Class 11 Physics TB

CBSE INFINITE
NO fear when we are Here
This PDF is downloaded from Click here
Join Our Telegram Channel Click here

@cbseinfinite
Academic Progress for every Student
Regular tests &

assignments
VEDANTU
IMPROVEMENT Report card with
PROMISE detailed analysis
VIP
Parent-teacher
meetings
Our Extraordinary Results 2021

Our Students
5.2X
HIGHER
Our Students
Our Students
3.8X
6.6X
HIGHER
All India HIGHER

All India All India
37.28% 37.28% 8.25%

9.84% 9.84% 1.25%
CBSE 10 CBSE 12 JEE

student scoring above 90% student scoring above 90% Advanced
SCAN CODE
to know more
about VIP
@cbseinfinite
@cbseinfinite
Published by
Vedantu Innovations Pvt. Ltd.
D. No. 1081, 3rd Floor, Vistar Arcade,
14th Main Rd, Sector 3, HSR Layout
Bangalore, Karnataka, India 560 102
www.vedantu.com
All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced or utilized in any form or by any
means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or by any information
storage and retrieval system, without permission in writing from the publishers.
Notice: Vedantu is committed to serving students with the best resources and knowledge.
Bearing that in mind, we have obtained all the information in this book from sources regarded
as reliable, and taken utmost care in editing and printing this book. However, as authors and
publishers, we are not to be held responsible for unintentional mistakes that might have crept
in. Having stated that, errors (if any) brought to our notice shall be gratefully acknowledged
and rectified in upcoming editions.
Printed by
Softberry Technology Pvt. Ltd
2nd Floor, above PNB, Scheme No 140
Indore, Madhya Pradesh - 452016
https://www.softberry.in
@cbseinfinite
How to use your
Tatva Practice Book
1
8. Quantization of charge
When a physical quantity can
have only discrete values rather
than any value, the quantity is
said to be quantised. The
smallest charge that can exist in Scan the QR Code in each
nature is the charge of an chapter’s theory section to
electron.
view micro concept videos
related to the chapter, on
SCAN CODE the Vedantu app.
Electrostatics
Exercise - 2:
2
Solve all types of
1. The rate constant for a first
order reaction is 4.606 ×
10–3s–1. The time required to
reduce 2.0g of the reactant to
0.2g is:
exercise questions (JEE 2020)
based on the latest JEE
pattern. (a) 500s (b) 1000s
(c) 100s (d) 200s
Answer Key
3
CHAPTER-1: ELECTROSTATICS
For extra exam
Exercise-1: Basic Objective preparation content,
visit the Vedantu app.
Scan the QR code in the You can find previous
Answers Section to view years’ JEE papers with
detailed solutions for all solutions and detailed
exercise questions. analysis.
@cbseinfinite
Founder’s Message
Dear Student,
I am delighted to present to you a Ready Reckoner and an amazing book to guide you for your
exams-‘TATVA’. Tatva—which means the ‘Core’ is fully aligned with the culture, the mission, and the
vision of Vedantu and therefore it gives me immense pleasure and joy to share this book with you. We
at Vedantu have always believed in revolutionizing the teaching and learning process and always
speedily progressed in the direction of bringing superior quality education and content to your table.
Tatva is a step forward in this direction. This book is your guide, your practice guru, and your
companion in moving towards your dreams. The book is a result of the consistent effort, diligence, and
research by our experienced team of subject experts and teachers.
This book has been customized with curated content to suit the needs of JEE aspirants like you and
guide you on the right path to cracking JEE and optimizing your efficiency. Tatva is a comprehensive
amalgamation of important concepts, theories, derivations, definitions, solved examples, concept
videos, practice questions, and important questions. We have ensured that high-quality content and
the right ingredients are in place in this booklet to help you climb up the success ladder.
A few guiding points to optimally use Tatva with a planned approach:
Tatva equips you with Theory, Concept Videos, and Solved examples to help you revise concepts,
mark your notes, walk you through the entire summary, and eventually makes you capable of
clearing all your conceptual doubts all by yourself.
We suggest revision of theory followed by practice of solved examples.
Practice relevant questions daily after finishing Vedantu lectures and session assignments. We
believe that a daily dose of Tatva will keep all your exam blues at bay.
Use the Tatva booklet to mark notes so that it always comes in handy for last-minute revision
sessions before your exams. Notes should include key points of theory, solved examples, and some
questions which you couldn't solve in the first attempt.
Exercise 1 and Exercise 2 of JEE Tatva deal with basic questions and those which can be asked or
already asked in JEE Main. Similarly, Exercise 3 and Exercise 4 deal with JEE Advanced level
questions. We recommend you solve basic JEE Main questions before moving to JEE Advanced
level questions.
Before wrapping up, the practice mantra: “Don't practice until you get it right. Practice until you
can't get it wrong.”
We strongly believe in you and your capabilities. So believe in yourself

because success is only one step away. Wishing that your talent shines
bright. All the very best!
Anand Prakash
Founder and Academic Head, Vedantu
Anand Prakash Sir has been a pioneer in producing Top Ranks in JEE/NEET
and Olympiads. He has personally taught and mentored AIR 1, 6, 7 (JEE
Advanced), AIR-1, 7, 9(AIIMS), and thousands of more students who have
successfully cleared these competitive exams in the last few years.
@cbseinfinite
Credits
“Happiness lies in the joy of achievement
and the thrill of creative effort.”
—Franklin D. Roosevelt
Tatva is the brainchild of a group of creative Vedans who have strived tirelessly to weave success stories for you.
We extend our heartfelt gratitude to the superb team of Vedans who give wings to the vision of Vedantu,
starting with our leaders who have been guiding and encouraging us at every step of the way:
Vamsi Krishna Sir, Anand Prakash Sir and Pulkit Jain Sir
We thank our leaders for their insight and mentorship. They steered the project in the right direction and were
instrumental in making Tatva a reality:
Sahil Bhatia, Sudhanshu Jain, Shubam Gupta, Ajay Mittal, Arshad Shahid, Jaideep Sontakke
The managers who embodied every aspect of what Tatva aimed to accomplish and brought their ideas and
diligence to the table to execute this vision immaculately:
Harish Rao, Neha Surana, Charubak Chakrabarti, Prashant Palande
Physics Team
We truly appreciate all the Master Teachers of Vedantu whose relentless efforts helped us translate this vision
into reality. Our heartfelt gratitude to our creative content developers and the typesetting team, who have put
in their hard work, insight, and eagerness to nurture and execute Tatva into ‘your ready handbook’ and bring a
positive learning experience to you.
Teachers Subject Matter Experts
Shreyas Hebbare Gagandeep Singh Atul Singh (Team Lead)
Anmol Gupta Md. Fazlur Rahman
Typesetting Team Graphic Designers

Nitesh Kumar Vishwanath G Mohit Kamboj
Santhosh Kumar Mani
We cannot thank the creative team enough. Their creative minds and contagious energy have added a visual
flair, truly making Tatva the treasure trove of knowledge that it is.
Kajal Nilanjan Chowdhury Rabin Jacob Mohit Kamboj
Kiran Gopal Balaji Sakamuri Thamam Mubarish Haritha Ranchith
Sarib Mohammad
We thank and appreciate the enthusiastic support provided by Arunima Kar, Savin Khandelwal, and Dipshi
Shetty.
The journey of bringing Tatva to life, from an idea to the book you are holding, would not have been possible
without the extensive support of our diligent Operations Team, our amazing Academic Team, our dedicated
team of Teachers, and our talented Tech Team.
@cbseinfinite
6
TABLE OF CONTENTS
UNITS & MEASUREMENTS AND BASIC MATHEMATICS
Theory ................................................................................................................................................ 8
Solved examples ............................................................................................................................... 36
Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions............................................................................................ 43
Exercise - 2 : Previous Year JEE MAIN Questions ........................................................................... 50
Exercise - 3 : Advanced Objective Questions .................................................................................. 55
Exercise - 4 : Previous Year JEE Advanced Questions ..................................................................... 58
Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 183
MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE
Theory ................................................................................................................................................ 62
Solved examples ............................................................................................................................... 72
Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 185
@cbseinfinite
7
MOTION IN A PLANE AND RELATIVE MOTION
Theory ................................................................................................................................................ 100
Solved examples ............................................................................................................................... 108
Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 187
LAWS OF MOTION AND FRICTION
Theory ................................................................................................................................................ 133
Solved examples ............................................................................................................................... 144
Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 189
@cbseinfinite
UNITS & MEASUREMENTS AND BASIC MATHEMATICS 8
01
UNITS & MEASUREMENTS AND
BASIC MATHEMATICS
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
Chapter
UNITS & 01
MEASUREMENTS AND BASIC MATHEMATICS 9
UNITS & MEASUREMENTS
1. PHYSICAL QUANTITY For Example:
Any quantity which can be measured is called a

physical quantity.
Examples: length, weight, time etc
Fig. 1.3
Fig. 1.1 1.4 Derived Physical Quantities

Examples:
1.1 Types of Physical Quantities length
● Acceleration =
time 2
mass
● Density =
length 3
● Volume = length 3
(length)
● Force = mass.
Fig. 1.2 time 2
Length
● Momentum = mass.
1.2 Fundamental Physical Quantities: time
Physical quantities which are independent of other mass
Pressure =
physical quantities are called fundamental physical length.time 2
quantity. These are the quantities we take as
fundamental quantities.
1.5 How to Measure a Physical Quantity
Quantity
For measuring a physical quantity we have to compare
Length it with some reference, we call it unit.
Mass A unit is a standard amount of a physical quantity.
Time Example: In old times people used to measure length
by hand span or foot span.
Electric Current
Temperature
Amount of Substance
Luminous Intensity
1.3 Derived Physical Quantities

Physical quantities which are dependent on other
physical quantities are called derived physical
quantities. Fig. 1.4
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
Let’s measure the length of a book using our hand If Magnitude of a Physical Quantity is
span. = n1 in u1 unit and n2 in u2 unit.
In this case unit for measurement is hand span. We can say that = n1u1 = n2u2
But the length of hand span varies from person to
person. So everyone will get a different result for 1.8 Need of System of Units
measuring the same object. What if everyone uses a unit of their choice for every
So, there was a need of precise standardization of measurement.
units. For Example:
1.6 Standard Units

Some of the standard units:
For measuring length: meter, centimeter, foot etc.
For measuring weight: kilogram, gram, pound etc
LET’S SEE A SHORTCUT HERE:
Imagine the no. of units force could have.
If everyone decides to have his own way of
measurement, then it will not be possible to come to
Fig. 1.5 correct conclusion. Thus a well-defined, universally
accepted system must be developed.
1.7 Expressing Measurement of physical quantity

1.9 System of Units
Suppose we measure length of a rod and write
A system of units is a complete set of units which is
length = 28 used to measure all kinds of fundamental and derived
By this expression we didn’t get any idea about the quantities.
size of rod it can be anything like Let’s see example of some of the major system of units
28 m
28 mm
28 km
28 foot or 28 steps
So we should always express a measurement with the
unit of measurement.
Fig. 1.6
1.10 The SI System of Units

Earlier different system of units are used in different
countries.
NOTE: So, there was need of an internationally accepted
We always write a measurement of physical quantity as system of units as a complete set of units.
its magnitude multiplied by its unit. Here comes the “The International SI System of
Units”.
Currently it is the most popular system of units
If we measure a physical quantity in more than one
worldwide.
unit then the multiplication of magnitude and unit is a
In SI system there are 7 base units and 2
constant.
supplementary units.
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
1.11 Fundamental Units: 1.14 Solid Angle
Quantity Name of Symbol

units
Length Meter m
Mass Kilogram kg
Fig. 1.8
Time Second s A
Ω= sr
r2
Electric Current Ampere A
1.15 Dimensions
Temperature Kelvin K
Dimensions of a physical quantity are the powers to
which the fundamental units must be raised in order to
Amount of Mole mol get the unit of physical quantity.
Substance
Fundamental quantity Dimension
Luminous Candela Cd
Intensity
Mass [M]
Length [L]
1.12 Supplementary Units:
Time [T]
Quantity Name of units Symbol
Current [A]
Plane angle Radian rad
Temperature [K]
Solid angle Steradian sr
Amount of Substance [mol]
1.13 Plane Angle Luminous Intensity [Cd]
1.16 Writing Dimensions of Physical Quantities

get the unit of that physical quantity.
displacement length
=
Velocity =
Fig. 1.7 time time
s  L1T −1 
⇒ Dimension of velocity =
θ = rad
r
change in velocity length
Acceleration ( a )
= =
( time )
2
time
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
 L1T −2 
⇒ Dimension of acceleration = then u1 =  M 1a L1bT1c  and u2 =  M 2 a L2bT2 c 
length =Q n=  a b c  n2  M 2 a L2bT2 c 
1  M 1 L1 T1 
Force =
Mass × Acceleration =
Mass ×
( time )
2
a b c
 M   L  T 
n2 = n1  1   1   1 
 M 1 L1T −2 
⇒ Dimension of force =  M 2   L2   T2 
This equation can be used to find the numerical value
in the second or new system of units. Space between
1.17 How do Dimensions behave in Mathematical
lines
Formulae?
Let us convert one joule into erg.
Rule 1: All terms that are added or subtracted must
Joule is SI unit of energy and erg is the CGS unit of
have same dimensions.
energy. Dimensional formula of energy is [ML2T-2]
● a = 1, b = 2, c = - 2.
SI CGS
=
M 1 1 =
kg 1000 g M= 2 1g
Rule 2: Dimensions obey rules of multiplication and L=
1 1=m 100 cm L= 2 1cm
division. = T1 1= s T2 1s
AB = n1 1= ( Joule ) n2 ? ( erg )
D=
C a b c
 M   L  T 
Given A =
= ML T  , B  M=
0
L T  , C  ML T 
−2 0 −1 2 −2 0 n2 = n1  1   1   1 
 M 2   L2   T2 
 ML0T −2  ×  M 0 L−1T 2  This equation can be used to find the numerical value
[ D] =  in the second or new system of units.
 ML−2T 0 
1 2 −2
1000  100  1 
⇒ [ D] = = 1
 M L 
1−1 0 −1+ 2 −2 + 2
T     
 1   1  1 
=
1× 103 × 104 =
107
2. DIMENSIONAL ANALYSIS ∴1 joule =
107 erg.
Dimensional analysis is a tool to find or check

2.2 Checking the Dimensional Consistency of
relations among physical quantities by using their
Equations
dimensions.
Principle of Homogeneity of Dimensions: For an
By using dimensional analysis, we can
equation to be valid, the dimensions on the left side
1. Convert a physical quantity from one system of must match the dimensions on the right side, It is then
units to another. dimensionally correct. Checking this is the basic way
2. Check the dimensional consistency of equation. of performing dimensional analysis.
3. Deduce relation among physical quantities. Let’s check that the second equation of motion is
correct or not.
1
2.1 Converting a Physical quantity from one =
s ut + at 2
System of Units to another 2
If u1 and u2 are the units of measurement of a physical = = length
s distance = [ L]
quantity Q and n1 and n2 are their corresponding length
magnitude then=
ut= × time= length= [ L]
Q n= 1u1 n2 u2 time
length
× ( time ) =length =[ L ]
Let M1, L1 and T1 be the fundamental units of mass,
at 2 =
2
( time )
2
length and time in one system; and M2, L2, T2 be
corresponding units in another system. If the
dimensional formula of quantity be  M a LbT c 
[ L=] [ L ] + [ L ]
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
NOTE: ● In the case of physical quantities which are

dependent upon more than three physical
If an equation is dimensionally incorrect, it must be quantities, this method will be difficult.
wrong. On the other hand, dimensionally correct
● In some cases, the constant of proportionality
equation may or may not be correct.
also possesses dimensions. In such cases, we
Let’s take an example to make it simple for you. cannot use this system.
If I say the area of a circle = 2 x radius2; ● If one side of the equation contains addition or
- this is dimensionally correct (both sides have subtraction of physical quantities, we cannot use
dimensions [L2]) this method to derive the expression.
- but it is wrong, as, it should be '𝛑𝛑' instead of '2'.
2.3 Deducing Relation among the Physical 3. SIGNIFICANT FIGURES

Quantities The significant figures are normally those digits in a
The method of dimensions can sometimes be used to measured quantity which are known reliably plus one
deduce relation among the physical quantities. additional digit that is uncertain.
For this, we should know the dependence of the let see an example shown in figure case a student takes
physical quantity on other quantities and consider it as reading 4.57 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚.
a product type of the dependency. Here the digit 4 and 5 are certain and the digit 7 is
Let’s find the time period of a simple pendulum by an estimate.
using dimensional analysis. The period of oscillation
of the simple pendulum depends on its length (𝑳𝑳),
mass of the bob (𝒎𝒎) and acceleration due to gravity
(𝒈𝒈).
Time period T ∝ m a g b Lc
⇒T =
km a g b Lc
Where k is dimensionless constant.
By considering dimensions on both sides,
a b c
 M 0 =
L0T 1   M 1  ⋅  LT −2   L1 
⇒  M 0 L0T 1  =
 M a Lb + cT −2b 
1 1 3.1 Rules for Determining Significant Figures

Comparing both sides a =
0, b =
− ,c =
2 2 Rule 1: Every non zero digit in a reported
−
1 1 measurement is assumed to be significant.
L
= =
T km 0
g 2 L2 k Example:
g
24.7 meters, no. of significant figures = 3
0.743 meter, no. of significant figures = 3
2.4 Limitations of Dimensional Analysis
714 meters, no. of significant figures = 3
● Dimensionless quantities cannot be determined
Rule 2: Zeros appearing between nonzero digits are
by this method.
significant.
● Constant of proportionality cannot be determined
Example:
by this method. They can be found either by
experiment (or) by theory. 70003 meters, no. of significant figures = 5
40.79 meters, no. of significant figures = 4
● This method is not applicable to trigonometric,
logarithmic and exponential functions. 1.503 meters, no. of significant figures = 4
Rule 3: Leftmost zeros appearing in front of nonzero
digits are not significant
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
Example: Last significant digit is 3 < 5

0.0073 meter, no. of significant figures = 2 So, the answer is 12.
0.423 meter, no. of significant figures = 3 Rule 2: If last significant digit(d) > 5, then increase
0.000099 meter, no. of significant figures = 2 the preceding digit by 1 and drop ‘d’.
Example:
NOTE: Round off 14.56 to 3 significant figures.
Leftmost zeros act as placeholders. By writing the Last significant digit is 6 > 5
measurements in scientific notation, we can eliminate So, the answer is 14.6.
such place holding zeros. Rule 3: If last significant digit(d) = 5, then look at the
preceding digit.
Leftmost zeros appearing in front of nonzero digits are (i) If preceding digit is even, drop ‘d’.
not significant
(ii) If preceding digit is odd then increase preceding
0.0073 meter = 7.3×10−3 meter digit by 1 and drop ‘d’.
0.423 meter = 4.23×10−1 meter Example:

Round off 1.45 to 2 significant figures.
0.000099 meter = 9.9×10−5 meter
Last significant digit is 5 and preceding
digit is 4 which is even. So, the answer is 1.4
NOTE:
Example:
As power of ten does not contribute in significant
figures thus even by changing units the number of
significant digits will remain same. Last significant digit is 5 and preceding
digit is 7 which is odd. So, the answer is 148
Rule 4: Zeros at the end of a number will be counted
as significant, only if they are at the right side of a
decimal point. 4. ERRORS
Example: An error is a mistake of some kind causing an error in

300 meter, no. of significant figures = 1 your results so the result is not accurate.
4.1 Types of Errors
27210 meter, no. of significant figures = 4
Errors can be divided into two main classes
● Random errors
3.2 Significant Figures in Calculations ● Systematic errors
In general, a calculated answer cannot be more precise
than the least precise measurement from which it was 4.2 Random Errors
calculated. Random error has no pattern. One instant your
The calculated value must be rounded to make it readings might be too small. The next instant they
consistent with the measurements from which it was might be too large. You can’t predict random error and
calculated. these errors are usually unavoidable.
So let’s read about rounding off. ● Random errors cannot be rectified but can be
minimized.
3.3 Rounding Off ● Random errors can be reduced by taking a lot of
Rule 1: If last significant digit(d) < 5 then drop it. readings, and then calculating the average
Example: (mean).
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
4.3 Causes of Random errors

1. Human Error
Example:
Fig. 1.11
Example:
Fig. 1.9 ● If a ruler is wrongly calibrated, or if it expands,
then all the readings will be too low (or all too
Way of taking reading 2 is best, 1 high).
and 3 give the wrong readings.
This is called a parallax error.
2. Faulty Technique
Using the instrument wrongly.
Fig. 1.12
2. Personal Error
Example:
● If someone has habit of taking measurements
Fig. 1.10 always from above the reading, then due to
parallax you will get a systematic error and all
4.4 Systematic Errors the readings will be different from the actual
reading
Systematic error is consistent, repeatable error
associated with faulty equipment or a flawed
experiment design. These errors are usually caused by
measuring instruments that are incorrectly calibrated.
● These errors cause readings to be shifted one
way (or the other) from the true reading.
4.5 Causes of Systematic Errors

1. Faulty Instruments
Example:
Fig. 1.13
● There is no any weight and the can’t be nothing
Now, Let’s learn about some common terms used
weighed but weighing machines are not showing
during, measurements and error analysis
zero.
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
4.6 Accuracy and Precision Mean Absolute Error

Accuracy is an indication of how close a measurement ∆a1 + ∆a2 + ∆a3 + ... + ∆an
is to the accepted value. ∆amean =
n
● An accurate experiment has a low systematic
So, we show the measurement by a ± ∆amean so on.
error.
Precision is an indication of the agreement
among a number of measurements. 4.9 Relative Errors
● A precise experiment has a low random error The relative error is the ratio of the mean absolute
error ∆amean to the mean value amean of the quantity
measured.
∆amean
Relative error =
amean
When the relative error is expressed in percent, it is
called the percentage error (δ).
Fig. 1.14 ∆amean
=
Percentage error δ × 100%
amean
4.7 Calculation of Errors
For calculation purpose we divide the errors in three
types 4.10 Range of Uncertainty
Absolute. error Range of uncertainty is reported as a nominal value

plus or minus an amount called the tolerance or
Relative. error
percent tolerance.
Percentage. error
4.8 Absolute Errors

The magnitude of the difference between the
individual measurement and the true value of the
quantity is called the absolute error of the
measurement. as
Absolute error is denoted by Δa, and it is always taken 2% of 120 = 2.4,
positive. 120 - 2.4 = 117.6,
For Example: 120 +2.4 = 122.4
Let say the: Values obtained in several measurements
are 𝑎𝑎1, 𝑎𝑎2, 𝑎𝑎3, …,
4.11 Limit of Reading or Least Count
If true value is not available, we can consider
The limit of reading of a measurement is equal to the
arithmetic mean as true value.
smallest graduation of the scale of an instrument.
a1 + a2 + a3 + ... + an
amean =
n
Absolute Errors in measurements =
∆a1 = a1 − amean ,
∆a2 = a2 − amean ,
... ... ... Fig. 1.15
... ... ... Least count of this scale is 1 mm
∆an = an − amean
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
4.12 Least Count Error 4.15 Errors of a Multiplication or Division

When a measurement falls between two divisions, then Measured value of physical quantity 𝐴𝐴 and 𝐵𝐵 are
errors due to approximate measurement made by the respectively 𝐴𝐴 ± Δ𝐴𝐴 and 𝐵𝐵 ± Δ𝐵𝐵
observer is called least count error. If a Physical Quantity 𝑍𝑍 = 𝐴𝐴 ✕ 𝐵𝐵 or
𝑍𝑍 = 𝐴𝐴/𝐵𝐵
4.13 Propagation of Errors
Then maximum relative error in Z,
∆Z ∆A ∆B
= +
Z A B
4.16 Error of a Measured Quantity

Raised to a Power
The relative error in a physical quantity raised to the
power k is the k times the relative error in the
individual quantity.
Measured values of physical quantity 𝐴𝐴 and 𝐵𝐵 are
respectively 𝐴𝐴 ± Δ𝐴𝐴 and 𝐵𝐵 ± Δ𝐵𝐵
Fig. 1.16
If a Physical Quantity 𝑍𝑍 = 𝐴𝐴2
4.14 Errors of a Sum or a Difference Then maximum relative error in 𝑍𝑍,
When two quantities are added or subtracted, the ∆Z ∆A ∆A ∆A

= + =2
absolute error in the final result is the sum of the Z A A A
absolute errors in the individual quantities. In general, if Z = A p B q C r
Measured values of physical quantity A and B are Then maximum relative error in 𝑍𝑍,
respectively A ± ∆A and B ± ∆B
∆Z ∆A ∆B ∆C
If a Physical Quantity 𝑍𝑍 = 𝐴𝐴 + 𝐵𝐵 or = p +q +r
Z A B C
Z= A − B
Then Maximum possible Error in Z is given by
∆Z = ∆A + ∆B
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
Dimensional Formulae of Physical Quantities

Relationship with other physical
S. No. Physical quantity Dimensions Dimensional formula
quantities
1. Area Length × breadth [L2] [M0L2 T0]
2. Volume Length × breadth × height [L3] [M0L3 T0]
3. Mass density Mass/volume [M]/[L3] or [ML−2] [ML−3T0]
4. Frequency 1/time period 1/[T] [M0L0T−1]
5. Velocity, speed Displacement/time [L]/[T] [M0LT−1]
6. Acceleration Velocity/time [LT−1]/[T] [M0LT−1]
7. Force Mass × acceleration [M][LT−1] [MLT−1]
8. Impulse Force × time [MLT−1][T] [MLT−1]

9. Work, Energy Force × distance [MLT1][L] [ML1T1]
10. Power Work/time [ML1T2]/[T] [ML1T1]
11. Momentum Mass × velocity [M][LT−1] [MLT−1]
12. Pressure, stress Force/area [MLT−1]/[L2] [ML−1T1]
Change in dim ension

13. Strain [L]/[L] [M0L0T0]
Original dim ension
 ML−1T −2 
14. Modulus of elasticity Stress/strain [ML−1T−2]
 M 0 L0 T 0 
15. Surface tension Force/length [MLT−2]/[L] [ML0T−2]
16. Surface energy Energy/area [ML2T2]/[L2] [ML0T−2]
17. Velocity gradient Velocity/distance [LT1]/[L] [M0L1T−1]
18. Pressure gradient Pressure/distance [ML−1T1]/[L] [ML−2T−2]
19. Pressure energy Pressure × volume [ML−1T−2][L3] [ML2T−2]
 MLT −2 
20. Coefficient of viscosity Force/area × velocity gradient [ML−1T−1]
 L2   LT −1 / L 
Angle, Angular
21. Arc/radius [L]/[L] [M0L1T0]
displacement
Trigonometric ratio
[M0L0T0]
22.
( sin θ, cos θ, tan θ, etc.) Length/length [L]/[L]
23. Angular velocity Angle/time [L0]/[T] [M0L0T−1]
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
BASIC MATHEMATICS
Nature of the roots of a quadratic equation
−b ± b 2 − 4ac
The roots are given by x =
2a
1. QUADRATIC EQUATION
● If D < 0, No real roots for given equation.
A quadratic equation is an equation of second degree,
meaning it contains at least one term that is squared.
The standard form of quadratic equation is
ax 2 + bx + c =0 where a ≠ 0
The solution of the above quadratic equation is the
values of variable ‘x’ which will satisfy it. It basically
have 2 solutions ( x1 and x2 )
If we try to calculate time when football is at height H
Fig. 1.19
then we will observe that we will get 2 answers
● If D > 0, Two distinct real roots
Fig. 1.17
t1 - While going up
t2 - While Coming down Fig. 1.20
What if we take a height which is greater than −b ± b 2 − 4ac
maximum height covered by ball and we are trying to ● The roots are given by x =
2a
find the time?
● If D = 0, Equal and real roots. Then we will get
only one root
Fig. 1.18
Fig. 1.21
By this diagram we can easily say that at no real value b
of time, the ball is at height H1. We will not have a ● The roots are given by −
2a
diagram everytime though.
b
For finding out if a quadratic equation has a real i. Sum of roots =x1 + x2 =
−
a
solution or not, we shall use the ’DISCRIMINANT’.
c
= x=
ii. Product of roots 1 x2
a
1.1 Discriminant of a Quadratic equation
D
Discriminant of a quadratic equation ax 2 + bx + c =0 iii. Difference of the roots = x1 − x2 =
a
is represented by D.
= b 2 − 4ac
D
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
(ii) Straight line graph

If the value of The quadratic equation will
discriminant = 0 i.e. have equal roots
b 2 − 4ac =
0 b
i.e. α = β = −
2a

discriminant have imaginary
< 0 i.e. b 2 − 4ac < 0
Roots i.e. α
= ( p + iq ) and
Fig. 1.23
β= ( p − iq ) .
Equation of graph: y = mx
Where ‘iq’ is the imaginary part
of complex number (iii) Straight line graph

discriminant have real roots
( D) > 0 i.e. b 2 − 4ac > 0

discriminant > 0 and D have rational roots
is perfect square

discriminant (D) > 0 have irrational roots i.e.
and D is not a perfect
square
α= (
p + q and β = )
p− q ( ) Fig. 1.24
Equation of graph: =
y mx + c
discriminant > 0, D is have integral roots m = tan θ
perfect square, a = 1
θ < 90°
and b and c are integers
m = + ve
(iv) Straight line graph
2. BASIC GRAPHS
(i) Straight line graph
Fig. 1.25
Equation of graph: =
y mx + c
Fig. 1.22
m = tan θ
Equation of graph: y = mx – c
θ > 90°
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
(v) Parabola graph (ix) Rectangular Hyperbola graph
Fig. 1.26
Equation of graph: x = ky 2
(vi) Parabola graph

Fig. 1.30
Equation of graph: xy = constant
1
x∝
y
(x) Circle graph
Fig. 1.27
Equation of graph: x = −ky 2
(vii) Parabola graph
Fig. 1.31
Equation of graph: x 2 + y 2 =
a2
Fig. 1.28 (xi) Ellipse graph
Equation of graph: y = kx 2
(viii) Parabola graph
Fig. 1.32
Fig. 1.29
x2 y 2
Equation of graph: y = −kx 2 Equation of graph: + =
1
a 2 b2
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
(xii) Exponential Decay graph Max value of Graph Min value of graph
1 at 0,360°, 720°...etc. −1 at 180°,540°,900°...etc.
• y = cos x
• sin (x + 𝜋𝜋/2) = cos x
• The y = cos x graph is obtained by shifting the y
= sin x, 𝜋𝜋/2 units to the left
• Period of the cosine function is 2𝜋𝜋
There are a few similarities between the sine and
cosine graphs they are:
Fig. 1.33 • Both have the same curve which is shifted along
the x-axis.
Equation of graph: y = e − kx
• Both have an amplitude of 1
(xiv) sin graph: • Have a period of 360o or 2𝜋𝜋 radians
The combined graph of sine and cosine function can
be represented as follows:
Fig. 1.34
Max value of Graph Min value of graph

1 at 90°, 450°,810°...etc. −1 at 270°, 630°,990° ...etc.
Fig. 1.36
• y = sin x
(xvi) tan graph:
• The roots or zeros of y = sin x is at the multiples
of 𝜋𝜋 The tan function is completely different from sin and
cos function. The function here goes between negative
• The sin graph passes the x-axis as sin x = 0.
and positive infinity, crossing through y = 0 over a
• Period of the sine function is 2 𝜋𝜋 period of 𝜋𝜋 radian.
• The height of the curve at each point is equal to
the line value of sine
(xv) cos graph:
Fig. 1.37
• y = tan x
• The tangent graph has an undefined amplitude as
Fig. 1.35 the curve tends to infinity
• It also has a period of 180o. i.e. 𝜋𝜋
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
3. BINOMIAL EXPANSION 4. VECTORS

A binomial is a polynomial with two terms. Scalars and Vectors
2
For example, 3x + 2 is a binomial.
4.1 What is a scalar?
what happens when we multiply the binomial with
itself? A scalar is a quantity that is fully described by a
magnitude only. It is described by just a number.
Example: a + b
Examples:
(a + b) = ( a + b )( a + b ) = a 2 + 2ab + b 2
2
Speed, volume, mass, temperature, power, energy,
time, etc.
(a + b) =( a + b ) ( a 2 + 2ab + b 2 )
3
=a 3 + 3a 2 b + 3ab 2 + b3 4.2 What is a vector?

Vector is a physical quantity which has magnitude as
(a + b) =( a + b ) ( a 3 + 3a 2 b + 3ab 2 + b3 )
4
well as direction and follows the rule of vector
addition.
=a 4 + 4a 3b + 6a 2 b 2 + 4ab3 + b 4
Vector quantities are important in the study of physics.
Calculations get longer and longer as we increase the Examples:
power, but we can say that there is a pattern,
Force, velocity, acceleration, displacement,
(a + b) = ( a + b )( a + b ) = a + 2ab + b
2 2 2
momentum, etc.
Power of a 2 1 0
4.3 Representation of Vectors
Power of b 0 1 2 • A vector is drawn as an arrow with a head and a
(a + b) =( a + b ) ( a + 2ab + b )
3 2 2 tail.
• The magnitude of the vector is often described
=a 3 + 3a 2 b + 3ab 2 + b3 by the length of the arrow.
Power of a 3 2 1 0 • The arrow points in the direction of the vector.
Power of b 0 1 2 3
(a + b) =( a + b ) ( a 3 + 3a 2 b + 3ab 2 + b3 )
4
=a 4 + 4a 3b + 6a 2 b 2 + 4ab3 + b 4
Power of a 4 3 2 1 0
Power of b 0 1 2 3 4
This pattern is summed up by binomial theorem
n ( n − 1)
Fig. 1.38
( a + b ) =a n + na n −1b1 + a n − 2b2
n
2 ×1 • Vectors can be defined in two dimensional or

n ( n − 1)( n − 2 )
three dimensional space
+ a n −3b3 ...... + b n How to write a vector?
3 × 2 ×1
Vectors are generally written with an arrow over the
n ( n − 1) n ( n − 1)( n − 2 ) 
(1 + x ) =
1 + nx + x +
n 1 2 3
x ... top of the letter. (Ex: a )
2 ×1 3 × 2 ×1
They can also be written as boldface letters. (Ex: a)
If value of x is very small, we can neglect higher  
powers of x AB = a
So, (1 + x ) = Magnitude:
1 + nx
n

AB = a
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
4.4 Properties of Vectors Unit vector


Vectors are mathematical objects and we will now x
∴ xˆ =
study some of their mathematical properties. x
(1). Equality of vectors It must be carefully noted that any two unit vectors
Two vectors are equal if they have the same magnitude must not be considered as equal, because they might
and the same direction. have the same magnitude, but the direction in which
(2). Negative Vector the vectors are taken might be different.
A negative vector is a vector that has the opposite
direction to the reference positive direction.
4.5 Types of Vectors

1. Zero Vector
2. Unit Vector
3. Position Vector
4. Co-initial Vector
5. Like and Unlike Vectors
6. Coplanar Vector Fig. 1.40
7. Collinear Vector  
8. Displacement Vector a |a| =1 × a → i
 
b |b| =1 × b → j
4.6 Zero Vector  
• A zero vector is a vector when the magnitude of c |c| =1 × c → k
the vector is zero and the starting point of the
vector coincides with the terminal point.

• In other words, a vector AB ' s coordinates of the
point A are the same as that of the point B then
the vector is said to be a zero vector and is
denoted by 0.
4.7 Unit Vector

A vector which has a magnitude of unit length is called
a unit vector.
 
Suppose if x is a vector having a magnitude x then 4.8 Position Vector:
If O is taken as reference origin and P is an arbitrary
the unit vector is denoted by x̂ in the direction of the
 point in space then the vector OP is called as the
vector x and has the magnitude equal to 1. position vector of the point. Position vector simply
denotes the position or location of a point in the three-
dimensional Cartesian system with respect to a
reference origin.
Fig. 1.39 Fig. 1.41
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
4.9 Co-initial Vector: 4.13 Displacement Vector:

The vectors which have the same starting point are If a point is displaced from position A to B then the
called co-initial vectors. 
displacement AB represents a vector AB which is
known as the displacement vector.
Fig. 1.42
 
The vectors AB and AC are called co-initial vectors
as they have same starting point. Fig. 1.46
4.10 Like and Unlike Vectors: 4.14 Multiplication of a vector with a scalar
The vectors having the same direction are known as
like vectors. On the contrary, the vectors having the • When a vector is multiplied by a scalar quantity,
opposite direction with respect to each other are then the magnitude of the vector changes in
termed to be unlike vectors. accordance with the magnitude of the scalar but
the direction of the vector remains unchanged.
• Suppose we have a vector a , then if this vector

is multiplied by a scalar quantity k then we get a

new vector with magnitude as ka and the

direction remains same as the vector a .
Fig. 1.43
4.15 Multiplication of vectors with scalar

4.11 Coplanar Vectors:
Three or more vectors lying in the same plane or
parallel to the same plane are known as coplanar
vectors.
Fig. 1.47
Now let us understand visually the scalar

multiplication of the vector.
Let us take the values of ‘k’ to be = 2, 3, -3, -1/2 and
Fig. 1.44 so on.
4.12 Collinear Vectors:

Vectors which lie along the same line are known to be
collinear vectors.
Fig. 1.48
Fig. 1.45
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
4.16 Position Vector 4.18 Components of a Vector

A vector representing the straight-line distance and the In physics, when you break a vector into its parts,
direction of any point or object with respect to the those parts are called its components.
origin, is called position vector. Typically, a physics problem gives you an angle and a
magnitude to define a vector
Fig. 1.49

OP= xi + y j
 
OP = x 2 + y 2 = r =r Fig. 1.52

OP= xi + y j
4.17 Displacement Vector
 
A vector representing the straight-line distance and the OP = x 2 + y 2 = r =r
direction of any point or object with respect to another  
point is called displacement vector. OA = xi ⇒ r cos θ =
OA
 
OB = yi ⇒ r sin θ =
OB

OB
tan θ = 
OA

Fig. 1.50 OA = xiˆ
  
OP= x1 i + y1 j OB= yi=
ˆ AD
  
= x2 i + y2 j = zk
=
OC ˆ DP
OQ
   In ∆ODP
= OQ − OP
PQ   
OD = OA + DP = xiˆ + yjˆ + zkˆ
= ( x2 − x1 ) i + ( y2 − y1 ) j

PQ = ( x2 − x1 ) + ( y2 − y1 )
2 2
Fig. 1.51 Fig. 1.53

  
OP = x + y + z = r = r
2 2 2 r = xi + y j + zk
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
 5.1 Triangle Law of Vector Addition

| r |= x2 + y 2 + z 2

r 
=r  → unit vector along r
|r|

OA = xiˆ, is the component of vector r in X-axis
 
OB = yjˆ, is the component of vector r in Y-axis

OC = zkˆ, is the component of vector r in Z-axis
4.19 Finding a Unit Vector (2D/3D)

• We have already studied about it in previous Fig. 1.56
classes. Just to recall:
• Unit vector in the direction of a is â 5.2 Both Addition and Subtraction can
be shown as:
Fig. 1.54
• It will be more clear by solving some problems

pertaining 2D/3D cases.
Fig. 1.57
5. ADDITION OF VECTORS
5.3 Polygon Law of Vector Addition
It states that if number of vectors acting on a particle at
a time are represented in magnitude and direction by
the various sides of an open polygon taken in same
order, their resultant vector R is represented in
magnitude and direction by the closing side of polygon
taken in opposite order. In fact, polygon law of vectors
is the outcome of triangle law of vectors.
Fig. 1.55
Can we add these vectors directly as (8 m + 6 m) = 14
m?
(a) Yes Fig. 1.58
(b) No      
R = A+ B +C + D + E
Sol: We add vectors considering their directions.      
OA + AB + BC + CD + DE = OE
So, now we will learn about the addition of vectors.
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
 
NOTE: The angles that vectors A and B make with the x-
axis are 𝜃𝜃A and 𝜃𝜃B. respectively.
• Resultant of two unequal vectors cannot be zero.
• Resultant of three coplanar vectors may or may Step 2: Find the components of the resultant along
not be zero. each axis by adding the components of the individual
• Resultant of three non-coplanar vectors cannot be vectors along that axis. That is, as shown in figure,
zero, minimum number of non-coplanar vectors Rx = Ax + Bx
whose sum can be zero is four.
and Ry = Ay + By
• Polygon law should be used only for diagram
purpose for calculation of resultant vector (For
addition of more than 2 vectors), we use
components of vector.
• Minimum no. of coplanar vector for zero
resultant is 2 (for equal magnitude) & 3 (for
unequal magnitude).
5.4 Addition of Vectors

Adding Vectors Analytically

r=1 x1 i + y1 j
 Fig. 1.60
r=2 x2 i + y2 j components along the same axis, say the x-axis, are
   vectors along the same line and, thus, can be added to
r= r1 + r 2
one another like ordinary numbers. The same is true
( ) (
= x1 i + y1 j + x2 i + y2 j ) for components along the y-axis. So resolving vectors
into components along common axes makes it easier to
= x1 i + y1 j + x2 i + y2 j = x1 i + x2 i + y1 j + y2 j add them. Now that the components of R are known,
its magnitude and direction can be found.
= ( x1 + x2 ) i + ( y1 + y2 ) j
5.5 Addition of Vectors: Components

Step 1: Identify the x-and y-axes that will be used in
the problem.
Fig. 1.61
Step 3: To get the magnitude R of the resultant, use
the Pythagorean theorem;
=
R Rx2 + Ry2
Fig. 1.59
Then, find the components of each vector to be added Step 4: To get the direction of the resultant;
along the chosen perpendicular axes. Use the equations  Ry 
    θ = tan −1  
= Ax A= cos θ , A y A sin θ to find the components. In  Rx 
   
figure, these components are Ax , A y , B x and B y .
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
5.7 Some Properties of Vector Addition
Fig. 1.62
5.6 Parallelogram Law of Vector Addition
Fig. 1.63

Suppose the magnitude of a = a and that of b = b . Fig. 1.65
 
What is the magnitude of a + b and what its
direction? 5.8 Subtraction of Vectors

Suppose the angle between a and b is 𝜃𝜃. • Subtracting Vectors Algebraically

a ax i + a y j
=

b bx i + by j
=
   
( ) ( )
a − b = a + −b = ax i + a y j + −bx i − by j
= ( ax − bx ) i + ( a y − by ) j
Fig. 1.64 • Subtracting Vectors Geometrically
It is easy to say from fig. that

AD 2 =( AB + BE ) + ( DE )
2 2
( a + b cos θ ) + ( b sin θ )
=
2 2
a 2 + 2ab cos θ + b 2
=
Thus, the magnitude of is
a 2 + b 2 + 2ab cos θ
Fig. 1.66
Its angle with a is 𝛼𝛼 where
DE b sin θ
α
tan= =
AE a + b cos θ
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
5.9 Change in Vectors • A quite different kind of multiplication is a

vector multiplication of vectors. Taking a vector
product of two vectors returns a vector, as its
name suggests.
• Vector products are used to define other derived
vector quantities.
Fig. 1.67 • For example, in describing rotations, a vector
quantity called torque is defined as a vector
product of an applied force (a vector) and its
distance from pivot to force (a vector).
• It is important to distinguish between these two
kinds of vector multiplication because the scalar
product is a scalar quantity and a vector product
is a vector quantity.
6.1 Scalar Product or Dot Product
Fig. 1.68
Fig. 1.69
  
Dot product of vector a and b is donated by a ⋅ b
   
a ⋅b = a b cos θ
0 ≤θ ≤π
• Dot product give us a scalar quantity.
6. PRODUCT OF TWO VECTORS  
a ⋅b
• Angle between vectors, cos θ =  
• A vector can be multiplied by another but may a b
not be divided by another vector.
• There are two kinds of products of vectors used
broadly in physics and engineering.
• One kind of multiplication is a scalar
multiplication of two vectors. Taking a scalar
product of two vectors results in a number (a
scalar), as its name indicates.
Fig. 1.70
• Scalar products are used to define work and
energy relations. • When θ = 0°,
•      
For example, the work that a force (a vector) =
a ⋅b a b=cos θ a b
performs on an object while causing its
 
displacement (a vector) is defined as a scalar a ⋅ b is maximum
product of the force vector with the displacement
vector.
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
6.3 Application of Dot product in physics

Work done (W): It is defined as the scalar product of

the force ( )
F , acting on the body and the

Fig. 1.71 Displacement ( s ) produced.
 
• When θ = π , Thus W= F ⋅ s
      Instantaneous power (P): It is defined as the scalar
a ⋅ b =a b cos π =− a b 
 
( )
product of force F and the instantaneous velocity
a ⋅ b is minimum. 
( v ) of the body.
 
Thus P= F ⋅ v
Magnetic flux (𝜙𝜙): The magnetic flux linked with a
surface is defined as the scalar product of magnetic
 
Fig. 1.72 ( )
intensity B and the area ( )
A vector. Thus
 
Condition for vector a. vector b = 0 φ= B ⋅ A
6.2 Properties of Dot Product NOTE:

    As the scalar product of two vectors is a scalar quantity,
a ⋅b = a b cos θ
so work, power and magnetic flux are all scalar
   
b ⋅a =b a cos θ quantities
6.4 Cross Product of Two Vectors

   
a ×b = a b sin θ nˆ 0° ≤ θ ≤ 180°
n̂ is the unit vector in direction normal to the a and b
Fig. 1.73
• Dot product is commutative.
   
b ⋅ a = a ⋅b
• Dot product is distributive over addition or
Fig. 1.74
subtraction.
       It is also called Vector Product.
( )
a⋅ b ± c = a ⋅b ± a⋅c
• When vectors are given in component form, 6.5 Direction of Cross Product
  Right Hand Thumb Rule: Curl the fingers of the right
A=Ax iˆ + Ay ˆj and B =
Bx iˆ + By ˆj hand in such a way that they point in the direction of
   
A ⋅ B= ( )(
Ax iˆ + Ay ˆj ⋅ Bx iˆ + By ˆj ) rotation from vector a to b through the smaller
angle, then the stretched thumb points in the direction
• We know that, iˆ ⋅ iˆ = ˆj ⋅ ˆj = 1 and iˆ ⋅ ˆj = ˆj ⋅ iˆ = 0  
of a × b
 
⇒ A⋅ B
= Ax Bx + Ay + By
• Thus for 3D, when

 
A = Ax iˆ + Ay ˆj + Az kˆ and B = Bx iˆ + By ˆj + Bz kˆ
 
A⋅ B
= Ax Bx + Ay By + Az Bz
Fig. 1.75
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
  • Sine of the angle between two vectors. If 𝜃𝜃 is the

Direction of a × b
   
Direction of b × a angle between two vectors A and B , then
   
| A× B |=| A || B | sin θ
 
A× B
sin θ =  
A B
• If n̂ is a unit vector perpendicular to the plane

 
  A× B

of vectors A and B , then n =  
Fig. 1.76 | A× B |
   
b × a | b || a | sin θ −n
= ( ) • Vector product of orthogonal unit vectors
iˆ × ˆj= kˆ, ˆj × kˆ= iˆ, kˆ × iˆ= ˆj
ˆj × iˆ =−kˆ, kˆ × ˆj =−iˆ, iˆ × kˆ =− ˆj
6.6 Properties of Vector Product
• Vector product is anti - commutative i.e.,
   
A × B =− B × A
• Vector product is distributive over addition i.e.,
      
( )
A× B + C = A× B + A× C
Fig. 1.77
• Vector of two parallel or antiparallel vectors is a
A Force of 15 N at angle 60° from horizontal is used
null vector. Thus
   to push a box along the floor a distance of 3 meter.
=
A × B AB sin ( 0° or 180
=° ) nˆ 0 How much work was done?
• Vector product of a vector with itself is a null
vector. 6.7 Application of Scalar and Vector Products
   1. We use Dot product in finding value of a vector.
A=× A AA sin=0° n 0 2. Finding component of one vector along another
i × i = j × j = k × k = 0 vector.
3. Finding angle between two vectors.
• The magnitude of the vector product of two
4. Finding unit vector perpendicular to plane
mutually perpendicular vectors is equal to the
consisting both the vectors.
product of their magnitudes.
  5. Finding work done.
=
| A × B | AB=
sin 90° AB 6. Finding area of triangle and parallelogram.
7. Finding Torque.
8. Finding power.
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
SUMMARY
UNITS AND MEASUREMENTS DIMENSIONS AND SIGNIFICIENT

FIGURES
FUNDAMENTAL AND DERIVED UNITS
Dimensional and Dimensional Analysis:
Fundamental Unit:
get the unit of derived quantity.
• Dimensional analysis is a tool to find or check
Length Meter m relations among physical quantities by using
their dimensions.
Mass Kilogram kg By using dimensional analysis, we can
1. Convert a physical quantity from one system of
Time Second s unit to another.
2. Check the dimensional consistency of equations
Electric Current Ampere A 3. Deduce relation among physical quantities.
Limitations of Dimensional Analysis
Temperature Kelvin K
● In some cases, the constant of proportionality
also possesses dimensions. In such cases, we
Amount of Substance Mole mol
cannot use this system.
● If one side of the equation contains addition or
Luminous Intensity Candela Cd
subtraction of physical quantities, we cannot use
this method to derive the expression.
Supplementary Units:
ERROR ANALYSIS
Systematic Errors
Plane angle Radian rad Systematic error is consistent, repeatable error
associated with faulty equipment or a flawed
Solid angle Steradian sr experiment design. These errors are usually caused by
measuring instruments that are incorrectly calibrated.
System of Units: ● These errors cause readings to be shifted one

way (or the other) from the true reading.
Now, Let’s learn about some common terms used
during, measurements and error analysis.
Accuracy and Precision
● Accuracy is an indication of how close a
measurement is to the accepted value.
● An accurate experiment has a low systematic
error.
● Precision is an indication of the agreement
among a number of measurements.
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
● A precise experiment has a low random error Types of Vectors

• If N division of vernier scale are equal in length (i) Zero Vector
to (N -1) MS divisions, then: (ii) Unit Vector
1MS (iii) Position Vector
L.C. = 1MS − 1VS ⇒ L.C. =
N (iv) Co-initial Vector
• Least count of a screw gauge (v) Like and Unlike Vectors
Pitch
L.C. = (vi) Coplanar Vector
N
(vii) Collinear Vector
(viii) Displacement Vector
BASIC MATHEMATICS • When a vector is multiplied by a scalar quantity,

then the magnitude of the vector changes in
accordance with the magnitude of the scalar but
BASIC ALGEBRA the direction of the vector remains unchanged.
Quadratic Equation • A unit vector is a vector that has a magnitude
of 1.
A quadratic equation is an equation of second degree,
• Any vector can become a unit vector on dividing
meaning it contains at least one term that is squared.
it by the vector's magnitude.
The standard form of quadratic equation is • A vector representing the straight line distance
ax 2 + bx + c =0 where a ≠ 0 and the direction of any point or object with
respect to the origin, is called position vector.
Discriminant of a Quadratic equation: Polygon Law:
Discriminant of a quadratic ax + bx + c =
2
0 equation • It states that if number of vectors acting on a
is represented by D. particle at a time are represented in magnitude and
direction by the various sides of an open polygon
D= b 2 − 4ac
taken in same order, their resultant vector R is
−b ± b 2 − 4ac represented in magnitude and direction by the
The roots are given by x =
2a closing side of polygon taken in opposite order.
Binomial Expansion
Addition of vectors:
A binomial is a polynomial with two terms.
Components to get the magnitude R of the resultant,
There are a few similarities between the sine and
use the Pythagorean theorem:
cosine graphs they are:
• Both have the same curve which is shifted along =
R Rx2 + Ry2
the x-axis.
• Both have an amplitude of 1 To get the direction of the resultant;
Have a period of 360o or 2𝜋𝜋 radians  Ry 
θ = tan −1  
 Rx 
SCALARS & VECTORS AND VECTOR
OPERATIONS
Vectors
• Scalar and Vector
• Representation and Properties of Vectors
• Types of Vectors
Negative Vector:
A negative vector is a vector that has the opposite
direction to the reference positive direction.
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
Addition of vectors: Properties of Cross Product:

Law of Parallelogram of vector addition. Thus, the • Vector product is anti - commutative i.e.,
   
magnitude of A × B =− B × A
  • Vector product is distributive over addition i.e.,
a + b is a 2 + b 2 + 2ab cos θ       
( )
A× B + C = A× B + A× C
• Vector of two parallel or antiparallel vectors is a
null vector. Thus
  
=
A × B AB sin ( 0° or 180
=° ) nˆ 0
• Vector product of a vector with itself is a null
vector.
b sin θ
Its angle with a is 𝛼𝛼 where tan=
DE   
α =
AE a + b cos θ A=× A AA sin=0° n 0
Vector Subtraction: i × i = j × j = k × k = 0

a ax i + a y j
=    
 • ( a×b = ) (
− b×a )
b bx i + by j
=       
    • ( )
a× b + c = a×b + a×c
( ) (
a − b = a + −b = ax i + a y j + −bx i − by j ) i × i = j × j = k × k = 0
•
= ( ax − bx ) i + ( a y − by ) j
• i × j =k j × i =−k
Scalar Product or Dot Product
j × k =i k × j =−i
    •
a ⋅b = a b cos θ
• k × i =j i × k =− j
0 ≤θ ≤π 
• Dot product give us a scalar quantity. • If a =a1 i + a2 j + a3 k and =b1 i + b2 j + b3 k , then
• i j k
Angle between vectors,
   
a ⋅b a × b =a1
cos θ =   a2 a3
a b b1 b2 b3
Applications of Vector Product

• Torque τ : The torque acting on a particle is
equal to the vector product of its position vector
    
• Dot product is commutative.
   
( )
( r ) and force vector F . Thus r = r × F
b ⋅ a = a ⋅b 
• Angular momentum L : The angular
• Dot product is distributive over addition or
momentum of a particle is equal to the cross
subtraction. 
       (r )
( )
product of its position vector and linear
a⋅ b ± c = a ⋅b ± a⋅c   

momentum ( p ) . Thus L= r × p
Cross Product:
    • Instantaneous velocity v : The instantaneous
a ×b =a b sin θ nˆ 0° ≤ θ ≤ 180°
velocity of a particle is equal to the cross product

n̂ is the unit vector in direction normal to the a and b of its angular velocity (ω ) and the position

vector ( r ) . Thus   
v= ω × r
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
Solved Examples
Example - 1 Ans. (d)

The unit of surface tension in SI system is Sol. Because 1 Newton = 105 Dyne.
(a) Dyne / cm2 (b) Newton/m
Example – 5
(c) Dyne/cm (d) Newton/m2
The
equation of a wave is given by
Ans. (b)
x 
F =Y A sin ω  − k  where ω is the angular velocity
Sol. From the formula of surface tension T = v 
l
and v is the linear velocity. The dimension of k is
By substituting the S.I. units of force and length, we
(a) LT (b) T
will get the unit of surface tension = Newton/m.
-1
(c) T (d) T2
Example – 2 Ans. (b)
The unit of absolute permittivity is Sol. According to principle of dimensional homogeneity
[ k ] =  L 
(a) Farad – meter (b) Farad / meter x
=  LT =
−1  [T ]
(c) Farad/meter2 (d) Farad v  
Ans. (b)
Example – 6
C
Sol. C 4πε 0 R ∴ ε=
From the formula =
4π R E, m, L and G denote energy, mass, angular
0
momentum and gravitational constant respectively,

By substituting the unit of capacitance and radius:
unit of ε 0 = Farad / meter. El 2
then the dimension of is
m5 G 2
Example – 3 (a) Angle (b) Length
If =
x at + bt , where x is the dis
2
(c) Mass (d) Time
tance travelled by the body in kilometre while t the Ans. (a)
time in seconds, then the units of b are Sol. [E]= energy = [ML2T-2], [m] = mass
(a) km/s (b) km-s = [M], [l] = Angular momentum
2 2
(c) km/s (d) km-s = [ML2T-1]
Ans. (c)
[G] = Gravitational constant
Sol. From the principle of dimensional homogeneity
= [M-1L3T-2]
[ x ]= bt 2  ⇒ [b]=  2 
x
Now substituting dimensions of given expression
t 
2
∴ Unit of b = km/s2  El 2   ML2T −2  ×  ML2T −1 
 5 2= 2
Example – 4 m G   M 5  ×  M −1 L3T −2 
Which relation is wrong? =  M 0 L0T 0 

(a) 1 Calorie = 4.18 Joules
The given expression is dimensionless. As angle is
(b) 1Å =10–10 m
also dimensionless the answer is (a).
(c) 1 MeV = 1.6 × 10–13 Joules
(d) 1 Newton =10-5 Dynes
@cbseinfinite
Example – 7 Example – 10
Each edge of a cube is measured to be 7.203 m. The The SI unit of universal gas constant (R) is
volume of the cube up to appropriate significant
(a) Watt K-1 mol-1 (b) Newton K-1 mol-1
figures is
(c) Joule K-1 mol-1 (d) Erg K-1 mol-1
(a) 373.714 (b) 373.71
Ans. (c)
(c) 373.7 (d) 373
Sol. Ideal gas equation PV = nRT
Ans. (c)
( 7.023)= ∴[ R
[ P ][V=]  ML−1T −2   L3   ML2T −2 
Volume= a= ]
3 3
Sol. 373.715m3 = =
[ nT ] [ mole][ K ] [ mole] × [ K ]
In significant figures volume of cube will be
373.7m3 because its edge has four significant So the unit will be Joule K-1 mol-1.
figures.
Example – 11
Example – 8
 a 
Each edge of a cube is measured to be 5.402 cm. The The equation  P + 2  (V − b ) =
constant. The units
 V 
total surface area and the volume of the cube in
of a is
appropriate significant figures are:
(a) Dyne × cm5 (b) Dyne × cm4
(a) 175.1cm 2 ,157cm 2
(c) Dyne × cm3 (d) Dyne × cm2
2 3
(b) 175.1cm ,157.6cm Ans. (b)
2 2
(c) 175cm ,157cm Sol. According to the principle of dimensional
homogeneity
(d) 175.08cm 2 ,157.639cm3
[ P ] = 
a 
Ans. (b) 2 
 
V
Sol. Total surface area
[a]
⇒= [ P ] V=
2
  ML T  =
−1 −2
L6   ML5T −2 
6 × ( 5.402 ) =
= 175.09cm 2 =
2
175.1cm 2
or unit of a = gm × cm5 × sec −2 = Dyne × cm 4
(Upto correct number of significant figure)
Total volume Example – 12
= (=
5.402 ) =
3 3 3
175.64 cm 175.6cm Suppose we employ a system in which the unit of
mass equals 100 kg, the unit of length equals 1 km
(Upto correct number of significant figure).
and the unit of time 100 s and call the unit of energy
Example – 9 eluoj (joule written in reverse order), then
V (a) 1 eluoj = 104 joule (b) 1 eluoj = 10-3 joule
The resistance R = where V= 100 ± 5 volts and
i (c) 1 eluoj = 10-4 joul (d) 1 joule = 103 eluoj
i = 10 ± 0.2 amperes. What is the total error in R
(a) 5% (b) 7% Ans. (a)
(c) 5.2% (d)

5
%
Sol. [ E ] =  ML2T −2 
2
[100kg ] × [1km] × [100sec]
−2
1eluoj =
2
Ans. (b)
V  ∆R  ∆V ∆I = 100kg × 106 m 2 × 10−4 sec −2
Sol. R = ∴ × 100  = × 100 + × 100
I  R  max V I = 104 kgm 2 × sec −=
2
104 Joule
5 0.2
= × 100 + × 100 =( 5 + 2 ) % =7%
100 10
@cbseinfinite
X = 3YZ2 find dimension of Y in (MKSA) system, if A physical parameter a can be determined by
X and Z are the dimension of capacitance and measuring the parameters b, c, d and e using the
magnetic field respectively relation a = bα c β / d γ eδ . If the maximum errors in
the measurement of b, c, d and e are b1 %, c1 %, d1 %
(a) M −3 L−2T −4 A−1 (b) ML−2
and e1 % , then the maximum error in the value of a
(c) M −3 L−2T 4 A4 (d) M −3 L−2T 8 A4 determined by the experiment is
Ans. (d) (a) ( b1 + c1 + d1 + e1 ) %
Sol. X = 3YZ 2
(b) ( b1 + c1 − d1 − e1 ) %
∴ [Y ]=
[ X ]=  M L T A 
−1 −2 4 2
(c) (α b1 + β c1 − γ d1 − δ e1 ) %
 Z 2
 MT −2 A−1 
2
(d) (α b1 + β c1 + γ d1 + δ e1 ) %
=  M L T A 
−3 −2 8 4
Ans. (d)
Example – 14 Sol. a = bα c β / d γ eδ
 ∆a 
Dimensions of
1
, where symbols have their So maximum error in a is given by  × 100 
µ0ε 0  a  max
usual meaning, are ∆b ∆c ∆d ∆e
=α ⋅ × 100 + β ⋅ × 100 + γ . × 100 + δ ⋅ × 100
(a)  LT −1  (b)  L−1T  b c d e
(c)  L−2T 2  (d)  L2T −2 

= (α b1 + β c1 + γ d1 + δ e1 ) %
Ans. (d)
Example – 17
Sol. We know that velocity of light
1 1 Unit of Stefan's constant is
C= ∴ = C2
µ0ε 0 µ0ε 0 (a) Js-1 (b) Jm −2 s −1 K −4
(c) Jm-2 (d) Js
 1  −1 2
 = LT  = L T 
2 −2
∴ So  Ans. (b)
 µ0ε 0 
Q Q
Sol. Stefan's formula = σ T 4 ∴ σ=
At AtT 4
Example – 15
Joule
If the value of resistance is 10.845 ohms and the ∴ unit of σ
= = Jm −2 s −1 K −4
m × sec× K 4
2
value of current is 3.23 amperes, the potential

Example – 18
difference is 35.02935 volts. Its value in significant
number would be In C.G.S. system the magnitude of the force is 100
dynes. In another system where the fundamental
(a) 35 V (b) 35.0 V
physical quantities are kilogram, metre and minute,
(c) 35.03 V (d) 35.025 V the magnitude of the force is
Ans. (b) (a) 0.036 (b) 0.36
Sol. Value of current (3.23 A) has minimum significant (c) 3.6 (d) 36
figure (3) so the value of potential difference Ans. (c)
V(= IR) has only 3 significant figure. Hence its value Sol. n1 = 100, M1 = g, L1 = cm, T1 = sec and M2 = kg,
be 35.0 V.
L2 = meter, T2 = minute, x = 1, y = 1,z = - 2
By substituting these values in the following
conversion formula
@cbseinfinite
x
 M   L  T 
y z
 2π ct   2π x 
n2 = n1  1   1   1  i.e.,  =  =
0 0 0
 M LT
 λ   λ 
 M 2   L2   T2 
1 −2
So (i) unit of c t is same as that of λ
 gm   cm   sec 
1
n2 = 100       (ii) unit of x is same as that of λ

 kg   meter   minute 
 2π ct   2π x  x
1 −2 (iii)   =  and (iv) is unit less. It is not
 gm   cm   sec 
1
n2 = 100  3  λ   λ  λ
  2   
10 gm  10 cm   60sec  c
the case with .
= 3.6kg − metre / s 2 λ
Conversion of 1 MW power on a new system having The potential energy of a particle varies with distance
basic units of mass, length and time as 10kg, 1dm A x
x from a fixed origin as U = , where A and B
and 1 minute respectively is x2 + B
(a) 2.16 × 1012 unit (b) 1.26 × 1012 unit are dimensional constants then dimensional formula
for AB is
(c) 2.16 × 1010 unit (d) 2 × 1014 unit
(a) ML7/ 2T −2 (b) ML11/ 2T −2
Ans. (a)
(c) M 2 L9/ 2T −2 (d) ML13/ 2T −3
Sol. [ P ] =  ML2T −3  Ans. (b)
Using the relation Sol. From the dimensional homogeneity
 x  = [ B ] ∴ [ B ] =  L 
x y z
 M   L  T  2 2
n2 = n1  1   1   1 
 M 2   L2   T2  As well as
−3
[ A]  x1/ 2  [ A]  L1/ 2 
1
 1kg   1m   1s 
2
= 1× 106       [U ] = 2 ⇒  ML T  =
2 −2
10kg  1dm  1min   x  + [ B ]  L2 
[As 1 MW =106 W]
−3 ∴ [ A] =
 ML7/ 2T −2 
 1kg  10dm   1sec 
2
= 10 6
   
10kg   1dm   60sec  Now [=
AB ]  ML7/ 2T −2  × =
 L2   ML11/ 2T −2 
= 2.16 × 1012 unit
Example – 22
Example – 20 If L, C and R denote the inductance, capacitance and
The equation of the stationary wave is resistance respectively, the dimensional formula for
 2π ct   2π x  C2LR is
y = 2a sin   cos  , which of the
 λ   λ  (a)  ML−2T −1 I 0  (b)  M 0 L0T 3 I 0 
following statements is wrong
(c)  M −1 L−2T 6 I 2  (d)  M 0 L0T 2 I 0 
(a) The unit of ct is same as that of λ
(b) The unit of x is same as that of λ Ans. (b)
(c) The unit of 2π c / λ is same as that of 2π x / λ t  2 2 R  2  R 

Sol. C 2 LR  =
= C L  ( LC )   
(d) The unit of c / λ is same as that of x / λ  L   L 
Ans. (d) and we know that frequency of LC circuits is given

1 1
2π ct 2π x by f =
Sol. Here, as well as are dimensionless 2π LC
λ λ
(angle)
@cbseinfinite
L Example – 25
i.e., the dimension of LC is equal to T 2  and  
R The length of a cylinder is measured with a meter rod
gives the time constant of LR circuit so the having least count 0.1 cm. Its diameter is measured
L with vernier callipers having least count 0.01 cm.
dimension of is equal to [T].
R Given that length is 5.0 cm. and radius is 2.0 cm. The
By substituting the above dimensions in the given percentage error in the calculated value of the
volume will be
 2 R 
formula ( LC )    =
2
= T 2  T −1  T 3  (a) 1% (b) 2%
  
L
(c) 3% (d) 4%
Example – 23 Ans. (c)
If velocity (V), force (F) and energy (E) are taken as Sol. Volume of cylinder V = π r 2 l
fundamental units, then dimensional formula for Percentage error in volume
mass will be
∆V 2∆r ∆l
−2 0 0 2 × 100 = × 100 + × 100
(a) V F E (b) V FE V r l
(c) VF −2 E 0 (d) V −2 F 0 E  0.01 0.1 
= 2 × × 100 + × 100 
Ans. (d)  2.0 5.0 
Sol. Let M = V a F b E c (1 2 ) % =
=+ 3%
Putting dimensions of each quantities in both side
[ M ] =  LT −1  Example – 26
a b c
 MLT −2   ML2T −2 
 
26 If the Vectors P = ai + a j + 3k and Q = ai − 2 j − k
Equating powers of dimensions. We have
are perpendicular to each other. Find the value of a?
b + c = 1, a + b + 2c = 0 and  
−a − 2b − 2c =0 Sol. If vectors P and Q are perpendicular
 
Solving these equations, a =
−2, b =
0 and c = 1 ⇒ P .Q =0
So M = V −2 F 0 E  ⇒ a 2 − 2a − 3 =0
⇒ a ( a − 3 ) + 1( a − 3 ) =
0
Example – 24
If there is a positive error of 50% in the measurement ( )( )
⇒ ai + a j + 3k . ai − 2 j − k =
0
of velocity of a body, then the error in the
⇒ a 2 − 3a + a − 3 =0
measurement of kinetic energy is
⇒ a =−1,3
(a) 25% (b) 50%
(c) 100% (d) 125%
Example – 27
Ans. (c)
Find the component of 3i + 4 j along i + j ?
1
Sol. Kinetic energy E = mv 2  
2   A.B
Sol. Component of A along B is given by hence
∆E  ∆m 2∆v  B
∴ × 100=  +  × 100 required component
E  m v 
=
Here, ∆m 0 and
∆v
= × 100 50% =
(=
3i + 4 j ) . ( i + j ) 7
v 2 2
∆E
∴ × 100 =2 × 50 =100%
E
@cbseinfinite
Example – 28 = (12 − 2 ) i − ( −6 − 4 ) j + ( 3 + 12 ) k
 
Find angle between A= 3i + 4 j and =
B 12i + 5 j ? =10i + 10 j + 15k
 
Sol. =
We have cos
 
A.B
θ =
(3i + 4 j ) .(12i + 5 j ) ⇒ a × b= 102 + 102 + 15=
2
= 5 17
425
AB 32 + 42 122 + 52 1   5 17
(i) Area of ∆OAB= a×b = sq.units
36 + 20 56 56 2 2
cos θ
= = =θ cos −1
5 × 13 65 65 (ii) Area of parallelogram formed by OA and OB as
 
adjacent sides = a × b = 5 17 sq.units
Example – 29
  Example – 32
Two vectors A and B are inclined to each other at

an angle θ. Find a unit vector which is perpendicular
  The torque of a force F =−3i + j + 5k acting at the

point r = 7i + 3 j + k is
to both A and B
 
  A× B
=
Sol. n ⇒ n
A × B AB sin θ = (a) 14i − 38 j + 16k (b) 4i + 4 j + 6k
AB sin θ
 
Here n is perpendicular to both A and B (c) −21i + 4 j + 4k (d) −14i + 34 j − 16k
Ans. (a)
  
Example – 30 Sol. The torque is defined as τ = r × F
A particle under constant force i + j − 2k gets i j k
 
displaced from point A(2, -1, 3) to B(4, 3, 2). Find r × F =7 3 1
the work done by the force
−3 1 5
Sol. Force =i + j − 2k
Displacement =i 3 1 + j 1 7 + k 7 3
 5 −3 −3 1
( ) ( ) ( 2i + 4 j − k )
1 5
= d = AB = 4i + 3 j + 2k − 2i − j + 3k =
= i (15 − 1) + j ( −3 − 35 ) + k ( 7 − ( −9 ) )
Work done = F .d = ( i + j − 2k ) . ( 2i + 4 j − k )
=14i − 38 j + 16k
=1× 2 + 1× 4 + ( −2 ) × ( −1) = 2 + 4 + 2 Thus the answer is (a)
= 8 units
Example – 33

Example – 31
The vector from origin to the points A and B are
( )
A force F = 3i + 2 j + k N acts on a particle. As a
  result the particle move with a constant velocity
a =3i − 6 j + 2k and b = 2i + j − 2k respectively. 
Find the area of
= ( )
v 2i + j m/s. The power applied by the force is
(i) the triangle OAB (a) 4W (b) 6W
(ii) The parallelogram formed by OA and OB as (c) 8W (d) 16 W
adjacent sides. Ans. (c)
  
Sol. Given OA =a =3i − 6 j + 2k and Sol. Power P = F .V

OB = b = 2i + j − 2k
i j k
( )(
= 3i + 2 j + k . 2i + j )
  = ( 3 × 2 + 2 × 1 + 1× 0 )
( )
∴ a × b = 3 −6 2
2 1 −2 = 8 N-m/s = 8 W
Hence correct answer is (c).
@cbseinfinite
Show that the vectors If A= 3iˆ + 4 ˆj and B= 7iˆ + 24 ˆj , the vector having
a = 3i − 2 j + k , b =i − 3 j + 5k , c = 2i + j − 4k form a the same magnitude as B and parallel to A is
right triangle.
(a) 5i + 20 j (b) 15i + 10 j
Sol. We have
 
( ) ( )
b + c = i − 3 j + 5k + 2i + j − 4k = 3i − 2 j + k = a (c) 20i + 15 j (d) 15i + 20 j
  Ans. (d)
⇒ a, b, c are coplanar
B = 7 2 + ( 24 ) = 625 =25
2
Sol.
Hence no two of these vectors are parallel, therefore,
‘the given vectors form a triangle. 3iˆ + 4 ˆj
 Unit vector in the direction of A will be Aˆ =
( )( )
a. c = 3i − 2 j + k . 2i + j − 4k 5
= 3 × 2 − 2 ×1 − 4 ×1 = 0  3iˆ + 4 ˆj 
= 25 
So required vector =  15iˆ + 20 ˆj
Hence the given vectors form a right angled triangle.  5 
@cbseinfinite
EXERCISE - 1 : BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

NOTE:
F
Important dimensional formulae for this Exercise 4. The surface tension is   , then the dimensions of

Dimension of Inductance  M L T A 
1 2 2 2
surface tension are
(a) [MLT–2] (b) [MT–2]
Dimension of Resistance  M L T A 
1 2 3 2
(c) [M0L0T0] (d) None of these
Dimension of Capacitance  M L T A 
1 2 4 2
1
5. If S = ft3 , where S is displacement and t is time then
3
Dimension of Voltage  M L T A 
1 2 3 1
find the dimension of f.

Dimension of Permitivity   M L T A 
1 3 4 2 (a) [M0L–1T3] (b) [MLT–3]
(c) [M0L1T–3] (d) [M0L–1T–3]
Dimension of Permeability   M LT A 
1 1 2 2
a
6. In the equation Snth = u + (2n – 1), the letters have their
Dimension of Magnetic field B  M L T A 
1 0 2 1 2
usual meanings. The dimensional formula of Snth is
Dimension of Gravitational constant G  M L T A 
1 3 2 0
(a) [ML0T] (b) [ML–1T–1]
(c) [M LT ]
0 –1
(d) [M0LT0]
Dimesnion formula for Young’s modulus Y  M L T A 
1 2 1 0
7. The equation of alternating current is I = I0e–t/CR, where t is
time, C is capacitance and R is resistance of coil, then the
Dimension of Coefficient of viscosity   M L T 
1 1 1
dimensions of C R is
(a) [MLT–1] (b) [M0LT]
Dimension of Electric field E  M L T A 
1 1 -3 -1
(c) [M L T]
0 0
(d) None of these
8. Taking frequency f, velocity v and density  to be the
Units & Measurements fundamental quantities, then the dimensional formula for
momentum will be
Single Choice Questions (a) [  v4 f –3] (b) [  v3 f –1]
Fundamental and Derived Units, Dimensions & Significant (c) [  v f 2] (d) [  2v2 f 2]
Figures
9. In the equation y = a sin(t + kx), the dimensional formula
1. The unit of momentum is of  is
(a) N s (b) Ns –1 (a) [M0L0T–1] (b) [M0LT–1]
(c) N m (d) N m –1 (c) [ML T ]
0 0
(d) [M0L–1T0]
2. If the acceleration due to gravity is 10 ms–2 and the units 10. The expression [ML–1T–1] represents
of length and time are changed in kilometre and hour (a) momentum (b) force
respectively, the numerical value of acceleration is (c) pressure (d) coefficient of viscosity
(a) 360000 (b) 72000
(c) 36000 (d) 129600 11. The magnetic force on a moving point charge is
  
3. If L denotes the inductance of an inductor through which F  q(v  B ).
a currect I is flowing, then the dimensional formula of LI2
Here, q = electric charge
is 
(a) [MLT–2] v = velocity of the point charge
(b) [ML2T–2] 
B = magnetic field
(c) [M2L2T–2]
Dimension of B is
(d) not expressible in terms of M,L,T (a) [MLT–1A] (b) [MLT–2A–1]
(c) [MT–2A–1] (d) None of these
@cbseinfinite
12. The time dependence of a physical quantity P is given by (a) v2 –1 p–1 (b) v2  g 
P  P0 e  t where  is a constant and t is time. Then
2 (c) v2 g p (d) g–1  
20. The velocity v (in cms ) of a particle is given in terms of
–1
constant  is
–2
time t (in sec) by the equation.
(a) Dimensionless (b) Dimension of T
2
(c) Dimensions of P (d) Dimension of T b . The dimensions of a, b and c are
v  at 
13. The dimensional formula of coefficient of permittivity for t c
1 q1 q 2 a b c
free space (0) in the equation F = , where
4 0 r2 (a) [L ]
2
[T] [LT2]
symbols have their usual meanings, is (b) [LT2] [LT] [L]
(a) [ML3A–2T–4] (b) [M–1L–3T4A2] (c) [LT–2] [L] [T]
(c) [M–1L–3A–2T–4] (d) [ML3A2T–4] (d) [L] [LT] [T2]
14. In the relation y = r sin (  t – kx), the dimensions of  /k 21. Consider a new system of units in which C (speed of light
are in vacuum), h (Planck’s constant) and G (gravitational
(a) [M0L0T0] (b) [M0L1T–1] constant) are taken as fundamental units. Which of the
following would correctly represent mass in this new
(c) [M0L0T1] (d) [M0L1T0]
system ?
15. The expression for centripetal force depends upon mass
of body, speed of the body and the radius of circular path. hC GC
Find the expression for centripetal force. (a) (b)
G h
mv 2 mv 2
(a) F  (b) F  hG
2r 3 r (c) (d) hGC
C
mv 2 m2 v2 22. If F = 6arbvc
(c) F  (d) F 
r2 2r
16. The damping force of an oscillating particle is observed to where F = viscous force
be proportional to velocity. The constant of proportionality  = coeffficient of viscosity
can be measured in r = radius of spherical body
(a) kg s –1 (b) kg s v = terminal velocity of the body
(c) kg m s –1 (d) kg m –1 s–1
Find the values of a, b and c.
17. If p represents radiation pressure, C represents speed of
(a) a = 1, b = 2,c = 1 (b) a = 1, b = 1,c = 1
light and q represents radiation energy striking a unit area
(c) a = 2, b = 1,c = 1 (d) a = 2, b = 2,c = 2
pre second, then non–zero integers a, b and c are such
that paqbCc is dimensionless, then 23. A gas bubble from an explosion under water oscillates
(a) a = 1, b = 1, c = – 1 (b) a = 1, b = –1, c = 1 with a time period T, depends upon static pressure p,
(c) a = –1, b = 1, c = 1 (d) a = 1, b = 1, c = 1 density of water  and the total energy of explosion E.
18. If I is the moment of inertia and the angular velocity, Find the epression for the time period T. (where, k is a
what is the dimensional formula of rotational kinetic energy dimensionless constant)
(a) T=kp -5/6 ρ1/2 E1/3 (b) T=kp -4/7 ρ1/2 E1/3
1 
I 
2 (c) T=kp -5/6 ρ1/2 E1/2 (d) T=kp -4/7 ρ1/3 E1/2
(a) [ML2T–1] (b) [M2L–1T–2] 24. If E, m, J and G represent energy, mass, angular momentum
(c) [ML T ]
2 –2
(d) [M2L–1T–2] and gravitational constant respectively, then the
19. The velocity v of water waves may depend on their dimensional formula of EJ2/m5G2 is
wavelenght (), the density of water (p) and the acceleration (a) [MLT–2] (b) [M0L0T]
due to gravity(g). The method of dimensions gives the (c) [M0L2T0] (d) dimensionless
relation between these quantities as
@cbseinfinite
25. Given X = (Gh / c3)1/2, where G, h and c are gravitational 32. The percentage errors in the measurement of mass and
constant, Planck’s cosntant and the velocity of light speed are 2% and 3% respectively. How much will be the
respectively. Dimensions of X are the same as those of maximum error in the estimate of kinetic energy obtained
(a) mass (b) time by measuring mass and speed?
(c) length (d) acceleration (a) 11% (b) 8%
26. The thrust developed by a rocket–motor is given by
(c) 5% (d) 1%
F = mv + A(p1 – p2), where m is the mass of the gas ejected
per unit time, v is velocity of the gas, A is area of cross– 33. Error in the measurement of radius of sphere is 2%. The
section of the nozzle, p1, p2 are the pressures of the exhaust error in the measurement of volume is
gas and surrounding atmosphere. The formula is (a) 1% (b) 5%
dimensionally
(c) 3% (d) 6%
(a) Correct
(b) Wrong 34. If there is a positve error of 50% in the measurement of
(c) Sometimes wrong, sometimes correct speed of a body, then the error in the measurement of
(d) Data is not adequate kinetic energy is
(a) 25% (b) 50%
ky
27. What is the unit of k in the relation U = 2 where (c) 100% (d) 125%
y  a2
U represents the potential energy, y represents the 35. The radius of the sphere is (4.3 ± 0.1)cm. The percentage
displacement and a represents the maximum displacement error in its volume is
ie, amplitude?
(a) m s–1 (b) m s 0.1 0.1100
(a) × 100 (b) 3 
(c) J m (d) J s–1 4.3 4.3
28. The wavelength associated with a moving particle depends
1 0.1100 1 0.1100
upon power p th of its mass m, q th power of its velocity v (c)  (d) 
3 4.3 3 4.3
and rth power of Planck’s constant h. Then the correct set
of values of p, q and r is 36. In an experiment, we measure quantities a, b and c. Then x
(a) p = 1, q = –1, r = 1 (b) p = 1, q = 1, r = 1
(c) p = –1, q = –1, r = –1 (d) p = –1, q = –1, r = 1 ab 2
is calculated from the formula, x = . The percentage
c3
29. If 3.8 × 10–6 is added to 4.32 × 10–5 giving due regard to errors in a, b, c are ± 1%, ± 3%, and ± 2% respectively. The
significant figures, then the result will be percentage error in x can be
(a) 4.58 × 10–5 (b) 4.7 × 10–5 (a) ±1% (b) ±4%
(c) 4.5 × 10–5 (d) None of these
(c) 7% (d) ±13%
30. A cube has a side of length 1.2 × 10–2 m. Calculate its
volume 37. If X = A×B and X, A and B are maximum absolute
(a) 1.7 × 10–6 m3 (b) 1.73 × 10–6 m3 errors in X, A and B respectively, then the maximum relative
(c) 1.70 × 10 m
–6 3
(d) 1.732 × 10–6 m3 error in X is given by
Error Analysis (a) X = A + B (b) X = A – B

31. The pressure on a square plate is measured by measuring
 X  A B X A B
the force on the plate and the lenght of the sides of the (c)   (d)  
X A B X A B
F
plate by using the formula p = . If the maximum errors 38. A wire has a mass (0.3 ± 0.003)g, radius (0.5 + 0.005)mm
2
in the measurement of force and length are 4% and 2% and length (6 ±0.06) cm. The maximum precentage error in
respectively, then the maximum error in the measurement the measurement of its density is
of pressure is (a) 1 (b) 2
(a) 1% (b) 2% (c) 3 (d) 4
(c) 8% (d) 10%
@cbseinfinite
39. A public park, in the form of a square, has an area of 47. A vector is not changed if
(100±0.2) m2. The side of park is (a) it is rotated through an arbitrary angle
(a) (10 ± 0.01) m (b) (10 ± 0.1) m (b) it is multipled by an arbitrary scalar
(c) (10.0 ± 0.1) m (d) (10.0 ± 0.2) m (c) it is cross multiplied by a unit vector
Basic Algebra (d) it is slid parallel to itself.
40. Identify the quadratic equation from the following. 48. The x and y components of a force are 2 N and –3N. The
1 force is
(a) m   1, m  0
m (a) 2iˆ  3jˆ N (b) 2iˆ  3jˆ N
1
(b) m 
2
 1, m  0 (c) 2iˆ  3jˆ N (d) 3iˆ  2ˆj N
m
49. A force is inclined at 60° to the horizontal. If its rectangular
1 component in the horizontal direction is 50 N, then
(c) x   1, x  0
2
x magnitude of the force in the vertical direction is

(d) x 2  2 x  1  0 (a) 25 N (b) 75 N
1 (c) 87 N (d) 100 N
41. Find the value of a for which m  is a root of equation.
3 50. One of the rectangular components of a velocity of 60 kmh–
  is 30 km h–1. The other rectangular component is
1
am 2  3  2 m 1  0
(a) (b) 2 (a) 30 km h–1 (b) 30 3 Km h 1
2
(c) 6 (d) 5 (c) 30 2 km h 1 (d) zero
42. The sides of two square plots are  2x  1 m and
51. If 0.5 î  0.8 ˆj  ckˆ is a unit vector, then the value of c is
 5x  4  m . The area of the second square plot is 9 times
(a) 0.11 (b) 0.22
the area of the first square plot. Find the side of the larger
plot. (c) 0.33 (d) 0.89
(a) 50 m (b) 20 m
(c) 26 m (d) 39 m 52. What is the unit vector along î  ˆj ?
   
6 6
2 1  2 1 î  ˆj
43. The value of will be
(a)
2
(b)  
2 î  ˆj
(a) –198 (b) 198
(c) 99 (d) –99 (c) î  ˆj (d) k̂
If 1  ax   1  8x  24x  .... then the value of a and n
n 2
44.
53. What is the numerical value of vector 3iˆ  4jˆ  5kˆ ?
is
(a) 2, 4 (b) 2, 3 (a) 3 2 (b) 5 2
(c) 3, 6 (d) 1, 2 (c) 7 2 (d) 9 2
Scalars and Vectors
45. Which one of the following is a scalar quantity ? Vector Operations
(a) Displacement (b) Momentum  
54. Two forces F1 and F2 are acting at right angles to each
(c) Acceleration (d) Work
other. Then their resultant has a magnitude
46. Which one of the following is not the vector quantity ?
(a) F1  F2 (b) F12  F22
(a) Torque (b) Displacement
(c) Velocity (d) Speed F1  F2
(c) F12  F22 (d)
2
@cbseinfinite
55. The resultant of two forces, each P, acting at an angle  is 

62. The magnitude of the X and Y components of A are 7 and
 
 
(a) 2 P sin (b) 2 P cos 6. Also the magnitudes of X and Y components of A  B
2 2 
are 11 and 9 resepectively. What is the magnitude of B ?
(c) 2 P cos  (d) P 2 (a) 5 (b) 6
56. Two forces, each equal to F, act as shown in figure. Their (c) 8 (d) 9
resultant is  
63. If vectors A and B have an angle  between them, then
ˆ B
value of | A ˆ | will be :
 
(a) 2 cos (b) 2 tan
2 2
F 
(a) (b) F (c) 2sin (d) none of these
2 2
(c) 3F (d) 5F   
64. If the resultant of the vectors î  2ˆj  kˆ , î  ˆj  2kˆ and
     
57. Given R  A  B and R = A = B. The angle between A and
 C is a unit vector along the y-direction, then C is
B is
(a) 2iˆ  kˆ (b) 2iˆ  kˆ
(a) 60° (b) 90°
(c) 120° (d) 180° (c) 2iˆ  kˆ (d) 2iˆ  kˆ
58. If the magnitude of the sum of the two vectors is equal to 65. The simple sum of two co-initial vectors is 16 units. Their
the difference of their magnitudes, then the angle between vectors sum is 8 units. The resultant of the vectors is
vectors is perpendicular to the smaller vector. The magnitudes of the
two vectors are :
(a) 0° (b) 45°
(a) 2 units and 14 units (b) 4 units and 12 units
(c) 90° (d) 180°
(c) 6 units and 10 units (d) 8 units and 8 units
 
59. Two vectors a and b are at an angle of 60° with each other..     
66. Two vectors A and B are such that A  B  C and
  2 2 2
Their resultant makes an angle of 45° with a . If | b | = 2 A +B =C .
  
unit, then | a | is If  is the angle between positive direction of A and B
then the correct statement is
(a) 3 (b) 3 1
2
(c) (d) (a)  =  (b)  
3 1 3/2 3
   
60. Given that A  B  C  0. Two out of the three vectors are (c)  = 0 (d)  
2
equal in magnitude. The magnitude of the third vector is
67. Three forces of magnitudes 6 N, 6 N and 72 N act at a
2 times that of the other two. Which of the following can
corner of a cube along three sides as shown in figure.
be the angles between these vectors ? Resultant of these forces is
(a) 90°, 135°, 135° (b) 45°, 45°, 90°
(c) 30°, 60°, 90° (d) 45°, 90°, 135°
  
61. Given A  î  2jˆ  3kˆ . When a vector B is added to A , we

get a unit vector along X–axis. Then, B is
(a)  2jˆ  3kˆ (b) î  2ˆj
(c) î  3kˆ (d) 2jˆ  3kˆ (a) 12 N along OB (b) 18 N along OA
(c) 18 N along OC (d) 12 N along OE
@cbseinfinite
68. A particle undergoes three successive displacements given by  

75. Two vectors A and B are inclined to each other at an angle
  
S1  2 m north–east, S2  2 m due south and S3  4 m, . Which of the following is the unit vector perpendicular
 
30° north of west, then magnitude of net displacement is : to both A and B ?
(a) 14  4 3 (b) 14  4 3  
AB ˆ B
A ˆ
(a)   (b)
(c) 14 (d) none of these AB sin 
69. The magnitude of resultant of three vectors of magnitude  
AB ˆ B
A ˆ
1, 2 and 3 whose directions are those of the sides of an
(c) (d)
equilateral triangle taken in order is : AB sin  ABcos 
(a) zero (b) 2 2 unit  
76. If A  2iˆ  3jˆ  4kˆ and B  4iˆ  3jˆ  2kˆ , then angle
(c) 4 3 units (d) 3 unit  
between A and B is

70. For what value of a, A  2iˆ  ajˆ  kˆ will be perpendicular to –1
(a) sin (25/29)
–1
(b) sin (29/25)

–1 –1
(c) cos (25/29) (d) cos (29/25)
B  4iˆ  2jˆ  kˆ
77. The vector sum of two forces is perpendicular to their vector
(a) 4 (b) zero differences. In that case, the forces
(c) 3.5 (d) 1 (a) are not equal to each other in magnitude
  (b) cannot be predicted
71. Projection of P on Q is
  (c) are equal to each other
ˆ
(a) P  Q (b) P̂  Q (d) are equal to each other in magnitude
   78. The area of the parallelogram represented by the vectors,
ˆ
(c) P  Q (d) P  Q  
 A  4iˆ  3jˆ and B  2iˆ  4ˆj as adjacent side is
72. The component of vector A  a x î  a y ˆj  a z kˆ along the (a) 14 units (b) 7.5 units
 
direction of î  ˆj is
(c) 10 units

(d) 5 units

79. The angle between A and B is . The value of the triple
(a) (ax – ay + az) (b) (ax + ay)
  
product A   B  A  is
a x  ay 
(a) A B
2
(b) zero
(c) (d) (ax – ay + az)
2 2
(c) A B sin 
2
(d) A B cos 
  
73. If A and B denote the sides of a parallelogram and its area 80. A vector F1 is along the positive Y–axis. If its vector product
 
1   with another vector F2 is zero, then F2 could be
is AB (A and B are the magnitude of A and B
2
  (a) 4jˆ (b) ˆj  kˆ
respectively), the angle between A and B is
(a) 30° (b) 60° (c) ˆj  kˆ (d) 4 î
(c) 45° (d) 120°  
81. If the vectors A  2iˆ  4ˆj and B  5iˆ  pjˆ are parallel to
     
74. Given, C  A  B and D  B  A . What is the angle 
  each other, the magnitude of B is
between C and D ?
(a) 5 5 (b) 10
(a) 30° (b) 60°
(c) 15 (d) 2 5
(c) 90° (d) 180°
@cbseinfinite
  Numerical Value Type Questions

ˆ B
82. Given  is the angle between A and B . Then | A ˆ | is
86. To find the distance d over which a signal can be seen
equal to clearly in foggy conditions, a railways engineer uses
(a) sin  (b) cos  dimensional analysis and assumes that the diatance
(c) tan  (d) cot  depends on the mass density  of the flog, intensity (power/
 
83. A vector A points vertically upwards and B point towards area) S of the light from the signal and its frequency f. the
 
North. The vector product A  B is engineer find that d is proportional to S1/ n . The value of n
(a) zero is
(b) along East 87. The value of gravitation constant is
(c) along West
G  6.67  10 11 N  m 2 / kg 2 in SI units. In CGS
(d) vectically downwards
  system of units, its value is n  10 8 dyne  cm 2 / g 2 ,
84. If A  2iˆ  3jˆ  6kˆ and B  3iˆ  6ˆj  2kˆ then vector
  where is.
perpendicular to both A and B has magnitude k times that
88. The radius of a sphere is measured to be  7.50  0.85 cm
 
of 6 î  2ˆj  3kˆ . That k is equal to . Suppose the percentage error in its volume is x. The value
of x, to the nearest x, is ________.
(a) 1 (b) 4
(c) 7 (d) 9 V
  89. The resistance R  , where V   50  2  V and
I
85. Given P  3jˆ  4kˆ and Q  2jˆ  5kˆ . The magnitude of the
scalar product of these vector is I   20  0.2  A . The percentage error in R is ‘x’%. The
(a) 20 (b) 23 value of ‘x’ to the nearest integer is ________.
(c) 26 (d) 5 33 90. The acceleration due to gravity is found upto an accuracy
of 4% on a planet. The energy supplied to a simple pendulum
to known mass ‘m’ to undertake oscillations of time period
T is being estimated. If time period is measured to an
accuracy of 3%, the accuracy to which the energy measured
is known as .......%

(where T  2 )
g
@cbseinfinite
EXERCISE - 2 : PREVIOUS YEARS JEE MAIN QUESTIONS

NOTE: 3. In an experiment to determine the period of a simple
Important dimensional formulae for this Exercise pendulum of length 1 m, it is attached to different spherical
bobs of radii r1 and r2. The two spherical bobs have uniform
1 2 2 2
mass distribution. If the relative difference in the periods,
is found to be 5  104 s, the difference in radii, r1  r2 is
1 2 3 2
best given by :    (r1 , r2 )  (2017)

1 2 4 2
(a) 1 cm (b) 0.05 cm

1 2 3 1
(c) 0.1 cm (d) 0.01 cm
4. The relative error in the determination of the surface area
1 3 4 2
of a sphere is  . Then the relative error in the determination
of its volume is : (2018)
1 1 2 2
3 
(a)  (b) 
1 0 2 1
2 3

1 3 2 0
5
(c)  (d) 
2
1 2 1 0
5. The percentage errors in quantities P, Q, R and S are 0.5
percent, 1 percent, 3 percent and 1.5 percent respectively
1 1 1
P3Q 2
in the measurement of a physical quantity A = . The
Dimension of Electric field E  M L T A 
1 1 -3 -1 
RS
Units and Measurements maximum percentage error in the value of A will be :
1. The following observations were taken for determining (2018)
surface tension T of water by capillary method : (a) 6.0 percent (b) 7.5 percent
diameter of capillary, D  1.25  10 m . 2 (c) 8.5 percent (d) 6.5 percent
6. The density of a material in the shape of a cube is
rise of water, h  1.45  102 m .
determined by measuring three sides of the cube and its
Using g  9.80m/ s 2 and the simplified relation mass. If the relative errors in measuring the mass and length
are respectively 1.5% amd 1% the maximum error in
rhg determining the density is : (2018)
T 103 N/ m , the possible error in surface tension
2 (a) 4.5% (b) 6%
is closest to : (2017) (c) 2.5% (d) 3.5%
(a) 0.15% (b) 1.5% 7. Expression for time in terms of G (universal gravitational
(c) 2.4% (d) 10% constant), h (planck constant) and c (speed of light) is
2. A physical quantity P is described by the relation proportional to: (2019)
P  a1/2 b2 c3 d 4 hc5 c3
(a) (b)
If the relative errors in the measurement of a, b, c and d G Gh
respectively, are 2%, 1%, 3% and 5%, the relative error in
P will be : (2017) Gh Gh
(a) 8% (b) 12% (c) (d)
c5 c3
(c) 32% (d) 25%
@cbseinfinite
8. The diameter and height of a cylinder are measured by a (a) M 0 L2 T 4 (b) M 2 LT 4

meter scale to be 12.6  0.1cm and 34.2  0.1cm , (c) MLT 2 (d) M 2 L2 T 2
respectively. What will be the value of its volume in
appropriate significant figures? (2019) 14. Let l , r , c and v represent inductance, resistance,
capacitance and voltage, respectively. The dimension of
(a) 4264  81cm 3 (b) 4264.4  81.0 cm 3
l
(c) 4260  80 cm 3 (d) 4300  80 cm 3 in SI units will be (2019)
rcv
9. If speed (V), acceleration (A) and force (F) are considered
(a)  LA  (b)  A 
2 1
as fundamental units, the dimension of Young’s modulus
will be: (where dimension of Young’s modulus is
(c)  LTA  (d)  LT 
2
 ML1T 2  ) (2019)
(a) V 2 A 2 F2 (b) V 2 A 2 F2 0

15. In SI unit, the dimensions of 0 is: (2019)
(c) V 4 A 2 F (d) V 4 A 2 F
10. If surface tension (S), Moment of inertia (I) and Planck’s (a) ML3 TA 1 (b) M 1 L1T 2 A
constant (h), were to be taken as the fundamental units,
(c) ML3/ 2 T 3 A (d) M 1 L2 T 3 A 2
then dimensional formula for linear momentum would be;
(where dimension of h is  ML T  )
2 1
(2019) 16. In the formula X  5YZ 2 , X and Z have dimensions of
capacitance and magnetic field, respectively. What are the
(a) S1/ 2 I 3/ 2 h 1 (b) S1/ 2 I1/ 2 h 1 dimensions of Y in SI units? (2019)
(a)  M L T A  (b)  M L T A 
3 2 8 4 1 2 4 2
(c) S1/ 2 I1/ 2 h 0 (d) S3/ 2 I1/ 2 h 0
11. In the measurement of a cube, the mass and edge length
(c)  M L T A  (d)  M L T A 
2 0 4 2 2 3 6 3
are measured as 10.00  0.10  kg,  0.10  0.01 m ,

respectively. The error in the measurement of density (in 17. Which of the follwoing combinations has the dimension
kg m-3 ) is: (2019) of electrical resistance? ( 0 is the permittivity of vaccum
(a) 0.10 kg / m 3 (b) 0.31kg / m 3
and 0 is the permeability of vaccum) (2019)
(c) 0.07 kg / m 3 (d) 0.01kg / m 3
0 0
12. The area of a square is 5.29 cm 2 . The area of 7 such (a) (b)
0 0
squares taking into account the significant figures is:
(2019)
0 0
(a) 37 cm 2 (b) 37.030 cm 2 (c) (d)
0 0
(c) 37.03cm 2 (d) 37.0 cm 2
13. The force of interaction between two atoms is given by B2
18. The dimension of , where B is magnetic field and
  x2 
20
 
F   e   kt  where x is the distance, k is the Boltzmann
0 is the magnetic permeability of vaccum, is (2019)
constant and t is temperature and  and  are two (a) ML1T 2 (b) ML2 T 2
constants. The dimension of  is: (where dimension for (c) MLT3K1 (d) ML2 T 1
Boltzmann constant is  M L T K  )
1 2 2 1
(2019)
@cbseinfinite
23. If speed V, area A and force F are chosen as fundamental

19. The dimension of stopping potential V0 in photoelectic
units, then the dimension of Young’s modulus will be
effect in units of Planck’s constant (h), speed of light (c), (2020)
and gravitational constant (G) and Ampere (A) is (2020)
(a) FA 2 V3 (b) FA 2 V 2
(a) h 2 / 3 c 5 / 3 G 1/ 3 A 1 (b) h 2 c1/ 3 G 3/ 2 A 1
(c) FA 1V 0 (d) FA 2 V1
(c) h 0 G 1c 5 A 1 (d) h 2 / 3 c 1/ 3 G 4 / 3 A 1
24. If momentum (P), area (A) and time (T) are taken to be the
20. A simple pendulum is being used to determine the value fundamental quantities then the dimensional formula for
of gravitational acceleration at a certain place. The length energy is: (2020)
of the pendulum is 25.0 cm and a stop watch with 1 sec
(a)  P AT  (b)  PA T 
1/ 2 1 1/ 2 1
resolution measures the time taken for 40 oscillations to
be 50 sec. The accuracy in g is (2020)
(c)  P A T  (d)  P AT 
1 1/ 2 1 2 2
(a) 5.40% (b) 3.40%
(c) 4.40% (d) 2.4% 25. Amount of solar energy received on the earth’s surface
per unit area per unit time is defined a solar constant.
hc5 Dimension of solar constant is: (where solar constant
21. A quantity f is given by f  where c is speed of
G Energy
 ) (2020)
light, G is universal gravitational constant and h is the Time  Area
Planck’s constant. Dimension of f is that of (2020)
(a) ML0T-3 (b) MLT-2
(a) area (b) energy
(c) M2L0T-1 (d) ML2T-1
(c) volume (d) Momentum
26. Dimensional formula for thermal conductivity is (here
22. For the four sets of three measured physical quantities as
given below. Which of the following options is correct? Q
(2020) K denotes the temperature): (where K  ) (2020)
AT
(i) A1  24.36, B1  0.0724, C1  256.2
(a) z 
C
L
R
(b) MLT 2 K 2
(ii) A 2  24.44, B2  16.08, C 2  240.2 (c) MLT 2 K (d) MLT 3 K
(iii) A 3  25.2, B3  19.2812, C3  236.183 A quantity x is given by  IFv / WL  in terms of moment

2 4
27.
(iv) A 4  25, B4  236.191, C 4  19.5 of inertia I, force F, velocity v, work W and Length L. The
dimensional formula for x is same as that of: (2020)
(a) A1  B1  C1  A3  B3  C3
(a) Coefficient of viscosity
 A 4  B4  C 4  A 2  B2  C 2 (b) Energy density
(c) Force constant
(b) A1  B1  C1  A 2  B2  C2
(d) Planck’s constant
 A 3  B3  C3  A 4  B4  C4 28. A physical quantity z depends on four observables a,b,c
2
(c) A1  B1  C1  A3  B3  C3 a 2b 3
and d, as z  . The percentages of error in the
 A 2  B2  C 2  A 4  B4  C 4 c d3
measurement of a,b,c and d are 2%, 1.5%, 4% and 2.5%
(d) A 4  B4  C 4  A1  B1  C1 respectively. The percentage of error in z is: (2020)
(a) 16.5 % (b) 12.25 %
 A3  B3  C3  A 2  B2  C2
(c) 13.5 % (d) 14.5 %
@cbseinfinite
1 E L (a)  a    i  ,  b    ii  ,  c    iv  ,  d    iii 
29. The quantities x  0 0
, y
B and
z are
CR
(b)  a    iii  ,  b    ii  ,  c    iv  ,  d    i 
defined where C-capacitance, R-Resistance, L-length, E-
Electric field, B-magnetic field and 0 , 0 -free space (c)  a    ii  ,  b    iii  ,  c    iv  ,  d    i 
permitivity and permeability respectively. Then: (Where (d)  a    iii  ,  b    iv  ,  c    ii  ,  d    i 

dimesion of E is  M L T A  .
1 1 3 1
(2020) 34. If e is the electronic charge, c is the speed of light in free
(a) Only y and z have the same dimension 2
1 e
(b) x,y and z have the same dimension space and h is Planck’s constant, the quantity
4 0 hc
(c) Only x and y have the same dimension
(d) Only x and z have the same dimension has dimensions of: (2021)
30. The density of a material in SI unit of 128 kgm3 . In new (a)  MLT 
0
(b)  LC 
1
unit system, in which the unit of length is 25 cm and the

(c)  MLT  (d)  M L T 
1 0 0 0
unit of mass is 50 g, the numerical value of density (in new
unit system) of the material is: (2020)
35. In a typical combustion engine the work done by a gas
31. The density of a solid metal sphere is determined by
  x2
measuring its mass and its diameter. The maximum error in molecule is given by W   2  e kT , where x is the
 x  displacement, k is the Boltzmann constant and T is the
the density of the sphere is   % . If the relative errors
 100 
temperature. If  and  are constants, dimensions of 
in measuring the mass and the diameter are 6.0% and 1.5%
respectively, the value of x is____. (2020) will be: (2021)
32. The period of oscillation of a simple pendulum is (a)  M LT 
0 0
(b)  M LT 
2 2
L
T  2 . Measured value of ‘L’ is 1.0 m from meter (c)  MLT 
2
(d)  MLT 
1
g
scale having a minimum division of 1 mm and time of one 36. If ‘C’ and ‘V’ represent capacity and voltage respectively
complete oscillation is 1.95 s measured from stopwatch of then what are the dimensions of  where CN   ?
0.01s resolution. The percentage error in the determination (2021)
of ‘g’ will be: (2021)
(a)  M L I T  (b)  M L I T 
1 3 2 7 3 4 3 7
(a) 1.03% (b) 1.33%
(c) 1.13% (d) 1.30%
(c)  M L I T  (d)  M L I T 
2 4 3 7 2 3 2 6
33. Match LIst-I with List-II:

List-I List-II 37. In order to determine the Young’s Modulus of a
wire of radius 0.2 cm (measured using scale of least count
(i)  MLT 
1
(a) h (Planck’s constant) = 0.001 cm) and length 1 m (measured
using a scale of least count = 1 mm), a weight of mass 1 kg
(ii)  ML T 
2 1
(b) E (kinetic energy) (measured using a scale of least count =1 g) was hanged
to get the elongation of 0.5 cm (measured using a scale of
(iii)  ML T 
2 2
(c) V (electric potential) least count 0.001 cm). what will be the fractional error in
the value of Young’s modulus determined by this
(iv)  ML I T 
2 1  3 experiment? (2021)
(d) P (linear momentum)
(a) 0.14% (b) 1.4%
Choose the correct answer from the options given below:
(2021) (c) 9% (d) 0.9%
@cbseinfinite
38. The time period of simple pendulum is given by
l
(a)
2

1 ˆ ˆ
a k i  (b)
2

1 ˆ ˆ
a i k 
T  2 . The measured value of the length of
g
pendulum is 10 cm known to a 1 mm accuracy. The time for (c)
1 ˆ ˆ
2

a j i  (d)
2

1 ˆ ˆ
a jk 
200 oscillations of the pendulum is found to be 100 second  
using a clock of 1 s resolution. The percentage accuracy 43. Two vectors A and B have equal magnitudes. The
 
in the determination of ‘g’ using this pendulum is ‘x’. The
value of ‘x’ to the nearest integer is, (2021)
 
magnitude of A  B is ‘n’ times the magnitude of
 
(a) 4%
(c) 3%
(b) 5%
(d) 2%
 A  B . The angle between A and B is: (2019)
39. Suppose you have taken a dilute solution of oleic acid in

1  n  1  1  n  1 
2
such a way that its concentration becomes 0.01 cm3 of (a) cos  2  (b) cos  
oleic acid per cm3 of the solution. Then you make a film of  n  1  n  1
this solution (monomolecular thickness) of area 4 cm2 by
1  n  1 
2
considering 100 spherical drops of radius 1  n  1 
(c) sin   (d) sin  
 n  1
2
1  n  1
 3 3
 
3
  10 cm . The thickness of oleic acid layer will   
 40  44. The sum of two forces P and Q is R , such that R  P .
be x 1014 m .  
The angle  (in degree) that the resultant of 2 P and Q
Where x is______. (2021) 
will make with Q is______ (2020)
Basic Mathematics 45. In an octagan ABCDEFGH of equal sides, what is the sum
40. Two forces P and Q, of magnitude 2F and 3F, respectively, of
are at an angle  with each other. If the force Q is doubled,       
AB  AC  AD  AE  AF  AG  AH ,
then their resultant also gets doubled. Then, the angle  
is: (2019) If, AO  2iˆ  3jˆ  4kˆ (2021)
(a) 120 (b) 60

(c) 90 (d) 30
   
41. Let A1  3, A 2  5 and A1  A 2  5 . The value of
   
 2A  3A  . 3A  2A  is:
1 2 1 2 (2019)
(a) -106.5 (b) -99.5
(a) 16iˆ  24ˆj  32kˆ (b) 16iˆ  24jˆ  32kˆ
(c) -112.5 (d) -118.5
42. In the cube of side ‘a’ shown in the figure, the vector from (c) 16iˆ  24ˆj  32kˆ (d) 16iˆ  24ˆj  32kˆ
the central point of the face ABOD to the central point of
the face BEFO will be: (2019)
@cbseinfinite
EXERCISE - 3: ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

NOTE: 4. The value of 0.99 – 0.989 is
Important dimensional formulae for this Exercise (a) 0.001 (b) 0.010 × 10–1
1 2 2 2 (c) 0.01 × 10–1 (d) 0.1 ×10–3
5. If f = x2 , then the relative error in f is
1 2 3 2
2x (x ) 2
(a) (b)
1 2 4 2
x x
1 2 3 1
x
(c) (d) ( x) 2
x
1 3 4 2
6. A student measures the time period of 100 oscillations of

a simple pendulum four times. The data set is 90 s, 91s, 95
1 1 2 2
s and 92 s. If the minimum division in the measuring clock

is 1 s, then the reported mean time should be :
1 0 2 1
(a) 92 ± 5.0 s (b) 92 ± 1.8 s

1 3 2 0
(c) 92 ± 3 s (d) 92 ± 2 s
7. A physical quantity is represented by X = MaLbT–c . If
1 2 1 0
percentage errors in the measurements of M, L and T are
and respectively, then total percentage error is
1 1 1
(a) (a + b – c)% (b) (a + b + c)%

1 1 -3 -1 
(c) (a – b – c)% (d) 0%
8. The lenght , breadth b and thickness t of a block are
Single Choice Questions
measured with the help of a metre scale. Given l = 15.12 ±
1. The value of universal gas constant is R = 8.3 J/K – mol.
0.01 cm, b = 10.15 ± 0.01 cm, t = 5.28 ± 0.01cm.
The value of R in atmosphere litre per kelvin mol
The percentage error in volume is nearly.
(a) 8.19 (b) 0.00819
(c) 81.9 (d) 0.0819 (a) 0.68% (b) 0.28%
2. In the equation X = 3YZ , X and Z have dimensions of
2
(c) 0.37% (d) 0.48%
capacitance and magnetic induction respectively. In MKSQ 9. The specific resistance  of a circular wire of radius r,
system, the dimensional formula of Y is
(a) [M–3L–2T–2Q–4] (b) [ML–2]  r2R
resistance R and lenght  is given by   .

(c) [M–3L–2Q4T8] (d) [M–3L–2Q4T4]
Given, r = (0.24 ± 0.02) cm, R = (30 ± 1)  and
n2  n1  = (4.80 ± 0.01) cm. The percentage error in  is nearly
3. The number of particles given by n = – D are
x2  x1
(a) 7% (b) 9%
crossing a unit area perpendicular to x–axis in unit time, (c) 13% (d) 20%
where n1 and n2 are the number of particles per unit volume
for the values x 1 and x 2 of x respectively. Then the 10. Given, potential difference V = (8±0.5) volt and currect
dimensional formula of diffusion constant D is I = (2±0.2)A. the value of resistance R is
(a) [M0LT0] (b) [M0L2T–4] (a) 4 ± 16.25% (b) 4 ± 6.25%
(c) [M LT ]
0 –3
(d) [M L T ] 0 2 –1
(c) 4 ± 10% (d) 4 ± 8%
@cbseinfinite
  
1 1 1 17. Given c  a  b . The angle which a makes with c is
11. The focal length of a mirror is given by f  u  v where u
(a) 0° (b) 45°
and v represent object and image distances respectively. (c) 90° (d) 180°
The maximum relative error in f is    
18. If P  Q = 0, then | P  Q | is
f u v  
(a)  
f u v (a) | P | |Q | (b) zero
f 1 1 (c) 1 (d) PQ
(b)  
f u / u v / v
 
19. Given r  4jˆ and p  2iˆ  3jˆ  kˆ . The angular momentum is
f u v  (u  v)
(c)   
f u v uv (a) 4iˆ  8k
ˆ (b) 8iˆ  4kˆ
f u v u v (c) 8jˆ (d) 9kˆ
(d)    
f u v uv uv
12. If x = a – b, the the maximum percentage error in the 20. The magnitude of the vector product of two vectors is3
measurement of x will be times their scalar product. The angle between the two
vectors is
 a+b   a b  (a) 90° (b) 60°
(a)    100% (b)    100%
 a-b   a b 
(c) 45° (d) 30°
 a b   a b 
(c)     100% (d)     100% More than one correct options
 a-b a b  a-b a b
21. In a system of units if force (F), acceleration (A) and time
A (T) are taken as fundamental units then which of the
13. If v   Bt 2  Ct 3 where v is velocity, t is time and A,
t following cannot be dimensional formula of energy. {Given
[energy] =  ML T  , [force]   ML T  }
2 2 1 2
B and C are constants, then the dimensional formula of B
is
(a) FA2T (b) FAT 2
(a) [M0LT0] (b) [ML0T0]
(c) [M0L0T] (d) [M0LT–3] (c) F 2 AT (d) FAT
14. The maximum static friction on a body is F =  Here, 22. The dimensions of universal gravitational constant are not
N = normal reaction force on the body = coefiicient of
(a) M 2 L2T 2 (b) M 1 L3T 2
static friction.
The dimensions of  are (c) ML1T 2 (d) ML2T 2
(a) [MLT–2] (b) [M0L0T0]  
23. If A  2iˆ  ˆj  kˆ and B  iˆ  ˆj  kˆ are two vectors, then
(c) Dimensionless (d) None of these
the unit vector
   
15. If A  B  B  A, then the angle between A and B is :
  ˆj  kˆ 

(a)  (b) /3 (a) perpendicular to A is  
 2 
(c) /2 (d) /4
   2iˆ  ˆj  kˆ 
16. Given A  4iˆ  6ˆj and B  2iˆ  3jˆ . Which of the following 
(b) parallel to A is  
 6 
is correct ?
    
(a) A  B  0 (b) A  B  24   ˆj  kˆ 

(c) perpendicular to B is  
  2 
|A| 1  
(c)   (d) A and B are anti-parallel iˆ  ˆj  kˆ
|B| 2 
(d) parallel to A is
3
@cbseinfinite
    Integer Type Questions

24. If  v1  v2  is perpendicular to  v1  v2  then
26. The acceleration due to gravity is found upto an accuracy
 
(a) v1 is perpendicular to v2 of 4% on a planet. The energy supplied to a simple pendulum
  to know mass ‘m’ to undertake oscillations of time period T
(b) v1  v2 is being estimated. If time period is measured to an accuracy
 of 3%, the accuracy to which E is known as ……… %
(c) v1
27. Two force P and Q acting at a point are such that if P is
 
(d) The angle between v1 and v2 can have any value reversed, the direction of the resultant is turned through
  
  90o, then P : Q equals:
25. If vectors A and B are given by A  5iˆ  6 ˆj  3kˆ and
  
B  6iˆ  2 ˆj  6kˆ . Which of the following is/are correct? 28. Two vectors A and B have magnitudes A = 3.00 and B =
 
  3.00. Their vector product is A  B  5.00kˆ  2.00iˆ . The
(a) A and B are mutually perpendicular
      29
(b) product of A  B is the same B  A
angle between A and B is such that sin   , where k
  k
(c) the magnitude of A and B are equal
is:
 
(d) the magnitude of A  B is zero

29. The X and Y components of vector A have numerical
   
values 6 and 6 respectively and that of A  B 
A B   
have numerical values 10 and 9. What is the magnitude of

B?
 
30. Two forces F1  5iˆ  10 ˆj  20kˆ and F2  10iˆ  5 ˆj  15kˆ act
 
on a single point. The angle between F1 and F2 is nearly..
@cbseinfinite
EXERCISE - 4 : PREVIOUS YEARS JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS
NOTE: 2. A student performs an experiment to determine the Young’s

Important dimensional formulae for this Exercise  FL 
modulus  Y 
A 
of a wire , exactly 2 m long, by Searle’ss
1 2 2 2 
method. In a particular reading, the student measures the
1 2 3 2
extension in the length of the wire to be 0.8 mm with an
uncertainly of 0.005mm at a load of exactly 1.0 kg. The
1 2 4 2
student also measures the diamter of the wire to be 0.4 mm
with an uncertainty of  0.01mm . Take, g = 9.8 ms–2 (exact).
1 2 3 1
The Young’s modulus obtained from the reading is :

1 3 4 2 (2007)
(a) (2  0.3) × 1011 Nm–2 (b) (2  0.2) × 1011 Nm–2
1 1 2 2
(c) (2  0.1) × 1011 Nm–2 (d) (2  0.5) × 1011 Nm–2
3. Student I, II and III perform an experiment for measuring
1 0 2 1
the acceleration due to gravity (g) using a simple

pendulum. They use different lengths of the pendulum
1 3 2 0
and/or record time for different number of oscillations.

The observations are shown in the table.
1 2 1 0
Least count for length = 0.1 cm.

1 1 1 Least count for time = 0.1 s.
Particular Length Number of Total time Time
1 1 -3 -1 
student of the oscillations for (n) period
pendulum (n) oscillations (s)
(cm) (s)
1. A student performs an experiment for determination of
I 64.0 8 128.0 16.0
 42   II 64.0 4 64.0 16.0
g   2  , where   1m, and he commits an error of
 T 
  III 20.0 4 36.0 9.0
 . For T he takes the time on n oscillations with the stop
watch of least count T and he commits a human error of If E I, E II and E III are the percentage errors in g, i.e.
0.1 s. For which of the following data, the measurement of  g 
g will be most accurate? (2006)   100  , for students I, II and III, respectively..
 g 
(a)   0.5mm, T  0.1s, n  20
(The time period of simple pendulum is given as
(b)   0.5mm, T  0.1s , n  50

(c)   0.5mm, T  0.01s, n  20 T  2
g ) (2008)
(d)   0.1mm, T  0.05s, n  50
(a) EI = 0 (b) EI is minimum
(c) EI = EII (d) EII is maximum
@cbseinfinite
4. A student performed the experiment of determination of (a) due to the errors in the measurement of d and l are the
focal length of a concave mirror by u–v method using an same.
optical bench of length 1.5 m. The focal length of the mirror (b) due to the error in the measurement of d is twice that
used is 24 cm. The maximum error in the location of the due to the error in the measurement of l
image can be 0.2 cm. The 5 sets of (u, v) values recorded (c) due to the error in the measurement of l is twice that
by the student (in cm) are (42, 56), (48, 48), (60, 40), (66, 33), due to the error in the measurement of d
(78, 39). The data set(s) that cannot come from experiment
(d) due to the error in the measurement of d is four times
and is(are) incorrectly recorded, is (are) : (We know the
that due to the error in the measurement of l
1 1 1 8. Match the List I with List II and select the correct answer
mirror formula for a spherical mirror   ) (2009)
v u f using the codes given below the lists: (2013)
(a) (42, 56) (b) (48, 48) List-I List-II
(c) (66, 33) (d) 78, 39) (P) Boltzmann constant 1. [ML2T–1]
5. A student uses a simple pendulum of exactly 1m length to (Q) Coefficient of viscosity 2. [ML–1T–1]
determine g, the acceleration due to gravity. He uses a (R) Planck’s constant 3. [MLT–3K–1]
stop watch with the least count of 1s for this and records (S) Thermal conductivity 4. [ML2T–2K–1]
40s for 20 oscillations. For this observation, which of the
Codes:
following statement(s) is/are correct? (The time period of
P Q R S
 (a) 3 1 2 4
simple pendulum is given as T  2 g ) (2010)
(b) 3 2 1 4
(a) Error T is measuring T, the time period is 0.05 s (c) 4 2 1 3
(b) Error T in measuring T, the time period is 1 s (d) 4 1 2 3
(c) percentage error in the determination of g is 5% 9. In the following ‘I’ refers to current and other symbols
have their usual meaning. Choose the option that
(d) percentage error in the determination of g is 2.5%
corresponds to the dimensions of electrical conductivity
6. To find the distance d over which a signal can be seen
clearly in foggy conditions, a railway engineer uses   1
where  R   and    (2016)
dimensional analysis and assumes that the distance  A  
depends on the mass density  of the fog, intensity (power/
(a) ML-3 T-3 I2 (b) M1 L3 T3 I
area) S of the light from the signal and its frequency f. The
engineer finds that d is proportional to S1/n. (c) M L T I
-1 -3 3 2
(d) M–1 L–3 T 3 I
The value of n : (2011) 10. A length-scale () depends on the permittivity () of a
(a) 2 (c) 3 dielectric material, Boltzmann constant (kB), the absolute
(c) 1 (d) 1 temperature (T), the number per unit volume (n) of certain
charged particles, and the charge (q) carried by each of
 4 MLg  the particles. Which of the following expression(s) for 
7. In the determination of Young’s modulus  Y  
 d 2  is(are) dimensionally correct? (2016)
by using Searl’s method, a wire of length L = 2m and
diameter d = 0.5 mm is used. For a load M = 2.5 kg, an  nq 2   k T 
(a)    k T  (b)    nq 2 
B
extension l = 0.25 mm in the length of the wire is observed.
 B   
Quantities d and l are measured using a screw gauge and
a micrometer, respectively. They have the same pitch of
0.5 mm. The number of divisions on their circular scale is    
100. The contributions to the maximum probable error of  q2   q2 
  2    1 
the Y measurement: (2012) (c)  3 
(d)  3 
 n k B T   n k B T 
@cbseinfinite
11. In an experiment to determine the acceleration due to 14. Sometimes it is convenient to construct a system of units
gravity g, the formula used for the time period of a periodic so that all quantities can be expressed in terms of only one
physical quantity. In one such system, dimensions of
7 R  r different quantites are given in terms of a quantity X as
motion is T  2 . The values of R and r are
5g
follows:  position    X  ;  speed    X  ;
0 
measured to be  60  1 mm and 10  1 mm, respectively..

In five successive measurements, the time period is found acceleration    X   ; linear momentum
to be 0.52 s, 0.56 s, 0.57 s,0.54 s and 0.59 s. The least count
of the watch used for the measurement of time period is   X q  ;  force  X r  ( (2020)
0.01 s. Which of the following statement(s) is(are) true?
(2016) (a)   p  2  (b) p  q  r  
(a) The error in the measurement of r is 10%
(c) p  q  r   (d) p  q  r  
(b) The error in the measurement of T is 3.57%
   
(c) The error in the measurement of T is 2%
(d) The error in the determined value of g is 11%
15. A physical quantity S is defined as S  E  B   0 ,
 
12. A person measures the depth of a well by measuring the where E is electric field, B is magnetic field and 0 is
time interval between dropping a stone and receiving the 
sound of impact with the bottom of the well. The error in the permeability of free space. The dimensions of S are
his measurement of time is T = 0.01s and he measures the the same as the dimensions of which of the following
depth of the well to be L = 20 m. Take the acceleration due quantity (ies)? (2021)
to gravity g = 10 ms –2 and the velocity of sound is
300 ms–1. Then the fractional error in the measurement, Energy Force
(a) Ch arg e  Current (b) Length  Time
L
, is closet to: (2017)
L
Energy Power
(a) 1% (b) 5% (c) (d)
Volume Area
(c) 3% (d) 0.2%
 
13. Two vectors A and B are defined as
 
 
A  ai and B  a cos ti  sin t j , where a is a constant
    
and   rads 1 . If A  B  3 A  B at time t =  for
6
the first time, the value of  , in seconds, is _______.
(2018)
@cbseinfinite
Find Answer Key and Detailed Solutions at the end of this book
UNITS & MEASUREMENTS AND BASIC

MATHEMATICS
Please share your valuable feedback by
scanning the QR code.
@cbseinfinite
MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE 62
02
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
Chapter
MOTION 02
IN A STRAIGHT LINE 63
While studying this chapter

1. IMPORTANT TERMS
• We will treat the object as point mass object
1.1 Mechanics
• An object can be considered as a point mass object if
It is the branch of Physics, which deals with the study of
during the course of motion, it covers distances much
motion of physical objects. Mechanics can be broadly
greater than its own size.
classified into following branches:
• We shall confine ourselves to the study of rectilinear
1.1.1 Statics motion
It is the branch of mechanics, which deals with the study • Rectilinear motion is the study of motion of objects
of physical objects at rest. along a straight line.
1.1.2 Kinematics
It is the branch of mechanics, which deals with study of
3. POSITION, DISTANCE, DISPLACEMENT
motion of physical bodies without taking into account
the factors, which causes motion. 3.1 Position
1.1.3 Dynamics • Position of an object is always defined with respect to
It is the branch of mechanics, which deals with the study some reference point which we generally refer to as
of motion of physical bodies taking into account the origin.
factors which causes motion.
3.2 Distance
• It is the actual path traversed by the body during the
2. STATES OF OBJECTS course of motion.
• SI unit is ‘metre’.
2.1 Rest
• Dimension is [M0L1T0]
• An object is said to be at rest if it does not change its
position with respect to the surrounding.
3.3 Displacement
• The white board in the classroom is at rest with
• It is the shortest path joining initial and final position
respect to the classroom
of the object.
2.2 Motion • SI unit is ‘metre’
• An object is said to be in motion if it changes its • Dimension is [M0L1T0]
position with respect to the surroundings. • It is a vector quality.
• When we walk, run or ride a bike we are in motion
with respect to the ground. 3.4 Difference between Distance and Displacement
Distance Displacement
2.3 Rest and Motion are Relative
It is the actual path It is the difference
Rest and motion depend upon the observer. The object
traversed by the object between the initial and
in one situation may be at rest whereas the same object
during the course of the final positions
in another situation may be in motion.
motion. ∆x = x2 − x1 where, x2
For example, the driver of a moving car is in motion with
respect to an observer standing on the ground whereas, and x1 are final and
the same driver is at rest with respect to the man initial position
(observer) in the passenger’s seat. respectively.
It is a scalar quantity. It is a vector quantity.
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
Distance Displacement • SI unit of velocity is m/s, although km/hr is used in

The distance travelled by The displacement of an many everyday applications
an object during the object may be positive, • Dimension is [M0L1T-1]
course of motion is never negative or, zero during
negative or zero and is the course of motion. 5.2 Average speed
always positive
• It is defined as the total path length travelled divided
Distance is never less Magnitude of the by the total time interval during which the motion has
than the magnitude of displacement can be less taken place.
displacement. Distance ≥ than or equal to the
• SI unit is m/s.
|Displacement|. distance travelled during
• Dimension [M0L1T-1]
the course of motion.
The distance depends The magnitude of
upon the path travelled displacement is 5.3 Difference between Speed and Velocity
independent of the path
Speed Velocity
taken by an object
during the course of It is defined as the total It is defined as the
motion path length travelled change in position or
divided by the total time displacement divided by
interval during which the time intervals, in
NOTE: the motion has taken which displacement
If the motion of an object is along a straight line and in place. occurs.
the same direction, the magnitude of displacement is
It is a scalar quantity. It is a vector quantity.
equal to the total path length.
It is always positive It may be positive,
during the course of the negative or zero during
4. SCALAR AND VECTOR QUANTITIES motion. the course of the motion.
4.1 Scalar Quantities It is greater than or It is less than or equal to

The physical quantities which have only magnitude but equal to the magnitude the speed.
no direction, are called scalar quantities. of velocity.
Example:
mass, length, time, distance, speed, work, temperature.
6. INSTANTANEOUS VELOCITY AND
4.2 Vector Quantities INSTANTANEOUS SPEED
The physical quantities which have magnitude as well as
direction, are called vector quantities. 6.1 Instantaneous Velocity
Example: • It is velocity at an instant of time t. The velocity at an
displacement, velocity, acceleration, force, momentum, instant is defined as the limit of the average velocity
torque as the time interval ∆t becomes infinitesimally small.
∆x
• Instantaneous velocity = lim = dx/dt
∆t → 0 ∆t
5. AVERAGE VELOCITY AND AVERAGE SPEED • The quantity on the right-hand side of equation is the
5.1 Average Velocity differential coefficient of x with respect to t and is
denoted by dx/dt.
• It is defined as the change in position or displacement
divided by the time intervals, in which displacement • SI unit is m/s
occurs. • Dimension is [M0L1T-1]
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
6.2 Instantaneous Speed • If the velocity of an object is vo at t = 0 and v at time

• Instantaneous speed or speed is the magnitude of t, we have
velocity at any particular instant of time. v − v0
• a=
• SI unit is m/s t −0
• Dimension is [M0L1T-1] or, v = vo + at — This is first equation of
motion
 other equations of motion are:
7. ACCELERATION
1
• =
S v 0 t + at 2
7.1 Average Acceleration 2
The average acceleration over a time interval is defined • v – u = 2aS
2 2
as the change of velocity divided by the time interval: v +v

• S = 0 t
v 2 – v1  2 
a=
t 2 – t1  In all the above equations, the acceleration is
assumed to be constant.
where, v2 and v1 are velocities at time t2 & t1.
It is the average change of velocity per unit time.
8. KINEMATICS EQUATIONS
SI unit is m/s2.
Dimension is [M0L1T-2]. 8.1 Equations of Uniformly Accelerated Motion
If a body starts with velocity (u) and after time t its
7.2 Instantaneous Acceleration velocity changes to v, if the uniform acceleration is a and
• Instantaneous acceleration is defined in the same way the distance travelled in time t is s, then the following
as the instantaneous velocity: relations are obtained, which are called equations of
uniformly accelerated motion.
∆v
a = lim (i) v = u + at
∆t → 0 ∆t
= dv / dt (for very small interval of time) at 2
(ii) =
s ut +
2
• SI unit is m/s2
(iii) v2 = u2 + 2as
• Dimension is [M0L1T-2]
(iv) Distance travelled in nth second
• When the acceleration is uniform, obviously,
a
instantaneous acceleration equals the average S n= u + ( 2n –1)
acceleration over that period 2
• Since velocity is a quantity having both magnitude If a body moves with uniform acceleration and velocity
and direction, a change in the velocity may involve changes from u to v in a time interval while traversing
either or both of these factors. certain path, then the velocity at the mid point of its path
is:
• Acceleration, therefore, may result from a change in
the speed(magnitude), a change in direction or u 2 + v2
changes in both. 2
• Like velocity, acceleration can also be positive,
negative or zero.
9. VERTICAL MOTION UNDER GRAVITY
NOTE: If an object is falling freely (u = 0) under gravity, then

equations of motion
We will restrict ourselves to the study of constant
acceleration for this chapter. In this case average (i) v = u + gt
acceleration equals the constant value of acceleration (ii) h = ut + 1/2(gt2)
during the interval.
(iii) v2 = u2 + 2gh
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
NOTE: Now let’s say x1 approaches to x2 then ∆x → 0 or it

will be very-very small, we write it dx. In that way, y
If an object is thrown upward then g is replaced by – g
approaches to y2 and ∆y → 0 , written as dy.
in above three equations.
It thus follows that dy
So, rate of change of y with respect to x = (at one
u dx
(i) Time taken to reach maximum height T = point)
g
Graphically it is tangent of curve on given point.
(ii) Maximum height reached by the body
u2
hmax =
2g
(iii) A ball is dropped from a building of height h and it
reaches after t seconds on earth. From the same
building if two balls are thrown (one upwards and
other downwards) with the same velocity u and
they reach the earth’s surface after t1, and t2
seconds respectively, then Fig. 2.2
dy
t = t1t2 = slope of tangent on curve between y and x at one
dx
(iv) When a body is dropped freely from the top of the
point.
tower and another body is projected horizontally
Mathematically that is called differentiation of y with
from the same point, both will reach the ground at
dy
the same time. respect to x =
dx
10. CALCULUS
10.1 Differentiation of a Function
If we say y as a function of x then we write
y = f (x)
x = Independent variable
In physics, first we will study the linear motion of an
y = Dependent variable.
object where position of object is represented by x
In physics we study variation of a quantity y with which changes with time t, then
respect to quantity x and we also study rate at which y
changes when x changes.
and that is equal to velocity (magnitude of velocity)

dx
v=
dt
dx
Fig. 2.1 v =
One simple way to see variation of y with x dt
∆y Above expression will give speed.
Rate of change of y with change in x =
∆x Similarly, when velocity changes with time then we say
∆y dv
Graphically one can see that = tan θ = a ⇒ acceleration
∆x dt
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
so, we can define 10.6 Integration

Velocity ⇒ that is rate of change of position with Integration of a function. Let y = f (x)
respect to t.
Acceleration ⇒ that is rate of change of velocity with
respect to t.
10.2 Double Differentiation
If x = f ( t )
dx
v= = x= f ′ ( t )
dt
Fig. 2.3
dv d  dx  d 2 x
a= =  = x= f ′′ ( t )
=  Area of shaded region of curve is
dt dt  dt  dt 2
dA = ydx
Total area bounded by curve y = f (x)
10.3 Standard Rules and Formulae of x =b b
Differentiation =A ∑
= dA ∫ dA
x=a a
n −1
=1. y x=y nx n
That is called area of graph with integration from a to
2. y = c ⇒ y = cx 0
y = 0 b.
a = lower limit of integration
= =
3. y sin x y cos x
b = upper limit of integration
4. y = cos x y = − sin x b
= =
5. y tan x y sec x 2 ∫ ydx = Definite Integral
a
6. y = cot x y = − cosec 2 x
∫ ydx = Indefinite Integral (without limit)
1
= n ( x)
7. y = y Integration is reverse process of differentiation in which
x we find a function for which the given function is the
=8. y e=
x
y e x derivative of function.
(Exponential Function)
10.7 Formulae
=9. y a=
x
y a x n ( x ) x n +1
1. ∫ x=
n
dx +c
n +1
1
10.4 Rules of Differentiation 2. ∫= dx n ( x ) + c
x
f1 ( x ) + f 2 ( x )
1. y = f1′( x ) + f 2′ ( x )
y =
3. ∫ sin xdx =
− cos x + c
2. y ( x)
cf= y cf ′ ( x )
4. ∫ cos =
xdx sin x + c
=3. y f1 ( x ) f 2 ( x )=y f1 ( x ) f 2′ ( x ) + f1′( x ) f 2 ( x )
tan xdx n ( sec x ) + c
5. ∫=
f1 ( x ) f 2 ( x ) f1′( x ) − f1 ( x ) f 2′ ( x )
=
4. y =
f2 ( x )  f 2 ( x ) 
2
6. ∫ e x dx= e x + c
10.5 Chain Rule 10.8 Rules of Integration
y = f ( x ) Now if we want to differentiate with respect 1. ∫ dx= x + c

to third variable say z. 2. ∫ cf ( x ) dx = c ∫ f ( x ) dx
dy dy dz
= × 3. ∫  f ( x ) + g ( x )  dx = ∫ f ( x ) dx + ∫ g ( x ) dx
dx dz dx
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
NOTE:
Like differentiation, rules of substitution are also
applicable to integration as well, in a similar way.
10.9 Applications in Physics

t2
x2 − x1= ∫ vdt=
t1
Change in position or displacement.
Fig. 2.5
dx
x2 t2
θ 2 < θ1
v = ⇒ ∫ dx =∫ vdt
dt x1 t1
tan θ 2 < tan θ1
dy dy
(Area under the curve of v and t graph is displacement) <
v t
dx 2 dx 1
2
dv
a = ⇒ ∫ dv =∫ adt Slope decreasing that means first derivative is
dt u t1
decreasing that means second derivative will be
t2 negative.
v −=
u ∫ adt= Change in velocity.
d2y
t1 <0
dx 2
(Area under the curve of a and t graph is change in
velocity) NOTE:
(i) Increasing graph with decreasing slope will be
11. INCREASING AND DECREASING FUNCTION concave downward.
(ii) Increasing graph, with increasing slope will be
11.1 Increasing function concave upward.
Suppose y = f (x) and if on ↑ in x, y also ↑ the
function is increasing function. There are two types of
possible graphical variations. 11.2 Decreasing function
On increasing value of x, y decreases. These also have
two types of graphs.
Fig. 2.4
θ 2 > θ1 Fig. 2.6
tan θ 2 > tan θ1 π
θ1 > θ 2 >
dy dy 2
>
dx 2 dx 1 tan θ 2 > tan θ1
Slope increasing that means first derivative is also d2y
2 Slope is negative but increasing so >0
d y dx 2
increasing so second derivative should be +ve >0
dx 2
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
dy d2y
< 0, 2 > 0 NOTE:
dx dx
If the graph is parabola, then second derivative will be
constant
x = at 2 + bt + c if a > 0
x =
2at + b 
x > 0 and constant
=
x 2a if a < 0

x < 0 and constant
So if acceleration is constant then x and t graph will be
parabola.
Fig. 2.7
θ1 > θ 2
tan θ1 > tan θ 2
Slope is decreasing and negative so second derivative is 12. MAXIMA AND MINIMA OF A FUNCTION
negative.
11.3 Application in Physics
Fig. 2.10
12.1 Maxima
Fig. 2.8
(Condition to locate and check point of maxima)
dy d2y
= 0 <0
dx dx 2 x1
12.2 Minima
(Condition to locate and check point to minima)
dy d2y
= 0 >0
dx dx 2 x2
Fig. 2.9
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
12.3 Point of Inflexion

Concavity change of a function at A is known as the 13. GRAPHS
point of inflexion.
13.1 Uniform Motion
• In a uniform motion a body covers equal distance
in equal intervals of time.
• Velocity is constant during the course of motion.
• Acceleration is zero during the course of motion.
If we try to represent the same on the number line with
x, v, a on the Y-axis and t on the X-axis then we will
have,
13.2 Non-uniform Motion

2.11 • In a non-uniform motion, a body covers unequal
distances in equal intervals of time.
dy
≠0 • Uniformly accelerated motion
dx
• Accelerated motion
d2y • Magnitude of velocity increases or decreases with
=0
dx 2 time
displacement – time graph velocity – time graph acceleration – time graph

velocity = slope of x – t graph acc = slope of v – t graph
(i) x v a
t t t
Nature of slope: Nature of slope: zero Nature of slope of a – t: zero

positive Magnitude of slope: constant Magnitude of slope: constant
Magnitude of slope:
constant
(ii) x v a
t t
t
Nature of slope: nature of slope: zero nature of slope: zero

negative magnitude of slope: constant magnitude of slope: Constant
magnitude of slope:
constant
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
Displacement – Time Graph Velocity – Time Graph Acceleration – Time Graph

Velocity = slope of x – t graph acc = slope of v – t graph
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
Nature of slope: positive Nature of slope: positive

Slope of a - t graph
Magnitude of slope: Increasing Magnitude of slope: constant
da
gives jerk, i.e., =
J = 0
dt
(iv)
Nature of slope: positive Slope of a - t graph

Nature of slope: negative
Magnitude of slope: decreasing  da
Magnitude of slope: constant gives jerk, i.e., =
J = 0
dt
(v)
Nature of slope: negative Nature of slope: negative Nature of slope: zero

Magnitude of slope: decreasing Magnitude of slope: constant
(vi)
Nature of slope: negative Nature of slope: positive Nature of slope: zero

Magnitude of slope: decreasing Magnitude of slope: constant
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
Solved Examples
Example - 1 total distance d + d

= =
Velocity of a particle at some instant is total time t1 + t 2
( )
v = 3iˆ + 4ˆj + 5kˆ m / s .
2d 2v1 v 2
= =
Find speed of the particle at this instant. ( d / v1 ) + ( d / v 2 ) v1 + v 2
Sol. Magnitude of velocity vector at any instant of time is
the speed of particle. Example - 4
Hence,
A ball is thrown upwards from the ground with an
speed = v or v = ( 3) + ( 4 ) + ( 5 ) = 5 2m / s
2 2 2
initial speed of u. The ball is at a height of 80 m at
two times, the time interval being 6s. Find u. Take g
Example - 2 = 10 m/s2.
In one second, a particle goes from point A to point Sol.

B moving in a semicircle. Find the magnitude of the
average velocity.
Here, u =u m / s, a =−g =−10m / s 2 and s =80 m .
1
Substituting the values in =
s ut + at 2 ,
AB 2
Sol. v av = m/s
∆t
We have 80 = ut − 5t 2 or 5t 2 − ut + 80 = 0
2.0
= = m / s 2m / s
1.0 u + u 2 − 1600 u − u 2 − 1600
Or t = and
10 10
Example - 3
Now, it is given that
A particle travels first half of the total distance with u + u − 1600 u − u − 1600
2 2
constant speed v1 and second half with constant − =

6
10 10
speed v 2 . Find the average speed during the complete
Or
journey.
u 2 − 1600
= 6 or u 2 − 1600
= 30 or u 2 − 1600
= 900
Sol. 5
∴ u2 = 2500 or u =
±50m / s
Ignoring the negative sign, we have u = 50 m / s
d d
=t1 = and t 2
v1 v2
Average speed
@cbseinfinite
Example - 5 Sol. In 1-D motion, average velocity can be written as

∆s X f − X i X 2 sec − X 0 sec
Velocity-time equation of a particle moving in a v= = =
∆t ∆t 2−0
av
straight line is v = (10 + 2t + 3t ) (SI units)
2
 2 ( 2 )2 + 4 ( 2 ) − 6  −  2 ( 0 )2 + 4 ( 0 ) − 6 
Find: =   
(a) Displacement of particle from the mean position 2
at time t = 1s, if it is given that displacement is = 8m / s
20 m at time t = 0.
Example - 8
(b) Acceleration-time equation.
Sol. (a) The given equation can be written as, A particle travels first half of the total time with
speed v1 and second half time with speed v 2 . Find
v=
ds
dt
= (10 + 2t + 3t ) or ds = (10 + 2t + 3t ) dt
2 2
the average speed during the complete journey.
Sol.
Or
∫ (10 + 2t + 3t ) dt or s − 20=
s 1
∫
1
ds= 2
10t + t 2 + t 3 
20 0 0
Or s = 20 + 12 = 32m
=d1 v=
1 t and d 2 v2 t
(b) Acceleration-time equation can be obtained by
differentiating the given equation w.r.t. time. Average speed
total distance d1 + d 2 v1 t + v 2 t v1 + v 2
= (10 + 2t + 3t 2 ) or a =2 + 6t
dv d = = = =
Thus, a =
dt dt total time t+t 2t 2
Example - 6 Example - 9
s-t graph of a particle in motion is as shown below. A ball is thrown upwards from the top of a tower 40
m high with a velocity of 10 m/s. Find the time when
it strikes the ground. Take g = 10m / s 2 .
Sol.
(a) State, whether the given graph represents a

uniform motion or not.
(b) Find velocity of the particle.
Sol. (a) v = slope of s-t graph. Since, the given s-t graph
is a straight line and slope of a straight line is always
constant. Hence, velocity is constant. Therefore, the
In the problem, u =
+10m / s, a =
−10m / s 2
given graph represents a uniform motion.
And s = −40m (at the point where stone strikes the
10
(b) v = slope of s-t graph =
− = −2m / s ground)
5
1
Substituting in =
s ut + at 2 , we have
Example - 7 2
A particle is moving along x-axis. Its X-coordinate −40 = 10t − 5t 2
varies with time as, X = 2t 2 + 4t − 6 . Or 5t 2 − 10t − 40 =

0
Here, X is in metres and t in seconds. Find average Or t 2 − 2t − 8 =0

velocity between the time interval t = 0 to t = 2s. Solving this, we have t = 4s and – 2s.
Taking the positive value t = 4s.
@cbseinfinite
Example - 10 (b) Differentiating eq. (ii) w.r.t. time t, we get the

dv
Displacement-time equation of a particle moving acceleration =a = 6t
along x-axis is x = 20 + t 3 − 12t (SI units) dt
(a) Find, position and velocity of particle at time t = As acceleration is a function of time, the motion
0. is non-uniformly accelerated.
(b) State whether the motion is uniformly (c) Substituting v = 0 in eq. (ii), we have
accelerated or not. =
0 3t 2 − 12
(c) Find position of particle when velocity of particle Positive value of t comes out to be 2s from this
is zero.
equation. Substituting t = 2s in eq. (i), we have
Sol. (a) x = 20 + t 3 − 12t … (i)
x =20 + ( 2 ) − 12 ( 2 ) or x =4m
3
At t = 0, x = 20 + 0 − 0 = 20m
Velocity of particle at time t can be obtained by
differentiating eq. (i) w.r.t. time
dx
i.e., =
v = 3t 2 − 12 … (ii)
dt
At t = 0, v =−
0 12 =
−12m / s
@cbseinfinite

Distance and Displacement 7. A body moves over one fourth of a circular arc in a
circle of radius R. The magnitude of distance
1. A body moves 6 m north, 8 m east and 10m
travelled and displacement will be respectively
vertically upwards, what is its resultant displacement
from initial position (only magnitude) πR πR
(a) ,R 2 (b) ,R
2 4
(a) 10 2 m (b) 10 m
R
10 (c) π R, (d) π R, R
(c) m (d) 10 × 2m 2
2
8. An aeroplane moves 400 m towards the north,
2. An athlete completes one round of a circular track of 300 m towards west and then 1200 m vertically
radius R in 40 seconds. If he/she continues to move upwards, then the difference between total distance
along the circular track, then what will be his and magnitude of resultant displacement from initial
displacement at the end of 2 minutes 20 seconds position:
(a) Zero (b) 2R (a) 600 m (b) 1800 m
(c) 2 π R (d) 7 π R (c) 1500 m (d) 1300 m
3. A boy stops after travelling 3 km towards east and
then goes 4 km towards north along a plane road.
The resultant displacement of the boy is (only Speed and Velocity
magnitude) 9. If a car covers 2/5th of the total distance with
v1 speed and 3/5th distance with v2 then average
(a) 7 km (b) 4 km
speed is
(c) 5 km (d) 15 km
1 v1 + v2
4. If the displacement of a particle is zero, then what (a) v1v2 (b)
2 2
can we say about its distance covered
2v1v2 5v1v2
(a) It must be zero (c) (d)
v1 + v2 3v1 + 2v2
(b) It cannot be zero
10. A person completes half of his journey with speed v1
(c) It is negative
and rest half with speed v2. The average speed of the
(d) It may or may not be zero person is
5. The location of a particle has changed. What can we v1 + v2 2v1v2
say about the displacement and the distance covered (a) = (b) =
2 v1 + v2
by the particle
v1v2
(a) Both cannot be zero (c) = (d) = v1v2
v1 + v2
(b) One of the two may be zero
(c) Both must be zero 11. A car moving on a straight road covers one third of
the distance with a speed of 20 km/hr and the rest
(d) If one is positive, the other is negative and vice
with a speed of 60 km/hr. The average speed is
versa
(a) 40 km/hr (b) 80 km/hr
6. A man goes 10 m towards North, then 20 m towards
east then his displacement is: [take 5 = 2.236 ] 2
(c) 46 km/hr (d) 36 km/hr
3
(a) 22.36 m (b) 25 m
(c) 25.5 m (d) 30 m
@cbseinfinite
12. A car travels first half of the distance between two 17. Assertion: A negative acceleration of a body can be
places with a speed of 30 km/h and the remaining associated with a ‘speeding up’ of the body.
half with a speed of 50 km/h. The average speed of Reason: Increase in speed of a moving body is
the car is: independent of its direction of motion.
(a) 45 km/h (b) 42.8 km/h (a) Both Assertion and Reason are true, and the
(c) 37.5 km/h (d) 48 km/h Reason is the correct explanation of the
13. Mark the correct statements: Assertion
(a) The magnitude of instantaneous velocity of a (b) Both Assertion and Reason are true, but the
particle is equal to instantaneous speed. Reason is not the correct explanation of the
(b) The magnitude of average velocity in an interval Assertion
is equal to its average speed in that interval. (c) Assertion is true, but Reason is false
(c) It is possible to have a situation in which the (d) Both Assertion and Reason are false
speed of a particle is always zero but the average 18. Assertion: Straight line motion is the natural
speed is not zero. tendency of the body.
(d) It is possible to have a situation in which the Reason: Motion in a straight line is an example of
speed of the particle is never zero but the motion in one dimension.
average speed in an interval is zero.
(a) Both Assertion and Reason are true, and the
14. Of the following situations, which one is Reason is the correct explanation of the
impossible? Assertion
(a) A body is having zero velocity and non–zero (b) Both Assertion and Reason are true, but the
acceleration Reason is not the correct explanation of the
(b) A body is having constant acceleration and Assertion
variable velocity (c) Assertion is true, but Reason is false
(c) A body is having constant speed and variable
(d) Both Assertion and Reason are false
acceleration
19. Assertion: A body can have acceleration even if its
(d) A body is having constant velocity and variable
velocity is zero at a given instant of time.
acceleration
Reason: A body is at rest when it reverses its
15. A body covers first one-third of the distance with a
direction of motion.
velocity 20 m/s, the second one-third with a velocity
of 30 m/s and last one-third with a velocity of (a) If both assertion and reason are correct and
40 m/s. The average velocity is nearly: reason is the correct explanation of assertion
(a) 28 m/s (b) 38 m/s (b) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is
not the correct explanation of assertion.
(c) 18 m/s (d) 8 m/s
(c) If assertion is true but reason is false
Acceleration (d) If both assertion and reason are false

16. Assertion: A positive acceleration of a body can be 20. Assertion: A body with constant acceleration
associated with a ‘slowing down’ of the body. always moves along a straight line.
Reason: Acceleration is a vector quantity. Reason: A body with constant acceleration may not
(a) Both Assertion and Reason are true, and the speed up.
Reason is the correct explanation of the (a) If both assertion and reason are correct and
Assertion reason is the correct explanation of assertion
(b) Both Assertion and Reason are true, but the (b) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is
Reason is not the correct explanation of the not the correct explanation of assertion.
Assertion (c) If assertion is true but reason is false
(c) Assertion is true, but Reason is false (d) If both assertion and reason are false
(d) Both Assertion and Reason are false
@cbseinfinite
21. A positive acceleration always corresponds to the 29. A body sliding on a smooth inclined plane requires
speeding up and a negative acceleration always 4 seconds to reach the bottom starting from rest at
corresponds to the speeding down. the top. How much time does it take to cover one-
(a) True fourth distance starting from rest at the top
(b) False only when motion is uniform. (a) 1 s (b) 2 s
(c) True for non-uniform motion (c) 4 s (d) 16 s
(d) False 30. Body A starts from rest with an acceleration a1.
After 2s another body B starts from rest with an
Kinematic Equations acceleration a2. If they travel equal distances in 5 sec
22. A stone falls from a balloon that is descending at a after the start of A, the ratio a1 : a2 will be equal to :
uniform rate of 12m/s. The displacement of the (a) 9 : 25 (b) 5 : 7
stone from the point of release after 10sec is (c) 5 : 9 (d) 7 : 9
[take g = 9.8 ms-2]
(a) 490m (b) 610m Vertical Motion under Gravity
(c) 510m (d) 725m 31. If a body is thrown up with the velocity of 15 m/s
23. Find the total displacement of a body in 8 s starting then maximum height attained by the body is
from rest with an acceleration of 20 cm/s2: (g = 10 m/s2)
(a) 64 m (b) 64 cm (a) 11.25 m (b) 16.2 m
(c) 640 cm (d) 0.064 m (c) 24.5 m (d) 7.62 m
24. A particle covers 150 m in 8th second starting from 32. A body falls from rest in the gravitational field of
rest, its acceleration is: the earth. The distance travelled in the fifth second
(a) 15 m/s2 (b) 20 m/s2 of its motion is (g = 10 m/s2)
(c) 10 m/s2 (d) 8 m/s2 (a) 25 m (b) 45 m
25. By what velocity a ball be projected vertically (c) 90 m (d) 125 m
upwards so that the distance covered in 6th second is 33. If a ball is thrown vertically upwards with speed u,
twice of that covered in 5th second? (g = 10 m/s2) the distance covered during the last t seconds of its
ascent is
(a) 40 m/s (b) 35 m/s 1 2 1 2
(a) gt (b) ut − gt
(c) 50 m/s (d) 60 m/s 2 2
26. A car accelerates from rest at constant rate for first (c) (u – gt)t (d) ut
10 s and covers a distance x. It covers a distance y in 34. A man drops a ball downwards from the roof of a
next 10 s at the same acceleration. Which of the tower of height 400 meters. At the same time
following is true? another ball is thrown upwards with a velocity
(a) x = 3y (b) y = 3x 50 meter/sec. from the bottom of the tower, then
(c) x = y (d) y = 2x they will meet at which height from the bottom of
27. A block starts accelerating at 5 m/s2 from rest on the the tower
frictionless surface. Calculate the distance travelled (a) 100 meters (b) 320 meters
by the block in the first 4 seconds? (c) 80 meters (d) 240 meters
(a) 20 m (b) 40 m 35. A particle is thrown vertically upwards. If its
(c) 80 cm (d) 120 m velocity at half of the maximum height is 10 m/s,
28. A block starts accelerating at 5 m/s2 from rest on the then maximum height attained by it is
frictionless surface. Calculate the distance travelled (Take g = 10 m/s2)
by the block in the first 4 seconds? (a) 8 m (b) 10 m
(a) 20 m (b) 40 m (c) 12 m (d) 16 m
(c) 80 m (d) 120 m
@cbseinfinite
36. A body freely falling from the rest has a velocity ‘v’ 44. The water drops fall at regular intervals from a tap
after it falls through a height ‘h’. The distance it has 5 m above the ground. The third drop is leaving the
to fall down for its velocity to become double, is tap at the instant the first drop touches the ground.
(a) 2h (b) 4h How far above the ground is the second drop at that
instant?
(c) 6h (d) 8h
(a) 1.25 m (b) 2.50 m
37. By which velocity a ball be projected vertically
downward from a very tall building so that the (c) 3.75 m (d) 4.00 m
distance covered by it in 6th second is twice the 45. A stone is dropped from certain height which can
distance it covers in its 5th second (g = 10 m/s2) reach the ground in 5 s. If the stone is stopped after
(a) 10 m/s (b) 65 m/s 3 s of its fall and then allowed to fall again, then the
time taken by the stone to reach the ground for the
(c) 35 m/s (d) not possible
remaining distance is:
38. A body falls from rest, its velocity at the end of first
(a) 3 s (b) 4 s
second is (g = 32 ft/sec)
(c) 2 s (d) none of these
(a) 16 ft/sec (b) 32 ft/sec
46. A ball is dropped from a bridge 122.5 m high. After
(c) 64 ft/sec (d) 24 ft/sec
the first ball has fallen for 2 s, a second ball is
39. A stone thrown upward with a speed u from the top thrown straight down after it, what must the initial
of a tower reaches the ground with a velocity 3u. velocity of the second ball, so that both the balls hit
The height of the tower is the surface of water at the same time?
(a) 3u2/g (b) 4u2/g (a) 26.1 m/s (b) 9.8 m/s
2 2
(c) 6u /g (d) 9u /g (c) 55.5 m/s (d) 49 m/s
40. A stone is shot straight upward with a speed of 47. A ball is thrown vertically upward with certain
20 m/sec from a tower 200 m high. The speed with speed it passes through the same point at 3 seconds
which it strikes the ground is approximately and 7 seconds from the start. The maximum height
(a) 60 m/sec (b) 65 m/sec achieved by the ball is:
(c) 70 m/sec (d) 75 m/sec (a) 500 (b) 250
41. A body projected vertically upwards with a velocity (c) 125 (d) 450
u returns to the starting point in 4 seconds. If 48. A stone is thrown vertically upwards. When stone is
g = 10 m/sec2, the value of u is at a height half of its maximum height, its speed is
(a) 5 m/sec (b) 10 m/sec 10 m/s; then the maximum height attained by the
stone is: (g = 10 m/s2)
(c) 15 m/sec (d) 20 m/sec
(a) 8 m (b) 10 m
42. A body is thrown vertically up from the ground. It
reaches a maximum height in 5 sec. After what time (c) 15 m (d) 20 m
it will reach the ground from the maximum height 49. A man throws balls with the same speed vertically
position upwards one after the other at an interval of 2 s.
(a) 1.2 sec (b) 5 sec What should be the speed of the throw so that more
than two balls are in the sky at any time?
(c) 10 sec (d) 25 sec
(Given: g = 9.8 m/s2)
43. From the top of a tower, a particle is thrown
vertically downwards with a velocity of 10 m/s. The (a) Any speed less than 19.6 m/s
ratio of the distances, covered by it in the 3rd and 2nd (b) Only with speed 19.6 m/s
seconds of the motion is (Take g = 10 m/s2)
(c) More than 19.6 m/s
(a) 5 : 7 (b) 7 : 5
(d) At least 9.8 m/s.
(c) 3 : 6 (d) 6 : 3
@cbseinfinite
50. A body is released from the top of the tower H metre 56. A particle moves along a straight-line OX. At a time
high. It takes t second to reach the ground. Where is t (in seconds), the distance x (in metres) of the
the body t/2 s after release? particle from O is given by
3H x = 40 + 12t – t3
(a) At m from the ground
4 How long would the particle travel before coming to
H rest?
(b) At m from the ground
2 (a) 24 m (b) 40 m
H (c) 12 m (d) 16 m
(c) At m from the ground
6 57. A particle moves along a straight line such that its
H displacement at any time t is given by s = 3t3 + 7t2 +
(d) At m from the ground
4 14t + 5
The acceleration of the particle at t = 1s is:
Differential Calculus 2 2
(a) 18 m/s (b) 32 m/s
51. A particle moves along a straight line such that at
time t (in second) its displacement from a fixed 2 2
(c) 29 m/s (d) 24 m/s
point O on the line is 3t2 – 2. The velocity of the
58. A particle moves in space such that x = 2 sin pt
particle at t = 2 is:
where x, is measured in meter and t in second. The
(a) 8 m/s (b) 4 m/s
acceleration of the particle at t = 3 s is
(c) 12 m/s (d) 0
(a) 2m/s–2 (b) 1m/s-2
52. The velocity of a particle is v = vo + gt + ft2. If it’s
position is x = 0 at t = 0, then its displacement after (c) 0m/s–2 (d) π m/s–2
unit time (t =1) is 59. The displacement x of a particle varies with time t as
g f =x ae −α t + be β t , where a, b, α and β are positive
(a) v o +2g+3f (b) v o + +
2 3 constants. The velocity of the particle will:
g (a) go on decreasing with time
(c) v o +g+f (d) v o + +f
2 (b) be independent of α and β
53. The position x (in m) of a particle along x-axis at
time t (in sec) is given by x = 1 + t – t2. The distance (c) drop to zero when α = β
travelled by the particle in first 2 seconds is (d) go on increasing with time
(a) 1 m (b) 2 m 60. The displacement x of a particle moving along a
(c) 2.5 m (d) 3 m straight line at time t is given by
54. The displacement of a body at any time t after x = a0 + a1t + a2t2
starting is given by s = 15t – 0.4t2. The velocity of The acceleration of the particle is:
the body will be 7 m/s–1 after time:
(a) 4a2 (b) 2a2
(a) 20 s (b) 15s
(c) 2a1 (d) a2
(c) 10 s (d) 5 s
61. The displacement of body is given to be
55.
The position vector of a particle is: proportional to the cube of time elapsed. The

=r a cos ωt iˆ + a sin ω t ˆj magnitude of the acceleration of the body is:
The velocity of the particle is: (a) decreasing with time (b) increasing with time
(a) parallel to position vector (c) constant but not zero (d) zero
(b) perpendicular to position vector
(c) directed towards origin
(d) directed away from the origin
@cbseinfinite
62. The position x of a particle with respect to time t Non-uniform Motion

along x-axis is given by = x 9t − t , where x is in
2 3
67. At any instant, the velocity and acceleration of a
metre and t is in second. What will be the position of particle moving along a straight-line is v and a. The
this particle when it achieves maximum speed along speed of the particle is increasing if
the +x direction?
(a) v > 0, a > 0 (b) v < 0, a > 0
(a) 32 m (b) 54 m
(c) v > 0, a < 0 (d) v > 0, a = 0
(c) 81 m (d) 24 m
68. Consider the acceleration, velocity and displacement
63. Temperature of a body varies with time as T = (T0 + of a tennis ball as it falls to the ground and bounces
at2 + b sint) K, where T0 is the temperature in Kelvin back. Directions of which of these changes in the
2 -2 process, (here consider the motion in y-direction):
at t = 0 sec, α= Ks & b = – 4 K, then rate of
π (a) Velocity only
change of temperature at t = p sec. is
(b) Displacement and velocity
(a) 8K (b) 8° C
(c) Acceleration, velocity and displacement
(c) 8 K/sec (d) 8° C/sec
(d) Displacement and acceleration
69. Of the following situations, which one is
Integral Calculus
impossible?
64. The acceleration of a particle is increasing linearly
(a) A body is having zero velocity and non–zero
with time t as bt. The particle starts from the origin
acceleration
with an initial velocity v0. The distance travelled by
the particle in time t will be: (b) A body is having constant acceleration and
variable velocity
1 1
(a) v0 t + bt 3 (b) v0 t + bt 3 (c) A body is having constant speed and variable
6 3
acceleration
1
(c) bt (d) v0 t + bt 2 (d) A body is having constant velocity and variable
2
acceleration
65. A particle moving along x-axis has acceleration f, at
70. The velocity of a particle moving on the x-axis is
 t
time t, given by= f f 0 1 −  , where f0 and T are given by v = x2 + x where v is in m/s and x is in m.
 T Find its acceleration in m/s2 when passing through
constants. The particle at t = 0 has zero velocity. At the point x = 2 m
the instant when f = 0, the particle’s velocity (v) is
(a) 0 (b) 5
(c) 11 (d) 30
1
(a) f 0T (b) f 0T 2 71. A particle is moving along a straight-line path and
2
its displacement (x) at time t is given by
1
(c) f 0T 2 (d) f 0T x2 = at2 + 2bt + c (where a, b and c are constants)
2
the acceleration of the particle is:
66. The acceleration of a particle is increasing linearly
with time t as bt. The particle starts from the origin a (at + b) 2
(a) (b)
with an initial velocity v0. The distance travelled by x x3
the particle in time t will be:
a (at + b) 2 a (at + b) 2
(c) − (d) +
1
(a) v0 t + bt 3
1
(b) v0 t + bt 3 x x3 x x3
6 3
1 1
(c) v0 t + bt 2 (d) v0 t + bt 2
3 2
@cbseinfinite
72. A particle moves along the X–axis according to the Graphs of Motion in a Straight Line
equation x = 6 t2, where x is in metres and t is in 76. The graph of displacement v/s time is
seconds. Then
(a) the acceleration of the particle is 6 m/s2
(b) the particle follows a parabolic path
(c) each second the velocity of the particle changes
by 12 m/s
(d) none of the above
73. An object starts from rest at x = 0 m when t = 0 s.
The object moves in the x direction with positive s(m) along y axis in question and t(s) along x axis in
velocity after t = 0 s. The instantaneous velocity and question
average velocity are related by
Its corresponding velocity-time graph will be
dx x
(a) <
dt t
dx x
(b) = V V
dt t
(a) (b)
dx x
(c) > t
dt t t
dx
(d) can be smaller than, greater than or equal
dt
x V
to V
t
(c) (d)
74. A particle moves in a straight line, according to the
t t
t
law x = 4a [t + asin   ], where x is its position in
a 77. A train moves from one station to another in 2 hours
meters, t in sec. & a is some constants, then the time. Its speed-time graph during this motion is
velocity is zero at shown in the figure. The maximum acceleration
during the journey is
(a) x = 4a2 p meters (b) t = p sec.
(c) t = 0 sec. (d) none
75. A point moves in a straight line so that its
displacement is x m at time t sec, given by x2 = t2 +
1. Its acceleration in m/s2 at time t sec is :
1 1 1
(a) (b) −
x x x2
t 1
(c) − (d)
x2 x3 (a) 140 km h–2 (b) 160 km h–2
(c) 100 km h–2 (d) 120 km h–2
@cbseinfinite
78. The adjoining curve represents the velocity-time 80. The displacement-time graph for two particles A and
graph of a particle, its acceleration values along OA,
B are straight lines inclined at angles of 30 and 60
AB and BC in metre/sec2 are respectively
with the time axis. The ratio of velocities of vA : vB
is
(a) 1 : 2 (b) 1: 3
(c) 3 :1 (d) 1 : 3
(a) 1, 0, – 0.5 (b) 1, 0, 0.5

(c) 1, 1, 0.5 (d) 1, 0.5, 0
79. Which of the following graph represents uniform
motion
s s
(a) (b)
t t
s s
(c) (d)
t t
@cbseinfinite
EXERCISE – 2 : PREVIOUS YEAR JEE MAINS QUESTIONS

1. A particle starts from rest. Its acceleration at time
t = 0 is 5 ms–2 which varies with time as shown in Fig.
The maximum speed of the particle will be: (a) (b)
( 2015)
(c) (d)
(a) 7.5 ms–1 (b) 15 ms–1 5. Which graph corresponds to an object moving with a
(c) 30 ms–1 (d) 75 ms–1 constant negative acceleration and a positive velocity?
(2017)
2. Which of the following option correctly describes the
variation of the speed v and acceleration ‘a ’ of a point
mass falling vertically in a viscous medium that
(a) (b)
applies a force F = −kv, where ‘k ' is a constant, on the
body? (Graphs are schematic and not drawn to
scale) (2016)
(c) (d)
(a) (b)
6. An automobile, travelling at 40 km/h, can be stopped
at a distance of 40 m by applying brakes. If the same
automobile is travelling at 80 km/h, the minimum
stopping distance, in metres, is (assume no skidding):
(2018)
(c) (d) (a) 75 m (b) 100 m
(c) 150 m (d) 160 m
7. All the graphs below are intended to represent the
3. An object is dropped from a height h from the ground. same motion. One of them does it incorrectly. Pick it
Every time it hits the ground it loses 50% of its kinetic up. (2018)
energy. The total distance covered as t   is:
(2017)
(a) 3h (b) 
5 8
(c) h (d) h (a) (b)
3 3
4. A body is thrown vertically upwards. Which one of the

following graphs correctly represent the velocity vs
time? (2017)
(c) (d)
@cbseinfinite
8. The velocity-time graphs of a car and a scooter are (a) (B), (C) (b) (A)
shown in the figure. (i) The difference between the (c) (A), (B), (C) (d) (A), (B), (D)
distance travelled by the car and the scooter in 15 s and
(ii) the time at which the car will catch up with the 11. The position of a particle as a function of time t, is
scooter are, respectively. (2018) given by x  t   at  bt 2  ct 3 where a, b and c are
constants. When the particle attains zero acceleration,
then its velocity will be: (2019)
b2 b2
(a) a  (b) a 
4c 3c
b2 b2
(c) a  (d) a 
c 2c
(a) 337.5 m and 25 s (b) 225.5 m and 10 s 12. A particle is moving with speed v  b x along
positive x-axis. Calculate the speed of the particle at
(c) 112.5 m and 15 s (d) 112.5 m and 22.5 s
time t   (assume that the particle is at origin at
9. A particle starts from the origin at time t = 0 and moves t = 0).
along the positive x-axis. The graph of velocity with
respect to time is shown in figure. What is the position (all quantities are measured in S.I unit)
of the particle at time t = 5s? (2019)
b 2 b 2
(a) (b)
4 2
b 2
(c) b2 (d)
2
13. A tennis ball is released from a height h and after freely
(2019) falling on a wooden floor it rebounds and reaches
h
(a) 10 m (b) 6 m height . The velocity versus height of the ball during
2
(c) 3 m (d) 9 m its motion may be represented graphically by: (graphs
10. A particle starts from origin O from rest and moves are drawn schematically and are not to scale)
with a uniform acceleration along the positive x-axis. (2020)
Identify all figures that correctly represents the
motion qualitatively
(a = acceleration, v = velocity, x = displacement, t =
time)
(a) (b)
(c) (d)
(2019)
@cbseinfinite
14. A small ball of mass m is thrown upward with velocity 19. The speed verses time graph for a particle is shown in
u from the ground. The ball experiences a resistive the figure. The distance travelled (in m) by the particle
force mkv2, where v is its speed. The maximum height during the time interval t = 0 to t = 5 s will
attained by the ball is: be________. (2020)
(2020)
1  ku 
2 2
1 ku
(a) tan 1 (b) ln 1  
k 2g 2k  g 
1  ku 2  1 ku 2
(c) ln  1   (d) tan 1
k  2g  2k g
15. A helicopter rises from rest on the ground vertically

upwards with a constant acceleration g. A food packet
is dropped from the helicopter when it is at a height h. 20. If the velocity-time graph has the shape AMB, what
The time taken by the packet to reach the ground is would be the shape of the corresponding acceleration-
close to [g is the acceleration due to gravity]: time graph? (2021)
(2020)
h  2h 
(a) t  3.4   (b) t   
g  3g 
2 h h
(c) t    (d) t  1.8
3 g g
(a)
16. The velocity (v) - time (t) graph of a body in a straight-
line motion is shown in the figure. The point S is at
4.333 seconds. The total distance covered by the body
in 6 s is: (2020)
(b)
37 49
(a) m (b) m
3 4
(c) 12 m (d) 11 m (c)
17. A ball is dropped from the top of a 100m high tower
1
on a planet. In the last s before hitting the ground, it
2
covers a distance of 19 m. Acceleration due to gravity
(in ms−2) near the surface on that planet is
(d)
(2020)
18. The distance x covered by a particle in one dimension
motion varies as with time t as x 2  at 2  2bt  c,
where a, b, c are constants. Acceleration of particle
depend on x as x–n, the value of n is
(2020)
@cbseinfinite
21. An engine of a train, moving with uniform (a)

acceleration, passes the signal-post with velocity u and
the last compartment with velocity v. The velocity
with which middle point of the train passes the signal
post is: (2021)
v2  u 2 v2  u 2
(a) (b)
2 2
vu vu (b)

(c) (d)
2 2
22. A stone is dropped from the top of a building. When it
crosses a point 5 m below the top, another stone starts
to fall from a point 25 m below the top. Both stones
reach the bottom of building simultaneously. The
height of the building is: (2021)
(a) 50m (b) 35m
(c)
(c) 45m (d) 25m
23. A scooter accelerates from rest for time t1 at constant
rate at a1 and then retards at constant rate a2 for time t2
t
and comes to rest. The correct value of 1 will be
t2
(2021)
a1  a2 a1 (d)
(a) (b)
a1 a2
a2 a1  a2
(c) (d)
a1 a2
24. The velocity-displacement graph describing the

motion of a bicycle is shown in the figure.
25. A car accelerates from rest at a constant rate  for

some time after which it decelerates at a constant rate
 to come to rest. If the total time elapsed is t seconds,
the total distance travelled is:
(2021)
2 2 4 2
(a) t (b) t
       
The acceleration-displacement graph of the bicycle's  
(c) t2 (d) t2
motion is best described by (2021) 2     4    
@cbseinfinite
26. The velocity of a particle is v  v0  gt  Ft 2 . Its 28. The velocity - displacement graph of a particle is
position is x = 0 at t = 0; then its displacement after shown in the figure.
time (t = 1 s) is: (2021)
g F
(a) v0  g  F (b) v0  
2 3
g
(c) v0  F (d) v0  2 g  3F
2 The acceleration - displacement graph of the same
27. The position, velocity and acceleration of a particle particle is represented by: (2021)
moving with a constant acceleration can be (a)
represented by: (2021)
(a)
(b)
(b)
(c)
(c)
(d)
(d)
@cbseinfinite
EXERCISE – 3 : ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

Single Choice Questions. 6. A body moving with a uniform acceleration has
1. In 1.0 s, a particle goes from point A to point B, velocities of u and v when passing through points A
moving in a semicircle (as shown in the figure). The and B in its path. The velocity of the body midway
magnitude of the average velocity is between A and B is
u+v u 2 + v2
(a) (b)
2 2
(c) uv (d) None of these

7. A body starts from rest and is uniformly accelerated
for 30 s. The distance travelled in the first 10s is x1.
(a) 3.14 m/s (b) 2.0 m/s
next 10s is x2 and the last 10 s is x3. Then the ratio
(c) 1.0 m/s (d) zero x1 : x2 : x3 is:
2. A wheel with radius 45 cm rolls without slipping
(a) 1 : 2 : 4 (b) 1 : 2 : 5
along a horizontal floor as shown in figure. P is a dot
pointed on the rim of the wheel. At time t1, P is at the (c) 1 : 3 : 5 (d) 1 : 3 : 9
point of contact between the wheel and the floor. At 8. A bird flies for 4 s with a velocity of |t – 2| m/s in a
a later time t2, the wheel has rolled, through one–half straight line, where t = time in seconds. It covers a
of a revolution. What is the displacement of P during distance of
this interval? (a) 2 m (b) 4 m
(c) 6 m (d) 8 m
9. A particle travels 10 m in first 5 s and 10 m in next
3 s. Assuming constant acceleration what is the
distance travelled in next 2 s
(a) 8.3 m (b) 9.3 m
(a) 90 cm (b) 168 cm
(c) 10.3 m (d) None of above
(c) 40 cm (d) data insufficient
10. An object moves along the x–axis. Its x coordinate is
3. A particle moving in a straight line covers half the
given as a function of time as
distance with speed of 3 m/s. The other half of the
distance is covered in two equal time intervals with x = 7 t – 3t2
speed of 4.5 m/s and 7.5 m/s respectively. The where x is in metre and t is in second. Its average
average speed of the particle during this motion is speed over the interval t = 0 to t = 4 s is
(a) 4.0 m/s (b) 5.0 m/s (a) 5 m/s (b) – 5 m/s
(c) 5.5 m/s (d) 4.8 m/s
169 169
4. A 150 m long train is moving with a uniform (c) − ms (d) ms
24 24
velocity of 45 km/h. The time taken by the train to
11. A particle is moving with velocity of 4 m/s along +
cross a bridge of length 850 meters is
ve X direction, an acceleration of 1 m/s2 is acted on
(a) 56 sec (b) 68 sec the particle along –ve X direction. Find the distance
(c) 80 sec (d) 92 sec travelled by the particle in 10 s.
5. What determines the nature of the path followed by a (a) 10 m (b) 26 m
particle?
(c) 16 m (d) 8 m
(a) Velocity (b) Speed
(c) Acceleration (d) None of these
@cbseinfinite
12. At a distance of 500 m from the traffic light, brakes 18. When a ball is thrown up vertically with velocity V0,
are applied to an automobile moving at a velocity of it reaches a maximum height of ‘h’. If one wishes to
20 m/s. The position of automobile relative to traffic triple the maximum height, then the ball should be
light 50 s after applying the brakes, if its acceleration thrown with velocity
is –0.5 m/s2, is
(a) 3V0 (b) 3V0
(a) 125 m (b) 375 m
(c) 9V0 (d) 3/2V0
(c) 400 m (d) 100 m
19. A stone is released from an elevator going up with an
13. A stone falls from a balloon that is descending at a
acceleration a. The acceleration of the stone after the
uniform rate of 12 m/s. The displacement of the
release is
stone from the point of release after 10 sec is
(a) a upward (b) (g–a) upward
(a) 490m (b) 510m
(c) (g–a) downward (d) g downward.
(c) 610m (d) 725m
20. A person standing near the edge of the top of a
14. Time taken by an object falling from rest to cover the building throws two balls A and B. The ball A is
height of h1 and h2 is respectively t1 and t2 then the thrown vertically upward with speed u and B is
ratio of t1 to t2 is thrown vertically downward with the same speed.
(a) h1 : h2 (b) h1 : h2 Find the difference in distance travelled when both
the balls strike the ground.
(c) h1 : 2h2 (d) 2h1 : h2
u2 u2
(a) (b)
15. The acceleration due to gravity on the planet A is 9 g 2g
times the acceleration due to gravity on planet B. A
man jumps to a height of 2m on the surface of A. 2u 2
(c) (d) 0
What is the height of jump by the same person on the g
planet B 21. An object is thrown in vertically upward direction.
(a) 18m (b) 6m During its rising
(c) 2m/3 (d) 2m/9 (a) its velocity is downward and acceleration is in
16. A body, thrown upwards with some velocity reaches upward direction
the maximum height of 50 m. Another body with (b) both velocity and acceleration are in upward
double the mass thrown up with double the initial direction
velocity will reach a maximum height of (c) both velocity and acceleration are in downward
(a) 100 m (b) 200 m direction
(c) 300 m (d) 400 m (d) velocity is in upward direction and acceleration
is in downward direction
17. From the top of a tower two stones, whose masses
are in the ratio 1:2 are thrown one straight up with an 22. As a rocket is accelerating vertically upwards at 9.8
initial speed u and the second straight down with the m/s2 near the earth’s surface, it releases a projectile.
same speed u. Then, neglecting air resistance Immediately after release, the acceleration (in m/s2)
of the projectile, is (Take g = 9.8 m/s2)
(a) The heavier stone hits the ground with a higher
speed (a) zero (b) 9.8 m/s2 up
(b) The lighter stone hits the ground with a higher (c) 9.8 m/s2 down (d) 19.6 m/s2 up
speed 23. A body falls freely from rest. It covers as much
distance in the last second of its motion as covered in
(c) Both the stones will have the same speed when
the first three seconds. The body has fallen for a time
they hit the ground.
of
(d) The speed can’t be determined with the given
(a) 3 s (b) 5 s
data.
(c) 7 s (d) 9 s
@cbseinfinite
24. A balloon starts rising from the ground with an 30. A rocket is fired upwards from earth’s surface such
acceleration of 1.25 m/s2 after 8s, a stone is released that it creates an acceleration of 20ms −2 . If after 5
from the balloon. The stone will (g = 10 m/s2) sec, its engine is switched off then the maximum
(a) Reach the ground in 4 second height reached by rocket from earth’s surface is:
(b) Begin to move down after being released [assume acceleration due to gravity ( g = 10ms −2 )
(c) Have a displacement of 50 m remains constant]
(d) Cover a distance of 40 m in reaching the ground (a) 250m (b) 500m
25. A stone is released from a high-flying balloon that is (c) 750m (d) 1000m
descending at a constant speed of 10 m/s. After 20 s 31. A drag racing car starts from rest at t = 0 and moves
of dropping, the velocity of the stone would be [Take along a straight line with velocity given by v = bt2,
g = 10 m/s2] where b is a constant. The expression for the distance
(a) 190 m/s down (b) 210 m/s down travelled by the car from its position at t = 0, is
(c) 10 m/s down (d) 25 m/s up bt 2
(a) bt3 (b)
26. A particle is dropped under gravity from rest from a 3
height h(g = 9.8 m/sec2) and it travels a distance
bt 3
9h/25 in the last second, the height h is (c) (d) 2 bt
3
(a) 100 m (b) 122.5 m
32. A particle moves along a straight line such that its
(c) 145 m (d) 167.5 m displacement at any time t is given by:
27. A body A is projected upwards with a velocity of 98 s = (t3 – 3t2 + 2) m.
m/s. a second body B is projected upwards with the
The displacement when the acceleration becomes
same initial velocity but after 4 sec. Both the bodies
zero is:
will meet after
(a) 0 m (b) 2m
(a) 6 sec (b) 8 sec
(c) 3 m (d) – 2m
(c) 10 sec (d) 12 sec
33. The displacement of a particle after time t is given by
28. A particle is dropped vertically from rest from a
height. The time taken by it to fall through x = (k/b2) (1 – e–bt), where b is a constant. What is
successive distances of 1 m each will then be the acceleration of the particle?
(a) All equal, being equal to 2 / g second (a) ke–bt (b) –ke–bt
(b) In the ratio of the square roots of the integers i.e, k – bt – k – bt

(c) e (d) e
b2 b2
1: 2 : 3 ...
34. The velocity v and displacement r of a body are
(c) In the ratio of the difference in the square roots
related as v2 = kr, where k is a constant. What will be
of the integers i.e.
the velocity after 1 seconds? (Given that the
1 : ( 2 − 1) : ( 3 − 2) : ( 4 − 3)... displacement is zero at t = 0)
(d) In the ratio of the reciprocal of the square roots (a) k r (b) kr 3/ 2
1 1 1 1
of the integers i.e., : : : k 0
1 2 3 4 (c) r (d) Data is not sufficient
2
29. A stone is thrown vertically upward with an initial
35. The velocity of a particle moving along x–axis is
velocity v0. The distance travelled in time 4v0/3g is
given as v = x2 – 5x + 4 (in m/s) where x denotes the
2v02 v02 x–coordinate of the particle in metres. Find the
(a) (b) magnitude of acceleration of the particle when the
g 2g
velocity of particle is zero?
4v02 5v02 (a) 0 m/s2 (b) 2 m/s2
(c) (d)
3g 9g
(c) 3 m/s2 (d) none of these
@cbseinfinite
36. Four particles are moving along X–axis. Their 40. Two particles A and B are moving along straight
coordinates (in metres) as function of time (in line, whose position–time graph is a shown in the
seconds) are given by figure below. Determine the instant (approximately)
x1 (t) = 3.5 – 2.7 t3 when both are moving with the same velocity.
x2 (t) = 3.5 + 2.7 t3

x3 (t) = 3.5 – 2.7 t2
x4 (t) = 3.4 – 2.4 t – 2.7 t2
Which of these particles is/are speeding up for t > 0?
(a) All the four (b) only 2
(c) only 2 and 3 (d) 2, 3 and 4 only (a) 17 s (b) 12 s
37. A particle is moving along X–axis whose (c) 6 s (d) no where
acceleration is given by a = 3x – 4, where x is the 41. A particle starts from rest. Its acceleration (a) versus
location of the particle. At t = 0, the particle is at rest time (t) is as shown in the figure. The maximum
at x = 4/3. The distance travelled by the particle in 5 speed of the particle will be
s is
(a) zero (b) 4m
(c) infinite (d) none of these
38. The displacement–time graph of a moving particle is
shown in figure. The instantaneous velocity of the
particle is negative at the point:
(a) 110 m/s (b) 55 m/s
(c) 550 m/s (d) 660 m/s
42. A body starts from rest moves along a straight line
with constant acceleration. The variation of speed v
with distance s is given by graph
V V
(a) (b)
(a) D (b) F
O s O s
(c) C (d) E
39. A lift is going up from the ground. The variation in V V
the speed of the lift is as given in the graph. What is
the height to which the lift takes the passengers? (c) (d)
O s O s
43. An object moving along a straight line has a constant
acceleration of 4 m/s2. The position–time graph for
this object has a slope that
(a) is constant
(b) decreases with time
(a) 3.6 m
(c) increases with time
(b) 28.8 m
(d) first increases and then decreases with time
(c) 36.0 m
(d) Cannot be calculated from the graph
@cbseinfinite
44. For 3 particles A, B and C moving along x–axis, x–t 47. The velocity–displacement curve for an object
graph is as shown below. moving along a straight line is shown in the figure
below.
Mark out the correct relationships between their At which of the points marked, the object speeding
average velocities between the points P and Q. up?
(a) ν av , A > ν av , B =
ν av , C (b) ν=
av , A ν=
av , B ν av , C (a) 1 (b) 2
(c) ν av , A > ν av , B > ν av , C (d) ν av , A < ν av , B < ν av , C (c) 1 and 3 (d) 1, 2 and 3
45. The acceleration of an object, starting from rest and

moving along a straight line is as shown in the figure More than one correct option
below. 48. Look at the graphs (a) to (d) carefully and indicate
which of these possible represents one dimensional
motion of a particle?
(a) (b)
Other than at t = 0, when is the velocity of the object
equal to zero?
(a) At t = 3.5 s
(b) During interval from 1s to 3s
(c) at t = 5 s
(c) (d)
(d) at no other time on this graph
49. A particle moving along a straight line with uniform
46. An elevator is moving upwards with constant
acceleration has velocities 7 m/s at P and 17 m/s at
acceleration. The broken curve shows the position y
Q. R is the midpoint of PQ. Then
of the ceiling of the elevator as a function of time t.
A bolt breaks loose and drops from the (a) the average velocity between R and Q is 15 m/s
ceiling.[assume that bolt sticks to the floor after (b) the ratio of time to go from P to R and that from
striking the lift surface] R to Q is 3: 2
(c) the velocity at R is 10 m/s
(d) the average velocity between P and R is 10 m/s.
50. A particle is projected vertically upwards with a
velocity u from a point O. When it returns to the
point of projection:
Which curve best represents the position of the bolt (a) its average velocity is zero
as a function of time? (b) its displacement is zero
(a) A (b) B (c) its average speed is u/2
(c) C (d) D (d) its average speed is u
@cbseinfinite
51. Pick the correct statements: (a) In the motion between O and A the velocity is
(a) Average speed of a particle in a given time is positive, and acceleration is negative
never less than the magnitude of the average (b) Between A and B, the velocity and acceleration
velocity. are positive
(b) It is possible to have a situation in which (c) Between B and C, the velocity is negative, and
 acceleration is positive
dv d 
≠ 0 but v =0
dt dt (d) Between D and E, the acceleration is positive
55. Which of the following statements about distance are
(c) The average velocity of a particle is zero in a
true
time interval. It is possible that the instantaneous
velocity is never zero in the interval. (a) It cannot be negative
(d) The average velocity of a particle moving on a (b) It cannot be zero

straight line is zero in a time interval. It is (c) It can never be lesser than magnitude of
possible that the instantaneous velocity is never displacement
zero in the interval. (Infinite accelerations are not (d) It can never decrease with time
allowed) 56. If the displacement of a particle varies with time as
52. Which of the following statements are true for a x = t + 7, the
moving body? (a) velocity of the particle is inversely proportional
(a) if its speed changes, its velocity must change and to t
it must have some acceleration (b) velocity of particle varies linearly with t
(b) if its velocity changes, its speed must change, and (c) velocity of particle is proportional to t
it must have some acceleration
(d) the particle moves with a constant acceleration
(c) if its velocity changes, its speed may or may not
57. The displacement (x) of a particle depends on time
change, and it must have some acceleration
(t) as x = α t 2 – β t 3
(d) if its speed changes but direction of motion does
not change, its velocity may remain constant. (a) The particle will return to its starting point after
α
53. If velocity of the particle is given by v = x , where
β
x denotes the position of the particle and initially
particle was at x = 4, then which of the following are 2α
(b) The particle will come to rest after time
correct. 3β
(a) at t = 2 sec, the position of the particle is at x = 9 (c) The initial velocity of the particle was zero but its
2 initial acceleration was not zero
(b) Particle acceleration at t = 2 sec. is 1 m/s .
(c) Particle acceleration is 1/2 m/s2 throughout the α
(d) No net force will act on the particle at t =
motion. 3β
(d) Particle will never go in negative direction from 58. A particle moves with an initial velocity v0 and
its starting position.
retardation α v , where v is its velocity at any time t.
54. A particle has a rectilinear motion and the figure
v0
gives its displacement as a function of time. Which (a) The particle will cover a total distance
α
of the following statements are true with respect to
the motion? 1
(b) The particle will come a rest after time
α
(c) The particle will continue to move for a very long
time
(d) The velocity of the particle will become v0/2
1
after time
α
@cbseinfinite
Integer Type Questions (a) A (b) B

59. A stone, thrown up is caught by the thrower after 6s. (c) C (d) D
How high (in metres) did it go [take g = 10m/s2] (e) E
60. A stone falls freely from rest and the total distance 65. Assertion: Plotting the acceleration–time graph from
covered by it in the last second of its motion is equal a given position–time graph of a particle moving
to the distance covered by it in the first five seconds along a straight line is possible.
of its motion. For how long (in seconds) the stone
Reason: From position–time graph the only sign of
remained in air?
acceleration can be determined but no information
61. A car moving in a straight line at 30 m/s slows
can be concluded about the magnitude of
uniformly to a speed of 10 m/s in 5 sec. Determine:
acceleration.
Displacement (in m) in the third second
(a) A (b) B
Assertion & Reason (c) C (d) D

(A) If both ASSERTION and REASON are true (e) E
and reason is the correct explanation of the
assertion. Match the following
(B) If both ASSERTION and REASON are true 66. Column I gives some graphs for a particle moving
but reason is not the correct explanation of along x–axis in positive x–direction. The variables v,
the assertion. x and t represent speed of particle, x–coordinate of
(C) If ASSERTION is true but REASON is particle and time respectively. Column II gives
false. certain resulting interpretation. Match the graphs in
(D) If ASSERTION is false but REASON is Column I with the statement in Column II.
true. Column-I Column-II
(E) If both ASSERTION and REASON are (a) v (p) Acceleration of
false. particle is
62. Assertion: Magnitude of average velocity is equal to uniform
average speed.
Reason: Magnitude of instantaneous velocity is x
equal to instantaneous speed. v - x graph
2
(a) A (b) B (b) v (q) Acceleration of
particle is
(c) C (d) D
nonuniform
(e) E
63. Assertion: When velocity of a particle is zero then
acceleration of a particle is also zero. x
v2 - x graph
Reason: Acceleration is equal to rate of change of v
(c) (r) Acceleration of
velocity.
particle is
(a) A (b) B directly
(c) C (d) D proportional to
(e) E ‘t’
t
64. Assertion: A particle moves in a straight line with v - t graph
constant acceleration. The average velocity of this (d) v (s) Acceleration of
particle cannot be zero in any time interval. particle is
directly
Reason: For a particle moving in straight line with
proportional to
constant acceleration, the average velocity in a time ‘x’.
t2
u+v 2
interval is , where u and v are initial and final v - t graph
2
velocity of the particle of the given time interval.
@cbseinfinite
67. The equation of motion of the particle is described in Using the following comprehension, solve Q. 69 to Q. 73
column I. At t = 0, particle is at origin and at rest. PASSAGE
Match the column I with the statements in column II.
A car is moving on a straight road. The velocity of the car
Column-I Column-II varies with time as shown in the figure. Initially (at t = 0),
(a) x = (3t2 + 2t) m (p) velocity of particle the car was at x = 0, where, x is the position of the car at any
at t = 1 s is 8 m/s time ‘t’.
(b) v = 8t m/s (q) particle moves
with uniform
acceleration
(c) a = 16 t (r) particle moves
with variable
acceleration
(d) v = 6t – 3t2 (s) particle will
change its
direction some 69. The variation of acceleration (a) with time (t) will be
time best represented by:
a
68. A particle is projected vertically upwards with speed
20 m/s from top of a tower of height 20 m see the
(a)
figure. Match the statements in column–I with results
in column–II t
10 20 30 60 70
(b) t
10 20 30 50 60 70
Column–I Column–II a
(A) ratio of maximum height from (P) 0

ground (BD) to the initial 70
(c) t
height from ground (AD) is 10 20 30
(B) ratio of distance travelled in (Q) 1

1st second to the distance
a
travelled in 2nd second is.
(C) ratio of initial speed at A to (R) 2 (d)
t
the final on ground (D) is 10 20 30 60 70
greater than
(D) ratio of time taken from A to C (S) 3
and time taken from A to B is
@cbseinfinite
70. The displacement time graph will be best represented Using the following comprehension, solve Q. 74 & 75
by: Passage
x(m)
Two particles A and B are moving along x–axis whose
position–time graphs are as shown in the figure below.
(a)
t(s)
10 20 30 60 70
(b)
74. For the time interval 0 to 5 s
(a) the particle A is speeding up while B is slowing
x(m) down
(b) both the particles are initially speeding up and
then slowing down
(c) (c) both the particles are initially slowing down and
(s)
then speeding up
10 20 30 60 70
(d) particle A is speeding up first and then slowing
x(m) down while particle B is slowing down first and
then speeding up
75. Mark the correct statement(s)
(a) Initial velocity of A is less than that of B.
(d)
(b) There is exactly one instant when both the
t(s)
10 20 30 60 70 particles have the same velocity.
71. The maximum displacement from the starting (c) There is no instant when both the particles have
position will be: same velocity.
(a) 200 m (b) 250 m (d) For time interval, 5 to 15 s average velocity of
(c) 160 m (d) 165 m both the particles are same.
72. Average speed from t = 0 to t = 70 s will be

16 24
(a) ms (b) ms
7 7
20
(c) ms (d) zero
7
73. Average acceleration from t = 10s to t =30 s is:
(a) 0 (b) 0.4
(c) 0.1 (d) 0.2
@cbseinfinite
EXERCISE – 4 : PREVIOUS YEAR JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

1. A particle is moving eastwards with a velocity of 3. A body starts from rest at time t = 0, the acceleration
5 m/s. In 10 s the velocity changes to 5 m/s time graph is shown in the figure. The maximum
northwards. The average acceleration in this time is velocity attained by the body will be
(1982)
(a) zero (2004)
1
(b) m/s2 towards north-east
2
1
(c) m/s2 towards north-west
2
1
(d) m/s2 toward north
2
2. A ball is dropped vertically from a height d above the
ground. It hits the ground and bounces up vertically (a) 110 m/s (b) 55 m/s
to a height d/2. Neglecting subsequent motion and air
(c) 650 m/s (d) 550 m/s
resistance, its velocity v varies with height h above
the ground as (2000) 4. A small block slides without friction down an
V inclined plane starting from rest. Let Sn be the
S
distance travelled from t = n – 1 to t = n. Then n
d Sn +1
h
is
(a)
(2004)
2n − 1 2n + 1
V (a) (b)
2n 2n − 1
2n − 1 2n
(b) (c) (d)
2n + 1 2n + 1
h
d
d
h
(c)
d
h
(d)
@cbseinfinite
5. The velocity displacement graph of a particle moving

along a straight line is shown in figure. The most
suitable acceleration-displacement graph will be
(2005)
(a)
a
x
(b)
x
(c)
a
x
(d)
a
x
@cbseinfinite

@cbseinfinite
MOTION IN A PLANE AND RELATIVE MOTION 100
03
MOTION IN A PLANE AND RELATIVE
MOTION
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
Chapter
MOTION 03 AND RELATIVE MOTION
IN A PLANE 101
1. INTRODUCTION TO MOTION IN A PLANE 1.3 Instantaneous Velocity


 ∆v dr
=v lim=
∆t → 0 ∆t dt
1.1 Position Vector and displacement

 =
v v i+v j
ˆ
x
ˆ
y
The position vector r of a particle P located in a plane
with reference to the origin of an x-y coordinate system

is given by =
r xiˆ + yjˆ
Fig. 3.2
dx dy
where, vx = and v y =
dt dt
Fig. 3.1  
=
v v 2x + v 2y , v represents speed/magnitude of
Suppose the particle moves along the path as shown to
 velocity and
a new position P1 with the position vector r
vy
 tan θ =
=
r1 x1î + y1ˆj vx
change in position = displacement  vy 
or θ = tan −1  
 
( ) (
= r1 − r = x1î + y1ˆj − xiˆ + yjˆ )  vx 
(By vector addition) NOTE:

= ( x1 − x ) î + ( y1 − y ) ˆj The direction of instantaneous velocity at any point on
the path of an object is tangent to the path at that point
= ∆xiˆ + ∆yjˆ and is in the direction of motion.
from above figure we can see that
   1.4 Average Acceleration
∆ r = r1 − r 
 ∆v ∆v x ˆ ∆v y ˆ
a= = i+ j
1.2 Average Velocity ∆t ∆t ∆t
avg
 
 ∆ r ∆xiˆ + ∆yjˆ a = a î + a ˆj
v= =
avg x y
∆t ∆t
av
v = ∆v î + ∆v ˆj
avg x y
1.5 Instantaneous Acceleration

 dv dv x ˆ dv y ˆ
NOTE: =
a = i+ j
dt dt dt
 
Direction of the average velocity is same as that of ∆ r =
a a î + a ˆj
x y
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
2. PROJECTILE MOTION Horizontal axis Vertical axis

vx = ux + ax t Maximum height attained
2.1 Introduction
=
v x u cos θ by the particle
When a particle is projected obliquely from the earth’s
Method 1: Using time of
surface, it moves simultaneously in horizontal and It is independent of t ascent
vertical directions in a curved trajectory as depicted in and is constant
u sin θ
the diagram under. Motion of such a particle is called time of ascent, t =
g
projectile motion.
1
=
s y u y t + at 2
2
u sin θ
= u sin θ×
g
1 u 2 sin 2 θ
− g
2 g2
u 2 sin 2 θ
Fig. 3.3 H=
2g
2.2 Parameters in Projectile Motion
In this case a particle is projected at an angle θ with an Time of ascent = Maximum height attained
Time of descent by the particle
initial velocity u. For this particular case we will
At topmost point Method 2: Using third
calculate the following:
y=0 equation of motion
(a) time taken to reach A from O
⇒= 0 u sin θ − gt v 2y − u 2y =
2a y s y
(b) horizontal distance covered (OA)
u sin θ
(c) maximum height reached during the motion t1 = u 2 sin 2 θ
g H=
(d) velocity at any time ‘t’ during the motion 2g
u sin θ
Horizontal axis Vertical axis t 2 = T − t1 =
g
ux = u cos θ =u y u sin θ
ax = 0 T u sin θ
a y = −g t=
1 t=
2 =
(In the absence of any 2 g
external force ax is 1
=sy u y t + a y t 2
assumed to be zero) 2 2.3 Maximum Range
when the particle returns to
u 2 sin 2θ u2
same horizontal level, R= and R max =
vertical displacement is 0 g g
and time taken is called Range is maximum when sin 2θ is maximum
time of flight (T),
maximum value of sin 2θ = 1 or, θ = 45°
1
=0 u sin θT − gT 2
2
2.4 Analysis of Velocity in Case of a Projectile
2u sin θ 2u y
= T =
g g
sx = ux t + 1/2ax t2 vy = uy + ay t
x – 0 = u cosθ t It depends on time ‘t’
x = u cosθ × 2uy/g Its magnitude first
2u cos θ sin θ
2 decreases and then
x= becomes zero and then
g increases.
(2 cosθ sinθ = sin 2θ)
u 2 sin 2θ
x=
g
horizontal distance
covered is known as Fig. 3.4
Range From the above equations.
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
(i) v1x = v2x = v3x = v4x = ux = u cos θ Path of the projectile is a parabola
which means that the velocity along x-axis remains 2u 2 sin θ cos θ 2u 2 R
R= or =
constant g g sin θ cos θ
[as there is no external force acting along that direction] Substituting this value in the above equation we have,
(ii)  x
= x tan θ 1 − 
y
(a) magnitude of velocity along y-axis first decreases  R
and then it increases after the topmost point
(b) at topmost point magnitude of velocity is zero.
(c) direction of velocity is in the upward direction while
3. PROJECTILE MOTION FROM A HEIGHT
ascending and is in the downward direction while
descending. 3.1 Horizontal Direction:
(d) magnitude of velocity at A is same as magnitude of (i) Initial velocity ux = u

velocity at O; but the direction is changed (ii) Acceleration ax = 0
(e) angle which the net velocity makes with the
3.2 Vertical Direction:
horizontal can be calculated by
(i) Initial velocity uy = 0
v y velocity along y − axis
tan α
= = (ii) Acceleration ay = -g (downward)
v x velocity along x − axis
net velocity is always along the tangent.
2.5 Equation of Trajectory

Trajectory is the path traced by the body. To find the
trajectory we must find relation between y and x by
eliminating time.
[Ref. to the earlier diag.]
Horizontal Motion Vertical Motion Fig. 3.6

=
u x u cos θ =
u y u sin θ
The path traced by projectile is called its trajectory.
ax = 0 a y = −g After time t,
=
s x u cos=
θt x =
sy u y t + a y t 2 Horizontal displacement x = ut
x
t=  x  1
Vertical displacement y = − gt 2
u cos x =y u sin θ  
 u cos θ  2
1 x2 (Negative sign indicates that the direction of vertical
− g 2 displacement is downward.)
2 u cos 2 θ
gx 2 1 x2  x
=
y x tan θ − 2 ⇒= y bx − ax 2 =
So y =g 2  t  this is equation of a parabola
2 u  u
2u cos 2 θ
(i) This is an equation of a parabola Above equation is called trajectory equation.
(ii) Because the coefficient of x2 is negative, it is an
inverted parabola. The equations for this type motion will be:
● Time of flight
2h
Tf =
g
● Horizontal Range
Fig. 3.5
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
2h vy = 0
=
R u=
xt u
g y=0
● Trajectory Equation
1 x2  x
=y =g 2  t 
2 u  u
This is equation of parabola
● Along vertical direction
v=
2
y 02 + 2 ( h1 )( g )
v y = 2gh1
Along horizontal direction: Fig. 3.8

v=
x u=
x u
Projectile up an inclined plane
So, velocity
Motion along x-axis Motion along y-axis
v= v 2x + v 2y = u 2 + 2gh1 =
u x u cos θ =
u y u sin θ
ax =
−g sin α ay =
−g cos α
=
v x u cos θ − g sin αt =
v y u sin θ − g cos αt
4. PROJECTILE ON AN INCLINE 1
=
x u cos θt − g sin αt 2 1
=
y u sin θt − g cos αt 2
2 2
● Motion of a particle along upward the inclined
plane.
(i) Projectile up the plane
• Time of Flight
At point B displacement along y-direction is zero. So,
1
substituting the proper values in =
s y u y t + a y t 2 , we
2
get
1 2u sin θ
=0 u sin θt + ( −g cos α ) t 2 ⇒∴
= t 0 and
2 g cos α
2u sin θ
Fig. 3.7 t = 0, corresponds to initial point and t =
g cos α
ux = u corresponds to final point.
ax =
−g sin α 2u sin θ
Thus, T =
g cos α
u − ( g sin α ) t
vx =
• Range
1
ut − ( g sin α ) t 2
x=
2
Horizontal component of initial velocity is=
u x u cos θ
uy = 0
1
Range (R) =u x T − g sin αT 2
ay =
−g cos α 2
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
2u sin θ 1  2u sin θ 
2
ux = u
=u cos θ − g sin α  
g cos α 2  g cos α  ax =
+g sin α
u + ( g sin α ) t
v=
2u 2 sin θ cos θ 2u 2 sin 2 θ
= − sin α 1
g cos α g cos 2 α x= ut + ( g sin α ) t
2
 cos α cos θ − sin α sin θ  uy = 0
= 2u 2 sin θ  
 g cos 2 α  ay =
−g cos α
vy = 0
2u 2 sin θ cos(α + θ)
= y=0
g cos 2 α
C−D C+D
Using, sin C − sin D =
2sin   cos  ,
 2   2 
Range can also be written as,
u2
=R sin ( 2θ + α ) − sin α 
g cos 2 α 
This range will be maximum when
π π α
2θ + α= or θ= − and
2 4 2
u2
=
R max [1 − sin α ] Fig. 3.10
g cos 2 α
Here, also we can see that for α =0 , range is maximum Projectile down an inclined plane
π Motion along x-axis Motion along y-axis
at θ= or θ= 45°
4
=
u x u cos θ =
u y u sin θ
u2 u2 =
a x g sin α
=
And R max (1=− sin 0 ° ) =
a y g cos α
g cos 2 0° g =
v x u cos θ + g sin αt =
v y u sin θ − g cos αt
1 1
=
x u cos θt + g sin αt 2 =
y u sin θt − g cos αt 2
(ii) Projectile down the plane 2 2
● Motion of a particle along the downward inclined

plane.
Fig. 3.9
Fig. 3.11
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
Here, x and y-directions are down the plane and • In one dimension, since relative velocity is along
perpendicular to plane respectively as shown in figure. the line joining A and B, hence velocity of
approach /separation is simply equal to magnitude
Hence, u x = u cos θ, a x = g sin α
of relative velocity of A with respect to B.
uy =
u sin θ, a y =
−g cos α
Velocity of approach / separation in two dimensions
Proceeding in the similar manner, we get the following • It is the component of relative velocity of one
results: particle with respect to another, along the line
joining them.
2u sin θ u2
=
● T = ,R sin ( 2θ − α ) + sin α 
g cos α g cos 2 α  • If the separation is decreasing, we say it is velocity
of approach and if separation is increasing, then we
say it is velocity of separation.
5. RELATIVE MOTION
6. RIVER–BOAT PROBLEMS
Relative is a very general term. In physics we use
relative very often.
For e.g. In river–boat problems we come across the following
three terms:

v r = absolute velocity of river.

v br = velocity of boatman with respect to river and

v b = absolute velocity of boatman.
Fig. 3.12

Hence, it is important to note that v br is the velocity of
Case I: If you are stationary and you observe a car 
boatman with which he steers and v b is the actual
moving on a straight road then you say velocity of car
velocity of boatman relative to ground. Further
is 20 m/s which means velocity of car relative to you is   
v=b v br + v r
20 m/s or, velocity of car relative to the ground is 20
m/s. Now, let us derive some standard results and their
(As you are stationary on the ground.) special cases.
A boatman starts from point A on one bank of a river
Case II: If you go inside a car and observe you will 
with velocity v br in the direction shown in figure. River
find that the car is at rest while the road is moving 
is flowing along positive x–direction with velocity v r .
backwards. you will say:
velocity of car relative to the you is 0 m/s Width of the river is d. Then
  
Mathematically, velocity of B relative to A is v=b v r + v br
represented as
   Therefore, vbx = vrx + vbrx = vr – vbr sin θ
vBA = vB - v A
and vby = vry + vbry= 0 + vbr cosθ = vbr cosθ
This being a vector quantity direction is very important B
Velocity of Approach / Separation Vb

Vbr d
• It is the component of relative velocity of one Vr
particle with respect to another, along the line A
joining them.
Fig. 3.13
• If the separation is decreasing, we say it is velocity Now, time taken by the boatman to cross the river is:
of approach and if separation is increasing, then we
say it is velocity of separation.
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
=t =
d d
or=t
d 7. RELATIVE VELOCITY OF RAIN W.R.T THE
...(i)
v by v br cos θ v br cos θ MOVING MAN
Further, displacement along x–axis when he reaches on 
Consider a man walking west with velocity vm ,
the other bank (also called drift) is

d represented by OA . Let the rain be falling vertically
or x = ( v r − v br sin θ ) ...(ii)  
v br cos θ downwards with velocity vr , represented by OB as
shown in figure. To find the relative velocity of rain
Condition when the boatman crosses the river in 
with respect to man (i.e., v rm .) bring the man at rest by
shortest interval of time 
imposing a velocity − v m on man and apply this
From eq. (i) we can see that time (t) will be minimum
when θ = 0° i.e., the boatman should steer his boat velocity on rain also. Now the relative velocity of rain
perpendicular to the river current. with respect to man will be the resultant velocity of
 

(
v r = OB ) and

−vm =
OC( )
, which will be
Condition when the boatman wants to reach point 
B, i.e., at a point just opposite from where he started represented by diagonal OD of rectangle OBDC.
(shortest distance) ∴ v=
rm v r2 + v m2 + 2v r v m cos90=
° v 2r + v 2m
In this case, the drift (x) should be zero.
∴x=0
d
or ( v r − v br sin θ ) = 0 or v r = v br sin θ
v br cos θ
vr  v 
or =
sin θ or θ sin −1  r 
=
v br  v br 
Hence, to reach point B the boatman should row at an
 vr 
angle θ =sin −1   upstream from AB.
 v br 
d d Fig. 3.14
=
t = 
vb v 2br − v r2 If θ is the angle which v rm makes with the vertical
direction, then
Since sin θ > 1 So, if vr > vbr, the boatman can never OD v m v 
reach at point B. Because if vr = vbr, tan=θ = or θ = tan −1  m 
OB v r  vr 
sinθ = 1 or θ = 90° and it is just impossible to reach at 
Here, angle θ is the angle that v rm makes w.r.t vertical.
B if θ = 90°. Similarly, if vr > vbr, sinθ > 1, i.e., no such
angle exists. Practically it can be realized in this manner
that it is not possible to reach at B if river velocity (vr) NOTE:
is too high. In the above problem if the man wants to protect
himself from the rain, he should hold his umbrella in
the direction of relative velocity of rain with respect to
man i.e., the umbrella should be held making an angle θ
(= tan–1 (vm/v)r) west of vertical.
• SI unit: m/s
Dimensional formula: [LT-1]
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
Solved Examples
Example - 1
Sol. It is a one dimensional motion. So, let us choose the
Velocity and acceleration of a particle at time t = 0 are east direction as positive and the west as negative.

=
u ( 2iˆ + 3jˆ ) m / s and =a ( 4iˆ + 2ˆj) m / s 2 Now, given that
v A = velocity of Anoop = 1 m/s
respectively. Find the velocity and displacement of
particle at t = 2s. and v D = velocity of Dhyani = −2m / s
Sol. Here, acceleration =

a

( 4iˆ + 2ˆj) m / s 2
is constant.
Thus, v AD = velocity of Anoop with respect to Dhyani
= v A − v D = 1 − ( −2 ) = 3m / s
So, we can apply
1 Hence, velocity of Anoop with respect to Dhyani is
v= u + at and =
s ut + at 2 3 m/s due east.
2
Substituting the proper values, we get

( )
v = 2iˆ + 3jˆ + ( 2 ) 4iˆ + 2ˆj ( ) Example - 4
( )
Car A has an acceleration of 2 m/s2 due east and car B,
= 10iˆ + 7ˆj m / s 4 m/s2 due north. What is the acceleration of car B
with respect to car A?
( 2 ) ( 2iˆ + 3jˆ ) + ( 2 ) ( 4iˆ + 2ˆj)
 1
and =
2
s Sol.
2
= (12iˆ + 10ˆj) m
Therefore, velocity and displacement of particle
( )
at t = 2s are 10iˆ + 7ˆj m / s and 12iˆ + 10ˆj m ( )
respectively.
It is a two dimensional motion.
Therefore,
Example - 2
a BA = acceleration of car B with respect to car A
Velocity of a particle in x-y plane at any time t is = aB − aA

=
v ( )
2tiˆ + 3t 2 ˆj m / s
At t = 0, particle starts from the co-ordinates (2m, 4m).
Find acceleration of the particle at t = 1s.

 dv d
Sol. =
a =
dt dt
(
2tiˆ + 3t 2 ˆj )
= ( 2iˆ + 6tjˆ ) m / s 2 Here, a B = acceleration of car B
= 4m / s 2 (Due north)
At t = 1s,
And a A = acceleration of car A

=
a ( )
2iˆ + 6ˆj m / s 2 = 2m / s 2 (Due east)
a BA = ( 4) + ( 2) = 2 5m / s 2
2 2
Example - 3
−1  4 
  tan ( 2 )
−1
Anoop is moving due east with a velocity of 1 m/s and =
and α tan
=
Dhyani is moving due west with a velocity of 2 m/s. 2
What is the velocity of Anoop with respect to Dhyani? Thus, a BA is 2 5m / s 2 at an angle of α =tan −1 ( 2 )
from west towards north.
@cbseinfinite
Example – 5
Car A and car B starts moving simultaneously in the

same direction along the line joining them. Car A
moves with a constant acceleration a = 4m / s 2 , while
car B moves with a constant velocity v = 1m / s . At
time t = 0, car A is 10 m behind car B. Find the time
when car A overtakes car B.
Sol.
Given,=
u A 0,=
u B 1m / s,=
a A 4m / s 2 and=
aB 0
Assuming car A to be at rest, we have
u AB =u A − u B =0 − 1 =−1m / s
a AB = a A − a B = 4 − 0 = 4m / s 2
Now, the problem can be assumed in simplified form w 30
(a) Time taken to cross the river, =
t = = 10s
as shown below. 3 3
(b) Drift along the river, x =( 6 )( t ) =6 × 10 =60m
Substituting the proper values in equation
1
=
s ut + at 2 ,
2
We get 10 =− t + ( 4 ) ( t 2 )
1 Example – 7
2
Or 2t − t − 10 =0
2 A man is walking with 3 m/s, due east. Rain is falling
vertically downwards with speed 4 m/s. Find the
1 ± 1 + 80
Or t = direction in which man should hold his umbrella, so
4 that rain does not wet him.
1 ± 81
= Sol. The man should hold his umbrella in the direction of
4 v rm or v r − v m
1± 9
=
4
Or t = 2.5 s and – 2s
Ignoring the negative value, the desired time is 2.5 s.
Example – 6
Width of a river is 30 m, river velocity is 2 m/s and

rowing velocity is 5 m/s at 37o from the direction of
river current
(a) Find the time taken to cross the river,
(b) Drift of the boatman while reaching the other
shore.
Sol.
OP = v r + ( − v m ) = v r − v m = v rm
3
⇒ tan θ =
4
3
⇒ θ= tan −1  = 37°
4
@cbseinfinite
Example – 9
A river is 20 m wide. River speed is 3 m/s. A boat

starts with velocity perpendicular to river current.
Velocity of boat is 5 m/s. How far from the point
directly opposite to the starting point does the boat
reach the opposite bank?
Sol. Let the horizontal drift of the boat at the opposite bank
be L
Time taken by the boat to reach the opposite bank
d
t=
Vb
Therefore, man should hold his umbrella at an angle of 20

⇒ t= = 4s
37o east of vertical (or 37o from vertical towards east) 5
∴ L = Vw t = 3 × 4 = 12 m
Example – 8
Example – 10
A particle is moving in x-y plane. Its initial velocity
and acceleration are A river is flowing from west to east at a speed of 5

u= ( ) 
4iˆ + 8jˆ m / s and a = ( )
2iˆ − 4ˆj m / s 2 . metre/minute. A man on the south bank of the river,
capable of swimming at 10 metre/minute in still water,
Find the time when it crosses x-axis, wants to swim across the river in the shortest time. He
initial coordinates of particle are (4m, 10m). should swim in a direction,
 
Sol. Sol. Let v m and v r be velocities of the man and the river
current w.r.t. the ground.
The velocity of the man in still water is equal to the
relative velocity of the man w.r.t. water i.e.,
  
v m/=
r vm − vr
 
Let v m/ r and v m make angle α and θ with the north
direction.
Let d be the width of the river. The time taken by the
man to cross the river is given by
width of the river
t=
component of man velocity along north
d
Particle starts from point P. Components of its initial = 
v m cos θ
velocity and acceleration are shown in figure.
At the time of crossing the x-axis, its y-coordinate d
= 
should be zero or its y-displacement (w.r.t. initial point v m / r cos α
P) is – 10 m.
( PQ t v m=
=

cos θ t v m/ r cos α )
1
Using the equation, =
sy u y t + a y t 2 From above equation, t is minimum when denominator
2 
is maximum, Given, v m/ r = 10 metre/min, a constant.
1
−10 = 8t − × 4 × t 2 Thus, t become minimum when cos α =1
2
Solving this equation, we get positive value of time, i.e., α =0 . Hence, the man takes the shortest time
when he swims perpendicular to the river velocity i.e.,
t = 5s
towards north.
@cbseinfinite

MOTION IN A PLANE 7. A body is thrown at angle 30° to the horizontal with
the velocity of 30 m/s. After 1 sec, its velocity will
Introduction to Motion in a Plane & Projectile Motion
be (in m/s) (g = 10 m/s2)
1. The co–ordinates of a moving particle at any time t
are given by x = αt3 and y = βt3. The speed of the (a) 10 7 (b) 700 10
particle at time t is given by (c) 100 7 (d) 40
(a) 3t α + β 2 2
(b) 3t 2
α +β
2 2
8. A projectile is fired at 30° to the horizontal. The
vertical component of its velocity is 80 ms–1. Its
(c) t 2 α 2 + β2 (d) α 2 + β2 time of flight is T. What will be the velocity of the
2. A particle has an initial velocity 3iˆ + 4ˆj and an projectile at t = T/2
acceleration of 0.4iˆ + 0.3jˆ . Its speed after 10 s is (a) 80 ms–1 (b) 80 3 ms–1
(a) 10 unit (b) 7 2 unit (c) (80/ 3 ) ms–1 (d) 40 ms–1
(c) 7 unit (d) 8.5 unit 9. For a given velocity, a projectile has the same range
R for two angles of projection. If t1 and t2 are the
3. A particle is moving with velocity=

v k yiˆ + xjˆ , ( ) times of flight in the two cases then
where k is a constant. The general equation for its (a) t1 t 2 ∝ R 2 (b) t1 t 2 ∝ R
path is
1 1
(a) y = x2 + constant (b) y2 = x + constant (c) t1 t 2 ∝ (d) t1 t 2 ∝
R R2
(c) xy = constant (d) y2 = x2 + constant
10. If for a given angle of projection, the horizontal
4. In a projectile motion, velocity at maximum height
range is doubled, the time of flight becomes
is
(a) 4 times (b) 2 times
u cos θ
(a) (b) u cos θ (c) 2 times (d) 1 / 2 times
2
u sin θ 11. A boy playing on the roof of a 10m high building
(c) (d) None of these throws a ball with a speed of 10 m/s at an angle of
2
30o with the horizontal. How far from the throwing
5. Two projectiles A and B are projected with angle of
point will the ball be at the height of 10 m from the
projection 30° for the projectile A and 45° for the
ground?
projectile B. If R A and R B are the horizontal
1 3
ranges for the two projectiles, then (g = 10 m/s2, sin 30o = , cos 30° = )
2 2
(a) R A =R B
(a) 8.66 m (b) 5.20 m
(b) R A >R B
(c) 4.33 m (d) 2.60 m
(c) R A <R B 12. Which of the following sets of factors will affect the
(d) the information is insufficient to decide the horizontal distance covered by an athlete in a long–
relation of R A and R B jump event
6. Two bullets are fired with horizontal velocities of (a) Speed before he jumps and his weight
50 m/s and 100 m/s from two guns placed at a height (b) The direction in which he leaps and the initial
of 19.6 m. Which bullet will strike the ground first? speed
(a) First (c) The force with which he pushes the ground and
(b) Second his speed
(c) Simultaneously (d) The direction in which he leaps and the weight
(d) None of these
@cbseinfinite
13. For a projectile, the ratio of maximum height (a) 3u 2 / 2g (b) u2/3g
reached to the square of flight time is (g = 10 ms–2)
(c) 3u2/2g (d) 3u2/g
(a) 5 : 4 (b) 5 : 2
21. A projectile is thrown from a point in a horizontal
(c) 5 : 1 (d) 10 : 1 plane such that its horizontal and vertical velocity
14. A cricketer can throw a ball to a maximum components are 9.8 m/s and 19.6 m/s respectively.
horizontal distance of 100 m. The speed with which Its horizontal range is
he throws the ball is (to the nearest integer) (a) 4.9 m (b) 9.8 m
(a) 30 ms–1 (b) 42 ms–1 (c) 19.6 m (d) 39.2 m
(c) 32 ms–1 (d) 35 ms–1 22. A ball thrown by one player reaches the other in 2
15. If two bodies are projected at 30° and 60° sec. the maximum height attained by the ball above
respectively, with the same speed, then the point of projection will be about
(a) Their ranges are same (a) 10 m (b) 7.5 m
(b) Their heights are same (c) 5 m (d) 2.5 m
(c) Their times of flight are same 23. If the initial velocity of a projectile be doubled.
(d) All of these Keeping the angle of projection same, the maximum
height reached by it will
16. A particle covers 50 m distance when projected with
an initial speed. On the same surface it will cover a (a) Remain the same (b) Be doubled
distance, when projected with double the initial (c) Be quadrupled (d) Be halved
speed 24. The maximum horizontal range of a projectile is 400
(a) 100 m (b) 150 m m. The maximum height attained by it will be
(c) 200 m (d) 250 m (a) 100 m (b) 200 m
17. The speed of a projectile at the highest point (c) 400 m (d) 800 m
1 25. Two bodies are projected with the same velocity. If
becomes times its initial speed. The horizontal
2 one is projected at an angle of 30° and the other at
range of the projectile will be an angle of 60° to the horizontal, the ratio of the
maximum heights reached is
u2 u2
(a) (b) (a) 3 : 1 (b) 1 : 3
g 2g
(c) 1 : 2 (d) 2 : 1
u2 u2 26. If time of flight of a projectile is 10 seconds. Range
(c) (d)
3g 4g is 500 m. The maximum height attained by it will be
18. A projectile is projected with initial velocity (a) 125 m (b) 50 m
(6iˆ + 8j)m
ˆ / sec. If g = 10 ms–2, then horizontal (c) 100 m (d) 150 m
range is 27. At the top of the trajectory of a projectile, the
directions of its velocity and acceleration are
(a) 4.8 metre (b) 9.6 metre
(a) Perpendicular to each other
(c) 19.2 metre (d) 14.0 metre
(b) Parallel to each other
19. A projectile thrown with an initial speed u and angle
(c) Inclined to each other at an angle of 45°
of projection 15° to the horizontal has a range R. If
the same projectile is thrown at an angle of 45° to (d) Antiparallel to each other
the horizontal with speed 2u, its range will be 28. A man projects a coin upwards from the gate of a
(a) 12 R (b) 3 R uniformly moving train. The path of coin for the
man will be
(c) 8 R (d) 4 R
(a) Parabolic
20. The velocity at the maximum height of a projectile
is half of its initial velocity of projection u. Its range (b) Inclined straight line
on the horizontal plane is (c) Vertical straight line
(d) Horizontal straight line
@cbseinfinite
29. In a projectile motion, the velocity 35. A ball is thrown from a point with a speed v0 at an
(a) Is always perpendicular to the acceleration angle of projection θ. From the same point and at the
same instant a person starts running with a constant
(b) Is never perpendicular to the acceleration
speed v0/2 to catch the ball. Will the person be able
(c) Is perpendicular to the acceleration for one to catch the ball? If yes, what should be the angle of
instant only projection?
(d) Is perpendicular to the acceleration for two (a) yes, 60° (b) yes, 30°
instants (c) no (d) yes, 45°
30. A particle is thrown upward with a speed u at an 36. A particle of mass m is projected with velocity v
angle θ with the horizontal. When the particle makes making an angle of 45° with the horizontal. When
an angle φ with the horizontal, its speed changes to the particle lands on the level ground the magnitude
 
v, then of the change in its momentum (p = mv) will be:
(a) v= u cos θ cos φ (b) v= u cos θ sec φ (a) 2 mv
=
(c) v u cos θ (d) v = u sec θ cos φ mv
(b)
2
31. A cricket ball is thrown with a velocity of 15 m/s at
an angle of 30° with the horizontal. The time of (c) mv 2
flight of the ball will be (g = 10 m/s2) (d) zero
(a) 1.5 s (b) 2.5 s 37. A particle is projected at 60° to the horizontal with a
(c) 3.5 s (d) 4.5 s  1 
kinetic energy  K = mu 2  . The kinetic energy at
32. A stone is thrown at an angle θ to the horizontal  2 
reaches a maximum height h. The time of flight of the highest point is
the stone is (a) K (b) zero
(a) (2h sin θ) /g (b) 2 (2h sin θ) /g K K

(c) (d)
4 2
(c) 2 (2h) /g (d) (2h) /g 38. A water fountain on the ground sprinkles water all
around it. If the speed of water coming out of the
33. Which of the following is largest, when the height fountain is v, the maximum area around the fountain
attained by the projectile is the largest that can get wet is:
(a) Range
v4 π v4
(a) π (b)
(b) Time of flight g2 2 g2
(c) Angle of projectile with vertical
v2 v2
(c) π (d) π
(d) None of these g2 g
 1  39. A boy can throw a stone up to a maximum height of
34. A ball whose kinetic energy is  E = mu 2  , is
 2  10 m. The maximum horizontal distance that the boy
projected at an angle of 45° to the horizontal. The can throw the same stone up to will be
kinetic energy of the ball at the highest point of its (a) 20 2 m (b) 10 m
flight will be
(c) 10 2 m (d) 20 m
E
(a) E (b) 40. The maximum range of a gun on horizontal terrain is
2
1.0 km. If g = 10ms −2 , what must be the muzzle
E
(c) (d) zero velocity of the shell?
2
(a) 400 m/s (b) 200 m/s
(c) 100 m/s (d) 50 m/s
@cbseinfinite
Projectile Motion from a Height & Projectile on an

Incline (a) 1 km (b) 2 km
41. An aeroplane is moving with a horizontal velocity u (c) 4 km (d) 6 km
at a height h above the ground. If a packet is
47. A projectile is projected from the foot of an incline
dropped from it the speed of the packet when it
of angle 30o with a velocity 30 m/s. The angle of
reaches the ground will be
projection as measured from the horizontal is 60o.
(a) (u 2 + 2gh)1/ 2 (b) (2 gh)1/ 2 What would be its speed when the projectile is
parallel to the incline?
(c) (u 2 − 2 gh)1/ 2 (d) 2 gh
(a) 10 m/s (b) 2 3 m/s
42. A boy playing on the roof of a 10 m high building
throws a ball with a speed of 10 m/s at an angle of (c) 5 3 m/s (d) 10 3 m/s
30° with the horizontal. How far from the throwing
48. Find range of projectile on the inclined plane which
point will the ball be at the height of 10 m from the
is projected perpendicular to the inclined plane with
1
ground? [g = 10 m/s2, = sin 30° ,=
cos 30° 0.866 velocity 20 m/s as shown in figure:
2
]
(a) 5.20 m (b) 4.33 m
(c) 2.60 m (d) 8.66 m
43. An inclined plane is making an angle β with
horizontal. A projectile is projected from the bottom
of the plane with a speed u at an angle α with (a) 55 m (b) 75 m
horizontal then its maximum range R max is (c) 84 m (d) 100 m
49. Find time of flight of a projectile thrown
u2 u2
(a) R max = (b) R max = horizontally with speed 10ms −1 from a long-inclined
g (1 − sin β ) g (1 + sin β )
plane which makes an angle of θ= 45° with the
(c) R max =
u
(d) R max =
u horizontal (Take g = 10ms −2 )
g (1 − sin β ) g (1 + sin β )
(a) 2 sec (b) 2 2 sec
44. For a given velocity of projection from a point on
(c) 2 sec (d) none
the inclined plane, the maximum range down the
plane is three times the maximum range up the 50. The range of projectile on a downward inclined
incline. Then, the angle of inclination of the inclined plane is ……… the range on upward inclined plane
plane is for the same velocity of projection and angle of
projection.
(a) 30o (b) 45o
(a) less than (b) more than
(c) 60o (d) 90o
(c) equal to (d) none of these
45. A shell is fired from a gun from the bottom of a hill
along its slope. The slope of the hill is α= 30° and
the angle of the barrel to the horizontal β= 60° . The RELATIVE MOTION
initial velocity v of the shell is 21 m/sec. Then Relative Velocity in one & two Dimensions
distance of point from the gun at which shell will 51. A man projects a coin upwards from the gate of a
fall uniformly moving train. The path of coin for the
(a) 10 m (b) 20 m man will be
(c) 30 m (d) 40 m (a) Parabolic
46. The maximum range of rifle bullet on the horizontal (b) Inclined straight line
ground is 6 km its maximum range on an inclined of (c) Vertical straight line
30o will be (d) Horizontal straight line
@cbseinfinite
52. A body is at rest at x = 0. At t = 0, it starts moving in 56. A small body is dropped from a rising balloon. A
the positive x-direction with a constant acceleration. person A stands on ground, while another person B
At the same instant another body passes through is on the balloon. Choose the correct statement:
x = 0 moving in the positive x-direction with a Immediately, just after the body is released.
constant speed. The position of the first body is (a) A and B, both feel that the body is coming
given by x1(t) after time t and that of the second (going) down.
body by x2(t) after the same time interval. Which of (b) A and B, both feel that the body is going up.
the following graphs correctly describes (x1 – x2) as (c) A feel that the body is coming down, while B
a function of time? feels that the body is going up.
(x1 – x2)
(d) A feel that the body is going up, while B feels
(x1 – x2)
that the body is going down.
57. A policeman moving on a highway with a speed of
30 kmh −1 fires a bullet at a thief's car speeding
(a) (b) away in the same direction with a speed of
t t
O O 192 kmh −1 . If the muzzle speed of the bullet is
(x1 – x2) (x1 – x2) 150 ms −1 with what speed does the bullet hit the
thief's car?
(a) 120 m/s (b) 90 m/s
(c) 125 m/s (d) 105 m/s
(c) (d)
t 58. A bird is flying towards north with a velocity
O t
O 40 km/h and a train is moving with a velocity
53. A bus starts from rest with an acceleration of 1 m/s2. 40 km/h towards east. What is the velocity of the
A man who is 48 m behind the bus starts with a bird noted by a man in the train?
uniform velocity of 10 m/s. Then the minimum time (a) 40 2 km h N − E (b) 40 2 km h S − E
after which the man will catch the bus:
(c) 40 2 km h N − W (d) 40 2 km h S − W
(a) 4 s (b) 10 s
(c) 12 s (d) 8 s
River-boat & Rain-man Problems
54. A 100 m long train at 15 m/s overtakes a man 59. A swimmer jumps from a bridge over a canal and
running on the platform in the same direction in swims 1 km upstream. After that first km, he passes
10 s. How long the train will take to cross the man if a floating cork. He continues swimming for half an
he was running in the opposite direction? hour and then turns around and swims back to the
(a) 7 s (b) 5 s bridge. The swimmer and the cork reach the bridge
(c) 3 s (d) 1 s at the same time. The swimmer has been swimming
at a constant speed. How fast does the water in the
55. A particle is moving eastwards with a velocity of
canal flow?
5 m/s. In 10s the velocity changes to 5 m/s
northwards. The average acceleration in this time is (a) 1.5 km/h (b) 2 km/h
(c) 4 km/h (d) 1 km/h
(a) zero
60. A river is flowing from east to west at a speed of
1
(b) ms −2 towards north 5 m/min. A man on south bank of river, capable of
2 swimming 10 m/min in still water, wants to swim
1 across the river in the shortest time; he should swim:
(c) ms −2 towards north–east
2 (a) due north
(b) due north-east
1
(d) ms −2 towards north–west (c) due north-east with double the speed of river
2
@cbseinfinite
61. A steamer moves with velocity 3 km/h in and 66. A river is flowing from west to east at a speed of
against the direction of river water whose velocity is 5 m/min. A man on the south bank of the river,
2 km/h. Calculate the total time for total journey if capable of swimming at 10 m/min in still water,
the boat travels 2 km in the direction of steam and wants to swim across the river in the shortest time.
then back to its place: Finally, he will swim in a direction
(a) 2 hrs (b) 2.5 hrs
(a) tan −1 ( 2 ) E of N (b) tan −1 ( 2 ) N of E
(c) 2.4 hrs (d) 3 hrs
62. A boat crosses a river of width 1 km along the (c) 30°E of N (d) 60°E of N
shortest path in 15 minutes. If the speed of boat in 67. A boat which has a speed of 5 km/h in still water
still water is 5 km/hr, then what is the speed of the crosses a river of width 1 km along the shortest
river? possible path in 15 min. The velocity of the river
(a) 1 km/hr (b) 3 km/hr water in km per hour is
(c) 2 km/hr (d) 5 km/hr (a) 1 (b) 3
−1
63. Ship A is travelling with a velocity of 5 kmh due (c) 4 (d) 41
east. The second ship is heading 30° east of north.
68. Rain is falling vertically downwards with a speed of
What should be the speed of second ship if it is to
4 kmh −1 . A girl moves on a straight, horizontal road
remain always due north with respect to the first
ship? with a velocity of 3 kmh −1 . The apparent velocity of
rain with respect to the girl is
(a) 10 kmh −1 (b) 9 kmh −1
(a) 3 kmh −1 (b) 4 kmh −1
(c) 8 kmh −1 (d) 7 kmh −1
64. A man swims from a point A on one bank of a river (c) 5 kmh −1 (d) 7 kmh −1
of width 100 m. When he swims perpendicular to 69. A man is walking on a road with a velocity 3kmh −1 .
the water current, he reaches the other bank 50 m Suddenly rain starts falling. The velocity of rain is
downstream. The angle to the bank at which he
10 kmh −1 in vertically downward direction. The
should swim, to reach the directly opposite point B
on the other bank is relative velocity of the rain w.r.t. man is
(a) 7 kmh −1 (b) 13 kmh −1
(c) 13kmh −1 (d) 109 kmh −1

70. Rain is falling vertically with a velocity of 25 ms −1 .
A woman rides a bicycle with a speed of 10 ms −1 in
the north to south direction. What is the direction
(angle with vertical) in which she should hold her
(a) 10o upstream (b) 20o upstream
umbrella to safe herself from the rain?
(c) 30o upstream (d) 60o upstream
(a) tan −1 ( 0.4 ) (b) tan −1 (1)
65. A boat is sent across (perpendicular) a river with a
velocity of 8 kmh −1 . If the resultant velocity of the (c) tan −1 ( 3) (d) tan −1 ( 2.6 )
−1
boat is 10 kmh , the river is flowing with a velocity
(a) 6 kmh −1 (b) 8 kmh −1
(c) 10 kmh −1 (d) 128 kmh −1
@cbseinfinite
EXERCISE – 2 : PREVIOUS YEAR JEE MAINS QUESTIONS

1. Two stones are thrown up simultaneously from the 2. A car is standing 200 m behind a bus, which is also
edge of a cliff 240 m high with initial speed of at rest. The two start moving at the same instant but
10 m/s and 40 m/s respectively. Which of the with different forward accelerations. The bus has
following graph best represents the time variation of acceleration 2 m/s2 and the car has acceleration
relative position of the second stone with respect to 4 m/s2. The car will catch up with the bus after a
the first? (assume stones do not rebound after hitting time of: (2017)
the ground and neglect air resistance, take
g = 10 m/s2) (The figures are schematic and not (a) 110s (b) 120s
drawn to scale.)
(c) 10 2s (d) 15 s
(2015)
(a) 3. A man in a car at location Q on a straight highway is
moving with speed v. He decides to reach a point P
in a field at a distance d from the highway (from
point M) as shown in the figure. Speed of the car in
the field is half of that on the highway. What should
be the distance RM, so that the time taken to reach P
is minimum?
(2018)
(b)
d
(a) d (b)
2
(c) d d
(c) (d)
2 3
4. The position co-ordinates of a particle moving in a
3-D coordinate system is given by
x = a cos ωt
y = a sin ωt
and z = a ωt
The speed of the particle is: (2019)
(d)
(a) 2 aω (b) aω
(c) 3aω (d) 2aω
@cbseinfinite
5. In a car race on straight road, car A takes a time t (a) R2 = 4 h1 h2 (b) R2 = 16 h1 h2

less than car B at the finish and passes finishing (c) R2 = 2 h1 h2 (d) R2 = h1 h2
point with a speed 'v' more than that of car B. Both 11. A particle is moving with a velocity
the cars start from rest and travel with constant
acceleration a1 and a2 respectively. Then 'v' is equal
=

( )
v K yiˆ + xjˆ , where K is a constant. The general
to: (2019) equation for its path is: (2019)

2 2
2a1 a 2 (a) y = x + constant (b) y = x + constant
(a) t (b) 2a1 a 2 t
a1 + a 2 2 2
(c) y = x + constant (d) xy = constant
a1 + a 2 12. Two guns A and B can fire bullets at speeds 1 km/s
(c) a1 a 2 t (d) t and 2 km/s respectively. From a point on a
2
horizontal ground, they fire bullets in all possible
6. ( )
A particle moves from the point 2.0iˆ + 4.0ˆj m , at t directions. The ratio of maximum areas covered by
( )
= 0, with an initial velocity 5.0iˆ + 4.0ˆj ms −1 . It is
the bullets fired by the two guns, on the ground is:
(2019)
acted upon by a constant force which produces a (a) 1:16 (b) 1:2
( )
constant acceleration 4.0iˆ + 4.0ˆj ms −2 . What is the (c) 1:4 (d) 1:8
distance of the particle from the origin at time 2 s? 13. A body is projected at t = 0 with a velocity 10ms–1 at
(2019) an angle of 60° with the horizontal. The radius of
curvature of its trajectory at t = 1 s is R. Neglecting
(a) 15 m (b) 20 2m
air resistance and taking acceleration due to gravity
(c) 5 m (d) 10 2m g = 10 ms–2, the value of R is
7. The stream of a river is flowing with a speed of (2019)
2 km/h. A swimmer can swim at a speed of 4 km/h. (a) 10.3 m (b) 2.8 m
What should be the direction of the swimmer with (c) 2.5 m (d) 5.1 m
respect to the flow of the river to cross the river
14. A passenger train of length 60 m travels at a speed
straight? (2019)
of 80 km/h. Another freight train of length 120 m
(a) 90° (b) 150°
travels at a speed of 30 km/h. The ratio of time taken
(c) 120° (d) 60° by the passenger train to completely cross the freight
8. The position vector of a particle changes with time train when they are moving in same direction to that

according to the relation r ( t = ( )
) 15t 2 î + 4 − 20t 2 ˆj. when they are in the opposite directions is
What is the magnitude of the acceleration at t = 1 (in (2019)
proper units)? (2019) 11 5
(a) (b)
(a) 40 (b) 25 5 2
(c) 100 (d) 50 3 25
9. A shell is fired from a fixed artillery gun with an (c) (d)
2 11
initial speed u such that it hits the target on the
15. A person standing on an open ground hears the
ground at a distance R from it. If t1 and t2 are the
sound of a jet aeroplane, coming from north at an
values of the time taken by it to hit the target in two
angle 60o with ground level. But he finds the
possible ways, the product t1t2 is: (2019)
aeroplane right vertically above his position. If ‘v’ is
R R the speed of sound, speed of the plane is nv, where n
(a) (b)
4g g is:
R 2R (2019)
(c) (d)
2g g 3 2
(a) (b)
10. Two particles are projected from the same point with 2 3
same speed u such that they have the same range R,
1
but different maximum height, h1 and h2. Which of (c) 1 (d)
the following is correct? (2019) 2
@cbseinfinite
−1  2 
16. Ship A is sailing towards north-east with velocity 3 −1
 =(c) θ sin
=   and v ms
=
v 30iˆ + 50ˆj km/hr, where î points east and ĵ  5 5
north. Ship B is at a distance of 80 km east and
−1  1  5 −1
150 km north of Ship A and is sailing towards west =(d) θ sin
=   and v ms
 5  3
at 10 km/hr. A will be at minimum distance from B
in: 20. A particle moves such that its position vector

(2019) r ( t )= cos ωtiˆ + sin ωt ˆj , where ω is a constant
(a) 4.2 hr (b) 2.6 hr and t is time. Then which of the following

statements is true for the velocity v ( t ) and
(c) 3.2 hr (d) 2.2 hr

17. A ball is thrown upward with an initial acceleration a ( t ) of the particle?
velocity V0 from the surface of the earth. The (2020)
  
motion of the ball is affected by a drag force equal (a) v and a both are perpendicular to r
mγv 2 (where m is mass of the ball, v is its   
(b) v and r both are parallel to r
instantaneous velocity and γ is a constant). Time   
(c) v is perpendicular to r and a is directed away
taken by the ball to rise to its zenith is: from the origin
(2019)   
(d) v is perpendicular to r and a is directed
1  γ  1  γ  towards the origin
(a) tan −1  V0  (b) sin −1  V0 
( γg) γg 21. A particle starts from the origin at t = 0 with an
 g   g  
initial velocity of u = 3iˆ from origin and moves in
1  γ  1  2γ  the x-y plane with a constant acceleration
(c) ln  V0  (d) tan −1  V0 
γg  g  2γ g  g  =

( )
a 6iˆ + 4ˆj m/s2. The x -coordinate of the particle
18. A plane is inclined at an angle α= 30° with respect at the instant when its y-coordinate is 32m is D
to the horizontal. A particle is projected with a speed meters. The value of D is: (2020)
u = 2ms −1 , from the base of the plane, as shown in (a) 60 (b) 50
figure. The distance from the base, at which the (c) 32 (d) 40
particle hits the plane is close to: (Take g = 10ms −2 ) 22. Train A and train B are running on parallel tracks in
the opposite directions with speeds of 36 km/hour
and 72 km/hour, respectively. A person is walking
in train A in the direction opposite to its motion with
a speed of 1.8 km/hour. Speed (in ms–1) of this
person as observed from train B will be close to :
(2019) (take the distance between the tracks as negligible)
(a) 20 cm (b) 18 cm (2020)

−1 −1
(c) 26 cm (d) 14 cm (a) 29.5 ms (b) 30.5 ms
19. The trajectory of a projectile near the surface of the (c) 31.5 ms −1 (d) 28.5 ms −1
earth is given as =
y 2x − 9x 2 . If it were launched 23. Starting from the origin at time t = 0, with initial
at an angle θ with speed v then (g = 10 ms–2): velocity 5 ĵms −1 , a particle moves in the x – y plane
(2019) with a constant acceleration of (10iˆ + 4ˆj) ms −2 . At
=(a) θ cos
= −1  1  5 −1 time t, its coordinates are ( 20 m, y 0 m ) . The values
  and v ms
 5 3
of t and y 0 are, respectively: (2020)
−1  2  3 (a) 5 s and 25 m (b) 2 s and 18 m
=(b) θ cos
=   and v ms −1
 5 5 (c) 2 s and 24 m (d) 4 s and 52 m
@cbseinfinite
24. When a car is at rest, its driver sees rain drops 27. A mosquito is moving with a velocity
falling on it vertically. When driving the car with 
v= 0.5 t 2 î + 3 t ˆj + 9 kˆ m / s and accelerating in
speed v, he sees that rain drops are coming at an
uniform conditions. What will be the direction of
angle 60º from the horizontal. On further increasing
mosquito after 2s? (2021)
the speed of the car to (1 + β)v, this angle changes to
45º. The value of β is close to: (2020) 2
(a) tan −1   from y-axis
(a) 0.50 (b) 0.73 3
5
(c) 0.37 (d) 0.41 (b) tan −1   from x-axis
25. A particle is moving along the x-axis with its 2
coordinate with time t given by x(t)= −3t2 + 8t + 10 2
(c) tan −1   from x-axis
m. Another particle is moving along the y-axis with 3
its coordinate as a function of time given by
y = 5 − 8t3 m. At t = 1 s, the speed (in m/s) of the 5
(d) tan −1   from y-axis
second particle as measured in the frame of the first 2
particle is given as v . Then v(in m/s) is 28. A swimmer can swim with velocity of 12 km/h in
_________. (2020) still water. Water flowing in a river has velocity 6
km/h. The direction with respect to the direction of
26. The trajectory of a projectile in a vertical plane is
flow of river water he should swim in order to reach
y = αx − β x 2 where α and β are constants and x the point on the other bank just opposite to his
& y are respectively the horizontal and vertical starting point is. (Round off to the Nearest Integer)
distances of the projectile from the point of (Find the angle in degrees) (2021)
projection. The angle of projection θ and the
maximum height attained H are respectively given
by
(2021)
4α 2 α2
(a) tan −1 α, (b) tan −1 α,
β 4β
β α α2
2
(c) tan −1   , (d) tan −1 β,
α β 2β
@cbseinfinite
EXERCISE – 3 : ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

Single Choice Questions 7. A particle A is projected from the ground with an
1. There are two values of time for which a projectile is initial velocity of 10 m/s at an angle of 60° with
at the same height. The sum of these two times is horizontal. From what height h should another
equal to particle B be projected horizontally with velocity
(a) 3T/2 (b) 4T/3 5 m/s so that both the particles collide in ground at
(c) 3T/4 (d) T point C if both are projected simultaneously
(T = time of flight of the projectile) (g = 10 m/s2)
2. The trajectory of a projectile in a vertical plane is B 5 m/s
y = ax – bx2, where a and b are constants and x and y
are respectively horizontal and vertical distance of
h
the projectile from the point of projection. The 10 m/s
maximum height attained by the particle and the 60°
angle of projection from the horizontal are A C
2 2 (a) 10 m (b) 30 m
b a
(a) , tan −1 ( b ) (b) , tan −1 ( 2a )
2a b (c) 15 m (d) 25 m
a 2
2a 2 8. A particle is projected at an angle of 60° above the
(c) , tan −1 ( a ) (d) , tan −1 ( a ) horizontal with a speed of 10 m/s. After some time
4b b
the direction of its velocity makes an angle of 30°
3. A particle moves in the x-y plane according to the
above the horizontal. The speed of the particle at this
law x = kt and y =kt (1 – at), where k and a are
instant is
positive constants and t is time. What is the equation
of trajectory of the particle? 5
(a) m/s (b) 5 3 m / s
αx 2 3
(a) y = kx (b) y= x −
k 10
(c) 5 m/s (d) m/s
αx 2 3
(c) y = (d) y = αx
k 9. In projectile motion, the modulus of rate of change
4. The equation of motion of a projectile is of speed
3
=y 12x − x 2 . Given that g =10 ms–2, what is the (a) is constant
4 (b) first increases then decreases
range of the projectile
(c) first decreases then increases
(a) 12.4 m (b) 16 m
(d) none of these
(c) 30.6 m (d) 36.0 m
5. A ball is dropped from the top of a tower in a high- 10. Two particles A and B are projected simultaneously
speed wind. The wind exerts a steady force on the from a point situated on a horizontal plane. The
ball. The path followed by the ball will be particle A is projected vertically up with a velocity
(a) Parabola (b) Circular arc uA while the particle B is projected up at an angle of
(c) Elliptical arc (d) Straight line 30° with horizontal with a velocity uB. After 5 sec
6. A particle is projected from the ground with an the particles were observed moving mutually
initial speed of u at an angle θ with horizontal. The perpendicular to each other. The velocity of
average velocity of the particle between its point of projection of the particle uA and uB respectively are
projection and highest point of trajectory is (a) 50 ms–1, 100 m/s
u u (b) 100 ms–1, 50 ms–1
(a) 1 + 2 cos 2 θ (b) 1 + cos 2 θ
2 2 (c) uA > 25 m/s and uB <50 m/s
u
(c) 1 + 3cos 2 θ (d) u cos θ (d) none of these
2
@cbseinfinite
11. A projectile is fired at an angle of 30° to the 16. A projectile is thrown in the upward direction
horizontal such that the vertical component of its making an angle of 60° with the horizontal
initial velocity is 80 m/s. Its time of flight is T. Its direction with a velocity of 147 ms–1. Then the time
velocity at t = T/4 has a magnitude of nearly after which its inclination with the horizontal is 45°
(a) 200 m/s (b) 300 m/s is
(c) 140 m/s (d) 100 m/s (a) 15 s (b) 10.98 s
12. A particle A is projected vertically upwards. (c) 5.49 s (d) 2.745 s
Another particle B of same mass is projected at an
17. From the top of a tower of height 40 m a ball is
angle of 45°. Both reach the same height. The ratio
projected upwards with a speed of 20 m/s at an
of the initial kinetic energy of A to that of B is
angle of elevation of 30o. Then the ratio of the total
1
[given KE = mv 2 ] time taken by the ball to hit the ground to its time of
2 flight (time taken to come back to the same
(a) 1:2 (b) 2:1 elevation) is (take g = 10 ms2)
(c) 1 : 2 (d) 2 :1 (a) 2:1 (b) 3:1
13. A body of mass m is thrown upwards at an angle θ (c) 3:2 (d) 4:1
with the horizontal with velocity v. While rising up 18. Three identical balls are thrown with same speed at
the velocity of the mass after t seconds will be angles of 15°, 45° and 75° with the horizontal
(a) (v cos θ) 2 + (v sin θ) 2 respectively. The ratio of their distances from the
point of projection to the point where they hit the
(b) (v cos θ − v sin θ) 2 − gt ground will be
(c) v 2 + g 2 t 2 − (2 v sin θ) gt (a) 1: 2 :1 (b) 1 : 2 : 1

(c) 2 : 4 : 3 (d) 1: 2 : 3
(d) v 2 + g 2 t 2 − (2 v cos θ) gt
19. A projectile is thrown at an angle of 40° with the
14. From the top of a tower 19.6 m high, a ball is horizontal and its range is R1. Another projectile is
thrown horizontally. If the line joining the point of
thrown at an angle 40° with the vertical and its range
projection to the point where it hits the ground
is R2. What is the relation between R1 and R2?
makes an angle of 45° with the horizontal, then the
initial velocity of the ball is (a) R1 = R2 (b) R1 = 2 R2
(a) 9.8 ms–1 (b) 4.9 ms–1 (c) R2 = 2 R1 (d) R1 = 4 R2/5
(c) 14.7 ms–1 (d) 2.8 ms–1 20. A cricketer hits a ball with a velocity 25 m/s at 60°
15. A particle is projected with a speed V from a point above the horizontal. How far (approximately)
O making an angle of 30° with the vertical. At the above the ground it passes over a fielder 50 m from
same instant, a second particle is thrown vertically the bat (assume the ball is struck very close to the
upwards with a velocity v from a point A. The two ground)
particles reach H, the highest point on the parabolic (a) 8.2 m (b) 9.0 m
V
path of particle simultaneously. Then ratio is (c) 11.6 m (d) 12.7 m
v
21. From a point on the ground at a distance 2 metres
from the foot of a vertical wall, a ball is thrown at an
angle of 45° which just clears the top of the wall and
afterward strikes the ground at a distance 4m on the
other side. The height of the wall is
2 3
(a) m (b) m
3 4
1 4
(a) 3 2 (b) 2 3 (c) m (d) m
3 3
2 3
(c) (d)
3 2
@cbseinfinite
22. Two projectiles A and B are projected with same 28. A body is projected at an angle of 30° with the
speed and angle of projection 30° for the projectile horizontal with speed 30 m/s. What is the angle with
A and 45° for the projectile B. If RA and RB are the the horizontal after 1.5 seconds? Take g = 10 m/s2.
horizontal ranges for the two projectiles, then (a) 0° (b) 30°
(a) RA = RB (c) 60° (d) 90°
(b) RA > RB 29. From certain height, two bodies are projected
horizontally with velocities 10 m/s and 20 m/s. They
(c) RA < RB
hit the ground in t1 and t2 seconds. Then
(d) the information is insufficient to decide the
(a) t1 = t2 (b) t1 = 2 t2
relation of RA and RB
23. A projectile is projected at an angle of 15° to the (c) t2 = 2 t1 (d) t1 = 2 t 2
horizontal with some speed v. If another projectile is 30. A body is projected with velocity v1 from the point
projected with the same speed, then it must be
A as shown in figure. At the same time, another
projected at what angle (other than 15°) with the
body is projected vertically upwards from B with
horizontal so as to have the same range.
velocity v2. The point B lies vertically below the
(a) It is never possible (b) 12.5°
v2
(c) 75° (d) 65° highest point. For both the bodies to collide,
v1
24. A fielder in a cricket match throws a ball from the
should be
boundary line to the wicket keeper. The ball
describes a parabolic path. Which of the following
quantities remains constant during the ball’s motion
in air? (neglect air resistance)
(a) its kinetic energy
(b) its speed
(c) the horizontal component of its velocity (a) 2 (b) 0.5
(d) the vertical component of its velocity (c) 3/ 2 (d) 1
25. The height y and the distance x along the horizontal 31. An aeroplane is flying at a constant horizontal
plane of a projectile on a certain planet (with no velocity of 600 km/h at an elevation of 6 km
surrounding atmosphere) are given by y = (8t – 5) towards a point directly above the target on the
metre and x = 6t metre where t is in seconds. The earth’s surface. At an appropriate time, the pilot
velocity of projection is released a ball so that it strikes the target on the
(a) 8 m/sec earth. The ball will appear to be falling
(b) 6 m/sec (a) on a parabolic path as seen by pilot in the plane
(c) 10 m/sec (b) vertically along a straight path as seen by an
(d) not obtained from the data observer on the ground near the target
26. A body is projected horizontally with speed 20 m/s (c) on a parabolic path as seen by an observer on the
from top of a tower. What will be its speed nearly ground near the target
after 5 sec? Take g = 10 m/s2 (d) on a zig-zag path as seen by pilot in the plane
(a) 54 m/s (b) 20 m/s 32. Three particles A, B and C are thrown from the top
(c) 50 m/s (d) 70 m/s of a tower 100 m in height with the same speed
10 m/s. A is thrown straight up, B is thrown straight
27. A body is projected horizontally with speed 20 m/s
down, and C is thrown horizontally. They hit the
from top of a tower, what will be the displacement
ground with the speeds vA, vB and vC respectively.
of the body if it hits the ground after 5 sec and
doesn’t bounce (quote nearest integer) Then
(a) 100 m (b) 125 m (a) vA > vB = vC (b) vB > vC > vA
(c) 160 m (d) 225 m (c) vA = vB = vC (d) vA = vB > vC
@cbseinfinite
33. A body is thrown horizontally with a velocity 39. A particle P is projected from a point on the surface
2 gh from the top of a tower of height h. It strikes of smooth inclined plane (see figure).
Simultaneously another particle Q is released on the
the level ground through the foot of the tower at a
smooth inclined plane from the same position. P and
distance x from the tower. The value of x is
Q collide on the inclined plane after t = 4 second.
(a) h (b) h/2 The speed of projection of P is nearly:
(c) 2h (d) 2h/3
34. Consider a boy on a trolley who throws a ball with
speed 20 m/s with respect to ground at an angle 37°
with vertical and trolley is moving with a speed
10 m/s in horizontal direction then what will be
maximum distance travelled by ball parallel to road :
(a) 20.2 m (b) 12 m (a) 5 m/s (b) 10 m/s
(c) 31.2 m (d) 62.4 m (c) 15 m/s (d) 20 m/s
35. Two men A and B, A standing on the extended floor 40. A ball is projected horizontally with a speed v from
nearby a building and B is standing on the roof of the top of a plane inclined at an angle 45° with the
the building. Both throw a stone towards each other. horizontal. How far from the point of projection will
Then which of the following will be correct. the ball strike the plane?
(a) stone will hit A, but not B
v2 v2
(b) stone will hit B, but not A (a) (b) 2
g g
(c) stone will not hit either of them, but will collide
with each other 2 v2  2 v2 
(c) (d) 2  
(d) none of these
g  g 
36. A particle is projected from a point (0, 1) on Y–axis 41. Position vector of a particle moving in x-y plane at

(assume + Y direction vertically upwards) aiming time t is: r = a (1 − cos ωt ) î + a sin ωt ˆj. The path of
towards a point (4, 9). It fell on ground along x axis the particle is
in 1 sec.
(a) a circle of radius a and centre at (a, 0)
Taking g = 10 m/s2 and all coordinate in metres.
(b) a circle of radius a and centre at (0, 0)
Find the x–coordinate of the point where it fell.
(c) an ellipse
(a) 3 (b) 4
(d) neither a circle nor an ellipse
(c) 2 (d) 2 5
42. A particle moves in x-y plane. The position vector
37. The position vector of a particle is given as

of particle at any time t=

is r { }
( 2t ) î + ( 2t 2 ) ˆj m.
( ) ( )
r = t 2 − 4t + 6 î + t 2 ˆj. The time after which the
The rate of change of θ at time t = 2 second. (where
velocity vector and acceleration vector becomes θ is the angle which its velocity vector makes with
perpendicular to each other is equal to positive x-axis) is
(a) 1 sec (b) 2 sec
2 1
(c) 1.5 sec (d) not possible (a) rad / s (b) rad / s
17 14
38. A particle is projected up an inclined plane with
4 6
initial speed v = 20 m/s at an angle θ =30o with (c) rad / s (d) rad / s
7 5
plane. The component of its velocity perpendicular
43. A particle has an initial velocity of 3iˆ + 4 ˆj and an
to plane when it strikes the plane is
acceleration of 0.4 î + 0.3 ˆj . Its speed after 10 s is:
(a) 10 3 m / s (b) 10 m/s
(a) 10 unit (b) 7 unit
(c) 5 3 m / s (d) data is insufficient
(c) 7 2 unit (d) 8.5 unit
@cbseinfinite
44. Velocity and acceleration of a particle initially are u2 1

(a) 1 −

( ) 
( )
(b)
=
v 3iˆ + 4 ˆj m/s and a= − 6 î + 8 ˆj m/s2 v2 u2
1− 2
respectively. Initially particle is at origin. maximum v
x–coordinate of particle will be: u2 1
(c) 1 + (d)
(a) 1.5 m (b) 0.75 m v2 u2
1+ 2
(c) 2.25 m (d) 4.0 m v
  50. A river is flowing from West to East at a speed of
45. Let v and a denote the velocity and acceleration
respectively of a particle moving in a circular path 5 metres per minute. A man on the south bank of the
then, river, capable of swimming at 10 metres per minute
  in still water, wants to swim across the river in
(a) v . a < 0 all the time shortest time. He should swim in a direction
 
(b) v . a > 0 all the time (a) due North (b) 30° East of North
 
(c) v . a = 0 all the time (c) 30° West of North (d) 60° East of North
(d) (a),(b) & (c) all are possible depending upon the 51. A river is flowing from west to east at a speed of
direction of net acceleration. 20 m/min. A man on the south bank of the river,
capable of swimming at 10 m/min in still water,
46. A person walks up a stationary escalator in time t1. If
wants to swim across the river without any drift. He
he remains stationary on the moving escalator, then should swim in a direction:
it can take him up in time t2. How much time would
(a) due north
it take him to walk up the moving escalator.
(b) 30° east of north
t +t
(a) 1 2 (b) t1 + t 2 (c) 30° west of north
2
(d) zero drift is not possible
t t
(c) 1 2 (d) t1 + t 2 52. The rowing speed of a man relative to water is
t1 + t 2 5 km/h and the speed of water flow is 3 km/h. At
47. A horizontal wind is blowing with a velocity v what angle to the river flow should he head if he
towards north-east. A man starts running towards wants to reach a point on the other bank, directly
north with acceleration a. The time after which man opposite to starting point:
will feel the wind blowing towards east is : (a) 127° (b) 143°
v 2v (c) 120° (d) 150°
(a) (b)
a a 53. Two cars are moving in the same direction with the
same speed of 30 km/h. They are separated by 5 km.
v 2v
(c) (d) What is the speed of the car moving in the opposite
2a a
direction if it meets the two cars at an interval of
48. Two trains are each 50 m long starts moving parallel 4 minutes?
towards each other at speeds 10 m/s and 15 m/s (a) 15 km/h (b) 30 km/h
respectively, after how much time will they pass
(c) 45 km/h (d) 60 km/h
each other?
(a) 8s (b) 4s
Multiple Choice Questions
(c) 2s (d) 6s
54. An observer moves with a constant speed along the
49. On a calm day a boat can go across a lake and return line joining two stationary objects. He will observe
in time T0 at a speed v. On a rough day there is that the two objects.
uniform current at speed u to help the onward (a) have the same speed
journey and impede the return journey. If the time (b) have the same velocity
taken to go across and return on the rough day be T,
(c) move in the same direction
then T/T0 is:
(d) move in opposite direction
@cbseinfinite
55. A particle is projected at an angle θ from ground (a) the particles will collide the plane with same
with speed u (g = 10 m/s2) speed
(a) if u = 10 m/s and θ = 30°, then time of flight (b) the times of flight of each particle are same
will be 1 sec. (c) both particles strike the plane perpendicularly
(b) if u = 10 3 m/s and θ = 60°, then time of flight (d) the particles will collide in mid-air if projected
will be 3 sec. simultaneously and time of flight of each particle
(c) if u = 10 3 m/s and θ = 60°, then after 2 sec is less than the time of collision.
velocity becomes perpendicular to initial 59. Choose the correct alternative(s)
velocity. (a) If the greatest height to which a man can throw a
(d) if u = 10 m/s and θ = 30°, then velocity never stone is h, then the greatest horizontal distance
becomes perpendicular to initial velocity during up to which he can throw the stone is 2h
its flight. (b) The angle of projection for a projectile motion
56. A particle leaves the origin with an initial velocity whose range R is n times the maximum height H

( )
u = 3iˆ m/s and a constant acceleration is tan–1 (4/n)

a= ( ) 
−1.0 î − 0.5 ˆj m/s2. its velocity v and position
(c) The time-of-flight T and the horizontal range R
of a projectile are connected by the equation

vector r when it reaches its maximum x-co- gT2 = 2R tan θ where θ is the angle of
ordinate are: projection

(a) v = −2ˆj

( )
(b) v = −1.5jˆ m / s (d) A ball is thrown vertically up. Another ball is
thrown at an angle θ with the vertical. Both of
=
(c)

r ( 4.5iˆ − 2.25jˆ ) m 
(d) =
r ( 3iˆ − 2ˆj) m them remain in air for the same period of time.
Then the ratio of heights attained by the two balls
57. In a projectile motion let tOA = t1 and tAB = t2. the
is 1 : 1.
horizontal displacement from O to A is R1 and from
60. Two particles A and B are located in x-y plane at
A to B is R2. Maximum height is H and time of
points (0, 0) and (0, 4 m). They simultaneously start
flight is T. If air drag is to be considered, then
moving with velocities.
choose the correct alternative (s)
 
y v A = 2ˆj m/s and v B = 2iˆ m/s. Select the correct
A alternative(s)
(a) the distance between them is constant
H
B (b) the distance between them first decreases and
x
O then increases
R1 R2
(c) the shortest distance between them is 2 2 m
(a) t1 will decrease while t2 will increase
(d) time after which they are at minimum distance is
(b) H will increase
1s
(c) R1 will decrease while R2 will increase
61. The co-ordinate of the particle in x-y plane are given
(d) T may increase or decrease
as x = 2 + 2t + 4t2 and y = 4t + 8t2 the motion of the
58. From an inclined plane two particles are projected particle is
with same speed at same angle θ , one up and other
(a) along a straight line
down the plane as shown in figure. Which of the
following statement(s) is/are correct? (b) uniformly accelerated
(c) along a parabolic path
(d) nonuniformly accelerated
@cbseinfinite

62. River is flowing with a velocity v R = 4iˆ m/s. A boat Assertion & Reason

( )
is moving with a velocity v BR = −2iˆ + 4ˆj of m/s (A) If both Assertion and reason are true and reason is
the correct explanation of the assertion.
relative to river. The width of the river is 100 m
(B) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is not
along y-direction. Choose the correct alternative(s)
the correct explanation of the assertion.
(a) the boatman will cross the river in 25 s
(C) If assertion is true but reason is false.
(b) absolute velocity of boatman is 2 5 m/s
(D) If assertion is false but reason is true.
(c) drift of the boatman along the river current is 50
(E) If both assertion and reason are false.
m
(d) the boatman can never cross the river
68. Assertion: For a particle moving along a straight
line or in a plane, the average velocity vector over a
Numerical Value Type Questions
time interval can be equal to instantaneous velocity
63. A particle of mass m = 2 kg is projected along X–
–1
at the end of the interval, even if velocity of particle
axis with velocity V0 = 5 ms . It is acted on by a is not constant.
variable force acting along Y–axis as shown in   
r −r dr
figure. What is the magnitude of its velocity at 2 Reason: 2 1 =
–1 t 2 − t1 d t
seconds? (in ms )
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
(e) E
69. Assertion: Two stones are simultaneously projected
from level ground from same point with same
speeds but different angles with horizontal. Both
stones move in same vertical plane. Then the two
64. A man standing on a road has to hold his umbrella at
stones may collide in mid-air.
37° with the vertical to keep the rain away. He
throws the umbrella and starts running at 12 km/h. Reason: For two stones projected simultaneously
He finds that raindrops are hitting his head from same point with same speed at different angles
vertically. Find the speed (in km/hr) of raindrops with horizontal, their trajectories may intersect at
with respect to the moving man. some point.
 
65. V= A ( )
x î + 2 ˆj m/s and V= B ( )
3iˆ + 2 ˆj m/s find x
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
such that, the relative speed of A with respect to B
becomes 5 m/s. (e) E
66. A particle is projected up an inclined plane of 70. Assertion: In a plane to plane projectile motion, the
inclination β at an elevation α to the horizontal. angle between instantaneous velocity vector and
Find the ratio between tan α and tan β , if the acceleration vector can be anything between 0 to π
particle strikes the plane horizontally. (excluding the limiting case).
67. A train takes 2 minutes to acquire its full speed 60 Reason: In plane to plane projectile motion,
kmph from rest and 1 minute to come to rest from acceleration vector is always pointing vertical
the full speed. If somewhere in between two stations downwards. (neglect air friction).
1 km of the track be under repair and the limited (a) A (b) B
speed on this part be fixed to 20 kmph, find the late
(c) C (d) D
running of the train ( in sec) on account of this repair
work, assuming otherwise normal at running of the (e) E
train between the stations.
@cbseinfinite
71. Assertion: Two particles of different mass, Paragraph Type Questions

projected with same velocity and angle of Using the following Comprehension, Solve Q. 75 to Q. 78
projection, the maximum height attained by both the Passage
particle will be same.
We know how by neglecting the air resistance, the
Reason: The maximum height of projectile is problems of projectile motion can be easily solved
independent of particle mass. and analysed. Now we consider the case of the
(a) A (b) B collision of a ball with a wall. In this case the
(c) C (d) D problem of collision can be simplified by
(e) E considering the case of elastic collision only. When
a ball collides with a wall, we can divide its velocity
72. Assertion: When a body is dropped or thrown
into two components, one perpendicular to the wall
horizontally from the same height, it would reach
and other parallel to the wall. If the collision is
the ground at the same time.
elastic, then the perpendicular component of
Reason: Horizontal velocity has no effect on the velocity of the ball gets reversed with the same
vertical direction. magnitude.
(a) A (b) B Vcos Vcos
(c) C (d) D
(e) E v Vsin Vsin
73. Assertion: In order to hit a target, a man should
point his rifle in the same direction as target. Velocity just Components of velocity Components of velocity
before collision just before collision just after collision
Reason: The horizontal range of the bullet is
independent of the angle of projection with The other parallel component of velocity will remain
horizontal. constant if wall is given smooth.
(a) A (b) B Now let us take a problem. Three balls ‘A’ and ‘B’
(c) C (d) D & ‘C’ are projected from ground with same speed at
same angle with the horizontal. The balls A, B and
(e) E
C collide with the wall during their flight in air and
all three collide perpendicularly with the wall as
Match the Column shown in figure.
74. A ball is projected from the ground with velocity v
such that its range is maximum. A C
B
Column–I Column–II
(A) Velocity at half of the (P) 3 v/2 75. Which of the following relation about the maximum
maximum height height H of the three balls from the ground during
their motion in air is correct:
v
(B) Velocity at the maximum (Q) (a) HA = HC > HB (b) HA > HB = HC
2
(c) HA > HC > HB (d) HA = HB = HC
height
76. If the time taken by the ball A to fall back on ground
(C) Change in its velocity when (R) v 2
is 4 seconds and that by ball B is 2 seconds. Then
it returns to the ground the time taken by the ball C to reach the inclined
v 5 plane after projection will be:
(D) Average velocity when it (S)
2 2 (a) 6 sec (b) 4 sec
reaches the maximum height (c) 3 sec (d) 5 sec
@cbseinfinite
77. The maximum height attained by ball ‘A’ from the Paragraph Type Questions
ground is Using the following comprehension, solve Q. 79 & 80
(a) 10 m Passage
(b) 15 m An aircraft moving with a speed of 250 m/s is at a
(c) 20 m height of 6000 m, just overhead of an anti-aircraft
gun.
(d) insufficient information
79. If the muzzle velocity of the shell is 500 m/s, the
78. The maximum height attained by ball B from
firing angle θ should be
ground is:
(a) 20 m (b) 5 m
(c) 15 m (d) none of these
(a) 30o (b) 45o

(c) 60o (d) None of these
80. The time after which the aircraft is hit is:
(a) 20 3 s (b) 15 3 s
(c) 20 s (d) 10 3 s
@cbseinfinite
EXERCISE – 4 : PREVIOUS YEAR JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

Single Choice Questions 3. A train is moving along a straight line with a constant
1. On a frictionless horizontal surface, assumed to be acceleration a. A boy standing in the train throws a
the x-y plane, a small trolley A is moving along a ball forward with a speed of 10 m/s, at an angle of
straight line parallel to the y-axis (see figure) with a 60° to the horizontal. The boy has to move forward
constant velocity of ( 3 −1 ) m/s. At a particular by 1.15 m inside the train to catch the ball back at the
initial height. The acceleration of the train, in m/s2, is.
instant when the line OA makes an angle of 45° with (2011)
the x-axis, a ball is thrown along the surface from the
4. A projectile is given an initial velocity of ( î + 2ˆj )
origin O. Its velocity makes an angle φ with the
x-axis and it hits the trolley. (2002) m/s, where î is a along the ground and ĵ is along the
y vertical. If g = 10 m/s2, the equation of its trajectory
A is (2013)
(a) y = x – 5x2 (b) y = 2x – 5x2
(c) 4y = 2x – 5x2 (d) 4y = 2x – 25x2
45°
5. Airplanes A and B are flying with constant velocity
x in the same vertical plane of angle 30° and 60° with
O
respect to the horizontal respectively as shown in
(a) The motion of the ball is observed from the frame
of the trolley. Calculate the angle θ made by the figure. The speed of A is 100 3 ms–1. At time t = 0s,
velocity vector of the ball with the x-axis in this an observer in A finds B at a distance of 500 m. This
frame. observer sees B moving with a constant velocity
perpendicular to the line of motion of A. If at t = t 0 ,
(b) Find the speed of the ball with respect to the
surface, if φ = 4θ/3. A just escapes being hit by B, to in seconds is:
(2014)
Assertion & Reason
(a) If Statement I is true. Statement II is true; Statement
II is the correct explanation for Statement I.
(b) If Statement I is true, Statement II is true; Statement
II is not a correct explanation for Statement I.
(c) If Statement I is true; Statement II is false. 6. A rocket is moving in a gravity free space with a
(d) If Statement I is false; Statement II is true. constant acceleration of 2ms–2 along + x direction
(see figure). The length of a chamber inside the
2. Statement–I: For an observer looking out through rocket is 4m. A ball is thrown from the left end of the
the window of a fast-moving train, the nearby objects chamber in + x direction with a speed of 0.3 ms–1
appear to move in the opposite direction to the train, relative to the rocket. At the same time, another ball
while the distant objects appear to be stationary. is thrown in -x direction with a speed of 0.2ms–1 from
its right end relative to the rocket. The time in
Statement–II: If the observer and the object are
  seconds when the two balls hit each other is:
moving at velocities v1 and v 2 respectively with
(2014)
reference to a laboratory frame, the velocity of the
 
object with respect to the observer is v 2 − v1 .
(2008)
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
@cbseinfinite
7. A ball is projected from the ground at an angle of 45° 9. A projectile is thrown from a point O on the ground
with the horizontal surface. It reaches a maximum at an angle 45° from the vertical and with a speed
height of 120 m and returns to the ground. Upon 5 2m / s . The projectile at the highest point of its
hitting the ground for the first time, it loses half of its trajectory splits into two equal parts. One part falls
kinetic energy. Immediately after the bounce, the vertically down to the ground, 0.5 s after the splitting.
velocity of the ball makes an angle of 30° with the The other part, t seconds after the splitting, falls to the
horizontal surface. The maximum height it reaches ground at a distance x meters from the point O. The
after the bounce, it metres, is........... (2018)
acceleration due to gravity. g = 10m / s 2
8. Starting at time t = 0 from the origin with speed The value of t is ___ (2021)
1ms–1, a particle follows a two-dimensional trajectory
10. A projectile is thrown from a point O on the ground
in the x-y plane so that its coordinates are related by
at an angle 45° from the vertical and with a speed
x2
the equation y = . The x and y components of its 5 2m / s . The projectile at the highest point of its
2
trajectory splits into two equal parts. One part falls
acceleration are denoted by ax and ay, respectively.
vertically down to the ground, 0.5 s after the splitting.
Then (2020)
The other part, t seconds after the splitting, falls to the
(a) a x = 1ms −2 implies that when the particle is at the
ground at a distance x meters from the point O. The
origin, a y = 1ms −2 acceleration due to gravity. g = 10m / s 2
(b) a x = 0 implies a y = 1ms −2 at all times The value of x(in m) is ___ (2021)
(c) at t = 0, the particle’s velocity points in the x-
direction
(d) a x = 0 implies that at t = 1 s, the angle between
the particle’s velocity and the x axis is 45º
@cbseinfinite
MOTION IN A PLANE AND

RELATIVE MOTION
@cbseinfinite
LAWS OF MOTION AND FRICITON 133
04
SCAN CODE
LAWS OF MOTION AND FRICITON
@cbseinfinite
Chapter
LAWS OF 04AND FRICITON
MOTION 134
1. FORCE
(a) A force is something which changes or tends to
change the state of rest or motion of a body. It causes
a body to start moving if it is at rest or stop it, if it is
in motion or deflect it from its initial path of motion.
(b) Force is also defined as an interaction between two
bodies. Two bodies can also exert force on each
other even without being in physical contact, e.g., Fig. 4.2
electric force between two charges, gravitational (f) Balanced forces
force between any two bodies of the universe. When an object is in equilibrium, that is, it is not
moving with changing velocity, the net force acting
(c) Force is a vector quantity having SI unit Newton (N)
on it is balanced.
and dimension [MLT-2].
For example, when an apple hangs from a tree, the
(d) Superposition of force: When many forces are weight of the apple is balanced by the force exerted
acting on a single body, the resultant force is by the branch on the apple.
obtained by using the laws of vector addition. (g) Unbalanced forces
→ → → →
F = F1 + F2 + ... Fn When an object is moving with changing velocity,
the net force on it is unbalanced.
For example, when an apple falls from the tree an
unbalanced force equal to its weight is acting on the
apple.
2. TYPE OF FORCE
Fig. 4.1 There are, basically, four forces, which are commonly
→ → encountered in mechanics.
The resultant of the two forces F1 and F2 acting at
(a) Weight: Weight of an object is the force with which
an angle θ is given by: earth attracts it. It is also called the force of gravity
or the gravitational force.
F= F12 + F22 + 2 F1 F2 cos θ
(b) Contact Force: When two bodies come in contact
The resultant force is directed at an angle a with they exert forces on each other that are called contact
respect to force F1 where forces.
F2 sin θ
tan α = (i) Normal Force (N): It is the component of
F1 + F2 cos θ contact force normal to the surface. It measures
(e) Lami’s theorem: If three forces F1, F2 and F3 are how strongly the surfaces in contact are pressed
acting simultaneously on a body and the body is in together.
equilibrium, then according to Lami’s theorem, (ii) Frictional Force (f): It is the component of
F1 F2 F3 contact force parallel to the surface. It opposes
= =
sin (π − α ) sin (π − β ) sin (π − γ ) the relative motion (or attempted motion) of the
two surfaces in contact.
where a, b and g are the angles opposite to the forces
F1, F2 & F3 respectively.
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
Consider, for example, a book lying on a horizontal
surface.
A free body diagram of the book alone would consist of
its weight (W = mg), acting through the centre of gravity
and the reaction (N) exerted on the book by the surface.
Fig. 4.3
(c) Tension: The force exerted by the ends of a taut
string, rope or chain is called the tension. The
direction of tension is so as to pull the body while
that of normal reaction is to push the body.
(d) Spring Force: Every spring resists any attempt to
change its length; the more you alter its length the
harder it resists. The force exerted by a spring is
given by F = –kx, where x is the change in length
and k is the stiffness constant or spring constant (unit Fig. 4.4
Nm–1).
4. NEWTON’S LAWS OF MOTION
3. FREE BODY DIAGRAM 4.1 First Law of Motion
3.1 Internal Forces (a) Every body continues in its state of rest or of
Internal forces are forces exchanged by the objects in the uniform motion in a straight line unless it is
system. Internal forces may cause acceleration in compelled by a resultant force to change that state.
different parts of the system but does not cause any (b) This law is also known as law of inertia. Inertia is
acceleration in the centre of mass of the entire system. the property of inability of a body to change its state
Example: of rest or uniform motion in a straight line unless
If both the bodies involved in friction are considered as some external force acts on it.
a system, then it acts as an internal force. (c) Mass is a measure of inertia of a body.
(d) A frame of reference in which Newton’s first law is
3.2 External Forces
valid is called inertial frame, i.e., if a frame of
External forces are forces caused by external agent
reference is at rest or in uniform motion it is called
present outside of the system. External non-zero net
inertial, otherwise non-inertial.
force imparts an acceleration to the centre of mass of the
system regardless of point of application.
Example: 4.2 Second Law of Motion
Friction is an external force if the body experiencing (a) This law gives the magnitude of force.
friction, is the system.
(b) According to second law of motion, rate of change
of momentum of a body is directly proportional to
3.3 Free Body Diagrams
the resultant force acting on the body, i.e.,
No system, natural or man-made, consists of a single   dp 
body alone or is complete in itself. A single body or a F∝  
 dt 
part of the system can, however be isolated from the rest
 
by appropriately accounting for its effect on the dp
F=K
remaining system. dt
A free body diagram (FBD) consists of a diagrammatic Here, the change in momentum takes place in the
representation of a single body or a sub-system of bodies direction of the applied resultant force. Momentum,
isolated from its surroundings showing all the forces  
p = mv is a measure of sum of the motion
acting on it.
contained in the body.
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
(c) Unit force: It is defined as the force which changes (b) Whenever one force acts on a body it gives rise to
the momentum of a body by unity in unit time. another force called reaction i.e., a single isolated
According to this, K = 1 force is physically impossible. This is why total
 dp d 

dv  dm internal force in an isolated system is always zero.
F = = ( mv ) = m + v
  dp 
.
dt dt dt dt
(c) According to Newton’s second law, F =  .
If the mass of the system is finite and remains  dt 
 
constant w.r.t. time, then (dm/dt) = 0 and  dp  dv 
    If F =0, =0 or   = 0
 dv    p 2 -p1  dt  dt 
F= m  = ma=  
 dt   t  
or v = constant or zero,
(d) External force acting on a body may accelerate it i.e., a body remains at rest or moves with uniform
either by changing the magnitude of velocity or velocity unless acted upon by an external force. This
direction of velocity or both. is Newton’s Ist law.
(i) If the force is parallel or antiparallel to the (d) Newton’s second law can also be expressed as:
 
motion, the path followed by the body is a = p2 − p1 . Hence, if a car and a truck are initially
Ft
straight line. moving with the same momentum, then by the
(ii) If the force is acting perpendicular to the application of same breaking force, both will come
motion of body, it changes only the direction to rest in the same time.
but not the magnitude of velocity. So, the path (e) The second law is a vector law. it is equivalent to
followed by the body is a circle (uniform three equations: Fx = max ; Fy = may ; Fz = maz.
circular motion). A force can only change the component of velocity
(iii) If the force acts at an angle to the motion of in its direction. It has no effect on the component
a body, it changes both the magnitude and perpendicular to it.
  
direction of v . In this case path followed by the (f) F = ma is a local relation. The force at a point on
body may be elliptical, non-uniform circular, space at any instant is related to the acceleration at
parabolic or hyperbolic. that instant. Example: An object on an accelerated
balloon will have acceleration of balloon. The
4.3 Third Law of Motion moment it is dropped, it will have acceleration due
(a) According to this law, for every action there is an to gravity.
equal and opposite reaction. When two bodies A and
4.5 Applications of Newton’s Laws of motion
B exert force on each other, the force by A on B (i.e.,
 There are two kinds of problems in classical mechanics:
action represented by FAB , is always equal and
(a) To find unknown forces acting on a body, given the
opposite to the force by B on A (i.e., reaction
  body’s acceleration, and
represented FBA). Thus, FAB = – FBA .
(b) To predict the future motion of a body, given the
(b) The two forces involved in any interaction between body’s initial position and velocity and the forces
two bodies are called action and reaction. But we acting on it. For either kind of problem, we use
cannot say that a particular force is action and the Newton’s second law. The following general
other one is reaction. strategy is useful for solving such problems:
(c) Action and Reaction force always acts on different (i) Draw a simple, neat diagram of the system.
bodies.
(ii) Isolate the object of interest whose motion is
being analysed. Draw a free body diagram for
4.4 Some Important Points Concerning Newton’s this object, that is, a diagram showing all
Laws of Motion external forces acting on the object. For
(a) The forces of interaction between bodies composing systems containing more than one object, draw
a system are called internal forces. The forces separate diagrams for each objects. Do not
exerted on bodies of a given system by bodies include forces that the object exerts on its
situated outside are called external forces. surroundings.
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
(iii) Establish convenient coordinate axes for each  
FPseudo = − mP a0
body and find the components of the forces
along these axes. Now, apply Newton’s Thus, Newton Second Law with respect to O will be
 
second law, ∑ F = ma in component form.
Check your dimensions to make sure that all
terms have units of force.
(iv) Solve the component equations for the
unknowns. Remember that you must have as
many independent equations as you have   
unknowns in order to obtain a complete FRe al + FPseudo = mP aP , O
solution.   
i.e., FRe al − mP aO = mP aP , O
(v) It is a good idea to check the predictions of 
your solutions for extreme values of the Where aP , O is acceleration of P with respect to observer
variables. You can often detect errors in your O.
results by doing so.
NOTE:
5. FRAME OF REFERENCE If observer is in rotating frame, then Pseudo force is
called “Centrifugal force”.
Before studying the concept of pseudo force let us first Remember: Pseudo force is required only and only if
discuss frame of reference. observer is non-inertial. e.g.
Frame of reference is the way of observation the things. (i) Study of motion with respect to accelerating lift.
(ii) Study of motion with respect to accelerating wedge.
Inertial Frame of Reference: A non-accelerating frame
of reference is called an inertial frame of reference. A
frame of reference moving with a constant velocity is an
inertial frame of reference. 7. APPARENT WEIGHT IN AN ACCELERTED LIFT
Non-inertial Frame of Reference: An accelerating (a) When the lift is at rest or moving with uniform
frame of reference is called a non-inertial frame of
velocity, i.e., a=0:
reference.
mg– R = 0 or R = mg ∴ Wapp. = W0
NOTE:
(i) A rotating frame of reference is a non-inertial frame
of reference, because it is also an accelerating one.
(ii) Earth is rotating about its axis of rotation and it is
revolving around the centre of sun also. So, it is non-
inertial frame of reference. But for most of the cases,
we consider it as an inertial frame of reference.
Fig. 4.5
6. PSEUDO FORCE (Where Wapp. = R = reaction of supporting surface or
reading of a weighing machine and W0= mg = true
It is a fictitious force observed only in non-inertial frames
weight.)
of reference. In a non-initial frame, it acts on a body in a
direction opposite to the acceleration of the frame of (b) When the lift moves upwards with an acceleration
reference. a:
  a
If observer O is non-inertial with acceleration a0 and R – mg = ma or R = m (g + a) = mg 1 + 
still wants to apply Newton’s Second Law on particle P,  g
then observer has to add a “Pseudo force” in addition to
real forces on particle P.
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
 a 9. PROBLEM OF A MASS SUSPENDED FROM

∴ Wapp. = W0 1 + 
 g A VERTICAL STRING
Following cases are possible:
(a) If the carriage (say lift) is at rest or moving
uniformly (in translatory equilibrium), then
T0 = mg.
(b) If the carriage is accelerated up with an
acceleration a, then
 a  a
Fig. 4.6 T = m (g + a) = mg 1 +  = T0 1 + 
 g   g
(c) When the lift moves downwards with an
acceleration a:
 a
mg – R = ma or R = m (g–a) = mg 1 − 
 g
 a
∴ Wapp. =W0 1 −  Fig. 4.8
 g
(c) If the carriage is accelerated down with an
acceleration a, then
 a  a
T = m (g – a) = mg 1 − = T0 1 − 
 g   g
Fig. 4.7
Here, if a > g, Wapp. will be negative. Negative apparent
weight will mean that the body is pressed against the Fig. 4.9
roof of the lift instead of floor.
(d) If the carriage begins to fall freely, then the tension
(d) When the lift falls freely, i.e., a = g: in the string becomes zero.
R = m (g –g) = 0 ∴ Wapp. = 0 (e) If the carriage is accelerated horizontally, then
for an observer inside carriage
8. PROBLEM OF MONKEY CLIMBING A ROPE (i) Mass m experiences a pseudo force ma opposite
to acceleration;
Let T be the tension in the rope. (ii) The mass m is in equilibrium inside the carriage
(a) When the monkey climbs up with uniform speed: and
T = mg. T sin θ = ma, T cos θ = mg, i.e.,
(b) When the monkey moves up with an acceleration
T = m g 2 + a2 ;
a:
T – mg = ma or T = m (g + a).
(c) When the monkey moves down with an
acceleration a:
mg – T = ma or T = m (g – a).
Fig. 4.10N A
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
(iii) The string does not remain vertical but inclines (ii) Locate positions of all movable points from
to the vertical at an angle θ = tan (a/g) opposite
–1 fixed point/axis.
to acceleration; (iii) (a) Write down the relation between length of
(iv) This arrangement is called accelerometer and the string and the position of different
can be used to determine the acceleration of a movable points.
moving carriage from inside by noting the (b) No. of relation must be equal to no. of
deviation of a plumbline suspended from it string.
from the vertical.
(iv) Differentiate it twice to get the relationship
between acceleration of different objects.
10. CONSTRAINED RELATION

Let us try to visualize this situation
Fig. 4.12
For string connecting m1 and m2 :
RRIA
Let the length of the string be l1
Fig. 4.11
(a) If m3 was stationary, then magnitude of
displacements of m1 and m2 would be same and in
opposite direction.
On differentiating it twice:
Let’s say x is the displacement of m1 and m2 when
a1 + a2
m3 is stationary. 0 = (a2 – a) + (a1 – a) + 0 ⇒ a =
2
(b) Now consider the case when m3 displaces by x1,
For string connecting m3 and pulley:
then net displacement of
Let the string length be l2
m1 = x1 – x
m2 = x1 + x
m3 = x1
Differentiate it twice we have
am3 = a1
NOTE:
am=
1
a1 − a If length is decreasing then differentiation of that length
will be negative.
am=
2
a1 + a
∴ On differentiating twice we have
This problem can be approached in other way.
0 = a + (–a3)
Which is more mathematical and do not require
much of visualisation. a = a3
(c) Steps involved to approach problems of Now, we can apply F = ma for different blocks.
multiple pulleys of system having different Solve for a3, a1, a2 and Tension.
accelerations:
(i) Define a fixed point/axis.
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
11. FRICTION 11.2 Laws of limiting friction

(a) Static Friction
Friction is an opposing force that comes into play (i) The force of friction always acts in a direction
when one body actually moves (slides or rolls) or opposite to the direction of relative motion, i.e.,
even tries to move over the surface of another body. friction is of perverse nature.
Thus, force of friction is the force that develops at the (ii) The maximum force of static friction, fms (called
surfaces of contact of two bodies and impedes limiting friction) is directly proportional to the
(opposes) their relative motion. normal reaction (R) between the two surfaces in
contact. i.e.,
f ms ∝ R ... (1)
(i) Frictional force is independent of the area of (iii) The force of limiting friction depends upon the
contact. This is because with increase in area of nature and the state of polish of the two surfaces
contact, force of adhesion also increases (in the in contact and it acts tangential to the interface
same ratio). And the adhesive pressure between the two surfaces.
responsible for friction, remains the same. (iv) The force of limiting friction is independent of the
(ii) When the surfaces in contact are extra smooth, extent of the area of the surfaces in contact as long
distance between the molecules of the surfaces in as the normal reaction remains the same.
contact decreases, increasing the adhesive force
between them. Therefore, the adhesive pressure 11.3 Coefficient of Static Friction
increases, and so does the force of friction.
µs R
We know that f ms ∝ R or f ms =
f ms
11.1 Static friction, Limiting friction and Kinetic or µ s = ... (2)
friction R
The opposing force that comes into play when one Here, µs is a constant of proportionality and is called
body tends to move over the surface of another, but the The coefficient of static friction.
actual relative motion has yet not started is called Thus:
Static friction.
Coefficient of static friction for any pair of surfaces in
Limiting friction is the maximum opposing force that contact is equal to the ratio of the limiting friction and
comes into play, when one body is just at the verge of the normal reaction.
moving over the surface of the other body.
µs, being a pure ratio, has got no units and its value
Kinetic friction or dynamic friction is the opposing
depends upon the nature of the surfaces in contact.
force that comes into play when one body is actually
Further, µs, is usually less than unity and is never equal
moving over the surface of another body.
to zero.
NOTE: Since the force of static friction (fs) can have any value
Kinetic friction is always slightly less than the limiting from zero to maximum (fms), i.e. fs < fms, eqn. (2) is
friction. generalised to
Wx - applied force fs < µ sR ... (3)
f - friction force
11.4 Kinetic friction
The laws of kinetic friction are exactly the same as
those for static friction. Accordingly, the force of
kinetic friction is also directly proportional to the
normal reaction, i.e.,
f k ∝ R or µ k R ... (4)
fk =
Fig. 4.13
µk is coefficient of kinetic friction. µk < µs.
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
11.5 Rolling friction The value of angle of friction depends on the nature of
The opposing force that comes into play when a body materials of the surfaces in contact and the nature of
rolls over the surface of another body is called the the surfaces.
rolling friction. Relation between µ and θ
Cause of rolling friction: Let us consider a wheel AC OB F
which is rolling along a road. As the wheel rolls along In ∆ AOC, tan θ= = = = µ ...(5)
OA OA R
the road, it slightly presses into the surface of the road
and is itself slightly compressed as shown in Fig. Hence µ = tan θ ...(6)
i.e. coefficient of limiting friction between any two

surfaces in contact is equal to tangent of the angle of
friction between them.
ABC
Fig. 4.14 11.7 Angle of repose or angle of sliding
Thus, a rolling wheel: Angle of repose or angle of sliding is defined as the
(i) constantly climbs a ‘hill’ (BC) in front of it, and minimum angle of inclination of a plane with the
horizontal, such that a body placed on the plane just
(ii) has to simultaneously get itself detached from the
begins to slide down.
road (AB) behind it. The force of adhesion between the
wheel and the road opposes this process. It is represented by α. Its value depends on material
and nature of the surfaces in contact.
Both these processes are responsible for rolling
friction. In fig., AB is an inclined plane such that a body placed
on it just begins to slide down. ∠BAC (α) = angle of
repose.
11.6 Angle of friction
The angle of friction between any two surfaces in
contact is defined as the angle which the resultant of
the force of limiting friction F and normal reaction R
makes with the direction of normal reaction R.
Fig. 4.16
It is represented by θ.
The various forces involved are:
In fig. OA represents the normal reaction R which
balances the weight mg of the body. OB represent F, (i) Weight, mg of the body, acting vertically
the limiting force of sliding friction, when the body downwards,
tends to move to the right. Complete the parallelogram (ii) Normal reaction, R, acting perpendicular to AB,
OACB. Join OC. This represents the resultant of R and (iii) Force of friction F, acting up the plane AB.
F. By definition, ∠AOC = θ is the angle of friction Now, mg can be resolved into two rectangular
between the two bodies in contact. components:
mg cos α opposite to R and mg sin α opposite to F. In
equilibrium,
F = mg sin α ... (7)
R = mg cos α ... (8)
Dividing (7) by (8), we get
F mg sin α
= = , i.e., µ tan α …(9)
R mg cos α
Fig. 4.15
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
Hence coefficient of limiting friction between any two 11.8 Method of changing friction
surfaces in contact is equal to the tangent of the angle Some of the ways of reducing friction are:
of repose between them.
(i) By polishing.
NOTE: (ii) By lubrication.
Combining (6) and (9), we obtain (iii) By proper selection of materials.
µ = tan θ = tan α (iv) By Streamlining.
∴θ =
α (v) By using ball bearings.
i.e. angle of friction is equal to angle of repose.
Some Important Cases

Case Diagram Result
(a) When two bodies are kept in contact F
(i) a =
and force is applied on the body of mass m1 + m2
m1.
m2 F
(ii) N =
m1 + m2
(b) When two bodies are kept in contact F

(i) a =
and force is applied on the body of mass m1 + m2
m2.
m1 F
(ii) N ′ =
m1 + m2
(c) When two bodies are connected by a F

(i) a =
string and placed on a smooth plane m1 + m2
surface.
m1 F
(ii) T =
m1 + m2
(d) When three bodies are connected F

(i) a =
through strings as shown in fig and ( m1 + m2 + m3 )
placed on a smooth horizontal surface.
m1 F
(ii) T1 =
(m1 + m2 + m3 )
(iii) T2 =
( m1 + m2 ) F
( m1 + m2 + m3 )
(e) When two bodies of masses m1 & m2
(i) a =
( m1 − m2 ) g
are attached at the ends of a string ( m1 + m2 )
passing over a pulley as shown in the
figure  2m1m2 
(ii) T =  g
 m1 + m2 
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
Case Diagram Result
(f) When two bodies of masses m1 & m2 g
(i) a = ,
m2 are attached at the ends of a ( m1 + m2 )
stringpassing over a pulley in such a
way that mass m1 rests on a smooth m1m2 g
(ii) T =
horizontal table and mass m2 is hanging ( m1 + m2 )
vertically.
(g) If in the above case, mass m1 is ( m2 − m1 sin θ ) g

placed on a smooth inclined plane (i) a =
m1 + m2
making an angle 𝜃𝜃 with horizontal as
shown m1m2 g (1 + sin θ )
(ii) T =
in ( m1 + m2 )
(iii) If the system remains in
equilibrium, then m1g sin 𝜃𝜃 = m2g
(h) In case (f), masses m1 and m2 are g ( m1 sin α − m2 sin β )

(i) a =
placed on inclined planes making angles ( m1 + m2 )
α & β with the horizontal respectively,
m1m2
then =(ii) T ( sin α + sin β ) g
( m1 + m2 )
(i) When a body is moving on smooth a = g sin 𝜃𝜃, N = mg cos 𝜃𝜃
inclined plane.
(j) When a body is moving down on a aD = (sin 𝜃𝜃 – µcos 𝜃𝜃)

rough inclined plane.
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
LAWS OF MOTION AND FRICTION 144
Solved Examples
Example - 1 Hence,
A cylinder of weight W is resting on a V-groove as (i) ∑F x =0

shown in figure. Draw its free body diagram.
∴ 8 + 4 cos 60° − F2 cos 30° = 0
3
Or 8 + 2 − F2 =0
2
20
Or F2 = N
. 3
Sol. The free body diagram of the cylinder is as shown in
figure.
(ii) ∑F y =0
∴ F1 + 4sin 60° − F2 sin 30° = 0
4 3 F2
Or F1 + − =
0
2 2
Here, w = weight of cylinder and N1 and N2 are the F 10

Or F1 = 2 − 2 3 = − 2 3
normal reactions between the cylinder and the two 2 3
inclined walls
4
Or F1 = N
Example - 2 3
A cork of mass 10 g is floating on water. The net force Example - 4
acting on the cork is:
Three blocks of masses 3 kg, 2 kg and 1 kg are placed
Sol. When the cork is floating, its weight is balanced by the
side by side on a smooth surface as shown in figure. A
upthrust. Therefore, net force on the cork is zero.
horizontal force of 12 N is applied on 3 kg block. Find
Example - 3 the net force on 2 kg block.
An object is in equilibrium under four concurrent
forces in the directions shown in figure. Find the
magnitudes of F1 and F2 .
Sol. Since, all the blocks will move with same acceleration
(say a) in horizontal direction.
Let us take all blocks as a single system.
Sol. The object is in equilibrium.
Net external force on the system is 12 N in horizontal

direction.
@cbseinfinite
Using ∑F x = max , Example - 6

All surfaces are smooth in following figure. Find F,
We get, 12 = ( 3 + 2 + 1) a = 6a
such that block remains stationary with respect to
12 wedge.
Or =
a = 2m / s 2
6
So net force on 2kg block = 2a = 4N
Example - 5
Using constraint method find the relation between
accelerations of 1 and 2.
F
Sol. Acceleration of (block + wedge) a =
( M + m)
Sol.
In the frame of wedge block is at rest,

So, net force along the incline should be zero.
Therefore,
ma cos θ = mg sin θ
At any instant of time let x1 and x2 be the ⇒a=g tan θ

displacements of 1 and 2 from a fixed line (shown
F
dotted). ⇒ g tan θ
=
m+M
Here x1 and x2 are variables but,
⇒ F = (m + M ) g tan θ
x1 + x2 =
constant
Example - 7
Or x1 + x2 =
l (length of string)
In the system shown in figure all surfaces are smooth.
Differentiating with respect to time, we have String is massless and inextensible. Find acceleration
a of the system and tension T in the string.
v1 + v2 =
0 or v1 = −v2
(g = 10 m/s2)
Again differentiating with respect to time, we get
a1 + a2 =
0 or a1 = −a2
This is the required relation between a1 and a2 ,
i.e., accelerations of 1 and 2 are equal but in opposite

directions.
@cbseinfinite
Sol. Here, weight of 2 kg is perpendicular to motion (or a). AC = 0.5 m, BC = 0.3 m

Hence, it will not contribute in net pulling force. Only ∴ AB =
0.4m
weight of 4 kg block will be included. θ
And if ∠BAC =
Net pulling force AB 0.4 4
∴a = θ
Then cos= = =
Total mass AC 0.5 5
( 4 )(10 ) 20 θ
And sin=
BC 0.3 3
= =
= = m / s2
( 4 + 2) 3 AC 0.5 5
Here, the object is in equilibrium under three
concurrent forces.
So, we can apply Lami’s theorem.
F 8 T
Or = =
sin (180° − θ ) sin ( 90° + θ ) sin 90°
F 8
Or = = T
sin θ cos θ
For T, consider FBD of 4 kg block. Writing equation
of motion. 8 8
∴ T= = = 10 N
40 − T =4a cos θ 4 / 5
∴ T = 40 − 4a
8sin θ (8 )( 3 / 5)
=
And F = = 6N
cos θ ( 4 / 5)
 20  40
=
40 − 4   =N Example - 9
 3  3
Example - 8 Two blocks of masses 4 kg and 2 kg are attached by

an inextensible light string as shown in figure. Both
One end of a string 0.5 m long is fixed to a point A the blocks are pulled vertically upwards by a force
and the other end is fastened to a small object of F = 120 N.
weight 8 N. The object is pulled aside by a horizontal
force F, until it is 0.3 m from the vertical through A.
Find the magnitudes of the tension T in the string and
the force F.
Find
(a) the acceleration of the blocks,
(b) tension in the string. (Take g = 10m / s 2 )

Sol.
Sol. (a) Let a be the acceleration of the blocks and T the
tension
in the string as shown in figure.
@cbseinfinite
Taking the two blocks and the string in the system. Weight mg has two components mg sin θ and
Using ∑F y = ma y , we get mg cos θ .
F − 4 g − 2 g =( 4 + 2 ) a Block is at rest
Or 120 − 40=
− 20 6a or
= 60 6a mg cos θ ... ( i )
∴N =
∴a = 10m / s 2 f = mg sin θ ... ( ii )

And =
T 2=a 20 N
Block is about to slip.
Example - 10
∴ f = fL = µ N
Suppose a block of mass 1 kg is placed over a rough
surface and a horizontal force F is applied on the block Here µ s = µ
as shown in figure. Now, let us see what are the values
of force of friction f and acceleration of the block a if Solving these three equations, we get
the force F is gradually increased. =µ tan
= θ tan 30°
1
=
3
=
Given that µ s 0.5,
= µk 0.4 and
= g 10 m / s 2
Example - 12
Sol. Free body diagram of the block is In the adjoining figure, the coefficient of friction
between wedge (of mass M) and block (of mass m) is
µ.
∑F y =0
∴ N − mg =
0
or = =
N mg (1)(10
= ) 10 N Find the minimum horizontal force F required to keep
the block stationary with respect to wedge.
f L µ=
= sN ( 0.5 )(=
10 ) 5N
Sol. For limiting case
f k µ=
and= kN ( 0.4 )(=
10 ) 4N
a = acceleration of (wedge + block) in horizontal
So, when force F is increased gradually up to 5N direction
friction will be equal to applied force after that kinetic
friction will act and it will be equal to 4N. F
=
M +m
Example - 11 F
So normal force on the block = = m
N ma
m+M
A particle of mass 1 kg rests on rough contact with a
plane inclined 30o to the horizontal and is just about to Also, weight mg is balanced by friction force
slip.
So, µ N = mg
Find the coefficient of friction between the plane and
the particle. F
⇒ µm =
mg
Sol. m+M
m+M
⇒F= g
µ
@cbseinfinite
Example - 13 (a) Since F ≤ µ s R

A block of mass m is at rest on a rough wedge as
∴ force of friction f= F= 14 N
shown in figure. What is the force exerted by the
wedge on the block?
This friction will act in the opposite direction of F.
(b) Since F ≤ µ s R , the block will not move.
Sol. Since, the block is permanently at rest, it is in

equilibrium.
Net force on it should be zero. In this case, only two
forces are acting on the block
(1) Weight = mg (downwards)
Example - 15
(2) Contact force (resultant of normal reaction and
friction force) applied by the wedge on the block. Figure shows two blocks in contact sliding down an
inclined surface of inclination 30o. The friction
For the block to be in equilibrium, these two forces
should be equal and opposite. coefficient between the block of mass 2.0 kg and the
incline is µ1 = 0.20 and that between the block of
Therefore, force exerted by the wedge on the block is
mg (upwards). mass 4.0 kg and the incline is µ 2 = 0.30 . Find the
Example - 14 acceleration of 2.0 kg block. ( g = 10m / s 2 ).

In the figure shown,
Sol. Since µ1 < µ 2 , acceleration of 2 kg block down the

plane will be more than the acceleration of 4 kg block,
if allowed to move separately. But, as the 2.0 kg block
(a) Find the force of friction acting on the block.
is behind the 4.0 kg block both of them will move with
(b) State whether the block will move or not. If yes same acceleration say a . Taking both the blocks as a
then with what acceleration? single system:
Sol. Resolving the force in horizontal (along the plane) and Force down the plane on the system
in vertical (perpendicular to the plane) directions ( 4 + 2 ) g sin 30°
=
(except friction)
1 
Here, R is the normal reaction. = (=
6 )( 2 )   30 N
2
∑E y =0 ⇒ R = 26 N Force up the plane on the system
µ s R = 0.6 × 26 = 16.6 N = µ1 ( 2 )( g ) cos 30° + µ 2 ( 4 )( g ) cos 30°
µk R = 0.4 × 26 = 10.4 N ( 2µ1 + 4µ2 ) g cos 30°

=
= ( 2 × 0.2 + 4 × 0.3)(10 )( 0.86 )

∑F x = net driving force F = 14 N
≈ 13.76 N
@cbseinfinite
∴ net force down the plane is 3

ar = a2 − a1 = g
F=
30 − 13.76 =
16.24 N 8
∴ acceleration of both the blocks down the plane will Initial velocity of both A and B is v . So, there is no
be a . relative initial velocity.
F 16.24 Hence,
=a = = 2.7 m / s 2
4+2 6 1 2
(a) applying s = at
2
Example - 16
1 2 3 2
Figure shows a small block A of mass m kept at the =
Or l = ar t gt
2 16
left end of a plank B of mass M = 2m and length l. The
system can slide on a horizontal road. The system is l
∴ t =4
started towards right with the initial velocity v . The 3g
friction coefficients between the road and the plank is
1
1 1 (b) Displacement of block s=
A u At − a At 2
and that between the plank and the block is . Find 2
2 4
l 1 g  16l   g
Or s A = 4v − ⋅ ⋅   a A = a1 = 
3g 2 4  3g   4
l 2
=
Or s A 4v − l
3g 3
1
Displacement of plank s=
B u B t − aB t 2
(a) the time elapsed before the block separates from 2
the plank.
l 1  5   16l   5 
Or sB =
4v −  g    aB =
a2 =g
(b) displacement of block and plank relative to 3g 2  8   3g   8 
ground till that moment.
l 5
Sol. There will be relative motion between block and plank =
Or sB 4v − l
3g 3
and plank and road. So at each surface limiting friction
will act. The direction of friction forces at different
surfaces are as shown in figure. Example - 17
On a horizontal rough road, value of coefficient of

friction µ = 0.4 . Find the minimum time in which a
distance of 400 m can be covered. The car starts from
rest and finally comes to rest.
1
Here, f1 =   ( mg ) Sol. Maximum friction on horizontal rough road,
4
f max = µ mg
1 3
And f 2 =   ( m + 2m ) g =   mg
2 2 ∴ maximum acceleration or retardation of the car may
f1 g f max µ mg
Retardation of A is a= = =
be amax or a = = µg
1
m 4 m m
f 2 − f1 5 = 0.4 × 10 = 4 m / s 2
And retardation of B=
is a2 = g
2m 8
Let, the car accelerates and retards for time ‘t’ with
Since a2 > a1
4 m / s2
Relative acceleration of A with respect to B is
@cbseinfinite
1 2 1 2 Here, θ = constant
Then, at + at =
400m
2 2
= =
Or at 2 400 m or 4t 2 400
Or t = 10 s
Therefore, the minimum time is 20 s (10 s of
acceleration and 10 s of retardation).
Double differentiating eq. (i) with respect to time, we
Example - 18 get a A = aB sin θ .
If the lower spring is cut, find the acceleration of the
upper block, immediately after cutting the spring. Example - 20
Figure shows a man standing stationary with respect
to a horizontal conveyor belt that is accelerating with
1ms −2 . What is the net force on the man? If the
coefficient of static friction between the man’s shoes
and the belt is 0.2, up to what maximum acceleration
of the belt can the man continue to be stationary
relative to the belt? Mass of the man = 65 kg.
( g = 9.8m / s )
2
Sol. Mass = m, 2m respectively

So, before the lower spring is cut,
Tlower =2mg
Tupper = mg+Tlower = 3mg
So, kx = 3mg
After the lower spring is cut, Tlower = 0 and Tupper Sol. As the man is standing stationary w.r.t. the belt,
remains same ∴ acceleration of the man = acceleration of the belt

Acceleration of the upper block is:
= a= 1ms −2
kx − mg
a= Mass of the man, m = 65 kg
m
3mg − mg Net force on the man = ma = 65 × 1 = 65 N
a=
m Given coefficient of friction, µ = 0.2
a = 2 g (upwards )
∴ limiting friction, f L = µ mg
Example - 19
If the man remains stationary with respect to the
In the figure shown figure relation between
maximum acceleration a0 of the belt, then
magnitudes of a A and aB .
Sol. ma=
0 f=
L µ mg
∴ a0 = µ g = 0.2 × 9.8 = 1.96ms −2
x A = xB sin θ
@cbseinfinite
EXERCISE – 1: BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

LAWS OF MOTION 7. A force vector applied on a mass is represented by

F = 6iˆ − 8 ˆj + 10kˆ and accelerates with 1 m / s . What
2
Newton’s Laws of Motion
is the mass of the body?
1. A force of 50 N is required to push a car on a level road
with constant speed of 10 m/s. The mass of the car is (a) 10 kg (b) 10 2kg
500 kg. What force should be applied to make the car
(c) 2 10kg (d) 20 kg
accelerate at 1 m / s 2 ?
8. A rope of length L and mass M is hanging from a rigid
(a) 550 N (b) 450 N
support. The tension in the rope at a distance x from
(c) 500 N (d) 2500 N
the rigid support is:
2. When a body is stationary
(a) there is no force acting on it  L−x
(a) Mg (b)   Mg
(b) the forces acting on it are not in contact with it  L 
(c) the combination of forces acting on it balance each  L  X
(c)   Mg (d) Mg
other  L−x L
(d) the body is in vacuum
9. A sphere is accelerated upwards with the help of a cord
3. A ship of mass 3 × 107 kg initially at rest is pulled by a whose breaking strength is five times its weight. The
force 5 × 104 N through a distance of 3m. Assuming maximum acceleration with which the sphere can
that the resistance due to water is negligible, what will move up without cord breaking is
be the speed of the ship? (a) 4g (b) 3g
(a) 0.1 m/s (b) 1.5 m/s
(c) 2g (d) g
(c) 5 m/s (d) 0.2 m/s
10. If a body loses half of its velocity on penetrating 3 cm
4. A lift weighing 1000 kg is moving upwards with an
in a wooden block, then how much will it penetrate
acceleration of 1 m / s 2 . The tension in the supporting more before coming to rest?
cable is
(a) 1 cm (b) 2 cm
(a) 980 N (b) 10800 N
(c) 3 cm (d) 4 cm
(c) 9800 N (d) 8800 N
5. A constant force acts on a body of mass 0.9 kg at rest
for 10s. If the body moves a distance of 250 m, the Force
magnitude of the force is 11. Three forces acting on a body are shown in fig. To
(a) 3 N (b) 3.5 N have the resultant force only along the y-direction, the
(c) 4 N (d) 4.5 N magnitude of the minimum additional force needed
6. When a force F acts on a body of mass m, the along OX is
acceleration produced in the body is a. If three equal Y
4N
forces F=1 F=
2 F=
3 F act on the same body as shown
in figure. The acceleration produced is:
o
30 1N
60o
O X
2N
(a) ( )
2 −1 a (b) ( )
2 +1 a (a) 0.5 N (b) 1.5 N
(c) 2a (d) a (c) 3 / 4N (d) 3N
@cbseinfinite
12. In the game of tug of wars, a condition of equilibrium 100

(a) 100N (b) N
exists. Both the teams pull the rope with a force of 3
104 N . The tension in the rope is
(c) 3 × 100 N (d) 50 3N
(a) 2 × 104 N (b) 0
17. An object is resting at the bottom of two strings which
(c) 104 N (d) none are inclined at an angle of 120° with each other. Each
13. A body of mass m is acted upon by a force F and the string can withstand a tension of 20 N. The maximum
acceleration produced is a. If three forces each equal weight of the object that can be sustained without
to F and inclined to each other at 120 act on the same breaking the string is:
body, the acceleration produced will be (a) 10 N (b) 20 N
(a) a / 3 (b) 2a (c) 20 2 N (b) 40 N
(c) 3a (d) zero
Application of Newton's Laws of Motion

Free body diagrams & Translational Equilibrium
14. Ten coins are placed on top of each other on a 18. In an elevator moving vertically up with an
horizontal table. If the mass of each coin is 10 g and acceleration ‘g’, the force exerted on the floor by a
passenger of mass M is
acceleration due to gravity is 10 ms −2 , what is the
(a) Mg (b) 1/2 Mg
magnitude and direction of the force on the 7th coin
(counted from the bottom) due to all the coins above (c) zero (d) 2 Mg
it? 19. The mass of a lift is 500 kg. What will be the tension
(a) 0.3 N downwards (b) 0.3 N upwards in its cable when it is going up with an acceleration of
(c) 0.7 N downwards (d) 0.7 N upwards 2.0 m / s 2 ?
15. A mass M is suspended by a rope from a rigid support (a) 5000 N (b) 5600 N
at A as shown. Another rope is tied at the end B and it (c) 5900 N (d) 6200 N
is pulled horizontally with a force F. If the rope AB 20. A dynamometer D is attached to two bodies of masses
make an angle θ with the vertical, then the tension in M = 6 kg and m = 4 kg. Forces F = 20 N and f = 10 N
the string AB is are applied to the masses as shown. The dynamometer
A reads:
D
F M m f
B
F
(a) 10 N (b) 20 N
(c) 6 N (d) 14 N
21. A monkey is accelerating down a string whose
M breaking strength is two third of his weight. The
minimum acceleration of the monkey should be
F
(a) F sin θ (b) 2
sin θ (a) 0 (b) g
3
F
(c) F cos θ (d) g
cos θ (c) g (d)
3
16. A block of mass 10 kg is suspended by three strings as
22. A balloon of weight W is falling vertically downward
shown in the figure. The tension T2 is:
with a constant acceleration a (<g). The magnitude of
the air resistance is:
 a
(a) W (b) W 1 + 
 g
 a a
(c) W 1 −  (d) W
 g g
@cbseinfinite
23. A 0.5 kg ball moving with a speed of 12 m/s strikes a 28. A 1 kg block and 0.5 kg block move together on a
hard wall at an angle of 30° with the wall. It is horizontal frictionless surface. Each block exerts a
reflected with the same speed and at the same angle, as force of 6 N on the other. The blocks move with a
shown in fig. If the ball is in contact with the wall for uniform acceleration of
0.25 s, the average force acting on the wall is
30o
(a) 3 m/s2 (b) 6 m/s2
2
(c) 9 m/s (d) 12 m/s2
30
o
29. In the following figure the masses of the blocks A and
B are same and each equal to m. The tensions in the
strings OA and AB are T2 and T1 respectively. The
(a) 96 N (b) 48 N system is in equilibrium with a constant horizontal
(c) 24 N (d) 12 N force mg on B. The T1 is
Constraint Motion
24. Two blocks are in contact on a frictionless table. One
has mass m and the other 2 m. A force F is applied on
2m as shown in figure. Now the same force F is applied
from the right on m. In the two cases the ratio of force
of contact between the two blocks will be:
(a) mg (b) 2mg
F (c) 3mg (d) 5mg
2m
m 30. Three blocks of masses 2 kg, 3 kg and 5 kg are
connected to each other with light string and are then
(a) same (b) 1 : 2 placed on a frictionless surface as shown in the figure.
(c) 2 : 1 (d) 1 : 3 The system is pulled by a force F = 10N, then tension
T1 = …
25. Two blocks of mass 4 kg and 6 kg are placed in contact
with each other on a frictionless horizontal surface. If
we apply a push of 5 N on the heavier mass, the force
on the lighter mass will be
(a) 5 N (b) 4 N (a) 1N (b) 5 N
(c) 2 N (d) None of the above (c) 8 N (d) 10 N
26. In the above problem, if a push of 5 N is applied on the 31. A block A of mass 7 kg is placed on a frictionless table.
lighter mass, the force exerted by the lighter mass on A thread tied to it passes over a frictionless pulley and
the heavier mass will be carries a body B of mass 3 kg at the other end. The
acceleration of the system is (given g = 10ms −2 )
(a) 5 N (b) 4 N
(c) 2 N (d) None of the above
27. In the above problem, the acceleration of the lighter
mass will be
5 −2
(a) 0.5 ms −2 (b) ms
4
5 −2 (a) 100 ms–2 (b) 3 ms–2
(c) ms (d) None of the above
6 (c) 10 ms–2 (d) 30 ms–2
@cbseinfinite
32. Two masses m1 and m2 are attached to a string which (a) T = 70.8 N and T ' = 47.2 N
passes over a frictionless smooth pulley. When m1 =
(b) T = 58.8 N and T ' = 47.2 N
10 kg, m2 = 6 kg, the acceleration of masses is
(c) T = 70.8 N and T ' = 58.8 N
(d) T = 70.8 N and T ' = 0
36. The acceleration of the 2 kg block, if the free end of
string is pulled with a force of 20 N as shown is:
(a) 20 m/s2 (b) 5 m/s2

2
(c) 2.5 m/s (d) 10 m/s2
33. A 50 kg boy stands on a platform spring scale in a lift
that is going down with a constant speed 3 m/s. If the
lift is brought to rest by a constant deceleration in a
distance of 9 m, what does the scale read during this
period? (a) zero (b) 10 m/s2
(g = 9.8 m/s2)
(c) 5 m/s2 upward (d) 5m/s2 downward
(a) 500 N (b) 465 N
(c) 515 N (d) zero 37. A mass 'M' is connected to a rope of length l and mass
34. The two pulley arrangements shown in the figure are m on which an external force F is applied, the tension
identical. The mass of the rope is negligible. In (a) the force at A is
mass m is lifted up by attaching a mass 2m to the other
end of the rope. In (b). m is lifted up by pulling the
other end of the rope with a constant downward force
of 2mg. The ratio of accelerations in two cases will be
Fm FM
(a) (b)
M +m M +m
F Fm
(c) (d)
M +m M −m
38. In the above question, tension force at midpoint of the
rope is
(a) 1 : 1 (b) 1 : 2 F ( M + m / 2) FM / 2
(a) (b)
(c) 1 : 3 (d) 1 : 4 M +m M +m
35. Two blocks are connected by a string as shown in the
diagram. The upper block is hung by another string. A Fm / 2
(c) (d) none
force F applied on the upper string produces an M +m
acceleration of 2m/s2 in the upward direction in both 39. In the above question, acceleration of mass M is
the blocks. If T and T’ be the tensions in the two parts
F F
of the string, then (a) (b)
M M +m/
F F
(c) (d)
M +m M +m
@cbseinfinite
40. A man weighs 80 kg. He stands on a weighing scale in 44. Two blocks are attached to the two ends of a string
the lift, which is moving upwards with a uniform passing over a smooth pulley as shown in the figure.
acceleration of 5 m/s2. What would be the reading on The acceleration of the block will be (in m/s2)
the scale?
(sin 37o = 0.60, sin 53o = 0.80)
(g = 10 m/s2)
(a) Zero (b) 400 N
(c) 800 N (d) 1200 N
41. Three equal weights A, B and C of mass 2 kg each are
hanging on a string passing over a fixed pulley which
is frictionless as shown in figure. The tension in the
string connecting weight B and C is:
(a) 0.33 (b) 1.33
(c) 1 (d) 0.066
45. Two blocks, each having a mass M, rest on frictionless
surfaces as shown in the figure. If the pulleys are light
and frictionless, and M on the incline is allowed to
move down, then the tension in string will be:
A
B
C
(a) zero (b) 13 N
(c) 3.3 N (d) 19.6 N
42. Consider the shown arrangement. Assume all surfaces 2 3
(a) Mg sin θ (b) Mg sin θ
to be smooth. If N represents magnitudes of normal 3 2
reaction between block and wedge, then acceleration
Mg sin θ
of M along horizontal is equal to: (c) (d) 2 Mg sin θ
2
Frames of Reference
46. Two weights W1 and W2 are suspended from the ends
to a light string passing over a smooth fixed pulley. If
the pulley is pulled up at an acceleration g. The tension
in the string will be:
N sin θ
(a) along + ve x-axis 4W1W2 2W1W2
M (a) (b)
W1 + W2 W1 + W2
N cos θ
(b) along –ve x-axis
M W1 − W2 W1W2
(c) (d)
N sin θ W1 + W2 2 (W1 + W2 )
(c) along –ve x-axis
M 47. The pendulum hanging from the ceiling of a railway
N sin θ carriage makes angle 30° with the vertical, when it is
(d) along –ve x-axis accelerating. The acceleration of the carriage is:
m+M
43. In the above question normal reaction between ground 3 2
(a) g (b) g
and wedge will have magnitude equal to: 2 3
(a) N cos θ + Mg (b) N cos θ + Mg + mg g
(c) g 3 (d)
(c) N cos θ − Mg (d) N sin θ + Mg + mg 3
@cbseinfinite
48. A block is placed on the top of a smooth inclined plane

of inclination θ kept on the floor of a lift. When the
60°
lift is descending with a retardation a, the block is
released. The acceleration of the block relative to the m
incline is:
(a) g sin θ (b) a sin θ   3 
(c) (g –a) sin θ (d) (g + a) sin θ (a) μ mg (b) µ  mg −   F 
  2  
49. A smooth inclined plane of length L, having an
inclination θ with horizontal is inside a lift which is   F    F 
(c) µ  mg −    (d) µ  mg +   
moving down with retardation a. The time taken by a   2    2 
block to slide down the inclined plane from rest will 54. While walking on ice, one should take small steps to
be: avoid slipping. This is because smaller steps ensure
2L 2L (a) larger friction (b) smaller friction
(a) (b)
a sin θ g sin θ (c) larger normal force (d) smaller normal force
2L 2L 55. A boy of mass M is applying a horizontal force to slide
(c) (d)
( g − a ) sin θ ( g + a ) sin θ a box of mass M’ on a rough horizontal surface. The
coefficient of friction between the shoes of the boy and
50. A block of mass m is placed on a smooth wedge of the floor is µ and that between the box and the floor
inclination θ . The whole system is accelerated
is µ ' . In which of the following cases it is certainly
horizontally so that the block does not slip on the
wedge. The force exerted by the wedge on the block (g not possible to slide the box?
is acceleration due to gravity) will be (a) µ < µ ' , M < M’ (b) µ > µ ' , M < M’
mg (c) µ < µ ' , M > M’ (d) µ > µ ' , M > M’
(a) mg (b)
cos θ
56. A wooden box of mass 8 kg slides down an inclined
(c) mg cos θ (d) mg sin θ plane of inclination 30° to the horizontal with a
constant acceleration of 0.4 ms −2 . What is the force of
friction between the box and inclined plane?
FRICTION (g = 10 m/s2)
Frictional Force and its Properties (a) 36.8 N (b) 76.8 N
51. A body is projected along a rough horizontal surface (c) 65.6 N (d) None of these
with a velocity 6 m/s. If the body comes to rest after
57. A minimum force F is applied to a block of mass
travelling 9 m, then coefficient of sliding friction, is:
102 kg to prevent it from sliding on a plane with an
(g = 10 m/s2)
inclination angle 30° with the horizontal. If the
(a) 0.5 (b) 0.4 coefficients of static and kinetic friction between the
(c) 0.6 (d) 0.2 block and the plane are 0.4 and 0.3 respectively, then
52. A car having a mass of 1000 kg is moving at a speed the force F is:
of 30 m/s. Brakes are applied to bring the car to rest. If (a) 157 N (b) 224 N
the frictional force between the tyres and the road
(c) 315 N (d) zero
surface is 5000 N, the car will come to rest in
58. A block of mass 4 kg is placed on a rough horizontal
(a) 5s (b) 8s
plane. A time dependent force F = kt2 acts on the block,
(c) 12s (d) 6s where k = 2N/s2. Coefficient of friction m = 0.8. Force
53. A mass m rests on a horizontal surface. The coefficient of friction between block and the plane at t = 2s is:
of friction between the mass and the surface is µ . If
(a) 8 N (b) 4 N
mass is pulled by a force F as shown in figure. The
(c) 2 N (d) 32 N
limiting friction between mass and the surface will be:
@cbseinfinite
59. In the figure shown, if coefficient of friction is µ , then

(a)
( P + Q sin θ ) (b)
( P cos θ + Q )
m2 will start moving upwards if: ( mg − Q cos θ ) ( mg − Q sin θ )
(c)
( P + Q cos θ ) (d)
( P sin θ − Q )
( mg + Q sin θ ) ( mg − Q cos θ )
64. A body of mass M is kept on a rough horizontal surface
m2
(friction coefficient = m). A person is trying to pull the
m1 body by applying a horizontal force, but the body is
not moving. The force by the surface on A is F where
(a) F = Mg (b) F = m Mg
m1 m1
(a) > sin θ − µ cos θ (b) > sin θ + µ cos θ (c) Mg ≤ F ≤ Mg 1 + µ 2 (d) Mg ≥ F ≥ Mg 1 − µ 2
m2 m2
65. The coefficient of friction between the tyres and road
m m
(c) 1 > µ sin θ − cos θ (d) 1 > µ sin θ + cos θ is 0.4. The minimum distance covered before attaining
m2 m2 a speed of 8 m/s starting from rest is nearly:
60. Two cars of unequal masses use similar tyres. If they (g = 10 m/s2)
are moving at the same initial speed, the minimum (a) 8.0 m (b) 4.0 m
stopping distance
(c) 10.0 m (d) 16.0 m
(a) is smaller for the heavier car
66. A block of mass 0.1 kg is held against a wall applying
(b) is smaller for the lighter car horizontal force of 5 N on the block. If coefficient of
(c) is same for both car friction between the block and the wall is 0.5, the
(d) depends on the volume of the car magnitude of frictional force acting on the block is
61. A block of mass 5 kg is kept on a horizontal floor (a) 2.5 N (b) 0.49 N
having coefficient of friction 0.09. Two mutually (c) 0.98 N (d) 4.9 N
perpendicular horizontal forces of 3 N and 4 N act on 67. A block of mass m is given an initial downward
this block. The acceleration of the block is: velocity v 0 and left on an inclined plane (coefficient
(g = 10 m/s2) of friction = 0.6). The block will:
2
(a) zero (b) 0.1 m/s
2
(c) 0.2 m/s (d) 0.3 m/s2 V0
62. Which of the following statements is true in a tug of
war. 30°
(a) The team which applies a greater force on the rope (a) continue to move down the plane with constant
than the other wins. velocity v 0
(b) The team which applies a smaller force on the other
(b) accelerate downward
wins.
(c) decelerate and come to rest
(c) The team which pushes harder against the ground
wins. (d) first accelerated then decelerate
(d) none of these 68. If a block moving up at θ=30o with a velocity 5 m/s,
63. A block of mass m, lying on a rough horizontal plane, stops after 0.5 sec, then coefficient of friction ( µ ) is
is acted upon by a horizontal force P and another force 1
[take = 0.6 ]
Q, inclined at an angle 𝜃𝜃 to the vertical upwards. The 3
block will remain in equilibrium, if minimum
(a) 0.5 (b) 1.25
coefficient of friction between block and the surface is:
(c) 0.6 (d) none of the above
@cbseinfinite
69. The upper half of an inclined plane of inclination 𝜃𝜃 is 74. Two blocks are connected over a massless pulley as
perfectly smooth while the lower half is rough. A block shown in figure. The mass of block A is 10 kg and the
starting from rest at the top of the plane will again coefficient of kinetic friction is 0.2. Block A slides
come to rest at the bottom, if the coefficient of friction down the incline at constant speed. The mass of block
between the block and the lower half of the plane is B in kg is:
given by:
(a) µ = 2 tan θ (b) µ = tan θ
2 1
(c) µ = (d) µ =
tan θ tan θ
Angle of Friction and Angle of Repose (a) 5.4 (b) 3.3

1 (c) 4.2 (d) 6.8
70. The coefficient of friction of a surface is . What
3 75. A block is gently placed on a conveyor belt moving
should be the angle of inclination so that a body placed horizontally with constant speed. After t = 4 s, the
on the surface just begins to slide down? velocity of the block becomes equal to velocity of the
(a) 30o (b) 45o belt. If the coefficient of friction between the block and
the belt is m = 0.2, then the velocity of the conveyor
(c) 60o (d) 90o belt is
71. In a situation the contact force by a rough horizontal (a) 8 m/s (b) 6 m/s
surface on a body placed on it has constant magnitude.
(c) 4 m/s (d) 2 m/s
If the angle between this force and the vertical is
decreased, the frictional force between the surface and 76. A box of mass 8 kg is placed on a rough inclined plane
the body will of inclination θ . Its downward motion can be
(a) increase prevented by applying an upward pull F and it can be
made to slide upwards by applying a force 2 F. The
(b) decrease
coefficient of friction between the box and the inclined
(c) remain the same
plane is:
(d) may increase or decrease
1
72. A block A kept on an inclined surface just begins to (a) tan θ (b) 3 tan θ
3
slide if the inclination is 30°. The block is replaced by
another block B and it is found that it just begins to 1
(c) tan θ (d) 2 tan θ
slide if the inclination is 40°. 2
(a) mass of A > mass of B 77. A block of mass M rests on a rough horizontal surface
(b) mass of A < mass of B as shown. Coefficient of friction between the block
(c) mass of A = means of B and the surface is m. A force F = Mg acting at angle 𝜃𝜃
with the vertical side of the block pulls it. In which of
(d) all the three are possible
the following cases the block can be pulled along the
Block on Block Systems & Miscellaneous cases in Friction surface:
73. Determine the time in which the smaller block reaches F
other end of bigger block in the figure
u = 0.3
10 N 2 kg M
u = 0.0
8 kg
θ 
(a) tan θ ≥ µ (b) tan   ≥ µ
L = 3.0 m
2
(a) 4s (b) 8 θ 
(c) cot θ ≥ µ (d) cot   ≥ µ
(c) 2.19 s (d) 2.13 s 2
@cbseinfinite
78. An insect crawls up a hemispherical surface very 80. Pushing force making an angle θ to the horizontal
slowly (see the figure). The coefficient of friction (towards bottom of the block) is applied on a block of
1 weight W placed on a horizontal table. If the angle of
between the insect and the surface is . If the line
3 friction is φ , the magnitude of force required to move
joining the centre of the hemispherical surface to the the body is equal to:
insect makes an angle a with the vertical, the maximum
W cos θ W sin φ
possible value of a is given by: (a) (b)
cos (θ − φ ) cos (θ + φ )
W tan φ W sin φ
(c) (d)
sin (θ − φ ) tan (θ − φ )
(a) cot 𝛼𝛼 = 3 (b) tan 𝛼𝛼 = 3

(c) sec 𝛼𝛼 = 3 (d) cosec 𝛼𝛼 = 3
79. A given object takes n times more time to slide down
45° rough inclined plane as it takes to slide down a
perfectly smooth 45° incline. The coefficient of kinetic
friction between the object and the incline is
1 1
(a) (b) 1−
2 − n2 n2
1 1
(c) 1− (d)
n2 1− n 2
@cbseinfinite
EXERCISE – 2: PREVIOUS YEARS JEE MAINS QUESTIONS

1. Given in the figure are two blocks A and B of weight 4. A rocket is fired vertically from the earth with an
20 N and 100 N, respectively. These are being acceleration of 2g, where g is the gravitational
pressed against a wall by a force F as shown. If the acceleration. On an inclined plane inside the rocket,
coefficient of friction between the blocks is 0.1 and making an angle θ with the horizontal, a point object
between block B and the wall is 0.15, the frictional of mass m is kept. The minimum coefficient of
force applied by the wall on block B is (assume, both friction µmin between the mass and the inclined
the blocks are stationary): (2015) surface such that the mass does not move is:
(2016)
(a) tan θ (b) 2 tan θ
(c) 3 tan θ (d) tan 2θ
5. A particle of mass m is acted upon by a force F given
R
by the empirical law F = 2 v ( t ) , If this law is to be
(a) 100 N (b) 80 N t
(c) 120 N (d) 150 N tested experimentally by observing the motion
starting from rest, the best way is to plot:
2. A rocket is fired vertically from the earth with an
(2016)
acceleration of 2g, where g is the gravitational
(a) v ( t ) against t
1
acceleration. On an inclined plane inside the rocket, (b) log v ( t ) against
2
making an angle θ with the horizontal, a point object t2

of mass m is kept. The minimum coefficient of
(c) log v ( t ) against t
1
friction µmin between the mass and the inclined (d) log v ( t ) against
t
surface such that the mass does not move is:
6. The machine as shown has 2 rods of length 1m
(2016) connected by a pivot at the top. The end of one rod is
(a) tan θ (b) 2 tan θ connected to the floor by a stationary pivot and the
(c) 3 tan θ (d) tan 2θ end of the other rod has a roller that rolls along the
floor in a slot. As the roller goes back and forth, a 2
3. A point particle of mass m moves along the uniformly
kg weight moves up and down. If the roller is moving
rough track PQR as shown in the figure. The
towards right at a constant speed, the weight moves
coefficient of friction, between the particle and the
up with a: (2017)
rough track equals μ. The particle is released, from
rest, from the point P and it comes to rest at a point
R. The energies, lost by the ball, over the parts, PQ
and QR, of the track, are equal to each other, and no
energy is lost when particle changes direction from
PQ to QR. (2016)
(a) constant speed

(b) decreasing speed
(c) increasing speed
The values of the coefficient of friction μ and the
distance x(=QR), are, respectively close to: 3
(d) speed which is th of that of the roller when the
(a) 0.2 and 6.5 m (b) 0.2 and 3.5 m 4
weight is 0.4 m above the ground
(c) 0.29 and 3.5 m (d) 0.29 and 6.5 m
@cbseinfinite
7. A given object takes n times more time to slide down (a) 200 N (b) 140 N
a 45o rough inclined plane as it takes to slide down a
(c) 70 N (d) 100 N
perfectly smooth 45o incline. The coefficient of
kinetic friction between the object and the incline is: 12. A particle of mass m is moving in a straight line
with momentum p. Starting at time t = 0, a force F =
(2018)
kt acts in the same direction on the moving particle
1 1 during time interval T so that its momentum changes
(a) (b) 1 −
2 − n2 n2 from p to 3p. Here k is a constant. The value of T is:
(all quantities are measured in S.I unit)
1 1
(c) 1− (d) (2019)
n2 1 − n2
8. A body of mass 2 kg slides down with an acceleration k p
(a) 2 (b) 2
of 3 m/s2 on a rough inclined plane having slope of p k
30o. The external force required to take the same body
up the plane with the same acceleration will be: 2k 2p
(c) (d)
(g = 10 m/s2) (2018) p k
(a) 14 N (b) 20 N 13. A block kept on a rough inclined plane, as shown in
(c) 6 N (d) 4 N the figure, remains at rest up to a maximum force 2 N
down the inclined plane. The maximum external
9. =
Two masses m1 5=
kg and m2 10 kg , connected
force up the inclined plane that does not move the
by an inextensible string over a frictionless pulley, are block is 10 N. The coefficient of static friction
moving as shown in the figure. The coefficient of between the block and the plane is: [Take g = 10 m/s2]
friction of horizontal surface is 0.15. The minimum (2019)
weight m that should be put on top of m2 to stop the
motion is: (2018)
3 3
(a) (b)
2 4
(a) 23.3 kg (b) 43.3 kg
1 2
(c) 10.3 kg (d) 18.3 kg (c) (d)
2 3
10. An automobile, travelling at 40 km/h, can be stopped
at a distance of 40 m by applying brakes. If the same 14. A bullet of mass 20g has an initial speed of 1
automobile is travelling at 80 km/h, the minimum ms−1, just before it starts penetrating a mud wall of
stopping distance, in metres, is (assume no skidding): thickness 20 cm. If the wall offers a mean resistance
of 2.5×10−2N, the speed of the bullet after emerging
(2018) from the other side of the wall is close to:
(a) 75 m (b) 160 m
(2019)
(c) 150 m (d) 100 m
(a) 0.1 ms-1 (b) 0.7 ms-1
11. A mass of 10 kg is suspended vertically by a rope
(c) 0.3 ms-1 (d) 0.4 ms-1
from the roof. When a horizontal force is applied on
the rope at some point, the rope deviates at an angle
of 45°at the roof point. If the suspended mass is at
equilibrium, the magnitude of the force applied is
(g = 10 ms-2) (2019)
@cbseinfinite
15. Two blocks A and B of masses 18. A liquid of density ρ is coming out of a hose pipe of
= =
m A 1kg and m B 3kg are kept on the table as radius with a horizontal speed v and hits a mesh. 50%
shown in figure. The coefficient of friction between of the liquid passes through the mesh unaffected. 25%
A and B is 0.2 and that between B and the surface of loses all of its momentum and 25% comes back with
the table is also 0.2. The maximum force F that can the same speed. The resultant pressure on the mesh
be applied on B horizontally, so that the block A does will be: (2019)
not slide over the block B is: [Take g = 10 m / s 2 ] 1 2 3 2
(a) ρv (b) ρv
(2019) 4 4
1 2
(c) ρv (d) ρ v 2
2
19. A block of mass 5 kg is (i) pushed in case (A) and (ii)
pulled in case (B), by a force F = 20 N, making an
angle of 30° with the horizontal, as shown in the
(a) 8 N (b) 16 N figures. The coefficient of friction between the block
and floor is µ = 0.2 . The difference between the
(c) 40 N (d) 12 N
accelerations of the block, in case (B) and case (A)
16. A spring whose unstretched length is l has a force will be: (g =10 m s-2) (2019)
constant k. The spring is cut into two pieces of
unstretched lengths l1 and l2 where, l1 = nl2 and n is
k1
an integer. The ratio of the corresponding force
k2
constants, k1 and k2 will be: (2019)
1 (a) 0.4 m s-2 (b) 3.2 m s-2
(a) n (b)
n2 (c) 0.8 m s-2 (d) 0 m s-2
20. A mass of 10 kg is suspended by a rope of length 4
1
(c) (d) n 2 m, from the ceiling. A force F is applied horizontally
n
at the mid-point of the rope such that the top half of
17. A block of mass 10 kg is kept on a rough inclined the rope makes an angle of 45o with the vertical. Then
plane as shown in the figure. A force of 3 N is applied F equals (Take g = 10 m/s2 and rope to be massless)
on the block. The coefficient of static friction
(2020)
between the plane and the block is 0.6. What should
be the minimum value of force P, such that the block (a) 100 N (b) 90 N
does not move downward? (Take g = 10 ms-2) (c) 75 N (d) 70 N
(2019) 21. A spaceship in space sweeps stationary interplanetary
dust. As a result, its mass increases at a rate
dM (t )
= bv 2 (t ), where v (t) is its instantaneous
dt
velocity. The instantaneous acceleration of the
satellite is: (2020)
bv 3
(a) −bv3 (t ) (b) −
M (t )
2bv3 bv 3
(a) 32 N (b) 18 N (c) − (d) −
M (t ) 2 M (t )
(c) 23 N (d) 25 N
@cbseinfinite
22. An insect is at the bottom of a hemispherical ditch of 25. Two blocks (m = 0.5 kg and M = 4.5 kg) are arranged
radius 1 m. It crawls up the ditch but starts slipping on a horizontal frictionless table as shown in figure.
after it is at height h from the bottom. If the The coefficient of static friction between the two
coefficient of friction between the ground and the blocks is 3/7. Then the maximum horizontal force
insect is 0.75, then h is: (g = 10 ms-2) that can be applied on the larger block so that the
blocks move together is ______ N. (Round off to the
(2020)
Nearest Integer) (Take g as 9.8 m/s2)
(a) 0.45 m (b) 0.60 m
(2021)
(c) 0.20 m (d) 0.80 m
23. A particle is projected with velocity v0 along x-axis.

A damping force is acting on the particle which is
proportional to the square of the distance from the
origin. i.e. ma = −α x 2 . The distance at which the 26. An inclined plane is bent in such a way that the
particle stops: (2021) x2
vertical cross-section is given by y = where y is
1 1 4
 2mv0  3  3mv02  2 in vertical and x in horizontal direction. If the upper
(a)   (b)  
 3α   2α  surface of this curved plane is rough with coefficient
of friction µ = 0.5 , the maximum height in cm at
1 1
 2mv02  2  3mv02  3 which a stationary block will not slip downward is
(c)   (d)  
 3α   2α 
_____cm. (2021)
27. The coefficient of static friction between a wooden
24. A block of mass m slides along a floor while a force
block of mass 0.5 kg and a vertical rough wall is 0.2.
of magnitude F is applied to it at an angle θ as shown
The magnitude of horizontal force should be applied
in figure. The coefficient of kinetic friction is µ K . on the block to keep it adhere to the wall will be ____
Then, the block’s acceleration ‘a’ is given by: N. [g = 10 ms-2] (2021)
(g is acceleration due to gravity) (2021)
28. As shown in the figure, a block of mass 3kg is kept
on a horizontal rough surface of coefficient of friction
1
. The critical force to be applied on the vertical
3 3
surface as shown at an angle 60° with horizontal such
that it does not move, will be 3x. The value of x will
F  F 
(a) − cos θ − µ K  g − sin θ  be _______. (2021)
m  m 
F  F 
(b) cos θ − µ K  g + sin θ 
m  m 
F  F 
(c) cos θ − µ K  g − sin θ 
m  m 
F  F 
(d) cos θ + µ K  g − sin θ  29. A person standing on a spring balance inside a
m  m 
stationary lift measures 60 kg. The weight of that
person if the lift descends with uniform downward
acceleration of 1.8 m/s2 will be ____ N. [g = 10 m/s2]
(2021)
@cbseinfinite
30. A boy pushes a box of mass 2 kg with a force 34. A bullet of mass 0.1 kg is fired on a wooden block to

=
F ( )
20iˆ + 10 ˆj N on a frictionless surface. If the pierce through it, but it stops after moving a distance
of 50 cm into it. If the velocity of bullet before hitting
box was initially at rest, then ______ m is the wood is 10 m/s and it slows down with uniform
displacement along the x-axis after 10 s. deceleration, then the magnitude of effective
(2021) retarding force on the bullet is ‘x’ N. The value of ‘x’
to the nearest integer is _______. (2021)
31. A body of mass 2 kg moves under a force of
( )
2iˆ + 3 ˆj + 5kˆ N . It starts from rest and was at the
35. The projectile motion of a particle of mass 5g is
shown in the figure.
origin initially. After 4 s, its new coordinates are (8,
b, 20). The value of b is _____. (Round off to the
Nearest integer). (2021)
32. A body of mass 1kg rests on a horizontal floor with
1
which it has a coefficient of static friction . It is The initial velocity of the particle is 5 2ms −1 and the
3
air resistance is assumed to be negligible. The
desired to make the body move by applying the
magnitude of the change in momentum between the
minimum possible force F N. The value of F will be
______. (Round off to the Nearest integer) points A and B is x × 10−2 kgms −1 .
[Take g = 10 m/s2] (2021) The value of x, to the nearest integer, is _______.
33. A boy of mass 4kg is standing on a piece of wood (2021)

having mass 5 kg. If the coefficient of friction
between the wood and the floor is 0.5, the maximum
force that the body can exert on the rope, so that the
piece of wood does not move from its place is ______
N. (Round off to the Nearest integer) [Take g = 10
m/s2]
(2021)
@cbseinfinite
EXERCISE – 3: ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

Objective Questions I [Only one correct option] (a) zero (b) 1ms −2
1. A person swimming in a fresh-water pool is obeying:
(c) 2ms −2 (d) 3ms −2
(a) Newton’s second law
(b) Gravitational law 6. The engine of a car produces acceleration of 4ms −2 in
(c) Newton’s third law car. If this car pulls another car of same mass, what
will be the acceleration produced?
(d) Newton’s first law
2. The passenger moves forward when train stops, due to: (a) 8ms −2 (b) 2ms −2
(a) inertia of passenger (c) 4ms −2 (d) 1ms −2
(b) inertia of train
7. In order to raise a mass of 100 kg a man of mass
(c) gravitation pull by the earth
60 kg fastens a rope to it and passes the rope over a
(d) none of the above smooth pulley. He climbs the rope with an
3. A mass of 3 kg descending vertically downward acceleration 5g/4 relative to rope. The tension in the
supports a mass of 2 kg by means of a light string rope is
passing over a pulley. At the end of 5 s the string
(a) 1432 N (b) 928 N
breaks. How much high from now the 2 kg mass will
go? (g = 9.8 m/s2) [assume strings are very long and (c) 1218 N (d) 642 N
value of g remains constant] 8. A motor cycle and a car are moving on a horizontal
(a) 4.9 m (b) 9.8 m road with the same velocity. If they are brought to rest
(c) 16.9 m (d) 2.45 m by the application of brakes, which provided equal
4. A man of mass 60 kg is standing on a horizontal retardation, then
conveyor belt. When the belt is given an acceleration (a) motor cycle will stop at shorter distance
of 1ms −2 , the man remains stationary with respect to (b) car will stop at a shorter distance
the moving belt. If g = 10ms −2 , the net force acting on (c) both will stop at the same distance
the man in:
(d) nothing can be predicted.
9. A force of 100 N need to be applied parallel to a
smooth inclined plane just to hold a body on it. The
angle of inclination of the inclined plane is 30°. How
much horizontal force need to be applied to do the
same?
(a) zero (b) 120 N (a) 50 N
(c) 60 N (d) 600 N (b) 87 N
5. Three masses of 1 kg, 6 kg and 3 kg are connected to (c) 100 N
each other with threads and are placed on a table as
(d) 115 N
shown in figure. If g = 10ms −2 , the acceleration with
10. A man has weight 80 N. He stands on a weighing scale
which the system is moving is
in a lift which is moving upwards with a uniform
acceleration of 5 m/s2. What would be the reading on
the scale?
(g = 10 m/s2)
(a) 800 N (b) 120 N
(c) zero (d) 400 N
@cbseinfinite
11. In the figure, the blocks A, B and C of mass m each 15. A body of mass m is suspended by two strings making
have acceleration a1 , a2 and a3 respectively. F1 and angles α and β with the horizontal. Tensions in the
F2 are external forces of magnitudes 2 mg and mg two strings are
respectively then:
mg cos β
=
(a) T1 = T2
sin (α + β )
(a) =
a1 a=
2 a3 (b) a1 > a3 > a2 mg sin β
=
(b) T1 = T2
=
(c) a1 a2 , a2 > a3 (d) a1 > a2 , a2 =
a3 sin (α + β )
12. An automobile enters a turn whose radius is R. The mg cos β mg cos α

=(c) T1 = , T2
road is banked at angle θ . friction is negligible sin (α + β ) sin (α + β )
between the wheels of the automobile and road. mass
(d) none of these
of the automobile is m and speed is u. Select the correct
alternative: 16. A ball is suspended by a thread from the ceiling of a
car. The brakes are applied and the speed of the car
(a) net force on the automobile is zero
changes uniformly from 10 m/s to zero in 5s. The
(b) normal reaction on the automobile is mg cos θ angle by which the ball deviates from the vertical
(c) normal reaction on the automobile is mg sec θ (g = 10 m/s2) is:
(d) none of the above 1 1
(a) tan −1   (b) sin −1  
13. A uniform rope of mass m hangs freely from a ceiling. 3 5
A bird of mass M climbs up the rope with an 1 1
acceleration a. The force exerted by the rope on the (c) tan −1   (d) cot −1  
5 3
ceiling is:
17. Two masses m and M are attached with strings as
shown. For the system to be in equilibrium we have:
(a) Ma + mg
(b) M (a + g) + mg
(c) M (a + g)
(d) dependent on the position of bird on the rope
2M 2m
14. When a bird of weight W sits on a stretched wire, the (a) tan θ = 1 + (b) tan θ = 1 +
m M
tension T in the wire is
M m
(a) > W/2 (b) = W (c) tan θ = 1 + (d) tan θ = 1 +
2m 2M
(c) < W (d) None of these
@cbseinfinite
18. A light string going over a clamped pulley of mass m (a) The second block falls with zero acceleration
supports a block of mass M as shown in the figure. (b) The first block falls with maximum acceleration
The force on the pulley by the clamp is given by: (c) Both (a) and (b) are wrong
(d) Both (a) and (b) are correct
22. For the arrangement shown in the figure the tension in
the string is given by
(a) 2 Mg (b) 2 mg
( M + m) + m2 ( M + m) +M2
2 2
(c) g (d) g
19. Tension in the cable supporting an elevator, is equal to mg
(a) (b) mg
the weight of the elevator. From this, we can conclude 2
that the elevator is going up or down with a 3
(a) uniform speed (b) uniform acceleration (c) mg (d) 2 mg
2
(c) variable acceleration (d) either (b) and (c). 23. In the arrangement shown, if the surface is smooth, the
20. All surfaces shown in figure are smooth. System is acceleration of the block m2 will be:
released with the spring unstretched. In equilibrium,
compression in the spring will be:
m2 g 2m2 g
mg 2 mg (a) (b)
(a) (b) 4m1 + m2 4m1 + m2
2k k
2m2 g 2m1 g
( M + m) g mg (c) (d)
(c) (d) m1 + 4m2 m1 + m2
2k k
24. Two masses are connected by a string which passes
21. Three identical blocks are suspended on two identical
over a pulley accelerating upward at a rate as shown.
springs one below the other as shown in figure. If
If a1 and a2 be the accelerations of bodies 1 and 2
thread is cut that supports block 1, then initially
(choose one alternative only): respectively, then:
(a) A= a1 − a2 (b) A= a1 + a2
a1 − a2 a1 + a2
(c) A = (d) A =
2 2
@cbseinfinite
25. A sphere of mass m is held between two smooth 29. A trolley is accelerating down an incline of angle θ
inclined walls. For sin 37° = 3/5, the normal reaction with acceleration g sin θ . Which of the following is
of the wall (2) is equal to: not correct? ( α is angle made by the string with
vertical).
16 mg 25 mg
(a) (b) (a) α = θ
25 21
(b) α = 0°
39 mg
(c) (d) mg (c) Tension in the string T = mg cos θ
25
(d) All of the above
26. A trolley car slides down a smooth inclined plane of
angle of inclination θ . If a body is suspended from 30. A car is moving in a circular horizontal track of radius
the roof of the trolley car by an inextensible string, the 10 m with a constant speed of 10 m/s. A plumb bob is
corresponding tension in the string will be: suspended from the roof of the car by a light rigid rod.
The angle made by the bob with the vertical is
(a) mg (b) mg cos θ (g = 10 m/s2)
(c) mg sin θ (d) zero
(a) zero (b) 30o
27. A block of mass m is resting on a wedge of angle θ as
(c) 45o (d) 60o
shown in the figure. The wedge is given an
acceleration a. What is the value of a so that the mass 31. A block slides down an inclined plane of slope of
m falls freely? angle θ with a constant velocity. It is then projected
up the plane with an initial velocity u. The distance up
to which it will rise before coming to rest is:
u2 u2
(a) (b)
4 g sin θ 2g
u 2 sin 2 θ u sin θ
(c) (d)
2g 2g
32. The time taken by a body to slide down a rough 45º
(a) g (b) g cos θ incline plane is twice that required to slide down a
(c) g cot θ (d) g tan θ smooth 45º incline plane. The coefficient of kinetic
friction between the object and rough plane is given
28. Two blocks of masses 5 kg and 3 kg are attached to by
the ends of a string passing over a smooth pulley fixed
(a) 1/3 (b) 3/4
to the ceiling of an elevator. A man inside the elevator
accelerated upwards, finds the acceleration of the 3 4
(c) (d)
blocks to be 9/32g. The acceleration of the elevator is: 4 3
g g
(a) (b)
3 4
g g
(c) (d)
8 6
@cbseinfinite
33. Two blocks are connected over a massless pulley as 36. A body is moving down along an inclined plane of
shown in figure. The mass of block A is 10 kg and the angle of inclination θ The coefficient of friction
coefficient of kinetic friction is 0.2. Block A slides between the body and the plane varies as µ = 0.5 x ,
down the incline at constant speed. The approximate
where x is the distance moved down the plane. The
mass of block B in kg is:
body will have the maximum velocity when it has
travelled a distance x given by:
2
(a) x = 2 tan θ (b) x =
tan θ
A
B (c) x = 2 cot θ (d) x =
2
cot θ
30°
37. In the shown arrangement mass of A = 1 kg, mass of
(a) 3.5 (b) > 2.5 B = 2 kg. Coefficient of friction between A and
B = 0.2. There is no friction between B and ground.
(c) 3.3 (d) 3.0 The frictional force exerted by A on B equals:
34. A block of mass m is kept on an inclined plane of a
lift moving down with acceleration of 2ms −2 . What
should be the coefficient of friction to let the block
move down with constant velocity relative to lift:
(a) 2 N (b) 3 N
(c) 4 N (d) 5 N
38. A body of mass 60 kg is dragged along a horizontal
surface by a horizontal force which is just sufficient to
start the motion of the body from rest. If the
1
(a) µ = (b) µ = 0.4 coefficients of static and kinetic friction are 0.5 and
3 0.4 respectively, the acceleration of the body is
3 (a) 0.98 m/s2 (b) 9.8 m/s2
(c) µ = 0.8 (d) µ =
2 (c) 0.54 m/s2 (d) 5.292 m/s2
35. Block A of mass m rests on the plank B of mass 3m 39. Two blocks A and B are placed on a table and joined
which is free to slide on a frictionless horizontal by a string (figure). The limiting friction for both
surface. The coefficient of friction between the block blocks is F. The tension in the string is T. The forces
and plank is 0.2. If a horizontal force of magnitude 2 of friction acting on the blocks are FA and FB. An
mg is applied to the plank B, the acceleration of A external horizontal force P = 3F/2 acts on A, directed
relative to the plank and relative to the ground away from B. Then
respectively, are:
A
2 mg
B
g 2g 3F F
(a) 0, (b) 0, (a) FA =FB =T= (b) =
FA ,=
FB F,=
T F
2 3 4 2
3g g g 2g F F
(c) , (d) , (c) FA =FB =3 , T=0 (d) FA =F, FB =T=
5 5 5 5 4 2
@cbseinfinite
40. In the figure, mA = 2kg and mB = 4kg . For what (a) 4 m (b) 8 m
minimum value of F, A starts slipping over B? (c) 16 m (d) 32 m
(g = 10 m/s2)
44. Two blocks A and B are pushed against the wall with
A µ = 0.2 the force F. The wall is smooth but the surface in
F B
1
contact of A and B are rough. Which of the following
µ2 = 0.4
is true for the system of the blocks?
(a) 24 N (b) 36 N
(c) 12 N (d) 20 N
41. A block of mass m is placed on another block of mass
M which itself is lying on a horizontal surface. The
coefficient of friction between two blocks is µ1 and
that between the block of mass M and horizontal
surface is µ 2 . What maximum horizontal force can be (a) F should be equal to weight of A and B for
applied to the lower block, so that the two blocks move equilibrium.
without separation?
(b) F should be less than the weight of A and B for
equilibrium.
(c) F should be more than the weight of A and B for
equilibrium
(d) The system cannot be in equilibrium (at rest).
(a) ( μ1 - μ 2 ) (m + M)g (b) ( μ1 - μ 2 ) (m - M)g 45. A block of mass M lies on a rough surface of
coefficient of friction µ A force is applied on it an
(c) ( μ1 + μ 2 ) (m - M)g (d) ( μ1 + μ 2 ) (m + M)g
angle θ to the horizontal as shown, and the block is at
42. In the arrangement shown in figure, there is a friction
rest. The frictional force acting on the block will be:
force between the blocks of masses m and 2m. The
mass of the suspended block is m. The block of mass
m is stationary with respect to block of mass 2 m. The
minimum value of coefficient of friction between m
and 2m is:
(a) F cos θ (b) m(mg + F sin θ )
(c) m(mg − F sin θ ) (d) µ mg
46. A block of mass 3 kg is at rest on a rough inclined

plane as shown in the figure. The magnitude of net
force exerted by surface on the block will be
1 1
(a) (b)
2 2
1 1
(c) (d)
4 3
43. The rear side of a truck is open, and a box of mass 20
kg is placed on the truck 4 m away from the open end.
coefficient of friction µ = 0.15 and g = 10 m/s2. The (a) 26 N (b) 19.5 N
truck starts from rest with an acceleration of 2 m/s2on (c) 10 N (d) 30 N
a straight road. The box will fall off the truck when it
is at a distance from the starting point equal to:
@cbseinfinite
47. For the arrangement shown in the figure the tension in 51. A block of weight 5 N is pushed against a vertical wall
the string is by a force of 12 N. The coefficient of friction between
the wall and the block is 0.6. The magnitude of total
force exerted by the wall on the block is
(a) 6N (b) 6.4 N

(c) 0.4 N (d) zero
48. The force required to just move a body up the inclined
plane is double the force required to just prevent the (a) 7.2 N (b) 5 N
body from sliding down the plane. The coefficient of (c) 12 N (d) 13 N
friction is µ . The inclination θ of the plane is 52. A uniform chain of length l is placed on a rough table
with length l/n (n > 1) hanging over the edge. If the
(a) tan −1 µ (b) tan −1 ( µ / 2)
chain just begins to slide off the table by itself from
(c) tan −1 2 µ (d) tan −1 3µ this position the coefficient of friction between the
chain and the table is
49. A body of mass m rests on horizontal surface. The 1 1
coefficient of friction between the body and the surface (a) (b)
n n −1
is m. If the mass is pulled by a force P as shown in the
figure, the limiting friction between body and surface 1 n −1
(c) (d)
will be: n +1 n +1
53. Two masses A and B of 7 kg and 3 kg respectively are
connected with a string passing over a frictionless
pulley fixed at the corner of table as shown in the
figure. The coefficient of friction between A and
horizontal surface is 0.3. The minimum mass of C that
may be placed on A to prevent it from moving is equal
  P  to
(a) µ mg (b) µ  mg +   
  2 
  P    3 P 
(c) µ  mg −    (d) µ  mg −   
  2    2  
50. A rough vertical board has an acceleration a along the
horizontal, so that a block of mass M pressing against
(a) 15 kg (b) 10 kg
it does not fall. The coefficient of friction between
(c) 5 kg (d) 3 kg
block and the board is:
54. If µ is coefficient of friction between the tyres and
a g
(a) ≥ (b) ≤ road, then the minimum stopping distance for a car of
g a mass m moving with velocity v is
v2
(c) ≤
a
(d) ≥
g (a) µ vg (b)
g a 2µ g
µv
(c) v 2 µ g (d)
2g
@cbseinfinite
55. A parabolic bowl with its bottom at origin has the 59. A block of mass 0.1 kg is held against a wall by
x 2 applying a horizontal force of 5 N on the block. If the
shape y = . Here, x and y are in metres. The coefficient of friction between the block and the wall
20
maximum height at which a small mass m can be is 0.5, the magnitude of the frictional force acting on
placed on the bowl without slipping (coefficient of the block is
static friction is 0.5) is: (a) 2.5 N (b) 0.98 N
(c) 4.9 N (d) 0.49 N
60. What is the maximum value of the force F such that
the block shown in the arrangement, does not move?
(a) 2.5 m (b) 1.25 m

(c) 1.0 m (d) 4.0 m
56. A homogeneous chain of length L lies on a table. The
coefficient of friction between the chain and the table (a) 20 N (b) 10 N
is µ . The maximum length which can hang over the (c) 12 N (d) 15 N
table in equilibrium is
 µ  1− µ 
(a)  L (b)  L
 µ +1  µ 
Objective Questions II
 1− µ   2µ 
(c)  L (d)  L [One or more than one correction option]
1+ µ   2µ + 1 
61. Which of the following are correct?
57. A wedge of mass 2m and a cube of mass m are shown
in figure. Between cube and wedge, there is no (a) A parachutist of weight W strikes the ground with
friction. The minimum coefficient of friction between his legs and comes to rest with an upward
wedge and ground so that wedge does not move is acceleration of magnitude 3g. Force exerted on
him by ground during landing is 4 W.
(b) Two massless spring balances are hung vertically
in series from a fixed point and a mass M kg is
attached to the lower end of the lower spring
balance. Each spring balance reads M kg.
(c) A rough vertical board has an acceleration a along
(a) 0.10 (b) 0.20 the horizontal direction so that a block of mass m
(c) 0.25 (d) 0.50 passing against it does not fall. The coefficient of
friction between the block and the board is greater
58. During pedalling of a bicycle, the force of friction
than g/a.
exerted by the ground on the two wheels is such that
it acts. (d) A man is standing at a spring platform. If man
(a) in the backward direction on the front wheel and jumps away from the platform the reading of the
in the forward direction on the rear wheel spring balance first increases and then decreases to
zero.
(b) in the forward direction on the front wheel and in
the backward direction on the rear wheel
(c) in the backward direction on both the front and the
rear wheels
(d) in the forward direction on both the front and the
rear wheels
@cbseinfinite
62. A body of mass 5 kg is suspended by the strings 65. A block of mass m is at rest on an inclined surface
making angles 60° and 30° with the horizontal as having a coefficient of friction µ > tan θ as shown in
shown in the figure (g = 10 m/s2) then, the figure. The horizontal acceleration which should
be given to the inclined plane, so that the force of
friction between the block and the plane becomes
zero, is:
(a) T1 = 25 N (b) T2 = 25 N
(c) T1 = 25 3 N (d) T2 = 25 3 N
63. Two blocks A and B of mass 5 kg and 2 kg, (a) g sin θ , leftward (b) g tan θ , leftward
respectively, connected by a spring of force constant (c) g cot θ , rightward (d) g tan θ rightward
100 N/m are placed on an inclined plane of inclination
30° as shown in the figure. If the system is released
from rest, then 66. The string shown in the figure is passing over small
smooth pulley rigidly attached to trolley A. Speed of
trolley is constant and equal to v A . Speed and
magnitude of acceleration of block B at the instant
shown in figure is
(a) There will be no compression or elongation in the

spring if all the surfaces are smooth.
(b) There will be elongation in the spring if A is rough
and B is smooth.
(c) Maximum elongation in the spring is 35 cm if all
surfaces are smooth.
(d) There will be elongation in the spring if A is
smooth and B is rough.
64. In the figure, the blocks A, B and C of mass m each (a) v B = v A , a B = 0 (b) a B = 0
have acceleration a1, a2 and a3 respectively. F1 , F2 3 16 v 2A
(c) v B = vA (d) a B =
and F3 are external forces of magnitude 2 mg, mg and 5 125
mg/2 respectively, then 67. The acceleration of a particle as observed from two
different frames S1 and S2 have equal magnitudes of
2ms −2 .
(a) The relative acceleration of the frame may either
be 0 or 4 m/s2.
(b) Their relative acceleration may have any value
between 0 and 4 m/s2.
(c) Both of the frames may be stationary with respect
to earth.
(a) a1 ≠ a2 ≠ a3 (b) a=
1 a2 ≠ a3 (d) The frames may be moving with same acceleration
in same direction.
(c) a1 > a2 > a3 (d) a1 ≠ a2 =
a3
@cbseinfinite
68. Two blocks of masses m1 and m2 are connected (a) The friction force between A and B is 40 N.
through a massless inextensible string. Block of mass (b) The net force acting on A is 150 N.
m1 is placed at the fixed rigid inclined surface while (c) The value of F is 190 N.
the block of mass m2 hanging at the other end of the
(d) The value of F is 150 N.
string, which is passing through a fixed massless
71. Mark the correct statement(s) regarding friction.
frictionless pulley shown in the figure. The coefficient
of static friction between the block and the inclined (a) Friction force can be zero, even though the contact
plane is 0.8. The system of masses m1 and m2 is surface is rough.
released from rest. (b) Even though there is no relative motion between
surfaces, frictional force may exist between them.
(c) The expressions f L = us N or f k = µk N are
approximate expressions.
(d) The expression f L = us N tells that direction of
f L and N are the same.
(a) The tension in the string is 20 N after releasing the 72. A 10 kg block is placed on the top of a 40 kg block as
system. shown in the figure. A horizontal force F acting on B
(b) The contact force by the inclined surface on the causes an acceleration of 2 m/s2 to B. For this situation
block is along normal to the inclined surface. mark out the correct statement(s).
(c) The magnitude of contact force by the inclined
surface on the block m1 is 20 3 N .
(d) None of these
69. In the figure, if F = 4N, m = 2kg, M = 4 kg then
(a) The acceleration of A may also be 2 m/s2.

(b) The acceleration of A must also be 2 m/s2.
(c) The coefficient of friction between the blocks may
be 0.2
(d) The coefficient of friction between the blocks mut
be 0.2 only.
2
(a) The acceleration of m w.r.t. ground is m / s2 .
3
(b) The acceleration of m w.r.t. ground is 1.2 m/s2.
73. A block of mass m = 2 kg is resting on a rough inclined
(c) The acceleration of M is 0.4 m/s2. plane of inclination 30o as shown in Figure. The
2 coefficient of friction between the block and the plane
(d) The acceleration of M w.r.t. ground is m / s2 . is µ = 0.5 . What minimum force F (in newton) should
3
70. A 20 kg block is placed on top of 50 kg block as shown be applied perpendicularly to the plane on the block,
in the figure. A horizontal force F acting on A causes so that block does not slip on the plane?
an acceleration of 3 m/s2 to A and 2 m/s2 to B. For this = =
[ given : g 10 ms −2 , 3 1.73 ]
situation mark out the correct statement(s).
@cbseinfinite
74. A block is placed on an inclined plane moving 78. A block weighing 20 kg is placed on a smooth surface
towards right horizontally with an acceleration A weight of 2 kg is mounted on the block. The
a0 = g . The length of the plane AC = 1 m. Friction is coefficient of friction between the block and the
absent everywhere. Find the time taken (in sec) by the weight is 0.25. Calculate the acceleration (in ms −2 ) of
block to reach from C to A. [take g = 10ms −2 ] the block when a horizontal force of 20 N is applied
to the weight as shown in the figure. (g = 10 ms-2).
79. A block A, of weight W, slides down an inclined plane

S of slope 37o at a constant velocity while the plank
75. You are designing an elevator for a hospital. The force
B, also of weight W; rests on top of A (figure). The
exerted on a passenger by the floor of the elevator is
plank B is attached by a cord to the top of the plane.
not to exceed 1.60 times the passenger's weight. The
If the coefficient of kinetic friction is the same
elevator accelerates upward with a constant
between the surfaces A and B and between the
acceleration for a distance of 3.0 m and then starts to
surfaces S and A, determine its value if tension(T) in
slow down. What is the maximum speed (in m/s) of
3
the elevator? [take g = 10ms −2 ] cord is 4 µ mg cos 37 . [take tan 37 = ]
4
76. A block A of mass m is placed over a plank B of man
2 m. Plank B is placed over a smooth horizontal
surface. The co-efficient of friction between A and B
1
is . Block A is given a velocity v0 towards right.
2
Find acceleration (in ms −2 ) of B relative to A. [take
g = 10ms −2 ]
80. A car is going at a speed of 6 m/sec when it encounters

a slope of angle 37º. The length of the sloping slide is
7 m. The friction coefficient between the road and the
tyre is 0.5. The driver applied brakes. The minimum
speed of the car with which it can reach the bottom is
77. Figure represents a painter in a crate which hangs w m/sec. Find w. [take 74 = 8.6 ]
alongside a building. When the painter of mass 10 kg
pulls the rope, the force exerted by him on the floor of
the crate is 450 N. If the crate weighs 25 kg, find the
acceleration (in ms −2 ) of the crate. [take g = 10m / s 2
]
@cbseinfinite
Assertion & Reason 87. Assertion: If a body is trying to slip over a surface
(A) Assertion is true, Reason is true; Reason is a correct then friction acting on the body is necessarily equal to
explanation for Assertion. the limiting friction.
(B) Assertion is true, Reason is true; Reason is NOT a Reason: Static friction can be less than the limiting
correct explanation for Assertion. friction force.
(C) Assertion is true, Reason is false. (a) A (b) B
(D) Assertion is false, Reason is true. (c) C (d) D
81. Assertion: In figure the ground is smooth and the 88. Assertion: On a rainy day, it is difficult to drive a car
masses of both the blocks are different. Net force or a bus at high speed.
acting on each of the block is not same. Reason: The value of coefficient of friction is
Reason: Acceleration of the blocks both will be lowered due to wetting of the surface.
different. (a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
Match the Following

Each question has two columns. Four options are given
82. Assertion: When static friction acts between two
representing matching of elements from Column-I and
bodies, there is no loss of mechanical energy.
Column-II. Only one of these four options corresponds
Reason: When kinetic friction acts between two to a correct matching.
bodies, there is loss of mechanical energy.
For each question, choose the option corresponding
83. Assertion: The acceleration of a particle as seen from
to the correct matching.
an inertial frame is zero if no external force acts on it.
89. Match the entries of Column I with the entries of
Reason: a particle can accelerate without any external
Column II.
force.
Column I Column II
84. Assertion: A reference frame attached to the earth is
an inertial frame of reference. Reason: Newton's laws (A) ……..friction force is (p) µ = tan θ
can be applied in this frame of reference. less than the applied force
85. Assertion: Pulling (refer to the figure) is easier than (B) ….. friction force is (q) Limiting equal to
pushing [refer to the figure] on a rough surface. the applied Force
Reason: Normal reaction is less in pulling than is (C) ….. friction acts when an
pushing.
object is on the (r) Static
verge of motion
(D) An object is about (s) Kinetic
to slide down when
(a) A (b) B
placed on an inclined
(c) C (d) D
plane, θ being the angle
86. Assertion: Static frictional force is always greater
of inclination with the
than the kinetic frictional force.
horizontal is related with
Reason: (Coefficient of static friction) µ s > µk
coefficient of friction ( µ ) as:
(coefficient of kinetic friction).
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
@cbseinfinite
90. For the situation shown in the figure, in Column I, the 92. Find the magnitudes of the horizontal forces F1 and F2
statements regarding friction forces are mentioned, that must be applied to hold the system in the position
while in Column II some information related to shown.
friction forces are given. Match the entries of Column
(a) 75 N, 90 N, respectively
I with the entries of Column II.
(b) 60 N, 60 N, respectively
(c) 90 N, 90 N, respectively
(d) 45 N, 90 N, respectively
Using the following passage, solve Q. 93 & 94

Passage – 2
Block A has a mass of 40 kg and block B has a mass of 15
kg, and F of 500 N is applied parallel to smooth inclined plane
Column - I Column - II
(figure). The system is moving together.
(A) Total friction force on 3 kg (p) towards
93. The acceleration of the system is
block is right
(B) Total friction force on 5 kg (q) towards
block is left
(C) Friction force on 2 kg block (r) zero
due to 3 kg block is 45 23
(a) m / s2 (b) m / s2
(D) Friction force on 3 kg block (s) non-zero 11 11
due to 5 kg block is 13 8
(c) m / s2 (d) m / s2
7 3
Paragraph Type Questions 94. The least coefficient of friction between A and B is
Using the following passage, solve Q. 91 & 92 5 2 9 3

(a) (b)
12 53
Passage - 1
In the following figure the weight w is 60.0 N. 9 2 5 3
(c) (d)
28 18
91. The tension in the diagonal string is

(a) 60 N (b) 90 N
(c) 85 N (d) 100 N
@cbseinfinite
Using the following passage, solve Q. 95 to 97 Using the following passage, solve Q. 98 to 100
Passage - 3 Passage - 4
Three blocks A, B and C of mass 3M, 2M and M, A student performs two experiments to determine the
respectively, are suspended vertically with the help of springs coefficient of static and kinetic friction between a block of
PQ and TU and a string RS as shown. If acceleration of block mass 100 kg and the horizontal floor.
A, B and C are a1, a2 and a3, respectively.
Ist Experiment: He applies a gradual increasing force on the
block and is just able to slide the block when force is 450 N
IInd Experiment: He applies constant force of different
magnitudes for the duration of 2 s and determine the distance
travelled by the block in this duration.
Set Force Distance
1. 300 N 0.5 m
2. 600 N 2.0 m
3. 750 N 3.0 m
Assume all the forces have been applied horizontally.
95. The value of acceleration a3 at the moment spring PQ 98. The coefficient of static friction between the block and
is cut is the floor is
(a) g downward (b) g upward (a) 0.45 (b) 0.5
(c) more than g downward (d) zero (c) 0.3 (d) 1.45
96. The value of acceleration a1 at the moment string RS 99. Which set of the readings of Experiment II is
is cut is absolutely wrong?
(a) g downward (b) g upward (a) 1 (b) 2
(c) more than g downward (d) zero (c) 3 (d) none of these
97. The value of acceleration a2 at the moment spring TU 100. The speed of the block after 3s (beginning from the
is cut is starting of application of force) in set 2 for IInd
experiment is
(a) g/5 upward (b) g/5 downward
(a) 6 m/s
(c) g/3 upward (d) zero
(b) 2 m/s
(c) 3 m/s
(d) Information is insufficient
@cbseinfinite
EXERCISE – 4: PREVIOUS YEARS JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

1. A string of negligible mass going over a clamped 4. Two blocks A and B of equal masses are released
pulley of mass m supports a block of mass M as from an inclined plane of inclination 45° at t = 0. Both
shown in the figure. The force on the pulley by the the blocks are initially at rest. The coefficient of
clamp is given by: kinetic friction between the block A and the inclined
plane is 0.2 while it is 0.3 for block B. Initially the
block A is 2 m behind the block B. When and
where their front faces will come in a line.
(Take g = 10 m/s2)
(2001)
(a) 2Mg (b) 2mg
(c) ( M + m)
2
+ m2 g (d) ( ( M + m)
2
)
+M2 g
(2004)
2. The pulleys and strings shown in the figure are 5. Two blocks A and B of masses 2 m and m
smooth and of negligible mass. For the system to respectively are connected by a massless and
remain in equilibrium, the angle θ should be: inextensible string. The whole system is suspended
by a massless spring as shown in the figure. The
(2001)
magnitudes of acceleration A and B, immediately
after the string is cut, are respectively
(2006)
(a) 0° (b) 30°
g g
(a) g , (b) ,g
(c) 45° (d) 60° 2 2
3. What is the maximum value of the force F such that g g
(c) g , g (d) ,
the block shown in the arrangement, does not move? 2 2
6. A circular disc with a groove along its diameter is
placed horizontally. A block of mass 1 kg is placed as
shown in the figure. The co-efficient of friction
between the block and all surface of groove in contact
is m = 2/5. The disc has an acceleration of 25 m/s2.
(2003) Find the acceleration of the block with respect to disc.
(a) 20 N (b) 10 N
(c) 12 N (d) 15 N
(2006)
@cbseinfinite
7. Two particles of mass m each are tied at the ends of a 10. Assertion: A block of mass m starts moving on a
light string of length 2a. The whole system is kept on rough horizontal surface with a velocity v. It stops
a frictionless horizontal surface with the string held due to friction between the block and the surface after
tight so that each mass is at a distance a from the moving through a certain distance. The surface is now
centre P (as shown in the figure). Now, the mid-point tilted to an angle of 30° with the horizontal and the
of the string is pulled vertically upwards with a small same block is made to go up on the surface with the
but constant force F. As a result, the particles moves same initial velocity v. The decrease in the
towards each other on the surface. The magnitude of mechanical energy in the second situation is smaller
acceleration, when the separation between them than that in the first situation.
becomes 2 x is (2007) Reason: The coefficient of friction between the
block and the surface decreases with the increase in
the angle of inclination. (2007)
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
11. A piece of wire is bent in the shape of a parabola
y = kx2 (y-axis vertical) with a bead of mass m on it.
F a F x The bead can slide on the wire without friction. It
(a) (b)
2m a −x
2 2 2m a − x2
2
stays at the lowest point of the parabola when the wire
is at rest. The wire is now accelerated parallel to the
F x F a2 − x2 x-axis with constant acceleration a. The distance of
(c) (d)
2m a 2m x the new equilibrium position of the bead, where the
8. A particle moves in the X–Y plane under the bead can stay at rest with respect to the wire, from the
influence of a force such that its linear momentum is y–axis is: (2009)

= p ( t ) A iˆ cos ( kt ) − ˆj sin ( kt )  , where A and k are (a)
a
(b)
a
gk 2 gk
constants. The angle between the force and the
momentum is: (2007) 2a a
(c) (d)
(a) 0° (b) 30° gk 4 gk
12. A block of mass m is on an inclined plane of angle q.
(c) 45° (d) 90°
The coefficient of friction between the block and the
plane is m and tan q > m. The block is held stationary
Assertion & Reason by applying a force P parallel to the plane. The
direction of force pointing up the plane is taken to be
(A) Assertion is true, Reason is true; Reason is a
positive. As P is varied from P1 = mg (sin q – m cos
correct explanation for Assertion.
q) to P2 = mg (sin q + m cos q), the frictional force f
(B) Assertion is true, Reason is true; Reason is NOT a versus P graph will look like. (2010)
correct explanation for Assertion.
(C) Assertion is true, Reason is false.
(D) Assertion is false, Reason is true.
9. Assertion: A cloth covers a table. Some dishes are
kept on it. The cloth can be pulled out without
dislodging the dishes from the table.
(a) (b)
Reason: For every action there is an equal and
opposite reaction. (2007)
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D (c) (d)
@cbseinfinite
13. A block is moving on an inclined plane making an h 3 3 8 3

angle 45° with the horizontal and the coefficient of =
(c) = ,f N
 16 3
friction is m. The force required to just push it up the
h 3 3 16 3
inclined plane is 3 times the force required to just =
(d) = ,f N
prevent it from sliding down. If we define N = 10 m,  16 3
then N is: (2011) 16. A football of radius R is kept on a hole of radius r (r
14. A block of mass m1 = 1 kg another mass m2 = 2 kg. < R) made on a plank kept horizontally. One end of
are placed together (see figure) on an inclined plane the plank is now lifted so that it gets tilted making an
with angle of inclination θ . Various values of θ are angle θ from the horizontal as shown in the figure
given in List I. The coefficient of friction between the below. The maximum value of θ so that the football
block m1 and the plane is always zero. The coefficient does not start rolling down the plank satisfies (figure
of static and dynamic friction between the block m2 is schematic and not drawn to scale)
and the plane are equal to = 0.3. In List II expressions
for the friction on block m2 are given. Match the
correct expression of the friction in List II with the
angles given in List I, and choose the correct option.
The acceleration due to gravity is denoted by g.
[Useful information: tan (5.5o) 0.1; tan (11.5o) 0.2; (2020)
tan (16.5o) 0.3] r r
(a) sin θ = (b) tan θ =
R R
r r
(c) sin θ = (d) cos θ =
2R 2R
17. A student skates up a ramp that makes an angle 30º
with the horizontal. He/she starts (as shown in the
figure) file the bottom of the ramp with speed v0 and
(2014)
wants to turn around over a semi-circular path xyz of
List I List II
radius R during which he/she reaches a maximum
P. θ = 5o 1. m2g sin θ height h (at point y) from the ground as shown in the
Q. θ = 10 o
2. (m1 + m2) g sin θ figure. Assume that the energy loss is negligible, and
R. θ = 15o 3. m2g cos θ the force required for this turn at the highest point is
provided by his/her weight only. Then (g is the
S. θ = 20o 4. (m1 + m2)g cos θ
acceleration due to gravity) (2020)
(a) P -1, Q-1, R-1, S-3 (b) P-2, Q-2, R-2, S-3
(c) P-2, Q-2, R-2, S-4 (d) P-2, Q-2, R-3, S-3
15. A uniform wooden stick of mass 1.6 kg and length l
rests in an inclined manner on a smooth, vertical wall
of height h ( < l ) such that a small portion of the stick
extends beyond the well. The reaction force of the
wall on the stick is perpendicular on the stick. (The
stick makers an angle of 30o with the wall is equal in 1
magnitude to the reaction of the floor on the stick.) (a) v02 − 2 gh = gR
2
The ratio h/l and the frictional force f at the bottom of
the stick are (g = 10 ms-2): 3
(2016) (b) v02 − 2 gh =gR
2
h 3 16 3
=
(a) = ,f N (c) the centripetal force required at points x and z is
 16 3
zero
h 3 16 3 (d) the centripetal force required is maximum at
= =
(b) ,f N
 16 3 points x and z
@cbseinfinite

@cbseinfinite
ANSWER KEY 183
Answer Key
CHAPTER -1 UNITS & MEASUREMENTS AND BASIC MATHEMATICS
EXERCISE - 1 : EXERCISE - 2 :
BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS PREVIOUS YEARS JEE MAIN QUESTIONS
DIRECTION TO USE - DIRECTION TO USE -

Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions. Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.
1. (a) 2. (d) 3. (b) 4. (b) 1. (b) 2. (c) 3. (c) 4. (a)

5. (c) 6. (d) 7. (c) 8. (a) 5. (d) 6. (a) 7. (c) 8. (c)
9. (a) 10. (d) 11. (c) 12. (b) 9. (d) 10. (c) 11. (b) 12. (d)
13. (b) 14. (b) 15. (b) 16. (a) 13. (b) 14. (b) 15. (d) 16. (a)
17. (b) 18. (c) 19. (b) 20. (c) 17. (a) 18. (a) 19. (c) 20. (c)
21. (a) 22. (b) 23. (a) 24. (d) 21. (b) 22. (a) 23. (c) 24. (b)
25. (c) 26. (a) 27. (c) 28. (d) 25. (a) 26. (a) 27. (b) 28. (d)
29. (b) 30.(a) 31. (c) 32. (b) 29. (b) 30.(40) 31. (1050) 32. (c)
33. (d) 34.(d) 35.(b) 36. (d) 33. (c) 34.(d) 35.(a) 36. (c)
37. (d) 38.(d) 39.(a) 40. (a) 37. (b) 38.(c) 39.(25) 40. (a)
41. (c) 42.(d) 43.(b) 44. (a) 41. (d) 42.(c) 43.(a) 44. (90)
45. (d) 46.(d) 47.(d) 48. (a) 45. (d)
49. (c) 50.(b) 51. (a) 52. (a)
53. (b) 54.(b) 55.(b) 56. (b)
57. (c) 58.(c) 59.(b) 60. (a)
61. (a) 62.(a) 63.(c) 64. (a)
65. (c) 66.(d) 67. (d) 68. (b)
69. (d) 70.(c) 71. (a) 72. (c)
73. (a) 74.(d) 75. (b,c) 76. (c)
77. (d) 78.(c) 79. (b) 80. (a)
81. (a) 82.(a) 83.(c) 84. (c)
85. (c) 86.(3.00) 87. (6.67) 88. (34)
89. (5) 90.(14)
@cbseinfinite
ANSWER KEY 184
CHAPTER -1 UNITS & MEASUREMENTS AND BASIC MATHEMATICS
EXERCISE - 3: EXERCISE - 4:
ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTION PREVIOUS YEARS JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

1. (d) 2. (d) 3. (d) 4. (c) 1. (d) 2. (b) 3. (b) 4. (c,d)

5. (a) 6. (d) 7. (b) 8. (c) 5. (a,c) 6. (b) 7. (a) 8. (c)
9. (d) 10. (a) 11. (d) 12. (a) 9. (c) 10. (b,d) 11. (a,b,d) 12. (a)
13. (d) 14. (c) 15. (a) 16. (a) 13. (2) 14. (a,b) 15. (b,d)
17. (c) 18. (a) 19. (a) 20. (b)
21. (a,c,d) 22. (a,c,d) 23. (a,b,c) 24. (b,d)
25. (a,d) 26. (14.00) 27. (1)
28. (9.00) 29. (5.00) 30.(45.00)
@cbseinfinite
ANSWER KEY 185
Answer Key
CHAPTER -2 MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE

1. (a) 2. (b) 3. (c) 4. (d) 1. (b) 2. (b) 3. (a) 4. (c)

5. (a) 6. (a) 7. (a) 8. (a) 5. (c) 6. (d) 7. (a) 8. (d)
9. (d) 10. (b) 11. (d) 12. (c) 9. (d) 10. (d) 11. (b) 12. (b)
13. (a) 14. (d) 15. (a) 16. (b) 13. (a) 14. (b) 15. (a) 16. (a)
17. (b) 18. (b) 19. (a) 20. (c) 17. (8.00) 18. (3.00) 19. (20.00) 20. (a)
21. (d) 22. (b) 23. (c) 24. (b) 21. (b) 22. (c) 23. (c) 24. (d)
25. (b) 26. (b) 27. (b) 28. (b) 25. (c) 26. (b) 27. (c) 28. (c)
29. (b) 30.(a) 31. (a) 32. (b)
33. (a) 34.(c) 35.(b) 36. (b)
37. (d) 38.(b) 39.(b) 40. (b)
41. (d) 42.(b) 43.(b) 44. (c)
45. (b) 46.(a) 47.(c) 48. (b)
49. (c) 50.(a) 51. (c) 52. (b)
53. (c) 54.(c) 55.(b) 56. (d)
57. (b) 58.(c) 59.(d) 60. (b)
61. (b) 62.(b) 63.(c) 64. (a)
65. (d) 66.(a) 67. (a) 68. (b)
69. (d) 70.(d) 71. (c) 72. (c)
73. (d) 74.(a) 75. (d) 76. (a)
77. (b) 78.(a) 79. (a) 80. (d)
@cbseinfinite
ANSWER KEY 186
CHAPTER -2 MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE

1. (b) 2. (b) 3. (a) 4. (c) 1. (c) 2. (a) 3. (b) 4. (c)

5. (c) 6. (b) 7. (c) 8. (b) 5. (a)
9. (a) 10. (d) 11. (b) 12. (d)
13. (c) 14. (b) 15. (a) 16. (b)
17. (c) 18. (a) 19. (d) 20. (a)
21. (d) 22. (c) 23. (b) 24. (a)
25. (b) 26. (b) 27. (d) 28. (c)
29. (d) 30.(c) 31. (c) 32. (a)
33. (b) 34.(c) 35.(a) 36. (b)
37. (a) 38.(d) 39.(c) 40. (b)
41. (b) 42.(b) 43.(c) 44. (b)
45. (d) 46.(c) 47.(a) 48. (b,c)
49. (a,b,d) 50.(a,b,c) 51. (a,b,c) 52. (a,c)
53. (a,c,d) 54.(a,c,d) 55.(a,c,d) 56. (b,d)
57. (a,b,c,d)58.(a,c) 59.(45) 60. (13)
61. (20) 62.(d) 63.(d) 64. (d)
65. (d)
66.  a  q,s  b  p  c  p  d  q,r 
67.  a  p,q  b  p,q  c  p,r  d  q,r 
68.  A  R;B  S;C  P; D  R 

69. (d) 70.(b) 71. (a) 72. (b)
73. (d) 74.(b) 75.(c)
@cbseinfinite
ANSWER KEY 187
Answer Key
CHAPTER -3 MOTION IN A PLANE AND RELATIVE MOTION
DIRECTION TO USE -
DIRECTION TO USE - Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.
Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.
1. (b) 2. (b) 3. (d) 4. (b) 1. (c) 2. (c) 3. (d) 4. (a)

5. (d) 6. (c) 7. (a) 8. (b) 5. (c) 6. (b) 7. (c) 8. (d)
9. (b) 10. (c) 11. (a) 12. (b) 9. (d) 10. (b) 11. (c) 12. (a)
13. (a) 14. (c) 15. (a) 16. (c) 13. (b) 14. (a) 15. (d) 16. (b)
17. (a) 18. (b) 19. (c) 20. (a) 17. (a) 18. (a) 19. (a) 20. (d)
21. (d) 22. (c) 23. (c) 24. (a) 21. (a) 22. (a) 23. (b) 24. (b)
25. (b) 26. (a) 27. (a) 28. (c) 25. (580.00) 26. (b) 27. (a) 28. (120.00)
29. (c) 30. (b) 31. (a) 32. (c)
33. (b) 34. (c) 35. (a) 36. (c)
37. (c) 38. (a) 39. (d) 40. (c)
41. (a) 42. (d) 43. (b) 44. (a)
45. (c) 46. (c) 47. (d) 48. (b)
49. (c) 50. (b) 51. (c) 52. (b)
53. (d) 54. (b) 55. (d) 56. (d)
57. (d) 58. (c) 59. (d) 60. (a)
61. (c) 62. (b) 63. (a) 64. (d)
65. (a) 66. (b) 67. (b) 68. (c)
69. (d) 70. (a)
@cbseinfinite
ANSWER KEY 188
CHAPTER -3 MOTION IN A PLANE AND RELATIVE MOTION

1. (d) 2. (c) 3. (b) 4. (b) 1. ((a) 45º, (b) 2 m/s) 2. (b)

5. (d) 6. (c) 7. (c) 8. (d) 3. (5 m/s2) 4. (b)
9. (a) 10. (a) 11. (c) 12. (a) 5. (5) 6. (8)
13. (c) 14. (a) 15. (c) 16. (c) 7. (30.00) 8. (a,b,c,d)
17. (a) 18. (b) 19. (a) 20. (a) 9. (0.5) 10. (7.5)
21. (d) 22. (c) 23. (c) 24. (c)
25. (c) 26. (a) 27. (c) 28. (a)
29. (a) 30. (b) 31. (c) 32. (c)
33. (c) 34. (d) 35. (d) 36. (c)
37. (a) 38. (b) 39. (b) 40. (d)
41. (a) 42. (a) 43. (c) 44. (b)
45. (d) 46. (c) 47. (c) 48. (b)
49. (b) 50. (a) 51. (d) 52. (a)
53. (c) 54. (a,b,c) 55. (a,b,c,d) 56. (b,c)
57. (a,d) 58. (b) 59. (a,b,c,d) 60. (b,c,d)
61. (a,b) 62. (a,b,c) 63. (7.5) 64. (16)
65. (8) 66. (2) 67. (160) 68. (c)
69. (c) 70. (b) 71. (a) 72. (a)
73. (e) 74.  A  P; B  Q;C  R; D  S
75. (a) 76. (c) 77. (c) 78. (c)
79. (c) 80. (d)
@cbseinfinite
ANSWER KEY 189
Answer Key
CHAPTER -4 LAWS OF MOTION AND FRICTION

1. (a) 2. (c) 3. (a) 4. (b) 1. (c) 2. (a) 3. (c) 4. (c)

5. (d) 6. (a) 7. (b) 8. (b) 5. (d) 6. (b) 7. (b) 8. (b)
9. (a) 10. (a) 11. (a) 12. (c) 9. (a) 10. (b) 11. (d) 12. (b)
13. (d) 14. (a) 15. (b) 16. (d) 13. (a) 14. (b) 15. (b) 16. (c)
17. (b) 18. (d) 19. (c) 20. (d) 17. (a) 18. (b) 19. (c) 20. (a)
21. (d) 22. (c) 23. (c) 24. (b) 21. (b) 22. (c) 23. (d) 24. (c)
25. (c) 26. (d) 27. (a) 28. (d) 25. (21.00) 26. (25.00) 27. (25.00) 28. (3.33)
29. (b) 30.(c) 31. (b) 32. (c) 29. (492.00) 30.(500.00)
33. (c) 34.(c) 35.(a) 36. (b) 31. (12.00) 32. (5.00) 33.(30.00)
37. (b) 38.(a) 39.(c) 40. (d) 34. (10.00) 35.(5.00)
41. (b) 42.(c) 43.(a) 44. (b)
45. (c) 46.(a) 47.(d) 48. (d)
49. (d) 50.(b) 51. (d) 52. (d)
53. (b) 54.(c) 55.(a) 56. (a)
57. (a) 58.(a) 59.(b) 60. (c)
61. (b) 62.(c) 63.(a) 64. (c)
65. (a) 66.(c) 67. (c) 68. (c)
69. (a) 70.(a) 71. (b) 72. (d)
73. (c) 74.(b) 75. (a) 76. (a)
77. (d) 78.(a) 79. (b) 80. (b)
@cbseinfinite
ANSWER KEY 190
CHAPTER -4 LAWS OF MOTION AND FRICTION

1. (c) 2. (a) 3. (a) 4. (c) 1. (d) 2. (c) 3. (a)

5. (c) 6. (b) 7. (c) 8. (c)
4. ( 8 2 m, 2 s ) 5. (b)
9. (d) 10. (b) 11. (b) 12. (c)
6. (10 ms2) 7. (b) 8. (d)
13. (b) 14. (a) 15. (c) 16. (c)
9. (b) 10. (c) 11. (b) 12. (a)
17. (a) 18. (d) 19. (a) 20. (d)
13. (5.00) 14. (d) 15. (d) 16. (a)
21. (d) 22. (b) 23. (a) 24. (c)
17. (a,d)
25. (d) 26. (b) 27. (c) 28. (c)
29. (b) 30.(c) 31. (a) 32. (b)
33. (c) 34.(a) 35.(d) 36. (a)
37. (a) 38.(a) 39.(d) 40. (b)
41. (d) 42.(c) 43.(c) 44. (d)
45. (a) 46.(d) 47.(d) 48. (d)
49. (c) 50.(d) 51. (d) 52. (b)
53. (d) 54.(b) 55.(b) 56. (a)
57. (b) 58.(a) 59.(b) 60. (a)
61. (a,b,c,d) 62.(a,d) 63. (a,d)
64. (a,c) 65.(b,c) 66.(c)
67. (b,c,d) 68.(a,b,c) 69.(b,c)
70. (a,b,c) 71.(a,b,c) 72. (b,c) 73. (2.7)
74. (1) 75.(6) 76. (7.5) 77. (2)
78. (0.25) 79.(0.25) 80.(8.6) 81. (c)
82. (b) 83.(c) 84.(d) 85. (a)
86. (d) 87.(d) 88.(a)
89. (A–s; B–r; C–q, s; D–p)
90. (A–q,s; B–r; C–p,s; D–q,s)
91. (c) 92. (b) 93.(a) 94. (b)
95. (d) 96.(b) 97. (a) 98. (a)
99. (a) 100.(c)
@cbseinfinite
MASTER INDEX .
VOLUME 1:
Units and Measurements & Basic Mathematics
Motion in a Straight line
Motion in a Plane & Relative Motion
Laws of Motion & Friction
VOLUME 2:
Work, Energy and Power
Circular Motion
Centre of Mass, Momentum and Collision
Rotational Motion
Gravitation
VOLUME 3:
Mechanical Properties of Solids
Fluid Mechanics
Simple Harmonic Motion
Waves
VOLUME 4:
Thermal Physics
Kinetic Theory of Gases and Thermodynamics
@cbseinfinite
Creating Impact at Scale
65 Million+
Monthly
Youtube Views
49 Million+ 40+ Countries

Monthly Where Students
Web + App Visitors Take Live Classes
25 Million+ 26 Million+
Monthly Active Hours of
Users Live Learning
25 43
Parents
Happy
Trust
Students
Vedantu
MILLION+ MILLION+
@cbseinfinite
Our Achievers of 2021
JEE Advanced 2021
Prerak Kevin Abhinav Vedantu students ace

JEE ADV. AIR 35 JEE ADV. AIR 78 JEE ADV. AIR 156 JEE Advanced 2021
JEE MAIN AIR 243 JEE MAIN AIR 533 JEE MAIN AIR 512
Ankit Shrey
6% of IITs’ upcoming batch
will be from Vedantu
JEE ADV. AIR 172 JEE ADV. AIR 174

JEE MAIN AIR 252 JEE MAIN AIR 238
JEE Main 2021
903 students in
Top 10,000
Vaibhav Bajaj Hrishit B P Sunrit Roy K
AIR 35 AIR 113 AIR 139
78 869
students scored students scored
99.9+ PERCENTILE 99.9+ PERCENTILE
68 444
students in students in
Top AIR 1000 Top AIR 5000 Kushagra Ganesh C Iyer
Sharma
AIR 158 AIR 179
NEET (UG) 2021
AIR 23
Pavit
Online Long Term Course
Score 710 AIR 92

Anirudh
Online Crash Course
Score 705
Shivank
Online Crash Course
AIR 143 Score 700

1172 NEET
Qualifiers
CBSE Class 12 ISC Class 12 CBSE Class 10
Annmary
Aatman Upreti Shreya Roshan Aastha N Raj Gitanjali Rajulal Shreya Nigam Khushi Arora Anshika Singha
Santhosh
98.4% 98.4% 98.0% 99.8% 98.4% 99.8% 99.6% 99.4%
ICSE Class 10
M.D.Sriya Varshil J Patel Mohammad Y Devika Sajeev Sakshi Semwal Aloki Upadhyay Ishita Surana Saumya Gupta
99.4% 97.4% 97.2% 97.2% 97.2% 99.4% 99.2% 99.2%
@cbseinfinite
#HereForRealAchievers
CBSE INFINITE

@cbseinfinite
Regular tests &

assignments
VEDANTU
VIP
Parent-teacher
meetings

Our Students
5.2X
HIGHER
Our Students
Our Students
3.8X
6.6X
HIGHER
All India HIGHER

All India All India
37.28% 37.28% 8.25%

9.84% 9.84% 1.25%
CBSE 10 CBSE 12 JEE

SCAN CODE
to know more
about VIP
@cbseinfinite
@cbseinfinite
Published by
www.vedantu.com
Printed by
@cbseinfinite
How to use your
Tatva Practice Book
1
electron.
Electrostatics
Exercise - 2:
2
Solve all types of
0.2g is:
(c) 100s (d) 200s
Answer Key
3
For extra exam
@cbseinfinite
Founder’s Message
Dear Student,
level questions.

Anand Prakash
@cbseinfinite
Credits
Physics Team
Anmol Gupta Md. Fazlur Rahman

Nitesh Kumar Vishwanath G Mohit Kamboj
Santhosh Kumar Mani
Sarib Mohammad
Shetty.
@cbseinfinite
6
TABLE OF CONTENTS
WORK, ENERGY & POWER
Theory ................................................................................................................................................ 08
Solved examples ............................................................................................................................... 17
Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 274
CIRCULAR MOTION
Theory ................................................................................................................................................ 51
Solved examples ............................................................................................................................... 66
Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 276
@cbseinfinite
7
CENTRE OF MASS, MOMENTUM AND COLLISION
Theory ................................................................................................................................................ 95
Solved examples ............................................................................................................................... 108
Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 278
ROTATIONAL MOTION
Theory ................................................................................................................................................ 154
Solved examples ............................................................................................................................... 165
Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 280
GRAVITATION
Theory ................................................................................................................................................ 222
Solved examples ............................................................................................................................... 233
Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 283
@cbseinfinite
WORK, ENERGY & POWER 8
05
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
WORK,Chapter
ENERGY 05
& POWER 9
1. WORK W = x Fx + y Fy + zFz
Obviously, work is a scalar quantity, i.e., it has
1.1 Introduction to Work:
In Physics, work stands for ‘mechanical work’. magnitude only and no direction. However, work done
Work is said to be done by a force when the body is by a force can be positive or negative or zero.
displaced actually through some distance in the
direction of the applied force. NOTE:
However, when there is no displacement in the Work done is positive, negative or zero depending
direction of the applied force, no work is said to be upon the angle between force and displacement
done, i.e., work done is zero, when displacement of the
body in the direction of the force is zero.
 1.2 Dimensions and Units of Work
Suppose a constant force F acting on a body produces
 As work = force × distance
a displacement s in the body along the positive x-
=W (M1 L1T −2 ) × L
direction, as shown in the figure
W =  M1 L2 T −2 
This is the dimensional formula of work.

The units of work are of two types:
1. Absolute units 2. Gravitational units
Fig. 5.1 (a) Absolute unit

If 𝜃𝜃 is the angle which F makes with the positive 1. Joule. It is the absolute unit of work in SI.
 Work done is said to be one joule, when a force of
direction of the displacement, then the component of F
one newton actually moves a body through a
in the direction of displacement is (F cos𝜃𝜃 ). As work
distance of one metre in the direction of applied
done by the force is the product of component of force
force.
in the direction of the displacement and the magnitude
of the displacement, From=
W Fs cos θ
1 joule = 1 newton × 1 metre × cos 0° = 1 N–m
=
W ( Fcos θ ) s ... (1)
2. Erg. It is the absolute unit of work in cgs system.
If displacement is exactly in the direction of force Work done is said to be one erg, when a force of one
applied, θ = 0°. Then from (1), dyne actually moves a body through a distance of
W = (F cos 0°) s = F s one cm in the direction of applied force.
 
Equation (1) can be rewritten as W = F.s ... ( 2 ) =
From W Fs cos θ
Thus, work done by a force is the dot product of force = 1dyne × 1cm × cos
1erg = 0° 10−5 N × 10−2 m × 1
and displacement.
  1erg = 10−7 J
In terms of rectangular component, F and s may be
(b) Gravitational units
written as
  These are also called the practical units of work.
F = Fx î + Fy ˆj + Fz kˆ and s = xiˆ + yjˆ + zkˆ 1. Kilogram-metre (kg–m). It is the gravitational unit
 
From (2), W = F.s of work in SI.
( F î + F ˆj + F kˆ ) .( xiˆ + yjˆ + zkˆ )

Work done is said to be one kg–m, when a force of 1
W= x y z kg f move a body through a distance of 1 m in the
direction of the applied force.
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
From=
W Fcos θ (c) Zero work
 
1 kg–m = 1 kg f × 1 m × cos 0° = 9.8 N × 1 m = 9.8 When force applied F or the displacement s or both
joule, i.e., are zero, work done W = F s cos θ is zero. Again, when
 
1kg − m =
9.8 J angle θ between F and s is 90°, cos θ = cos 90° = 0.
2. Gram-centimetre (g-cm). It is the gravitational unit Therefore work done is zero.
of work in cgs system. For example :
Work done is said to be one g-cm, when a force of 1 When we push hard against a wall, the force we exert

g f moves a body through a distance of 1 cm. in the on the wall does no work, because s = 0. However, in
direction of the applied force. this process, our muscles are contracting and relaxing
From= W Fs cos θ alternately and internal energy is being used up. That is
1 g-cm = 1 g f × 1 cm × cos 0° why we do get tired.
1 g-cm = 980 dyne × 1 cm × 1 And
1g − cm =
980 erg In case of a particle moving in a circle with constant
speed the centripetal force acting on the particle is
always perpendicular to its velocity so angle θ between
1.3. Nature of Work Done  
Although work done is a scalar quantity, its value may F and s is 90°, [cos θ = cos 90° = 0]. Therefore, work
be positive, negative or even zero, as described below: done is zero.
(a) Positive work
 1.4. Work done by a Variable Force
As W == F. s Fs cos θ
If the force is variable, then the work done is
∴ when θ is acute (< 90°), cos θ is positive. Hence, xB
work done is positive. W = ∫ F ( dx )

xA
For example :
When a body falls freely under the action of gravity, θ
= 0°, cos θ = cos 0° = + 1. Therefore, work done by
gravity on a body falling freely is positive.
(b) Negative work
 
As W == F. s Fs cos θ
∴ When θ is obtuse (> 90°), cos θ is negative. Hence,
work done is negative. Fig. 5.3
xB
For example :
W = ∫ area of the strip PQRS
When a body is thrown up, its motion is opposed by xA
gravity. The angle θ between gravitational force and = total area under the curve between F and x-axis for
the displacement is 180°. As cos θ = cos 180° = –1,
x ∈ [ x A , xB ]
therefore, work done by gravity on a body moving
upwards is negative. W = Area ABCDA
Hence, work done by a variable force is numerically

equal to the area under the force-displacement curve
and the displacement axis.
2. KINETIC ENERGY
2.1. Introduction to Kinetic Energy:

The kinetic energy of a body is the energy possessed by
the body by virtue of its motion.
Fig. 5.2
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
For example:
(i) A bullet fired from a gun can pierce through a
target on account of kinetic energy of the bullet.
(ii) Windmills work on the kinetic energy of air. For
example, sailing ships use the kinetic energy of
wind.
(iii) Water mills work on the kinetic energy of water.
For example, fast flowing stream has been used to
grind corn.
(iv) A nail is driven into a wooden block on account of
kinetic energy of the hammer striking the nail.
Formula for Kinetic Energy
1
K.E. of body = m v2
2
2.2. Relation Between Kinetic Energy and Linear

Momentum
Let m = mass of a body, v = velocity of the body.
∴ Linear momentum of the body, p = mv
3. WORK ENERGY THEOREM
( m2 v2 )
1 1 According to this principle, work done by net force in
=
and K.E. of the body = mv 2
2 2m displacing a body is equal to change in kinetic energy of
the body.
∴ K.E. =
p2
2m Thus, when a force does some work on a body, the
kinetic energy of the body increases by the same
This is an important relation. It shows that a body amount. Conversely, when an opposing (retarding)
cannot have K.E. without having linear momentum. The force is applied on a body, its kinetic energy decreases.
reverse is also true. The decrease in kinetic energy of the body is equal to
1 the work done by the body against the retarding force.
Further, if p = constant, K.E ∝ Thus, according to work energy principle, work and
m
This is shown in figure (a) kinetic energy are equivalent quantities.
Proof : To prove the work-energy theorem, we confine
If K.E. = constant, p 2 ∝ m or
ourselves to motion in one dimension.
This is shown in figure (b). Suppose m = mass of a body, u = initial velocity of the
If m = constant, p 2 ∝ K.E or body, F = force applied on the body along it’s direction
of motion, a = acceleration produced in the body, v =
This is shown in figure (c)
final velocity of the body after t second.
Small amount of work done by the applied force on the
body, dW = F (ds) when ds is the small distance moved
by the body in the direction of the force applied.
 dv 
Now, = = m 
F ma
 dt 
( ds ) m  =
dv   dv 
=
dW F=  ds m  
 dt   dt 
 ds 
= =
dW mv dv  v
 dt 
Total work done by the applied force on the body in
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
increasing its velocity from u to v is Potential Energy and the Associated Conservative
v Force:
v v
 v2 
=W ∫u=
mv dv ∫u v dv m  2 
m= We know how to find potential energy associated with a
u
conservative force. Now we learn how to obtain the
W=
1
2
( )
m v2 − u 2 =
1
2
1
mv 2 − mu 2
2
conservative force if potential energy function is
known. Consider work done dW by a conservative
1 force in moving a particle through an infinitely small
But mv=
2
K= final K.E. of the body and 
2 f
path length d s as shown in the figures.
1
mu=
2
K=
i
initial K.E. of the body
2
= K f − K i = change in K.E. of body
W
i.e., work done on the body = increase in K.E. of body
4. POTENTIAL ENERGY
Fig. 5.4
4.1. Conservative and Non-Conservative Force  
dU =
Uf − Ui =
−dW = −F.ds =−Fds cos θ
Conservative force
A force is said to be conservative if work done by or From the above equation, the magnitude F of the
against the force in moving a body depends only on the conservative force can be expressed.
initial and final positions of the body, and not on the dU dU
F=
− =
−
nature of path followed between the initial and the final ds cos θ dr
positions. If we assume an infinitely small displacement in the
This means, work done by or against a conservative direction of the force, magnitude of the force is given
force in moving a body over any path between fixed by the following equation.
initial and final positions will be the same.
dU
For example, gravitational force is a conservative force. F= −
dr
Properties of Conservative forces:
Here minus sign suggests that the force acts in the
1. Work done by or against a conservative force, in direction of decreasing potential energy.
moving a body from one position to the other
∂U ∂U ∂U
depends only on the initial position and final Also, Fx =
− , Fy =
– , FZ =
−
∂x ∂y ∂z
position of the body.
2. Work done by or against a conservative force does
not depend upon the nature of the path followed by 4.2 Introduction to Potential Energy
the body in going from initial position to the final The potential energy of a body is defined as the energy
position. possessed by the body by virtue of its position or
3. Work done by or against a conservative force in configuration in some conservative field.
moving a body through any round trip (i.e., closed Thus, potential energy is the energy that can be
path, where final position coincides with the initial associated with the configuration (or arrangement) of a
position of the body) is always zero. system of objects that exert forces on one another.
Non-conservative Forces Obviously, if configuration of the system changes, then
its potential energy changes.
A force is said to be non-conservative, if work done by
or against the force in moving a body from one position Two important types of potential energy are :
to another, depends on the path followed between these 1. Gravitational potential energy
two positions. 2. Elastic potential energy.
For example, frictional force is non-conservative forces. Also WC = −∆U
WC : Work done by conservative force
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
4.3. Gravitational Potential Energy When the spring is compressed or elongated, it tends to
Gravitational potential energy of a body is the energy regain to its original length, on account of elasticity.
possessed by the body by virtue of its position above The force trying to bring the spring back to its original
the surface of the earth. configuration is called restoring force or spring force.
To calculate gravitational potential energy, suppose For a small stretch or compression, spring obeys
Hooke’s law.
m = mass of a body
Restoring Force ∝ stretch or compression
g = acceleration due to gravity on the surface of earth.    
h = height through which the body is raised, as shown F ∝ − x, F = − kx
in the figure. where k is a constant of the spring and is called spring
constant.
1
It is established that for a spring, k ∝ ,

 : Natural length of spring
i.e., smaller the length of the spring, greater will be the
force constant and vice-versa.
The negative sign in equation indicates that the
restoring force is directed always towards the
equilibrium position.
Fig. 5.5 Let the body be displaced further through an
infinitesimally
If we assume that height h is not too large and the value
small distance dx, against the restoring force.
of g is practically constant over this height,
Small amount of work done in increasing the length of
Wg =
mg × cos180° the spring by dx is
Wg = −mgh dW = – F dx = kx dx
Total work done in giving displacement x to the body
∆U =− Wg
can be obtained by integrating from x = 0 to x = x, i.e.,
∆U =mgh x =x x =x
 x2   x2  1 2
W= ∫ k x dx
= k   = k  − 0=  2 kx
UB − UA =
mgh x =0  2  x =0 2 
Considering U A= 0, U B= U= mgh This work done is stored in the spring at the point B in
the form of P.E
4.4. Spring Potential Energy 1 2
∴ P.E. at = =
B W kx
Potential energy of a spring is the energy associated 2
with the state of compression or expansion of an elastic
spring.
To calculate it, consider an elastic spring OA of
negligible mass. The end O of the spring is fixed to a
rigid support and a body of mass m is attached to the
free end A. Let the spring be oriented along x–axis and Fig. 5.7
the body of mass m lies on a perfectly frictionless The variation of potential energy with distance x is
horizontal table. shown in figure
P.E.
O
A
Fig.5.6
The position of the body A, when spring is unstretched X' A X
x
is chosen as the origin.
Fig. 5.8
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
A
5. MECHANICAL ENERGY AND ITS
CONSERVATION x
h
The mechanical energy (E) of a body is the sum of B
kinetic energy (K) and potential energy (U) of the body
(h–x)
i.e., E= K + U C
Ground
Obviously, mechanical energy of a body is a scalar
quantity measured in joule. Fig.5.9
We can show that the total mechanical energy of a As the body is at rest at A, therefore,
system is conserved if the force, doing work on the At A : K. E. of the body = 0
system are conservative. P.E. of the body = mgh where g is acceleration due to
This is called the principle of conservation of total gravity at A.
mechanical energy. T.E. of the body =K.E + P.E =+
0 mgh
For simplicity, we assume the motion to be one E A = mgh .... (1)

dimensional Let the body be allowed to fall freely under gravity,
only. Suppose a body undergoes a small displacement when it strikes the ground at C with a velocity v.
∆x under the action of a conservative force F ( x ) . From v 2 − u 2 =
2as
According to work energy theorem, v2 − 0 =2gh
change in K.E. = work done v 2 = 2gh ... ( 2 )
= F ( x ) .∆x
∆K 1 1
∴At C : K.E. of the =
body =mv 2 m(2=
gh) mgh
2 2
As the force is conservative, the potential energy
P.E. of the body = mgh = mg (0) = 0
function U ( x ) is defined as
Total energy of the body = K.E. + P.E.
−∆U =F ( x ) .∆x or ∆U =− F ( x ) .∆x 0 mgh ... ( 3)
E C= mgh + =
In the free fall, let the body cross any point B with a
= F ( x ) .∆x
Adding, we get ∆K velocity v1 , where AB = x
∆K = −∆U, ∆ ( K + U ) = 0 From v2 – u2 = 2 as
v12 − 0 =2(g)x .... ( 4 )
which means ( K + U ) =E =constant 1 1
=
At B : K.E. of the body =mv 2 = mgx
m(2gx)
2 2
Height of the body at B above the ground
5.1 Illustration of the Law of Conservation of
= CB = (h – x)
Mechanical Energy
P.E. of the body at B = mg (h – x)
To illustrate the law further, let us calculate kinetic
Total energy of the body at B = K.E. + P.E.
energy K.E., potential energy P.E. and total energy T.E.
of a body falling freely under gravity. E B = mgx + mg ( h − x )= mgx + mgh − mgx
Let m be the mass of the body held at A, at a height h E B = mgh ... ( 5 )

above the ground, as shown in the figure. From (1), (3), (5) we find that
E=
A
E=
B
E=
C
mgh which proves conservation of
mechanical energy
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
6. POTENTIAL ENERGY AND 6.1 Stable Equilibrium

At r = r1 the potential energy function is a minima and
NATURE OF EQUILIBRIUM
the force on either side acts towards the point r = r1 . If
dU
As we know F = − So, Force = negative of slope of the particle is displaced on either side and released, the
dr
force tries to restore it at r = r1 . At this location the
u versus r graph.
particle is in the state of stable equilibrium. The dip in
The state of stable and unstable equilibrium is the potential energy curve at the location of stable
associated with a point location, where the potential equilibrium is known as potential well. A particle when
energy function assumes a minimum and maximum disturbed from the state of stable equilibrium starts
value respectively, and the neutral equilibrium is oscillations about the location of stable equilibrium. At
associated with region of space, where the potential the locations of stable equilibrium, we have
energy function assumes a constant value. ∂U ∂F ∂2 U
F(r) =
− =
0; and < 0; and >0
For the sake of simplicity, consider a one-dimensional ∂r ∂r ∂r 2
potential energy function U of a central force F. Here r
is the radial coordinate of a particle. The central force F 6.2 Unstable Equilibrium
experienced by the particle equals to the negative of the At r = r2 the potential energy function is a maxima, the
slope of the potential energy function. Variation in the
force acts away from the point r = r2 . If the particle is
force with r is also shown in the figure.
displaced slightly on either side, it will not return to the
At locations =r r1=
, r r2 , and in the region r ≥ r3 , location r = r2 . At this location, the particle is in the
where potential energy function assumes a minimum, a state of unstable equilibrium. At the locations of
maximum, and a constant value respectively, the force unstable equilibrium, we have
becomes zero and the particle is in the state of ∂U ∂F ∂2 U
equilibrium F(r) =
− =
0; therefore > 0; and <0
∂r ∂r ∂r 2
6.3 Neutral Equilibrium

In the region r = r3 , the potential energy function is
constant and the force is zero everywhere. In this
region, the particle is in the state of neutral equilibrium.
At the locations of neutral equilibrium, we have
∂U ∂F ∂2 U
F(r) =
− =
0 therefore =
0 and =
0
∂r ∂r ∂r 2
7. POWER
Power of a person or machine is defined as the time rate

at which work is done by it.
work done
i.e., Power = Rate of doing work =
time taken
Thus, power of a body measures how fast it can do the

Fig.5.10
work.
NOTE: Units of power
Force is negative of the slope of the potential energy
function The absolute unit of power in SI is watt, which is
denoted by W.
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
From P = W/t
1 joule
1 watt = , i.e., 1W = 1Js −1
1sec
Power of a body is said to be one watt, if it can do one

joule of work in one second.
1 h.p. = 746 W
NOTE:
Power is also described in terms of rate at which energy
is consumed.
dW
P=
dt
  
Now, dW = F.d s, where F is the force applied and

d s is the small displacement.
 
F.d s
P=
dt

ds 
But = v, the instantaneous velocity.
dt
 
P = F.v
Dimensions of power can be deduced as:
W
P=
t
M1 L2 T −2
⇒=
[P] =  M1 L2 T −3 
T1
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
Solved Examples
Example - 1 Example – 2
The sign of work done by a force on a body is A body of mass 2 kg initially at rest moves under the
important to understand. State carefully if the action of an applied horizontal force of 7 N on a table
following quantities are positive or negative: with coefficient of kinetic friction = 0.1. Compute the
(a) work done by a man in lifting a bucket out of a (a) work done by the applied force in 10 s,
well by means of a rope tied to the bucket. (b) work done by friction in 10 s,
(b) work done by gravitational force in the above case, (c) work done by the net force on the body in 10 s,
(c) work done by friction on a body sliding down an (d) change in kinetic energy of the body in 10 s, and
inclined plane, interpret your results.
Sol. Mass of the body, m = 2 kg
(d) work done by an applied force on a body moving
on a rough horizontal plane with uniform velocity, Applied force, F = 7 N
Coefficient of kinetic friction, µ = 0.1
(e) work done by the resistive force of air on a
vibrating pendulum in bringing it to rest. Initial velocity, u = 0
Time, t = 10 s
Sol. (a) Positive: In the given case, force and displacement
are in the same direction. Hence, the sign of work Frictional force is given as:
done is positive. In this case, the work is done on f = µmg =
the bucket. 0.1 × 2 × 9.8 = 1.96 N
(b) Negative: in the given case, the direction of force Total force = 7-1.96 = 5.04
(vertically downward) and displacement (vertically Total acceleration of the body:
upward) are opposite to each other. Hence, the sign
a = 2.52 ms-2
of work done is negative.
The distance travelled by the body is given by the
(c) Negative: since the direction of frictional force is equation of motion :
opposite to the direction of motion, the work done
s = ut + (1/2)at2
by frictional force is negative in this case.
= 0 + (1/2) × 2.52 × (10)2 = 126 m
(d) Positive: Here the body is moving on a rough
(a) Work done by the applied force,
horizontal plane. Frictional force opposes the
motion of the body. Therefore, in order to maintain Wa = F × s = 7 × 126 = 882 J
a uniform velocity, a uniform force must be applied (b) Work done by the frictional force.
to the body. Since the applied force acts in the Wƒ = F× s = –1.96×126 = –247J
direction of motion of the body, the work done is
positive. (c) Net force = 7 + (-1.96) = 5.04 N
Work done by the net force,
(e) Negative: the resistive force of air acts in the
direction opposite to the direction of motion of the Wnet =5.04 × 126 = 635J
pendulum. Hence, the work done is negative in this (d) From the first equation of motion, final velocity
case. can be calculated as :
v = u + at = 0 + 2.52 × 10 = 25.2 m/s
Change in kinetic energy
= (1/2)mv2 - (1/2) mu2
= (1/2) × 2(v2 -u2) = (25.2)2 - 02 = 635 J
@cbseinfinite
Example – 3 Sol.
(a) Decreases: A conservative force does a positive
The potential energy function for a particle executing
work on a body when it displaces the body in the
kx 2 direction of force. As a result, the body advances
linear simple harmonic motion is given by U(x) =
2 toward the centre of force. It decreases the
where k is the force constant of the oscillator. For k = separation between the two, thereby decreasing the
0.5 N m-1, the graph of V (x) versus x is shown in fig. potential energy of the body.
Show that a particle of total energy 1 J moving under
(b) Kinetic energy: The work done against the
this potential must ‘turn back’ when it reaches x = +
direction of friction reduces the velocity of a
2m.
body. Hence, there is a loss of kinetic energy of the
body.
Example – 5
State if each of the following statements is true or

false. Give reasons for your answer.
(a) Total energy of a system is always conserved, no
Sol.
matter what internal and external forces on the
Total energy of the particle, E = 1J body are present.
Force constant, k = 0.5 N m-1. (b) Work done in the motion of a body over a closed
1 loop is zero for every force in nature.
Kinetic energy of the particle, K = mv 2 .
2
According to the conservation law : Sol.
E=U+K (a) False The external forces on the body may change
1 2 1 2 the total energy of the body.
=1 kx + mv (b) False The work done in the motion of a body over
2 2
a closed loop is zero for a conservation force only.
At the moment of ‘turn back’, velocity (and hence K)
becomes zero,
1 Example – 6
∴1 = kx 2
2 A body is initially at rest. It undergoes one-
1 dimensional motion with constant acceleration.
× 0.5x 2 =
1
2 The power delivered to it at time t is proportional to
x2 = 4 (i) t1/2 (ii) t (iii) t3/2 (iv) t2
x=+2 Sol.
Hence, the particle turns back when it reaches x = + 2 From
m.
v = u + at
v = 0 + at = at
Example – 4
As power, P = F × v
Underline the correct alternative: ∴ P = (ma) × at = ma2 t
(a) When a conservative force does positive work on a
As m and a are constants, therefore, P ∝ t
body, the potential energy of the body increases/
decreases/remains unaltered. Hence, right choice is (ii) t
(b) Work done by a body against friction always
results in a loss of its kinetic/potential energy.
@cbseinfinite
Example – 7 Sol.
Volume of the tank, V = 30 m3
A body is moving unidirectionally under the influence
Time of operation, t = 15 min = 15×60 = 900 s
of a source of constant power. Its displacement in time
Height of the tank, h = 40m
t is proportional to
(i) t1/2 (ii) t (iii) t3/2 (iv) t2 Efficiency of the pump, η = 30%
Density of water, ρ = 103 kg/m3
Sol. Mass of water, m = Vρ = 30 × 103 kg
As power, P = force velocity Output power can be obtained as :
Po = Work done/Time = mgh/t
P = [MLT-2][LT-1] = [ML2T-3] = constant
As, P = [ML2T-3] = 30 × 103 × 9.8 × 40/900 = 13.067 × 103 W
∴ L2T-3 = constant For input power Pi, efficiency, is given by the relation:
or, L2/T3 = constant =

P0
= 30%
pi
∴ L2 ∝ T3 or, L ∝ T3/2
Hence, right choice is (iii) t3/2 Pi = 13.067 × 100 × 103 /30
= 0.436 × 105 W = 43.6 kW

Example – 8
A body constrained to move along the z-axis of a Example – 10

coordinate system is subject to a constant force A body of mass 0.5 kg travels in a straight line with

F given by F = –i + 2j + 3k N velocity v = ax3/2 where a = 5 m1/2 s-1. What is the
Where i, j, k are unit vectors along the x-, y- and z-axis work done by the net force during its displacement
of the system respectively. What is the work done by from x = 0 to x = 2m?
this force in moving the body a distance of 4 m along Sol.
the z-axis? Mass of the body, m = 0.5 kg
Sol. Velocity of the body is governed by the
Force exerted on the body, equation,

F = –i + 2j + 3k N
v = ax3/2 and a = 5 m1/2 s-1
 Initial velocity, u at (x = 0) = 0
Displacement, S = 4k m
 Final velocity v at (x = 2m) = 10 2 m/s
Work done, W = F.s Work done, W = Change in kinetic energy
= (–i + 2j + 3k).(4k)
  = (1/2) m (v2 - u2)
= 0 + 0 + 3× 4 = (1/2) × 0.5 [(10 2 )2 – 02]
= 12J = (1/2) × 0.5 × 10 × 10 × 2
= 50 J
Hence, 12 J of work is done by the force on the body.
Example – 11
Example – 9
A man rowing a boat upstream is at rest with respect
A pump on the ground floor of a building can pump up to shore.
water to fill a tank of volume 30 m3 in 15 min. If the (a) Is he doing any work ?
tank is 40 m above the ground, and the efficiency of
(b) If he stops rowing and moves down with the
the pump is 30%, how much electric power is
stream, is any work being done on him ?
consumed by the pump?
@cbseinfinite
Sol. (a) No work is being done by the net force because Example – 16
displacement of boat relative to the shore is zero.
(b) When he stops rowing, force of water flow will A block of mass 5 kg is being raised vertically
produce displacement with respect to the shore. upwards by the help of a string attached to it. It rises
Therefore, work is done by force of flowing water. with an acceleration of 2 m/s2. The block rises by 2.5
KE of the person will increase. m. Match the correct choices :
Column-I Column-II
Example – 12 (A) Work done by gravity (P) 122.55
(B) Work done by tension (Q) 147.55
A stone is dropped from the top of a high tower. Will
the mechanical energy of the stone be conserved or (C) Net work done on the block (R) –122.55
not if the force of friction due to air is not (S) 25 J
neglected?
Sol. Let us first calculate the tension.
Sol. Mechanical energy is conserved only when forces From force diagram :
involved are conservative. As force of friction due to
air is non-conservative, therefore, mechanical energy T – mg = 5 a T = 5 (9.8 + 2) = 59 N.
of the stone is not conserved. As the T and displacement S are in same direction
(upwards), work done by the tension T is:
Example – 13
A man can jump higher on moon than on earth. With

same effort, can a runner improve his timing for 100
m race on moon as compared to that on earth ?
Sol. The man can jump higher on moon than on earth, W = T s = 59 (2.5) = 147.5 J
because the accleration due to gravity on moon is less
Work done by the gravity = – mgs = – 5 (9.8) (2.5)
than acceleration due to gravity on earth. However,
acceleration due to gravity has no effect on horizontal = – 122.5 J
motion. Therefore, a runner cannot improve his timing Net work done on block = work done by T + work
on the moon for 100 metre race. done by mg
= 147.5 + (–122.5) = 25 J
Example – 14
The answer is A → R, B → Q, C → S.
Work done by external forces is always equal to the
gain in kinetic energy. Is it always true ? Example – 17
Sol. Yes, This is the universal work-energy theorem.
A pump is required to lift 1000 kg of water per
minute from a well 20 m deep and eject it at a rate of
Example – 15 20 m/s.
Assume that the Earth revolves around the Sun in a (a) How much work is done in lifting water ?
perfectly circular orbit. Does the Sun do any work (b) How much work is done in giving it a KE ?
on the Earth ? (c) What HP (horse power) engine is required for the
Sol. While the force is along the radius, the displacement is purpose of lifting water ?
a along the tangent. Since radius and tangent are Sol. (a) Work done in lifting water = gain in PE (potential
perpendicular, therefore, E and S are also energy = 1000 × g × 20 = 1.96 × 105
perpenedicular. Consequently, work done is zero. (b) Work = 1000 × g × 20 = 1.96 × 105 J per minute
Work done (per minute) in giving it KE = 1/2 mv2
= 1/2 (1000) (20)2 = 2 × 105 J per minute
@cbseinfinite
(c) Power of the engine = work done per second Example – 20

5 3
= 1/60 (1.96 + 2) 10 J = 6.6 × 10 W (watts)
A smooth narrow tube in the form of an arc AB of a
Since 1 HP = 746 W,
circle of centre O and radius r is fixed so that A is
Hence, power required = 8.85 HP vertically above O and OB is horizontal. Particles P of
mass m and Q of mass 2 m with a light inextensible
Example – 18  πr 
string of length   connecting them are placed
 2 
An object of mass 5 kg falls from rest through a
inside the tube with P at A and Q at B and released
vertical distance of 20 m and attains a velocity of 10
from rest. Assuming the string remains taut during
m/s. How much work is done by the resistance of the
motion, find the speed of particles when P reaches B.
air on the object ? (g = 10 m/s2)
Sol. Applying Work-Energy theorem,
work done by all the force = change in kinetic energy
1
or Wmg + Wair = mv 2
2
1
∴ =
Wair mv 2 − Wmg Sol. All surface are smooth. Therefore, mechanical energy
2
of the system will remain conserved.
=
1 2
mv − mgh ∴ Decrease in PE of both the block
2 = increase in KE of both the blocks
1  πr  1
= × 5 × (10 ) − ( 5 ) × (10 ) × ( 20 )
2
∴ (mgr) + (2mg)  =  ( m + 2m ) v2
2  2 2
= – 750 J
2
=
Or v (1 + π ) gr
3
Example – 19
A rod of length 1.0 m and mass 0.5 kg fixed at one Example – 21

end is initially hanging, vertical. The other end is now
raised until it makes an angle 60° with the vertical. A small mass m starts from rest and slides down the
How much work is required ? smooth spherical surface of radius R. Assume zero
potential energy at the top. Find :
Sol. For increase in gravitational potential energy of a rod
we see the centre of the rod. (a) the change in potential energy
(b) the kinetic energy
(c) the speed of the mass as a function of the angle θ
made by the radius through the mass with the
vertical.
Sol. In the figure h = R (1 – cos θ)
W = change in potential energy

= mg (1 − cos θ )
2
Substituting the values, we have
( 0.5)( 9.8) 
1.0  (a) As the mass comes down, potential energy will
=W  (1 − cos 60° ) decrease. Hence,
 2 
= 1.225 J ∆U = – mg h = – mgR (1 – cos θ)
@cbseinfinite
(b) Magnitude of decrease in potential energy = 3 1

[as for A, h = d and y = d]
increase in kinetic energy 4 4
∴ Kinetic energy = mgh 3g k
=
Or v d +
= mgR (1 – cos θ) 2d 16 m
1
(c) mv=
2
mgR (1 − cos θ )
2 Example – 23
∴=
v 2gR (1 − cos θ )
A single conservative force F (x) acts on a 1.0 kg
particle that moves along the x–axis. The potential
energy U (x) is given by :
Example – 22 U (x) = 20 + (x – 2)2
where x is in meters. At x = 5.0 m the particle has a
One end of a light spring of natural length d and
kinetic energy of 20 J.
spring constant k is fixed on a rigid wall and the other
is attached to a smooth ring of mass m which can slide
without friction on a vertical rod fixed at a distance d
from the wall. Initially the spring makes an angle of
37° with the horizontal as shown in figure. When the
system is released from rest, find the speed of the ring
when the spring becomes horizontal [sin 37° = 3/5]
(a) What is the mechanical energy of the system ?

(b) The maximum kinetic energy of the particle, and
(c) The value of x at which it occurs.
(d) Determine the equation for F (x) as a function of
x.
(e) For what (finite) value of x does F (x) = 0 ?
Sol. If l is the stretched length of the spring, then from Sol.
figure (a) Potential energy at x = 5.0 m is
d 4 5 U = 20 + (5 –2)2 = 29 J
= cos=
37° =
, i.e.,  d
 5 4 ∴ Mechanical energy
5 d
so the stretch y =  − d = d − d = E = K + U = 20 + 29 = 49 J
4 4
(b) and (c) :
5 3 3
and =
h  sin 37=
° d× = d Maximum kinetic energy is at x = 2m, where the
4 5 4
potential energy is minimum and this maximum
Now taking point B as reference level and applying kinetic energy is,
law of conservation of mechanical energy between A
Kmax = E – Umin = 49 – 20 = 29 J
and B,
dU
EA = E B (d) F =− =2 ( x − 2) =
( 2x − 4 )
dx
1 1
Or mgh + ky 2 = mv 2 [as for B, h = 0 and y = 0] (e) F (x) = 0, at x = 2.0 m
2 2
2 where potential energy is minimum (the position of
3 1 d 1
Or mgd + k   = mv 2 stable equilibrium).
4 2 4 2
@cbseinfinite
Example – 24
A running man has half the kinetic energy of that of a

boy of half of his mass. The man speeds up by 1 m/s
so as to have same kinetic energy as that of the boy,
the original speed of the man is :
(a) ( )
2 -1 m / s (b) 2m/s
1 1
m/s m/s
( )
(c) (d)
2 –1 2
1
Sol. K man = K boy
2
1 2 1 1 m  2 
mv =    u 
2 2 2 2  
u
v=
2
K man = K boy
1  1 m  
m(v +1) 2 =    u 2 
2  2 2  
u
v +1 =
2
v +1 =
2v
2
(
⇒ 2– 2 v= 2 )
2 1
v= ⇒v= ms –1
2– 2 2 -1
@cbseinfinite

Work 5. A ball of mass 5 kg experiences a force F = (2 x2 + x)
( )
N. Work done in displacing the ball by 2 m from origin
1. A force of 10 iˆ − 3 ˆj + 6 kˆ N acts on a body of 5 kg is:
and displaces it from A ( 6 iˆ + 5 ˆj − 3 kˆ ) m to B (a)
22
3
J (b)
44
3
J
(10 iˆ − 2 ˆj + 7 kˆ ) m . The work done is (c)

32
J (d)
16
J
(a) zero (b) 121 J 3 3
(c) 100 J (d) 221 J 6. The relationship between force and position is shown
2. A body is under the action of two equal and opposite in figure (in one dimensional case). The work done by
forces, each of 3 N. The body is displaced by 2m. The the force in displacing a body from x = 1 cm to
work done is: x = 5 cm is:
(a) + 6 J (b) – 6 J
(c) 0 (d) none of the above
3. A particle is moved from (0, 0) to (a, a) under a force

= (3i + 4 j ) from two paths. Path 1 is OP and path 2
F
is OQP. Let W1 and W2 be the work done by this force
in these two paths. Then: (a) 20 erg (b) 60 erg
y (c) 70 erg (d) 700 erg
P (a, a) 7. Under the action of a force, a 2 kg body moves such
that its position x as a function of time t is given by
t3
x= , where x is in metre and t in second. The work
45° x 3
O Q done by the force in the first two seconds is:
(a) W1 = W2 (b) W1 = 2W2 (a) 1600 J (b) 160 J
(c) 16 J (d) 1.6 J
(c) W2 = 2W1 (d) W2 = 4W1
8. A particle moves along the x-axis from x = 0 to
4. The net work done by the tension in the figure when
x = 5 m under the influence of a force given by
the bigger block of mass M touches the ground is:
F = 7 – 2x + 3x2. Work done in the process is:
(a) 70 (b) 270
(c) 35 (d) 135
9. A particle moves under a force F = Cx from x = 0 to
x = x1. The work done is:
Cx12
(a) Cx12 (b)
2
(c) 0 (d) Cx13

10. A particle of mass 0.5 kg is displaced from position r1

(2, 3, 1) to r2 (4, 3, 2) by applying a force of magnitude
( )
30 N which is acting along iˆ + ˆj + kˆ . The work done
(a) + Mgd (b) – (M + m)gd by the force is
(c) – mgd (d) zero (a) 10 3 J (b) 30 3 J
(c) 30 J (d) none of these
@cbseinfinite
11. A box is dragged across a floor by a rope which makes

an angle of 45° with the horizontal. The tension in the
rope is 100 N while the box is dragged 10 m. The work
done is:
(a) 607.1 J (b) 707.1 J
(c) 1414.2 J (d) 900 J
µ mgd µ mgd cos θ
12. A horizonal force F pulls a 10 kg carton across the (a) (b)
cos θ + µ sin θ cos θ + µ sin θ
floor at a constant speed. If the coefficient of sliding
friction between carton and floor is 0.50, the work µ mgd sin θ µ mgd cos θ
(c) (d)
done by F in moving the carton through 5 m is: [take cos θ + µ sin θ cos θ − µ sin θ
g =10 m s -2 ] 18. A uniform chain of length L and mass M is lying on a
(a) 196 J (b) 210.5 J smooth table and one third of its length is hanging
vertically down over the edge of the table. If g is
(c) 245 J (d) 254 J
 acceleration due to gravity, work required to pull the
13. The work done by a force F = −6 x 3 iˆ ( ) N is hanging part on to the table is
displacing a particle from x = 4 m to x = –2 m is MgL
(a) MgL (b)
(a) – 240 J 3
(b) 360 J MgL MgL
(c) (d)
(c) 420 J 9 18
(d) will depend upon the path 19. A car covers a distance of 10 km along an inclined
14. A body of mass 500 g is taken up an inclined plane of plane under the action of a horizontal force of 5 N. The
length 10 m and height 5 m, and then released to slide work done on car is 25 kJ. The inclination of the plane
down to the bottom. The coefficient of friction to horizontal is:
between the body and the plane is 0.1. What is the (a) 0° (b) 30°
amount of work done by friction in the round trip? (c) 60° (d) 90°
(a) 5 J (b) 15 J Kinetic Energy
5 20. The P.E. and KE of a helicopter flying horizontally at
(c) 5 3 J (d) J
3 a height 400 m are in the ratio 5 : 2. The velocity of
15. A mass M is lowered with the help of a string by a helicopter is
g (a) 28 m/s (b) 14 m/s
distance x at a constant acceleration . The (c) 56 m/s (d) 30 m/s
2

magnitude of work done by the string will be: 21. A 120 g mass has a velocity = ( )
v 2 iˆ + 5 ˆj ms −1 at a
1 2 certain instant. K.E. of the body at that instant is
(a) Mgx (b) Mgx
2 (a) 3.0 J (b) 1.74 J
1 2 (c) 4.48 J (d) 5.84 J
(c) Mgx (d) Mgx
2 22. A body is moving under the action of a force.
16. The work done by pseudo forces is Suddenly, force is increased to such an extent that its
(a) positive (b) negative kinetic energy is increased by 100%. The momentum
(c) zero (d) all of these increases by:
(a) 100% (b) 60%
17. A block of mass m is pulled along a horizontal surface
(c) 40% (d) 20%
by applying a force at an angle q with the horizontal.
If the block travels with a uniform velocity and has a 23. A man has a box of weight 10 kg. The energy of the
displacement d and the coefficient of friction is m, then box, when the man runs with a constant velocity of
the work done by the applied force is 2 m/sec along with the box behind the bus, is:
(a) 10 joule (b) 30 joule
(c) 20 joule (d) 2 joule
@cbseinfinite
24. What is the shape of the graph between the speed and (a) 3.4 × 103 newton
kinetic energy of a body? (b) 5.2 × 103 newton
(a) straight line (b) hyperbola (c) 4.0 × 103 newton
(c) parabola (d) exponential (d) 3.6 × 103 newton
25. If the linear momentum is increased by 50%, then 31. How much work must be done by a force on 50 kg
kinetic energy will be increased by:
body in order to accelerate it from rest to 20 m/s in
(a) 50% (b) 100% 10 s?
(c) 125% (d) 25% (a) 103 J (b) 104 J
26. A running man has half the KE that a boy of half his
(c) 2 × 103 J (d) 4 × 104 J
mass has. The man speeds up by 1m/s and then has the
32. The displacement of a body of mass 2 kg varies with
same KE as that of boy. The original speeds of man
time t as s = t2 + 2t, where s is in meters and t is in
and boy in m/s are:
seconds. The work done by all the forces acting on the
(a) ( 2 + 1), ( 2 −1) (b) ( 2 + 1), 2( 2 + 1) body during the time interval t = 2s to t = 4s is
(c) 2, 2 (d) ( 2 + 1), 2( 2 −1) (a) 36 J (b) 64 J
27. An object moving horizontally with kinetic energy of (c) 100 J (d) 120 J
800 J experiences a constant opposing force of 100 N 33. An object of mass m is allowed to fall from rest along
while moving from a to b (where ab = 2m). The energy a rough inclined plane. The speed of the object on
of particle at b is: reaching the bottom of the plane is proportional to
(a) 700 J (b) 400 J (a) m0 (b) m
(c) 600 J (d) 300 J (c) m 2 (d) m −1
28. A particle moves on a rough horizontal ground with
34. A spring of spring constant 1000 N/m is compressed
3 through 5 cm and is used to push a metal ball of mass
some initial velocity v 0 . If th of its K.E. is lost in
4 0.1 kg. The velocity with which the metal ball moves
friction in time t0, the coefficient of friction between is
the particle and the ground is
(a) 5 m/s (b) 7.5 m/s
v v
(a) 0 (b) 0 (c) 10 m/s (d) 2.5 m/s
2 gt0 4 gt0
35. A block of mass 4 kg falls from a height of 3 m on a
3 v0 v spring of force constant l500 N/m. Calculate maximum
(c) (d) 0
4 gt0 gt0 compression of spring (g = 9.8 N/kg)
(a) 1.35 m (b) 0.42 m
Work Energy Theorem
(c) 0.735 m (d) 0.676 m
29. A particle of mass 0.l kg is subjected to a force which
varies with distance as shown in figure. If it starts its 36. A truck weighing 1000 kg changes its speed from
journey from rest at x = 0, its velocity at x = 12 m is 36 km/h to 72 km/h in 2 minutes. Thus, the work done
by the engine on the truck is:
(a) 2.5 × 105 J (b) 3.5 × 105 J
5
(c) 1.5 × 10 J (d) 5.5 × 105 J
37. The work done in time t on a body of mass m which is
accelerated from rest to a speed v in time t1 as a
function of time t is given by:
1 v 2 v
(a) m t (b) m t 2
(a) 0 m/s (b) 40 m/s 2 t1 t1
(c) 20 2 m / s (d) 20 m/s 2
1  mv  2 1 v2 2
30. What average force is necessary to stop a bullet of (c)   t (d) m t
2  t1  2 t12
mass 20 gm and speed 250 m/sec as it penetrates wood
to a distance of 12 cm:
@cbseinfinite
38. What average force is necessary to stop a bullet of 41. A block of mass 0.5 kg has an initial velocity of 10 m/s.
mass 20 gm and speed 250 m/sec as it penetrates wood down an inclined plane of angle 30°, the coefficient of
to a distance of 12 cm: friction between the block and the inclined surface is
(a) 3.4 × 103 newton (b) 5.2 × 103 newton 0.2. The velocity of the block after it travels a distance
(c) 4.0 × 10 newton3
(d) 3.6 × 103 newton of 10 m is:
(a) 17 m/s (b) 13 m/s
39. A particle at rest on a frictionless table is acted upon
by a horizontal force which is constant in magnitude (c) 24 m/s (d) 8 m/s
and direction. A graph is plotted of the work done on 42. A block is moved from rest through a distance of 4 m
the particle W, against the speed of the particle v. If along a straight-line path. The mass of the block is 5
there are no frictional forces acting on the particle, the kg and the force acting on it is 20 N. If kinetic energy
graph will look like: acquired by the block be 40 J, at what angle to the path
(a) is the force acting?
(a) 30o (b) 60o
o
(c) 45 (d) 0o
W 43. A particle is moving in a conservative force field from
point A to point B. UA and UB are the potential energies
of the particle at point A and B and WC is the work
v done by conservative forces in the process of taking
(b) the particle from A and B:
(a) WC = UB – UA (b) WC = UA – UB
W (c) UA > UB (d) UB > UA
44. Work done by the conservative forces on a system is
equal to
v (a) the change in kinetic energy of the system
(b) negative of the change in potential energy of the
(c)
system
(c) the change in total mechanical energy of the system
W (d) none of these
Potential Energy
45. If we shift a body in equilibrium from A to C in a
v
gravitational field via path AC or ABC
(d)
v

40. A body of mass 2 kg is moved from a point A to a point (a) the work done by the force F for both paths will
B by an external agent in a conservative force field. If be same
the velocity of the body at the points A and B are 5 m/s (b) WAC > WABC
and 3 m/s respectively and the work done by the
(c) WAC < WABC
external agent is –10 J, then the change in potential
(d) None of the above
energy between points A and B is
46. A meter stick of mass 400 g is pivoted at one end and
(a) 6 J (b) 36 J
displaced through an angle 60°. The increase in its
(c) 16 J (d) none of these potential energy is:
(a) 1 J (b) 10 J
(c) 100 J (d) 1000 J
@cbseinfinite
47. A man weighing 60 kg lifts a body of mass 15 kg to Conservation of Mechanical Energy

the top of a building 10 m high in 3 minutes. His 54. A toy gun uses a spring of very large value of force
efficiency is constant k. When charged before triggering in the
(a) 20% (b) 10% upward direction, the spring is compressed by a small
(c) 30% (d) 40% distance x. If mass of shot is m, on being triggered it
48. A spring of spring constant 8 N/cm has an extension of will go up to a height of:
5 cm. The minimum work done in joule in increasing kx 2 x2
(a) (b)
the extension from 5 cm to 15 cm is mg kmg
(a) 16 J (b) 8 J kx 2 (kx) 2
(c) 4 J (d) 32 J (c) (d)
2mg mg
49. The potential energy of a certain spring when stretched
55. A body is attached to the lower end of a vertical spiral
through a distance ‘S’ is 10 joules. The amount of work
spring and it is gradually lowered to its equilibrium
(in joule) that must be done on this spring to stretch it
position. This stretches the spring by a length d. If the
through an additional distance ‘S’ will be:
same body attached to the same spring is allowed to
(a) 30 (b) 40 fall suddenly, what would be the maximum stretching
(c) 10 (d) 20 in this case?
50. The force required to stretch a spring varies with the (a) d (b) 2d
distance as shown in the figure. If the experiment is 1
performed with the above spring of half the length, the (c) 3d (d) d
2
line OA will: 56. A sphere of mass 2 kg is moving on a frictionless
horizontal table with velocity n. It strikes with a spring
(force constant = 1 N/m) and compresses it by 4 m. The
velocity (n) of the sphere is:
(a) 4 m/s (b) 2 2 m/s
(a) shift towards F–axis (c) 2 m/s (d) 2 m/s
(b) shift towards X–axis 57. An elastic string of unstretched length L and force
(c) remain as it is constant k is stretched by a small length x. It is further
(d) become double in length stretched by another small length y. The work done in
51. Two springs have their force constants k1 and k2. Both the second stretching is
k ( x2 + y 2 )
are stretched till their elastic energies are equal. Then, 1 2 1
(a) ky (b)
ratio of stretching forces F1/F2 is equal to: 2 2
1 1
ky ( 2 x + y ) (d) k ( x + y )
(a) k1: k2 (b) k2 : k1 2
(c)
(c) k1 : k2 (d) k22 : k12 2 2
58. A block of mass 0.5 kg has an initial velocity of 10 m/s
52. On changing the length of a spring by 0.1 m there is a down an inclined plane 30°, the coefficient of friction
change of 5 J in its potential energy. The force constant between the block and the inclined surface is 0.2. The
of the spring is: velocity of the block after it travels a distance of 10 m
(a) 80 Nm-1 (b) 10.0 Nm-1 figure is
(c) 90 Nm-1 (d) 1000 Nm-1
53. A rod of mass m and length  is lying on a horizontal
table. Work done in making it stand on one end will
be:
mg
(a) mg  (b)
2
mg (a) 17 m/s (b) 13 m/s
(c) (d) 2 mg 
4 (c) 24 m/s (d) 8 m/s
@cbseinfinite
59. A coconut of mass 1.0 kg falls to earth from a height 67. A body of mass m was slowly pulled up the hill by a
of 10 m. The kinetic energy of the coconut, when it is force F which at each point was directed along the
4 m above ground is: tangent to the trajectory. All surfaces are smooth. Find
(a) 0.588 joule (b) 58.8 joule the work performed by this force:
(c) 5.88 joule (d) 588 joule
60. Calculate the K.E. and P.E. of the ball halfway up,
when a ball of mass 0.1 kg is thrown vertically
F h
upwards with an initial speed of 20 ms–1.
(a) 10 J, 20 J (b) 10 J, 10 J m
(c) 15 J, 8 J (d) 8 J, 16 J
61. If a body of mass 3 kg is dropped from top of a tower (a) mg  (b) – mg 
of height 250 m, then its kinetic energy after 3 sec. will
(c) mgh (d) zero
be
(a) 1126 J (b) 1048 J 68. A particle is released from the top of two inclined
(c) 735 J (d) 1296.5 J rough surfaces of height ‘h’ each. The angle of
inclination of the two planes are 30° and 60°
62. A body of mass 2 kg moves down the quadrant of a
respectively. All other factors (e.g. coefficient of
circle of radius 4 m. The velocity on reaching the
friction, mass of block etc.) are same in both the cases.
lowest point is 8 m/s. What is work done against
Let K1 and K2 be kinetic energies of the particle at the
friction?
bottom of the plane in two cases. Then
(a) 14.4 J (b) 28.8 J
(c) 64 J (d) Zero (a) K1 = K2 (b) K1 > K2
63. The KE of a 500-gram stone is 100 J. Against a force (c) K1 < K2 (d) data insufficient
of 50 N, how long will it travel? 69. A particle is released from a height H. At certain height
(a) 0.2 s (b) 0.1 s its kinetic energy is two times its potential energy.
(c) 0.3 s (d) 0.4 s Height and speed of particle at that instant are
64. If water falls from a dam into a turbine wheel 19.6 m H 2 gH H gH
below, then velocity of water at turbine, is (a) , (b) , 2
3 3 3 3
(Take g = 9.8 m/s2)
(a) 9.8 m/s (b) 19.6 m/s 2H 2 gH H
(c) , (d) , 2 gH
(c) 39.2 m/s (d) 98.0 m/s 3 3 3
65. Three particles A, B and C are projected from the top 70. A body is falling with velocity 1 m/s at a height 3 m
of a tower with the same speed. A is thrown straight from the ground. The speed at height 2 m from the
upwards B straight down and C horizontally. They hit ground will be:
the ground with speeds vA, vB and vC, then which of (a) 4.54 m/s (b) 1 m/s
the following is correct: (c) 6 m/s (d) 5.32 m/s
(a) vA = vB > vC (b) vA = vB = vC 71. If v be the instantaneous velocity of the body dropped
(c) vA > vB = vC (d) vB > vC > vA from the top of a tower, when it is located at height h,
66. A pendulum of length 2 m left at A. When it reaches then which of the following remains constant?
B, it loses 10% of its total energy due to air resistance.
v2
The velocity at B is: (a) gh + v2 (b) gh +
2
A v2
(c) gh – (d) gh – v2
2
B
(a) 6 m/s (b) 1 m/s
(c) 2 m/s (d) 8 m/s
@cbseinfinite
Potential Energy Graphs Power

72. The potential energy of a particle is represented in the 75. A pump of 200 W power is lifting 2 kg water from an
figure. The force acting on the system will be average depth of 10 m per second. Velocity of water
delivered by the pump is (g = 9.8 m/s2)
represented by
(a) 3 m/s (b) 2 m/s
(c) 4 m/s (d) 1 m/s
76. A machine gun fires 360 bullets per minute, with a
velocity of 600 m/s. If the power of the gun is 5.4 kW,
mass of each bullet is (assume 100% efficiency)
(a) 5 kg (b) 0.5 kg
(a) (b)
(c) 5 g (d) 0.5 g
77. A train of mass 100 ton is moving up an incline of 1 in
100 at a constant speed of 36 km ph. If the friction per
ton is 100 N, then power of the engine is
(c) (d)
(a) 198 kW (b) 96 kW
(c) 298 kW (d) 398 kW
73. The diagrams represent the potential energy (U) of a 78. The power of a water pump is 2 kW. If g = 10 m/s2, the
function of the inter-atomic distance r. Which diagram amount of water it can raise in one minute to a height
corresponds to stable molecules found in nature.
of 10 m is
(a) 2000 litre (b) 1000 litre
(c) 100 litre (d) 1200 litre
79. A man is riding on a cycle with velocity 7.2 km/hr up
(a) (b) a hill having a slope 1 in 20. Total mass of the man and
cycle is 100 kg. The power of man is:
(a) 98 W (b) 49 W
(c) 196 W (d) 147 W
80. Power applied to a particle varies with time as
(c) (d) P = (3t2 – 2t + 1) W, where t is in second. Find the
change in its kinetic energy between time t = 2s and
t = 4s.
74. The potential energy of a particle varies with distance
x as shown in the graph. (a) 32 J (b) 46 J
(c) 61 J (d) 102 J
The force acting on the particle is zero at

(a) C (b) B
(c) B and C (d) A and D
@cbseinfinite

1. A car of weight W is on an inclined road that rises by 5. A time dependent force F=6 t acts on a particle of mass
100 m over a distance of 1 km and applies a constant 1 kg. If the particle starts from rest, the work done by
W the force during the first 1 sec. will be:
frictional force on the car. While moving uphill on
20 (2017)
−1
the road at a speed of 10 m s , the car needs power P. (a) 4.5 J (b) 22 J
P (c) 9 J (d) 18 J
If it needs power while moving downhill at speed
2
6. A particle is moving in a circular path of radius a
v then value of v is: (2016)
k
(a) 20 ms −1 (b) 15 ms −1 under the action of an attractive potential U = − 2 .
2r
(c) 10 ms −1 (d) 5 ms −1 its total energy is: (2018)
2. A particle of mass M is moving in a circle of fixed
k
radius R in such a way that its centripetal acceleration (a) (b) Zero
2a 2
at time t is given by n 2 Rt 2 where n is a constant. The
power delivered to the particle by the force acting on 3 k k
(c) − (d) −
it, is: (all quantities are measured in S.I unit) 2 a2 4a 2
(2016) 7. A body of mass m starts moving from rest along x-
(a) Mn 2 R 2 t (b) MnR 2 t axis so that its velocity varies as v = a s where a is a
1 constant and s is the distance covered by the body. The
(c) MnR 2 t 2 (d) Mn 2 R 2 t 2
2 total work done by all the forces acting on the body in
3. Concrete mixture is made by mixing cement, stone the first t seconds after the start of the motion is:
and sand in a rotating cylindrical drum. If the drum (2018)
rotates too fast, the ingredients remain stuck to the
1 42
wall of the drum and proper mixing of ingredients (a) ma t (b) 8ma 4 t 2
8
does not take place. The maximum rotational speed of
the drum in revolutions per minute (r p m) to ensure 1 4 2
(c) 4ma 4 t 2 (d) ma t
proper mixing is close to: (Take the radius of the drum 4
to be 1.25 m and its axis to be horizontal): (given 8. Two particles of the same mass m are moving in
2 = 1.414 and g = 10 m / s 2 ) (2016) circular orbits because of force, given by
(a) 0.4 (b) 1.3 −16 3
F=(r ) − r . The first particle is at a distance r=1,
(c) 8.0 (d) 27.0 r
and the second, at r =4. The best estimate for the ratio
4. Velocity-time graph for a body of mass 10 kg is shown
of kinetic energies of the first and the second particle
in figure. Work-done on the body in first two second
is closest to: (2018)
of the motion is: (2016)
(a) 6 × 10−2 (b) 3 × 10−3
(c) 10−1 (d) 6 × 102
9. A force acts on a 2kg object so that its position
(in m) is given as a function of time (in s) as
=x 3t 2 + 5. What is the work done by this force in first
5 second? (2019)
(a) 850 J (b) 950 J
(a) 12000 J (b) -12000 J
(c) 875 J (d) 900 J
(c) -4500 J (d) -9300 J
@cbseinfinite
10. A particle which is experiencing a force, given by 14. A particle moves in one dimension from rest under the
    
F= 3i − 12 j , undergoes a displacement of d = 4i . If influence of a force that varies with the distance
travelled by the particle as shown in the figure. The
the particle had a kinetic energy of 3J at the beginning
kinetic energy of the particle (in J) after it has travelled
of the displacement, what is its kinetic energy at the
3 m is: (2019)
end of the displacement? (2019)
(a) 9 J (b) 12 J
(c) 10 J (d) 15 J
11. A uniform cable of mass ' M ' and length ' L ' is placed
th
1
on a horizontal surface such that its   part is
n
hanging below the edge of the surface. To lift the
hanging part of the cable up to the surface, the work
done should be: (2019)
MgL MgL (a) 2.5 J (b) 4 J
(a) (b) (c) 5 (d) 6.5 J
2n 2 n2
15. A 60 HP electric motor lifts an elevator with a
2MgL
(c) (d) nMgL maximum total load capacity of 2000 kg. If the
n2
frictional force on the elevator is 4000 N, the speed of
12. A block of mass m, lying on a smooth horizontal
the elevator at full load is close to (Given
surface, is attached to a spring (of negligible mass) of
= =
1HP 746 W, g 10 m / s 2 ) (2019)
spring constant k. The other end of the spring is fixed,
as shown in the figure. The block is initially at rest in (a) 1.5 m / s (b) 2.0 m / s
its equilibrium position. If now the block is pulled (c) 1.7 m / s (d) 1.9 m / s
with a constant force F, the maximum speed of the 16. An elevator in a building can carry a maximum of
block is: (2019) 10 persons, with the average mass of each person being
68 kg. The mass of the elevator itself is 920 kg and it
moves with a constant speed of 3 m/s. The frictional
force opposing the motion is 6000 N. If the elevator is
moving up with its full capacity, the power delivered
by the motor to the elevator ( g = 10 m / s 2 ) must be at
least (2020)
2F 2F
(a) (b) (a) 66000 W (b) 63360 W
mk π mk
(c) 48000 W (d) 56300 W
πF F 17. Particle moves from point A to point B along the line
(c) (d)
mk mk 
shown in figure under the action of force F =− xiˆ + yjˆ
13. A block of mass m is kept on a platform which starts 
from rest with constant acceleration g/2 upwards, as .Determine the work done on the particle by F in
shown in figure. The work done by normal reaction on moving the particle from point A to point B (all
block in time t is: quantities are in S I units) (2020)
(2019)
mg 2 t 2 mg 2 t 2 (a) 1 J (b) 1/2 J

(a) − (b)
8 8 (c) 2 J (d) 3/2 J
3mg 2 t 2
(c) 0 (d)
8
@cbseinfinite
18. A particle is moving unidirectionally on a horizontal 20. If the potential energy between two molecules is given
plane under the action of a constant power supplying A B
by U = − 6 + 12 , then at equilibrium, separation
energy source. The displacement (s) - time (t) graph r r
that describes the motion of the particle is (graphs are between molecules, and the potential energy are:
drawn schematically and are not to scale): (2020)
(2020) 1/ 6 1/ 6
 2B  A2  2B  A2
(a) (a)   ,− (b)   ,−
 A  4B  A  2B
1/ 6 1/ 6
B  B  A2
(c)   , 0 (d)   ,−
 A  2A  2B
21. A small block starts slipping down from a point B on
an inclined plane AB, which is making an angle θ
with the horizontal section B C is smooth and the
(b)
remaining section C A is rough with a coefficient of
friction µ . It is found that the block comes to rest as
it reaches the bottom (point A) of the inclined plane.
If BC = 2 AC, the coefficient of friction is given by
µ = k tan θ . The value of k is (2020)
(c)
22. A body of mass 2 kg is driven by an engine delivering

a constant power of 1 J / s . The body starts from rest
and moves in a straight line. After 9 seconds, the body
has moved a distance (in m) (2020)
(d) 23. A small bob tied at one end of a thin string of length 1
m is describing a vertical circle so that the maximum
and minimum tension in the string is in the ratio 5: 1.
The velocity of the bob at the highest position is ...m/s.
(Take g = 10 m / s 2 ) (2021)
24. The potential energy (U) of a diatomic molecule is a
function dependent on r (interatomic distance) as
α β
U= − − 3 Where, α and β are positive
19. A person pushes a box on a rough horizontal platform r10 r 5
surface. He applies a force of 200 N over a distance of constants. The equilibrium distance between two
15 m. Thereafter, he gets progressively tired and his  2α 
a/b
applied force reduces linearly with distance to 100 N. atoms will be   , where a/b is in lowest form
 β 
The total distance through which the box has been
and a=_________________, (2021)
moved is 30 m. What is the work done by the person
during the total movement of the box? 25. Two solids A and B of mass 1 kg and 2 kg respectively
are moving with equal linear momentum. The ratio of
(2020)
A
(a) 5690 J (b) 5250 J then kinetic energies ( KE ) A : ( KE ) B will be so the
1
(c) 2780 J (d) 3280 J value of A will be (2021)
@cbseinfinite
26. As shown in the figure, a particle of mass 10 kg is (c)

placed at a point A. When the particle is slightly
displaced to its right, it starts moving and reaches the
point B. The speed of the particle at B is x m/s.
(d)
( Take g = 10 m / s )
2
The value of ‘x’ to the nearest integer is………

(2021)
27. A ball of mass 4 kg, moving with a velocity of
10 ms −1 , collides with a spring of length 8 m and force
constant 100Nm −1 . The length of the compressed 29. A boy is rolling a 0.5 kg ball on the frictionless floor
spring is x in m. The value of x, to the nearest integer, with the speed of 20 m/s. The ball gets deflected by an
is (2021) obstacle on the way. After deflection it moves with
28. A particle of mass m moves in a circular orbit under 5 % of its initial kinetic energy. What is the speed of
C the ball now? (2021)
the central potential field, U (r ) = − , where C is a
r (a) 19.0 m / s (b) 4.47 m / s
positive constant. The correct radius - velocity graph
(c) 14.41 m / s (d) 1.00 m / s
of the particle's motion is: (2021)
(a) 30. The constant power delivering machine has towed a
box, which was initially at rest, along a horizontal
straight line. The distance moved by the box in time
‘t’ is proportional to: (2021)
(a) t1/ 2 (b) t 2/3
(c) t (d) t 3/ 2
(b)
@cbseinfinite

Objective Questions I [Only one correct option] 280 140
(a) (b)
5 5
1. ( )
Force acting on a particle is 2i + 3 j N. Work done by
232 192
(c) (d)
this force is zero, when a particle is moved on the line 5 5
3y + kx = 5. Here, value of k is: 6. If a person is pushing a box inside a moving train with
(a) 2 (b) 4 
a force F , the work done in the frame of the earth will
(c) 6 (d) 8 be:
2. A small block of mass m is kept on a rough inclined    
(a) F . s0 (b) F . s
surface of inclination θ fixed in an elevator. The   
elevator goes up with a uniform velocity v and the (c) F . ( s + s0 ) (d) Zero
block does not slide on the wedge. The work done by 
(where s is the displacement of the box in the train
the force of friction on the block in a time t will be: 
and s0 is the displacement of the train relative to the
(b) mgvt cos θ
2
(a) Zero
ground.)
1
(c) mgvt sin θ
2
(d) mgvt sin2θ 7. A body is lifted over route I and then route II such that
2 force is always tangent to the path. Coefficient of
3. A plank of mass 10 kg and a block of mass 2 kg are friction is same for both the paths. Work done
placed on a horizontal plane as shown in the figure.
2 kg
10 kg 60 N
There is no friction between plane and plank. The
coefficient of friction between block and plank is 0.5,
(a) on both the routes is same
A force of 60 N is applied on plank horizontally In
first 2 s the work done by the friction on the block is: (b) on route I is more
(a) – 100 J (b) 100 J (c) on route II is more
(c) zero (d) 200 J (d) on both the routes is zero
 8. An object of mass m is tied to a string of length l and a
4. A force of F = 2 xi + 2 j + 3 z 2 k N is acting on a
variable horizontal force is applied on it, which starts
particle. Find the work done by this force in displacing at zero and gradually increases (it is pulled extremely
the body from (1, 2, 3) m to (3, 6, 1) m. slowly so that equilibrium exists at all times) until the
(a) –10 J (b) 100 J string makes an angle θ with the vertical. Work done
(c) 10 J (d) 1 J by the force F is:

5. A force F = ( 3 xy − 5 z ) j + 4 zk is applied on a particle.
The work done by the force when the particle moves
from point (0, 0, 0) to point (2, 4, 0) as shown in the
figure is
(a) mgl (1 – sin θ) (b) mgl

(c) mgl (1 – cos θ) (d) mgl (1 – tan θ)
@cbseinfinite
9. A particle moves along the x–axis from x= x1 to x = x2 b 2a

(a) (b)
under the influence of a force given by F = 2x. Work 2a b
done in the process is
2b a
(a) zero (b) x22 − x12 (c) (d)
a 2b
(c) 2x2 (x2 – x1) (d) 2x1 (x1 – x2) 14. A uniform chain AB of mass m and length  is placed
10. Velocity time graph of a particle of mass 2 kg moving with one end A at the highest point of a hemisphere of
in a straight line is as shown in figure. Work done by radius R. Referring to the top of the hemisphere as the
all forces on the particle is: datum level, the potential energy of the chain is (given
πR
that  < )
2
(a) 400 J (b) –400 J mR 2 g    mR 2 g   

(a)  − sin  (b)  − sin 
(c) –200 J (d) 200 J  R R 2  R R
11. Work done by a conservative force on a system is
mR 2 g    mR 2 g   
equal to (c)  sin −  (d) −  − sin 
2  R R  R R
(a) the change in kinetic energy of the system
15. The given plot shows the variation of U, the potential
(b) the change in potential energy of the system
energy of interaction between two particles, with the
(c) the change in total mechanical energy of the system distance separating them, r
12. A chain (uniform) of mass m and length  has a small
block of mass M attached to one of its ends and hangs
from the surface of a table, with one-third its length
resting on it. It is pulled by a constant horizontal force
to lift the block slowly to the table surface. The work
done by the force is 1. B and D are equilibrium points.
2. C is a point of stable equilibrium.
3. The force of interaction between the two particles is
attractive between points C and B, and repulsive
between points D and E on the curve.
4. The force of interaction between the particles is
repulsive between points C and A.
Which of the above statements are correct?
 2   m  g  
(a) (M + m)g   (b)  M +   (a) 1 and 3 (b) 1 and 4
 3  3  3 
(c) 2 and 4 (d) 2 and 3
 g   m  2 g  
(c) ( M + m )   (d)  M +   16. The potential energy function associated with the force
 3   3  3  
F 4 xy i + 2 x 2 j is
=
13. A particle located in a one-dimensional potential field
2 2
a b (a) U = –2x y (b) U = –4x y + constant
has its potential energy function as U(x) = 4 − 2 2
x x (c) U = 2x y + constant (d) not defined
where a and b are positive constants. The position of
equilibrium x-corresponds to
@cbseinfinite
17. The potential energy for a force field is given by 22. A man raises 1 kg wt. to a height of 100 cm and
U (x, y) = cos (x + y). The force acting on a particle at holds it there for 30 minutes. How much work has he
 π performed?
position given by coordinates  0,  is
 4 (a) 1 × 9.8 J (b) 1 × 9.8 × 30 × 60 J
( i + j ) ( i + j )
1 1 (c) 1 × 9.8 × 30 J (d) 1 × 9.8 × 30 erg.
(a) − (b)
2 2 23. A ball is dropped from a height of 20 cm. Ball
rebounds to a height of 10 cm. What is the loss of
1 3  1 3 
(c)  i + j (d)  i − j energy?
2 2  2 2 
  (a) 25% (b) 75%
18. In the given figure the variation of potential energy (c) 50% (d) 100%
of a particle of mass m = 2 kg is represented w.r.t. its
24. A machine, which is 75% efficient, uses 12 J of
x-coordinate. The particle moves under the effect of
energy in lifting up a 1 kg mass through a certain
the conservative force along the x-axis. which of the
distance. The mass is then allowed to fall through
following statements is incorrect about the particle?
that distance. the velocity at the end of its fall is
–1
(in ms )
(a) 24 (b) 32
(c) 18 (d) 9
25. A rope ladder with a length l carrying a man with a
mass m at its end is attached to the basket of balloon
with a mass M. The entire system is in equilibrium in
(a) If it is released at the origin, it will move in
the air. As the man climbs up the ladder into the
negative x-axis
balloon, the balloon descends by a height h. Then the
(b) If it is released at x = 2 + ∆ where ∆ → 0, then its potential energy of the man
maximum speed will be 5 m/s and it will perform
(a) increases by mg (l – h)
oscillatory motion
(b) increases by mgl
(c) If initially x = –10 and then it will cross x = 10
(c) increase by mgh
(d) x = –5 and x = +5 are unstable equilibrium
positions of the particle (d) increases by mg (2l – h)
19. The potential energy for a body of mass m that is 26. The force acting on a body moving along x–axis
acted on by a very massive body is given by varies with the position of the particle as shown in
kx 3 the figure. The body is in stable equilibrium at:
U=
−mgx + . The corresponding force is
3
2 2
(a) – mg + kx (b) mg – kx
(c) mg – kx (d) – mg + kx
20. A ball is released from the top of a tower. The ratio
of work done by force of gravity in first, second and
third second of the motion of ball is
(a) 1 : 2 : 3 (b) 1 : 4 : 16 (a) x = x1 (b) x = x2
(c) 1 : 3 : 5 (d) 1 : 9 : 25 (c) both x1 and x2 (d) neither x1 nor x2
21. A man throws the bricks to a height of 12 m where
27. If the speed of a vehicle increases by 2 m/s, its K.E.
they reach with a speed of 12 m/s. If he throws the
is doubled. The original speed of the vehicle was
bricks such that they just reach that height, what
percentage of energy will be saved (g = 9.8 m/s2) (a) ( )
2 +1 m / s (b) 2 ( )
2 +1 m / s
(a) 29% (b) 46%
(c) 37.5% (d) 50% (c) 2 ( )
2 +1 m / s (d) 2 m / s.
@cbseinfinite
28. A particle moves in a straight line with retardation

proportional to its displacement. Its loss of KE for any
displacement x is proportional to
2
(a) x (b) x
0 x
(c) x (d) e
29. An engine pumps water continuously through a hole.
Speed with which water passes through the hole nozzle
is v and k is the mass per unit length of the water jet as
it leaves the nozzle. Find the rate at which kinetic (a) x0 (b) 2x0
energy is being imparted to the water.
(c) 3x0 (d) 1.5x0
1 1
(a) kv 2 (b) kv 3 32. A spring of stiffness k is kept compressed by applying
2 2
 mg 
horizontal force on m by a length x0  =  . If the
v2 v3  k 
(c) (d)
2k 2k force F is withdrawn suddenly, the block oscillates and
finally stops. In consequence, frictional loss is equal to
30. A block of 4 kg mass starts at rest and slides a distance
50% of the initial potential energy stored in the spring.
d down a frictionless incline (angle 30°) where it runs
The coefficient of friction the between block and the
into a spring of negligible mass. The block slides an
ground is
additional 25 cm before it is brought to rest
momentarily by compressing the spring. The force
constant of spring is 400 N/m. the value of d is then
–2
(take g = 10 ms )
1 2
(a) (b)
2 3
1 1
(c) (d)
2 3
33. A mass m is allowed to fall on a pedestal fixed on the
top of a vertical spring. If the height of the mass was H
(a) 25 cm (b) 37.5 cm from the pedestal and the compression of the spring is
(c) 62.5 cm (d) none of the above d then the spring’s force factor is given by
31. Two discs, each having mass m, are attached rigidly to

the ends of a vertical spring. One of the discs rests on a
horizontal surface and the other produces a
compression x0 on the spring when it is in equilibrium.
How much further must the spring be compressed so
that when the force causing compression is removed,
the extension of the spring will be able to lift the lower
disc off the table (H + d ) (H − d )
(a) Mg 2
(b) 2 Mg
d d2
Mg H (H + d )
(c) (d) 2 Mg
2 d2 d2
@cbseinfinite
34. A vertical spring of force constant 100 N/m is

attached with a hanging mass of 10 kg. Now an
external force is applied on the mass so that the
spring is stretched by additional 2 m. The work done
by the force F is
(g = 10 m/s2)
(a) 300 J (b) –300 J

(c) 400 J (d) –400 J
37. A plot of velocity versus time is shown in figure. A
single force acts on the body. The correct statement
is:
(a) 200 J (b) 400 J

(c) 450 J (d) 600 J
35. A block of mass m is attached with a massless spring
of force constant k. The block is placed over a rough
(a) in moving from C to D, work done by the force on
inclined surface for which the coefficient of friction is
the body is positive.
µ = 3/4. The minimum value of M required to move
the block up the plane is (Neglect mass of string and (b) in moving from B to C, work done by the force
pulley and friction in pulley) on the body is positive.
(c) in moving from A to B, the body does work on
the system.
(d) in moving from O to A, work is done by the body
and is negative.
38. A mass-spring system oscillates such that the mass
moves on a rough surface having coefficient of friction
µ. It is compressed by a distance a from its normal
3 4 length and, on being released, it moves to a distance b
(a) m (b) m from its equilibrium position. The decrease in
5 5
amplitude for one half-cycle (–a to b) is:
6 3
(c) m (d) m µ mg 2 µ mg
5 2 (a) (b)
k k
36. Velocity-time graph of a particle moving in a straight
line is as shown in figure. Mass of the particle is 2 µg k
(c) (d)
kg. Work done by all the forces acting on the particle k µ mg
in time interval between t = 0 to t = 10 s is
@cbseinfinite
39. System shown in figure is released from rest. Pulley 42. A meter stick of mass 400 g is pivoted at one end and
and spring is massless, and friction is absent displaced through an angle 60°. The increase in its
everywhere. The speed of 5 kg block when 2 kg block potential energy is:
leaves the contact with ground is: (a) 1 J (b) 10 J
(Take force constant of spring k = 40 N/m and g = 10 (c) 100 J (d) 1000 J
2
m/s )
43. A uniform chain has a mass M and length L. It is

placed on a frictionless table with length l0 hanging
over the edge. The chain begins to slide down. Then,
the speed v with which the end slides down from the
edge is given by:
g g
=
(a) v ( L + l0 ) =
(b) v ( L − l0 )
L L
g 2 2
=
(c) v ( L − l0 ) =
(d) v 2 g ( L − l0 )
L
44. A block of mass m is moving with a constant
acceleration ‘a’ on a rough plane. If the coefficient of
(a) 2 m/s (b) 2 2 m / s
friction between the block and the ground is µ, the
(c) 2 m/s (d) 4 2 m / s power delivered by the external agent after a time t
from the beginning is equal to
40. In the given curved road, if particle is released from
(b) µmgat
2
A then (a) ma t
(c) µm(a + µg)gt (d) m(a + µg)at
45. A block of mass m is being pulled up the rough
incline by an agent delivering constant power P. The
coefficient of friction between the block and the
incline is µ. The maximum speed of the block during
the course of ascent is
(a) kinetic energy at B must be mgh

(b) kinetic energy at B may be zero
P
(c) kinetic energy at B must be less than mgh (a) v =
mg sinθ + µ mg cos θ
(d) kinetic energy at B must not be equal to zero
P
41. A uniform flexible chain of mass m and length 2l (b) v =
hangs in equilibrium over a smooth horizontal pin of mg sinθ − µ mg cos θ
negligible diameter. One end of the chain is given a 2P
(c) v =
small vertical displacement so that the chain slips mg sinθ − µ mg cos θ
over the pin. The speed of chain when it leaves pin is:
3P
(a) 2 g (b) g (d) v =
mg sinθ − µ mg cos θ
(c) 4 g (d) 3 g
@cbseinfinite
46. A uniform rope of linear mass density λ and length  50. A motor drives a body along a straight line with a
is coiled on a smooth horizontal surface. One end is constant force. The power P developed by the motor
pulled up with constant velocity v. Then the average must vary with time t as shown in figure.
power applied by the external agent in pulling the (a)
entire rope just off the ground is
P
t
(b)
P
1 λ g 2
(a) λ v 2 + (b) λ gv
2 2
1 3 λ vg 1
(c) λv + (d) λ gv + λ v 3 t
2 2 2
47. A particle A of mass 10/7 kg is moving in the positive (c)
direction of x. Its initial position is x = 0 and initial
P
velocity at x = 0 is 1m/s. Velocity at x = 10m is
t
(d)
(a) 4 m/s (b) 2 m/s

100 t
(c) 3 2 m/s (d) m/s
3 51. A dam is situated at a height of 550 m above sea level
and supplies water to a powerhouse which is at a
48. Power supplied to a particle of mass 2 kg varies with
height of 50m above sea level. 2000 kg of water
time as P = 3t2/2 watt, here t is in second. Velocity of
passes through the turbines per second. What would
particle at t = 0 is u = 0. The velocity of particle at
be the maximum electrical power output of the power
time t = 2 s will be
house if the whole system were 80% efficient?
(a) 1 m/s (b) 4 m/s
(a) 8 MW (b) 10 MW
(c) 2 m/s (d) 2 2 m / s
(c) 12.5 MV (d) 16 MV
49. A constant power P is applied to a particle of mass m. –1
52. A 500 kg car, moving with a velocity of 36 km h on
The distance travelled by the particle when its
a straight road unidirectionally, doubles its velocity in
velocity increases from v1 to v2 is (neglect friction)
one minute. The power delivered by the engine for
(a)
m
( v2 − v12 )
3P 2
(b)
m
3P
( v2 − v1 ) doubling the velocity is
(a) 750 W (b) 1050 W
(c)
3P
( v2 − v1 )
m 3 3
(d)
m 2
3P
( v2 − v12 ) (c) 1150 W (d) 1250 W
@cbseinfinite
53. The power of a water jet flowing through an orifice of a a

radius r with velocity v is (a) x = (b) x =
b b
(b) 500 πr v
2 2
(a) zero
3a  2a 
(c) 500 πr v
2 3
(d) πr v
4 (c) x = (d) x = 6  
b  b 
54. A force F acting on a body depends on its
displacement S as F ∝ S . The power delivered by F
–1/3
will depend on displacement as:
2/3 –5/3
[One or more than one correct option]
(a) S (b) S 59. Work done by force of friction
1/2 0
(c) S (d) S (a) can be zero (b) can be positive
55. A pendulum of mass 1 kg and length  = 1 m is (c) can be negative (d) any of these
60. When work done by force of gravity is negative,
released from rest at angle θ = 60°. The power
delivered by all the forces acting on the bob at angle (a) PE increases (b) KE decreases
θ = 30° will be: (g = 10 m/s )
2 (c) PE remains constant (d) PE decreases
61. Which of the following may or may not be
(a) 13.5 W (b) 20.4 W
conserved?
(c) 24.6 W (d) zero
(a) Energy (b) Potential energy
56. A bob of mass m accelerates uniformly from rest to v1 (c) Mechanical energy (d) Kinetic energy
in time t1 . As a function of t, the instantaneous power 62. Internal forces can change
delivered to the body is (a) kinetic energy (b) mechanical energy
k (c) energy (d) momentum
m m 63. In which of the following cases, no work is done by
v v
the force:
m v1t m v1t (a) A man carrying a bucket of water, walking on a
(a) (b)
t2 t1 level road with a uniform velocity
m v1t 2 m v12 t (b) A drop of rain falling vertically with a constant
(c) (d) velocity
t1 t12
(c) A man whirling a stone tied to a string in a circle
57. The potential energy of a particle of mass 1 kg is, with a constant speed.
2
U = 10 + (x – 2) . Here, U is in joules and x in metres (d) A man walking up on a staircase
on the positive x-axis. Particle travels up to x = +6 m.
64. Two inclined frictionless tracks of different
Choose the correct statement:
inclinations meet at A from where two blocks P and
(a) On negative x-axis particle travels up to x = – 2m Q of different masses are allowed to slide down from
(b) The maximum kinetic energy of the particle is rest at the same time, on each track, as shown in the
16 J figure. Then [ given :θ 2 > θ1 ]
(c) Both (a) and (b) are correct
(d) Both (a) and (b) are wrong
58. The potential Energy as a function of the force
between two atoms in a diatomic molecule is given
a b
by U (= x) − 6 , where a and b are positive
x12
x (a) both blocks will reach the bottom at the same time
constants and x is the distance between the atoms. (b) block Q will reach the bottom earlier than block P
The position of stable equilibrium for the system of (c) both blocks will reach the bottom with the same
the two atoms is given as: speed
(d) block Q will reach the bottom with a higher speed
than block P.
@cbseinfinite
65. A body of mass m is moving in a straight line at a 69. A body of 0.2 kg is suspended through a spring, so
constant speed v. Its kinetic energy is K and the that the spring is stretched by 1.0 cm at equilibrium.
magnitude of its momentum is p. Which of the A particle of mass 0.12 kg is slowly dropped on the
following relations are correct? body after the impact. Find the maximum extension
of the spring (in cm). [ g = 10ms −2 ]
2K
(a) p = 2mK (b) p =
m Assertion & Reason
For the following questions choose the correct answer
2K
(c) 2K= pv (d) v = from the codes (A), (B), (C) and (D) defined as follows.
p
(A) If both Assertion and Reason are true and the
Numerical Value Type Questions Reason is correct explanation of the Assertion.
(B) If both Assertion and Reason are true but Reason is
66. A projectile is thrown with initial velocity U at an
not correct explanation of the Assertion.
angle θ to the horizontal. Its velocity when it is at the
(C) If Assertion is true but Reason is false.
2 (D) If Assertion is false but Reason is true.
highest point is times the velocity when it is at
5
Kinetic energy
height half of the maximum height. The angle of 70. Assertion: Stopping distance =
Stopping force
projection θ with horizontal is π/*. What is the value
*? Reason: Work done in stopping a body is equal to
  KE of the body.
67. Two constant forces F1 and F2 are acting on a bock
 (a) A (b) B
as shown. The magnitude of the force F1 is 2 N and
 (c) C (d) D
that of F2 is 4 N. The velocity of the block at a
71. Assertion: Two springs of force constants k1 and k2
certain instant is 3.0 m/sec.
are stretched by the same force. If k1 > k2, then work
done in stretching the first spring (W1) is less than
work done in stretching the second spring (W2).
Reason: F = k1x1 = k2x2
x1 k2
∴ =
x2 k1
Find the power(in watt) due to each force and the net
power. 1 2
  kx
W1 2 1 1 k  k2 
2
k2
68. Two constant forces F1 and F2 are acting on a bock = = 1 = 
 W2 1 k x 2 k2  k1  k1
2 2
as shown. The magnitude of the force F1 is 2 N and 2

that of F2 is 4 N. The velocity of the block at a As k1 > k2, W1 < W2
certain instant is 3.0 m/sec.
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
72. Assertion: A weightlifter does not work in holding
the weight up.
Reason: Work done is zero because distance moved
is zero.

If the magnitude of the force F2 is increased to 6 N, (a) A (b) B
what is the net power (in watt) at this instant? (c) C (d) D
@cbseinfinite
73. Assertion: Mass and energy are not conserved Match the following
separately but are conserved as a single entity ‘mass- Each question has two columns. Four options are given
energy’. representing matching of elements from Column-I and
Reason: This is because one can be obtained at the Column-II. Only one of these four options corresponds
cost of the other as per Einstein equation. to a correct matching.
2 For each question, choose the option corresponding
E = mc
(a) A (b) B
78. A man pushes a block of 30 kg along a level floor at a
(c) C (d) D
constant speed with a force directed at 45° below the
74. Assertion: Energy released when a mass of one horizontal. If the coefficient of friction is 0.20, then
7
microgram disappears in a process is 9 × 10 J. match the following: [ g = 10ms −2 ]
1 2 Column I Column II
Reason: It follows from E = mv .
2 (a) Work done by all forces (p) zero
(a) A (b) B exerted by the surface on
the block in 20 m
(c) C (d) D
(b) Work done by the force (q) 1500 J
75. Assertion: In a circular motion, work done by
of gravity
centripetal force is not zero always.
(c) Work done by the man (r) 750 J
Reason: If speed of the particle increases or on the block in pushing it
decreases in circular motion, net force acting on the through 10 m
particle does not remain towards centre.
(d) Net force on the block (s) -1500 J
(a) A (b) B Paragraph Type Questions
(c) C (d) D Using the following passage, solve Q. 79 to 80
76. Assertion: Under the action of a conservative force Passage
of constant magnitude, work done is path A block of mass m is released from a height h1 along a
independent. smooth track as shown in the figure.
Reason: Work done by force of gravity is path
independent only near the surface of Earth.
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
77. Assertion: The potential energy of a particle varies
with distance x as shown in the graph.
79. Determine the force exerted on the block by the track
at point 2, where radius of curvature is r1.
m(2 gh1 ) m ( 2 gh1 )
(a) mg + (b) 2mg +
r1 r1
mg m ( 2 gh1 ) m ( gh1 )
(c) + (d) mg +
2 r1 r1
The force acting on the particle is zero at point B and
C. 80. Determine the minimum safe value of radius of
curvature at point 3, so that the block does not fly off
Reason: The slope of the U-x curve is zero at point B
the track.
and C.
(a) (h1 – h2) (b) 2(h1 – h2)
(a) A (b) B
( h1 − h2 ) 2 ( h1 − h2 )
(c) C (d) D (c) (d)
3 3
@cbseinfinite

Objective Questions I [Only one correct option] 2. An ideal spring with spring-constant k is hung from
the ceiling and a block of mass M is attached to its
1. A particle, which is constrained to move along x-axis, lower end. The mass is released with the spring
is subjected to a force in the same direction which initially unstretched. Then the maximum extension in
varies with the distance x of the particle from the the spring is:
origin as F ( x ) =−kx + ax 3 . Here, k and a are positive (2002)
constant. For x ≥ 0, the functional form of the 4Mg 2Mg
(a) (b)
potential energy U ( x ) of the particle is: k k
(2002) Mg Mg
(c) (d)
(a) k 2k
3. If W1 , W2 and W3 represent the work done in moving
a particle from A to B along three different paths 1, 2
and 3 respectively (as shown) in the gravitational
field of a point mass m. Find the correct relation
between W1 , W2 and W3 : (2003)
(b)
(a) W1 > W2 > W3 =

(b) W1 W=
2 W3
(c) W1 < W2 < W3 (d) W2 > W1 > W3
(c) 4. A particle is placed at the origin and a force F = kx

is acting on it (where k is a positive constant). If
U ( 0 ) = 0, the graph of U ( x ) versus x will be (where
U is the potential energy function):
(2004)
(d)
(a) (b)
(c) (d)
@cbseinfinite
5. A block (B) is attached to two unstretched springs S1 7. Two blocks A and B of masses 2m and m,
and S 2 with spring constants k and 4k, respectively. respectively are connected by a massless and
The other ends are attached to two supports M 1 and inextensible string. The whole system is suspended
by a massless spring as shown in the fig. The
M 2 not attached to the walls. The springs and
magnitudes of acceleration of A and B, immediately
supports have negligible mass. There is no friction after the string is cut, are respectively
anywhere. The block B is displaced towards wall 1 by
(2009)
a small distance x and released. The block returns and
moves a maximum distance y towards wall 2.
Displacements x and y are measured with respect to
y
the equilibrium position of the block B. The ratio is
x
(2008)
g g
(a) g , (b) ,g
2 2
(a) 4 (b) 2
g g
1 1 (c) g , g (d) ,
(c) (d) 2 2
2 4
8. A block of mass 2kg is free to move along the x–axis.
6. An insect crawls up a hemispherical surface very
It is at rest and from t = 0 onwards it is subjected to a
slowly (see figure) The coefficient of friction between
time-dependent force F(t) in the x direction. The force
1
the insect and the surface is . If the line joining the F(t) varies with t as shown in the figure. The kinetic
3 energy of the block after 4.5 seconds is
centre of the hemispherical surface to the insect
(2010)
makes an angle α with the vertical, the maximum
possible value of α is given by:
(2009)
(a) cot α = 3 (b) tan α = 3
(a) 4.50 J (b) 7.50 J
(c) sec α = 3 (d) cosec α = 3
(c) 5.06 J (d) 14.06 J
@cbseinfinite
Objective Questions II 11. A student skates up a ramp that makes an angle 30º
[One or more than one correct option] with the horizontal. He/she starts (as shown in the
figure) at the bottom of the ramp with speed v0 and
9. A block of mass M has a circular cut with a
wants to turn around over a semi-circular path xyz of
frictionless surface as shown. The block rests on the
radius R during which he/she reaches a maximum
horizontal frictionless surface of a fixed table.
height h (at point y) from the ground as shown in the
Initially the right edge of the block is at x = 0, in a
figure. Assume that the energy loss is negligible, and
co-ordinate system fixed to the table. A point mass m
the force required for this turn at the highest point is
is released from rest at the topmost point of the path
provided by his/her weight only. Then (g is the
as shown and it slides down. When the mass loses
acceleration due to gravity) (2020)
contact with the block, its position is x and the
velocity is v. At that instant, which of the following
options is/are correct? (2017)
1
(a) v02 − 2 gh = gR
2
3
(b) v02 − 2 gh =gR
2
2 gR (c) the centripetal force required at points x and z is
(a) The velocity of the point mass m is: v = zero
m
1+ (d) the centripetal force required is maximum at points
M
x and z
m
(b) The velocity of the block M is: V = − 2 gR
M
mR
(c) The position of the point mass is x = − 2 12. A bullet is fired at a target. Its velocity is decreased
M +m by 50% after penetrating 21 cm into the target. Find
(d) The x component of displacement of the centre of the additional thickness (in cm) that the bullet will
mR penetrate before coming to rest. (2008)
mass of the block M is: −
M +m 13. A light inextensible string that goes over a smooth
fixed pulley as shown in the figure connects two
10. A particle of mass m is initially at rest is at the origin. blocks of masses 0.36 and 0.72 kg. Taking
It is subjected to a force and starts moving along the
g = 10ms −2 , find the work done (in joules) by the
x-axis. Its kinetic energy K changes with time as
string on the block of mass 0.36 kg during the first
dK
= γ t , where γ is a positive constant of second after the system is released from rest.
dt
(2009)
appropriate dimensions. Which of the following
statements is (are) true? (2018)
(a) The force applied on the particle is constant
(b) The speed of the particle is proportional to time
(c) The distance of the particle from the origin
increases linearly with time
(d) The force is conservative
@cbseinfinite
14. A bob of mass m, suspended by a string of length l1 , Assertion & Reason

is given a minimum velocity required to complete a For the following questions choose the correct answer
full circle in the vertical plane. At the highest point, it from the codes (A), (B), (C) and (D) defined as follows.
collides elastically with another bob of mass m
(A) Statement I is true, Statement II is also true;
suspended by a string of length l2 , which is initially
Statement II is the correct explanation of Statement
at rest. Both the strings are massless and inextensible. I.
If the second bob, after collision acquires the
(B) Statement I is true, Statement II is also true;
minimum speed required to complete a full circle in
Statement II is not the correct explanation of
l
the vertical plane, the ratio 1 is (2013) Statement I.
l2
(C) Statement I is true, Statement II is false.
15. A particle of mass 0.2 kg is moving in one dimension (D) Statement I is false, Statement II is true
under a force that delivers a constant power 0.5 W to
the particle. If the initial speed (in ms–1) of the 17. Statement–I: A block of mass m starts moving on a
particle is zero, the speed (in ms–1) after 5s is rough horizontal surface with a velocity v. It stops
(2013) due to friction between the block and the surface after
moving through a certain distance. The surface is now
16. Consider an elliptically shaped rail PQ in the vertical tilted to an angle of 30° with the horizontal and the
plane with OP =3m and OQ = 4m. A block of mass 1 same block is made to go up on the surface with the
kg is pulled along the rail from P to Q with a force of same initial velocity v. The decrease in the
18 N, which is always parallel to line PQ (see the mechanical energy in the second situation is smaller
figure given) Assuming no frictional losses, the than that in the first situation.
kinetic energy of the block when it reaches Q is
(n×10) Joules. The value of n is (take acceleration Statement-II : The coefficient of friction between the
due to gravity = 10 ms–2) (2014) block and the surface decreases with the increase in
the angle of inclination. (2015)
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
@cbseinfinite
Match the following Paragraph Type Questions

Using the following passage, solve Q.19 to Q.20
18. A particle of unit mass is moving along the x-axis
Passage
under the influence of a force and its total energy is
conserved. Four possible forms of the potential A small block of mass 1 kg is released from rest at the top of
energy of the particle are given in column I (a and a rough track. The track is a circular arc of radius 40m. The
U 0 constant). Match the potential energies in column block slides along the track without toppling and a frictional
I to the corresponding statement(s) in column II. force act on it in the direction opposite to the instantaneous
velocity. The work done in overcoming the friction up to the
(2015)
point Q, as shown in the figure, is 150 J. (Take the
acceleration due to gravity, g = 10 ms −2 ).
Column - I Column - II
  x 2 
2 (P) the force acting
U0
1 ( x)
(A) U= 1 −    on the particle is
2   a   zero at x = a
U0  x 
2 (Q) The force
(B) U 2 ( x ) =   acting on the
2 a
particle is zero at
x=0
  x 2  (R) The force
U  x  − a 
2  19. The speed of the block when it reaches the point Q
(C) U 3 ( x ) = 0   e 

acting on the
2 a particle is zero at (2013)
x = −a
(a) 5 ms −1 (b) 10 ms −1
U0 x 1 x   3 (S) The particle
4 ( x)
(D) U=  −    experiences an (c) 10 3 ms −1 (d) 20 ms −1
4  a 3  a   attractive force
towards x = 0 in 20. The magnitude of the normal reaction that acts on the
block at the point Q is (2013)
the region x < a.
(a) 7.5 N (b) 8.6 N
(T) The particle
with total energy (c) 11.5 N (d) 22.5 N
U0
can the
4
oscillate about the
point x = −a
@cbseinfinite
WORK, ENERGY AND POWER

@cbseinfinite
CIRCULAR MOTION 51
06
CIRCULAR MOTION
SCAN CODE
CIRCULAR MOTION
@cbseinfinite
Chapter
CIRCULAR 06
MOTION 52
CIRCULAR MOTION
1. CHARACTERISTICS OF CIRCULAR MOTION: (b) Particle moving in straight line
1.1 Introduction to Circular Motion

When an object moves in a circle its velocity is tangent
to that circle. The force towards the centre constantly
changes the direction of the velocity. Without that force
the object would keep moving in a straight line instead. Fig. 6.4
(c) Particle moving in circular path
(i) Angular displacement is a vector quantity.
(ii) Its direction is perpendicular to the plane of rotation
and given by right hand screw rule.
NOTE:
Clockwise angular displacement is taken as negative
and anticlockwise angular displacement is taken as
positive.
arc linear displacement
=
angle =
radius radius
(This is true when the angle is very small)
Fig. 6.1 (iii) For circular motion ∆S = r × ∆θ
(iv) Its unit is radian (in M.K.S).
1.2 Various parameters in circular motion
Angular Displacement: NOTE:
Angle subtended by position vector of a particle moving Always change degree into radian, if it occurs in
along any arbitrary path w.r.t. some fixed point is called numerical problems.
angular displacement.
360°
1radian = ⇒ π radian = 180°
2π
(v) It is a dimensionless quantity i.e. dimension is
 M 0 L0 T 0 
Angular Velocity:
Fig. 6.2
It is defined as the rate of change of angular
(a) Particle moving in an arbitrary path displacement of a body or particle moving in a circular
path.
(i) It is a vector quantity.
(ii) Its direction is the same as that of angular
displacement i.e. perpendicular to the plane of
rotation.
Fig. 6.3
SCAN CODE
CIRCULAR MOTION
@cbseinfinite
CIRCULAR MOTION 53
NOTE: Angular Acceleration:

The rate of change of angular velocity with respect to
If the particle is revolving in the clockwise direction
the time is defined as angular acceleration.
then the direction of angular velocity is perpendicular to
the plane downwards. Whereas in case of anticlockwise If ∆ω be change in angular velocity in time ∆t , then
direction the direction will be upwards. angular acceleration
 
(iii) Its unit is radian/sec. ∆ω dω
=α lim =
(iv) Its dimension is  M 0 L0T −1  ∆t → 0 dt dt
Types of Angular Velocity: (ii) Its direction is that of change in angular velocity.
(a) Average Angular Velocity: (iii) Unit: rad / sec 2
 Total angular displacement (iv) Dimension: M L T
0 0 −2
ω av =
Total time taken
(b) Instantaneous Angular velocity: Relation Between Angular Acceleration and Linear
The instantaneous angular velocity is defined as the Acceleration
angular velocity at some particular instant. Linear acceleration = Rate of change of linear velocity
Instantaneous angular velocity
dv
⇒ a = ..... ( i )
∆θ dθ dt
=ω lim
=
∆t → 0 ∆t dt Angular acceleration = Rate of change of angular
velocity
NOTE:
dω
Instantaneous angular velocity can also be called simply ⇒ α = ..... ( ii )
dt
angular velocity.
From (i) & (ii)
Relation Between Linear Velocity and Angular a dv d ( rω )
= =
Velocity α dω dω
dθ dθ ds 1 dω
ω =
We have = . = .v = r= [r is constant ] r
dt ds dt r dω
ds arc
[ dθ
= = , angle αr
⇒a=
dr radius   
In vector form a= α × r
and= ds
v = linear velocity]
dt
⇒v=rω
  
In vector form, v= ω × r
NOTE:
(i) When a particle moves along a curved path, its
linear velocity at a point is along the tangent drawn
at that point.
(ii) When a particle moves along a curved path, its
velocity has two components. One along the radius,
which increases or decreases the radius and another
one perpendicular to the radius, which makes the
particle revolve about the point of observation.
∆θ v sin θ
ω =
(iii)=
∆t r
SCAN CODE
CIRCULAR MOTION
@cbseinfinite
CIRCULAR MOTION 54
Equation of Linear Motion and Rotational Motion:
Linear Motion Rotation Motion
(i) With constant velocity a = 0, s = ut α 0,=

= θ ωt
(ii) With constant acceleration (i) Average velocity (i) Average angular velocity
v+u ω1 + ω2
vav = ωav =
2 2
(ii) Average acceleration (ii) Average angular acceleration
v−u ω2 − ω1
aav = aav =
t t
v+u ω1 + ω2
(iii)=
s v=
av t t θ ω=
(iii)=
2 av .t t
2
(iv) v= u + at
(iv) ω=
2 ω1 + α t
1
(v) =
s ut + at 2 1
2 θ ω1t + α t 2
(v) =
2
(vi) v=
2
u 2 + 2as
(vi) ω= ω1 + 2αθ
2 2
2
1
u + ( 2n − 1) a
(vii) S n =
1
2
(vii) θ n =
ω1 + ( 2n − 1) α
th 2
displacement in n sec
th
ds Angular displacement in n se
(i) v =
dt
(i) ω = dθ / dt
(ii) ∫ ds = ∫ v dt
(iii) With variable acceleration dv dv
(ii) ∫ dθ = ∫ ω dt
(iii) =
a = v
dt ds dω dω
α
(iii)= = ω
dθ
∫ dv = ∫ a dt
(iv) dt
(v) ∫ v dv = ∫ a ds
(iv) ∫ dω = ∫ α dt
(v) ∫ ω dω = ∫ α dθ
Radial and Tangential Acceleration An object A is tied to a string and made to revolve
Radial Acceleration: about a fixed point O (centre) (see figure). The object
In a uniform circular motion, “the acceleration of the when revolved fast, the string (OA) looks almost like
object is along the radius, directed towards the centre” the radius of the circle. Which implies that a force is
is called radial acceleration. exerted on the object from the centre, there by an
accelerationar along the radial direction. (along the
radius of the circle towards the centre). To counter this
force, tension is developed along the string in the
opposite direction. This force due to tension is called
centripetal force, thus the acceleration generated on the
object is called centripetal acceleration or radial
acceleration ar .
Fig. 6.5
SCAN CODE
CIRCULAR MOTION
@cbseinfinite
CIRCULAR MOTION 55
● at is the tangential component

● t is the time period
● v1 and v2 are the respective velocities of the two

objects in a circular motion
2. UNIFORM AND NON-UNIFORM CIRCULAR

Fig. 6.6 MOTION
2.1 Non-uniform Circular Motion:

(i) In non-uniform circular motion:

v ≠ constant ω ≠ constant
i.e. speed ≠ constant

i.e. angular velocity ≠ constant
Fig. 6.7 (ii) If at any instant
v = magnitude of velocity of particle
figure the equivalent diagram of the centripetal velocity
r = radius of circular path
vector A and B.
ω = angular velocity of particle
Implementing the property of similar triangles we get-
then v = rω
AB l
= (iii) Tangential acceleration :
OA r
dv
Since A and B are infinitesimally close we can at =
dt
approximate AB to the length of arc AB AB= v × dt
ds
From figure since A and B are very close, Where =
v and=
s arc − lenght
dt
AB dv v × dt dv
v + dv ≈ dv= = (iv) Tangential force:
OA v r v
Ft = mat
On rearranging,
(v) Centripetal force :
dv v 2
= mv 2
dt r =
Fc = mω 2 r
r
Thus, dv gives radial acceleration of an object under (vi) Net force on the particle :
dt   
=F Fc + F t
uniform circular motion. We arrive at the final
v2 ⇒ F= Fc2 + Ft2
expression- ar =
r If θ is the angle made by [Note angle between Fc and
Ft is 90° ] F with Fc , then
Tangential Acceleration:
Ft
The tangential component is defined as the component tan θ =
Fc
of angular acceleration tangential to the circular path.
The unit of measurement is m.s −2 . The mathematical F 
⇒θ =
tan −1  t 
representation is given as:  Fc 
v 2 − v1 Where, Angle between F & Ft is ( 90° – θ )

at =
t
SCAN CODE
CIRCULAR MOTION
@cbseinfinite
CIRCULAR MOTION 56
Fig. 6.8
Fig. 6.10
(vii) Net acceleration towards the centre = centripetal 
(ii) As v is constant so tangential acceleration at = 0
acceleration
v2 F
⇒ ac = = ω 2r = c
r m
(viii) Net acceleration,
Fnet
a= ac2 + at2 =
m
Fig. 6.11
The angle made by 'a' with ac ,
(iii) Tangential force Ft = 0
at Ft
θ
tan= =
ac Fc
Fig. 6.12
(iv) Total acceleration
v 2 (towards the centre)
a = ac2 + at2 = ac =
r
Fig. 6.9
NOTE:
2.2 Uniform Circular Motion: (i) Because Fc is always perpendicular to velocity or
If displacement, hence the work done by this force
m = mass of body, will always be zero.
r = radius of circular orbit, (ii) Circular motion in the horizontal plane is usually
v = magnitude of velocity, uniform circular motion.
ac = centripetal acceleration, (iii) There is an important difference between projectile
motion and circular motion.
at = tangential acceleration
In projectile motion, both the magnitude and the
In uniform circular motion : direction of acceleration (g) remain constant, while
  
(i) v=
1 v=
2 v=
3 constant i.e. speed is constant in circular motion the magnitude remains constant
but the direction continuously changes. Hence
equations of motion are not applicable for circular
motion. Remember that equations of motion remain
valid only when both the magnitude & direction of
acceleration are constant.
SCAN CODE
CIRCULAR MOTION
@cbseinfinite
CIRCULAR MOTION 57
Hint to solve numerical problems:

v4
(i) Write down the required centripetal force. =T mg 1 + ..... ( i )
r2g2
(ii) Draw the free body diagram of each component of
v2
the system. And tan θ = ...... ( ii )
rg
(iii) Resolve the forces acting on the rotating particle
along radius and perpendicular to radius. Also if h = height of conical pendulum
OP r
(iv) Calculate net radial force acting towards the centre θ
tan= = ...... ( iii )
of the circular path. OS h
(v) Make it equal to required centripetal force. From (ii) & (iii),
(vi) For remaining components see according to v2 g
ω=
2
=
question. r2 h
The time period of revolution
NOTE: h  cos θ
= π
T 2= 2π
When a system of particles rotates about an axis, the g g
angular velocity of all the particles will be the same, but [where OS =  ]
their linear velocity will be different, because of
different distances from the axis of rotation i.e. v = r ω .
3. CENTRIPETAL FORCE AND
2.3 Motion In Horizontal Circle: CENTRIFUGAL FORCE
Conical pendulum:
This is the best example of uniform circular motion. A 3.1 Centripetal Force
conical pendulum consists of a body attached to a (i) A body or particle moving in a curved path always
string, such that it can revolve in a horizontal circle moves effectively in a circle at any instant.
with uniform speed. The string traces out a cone in (ii) The velocity of the particle changes moving on the
space. curved path, this change in velocity is brought by a
(i) The force acting on the bob are force known as centripetal force and the
(a) Tension T (b) weight mg acceleration so produced in the body is known as
centripetal acceleration.
(iii) The direction of centripetal force or acceleration is
always towards the centre of the circular path.
Expression for Centripetal Acceleration:
Fig. 6.13
(ii) The horizontal component T sin θ of the tension T
provides the centripetal force and the vertical
component T cos θ balances the weight of bob
Fig. 6.14 Fig. 6.15
mv 2
∴ T sin θ = (a) Particle moving in (b) Vector diagram
r
of circular path of radius r velocities
and T cos θ = mg
The triangle OP1 P2 and the velocity triangle are similar
From these equation
P1 P2 AB
∴ =
PO
1 AQ
SCAN CODE
CIRCULAR MOTION
@cbseinfinite
CIRCULAR MOTION 58
∆s ∆v   
⇒ = v1 = v 2 = v 
r v  
v
⇒ ∆v= ∆s
r
∆v v ∆s
⇒ =
∆t r ∆t
∆v v  ∆s 
⇒ lim = lim  
∆t → 0 ∆t r ∆t →0  ∆t  Fig. 6.17
v v 2
 mv 2 mv 2 
⇒ ac = v= = rω 2 Fc = .rˆ = − 2 r
r r r r
This is the magnitude of centripetal acceleration of   
particle − mω 2 r rˆ =
= − mω 2 r =
−m v × ω ( )
(i) It is a vector quantity. In vector form negative sign indicates direction only
     
a c= ω × v
 (
Fc m v × ω
= )
(ii) The direction of a c would be the same as that of
 (iii) For circular motion :
∆v 
(iii) Because the velocity vector at any point is =Fc m ( v ω
= sin 90° ) mvω
tangential to the circular path at that point, the
acceleration vector acts along the radius of the
NOTE:
circle at that point and is directed towards the
centre. This is the reason that it is called centripetal 1. Centripetal force is not a real force. It is only the
acceleration. requirement for circular motion.
2. It is not a new kind of force. Any of the forces found
Expression for Centripetal force in nature such as gravitational force, electric, friction
force, tension in string reaction force may act as
centripetal force..
3.2 Centrifugal Force

Centrifugal force is a pseudo force of centripetal force
in a circular motion which acts along the radius and is
directed away from the centre of the circle. The force
does not exist when measurements are made in an
inertial frame of reference. It only comes into play
when changing our reference frame from a
ground/inertial to a rotating reference frame.
Fig. 6.16 Calculating Centrifugal Force:

If v = velocity of particle, r = radius of path A centrifugal force basically uses the centripetal force
Then necessary centripetal force Fc = mass × formula (which describes a real phenomenon) and
acceleration reverses the direction of the force, to describe the
fictitious centrifugal force.
v2
Fc = m
r mv 2
F= −
This is the expression for centripetal force r
(i) It is a vector quantity Where, F is the Centrifugal force, m is the mass of the
(ii) In vector form object, v is the speed or velocity of the object and r is
the radius.
Centrifugal Force Examples in Daily Life:
SCAN CODE
CIRCULAR MOTION
@cbseinfinite
CIRCULAR MOTION 59
Centrifugal Force acts on every object moving in a where v is velocity of car while turning and r is radius
circular path when viewed from a rotating frame of of circular track.
reference. Some examples of Centrifugal Force are F µ=
As= sR µ s mg , [using (1)]
given below.
Where µ s is coefficient of static friction between the
● Weight of an object at the poles and on the equator
tyres and the road. Therefore, from (2),
● A bike making a turn.
● Vehicle driving around a curve mv 2
≤ µ s mg or v ≤ µ s rg ∴ vmax = µ s rg …. (3)
● Equatorial railway r
Hence the maximum velocity with which a vehicle can
go round a level curve ; without skidding is
4. APPLICATIONS OF CIRCULAR MOTION v= µ s rg
4.1 Rounding a Level Curved Road The value of v depends on radius r of the curve and on
When a vehicle goes round a curved road, it requires coefficient of static friction ( µ s ) between the tyres and
some centripetal force. While rounding the curve, the
the road. Clearly, v is independent of mass of the car.
wheels of the vehicle have a tendency to leave the
curved path and regain the straight-line path. Force of
4.2 Banking of Roads
friction between the wheels and the road opposes this
tendency of the wheels. This force (of friction) The maximum permissible velocity with which a
therefore, acts, towards the centre of the circular track vehicle can go round a level curved road without
and provides the necessary centripetal force. skidding depends on µ , the coefficient of friction
Three forces are acting on the car, fig. between the tyres and the road. The value of µ
decreases when road is smooth or tyres of the vehicle
are worn out or the road is wet and so on. Thus force of
friction is not a reliable source for providing the
required centripetal force to the vehicle.
A safer course of action would be to raise outer edge of
the curved road above the inner edge. By doing so, a
component of normal reaction of the road shall be
spared to provide the centripetal force. The
phenomenon of raising outer edge of the curved road
Fig. 6.18 above the inner edge is called banking of roads. We can
(i) The weight of the car, mg, acting vertically
calculate the angle of banking θ , as detailed below:
downwards,
In Fig., OX is a horizontal line. OA is the level of
(ii) Normal reaction R of the road on the car, acting banked curved road whose outer edge has been raised.
vertically upwards,
XOA = θ = angle of banking.
(iii) Frictional Force F, along the surface of the road,
towards the centre of the turn, as explained already.
As there is no acceleration in the vertical direction,
R – mg = 0 or R = mg ...(1)
The centripetal force required for circular motion is
along the surface of the road, towards the centre of the
turn.
As explained above, it is the static friction that provides
the necessary centripetal force. Clearly,
mv 2
≤F ...... ( 2 )
r Fig. 6.19
SCAN CODE
CIRCULAR MOTION
@cbseinfinite
CIRCULAR MOTION 60
mg ( sin θ + µ s cos θ ) mv 2
Using (5), =
( cos θ − µs sin θ ) r
rg ( sin θ + µ s cos θ ) rg cos θ ( tan θ + µ s )

=∴ v2 =
( cos θ − µs sin θ ) cos θ (1 − µ s tan θ )
 rg ( µ s + tan θ ) 
1/ 2
v=  ..... ( 6 )
Fig. 6.20  (1 − µ s tan θ ) 
Three forces are acting on the vehicle as shown in This is the max. velocity of vehicle on a banked road.
Fig 6.20
(i) Weight mg of the vehicle acting vertically Discussion
downwards. 1. If µ s = 0 , i.e., if banked road is perfectly smooth,
(ii) Normal reaction R of the banked road acting then from eqn. (6),
upwards in a direction perpendicular to OA.
v0 = ( rg tan θ )
1/ 2
……(7)
(iii) Force of friction F between the banked road and the
tyres, acting along AO. This is the speed at which a banked road can be
R can be resolved into two rectangular components :- rounded even when there is no friction. Driving at
this speed on a banked road will cause almost no
(i) R cos θ , along vertically upward direction
wear and tear of the tyres.
(ii) R sin θ , along the horizontal, towards the centre of
From (7),
the curved road.
F can also be resolved into two rectangular components: = =
v02 rg tan θ or tan θ v02 / rg .....(8)
(i) F cos θ , along the horizontal, towards the centre of 2. If speed of vehicle is less than v0 , frictional force
curved road will be up the slope. Therefore, the vehicle can be
(ii) F sin θ , along vertically downward direction. parked only if tan θ ≤ µ s .
As there is no acceleration along the vertical direction, Roads are usually banked for the average speed of
the net force along this direction must be zero. vehicles passing over them. However, if the speed of a
Therefore, vehicle is somewhat less or more than this, the self-
θ mg + F sin θ
R cos= ..... (1) adjusting static friction will operate between the tyres
If v is velocity of the vehicle over the banked circular and the road, and the vehicle will not skid.
road of radius r, then centripetal force required The speed limit at which the curve can be negotiated
= mv 2 / r .
This is provided by the horizontal safely is clearly indicated on the sign boards erected
components of R and F as shown in Fig. along the curved roads.
Note that curved railway tracks are also banked for the
mv 2
∴ R sin θ + F cos θ = .... ( 2 ) same reason. The level of outer rail is raised a little
r
above the level of inner rail, while laying a curved
But F ≤ µ s R , where µ s is coefficient of static friction
railway track.
between the banked road and the tyres. To obtain vmax ,
we put F = µ s R in (1) and (2). 4.3 Bending of a Cyclist
θ mg + µ s R sin θ
R cos= …. (3) When a cyclist takes a turn, he also requires some
mv 2 centripetal force. If he keeps himself vertical while
and R sin θ + µ s R cos θ =….(4) turning, his weight is balanced by the normal reaction
r
of the ground. In that event, he has to depend upon
From (3), R ( cos θ − µ s sin θ ) =
mg
force of friction between the tyres and the road for
mg obtaining the necessary centripetal force. As force of
R=
cos θ − µ s sin θ ….. (5) friction is small and uncertain, dependence on it is not
safe.
mv 2
From (4), R ( sin θ + µ s cos θ ) =
r
SCAN CODE
CIRCULAR MOTION
@cbseinfinite
CIRCULAR MOTION 61
To avoid dependence on force of friction for obtaining

5. VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION
centripetal force, the cyclist has to bend a little inwards
from his vertical position, while turning. By doing so, a
component of normal reaction in the horizontal 5.1 Motion of a body suspended by string:
direction provides the necessary centripetal force. To This is the best example of non-uniform circular
calculate the angle of bending with vertical, suppose motion.
m = mass of the cyclist, When the body rises from the bottom to the height h
v = velocity of the cyclist while turning, apart of its kinetic energy converts into potential energy
r = radius of the circular path, Total mechanical energy remains conserved
θ = angle of bending with vertical. Total (P.E. + K.E.) at A = Total (P.E. + K.E.) at P
In Fig., we have shown weight of the cyclist (mg) 1 1
⇒ 0 + mu 2= mgh + mv 2
acting vertically downwards at the centre of gravity C. 2 2
R is force of reaction of the ground on the cyclist. It
⇒ v= u 2 − 2 gh= u 2 − 2 g  (1 − cos θ )
acts at an angle θ with the vertical.
Fig. 6.22
[Where  is length of the string]
Tension at a point P :
Fig. 6.21
mv 2
R can be resolved into two rectangular components: (i) At point P required centripetal force =

R cos θ , along the vertical upward direction,
(a) Net force towards the centre :
R sin θ , along the horizontal, towards the centre of the
T – mgcos θ , which provides required centripetal
circular track.
force.
In equilibrium, R cos θ balances the weight of the
cyclist i.e
R cos θ = mg ...(1)
and R sin θ provides the necessary centripetal force
(m v 2
/ r)
mv 2
∴ R sin θ =..... ( 2 )
r
R sin θ mv 2
Dividing (2) by (1), we get = Fig. 6.23
R cos θ r mg
mv 2
v2 ∴ T − mg cos θ =
tan θ = 
rg
v2
Clearly, θ would depend on v and r. =T m[ g cos θ + ]

For a safe turn, θ should be small, for which v should m 2
be small and r should be large i.e. turning should be at a = [u − g  ( 2 − 3cos θ )]

slow speed and along a track of larger radius. This
means, a safe turn should neither be fast nor sharp.
SCAN CODE
CIRCULAR MOTION
@cbseinfinite
CIRCULAR MOTION 62
(b) Tangential force for the motion (iii) Cases :

Ft = mg sin θ (a) If u > 5 g 
This force retards the motion In this case tension in the string will not be zero at
any of the points, which implies that the particle will
(ii) Results: continue the circular motion.
(b) If u = 5 g 
In this case the tension at the top most point (B) will
be zero, which implies that the particle will just
complete the circular motion.
(c) Critical Velocity: The minimum velocity at which
Fig. 6.24
the circular motion is possible
(a) Tension at the lowest point A :
The critical velocity at A = 5 g 
mv A2
=
TA + mg
 The critical velocity at B = g 
( Here, θ = 0° ) The critical velocity at C = 3 g 
mu 2 Also=
TA 6 mg=
, TB 0,=
TC 3 mg
=
TA + mg

(b) Tension at point B:
(d) If 2 g < u < 5g
In this case particle will not follow circular motion.
mvB2
=
TB − mg Tension in string becomes zero somewhere between

points C & B whereas velocity remain positive.
mu 2 Particle leaves circular path and follow parabolic
=
TB − 5mg
 trajectory
(=
θ 180° )
(c) Tension at point C :
mvC2
TC =

mu 2
=
TC − 2mg

( Here θ= 90° )
Thus we conclude that Fig. 6.25
TA > TC > TB (e) If u = 2 g 
and also TA − TB =
6 mg In this case both velocity and tension in the string
TA − TC =
3 mg
becomes zero between A and C and particle will
oscillate along semi-circular path.
TC − TB =
3 mg
(f) If u < 2 g 
The velocity of particle remains zero between A and
C but tension will not be zero and the particle will
oscillate about the point A.
SCAN CODE
CIRCULAR MOTION
@cbseinfinite
CIRCULAR MOTION 63
SUMMARY
 
CIRCULAR MOTION =α lim =
∆ω dω
∆t → 0 dt dt
1. CHARACTERISTICS OF CIRCULAR MOTION:
(ii) Its direction is that of change in angular velocity.
Introduction to Circular Motion (iii) Unit: rad / sec 2
When an object moves in a circle its velocity is tangent (iv) Dimension: M 0 L0 T −2
to that circle. The force towards the centre constantly
Relation Between Angular Acceleration and Linear
changes the direction of the velocity. Without that force
Acceleration
the object would keep moving in a straight line instead.
a = αr
  
Various parameters in circular motion In vector form a= α × r
Angular Displacement: Radial Acceleration:

Angle subtended by position vector of a particle moving In a uniform circular motion, “the acceleration of the
along any arbitrary path w.r.t. some fixed point is called object is along the radius, directed towards the centre”
angular displacement. is called radial acceleration.
v2
ar =
Angular Velocity: r
It is defined as the rate of change of angular Tangential Acceleration:
displacement of a body or particle moving in a circular The tangential component is defined as the component
path. of angular acceleration tangential to the circular path.
(i) It is a vector quantity. The unit of measurement is m.s −2 . The mathematical
(ii) Its direction is the same as that of angular representation is given as:
displacement i.e. perpendicular to the plane of  
 v − v1 Where,
rotation. at = 2
t
Types of Angular Velocity: ● at is the tangential component
(a) Average Angular Velocity: ● t is the time period

 Total angular displacement ● v1 and v2 are the respective velocities of the two
ω av =
Total time taken objects in a circular motion
(b) Instantaneous Angular velocity:
The instantaneous angular velocity is defined as the 2. UNIFORM AND NON-UNIFORM CIRCULAR
angular velocity at some particular instant.
MOTION
Instantaneous angular velocity
∆θ dθ
=ω lim = Uniform Circular Motion
∆t → 0 ∆t dt
Angular Acceleration: In uniform circular motion, the ‘speed’ of the particle is
constant. In other words, while the direction of the
The rate of change of angular velocity with respect to
velocity is changing, it’s magnitude is constant. And
the time is defined as angular acceleration.
this means that its angular velocity (number of radians
If ∆ω be change in angular velocity in time ∆t , then covered per second) is also constant.
angular acceleration
SCAN CODE
CIRCULAR MOTION
@cbseinfinite
CIRCULAR MOTION 64
Non-Uniform Circular Motion Banking of Roads

Non-uniform circular motion denotes a change in the The maximum permissible velocity with which a
speed of a particle moving along a circular path. vehicle can go round a level curved road without
skidding depends on µ , the coefficient of friction
between the tyres and the road. The value of µ
3. CENTRIPETAL FORCE AND decreases when road is smooth or tyres of the vehicle
CENTRIFUGAL FORCE are worn out or the road is wet and so on. Thus force of
friction is not a reliable source for providing the
Centripetal Force: required centripetal force to the vehicle.
(i) A body or particle moving in a curved path always
moves effectively in a circle at any instant.
Bending of a Cyclist
(ii) The velocity of the particle changes moving on the
When a cyclist takes a turn, he also requires some
curved path, this change in velocity is brought by a
centripetal force. If he keeps himself vertical while
force known as centripetal force and the
turning, his weight is balanced by the normal reaction
acceleration so produced in the body is known as
of the ground. In that event, he has to depend upon
centripetal acceleration.
force of friction between the tyres and the road for
(iii) The direction of centripetal force or acceleration is obtaining the necessary centripetal force. As force of
always towards the centre of the circular path. friction is small and uncertain, dependence on it is not
v2 safe.
Fc = m
r
This is the expression for centripetal force
(i) It is a vector quantity 5. VERTICAL CIRCULAR MOTION
(ii) In vector form
Motion of a body suspended by string:
 mv 2 mv 2  This is the best example of non-uniform circular
Fc = .rˆ = − 2 r
r r motion.
Centrifugal Force: When the body rises from the bottom to the height h
Centrifugal force is a pseudo force of centripetal force apart of its kinetic energy converts into potential energy
in a circular motion which acts along the radius and is Total mechanical energy remains conserved
directed away from the centre of the circle. The force Total (P.E. + K.E.) at A = Total (P.E. + K.E.) at P
does not exist when measurements are made in an 1 1
inertial frame of reference. It only comes into play ⇒ 0 + mu 2= mgh + mv 2
2 2
when changing our reference frame from a
ground/inertial to a rotating reference frame. ⇒ v= u 2 − 2 gh= u 2 − 2 g  (1 − cos θ )
4. APPLICATIONS OF CIRCULAR MOTION
Rounding a Level Curved Road

When a vehicle goes round a curved road, it requires
some centripetal force. While rounding the curve, the
wheels of the vehicle have a tendency to leave the
curved path and regain the straight-line path. Force of [Where  is length of the string]
friction between the wheels and the road opposes this
tendency of the wheels. This force (of friction) Tension at a point P :
therefore, acts, towards the centre of the circular track 2
and provides the necessary centripetal force. (i) At point P required centripetal force = mv

SCAN CODE
CIRCULAR MOTION
@cbseinfinite
CIRCULAR MOTION 65
(a) Net force towards the centre : (b) Tension at point B:

T – mgcos θ , which provides required centripetal
mvB2
force. =
TB − mg

mu 2
=
TB − 5mg

(=
θ 180° )
(c) Tension at point C :
mvC2
TC =

mu 2
=
TC − 2mg

mv 2
∴ T − mg cos θ = ( Here θ= 90° )

v2
Thus we conclude that
=T m[ g cos θ + ]
 TA > TC > TB
=
m 2
[u − g  ( 2 − 3cos θ )] and also TA − TB =
6 mg
 TA − TC =
3 mg
(b) Tangential force for the motion
TC − TB =
3 mg
Ft = mg sin θ
This force retards the motion
(ii) Results:
(a) Tension at the lowest point A :

mv A2
=
TA + mg

( Here, θ = 0° )
mu 2
=
TA + mg

SCAN CODE
CIRCULAR MOTION
@cbseinfinite
CIRCULAR MOTION 66
Solved Examples
The magnitude of the linear acceleration, the particle An electron is moving in a circular orbit of radius
moving in a circle of radius of 10 cm with uniform 5.3 × 10−11 metre around the atomic nucleus at a rate
speed completing the circle in 4 s, will be – of 6.6 × 1015 revolutions per second. The centripetal
(a) 5  cm/s2 (b) 2.5  cm/s2 force acting on it will be -
(c) 5 2 cm/s2 (d) 2.5 2 cm/s2 (The mass of the electron is 9.1 × 10−31 kg)
Ans. (d) (a) 8.3 × 10−8N (b) 3.8 × 10−8N

Sol. The distance covered in completing the circle is 2  (c) 4.15 × 10−8N (d) 2.07 × 10−8N
= 2  × 10 cm Ans. (a)
The linear speed is Sol. Let the radius of the orbit be r and the number of
revolutions per second be n. Then the velocity of
2r 210
v   5 cm / s electron is given by
t 4
v  2nr,
The linear acceleration is,
v 2 4 2 r 2 n 2
v 2  5 
2
Acceleration a    4 2 r n 2
a   2.5 2 cm / s 2 r r
r 10
Substituting the given values, we have
This acceleration is directed towards the centre of the
a  4   3.14    5.3 1011  6.6 1015 
2 2
circle
Hence the correct answer is (D).
 9.11022 m / s2 towards the nucleus.
The centripetal force is FC  ma
Example - 2
The length of second’s hand in a watch is 1 cm. The   9.11031  9.11022 
change in velocity of its tip in 15 seconds is –
 8.3108 N towards the nucleus.

(a) 0 (b) cm / s Hence the correct answer is (A).
30 2
  2
(c) cm / s (d) cm / s Example – 4
30 30
An aircraft executes a horizontal loop of radius 1 km
Ans. (b)
with a steady speed of 900 km/h. The ratio of
Circumference 2r centripetal acceleration to that gravitational
Sol. Velocity  
Time of revolution 60 acceleration will be-
21  (a) 1 : 6.38 (b) 6.38 : 1
  cm / s
60 30 (c) 2.25 : 9.8 (d) 2.5 : 9.8
Change in velocity Ans. (b)
     
2 2
Sol. Given that radius of horizontal loop
v       r = 1 km = 1000 m
 30   30 
900  5
 Speed v  900 km / h   250 m / s
 2 cm / s 18
30
Hence the correct answer is (B). Centripetal acceleration
@cbseinfinite
CIRCULAR MOTION 67
v 2 250  250 Here, dS  n  2r 

ac    62.5 m / s 2
r 1000
 1.5  2 2 102 
Centripetal accleration a 62.5
 c   6.38 :1  6102
Gravitational accleration g 9.8
6  10 2
Hence the correct answer is (B).    3 radian
2  10 2
Hence the correct answer is (B).
Example - 5
A motor car is travelling at 30 m/s on a circular road
of radius 500 m. It is increasing its speed at the rate Example - 7
of 2 m/s2. Its net acceleration is (in m/s2) – A particle revolving in a circular path completes the
(a) 2 (b) 1.8 first one third of circumference in 1 sec, while the
(c) 2.7 (d) 0 next one third in 1 sec. The average angular velocity
of particle will be-
Ans. (c)
(in rad/sec)
Sol. Two types of acceleration are experienced by the car
2 
(i) Radial acceleration due to circular path, (a) (b)
3 3
v 2  30 
2
ar    1.8 m / s 2 4 5
r 500 (c) (d)
3 3
(ii) A tangential acceleration due to increase of Ans. (a)
tangential speed given by
Total angular displacement
dv Sol. We have av 
at   2 m / s2 Total time
dt
For first one third part of circle, angular
Radial and tangential acceleration are perpendicular
displacement,
to each other.
2r
Net acceleration of car a
S1
1   3
 a 2r  a 2t  1.8   2   2.7 m / s 2
2 2
r r
For second one third part of circle,
Hence the correct answer is (C).
2r
2
2  3  rad
Example – 6 r 3
A particle completes 1.5 revolutions in a circular path Total angular displacement,
of radius 2 cm. The angular displacement of the
4
particle will be –   1  2  rad
3
(in radian)
Total time  1  1  2 sec
(a) 6  (b) 3 
4
(c) 2  (d) 
Ans. (d)  av  3 rad / s
3
Sol. We have angular displacement
4 2
  rad / s
linear displacement 6 3

radius of path
Hence the correct answer is (A).
S
 
r
@cbseinfinite
CIRCULAR MOTION 68
Example - 8 Ans. (a)

The ratio of angular speeds of minute hand and hour Sol. The angular velocity is
hand of a watch is – v

(a) 1 : 12 (b) 6 : 1 r
(c) 12 : 1 (d) 1 : 6 Hence v  10 m / s
Ans. (c) r  20 cm  0.2 m,
Sol. Angular speed of hour hand,
  50 rad / s
 2
1   rad / sec Hence the correct answer is (A).
t 12  60
angular speed of minute hand,
2 Example - 11
2  rad / sec
60 The angular velocity of a particle is given by
2 12   1.5t  3t 2  2, the time when its angular

1 1 acceleration decreases to be zero will be –
Hence the correct answer is (C). (a) 25 sec (b) 0.25 sec
(c) 12 sec (d) 1.2 sec
Example - 9 Ans. (b)
The angular displacement of a particle is given by Sol. Given that   1.5t  3t 2  2
1
  0 t  at 2 , where 0 and a are constant and d
  1.5  6t
2 dt
0  1 rad / sec, a  1.5 rad / sec 2 . The angular When   0
velocity at time, t = 2 sec will be (in rad/sec) –
1.5  6t  0
(a) 1 (b) 5
1.5
(c) 3 (d) 4 t  0.25 sec
6
Ans. (d)
1
Sol. We have   0 t  at 2
2
Example - 12
d
 0  at A particle is moving in a circular path with velocity
dt
varying with time as v  1.5t 2  2t. If 2 cm the radius
This is angular velocity at time t. Now angular
of circular path, the angular acceleration at t = 2 sec
velocity at t = 2 sec will be
will be –
 d 
   0  2a (a) 4 rad/sec2 (b) 40 rad/sec2
 dt t  2sec
(c) 400 rad/sec2 (d) 0.4 rad/sec2
 1  2 1.5  4 rad / sec Ans. (c)
Hence the correct answer is (D). Sol. Given v  1.5t 2  2t
Linear acceleration a
Example - 10 dv
  3t  2
A particle moves in a circle of radius 20 cm with a dt
linear speed of 10 m/s. The angular velocity will be – This is the linear acceleration at time t
(a) 50 rad/s (b) 100 rad/s Now angular acceleration at time t
(c) 25 rad/s (d) 75 rad/s
@cbseinfinite
CIRCULAR MOTION 69
a 3t  2 3t 2 t 3
 a    c
r 2 102 2 3
Angular acceleration at at t  0,   0
t  2 sec
3t 2 t 3
c  0,   
3 2  2 8 2 3
  at t  2 sec    102
2 102 2 Angular velocity at
 4 102  400 rad / sec 2 t  2 sec,  t 2 sec
3 8 10
  4    rad / sec
2 3 3
Example - 13 Since there is no angular acceleration after 2 sec
A grindstone starts from rest and has a constant- The angular velocity after 6 sec remains the same.
angular acceleration of 4.0 rad/sec2. The angular Hence the correct answer is (A).
displacement and angular velocity, after 4 sec. will
respectively be –
(a) 32 rad, 16 rad/sec (b) 16 rad, 32 rad/s Example - 15
(c) 64 rad, 32 rad/sec (d) 32 rad, 64 rad/sec Write an expression for the position vector r for a
particle describing uniform circular motion, using
Ans. (a)
rectangular coordinates and the unit vectors i and j.
Sol. Angular displacement after 4 sec is The vector expressions for the velocity v and
1 acceleration a will be-
  0 t  at 2
2 (a)  r2 (b) −  2r/2
1 1
 at 2   4  42  32 rad (c) −2  r2 (d) −  2r
2 2 Ans. (d)
Angular velocity after 4 sec
Sol. r  ix  jy, x  r cos ,
  0  at
y  r sin  where   t
 0  4  4  16 rad / sec
r  i  r cos t   j  r sin t 
v
dr
dt
  
 i r sin t  j r cos t 
Example - 14
r
The shaft of an electric motor starts from rest and on a  d2  2 r
the application of a torque, it gains an angular dt 2
acceleration given by a  3t  t 2 during the first 2 Hence the correct answer is (D).
seconds after it starts after which a = 0. The angular
velocity after 6 sec will be –
Example - 16
(a) 10/3 rad/sec (b) 3/10 rad/sec
The maximum speed at which a car can turn round a
(c) 30/4 rad/sec (d) 4/30 rad/sec curve of 30 metre radius on a level road if the
Ans. (a) coefficient of friction between the tyres and the road
is 0.4, will be –
Sol. Given a  3t  t 2
(a) 10.84 m/s (b) 17.84 m/s
d
  3t  t 2 (c) 11.76 m/s (d) 9.02 m/s
dt
Ans. (a)
 d   3t  t 2  dt
@cbseinfinite
CIRCULAR MOTION 70
Sol. Let W = Mg be the weight of the car. Friction force = maximum angle q is given by the breaking tension of
0.4 W the string in the equation Tcos   m.g
Mv 2 Wv 2 Here T (Maximum) = 8 N and m = 0.4 kg
Centripetal force  
r gr 8cos   0.4  g  0.4 10  4
Wv 2
4 1
0.4W  cos      ,   60
gr 8 2
v 2  0.4  g  r  0.4  9.8  30  117.6 The angle with horizontal  90  60  30
0.4  v 2
v  10.84 m / sec From equation (2), 8sin 60 
4sin 60
32sin 2 60
v2   80sin 2 60
0.4
Example - 17
v  80 sin 60  7.7 m / sec
A man whirls a stone round his head on the end of a
string 4.0 metre long. Can the string be in a Hence the correct answer is (A).
horizontal, plane? If the stone has a mass of 0.4 kg
and the string will break, if the tension in it exceeds 8 Example - 18
N. The smallest angle the string can make with the
horizontal and the speed of the stone will respectively A smooth table is placed horizontally and a spring of
be (Take g = 10 m/sec2) unstretched length l0 and force constant k has one end
fixed to its centre. To the other end of the spring is
(a) 30°, 7.7 m/s (b) 60°, 7.7 m/s
attached a mass m which is making n revolutions per
(c) 45°, 8.2 m/s (d) 60°, 8.7 m/s second around the centre. Tension in the spring will
Ans. (a) be
Sol. 4p 2 m k n2 4p 2 m k n2
0 0
(a) (b)
 k  4 mn 
2 2
 k  4 mn 
2 2
2p 2 m k 0 n2 2p m k 0 n2
(c) (d)
 k  4 mn 
2 2
 k  4 mn 
2 2
Ans. (a)
Sol. Let T be the tension produced in the stretched string.
The centripetal force required for the mass m to move
in a circle is provided by the tension T. The stretched
length of the spring is r (radius of the circle).
From figure Now,
Tcos   mg ... 1 Elongation produced in the spring   r  
0
mv 2 mv 2 Tension produced in the spring,

T sin    ...  2 
r sin  T  k r  0  ... 1
mg Where k is the force constant
From eq. (1) T 
cos  Linear velocity of the motion v  2 r n
When the string is horizontal, q must be 90 i.e.,
mv 2 m  2rn 
2
cos90  0 Centripetal force  
r r
mg
T   42 r n 2 m ...  2 
0
Thus the tension must be infinite which is impossible, Equating equation. (1) and (2), we get
so the string can not be in a horizontal plane. The
@cbseinfinite
CIRCULAR MOTION 71
k r  0   42 r n 2 m Ans. (b)

Sol. Tension in the rope  mr2  mr42 n 2
 mv 2 
T   Maximum tension  6.4 N
 r 
6.4  4  0.4  4 2 n2
kr  k 0  4 2 r n 2 m
Number of revolutions per minutes
r  k  42 n 2 m   k 0
60
  19.1
k 
r 0
...  3
 k  4 n m 
2 2
Substituting the value of r in eqn. (1) we have

 k 0  Example - 21
T  k  
  k  4 2 n 2 m  A certain string which is 1 m long will break, if the
0

load on it is more than 0.5 kg. A mass of 0.05 kg is
4 2 n 2 m 0 k attached to one end of it and the particle is whirled
or T  ...  4 
 k  4 n m 
2 2 round a horizontal circle by holding the free end of
the string by one hand. The greatest number of
Hence the correct answer is (A). revolutions per minute possible without breaking the
string will be-
Example - 19 (a) 9.45 (b) 94.5
The safe velocity required for scooterist negotiating a (c) 99.5 (d) 9.95
curve of radius 200 m on a road with the angle of Ans. (b)
repose of tan 1
 0.2 will be- Sol. Mass of the body m = 0.05 kg,
(a) 20 km/hr (b) 200 m/s Radius of circular path = 1 m
(c) 72 km/hr (d) 72 m/s The maximum tension in the string can withstand
Ans. (c)  0.5 kg wt  0.5  9.8 N  4.9 N
Sol. As the centripetal force is supplied by the frictional
Hence the centripetal force required to produce the
force, hence
maximum tension in the string is 4.9 N
mv 2 v2
 mg  0.2  4.9 4.9
r 200  10 i.e. mr2  4.9 2    98
mr 0.05 1
  tan 1  0.2  tan 1       0.2
98
v  20 m / s   98 2m  98 m 
2
18  1.1576 rev / sec  94.5 rev / min
The safe speed is 20   72 km / hr
5
Example - 22
Example - 20
A body of mass m is attached with a string of length
A body of mass 4 kg is tied to one end of a rope of
1. If it is whirled in a horizontal circular path with
length 40 cm and whirled in a horizontal circle. The
velocity v. The tension in the string will be –
maximum number of revolutions per minute it can be
whirled so that the rope does not snap as the rope can mv 2
(a) mv2 (b)
withstand to a tension of 6.4 Newton, will be –
(a) 1.91 (b) 19.1 m mv 2
(c) (d)
(c) 191 (d) 1910 v2 2
@cbseinfinite
CIRCULAR MOTION 72
Ans. (b) mv 2A
T1 
3l
Sol. Required centripetal force, For B:
m  v 2B 
2
mv
Fc 
Required centripetal force 
2
Here centripetal force is provided by the tension in
Remember w i.e. angular velocity of all the particles
the string
is same
v A v B vC
  
3 2
2mv 2A
Thus for B, centripetal force 
9
Net force towards the centre
2mv 2A
mv 2 T2  T1 
T  Fc  9
2mv 2A 5mv A2
Hence the correct answer is (B). T2   T1 
9 9l
(Putting value of T1)
Example - 23 For C:
Three identical particles are connected by three mv C2 mv 2A
Centripetal force 
strings as shown in fig. These particles are revolving 3l 9l
in a horizontal plane. The velocity of the outermost
Net force towards centre  T3  T2
particle is v. Then T1 : T2 : T3 will be - (Where T1 is
tension in the outermost string etc.) mv 2A
T3  T2 
9
mv 2A
T3   T2
9
6mv 2A
T3 
(a) 3 : 5 : 7 (b) 3 : 5 : 6 9l
(c) 3 : 4 : 5 (d) 7 : 5 : 3 (on putting value of T2)
1 5 6
Ans. (b) Now T1 : T2 : T3  : :  3 : 5 : 6
3 9 9
Sol. For A:
Note: It is to be pondered from the above example
that as the velocity is increased continuously, the
innermost string will break first i.e. T 3> T2> T1
Example - 24
2
mv A particle describes a horizontal circle on the smooth
Required centripetal force  A
3l surface of an inverted cone. The height of the plane

(net force towards centre = T1) of the circle above the vertex is 9.8 cm. The speed of
the particle will be –
This will provide required centripetal force particle at
A, (a) 9.8 m/s (b) 0.98 m/s
(c) 0.098 m/s (d) 98 m/s
@cbseinfinite
CIRCULAR MOTION 73
Ans. (b) Example - 25

A car is moving in a circular path of radius 100 m
Sol. The force acting on particle are with velocity of 200 m/sec such that in each sec its
(i) weight mg acting vertically downward. velocity increases by 100 m/s, the net acceleration of
car will be –
(ii) Normal reaction N of the smooth surface of the
cone. (in m/sec)
mv 2 (a) 100 17 (b) 10 7

(iii) Reaction of the centripetal force acting
r
(c) 10 3 (d) 100 3
radially outwards.
Ans. (a)
Resolving N into horizontal and vertical components
we obtain Sol. We know centripetal acceleration
 Tangential velocity 
2
mv 2
N cos   and Nsin   mg ac 
r radius
 200 
2
  400 m / sec 2
100
N sin  mg

N cos  mv 2 Tangential acceleration
r
a t  100 m / sec 2 (given)
rg
tan   a net  a c2  a 2t  2a c a t cos90
v2
 a c2  a 2t
  400  100
2 2
 100 17 m / s2
[Remember the angle between at i.e. the tangential
acceleration and ac i.e. the radial acceleration is
always 90]
r Example - 26
But tan  
h
The roadway bridge over a canal is in the form of an
r rg arc of a circle of radius 20 m. What is the minimum

h v2 speed with which a car can cross the bridge without
leaving contact with the ground at the highest point (g
v  hg  9.8  9.8 102
= 9.8 m/s2)
 0.98 m / s (a) 7 m/s (b) 14 m/s
Hence the correct answer is (B). (c) 289 m/s (d) 5 m/s
@cbseinfinite
CIRCULAR MOTION 74
Ans. (b) v2
From (1) & (2), h  l
Sol. The minimum speed at highest point of a vertical rg
circle is given by
120
vc  rg  20  9.8  14 m / s Hence v  48 km / hr  m / s,
9
Hence the correct answer is (B). (r = 400 m, l = 1m),
2
 120 
Example - 27   1
h
9 
 0.045 m  4.5 cm
For a heavy vehicle moving on a circular curve of a 400  9.8
highway the road bed is banked at an angle  Hence the correct answer is (C).
corresponding to a particular speed. The correct angle
of banking of the road for vehicles moving at 60
km/hr will be - (If radius of curve = 0.1 km) Example - 29
(a) tan 1  0.283 (b) tan 1  2.83 A car driver is negotiating a curve of radius 100 m
with a speed of 18 km/hr. The angle through which
(c) tan 1  0.05 (d) tan 1  0.5 he has to lean from the vertical will be –
Ans. (a) 1 1
(a) tan 1 (b) tan 1
4 40
50
Sol. v  60 km / hr  m/s
3 1  1 
(c) tan 1   (d) tan 1  
2  20 
r  0.1 km  100 m
Ans. (b)
v2
tan    0.283 2
 5
rg 18  
v 2  18  1
We know that, tan    
  tan 1  0.283
Sol.
rg 100  10 40
Hence the correct answer is (A). 1
   tan 1
40
Example - 28 Hence the correct answer is (B).
A train has to negotiate a curve of radius 400 m. By
how much should the outer rail be raised with respect Example - 30
to the inner rail for a speed of 48 km/hr. The distance
between the rail is 1 m. In figure ABCDE is a channel in the vertical plane,
part BCDE being circular with radius r. A ball is
(a) 12 m (b) 12 cm
released from A and slides without friction and
(c) 4.5 cm (d) 4.5 m without rolling. It will complete the loop path –
Ans. (c) (a) if h is greater than 5r/2
v2
Sol. We know that tan   ... 1 (b) if h is less than 5r/2
rg
(c) if h is greater than 2r/5
Let h be the relative raising of outer rail with respect
(d) if h is less than 2r/5
to inner rail. Then
Ans. (a)
h
tan   ...  2 
(l = separation between rails)
@cbseinfinite
CIRCULAR MOTION 75
Sol. Sol. See fig, Here v = 360 km/hr = 100 m/sec
Let m be the mass of the ball. When the ball comes

mv 2
down to B, its potential energy mgh which is At lower point, N  mg  ,
converted into kinetic energy. Let vB, be the velocity R
1 mv 2
of the ball at B. Then, mgh  mv 2B N = weight of the flyer  mg 
2 R
The ball now rises to a point D, where its potential 70  10000 
N  70  10   2100 N
energy is mg  h  2r  . If v D be the velocity of the 500
ball at D, then, mv 2
At upper point, N  mg  ,
1 R
mg  h  2r   mv 2D ...  2 
2 mv 2
N  mg  1400  700  700 N
Now to complete the circular path, it is necessary that R
the centrifugal force acting upward at point D, should mv 2
At middle point, N   1400 N
be equal or greater than the force mg acting R
downward at point D should be equal or greater than Hence the correct answer is (D).
the force mg acting downward. Therefore
mv 2D
mg or v 2D  r g Example - 32
r
A particle of mass m tied with a string of length 1 is
From equation (2) v2D  2g  h  2r 
released from horizontal as shown in fig. The velocity
5 at the lowest portion will be –
h r
2 (a) g (b) 2g
1 1
(c) g (d) g
2 2
Example - 31
Ans. (b)
An aircraft loops the loop of radius R = 500 m with a Sol. Suppose v be the velocity of particle at the lowest
constant velocity v = 360 km/hour. The weight of the position B.
flyer of mass m = 70 kg in the lower, upper and
According to conservation of energy
middle points of the loop will respectively be-
(K.E. + P.E.)at A = (K.E. + P.E.) at B
(a) 210 N, 700 N, 1400 N
(b) 1400 N, 700 N, 2100
(c) 700 N, 1400 N, 210 N
(d) 2100 N, 700 N, 1400
Ans. (d)
@cbseinfinite
CIRCULAR MOTION 76
1 1
0  mgl  mv 2  0 mgl  mv 2
2 2
v  2g v2  2gl ... 1
Hence the correct answer is (B). If T be the tension in the string,
mv 2
Example - 33 then T  mg  ...  2 
A 4 kg ball is swung in a. vertical circle at the end of From (1) & (2) T = 3 mg
a cord 1 m long. The maximum speed at which it can
swing if the cord can sustain maximum tension of
163.6 N will be –
(a) 6 m/s (b) 36 m/s Example - 35
(c) 8 m/s (d) 64 m/s A ball is released from height h as shown in fig.
Ans. (a) Which of the following conditions hold good for the
particle to complete the circular path?
mv 2
Sol. Maximum tension T   mg
r
mv2
 T  mg
r
4v 2
or  163.6  4  9.8
1
v 6 m/s
5R 5R
Hence the correct answer is (A). (a) h  (b) h 
2 2
5R 5R
(c) h  (d) h 
Example - 34 2 2
The string of a pendulum is horizontal. The mass of Ans. (b)
the bob is m. Now the string is released. The tension Sol. According to the law of conservation of energy (K.E.
in the string in the lowest position is – + P.E.) at A = (K.E. + P.E.) at B
(a) 1 mg (b) 2 mg 1
0  mgh  mv2  0
(c) 3 mg (d) 4 mg 2
Ans. (c) v  2gh
Sol. The situation is shown in fig. Let v be the velocity of
But velocity at the lowest point of circle,
the bob at the lowest position. In this position the P.E.
of bob is converted into K.E. hence – v  5gR
2gh  5gR
5R
h
2
@cbseinfinite
CIRCULAR MOTION 77

Characteristics of Circular Motion 7. A body is revolving with a uniform speed V in a circle
1. The linear and angular acceleration of a particle are of radius r. The angular acceleration of the body is -
10 m/sec2 and 5 rad/sec2 respectively it will be at a
V
distance from the axis of rotation - (a)
r
(a) 50 m (b) 1/2 m
(b) Zero
(c) 1 m (d) 2 m
2. A tacheometer is a device to measure - V2
(c) along the radius and towards the centre
(a) gravitational pull (b) speed of rotation r
(c) surface tension (d) tension in a spring
3. Two cars of masses m1 and m2 are moving along the circular V2
(d) along the radius and away from the centre
path of radius r1 and r2. They take one round in the same r
time. The ratio of angular velocities of the two cars will
8. A particle is moving along a circular path with uniform
be-
speed. Through what angle does its angular velocity
(a) m1 : m2 (b) r1 : r2 change when it completes half of the circular path ?
(c) 1 : 1 (d) m1 r1 : m2 r2 (a) 0° (b) 45°
4. The angular velocity of earth about its axis of rotation is- (c) 180° (d) 360°
2 9. What is the angular velocity in rad/s of a fly wheel making
(a) rad / sec
(60  60  24) 300 r.p.m. ?
(a) 600  (b) 20 
2
(b) rad / sec (c) 10  (d) 30
(60  60)
10. A particle covers equal distance around a circular path, in
2 equal intervals of time. Which of the following quantities
(c) rad / sec
60 connected with the motion of the particle remains constant
with time ?
2
(d) rad / sec (a) Displacement (b) Velocity
365  24  60  60
(c) Speed (d) Acceleration
5. A bottle of soda water is grasped by the neck and swing
briskly in a vertical circle. Near which portion of the bottle 11. The ratio of angular speed of hours hand and seconds
do the bubbles collect? hand of a clock is-
(a) near the near bottom (a) 1 : 1 (b) 1 : 60
(b) in the middle of the bottle (c) 1 : 720 (d) 3600 : 1
(c) near the neck 12. The ratio of angular speeds of minutes hand and hour
(d) uniformly distributed in the bottle hand of a watch is -
6. A body is moving with a constant speed v in a circle of (a) 1 : 12 (b) 6 : 1

radius r. Its angular acceleration is- (c) 12 : 1 (d) 1:6
v 13. In circular motion, the centripetal acceleration is given by-

(a) Zero (b)
r    
(a) ar (b)  v
v2 v2
   
(c) a  v (d)  r
(c) (d)
r2 r
@cbseinfinite
CIRCULAR MOTION 78
14. A particle moves in a circle of radius 25 cm at two 21. In the figure, a particle is shown travelling counter-
revolutions per second. The acceleration of particle in clockwise in a circle of radius 10 m. The acceleration vector
m/s2 is - is indicated at a specific time. Find the value of 'v' (in m/s)
(a) 2 (b) 82 at this time.
(c) 4 2 (d) 22
15. Two bodies of masses 10 kg and 5 kg moving on concentric Uniform and Non-uniform Circular Motion
orbits of radii R and r such that their period of revolution
22. In applying the equation for motion with uniform angular
are same. The ratio of their centripetal acceleration is in the
acceleration  = 0 +  t, the radian measure -
same order as given.
(a) must be used for both  and 
R r
(a) (b) (b) may be used for both  and 
r R
(c) may be used for  but not 
R 2
r 2 (d) cannot be used for both  and 
(c) (d)
r2 R2 23. A wheel starts rotating at 10 rad/sec and attains the
angular velocity of 100 rad/sec in 15 seconds. What is
16. A particle is moving along a circular path of radius 2m with
–1
uniform speed of 5 ms . What will be the change in velocity the angular acceleration in rad/sec2?
when the particle completes half of the revolution? (a) 10 (b) 110/15
–1
(a) Zero (b) 10 ms (c) 100/15 (d) 6
10 24. A particle is moving in a horizontal circle with constant

(c) 10 2 ms 1
(d) ms1 speed. State whether, the-
2
(a) K.E. is constant
17. A particle is moving along a circular path of radius 5m with
–1 (b) P.E. is constant
a uniform speed 5 ms . What will be the average
acceleration when the particle completes half revolution? (c) Both K.E. and P.E. are constant
(a) Zero (b) 10 ms
–1 (d) Neither K.E. nor P.E. are constant
25. A stone of mass m is tied to a string of length  and
–2 10 2
(c) 10 ms (d) ms whirled in a circle with a constant speed v. If the string is

released, the stone flies-
18. A particle moves in circular path with uniform speed v. (a) radially outward
The change in its velocity on rotating through 60º is -
(b) radially inward
v (c) tangentially outward
(a) v 2 (b)
2
(d) with an acceleration mv2/ 
(c) v (d) Zero 26. If a particle moves in a circle describing equal angles in
19. A particle is moving along a circular path of radius equal interval of times, its velocity vector –
6 m with uniform speed of 8 ms –1 . The average
(a) remains constant
acceleration when the particle completes one half of
the revolution is - (b) changes in magnitude
(c) changes in direction
16 32
(a) m/s2 (b) m/s2 (d) changes both in magnitude and direction
3 3
27. In uniform circular motion-
64
(c) m/s2 (d) None of these (a) both velocity and acceleration are constant
3
20. A particle stats from rest and moves in a circular motion (b) acceleration and speed are constant but velocity
2 changes
with constant angular acceleration of 2 rad / s . The
number of revolutions completed by the particle during (c) both acceleration and velocity change
(d) both acceleration and speed are constant
k
the first 4s is rev , where k is:

@cbseinfinite
CIRCULAR MOTION 79
28. When a body moves with a constant speed along a circle- 34. A car is moving with speed 30 m/s on a circular path
(a) no work is done on it of radius 500 m. Its speed is increasing at the rate of
(b) no acceleration is produced in the body 2 m/s2. The net acceleration of the car is-
(c) no force acts on the body (a) 3.7 m/s2 (b) 2.7 m/s2
(d) its velocity remains constant (c) 1.8 m/s2 (d) 2 m/s2
29. A wheel is subjected to uniform angular acceleration about 35. The angular velocity of a particle moving in a circle of
its axis. Initially its angular velocity is zero. In the first radius 50 cm is increased in 5 min from 100 revolutions per
2 sec, it rotates through an angle ; in the next 2 sec, it minute to 400 revolutions per minute. Find tangential
rotates through an additional angle 2. The ratio of 2 /1 acceleration of the particle.
is- 2 2
(a) 60 m/s (b) /30 m/s
(a) 1 (b) 2
2 2
(c) 3 (d) 5 (c) /15 m/s (d) /60 m/s
30. A grinding wheel attained a velocity of 20 rad/sec in 36. A particle moves in a circle of a radius 30 cm. Its linear
5 sec starting from rest. Find the number of revolutions speed is given by : v = 2t, where t in second and v in
made by the wheel. m/s. Find out its radial and tangential acceleration at
t = 3 sec. respectively :
 1
(a) revolution per sec (b) revolution per sec 2
(a) 220 m/sec , 50 m/sec
2 2
(b) 100 m/sec , 5 m/sec
2
25 
2 2 2 2
(c) 120 m/sec , 2 m/sec (d) 110 m/sec , 10 m/sec
25
(c) revolution (d) None

31. A wheel having a diameter of 3 m starts from rest and Centripetal and Centrifugal Force
accelerates uniformly to an angular velocity of 37. A body of mass m is moving in a circle of radius r with a
210 r.p.m. in 5 seconds. Angular acceleration of the constant speed v. The force on the body is mv2/r and u is
wheel is - directed towards the centre. What is the work done by this
rad rad force in moving the body over half the circumference of
(a) 1.4 2 (b) 3.3 the circle?
s s2
rad rad mv 2
(c) 2.2 2 (d) 1.1 2 (a) (b) zero
s s r  r
32. A particle completes 3 revolutions per second on a
circular path of radius 8 cm. Find the values of angular
velocity and centripetal acceleration of the particle - mv 2 r 2
(c) (d)
r mv 2
rad cm rad cm
(a) 6 ; 2882 2 (b)  ; 2752 2 38. Centrifugal force is considerd as pseudo force when
s s s s
(a) An observer is at the centre of circular motion
rad cm
(c) 6 ; 288 2 (d) None (b) An outside observer
s s
33. A car is travelling with linear velocity v on a circular road (c) An observer who is moving with the particle which is
of radius r. If it is increasing it speed at the rate of 'a' experiencing the force
metre/sec2, then the resultant acceleration will be- (d) None of the above
39. A stone of mass 0.5 kg tied with a string of length 1 metre
 v2 2  v4 2 is moving in a circular path with a speed of 4 m/sec. The
(a)  2  a  (b)  2  a 
r  r  tension acting on the string in Newton is-
(a) 2 (b) 8
 v4 (c) 0.2 (d) 0.8
2  v2 2
(c)  2  a  (d)  2  a 
r  r 
@cbseinfinite
CIRCULAR MOTION 80
40. A particle is acted upon by a force of constant (a) Centripetal force remains unchanged
magnitude which is always perpendicular to the velocity (b) Centripital force is halved
of the particle. The motion of the particle takes place in (c) Centripital force is doubled
a plane. it follows that– (d) Centripital force is quadrupled
(a) its velocity is constant 46. If both the speed and radius of circular path of a
(b) its acceleration is constant revolving body are doubled, the magnitude of centripetal
(c) its kinetic energy is constant force will be
(d) it moves in straight line (a) equal to the former
41. A particle is acted upon by a constant force always (b) twice the former
normal to the direction of motion of the particle. It is (c) 4 times the former
therefore inferred that- (d) 8 times the former
(a) Its velocity is constant 47. A string of length 1 m is fixed at one end and carries
(b) It moves in a straight line a mass of 100 gm at the other end. The string makes
(c) Its speed is constant (2/) revolutions per second around vertical axis through
the fixed end. Calculate the tension in the string-
(d) It moves in circular path
(a) 1.0 N (b) 1.6 N
(a) a, d (b) c, d
(c) 2 N (d) 4 N
(c) a, b (d) a, b, c
48. A chain of 125 links is 1.25 m long and has a mass of
42. A cyclist taking turn bends inwards while a car
2 kg with the ends fastened together it is set rotating
passenger taking the same turn is thrown outwards.
The reason is - rev
at 3000 . Find the centripetal force on each link -
(a) that car is heavier than cycle min
(b) that car has four wheels, while cycle has only two (a) 3.14 N (b) 314 N
(c) that cyclist has to counteract the centrifugal force, 1 1
while the passenger is only thrown by it (c) N (d) N
3.14 314
(d) the difference in the speed of the two
49. The earth, radius 6400 km, makes one revolution about
43. What happens to the centripetal acceleration of a revolving
its own axis in 24 hours. The centripetal acceleration of
body if you double the orbital speed v and halve the angular
a point on its equator is nearly -
velocity  ?
(a) the centripetal acceleration remains unchanged cm cm
(a) 340 2 (b) 3.4
sec sec 2
(b) the centripetal acceleration is halved
(c) the centripetal acceleration is doubled cm cm
(c) 34 (d) 0.34
(d) the centripetal acceleration is quadrupled sec 2 sec 2
44. The breaking tension of a string is 10 N. A particle of mass 50. A stone of mass 0.1 kg tied to one end of a string
0.1 kg tied to it is rotated along a horizontal circle of radius 1.0 m long is revolved in a horizontal circle at the rate
0.5 metre. The maximum speed with which the particle can of 10/ revolution per second. Calculate the tension of
be rotated without breaking the string is- the string ?
(a) 30 N (b) 40 N
(a) 5 m/sec (b)  50  m/sec (c) 50 N (d) 60 N
51. A coin placed on a rotating turn table just slips if it is
(c)  500  m/sec (d) 1000  m/sec at a distance of 40 cm from the centre if the angular
velocity of the turntable is doubled, it will just slip at
45. What happens to centripital force of a revolving body if
you double the orbital speed v and halve the angular a distance of
velocity - (a) 10 cm (b) 20 cm
(c) 40 cm (d) 80 cm
@cbseinfinite
CIRCULAR MOTION 81
52. A stone of mass 0.5 kg tied with a string of length 1 m Applications of Circular Motion
is moving in a circular path with a speed of 4 m/sec. 57. A car of mass m is taking a circular turn of radius 'r' on a
The tension acting on the string in Newton is frictional level road with a speed v. In order that the car
(a) 2 (b) 8 does not skid-
(c) 0.2 (d) 0.8 mv2 mv2

(a)  mg (b)  mg
53. A string can bear a maximum tension of 100 Newton r r
without breaking. A body of mass 1 kg is attached to
one end of 1 m length of thin string and it is revolved mv2 v
(c) = mg (d) = mg
in a horizontal plane. The maximum linear velocity which r r
can be imparted to the body without breaking the string, Where '' is coefficient of friction
will be -
58. A cyclist turns around a curve at 15 miles/hour. If he turns
(a) 10 m/s (b) 1 m/s at double the speed, the tendency to overturn is-
(c) 100 m/s (d) 1000 m/s (a) doubled (b) quadrupled
54. The 4 kg disk D is attached to the end of a cord as shown (c) halved (d) unchanged
in the figure. The other end of the cord is tied at the center 59. When the road is dry and the coefficient of friction is
of a platform. If the platform is rotating rapidly and the , the maximum speed of a car in a circular path is
disk is placed on it and released from rest as shown, 10 m/s, if the road becomes wet and ’ = /2. What is
determine the time (in seconds), it takes for the disk to the maximum speed permitted ?
reach a speed great enough to break the cord. The (a) 5 m/s (b) 10 m/s
maximum tension the cord can sustain is 100 N and the
(c) 10 2 m/s (d) 5 2 m/s
coefficient of kinetic friction between the disk and the
60. A car of mass 1000 kg moves on a circular track of
platform is  k  0.1 . Take g  10ms 2 radius 20 m. if the coefficient of friction is 0.64, what is
the maximum velocity with which the car can be moved?
(a) 1.12 m/s (b) 11.2 m/s
0.64  20 0.64  20
(c) m/s (d) m/s
1000 1000
61. On an unbanked road, a cyclist negotiating a bend of radius
r at velocity v must lean inwards by an angle  equal to -
55. A force of constant magnitude F = 10 N acts on a particle (a) tan–1 (v2/g) (b) tan–1 (g/v)
moving in a plane such that it is perpendicular to the (c) tan–1 (v2 / gr) (d) tan–1 (rg/v2)
 
 
velocity v v  v  5 m / s of the body, and the force is
62. A cyclist is moving on a circular track of radius 80 m with a
velocity of 72 km/hr. He has to lean from the vertical
always directed towards a fixed point. Then the angle approximately through an angle
(in radian) turned by the velocity vector of the particle as (a) tan–1 (1/4) (b) tan–1 (1)
it covers a distance S = 10 m is (take: mass of the particle (c) tan–1 (1/2) (d) tan–1 (2)
as m = 2 kg) 63. Keeping the banking angle same to increase the maximum
56. 5. A particle describes a horizontal circle in a conical funnel speed with which a vehicle can travel on a curved road by
whose inner surface is smooth with speed of 0.5 m/s. What 10%, the radius of curvature of road has to be changed
is the height of the plane of circle from vertex of the funnel from 20 m to-
(in cm) (a) 16 m (b) 18 m
(c) 24.25 m (d) 30.5 m
@cbseinfinite
CIRCULAR MOTION 82
64. A motor cyclist moving with a velocity of 72 km per hour (a) 100 N (b) 600 N
on a flat road takes a turn on the road at a point where the (c) 110 N (d) 1100 N
radius of curvature of the road is 20 metres. The acceleration
70. A block of mass m slides down along the surface of the
due to gravity is 10 m/s2. In order to avoid skidding, he
bowl from the rim to the bottom as shown in fig. The velocity
must not bend with respect to the vertical plane byan angle
of the block at the bottom will be-
greater than-
(a) = tan–1 6 (b)  = tan–1 2
(c)  = tan–1 25.92 (d)  = tan–14
65. A person with a mass of M kg stands in contact against
the wall of the cylindrical drum of radius r rotating with
an angular velocity . The coefficient of friction between
the wall and the clothing is . The minimum rotational
speed of the cylinder which enables the person to remain
stuck to the wall when the floor is suddenly removed (a) Rg (b) 2 Rg
is -
(c) 2Rg (d) gR
g r 71. A sphere is suspended by a thread of length l. What
(a) min = (b) min =
r g minimum horizontal velocity is to be imparted to the sphere
for it to reach the height of suspension?
2g gr
(c) min = (d) min = (a) g (b) g l
r 
(c) 2g (d) /g
Vertical Circular Motion 72. A particle rests on the top of the hemisphere of radius R.
The small horizontal velocity that must be imparted to the
66. A particle is projected so as to just move along a vertical
particle if it is to leave the hemisphere without sliding down.
circle of radius r. The ratio of the tension in the string when
is-
the particle is at the lowest and highest point on the circle
is - (a) v = (2gR)1/2 (b) v = (gR/2)1/2
(c) v = (gR)1/2 (d) v = (2g/R)1/2
(a) 1 (b) finite but large
73. A mass m is revolving in a vertical circle at the end of a
(c) zero (d) Infinite
string of length 20 cm. By how much does the tension of
67. A body of mass 2 kg is moving in a vertical of radius 2 m. the string at the lowest point exceed the tension at the top
The work done when it moves from the lowest point to the most point?
highest point is-
(a) 2 m g (b) 4 m g
(a) 80 J (b) 40 J
(c) 6 m g (d) 8 m g
(c) 20 J (d) 0
74. A body of mass m crosses the top most point of a vertical
68. A motor - cycle is moving in a vertical circular path. At
circle with critical speed. What will be tension in string
what stage will the speed of the motor cycle be
when it is horizontal-
maximum ?
(a) mg (b) 2 mg
(a) At the highest point of the path
(c) 3 mg (d) 6 mg
(b) At the lowest point of the path
75. An aeroplane flying at 100 m/sec dives in a vertical
(c) At the mid height of the path
plane along the circle of radius 200 m. The mass of the
(d) At all the points in the path pilot is 75 kg. What will be the force exerted by the pilot
69. A body of mass 10 kg is rotated in vertical circle of radius on his seat when the aeroplane is at the maximum height
4 cm at constant angular velocity of 5 rad/ sec. The maximum (a) 300 kg wt (b) 200 kg wt
tension in the string is-
(c) 450 kg wt (d) 100 kg wt
@cbseinfinite
CIRCULAR MOTION 83
76. An aeroplane flying at 100 m/sec dives in a vertical 79. The roadway of a bridge over a canal is in the form of a
plane along the circle of radius 200 m. The mass of the circular arc of radius 18 m. What is the greatest speed with
pilot is 75 kg. The force exterted when the pilot is at which a motor cycle can cross the bridge without leaving
the lowest point is ground.
(a) 450 kg wt (b) 250 kg wt (a) 98 m/s (b) 18  9.8 m/s
(c) 300 kg wt (d) 100 kg wt
(c) 18 × 9.8 m/s (d) 18/9.8 m/s
77. A can filled with water is revolved in a vertical circle of
80. The maximum speed with which a car can cross a convex
radius 4 metre and the water just does not fall down. The
bridge over a river with radius of curvature 9 m is :
time period of revolution will be -
(given that the centre of gravity of car is 1m above the
(a) 1 sec (b) 10 sec road)
(c) 8 sec (d) 4 sec (a) 50 m/s (b) 30 m/s
78. A 2 kg stone at the end of a string 1 m. long is whirled in a (c) 20 m/s (d) 10 m/s
vertical circle at a constant speed. The speed of the stone
is 4 m /sec. The tension in the string will be 52 N when the
stone is-
(a) at the top of the circle
(b) at the bottom of the circle
(c) half way down
@cbseinfinite
CIRCULAR MOTION 84

1. A particle starts moving on a circle of radius R with 5. A particle is moving along a circular path with a
initial velocity v0 such that centripeta L tangential constant speed of 10 ms 1 . What is the magnitude of
acceleration are equal at all instants. Maximum time
the change in velocity of the particle (in m/s), when
for which it can move. (2015)
it moves through an angle of 60° around the center
R 2R of the circle? (2019)
(a) v (b) v
0 0 (a) 10 3m / s (b) 0
R (c) 10 2m / s (d) 10 m / s
(c) 2v (d) Infinite 6. A uniform rod of length l is being rotated in a
0
horizontal plane with a constant angular speed about
2. A civil engineer has to design a circular banked racing
an axis passing through one of its ends. If the tension
track on which cars can move up to speed of 360 km/
generated in the rod due to rotation is T(x) at a
1 distance x from the axis, then which of the following
hr with coefficient of friction   and radius 4 km.
8 graphs depicts it most closely? (2019)
Angle of banking for safe racing should be:
(2016)
(a) 85.40 (b) 82.85
(c) 80.81 (d) 83.78
3. A conical pendulum of length 1 m makes an angle
  45 w.r.t. Z-axis and moves in a circle in the XY
plane. The radius of the circle is 0.4 m and its center
is vertically below O. The speed of the pendulum, in
its circular path, will be: (Take g = 10 ms–2)
(2017)
(a) 0.4 m/s (b) 4 m/s

(c) 0.2 m/s (d) 2 m/s
4. A particle is moving with a uniform speed in a circular
orbit of radius R in a central force inversely
proportional to the nth power of R. If the period of
rotation of the particle is T, then : (2018)
 n 1 n
(a) T R 2
(b) TR 2
3 n
1
(c) TR 2 for any n. (d) TR 2
@cbseinfinite
CIRCULAR MOTION 85
7. A bead of mass m stays at point P (a, b) on a wire 9. A modern grand-prix racing car of mass m is travelling
bent in the shape of a parabola y  4Cx and rotating
2 on a flat track in a circular arc of radius R with a
speed v. If the coefficient of static friction between
with angular speed  (see figure). The value of  is
(neglect friction): (2020) the tyres and the track is S , , then the magnitude of
negative lift FL acting downward on the car is:
(Assume forces on the four tyres are identical and
g = acceleration due to gravity) (2021)
 v2   v2 
2g (a) m   R  g  (b) m   R  g 
(a) (b) 2 gC  S   S 
C
 v2   v2 
2gC (c) m  g   R  (d) m  g   R 
(c) (d) 2 2gC  S   S 
ab
10. An inclined plane is bent in such a way that the
8. An insect is at the bottom of a hemispherical ditch of
radius 1 m. It crawls up the ditch but starts slipping x2
vertical cross-section is given by y  where y is
after it is at height h from the bottom. If the coefficient 4
of friction between the ground and the insect is 0.75, in vertical and x in horizontal direction. If the upper
then h is:  g  10 ms  surface of this curved plane is rough with coefficient
2
(2020)
of friction   0.5 , the maximum height in cm at which
(a) 0.45 m (b) 0.60 m
a stationary block will not slip downward is _____cm.
(c) 0.20 m (d) 0.80 m
(2021)
@cbseinfinite
CIRCULAR MOTION 86

Single Choice Questions 5. In the above question, the tangential speed of the water
1. A car is moving with a speed of 30 m/sec on a circular drop on leaving the rim of the umbrella is :
path of radius 500 m. Its is increasing at the rate of 2 (a) 3 m/s (b) 1.5 m/s
m/sec2. What is the acceleration of the car?
(c) 1 m/s (d) 2.5 m/s
(a) 9.8 m/sec2 (b) 2.7 m/sec2
(c) 2.4 m/sec2 (d) 1.8 m/sec2 6. In the above question, the locus of the drops is a circle of
radius :
2. Two moving particles P and Q are 10 m apart at a certain
instant. The velocity of P is 8 m/s making 30º with the line (a) 3 m (b) 1.5 m
joining P and Q and that of Q is 6 m/s making an angle (c) 1 m (d) 2.5 m
30º with PQ as shown in the firuge .Then angular
velocity of P with respect to Q is- 7. Two identical particles, A and B, are attached to a string of
length 2l, A to middle and B to one of the ends. The string
is whirled in a horizontal circle, with the end O fixed. If the
kinetic energy of B relative to A is E, then the absolute
kinetic energies of A and B are
(a) 0 rad/s (b) 0.1 rad/s

(c) 0.4 rad/s (d) 0.7 rad/s
3. A racing car is travelling along a track at a constant
speed of 40 m/s. A T.V. camera men is recording the
event from a distance of 30 m directly away from the
track as shown in figure. In order to keep the car under
view in the position shown, the angular speed with
which the camera should be rotated, is- (a) E and E (b) E and 4E
(c) 4E and E (d) E and 3E
8. If the equation for the displacement of a particle moving
on a circular path is given by :
3
 = 2t + 0.5
where  is in radian and t in second, then the angular
velocity of the particle at t = 2 sec
(a) 4/3 rad/sec (b) 3/4 rad/sec (a) 8 rad/sec (b) 12 rad/sec
(c) 8/3 3 rad/sec (d) 1 rad/sec (c) 24 rad/sec (d) 36 rad/sec
9. A particle moves in a uniform circular motion. Choose the
4. A wet, open umbrella is held vertical and is twirled about
wrong statement :
the handle at a uniform rate of 21 revolutions in 44 second.
If the rim of the umbrella is a circle of 1 metre in diameter (a) The particle moves with constant speed
and the height of the rim above the floor is 4.9 metre, then (b) The acceleration is always normal to the velocity
the angular speed of the umbrella is : (c) The particle moves with uniform acceleration
(a) 3 radian/sec (b) 1.5 radian/sec (d) The particle moves with variable velocity
(c) 1 radian/sec (d) 2.5 radian/sec
@cbseinfinite
CIRCULAR MOTION 87
10. A particle is moving on a circular track of radius 30 cm with 17. A rubber band of length l has a stone of mass m tied
a constant speed of 6 m/s. It acceleration is : to its one end. It is whirled with speed v so that the
(a) zero (b) 120 m/s2 stone describes a horizontal circular path. The tension
(c) 1.2 m/s2 (d) 36 m/s2 T in the rubber band is -
11. Let a r and a t represent radial and tangential acceleration. (a) zero (b) mv2 /l
The motion of a particle may be circular if: (c) > (mv2)/l (d) < mv2 /l
18. A circular turn table of radius 0.5 m has a smooth
(a) a r  0, a t  0 (b) a r  0, a t  0
groove as shown in fig. A ball of mass 90 g is placed
(c) a r  0, a t  0 (d) None of these inside the groove along with a spring of spring constant
102 N/cm. The ball is at a distance of 0.1 m from the
12. A point moves along a circle with velocity v = at where a
centre when the turn table is at rest. On rotating the
0.5 m/sec2. Then the total acceleration of the point at the
turn table with a constant angular velocity of
moment when it covered (1/10) th of the circle after
102 rad-sec–1 the ball moves away from the initial
beginning of motion -
position by a distance nearly equal to-
(a) 0.5 m/sec2 (b) 0.6 m/sec2
(c) 0.7 m/sec2 (d) 0.8 m/sec2
13. A particle P is moving in a circle of radius 'a' with a
uniform speed v. C is the centre of the circle and AP
is diameter. The angular velocity of P about A and C
are in the ratio-
(a) 1 :1 (b) 1 : 2
(a) 10–1 m (b) 10–2 m
(c) 2 : 1 (d) 4 : 1
(c) 10–3 m (d) 2 × 10–1 m
14. A particle is moving along a circular path of radius 3
meter in such a way that the distance travelled measured 19. A particle of mass m is attached to one end of a string
along the circumference is given by of length l while the other end is fixed to a point h
above the horizontal table, the particle is made to revolve
t2 t3 in a circle on the table so as to make p revolutions per
S=  . The accelration of particle when t = 2 sec
2 3 second. The maximum value of p if the particle is to be
is- in contact with the table will be-
(a) 1.3 m/s2 (b) 13 m/s2
(c) 3 m/s 2 (d) 10 m/s2
(a) 2 gh (b) g / h
15. A partcile of mass m is moving in a circular path of 1
constant radius r such that its centripetal acceleration (c) 2 h / g (d) g / h
2
ac is varying with time t as ac= k2 r t2, where k is a
20. A gramophone record is revolving with an angular
constant, the power delivered to the particle by the
velocity  . A coin is placed at a distance r from the
forces acting on it is-
centre of the record. The static coefficient of friction is
(a) 2 m k2 r2 t (b) m k2 r2 t . The coin will revolve with the record if-
(c) (m k4 r2 t5)/3 (d) 0
(a) r > g 2 (b) r = g /2 only
16. Two particle of equal masses are revolving in circular
(c) r < g /2 only (d) r  g /2
paths of radii r1 and r2 respectively with the same speed.
The ratio of their centripetal forces is : 21. A smooth table is placed horizontally and an ideal spring
of spring constant k = 1000 N/m and unextended length
r2 r2 of 0.5 has one end fixed to its centre. The other end is
(a) (b)
r1 r1 attached to a mass of 5 kg which is moving in a circle
2
with constant speed 20 m/s. then the tension in the
2
r  r  spring and the extension of this spring beyond its normal
(c)  1  (d)  2 
 r2   r1  length are-
(a) 1200 N, 1.2, m (b) 600 N, 0.6, m
(c) 700 N, 0.7, m (d) 800 N, 0.8 m
@cbseinfinite
CIRCULAR MOTION 88
22. A body of mass 2 kg is tied at one end of a string

1 m long. The other end is fixed and the body revolves
in a horizontal circle. The maximum tension which the
string can withstand is 2000 N. Calculate the maximum
number of revolutions per minute the body will make
and its linear velocity when the string just breaks-
(a) 203 rpm, 13.6 m/sec (b) 32 rpm, 16.3 m/sec
(c) 302 rpm, 61.3 m/sec (d) 300 rpm, 31.6 m/sec
23. If mass, speed and radius of rotation of a body moving
in a circular path are all increased by 50%, the necessary
force required to maintain the body moving in the (a) 10 / 3 rad/sec
circular path will have to be increased by-
(b) 10 3 rad/sec
(a) 225% (b) 125%
(c)150% (d)100 % (c) 10 rad/sec
24. A coin placed on a rotating turn table just slips if it (d) 20 rad/sec
is paced at a distace of 4 cm from the centre. If the
28. A motorcyclist wants to drive on the vertical surface of
angular velocity of the turn table is doubled, it will just
wooden ‘well’ or radius 5 m, with a minimum speed of
slip at a distance of-
(a) 1 cm (b) 2 cm 5 5 m/s. The minimum value of coefficient of friction
between the tyres and the wall of the well must be :
(c) 4 cm (d) 8 cm
(take g = 10 m/s2)
25. The kinetic energy of a particle moving along a circle
of radius R depends on the distance covered s as (a) 0.10 (b) 0.20
T = Ks2 where K is a constant. Find the force acting (c) 0.30 (d) 0.40
on the particle as a function of s - 29. A smooth wire is bent into a vertical circle of radius a.
A bead P can slide smoothly on the wire. The circle is
2K  s 
2
R
2 rotated about diameter AB as axis with a speed  as
(a) 1   (b) 2Ks 1    shown in figure. The bead P is at rest with respect to
s R  s 
the circular ring in the position shown. Then 2 is equal
to-
2 2
 s  2s R
(c) 2Ks 1    (d) 1   (a) 2g /a (b) 2g / (a 3)
R K  s 
(c) 2 3g / a (d) 2a / (g 3)
26. An unbanked curve has a radius of 60 m. The maximum
speed at which a car can make a turn if the coefficient of 30. A heavy small sized sphere is suspended by a string of
static friction is 0.75 is : length . The sphere rotates uniformly in a horizontal
(a) 2.1 m/s (b) 14 m/s circle with the string making an angle  with the vertical.
Then the time period of this conical pendulum is-
(c) 21 m/s (d) 7 m/s
27. A particle P will be in equilibrium inside a hemispherical  l sin  
bowl of radius 0.5 m at a height 0.2 m from the bottom when (a) T = 2 (b) T=2  
 g 
the bowl is rotated at an angular speed
( g = 10 m/sec2)
 l cos    l 
(c) T = 2   (d) T=2  g cos  
 g   
@cbseinfinite
CIRCULAR MOTION 89
31. A car is moving with a speed v on a road inclined at 36. The vertical section of a road over a canal bridge in the
an angle  in a circular arc of radius r, the minimum direction of its length is in the form of circle of radius
coefficent of friction so that the car does not slip 8.9 metre. Then the greatest speed at which the car can
away- cross this bridge wihout losing contact with the road at
its hgihest point, the centre of gravity of the car being
v2 v2 at a height h = 1.1 metre from the ground. Take
(a) =  tan  (b)  
rg rg g = 10 m/sec2-
(a) 5 m/sec (b) 10 m/sec

v 2 cos   rg sin  v 2 cos   rg sin  (c) 15 m/sec (d) 20 m/sec
(c) (d)
rg cos   v 2 sin  rg cos   v 2 sin 
37. A car while travelling at a speed of 72 km/hr. Passes
32. If the banking angle of curved road is given by tan (3/5) –1
through a curved portion of road in the form of an arc
and the radius of curvature of the road is 6 m, then the safe of a radius 10 m. If the mass of the car is 500 kg the
driving speed should not exceed : (g = 10 m/s2) reaction on the car at the lowest point P is-
(a) 86.4 km/h (b) 43.2 km/h (a) 25 kN (b) 50 kN
(c) 21.6 km/h (d) 30.4 km/h
(c) 75 kN (d) None of these
33. A circular road of radius 1000 m has banking angle 45°. The
maximum safe speed of a car having mass 200 kg will be, if 38. A stone is rotated steadily in a horizontal circle with a
the coefficient of friction between tyres and road is 0.5 : time period T by means of a string of length l. If the
tension in the string is kept constant and length l
(a) 172 m/s (b) 124 m/s
increase by 1%, then percentage change in time period
(c) 99 m/s (d) 86 m/s T is-
34. A simple pendulum is oscillating without damping. When
(a) 1 % (b) 0.5 %
the displacement of the bob is less than maximum, its

acceleration vector a is correctly shown in : (c) 2 % (d) 0.25 %
39. A stone of mass 1 kg tied to a light inextensible string

a of length 10/3 metre is whirled in a vertical circle. If the
(a) (b) ratio of maximum tension to minimum tension in the
string is 4, then speed of stone at highest point of the
circle is- [g = 10 m/s2]
a
(a) 20 m/s (b) 10 3 m/s
(c) 5 2 m/s (d) 10 m/s

(c) (d)
a 40. A partcle rests on the top of a hemisphere of radiu R.
a Find the smallest horizontal velocity that must be
imparted to the particle if it is to leave the hemisphere
35. A mass of 2.9 kg, is suspended from a string of length without sliding down it-
50 cm, and is at rest. Another body of mass 100 gm is
moving horizontally with a velocity of 150 m/sec, strikes (a) gR (b) 2gR
and sticks to it. What is the tension in the string when
it makes an angle of 60º with the vertical (c) 3gR (d) 5gR
(a) 153.3 N (b) 135.3 N
(c) 513.3 N (d) 351.3 N
@cbseinfinite
CIRCULAR MOTION 90
41. A light rigid rod of length L has a bob of mass M attached

to one of its end just like a simple pendulum. Speed at the
lowest point when it is inverted and released is
(a) 10 m/s (b) 7 m/s
(a) gL (b) 2gL (c) 4 m/s (d) 2 m/s

45. A simple pendulum is released from rest from the point A at
(c) 2 gL (d) 5gL an angle 30° with vertical. Then :
42. A ball of mass m is attached to one end of a light rod of

length l, the other end of which is hinged. What minimum
velocity v should be imparted to the ball downwards, so
that it can complete the circle.
(a) vertical component of velocity of the bob is always

less than its, horizontal component.
(a) g (b) 5g  (b) vertical component of velocity is less than, equal to or
more than the horizontal component on different
(c) 3g  (d) 2g  position.
43. A particle is given an initial speed u inside a smooth (c) vertical component of velocity is always more than
spherical shell of radius R = 1 m that it is just able to the horizontal component.
complete the circle. Acceleration of the particle when its
(d) acceleration of the bob is constant throughout.
velocity is vertical is
46. With what minimum speed v must a small ball should be
pushed inside a smooth vertical tube from a height h so that
it may reach the top of the tube ? Radius of the tube is R.
(a) g 10 (b) g
(c) g 2 (d) 3g 5
(a) 2 g h  2R  (b) R
44. A bob is suspended from a crane by a cable of length 2
 = 5 m. The crane and load are moving at a constant speed
v0. The crane is stopped by a bumper and the bob on the (c) g 5R  2h  (d) 2g 2R  h 
cable swings out an angle of 60°. The initial speed v0 is
(g = 9.8 m/s2)
@cbseinfinite
CIRCULAR MOTION 91
47. A block of mass m, slides down along the surface of a bowl 52. A body of mass 1 kg attached to an inextensible string of
(radius R) from the rim to the bottom. The velocity of the length 1 m, is made to rotate in vertical circle about the free
block at the bottom will be : end. When body is at its highest position, the tension in
the string is 10 N. Then
(a) R g (b) 2  R g
(a) the tension in the string remains same for any position
of the body
(c) 2R g (d) gR
(b) its velocity at highest position is 20 m/s
48. A simple pendulum 1 metre long has a bob of 10 kg. If the
pendulum swings from a horizontal position, the K.E. of (c) its velocity at its lowest position is 50 m/s
the bob, at the instant it passes through the lowest position
of its path is (d) tension in the string at the lowest position of the body
(a) 89 joule (b) 95 joule is 70 N
(c) 98 joule (d) 85 joule 53. A simple pendulum of length L and mass (bob) m is
oscillating in a vertical plane about a vertical line between
Multiple Choice Questions angular limits – and  . For displacement       ,
49. A particle is moving in a circular path of radius 1 m such the tension in the string and velocity of bob are T and v
that its speed is varying with time as v = 2t m/s, here t is in respectively. the following relations hold good under the
sec. given a is the net acceleration and v is the velocity
above condition.
of the particle. (a) T cos   mg
1
(a) At t  s, angle between velocity and ascceleration
(b) T – mg cos  
mv 2
2 L
45°
(c) tangential acceleration  g sin 
1 
(b) At t  s, a.v  2 2
(d) T  mg cos 
2
54. A small sphere of mass m suspended by a thread is first
1 
(c) At t  s, a.v  0 taken aside so that the thread forms the right angle with
2 the vertical and then released, then
  magnitude is independent of radial acceleration
(d) a.v (a) total acceleration of sphere as a function of  is
50. A particle moves in a circle of radius 20 cm. Its linear speed
g 1  3cos 2 
is givenn by v = 2t where t is in seconds and b in ms–1 then
(a) The radial acceleration at t = 2 s is 80 ms–2 (b) thread tension as a function of  is T  3mg cos 
(b) Tangential acceleration at t = 2 s is 2 ms –2
(c) the angle  between the thread and the vertical at
(c) Net acceleration at t = 2 s is greater than 80 ms–2 the moment when the total acceleration vector of
(d) Tangential acceleration remains constant in magnitude
the sphere is directed horizontally is cos –1 1 3
51. A ball tied to a string is swung in a vertical circle. The
physical quantities which do not remain constant. (d) the thread tension at the moment when the vertical
component of the sphere’s velocity is maximum will
(a) Speed of ball (b) centripetal force
be mg
(c) tension in string (d) earth’s pull on ball
@cbseinfinite
CIRCULAR MOTION 92
55. A horizontal cylinder is fixed, its inner surface is smooth Numeric Value Type Questions
and its radius is R. A small block is initially at the
56. A weightless thread can support tension up to 30 N. A
lowest point. The minimum velocity that should be given stone of mass 0.5 kg is tied to it and is revolved in a
to the block at the lowest point, so that it can cross the circular path of radius 2m in a vertical plane. If
point P is u, then;
g  10 m s 2 , then the maximum angular velocity of the
stone (in rad/sec) will be
57. A stone of mass 1 kg tied to a light inextensible string
10
of length L  m is whirled in a circular path of
S
radius L in a vertical plane. If the ratio of the maximum
tension in the string to the highest point of the circle
is 4:1. Then find the velocity of the stone (in m/s) at the
top most point.
(a) if the block moves anti-clockwise, then u  3.5gR 58. A simple pendulum oscillates in a vertical plane. When
it passes through the mean position, the tension in the
(b) if the block moves anti-clockwise, then u  3gR string is 3 times the weight of the pendulum bob. What
is the maximum angular displacement (in degrees) of the
pendulum of the string with respect to the vertical.
(c) if the block moves clockwise, then u  3.5gR
59. An automobile moving with a speed of 10m/s enters an
(d) if the block moves clockwise, u  5gR unbanked curve of radius r = 50m. If g  10m / s 2 , the
minimum value of  so as to safely negotiate the curve
is 1/x. Then x =
 20 
60. A particle moves along a circle of radius   with
 
constant tangential acceleration. If the velocity of the
particle is 80 m/s at the end of the second revolution
after motion has begun, the tangential acceleration
in ms 
2
is
@cbseinfinite
CIRCULAR MOTION 93

1. A stone tied to a string of length L is whirled in a vertical 4. A bob of mass M is suspended by a massless string
circle with the other end of the string at the centre. At a of length L. The horizontal velocity V at position A
certain instant of time, the stone is at its lowest position, is just sufficient to make it reach the point B. The
and has a speed u. The magnitude of the change in its angle  at which the speed of the bob is half of that
velocity as it reaches a position where the string is at A satisfies – (IIT-2008)
horizontal is : (1998)
(a) u 2  2 gL (b) 2 gL
(c) u 2  gL (d) 
2 u 2  gL 
2. A small block is shot into each of the four tracks as
shown below. Each of the tracks rises to the same
height. The speed with which the block enters the
track is the same in all cases. At the highest point of
the track, the normal reaction is maximum in –
(IIT-2001)
π π 
(a) (b) (a)  = (b) <<
4 4 2
π 3π
(c) (d) (c) << (d) <<
2 4
3. An insect crawls up a hemispherical surface very 5. A ball of mass (m) 0.5 kg is attached to the end of a string
slowly (see the figure). The coefficient of friction having length (L) 0.5 m. The ball is rotated on a horizonal
circuit path about vertical axis. The maximum tension that
1 the string can bear is 324 N. The maximum possible value
between the insect and the surface is . If the line
3 of angular velocity of ball (in rad/s) is : (2011)
joining the centre of the hemispherical surface to the
insect makes an angle  with the vertical, the maximum
possible value of  is given by –
(IIT-2001)
(a) 9 (b) 18
(a) cot  = 3 (b) tan  = 3 (c) 27 (d) 36
(c) sec  = 3 (d) cosec  = 3
@cbseinfinite
CIRCULAR MOTION 94
CIRCULAR MOTION

@cbseinfinite
CENTRE OF MASS, MOMENTUM AND COLLISION 95
07
CENTRE OF MASS, MOMENTUM AND
COLLISION
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
Chapter
CENTRE 07MOMENTUM AND COLLISION
OF MASS, 96
1. CENTRE OF MASS (b) For multiple point objects system
1.1 Concept of Centre of Mass
Definition: It is the weighted mean of the positions of

all the point objects with masses as their weight.
Example:
Fig. 7.1
then
M1 x1 + M 2 x 2 + ...... + M n x n
X cm = Fig. 7.3
M1 + M 2 ...... + M n
Consider three systems, where total mass and position
Similarly:
 of COM of all the particles in system 1, is M1 and
 ∑ M i ri
rcm =
∑ Mi
( x , y ) , in system 2 is
1 1 M 2 and ( x 2 , y 2 ) and in system
3 is M and ( x , y ) .
∑ Mi x i ∑ M i yi 3 3 3
=⇒ X cm = and Ycm
∑ Mi ∑ Mi Then COM of all particles in all combined systems is
M1 x 1 + M 2 x 2 + M 3 x 3
X cm = and
1.2 Location of COM M1 + M 2 + M 3
(a) For 2 point objects M1 y1 + M 2 y 2 + M 3 y3
Ycm =
M1 + M 2 + M 3
(c) Continuous Objects:
COM of continuous objects can be found with help of
integration. Presently we shall focus on the location of
COM for some continuous objects.
(i) Centre of Mass of uniform Rod
Suppose a rad of mass M and length L is lying along the
Fig. 7.2 x-axis with its one end at x = 0 and the other at x = L.
M2c Mass per unit length of he rad l = M/L
a=
M1 + M 2 Hence. Dm. (the mass of he element dx situated at
M1 c x = x is) = l dx
b=
M1 + M 2 The coordinates of the element dx are (x, 0, 0).
Therefore, x-coordinate of COM of the rod will be
NOTE:
COM will be towards the heavier mass.
Fig. 7.4
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
1 The surface mass density of the hemisphere will be

∫=xdm 1 L L
= ∫
=
0
x COM xdx M
L σ=
∫ λdx L 0 2 .
0 2πR 2
The y-coordinate of COM is The surface mass density of the ring element will be
dm
σ=
=
y COM
∫=
y dm
0 2πR cos θ ( Rdθ )
dm
dm M
=⇒σ =
Similarly, z COM = 0 2πR cos θ ( Rdθ ) 2πR 2
i.e., the coordinates of COM of the rod are (0, 0), i.e., it dm
lies at the centre of the rod. ⇒ =
M
cos θdθ
⇒= dm M cos θdθ
Centre of Mass of a Uniform Hollow Hemisphere of =
Form the figure we get that y R sin θ
Radius R.
Substitute the values of dm and y in (i).
Consider a hollow hemisphere of radius R as shown.
Due to symmetry, the x coordinate of the centre of mass y COM =
∫ M cos θdθ ( R sin θ )
of this surface will be zero. M
Let us find the y component of the centre of mass ⇒ y=

COM R ∫ cos θ sin θdθ
For this, consider a small element of the hemisphere in The limits of ⇒ y=
COM R ∫ cos θ sin θdθ will be form 0
a ring, as shown in the figure.
π
to .
2
sin 2θ
⇒ cos θ sin θ =
2
Substitute this value (ii).
π2
sin 2θ
⇒y R∫
= dθ
0
2
π2
R
⇒=
y COM
2 ∫ sin 2θdθ
0
R R π 
–  cos – cos ( 0 ) 
π2
Fig. 7.5 ⇒ y=
COM – cos 2=
θ0
2 2 2 
Let this ring make angle θ with the positive x-axis and R R
the width of this ring element subtend a small angle dθ ⇒ y COM
= – 1)
( 0 –= .
2 2
at the origin. Therefore, the centre of mass of the hollow hemisphere
The radius of this will be R cos θ and the width will be  R
is  0,  .
equal to Rdθ (from the arc-length formula).  2
Now, centre of mass of a system of small elements is
NOTE:
given as y COM =
∫ dmy …(1) Students can make a mistake is writing the limits of the
M angle θ. some students may consider the limits of θ
Here, y is the position of the ring element on the y-axis, from 0 to π.
dm is the mass of this element and M is the total mass Note that we are considering small ring elements of the
of he hemisphere. hemisphere. So the rings will start from the bottom of
To find dm, let us assume that the mass of the the hemisphere when the angle is zero. And the angle
hemisphere is uniformly distributed. Therefore, it will increase, we get the other rings. Therefore, at the ring
have a uniform surface mass density. π
element (at the top) the angle will be equal to . .
2
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
Centre of Mass of Solid Hemisphere Centre of Mass of a Uniform Solid Cone.

Let us consider the base of the cone to be R and height
is h.
We will consider a small circular cross section of radius
‘z’ and thickness ‘dr’ from a distance ‘r’ from the
vertex of the solid cone.
Fig. 7.6
We are considering a solid hemisphere of mass M and
has the radius R. The centre of mass will lie on the Fig. 7.7
vertical line passing through the centre of the Consider two triangles ABC and AOD. These triangles
hemisphere, the vertical line is also the normal to the are similar triangle, so we can write.
base. In order to find the centre of mass, we have to
AB BC
consider an element. =
AO OD
We are taking an elemental disc at a height h from the This can be expressed as.
base of the hemisphere. The mass of the elemental disc
r z
is dM and the width is dy. = …(1)
h R
The radius of the disc is r = R 2 – y 2 …(1) The volume of the small volume element considered is,
dV = πz 2 dr, which can be written in terms of r from
Mass of the disc =
dM ( 3M 2πR ) × ( πr dy )
3 2
…(2)
equation (1). So we get,
Substitute equal 91) in equal (2)
πR 2 r 2
dM − ( 3M 2πR ) × π ( R – y ) dy
3 2 2 dV = dr …(2)
h2
y- coordinate of Centre of mass, y c = (1 M ) ∫ ydM, Centre of mass for continuous mass distribution is given
by the formula,
Here y is the y-coordinate which represent the height of
1 πR 2 r 2
M∫
the elemental disc from the base. =
C.M rρ dr
h2
Putting the value of dM and calculating the centre of
πR 2 ρ
mass, we get ⇒ C.M =2 ∫ r 3 dr
yc (1 M ) ∫ y ( 3M 2R 3 ) × ( R 2 – y 2 ) dy
Mh
The limits of integration are from 0 to h, so
Integrating between the limits 0 → R πR 2 ρ 3
h
Mh 2 ∫0
C.M = r dr
yc
1 R 3M 2
M ∫0 R 3
( R – y2 ) dy × y
On integrating and applying the limits we get.
∫ (R – y 2 ) dy
3 R
πR 2 ρh 2
yc = 2
C.M =
2R 3 0
4M
3 2R ) ( R 2 ) – ( R 4 ) 
(= 2 4 4
3R 8
Substituting M as M =
ρ
ρV = 2 . we can write
y c = 3R 8 3πR h
3h
C.M =
4
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
   
 M r + M 2 r2 + M 3 r3 + ......M n rn
We know rcm = 1 1
M1 + M 2 + ......M n
Taking time derivatives both sides.

   
M v + M 2 v 2 + ......M n v n
Vcm = 1 1
M 1 + M 2 ......M n
Taking time derivations both sides

  
 M a + M 2 a 2 + ......M n a n
a cm = 1 1
M1 + M 2 + ......M n
2.2 Properties and Application of COM

(a) Entire mass is supposed to be concentrated at COM.
(b) If some force is applied on a free object, the body
does not rotate if line of action of force passes
through centre of mass.
   
M a + M 2 a 2 + ......M n a n
(c) We know A cm = 1 1
M1 + M 2 + ......M n
   
⇒ MA cm = M1a1 + M 2 a 2 + ......M n a n
By Newton’s 2nd law.

 
M1a1 = F1 and similarly for all objects, with terms having
the obvious meanings.
   
∴ ⇒ F1 + F2 + ......Fn =
MA cm
Fig. 7.8  
⇒ ∑ Fext =
MA cm
The above relation is very useful in solving complicated

2. MOTION OF CENTRE OF MASS
problems.
2.1 Kinematics of COM (d) We know
   
M1 v1 + M 2 v 2 + ......M n v n
Vcm =
M1 + M 2 + ......M n
   
⇒ Mv cm = M1 v1 + M 2 v 2 + ...... + M n v n
   
Psys = P1 + P2 + ...... + Pn
Total momentum of system of all particles is total mass


times Vcm .
Above relation helps us in applying momentum related

Fig. 7.9
equations in complex problems.
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
3. LINEAR MOMENTUM Impulse

Impulse in Physics is a term that is used to describe or
quantify the effect of force acting over time to change
3.1 Conservation of Linear Momentum
the momentum of an object.
According to the conservation of linear momentum, It is represented by the symbol J and usually expressed
“If the net external force acting on a system of bodies is in Newton-second or kg m/s.
zero, then the momentum of the system remains
constant.” Impulse Equation

Fnet = 0 Impulse is often stated to be the product of the average
 net force that acts on an object for a certain duration.
dp The equation for impulse is given as:
⇒ =
0
dt J = F ⋅ ∆t

⇒ p=constant
Hence. NOTE:
 We assume that force is constant over time.
mv = constant or
Impulse is a vector quantity like force and it also has
=
m v m=
1 1
v m=
2 2
v m=
3 3
v constant
n n direction.
NOTE:
Impulse-Momentum Theorem
We have to remember that the momentum of the system
The Impulse-Momentum theorem helps us establish the
is conserved and not that of the individual particles. The
relation between the two concepts.
momentum of the individual bodies in the system might
The theorem basically states that the change that is seen
increase or decrease according to the situation, but the
in the momentum of an object is equivalent to the
momentum of the system will always be conserved, as
amount of impulse exerted on it.
long as there is no external net force acting on it.
Basically, what students should understand is that
impulse is a measure of how much the momentum
3.2 Conservation of Linear Momentum Formula changes. Here we also get an alternative formula which
The principle of conservation of momentum states that is given as:
if two objects collide, then the total momentum before   
=J p 2 − p1
and after the collision will be the same if there is no
external force acting on the colliding objects. Where,
Conservation of linear momentum formula p1 = initial momentum
mathematically expresses the momentum of the system p2= final momentum
remains constant when the net external force is zero. With this formula, we can further clearly relate impulse
Initial momentum = Final momentum to the changes in the momentum of the object.
Pi = Pf
4. COLLISIONS
Linear Momentum Formula
Introduction to collisions:
Linear Momentum is mathematically expressed as:
  We define a collision as an isolated event in which two
p = mv or more colliding bodies exert relatively strong forces
 on each other for a relatively short time.
p is the linear momentum
 Two key rules of the collision game are :
v is the linear velocity
(i) Law of conservation of linear momentum.
m is the mass of the body (ii) Law of conservation of energy.
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
Types of Collision: where u1 , u 2 are velocities of two bodies before

Collisions between particles have been divided broadly collision, and v1 , v 2 are their respective velocities after
into two types:
collision.
1. Elastic collisions
2. Inelastic collisions
NOTE:
(i) For a perfectly elastic collision, relative velocity of
(a) Elastic collision:
separation after collision is equal to relative
A collision in which there is absolutely no loss of
velocity of approach before collision.
kinetic energy is called an elastic collision.
For example, collisions between atomic and subatomic ∴e=
1
particles are elastic collisions. (ii) For a perfectly inelastic collision, reactive velocity
A collision between two ivory balls can also be taken as of separation after collision = 0
an elastic collision. ∴e=0
The basic characteristics of an elastic collision are:
(iii) For all other collisions, e lies between 0 and 1, i.e.,
(i) The linear momentum is conserved,
0 < e <1.
(ii) Total energy of the system is conserved,
(iii) The kinetic energy is conserved.
4.2 Elastic Collision in One Dimension
It involves two bodies moving initially along the same
(b) Inelastic collision:
straight line, striking against each other without loss of
A collision in which there occurs some loss of kinetic
kinetic energy and continuing to move along the same
energy is called an inelastic collision.
straight line after collision.
As there is always some loss of kinetic energy in most
Suppose two balls A and B of masses m1 and m2 are
of the collisions, therefore, collisions we come across in
moving initially along the same straight line with
daily life are generally inelastic.
velocities u1 and u2 respectively, figure (a).
The basic characteristics of an inelastic collision are:
(i) The linear momentum is conserved.
(ii) Total energy is conserved.
(iii) Kinetic energy is NOT conserved. Obviously, a
part of kinetic energy is converted into some other
form of energy e.g., heat energy, sound energy etc.
(iv) Some or all the forces involved in an inelastic
collision may be non-conservative in nature.
4.1 Coefficient of Restitution or Coefficient of

Resilience
Coefficient of restitution or coefficient of resilience of a
collision is defined as the ratio of relative velocity of
separation after collision to the relative velocity of
Fig. 7.10
approach before collision.
When u1> u2, relative velocity of approach before
It is represented by ‘e’.
collision, = u1 – u2.Therefore, two balls collide, figure
relative velocity of separation (after collision)
e= (b).
relative velocity of approach (before collision)
Let the collision be perfectly elastic. After collision,
v 2 − v1 suppose v1 is the velocity of A and v2 is the velocity of
e= B along the same straight line, figure (c).
u1 − u 2
When v 2 > v1 , the bodies separate after collision.
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
Relative velocity of separation after collision = v 2 − v1 4.3 Calculation of velocities after collision
Linear momentum of the two balls before collision Velocity of A:
= m1 u1 + m 2 u 2 From (6), v 2 = u1 − u 2 + v1 ….(A)
Linear momentum of the two balls after collision Putting in eq.(1), we get
= m1 v1 + m 2 v 2
As linear momentum is conserved in an elastic m1 v1 + m 2 ( u1 − u 2 + v1 )= m1 u1 + m 2 u 2
collision, therefore
m1 v1 + m 2 u1 − m 2 u 2 + m 2 v1 = m1 u1 + m 2 u 2
m1 v1 + m 2 v 2 = m1 u1 + m 2 u 2 ... (1)
v1 ( m1 +m 2 ) = ( m1 -m 2 ) u1 +2m 2 u 2
or m2 ( v2 − u 2 =
) m1 ( u1 − v1 ) ... (2)
(m − m 2 ) u1 2m 2 u 2
Total K.E. of the two balls before collision =v1 1
+ … (7)
m1 + m 2 m1 + m 2
1 1
= m1 u12 + m 2 u 22 ...(3)
2 2
Total K.E. of the two balls after collision Velocity of B :
1 1 Put this value of v1 from eq.(7) into eq. (A)
= m1 v12 + m 2 v 22 ...(4)
2 2 (m − m 2 ) u1 2m 2 u 2
v 2 = u1 − u 2 + 1
+
As K.E. is also conserved in an elastic collision, m1 + m 2 m1 + m 2
therefore from,  m − m2   2m 2 
=
u1 1 + 1  + u2  − 1
 m1 + m 2   m1 + m 2 
1 1 1 1
m1 v12 + m 2 v 22 = m1 u12 + m 2 u 22
2 2 2 2
 m + m 2 + m1 − m 2   2m 2 − m1 − m 2 
m 2 ( v 22 − u=
= u1  1  + u2 
2)
m1 ( u12 − v12 )
1 2 1 
Or
2 2  m 1
+ m 2   m1 + m 2 
Or m 2 ( v 22 − u 22 =
) m1 ( u12 − v12 ) … (5) 2m1 u1 ( m 2 − m1 ) u 2
=v2 + … (8)
Dividing, (5) by (2) we get m1 + m 2 m1 + m 2
m 2 ( v 22 − u 22 ) m1 ( u12 − v12 )
=
m2 ( v2 − u 2 ) m1 ( u1 − v1 ) NOTE:
The expression for v 2 can be obtained from the
(v + u 2 )( v 2 − u 2 ) (u + v1 )( u1 − v1 )
Or
2
= 1
expression for v1 , by replacing m1 by m 2 and u1 by
(v 2
− u2 ) (u 1
− v1 )
u 2 . The reverse is also true.
Or v 2 +u 2 =u1 +v1
Or v 2 − v1 = u1 − u 2 … (6) Particular Cases

1. When masses of two bodies are equal,
Hence, in one dimensional elastic collision, relative
velocity of separation after collision is equal to relative =
i.e., m1
m=
2
m, say
velocity of approach before collision.
2 mu 2
v − v1 =
From (7), v1 = u 2 , i.e., velocity of A after
From (6), 2 =1 2m
u1 − u 2 collision = velocity of B before collision.
v 2 − v1 2 m1 u1
By definition, = e= 1 =
From (8), v2 = u1 , i.e., velocity of B after
u1 − u 2 2m1
Hence, the coefficient of restitution/resilience of a collision = velocity of A before collision.
perfectly elastic collision in one dimension is unity.
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
Hence, when two bodies of equal masses undergo a (c) When body B at rest has negligible mass,
perfectly elastic collision in one dimension, their
i.e., m 2 << m1 ; i.e., m 2 can be ignored compared to m1
velocities are just interchanged.
Putting m 2 = 0 ,
m1 2m1 u1
=
we get v1 = u1 u=
1
; v2 = 2u1
m1 m1
Hence, when a heavy body A undergoes an elastic

collision with a light body B at rest, the body A keeps
on moving with the same velocity of its own and the
body B starts moving with double the initial velocity of
A.
Fig. 7.11 4.4 Inelastic Collision in One Dimension

2. When the target body B is initially at rest, i.e.,
Figure shows two bodies of masses m1 and m 2
u2 = 0
moving with velocities, u1 and u 2 respectively, along a
From (7), v1 =
(m1
− m 2 ) u1
… (9) single axis. They collide involving some loss of kinetic
m1 + m 2
energy. Therefore, the collision is inelastic.
2m1 u1
From (8), v 2 = … (10) Let v1 and v 2 be the velocities of the two bodies after
m1 + m 2
collision.
Three cases arises further :
(a) When masses of two bodies are equal,

i.e., m1 = m 2
For, v1 = 0 Fig. 7.12
2m1 u1 As the two bodies form one system, which is closed and
=
From, v2 = u1
2m1 isolated, we can write the law of conservation of linear
i.e., body A comes to rest and body B starts moving momentum for the two body system as :
with the initial velocity of A. Obviously, in such a
collision, 100% K.E. of A is transferred to the body B. Total momentum before the collision (Pi) = Total
This is shown in figure.
momentum after the collision (Pf)
m1 u1 + m 2 u 2 = m1 v1 + m 2 v 2 ...(11)
(b) When body B at rest is very heavy, i.e., m 2 >> m1
, i.e., m1 can be ignored compared to m2 NOTE:

m The overhead arrows for vectors have been avoided as
Putting m1 = 0, we obtain v1 =
− 2 u1 =
− u1 ; v 2 =
0
m2 the collision is one dimensional and velocity
components along one axis are used.
Hence, when a light body A collides against a heavy
body B at rest; A rebounds with its own velocity and B If we know masses m1 , m 2 , initial velocities u1 , u 2 and
continues to be at rest. This is what happens when a ball one of the final velocities, we can calculate the other
rebounds to the same height from which it was thrown, final velocity from the equation.
on striking a floor.
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
Perfectly inelastic collision in one dimension Suppose m1 , m 2 are the masses of two bodies A and B
Figure shows perfectly inelastic collision between two moving initially along the X–axis with velocities
bodies of masses m1 and m 2 . The body of mass m 2 u1 and u 2 respectively.
happens to be initially at rest ( u 2 = 0 ) We refer to this When u1 > u 2 , the two bodies collide. After collision,
body as the target. The incoming body of mass m1, let the body A move with a velocity v1 at an angle θ
moving with initial velocity u1 is referred to as the with X–axis. Let the body B move with a velocity v 2 at
projectile. After the collision, the two bodies move
an angle φ with X–axis as shown in figure.
together with a common velocity V. The collision is
perfectly inelastic.
Fig. 7.13
As the total linear momentum of the system remains

constant, therefore Pi = Pf
i.e.,
m1 u 2 + m 2 u 2 =( m1 + m 2 ) V Fig. 7.14
As the collision is elastic, kinetic energy is conserved.
or m1=
u1 (m + m2 ) V
∴ Total K.E. after collision = Total K.E. before
1
(u 2
= 0) collision
1 1 1 1
m1 u1 Or m1 v12 + m 2 v 22 = m1 u12 + m 2 u 22 … (12)
Or V = 2 2 2 2
m1 + m 2
Or m1 v12 + m 2 v 22 = m1 u12 + m 2 u 22 … (13)
As linear momentum is conserved in elastic collision,
therefore, along the X–axis, total linear momentum
after collision = total linear momentum before collision.
4.5 Oblique Collisions: m1 v1 cos θ + m 2 v 2 cos
= φ m1 u1 + m 2 u 2 ... (14)
Elastic Collision in Two Dimensions of Oblique Now, along Y–axis, linear momentum before collision
Collision is zero (as both the bodies are moving along X–axis).
If the initial velocities and final velocities of both the And after collision, total linear momentum along Y–
bodies are along the same straight line, then it is called axis is
a one-dimensional collision or head-on collision. In (m v 1 1
sin θ − m 2 v 2 sin φ )
the case of small spherical bodies, this is possible if the
direction of travel of body 1 passes through the centre m1 v1 sin θ − m 2 v 2 sin φ = 0 ... (15)
of body 2. From three equations (13), (14) and (15), we have to
When two bodies travelling initially along the same calculate four variables v1 , v 2 , θ and φ , which is not
straight line collide without loss of kinetic energy and possible. We have, therefore, to measure experimentally
move along different directions in a plane after any one parameter, i.e., final velocities v1 , v 2 of A, B or
collision, the collision is said to be an elastic collision
their direction θ and π . The rest of the three
in two dimensions.
parameters can then be calculated from the three
equations.
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
When two bodies travelling initially along the same

straight line collide involving some loss of kinetic
energy, and move after collision, along different
directions in a plane, the collision is said to be inelastic
collision in two dimensions.
As the system is closed and isolated, the total linear
 
momentum of the system remains constant, i.e., Pf = Pi

Referring to figure and equating final momentum Pf ( )

along X–axis to initial momentum Pi ( ) along the same
axis, we get
m1 v1 cos θ + m 2 v 2 cos
= φ m1 u1 + m 2 u 2 ...(16)
Fig. 7.15
As initial momentum of the two bodies along Y–axis is
zero, therefore applying the law of conservation of After the collision at O, the two bodies stick to each
linear momentum along Y–axis, we get other and move with a common velocity V at an angle
=0 m1 v1 sin θ − m 2 v 2 sin φ ...(17) φ with X–axis as shown in figure.
As initial momentum of the two bodies along Y–axis is As the system is closed and isolated, the total linear
zero, therefore applying the law of conservation of momentum of the system remains constant.
linear momentum along Y–axis, we get Referring to figure, and equating initial momentum
=0 m1 v1 sin θ − m 2 v 2 sin φ along X–axis to final momentum along the same axis,
we get
Knowing m1 , m 2 ; u1 , u 2 ;θ and φ , we can calculate v1
m1 u1 cos θ + m 2 =
u2 (m 1
+ m 2 ) v cos φ . ..(18)
and v 2 from the equation.
Again, applying the law of conservation of linear
momentum along the y–axis, we get.
Perfectly inelastic collision in two dimensions
m1 u1 sin θ +=
0 (m 1
+ m 2 ) v sin φ ...(19)
Figure shows perfectly inelastic collision between two
bodies of masses m1 and m 2 . The body of mass m2 is Knowing m1 , m 2 ; u1 , u 2 and θ , we can calculate final
moving initially with velocity u 2 along X–axis. The velocity v and its direction, i.e., from equations (18) and
(19).
body of mass m1 is moving with velocity u1 at an angle
θ with X–axis as shown.
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
SUMMARY

1. CENTRE OF MASS Fnet = 0

Concept of Centre of Mass dp
⇒ =
0
Definition: It is the weighted mean of the positions of dt

all the point objects with masses as their weight. ⇒ p=constant
Hence.
Location of COM 
mv = constant
Impulse
Impulse in Physics is a term that is used to describe or
quantify the effect of force acting over time to change
the momentum of an object.
Impulse Equation
Impulse is often stated to be the product of the average
Then COM of all particles in all combined systems is net force that acts on an object for a certain duration.
M x + M 2 x 2 + M3 x 3 The equation for impulse is given as:
X cm = 1 1 and
M1 + M 2 + M 3 J = F ⋅ ∆t
M1 y1 + M 2 y 2 + M 3 y3
Ycm =
M1 + M 2 + M 3
4. COLLISIONS
Introduction to collisions:
2. MOTION OF CENTRE OF MASS We define a collision as an isolated event in which two
or more colliding bodies exert relatively strong forces
Kinematics of COM on each other for a relatively short time.
   
 M1 r1 + M 2 r2 + M 3 r3 + ......M n rn Two key rules of the collision game are :
We know rcm =
M1 + M 2 + ......M n (i) Law of conservation of linear momentum.
Taking time derivatives both sides. (ii) Law of conservation of energy.
   
M1 v1 + M 2 v 2 + ......M n v n
Vcm =
M 1 + M 2 ......M n
Types of Collision:
Taking time derivations both sides 1. Elastic collisions
  
 M1a1 + M 2 a 2 + ......M n a n
a cm = 2. Inelastic collisions
M1 + M 2 + ......M n
(a) Elastic collision:

3. LINEAR MOMENTUM A collision in which there is absolutely no loss of
kinetic energy is called an elastic collision.
Conservation of Linear Momentum
According to the conservation of linear momentum,
“If the net external force acting on a system of bodies is (b) Inelastic collision:
zero, then the momentum of the system remains A collision in which there occurs some loss of kinetic
constant.” energy is called an inelastic collision.
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
Coefficient of Restitution or Coefficient of Resilience Oblique collisions:

Coefficient of restitution or coefficient of resilience of a Elastic Collision in Two Dimensions of Oblique
collision is defined as the ratio of relative velocity of Collision
separation after collision to the relative velocity of If the initial velocities and final velocities of both the
approach before collision. bodies are along the same straight line, then it is called
It is represented by ‘e’. a one-dimensional collision or head-on collision. In
the case of small spherical bodies, this is possible if the
relative velocity of separation (after collision) direction of travel of body 1 passes through the centre
e=
relative velocity of approach (before collision) of body 2.
When two bodies travelling initially along the same
v 2 − v1 straight line collide without loss of kinetic energy and
e=
u1 − u 2 move along different directions in a plane after
collision, the collision is said to be an elastic collision
in two dimensions.
Calculation of velocities after collision
Velocity of A:
(m − m 2 ) u1 2m 2 u 2
=v1 1
+
m1 + m 2 m1 + m 2
Velocity of B :
2m1 u1 ( m 2 − m1 ) u 2
=v2 +
m1 + m 2 m1 + m 2
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
Solved Examples
Example - 1 4x  –2
A block of mass M is tied to one end of a massless 1
x
rope. The other end of the rope is in the hands of man 2
of mass 2M as shown. The block and the man are 1
resting on a rough wedge of mass M. The whole  Plank moves left by m
2
system is resting on a smooth horizontal surface. The
man starts walking towards right while holding the
Example - 2
rope in his hands. Pulley is massless and frictionless.
Find the displacement of the wedge when the block A heavy ring of mass m is clamped on the periphery of
meets the pulley? Assume wedge is sufficiently long a light circular disc. A small particle having equal
so that man does not fall down. mass is clamped at the centre of the disc. The system is
rotated in such a way that the centre moves in a circle
of radius r with a uniform speed v. We conclude that
an external force
mv 2
(a) must be acting on the central particle
r
2 mv 2
(a) 1/2 m towards right (b) must be acting on the central particle
r
(b) 1/2 m towards left
(c) the wedge does not move at all 2 mv 2
(c) must be acting on the system
(d) 1 m towards left r
Ans. (b) 2 mv 2
(d) must be acting on the ring.
Sol. r
Ans. (c)
Sol.
COM is ring in also on the centre of ring.

Displacement of plank = x  Let COM say that 2 m (mass) is placed at the centre
Displacement of small block w.r.t ground   x  2  of ring
Displacement w.r.t ground of. Man   x  2 

Fext = 0
x cm  0 Psystem  0
Mx  M(x  2)  2M(x  2) 2mv2
0  Fe 
M  m  2m r
4x  2  4  0
@cbseinfinite
Two vehicles of equal masses are moving with same A mass of 100 g strikes the wall with speed 5 m/s at an
speed v on two roads inclined at an angle θ. They angle as shown in figure and it rebounds with the same
speed. If the contact time is 2 × 10–3 s, what is the
collide inelastically at the junction and, then move
force applied on the mass by the wall?
together. The speed of the combination is :
(a) v cosθ (b) 2 v cosθ (a) 250 3 N to right
(b) 250 N to right
3 v 
(c) v cosθ (d) cos
2 2 2 (c) 250 3 N to left
Ans. (a) (d) 250 N to left
Ans. (c)
Sol. P system  conserved
Sol.
Pi  horizontal   Psystem (Horizontal)
Change in linear momentum of ball.

P  Pf  Pi
 mvcos   (mvcos )  2mv0   

P  Vsin 60 i  vcos 60 j m  Vsin 60 i  vcos 60 j 
 2mvcos   2mv0
 v0  v cos  
P  2vsin 60 i m 
 3
Example - 4  P  2mv   i
An object of mass 3 m splits into three equal  2 
fragments. Two fragments have velocities v ˆj and v î. |  P | 2mv

3
 v 3m
The velocity of the third fragment is : 2
 
(a) v ˆj  î  
(b) v î  ˆj F 
P vm 3
t

t
v  î  ˆj
 
(c)  v î  ˆj (d)
2
 1 
 F  (5)  
3
 10  2  10
3
Ans. (c) F  250 3 N to left Answer (c)

Sol. In explosion FExt  0
Example - 6
 Psystem  conserved
A body of mass 5 kg at rest explodes into three
Pi  Pf fragments with masses in the ratio 1 : 1 : 3. The
3 m(o)  mviˆ  mvjˆ  mV3 fragments with equal masses fly in mutually
perpendicular directions with speeds of 21 m/s. The
 
 V 3  –v î  ˆj velocity of the heaviest fragment will be :
(a) 11.5 m/s (b) 14.0 m/s
(c) 7.0 m/s (d) 9.87 m/s
Ans. (d)
@cbseinfinite
Sol. Pi  Pf
5(0)  1(21) i  1(21) j  3v3
 
3v3  21 i  j
v3  7(i  j)
v3  7 2  9.87 m / s
v02  M  m  v02  m 
Example – 7
(a)   (b)  
2g  M  2g  M  m 
A gun is attached to a trolley that can move freely on a
v02  M  v02  M  m 
smooth level road. The total mass of the gun and the (c)   (d)  
2g  M  m  2g  m 
trolley is 10 kg. A bullet of mass 0.005 kg is shot
horizontally to the right and is observed to have Ans. (c)
travelled a distance of 50 m in 0.2 s. In this interval of Sol.
time, the trolley has moved a distance:
(a) 2.5 cm (b) 6.0 cm
(c) 4 m (d) 4 cm
Ans. (a)
Sol.
After attaining max height the bob comes to rest w.r.t

trolley.
 Let us suppose that they both acquire the same
velocity
By momentum Conservation
Applying conservation of P before and after firing
Pi  Pf
Pi  Pf
mv0  (M  m)v
0  0.005v  10v0
mv0
v0  0.0005v v (i)
(M  m)
Velocity gained by bullet = u
By ME conservation
50 50
u2    250 m / s MEi  MEf
t 0.2
 v0  0.0005v 1 1
mv02  (M  m)v 2  mgh
2 2
v0  0.0005(250) = 0.125m/s
1 1 mv02
 Distance travelled by trolley in 0.2s is mv02  (M  m)  mgh
2 2 (M  m) 2
S  v0 t
1 2 mv02
St  0.0005(250)(0.2) v0   gh
2 2(M  m)
St  0.025 m  2.5 cm v 02  m 
1    gh
2  M m
Example – 8 v 02  m  m  m 
   gh
A bob of mass m is suspended by a string of length l 2  Mm 
from a train of mass M free to move on a smooth
v02 M
horizontal surface. The bob is given a horizontal h
2g(M  m)
velocity v0. The maximum height attained by the bob
is :
@cbseinfinite
Example – 9
(a) v, v1 and v2 must be parallel to each other.
A bullet hits a block kept at rest on a smooth
horizontal surface and gets embedded into it. Which of (b) None of the two of v, v1 and v2 should be parallel
the following does not change? to each other.
(a) linear momentum of the block (c) v1  v2 must be parallel to v .
(d) m1 v  m2 v2 must be parallel to v .
(b) kinetic energy of the block
Ans. (d)
(c) gravitational potential energy of the block  A 4
Sol. z x  zHe z2 y
4
(d) temperature of the block

From conservation of linear momentum
Ans. (c)
m 1
 m 2  v  m1 V1  m 2 V2
Sol.
Example – 12
At time t = 0, a particle P of mass m moving in a
circular path of radius R with a constant velocity V2 is
at a point (2R, 0) while another particle Q of same
mass moving along y-axis with constant velocity V1is
at origin (0, 0). Find linear momentum of particle P
Gravitational potential energy of block does not
relative to Q when their velocities are mutually
changes because no vertical displacement is possessed
perpendicular for first time :
by block.
P of block changes because net force is acting on it.
 KE block also changes.
Example – 10
A body at rest breaks into two pieces of equal masses.
The parts will move  V ^ ^
(a) m  V2 sin 2 t  i  V1 j
(a) in same direction  R  
(b) along different lines  V ^ ^
(b) m  V2 cos 2 t  i  V1 j
(c) in opposite directions with equal speeds   R  
(d) in opposite directions with unequal speeds  V ^ ^
(c) m  V1 sin 1 t  i  V2 j
Ans. (c)  R  
Sol. 0  P1  P2

(d) m V2 î  V1ˆj 
P2  P1 Ans. (a)
mV2  mV1 Sol.
 V2  V1
Example – 11
A nucleus moving with a velocity v emits anα–

particle. Let the velocities of the α–particle and the
remaining nucleus be v1 and v2 and their masses be
m1 and m2.
@cbseinfinite
V2 Example – 14
At time t, θ  t  t
R
A 50 g bullet moving with a velocity of 10ms–1 gets
VP,  VP  VR embedded into a 950g stationary body. The loss in KE
  
  V2 cos  j – V2 sin  i   V1 j
of the system will be
(a) 95% (b) 100%
So linear momentum of P with respect to Q (c) 5% (d) 50%
  
 m  V2 cos   V1  j  V2 sin  i 

Ans. (a)
Sol. m = 50g, M = 950g
V
When   2 .t u = 10m/s
R
relative linear momentum when V1  V2 1 mu
ki  mu 2 , mu  (M  m)V  v 
2 Mm
 V  
 m  V2 sin 2 .t  i  V1 j 1 m2 u 2
 R   So, k f 
2 Mm
1  m 
Example – 13 mu 2    1
ki  kf 2  M  m   100
loss =  100 
A body of mass M is hung by a long thread and a ki 1
mu 2
bullet of mass m hits it horizontally with a velocity v 2
and gets embedded in the body. Then for the body and M
the bullet system.  100
Mm
 Mm 
(a) momentum   v 
950
 100  95
Mm 1000
1 2
(b) kinetic energy  mv
2 Example – 15
(c) momentum 
 M  m  mv
M Two identical small balls, each of mass m, are
m2 v2 connected by a massless and inextensible string of
(d) kinetic energy 
2M  m length l and placed on a smooth horizontal xy plane.
An external agent starts pulling the string from its mid-
Ans. (d)
point along y-axis with velocity v0 as shown. When the
Sol.
separation between the two balls reduces to l/2, then
the speed of each ball will be
For (Body + bullet) system (a) 2v0

Conservation of momentum (b) v0
mv  0  (M  m)V (c) 0
v
mv 2
V (d) none of the above
Mm
Ans. (b)
1 1 m2 v 2
K  (M  m)v2 
2 2 Mm
Sol. Strings is inextensible, so
@cbseinfinite
v cos   v0 cos(90  ) R
vA  and vB = 0
sin  4
v  v0 mv A  mv B  mv1A  mv1B
cos 
R
 v0 tan   0  v1A  v1B
4
 v0 tan 60 R
v1B  v1A  (1)
 v0 3. 4
R
v1B  v1A  (0.2) ...(2)
4
On solving
R
v1B  0.6 
4
R
v1A  0.4 
4
R
So relative velocity after collision  0.2
4
2R
time when they collide again   40 s
R
0.2 
4
1 Example – 17
cos   4 
2
A girl throws a ball with initial velocity v at an
2
inclination of 45°. The ball strikes the smooth vertical
 2V   
2
θ = 60° ,speed of ball =
2
– v0 3 wall at a horizontal distance d from the girl and after
0
rebouncing return to her hand. What is the coefficient
= V0 (∴Vres= 2V) of restitution between wall and the ball?
gd
(a) v2 – gd (b)
Example – 16 v 2  gd
Two identical sphere A and B lie inside a smooth gd v2
(c) (d)
horizontal circular tube at the opposite ends of v2 gd
diameter. At t = 0, A is projected along the tube and at
Ans. (b)
the time t = 4 s, A collides with B. If the coefficient of
Sol.
restitution is 0.2, the second collision will occur after a
minimum time of :
(a) 40 s (b) 20 s
(c) 20 π s (d) 40 π s
Ans. (a)
Sol.
After rebouncing, the horizontal velocity component

becomes eu x while vertical component remains
unchanged.
d  u x t1 also d  eu x t 2
@cbseinfinite
d d mv 48
t1  t2   cos  t  mvf  m( v)  vf  v 
ux eu x 3t
since ball returns to her hand so, 4mv
cos   2mv
1
o  u y  t1  t 2   g  t1  t 2  3
2
2
3
2u y cos  
 t1  t 2  2
g
  30
d d 2u y
 
u x eu x g
Example – 19
 1  2u x u y
d 1    The balls of mass m0 and m are on a smooth horizontal
 e g
surface connected with a string. A bullet of mass m0
1
2v 2  2 moving with a speed V0 collides with ball of mass m0.
1
1  2  v As u = u = V Find the speed of ball of mass m, if coefficient of
x r
e gd gd 2
restitution is e :
1 v 2  gd m0 V0 1  e 
 m 0 V0 e
e gd (a) (b)
 m0 + m  2 m + m
0
gd
e 2 m0 V0 1  e   m – m V e
v  gd (c) (d)
0 0
m 0
+ m  m + m
0
Ans. (b)
Example – 18
Sol.
A sphere B of mass m is moving towards a bigger
fixed sphere A with velocity V on a smooth horizontal
surface, as shown. Sphere B moves and returns back
after making an elastic collision and being in contact Ball of mas m 0 sticks to block m 0 so e  0.
with sphere A for a very short time Δt. The sphere A
According principle of momentum conservation
 m V 48 
exerts a contact force of   . Find the angle m0 V0  mV   m0  m0  V
 3 t  Let v be the final velocity of the system.
between contact force and the horizontal at the point of
m0 V0
contact : V
m  2m0
In the option put e  0
Example – 20
(a) 45° (b) 30°
The velocity of centre of mass of the system after all
(c) 60° (d) Zero
collisions have taken place, in the previous problem
Ans. (b)
will be:
Sol.
mu
(a) (b) Nu
N  m +1
uN
(c) (d) Zero
 N +1
Ans. (d)
mv 48 Sol. Since there is no external force.
Impulse   cos  t  P
3t
So velocity of com of N balls = 0.
@cbseinfinite
Body A of mass m and B of mass 3 m move towards A smooth sphere of mass M moving with velocity u
each other with velocities V and 2V respectively from directly collides elastically with another sphere of
the positions as shown, along a smooth horizontal mass m at rest. After collision their final velocities are
circular track of radius r. After the first elastic V and v respectively. The value of v is :
collision, they will collide again after the time : 2u M 2um
(a) (b)
m M
2u 2u
(c) (d)
m M
1 1
M m
Ans. (c)
Sol.
2r r
(a) (b)
V 2V
Mu  m  0  MV  mv
r 2r
(c) (d) MV  mv  mu .(1)
V 3V
Ans. (d) v–V=u
V=v–u ...(2)
Sol.
2u
on solving v 
m
1
M
Example – 23
The bob A or a simple pendulum is released when the
string makes an angle of 45° with the vertical. It hits
VA= V another bob B of the same material and same mass
VB = 2V kept at rest on a table. If the collision is elastic :
3v
v rel  3v, Wrel 
r

r
r
rel  w rel  t  t  2 
3v 6v
Let the collision take place angle θ with the vertical
So   w A  t
v r r
So,     , (a) both A and B rise to the same height
r 6v 6
Now apply conservation of momentum and laws of (b) both A and B come to rest at B
restitution we get velocity. After elastic collision (c) both A and B move with the same velocity of A
1v 2v (d) A comes to rest and B moves with the velocity of A
v 'A  , v'B 
r r Ans. (d)
3v
So new vrel  Sol. Since collision is elastic, so velocity of A and B gets
r
interchanged.
2 2r
So they will collide again t  
3v r 3v
@cbseinfinite
Example – 24 Sol.
A body of mass M1 collides elastically with another

body of mass M2 at rest. There is maximum transfer of
energy when:
(a) M1> M2
(b) M1< M2
(c) M1 = M2 After inelastic collision the both block with move
(d) same for all values of M1 and M2 together and combined velocity is given by
rest
Ans. (c) u0 u
2kg 4kg  6kg
Sol. For maximum transfer of energy. M1  M 2 ,
2u0  6u
(velocity interchanged)
u0
2u u
Velocity of after collision v 2  3
M
1 2 Let x be compression in the spring
M4
Wext – U  WNC  K
2
1  2uM1  Wext  0
so ke  M2  
2  M1  m 2   1  1
mg(x)   0   mu 2   kx 2 ...(1)
2M12 M 2 u 2 dk  2  2
k , putting 0
 M1  M 2  dM1 m  4  2  6 kg 

u  ...(2)
We get M1  M 2   0.5, u  0 
3 
Solving (1) and (2), we get x = 25 cm
Example – 25
Figure shows two blocks of masses 2 kg and 4 kg Example –26
resting on a horizontal surface and a spring of spring A ball falls on an inclined plane as shown. The ball is
constant k = 100 N/m attached to a fixed wall. All the dropped from height h. Coefficient of restitution for
three lie along the same line. The space between the collision is e and the surface is frictionless. If h 1, h2 ...
two blocks is smooth, while the space between the 4 hn are height of h projectiles and t1, t2, ...tn are their
kg block and wall is rough (μ = 0.5). If the 2 kg block corresponding time of flights, then
is given a velocity of 10 m/s, then the maximum
compression of the spring is (collision between the two
blocks is perfectly inelastic).
i. t1, t2, ...,tn form a geometric progression of

common ratio e.
ii. h1> h2> h3> ... >hn.
iii. t1, t2, ..., tn form a geometric progression of
common ratio e2.
iv. h1, h2, ..., h3 form a geometric progression of
common ratio e.
Evaluate the above statement and choose the
(a) 25 cm (b) 10 cm correct option from the following
(c) 15 cm (d) 5 cm (a) Statements i, ii are true and iii, iv are false
Ans. (a) (b) Statements i, ii are false and iii, iv are true
(c) All statements are true
(d) All statements are false
@cbseinfinite
Ans. (a) Ans. (c)

Sol. After the first collision, velocity  to the inclined
r
Sol. According to principle of conservation of momentum
plane becomes ev cos , then time of height 4mv  3mv1  4mv2
 2u y  4v  3v1  4v2 ....(1)
T  
 g  v1  v 2
e 1
2ev 2
2e v 3
2e v v
t1  , t2  , t3 
g g g v2  v1  v....(ii)
e2 v 2 cos  e4 v 2 cos 2  From (i)
h1  , h2  , 4v  3v1  4  v1  v 
2 g cos  2 g cos 
From A to B 4v  3v1  4v1  4v
1 8v
mu 2  mgR  u  2gr,  v1
2 7
The declination of ball A  ug Let v  be the velocity of block and ball when ball is at
maximum height
Passage - 1 8v
Using the following passage, solve Example. 27 to 28 3m   7mv
7
A box B of mass M having a frictionless spherical 24
empty space of radius R (as shown) is placed on a v  v
49
smooth horizontal floor. A ball C and mass m is placed According to energy Conservation
at the bottom position of the spherical space of box B.
1 64 1 242
A ball A of mass M0 strikes elastically with the box  3m  v 2   7m  2 v 2  mgh
2 49 2 49
with velocity V while moving on the same floor.
On solving
1.1v2
h
g
Passage – 2
Using the following passage, solve Example 29 and 30
A ball of mass m moving with velocity v strikes the
bob of a pendulum at rest. The mass of the bob is also
Example – 27 m.
If M = 2m and M0 = 3m find the height upto which ball

Example – 29
C inside the box will rise after the impact :
(a) Zero (b) V2/4g If the collision is perfectly inelastic, the height to
2
(c) V /2g (d) V2/g which the bob will rise is given by
Ans. (a) u2 u2
(a) (b)
Sol. Zero, as due to frictionless surface m will continue 8g 4g
moving horizontally u2 u2
(c) (d)
2g g
Example – 28 Ans. (a)
If M = 3m and M0 = 4 m find the height upto which Sol. According to principle of conservation of momentum
ball C inside the box will rise after the impact mu  0  2mv1
(approximately): u
v1 
(a) v2/ 4g (b) v2/ 2g 2
According to energy conservation
(c) v2/ g (d) Zero
@cbseinfinite
k  given in PE Ans. (c)

1
 2mv12  2mgh velocity of seperation v 'sin 
2 Sol. e  
velocity of approach u cos 
u2
m  2mgh
4 Perpendicular to inclined plane velocity remains
u2 constant
h
8g
Example – 30
If the collision is elastic, the height to which the bob
will rise will be
u2 u2 s
(a) (b)
8g 2g v cos   u sin 
2 2
2u u
(c) (d) u sin 
g g v 
cos 
Ans. (b)
Sol. If the collision is elastic e  1, mass of bob is same so u sin  sin  sin 2 
e    tan 2 
velocities is interchanged. cos  u cos  cos  2
Example – 32
If the collision is elastic, what is the impulse on the
According to energy conservation loss in KE  gain in
ball?
PE
1 (a) 2m 2gh tan  (b) 2m 2gh sin 
mu 2  mgh
2
u2 (c) 2m 2gh cot  (d) 2m 2gh cos 
h
2g Ans. (d)
Passage – 3 Sol. If collision is elastic  e  1

Using the following passage, solve Example 31 and 32
V1 sin  1
A smooth ball is dropped from height h on a smooth incline 1 , V sin   u sin 
u cos 
as shown. After collision the velocity of the ball is directed
horizontally. Impulse  p  pf  pi
 m  u cos    V'sin  
  u cos   u cos  m
 (2u cos )m
I  2m 2gh cos 
Example – 31
Find the coefficient of restitution.
(a) cot2θ (b) sin2θ
(c) tan2θ (d) cos2θ
@cbseinfinite
Assertion-Reason Type Example: Example – 36

(a) Both assertion and reason are true and reason is the
correct explanation for assertion. . A cavity of radius b is made in a disc of mass M,
(b) Both assertion and reason are true but reason is not radius R, as shown in Fig. Find the new COM:
the correct explanation for assertion.
(c) Assertion is true and reason is false.
(d) Assertion is false and reason is true.
Example – 33
Statement–1: In a particular frame of reference, law
of conservation of momentum holds good.
Statement–2: Momentum of a body will depend upon
the frame of reference. –b 2 –b 2
(a) (b)
(a) A (b) B Rb R–b
(c) C (d) D –R –R
(c) (d)
Ans. (d) 2R  b 3R  b
Sol. Velocity is frame dependent and have momentum. Ans. (a)
Sol. Let the mass per unit area of ring be 
Example – 34 First we need to calculate the mass removed:
b2
m    Area Re moved     b 2   2 
b 2   M 2
Statement–1: Internal forces can change the M
momentum of the system. R R
Statement–2: Internal forces can change the kinetic COM of the part cut is at (R–b) along X-axis.
energy of the system. New center of mass is given by:
(a) A (b) B b2
(c) C (d) D M  0 – m  R – b  –M R – b
x   R2
Ans. (d) M–m b2
M–M 2
dp R
Sol. Fext  0   0  p  constant –b 2  R – b  –b 2
dt  
Internal force can change the kinetic energy of system. R 2 – b2 Rb
Consider two charged particles separated by some
distance and released. Example – 37
From the circular disc of radius 4R two small discs of
Example – 35 radius R are cut off. The centre of mass of the new
Statement – 1: We apply the principle of conservation structure will be at
of linear momentum in collision and explosion
phenomena even in the presence of external forces.
Statement – 2: During collision and explosion net
impulse on the system should be zero to apply the
principle of conservation of linear momentum.
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
Ans. (c)
R R R R
(a) î  ˆj (b) –iˆ  ˆj
Sol. Fext  0  P system  constant 5 5 5 5
R R
P  Impulse  Fdt  0 (c) –iˆ – ˆj (d) None of these
5 5
@cbseinfinite
Ans. (d) (The negative sign indicates that this portion has been
Sol. Two small discs which are taken out can be removed from the original disc.)
considered as having negative area for calculation of Let x be the distance through which the centre of
CM. mass of the remaining portion shifts from point O.
A1    4R  ;
2 The relation between the centres of masses of two
masses is given as:
A2  –   R  ; x   m1r1  m2 r2   m1  m2 
2
A3  –   R  ;   M  0 –  M 4   R 2  M – M 4   –R6
2
Position vector for the COM of disc of radius (The negative sign indicates that the centre of mass
4R  r1 ; gets shifted toward the left of point O)
Position vector for the COM of disc-1 of radius
R  r2 ;
Position vector for the COM of disc-2 of radius
R  r3 ;
 A1 r1  A 2 r2  A3 r3
rcm  ;
A1  A 2  A3
r1  0iˆ  0j;
ˆ Example – 39
r ˆ ˆ
2  3Ri  0j ;
A man of mass m is standing on a platform of mass
 M kept on smooth ice. If the man starts moving on
Substituting r1 , r2 , r3 in rcm we get,
the platform with a speed v relative to the platform,
  4R   0 –   R   3Riˆ –   R   3Rjˆ
2 2 2

with what velocity relative to the ice does the
r 
  4R  –   R  –   R  platform recoil?
cm 2 2 2
Sol. Consider the situation shown is figure. Suppose the

3R ˆ 3R ˆ
 i– j man moves at a speed w towards right and the
14 14 platform recoils at a speed V towards left, both
relative to the ice. Hence, the speed of the man
Example – 38 relative to the platform is V + w. By the equation,
V  w  v, or w  y – Y …(i)
From a uniform disc of radius r, a circular hole of
Taking the platform and the man to be the system,
radius R/2 is cut out. The centre of the hole is at R/2
there is no external horizontal force on the system.
from the centre of the original disc. Locate the centre
The linear momentum of the system remains
of gravity of the resulting flat body.
constant. Initially both the man and the platform were
Sol. Let mass per unit area of the original disc   at rest. Thus,
Thus mass of original disc  M  R 2 0  MV – mw or, MV  m  v – V  [Using (i)]
R mv
Radius of smaller disc  . or, V  .
2 Mm
2
R M
Thus mass of the smaller disc     
2 4
After the smaller disc has been cut from the original,
the remaining portion is considered to be a system of
two masses. The two masses are:
M(concentrated at O), and –M(=M/4) concentrated at
‘O’
@cbseinfinite
. A person P of mass 50 kg stands at the middle of a In a free space a rifle of mass M shoots a bullet of
boat of mass 100 kg moving at a constant velocity 10 mass m at a stationary block of mass M distance D
m/s with no friction between water and boat and also away from it. When the bullet has moved through a
the engine of the boat is shut off. With what velocity distance d towards the block the centre of mass of the
(relative to the boat surface) should the person move bullet-block system is at a distance of :
so that the boat comes to rest. Neglect friction
D – d m
between water and boat. (a) from the block
Mm
md  MD
(b) from the rifle
Mm
2dm  DM
(c) from the rifle
Mm
M
(a) 30 m/s towards right (b) 20 m/s towards right (d)  D – d  from the bullet
Mm
(c) 30 m/s towards left (d) 20 m/s towards left
Ans. (a, b, d)
Ans. (a)
Sol.
Sol. Momentum of the system remains conserved as no
external force is acting on the system in horizontal
direction   50  10010  50  V  100  0
 V  30 m s towards right, as boat is at rest
VPboat  30m s
m D – d
Example – 41 As; Mx  m  D – d – x  x  from the block
Mm
Two men of masses 80 kg and 60 kg are standing on D – d M
And x   D – d – x  from the bullet
a wood plank of mass 100 kg, that has been placed Mm
over a smooth surface. If both the men start moving
toward each other with speeds 1 m/s and 2 m/s
Example – 43
respectively then find the velocity of the plank by
which it starts moving. Each of the blocks shown in figure has mass 1 kg.
The rear block moves with a speed of 2 m/s towards
the front block kept at rest. The spring attached to the
front block is light and has a spring constant 50N/m.
Find the maximum compression of he spring.
Assume, on a friction less surface
Sol. Applying momentum conservation; Sol. Maximum compression will take place when the
blocks move with equal velocity. As no net external
801  60  –2  80  60  100 v horizontal force acts on the system of he two blocks,
–40 1 the total linear momentum will remain constant. If V
v  – m sec.
240 6 is the common speed at maximum compression, we
have, 1kg  2m s   1kg  V  1kg  V or ,
V  1m s.
@cbseinfinite
1 Sol. v = 1 is velocity relative the trolley so if trolley is

Initial kinetic energy  1kg  2 m s   2J.
2
2 moving at V opposite to the man then velocity of man

is ground frame will be v –V
1
Final kinetic energy  1kg 1m s   1J
2
Note: As initially the trolley and man were at rest, So
2
the velocity of center of mass should be zero all the
The kinetic energy lost is stored as the elastic energy
time unitl
in the spring.
Applied by some external force.
1
Hence,  50 N m  x 2  2J –1J  1J or x  0.2m. 80  v – V   320   –V 
2 So we should get 0
80  320
(negative V because towards left.)
Example – 44
m1  V1   m 2   V2 
From the formula Vcm 
The two blocks A and B or same mass connected to a m1  m 2
spring and placed on a smooth surface. They are
given velocities (as shown in the figure) when the Putting v = 1 and on solving we get V = 0.2 m/s $
spring is in its natural length: towards left.
Displacement of man relative to ground will be time
× (v – V) = 4× 0.8= 3.2 meter
Example – 46
(a) The maximum velocity of B will be 10 m/s
A child is standing at one end of a long trolley
(b) The maximum velocity of B will be greater than
moving with a speed v on a smooth horizontal track.
10 m/s
If the child starts running towards the other end of
(c) The spring will have maximum extension when A trolley with a speed u. The centre of mass of the
and B both stop system (trolley + child) will move with a speed:
(d) The spring will have maximum extension when (a) Zero (b) v + u
both move towards left.
(c) v (d) v – u
Sol. Suppose B moves with a velocity more than 10 m/s a
should move at a velocity greater than 5 m/s and Ans. (c)
increase the overall energy which is not possible Sol. the boy is moving the net external force = o
since there is no external force acting on the system. ma 
com  Fexternal
Hence B should move with a maximum velocity 10
m/s. Also both A and B can never stop so as to keep a
com  0
the momentum constant. So com will not move; it moves with V only.
Also both A and B can never move towards left
simultaneously for momentum remaining conserved.
Hence only (a) is correct. Example – 47
A man of 50 kg is standing at one end on a boat of
length 25 m and mass 200 kg. If he starts running and
Example – 45
when he reaches the other end, he has a velocity
A man m = 80kg is standing on a trolley of mass 320 2ms –1 with respect to the boat. The final velocity of
kg on a smooth surface. If man starts walking on the boat is (in ms –1 )
trolley along rails at a speed of 1 m/s, then after 4 sec,
his displacement relative to ground is 2 2
(a) (b)
(a) 4 m (b) 4.8 m 5 3
(c) 3.2 m (d) 6 m 8 8

(c) (d)
Ans. (c) 5 3
Ans. (a)
@cbseinfinite
Sol. Let final velocity of boat be v. Apply conservation of momentum ln direction
So velocity of man with respect to ground is 2 + v o  p – p3 cos   p3 cos  ...(1)
As Center of mass of system should remain at rest, in Apply conservation of momentum in y direction
absence of external force,
0  3p – p3 sin   p3 sin  3p …(2)
2
50  2  v   200v  0  v  – m s
5 Squaring and adding (1) and (2) p32  p 2  3p 2
Negative sign indicates that the velocity of boat is in  p3  2p
opposite direction to that of the man.
Now diving (1) from (2) we get tan   3    60
Angle mode by p 3 with p 2
Example – 48
  90  
An object initially at rest explodes into three
fragments A, B and C. The momentum of A is piˆ  30  60
  150
and that of B is 3pjˆ where p is a +ve number. The
momentum of C will be?
 
(a) 1  3 p in a direction making angle 120° with
Example – 49
that of A A bomb of mass 12 kg at rest explodes into two piece

of masses 4 kg and 8 kg. The velocity of 8 kg mass is
 
(b) 1  3 p in a direction making angle 150° with 6 m/s. The kinetic energy of the other mass is?
that of B (a) 48 J (b) 32 J
(c) 2p in a direction making angle 150° with that of A (c) 24 J (d) 288 J
(d) 2p in a direction making angle 150° with that of B Ans. (d)
Ans. Sol. As the initial momentum of bomb was zero, therefore
after explosion two parts should posses numerically
equal momentum
i.e., mA vA  mB vB  4  VA  8  6  vA  12 m s
1
 Kinetic energy of other mass A.  mA v2A
2
1
  4 12   288J.
2
Let the fragments C moves with momentum p 3

making an angle  with negative x axis initial
momentum of the bomb is zero i.e., p1  0
@cbseinfinite

Centre of Mass (a) 1 m from O on OE (b) 2 m from O on OF
1. The position of centre of mass of a system consisting
(c) 2 m from O on OG (d) 2 m from O on OH
of two particles of masses m1 and m 2 separated by a
6. Three rods of the same mass are placed as shown in
distance L apart, from m1 will be :
the figure. What will be the co-ordinate of centre of
m1L m2 L mass of the system ?
(a) (b)
m1 + m 2 m1 + m 2
m2 L L
(c) (d)
m1 2
2. A system consists of mass M and m (<< M). The
centre of mass of the system is :
(a) at the middle
(b) nearer to M
a a  a a 
(c) nearer to m (a)  ,  (b)  , 
2 2  2 2
(d) at the position of larger mass
 2a 2a  a a
3. Four identical sphere each of radius 10 cm and mass 1 (c)  ,  (d)  , 
 3 3  3 3
kg are placed on a horizontal surface touching one
another so that their centres are located at the corners 7. =
Four particles of mass =
m1 2m, m 2 4m, m3 = m and
of square of side 20 cm. What is the distance of their m 4 are placed at four corners of a square. What
centre of mass from centre of either sphere ?
should be the value of m 4 so that the cente of mass of
(a) 5 cm (b) 10 cm
all the four particles are exactly at the centre of the
(c) 20 cm (d) none of these square?
4. Four bodies of masses 2,3,5 and 8 kg are placed at the (a) 2 m (b) 8 m
four corners of a square of side 2 m. The position of
CM will be:
8. All the particles of a body are situated at a distance R
 8 13   7 11  from the origin. The distance of centre of mass of the
(a)  ,  (b)  , 
9 9  9 9  body from the origin is :
 11 13   11 8  (a) = R (b) ≤ R
(c)  ,  (d)  , 
9 9  9 9 (c) > R (d) ≥ R
5. Masses of 2 kg each are placed at the corners B and A
of a rectangular plate ABCD as shown in the figure. A
9. A uniform metal disc of radius R is taken and out of it,
mass of 8 kg to be placed on the plate so that the
a disc of diameter R is cut-off from the end. The centre
centre of mass of the system should be at the centre O.
of mass of the remaining part will be :
Then the mass should be placed at :
4m (a) R/4 from the centre
B H C (b) R/3 from the centre
(2 kg)
(c) R/5 from the centre
O
F E (d) R/6 from the centre
(2 kg)
A G D
@cbseinfinite
10. A uniform square plate ABCD has mass of 10 kg. If 13. A uniform circular disc of radius a is taken. A circular
two points masses of 5 kg each are placed at the portion of radius b has been removed from its as
corners C and D as shown in the adjoining figure, then shown in the figure. If the centre of hole is at a
the centre of mass shifts to the mid-point of : distance c from the centre of the disc, the distance x 2
of the centre of mass of the remaining part from the
initial centre of mass O is given by :
(a) OH (b) DH
(c) OG (d) OF πb 2 cb 2
(a) (b)
11. A square plate of side 20 cm has uniform thickness (a 2
−c 2
) (a 2
− b2 )
and density. A circular part of diameter 8 cm is cut out πc 2 ca 2
(c) (d)
symmetrically as shown in figure. The position of
centre of mass of the remaining portion is :
(a 2
− b2 ) (c 2
− b2 )
14. Three bricks each of length L and mass M are
arranged, as shown from the wall. The distance of the
 11 
centre of mass of the system from the wall is   L .
 3n 
O O1
Find the value of n.
(a) at O1
(b) at O
(c) 0.54 cm from O on the left hand side
12. A uniform metal rod of length 1 m is bent at 90° so as
to form two arms of equal length. The centre of mass
of this bent rod is : 15. A ball of mass 3 M is rolling on a smooth flat
table towards another ball of mass 2M at rest with a
 1 
(a) on the bisector of the angle,   m from vertex constant velocity 5 m/s. When the two balls are
 2 separated by a distance 6m, the position of center of
 1  mass from the mass 3 M is (in m)
(b) on the bisector of the angle,   m from vertex
2 2
Motion of Centre of Mass
1
(c) on the bisector of the angle,   m from vertex 16. Two blocks of mass 10 kg and 4 kg are connected by a
2
spring of negligible mass and placed on a frictionless
 1  horizontal surface. An impulse gives a velocity of 14
(d) on the bisector of the angle,   m from vertex
4 2 m/s to the heavier block in the direction of the lighter
block. The velocity of the centre of mass is :
(a) 30 m/s (b) 20 m/s
(c) 10 m/s (d) 5 m/s
@cbseinfinite
17. Two balls are thrown simultaneously in air. The 23. Two particles A and B initially at rest, move towards
acceleration of the centre of mass of the two balls each other under a mutual force of attraction. At the
while in air : instant when the speed of A is v and the speed of B is
(a) depends on the direction of the motion of the balls 2v, the speed of centre of mass of the system is :
(b) depends on the masses of the two balls (a) zero (b) v
(c) depends on the speeds of the two balls (c) 1.5 v (d) 3 v
(d) is equal to g 24. A meter stick is placed vertically at the origin on a
18. Consider a system of two identical particles. One of frictionless surface. A gentle push in +x direction is
the particles is at rest and the other has an acceleration given to the top most point of the rod, when it has
 fallen completely x coordinate of centre of rod is at :
a . The centre of mass has an acceleration.
1 (a) origin (b) – 0.5 m
(a) zero (b) a (c) – 1 m (d) + 0.5 m
2
  25. The figure shows the positions and velocities
(c) a (d) 2 a
of two particles at t=0 s. If the particle move under the
19. Two particles of equal mass have co-ordinates
mutual force of attraction, then the position of center
(2m, 4m, 6m) and (6m, 2m, 8m). Of these one particle
of mass at t = 1 s is given as xcm = n m, where n is:

( )
has a velocity v = 2 î m/s and another particle has
1

( )
velocity v 2 = 2 ˆj m/s at time t = 0. The coordinate of
their centre of mass at time t = 1s will be :
(a) (4m, 4m, 7m) (b) (5m, 4m, 7m)
(c) (2m, 4m, 6m) (d) (4m, 5m, 4m) 26. A man of mass 80 kg riding on a small cart of mass 40
20. Two particles are shown in the figure. At t = 0 a kg which is rolling along a level floor at a speed of 2
constant force F = 6N starts acting on the 3 kg mass. m/s. He is running on the cart so that his velocity
Find the velocity of the centre of mass of these relative to the cart is 3 m/s in the direction opposite to
particles at t = 5 s. the motion of cart. What is the speed of the centre of
mass of the system?
27. Two masses of 10 kg and 20 kg are placed at a
distance of 15 m from each other. Find the distance (in
(a) 5 m/s (b) 4 m/s meter) of center of mass from 10 kg mass:
(c) 6 m/s (d) 3 m/s
21. Two bodies A and B are attracted towards each other Linear Momentum
due to gravitation. Given that A is much heavier than 28. Two bodies A and B having masses in the ratio 3 : 1
B, which of the following correctly describes the possess the same kinetic energy. The ratio of linear
motion of the centre of mass of the bodies ? momentum of A to B is :
(a) It moves towards A (a) 1 : 3 (b) 3 : 1
(b) It remains at rest (c) 1 : 3 (d) 3:1
(c) It moves towards B
29. If the linear momentum is increased by 5%, the kinetic
(d) It moves perpendicular to the line joining the energy will increase by:
particles
(a) 50% (b) 100%
22. Two particles of masses 4 kg and 8 kg are separated by
(c) 125% (d) 10%
a distance of 12 m. If they are moving towards each
other under the influence of a mutual force of 30. A 4 kg mass and a 1 kg mass are moving with equal
attraction, then the two particles will meet each other kinetic energies. The ratio of their momenta is
at a distance of : (a) 1 : 2 (b) 1 : 1
(a) 6 m from 8 kg mass (b) 2 m from 8 kg mass (c) 2 : 1 (d) 4 : 1
(c) 4 m from 8 kg mass (d) 8 m from 8 kg mass
@cbseinfinite
31. A block of mass 2 kg collides with a horizontal 38. A mass m with velocity u strikes a wall normally and
–1 returns with the same speed. What is magnitude of the
massless spring of force constant 2 Nm . The block
change in momentum of the body when it returns :
compresses the spring 4 m from the rest position.
Speed of the block at the instant of collision is (a) 4 mu (b) mu
(a) 16 m/s (b) 4 m/s (c) 2 mu (d) zero
(c) 8 m/s (d) 12 m/s 39. One projectile moving with velocity v in space, gets
burst into 2 parts of masses in the ratio 1 : 3. The
32. A shell of mass m moving with velocity v suddenly
smaller part becomes stationary. What is the velocity
breaks into 2 pieces. The part having mass m/4
of the other part ?
remains stationary. The velocity of other part will be
(a) 4 v (b) v
(a) v (b) 2v
4v 3v
3 4 (c) (d)
(c) v (d) v 3 4
4 3
40. Consider the following two statements :
–1
33. A 50 gram bullet moving with a velocity of 10 ms (A) Linear momentum of the system remains constant
gets embedded into a 950 g stationary body. The loss (B) Centre of mass of the system remains at rest
in K.E. of the system will be
(a) A implies B and B implies A
(a) 95% (b) 100%
(b) A does not imply B and B does not imply A
(c) 5% (d) 50%
(c) A implies B but B does not imply A
34. A bullet weighing 50 gm leaves the gun with a
(d) B implies A but A does not imply B
velocity of 30 m/s. If the recoil speed imparted to the
41. Consider the following two statements :
gun is 1 m/s, the mass of the gun is :
(A) Linear momentum of a system of particles is zero
(a) 15 kg (b) 30 kg
(B) Kinetic energy of a system of particles is zero
(c) 1.5 kg (d) 20 kg
(a) A implies B and B implies A
35. A spacecraft of mass M moves with velocity V in free
space at first, then it explodes, breaking into two (b) A does not imply B and B does not imply A
pieces. If after explosion a piece of mass m comes to (c) A implies B but B does not imply A
rest, the other piece of spacecraft will have a velocity : (d) B implies A but A does not imply B
MV MV 42. A machine gun fires a steady stream of bullets at the
(a) (b)
M−m M+m rate of n per minute into a stationary target in which
the bullets get embedded. If each bullet has a mass m
mV mV
(c) (d) and arrives at the target with a velocity v, the average
M−m M+m force on the target is :
36. A body of mass 1 kg initially at rest, explodes and
60 v
breaks into three fragments of masses in the ratio 1 : 1 (a) 60 mnv (b)
mn
: 3. The two pieces of equal mass fly off perpendicular
to each other, with a speed of 15 m/s each. The speed mnv mv
(c) (d)
of the heavier fragment is : 60 60 n
(a) 5 2 ms −1 (b) 45ms −1 43. A particle of mass 15 kg and initial velocity


vi = î − 2 ˆj m/s. It collides with another body and the
(c) 5ms −1 (d) 15ms −1
impact time is 0.1 s, resulting in a velocity
37. A bullet of mass 5 g is fired at a velocity 900 ms −1 
vf = 6iˆ + 4 ˆj + 5 kˆ m/s after impact. The average force
from a rifle of mass 2.5 kg. What is recoil velocity of
of impact on the particle is :
the rifle ?
(a) 0.9 ms −1 (b) 180 ms −1 (a) 15 5iˆ + 6 ˆj + 5 kˆ (b) 15 5iˆ + 6 ˆj − 5 kˆ
(c) 900 ms −1 (d) 1.8 ms −1 (c) 150 5iˆ − 6 ˆj + 5 kˆ (d) 150 5iˆ + 6 ˆj + 5 kˆ
@cbseinfinite
44. A man of mass M stands at one end of a plank of (a) system (m + M) along any direction
length L which lies at rest on a frictionless surface. (b) system (m + M) along vertical
The man walk to the other end of the plank. If the (c) system (m + M) horizontally
M (d) none of the above
mass of the plank is , the distance that the man
3
moves relative to the ground is : 48. A shell is fired from cannon with a velocity v at an
angle with the horizontal direction. At the highest
3L L point in its path it explodes into two pieces of equal
(a) (b)
4 4 mass. One of the pieces retrace its path then find the
4L L velocity of other piece immediately after the explosion
(c) (d)
5 3 is :
45. A particle is projected from a point at an angle with (a) 3v cos θ (b) 2v cos θ
the horizontal. At any instant t, if p is the linear
momentum and E the kinetic energy, then which of the 3 3
(c) v cos θ (d) v cos θ
following graphs is/are correct ? 2 2
49. A ball hits the floor and rebounds after an inelastic
collision. in this case :
(a) the momentum of the ball just after the collision is
the same as that just before the collision
(b) the mechanical energy of the ball remains the same
in the collision
(d) none of these (c) the total momentum of the ball and the earth is
conserved
(d) the total energy of the ball and the earth is
46. In a gravity free space, a man of mass M standing at a conserved
height h above the floor, throws a ball of mass m
straight down with a speed u. When the ball reaches 50. A projectile is moving at 20ms −1 at its highest point
the floor, the distance of the man above the floor will where it breaks into equal parts due to an internal
be : explosion. One part moves vertically up at 30ms −1
with respect to the ground. Then the other part will
 m  M
(a) h 1 +  (b) 1 +  h move at
 M   m
m (a) 20 m / s (b) 10 13 m / s
(c) h (d)h
M (c) 50 m / s (d) 30 m / s
47. A shell of mass m is moving horizontally with velocity
v0 and collides with a wedge of mass M just above 51. A particle of mass m moving towards the east with
speed v collides with another particle of the same mass
point A, as shown in the figure. As a consequence,
and same speed v moving towards the north. If the two
wedge starts to move towards left and the shell returns
particles stick to each other, the new particle of mass
with a velocity in x–y plane. The principle of
2m will have a speed of
conservation of momentum can be applied for :
v
(a) v (b)
2
v
(c) (d) v 2
2
@cbseinfinite
52. A 3kg mass moving at a speed of 15 ms −1 collides with 59. A 2kg of block of wood rests on a long table top. A 5 g
a 6 kg object initially at rest. They stick together. Find bullet moving horizontally with a speed of 150 m/s is
the velocity of the combination (m/s) after the shot into the block and sticks to it. The block then
collision. slides 2.7 m along the table top and comes to a stop.
The force of friction between the block and the table
53. A body of mass m = 0.10 kg has an initial velocity of
is:
3iˆ m / s . It collides elastically with another body, B of
(a) 0.052 N (b) 3.63 N
the mass which has an initial velocity of x 0 .After
(c) 2.50 N (d) 1.04 N
collision, A moves with a velocity= ( )
v 4 î + ˆj m / s . 60. Two balls of equal mass have a head on collision with
speed 6 m/s each in opposite direction. If the
x
The energy of B after collision is written as J , the 1
10 coefficient of restitution is , the speed of each ball
3
value of x is
after impact will be :
(a) 18 m/s (b) 2 m/s
Collisions (c) 6 m/s (d) data insufficient
54. A ball is dropped from a height of 1 m. If coefficient 61. A 50 kg mass is travelling at a speed of 2 m/s.
of restitution between the surface and the ball is 0.6, Another 60 kg mass travelling at a speed of 12 m/s in
the ball rebounds to a height of the same direction, strikes the first mass. After the
(a) 0.6 m (b) 0.4 m collision the 50 kg mass is travelling with a speed of 4
m/s. The coefficient of restitution of the collision is
(c) 1 m (d) 0.36 m
19 30
55. When a ball of mass = 5 kg hits a bat with a velocity (a) (b)
=3 m/s, in positive direction and it moves back back 30 19
with a velocity = 4 m/s, find the impulse in SI units : 20 11
(c) (d)
(a) 5 (b) 15 11 20
(c) 25 (d) 35 62. P and Q are two identical masses at rest suspended by
56. A block of mass m moving at a velocity v collides an inextensible string passing over a smooth
with another block of mass 2 m at rest. The lighter frictionless pulley. Mass P is given a downward push
block comes to rest after collision. Find the coefficient with a speed v as shown in figure. It collides with the
of restitution : floor and rebounds. What happens immediately after
collision ?
(a) 1/2 (b) 1
(c) 1/3 (d) 1/4
57. The magnitude of the impulse developed by a mass of
0.2 kg which changes its velocity from 5 î − 3 ˆj + 7 kˆ
m/s to 2 î + 3 ˆj + kˆ m/s is :
(a) 2.7 N–s (b) 1.8 N–s
(c) 0.9 N–s (d) 3.6 N–s
58. A steel ball strikes a steel plate at an angle  with the
vertical. If the coefficient of restitution is e, the angle
at which the rebound will take place is : (a) P and Q both move upwards with equal speeds
(b) P and Q both move upwards with different speeds
 tan θ 
(a) θ (b) tan −1   (c) P moves upwards & Q moves downwards with
 e 
equal speed
 e 
(c) e tan θ (d) tan −1   (d) Both P and Q are at rest.
 tan θ 
@cbseinfinite
63. A body of mass m1 moving with a uniform velocity of 69. A bullet of mass m moving with velocity v strikes a
40 m/s. collides with another of mass m 2 at rest and suspended wooden block of mass M. If the block rises
to a height h, the initial velocity of the bullet will be :
then the two together begin to move with a uniform
velocity of 30 m/s. The ratio of their masses (m1/m2) M+m
(a) 2 gh (b) 2 gh
is m
(a) 0.75 (b) 4.0 m M−m
(c) 2 gh (d) 2 gh
(c) 3 (d) 1.33 M+m m
64. A body of mass m strikes a stationary body of mass M 70. Three balls A, B and C ( m=
A =
m C 4m B ) are placed
and undergoes an elastic collision. After collision, m on a smooth horizontal surface. Ball B collides with
has a speed one-third its initial speed. The ratio M/m is ball C with an initial velocity v as shown. Total
(a) 1 : 2 (b) 2 : 1 number of collsions between the balls will be (all
collisions are elastic)
(c) 1 : 3 (d) 3 : 1
65. A massive ball moving with speed v collides with a
tiny ball of negligible mass. The collision is elastic.
The second ball will move with a speed equal to
(a) one (b) two
(a) v (b) 2 v
(c) three (d) four
(c) v/2 (d) zero
71. Two ice skaters A and B approach each other at right
66. An object of mass 2 kg is moving with a velocity of 3 angles. Skater A has a mass 30 kg and velocity 1 m/s
m/s and collides head on with an object B of mass 1 kg skater B has mass 20 kg and velocity 2 m/s. They meet
moving in the opposite direction with a velocity of 4 and cling together. Their final velocity of the couple is
m/s. After collision, both objects coalesce so that they :
move with a common velocity v equal to
(a) 2 m/s (b) 1.5 m/s
2 (c) 1 m/s (d) 2.5 m/s
(a) m / s (b) 1 m/s
3
72. The collision of two balls of equal mass takes place at
(c) 2 m/s (d) 3 m/s the origin of co-ordinates. Before collision, the
67. A bullet of mass 0.01 kg and travelling at a speed of are ( v x 50cm
components of velocities= = / s, v y 0 )
500 ms −1 strikes a block of 2 kg, which is suspended and (vx = –40 cm/s and vy = 30 cm/s). The first balls
by a string of length 5 m. The centre of gravity of the comes to rest after collison. The velocity components
block is found to rise through a vertical height of 0.1 (vx and vy respectively) of the second ball are :
m. The speed of the bullet after it emerges from the
(a) 10 cm/s and 30 cm/s
block is
(b) 30 cm/s and 10 cm/s
(a) 200 m/s (b) 240 m/s
(c) 5 cm/sand 15 cm/s
(c) 220 m/s (d) 280 m/s
(d) 15 cm/sand 5 cm/s
68. A bag of mass M hangs by a long thread and a bullet
of mass m comes horizontally with velocity v and gets 73. 10,000 small balls, each weighing 1 g, strike one
caught in the bag. Then for the combined (bag + square cm of area per second with a velocity 100 m/s
bullet) system, in a normal direction and rebound with the same
velocity. The value of pressure on the surface will be :
mvM 1 2
(a) momentum = (b) KE = mv (a) 2 × 103 N / m 2 (b) 2 × 55 N / m 2
m+M 2
1 m2 v2
(c) 107 N / m 2 (d) 2 × 107 N / m 2
(c) KE = ( m + M ) v 2 (d) KE =
2 2 (M + m)
@cbseinfinite
74. A ball of mass 10 kg moving with a velocity

10 3m / s along the x-axis, hits another ball of mass
20 kg which is at rest. After the collision, first ball
comes to rest while the second ball disintegrates into
two equal places. One piece start moving along y-axis
with a speed of 10 m/s. The second piece starts
moving at an angle of 30° with respect to the x-axis.
The velocity of the ball moving at 30° with x-axis is
x m / s . The configuration of pieces after collision is 77. A ball collides elastically with another ball of the same
shown in the figure below. mass. The collision is oblique and initially one of the
balls was at rest. After the collision, the two balls
The value of x to the nearest integer is …………
move with same speeds. What will be angle (in
degrees) between the velocities of the balls after the
collision?
78. A body of mass m moving with velocity v collides
perfectly elastically and head on with another body of
mass 2m which is initially at rest. The ratio of K.E. of
the colliding body (first body) before and after
K.E.before
collision, i.e, will be
K.E.after
75. Board A is placed on board B as shown. Both boards
slide, without moving with respect to each other, along 79. A ball leaves a horizontal table with velocity
a frictionless horizontal surface at a speed 6 m/s. v 0 = 5m / s . The ball bounces elastically from a
Board B hits a resulting board C “head-on”. After the vertical wall at a horizontal distance D (=8m) from the
collision, boards B and C stick together and board A table, as shown in figure. The ball strikes the floor a
slides on top of board C and stops its motion relative
to C in the position shown on the diagram. What is the
distance x 0 from the table ( g = 10m / s ) .
2
Find the
length (in m) of each board? All three boards have the value of x 0 (in m).
same mass, size and shape. The coefficient of kinetic
friction between boards A and C and between boards
A & B is 0.3 (Take g = 10 m / s 2 )
76. A ball is projected with velocity 20 2 m/s at an angle

of 45° with horizontal as shown in figure. The ball
collide with the wall, the coefficient of restitution 80. Two bodies of the same mass are moving with the
1 same speed, but in different directions in a plane. They
between the ball and wall A is and with the wall B have a completely inelastic collision and move
2
1 together thereafter with a final speed which is half of
is , distance of point (in m) where ball collide with their initial speed. The angle between the initial
4
the ground from the projection point (correct to two velocities of the two bodies (in degree) is ____.
decimal places) is
@cbseinfinite

1. It is found that if a neutron suffers an elastic collinear 6. A body of mass moving with an unknown velocity of
collision with deuterium at rest, fractional loss of its energy v î undergoes a collinear collision with a body of mass m
1 2
is pd, while for its similar collision with carbon nucleus at
rest, fractional loss of energy is pc.The values of pd and pc moving with a velocity v 2 î . After collision, m1 and m2
are respectively : (2018) move with velocities of v3 î , respectively. If m 2  0.5 m1
(a) (0, 0) (b) (0, 1)
and v3  0.5 v1 then v1 is: (2019)
(c) (0.89, 0.28) (d) (0.28, 0.89)
v2
(a) v4  (b) v4  v 2
2. The mass of a hydrogen molecule is 3.32  1027 kg. If 1023 2
hydrogen molecules strike, per second, a fixed wall of area v2
(c) v4  (d) v4  v2
2cm2 at an angle of 450 to the normal, and rebound 4
elastically with a speed of 103m/s, then the pressure on 7. A uniform rectangular thin sheet ABCD of mass M has
the wall is nearly : (2018) length a and breadth b, as shown in the figure. If the shaded
portion HBGO is cut-off, the coordinates of the centre of
(a) 2.35 102 N / m2 (b) 4.70 102 N / m2
Mass of the remaining portion will be: (2019)
3 2 3 2
(c) 2.35 10 N / m (d) 4.70 10 N / m
3. In a collinear collision, a particle with an initial speed v0

strikes a stationary particle of the same mass. If the final
kinetic energy 50% greater than the original kinetic energy,
the magnitude of the relative velocity between the two
particles, after collision, is : (2018)
v0 v0
(a) (b)
2 2
v0  3a 3b   5a 5b 
(c) (d) 2v0 (a)  ,  (b)  , 
4  4 4   3 3 
 2a 2b   5a 5b 
4. The position vector of the centre of mass rcm of an (c)  ,  (d)  , 
 4 4   12 12 
asymmetric uniform bar of negligible area of cross-section
8. A ball is thrown vertically up (taken as + z-axis) from the
as shown in figure is (2019)
ground. The correct momentum-height (p – h) diagram is:
 13 5  5 13 (2019)
(a) rcm  Lxˆ  Lyˆ (b) rcm  Lxˆ  Lyˆ
8 8 8 8
 3 11  11 3
(c) rcm  Lxˆ  Lyˆ (d) rcm  Lxˆ  Lyˆ
8 8 8 8
5. An alpha-particle of mass m suffers one-dimensional
elastic collision with a nucleus at rest of unknown mass. It
is scattered directly backwards losing, 64% of its initial
kinetic energy. The mass of the nucleus is (2019)
(a) 2m (b) 3.5 m
(c) 1.5 m (d) 4m
@cbseinfinite
9. A body of mass 2 kg makes an elastic collision with a

13. A body of mass m = 0.10 kg has an initial velocity of 3iˆ m / s .
second body at rest and continues to move in the original
direction, but with one-fourth of its original speed. What is It collides elastically with another body, B of the same mass
the mass of the second body? (2019) ˆ / s . After collision, A
which has an initial velocity of 5jm
(a) 1.0 kg (b) 1.5 kg 
(c) 1.8 kg (d) 1.2 kg
 
moves with a velocity v  4 î  ˆj m / s . The energy of B
10. A particle of mass 'm' is moving with speed ‘2v’ and collides x
with a mass ‘2m’ moving with speed ‘v’ in the same direction. after collision is written as J , the value of x is (2019)
10
After collision, the first mass is stopped completely while
the second one splits into two particles each of mass ‘m’, a
which move at angle 45° with respect to the original 14. A square shaped hole of side   is carved out at a
2
direction. The speed of each of the moving particle will be:
(2019) a
distance d  from the centre 'O' of a uniform circular
2
(a) 2v (b) 2 2v
disk of radius a. If the distance of the centre of mass of the
v a
v remaining portion from O is  value of X (to the nearest

(c) 2 2
 (d)
2
X
integer) is ……….. . (2019)
11. Three blocks A, B and C are lying on a smooth horizontal 15. A particle of mass m is moving along the x-axis with initial
surface, as shown in the figure. A and B have equal masses, velocity uiˆ . It collides elastically with a particle of mass 10
m, while C has M. Block A is given an initial speed v towards
m at rest and then moves with half its initial kinetic energy
B due to which it collides with B perfectly inelastically. The
combined mass collides with C, also perfectly inelastically. (see figure). If sin 1  n sin 2 then value of n is
5 (2019)
th of the initial kinetic energy is lost in whole process.
6 m
What is value of M/m? (2019)
1
m uiˆ 10m 2
12. A particle of mass 1 kg slides down a frictionless track 10m

(AOC) starting from rest at a point A (height 2 m). After 16. A cricket ball of mass 0.15 kg is thrown vertically up by a
reaching C, the particle continues to move freely in air as a bowling machine so that it rises to a maximum height of 20
m after leaving the machine. If the part pushing the ball
projectile. When it reaches its highest point P (height 1 m) applies a constant force F on the ball and moves
the kinetic energy of the particle is (in J): (Figure drawn is horizontally a distance of 0.2 m while launching the ball,
schematic and not to scale; take g  10m / s 2 ) the value of F (in N) is  g  10 ms  ………. .
2
(2019) (2019)
17. A particle of mass 200 MeV / c 2 collides with a hydrogen

atom at rest. Soon after the collision the particle comes to
rest, and the atom recoils and goes to its first excited state.
N
The initial kinetic energy of the particle (in eV) is . The
4
value of N is: (2019)
(Given the mass of the hydrogen atom to be 1GeV / c 2 ).
@cbseinfinite
18. Two bodies of the same mass are moving with the same
speed, but in different directions in a plane. They have a
completely inelastic collision and move together thereafter
with a final speed which is half of their initial speed. The
angle between the initial velocities of the two bodies (in
degree) is ________. (2019)
19. The centre of mass of solid hemisphere of radius 8 cm is x
from the centre of the flat surface. The value of x(in cm) is
________. (2020)
20. A piece of wood of mass 0.03 kg is dropped from the top of
a 100 m height building. At the same time, a bullet of mass
0.02 kg is fired vertically upwards, with a velocity 100 ms–1, (a)
5
 
a ˆ ˆ
i–j  
(b) a î  ˆj
from the ground. The bullet gets embedded in the wood.
Then the maximum height to which the combined system
reaches above the top of the building before falling below (c) zero (d)
5
 
a ˆ ˆ
i j
is: ( g = 10 ms–2) (2020)
(a) 20 m (b) 30 m 24. If 1022 gas molecules each of mass 10–25 kg collide with a
surface (Perpendicular to it) elastically per second over an
(c) 40 m (d) 10 m
area 1 m2 with speed 104 m/s, the pressure exerted by the
21. A body of mass 1 kg falls freely from a height of 100 m, on gas molecules will be of the order of (2020)
a platform of mass 3 kg which is mounted on a spring having
spring constant k = 1.25 × 106 N/m. The body stick to the N N
(a) 2 (b) 4
platform and the spring’s maximum compression is founded m2 m2
be s. Given that g = 10 ms–2, the value of x will be close to:
N N
(2020) (c) 6 (d) 0
m2 m2
(a) 40 cm (b) 4 cm
25. Two particles, of masses M and 2M, moving, as shown
(c) 80 cm (d) 8 cm
with speeds of 10 m/s and 5 m/s, collide elastically at the
22. A simple pendulum, made of a string of length l and a bob origin. After the collision, they move along the indicated
of mass m, is released from a small angle 0 . It strikes a directions with speeds v1 and v2, respectively. The values
block of mass M, kept on a horizontal surface at its lowest of v1 and v2 are nearly: (2020)
point of oscillations, elastically. It bounces back and goes
up to an angle 1 . Then M is given by (2020)
m  0  1   0 – 1 
(a) 2   –   (b) m     
 0 1  0 1
 0  1  m  0 – 1 
(c) m   –   (d) 2     
 0 1  0 1
23. Four particles A, B, C and D with masses mA = m, mB = 2m,

mC = 3m and mD = 4m are at the corners of a square. They
(a) 6.5 m/s and 6.3 m/s (b) 3.2 m/s and 6.3 m/s
have accelerations of equal magnitude with directions as
shown. The acceleration of the centre of mass of the (c) 6.5 m/s and 3.2 m/s (d) 3.2 m/s and 12.6 m/s
particles is: (2020)
@cbseinfinite
26. A man (mass = 50 kg) and his son (mass = 20 kg) are standing 30. A particle of mass m is dropped from a height h above the
on a frictionless surface facing each other.. The man pushes ground. At the same time another particle of the same mass
his son so that he starts moving at a speed of 0.70 m/s with is thrown vertically upwards from the ground with a speed
respect to the man. The speed of the man with respect to
of 2gh . If they collide head on completely inelastically,,
the surface is : (2020)
the time taken for the combined mass to reach the ground,
(a) 0.28 m/s (b) 0.20 m/s
(c) 0.47 m/s (d) 0.14 m/s h
in units of is (2020)
27. A person of mass M is, sitting on a swing of length L and g
swinging with an angular amplitude 0 . If the person
stands up when the swing passes through its lowest point, 3 1
(a) (b)
the work done by him, assuming that his centre of mass 2 2
move by a distance     L is closest to: (2020)

1 3
(c) (d)
(a) Mg 1 0  (b) Mg 1 – 0 
2 2 2 4
31. As shown in figure, when a spherical cavity (centered at
   2 O) of radius 1 m is cut out of a uniform sphere of radius R
(d) Mg 1  2 
0
(c) Mg (centered at C), the center of mass of remaining (shaded)
 
part of sphere is shown by COM, i.e. on the surface of the
28. Three points particles of mass 1 kg, 1.5 kg and 2.5 kg are cavity. R can be determined by the equation (2020)
placed at three corners of a right triangle of perpendicular
sides 4.0 cm, 3.0 cm as shown in the figure. The centre of
mass of the system is at the point: (2020)
(a) 0.9 cm right and 2.0 cm above 1 kg mass (a)  R  R  1  2 – R   1

2
(b) 2.0 cm right and 0.9 cm above 1 kg mass

(b)  R – R – 1  2 – R   1
2
(c) 1.5 cm right and 1.2 cm above 1 kg mass
(d) 0.6 cm right and 2.0 cm above 1 kg mass
(c)  R – R  1  2 – R   1
2
29. Find the coordinates of center of mass of the lamina shown
in the figure below. (2020)
(d)  R  R – 1  2 – R   1
2
32. Two particles of equal mass m have respective initial
  u u
velocities u1  uiˆ and u 2  î  ˆj . They collide
2 2
completely inelastically. Find the loss in kinetic energy.
(2020)
3mu 2 2mu 2
(a) (b)
4 3
(a) (0.75 m, 1.75 m) (b) (0.75 m, 0.75 m)
mu 2 mu 2
(c) (1.25 m, 1.5 m) (d) (1 m, 1.75 m) (c) (d)
3 8
@cbseinfinite
33. A rod of length L has non-uniform linear mass density 36. A block of mass 1.9 kg is at rest at the edge of a table, of
height 1 m. A bullet of mass 0.1 kg collides with the block
 x 
2
and sticks to it. If the velocity of the bullet is 20 m/s in the
given by   x    a  b  L   , where a and b are
    horizontal direction just before the collision then the kinetic
energy just before the combined system strikes the floor, is
constants and 0  x  L . The value of x for the center of [Take g = 10 m/s2. Assume there is no rotational motion and
mass of the rod is at: (2020) loss of energy after the collision is negligible.]
(2020)
(a) 23 J (b) 21 J
(c) 20 J (d) 19 J
37. Block of masses m, 2m, 4m and 8m are arranged in a line on
a frictionless floor. Another block of mass m, moving with
speed V along the same line (see figure) collides with mass
3L  2a  b  3L  2a  b 
(a)   (b)   m in perfectly inelastic manner. All the subsequent collisions
2  3a  b  4  3a  b 
are also perfectly inelastic. By the time the last block of
mass 8m starts moving the total energy loss is p% of the
3L  a  b  4L  a  b  original energy. Value of ‘p’ is close to: (2020)
(c)   (d)  
4  3a  b  3  3a  b 
34. A particle of mass m is projected with a speed u from the


ground at angle   w.r.t. horizontal (x-axis). When it
3
has reached its maximum height, it collides completely
inelastically with another particle of the same mass and (a) 94 (b) 87
velocity uiˆ . The horizontal distance covered by the (c) 37 (d) 77

combined mass before reaching the ground is: (2020)
38. Particle A of mass m1 moving with velocity  
3 î  ˆj ms –1
3 3u 2 2 2u 2 collides with another particle B of mass m2 which is at rest
(a)
8g
(b)
g  
initially. Let V1 and V 2 be the velocities of particles A and
B after collision respectively. If m1 = 2m2 and after collision
5u 2 3 2u 2   
(c)
8g
(d)
4g
 
V1  î  3 ˆj ms –1 , the angle between V1 and V 2

is: V 2 is: (2020)
35. A particle of mass m with an initial velocity uiˆ collides
(a) 105° (b) 15°
perfectly elastically with a mass 3m at rest. Mass m moves
(c) –45° (d) 60°
with a velocity v ˆj after collision, then v is given by:
39. A ball with a speed of 9 m/s collides with another identical
(2020) ball at rest. After the collision, the direction of each ball
makes an angle of 30° with the original direction. The ratio
1 2 of velocities of the balls after collision is x : Y, where x is
(a) v  u (b) u  u
6 3 _______. (2021)
40. Two particles having masses 4g and 16 g respectively are
u u moving with equal kinetic energies. The ratio of the
(c) v  (d) v 
3 2 magnitude of their linear momentum is n : 2. The value of n
will be _______. (2021)
@cbseinfinite
41. A ball of mass 10 kg moving with a velocity 10 3 ms –1 43. A ball of mass 10 kg moving with a velocity 10 3 m s
along X-axis, hits another ball of mass 20 kg which is at along the x-axis, hits another ball of mass 20 kg which ius at
rest. After collision, the first ball comes to rest and the rest. After the collision, first ball comes to rest while the
second one disintegrates into two equal pieces. One of the second ball disintegrates into two equal pieces. One piece
pieces starts moving along Y-axis at a speed of 10 m/s. The starts moving along y-axis with a speed of 10 m/s. The
second piece starts moving at as speed of 20 m/s at an second piece starts moving at an angle of 30° with respect
angle  (degree) with respect to the X-axis. to the x-axis. The velocity of the ball moving at 30° with x-
The configuration of pieces after collision is shown in the axis is x m/s. The configuration of pieces after collision is
figure shown in the figure below.
The value of  to the nearest integer is ________. The value of x to the nearest integer is ................
(2021) (2021)
a
44. A circular hole of radius   is cut out of a circular disc of
2
42. The disc of mass M with uniform surface mass density 
is shown in the figure. The centre of mass of the quarter radius ‘a’ as shown in figure. The centre of mass of the
remaining circular portion with respect to point ‘O’ will be:
x a x a
disc (the shaded area) is at the position  , ; where (2021)
 3  3 
x is ______.
[Round off to the Nearest Integer]
[a is an area as shown in the figure] (2021)
1 5
(a) a (b) a
6 6
2 10
(c) a (d) a
3 11
@cbseinfinite
45. Given below are two statements: one is labelled as Assertion (a) 821.4 m/s (b) 841.4 m/s
A and the other is labelled as Reason R. (c) 831.4 m/s (d) 811.4 m/s
Assertion A: Body ‘P’ having mass M moving with speed 48. A rubber ball is released from a height of 5 m above the
‘u’ has head-on collision elastically with another body ‘Q’
having mass ‘m’ initially at rest. If m<<M, body ‘Q’ will 81
floor. it bounces back repeatedly, always rising to of
have a maximum speed equal to ‘2u’ after collision. 100
Reason R: During elastic collision, the momentum and the height through which it falls. Find the average speed of
kinetic energy are both conserved. the ball. (Take g = 10 m/s2) (2021)
In the light of the above statements, choose the most (a) 3.0 m/s (b) 3.50 m/s
appropriate answer from the options given below: (c) 2.0 m/s (d) 2.50 m/s
(2021) 49. Two identical block A and B each of mass m resting on the
(a) Both A and R are correct but R is NOT the correct smooth horizontal floor are connected by a light spring of
explanation of A natural length L and spring constant K. A third block C of
mass m moving with a speed v along the line joining A and
(b) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct explanation
B collides with A. the maximum compression in the spring
of A
is: (2021)
(c) A is not correct but R is correct
(d) A is correct but R is not correct.
46. Two masses A and B, each of mass M are fixed together by
a massless spring. A force acts on the mass B as shown in
figure. If the mass A starts moving away from mass B with m mv
(a) v (b)
magnitude of acceleration as ‘a’, then the magnitude of 2K 2K
acceleration of mass B at that instant will be: (2021)
mv m
(c) (d)
K 2K
50. An object of mass m1 collides elastically with another object
MF Ma – F of mass m2, which is at rest. After the collision the object
(a) (b)
F  Ma M move with equal speeds in opposite direction. The ratio of
the masses m2 : m1 is: (2021)
F  Ma F – Ma (a) 3 : 1 (b) 2 : 1
(c) (d)
M M
(c) 1 : 2 (d) 1 : 1
47. A large block of wood of mass M = 5.99 kg is hanging from
two long massless cords. A bullet of mass m = 10 g is fired
into the block and gets embedded in it. The (block + bullet)
then swing upwards, their centre of mass rising a vertical
distance h = 9.8 c m before the (block + bullet) pendulum
comes momentarily to rest at the end of its arc. The speed
of the bullet just before collision is: (take g = 9.8 ms–2)
(2021)
@cbseinfinite

Singal Choice Questions (a) at a distance of 2R from O
1. Three idential spheres, each of mass 1 kg are placed (b) at a distance of 3R from O
touching each other with their centres on a straight line. (c) at a distance of 4R from O
Their centres are marked P, Q and R respectively. The (d) at a distance of 5R from O
distance of centre of mass of the system from P is : 4. From a circular disc of radius R, a square is cut out with a
PQ  PR  QR PQ  PR radius as its diagonal. The centre of mass of remainder is at
(a) (b) a distance (from the centre) :
3 3
R R
PQ  QR (a)  4  2  (b)
(c) (d) none of these 2
3
R R
2. A circular ring of mass 6 kg and radius a is placed such that (c)    2  (d)  2  2 
its centre lies at the origin. Two particles of masses 2 kg
each are placed at the intersecting points of the circle with 5. You are supplied with three identical rods of same length
+ve x–axis and +ve y–axis. Then, the angle made by the and mass. The length of each rod is 2. Two of them are
position vector of centre of mass of entire system with converted into rings and then placed over the third rod as
x–axis is : shown in figure. If points A is considered as origin of the
co-ordinate system the co-ordinate of the centre of mass
(a) 45° (b) 60°
will be (you may assume AB as x–axis of the co-ordinate
1  4 
system) :
(c) tan   (d) 30°
5
3. A carpenter has constructed a toy as shown in the
adjoining figure. If the density of the material of the sphere
is 12 times that of cone, the position of the centre of mass
of the toy is given by :
 1  2
(a)  ,  (b)  , 
2 3  2 3
 1  2
(c)  ,  (d)  , 
 3  3
6. An object comprises of a uniform ring of radius R and its
uniform chord AB (not necessarily made of the same
material) as shown. Which of the following can not be the
centre of the mass of the object ?
R R  R R 
(a)  ,  (b)  , 
3 3  2 2
R R
(c)  ,  (d) None of these
4 4
@cbseinfinite
7. A circular plate of diameter d is kept in contact with a square (a) a vertical straight line
plate of edge d as shown in figure. The density of the (b) a horizontal straight line
material and the thickness are same everywhere. The centre
(c) a straight line at angle  (< ) with horizontal
of mass of the compositive system will be
(d) a parabola
11. Two bodies having masses m1 and m 2 and velocity
 
u1 and u 2 collide and form a composite system. If
 
m1 u1  m 2 u 2  0  m1  m2  , the velocity of composite
system will be :
(a) inside the circular plate    
(a) u1  u 2 (b) u1  u 2
(b) inside the square plate
(c) at the point of contact  
u1  u 2
(d) outside the system (c) (d) zero
2
8. A circular plate of uniform thickness has a diameter of 28
cm. A circular portion of diameter 21 cm is removed from 12. A boy of mass m is standing on a block of mass M kept on
the plate as shown. O is centre of mass of complete plate. a rough surface. When the boy walks from left to right on
The position of centre of mass of remaining portion will the block, the centre of mass (boy + block) of system :
shift towards left from ‘O’ by
(a) remains stationary
(b) shift towards left
(c) shifts towards right
(d) shifts towards right if M > m and towards left if M < m
Comprehension Type Questions

(a) 5 cm (b) 9 cm Passage–1
(c) 4.5 cm (d) 5.5 cm Using the following passage, solve Q. 13 to 15
9. Three identical uniform rods of the same mass M and length The entire mass of a system is assumed to be concentrated
L are arranged in xy plane as shown. A fourth uniform rod at a point, which we call the centre of mass. Such an
of mass 3M has been placed as shown in the xy plane.
assumption must be in someway helpful to us. This point
What should be the value of the length of the fourth rod
may even be outside of the system. Once the journey has
such that the center of mass of all the four rods lie at the
origin ? started, a given system may have exploded by itself or
have broken down into number of pieces, each piece moving
with a different velocity in a different direction than that of
the original system, but this point of centre of mass will
continue to move with same velocity in the same direction,
as if nothing has happened.
Suppose a man of mass 60 kg is on a trolley of mass 40 kg
moving at a speed of 4 m/sec. The man jumps off the trolley
in the direction opposite to the motion of the trolley with a
speed of 2 m/sec.
(a) 3L (b) 2L
13. What may be essential condition to work out the velocity
L(2 2  1) and direction of centre of mass :
(d) L( 2  1) / 3 (d)
3 (a) Centre of mass moves with constant velocity.
10. Two balls of equal mass are projected from a tower (b) The system breaks down into number of fragments.
simultaneously with equal speeds. One at angle  above
the horizontal and the other at the same angle  below the (c) There is no external force acting on the system
horizontal. The path of the centre of mass of the two balls is : (d) The different parts of the system move with different
velocities.
@cbseinfinite
14. If V1 and V2 are velocities of centre of mass of the system (a) (1, 0) (b) (3, 0)
just before and after the man jumps off the trolley, find (c) (5, 0) (d) (2.25, 0)
correct option : 20. A cracker is thrown into air with a velocity of 10 m/s at an
(a) V1 = V2 (b) V1 > V2 angle of 45° with the vertical. When its is at a height of
(c) V1 < V2 (d) Unpredictable 1
  m from the ground, it explodes into a number of peices
15. The velocity of centre of mass of the system just after the 2
man jumps off the trolley is : which follow different parabolic paths. What is the velocity
(a) 2 m/sec (b) 3 m/sec of centre of mass, when its is at a height of 1 m from the
–2
ground ? (g = 10 m/s )
(c) 4 m/sec (d) 8 m/sec
(a) 4 5 ms1 (b) 2 5 ms1
Assertion & Reason –1
(c) 5 4 ms1 (d) 5 ms
(a) Both assertion and reason are true and reason is the
correct explanation for assertion. 21. In a free space, a rifle of mass M shoots a bullet of mass m
(b) Both assertion and reason are true but reason is not the at a stationary block of mass M distance D away from it.
correct explanation for assertion. When the bullet has moved through a distance d towards the
(c) Assertion is true and reason is false. block, the centre of mass of the bullet-block system is at a
distance of:
(d) Assertion is false and reason is true.
16. Statement–1 : Centre of mass of a body will continue to D  d m
(a) from the bullet
move with constant velocity, if external forces acting on it Mm
are zero. md  MD
Statement–2 : Centre of mass of a moving car is achieved (b) from the block
Mm
to come to rest by applying brakes as the internal forces of
2md  MD
the brakes bring the required change. (c) from the bullet
Mm
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D D  d M
(d) from the bullet
17. Statement – 1: If no external force acts on a system of Mm
particles, then the centre of mass will not move in any 22. Two blocks m1 and m2 are pulled on a smooth horizontal
direction. surface, and are joined together with a spring of stiffness k
Statement – 2: If net external force is zero, then the linear as shown. Suddenly, block m2 receives a horizontal velocity
momentum of the system remains constant. v0, then the maximum extension xm in the spring is
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
18. Statement–1: If net force acting on a system is zero then
centre of mass of the system always remains at rest.
Statement–2: If net force acting on a system is zero then
acceleration of centre of mass is zero.
m1m 2 2m1m 2
(a) A (b) B (a) v0 m  m (b) v0
1 2  m1  m2  k
(c) C (d) D
19. Block A and B are resting on a smooth horizontal surface
m1m 2 m1m 2
given equal speeds of 2 m/s in opposite sense as shown in (c) v0 2 m  m k (d) v0
the figure. At t = 0, the position of block are shown, then  1 2  m1  m2  k
the coordinates of centre of mass at t = 3 s will be : 23. A 50 kg man is standing on a flat boat at rest in a river. He
moves 5 m to north and halts. If the boat has a mass of 450
kg, then the boat moves through :
(a) 0.5 m to the south (b) 0.25 m to the south
(c) 0.5 m to the north (d) 0 m
@cbseinfinite
24. A boy is standing at the centre of a boat, which is free to

R
move on water. If the masses of the boy and the boat are m1 28. A ball of mass m and radius   is placed as shown, on
and m2 respectively, and the boy moves a distance of 1 m  10 
forward, then the movement of the boat is ..... metres : a block B of mass 9 m which is placed on a smooth surface.
When the ball comes down to the lowest position, the
m1 m2
(a) m  m (b) m  m block B will move to the left by a distance of :
1 2 1 2
m1 m2
(c) m (d) m
2 1
A man of mass m stands on a plane plank of mass   ,

m
25.
2
(a) 0.25 R (b) 0.14 R
lying on a smooth horizontal floor. Initially both are at rest.
Then the man starts walking on the plank towards the east (c) 0.15 R (d) 0.20 R
and stops after a distance l on the plank. Then : 29. The sphere A of mass m1 moves with velocity V on a
(a) the plank will slide to the west by a distance l/3 frictionless horizontal surface and strikes with sphere B of
(b) the planks will continue to move towards the west over mass m2 at rest. The sphere A comes back with speed V/10.
the smooth floor. Find the correct option :
2
(c) the plank will slide to the west by   l and then stop
3
(a) m1 > m2 (b) m1 = m2
26. Block A and B shown in the figure are having equal masses
(c) m1 < m2 (d) none of these
m. The system is released from rest with the spring
unstretched. The string between A and ground is cut when 30. The ball B is at rest. A moving ball A collides elastically
there is maximum extension in the spring. The acceleration with it in one dimension. The masses of balls are equal. For
of centre of mass of the two blocks at this instant is : ball B, which of the following will be greatest, if velocity of
A is greater than 2m/sec. ?
(a) Kinetic energy (b) Momentum
(c) Potential energy (d) None of these
31. In the previous problem, if mB >> mA, which of the following
will be greatest for ball B ?
(a) Speed (b) Momentum
(c) Kinetic energy (d) None of these
32. Three particles A, B and C of equal masses move with
equal speeds v along the medians of an equalateral triangle.
They collide at the centroid O of the triangle. After collision
A comes to rest while B retraces its path with speed v. The
g
(a) g (b) velocity of C is then
2
(c) 2 g (d) zero
27. A man of mass m moves with a constant speed on a plank
of mass M and length l kept initially at rest on a frictionless
horizontal surface, from one end to the other in time t. The
speed of the plank relative to ground while man is moving, is
M  m 
(a)   (b)  
tm t mM
 
 M  (a) v, direction OA (b) 2v, direction OA
(c)  
t Mm
(d) none of these  
(c) 2v, direction OB (d) v, direction BO
@cbseinfinite
Match the Column Assertion & Reason

33. Two particles of mass m1 and m2 have velocity of centre of (a) Both assertion and reason are true and reason is the
mass as V. Match the columns : correct explanation for assertion.
Column–I Column–II (b) Both assertion and reason are true but reason is not the
(a) If velocity of two particles (P) V  V0 correct explanation for assertion.
are same (say V0), then (c) Assertion is true and reason is false.
(b) If velocity of two particles (Q) V  V0 (d) Assertion is false and reason is true.
are not same (velocity of one 36. Statement–1 : It is not possible to know details of final
particle is V0), then motion just by knowing details of initial motion and without
knowing the forces which are changing the motion of the
1
(c) When velocities of the (R)  m1 +m2 V02 system.
2

particles are same (say V0), dp
Statement–2 : Fext 
then kinetic energy of the dt
system will be (a) A (b) B
1 (c) C (d) D
(d) When velocities of the (S)  m1 +m2 V 2 37. Two bodies with masses, m1 and m2 (m1 > m2) are joined by
2
a string passing over a fixed pulley. The centres of gravity
particles are not same
of the two masses are initially at the same height. Assume
(velocity of one particle
masses of pulley and weight of the thread negligible. The
is V0), then kinetic energy acceleration of the centre of mass of m1 and m2, is :
of the system will be
34. Centre of mass of a system is a unique point which is very  m1  m 2  m1g
(a)  m  m  g (b)  m  m 
helpful in solving the problems related to the motions of  1 2  1 2
rigid bodies. In columns I and II, some statements regarding 2

centre of mass are given. Match the columns:  m1  m 2  m2g
(c)   g (d)  m  m 
Column I Column II  m1  m 2  1 2
(a) in the absence of external (p) inside the material of the 38. A car of mass m is initially at rest on the boat of mass M
force, the internal forces body tied to the wall of dock through a massless, inextensible
(b) Centre of mass of a (q) may affect the motion of string as shown in figure. The car accelerates from rest to
body can be individuals velocity v0 in time t0. At t = t0 the car applies brake and
(c) The kinetic energy (r) do not affect the motion comes to rest relative to the boat in negligible time. Neglect
friction between the boat and water; the time ‘t’ at which
of the system of two of centre of mass
boat will strike the wall is :
blocks
(d) Centre of mass of (s) outside the material of
solid cylinder is the body
35. Match the following:
Column I Column II
(a) Inelastic collisions (p) Kinetic energy of the system
may decrease
(b) Elastic Collisions (q) Kinetic energy of the system
may increase
(c) Total work done is (r) kinetic energy of the system L (M  m)
(a) t0 + L/v0 (b) t 0 
zero may remain constant mv0
(d) Non-conservative (s) just before and after collision,
LM
forces are not present momentum remains constant (c) mv (d) None of the above
0
@cbseinfinite
39. A sphere of mass m moving with a constant velocity u hits 42. The quantities remaining constant in a collision are
another stationary sphere of same mass. If e is the (a) momentum, kinetic energy and temperature
coefficient of restitution, then ratio of velocities of the two (b) momentum and kinetic energy but not temperature
v1 (c) momentum and temperature but not kinetic energy
spheres v after collision will be :
2 (d) momentum, but neither kinetic energy nor temperature
43. The sphere A starts moving from one end with velocity V
on the stationary wedge B of mass M, as shown, Find the
coefficient of restitution, if A falls off after rising upto top
1 e 1 e of the wedge B with zero velocity (w.r.t. wedge):
(a) (b)
1 e 1 e
e 1 e 1
(c) (d)
e 1 e 1
40. A mass m moves with a velocity v and collides inelastically
with another identical mass. After collision the Ist mass
v
moves with velocity in a direction perpendicular to
3 m cos
(a) (b) 0
the initial direction of motion. Find the speed of the 2nd M
mass after collision : M cos  M
(c) (d)
m m
44. In a two block system an initial velocity v0 with respect to
ground is given to block A :
(a) the momentum of block A is not conserved

2 v
(a) v (b) (b) the momentum of system of block A and B is conserved
3 3
(c) the increase in momentum of B is equal to the decrease
(c) v (d) 3v in momentum of block A
41. A particle A of mass m initially at rest slides down a height (d) all the above
of 1.25 m on a frictionless ramp, collides with and sticks to 45. A projectile is moving at 60 m/s at its highest point, where
an identical particle B of mass m at rest as shown in the it breaks into two equal parts due to an internal explosion.
figure. Then particles A and B together collide elastically One part moves vertically up at 50 m/s with respect to the
with particle C of mass 2 m at rest. The speed of particle A ground. The other part will move at :
2
after the collision with particle B would be : (g = 10 m/s ) (a) 110 m/s (b) 120 m/s
(c) 130 m/s (d) 10 61 m / s

46. A man weighing 80 kg is standing on a trolley weighing 320
kg. The trolley is resting on frictionless horizontal rails. If
the man starts walking on the trolley along the rails at a
speed of 1 m/s relative to trolley, then after 4 s, his
displacement relative to the ground will be :
(a) 2.0 m/s (b) 1.25 m/s
(a) 4.2 m (b) 4.8 m
(c) 2.5 m/s (d) 5 m/s
(c) 3.2 m (d) 3.0 m
@cbseinfinite
47. Statement–1 : When initial and final velocities are equal, a 50. A stationary body explodes into four identical fragments
quick and slow collision between two bodies will be equally such that three of them fly off mutually perpendicular to
violent. each other, each with same KE, E0.The energy of explosion
Statement–2 : Whether a force is small or large, rate of will be
change of momentum will determine the state of collision
4E 0
of being violent or not. (a) 6 E0 (b)
3
(a) A (b) B
(c) 4 E0 (d) 8 E0
(c) C (d) D
51. Two bodies of massses m1 and m2 have equal momenta. If
48. Two identical spheres A and B of radius r are released
E1 and E2 be their respective K.E., the ratio E1 : E2 is equal :
simultaneously from the positions as shown, in a vessel C
of radius (R + r) and which moves on a smooth surface. If (a) m1 : m2 (b) m2 : m1
1 (c) m1 : m 2 (d) m12 : m 22

coefficient of restitution is , find the velocity of A after
2
52. A mass of 10 g moving horizontally with a velocity of 100
collision with B. cm/s strikes a pendulum bob of mass 10 g. Length of string
is 50 cm. The two masses stick together. The maximum
2
height reached by the system now is : (g = 10 m/s )
(a) 2gR (b) gR

(a) 7.5 cm (b) 5 cm
gR (c) 2.5 cm (d) 1.25 cm
(c) (d) 2 gR
2 53. A bullet of mass 0.01 kg and travelling at a speed of 500 m/s
strikes a block of mass 2 kg, which is suspended by a
49. In a vertical plane inside a smooth hollow thin tube, a block
string of length 5 m. The centre of gravity of the block is
of same mass as that of tube is released as shown. When it
found to rise a vertical distance of 0.1 m. What is the speed
is slightly disturbed it moves towards right. By the time the
of the bullet after it emerges from the block :
block reaches the right end of the tube, the displacement
of the tube will be (where ‘R’ is the mean radius of tube the (a) 780 m/s (b) 220 m/s
assume that the tube remains in vertical plane) (c) 1.4 m/s (d) 7.8 m/s
54. A cannon ball is fired with a velocity 200 m/s at an angle of
60° with the horizontal. At the highest point of its flight, it
explodes into 3 equal fragments, one going vertically
upwards with a velocity 100 m/s, the second one fallings
vertically downwards with a velocity 100 m/s. The third
fragement will be moving with a velocity.
(a) 100 m/s in the horizontal direction
2R 4R
(a) (b) (b) 300 m/s in the horizontal direction
 
(c) 300 m/s in a direction making an angle of 60° with the
R horizontal
(c) (d) R (d) 200 m/s in a direction making an angle of 60° with the
2
horizontal
@cbseinfinite
55. An isolated particle of mass m is moving in a horizontal 60. A ball strikes a horizontal floor at 45°.25% of its kinetic
plane (x, y) along the x–axis at a certain height above the energy is lost in collision. Find the coefficient of restitution:
ground. It suddenly explodes into two fragments of masses
1 1
m 3m . An instant later, the smaller fragment is (a) (b)
2 2
and
4 4
1 1
at y = + 15 cm. The larger fragment at this instant is at : (c) (d)
2 2 4
(a) y = – 5 cm (b) y = + 20 cm
(c) y = + 5 cm (d) y = – 20 cm 61. In the previous problem, when the string is taut the velocity
of the centre of mass is :
56. A block of mass m is pushed towards a movable wedge of
mass nm and height h, with a velocity u. All surfaces are m0 v0 2 m0 v0
smooth. The minimum value of u for which the block will (a)  m +m  (b)  m +m 
0 0
reach the top of the wedge is :
m0 v0  m0 +m v0
(c)  2 m +m  (d)
0  2 m0 +m
62. A moving particle of mass m, makes a head on elastic
collision with a particle of mass 2m, which is initially at rest.
The fraction of energy lost by colliding particle is :
1 2
(a) (b)
9 3
(a) 2gh (b) 2 ngh
8
(c) (d) no loss
 1  1 9
(c) 2gh 1   (d) 2gh 1  
 n  n 63. A body A of mass 2 kg is projected upward from the surface
57. A projectile of mass 3 m explodes at highest point of its of the ground at t = 0 with a velocity of 20 m/s. One second
after a body B, also of mass 2 kg is dropped from a height
path. It breaks into three equal parts. One part retraces its
of 20 m. If they collide elastically, then their velocities just
path, the second one comes to rest. The range of the
projectile was 100 m if no explosion would have taken place. after collision are :
The distance of the third part from the point of projection (a) vA = 5 m/s downward, vB = 5 m/s upward
when it finally lands on the ground is : (b) vA = 10 m/s downward, vB = 5 m/s upward
(a) 100 m (b) 150 m
(c) vA = 10 m/s upward, vB = 10 m/s downward
(c) 250 m (d) 300 m
(d) both move downward with velocity 5 m/s
58. At high altitude, a body explodes at rest into two equal
fragments with one fragment receiving horizontal velocity 64. A pendulum consists of a wooden bob of mass m and of
of 10 m/s. Time taken by the two radius vectors connecting lenght l. A bullet of mass m1 is fired towards the pendulum
2
point of explosion of fragments to make 90° is: (g = 10 m/s ) with a speed v1. The bullet emerges out of the bob with a
speed v1/3 and the bob just completes motion along a
(a) 10 s (b) 4 s
vertical circle. Then v1 is
(c) 2 s (d) 1 s
59. A ball thrown with velocity 30 m/s and making an anlge 37° m 3 m 
with horizontal. The ball strikes a vertical wall at a distance (a)  m  5g (b) 2  m  5g
 1  1
of 12 m from the point of projection and coefficient of
restitution between wall and the ball is equal to 0.5. What
2  m1   m1 
is the velocity of the ball just after impact on the wall ? (c)   5g (d)   g
3 m  m
(a) 17.7 m/s (b) 15.6 m/s
(c) 20.4 m/s (d) 19.4 m/s
@cbseinfinite
65. Ball A strikes with velocity u elastically with identical ball B Assertion & Reason
at rest, inclined at an angle of 60° with line joining the (a) Both assertion and reason are true and reason is the
centres of two balls. What will be the speed of ball B after correct explanation for assertion.
collision: (b) Both assertion and reason are true but reason is not the
u 3 correct explanation for assertion.
(a) u (b)
2 (c) Assertion is true and reason is false.
u (d) Assertion is false and reason is true.
u
(c) (d)
2 2 69. Statement–1 : In one dimensional elastic collision between
66. A smooth sphere is moving on a horizontal surface with an incoming body A and body B which is at rest, mass of
body B should be quite lesser than mass of body A so that
velocity vector 2iˆ  2ˆj immediately before it hits a vertical
body B recoil with greatest speed.
wall. The wall is parallel to ĵ vector and the coefficient of Statement–2 : Linear momentum and energy is conserved
in elastic collision.
restitution between the sphere and the wall is e = 1/2. The
velocity vector of the sphere after it hits the wall is : (a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
(a) î  ˆj (b) î  2ˆj
70. Statement–1: A particle strikes head–on with another
stationary particle such that first particle comes to rest
(c) î  ˆj (d) 2iˆ  ˆj
after collision. The collision should necessarily be elastic.
67. Particles P and Q of masses 20 g and 40 g respectively are Statement–2: In elastic collision there is no loss of
projected from positions A and B on the ground. The initial momentum of the system of both the particles.
velocities of P and Q make angles of 45° and 135°, repectively
(a) A (b) B
with the horizontal as shown. Each particle has an initial
(c) C (d) D
speed of 49 m/s. The separation AB is 245 m. Both particles
travel in the same vertical plane and undergo a collision. 71. Statement–1: If a sphere of mass m moving with speed u
After the collision P retraces its path. The position of Q undergoes a perfectly elastic head–on collision with
when it hits the ground is another sphere of heavier mass M at rest (M > m), then
direction of velocity of sphere of mass m is reversed due to
collision (no external force acts on system of two spheres).
Statement–2: During a collision of spheres of unequal
masses, the heavier mass exerts more force on the lighter
mass in comparison to the force which lighter mass exerts
on the heavier one.
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
245
(a) 245 m (b) m
3
More than one Option Correct Type
245 245
(c) m (d) m 72. Which of the following is/are correct?
2 2
(a) If centre of mass of three particles is at rest and it is
68. Match the columns : known that two of them are moving along different
Column–I Column–II lines then the third particle must also be moving.
(a) Elastic collision (P) Constant kinetic energy (b) If centre of mass remains at rest, then net work done by
(b) Inelastic collision (Q) Work done is path the forces acting on the system must be zero.
independent (c) If centre of mass remains at rest then the net external
(c) Non conservative (R) Constant linear momentum force must be zero.
forces (d) If speed of centre of mass is changing then there must
be some net work being done on the system.
(d) Conservative forces (S) None of the above
@cbseinfinite
73. A bag P (mass M) hang by a long thread and a bullet (mass (a) the deceleration of ball A on horizontal plane is g, if 
m) comes horizontally with velocity v and gets caught in the is the coefficient of friction.
bag. Then for the combined (bag + bullet) system, (b) the deceleration of ball A on horizontal plane is 2g.
(a) momentum is mv throughout (c) the value of coefficient of friction is 0.25.
(b) momentum is (M + m)v throughout (d) the value of coefficient of friction is 0.50.
1 2 78. A ball A of mass m is given an initial velocity to slide down
(c) kinetic energy ismv throughout and collide with ball B of mass (2m) so that ball B now has
2
sufficient energy just to hit ball at C. As the ball A slides
(d) loss in kinetic energy in collision process is down its velocity becomes twice of its initial velocity before
1 2 M  collision. The coefficient of restitution is (1/2) :
mv  
2 Mm
74. The momentum of a particle is given by

 
P  4 sin ti  4 cos tj kg m / s . Select the correct
alternative(s).
(a) Momentum P of the particle is always parallel to F.
(b) Momentun P of the particle is always perpendicular to
F.
(c) Magnitude of momentum P is always constant.
(d) None of the above (a) the velocity of ball B after collision is  2 g  h+s  
75. A body moving towards a body of finite mass at rest
collides with it. It is possible that (b) the velocity of ball B after collision is 2 g  h+s  .
(a) both bodies come to rest
(b) both bodies move after collision (c) the initial velocity of ball A is 2 g  h+s  .
(c) the moving body stops and the body at rest starts
moving (d) the initial velocity of ball A is 2 g  h+s  .
(d) the stationary body remains stationary and the moving
body rebounds 79. A ball A of mass 3m is placed at a distance d from the wall
on a smooth horizontal surface. Another ball B of mass m
76. Which of the following statement are true?
moving with velocity u collides with ball A. The coefficient
(a) In an elastic collision of two bodies, the momentum
of restitution between the balls and the wall and between
and energy of each body is conserved.
the balls is e :
(b) The total energy of a system is always conserved
irrespective of whether external forces act on the
system.
(c) The work done by a force in nature on a body, over a
closed loop, is not always zero.
(d) In an inelastic collision of two bodies, the final kinetic
energy is less than the initial kinetic energy of the u  3 e – 1
system. (a) the velocity of ball B after collision is .
4
77. The inclined plane is smooth and horizontal plane is rough.
The ball placed at A collides elastically with similar ball u  2 e  1
(b) the velocity of ball B after collision is .
placed at C. After moving a distance R, the ball at C stops: 4
(c) After collision, ball A will move away by distance
d  2e 1
.
d  2e – 1
(d) After collision, ball A will move away by distance
d  e 1
.
 3e –1
@cbseinfinite
80. Two blocks A and B each of mass m are connected by a (a) Tension in the string is 17 mg/9
massless spring of natural length L and spring constant K.
(b) Tension in the string is 3 mg
The blocks are initially resting on a smooth horizontal floor
with the spring at its natural length, as shown. A third
2g
identical block C (of mass m) moves on the floor with a (c) The velocity of the block is
speed V along the line joining A and B and collides elastically 3
with A : (d) The maximum height attained by the pendulum bob
4
after impact is (measured from the lowest position)
9

82. Two particles of masses 5 kg and 3 kg are at a separation of
(a) the kinetic energy of (A – B) system at maximum 8 m. If the 5-kg mass is moved towards the 3-kg mass by a
compression of the spring is zero. distance of 1.8 m, then by what distance and in which
(b) the kinetic energy of (A – B) system at maximum direction the second particle should be moved so that the
2
compression of the spring is mV /4. centre of the system does not change (in m)?
83. Blocks A and B of mass 1 kg each are moving with 4 m/sec
(c) the maximum compression of the spring is V  m/K  and 2 m/sec, respectively, as shown in the figure. The
coefficient of friction for all surfaces is 0.10. Find the
distance by which the centre of mass travels before coming
(d) the maximum compression of the spring is V  m/ 2 K 
to rest (in m).
81. A pendulum bob of mass m connected to the end of an 84. Two balls A and B of masses 0.10 kg and 0.25 kg, repectively,
ideal string of length l is released from rest from horizontal are connected by a stretched spring. The system is placed
position as shown. At the lowest point, the bob makes an on a smooth table. The initial acceleration of B is 2 m/sec
2
elastic collision with a stationary block of mass 5m, which westwards when the system is released. Find the magnitude
is kept on a frictionless surface. Mark out the correct 2
and direction of the acceleration of A (in m/sec ) towards
statement(s) for the instant just after the impact. east.
85. Two blocks A and B of equal mass m = 1 kg are lying on a
smooth horizontal surface as shown in the figure. A spring
of force constant K = 200 N/m is fixed at one end of the
block A. Block B collides with block A with velocity
v0 = 2 m/sec. What will be the maximum compression of the
–1
spring (in 10 m)?
@cbseinfinite

1. Two particles of masses m1 and m2, in projectile motions, 4. A particle of mass m, moving in a circular path of radius R
have velocities v1 < v2 respectively at time t = 0. They with a constant speed v2 is located at point (2R, 0) at
  time t = 0 and a man starts moving with a velocity v1 along
collide at time t0. Their velocities become v '1 and v '2 at
the +ve of y-axis from origin at time t = 0. Calculate the
time 2t 0 while moving in air. The value of
linear momentum of the particle with respect to the man as
  
   
 a function of time. (2003)
 m1 v '1  m 2 v '2  –  m1 v1  m 2 v 2  is (2001)
   
(a) zero (b) (m1 + m2) gt0
1
(c) 2(m1 + m2) gt0 (d) (m + m2) gt0
2 1
2. A car P is moving with a uniform speed of 5 3 m/s towards

a carriage of mass 9 kg at rest kept on the rails at a point B
as shown in figure. The height AC is 120 m. Cannon balls 5. There is a rectangular plate of mass M kg, of dimensions
of 1 kg are fired from the car with an initial velocity 100 m/ (a × b). The plate is held in the horizontal position by striking
s at an angle 30° with the horizontal. The first cannon ball n small balls, each of mass m, per unit area per unit time.
hits the stationary carriage after a time t0 and sticks to it. These are striking in the dotted half region of the plate.
Determine t0. At t0, the second cannon ball is fired. Assume The balls are colliding elastically with velocity v. What is
that the resistive force between the rails and the carriage v?
is constant and ignore the vertical motion of the carriage
throughout. If the second ball also hits and sticks to the
carriage, what will be the horizontal velocity of the carriage
just after the second impact. (2001)
It is given : n = 100, M = 3kg, m = 0.01 kg

2
b = 2m, a = 1m, g = 10 m/s . (2006)
 ^  ^
6. Two balls, having linear momenta p1  p i and p 2  – p i ,

3. Two blocks of masses 10 kg and 4 kg are connected by a undergo a collision in free space. There is no external force
spring of negligible mass and placed on a frictionless  
horizontal surface. An impulse gives a velocity of 14 m/s acting on the balls. Let p '1 and p '2 be their final momenta.
to the heavier block in the direction of the lighter block. The following option(s) is/are NOT ALLOWED for any
The velocity of the centre of mass is (2002) non-zero value of p, a1, a2, b1, b2, c1 and c2. (2008)

(a) 3 m/s (b) 20 m/s  ^ ^ ^ ^ ^
(a) p '1  a1 i  b1 j  c1 k, p '2  a 2 i  b 2 j
(c) 10 m/s (d) 5 m/s  ^  ^
(b) p '1  c1 k, p '2  c 2 k
 ^ ^ ^  ^ ^ ^
(c) p '1  a1 i  b1 j  c1 k, p '2  a 2 i  b 2 j  c1 k
 ^ ^  ^ ^
(d) p '1  a1 i  b1 j, p '2  a 2 i  b 2 j
@cbseinfinite
7. A shell is fired from a cannon with a velocity v (m/s) at an 11. Two small particles of equal masses start moving in
angle  with the horizontal direction. At the highest point opposite directions from a point A in a horizontal circular
in its path it explodes into two pieces of equal mass. One of orbit. Their tangential velocities are v and 2 v respectively,
the pieces retraces its path to the cannon and the speed (in as shown in the figure. Between collisions, the particles
m/s) of the other piece immediately after the explosion is move with constant speeds. After making how many elastic
(2008) collisions, other than that at A, these two particles will
again reach the point A ? (2009)
(a) 3v cos  (b) 2v cos 
3 3
(c)  cos  (d)  cos 
2 2
Passage
A small block of mass M moves on a firctionless surface of
an inclined plane, as shown in figure. The angle of the
(a) 4 (b) 3
incline suddenly changes from 60° to 30° at point B. The
block is initially at rest at A. Assume that collisions between (c) 2 (d) 1
2
the block and the incline are totally inelastic (g = 10 m/s ) 12. Look at the drawing given in the figure, which has been
drawn with ink of uniform line-thickness. The mass of ink
used to draw each of the two inner circles, and each of the
two line segments is m. The mass of the ink used to draw
the outer circle is 6 m. The coordinates of the centres of the
different parts are : outer circle (0, 0), left inner circle (–a, a),
right inner circle (a, a), vertical line (0, 0) and horizontal line
(0, –a). The y–coordinate of the centre of mass of the ink in
this drawing is (2009)
8. The speed of the block at point B immediately after it strikes

the second incline is (2008)
(a) 60 m / s (b) 45 m / s
(c) 30 m / s (d) 15 m / s
a a
9. The speed of the block at point C, immediately before it (a) (b)
10 8
leaves the second incline is (2008)
a a
(c) (d)
(a) 120 m / s (b) 105 m / s 12 3
13. If the resultant of all the external forces acting on a system
(c) 90 m / s (d) 75 m / s of particles is zero, then from an inertial frame, one can
10. If collision between the block and the incline is completely surely say that (2009)
elastic, then the vertical (upward) component of the velocity (a) linear momentum of the systmem does not change in
of the block at point B, immediately after it strikes the second time
incline is (2008) (b) kinetic energy of the system does not change in time
(a) 30 m / s (b) 15 m / s (c) angular momentum of the system does not change in
time
(c) zero (d)  15 m / s (d) potential energy of the system does not change in time
@cbseinfinite
Multiple Choice Questions with One or More than One Correct Assertion & Reason
Answer (a) Both the Assertion and the Reason are correct and the
14. A point mass of 1 kg collides elastically with a stationary Reason is the correct explanation of the Assertion.
point mass of 5 kg. After their collision, the 1 kg mass (b) The Assertion and the Reason are correct but the Reason
reverses its direction and moves with a speed of 2 ms–1. is not the correct explanation of the Assertion.
Which of the following statement(s) is (are) correct for
(c) Our Assertion is true but the Reason is false.
the system of these two masses ? (2010)
(d) The statement of the Assertion is false but the Reason is
(a) Total momentum of the system is 3 kg ms–1.
true.
(b) Momentum of 5 kg mass after collision is 4 kg ms–1. 17. Statement I A point particle of mass m moving with speed
(c) Kinetic energy of the centre of mass is 0.75 J. v collides with stationary point particle of mass M. If the
(d) Total kinetic energy of the system is 4 J. 1 2
maximum energy loss possible is given as f  mv  , then
2 
Assertion & Reason  M 
f  .
(a) Both the Assertion and the Reason are correct and the Mm
Reason is the correct explanation of the Assertion. Statement II Maximum energy loss occurs when the particles
(b) The Assertion and the Reason are correct but the Reason get stuck together as a result of the collision. (2013)
is not the correct explanation of the Assertion. (a) A (b) B
(c) Our Assertion is true but the Reason is false. (c) C (d) D
(d) The statement of the Assertion is false but the Reason is 18. A flat plate is moving normal to its plane through a gas
true. under the action of a constant force F. The gas is kept at a
15. Satement I : Two particles moving in the same direction do very low pressure. The speed of the plate v is much less
not lose all their energy in a completely inelastic collision. than the average speed u of the gas molecules. Which of
Satement II : Principal of conservation of momentum holds the following options is/are true? (2018)
true for all kinds of collisions. (2010) (a) The pressure difference between the leading and
(a) A (b) B trailing faces of the plate is proportional to u
(c) C (d) D (b) The plate will continue to move with constant non-
zero acceleration, at all times
16. A ball of mass 0.2 kg rests on a vertical post of height 5 m.
A bullet of mass 0.01 kg, travelling with a velocity v m/s in (c) At a later time the external force F balances the resistive
a horizontal direction, hits the centre of the ball. After the force
collision, the ball and bullet travel independently. The ball (d) The resistive force experienced by the plate is
hits the ground at a distance of 20 m and the bullet at a proportional to v
distance of 100 m from the foot of the post. The initial 19. A spring-block system is resting on a frictionless floor as
velocity v of the bullet is (2011) shown in the figure. The spring constant is 2.0 Nm and
–1
the mass of the block is 2.0 kg. Ignore the mass of the
spring. Initially the spring is in unstretched condition.
Another block of mass 1.0 kg moving with a speed of 2.0
–1
ms collides elastically with the first block. The collision is
such that the 2.0 kg block does not hit the wall. The
distance, in metres, between the two blocks when the
spring returns to its unstretched position for the first time
after the collision is......................
(2018)
(a) 250 m/s (b) 250 2 m / s

(c) 400 m/s (d) 500 m/s
@cbseinfinite
20. A small particle of mass m moving inside a heavy, hollow

and straight tube along the tube axis undergoes elastic
collision at two ends. The tube has no friction and it is
closed at one end by a flat surface while the other end is
fitted with a heavy movable flat piston as shown in figure.
When the distance of the piston from closed end is L  L0
the particle speed is v  v0 . The piston is moved inward at
dL
a very low speed V such that V  v 0 . .Where dL is the
L
infinitesimal displacement of the piston. Which of the
following statement(s) is/are correct? (2019)
(a) After each collision with the piston, the particle speed
increases by 2V.
(b) If the piston moves inward by dL, the particle speed
increases by 2v
(c) The particle kinetic energy increases by a factor of 4
1
when the piston is moved inward from L 0 to L 0
2
(d) The rate at which the particle strikes the piston is v/L
CENTRE OF MASS, MOMENTUM AND

COLLISION
@cbseinfinite
ROTATIONAL MOTION 154
08
ROTATIONAL MOTION
SCAN CODE
ROTATIONAL MOTION
@cbseinfinite
Chapter
ROTATIONAL 08
MOTION 155
ROTATIONAL MOTION
1. KINEMATIC OF THE SYSTEM OF PARTICLES According to right hand thumb rule, if we curl the
fingers of right hand along the direction of angular
System of particles can move in different ways as displacement then the right-hand thumb gives us the
observed by us in daily life. To understand this, we need direction of angular velocity. It is always along the
to understand few new parameters. axis of the rotation.
Rigid body: A body in which distance between any two
(iii) Angular Acceleration
particles remain same regardless of any external changes.
Angular acceleration of an object about any point is
1.1 Kinematic of Rotational Motion rate of change of angular velocity about that point.
(i) Angular Displacement
Consider a particle moving from A to B in the
following figures.
Fig.8.3
dω d 2 θ
=
α =
dt dt 2
dω dθ dω
α= . =ω
Fig. 8.1 dt dθ dθ
Angle θ is the angular displacement of the particle ∆ω
α avg =
about O. ∆t
Unit: radian (rad).
Unit → Rad/s2.
(ii) Angular Velocity Angular acceleration is also a vector quantity.
The rate of change of angular displacement is called
If α is constant, then like equations of translatory
as angular velocity.
motion we can also write relations between ω, α θ
and t.
=
ω ω0 + αt
1
∆θ = ω0 t + αt 2
2
ω − ω0 = 2α∆θ
2 2
Here, ω0 is initial angular velocity and ω is final

angular velocity.
Fig. 8.2
Instantaneous Angular Velocity 1.2 Various Types of Motion
dθ
ω= (i) Translational Motion
dt
Average Angular Velocity A system is said to be in translational motion, if all the
∆θ particles within the system have same linear velocity
ω=
∆t Example: Motion of a rod as shown below.
Unit → Rad/s.
Angular velocity is a vector quantity whose
direction is given by right hand thumb rule.
SCAN CODE
ROTATIONAL MOTION
@cbseinfinite
1.3 Relationship Between Kinematics Variables

In general, if a body is rotating about any axis (fixed or
movable), with angular velocity ω and angular
acceleration α, then velocity of any point p with respect
to axis is
  
v p = ω× r
Fig. 8.4   
Example: Motion of body of car on a straight rod. a= a t + a r
  
at = α × r
  
a r = ω× v
Fig.8.5
In both the above examples, velocity of all the
particles is same as they all have equal displacements
in equal intervals of time.
(ii) Rotational Motion Fig.8.8
An object is said to be in pure rotational motion, when
all the points lying on the system are in circular Example
motion about one common fixed axis.
Fig.8.9
Fig.8.6
In pure rotational motion, angular velocity of all the
ωL
points is same about the fixed axis. vB = ωL and v A = , with directions as shown in the
2
(iii) Rotational + Translational motion figure above.
An object is said to be in rotational + translational Now in rotational + translational motion, we just
motion, when the particle is rotating with some superimpose velocity and acceleration of axis on the
angular velocity about a movable axis. velocity and acceleration of any point about the axis of
For Example rotation. (i.e.)
Fig.8.7 Fig.8.10

v = velocity of axis. v PO = ωRi
ω = Angular velocity of system about O. 
v O = vi
  
 vP − vO = v PO
  
⇒ v P =v PO + v O =( ωR + v ) i
SCAN CODE
ROTATIONAL MOTION
@cbseinfinite

Similarly, v QO = ωR j I = ∫ r 2 dm

v O = vi

∴ v Q= vi + ωR j
2. MOMENT OF INERTIA
Moment of inertia gives the measure of mass

Fig.8.13
distribution about an axis.
Keep in mind that here the quantity r is the perpendicular
I = ∑ mi ri2
distance of point mass from axis of rotation, not the
Where ri = Perpendicular distance of the i th mass from distance to the origin. To evaluate this integral, we must
the axis of rotation. express m in terms of r.
Moment of inertia is always defined about an axis. 2.3 Moment of Inertia of Some Important Bodies
(i) Circular Ring
Axis passing through the centre and perpendicular
to the plane of ring.
I = MR2
Fig.8.14
(ii) Hollow Cylinder
I = MR2
Fig.8.11
For example, moment of inertia for above case,
I = M1r12 + M 2 r22 + M 3 r32 + M 4 r42
• SI unit → kg-m2
• Gives the measure of rotational inertia and is
analogous to mass in linear motion. Fig.8.15
2.1 Moment of Inertia of a Discreet Particle System: (iii) Solid Cylinder and a Disc
About its geometrical axis as shown below
1
I = MR 2
2
Fig.8.12
Fig.8.16
I = M r + M r + M 3 r32
11
2 2
2 2
(iv) Sphere
2.2 Moment of Inertia of Continuous Bodies
Solid Sphere: Axis passing through the centre of
When the distribution of mass of a system of particle is mass
continuous, the discrete sum I = ∑ m1r12 is replaced by an 2
I = MR 2
integral. The moment of inertia of the whole body takes 5
the form
SCAN CODE
ROTATIONAL MOTION
@cbseinfinite
according to the parallel axis theorem:
Fig.8.17
Hollow Sphere:
Axis passing through the centre of mass,
Fig.8.21
2
I = MR 2 I=
P Icm + Md 2
3
(v) Thin Rod of length l: (ii) Perpendicular Axis Theorem:
Consider a planar body (i.e., a body of zero
• Axis passing through midpoint and thickness) of mass M. Let X and Y axes be two
perpendicular to length: mutually perpendicular lines in the plane of the
body. The axes intersect at origin O.
Fig.8.18
M 2
I=
12
• Axis passing through an end and perpendicular
Fig.8.22
to the rod:
Let I x = moment of inertia of the body about X–
axis.
Let I y = moment of inertia of the body about Y–
axis.
Then the moment of inertia of the body about Z–
Fig.8.19
axis (Passing through O and perpendicular to the
M 2
plane of the body) is given by:
I=
3 I=
z Ix + Iy
(vi) Rectangular Sheet: The above result is known as the perpendicular axis
• axis passing through centre of the rectangular theorem.
sheet
NOTE:
Perpendicular axis theorem is not valid for 3D bodies.
2.5 Radius of Gyration

If M is the mass and I is the moment of inertia of a rigid
body about a given axis then the radius of gyration (K)
of the body about that axis is given by :
Fig.8.20
I
I =M
( a + b2 )
2 K=
M
12 R
e.g.= =
K ring R, K disc (About an axis passing
2.4 Theorems on Moment of Inertia 2
(i) Parallel Axis Theorem: Let I CM be the moment through the com and perpendicular to the plane of body)
of inertia of a body about an axis through its centre
of mass and let I P be the moment of inertia of the
same body about another axis which is parallel to
the first one. If d is the distance between these two
parallel axes and M is the mass of the body then
SCAN CODE
ROTATIONAL MOTION
@cbseinfinite
3. ROTATIONAL DYNAMICS • If ∑ τ = 0 , then the body is said to be in

rotational equilibrium.
3.1 Torque • If ∑ F = 0 along with ∑ τ = 0 , then body is
said to be in mechanical equilibrium
Similar to force, the cause of rotational motion is a (Translation and rotational equilibrium).
physical quantity called a torque/moment of • If two forces of equal magnitude, opposite
force/angular force. direction and do not share a line of action act
Torque incorporates the following factors. to produce same torque, then they constitute a
• Amount of force. couple. It does not produce any translation,
• Point of application of force. only rotation.
• Direction of application of force. • For calculating torque, it is very important to
Combining all the above, know the effective point of application of
Torque about point O,
   force.
τ = r ×F
3.2 Newton's Law in Rotation
= τ r.Fsin θ
Where, ∑τ = Iα
r = distance from the point O to point of application of
Where, I = moment of Inertia
force.
F = force
  α = Angular Acceleration
θ = angle between r and F
3.3 Equilibrium of Rigid Bodies
The conditions of equilibrium for a rigid body are
different from that of a particle. Unlike particle such as
bodies, rigid bodies have a tendency to rotate, therefore,
one must consider the rotational equilibrium also, in
addition to the translational equilibrium.
The equations of equilibrium (in two dimensions) for a
rigid body are stated as:

Fig. 8.23 Translational equilibrium: ∑ F = 0

Rotational equilibrium: ∑τ C = 0
Magnitude of torque can also be rewritten as
=τ rF⊥ =
or τ r⊥ F Note that for rotational equilibrium of a rigid body, the
Where, net torque about its centre of mass must be zero.
F⊥ = component of force in the direction perpendicular Action of two forces on a particle and a rigid body is
 shown in Figs. 8.24 and 8.25.
to r.
A particle is in equilibrium under the action of two equal
r⊥ = component of distance in the direction and opposite forces.

perpendicular to F.
(i) Direction of Torque:
Direction of torque is given by right hand thumb
rule. If we curl the fingers of right hand from first


()
vector ( r ) to the second vector F then right-
hand thumb gives us direction of their cross
product, i.e., the torque.
(ii) Some Important Points about Torque:
Torque is always defined about a point or about an ∑F = 0
axis. ∑τ = 0
C
When there are multiple forces, the net torque
needs to be calculated. i.e., all torque about same Fig. 8.24
point/axis. The body have both translational and rotational
   
τnet = τF1 + τF2 + ...τFn equilibrium.
SCAN CODE
ROTATIONAL MOTION
@cbseinfinite
A rigid body may or may not be in equilibrium under the

action of two equal and opposite forces. 4. ANGULAR MOMENTUM AND
ANGULAR IMPULSE
4.1 Angular Momentum

(i) For a particle
Angular momentum about a point (O) is given as
      
( )
L = r × p = r × mv = m r × v ( )

where r is position vector of the particle w.r.t. O
∑F = 0 
and v is velocity of particle
∑τ ≠ 0
C
(ii) For a particle moving in a circle
Fig. 8.25 For a particle moving in a circle of radius r with a
speed v, its linear momentum is mv, magnitude of
The body is in translational equilibrium but not in angular momentum (L) is given as :
rotational equilibrium.
= =
L mvr⊥ mvr
Figures 8.26 and 8.27 show equilibrium of a rigid body
under the action of three parallel or concurrent forces. As θ being 90°, sin 90° =1

A rigid body may be in equilibrium under the action of Direction of L is out of the plane of circle.
three forces if their lines of action are parallel to each
other.
Fig.8.28
(iii) For a rigid body (about a fixed axis)
L = sum of angular momentum of all particles
about that axis
⇒=
L m1 v1r1 + m 2 v 2 r2 + m3 v3 r3 + ....
Fig. 8.26
A rigid body may be in equilibrium under the action of
⇒ L = m1r12 ω + m 2 r22 ω + m3 r32 ω + .... (v = rω)
three concurrent forces (concurrent means having a ⇒=
L (m r
1 1
2
+ m r + m r + ....) ω
2
2 2
2
3 3
common point of application). ⇒ L =ω

I
Angular momentum is also a vector and its

direction is same as that of ω
We know that,
 
L = Iω
 
dL d ω  
=I = Iα = τnet (Considering I constant)
dt dt
Similar to the definition of linear force in linear
motion, Torque can be defined as the rate of change
Fig. 8.27 of angular momentum.
SCAN CODE
ROTATIONAL MOTION
@cbseinfinite
4.2 Conservation of Angular Momentum The total kinetic energy of a body which is translating
 as well as rotating is given by :
If τnet =
0 =K K translational + K rotational

dL 1 1
⇒ =0 =
K 2
MVCM + ICM ω2
dt 2 2

⇒L= constant Where,
  VCM = speed of the centre of mass
⇒ Lf = Li ICM = moment of inertia about axis passing through CM.
ω = angular velocity of rotation
4.3 Angular Impulse
   6. ROLLING
∫ dt =∆L
J =τ
Rolling motion is a combination of rotation and
translation
5. WORK AND ENERGY In case of rolling all point of a rigid body have same
angular speed but different linear speed.
5.1 Work Done by a Torque
Consider a rigid body acted upon by a force F at
perpendicular distance r from the axis of rotation.
Suppose that under this force, the body rotates through
an angle dθ.
Work done = force × displacement
Fig.8.29
= F(rdθ)
dW 6.1 Pure Rolling (without Slipping)
⇒ dW =τdθ
For a rolling motion to be pure rolling the velocity of
⇒ Work done = (torque) × (angular displacement) point of contact of body with platform should be equal
for both rolling body and platform.
⇒W= ∫ τdθ ( Where τ is function of θ )
dW dθ
Power = = τ = τω
dt dt
5.2 Kinetic Energy
Rotational kinetic energy of the system rotating about a Fig.8.30
fixed axis
1 1 (i) General case (when surface is moving)
= m1 v12 + m 2 v 22 + ....
2 2 VA = VB
1 1 ⇒ Vcm − ωR = VB
= m1r12 ω2 + m 2 r22 ω2 + ....
2 2
In terms of acceleration: a cm − αR = a B
=
1
2
( )
m1r22 + mr22 + m3 r32 + .... ω2 (ii) Special case (when VB = 0)
1 2 Vcm − ωR = 0
Hence rotational kinetic energy of the system= Iω
2 ⇒ Vcm =
ωR
Where I = Moment of inertia about the axis.
6.2 Total KE of Rolling Body
NOTE:
Comparing the expression of rotational kinetic energy
with 1/2 mv2, we can say that the role of moment of
inertia (I) is same in rotational motion as that of mass in
linear motion. It is a measure of the resistance offered by
a body to a change its rotational motion. Fig. 8.31
SCAN CODE
ROTATIONAL MOTION
@cbseinfinite
1 6.5 Rolling and Sliding Motion on an Inclined Plane

(i) =
K I P ω2
2 (i) Pure rolling on an incline plane
or
1 1
(ii) =
K Icm ω2 + MVcm
2
2 2
Here,
(a) I=
P Icm + MR 2 (parallel axes theorem)
(b) Vcm = ωR (condition for pure rolling)
Fig.8.34
NOTE: g sin θ
aR =
Friction is responsible for the motion, but work done or I
1+
dissipation of energy against friction is zero in pure mR 2
rolling motion as point of application has zero velocity. If initial velocity of body is zero then by using
equation of motion,
2g sin θ h
6.3 Forward Slipping VR2 − 02 =
I sin θ
1+
MR 2
2gh
⇒ VR =
I
1+
MR 2
1 2h  I 
Fig.8.32 =
Also, t R 1 + 
sin θ g  MR 2 
The bottom most point slides in the forward direction Where, VR = Final velocity of com of rolling body,
w.r.t. ground, so friction force acts opposite to velocity
tR = Time taken by body to reach the ground,
at lowest point i.e., opposite to direction of motion.
(ii) Sliding on an incline plane
Example: When sudden brakes are applied to car its ‘v’
remain same while ‘ωr’ decreases so it slides on the
ground.
6.4 Backward Slipping
Fig.8.35
Using energy conservation,
1
mVs2 = mgh
Fig.8.33 2
The bottom most point slides in the backward direction ⇒ Vs = 2gh
w.r.t. ground, so friction force acts opposite to velocity Component of acceleration along incline is g sinθ.
i.e., friction will act in the direction of motion. Time taken by body to reach ground by sliding:
h 1
Example: When car starts on a slippery ground, its = g sin θ t s2
wheels have small ‘v’ but large ‘ωr’ so wheels slips on sin θ 2
the ground and friction acts against slipping. 1 2h
⇒ ts = .
sin θ g
SCAN CODE
ROTATIONAL MOTION
@cbseinfinite
Now, if F or b (or both) is increased, distance a also

7.TOPPLING
increases. But it cannot go beyond the right edge
of the block. So, in extreme case (beyond which the
You might have seen in your practical life that if a block will topple down), the normal reaction
force F is applied to a block A of smaller width and
passes through E as shown in (b) Fig. 8.38
greater height it is more likely to topple down before
sliding while if the same force F is applied to another Now, if F or b is further increased, the block will
block B of broader base, chances of its sliding are topple down. This is why the block having the
more compared to its toppling. broader base has less chances of toppling in
comparison to a block of smaller base. Because the
block of larger base has more margin for the normal
reaction to shift. On the similar ground we can see
why the rolling is so easy.
Fig.8.36
Have you ever thought why it happens so? To
understand it in a better way let us take an example.
Suppose a force F is applied at a height b above the
base AE of the block.
Further, suppose the friction f is sufficient to prevent
sliding.
Fig.8.39
Because in this case the normal reaction has zero
margin to shift.
So even if the body is in translational equilibrium
Fig.8.37
(F = f, N = mg) an unbalanced torque is left behind
In this case, if the normal reaction N also passes and the body starts toppling and here the toppling
through C, then despite the fact that the block is in means motion. Under ideal conditions, the body will
translational equilibrium (F = f and N = mg), an start moving by a very small force F tending to zero
unbalanced torque (due to the couple of forces F and also.
f ) is there.
This torque has a tendency to topple the block about
point E. To cancel the effect of this unbalanced
torque the normal reaction N is shifted towards right
a distance ‘a’ (as shown in (a) of Fig.8.38) such that,
net anticlockwise torque is equal to the net
clockwise torque or Fb = ( mg ) a
Fb
or a =
mg
Fig.8.38
SCAN CODE
ROTATIONAL MOTION
@cbseinfinite
SUMMARY
1. Ideally a rigid body is one for which the distances (2) It is in rotational equilibrium, i.e., the total
between different particles of the body do not change, external torque on it is zero:
  
even though there are forces acting on them. ∑=
τ ∑r t t ×=
Ft 0.
2. A rigid body fixed at one point or along a line can have
10. The centre of gravity of an extended body is that point
only rotational motion. A rigid body not fixed in some
about which the total gravitational torque on the body
way can have either pure translational motion or a
is zero.
combination of translational and rotational motions.
11. The moment of inertia of a rigid body about an axis is
3. In rotation about a fixed axis, every particle of the rigid
body moves in a circle which lies in a plane defined by the formula I = ∑m r
i i
2
where ri is the
perpendicular to the axis and has its centre on the axis. perpendicular distance of the ith point of the body from
Every point in the rotating rigid body has the same the axis.
angular velocity at any instant of time.
12. The theorem of parallel axes:=
I ' I com + Ma 2 , allows
4. In pure translation, every particle of the body moves
us to determine the moment of inertia of a rigid body
with the same velocity at any instant of time.
about an axis as the sum of the moment of inertia of the
5. Angular velocity is a vector quantity. Its magnitude is body about a parallel axis through its centre of mass
dθ and the product of mass and square of the perpendicular
ω= and it is directed along the axis of rotation. For
dt distance between these two axes.

rotation about a fixed axis this vector ω has a fixed 13. Rotation about a fixed axis is directly analogous to
direction. linear motion in respect of kinematics and dynamics.
6. The linear velocity of a particle of a rigid body rotating 14. The kinetic energy of rotation about an axis is
   
about a fixed axis is given by v = ω× r, where r is the K=
1 2
Iω .
position vector of the particle with respect to an origin 2
along the fixed axis. The relation applies even to more 15. For a rigid body rotating about a fixed axis of rotation,
general rotation of a rigid body with one point fixed. In L = Iω, where I is the moment of inertia about that axis.

that case r is the position vector of the particle with 16. The angular acceleration of a rigid body rotating about
respect to the fixed point taken as the origin. a fixed axis is given by Iα = τ.
7. The angular momentum of a system of n particles about 17. If the external torque τ acting on the body about the axis
the origin is is zero, then angular momentum about the axis (L = Iω)
 n   of such a rotating body is constant.
=L ∑r t × pt
t =1 18. For rolling motion without slipping on ground vcm =
8. The torque or moment of force on a system of n Rω, where vcm is the velocity of translation (i.e., of the
particles about the origin is centre of mass), R is the radius and m is the mass of the
body. The kinetic energy of such a rolling body is the
 n  
=τ ∑r
t =1
t × Ft sum of kinetic energies of translation and rotation:
1 1
9. A rigid body is in mechanical equilibrium if K= 2
mv cm + Icm ω2
2 2
(1) It is in translational equilibrium, i.e., the total

external force on it is zero: ∑F t = 0, and
SCAN CODE
ROTATIONAL MOTION
@cbseinfinite
SOLVED EXAMPLES
0 = 0 and = 0 by substituting these values :
Example - 1
2
A flywheel of radius 30 cm starts from rest and accelerates 0 – 0 = 9t – 6t
2
with constant acceleration of 0.5 rad/s . Compute the Solving for t, we obtain t = 9/6 = 1.50 s
tangential, radial and resultant accelerations of a point on From  = ddt, we have
its circumference :
0
(a) Initially at  = 0°
 9t  6t  dt  4.5 t
t t
   dt   2t 3
2 2
(b) After it has made one third of a revolution.
0 0
Sol. (a) At the start :
2
 = 0.5 rad/s Substituting 0 = 0 and t = 1.5 s, we obtain
R = 0.3 m 2 3
 = i = 0 rad/s 0 = 4.5 (1.5) – 2 (1.5) = 3.375 rad
2
Radial acceleration = ar =  R = 0 m/s Example - 3
2
Tangential acceleration = at = R = (0.3) (0.5) = 0.15 m/s In the given figure, calculate the linear acceleration of the
Net acceleration = anet blocks.
 a 2r  a 2t  0 2  0.152  0.15 m / s 2
(b) After  = 120° (2 /3) :
2f  i2  2  0  20.52 / 3
B
2 A
 f  rad / s
3 Mass of block A = 10 kg
a r   R  2 / 3 0.3   / 5 m / s
2 2 Mass of block B = 8 kg
2
Mass of disc shaped pulley = 2 kg (take g = 10 m/s )
a t  R  0.3 0.5  0.15 m / s 2
Sol. Let R be the radius of the pulley and T1 and T2 be the
2
 0.15  0.646 m/s2
2
a net  a 2r  a 2t  tensions in the left and right portions of the string.
25
Let m1 = 10 kg ; m2 = 8 kg ; M = 2 kg.
Example - 2
A wheel mounted on a stationary axle starts at rest and is Let a be the acceleration of blocks.
given the following angular acceleration :
T1 T2
 = 9 – 12 t (in SI units)
where t is the time after the wheel begins to rotate. Find
the number of radians that the wheel turns before it stops
(and begins to turn in the opposite direction). m1g m2g
Sol. The kinematic equations do not apply because the angular

acceleration  is not constant. For the blocks (linear motion)
We start with the basic definition :  = d/dt to write (i) T1 – m1g = m1a
(ii) m2g – T2 = m2a
t t
  0    dt   9  12 t  dt  9 t  6t 2
(in SI units) For the pulley (rotation)
0 0
Net torque = I
We find the elapsed time t between
@cbseinfinite
When the rod is horizontal /2 and = 3g/2L.

The tangential linear acceleration of the free end is
T1 T2 3g
a t  L 
2
1 Example - 5
(iii) T2R – T1R = MR 2 
2 A turntable rotates about a fixed vertical axis, making one
revolution in 10 s. The moment of inertia of the turntable
The linear acceleration of blocks is same as the tangential 2
about the axis is 1200 kg m . A man of mass 80 kg initially
acceleration of any point on the circumference of the pulley standing at the centre of the turntable, runs out along a
which is R. radius. What is the angular velocity of the turntable when
(iv) a = R the man is 2m from the centre ?
Dividing (iii) by R and adding to (i) and (ii), Sol.
M
m 2 g  m1g  m 2 a  m1a  R
2
 M
 m 2 g  m1 g   m 2  m 1   a
 2
a
m 2  m1
g 
10  8g 
20
m / s2
M 2 19 I0 = initial moment of inertia of the system
m 2  m1  10  8 
2 2
I0 = Iman + Itable
Example - 4 2
I0 = 0 + 1200 = 1200 kg m
A uniform rod of length L and mass M is pivoted freely at
(Iman = 0 as the man is at the axis)
one end.
(a) What is the angular acceleration of the rod when I = final moment of inertia of the system
it is at angle to the vertical ? I = Iman + Itable
(b) What is the tangential linear acceleration of the 2
I = mr + 1200
free end when the rod is horizontal ? The moment of
1
inertia of a rod about one end is ML2
3
Sol. The figure shows the rod at an angle to the vertical. If we
2m
take torques about the pivot we need not be connected
with the force due to the pivot.
2 2
+ I = 80 (2) + 1200 = 1520 kg m
By conservation of angular momentum :
I0 0 = I
mg Now 0 = 2/T0 = 2/10 = /5 rad/s
The torque due to the weight is mgL/2 sin so the second I 0 0 1200  
  = 0.51 rad/s
law for the rotational motion is I 1520  5
mgL ML2 3 g sin 

sin    Thus  
2 3 2L
@cbseinfinite
A meter stick lies on a frictionless horizontal table. It has A solid sphere of radius r and mass m rolls without slipping
a mass M and is free to move in any way on the table. A down the track shown in the figure. At the end of its run
hockey puck m, moving as shown with speed v collide at point Q its center–of–mass velocity is directed upward.
elastically with the stick.
M
centre
m v R
(a) What is the velocity of the puck after impact ?

(a) Determine the force with which the sphere presses
(b) What is the velocity of the CM and the angular velocity
against the track at B.
of the stick after impact ?
(b) Upto what height does the CM rise after it leaves
Sol. Before Collision After Collision the track ?
Sol. (a) From A to B
M Loss in GPE = gain in KE
VCM
1 1
m v m v1 mg 10 R   2
m Vcm  I cm 12
2 1
2
There is no external impulse on the system. For rolling without slipping on a fixed surface.
 Linear momentum is conserved and Angular momentum Vcm1 = R1
about any point is conserved. The CM follows a circular path of radius R – r
(i) Pi = Pf 2
mVcm
mv = mv1 + MVCM ...(i) AT B, net force towards centre = N – mg =
R r
(ii) (LCM)i = (LCM)f about CM of rod.
m 100 gR  mg 107 R  7 r 
 N  mg  7  R  r   7 R  r
 mv1 
mv  0   ICM  ...(ii)
2 2 (b) From A to Q, mg (9R + r)
2
(iii) At colliding points 1 1  Vcm 2 
 2
mv cm  I cm  

Vsep = eVapp 2 2
2  r 
   V cm 2  r2 at Q 
 VCM    v1   ev ...(iii)
 2 
e = 1 (Elastic collision) Top

A
Solving (i), (ii) and (iii) we get :
 4m  M  2m
v1    v ; VCM  v
 4m  M  4m  M  10 R + r
Q
 12 m  v
   
 4 m  M   
B
@cbseinfinite
From Q to P,  does not change because about C.M torque

g sin  mg sin 
is zero in air. A CM  2
and f 
k R2
gain in GPE = loss in KE 1 2 1 2
R k
1 2
 mg × gain in height = mVcm We can also derive the condition for pure rolling (rolling
2 2
without slipping) :
2
Vcm 5
 h 2
 9R  r  To avoid slipping, f < sN
2g 7
g sin 
52 R 5 r   s mg cos 
 height above the base = R + h =  1 R 2 / k 2
7 7
Example - 8 tan 
 s 
A rigid body of radius of gyration k and radius R rolls R2
1 2
(without slipping) down a plane inclined at an angle  k
with horizontal. Calculate its acceleration and the frictional
force acting on it. This is the condition on s so that the body rolls without
slipping.
Sol. When the body is placed on the inclined plane, it tries to
slip down and hence a static friction f acts upwards. This Example - 9
friction provides a torque which causes the body to rotate.
A particle of mass m is subject to an attractive central
Let ACM be the linear acceleration of centre of mass and  2
force of magnitude k/r where k is a constant. At the
be the angular acceleration of the body.
instant when the particle is at an extreme position in its
From force diagram : closed elliptical orbit, its distance from the centre of force
For linear motion parallel to the plane
k
mg sin  – f = ma is ‘a’ and its speed is 2 ma . Calculate its distance from
For rotation around the axis through centre of mass
force-centre when it is at the other extreme position.
2
Net torque = I  f R = (mk ) 
Sol. Let P be the particle and C be the force–centre. P1 and P2
N are its extreme positions at distance r1 and r2 from C.
f
v1
r1 = a r2 P2
P1 C
v2
As there is no slipping, the point of contact of the body k

with plane is instantaneously at rest. We have r1 = a and v1 = 2 ma
 v = R  and ACM = R
As the force is directed towards C, torque about C is zero.
Solve the following three equations for a and f :
Hence we will apply conservation of angular momentum
mg sin  – f = m
about C and conservation of energy.
2
f R = mk  2
F = k/r
ACM = R
@cbseinfinite
 Potential energy (U) = –k/r K   mv 20    mv 02  2mv 02  mv 02 

(Compare the expression of force with gravitational force)
From conservation of energy,  K  5mv 02
total energy at P1 = total energy at P2
Example - 11
1 k 1 k 
mv12     mv 22    Figures shows four rotating disks that are sliding across a
2  r1  2  r2  frictionless floor. Three forces act on each disk, either at
From conervation of angular momentum about C, the rim, at the centre, or halfway between rim and centre.
m v1 r1 = m v2 r2 Which disks are in equilibrium:
We have to find r2. Hence we eliminate v2.
2
1 k 1 v r  k
mv12   m  1 1  
2 r1 2  r2  r2
k
Substituting v1 = 2 ma and r1 = a
1 k k 1 ma 2 k 
m   
2 2ma a 2 r22 2 ma r2
 3r22  4 ar2  a 2  0
 r2 = a, a/3
The other extreme position is at a distance of a/3 from C.
(a) A, D (b) A, B
Example - 10 (c) C, D (d) A, C
Sol. (d)
A ring of mass m and radius R has four particles each of  
mass m attached to the ring as shown in figure. The centre For the equlibrium,  F  0 and    0
of ring has a speed v0. The kinetic energy of the system is
For Disk A

 F  3F  2F  F  0
 R
   3F  0  F  R  2F   0
2
For Disk B

 F  2F  F  F  4F

   2F  0  F  R  F  R  0
(a) mv 02 (b) 3mv02
For Disk C
(c) 5mv 20 (d) 6mv 02 
Ans. (c)  F  F  F  2F  0

   2F  0  F  R  F  R  0
Sol. K = Kring + Kparticles
For Disk D
1 1 
K   mv02  I2 

 F  2F  F  F  0
2 2  
   F  0  F  R  2F  R  3FR
1
 1
 1
  
2 2
  m 2v0  m  2v0   m
2
2v 0  0
2 2 2  We can clearly see that only disk A and C are in
v0 equilibrium.
Also   , I  mR 2
R
@cbseinfinite
Example - 12 Sol. Considering pure rotation about O, in figure

OQ > OC > OP, VQ > VC > VP
A string is wrapped over the edge of a uniform disk and
its free end is fixed to the ceiling, the disk moves down
unwinding the string with an acceleration equal to
2 3
(a) g (b) g
3 2
2 g
(c) g (d)
7 2
Ans. (a)
Sol.
Example - 14
In the figure mass m1 slides without friction on the
horizontal surface, the frictionless pulley is in the form of
a cylinder of mass M and radius R, and a string turns the
pulley without slipping. Find the acceleration of each
mass, and tension in each part of the string.
a cm  R ...(i)
mg  T  ma cm ...(ii)
2
mR a cm
TR  
2 R
ma cm
T ...(iii)
2 Sol. Step I: Analysis of motion:
From eq.(ii) and (iii) In this case the string rotates the pulley, i.e., the string
does not slide. The pulley will have angular acceleration.
2 Hence, the tension on the string on both the sides of the
a cm  g
3 pulley will not be equal. The motion of m1 and m2 will be
Example - 13 translational.
Positive direction of angular acceleration  is taken along
A disc rolls without slipping on a horizontal surface with
constant angular velocity  . P and Q are two points the corresponding acceleration a1 which is taken positive
such that their distance from center C is same. If VC, VQ in the direction of net force.
and VP are the respective magnitude of velocities of C, Q Step II: Equation of motion:
and P then Let these be T 1 and T 2 . The equation of motion
respectively, for masses m1 and m2 is
T1  m1a … (i)
and m2 g  T2  m2 a … (ii)
(a) VP < VQ < VC (b) VQ < VC < VP
1
(c) VQ > VC > VP (d) VQ  VC , VP  VC
2
Ans. (c)
@cbseinfinite
Step III: Application of torque equation: h

The cylinder will topple if  mg sin     mg cos  r
The torque equation for the pulley, 2
T2 R  T1R  I … (iii) 2r
or tan   ...(ii)
( N 2 constitutes no torque about the axis of rotation) h
There is no slipping of the string over the pulley. Thus, the condition of sliding is tan   
Step IV: Constraint Relation: 2r
and condition of toppling is tan  
a h
a  R    … (iv)
R 2r
Hence, the cylinder will slide before toppling if  
From eqs. (iii) and (iv), we get h
a 2r
T2 R  T1R  I (b) The cylinder will topple before sliding if  
R h
Ia Example - 16
or T2  T1  … (v)
R2 From a circular disc of radius R and mass 9M, a small disc
Step V: Solving equations: of radius R/3 is removed from the disc. The moment of
Solving the above equation, we get inertia of the remaining disc about an axis perpendicular
m2 g to the plane of the disc and passing through O is:
a
 I 
 m1  m2  2 
 R 
MR 2
Here, I 
2
 I 
m1m2 g  m1  2  m2 g
T1   R 
 I  T2 
 m1  m2  2  and  I 
 m1  m2  2 
 R 
 R 
Example - 15
A uniform cylinder of height h and radius r is placed with 40
(a) 4 MR2 (b) MR2
its circular face on a rough inclined plane and the inclina- 9
tion of the plane to the horizontal is gradually increased.
37
If  is the coefficient of friction, then under what condi- (c) 10 MR2 (d) MR2
tion the cylinder will 9
(a) slide before toppling Ans. (a)
Mass of original disc  9M    πR 
2
Sol.
(b) topple before sliding
Sol. (a) The cylinder will slide if  R2 
 Mass of disc cut, M  = σ  π 9 M
 
2
1 R2  2R 
MOI of disc cut about O, I= M +M  
2 9  3 
MOI of remaining disc = MOI of original disc - MOI of disc cut.
1 1 
 (9M)R 2 -  MR 2 
2 2 
mg sin    mg cos
or tan    … (i)  4MR 2
@cbseinfinite

Introduction to Rotational Motion 8. An electric fan has blades of length 30 cm as measured
from the axis of rotation. If the fan is rotating at
1. The driving side belt has a tension of 1600 N and the 1200 rpm, the acceleration of a point on the tip of a
slack side has 500 N tension. The belt turns a pulley blade is about:
40 cm in radius at a rate of 300 rpm. This pulley drives (a) 4740 m/sec2 (b) 5055 m/sec2
a dynamo having 90% efficiency. How many (c) 1600 m/sec 2
(d) 2370 m/sec2
kilowatts are being delivered by the dynamo?
(a) 12.4 (b) 6.2 Moment of Inertia
(c) 24.8 (d) 13.77 9. The moment of inertia of a body does not depend on:
2. The angular velocity of a wheel increases from (a) the mass of the body
100 rps to 300 rps in 10 s. The angle rotated (in (b) the angular velocity of the body
radians) by the wheel is: (c) the axis of rotation of the body
(a) 600 (b) 1500 (d) the distribution of the mass in the body
(c) 1000 (d) 2000 10. Three point masses m1, m2 and m3 are located at the
3. When a ceiling fan is switched off, its angular velocity vertices of an equilateral triangle of side ‘a’. What is
falls to half while it makes 36 rotations. How many the moment of inertia of the system about an axis
more rotations will it make before coming to rest? along the altitude of the triangle passing through m1?
[Assume constant average angular retardation]
a2 a2
(a) 24 (b) 36 (a) ( m1 + m2 ) (b) ( m2 + m3 )
4 4
(c) 18 (d) 12
a2 a2
4. A rigid body rotates about a fixed axis with variable (c) ( m1 + m3 ) (d) ( m1 + m2 + m3 )
angular velocity equal to α − β t at time t where 4 4
11. A circular disc X of radius R is made from an iron
α and β are constants. The angle through which it
plate of thickness t, and another disc Y of radius 4R is
rotates before it comes to rest is: made from an iron plate of thickness t/4. Then the
α2 α2 − β2 relation between the moment of inertia IX and IY is :
(a) (b)
2β 2α (a) IY = 32 IX (b) IY = 16 IX
(c) IY = IX (d) IY = 64 IX
α2 − β2 α (α − β )
(c) (d) 12. The ratio of the squares of radii of gyration of a
2β 2
circular disc and a circular ring of the same radius
5. A wheel is subjected to uniform angular acceleration about a tangential axis is:
about its axis. Initially, its angular velocity is zero. In (a) 1:2 (b) 5:6
the first 2 s, it rotates through an angle θ1 , in the next (c) 2:3 (d) 2:1
θ2 13. Moment of inertia of a uniform annular disc of
2s, it rotates through an angle θ 2 . The ratio of is:
θ1 internal radius r and external radius R and mass M
about an axis through its centre and perpendicular to
(a) 1 (b) 2
its plane is:
(c) 3 (d) 5
1 1
6. The linear velocity of a particle on the equator is (a) M (R2 − r 2 ) (b) M (R2 + r 2 )
nearly (radius of the earth is 4000 miles): 2 2
(a) zero (b) 10 miles/hr M (R4 + r 4 ) 1 M (R4 + r 4 )
(c) (d)
(c) 100 miles/hr (d) 1000 miles/hr 2( R 2 + r 2 ) 2 (R2 − r 2 )
7. A stone of mass m is tied to a string of length L and 14. For the same total mass which of the following will
rotated in a circle with a constant speed v; if the string have the largest moment of inertia about an axis
is released the stone files: passing through the centre of gravity and
(a) Radially outward perpendicular to the plane of the body?
(b) Radially inward (a) A disc of radius a
(c) Tangentially (b) A ring of radius a
mv 2 (c) A square lamina of side 2a
(d) With an acceleration
L (d) Four roads forming square of side 2a
@cbseinfinite
15. If the radius of a solid sphere is 35 cm, calculate the 21. The moment of inertia of a metre stick of mass 300
radius of gyration when the axis is along a tangent: gm, about an axis at right angles to the stick and
(a) 7 10cm (b) 7 35 cm located at 30 cm mark, is:
(a) 8.3 × 105 g − cm 2 (b) 5.8 g − cm 2
7 2
(c) cm (d) cm
5 5 (c) 3.7 × 105 g − cm 2 (d) none of these
16. The moment of inertia of a straight thin rod of mass 22. The moment of inertia of a solid sphere about an axis
M, length L about an axis perpendicular to its length 2
passing through centre of gravity is MR 2 ; then its
and passing through its one end is: 5
1 1 radius of gyration about a parallel axis at a distance
(a) ML2 (b) ML2
12 3 2R from first axis is:
1 2 22
(c) ML (d) ML2 (a) 5R (b) R
2 5
17. A closed tube partly filled with water lies in a 5 12
horizontal plane. If the tube is rotated about (c) R (d) R
2 5
perpendicular bisector, the moment of inertia of the
23. Four spheres of diameter 2a and mass M are placed
system:
with their centres on the four corners of a square of
(a) increases
side b. Then the moment of inertia of the system about
(b) decreases
an axis along one of the sides of the square is:
(c) remains constant
4 8
(d) depends on sense of rotation (a) Ma 2 + 2 Mb 2 (b) Ma 2 + 2 Mb 2
18. Two rings of same mass (m) and radius (r) are placed 5 5
such that their centres are at a common point and their 8 4
(c) Ma 2 (d) Ma 2 + 4 Mb 2
planes are perpendicular to each other. The moment 5 5
of inertia of the system about an axis passing through 24. For the given uniform square lamina ABCD, whose
the centre and perpendicular to the plane of one of the centre is O, Choose the correct statement about
rings is moment of inertial about certain axes.
1
(a) mr 2 (b) mr2
2
3
(c) mr 2 (d) 2mr2
2
19. What is the moment of inertia I of a uniform solid
sphere of mass M and radius R, pivoted about an axis
that is tangent to the surface of the sphere?
(a) 2 I AC = I EF (b) IAD = 3IEF
(c) IAC = IEF (d) I AC = 2 I EF
25. Moment of inertia of a circular wire of mass M and
radius R about its diameter is:
MR 2
(a) (b) MR2
2 3 2
(a) MR 2 (b) MR 2
3 5 MR 2
(c) 2MR2 (d)
6 7 4
(c) MR 2 (d) MR 2 26. One solid sphere A and another hollow sphere B are
5 5
of same mass and same outer radii. Their moments of
20. The moment of inertia of a solid cylinder of mass M,
inertia about their diameters are respectively IA and IB
radius R and length L about its axis
such that
(a) ML2 (b) MR2 (a) IA = IB (b) IA > IB
MR 2 MR 2 I d
(c) (d) (c) IA < IB (d) A = A
L 2 IB d B
@cbseinfinite
27. Three-point masses, each of mass M, are placed at the 33. A uniform rod is kept on a frictionless horizontal table
corners of an equilateral triangle of side L. Then the and two forces F1 and F2 are acted as shown in figure.
moment of inertia of this system about an axis along The line of action of force FR1 (which produces same
one side of the triangle is:
torque) is at a perpendicular distance ‘C’ from O. Now
(a) 3ML2 (b) ML2 F1 and F2 are interchanged and F1 is reversed. The new
3 3 forces FR2 (which produces torque of same magnitude
(c) ML2 (d) ML2
4 2 in the present case) has its line of action at a distance
28. Moment of inertia of a uniform circular disc about a
C
diameter is I. Its moment of inertia about an axis from O. If the FR1 : FR1 in the ratio 2:1, then a: b
2
perpendicular to its plane and passing through a point
on its rim will be: is (assume F2 a > F1b) :
(a) 5I (b) 3I
(c) 6I (d) 4I
29. The moment of inertia of a circular ring of radius R
and mass M about a tangent in its plane is:
1
(a) MR 2 (b) MR 2 2 F2 − F1 F2 + 4 F1
2 (a) (b)
4 F3 − F1 4 F2 − F1
3
(c) MR 2 (d) 2MR 2 F2 − 3F1 F2 + F1
2 (c) (d)
F1 + F2 2 F2 + 3F1
30. A wheel comprises of a ring of radius R and mass M 
and three spokes of mass m each. The moment of 34. What is the torque of force F = 2iˆ − 3 ˆj + 4kˆ acting at
inertia of the wheel about its axis is : 
a point r = 3iˆ + 2 ˆj + 3kˆ about the origin?
(a) 6iˆ − 6 ˆj + 12kˆ (b) −6iˆ + 6 ˆj − 12kˆ
(c) 17iˆ − 6 ˆj − 13kˆ (d) −17iˆ + 6 ˆj + 13kˆ
35. A cubical block of mass M and edge a slides down a
rough inclined plane of inclination θ with a uniform
 m 2 velocity. The torque of the normal force on the block
(a)  M +  R (b) (M + m) R2 about its centre has a magnitude:
 4
(a) zero (b) Mga
M +m 2
(c) (M + 3m) R2 (d)  R Mga sin θ
 2  (c) Mga sin θ (d)
2
31. Four identical rods are joined end to end to form a 36. A T- shaped object with dimensions shown in the
square. The mass of each rod is M. The moment of 
figure, is lying on a smooth floor. A force F is applied
inertia of the square about the median line is:
at the point P parallel to AB, such that the object has
M 2 M 2 only the translational motion without rotation. Find
(a) (b)
3 4 the location of P with respect to C:
M 2 2M  2
(c) (d)
6 3
Torque
32. When a steady torque or couple acts on a body, the
body:
(a) continues in a state of rest or of uniform motion by
Newton’s 1st law 4l
(b) gets linear acceleration by Newton’s 2nd law (a) (b) l
3
(c) gets an angular acceleration
2l 3l
(d) continues to rotate at a steady rate. (c) (d)
3 2
@cbseinfinite
37. An equilateral prism of mass m rests on a rough 41. In the pulley system shown, if radii of the bigger and
horizontal surface with coefficient of friction µ . A smaller pulley are 2 m and 1 m respectively and the
horizontal force F is applied on the prism as shown in acceleration of block A is 5 m/s2 in the downward
the figure. If the coefficient of friction is sufficiently direction, then the acceleration of block B will be:
high so that the prism does not slide before toppling,
then the minimum force required to topple the prism
is:
mg mg
(a) (b)
3 4 (a) 0 m/s2 (b) 5 m/s2
µ mg µ mg (c) 10 m/s2 (d) 2.5 m/s2
(c) (d) 42. Figure shows a uniform rod of length l and mass M
3 4
which is pivoted at end A such that it can rotate in a
38. A flywheel of mass 50 kg and radius of gyration about
vertical plane. The free end of the rod ‘B’ is initially
its axis of rotation of 0.5m is acted upon by a constant
vertically above the pivot and then released. As the
torque of 12.5 Nm. Its angular velocity at t = 5 sec is:
rod rotates about A, its angular acceleration when it is
(a) 2.5 rad/sec (b) 5 rad/sec
inclined to horizontal at angle q is
(c) 7.5 rad/sec (d) 10 rad/sec
39. A uniform metre stick of mass M is hinged at one end
and supported in a horizontal direction by a string
attached to the other end. What should be the initial
acceleration (in rad/sec2) of the stick if the string is
cut?
3
(a) g (b) g
2
(c) 3g (d) 4g
40. A thin hollow cylinder is free to rotate about its
geometrical axis. It has a mass of 8 kg and a radius of 3g g
(a) cos θ (b) tan θ
20 cm. A rope is wrapped around the cylinder. What 2 
force must be exerted along the rope to produce an 5g g
(c) sin θ (d) sin θ
angular acceleration of 3 rad/sec2? 4 
(a) 8.4 N (b) 5.8 N 43. A constant torque acting on a uniform circular wheel
(c) 4.8 N (d) None of these changes its angular momentum from A0 to 4A0 in 4
seconds. The magnitude of this torque is :
3 A0
(a) (b) A0
4
(c) 4A0 (d) 12A0
@cbseinfinite

44. A particle moves in a force field given by: F = rF
ˆ , 47. A uniform rod of length L is free to rotate in a vertical
where r̂ is a unit vector along the position vector r̂ , plane about a fixed horizontal axis through B. The rod
then which is true? begins rotating from rest from its unstable equilibrium
(a) The torque acting on the particle is not zero position. When it has turned through an angle q its
(b) The torque acting on the particle produces an average angular velocity w is given as:
angular acceleration in it
(c) The angular momentum of the particle is
conserved
(d) The angular momentum of the particle increases
Rotational Kinetic Energy
45. Figure shows a uniform rod of length l and mass M
which is pivoted at end A such that it can rotate in a 6g 6g θ
(a) sin θ (b) sin
vertical plane. The free end of the rod ‘B’ is initially L L 2
vertically above the pivot and then released. As the 6g θ 6g
rod rotates about A, (c) cos (d) cos θ
L 2 L
Angular Momentum
48. A particle of mass m is projected with a velocity v
making an angle of 45° with the horizontal. The
magnitude of angular momentum of the projectile
about an axis of projection when the particle is at
maximum height h is :
mv 3
(a) zero (b)
4 2g
The end B of the rod will hit the ground with a linear 2
speed:
mv
(c) (d) m 2 gh3
2g
(a) 2 g (b) 5 g
49. A particle of mass m = 5 units is moving with a
2g uniform speed v = 3 2 m / s in the X–Y plane along
(c) 3 g (d)

the line y = x + 4. When the particle crosses y-axis
46. A uniform rod of mass M and length L lies radially on
The magnitude of the angular momentum of the
a disc rotating with angular speed w in a horizontal
particle about the origin is :
plane about its axis. The rod does not slip on the disc
(a) zero (b) 60 unit
and the centre of the rod is at a distance R from the
centre of the disc. Then the kinetic energy of the rod (c) 7.5 unit (d) 40 2 unit
is: 50. A particle is moving along a straight line parallel to
x–axis with constant velocity. Its angular momentum
about the origin :
(a) decreases with time (b) increases with time
(c) remains constant (d) is zero
51. If a particle moves in the X – Y plane, the resultant
angular momentum has:
(a) only x– component (b) only y– component
(c) both x & y component (d) only z–component
1  L2  1 52. A rigid body rotates with an angular momentum L. If
(a) mω 2  R 2 +  (b) mω 2 R 2
2  12  2 its rotational kinetic energy is made 4 times, its
angular momentum will become:
1
(c) mω 2 L2 (d) none of these (a) 4 L (b) 16 L
24
(c) 2L (d) 2 L
@cbseinfinite

53. The position of a particle is given by r =iˆ + 2 ˆj − kˆ : Combined Translational and Rotational Motion
 59. A body is rolling down an inclined plane without
and its linear momentum is given by: p = 3iˆ + 4 ˆj − 2kˆ
slipping. How does the acceleration of the rolling
. Then its angular momentum, about the origin is body depend on its radius?
perpendicular to: (a) It is inversely proportional to the square root of
(a) yz plane (b) z– axis radius
(c) y– axis (d) x– axis (b) It is directly proportional to the square root of
1 radius
54. If the radius of earth contracts th of its present-day
n (c) It does not depend upon radius
value, the length of the day will be approximately: (d) It is directly proportional to the radius
24 24 60. A disc of radius r rolls on a horizontal ground with
(a) h (b) 2 h
n n linear acceleration a and angular acceleration α as
(c) 24n h (d) 24n2 h shown in figure. The magnitude of acceleration of
55. A disc of moment of inertia I1 is rotating freely with point P shown in figure at an instant when its linear
angular velocity w1 when a second, non-rotating disc velocity is v and angular velocity is ω will be:
with moment of inertia I2 is dropped on it gently.
The two then rotate as a unit. Then the total angular
speed is :
Iω Iω
(a) 1 1 (b) 2 1
I2 I1
I1ω1 ( I1 + I 2 ) ω1
(c) (d)
I 2 + I1 I2
ar
56. A thin circular ring of mass M and radius R is rotating (a) (a + rα ) 2 + (rω 2 ) 2 (b)
R
about its axis with a constant angular velocity w. Two
objects, each of mass m, are attached gently to the (c) r 2α 2 + r 2ω 4 (d) rα
opposite ends of a diameter of the ring. The ring 61. A string of negligible thickness is wrapped several
rotates now with an angular velocity: times around a cylinder kept on a rough horizontal
ωM ω ( M − 2m ) surface. A man standing at a distance from the
(a) (b) cylinder holds one end of the string and pulls the
M +m M + 2m
cylinder towards him. There is no slipping anywhere.
ωM ω ( M + m) The ratio of length of the string passed through the
(c) (d)
M + 2m M hand of the man to the distance moved by centre of
57. If a gymnast, sitting on a rotating stool with his arms mass of cylinder is:
outstretched, suddenly lowers his arms :
(a) the angular velocity increases
(b) his moment of inertia increases
(c) the angular velocity remains same
(d) the angular momentum increases
(a) 1 (b) 2
58. A thin uniform circular disc of mass M and radius R
(c) 3 (d) 4
is rotating in a horizontal plane about an axis passing
62. A solid sphere of mass M and radius R is placed on a
through its centre and perpendicular to the plane with
rough horizontal surface. It is pulled by a horizontal
angular velocity w. Another disc of same mass but
force F acting through its centre of mass as a result of
half the radius is gently placed over it coaxially. The
which it begins to roll without slipping. Angular
angular speed of the composite disc will be:
acceleration of the sphere can be expressed as:
5 4
(a) ω (b) ω 3F 5F
4 5 (a) (b)
4 MR 7 MR
2 5
(c) ω (d) ω 7F 5F
5 2 (c) (d)
11MR 2 MR
@cbseinfinite
63. A sphere cannot roll on: 70. A uniform solid sphere rolls on a horizonal surface at
(a) a smooth horizontal surface 20 ms-1. It then rolls up an incline having an angle of
(b) a rough horizontal surface inclination at 30° with the horizontal. If the friction
(c) a smooth inclined surface losses are negligible, the value of height h above the
(d) a rough inclined surface ground where the ball stops is:
64. A hoop rolls on a horizontal ground without slipping (a) 14.3 m (b) 28.6 m
with linear speed v. Speed of a particle P on the (c) 57.2 m (d) 9.8 m
circumference of the hoop at angle q is: 71. A solid sphere is rolling on a frictionless surface,
shown in figure with a translational velocity v m/s. If
it is to climb the inclined surface then v should be:
θ (a) ≥
10
gh (b) ≥ 2 gh
(a) 2 v sin (b) v sin q 7
2
θ (c) 2gh (d)
10
gh
(c) 2 v cos (d) v cos q
2 7
65. A sphere of mass m rolls without slipping on an 72. A disc is rolling on an inclined plane. What is the ratio
inclined plane of inclination q. The linear acceleration of its rotational K.E. to the total K. E.?
of the sphere is: (a) 1:3 (b) 3:1
1 2
(a) g sin θ (b) g sin θ (c) 1:2 (d) 2:1
7 7 73. A spherical ball of mass 20 kg is stationary at the top
3 5 of a hill of height 100 m. It rolls down a smooth
(c) g sin θ (d) g sin θ
7 7 surface to the ground, then climbs up another hill of
66. A sphere of mass m rolls without slipping on an height 30 m and finally rolls down to a horizontal base
inclined plane of inclination q. The force of friction at a height of 20 m above the ground. The velocity
on the sphere is: attained by the ball is :
1 2
(a) Mg sin θ (b) Mg sin θ (a) 40 m/s (b) 20 m/s
7 7 (c) 10 m/s (d) 10 30 m/s
3 5
(c) Mg sin θ (d) Mg sin θ 74. Figure shows a hemisphere of radius 4R. A ball of
7 7 radius R is released from position P. It rolls without
67. A sphere of mass m rolls without slipping on an slipping along the inner surface of the hemisphere.
inclined plane of inclination q. the minimum value of
Linear speed of its centre of mass when the ball is at
coefficient of friction so that sphere may roll without
position Q is:
slipping is:
2 2
(a) sin θ (b) cos θ
7 7
2 2
(c) tan θ (d) cot θ
7 7
68. A hoop rolls without slipping down an 30o incline of
slope 30°. Linear acceleration of its centre of mass is 30 gR 24 gR
(a) (b)
g g 7 5
(a) (b)
2 3 40 gR
(c) (d) 6 gR
g g 9
(c) (d)
4 6 75. If a spherical ball rolls on a table without slipping, the
69. A 6 kg ball starts from rest and rolls down a rough fraction of its total energy associated with rotation is
gradual slope until it reaches a point 80 cm lower than 3 2
(a) (b)
its starting point. Then the speed of the ball is: 5 7
(a) 1.95 ms-1 (b) 2.5 ms-1 2 3
-1
(c) (d)
(c) 3.35 ms (d) 4.8 ms-1 5 7
@cbseinfinite

1. The moment of inertia of a uniform cylinder of length
4. Moment of inertia of an equilateral triangular lamina
l and radius R about its perpendicular bisector is I. ABC, about the axis passing through its centre O and
l
What is the ratio . Such that the moment of inertia perpendicular to its plane is I o as shown in the figure.
R
A cavity DEF is cut out from the lamina, where D, E,
is minimum? (2017)
F are the mid points of the sides. Moment of inertia of
3 3 the remaining part of lamina about the same axis is:
(a) (b)
2 2
(2017)
3
(c) 1 (d)
2
2. A slender uniform rod of mass M and length l is
pivoted at one end so that it can rotate in a vertical
plane (see figure). There is negligible friction at the
pivot. The free end is held vertically above the pivot
and then released. The angular acceleration of the rod
when it makes an angle θ with the vertical is: (a)
7
Io (b)
15
Io
(2017) 8 16
3Io 31I o
(c) (d)
4 32
5. The machine as shown has 2 rods of length 1m
connected by a pivot at the top. The end of one rod is
connected to the floor by a stationary pivot and the end
of the other rod has a roller that rolls along the floor in
3g 2g a slot. As the roller goes back and forth, a 2 kg weight
(a) sin θ (b) sin θ moves up and down. If the roller is moving towards
2l 3l
right at a constant speed, the weight moves up with a:
3g 2g
(c) cos θ (d) cos θ (2017)
2l 3l
3. A uniform disc of radius R and mass M is free to rotate
only about its axis. A string is wrapped over its rim and
a body of mass m is tied to the free end of the string as
shown in the figure. The body is released from rest.
Then the acceleration of the body is:
(2017)
(a) constant speed

(b) decreasing speed
(c) increasing speed
3
(d) speed which is th of that of the roller when the
4
2 mg 2 Mg weight is 0.4 m above the ground
(a) (b)
2m + M 2m + M
2 mg 2 Mg
(c) (d)
2M + m 2M + m
@cbseinfinite
R 8. Seven identical circular planar disks, each of mass M

6. A circular hole of radius is made in a thin uniform
4 and radius R are welded symmetrically as shown. The
disc having mass M and radius R, as shown in figure. moment of inertia of the arrangement about the axis
The moment of inertia of the remaining portion of the normal to the plane and passing through the point P is:
disc about an axis passing through the point O and (2018)
perpendicular to the plane of the disc is: (2017)
55 73
(a) MR 2 (b) MR 2
2 2
219 MR 2 237 MR 2
(a) (b) 181 19
256 512 (c) MR 2 (d) MR 2
2 2
19MR 2 197 MR 2 9. A uniform rod AB of mass M, is suspended from a
(c) (d)
512 256 point X, at a variable distance x from A, as shown. To
make the rod horizontal, a mass m is suspended from
7. From a uniform circular disc of radius R and mass 9M,
its end A. A set of (m, x) values is recorded. The
R
a small disc of radius is removed as shown in the appropriate variables that give a straight line, when
3
plotted, are: (2018)
figure. The moment of inertia of the remaining disc
about an axis perpendicular to the plane of the disc and
passing through centre of disc is: (2018)
1
(a) m, (b) m, x
x2
1
(c) m, (d) m, x 2
x
10. A force of 40 N acts on a point B at the end of an
L-shaped object, as shown in the figure. The angle θ
that will produce maximum moment of the force about
40
(a) MR 2 (b) 10MR 2 point A is given by (2018)
9
37
(c) MR 2 (d) 4MR 2
9
1
(a) tan θ = (b) tan θ = 2
4
1
(c) tan θ = (d) tan θ = 4
2
@cbseinfinite
11. A disc rotates about its axis of symmetry in a 14. A thin circular disk is in the xy plane as shown in the
horizontal plane at a steady rate of 3.5 revolutions per figure. The ratio of its moment of inertia about z and
second. A coin placed at a distance of 1.25 cm from z’ axes will be: (2018)
the axis of rotation remains at rest on the disc. The
coefficient of friction between the coin and the disc is:
(g = 10 m/s2) (2018)
(a) 0.5 (b) 0.3
(c) 0.7 (d) 0.6
12. A thin uniform bar of length L and mass 8 m lies on a
smooth horizontal table. Two point masses m and 2m
are moving in the same horizontal plane from opposite
sides of the bar with speeds 2v and v respectively (as
(a) 1:3 (b) 1:4
shown). The masses stick to the bar after collision at a
L L (c) 1:5 (d) 1:2
distance and respectively from the centre of the
3 6 15. A rod of length 50 cm is pivoted at one end. It is raised
bar. If the bar starts rotating about its centre of mass as such that if makes an angle of 30° from the horizontal
a result of collision, the angular speed of the bar will as shown and released from rest. Its angular speed
be: (2018) when it passes through the horizontal (in rad/s) will be
(g = 10 m/s2) (2019)
v 6v
(a) (b)
5L 5L
3v v 30
(c) (d) (a) (b) 30
5L 6L 7
13. A thin rod MN, free to rotate in the vertical plane about
20 30
the fixed end N, is held horizontal. When the end M is (c) (d)
3 2
released, the speed of the this end, when the rod makes
an angle α with the horizontal, will be proportional to: 16. A rigid massless rod of length 3l has two masses
(see figure) (2018) attached at each end as shown in the figure. The rod is
pivoted at point P on the horizontal axis (see figure).
When released from initial horizontal position, its
instantaneous angular acceleration will be: (2019)
(a) sinα (b) sinα

g g
(c) cosα (d) cosα (a)
13l
(b)
3l
g 7g
(c) (d)
2l 3l
@cbseinfinite
17. Two identical spherical balls of mass M and radius R 20. A circular disc D1 of mass M and radius R has two
each are stuck on two ends of a rod of length 2R and identical discs D2 and D3 of the same mass M and
mass M (see figure). The moment of inertia of the radius R attached rigidly at its opposite ends (see
system about the axis passing perpendicularly through figure). The moment of inertia of the system about the
the centre of the rod is: (2019) axis OO', passing through the centre of D1, as shown
in the figure, will be: (2019)
137 17
(a) MR 2 (b) MR 2
15 15
(a) MR 2 (b) 3MR 2
209 152
(c) MR 2 (d) MR 2 4 2
15 15 (c) MR 2 (d) MR 2
5 3
18. A string is wound around a hollow cylinder of mass 5 21. A particle of mass 20 g is released with an initial
kg and radius 0.5 m. If the string is now pulled with a velocity 5 m/s along the curve from the point A, as
horizontal force of 40 N, and the cylinder is rolling shown in the figure. The point A is at height h from
without slipping on a horizontal surface (see figure), point B. The particle slides along the frictionless
then the angular acceleration of the cylinder will be surface. When the particle reaches point B, its angular
(Neglect the mass and thickness of the string): momentum about O will be: (Take g = 10 m/s2)
(2019) (2019)
(a) 20 rad/s2 (b) 16 rad/s2

(c) 12 rad/s2 (d) 10 rad/s2
(a) 8 kg-m2/s (b) 6 kg-m2/s
19. The magnitude of torque on a particle of mass 1kg is
(c) 3 kg-m2/s (d) 2 kg-m2/s
2.5 N m about the origin. If the force acting on it is 1N,
22. The moment of inertia of a solid sphere, about an axis
and the distance of the particle from the origin is 5m,
parallel to its diameter and at a distance of x from it, is
the angle between the force and the position vector is
(in radian): (2019) ' I ( x ) ’. which one of the graphs represents the
π π variation of I ( x ) with x correctly? (2019)

(a) (b)
6 3
π π
(c) (d) (a) (b)
8 4
(c) (d)
@cbseinfinite
23. A solid sphere and solid cylinder of identical radii 27. Moment of inertia of a body about a given axis is
approach an incline with the same linear velocity (see 1.5 kg m 2 . Initially the body is at rest. In order to
figure). Both roll without slipping all throughout. The
produce a rotational kinetic energy of 1200 J, the
two climb maximum heights hsph and hcyl on the
angular acceleration of 20rad / s 2 must be applied
hsph about the axis for a duration of: (2019)
incline. The ratio is given by: (2019)
hcyl (a) 2.5 s (b) 2 s
(c) 5 s (d) 3 s
28. A thin smooth rod of length L and mass M is rotating
freely with angular speed ω0 about an axis
2 perpendicular to the rod and passing through its centre.
(a) (b) 1
5 Two beads of mass m and negligible size are at the
14 4 centre of the rod. Initially, the beads are free to slide
(c) (d) along the rod. The angular speed of the system, when
15 5
24. A rectangular solid box of length 0.3 m is held the beads reach the opposite ends of the rod, will be:
horizontally, with one of its sides on the edge of a (2019)
platform of height 5 m. When released, it slips off the M ω0 M ω0
table in a very short time τ = 0.01s , remaining (a) (b)
M +m M + 3m
essentially horizontal. The angle by which it would
rotate when it hits the ground will be (in radians) close M ω0 M ω0
(c) (d)
to: (2019) M + 6m M + 2m
29. A solid sphere of mass M and radius R is divided into
7M
two unequal parts. The first part has a mass of
8
and is converted into a uniform disc of radius 2R. The
second part is converted into a uniform solid sphere.
Let I1 be the moment of inertia of the new sphere
(a) 0.5 (b) 0.3 I1
about its axis. The ratio is given by:
(c) 0.02 (d) 0.28 I2
25. A stationary horizontal disc is free to rotate about its
(2019)
axis. When a torque is applied on it, its kinetic energy
as a function of θ , where θ is the angle by which it (a) 185 (b) 140
has rotated, is given as kθ 2 . If its moment of inertia, (c) 285 (d) 65
is I then the angular acceleration of the disc is 30. The time dependence of the position of a particle of

(2019) mass m = 2 is given by r (=
t ) 2tiˆ − 3t 5 ˆj . Its angular
k k
(a) θ (b) θ momentum, with respect to the origin, at time t = 2 is:
4I I
k 2k (2019)
(c) θ (d) θ
26.
2I I
The following bodies are made to roll up (without
(
(a) 48 iˆ + ˆj ) (b) 36kˆ
slipping) on same inclined plane from a horizontal

plane: (i) a ring of radius R, (ii) a solid cylinder of ( )
(c) −34 kˆ − iˆ (d) −48kˆ
radius R/2 and (iii) a solid sphere of radius R/4. If, in
each case, the speed of the centre of mass at bottom of
the incline is same, the ratio of the maximum heights
they climb is: (2019)
(a) 10:15:7 (b) 14:15:20
(c) 4:3:2 (d) 2:3:4
@cbseinfinite
31. A smooth wire of length 2πr is bent into a circle and 34. A homogeneous solid cylindrical roller of radius R and
kept in a vertical plane. A bead can slide smoothly on mass M is pulled on a cricket pitch by a horizontal
the wire. When the circle is rotating with angular speed force F passing through its centre. Assuming rolling
ω about the vertical diameter AB, as shown in figure, without slipping, angular acceleration of the cylinder
the bead is at rest with respect to the circular ring at is: (2019)
position P as shown. Then the value of ω 2 is equal to: (a)
3F
(b)
F
(2019) 2mR 3mR
F 2F
(c) (d)
2mR 3mR
 
35. A slab is subjected to two forces F1 and F2 of same

magnitude F as shown in the figure. Force F2 is in XY
plane while force F1 acts along z-axis at the point
 
( 2i + 3 j ) . The moment of these forces about point O
will be: (2019)
3g 2g
(a) (b)
2r (r 3)
(c)
( g 3) (d)
2g
r r
32. An L-shaped object, made of thin rods of uniform mass
density, is suspended with a string as shown in figure.
If AB = BC, and the angle made by AB with downward
vertical is θ, then: (2019)
(
(a) 3iˆ − 2 ˆj + 3kˆ F ) (
(b) 3iˆ − 2 ˆj − 3kˆ F )
(c) ( 3iˆ + 2 ˆj − 3kˆ ) F (d) ( 3iˆ + 2 ˆj + 3kˆ ) F
36. An equilateral triangle ABC is cut from a thin solid
sheet of wood. (see figure) D, E and F are the mid-
points of its sides as shown and G is the centre of the
triangle. The moment of inertia of the triangle about an
axis passing through G and perpendicular to the plane
of the triangle is I0. It the smaller triangle DEF is
removed from ABC, the moment of inertia of the
remaining figure about the same axis is I. Then?
1 1
(a) tan θ = (b) tan θ = (2019)
2 3 2
2 1
(c) tan θ = (d) tan θ =
3 3
33. To mop-clean a floor, a cleaning machine presses a
circular mop of radius R vertically down with a total
force F and rotates it with a constant angular speed
about its axis. If the force F is distributed uniformly
over the mop and if coefficient of friction between the
9 3
mop and the floor is μ, the torque, applied by the (a) I = I0 (b) I = I0
machine on the mop is: (2019) 16 4
µ FR µ FR I0 15
(a) (b) (c) I = (d) I = I 0
3 6 4 16
µ FR 2 µ FR
(c) (d)
2 3
@cbseinfinite
37. Let the moment of inertia of a hollow cylinder of 42. Two coaxial discs, having moments of inertia
length 30 cm (inner radius 10 cm and outer radius 20 I
I1 and 1 , are rotating with respective angular
cm), about its axis be I . The radius (in cm) of a thin 2
cylinder of the same mass such that its moment of ω1
velocities ω1 and about their common axis. They
inertia about its axis is also I , is (give answer to the 2
nearest integer) (2019) are brought in contact with each other and thereafter
(a) 12 cm (b) 16 cm they rotate with a common angular velocity. If E f and
(c) 14 cm (d) 18 cm
Ei are the final and initial total energies,
38. A circular coil having N turns and radius r carries a
current I. It is held in the x-z plane in a magnetic field then ( E f − Ei ) is: (2019)
Biˆ . The torque (magnitude) on the coil due to the I1ω12

I1ω12
magnetic field is: (2019) (a) − (b)
12 6
2
Br I
(a) (b) Bπr 2 IN 3 I1ω12
πN (c) I1ω12 (d) −
8 24
Bπr 2 I
(c) (d) zero 43. A circular disc of radius b has a hole of radius a at its
N centre (see figure). If the mass per unit area of the disc
39. A thin circular plate of mass M and radius R has its
σ 
density varying as ρ ( r ) = ρ0 r with ρ0 as constant varies as  0  , then the radius of gyration of the disc
 r 
and r is the distance from its centre. The moment of about its axis passing through the centre is:
inertia of the circular plate about an axis perpendicular
(2019)
to the plate and passing through its edge is I = aMR 2 .
The value of the coefficient 'a' is: (2019)
8 1
(a) (b)
5 2
3 3
(c) (d)
5 2
40. A particle m is moving along a trajectory given by
x x0 + a cos ω1t
=
a 2 + b 2 + ab a+b
(a) (b)
y y0 + b sin ω2t
= 2 2
The torque, acting on the particle about the origin, at t a 2 + b 2 + ab a+b
= 0 is: (2019) (c) (d)
3 3
(a) m ( − x b + y a ) ω 2 kˆ
0 0 1
44. The radius of gyration of a uniform rod of length l
(b) +my0 aω12 kˆ l
about an axis passing through a point away from the
(c) zero 4
(d) −m ( x0 bω22 − y0 aω12 ) kˆ centre of the rod, and perpendicular to it, is
41. A thin disc of mass M and radius R has mass per unit (2020)
area σ(r) = kr2 where r is the distance from its centre. 7 3
Its moment of inertia about an axis going through its (a) l (b) l
48 8
centre of mass and perpendicular to its plane is:
(2019) 1 1
(c) l (d) l
2 2 4 8
MR 2 MR
(a) (b)
3 3
MR 2 MR 2
(c) (d)
6 2
@cbseinfinite
45. A bob of mass m is tied by a massless string whose 50. Three identical solid spheres each have mass ‘M’ and
other end portion is wound on a fly wheel (disc) of diameter ‘d’ are touching each other as shown in the
radius r and mass m. when released from the rest, the figure. Calculate ratio of moment of inertia about the
bob starts falling vertically. When it has covered a axis perpendicular to plane of paper and passing
distance h, the angular speed of the wheel will be: through point P and B as shown in the figure. Given P
(2020) is centroid of the triangle (2020)
3 1 4 gh
(a) r (b)
4 gh r 3
3 1 2 gh
(c) r (d)
2 gh r 3
46. Mass per unit area of a circular disc of radius a depends
on the distance r from its centre as σ ( r )= A + Br .
The moment of inertia of the disc about the axis, 13 13
perpendicular to the plane and passing through its (a) (b)
23 15
centre is: (2020)
15 23
 A aB   aA B  (c) (d)
(a) 2π a  +
4
 (b) 2π a  4
+  13 13
4 5   4 5 51. A uniform cylinder of mass M and radius R is to be
 A aB   A B pulled over a step of height a (a < R) by applying a
(c) π a 4  +  (d) 2π a 4  + 
4 5  4 5 force F at its centre ‘O’ perpendicular to the plane
47. A particle of mass 𝑚𝑚 is fixed to one end of a light through the axes of the cylinder on the edge of the step
spring having force constant k and unstretched length (see figure). The minimum value of F required is
l . The other end is fixed. The system is given an (2020)
angular speed 𝜔𝜔 about the fixed end of the spring such
that it rotates in a circle in gravity free space. Then the
stretch in the spring is (2020)
lmω 2 lmω 2
(a) (b)
k − mω 2 k + mω 2
lmω 2 lmω 2
(c) (d)
k − mω k + mω 2
 R  a2
48. Consider a uniform rod of mass 4m and length L (a) Mg   −1 (b) Mg 1−
 R−a R2
pivoted about its centre. A mass m is moving with a
 R−a
2
π a
(d) Mg 1 − 
velocity v making angle θ = to the rod’s long axis (c) Mg 
4 R  R 
collides with one end of the rod and stick to it. The 52. Shown in the figure is rigid and uniform one meter
angular speed of the rod-mass system just after long rod AB held in horizontal position by two strings
collision is (2020) tied to its ends and attached to the ceiling. The rod is
3 2v 4v of mass ‘m’ and has another weight of mass 2 m hung
(a) (b) at a distance of 75 cm from A. The tension in the string
7L 7L
at A is: (2020)
3v 3v
(c) (d)
7 2L 7L
49. A uniform sphere of mass 500 gram rolls without
slipping on a plane horizontal surface with its centre
moving at a speed of 5 cm/sec. Its kinetic energy is
(2020)
−4 −4
(a) 8.75 × 10 J (b) 6.25 × 10 J (a) 0.75 mg (b) 0.5 mg
(c) 8.75 × 10 J −3
(d) 1.13 × 10 J−3 (c) 1 mg (d) 2 mg
@cbseinfinite
53. Two uniform circular discs are rotating independently 56. A uniform rod of length ‘l’ is pivoted at one of its ends
in the same direction around their common axis on a vertical shaft of negligible radius. When the shaft
passing through their centres. The moment of inertia rotates at angular speed ω the rod makes an angle θ
and angular velocity of the first disc are 0.1kg-m 2 and with it (see figure). To find θ equate the rate of change
−1 of angular momentum (direction going into the paper)
10rad s respectively while those for the second one
ml 2 2
are 0.2kg-m 2 and 5 rad s −1 . At some instant they get ω sin θ cos θ about the centre of mass (CM) to
12
stuck together and start rotating as a single system
the torque provided by the horizontal and vertical
about their common axis with some angular speed. The
forces FH and FV about the CM. The value of θ is
kinetic energy of the combined system is:
then such that: (2020)
(2020)
2 10
(a) J (b) J
3 3
5 20
(c) J (d) J
3 3
54. A block of mass m = 1kg slides with velocity
v = 6m / s on a frictionless horizontal surface and
collides with a uniform vertical rod and sticks to it as 2g 3g
shown. The rod is pivoted about O and swings as a (a) cos θ = (b) cos θ =
3lω 2 2lω 2
result of the collision making angle θ before
g g
momentarily coming to rest. If the rod has mass (c) cos θ = (d) cos θ =
2lω 2 lω 2
M = 2kg , and length l = 1m , the value of θ is
57. Consider two uniform discs of the same thickness and
approximately: (take g = 10m / s 2 )
different radii R1 = R and R2 = α R made of the same
(2020) material. If the ratio of their moments of inertia I1 and
I2, respectively, about their axes is I1 : I 2 = 1:16 then
the value of α is: (2020)
(a) 2 (b) 2
(c) 2 2 (d) 4
58. For a uniform rectangular sheet shown in the figure,
the ratio of moments of inertia about the axes
(a) 49° (b) 63° perpendicular to the sheet and passing through O (the
(c) 69° (d) 55° centre of mass) and O′ (corner point) is:
55. Moment of inertia of a cylinder of mass M, length L (2020)
and radius R about an axis passing through its centre
and perpendicular to the axis of the cylinder is
 R 2 L2 
= I M +  . If such a cylinder is to be made for
 4 12 
a given mass of a material, the ratio L/R for it to have
minimum possible I is: (2020)
2 3 1 2
(a) (b) (a) (b)
3 2 2 3
2 3 1 1
(c) (d) (c) (d)
3 2 4 8
@cbseinfinite
59. A wheel is rotating freely with an angular speed ω on 62. A rod of length 1 m pivoted at one end is released from
a shaft. The moment of inertia of the wheel is I and the rest when it makes 30° from the horizontal as shown
moment of inertia of the shaft is negligible. Another in the figure below.
wheel of moment of inertia 3I initially at rest is
suddenly coupled to the same shaft. The resultant
fractional loss in the kinetic energy of the system is:
(2020)
3
(a) (b) 0
4
5 1 If ω of rod is n at the moment it hits the ground,
(c) (d)
6 4 then find n. (2020)
63. A person of 80 kg mass is standing on the rim of a
60. Four point masses, each of mass m, are fixed at the
corners of a square of side l. The square is rotating with circular platform of mass 200 kg rotating about its axis
at 5 revolutions per minute (rpm). The person now
angular frequency ω , about an axis passing through
starts moving towards the centre of the platform. What
one of the corners of the square and parallel to its
will be the rotational speed (in rpm) of the platform
diagonal, as shown in the figure. The angular
when the person reaches its centre ………..
momentum of the square about this axis is:
(2020)
(2020)
64. A massless equilateral triangle EFG of side ‘a’ (As
shown in figure) has three particles of mass m situated
at its vertices. The moment of inertia of the system
about the line EX perpendicular to EG in the plane of
N
EFG is ma 2 where N is an integer. The value of N
20
is …………. (2020)
(a) 4 ml 2ω (b) 2 ml 2ω
(c) 3 ml 2ω (d) ml 2ω
61. Consider a uniform cubical box of side a on a rough 65. ABC is a plane lamina of the shape of an equilateral
floor that is to be moved by applying minimum triangle. D, E are mid points of AB, AC and G is the
possible force F. At a point b above its centre of mass centroid of the lamina. Moment of inertia of the lamina
(see figure). If the coefficient of friction is µ = 0.4, about an axis passing through G and perpendicular to
b the plane ABC is I 0 . If part ADE is removed, the
the maximum value of 100 × for the box not to
a moment of inertia of the remaining part about the same
topple before moving is …….. (2020) NI 0
axis is where N is an integer. Value of N is
16
(2020)
@cbseinfinite
66. A circular disc of mass M and radius R is rotating 70. Four identical solid spheres each of mass 'm' and radius
about its axis with angular speed ω1 . If another 'a' are placed with their centres on the four corners of
a square of side 'b'. The moment of inertia of the
R
stationary disc having radius and same mass M is system about one side of square where the axis of
2
rotation is parallel to the plane of the square is
dropped co-axially on to the rotating disc. Gradually
both discs attain constant angular speed ω2 . The (2021)
energy lost in the process is p% of the initial energy. 4 8

(a) ma 2 + 2mb 2 (b) ma 2 + mb 2
Value of p is ……… (2020) 5 5
67. Moment of inertia (M.I.) of four bodies, having same 8 4
(c) ma 2 + 2mb 2 (d) ma 2
mass and radius, are reported as; 5 5
I1 = M.I. of thin circular ring about its diameter, 71. A cord is wound around the circumference of wheel of
I 2 = M.I. of circular disc about an axis perpendicular radius r . The axis of the wheel is horizontal and the
to disc and going through the centre, moment of inertia about it is I . A weight mg is
I 3 = M.I. of solid cylinder about its axis and attached to the cord at the end. The weight falls from
I 4 = M.I. of solid sphere about its diameter. rest. After falling through a distance ‘ h ’, the square of
angular velocity of wheel will be (2021)
Then:
(2021) 2mgh 2 gh
(a) (b)
I + 2mr 2 I + mr 2
5
(a) I1 + I 3 < I 2 + I 4 (b) I1 I =
2 I3 +
I4
2 2mgh
(c) 2gh (d)
(c) I1 + I 2 = I 3 < I 4 (d) I= I= I3 > I 4 I + mr 2
1 2
68. Consider two satellites S1 and S 2 with periods of 72. Four equal masses, m each are placed at the corners of
revolution 1hr. and 8hr. respectively revolving around a square of length ( l ) as shown in the figure. The
a planet in circular orbits. The ratio of angular velocity moment of inertia of the system about an axis passing
of satellite S1 to the angular velocity of satellite S 2 is through A and parallel to DB would be:
(2021)
(2021)
(a) 1:8 (b) 2:1
(c) 1:4 (d) 8:1
69. A sphere of radius ‘a’ and mass ‘m’ rolls along a
horizontal plane with constant speed v0 . It encounters
an inclined plane at angle θ and climbs upward.
Assuming that it rolls without slipping, how far up the
sphere will travel?
(2021)
(a) 3ml 2 (b) 2ml 2
(c) 3ml 2 (d) ml 2
5v02 sin θ 7v02 sin θ

(a) (b)
g 10 g
5 v02 sin θ 2v02 sin θ
(c) (d)
2 g g
@cbseinfinite

73. A triangle plate is shown F= 4iˆ − 3 ˆj is applied at 75. A sphere of mass 2 kg and radius 0.5 m is rolling with
an initial speed of 1 m / s goes up an inclined plane
point P. The torque at point P with respect to point ‘O’
and ‘Q’ are: which makes an angle of 30° with the horizontal
(2021) plane, without slipping. How long will the sphere take
to return to the starting point A? (Take g = 10 ms −2 )
(2021)
(a) 0.60 s (b) 0.52 s

(c) 0.56 s (d) 0.80 s
76. A thin circular ring of mass M and radius r is rotating
(a) −15 − 20 3, 15 − 20 3
about its axis with an angular speed ω . Two particles
(b) +15 + 20 3, 15 − 20 3 having mass m each are now attached at diametrically
opposite points. The angular speed of the ring will
(c) +15 − 20 3, 15 + 20 3 become: (2021)
(d) −15 + 20 3, 15 + 20 3  M + 2m   M 
(a)  ω (b)  ω
 M   M + 2m 
74. A mass M hangs on a massless rod of length l which
 M   M − 2m 
rotates at a constant angular frequency. The mass M (c)  ω (d)  ω
moves with steady speed in a circular path of constant M + m  M + 2m 
radius. Assume that the system is in steady circular 77. Consider a uniform wire of mass M and length L. It is
motion with constant angular velocity ω . The angular bent into a semicircle. Its moment of inertia about a
momentum of M about point A is LA which lies in the line perpendicular to the plane of the wire passing
through the centre is: (2021)
positive z direction and the angular momentum of M
ML2 1 ML2
about B is LB . The correct statement for this system is: (a) (b)
π2 2 π2
(2021) 1 ML 2
2 ML2
(c) (d)
4 π2 5 π2
78. A solid cylinder of mass m is wrapped with an
inextensible light string and, is placed on a rough
inclined plane as shown in the figure. The frictional
force acting between the cylinder and the inclined
plane is, if the coefficient of static friction is µ s = 0.4 :
(2021)
(a) LA and LB are both constant in magnitude and

direction
(b) LB is constant in direction with varying magnitude
(Take the coefficient of kinetic friction and coefficient
(c) LB is constant, both in magnitude and direction
of static friction are equal)
(d) LA is constant, both in magnitude and direction (a) 0 (b) 5mg
mg 7
(c) (d) mg
5 2
@cbseinfinite
79. A uniform thin bar of mass 6 kg and length 2.4 m is 82. A solid disc of radius ' a ' and mass ‘ m ’ rolls down
bent to make an equilateral hexagon. The moment of without slipping on an inclined plane making an angle
inertia about an axis passing through the centre of mass θ with the horizontal. The acceleration of the disc will
and perpendicular to the plane of hexagon is …
2
×10−1 kgm 2 . (2021) be g sin θ where b is _____. (Round off to the
b
80. Consider a 20 kg uniform circular disk of radius 0.2 Nearest Integer) (g = acceleration due to gravity; and
m. It is pin supported at its centre and is at rest θ = angle as shown in figure) (2021)
initially. The disk is acted upon by a constant force
F = 20N through a massless string wrapped around its
periphery as shown in the figure.

83. A force F = 4iˆ + 3 ˆj + 4kˆ is applied on an intersection
point of x = 2 plane and x-axis. The magnitude of
Suppose the disk makes n number of revolutions to
torque of this force about a point (2, 3, 4) is ____.
attain an angular speed of 50 rad s −1 .
(Round off to the Nearest Integer) (2021)
The value of n, to the nearest integer, is ___________. 84. The angular speed of truck wheel is increased from
[Given: In one complete revolution, the disk rotates by 900 rpm to 2460 rpm in 26 seconds. The number of
6.28 rad) (2021) revolutions by the truck engine during this time is
81. Consider a frame that is made up of two thin massless ………
rods AB and AC as shown in the figure. A vertical (Assuming the acceleration to be uniform).

force P of magnitude 100 N is applied at point A of (2021)
the frame. 85. The following bodies,
(1) a ring
(2) a disc
(3) a solid cylinder
(4) a solid sphere,
of same mass ' m ' and radius ‘ R ’ are allowed to roll
down without slipping simultaneously from the top of
the inclined plane. The body which will reach first at
the bottom of the inclined plane is ……… [Mark the
body as per their respective numbering given in the
 question] (2021)
Suppose the force is P resolved parallel to the arms
AB and AC of the frame.
The magnitude of the resolved component along the
arm AC is xN.
The value of x, to the nearest integer, is ___________.
sin ( 35° ) 0.573,
[Given:= = cos ( 35° ) 0.819
sin (110° ) =0.939, cos (110° ) =−0.342 ]
(2021)
@cbseinfinite

Objective Questions I [Only one correct option]
5. The moment of inertia of a system of four rods forming
1. A uniform solid cylinder has a radius R and length L. If a square each of length L and mass M, about the axis
the moment of inertia of this cylinder about an axis shown is [axis is perpendicular to the plane of the rod]
passing through its centre and normal to its circular face
is equal to the moment of inertia of the same cylinder
about an axis passing through its centre and normal to
its length, then
(a) L = R (b) L  3 R
(c) L  R / 3 (d) L = 0
2. A cricket mat of mass 50 kg is rolled loosely in the form 2
(a) ML2 (b) 2ML2
of a cylinder of radius 2m. Now again it is rolled tightly 3
so that the radius becomes 3/4th of original value; then
8
the ratio of moment of inertia of mat about its axis in (c) 3ML2 (d) ML2
3
the two cases is:
6. A thin rod of length 4l and mass 4M is bent at the point
(a) 1:3 (b) 4:3
as shown in the figure. What is the moment of inertia of
(c) 3:5 (d) 16:9 the rod about the axis passing through point O and
3. A circular disc is to be made using iron and aluminium. perpendicular to the plane of the paper?
To keep its moment of inertia maximum about a
geometrical axis, it should be so prepared that:
(a) aluminium at interior and iron surrounds it
(b) iron at interior and aluminium surrounds it
M 2 10 M 2
(c) aluminium and iron layers in alternate order (a) (b)

3 3
(d) sheet of iron is used at both external surface and
aluminium sheet as inner material M 2 M 2
(c) (d)
12 24
4 Three identical rods, each of mass m and length l, form
an equilateral triangle. Moment of inertia about one of 7. Consider a uniform square plate of side a and mass m.
the sides is The moment of inertia of this plate about an axis
perpendicular to its plane and passing through one of its
corners is
2 5
(a) ma 2 (b) ma 2
3 6
1 7
(c) ma 2 (d) ma 2
m 2 2 12 12
(a) (b) ml
4
2
3m m 2
(c) (d)
4 2
@cbseinfinite
8. From a circular disc of radius R and mass 9M, a small 2

(a) mR 2 (b) mR2
disc of radius R/3 is removed from the disc. The 3
moment of inertia of the remaining disc about an axis
5
perpendicular to the plane of the disc and passing (c) mR 2 (d) 2mR2
through O is: 
12. A solid sphere of radius R has moment of inertia I about
its geometrical axis. It is melted into a disc of radius r
and thickness t. If its moment of inertia about the
tangential axis (which is perpendicular to plane of the
disc), is also equal to I, then the value of r is equal to:
40
(a) 4 MR2 (b) MR2
9
37 2 2
(c) 10 MR2 (d) MR2 (a) R (b) R
9 15 5
9. The moment of inertia of a hollow cylinder of mass M, 3 3
radius R and Length L about its axis is: (c) R (d) R
15 15
(a) MR2 (b) ML2 13. Let I be the moment of inertia of a uniform square plate
MR 2
MR 2 about an axis AB that passes through its centre and is
(c) (d) parallel to two of its sides. CD is a line in the plane of
L 2
the plate that passes through the centre of the plate and
10. Two thin discs, each of mass M and radius r, are
makes an angle q with AB. The moment of inertia of the
attached as shown in the figure, to form a rigid body.
plate about the axis CD is then equal to:
The rotational inertia of this body about an axis
perpendicular to the plane of disc B and passing through (a) I (b) I sin2 
its centre is:
(c) I cos2  (d) I cos2 (  /2)
14. A stone of mass m tied to a string of length l is rotating
along a circular path with constant speed v. The torque
on the stone is:
mv
(a) mvl (b)
l
2 2 mv 2
(a) 2Mr (b) 3Mr (c) (d) zero
l
2 2
(c) 4Mr (d) 5Mr
15. A body is under the action of two equal and oppositely
11. A uniform rod of mass m is bent into the form of a directed forces and the body is rotating with constant
semicircle of radius R. The moment of inertia of the rod acceleration. Which of the following cannot be the
about an axis passing through A and perpendicular to separation between the lines of action of the forces?
the plane of the paper is:
(a) 1m (b) 0.4 m
(c) 0.25 m (d) zero
@cbseinfinite
16. A uniform ladder of mass 10 kg leans against a smooth 20. A horizontal bar of length l and negligible mass is
vertical wall making an angle of 53° with it. The other supported at its two ends. A mass M is hung from the
end rest on a rough horizontal floor. The normal force bar at a distance ‘a’ from the left end, as shown. What
and frictional force that the floor exerts on the ladder is the magnitude of the force that the support on the right
are respectively applies to the bar?
(a) 98 N, 65 N (b) 98 N, 0
(c) 0, 65 N (d) 65 N, 98 N
17. A uniform beam of length L whose mass ‘m’ is 1.8 kg
rests with its ends on two digital scales, as in figure. A
uniform block whose mass M is 2.7 kg rests on the
beam, its centre is at a distance L/4 from the beam’s left
end. What do the scales read? a
(a) Mg (b) Mg
a
a
(c) Mg (d) Mg
a a
21. A motor car is travelling at 60 m/s on a circular road of
radius 1200 m. It is increasing its speed at the rate of 4
m/s2. The acceleration of the car is:
(a) 29 N on right scale and 15 N on left scale
(a) 3m/s2 (b) 4 m/s2
(b) 15 N on right scale and 29 N on left scale
(c) 5 m/s2 (d) 7 m/s2
(c) 10 N on right scale and 20 N on left scale
22. A particle moves in a circle of radius 25 cm at two
(d) 2.25 N on right scale and 7 N on left scale
revolutions per sec. The acceleration of the particle in
18. O is the centre of an equilateral triangle ABC. F1, F2 and
m/s2 is:
F3 are three forces acting along the sides AB, BC and
AC as shown in the adjoining diagram. What should be (a) 2 (b) 8 2
the magnitude of F3 so that the total torque about O is (c) 4 2 (d) 2 2
zero?
23. The maximum possible velocity of the bob at the lowest
position of a simple pendulum of length L to oscillate is
(a) 5 gL (b) 3 gL
(c) 2 gL (d) gL
24. A pendulum of mass m is oscillating in a vertical circle

F1  F2
(a) (b) 2 (F1 + F2) with angular amplitude of 90°. The acceleration of the
2
bob at ‘B’ is
(c) (F1 + F2) (d) (F1 – F2)
19. A solid cube of side 1 m is just tilted by a horizontal

force of 10 N. The weight of cube is
(a) g (b) zero

(c) greater than g (d) less than g but not zero
(a) 5 N (b) 10 N
(c) 15 N (d) 20 N
@cbseinfinite
25. Two racing cars of mass m1 and m2 are moving in 31. For a particle in uniform circular motion, the
circles of radii r1 and r2 respectively; their speeds are acceleration a at a point P ( R,  ) on the circle of radius
such that they each make a complete circle in the same R is
length of time t. The ratio of the angular speed of the
v2 ˆ v2 ˆ v2 ˆ v2 ˆ
first to the second car is: (a) i j (b) i j
R R R R
(a) m1 : m2 (b) r1 : r2
v2 v2
(c) 1:1 (d) none (c)  sin  iˆ  cos  ˆj (d)
R R
26. For a particle of a rotating rigid body moving with v2 v2
 cos  iˆ  sin  ˆj
constant angular velocity  & v = rw So: R R
(a)   1/ r  (b) ω  v 32. Two particles A and B are situated at a distance
d = 2m apart. Particle A has a velocity of 10 m/s at an
(c) v  r (d) none of these angle of 60º and particle B has a velocity v at an angle
27. A planet P revolves around the Sun in a circular orbit, 30º as shown in figure. The distance d between A and
with the sun at the centre, which is coplanar with and B is constant. The angular velocity of B with respect to
concentric to the circular orbit of Earth E around the A is:
Sun. P and E revolve in the same direction. The time
required for the revolution of P and E around the sun are
3 year and 1 year respectively. The time required for P
to make one revolution around the sun relative to E is
(a) 1.5 year (b) 3 year
(c) 10 year (d) 1 year 5
(a) 5 3 rad/sec (b) rad/sec
28. A toy car travels in horizontal circle of radius 2a, kept 3
on the track by a radial elastic string. Its period is T. The
10
length of the unstretched string is found to be a. When (c) 10 3 rad/sec (d) rad/sec
3
the car is speeded up, the string stretches until the car is
moving in a circle of radius 3a. Assuming that the string 33. Two particles A and B are moving as shown in figure.
obeys Hooke’s’ law, the period of revolution is At this moment of time, the angular speed of A with
respect to B is:
(a) T(3/4) (b) T 3 / 4
(c) T 4 / 3 (d) T
29. A circular disc of Moment of inertia 0.5 kg m2 and
radius 0.2 m has a weightless string passing around its
rim. The string is pulled down by a force F and it
acquires an angular speed of 5 revolution per second in (a)
 va  vb 
r
5 sec. The force F is
 va  vb 
(a) 5 N (b) 4 N (b)
r
(c) 2.5 N (d) 2 N  vb sin  2  va sin 1  in anticlockwise direction
(c)
30. A mass of 2 kg is whirled in a horizontal circle by means r
of a string at an initial speed of 5 rpm. Keeping the
(d)
 vb sin  2  va sin 1  in anticlockwise direction
radius constant, the tension in the string is doubled. The r
new speed is nearly.
34. A wheel initially at rest, is rotated with a uniform
(a) 14 rpm (b) 10 rpm angular acceleration. The wheel rotates through an
(c) 2 rpm (d) 7 rpm angle q1 in first one second and through an additional
angle q2 in the next one second. The ratio q2/q1 is:
(a) 4 (b) 2
(c) 3 (d) 1
@cbseinfinite
35. A sphere S rolls without slipping, moving with a (a) g (b) g/2
constant speed on a plank P. The friction between the (c) g/3 (d) 2g/3
upper surface of P and the sphere is sufficient to prevent
39. Each pulley shown in the given figure below has radius
slipping, while the lower surface of P is smooth and
r and moment of inertia I. The acceleration of the block
rests on the ground. Initially, P is fixed to the ground by
is
a pin N. If N is suddenly removed.
(a) S will begin to slip on P

(b) P will begin to move backwards
 M  m g  M  m g
(a) (b)
 2I   2I 
(c) the speed of S will decrease, and its angular velocity M m 2  M m 2 
will increase  r   r 
(d) there will be no change in the motion of S and P will  M  m g  M  m g

(c) (d)
still be at rest.  I   I 
M m 2  M m 2 
36. A mass m is hanged from a solid cylindrical shaft of  r   r 
radius R and mass 2m (as shown in the figure). Shaft is 40. A uniform rod of length 2l is placed with one end in
free to rotate. What is the acceleration of mass m? contact with the horizontal table and is then inclined at
an angle a to the horizontal and allowed to fall. When it
becomes horizontal, its angular velocity will be
3g sin  2
(a) (b)
2 3g sin 
g sin 
(c) (d)
(a) g (b) 2g/3 g sin 
(c) g/2 (d) g/3 41. A fly wheel rotating about a fixed axis has a kinetic
37. The moment of inertia of a body about a given axis is energy of 360 joule when its angular speed is
1.2 kg m2. Initially, the body is at rest. In order to 30 radian/sec. The moment of inertia of the wheel about
produce a rotational kinetic energy of 1500 joule, an the axis of rotation is
angular acceleration of 25 radian/sec2 must be applied (a) 0.6 kg m2 (b) 0.15 kg m2
about that axis for a duration of (c) 0.8 kg m2 (d) 0.75 kg m2
(a) 4 seconds (b) 2 seconds 42. A ring of radius r and mass m rotates about an axis
(c) 8 seconds (d) 10 seconds passing through its centre and perpendicular to its
38. A mass M is supported by a massless string wound plane with angular velocity w. Its kinetic energy is:
around a uniform cylinder of mass M and radius R. On 1
releasing the mass from rest, it will fall with (a) mr (b) mr 2
2
acceleration.
1 2 2
(c) mr 2 2 (d) mr 
2
43. A wheel of mass 2 kg, having practically all the mass
concentrated along the circumference of a circle of
radius 20 cm, is rotating on its axis with an angular
velocity of 100 rad/s. The rotational kinetic energy of
the wheel is:
(a) 4 joule (b) 70 joule
@cbseinfinite
44. A rod AB is 1 m long. It is hinged at A so as to rotate in (a) pattern A is more sturdy

a vertical plane. Initially the rod is horizontally placed (b) pattern B is more sturdy
and then it is released from rest. Obtain the angular
(c) pattern C is more sturdy
speed of the rod and the linear speed of its free end as it
(d) all will have same sturdiness
passes through the position shown in the diagram
48. A cylindrical rod of mass M, length L and radius R has
two cords wound around it whose ends are attached to
the ceiling. The rod is held horizontally with the two
cords vertical. When the rod is released, the cords
unwind, and the rod rotates. The linear acceleration of
the cylinders as it falls, is:
(a) g (b) g/3
(c) 2g/3 (d) g/2
49. A hollow sphere and a solid sphere of same mass and
(a) w = 5.05 rad/s, v = 5.05 m/s
radius are allowed to roll down an inclined plane from
(b) w = 1 rad/s, w = 1 m/s
same height simultaneously. Which will reach bottom
(c) w = 4.04 rad/s, v = 2.02 m/s
first.
(d) w = 5.05 rad/s, v = 1.01 m/s
(a) Hollow sphere (b) Solid sphere
45. A rod AB of length L revolves in a horizontal plane
about the axis YY’ with an angular velocity  . If A is (c) Both together (d) None of these
area of cross-section of rod and  is its density, its 50. A bicycle is performing pure rolling and moving at a
kinetic energy is speed of 30 km/h. Then speeds at the highest and lowest
point of the front wheel are
(radius = 2 m)
(a) 60 km/h and 0 respectively
(b) 60 km/h for both the points
(c) 30 km/h for both the points
1 3 2 1 3 2 (d) Not possible to calculate
(a) AL   (b) AL  
3 2 51. A body of mass m slides down an incline and reaches
1 the bottom with a velocity u. If the same body were in
(c) AL3 2  (d) none of these
24 the form of a hollow cylinder which rolls down from
46. A rod of length L is hinged from one end. It is brought this incline, the velocity of the cylinder at the bottom
to a horizontal position and released. The angular would be
velocity of the rod when it is in vertical position is: u
(a) 1/ 3 u (b)
(a) 2g / L (b) 3g / L 2
(c) g / 2L (d) g/L (c) 2/5u (d) 2/ 3u
47. A streetlight of mass M is suspended from the end of a
52. A solid sphere radius 1 m and mass 2 kg is rolling with
uniform rod of length L in different possible patterns as
a linear speed of 2 m/s. What is speed of point A
shown in figure, then:
(A) (B)
(a) 2 m/s (b) 2 2 m / s

(C)
(c) 4 m/s (d) 2 m/ s
@cbseinfinite
53. Consider a wheel of a bicycle rolling on a level road at r

a linear speed V0. Choose the incorrect statement (a) AB  v
g
r
(b) AB  2v
g
r
(c) AB  4v
g
(d) If v  4 rg , the blob of mud will land on the wheel

(a) the speed of the particle A is zero
and not on the road
(b) the speed of C is 2 V0
58. A string is wrapped several times round a solid cylinder
(c) the speed of B, C and D are all equal to V0 and then the end of the string is held stationary while
(d) the speed of B is greater than the speed of O the cylinder is released from rest with no initial motion.
The acceleration of the cylinder and tension in the string
54. A circular disc rotates in a vertical plane about a fixed
will be
horizontal axis which passes through a point X on the
circumference of the disc. When the centre of the disc
moves with speed v, the speed of the opposite end of the
diameter through X is
(a) 2v (b) 2v
1
(c) v (d) v
2 2 mg mg
(a) g and (b) g and
55. A ring, hollow sphere and solid sphere are rolled down 3 3 2
from inclined plane. Which will take least time to reach g mg g mg
the ground? (c) and (d) and
3 2 2 3
(a) solid sphere (b) hollow sphere
59. A solid homogeneous sphere is moving on a rough
(c) ring (d) both 2 and 3 horizontal surface, partly rolling and partly sliding.
56. A cylindrical drum is pushed along by a board of length During this kind of motion of the sphere
l. The drum rolls forward on the ground a distance of (a) Total kinetic energy is conserved
l/2. There is no slipping at any instant. During the
(b) Angular momentum of the sphere about the point of
process of pushing the board, the distance moved by the
contact with the plane is conserved
man on the ground is:
(c) Only the rotational kinetic energy about the centre
of mass is conserved
(d) Angular momentum about centre of mass is
conserved
3 60. An inclined plane makes an angle of 30° with the

(a) (b)
2 4 horizontal. A solid sphere rolling down this inclined
plane from rest without slipping has a linear
(c) l (d) none of these
acceleration equal to:
57. A wheel of radius r rolls without slipping with a speed
(a) g/3 (b) 2g/3
v on a horizontal road. When it is at a point A on the
road, a small blob of mud separates from the wheel at (c) 5g/7 (d) 5g/14
its highest point and lands at point B on the road.
@cbseinfinite
61. A round uniform body of radius R, mass M and moment 66. A solid sphere of mass m is lying at rest on a rough
of inertia I, rolls down (without slipping) an inclined horizontal surface. The coefficient of friction between
plane making an angle q with the horizontal. Then, its the ground and sphere is m. The maximum value of F,
acceleration is so that the sphere will not slip, is equal to
g sin  g sin 
(a) (b)
I MR 2
1 1
MR 2 I
g sin  g sin 
(c) (d)
I MR 2
1 1 (a)
7
 mg (b)
4
 mg
MR 2 I 5 7
62. A solid sphere and a hollow sphere of equal mass and 7
5
radius are placed over a rough horizontal surface after (c)  mg (d)  mg
7 2
rotating it about its mass centre with same angular
velocity w0. Once the pure rolling starts let v1 and v2 be 67. A disc of radius R and mass M is rolling horizontally
the linear speeds of their centre of mass. Then: without slipping with speed v. It then moves up an
incline as shown. The maximum height up to which it
(a) v1 = v2 (b) v1 > v2
can reach is
(c) v1 < v2 (d) data is insufficient
63. In the above problem, let t1 and t2 be the times when
pure rolling of solid sphere and of hollow sphere is
started. Then:
(a) t1 = t2 (b) t1 < t2
(c) t1 > t2 (d) none of these
64. A constant horizontal force F is applied on the top of a (a) v2/g (b) v2/2g
solid sphere and a hollow sphere of same mass and
(c) v2/3g (d) 3v2/4g
radius both kept on a sufficiently rough surface. Let a 1
and a2 be their linear accelerations then: 68. A ring of 1 kg mass and 1 m radius is moving forward
with velocity 1 m/s by rolling without slipping in a
horizontal plane. Its kinetic energy would be:
1
(a) joule (b) 1 joule
2
69. A solid sphere rolls down two different inclined planes
of the same height but of different inclinations:
(a) a1 = a2 (b) a1 > a2
(a) In both cases the speeds and time of descent will be
(c) a1 < a2 (d) data sufficient same
65. A uniform ball of radius r rolls without slipping down (b) The speeds will be same but time of descent will be
from the top of a sphere of radius R. The angular different
velocity of the ball when it breaks from the sphere is
(c) The speeds will be different but time of descent will
5g  R  r  10 g  R  r  be same
(a) (b)
17 r 2 17 r 2 (d) Speeds and time of descent both will be different.
5g  R  r  10 g  R  r 
(c) 2
(d)
10r 7r 2
@cbseinfinite
70. A ball rolls down an inclined groove acquiring a 74. A wheel of mass M and radius a and Moment of inertia
velocity Vr as it reaches the bottom. If the same ball IG (about centre of mass) is set rolling with angular
slide without friction rather than rolled from the same velocity w up a rough inclined plane of inclination  .
height down a similar track to acquire a velocity Vs , The distance travelled by it up the plane is:
which of the following statement is true?
I G 2  2  Ma 2  I G 
(a) (b)
(a) Vr < Vs because work must be done by the rolling 2 mg sin  2 Mg sin 
ball against frictional forces
I G 2 I G
(b) Vr > Vs because the rotational kinetic energy (c) (d)
2  Mg sin  2 Mg sin 
acquired makes the rolling ball travel faster
75. A loop and a disc have the same mass and roll without
(c) Vr = Vs because the kinetic energy must be
slipping with the same linear velocity v. If the total K.E.
conserved. of the loop is 8 J, the K.E. of the disc must be:
(d) Vr < Vs because the rolling ball acquires rotational (a) 6 J (b) 8 J
as well as translational kinetic energy
(c) 12 J (d) 16 J
(e) Vr < Vs, because the rotating ball has an angular
76. A particle of mass m is projected with a velocity v
acceleration as well as a linear acceleration making an angle of 45° with the horizontal. The
71. The speed of a homogeneous solid sphere after rolling magnitude of the angular momentum of the projectile
down an inclined plane of vertical height h from rest about the point of projection when the particle is at
without sliding is maximum height h is
10 gh mv 3
(a) (b) gh (a) zero (b)
7 4 2g
6 gh mv 3 m
(c) 2 gh (d) (c) (d)
5 2g 2 gv 3
72. A spherical ball rolls on a table without slipping. The 77. When a mass is rotating in a plane about a fixed point
fraction of its total energy associated with rotation is: its angular momentum is directed along
2 2 (a) the radius

(a) (b)
5 7 (b) the tangent to orbit
3 3 (c) line at an angle of 45° to the plane of rotation
(c) (d)
5 7 (d) the axis of rotation
73. A person slides freely down a frictionless inclined plane 78. A mass M is moving with constant velocity parallel to
while his bag falls down vertically from the same x–axis. Its angular momentum with respect to origin.
height. The final speeds of the man ( vM ) and the bag (a) is zero (b) remain constant
(vB) should be such that: (c) goes on increasing (d) goes on decreasing
(a) vM  vB 79. A projectile is projected at certain angle. The angular
momentum about origin will
(b) vM  vB
(a) always increase
(c) the depend on the masses
(b) always decrease
(d) vM  vB (c) will first increase then decrease
(d) remain constant
@cbseinfinite
80. A conical pendulum consists of a mass M suspended 83. A particle performs uniform circular motion with an
from a strong string of length l. The mass executes a angular momentum L. If the frequency of particle’s
circle of radius R in a horizontal plane with speed v. At motion is doubled and its kinetic energy is halved, the
angular momentum becomes:
time t, the mass is at position Ri and has v j velocity.
(a) 2L (b) 4L
At time t, the angular momentum vector of mass M
about the point from which the string passes on the L L
(c) (d)
ceiling is 2 4
84. A disc of mass m and radius R moves in the x–y plane
as shown the figure. The angular momentum of the disc
about the origin O at the instant shown is
(a) MvRk
5 7
(b) Mv k
(a) mR 2 (b) mR 2
2 3
 2
 R2 R  9 3
(c) Mv  i k (c) mR 2 (d) mR 2
2 2
 
85. A uniform sphere of mass m, radius r and moment of
 2
R 2
R  inertia I about its centre moves along the x-axis as
(d)  Mv  i  k
shown in the figure. Its centre of mass moves with
 
velocity = v0, and it rotates about its centre of mass with
81. A penguin of mass m falls from rest at point A. At angular velocity = w0. Let L = Iw0 + mv0r is the angular
horizontal distance d from the origin O momentum of the body about the origin O is
(a) L, only if v0 = w0r

(A) What is the angular momentum of the falling (b) greater than L, if v0 > w0r
penguin about O (c) less than L is v0 > w0r
(B) What torque does the weight mg acting on the (d) L, for all values of w0 and v0
penguin exert about the origin O
86. A stone attached to one end of a string is revolved
(a) 0 for (A) mu2/R for (B) where R is the height of A around a stick so that the string winds upon the stick and
from ground. gets shortened. What is conserved.
(b) 0 for (A) and 0 for (B) (a) angular momentum (b) linear momentum
(c) mg td for (A) and mgd for (B) (c) Kinetic energy (d) none of these
(d) Since angular momentum and torque both vary 87. A particle of mass m is attached to a light string which
continuously so it is not possible to calculate them passes through a hollow tube. The tube is held by one
82. Angular momentum of the particle rotating with a hand and the string by the other. The object is set into
central force is constant due to rotation in a circle of radius R and velocity V. The string
(a) constant force is then pulled down, shortening the radius of path to r.
(b) constant linear momentum What is conserved?
(c) zero torque (a) angular momentum (b) linear momentum
(d) constant torque (c) Kinetic Energy (d) None of these
@cbseinfinite
88. An athlete diving off a high springboard can perform a 93. A solid sphere is rotating in free space. If radius of the
variety of physical movements in the air before sphere is increased keeping mass same which one of the
entering the water below. Which one of the following following will not be affected?
parameters will remain constant during the fall? The (a) Moment of inertia
athlete’s
(b) Angular momentum
(a) linear velocity (b) linear momentum
(c) Angular velocity
(c) moment of inertia (d) angular momentum
(d) Rotational kinetic energy
89. Initial angular velocity of a circular disc of mass M is
w1. Then two small spheres of mass m each are attached 94. A cubical block of edge a is moving with velocity v on
gently to two diametrically opposite points on the edge a horizontal smooth plane as shown in figure. It hits a
of the disc. What is the final angular velocity of the ridge at point O. The angular speed of the block after it
disc? hits O is:
M m M m
(a)   1 (b)   1
 M   m 
 M   M 
(c)   1 (d)   1
 M  4m   M  2m  3v 3v
(a) (b)
90. A uniform disc of radius a and mass m is rotating freely  4a   2a 
with angular speed  in a horizontal plane, about a
smooth fixed vertical axis through its centre. A particle, (c) 3v  2a  (d) Zero
also of mass m, is suddenly attached to the rim of the
95. In the following figure a massive rod AB of length l is
disc and rotates with it. The new angular speed is
held in horizontal position by two massless strings. If
(a)  / 3 (b)  / 3 the string at B breaks and if the horizontal acceleration
of centre of mass, vertical acceleration and angular
(c)  / 5 (d)  / 5
acceleration of rod about the centre of mass are a x, ay
91. A rigid horizontal smooth rod AB of mass 0.75 kg and and a, respectively, then
length 40 cm can rotate freely about a fixed vertical axis
through its midpoint O. Two rings each of mass 1 kg
initially at rest at a distance of 10 cm from O on either
side of the rod. The rod is set in rotation with an angular
velocity of 30 radians per sec. and when the rings reach
the ends of the rod, the angular velocity in rad/sec. is (a) 2 3a y  3a  2ax (b) 3a y  3a  ax
(a) 5 (b) 10 (c) a y  3a  2ax (d) 2a y  a  2 3ax

(c) 15 (d) 20
96. A meter rule is freely pivoted about its centre. A piece
92. A rigid spherical body is spinning around an axis of putty of mass 20 g travelling at 5 ms-1 strikes and
without any external torque. Due to changes in adheres to one end of the rule so that the rule starts to
temperature, the volume increases by 1%. Its angular rotate in a horizontal circle. Given that the moment of
speed will inertia of the rule and putty about pivot is 0.02 kg m2,
(a) increase approximately by 1% the initial angular velocity of the rule is
(b) decrease approximately by 1% (a) 1.58 rad s-1 (b) 2.24 rad s-1
(c) decrease approximately by 0.67% (c) 2.50 rad s-1 (d) 5.00 rad s-1
(d) decrease approximately by 0.33%
@cbseinfinite
97. A uniform bar of length 6a and mass 8m lies on a 99. A mass m is moving at speed v perpendicular to a rod
smooth horizontal table. Two-point masses m and 2m, of length d and mass M = 6 m which pivots around a
moving in the same horizontal plane with speeds 2v and frictionless axle running through its centre. If it strikes
v respectively, strike the bar (as shown in figure) and and sticks to the end of the rod. The moment of inertia
stick to the bar after collision. Denoting angular of the rod about its centre is Md2/12. Then the angular
velocity (about centre of mass), total energy and speed of the system just after the collision is:
velocity of centre of mass by w, E and v0 respectively,
after the collision which of the following is incorrect?
2v 2v
(a) (b)
3d d
v 3v
(c) (d)
d 2d
3v
(a) v0  0 (b)  
5a
v 3mv 2
(c)   (d) E  [One or more than one correct option]
5a 5a
98. A stick of length L and mass M lies on a frictionless 100. The moment of inertia of a thin square plate ABCD, of
horizontal surface on which it is free to move in any uniform thickness about an axis passing through the
way. A ball of mass m moving with speed v collides centre O and perpendicular to the plane of the plate is
elastically with the stick as shown in the figure. If after
the collision the ball comes to rest, then what should be
the mass of the ball?
(a) I1 + I2 (b) I3 + I4
(c) I1 + I3 (d) I1 + I2 + I3 + I4
where I1, I2, I3 and I4 are respectively moments of inertia
about axes 1, 2, 3 and 4 which are in the plane of the
(a) m = 2 (b) m = M plate.
(c) m = M/2 (d) m = M/4
@cbseinfinite
101. A pair of uniform identical wires are bent into semi-

circular rings, and then glued together so that the two
rings have a common centre, but the planes of the
semicircles are mutually perpendicular as shown in the
figure:
Note that B is the common mid–point of the semi-
circular rings. While O is the centre of the rings. If m is
the total mass of the system and R is the radius of the
rings. Which of the following statements is (are) true?
(a) Friction force decelerates the disc M1 and

accelerates the disc M2.
(b) The final angular speeds of the discs are in the ratio
1 R1
(a) Moment of inertia of the system about the axis OB  .
2 R2
is given by mR 2
(c) The angular momentum of the system (M1 + M2) is
(b) Moment of inertia of the system about the axis OB conserved about the point of contact.
mR 2 (d) The final rotational energy is less than the initial
is given by
2 rotational energy.
(c) Radius of gyration of the system about the axis OB 104. A constant external torque t acts for a very brief period
R Dt on a rotating system having moment of inertia I.
is given by (a) The angular momentum of the system will change
2
by t Dt
(d) Radius of gyration of the system about the axis OB (b) The angular velocity of the system will change by
is given by R . tDt/I
102. Four identical rods, each of mass m and length l, are (c) If the system was initially at rest, it will acquire
t 
2
joined to form a rigid square frame. The frame lies in
rotational kinetic energy
the x-y plane, with its centre at the origin and the sides 2I
parallel to the x and y axis. Its moment of inertia about. (d) The kinetic energy of the system will change by
t 
2
2 2
(a) the x– axis is m
3 I
4 2
105. In the figure, the disc D does not slip on the surface S.
(b) the z– axis is m The pulley P has mass, and the string does not slip on
3
it. The string is wound around the disc.
(c) and axis parallel to the z– axis and passing through
10 2
a corner is m
3
5 2
(d) one side is m
3 (a) The acceleration of the block B is double the
acceleration of the centre of D
103. A circular disc of mass M1 and radius R1 initially
(b) The force of friction exerted by D on S acts to the
moving with an angular speed w0 about the horizontal
left
centroidal axis is brought in contact with another
(c) The horizontal and the vertical sections of the string
stationary circular disc of mass M2 and radius R2 as
have the same tension
shown in the figure.
(d) The sum of the kinetic energies of D & B is less than
the loss in the potential energy of B as it move down.
@cbseinfinite
106. A disc of circumference s is at rest at a point A on a 110. A ring (R), a disc (D), a solid sphere (S) and a hollow
horizontal surface when a constant horizontal force sphere with thin walls (H), all having the same mass but
begins to act on its centre. different radii, start together from rest at the top of an
inclined plane and roll down without slipping. Then:
(a) all of them will reach the bottom of the incline
together
(b) the body with the maximum radius will reach the
Between A and B there is sufficient friction to prevent bottom first
slipping, and the surface is smooth to the right of B. AB (c) they will reach the bottom in the order S, D, H and
= s. The disc moves from A to B in time T. To the right R
of B- (d) all of them will have the same kinetic energy at the
(a) the angular acceleration of the disc will disappear; bottom of the incline
linear acceleration will remain unchanged 111. A particle of mass m is projected with a velocity v
(b) linear acceleration of the disc will increase making an angle of 45° with the horizontal. The
(c) the disc will make one rotation in time T/2 magnitude of the angular momentum of the projectile
(d) the disc will cover a distance greater than in further about the point of projection when the particle is at its
time T maximum height h, are:
107. A particle of mass m is travelling with a constant Mv 3

(a) zero (b)
velocity v  v0 iˆ along the line y = b, z = 0. Let dA be 4 2g
the area swept out by the position vector from origin to
the particle in time dt and L the magnitude of angular
(c) Mv3 / 2 g (d) m  2gh 3
momentum of particle about origin at any time t. Then: 112. A thin uniform rod of mass m and length l is free to
(a) L = constant (b) L ¹ constant rotate about its upper end. When it is at rest, it receives
an impulse I at its lowest point, normal to its length.
dA 2 L dA L
(c)  (d)  Immediately after impact,
dt m dt 2m
(a) the angular momentum of the rod is Il
108. A ring rolls without slipping on the ground. Its centre C
moves with a constant speed u. P is any point on the (b) the angular velocity of the rod is 3I/ml
ring. The speed of P with respect to the ground is v. (c) the kinetic energy of the rod is 3I2/2m
(a) 0 < v < 2 u (d) the linear velocity of the midpoint of the rod is 3I/2m
(b) v = u, if CP is horizontal 113. A small ball of mass m suspended from the ceiling at a
(c) v = u, if CP makes an angle of 30° with the point O by thread of length l moves along a horizontal
horizontal and P is below the horizontal levels of C circle with a constant angular velocity w.
(d) v  2 u , if CP is horizontal.
109. The disc of radius r is confined to roll without slipping
at A and B. If the plates have the velocities shown then:
(a) angular momentum is constant about O

(b) angular momentum is constant about C
(c) vertical component of angular momentum about O
(a) Angular velocity of the disc is 2v/r is constant
(b) Linear velocity, v0 = v (d) magnitude of angular momentum about O is
constant
(c) Angular velocity of the disc is 3v/2r
(d) None of these
@cbseinfinite
114. A horizontal disc rotates freely about a vertical axis 117. A smooth solid sphere of weight 1000 N is supported
through its centre. A ring, having the same mass and by the light frame OAB as shown in figure. The frame
radius as the disc, is now gently placed on the disc. After is hinged at O. Determine the reactions at B (in
some time, the two rotate with a common angular newtons)
velocity, then:
(a) some friction exists between the disc and the ring
(b) the angular momentum of the “disc plus ring” is
conserved
(c) the final common angular velocity is 2/3rd of the
initial angular velocity of the disc
(d) (2/3)rd of the initial kinetic energy changes to heat
115. A rod AC of length l and mass m is kept on a horizontal
smooth plane. It is free to rotate and move. A particle of
same mass m moving on the plane with velocity v
strikes rod at point B making angle 37° with the rod.
The collision is elastic. After collision. 118. A smooth solid sphere of weight 1000 N is supported
by the light frame OAB as shown in figure. The frame
is hinged at O. Determine the reactions at A (in
newtons)
72 v
(a) The angular velocity of the rod will be
55

(b) The centre of the rod travel a distance in the
3
time at which it makes half rotation
24 mv
(c) Impulse of the impact force is
55 119. The angular velocity of the rotation of a disc as a
(d) None of these function of time is given by w = 2 + 6t. The disc is
homogeneous with a radius 0.2 m and mass 5 kg. It
rotates around an axis passing through its centre. Find
the tangential force applied to the rim of the disc (in N).
116. A man whose mass is 75 kg holds the 25 kg mass. The
platform on which the man is standing is suspended by 120. A rigid body rotates about a fixed axis. Its angular
two ropes at A and B. Determine the tension (in newton) velocity is variable and is given by a – bt, where a and
in one of the ropes at A as shown in figure b are constants and t is the time. The angle through
[quote nearest integer] which it rotates before coming to rest is given by
2
 , where I is an integer. Find I.
I
@cbseinfinite
121. The figure shows a thin ring of mass M = 1 kg and Assertion & Reason
radius R = 0.4 m spinning about a vertical diameter For the following questions choose the correct
 1 2  answer from the codes (A), (B), (C) and (D) defined
 Take I  MR  . A small bead of mass m = 0.2 kg
 2  as follows.
can slide without friction along the ring. When the (A) Statement–I is True, Statement–II is True;
bead is at the top of the ring, the angular velocity is 5 Statement–II is a correct explanation for
rad/s. What is the angular velocity when the bead slips Statement–I.
(B) Statement–I is True, Statement–II is True;
Statement–2 is NOT a correct explanation for
Statement–I.
(C) Statement–I is True, Statement–II is False.
(D) Statement–I is False, Statement–II is True.
127. Statement-I : The hard boiled egg and raw egg can be
distinguished on the basis of spinning of both.
Statement-II : The moment of inertia of hard boiled
122. A body rotating at 20 rad/s is acted upon by a constant egg is more as compared to raw egg.
torque providing it a deceleration of 2 rad/s2. At what (a) A (b) B
time (in sec) will the body have kinetic energy same as (c) C (d) D
the initial value if the torque continues to act? 128. Statement–1: The mass of a body cannot be considered
123. If the square of the velocity of a body sliding down an to be concentrated at the centre of mass of the body for
incline is 160 (m2/sec2), find the velocity of a ring of the purpose of computing its moment of inertia.
same mass at the bottom which rolls down this incline
Statement–2: Then the moment of inertia of every
(in m/s) (g = 10 m/sec2) [quote nearest integer]
body about an axis passing through its centre of mass
124. A uniform ring of mass m, radius R, and centre C lies at
would be zero.
rest on a smooth horizontal table. An impulse of mv 7
(a) A (b) B
is given to a point P on the circumference horizontally
to move in a direction at 60° to PC. If the initial speed (c) C (d) D
v 129. Statement–I : Angular velocity is a characteristic of the
of point P is ( x m/sec). then value of x is rigid body as a whole.
4
125. A particle of mass m and velocity v0 is fired at a solid Statement-II : Angular velocity may be different for
cylinder of mass M and radius R. The cylinder is different particles of rigid body about the axis of
initially at rest and is mounted on a fixed horizontal axle rotation.
that runs through the centre of mass. The line of motion (a) A (b) B
of the particle is perpendicular to the axle and at a (c) C (d) D
distance d, less than R, from the centre.
130. Statement 1: A uniform thin rod of length L is hinged
If the angular speed of the system just after the particle
about one of its end and is free to rotate about the hinge
strikes and sticks to the surface of the cylinder is
without friction. Neglect the effect of gravity. A force F
 pmv 0  d is applied at a distance x from the hinge on the rod such
 M+2m  R 2 , then value of p is:
  that force always is perpendicular to the rod. As the
126. A particle of mass m and velocity v0 is fired at a solid value of x is increased from zero to L, the component of
cylinder of mass M and radius R. The cylinder is reaction by hinge on the rod perpendicular to length of
initially at rest and is mounted on a fixed horizontal axle rod increases.
that runs through the centre of mass. The line of motion Statement 2: Under the conditions given in statement 1
of the particle is perpendicular to the axle and at a as x is increased from zero to L, the angular acceleration
distance d, less than R, from the centre. of rod increases.
Is mechanical energy conserved in this process?
(a) A (b) B
Explain your answer.
[write 1 for ‘Yes’ and 0 for ‘No’] (c) C (d) D
@cbseinfinite
131. Statement 1 : A rigid disc rolls without slipping on a Match the Columns
fixed rough horizontal surface with uniform angular Each question has two columns. Four options are given
velocity. Then the acceleration of lowest point on the
disc is zero.
Column-II. Only one of these four options corresponds
Statement 2 : For a rigid disc rolling without slipping to a correct matching.
on a fixed rough horizontal surface, the velocity of the
lowest point on the disc is always zero.
(a) A (b) B
137. In Column I information about the force(s) acting on a
(c) C (d) D body are mentioned, while in Column II information
132. Statement–1: A solid sphere is rolling on a rough about the motion of a body is given. Match the entries
horizontal surface. Acceleration of contact point is zero. of Column II with the entries of Column I.
Statement–2: A solid sphere can roll on the smooth Column I
surface. Column II
(a) A (b) B (a) A single force through (p) Rotational motion
(c) C (d) D centre of mass
133. Statement–1: A sphere is performing pure rolling on a (b) Equal and opposite (q) Translational motion
rough horizontal surface with constant angular velocity. forces separated by
Frictional force acting on the sphere is zero. non-zero distance
Statement–2: Velocity of contact point is zero. (c) Equal and opposite (r) No motion
(a) A (b) B forces acting at same
(c) C (d) D point
134. Statement–1: A disc is rolling on a rough horizontal (d) A single force not (s) Centre of mass
surface. The instantaneous speed of the point of contact through centre of mass performs
during perfect rolling is zero with respect to the ground. curvilinear motion
Statement–2: The force of friction can help in 138. A disc of radius R is rolling with angular velocity w,
achieving pure rolling condition. angular acceleration a and linear acceleration a, along
x–direction. There are 4 points A, B, C and D on the
(a) A (b) B
disc as shown.
(c) C (d) D
135. Statement–1: A ring moving down on a smooth
inclined plane will be in slipping motion.
Statement–2: Work done by friction in pure rolling
motion is zero.
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
136. Statement–1: Torque is equal to rate of change of Column–I Column–II
angular momentum.
 a   R    R 
2 2 2
(a) Acceleration of point A (p)
Statement–2: Angular momentum depends on the
(q)  a   R    2 R 
2
moment of inertia and angular velocity. (b) Acceleration of point B
2
(a) A (b) B
(r)  a   R    2 R 
2 2
(c) C (d) D (c) Acceleration of point C
a   R   R 
2 2 2
(d) Acceleration of point D (s)
@cbseinfinite
139. In each situation of column–I, a uniform disc of mass m Using the following passage, solve Q.140 to Q.142
and radius R rolls on a rough fixed horizontal surface as Passage
shown. At t = 0 (initially) the angular velocity of disc is
Two rods 1 and 2 are released from rest as shown in figure.
w0 and velocity of centre of mass of disc is v0 (in
horizontal direction). The relation between v0 and w0 for Given: l1 = 4l, m1 = 2m, l2 = 2l and m2 = m.
each situation and also initial sense of rotation is given There is no friction between the two rods. If a be the angular
for each situation in column–I. Then match the
statements in Column–I with the corresponding results acceleration of rod 1 just after the rods are released. Then:
in column–II.
(a) (p) The angular
momentum
of disc about
point A
remains
conserved.
140. What is the normal reaction between the two rods at
(b) (q) The kinetic this instant?
energy of
disc after it 4m 
(a) 16 3 m  (b)
starts rolling 3
without
slipping is 32 m 
(c) (d) 12 3 m 
less than its 3 3
initial kinetic
141. What is the horizontal force on rod 1 by hinge A at this
energy.
instant?
(c) (r) In the
 32  12 3   16  2 3 
duration disc (a)   m  (b)  
rolls with  3 3   3 
slipping, the
friction acts 
(c) 14  2 3 m  (d) 3m
on disc
towards left. 142. What is initial angular acceleration of rod 2 in terms of
the given parameters in the question?
(d) (s) In the
duration disc 2 3 g  3 3 g 
(a)   2 3  (b)   3 
rolls with
 2   
slipping, the
friction acts 6 3 g  3 3 g 8 
on disc for (c)   5 3  (d)   
 8   8 3 
some time to
right and for
some time to
left.
@cbseinfinite
Using the following passage, solve Q.143 to Q.145 147. The speed of the point of contact of the sphere with the
Passage inclined plane when the sphere reaches the bottom of
the incline is
A uniform rod of mass M = 2 kg and length L is suspended
by two smooth hinges 1 and 2 as shown in the figure. A force 10 gh
(a) 2gh (b)
F = 4 N is applied downward at a distance L/4 from hinge 2. 7
Due to the application of force F, hinge 2 breaks. At this (c) zero (d) 2 2gh
instant, applied force F is also removed. The rod starts to
148. The time taken by the sphere to reach the bottom is
rotate downward about hinge 1.
2h 70h
(a) (b)
g 9g
25h 25h
(c) (d)
18 g 6g
143. The reaction at hinge 1, before hinge 2 breaks, is Using the following passage, solve Q.149 to Q.150
(a) 24 N (b) 12 N Passage
(c) 11 N (d) 10 N A hollow sphere is released from the top of an inclined plane
144. The reaction at hinge 1, just after breaking of hinge 2, of inclination q.

is
149. What should be the minimum coefficient of friction
(a) 20 N (b) 10 N between the sphere and the plane to prevent sliding?
(c) 5 N (d) 0 6 4
(a) tan  (b) tan 
5 5
145. The acceleration of the end point of the rod, when the
rod becomes vertical is 2 1
(c) tan  (d) tan 
(a) 30 m/s 2
(b) 20 m/s 2 5 5
(c) 10 m/s2 (d) 0 150. Find the kinetic energy of the sphere as it moves down
a length l on the incline if the friction coefficient is half
Using the following passage, solve Q.146 to Q.148
the value calculated in problem 149.
Passage
9 7
(a) mg sin  (b) mg sin 
In the given figure, a uniform solid sphere is released on the 5 8
top of a fixed inclined plane of inclination 37° and height ‘h’. 3 5
(c) mg sin  (d) mg sin 
It rolls without sliding. 8 8
146. The acceleration of the centre of the sphere is
3g 4g
(a) (b)
5 5
4g 3g
(c) (d)
7 7
@cbseinfinite
Objective Questions I [Only one correct option]

3. A thin wire of length L and uniform linear mass
1. An equilateral triangle ABC formed from a uniform
density ρ is bent into a circular loop with centre at O
wire has two small identical beads initially located at
as shown. The moment of inertia of the loop about the
A. The triangle is set rotating about the vertical axis
AO. Then the beads are released from rest axis XX′ is : (2000)
simultaneously and allowed to slide down, one along
AB and other along AC as shown. Neglecting
frictional effects, the quantities that are conserved as
beads slides down are: (2000)
ρ L3 ρ L3
(a) (b)
8π 2 16π 2
5ρ L3 3ρ L3
(c) (d)
16π 2 8π 2
4. A cylinder rolls up an inclined plane, reaches some
(a) angular velocity and total energy (kinetic and height and then rolls down (without slipping
throughout these motions). The directions of the
potential)
frictional force acting on the cylinder are: (2002)
(b) total angular momentum and total energy
(a) up the incline while ascending and down the incline
(c) angular velocity and moment of inertia about the
axis of rotation while descending.
(d) total angular momentum and moment of inertia (b) up the incline while ascending as well as
about the axis of rotation.
descending
2. A cubical block of side L rests on a rough horizontal
surface with coefficient of friction µ. A horizontal (c) down the incline while ascending and up the incline
force F is applied on the block as shown. If the while descending.
coefficient of friction is sufficiently high, so that the
block does not slide before toppling, the minimum (d) down the incline while ascending as well as
force required to topple the block is: (2000) descending
mg
(a) infinitesimal (b)
4
mg
(c) (d) mg (1 − µ )
2
@cbseinfinite
5. A circular platform is free to rotate in a horizontal 6. Consider a body, shown in figure, consisting of two
plane about a vertical axis passing through its centre. identical balls, each of mass M connected by a light
A tortoise is sitting at the edge of the platform. Now rigid rod. If an impulse J = Mv is imparted to the body
the platform is given an angular velocity ω0 . When at one of its end, what would be its angular velocity?
the tortoise moves along a chord of the platform with (2003)
a constant velocity (with respect to the platform). The
angular velocity of the platform ω ( t ) will vary with
time t as: (2002)
(a)
v 2v
(a) (b)
L L
v v
(c) (d)
3L 4L
7. A particle undergoes uniform circular motion. About
which point on the plane of the circle, will the angular
momentum of the particle remain conserved?
(b)
(2004)
(a) Centre of circle
(b) On the circumference of the circle
(c) Inside the circle
(d) Outside the circle
8. A disc is rolling (with slipping) on a horizontal surface.
C is its centre & Q & P are two points equidistant from
C. Let vP , vQ , vC be the magnitude of velocities of
(c)
points P, Q & C respectively, then: (2004)
(a) vQ > vC > vP (b) vQ < vC < vP

(d)
1
=
(c) vP v=
Q , vC vP (d) vQ < vC > vP
2
9. A child is standing with folded hands at the centre of a
platform rotating about its central axis. The kinetic
energy of the system is K. The child now stretches his
arms so that the moment of inertia of the system
doubles. The kinetic energy of the system now is:
(2004)
K
(a) 2K (b)
2
K
(c) (d) 4K
4
@cbseinfinite
10. A particle moves in a circular path with decreasing

speed. Choose the correct statement: (2005)
(a) Angular momentum remains constant

()
(b) Acceleration a is towards the centre
(c) Particle moves in a spiral path with decreasing

radius
(a) ring (b) solid sphere
(d) The direction of angular momentum remains
constant. (c) hollow sphere (d) disc
11. A block of mass m is at rest under the action of force 14. A block of base 10 cm × 10 cm and height 15 cm is
F against a wall as shown in figure. Which of the kept on an inclined plane. The coefficient of friction
following statement is incorrect? (2005) between them is 3. The inclination θ of this inclined
plane from the horizontal plane is gradually increased
from 0°. Then, (2009)
(a) at θ = 30°, the block will start sliding down the
plane
(b) the block will remain at rest on the plane up to
certain θ and then it will topple
(a) f = mg [where f is the frictional force]
(c) at θ = 60°, the block will start sliding down the
(b) F = N [where N is the normal force] plane and continue to do so at higher angles.
(c) F will not produce torque (d) at θ = 60°, the block will start sliding down the
(d) N will not produce torque plane and on further increasing θ, it will topple at
certain θ
12. A ball moves over a fixed track as shown in the figure.
From A to B the ball rolls without slipping. If surface 15. A wire, which passes through the hole in a small bead,
BC is frictionless and K A , K B and K C are kinetic is bent in the form of quarter of a circle. The wire is
fixed vertically on ground as shown in the figure. The
energies of the ball at A, B and C respectively, then:
bead is released from near the top of the wire and it
(2006) slides along the wire without friction. As the bead
moves from A to B, the force it applies on the wire is:
(2014)
(a) hA > hC ; K B > K C (b) hA > hC ; K C > K A
=
(c) hA h=
C ; KB KC (d) hA < hC ; K B > K C
13. A small object of uniform density rolls up a curved

surface with an initial velocity v. It reaches up to a (a) always radially outwards.
3v 2 (b) always radially inwards.

maximum height of with respect to the initial
4g (c) radially outwards initially and radially inwards
position. The object is: (2007) later.
(d) radially inwards initially and radially outwards
later.
@cbseinfinite
16. A ring of mass M and radius R is rotating with angular 18. A football of radius R is kept on a hole of radius
speed ω about a fixed vertical axis passing through its r (r < R) made on a plank kept horizontally. One end
M of the plank is now lifted so that it gets tilted making
centre O with two point masses each of mass at
8 and angle θ from the horizontal as shown in the figure
rest at O. These masses can move radially outwards below. The maximum value of θ so that the football
along two massless rods fixed on the ring as shown in does not start rolling down the plank satisfies (figure
the figure. At some instant the angular speed of the is schematic and not drawn to scale) (2020)
8
system is ω and one of the masses is at a distance of
9
3
R from O. At this instant the distance of the other
5
mass from O is (2015)
r r
(a) sin θ = (b) tan θ =
R R
r r
(c) sin θ = (d) cos θ =
2R 2R
19. A small roller of diameter 20 cm has an axle of
diameter 10 cm (see below on the left). It is on a
2 1 horizontal floor and a meter scale is positioned
(a) R (b) R
3 3 horizontally on its axle with one edge of the scale on
3 4 top of the axle (see figure on the right). The scale is
(c) R (d) R now pushed slowly on the axle so that it moves without
5 5
slipping on the axle, and the roller starts rolling
17. A uniform wooden stick of mass 1.6 kg and length l without slipping. After the roller has moved 50 cm, the
rests in an inclined manner on a smooth, vertical wall position of the scale will look like (figures are
of height h (< l) such that a small portion of the stick schematic and not drawn to scale) (2020)
extends beyond the wall. The reaction force of the wall
on the stick is perpendicular to the stick. The stick
makes an angle of 30° with the wall and the bottom of
the stick is on a rough floor. The reaction of the wall
on the stick is equal in magnitude to the reaction of the
h
floor on the stick. The ratio and the frictional force
l
f at the bottom of the stick are ( g = 10 ms −2 ) (a) (b)
(2016)
h 3 16 3
=
(a) = , f N
l 16 3
h 3 16 3 (c) (d)
= =
(b) , f N
l 16 3
h 3 3 8 3
=
(c) = , f N
l 16 3
h 3 3 16 3
=
(d) = , f N
l 16 3
@cbseinfinite
Objective Questions II 23. Two thin circular discs of mass m and 4m, having radii
[One or more than one correct option] of a and 2a, respectively, are rigidly fixed by massless,
20. A solid sphere is in pure rolling motion on an inclined rigid rod of length l = 24 a through their centers.
surface having inclination θ (2006) This assembly is laid on a firm and flat surface and set
rolling without slipping on the surface so that the
angular speed about the axis of the rod is ω. The
angular momentum of the entire assembly about the

point ‘O’ is L (see the figure). Which of the following
statement(s) is(are) true? (2016)
(a) frictional force acting on sphere is f = µ mg cos θ

(b) f is dissipative force
(c) friction will increase its angular velocity and
decrease its linear velocity

(d) If θ decreases, friction will decrease (a) The magnitude of the z-component of L is
21. A small ball starts moving from A over a fixed track 55ma 2ω
as shown in the figure. Surface AB has friction. From (b) The magnitude of angular momentum of the
A to B the ball rolls without slipping. Surface BC is
ω
frictionless K A , K B and K C are kinetic energies of the assembly about its center of mass is 17 ma 2
2
ball at A, B and C respectively. Then (2006)
(c) The magnitude of angular momentum of center of
mass of the assembly about the point O is 81ma ω
2
(d) The center of mass of the assembly rotates about

ω
the z-axis with an angular speed of
5

(a) hA > hC ; K B > K C (b) hA > hC ; K C > K A 24. The position vector r (t ) of a particle of mass m is

=
(c) hA h=
C ; KB KC (d) hA < hC ; K A > K C given by the following equation r= ( t ) α t 3 i + β t 2 j
22. A sphere is rolling without slipping on a fixed 10 −3
where α
= = ms , β 5 ms −2 and m = 0.1 kg . At t =
horizontal plane surface. In the fig., A is the point of 3
contact. B is the centre of the sphere and C is its 1 s, which of the following statement(s) is (are) true
topmost point. Then, (2009) about the particle? (2016)
 
(a) the velocity v is given by= (
v 10i + 10 j ms −1 )

(b) The angular momentum L with respect to the
 5
origin is given by L = −   k Nms
3
 
 
(
 
(a) v C − v A= 2 v B − v C )
   
(b) v C − v B = v B − v A (c) The force F is given by F= (i + 2 j ) N
      

(c) v C − v A = 2 v B − v C (d) v C − v A =
4 vB (d) The torque τ with respect to the origin is given by
  20 
τ = −   k Nm
 3 
@cbseinfinite
25. Consider a body of mass 1.0 kg at rest at the origin at


time t = 0. A force=
F (α tiˆ + Bjˆ ) is applied on the
body, where α = 1.0Ns −1 and β = 1.0N The torque
acting on the body about the origin at time t = 1.0 s is

τ Which of the following statements is (are) true?
(2018)
 1
(a) τ = Nm
3
 (a) ω =
3vx
(b) ω =
12vx
(b) The torque τ is in the direction of the unit vector L2 + 3 x 2 L2 + 12 x 2
+ k
L v
(c) xM = (d) ωM = 3
(c) The velocity of the body at t = 1s is 3 2L
 1
= v
2
( )
iˆ + 2 ˆj ms −1 28. A horizontal force 𝐹𝐹 is applied at the center of mass of
a cylindrical object of mass 𝑚𝑚 and radius R,
(d) The magnitude of displacement of the body at t = perpendicular to its axis as shown in the figure. The
1 coefficient of friction between the object and the
1s is m
6 ground is µ . The center of mass of the object has an
26. A thin and uniform rod of mass M and length L is held acceleration a. The acceleration due to gravity is g.
vertical on a floor with large friction. The rod is Given that the object rolls without slipping, which of
released from rest so that it falls by rotating about its the following statement(s) is(are) correct?
contact-point with the floor without slipping. Which of (2021)
the following statement(s) is/are correct, when the rod
makes an angle 600 with vertical?
[g is the acceleration due to gravity) (2019)
2g
(a) The angular acceleration of the rod will be
L
(b) The normal reaction force from the floor on the rod
mg
will be
16
(c) The radial acceleration of the rod’s center of mass

3g
will be
4 (a) For the same F, the value of 𝑎𝑎 does not depend on
whether the cylinder is solid or hollow
3g
(d) The angular speed of the rod will be (b) For a solid cylinder, the maximum possible value
2L
of 𝑎𝑎 is 2𝜇𝜇𝑔𝑔
27. A rod of mass 𝑚𝑚 and length L, pivoted at one of its
ends, is hanging vertically. A bullet of the same mass (c) The magnitude of the frictional force on the object
moving at speed 𝑣𝑣 strikes the rod horizontally at a due to the ground is always µ mg
distance 𝑦𝑦 from its pivoted end and gets embedded in
F
it. The combined system now rotates with angular (d) For a thin-walled hollow cylinder, a =
2m
speed ω about the pivot. The maximum angular
speed ωM is achieved for x = xM. Then
(2020)
@cbseinfinite
29. A particle of mass M = 0.2kg is initially at rest in 32. A boy is pushing a ring of mass 2 kg and radius 0.5 m
the xy-plane at a point (x = −h )
−l , y = where with a stick as shown in the figure. The stick applies a
force of 2 N on the ring and rolls it without slipping
l = 10m and h = 1m. The particle is accelerated at 2
with an acceleration of 0.3m / s . The coefficient of
time 𝑡𝑡 = 0 with a constant acceleration a = 10m / s 2
friction between the ground and the ring is large
along the positive x-direction. Its angular momentum enough that rolling always occurs and the coefficient
and torque with respect to the origin, in SI units, are
  P
represented by L and τ , respectively. i, j and k are of friction between the stick and the ring is   . The
 10 
unit vectors along the positive x, y and z-directions, value of P is. [quote nearest integer] (2011)
respectively. If k = i × j then which of the following
statement(s) is(are) correct? (2021)
(a) The particle arrives at the point ( x = l , y = −h ) at
time t = 2 s

(b) τ = 2k when the particle passes through the
point ( x = l , y = −h )

(c) L = 4k when the particle passes through the
point ( x = l , y = −h ) 33. A uniform circular disc of mass 50 kg and radius 0.4
 m is rotating with an angular velocity of 10 rad/s about
(d) τ = k when the particle passes through the point its own axis, which is vertical. Two uniform circular
(x = 0, y = −h ) rings, each of mass 6.25 kg and radius 0.2 m, are gently
placed symmetrically on the disc in such a manner that
30. One end of a horizontal uniform beam of weight W and they are touching each other along the axis of the disc
length L is hinged on a vertical wall at point O and its and are horizontal. Assume that the friction is large
other end is supported by a light inextensible rope. The enough such that the rings are at rest relative to the disc
other end of the rope is fixed at point Q, at a height L and the system rotates about the original axis. The new
above the hinge at point O. A block of weight αW is angular velocity (in rad s–1) of the system is
attached at the point P of the beam, as shown in the
figure (not to scale). The rope can sustain a maximum (2013)
tension of ( 2 2 )W . Which of the following 34. A horizontal circular platform of radius 0.5 m and
mass 0.45 kg is free to rotate about its axis. Two
statement(s) is(are) correct? (2021)
massless spring toy-guns, each carrying a steel ball of
(a) The vertical component of reaction force at O does mass 0.05 kg are attached to the platform at a distance
not depend on α 0.25 m from the centre on its either side along its
(b) The horizontal component of reaction force at O is diameter (see figure). Each gun simultaneously fires
equal to W for α = 0.5 the balls horizontally and perpendicular to the
(c) The tension in the rope is 2 W for α = 0.5 diameter in opposite directions. After leaving the
platform, the ball has horizontal speed of 9 ms–1 with
(d) The rope breaks if α > 1.5
respect to the ground. The rotational speed of the
Numerical Value Type Questions platform in rad/s after the balls leave the platform is
31. Four solid spheres each of diameter 5 cm and mass (2014)
0.5 kg are placed with their centres at the corners of a
square of side 4 cm. The moment of inertia of the
system about the diagonal of the square is N × 10–4 kg
m2, then N is. (2011)
@cbseinfinite
35. A uniform circular disc of mass 1.5 kg and radius 0.5 39. A thin rod of mass M and length 𝑎𝑎 is free to rotate in
m is initially at rest on a horizontal frictionless surface. horizontal plane about a fixed vertical axis passing
Three forces of equal magnitude F= 0.5 N are applied through point O. A thin circular disc of mass M and of
simultaneously along the three sides of an equilateral a
radius is pivoted on this rod with its center at a
triangle XYZ with its vertices on the perimeter of the 4
disc (see figure). One second after applying the forces, a
the angular speed of the disc in rad s–1 is (2014) distance from the free end so that it can rotate freely
4
about its vertical axis, as shown in the figure. Assume
that both the rod and the disc have uniform density and
they remain horizontal during the motion. An outside
stationary observer finds the rod rotating with an
angular velocity Ω and the disc rotating about its
vertical axis with angular velocity4Ω. The total
36. The densities of two solid spheres A and B of the same
angular momentum of the system about the point O
r
radii R vary with radius r as ρ A ( r ) = k   and  Ma 2 Ω 
R is   n. find the value of n (2021)
5  48 
r
ρ B ( r ) = k   , respectively, where k is a constant.
R
The moments of inertia of the individual spheres about
axes passing through their centres are I A and I B ,
IB n
respectively. If = , the value of n is: (2015)
I A 10
40. A pendulum consists of a bob of mass m = 0.1kg and
37. Two identical uniform discs roll without slipping on a mass less in extensible string of length L = 1.0m. It
two different surfaces AB and CD (see figure) starting is suspended from a fixed point at height H = 0.9 m
at A and C with linear speeds v1 and v2 , respectively, above a friction less horizontal floor. Initially, the bob
and always remain in contact with the surfaces. If they of the pendulum is lying on the floor at rest vertically
reach B and D with the same linear speed and below the point of suspension. A horizontal impulse P
v1 = 3m / s then v2 in m/s is (g = 10 m/s2) (2015) = 0.2kg −m/s is imparted to the bob at some instant.
After the bob slides for some distance, the string
becomes taut and the bob lifts off the floor. The
magnitude of the angular momentum of the pendulum
about the point of suspension just before the bob lifts
off is Jkg−m2/s. The kinetic energy of the pendulum
just after the liftoff is K Joules.
The value of J is_______. (2021)
41. A pendulum consists of a bob of mass m = 0.1kg and
a mass less in extensible string of length L = 1.0m. It
is suspended from a fixed point at height H = 0.9m
above a friction less horizontal floor. Initially, the bob
of the pendulum is lying on the floor at rest vertically
below the point of suspension. A horizontal impulse P
38. A ring and a disc are initially at rest, side by side, at
= 0.2kg -m/s is imparted to the bob at some instant.
the top of an inclined plane which makes an angle 60o
After the bob slides for some distance, the string
with the horizontal. They start to roll without slipping
becomes taut and the bob lifts off the floor. The
at the same instant of time along the shortest path. If
magnitude of the angular momentum of the pendulum
the time difference between their reaching the ground
( 2 − 3 ) s, then the height of the top of the inclined
about the point of suspension just before the bob lifts
off is Jkg -m2/s. The kinetic energy of the pendulum
is
10 just after the lift-off is K Joules.
plane, in metres, is ______. Take g = 10ms −2 . (2018) The value of K is_______. (2021)
@cbseinfinite
Assertion & Reason 44. When disc B is brought in contact with disc A, they
acquire a common angular velocity in time t. The
average frictional torque on one disc by the other
from the codes (A), (B), (C) and (D) defined as follows.
during this period is (2007)
(A) If Statement–I is true, Statement–II is true;
2Iω 9Iω
Statement–II is the correct explanation for (a) (b)
Statement–I. 3t 2t
(B) If Statement–I is true, Statement–II is true; 9Iω 3I ω

(c) (d)
Statement–II is not a correct explanation for 4t 2t
Statement–I. 45. The loss of kinetic energy during the above process is:
(C) If Statement–I is true; Statement–II is false. (2007)
(D) If Statement–I is false; Statement–II is true.
Iω 2 Iω 2
(a) (b)
42. Statement–I: Two cylinders, one hollow (metal) and 2 3
the other solid (wood) with the same mass and
Iω 2 Iω 2
identical dimensions are simultaneously allowed to (c) (d)
roll without slipping down an inclined plane from the 4 6
same height. The hollow cylinder will reach the Using the following passage, solve Q.46 to Q.48
bottom of the inclined plane first.
Passage
Statement–II: By the principle of conservation of
A uniform thin cylindrical disk of mass M and radius
energy, the total kinetic energies of the both the
R is attached to two identical massless springs of
cylinders are identical when they reach the bottom of
spring constant k which are fixed to the wall as shown
the incline. (2008)
in the figure. The springs are attached to the axle of the
(a) A (b) B disk diametrically on either side at a distance d from
(c) C (d) D its centre. The axle is massless and both the springs
and the axle are in a horizontal plane. The unstretched
Using the following passage, solve Q.43 to Q.45 length of each spring is L. The disk is initially at its
Passage equilibrium position with its centre of mass (CM) at a
distance L from the wall. The disk rolls without
Two discs A and B are mounted coaxially on a vertical  
slipping with velocity v0 = v0 iˆ. The coefficient of
axle. The discs have moments of inertial I and 2I
respectively about the common axis. Disc A is friction is µ.
imparted an initial angular velocity 2ω using the entire
potential energy of a spring compressed by a distance
x1 . Disc B is imparted an angular velocity ω by a
spring having the same spring constant and
compressed by a distance x2 . Both the discs rotate in
the clockwise direction.
x1
43. The ratio is (2007) 46. The net external force acting on the disk when its
x2
centre of mass is at displacement x with respect to its
1 equilibrium position is (2008)
(a) 2 (b) (a) −kx (b) −2kx
2
2kx 4kx
(c) − (d) −
1 3 3
(c) 2 (d)
2
@cbseinfinite
47. The centre of mass of the disk undergoes simple Using the following passage, solve Q.49 to Q.50
harmonic motion with angular frequency ω equal to
Passage
(2008)
A frame of reference that is accelerated with respect to
k 2k
(a) (b) an inertial frame of reference is called a non-inertial
M M
frame of reference. A coordinate system fixed on a
2k 4k circular disc rotating about a fixed axis with a constant
(c) (d)
3M 3M angular velocity ω is an example of a non-inertial
48. The maximum value of v0 for which the disk will roll frame of reference. The relationship between the force

without slipping is (2008) F rot experienced by a particle of mass m moving on

M M the rotating disc and the force F in experienced by the
(a) µ g (b) µ g
k 2k particle in an inertial frame of reference is
       
(c) µ g
3M
(d) µ m
5M ( ) ( )
F rot = F in + 2m v rot × ω + m ω × r × ω where v rot is
k 2K the velocity of the particle in the rotating frame of

reference and r is the position vector of the particle
with respect to the centre of the disc.
Now consider a smooth slot along a diameter of a disc
of radius R rotating counter-clockwise with a constant
angular speed ω about its vertical axis through its
center. We assign a coordinate system with the origin
at the center of the disc, the x-axis along the slot, the
y-axis perpendicular to the slot and the z-axis along the

( )
rotation axis ω = ω k . A small block of mass m is
 R
gently placed in the slot at r =   i at t = 0 and is
2
constrained to move only along the slot.
49. The distance r of the block at time t is

(2016)
(b) ( e 2ωt + e −2ωt )

R R
(a) cos 2ωt
2 4
(d) ( e + e −ωt )
R R ωt
(c) cos ωt
2 4
50. The net reaction of the disc on the block is
(2016)
(a) mω 2 R sin ωt j − mgk
(b) −mω 2 R cos ωt j − mgk
mω 2 R ( eωt − e −ωt ) j + mgk

1
(c)
2
(d) mω 2 R ( e 2ωt − e −2ωt ) j + mgk

1
2
@cbseinfinite
ROTATIONAL MOTION
@cbseinfinite
GRAVITATION 222
09
GRAVITATION
SCAN CODE
GRAVITATION
@cbseinfinite
Chapter 09
GRAVITATION 223
GRAVITATION
INTRODUCTION
1.3 Vector Form
Gravity is the force of attraction exerted by earth towards is In vector form, Newton’s law of gravitation is

centre on a body lying on or near the surface of earth. represented in the following manner. The force F21 ( )
Gravity is merely a special case of gravitation and is also exerted on particle m2 by particle m1 is given by,
called earth’s gravitational pull.  mm
F21 = G 1 2 2 ( rˆ12 ) ... ( i )
Weight of a body is defined as the force of attraction exerted r
Where ( r̂12 ) is a unit vector drawn in the direction of
by the earth on the body towards its centre.
vector from particle m2 to

( )
The units and dimensions of gravity pull or weight are the
same as those of force. particle m1. Similarly, the force F12 exerted on particle
m1 by particle m2 is given by
 mm
1. NEWTON’S LAW OF GRAVITATION F12 = −G 1 2 2 ( rˆ12 ) ... ( ii )
r
1.1 Definition From (i) and (ii)
 
Every particle attracts every other particle with a force ∴ F12 = −F21
which is directly proportional to the product of their
masses and inversely proportional to the square of the 2. ACCELERATION DUE TO GRAVITY
distance between them.
2.1 Definition
Acceleration due to gravity is the acceleration gained by
a an object due to gravitational force.
Fig. 9.1 It SI unit is m / s 2 . It has both magnitude direction,
hence, it is a vector quantity.
1.2 Mathematical Form Acceleration due to gravity is represented by g.
If m1 and m2 are the masses of the particles and r is the The stranded value of g on the surface of earth at sea level
distance between them, the force of attraction F between is 9.8 m / s 2 .
the particles is given by
mm 2.2 The Acceleration due to Gravity at a Height h
F ∝ 12 2 above the Earth’s Surface
r
mm Let M and R be the mass and radius of the earth and g be
∴F= G 12 2
r the acceleration due to gravity at the earth’s surface.
Where G is the universal constant of gravitation. Suppose that a body of mass m is placed on the surface
Universal gravitational constant is measured in of the earth.
N m 2 / kg 2 GMm
∴ mg =2
R
The dimensional formula is  L3 M −1T −2  universal GM
∴ g = 2 ... ( i )
gravitational constant R
The value of G is: 6.67408 × 10−11 Nm 2 / kg 2 Now suppose that the body is raised to a height h, above
the earth’s surface,
GMm
Mg n = .... ( ii )
(R + h)
2
SCAN CODE
GRAVITATION
@cbseinfinite
GRAVITATION 224
Fig. 9.3
Fig. 9.2
4
Now, M ′ = π ( R − d ) ρ
3
Dividing eq (ii) by eq (i), we get,
gh R2 3
=
g ( R + h )2 GM1
gd =
(R − d)
2
 R2 
∴ gh = g 4
 ( R + h )  or g d = πG ( R − d ) ρ ... ( ii )
2
3
2.3 Acceleration due to Gravity at a Very Small Dividing the equation (ii) by (i), we have
Height 4
πG ( R − d ) ρ
gd 3 R −d  d
R+h
−2
= = g d g 1 −  .. ( iii )
or =
gh = g   g 4
πGRρ R  R 
 R  3
−2
 h Therefore, the value of acceleration due to gravity
=g h g 1 + 
 R decreases with depth.
If h << R, then neglecting high power’s of ‘h’ we get, 2.5 Variation of ‘g’ with Latitude due to Rotational
 2h  Motion of Earth
=g h g 1 − 
 R  Due to the rotational of the earth the force mrω2 cos λ
radially outwards. Hence the net force of attraction
2.4 Effect of Depth on a Acceleration due to Gravity
exerted by the earth of the particle and directed towards
Also g in terms of ρ
the centre of the earth is given by
GM
g= 2 mg ′ = mg − mrω2 cos λ
R
If ρ is density of the material of earth, then where g ′ is the value of the acceleration due to gravity
4 at the point P.
M = πR 3ρ
3
4
G × πR 3ρ
∴ g= 3
R2
4
∴ g = πGRρ
3
Let gd be acceleration due to gravity at the point B at a
depth d below the surface of earth. A body at the point B
will experience force only due to the portion of the earth
of radius OB (R – d). The outer spherical shell, whose
thickness is d, will not exert any force on body at point
B. Fig. 9.4
Because it will acts as a shell and point is inside. ∴ g ′ = g − rω2 cos λ
=
Now, r R cos λ (where R is the radius of the earth)
Then g ′ = g − ( R cos λ ) ω2 cos λ
SCAN CODE
GRAVITATION
@cbseinfinite
GRAVITATION 225
∴ g ′ = g − Rω2 cos 2 λ The force due to test mass m0 placed at point P is given
b:
The effective acceleration due to gravity at a point ‘P’ is
GMm 0
given by, g ′ = g − Rω2 cos 2 λ F=
r2
Thus, value of ‘g’ changes with λ and ω F GM
Hence E = ⇒ E=
1. At poles, m0 r2
λ= 90°  GM
In vector form E = − 2 rˆ
g ′ = g − Rω2 cos 2 90° r
g′ = g Dimensional formula of intensity of gravitational field
F  MLT 
−2
This is maximum acceleration due to gravity.
= = =  M 0 LT −2 
2. At equator m [ ]
M
λ =0
3.2 Gravitational Potential
g ′ = g − Rω2 cos 2 0 The gravitational potential at any point in a
g ′ = g − Rω2 gravitational field is defined as the work done to bring a
This is minimum acceleration due to gravity. unit mass slowly from infinity to that point.
Variation due to shape. 1. The gravitational potential (V) at a point at distance r
from a point mass M is given by,
NOTE: GM
V= − (Where G is the constant of gravitation)
The variation of acceleration due to gravity according to r
the depth and the height from the earth’s surface can be 2. The work done on a unit mass is converted into its
expressed with help of following graph. potential energy. Thus, the gravitational potential at any
point is equal to the potential energy of a unit mass
placed at that point.
3. If a small point mass m is placed in a gravitational field
at a point where the gravitational potential is V, the
gravitational
potential energy (P.E.) of the mass m is given by.
P.E. = mass × gravitational potential
P.E = mV
Fig. 9.5 GMm
P.E = −
r
3. GRAVITATION FIELD AND 3.3 Gravitational Potential Energy
GRAVITATION POTENTIAL Gravitational potential energy of a body at a point is
defined as the work done in slowly bringing the body
3.1 Gravitational Field from infinity to that point.
The space surrounding the body within which its Let a body of mass m is displaced through a distance ‘dr’
gravitational force of attraction is experienced by other towards the mass M, then work done given by,
bodies is called gravitational field. Gravitational field is r
GMm GMm
very similar to electric field in electrostatics where dW =Fdr = 2 dr ⇒ ∫ dW =∫ 2 dr
r ∞ r
charge ‘q’ is replaced by mass ‘m’ and electric constant
‘K’ is replaced by gravitational constant ‘G’. The Gravitational potential energy,
intensity of gravitational field at a points is defined as the GMm
U= −
force experienced by a unit mass placed at that point. r

 F (i) From above equation, it is clear that gravitational
E= potential energy increases with increase in distance (r)
m
(i.e. it becomes less negative).
The unit of the intensity of gravitational field is N kg-1.
(ii) Gravitational P.E. becomes maximum (or zero) at
Intensity of gravitational field due to point mass:
r= ∞
SCAN CODE
GRAVITATION
@cbseinfinite
GRAVITATION 226

Object Potential (V) Gravitational field ( E ) Figure
Ring −GM  −GMr

V= E= rˆ
(a )
2 1/ 2
(a + r2 )
3/ 2
2
+r 2
Thin circular −2GM  2 2   2GM  r 

=V a +r −r E=− 2 1 −  rˆ
a2   a  r +a 
2 2
Uniform Thin spherical

shell
(a) Point P inside the shell GM E=0

(r < a) V= −
a
(b) Point P outside the
GM  −GM
shell (r > a) V= −
r E = 2 rˆ
r
Uniform Solid sphere

(a) Point P inside the  −GMr
− 3 ( 3a 2 − r 2 )
GM
sphere (r ≤ a) V= E= rˆ
2a a3
(b) Point P outside the
sphere (r ≥ a) GM  −GM
V= − E = 2 rˆ
r r
SCAN CODE
GRAVITATION
@cbseinfinite
GRAVITATION 227
4. ESCAPE VELOCITY OF A BODY 5. SATELLITE
4.1 Expression for the Escape Velocity of a Body at 5.1 Definition

Rest on the Earth’s Surface Any smaller body which revolves around another larer
The minimum velocity with which a body should be body under the influence of its gravitation is called a
projected from the surface of the earth, so that it escapes satellite. The satellite may be natural or artificial.
from the earth’s gravitational field, is called the escape 1. The moon which revolves around the earth, is a
velocity. satellite of the earth. There are sixteen satellites
Thus, if a body or a satellite is given the escape revolving around the planet Jupiter. These satellites are
velocity, its kinetic energy of projection will be equal to called natural satellites.
its binding energy. 2. A satellite made and launched into circular orbit by
Kinetic Energy of projection = Binding Energy. man is called an artificial satellite. The first satellite was
1 GMm launched by USSR named SPUTNIK–I and the first
∴ mv c2 = Indian satellite was ‘ARYABHATTA’.
2 R
2GM There are two types of satellites:
∴ vc = 1. GEO stationary satellite
R
2. SPY satellite
4.2 Expression for ‘Ve’ in Terms’s of ‘g’ Let’s discuss GEO stationary satellite
The escape velocity for any object on the earth’s surface
is given by.
2GM
ve =
R
If m is the mass of the object, its weight mg is equal to
the gravitational force acting on it.
GMm
∴ mg =2
R
∴ GM =
gR 2 Fig 9.6
Substituting this value in the expression for ve we get, We know that the earth rotates about tis axis with angular
velocity ωearth and time period Tearth = 24 hours . Suppose
v e = 2gR
a satellites is set in an orbit which is in plane of the
4.3 Expression for ‘Ve’ in Terms’s of Density equator, whose ω is equal to ωearth , (or its T is equal to
We have,
Tearth = 24 hours ) and direction is also same as that of
2GM earth. Then as seen from earth, it will appear to be
ve =
R stationery. This type of satellite is called geo-stationery
satellite.
Let ρ be the mean density of the planet. Then,
ωsatellite =
ωearth
4 3 ⇒ Tsatellite =Tearth =24 hr.
M= πR ρ
3
So time period of a geo-stationery satellite must be 24
2G 4 3
v=
e × πR ρ hours. To achieve T = 24 hour, the orbital radius geo-
R 3 stationery satellite.
2πGρ  4π 2  3
v e = 2R
3 T2 =  r
 GM e 
Putting the values, we get orbital radius of geo-stationery
satellite r = 6.6R e (here Re = Radius of the earth) height
from the surface h = 5.6R e .
SCAN CODE
GRAVITATION
@cbseinfinite
GRAVITATION 228
7.2 An Expression for the Orbital Velocity of a

6. PERIOD OF REVOLUTION OF A SATELLITE Satellite Revolving Round the Earth
The time taken by a satellite to complete one revolution Suppose that a satellite of mass m is raised to a height h
round the earth is called its period or periodic time (T). above the earth’s surface and then projected in a
Consider a satellite of mass m revolving in a circular horizontal direction with the orbital velocity v0 . The
orbit with a orbital velocity v0 at a height h above the satellite begins to move round the earth in a circular orbit
surface of the earth. Let M and R be the mass and the of radius, R + h,
radius of the earth respectively. The radius (r) of the where R is the radius of the earth.
circular orbit of the satellite is r = R + h.
For the circular motion,
Fig.9.8
The gravitational force acting on the satellite is
Fig. 9.7 GMm
,
(R + h)
2
GM
∴ v0 = ... ( i ) where M is the mass of the earth and G is the constant of
r gravitation.
If T is the period of revolution of the satellite,
For circular motion,
circumference of orbit 2πr
=
Period (T) = mv 02 GMm
critical velocity v0 = ,
( R + h ) ( R + h )2
2πr
R= ...(From i) GM
GM ∴ v0 =
r (R + h)
This expression gives the orbital velocity of the satellite.
r3
∴ T =2π From the expression, it is clear that the orbital velocity
GM
depends upon.
This expression gives the periodic time of the satellite.
Squaring the expression, we get 1. Mass of the earth
2. Radius of earth and
4π2 r 3
∴ T2 = 3. Height of the satellite above the surface of the earth.
GM
∴ T 2 ∝ r 3 ...(since G and M are constants) 7.3 The Escape Velocity of a Body from the Surface
Thus, the square of the time period of revolution of a of the Earth is 2 times its Critical Velocity
satellite is directly proportional to the cube of the radius when it Revolves Close to the Earth’s Surface
of its orbit Let M and R be the mass and radius of the earth and m
be the mass of the body. When orbiting close to the
7. ORBITAL VELOCITY earth’s surface, the radius of the orbit is almost equal to
R. If ve is the critical velocity of the body, then for a
7.1 Definition circular orbit.
The horizontal velocity with which a satellite must be Centripetal force = Gravitational force
GMm
projected from a point above the earth’s surface, so that ∴ mv c2 =2
it revolves in a circular orbit round the earth, is called the R
orbital velocity of the satellite. GM
∴ vc = ... ( i )
R
SCAN CODE
GRAVITATION
@cbseinfinite
GRAVITATION 229
If ve is the escape velocity from the earth’s surface, NOTE:

K.E. of projection = Binding energy
1 GMm Launching of An Artificial Satellite Around Earth
∴ mv e2 =
2 2
2GM
∴ ve = ... ( ii )
R
From Eq (i) and Eq. (ii), we get,
v e = 2v c
7.4 Different Cases of Projection
When a satellite is taken to some height above the earth
and then projected in the horizontal direction, the
following four cases may occur, depending upon the
magnitude of the horizontal velocity.
Fig. 9.10
The satellite is placed upon the rocket which is launched
from the earth. After the rocket reaches its maximum
Fig. 9.9 vertical height h, a spherical mechanism gives a thrust to
1. If the velocity of the projection is less than the orbital the satellite at point A (figure) producing a horizontal
velocity then the satellite moves in elliptical orbit, but the velocity v. The total energy of the satellite at A is thus,
point of projection is apogee and in the orbit, the satellite
1 GMm
comes closer to the earth with its perigee point lying at =E mv 2 −
180°. If it enters the atmosphere while coming towards 2 R+h
perigee it will loose energy and spirally comes down. If The orbit will be an ellipse (closed path), a parabola, or
it does not enters the atmosphere it will continue to move an hyperbola depending on whether E is negative, zero,
in elliptical orbit. or positive. In all cases the centre of the earth is at one
2. If the velocity of the projection is equal to the orbital focus of the path. If the energy is too low, the elliptical
velocity then the satellite moves in circular orbit round orbit will intersect the earth and the satellite will fall
the earth. back. Otherwise, it will keep moving in a closed orbit, or
3. If the velocity of the projection is greater than the will escape from the earth, depending on the values of v
orbital velocity but less than the escape velocity, then the and h.
satellite moves in elliptical orbit and its apogee, or point
Hence a satellite carried to a height h (<< R) and given a
of greatest distance from the earth, will be greater than
horizontal velocity of 8 km/sec will be placed almost in
projection height.
a circular orbit around the earth (figure). If launched at
4. If the velocity of the projection is equals to the escape
less than 8 km/sec, it would get closer and closer to earth
velocity, then the satellite moves in parabolic path.
until it hits the ground. Thus, 8 km/sec is the critical
5. It the velocity of the projection is greater than the (minimum) velocity.
escape velocity, then orbit will hyperbolic and will
escape the gravitational pull of the earth and continue to
travel infinitely.
SCAN CODE
GRAVITATION
@cbseinfinite
GRAVITATION 230
3. Weather forecasting.
8. ENERGY OF SATELLITE
4. For taking photographs of astronomical objects.
GMm
The potential energy of the system is U = − 5. For studying of solar and cosmic radiations.
r
10. WEIGHTLESSNESS
1. The gravitational force with which a body is attracted
towards the centre of earth is called the weight of
body.
2. When an astronaut is on the surface of earth,
gravitational force acts on him. This gravitational
force is the weight of astronaut and astronant exerts
Fig. 9.11 this force on the surface of earth. The surface of earth
The kinetic energy of the satellite is, exerts an equal and opposte reaction and due to this
1 2 1  GM  reaction he feels his weight on the earth.
=K =mv0 m 
2 2  r  3. For an astronaut in an orbiting satellite, the satellite
1 GMm and astronaut both have same acceleration towards
or K = the centre of earth and this acceleration is equal to the
2 r
acceleration due to gravity at the place.
GMm
The total energy is, E = K+U= −
2r 4. Therefore astronaut does not produce any action on
GMm the floor of the satellite. Naturally the floor does not
or E = − exert any force of reaction on the astronaut. As there
2r
This energy is constant and negative, i.e., the system is is no reaction, the astronaut has a feeling of
closed. The farther the satellite from the earth the greater weightlessness. (i.e. no sense of his own weight).
its total energy. NOTE:
1. sensation of weightlessness experienced by an
9. COMMUNICATION SATELLITE astronaut is not the result of there being zero
gravitational acceleration, but of there being zero
An artificial satellite revolving in a circular orbit round difference between the acceleration of the spacecraft
the earth in the same sense of the rotational of the earth and the acceleration of the astronaut.
and having same period of revolution as the period of 2. The most common problem experienced by
rotation of the earth astronauts in the initial hours of weightlessness is
(i.e. 1 day = 24 hours = 86400 seconds) is called as known as space adaptation syndrome (space
geo-stationary or communication satellite. sickness).
As relative velocity of the satellite with respective to the
earth is zero it appears stationary from the earth’s
11. KEPLER’S LAWS
surface.
Therefore it is know as geo-stationary satellite or
geosynchronous satellite. 11.1 Law of Orbit
Each Planet moves around the sun in an elliptical orbit
1. The height of the communication satellite above the
with the sun at one of the foci as shown in figure. The
earth’s surface is about 36000 km and its period of
eccentricity of an ellipse is defined as the ratio of the
revolution is 24 hours or 24 × 60 × 60 seconds.
SO
distance SO and AO i.e. e =
9.1 Uses of the Communication Satellite AO
1. For sending TV signals over large distances on the SO
=
∴e =
, SO ea
earth’s surface. a
2. Telecommunication.
SCAN CODE
GRAVITATION
@cbseinfinite
GRAVITATION 231
Astronomical Data
Body Sun Earth Moon
Mean radius, 6.95 × 108 6.37 × 106 1.74 × 106
Mass, kg 1.97 × 1030 5.96 × 1024 7.30 × 1022

Fig. 9.12
The distance of closest approach with sun at F1 is AS. Mean density,
1.41 5.52 3.30
This position is called perigee. 103 kg/m3
The greatest distance (BS) Period of
of the planet from the sun is at position B apogee. rotation about 25.4 1.00 27.3
At, Perigee (AS) = AO – OS = a – ea = a (1 – e) axis, days
At, apogee (BS) = OB + OS = a + ea = a (1 + e)
11.2 Law of Area Inertial Mass
The line joining the sun and a planet sweeps out equal NOTE:
areas in equal intervals of time. A planet takes the same
Inertial mass of a body is related to its inertia in linear
time to travel from A to B as from C to D as shown in
motion; and is defined by Newton’s second law of
figure.
motion.
(The shaded areas are equal). Naturally the planet has to
move faster between C to D. Let a body of mass m G move with acceleration a under
the action of an external force F. According to Newton’s
second law of motion, F = mi a or mi = F/a
Thus, inertial mass of a body is equal to the magnitude
of external force required to produce unit acceleration in
the body.
Gravitational Mass
Fig. 9.13
NOTE:
area swept
Areal velocity = Gravitational mass of a body is related to gravitational
time
pull on the body and is defined by Newton’s law of
1
r ( rdθ ) gravitational.
1 2 dθ 1 mr 2 ω L
= 2= = r = GMm G F F
dt 2 dt 2 m 2m =F = or m G =
L
R 2
GM / R(2
I )
Hence = constant. [ L is angular momentum and it The mass mG of the body in this sence is the gravitational
2m
mass of the body. The inertia of the body has no effect
is constant as there is no external torque]
on the gravitational mass of the body. mG = F
11.3 Law of Periods
Thus, Gravitational mass of a body is defined as the
The square of the time for the planet to complete a
magnitude of gravitational pull experienced by the body
revolution about the sun is proportional to the cube of
in a gravitational field of unit intensity.
semimajor axis of the elliptical orbit.
T2 ∝ a3
SCAN CODE
GRAVITATION
@cbseinfinite
GRAVITATION 232
12. BINARY STAR SYSTEM
12.1 Double Star System
Fig. 9.14
For mass m B
Gm A m B
= m B ω2 rB
r2
Gm A ω2 m A r
=
r2 mA + mB
G ( mA + mB )
ω2 =
r3
 2π 
2
G ( mA + mB )
  =
 
T r3
4π 2 r 3
T2 =
( mA + mB ) G
4π 2 r 3
T=
( mA + mB ) G
In reality all the planets arel satellite revolves around
their COM (also known as Barycenter) but if the mass
of planet is very large as compare to the mass of
satellite, then we can assume that planet is stationary
and satellite is removing around it in circular path
(because rA → 0 )
SCAN CODE
GRAVITATION
@cbseinfinite
GRAVITATION 233
SOLVED EXAMPLES
Sol. The relation for orbital speed is v = GM /  R  h  , where
Example - 1
h is the height of the satellite above the earth’s surface.
Gravitational force is a weak force but still it is considered
Clearly, the smaller is the value of h, greater is the value of v
the most important force. Why ?
and vice versa. Hence, satellite revolving close to earth has
Sol. Gravitational force plays an important role for initiating the larger speed.
birth of stars, for controlling the entire structure of the Example - 6
universe and evolution of the universe. It helped to explain
many natural phenomena. What would happen if gravity suddenly disappear ?
Example - 2 Sol. If gravity suddently disappears,
Is the value of g same every where on the surface of (i) all bodies will lose their weights.
earth ? How has it been decided ? (ii) We shall be thrown away from the surface of earth due to
centrifugal force.
Sol. The value of g is at different places on the surface of earth.
The shape of the earth is not exactly spherical ; it is flattened (iii) The motion of planets around the sun will cease because
at the poles and is bulging out at the equator. Due to which centripetal force shall not be provided.
the radius of the earth is smaller at poles and is larger at (iv) Motion of the satellite around earth will also be not
2
equator. Since, g  1/R , therefore, the acceleration due to possible as no centripetal force will be provided.
gravity is smaller at equator than that at poles.
Example - 7
Example - 3
Why are space rockets usually launched from west to east
The line that joins the Saturn to the Sun sweeps areas in the equatorial line ?
A1, A2 and A3 in time intervals of 6 weeks, 3 weeks and
Sol. We know that earth revolves from west to east about its
2 weeks respectively as shown in the figure. What is the
polar axis. Therefore, all the particles on the earth have
correct relation between A1, A2 and A3 ?
velocity from the west to east. This velocity is maximum in
3 weeks the equatorial line, as v = R , where R is the radius of earth
A2 and  is the angular velocity of revolution of earth about its
polar axis. When a rocket is launched from west to east in
6 weeks A3 2 weeks equatorial plane, the maximum linear velocity is added to
A1
Sun the launching velocity of the rocket, due to it, launching
Saturn
becomes easier.
Sol. According to Kepler’s 2nd law, the areal velocity of planet Example - 8
around the sun is constant. Therefore, The escape speed of the projectile on the earth’s surface
A1 > A2 > A3 and A1 = 2 A2, A1 = 3 A3. is ve. A body is projected out with thrice of this speed.
What is the speed of the body after crossing the
Example - 4
gravitational field of the earth ? Ignore the presence of
Earth is continuously pulling Moon towards its centre. Why Sun and the another planets.
does not Moon fall on to Earth.
Sol. It is so because the gravitational attraction of earth provides Sol. The speed with which the projectile is projected, v = 3 ve.
the necessary centripetal force to the moon for its orbital Let. m be the mass of the projectile and v0 be the speed of
motion around the earth. Due to it, the moon is revolving projectile after crossing the gravitational field. Using law of
around the earth. conservation of energy, we have
Example - 5
1 1 1
Two artificial satellites, one close to the surface and the mv02  mv 2  mv2e or v02  v 2  ve2
2 2 2
other away are revolving around the earth. Which has
larger speed ?
 3ve 
2
or v 0 v 2  v e2   v e2  2 2 v e
@cbseinfinite
GRAVITATION 234
Example - 9
mv 2 GM m
Will 1 kg sugar be more at poles or at the equator.  2
or mv r = GM m
r r2
Sol. The value of g is larger at the poles than at the equator. If
or (mvr) v = GM m = a constant
the sugar is weighed in a physical balance then there will be
no difference. If it is weighed by a spring balance, calibrated or Lv = a constant
at the equator, then 1 kg of sugar will have a lesser amount where mvr = L is the angular momentum of the satellite. As
at poles. the air friction causes the retarding torque, it will decrease
the angular momentum L of the satellite. Due to it, the
Example - 10 velocity of the satellite v increases in order to keep Lv = a
Why does moon have no atmosphere ? constant.
Sol. Moon has no atmosphere because the value of acceleration Example - 14
due to gravity ‘g’ on surface of moon is small. Therefore, Moon travellers tie heavy weight at their back before
the value of escape speed on the surface of moon is small landing on the moon. Why ?
–1
(only 2.5 km s ). The molecules of the atmospheric gases Sol. The value of g on moon is small, therefore, the weight of
on the surface of the moon have thermal speeds greater moon travellers will also be small.
than the escape speed. That is why all the molecules of
gases have escaped and there is no atmosphere on moon. Example - 15
Is it possible to put an artificial satellite on an orbit in such
Example - 11 a way that it always remains visible directly over
Chandigarh ?
Why does a body lose weight at the centre of the earth ?
Sol. No, because to put an artificial satellite in an orbit such that
Sol. The weight of the body is the force with which the body is
it always remains directly over a particular place, its time
attracted by the earth towards its centre. Quantitatively, the
period should be the same as that of the earth in the
weight of body of mass m is equal to mg. Where g is the
equatorial plane. As Chandigarh does not lie on the equatorial
acceleration due to gravity. At the centre of earth, g = 0, so
plane, a geostationary satellite cannot be seen over
weight of body is zero at the centre of earth.
Chandigarh.
Explain, why a tennis ball bounces higher on hills than in When a body falls towards earth, earth moves towards the
plains. body. Why is earth’s motion not noticed ?
Sol. Let u be the velocity of the tennis ball with which it bounces Sol. The motion of earth is not noticed because the acceleration
at a place, where acceleration due to gravity is g’. The ball produced in earth is negligible due to large mass of the
will go up till its velocity becomes zero. If h is the height earth.
upto which the ball rises up at a place, then initial K.E. of
Example - 17
ball is equal to final P.E. of ball at highest point. i.e.,
Why do different planets have different escape speeds ?
1 u2
mu 2  m g h or h 
2 2 g Sol. As, escape speed = 2 GM / R , therefore its values are
As acceleration due to gravity (g’) on hill is less than that different for different planets which are of different masses
on the surface of earth (due to altitude effect), so the tennis and different sizes.
ball will bounce higher on hills than on plains.
Example - 18
Example - 13
What is the sense of rotation of stationary satellite around
Air friction increases the velocity of the satellite. Explain. the earth ?
Sol. If a statellite of mass m is revolving in a circular orbit of Sol. West to East.
radius r, with speed v around the earth of mass M, the
centripetal force is provided by the gravitational pull, i.e.,
@cbseinfinite
GRAVITATION 235
Example - 19 Since, rA > rP, so vP > vA.

13
The distances of two planets from the Sun are 10 and Here, area SBAC is greater than area SCPB. As the areal
12
10 metre respectively. Find the ratio of time periods and velocity of a planet is constant around the sun, i.e., equal
speed of the two planets. areas are swept in equal time. Hence planet will take longer
13 12 T1 v time to traverse BAC than CPB.
Sol. Here, r1 = 10 m; r2 = 10 m;  ?; 1  ?
T2 v2 Example - 21
3/ 2 Gravitational force between a point masses m and M

T2 r3 T r   1013 
separated by a distance is F. Now if a point mass 3 m is
Now 12  13 or 1   1    12   10 10
T2 r2 T2  r2   10  placed next to m, what will be the (a) force on M due to m
(b) total force on M ?
2 r1 2 r2
v1  and v 2 
T1 T2 Sol. (a) If r is the distance between two point masses m and M,
then the gravitational force on m due to mass M is
v1 r1 T2 1013 1 1
    12   GM m
v 2 r2 T1 10 10 10 10 F .
r2
Example - 20 Since, the gravitational force between two point masses is
Let the speed of the planet at the perihelion P in figure be independent of the presence of other masses, so if a point
vp and the sun-planet distance SP be rp. Relate rp, vp to the mass 3 m is placed next to m, the force on M due to
corresponding quantities at the aphelion (rA, vA). Will the
planet take equal times to traverse BAC and CPB ? GM m
mF
r2
B (b) Total force on body of mass M is,
GM   m  3m 
F 
r2
P A
S S'
4 GM m
  4F
r2
C
Example - 22
  Three equal masses of m kg each are fixed at the vertices of
Sol. Refer figure, we note that rp and v p are perpendicular to
an equilateral triangle ABC. Figure. (i) What is the force
 
each other. Similarly, rA and v A are perpendicular to each acting on a mass 2 m placed at the centroid G of the triangle ? (ii)
other. Using the law of conservation of angular momentum. What is the force if the mass at the vertex A is doubled ? Take
AG = BG = CG = 1 m.
Angular momentum of planet at P = angular momentum of
planet at A A
B
vP
A
P rP rA
S
vA G
C
B C
mPvPrP = mPvArA
v P rA Sol. (i) Refer figure, the gravitational force on mass 2 m at G due

or v  r to mass at A is,
A P
@cbseinfinite
GRAVITATION 236
Am Example - 23
A planet whose size is the same and mass 4 times as that of
Earth, find the amount of energy needed to lift a 2 kg mass
F1 vertically upwards through 2m distance on the planet. The
–2
value of g on the surface of Earth is 10 ms .
G Sol. Let M, R be the mass and radius of earth. Therefore, mass of
D E planet M’ = 4 M and radius of planet R’ = R
30° 30°
F2 F3 Let g and g’ be the acceleration due to gravity on the surface
m m of earth and planet respectively. Then,
B H C
GM GM  G 4 M
m  2m g and g   
F1  G 2
= 2 G m along GA R2 R 2 R2
12 –2
= 4 g = 4 × 10 = 40 m s
Gravitational force on mass 2 m at G due to mass at B is,
Energy needed to lift the body = mg’ h = 2 × 40 × 2 = 160 J
m2m
F2  G 2
= 2 G m along GB. Example - 24
12
A body weighs 64 N on the surface of Earth. What is the
Gravitational force on mass 2 m at G due to mass at C is,
gravitational force on it due to the Earth, at a height equal
m2m to half the radius of Earth. Acceleration due to gravity on
F3  G 2
= 2G m along GC. –2
12 the surface of Earth is 10 ms .
Sol. Weight of body = mg = 64 N
Draw DE parallel to BC passing through point G. Then EGC
= 30° = DGB. 64 64
   mass of body, m = g  10  6.4 kg.
Resolving F2 and F3 into two rectangular components, we
have At height h, the value of g’ is given by,
F2 cos 30° along GD and F2 sin 30° along GH; F3 cos 30° 2
along GE and F3 sin 30° along GH. R2  R  4
g’ = g  10    10 
R  h 
2
Here, F2 cos 30° and F3 cos 30° are equal in magnitude and  R R / 2  9
acting in opposite directions, cancel out each other. The
resultant force on the mass 2 m at G is 4
 weight at a height h = mg’ = 6.4 × 10 × N
= F1 – (F2 sin 30° + F3 sin 30°) 9
= 28.44 N
 1 1
= 2Gm –  2G m   2 G m    0.
2 2 2
 2 2 Example - 25
Find the percentage decrease in the weight of the body
(ii) When mass at A is 2 m, then gravitational force on mass when taken to a height of 16 km above the surface of Earth.
2 m at G due to mass 2 m at A is Radius of the Earth is 6400 km.
2m  2m Sol. Here, h = 16 km, R = 6400 km.
F1  G 2
= 4 G m along GA
12
 2h  2 hg
The resultant force on mass 2 m at G due to masses at A, B Now g   g 1    g or g – g’ = 2gh/R.
 R  R
and C is = F1 – (F2 sin 30° + F3 sin 30°)
mg  mg  g  g
 % decrease in weight =  100  100
mg g
 1 1
 4 G m2   2 G m 2   2G m 2  
 2 2
2 gh 16
  100  2   100 = 0.5%.
= 2 G m along GA gR 6400
@cbseinfinite
GRAVITATION 237
Example - 26
G  100 G  10, 000
How much below the surface does the acceleration due to 
x2 1  x 
2
gravity become 70% of its value on the surface of Earth.

6
Radius of Earth = 6.4 × 10 m. 2
or 10 x = (1 – x)
2
or 10x = 1 – x
Sol. Here g’/g = 70/100 = 7/10 and d = ?
or 11x = 1 or x = 1/11 m.
 d g d 7 d
Now g   g  1   ;   1  or  1 Example - 29
 R g R 10 R
Three particles, each of mass m are placed at the vertices
of an equilateral triangle of side a. What are the gravitational
d 7 3
or  1  field and gravitational potential at the centroid of the
R 10 10 triangle.
3R 3  6.4 106 Sol. Refer figure, O is the centroid of triangle ABC, where
or d  
10 10
A
6 m
= 1.92 × 10 m
Example - 27
Calculate that imaginary angular velocity of the earth for
which effective acceleration due to gravity at the equator IA
becomes zero. In this condition, find the length (in hours) F E
–2 O
of a day ? Radius of earth = 6400 km. g = 10 ms .
IB IC
Sol. At equator, latitude  = 0°. Let g be the acceleration due to
m m
gravity when the earth is at rest. The acceleration due to B D C
gravity (g’) at the equator, when earth is rotating with angular
velocity  be zero. 2 2
 2 OA  AD  (AB sin 60°)
 g’ = g – R  cos  = 0 3 3
2 2
or g = R  cos 0° = R 
2
   0  2 3 3 a
 a a 
3 2 2 3
g 10 –3 –1
or   = 1.25 × 10 rad s .
R 6400  10 3
a
Thus, OA = OB = OC =
 New time period of rotation of earth 3
The gravitational intensity at O due to mass m at A is,
g 10
  = 5024 s = 1.4 h.
R 6400  103 Gm Gm
IA   along OA.
 OA  a / 3
 2
Example - 28
Two bodies of masses 100 kg and 10,000 kg are at a distance
1m apart. At which point on the line joining them will the Similarly the gravitational intensity at O due to mass m at B
resultant gravitational field intensity is zero ? is,
Sol. Let x be the distance of the point P from 100 kg body where Gm Gm
IB   along OB
 OB  a / 3 
2 2
the resultant gravitational intensity is zero.
 Gravitational intensity at P due to body of mass 100 kg is
equal and opposite to that due to body of mass 10,000 kg. and gravitational intensity at O due to mass m at C is,
Hence,
@cbseinfinite
GRAVITATION 238
Gm Gm Sol. Refer to figure.

IC   along OC.
 OC  a / 3 
2 2
A l B
As IA, IB and IC are equal in magnitude and equally inclined

to each other, the resultant gravitational intensity at O is
zero. l l
O
Gravitational potential at O due to masses at A, B and C is
Gm  Gm   Gm  3Gm 3Gm

V     D l C
OA  OB   OC  OA a / 3
AC = BD = l 2
3 3 Gm
  2 
a OA = OB = OC = OD = 
2 2
Example - 30
Using superposition principle, total potential energy of the
A satellite orbits the earth at a height of 600 km from its
system of four particles placed at the vertices A, B, C and D
surface. Calculate (i) kinetic energy (ii) potential energy of a square is
(iii) total energy. Mass of the satellite is 300 kg, mass of the
24 6
earth is 6 × 10 kg, radius of the earth is 6.4 × 10 m and G  G m  m   G m  m G m  m 
–11 2 –2 U   
is 6.67 × 10 N m kg . Will your answer alter if the earth  AB   BC AC 
were to shrink suddently to half its size without changing
the position of the satellite?  G m  m G m  m  G m  m 
   
6 3 6  AD BD CD 
Sol. Here, r = R + h = 6.4 × 10 + 600 × 10 = 7.0 × 10 m;
24
m = 300 kg; M = 6 × 10 kg; 4 G m 2 2G m 2 2 G m 2  1 
–11 2 –2    2  
G = 6.67 × 10 Nm kg .   2   2
1 1 Gm
(i) K.E. of satellite = mv2  m 5.414 Gm 2
2 2 r 

1
  300 

6.67 1011  6  1024 9 
= 8.7 × 10 J
 Total Gravitational potential at the centre O of the square is
2 7  106 G m  4 4 Gm Gm
V   4 2 .
(ii) P.E. of the satellite OA / 2 
Example - 32
=–
GM m  6.67 10

11

 6 1024  300   
What is the minimum energy required to launch a satellite
r 7  106
of mass m kg from the earth’s surface of radius R in a
9
= – 17.4 × 10 J circular orbit at an altitude of 2 R ?
9 9
(iii) Total energy = K.E. + P.E. = 8.7 × 10 + (– 17.4 × 10 )
Sol. Energy of satellite on the surface of earth
9
= – 8.7 × 10 J
If the earth shrinks suddenly to half its radius (R becomes) GM m mg R 2
E1      mg R ...(i)
R/2) but distance r remains unchanged, then the answer will R R
not alter. If v is the velocity of the satellite at the distance 2R from the
Example - 31 surface of the earth, then total energy of the satellite
Find the potential energy of a system of four particles
1 GM m
E2 = K.E. + P.E. = 2 mv   2R  R 
2
each of mass m placed at the vertices of a square of side l. ...(ii)
Also obtain the potential at the centre of the square.
@cbseinfinite
GRAVITATION 239
6 6 5
Orbital velocity of satellite, = 6.652 × 10 – 6.380 × 10 = 2.72 × 10 m.
GM GM Example - 35
v or v2  Determine the escape speed of Moon. Given, the radius of
2R  R 3R 6 22
Moon is 1.74 × 10 m, its mass is 7.36 × 10 kg. Does your
answer throw light on why the Moon has no atmosphere ?
So, 1 mv 2  GM m –11 2 –2
2 6R G = 6.67 × 10 N m kg .
6 22
GM m GM m GM m mg R Sol. Here, R = 1.74 × 10 m; M = 7.36 × 10 kg;
 E 2  6 R  3R   6 R   6 G = 6.67 × 10
–11 2 –2
Nm kg , ve = ?
 Minimum energy required to launch the satellite is 2 GM 2  6.67 1011  7.3 1022
ve  
1 R 1.74 106
5
= E2 – E 1 =  mgR + mg R  mg R .
6 6 –1
= 2375 ms = 2.38 km s .
–1
Example - 33 Since, the average thermal speed of the gas molecules like
A remote sensing satellite of the Earth in a circular orbit at a oxygen, hydrogen etc. on the surface of Moon is greater
–1
height of 400 km above the surface of Earth. What is the (a) than the escape speed of moon (= 2.38 km s ), hence these
orbital speed, and (b) period of revolution of satellite ? gases have escaped from the surface of Moon and Moon
6
Radius of Earth = 6 × 10 m and acceleration due to gravity has no atmosphere.
2
at the surface of Earth is 10 m/s . Example - 36
6 2
Sol. Here, R = 6 × 10 m; g = 10 m/s ; Assuming the Earth to be a sphere of uniform mass density,
3
h = 400 × 10 m = 0.4 × 10 m
6
how much would a body weigh half way down to the centre
of the Earth if it weighed 250 N on the surface ?
g 10
(a) Orbital speed, v  R  6  106  d
Rh 6  10  0.4  106
6
 d
Sol. As gd  g 1    mgd = mg  1  
3  R  R
= 7.5 × 10 m/s.
R
Here, d =
R  h
3
2 2
(b) Period of revolution, T 
R g  R
1  2  1
Hence, mgd = (250) ×    250  = 12.5 N.
 6  10 
3
2   22 / 7 
6
 0.4  10 6  R  2
 = 5368.5 s  
6  10 6 10
Example - 37
Example - 34
A saturn year is 29.5 times the Earth year. How far is the
An Earth satellite has time period of 90 minutes. Assuming 8
Saturn from the sun if the Earth is 1.50 × 10 km away from
the orbit to be circular, calculate its height. Given, radius of the Sun ?
–2
Earth = 6380 km, g at the surface of Earth = 9.8 ms .
Sol. As we know from the Kepler’s third law
Sol. Here, T = 90 minutes = 90 × 60 s = 5400 s;
6 –2
R = 6380 km = 6380 × 1000 m = 6.38 × 10 m; g = 9.8 ms .
T12 R13

1 T22 R 32
 g R 2T2 3
We know, h    R
 4 
2
2/3 2/3
T   29.5 
 R 2  R1  2   
 1.5 108 
 1 

1  T1 

 
 9.8  6.38  106 2   5400 2  3
  6.38  106 8
= (1.5 × 10 ) × 9.547
 4   22 / 7 
2 
 
8
= 14.32 × 10 km.
@cbseinfinite
GRAVITATION 240
Example - 38
Two bodies of masses m1 and m2 are placed at a distance ‘r’ 
G
r 
m1  
m1  m 2  m 2  
m1  m 2 

a part. Show that the position where the gravitational field
due to them is zero, the potential is given by

G
r 
m1  m 2  2 m1m 2  .
 
G

  m1  m 2  2 m1m 2  .
r    Example - 39
At what height from the surface of earth the value of
Sol. Consider the two bodies A and B of masses m1 and m2 acceleration due to gravity will fall to half that on the surface
produce zero resultant gravitational field at C, where AC = x. of the earth (radius of earth R = 6400 km)
We have, BC = (r – x)
Sol. Given :
Gm1 Gm 2 R = 6400 km = 6400 × 10 m
3
Hence, 
r  x
2 2
x
1
gh = g
2
m1 m2
or  To Find : h = ?
x r  x 
We have,
or (r –x) m1  x m 2 2
 R 
gh    g
Rh
r m1
or x 
m1  m 2 gh R2

g  R  h 2
 r m1 
and  r  x   r    2
1  R 
 m1  m 2   
2 Rh
 r m2  R 1
  
Rh 2
 m1  m 2 
Rh
 2
1 m1  m2 R
Thus, 
x r m1
RhR
 1.414  1
R
1 m1  m 2
and  h
r  x r m2  0.414
R
Gravitational potential at P h = 0.414 × 6400 × 10
3
h = 6400 × 414
Gm1  Gm2   m1 m 2 
     G    h = 414 × 64 × 10
2
x   r  x    x rx
2
h = 26496 × 10 m
3
h = 2649.6 × 10 m

 G  m1
 m1  m 2 m 2 m1  m 2  
 h = 2649.6 km
 r m1 r m1 
 
@cbseinfinite
GRAVITATION 241
Find the acceleration due to gravity on the surface of the A body is raised to a height of 1600 km above the earth’s
moon. Given that the mass of the moon is 1/80 times that of surface and projected with a horizontal velocity of 6 km/s.
the earth and the diameter of the moon is 1/4 times that of Will it revolve around the earth as a satellite ?
2
the earth (g = 9.8 m/s ). –11
(G = 6.67 × 10 S.I. unit, radius of earth R = 6400 km, mass
24
of earth = 5.98 × 10 kg)
Sol. Taking ratio of ‘g’ we get
Sol. In order that the body revolves in circular orbit around the
g 2 M 2 R12
   earth
g1 M1 R 22
Horizontal Velocity = Critical Velocity
1  4   9.8
2
g2  GM
vc 
80 Rh
16  9.8
g2  6.67  1011  5.98  10 24
80 
2
 6400  1600 10 3
g2 = 1.96 m/s
Example - 41 6.67  5.98 1013


Find the height of a satellite from the surface of the earth 8000  103
–11 2 2
whose critical velocity is 5 km/s. (G = 6.67 × 10 Nm /kg
24
mass of earth M = 6 × 10 kg and radius of earth
6.67  5.98  1013  106
R = 6400 km). 
8
GM 6.67  5.98  107

Sol. vc  
Rh 8
GM
vc2  6.67  5.98  107
Rh 
8
GM
Rh 
v2c 66.7  5.98  106

8
6.67 1011  6 1024
Rh  66.7  5.98
25  106 103
8
40.02  1013  106
Rh  1 
25  AL   log 66.7  log 5.98  log 8   103
7
2 
R + h = 1.6008 × 10
7
h = (1.6008 × 10 ) – R 1 
7 3
 AL  1.8241  0.776700.9031  1.6977   103
h = 1.6008 × 10 – 6400 × 10 2 
6 6
h = 16.008 × 10 – 6.4 × 10 = AL [0.8488] × 10
3
6
h = 9.608 × 10 m 3
= 7.06 × 10 m/s
h = 9608 km = 7.06 km/s
Hence the body will not revolve round the earth.
@cbseinfinite
GRAVITATION 242
What would be the new period of rotation of the earth Compare the critical speeds of two satellites if the ratio of
around the Sun if the distance between the earth and the their periods is 8 : 1.
sun is doubled ?
Sol. T 2  r 3 GM
Sol. vc1  r1
T22 r23
 T2  r3
GM
1 1
v c2 
r2
T12  r23
T22 
r13 v c1 r2
 ...(1)
3 v c2 r1
= 1 × (2)
T22  8 T12  r13
T2  8 year T22  r23
T2  2 2 2
 T1   r1 
3
   
T2 = 2 × 1.414  T2   r2 
T2 = 2.828 years
2 3
 T2 = 2.82 × 365  8   r1 
   
= 1032 days  1   r2 
Example - 44 r1 4
 ...(2)
A communication satellite is at a height of 36000 km from r2 1
earth’s surface. What will be its new period when it is
brought down to a height of 20,000 km (Radius of earth vc1 1
= 6400 km)  ... from (1) and (2)
v c2 4
Sol. As per kepler’s law,
2 3
T r vc1 1
 
2 3 vc2 2
 T2   r2 
    Example - 46
 T1   r1 
Calculate the height of a communication satellite.
2 3
 T2   26.4  –11 2 2
(G = 6.67 × 10 Nm /kg ; mass of earth = 5.98 × 10 kg,
24
  24    42.4  6
radius of earth = 6.4 × 10 S.I. units).
   
3/ 2
T2  26.4 
   r3
24  42.4  Sol. T  2
GM
3 
T2  AL   log 26.4  log 42.4   log 24  r3 
 2  T 2  4 2  
 GM 
 T2 = AL [(2.1324 + 1.3802) – 2.4410]
 T2 = AL [1.0716] T 2  GM
r3 
 T2 = 11.79 hours 4 2
@cbseinfinite
GRAVITATION 243
24  24  3600  3600  6.67  1011  5.98  1024 1 1

r3   GMm   
4  9.872  r1 r2 
576 1296  6.67  5.98  104  1013 GMm  1 1 

r3  
39.488   
R  2 3
1 GMm 1
r  AL [log576  log1296  log 6.67  log 5.98  17log10)  
3 R 6
 log 39.488] 6.67  1011  6  1024  103
Work done 
6.4  106  6
1
r  AL   2.7604  3.1126  0.824  0.7767  17 
3 6.67 1013  103

6.4
 1.5964 
10
= 1.042 × 10 J
1
 r  AL  22.8774  Example - 48
3
 r = AL (7.6258) What will be the B.E. of a satellite of mass 80 kg revolving

6 6 in an orbit close to earth’s surface. Also calculate its B.E.
= 42.24 × 10 – 6.4 × 10
at a height of 1600 km from earth’s surface. (Mass of earth
=R+h 24
= 5.98 × 10 kg; radius of earth = 6400 km).
6
 h = 42.24 × 10 – 6.4
6
= 42.24 × 10 m GMm
6 Sol. B.E.  2  R  h 
h = 35.84 × 10 m
= 35840 km
GMm
Example - 47 
2R
Calculate the work done in mowing a body of mass 1000 kg
a from a height R to a height 2R above the surface of
–11 2 2 1  6.67  1011  5.98  1024  80 
the earth. (G = 6.67 × 10 Nm /kg , mass of the earth   
24 2 6.4  106 
M = 6 × 10 kg. Radius of earth R = 6400 km).
Sol. r1 = R + h1 1  6.67  5.98  80 107 

  
=R+R ... (h1 = R) 2 6.4 
=2R
r2 = R + h2 1  6.67  5.98  8  108 
  
= R + 2R ... (h2 = R) 2 6.4 
=3R
1
 W = P.E.2 – P.E.1    AL   log 6.67  log 5.98  log 8   log 6.4    108
2 
GMm  GMm 
   1
r2  r1    AL  0.8241  0.7767  0.9031  2.5039
2

GMm GMm
   0.8062   108
r1 r2
@cbseinfinite
GRAVITATION 244
1
  AL  2.5039  0.8062  1.6977    108
2
1
  AL 1.6977   108 
2
1
  4.985  109
2
9
= 2.4925 × 10 J
Example - 49
Calculate the escape velocity from the surface of the planet
of radius 2000 km, if acceleration due to gravity at the
2
surface of the planet is 2.5 m/s .
2GM
Sol. ve 
R
2gR 2
ve 
R
ve  2 gR
v e  2  2.5  2  106
v e  4  2.5  106
v e  10  10 6
ve  10  103
 1 
  AL   log10   103
  2 
 1 
v e   AL   1.0000    103
 2 
3
= AL (0.5000) × 10
3
= 3.162 × 10
= 3.162 km/s
@cbseinfinite
GRAVITATION 245

Newtons Law of Gravitation Acceleration Due to Gravity
1. The SI unit of gravitational constant G is 8. The acceleration due to gravity g on earth is 9.8 ms-2.
(a) Nm kg–2 (b) Nm2 kg–2 What would the value of g for a planet whose size is the
same as that of earth but the density in twice that of
(c) Nm2 kg–1 (d) Nm kg–1
earth?
2. The value of gravitational constant G depends upon
(a) 19.6 ms-2 (b) 9.8 ms-2
(a) the masses of the bodies
(c) 4.9 ms-2 (d) 2.45 ms-2
(b) the sizes of the bodies
9. If both the mass and the radius of the earth decrease by
(c) the separation of the bodies
1%, the value of the acceleration due to gravity will
(d) none of the above quantities
(a) decrease by 1% (b) increase by 1%
3. A rocket is fired from the earth to the moon. The
(c) increase by 2% (d) remain unchanged
distance between the earth and the moon is r and the
mass of the earth is 81 times the mass of the moon. The 10. The acceleration due to gravity on earth of radius Re is
gravitational force on the rocket will be zero, when its ge and that on moon of radius Rm is gm. The ratio of
distance from the moon is the masses of the earth and the moon is given by
r r
(a) (b) ge Re g e Re
20 15 (a) . (b) .
g m Rm g m Rm
r r
(c) (d)
10 5 g e Re2 g e2 Re
(c) . (d) .
g m Rm2 g m2 Rm
4. A mass M is divided into two parts xM and (1-x)M For
a given separation, the value of x for which the 11. Two planets of radii R1 and R2 are made from the same
gravitational attraction between the two pieces becomes material. The ratio of the accelerations due to gravity
maximum is g1/g2 at the surfaces of the planets is
1 3 R1 R2
(a) (b) (a) (b)
2 5 R2 R1
(c) 1 (d) 2 2 2
R  R 
5. Weight of an object is: (c)  1  (d)  2 
(a) Normal reaction between ground and the object  R2   R1 
(b) Gravitational force exerted on the object 12. Assuming that the earth is a sphere of radius R, at what
altitude will the value of the acceleration due to gravity
(c) Depends on frame of reference.
be half its value at the surface of the earth?
(d) Net force on the object
R R
6. If the distance between two masses is doubled, the (a) h = (b) h =
gravitational attraction between them 2 2
(a) Is doubled (b) Becomes four times (c)=
h ( )
2 +1 R (d)=
h ( )
2 −1 R
(c) Is reduced to half (d) Is reduced to a quarter
13. The height of the point vertically above the earth’s
7. Two particles of equal mass m go round a circle R under
surface at which the acceleration due to gravity
the action of their mutual gravitational attraction. The
becomes 1% of its value at the surface is (R is the radius
speed of each particle is:-
of the earth)
1 1 Gm
(a) v = (b) v = (a) 8 R (b) 9 R
2 R GM 2R
(c) 10 R (d) 20 R
1 Gm 4Gm
(c) v = (d) v =
2 R R
@cbseinfinite
GRAVITATION 246
14. The radius of the earth is about 6400 km and that of 20. The angular speed of earth in rad/s, so that the object on
mars is about 3200 km. The mass of the earth is about equator may appear weightless is: (radius of earth =
10 times the mass of mars. An object weighs 200 N on 6400 km)
the surface of the earth. Its weight on the surface of mars (a) 1.25 × 10−3 (b) 1.50 × 10−3
would be
(c) 1.56 (d) 1.25 × 10−1
(a) 6 N (b) 20 N
(c) 40 N (d) 80 N 21. If we move from equator to pole value of g:
15. What must be the angular velocity of rotation of the (a) first increases then decreases
earth so that the effective acceleration due to gravity at (b) remains same
the equator is zero?
(c) increases
The radius of the earth = 64 × 104 m.
(d) decreases
g
[given: = 0.39 ] 22. If the spinning speed of the earth is increased, then
8
weight of the body at the equator:
(a) 3.3 × 10-3 rad s-1 (b) 3.5 × 10-3 rad s-1
(a) does not change (b) doubles
(c) 3.7 × 10-3 rad s-1 (d) 3.9 × 10-3 rad s-1
(c) decreases (d) increases
3
16. If a man at the equator would weigh   th of his actual 23. The speed of earth’s rotation about its axis is ω. Its
5
speed is increased to x times to make the effective
weight, the angular speed of the earth is
acceleration due to gravity equal to zero at the equator.
2 g g then x is:
(a) (b)
5 R R (a) 1 (b) 8.5
R 2 R (c) 17 (d) 34
(c) (d)
g 5 g
17. Assuming earth to be a sphere of uniform density. What Field & Potential
is the value of acceleration due to gravity at a point 100
24. Three particles, each of mass m, are placed at the
km below the earth’s surface?
vertices of an equilateral triangle of side a. The
(given R = 6380 × 103m)
gravitational field intensity at the centroid of the
(a) 3.6 m/s2 (b) 6.6 m/s2 triangle is
(c) 7.66 m/s2 (d) 9.65 m/s2
Gm 2
18. Assertion: A tennis ball bounces higher on hills than in (a) zero (b)
a2
plains.
Reason: Acceleration due to gravity on the hill is 2Gm 2 3Gm 2
(c) (d)
greater than that on the surface of earth. a2 a2
(a) If both assertion and reason are correct and reason is 25. Infinite number of masses, each of mass m, are placed
the correct explanation of assertion. along a straight line at distances of r, 2r, 4r, 8r, etc. from
(b) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is not a reference point O. The gravitational field intensity at
the correct explanation of assertion. point O will be
(c) If assertion is true but reason is false.
5 Gm 4 Gm
(d) If both assertion and reason are false. (a) (b)
4 r2 3r2
19. What will be the formula of the mass in terms of g, R
and G? (R = radius of earth) 3 Gm 2Gm
(c) (d)
2 2 r2 r2
R R
(a) g 2 (b) G
G g
R R2
(c) G (d) g
g G
@cbseinfinite
GRAVITATION 247
26. A mass m is placed in the cavity inside a hollow sphere R R

(a) (b)
of mass M as shown in the figure. What is the 3 2
gravitational force on mass m?
mR mR
(c) (d)
( M + m) M
32. The change in the gravitational potential energy when a

body of mass m is raised to a height nR above the
surface of the earth is (here R is the radius of the earth)
 n   n 
(a)   mgR (b)   mgR
 n +1  n −1 
GMm GMm
(a) (b) mgR
R2 r2 (c) nmgR (d)
n
GMm
(c) (d) zero 33. A body of mass m placed on earth surface is taken to a
(R − r)
2
height of h = 3R, then change in gravitation potential

energy is
Gravitational Potential Energy
mgR 2
27. Radius of orbit of satellite of earth is R. Its Kinetic (a) (b) mgR
energy is proportional to: 4 3
1 1 3 mgR
(a) (b) (c) mgR (d)
R R 4 4
1 34. The masses and radii of the earth and moon are M1, R1
(c) R (d) 3 and M2, R2 respectively. Their centres are a distance d
2
R
apart. The minimum speed with which a particle of
28. Two objects of masses m and 4m are at rest at infinite mass m should be projected from a point midway
separation. They move towards each other under mutual between the two centres so as to escape to infinity is
gravitational attraction. Then, at a separation r, which given by
of the following is true?
 G ( M1 + M 2 )   G ( M1 + M 2 ) 
1/ 2 1/ 2
(a) The total energy of the system is zero.
(a) 2   (b) 2  
(b) The force between them is not zero.  md   d 
(c) The centre of mass of the system is at rest.
 G ( M1 − M 2 )   G ( M1 − M 2 ) 
1/ 2 1/ 2
(d) All the above are true.
(c) 2   (d) 2  
29. A body is released from a height equal to the radius (R)
 md   d 
of the earth. The velocity of the body when it strikes the
surface of the earth will be 35. A rocket is launched vertically from the surface of the
earth of radius R with an initial speed v. If atmospheric
(a) gR (b) 2 gR
resistance is neglected, the maximum height attained by
(c) 2 2 gR (d) 2 gR the rocket is given by
30. A high jumper can jump 2.0 m on earth. With the same R R
(a) h = (b) h =
effort how high will he be able to jump on a planet  2 gR   2 gR 
 2 − 1  2 + 1
whose density is one-third and radius one-fourth those  v   v 
of the earth?
 2 gR   2 gR 
(a) 4m (b) 8m =
(c) h R  2 − 1 =
(d) h R  2 + 1
(c) 12m (d) 24m  v   v 
31. A body of mass m is raised to a height h above the 36. The escape velocity of a body projected vertically
surface of the earth of mass M and radius R until its upwards from the surface of the earth is v. If the body
1 is projected in a direction making an angle θ with the
gravitational potential energy increases by mgR. The
3 vertical, the escape velocity would be
value of h is (a) v (b) v cos θ
(c) v sin θ (d) v tan θ
@cbseinfinite
GRAVITATION 248
37. The escape velocity from the earth is ve. What is the 44. A satellite is moving around the earth in a stable circular
escape velocity from a planet whose mass and radius are orbit. Which one of the following statements will be
twice those of the earth? wrong for such a satellite?
(a) ve (b) 2 ve (a) It is moving at a constant speed.
(c) 4 ve (d) 16 ve (b) Its angular momentum remains constant.
3 (c) It is acted upon by a force directed away from the
38. A body is projected up with a velocity equal to th of
4 centre of the earth which counterbalances the
the escape velocity from the surface of the earth. The gravitational pull of the earth.
height it reaches is: (Radius of the earth = R)
(d) It behaves as if it were as freely falling body.
10 R 9R
(a) (b) 45. Astronauts in a stable orbit around the earth are said to
9 7
be in a weightless condition. The reason for this is that
9R 10 R
(c) (d) (a) the capsule and its contents are falling freely at the
8 3 same rate
39. Mass of moon is 1/81 times that of earth and its radius
(b) there is no gravitational force acting on them
is 1/4 of the earth radius. If the escape velocity on the
earth’s surface is 11.2 km/s. Then its value at the surface (c) the gravitational force of the earth balances that of
of moon will be the sun
(a) 5 km/s (b) 2.5 km/s (d) there is no atmosphere at the height at which they
(c) 1.25 km/s (d) none of these are orbiting
40. The ratio of the radii of the planet P1 and P2 is k. The 46. Choose the wrong statement. The orbital velocity of a
ratio of acceleration due to gravity on them is r. Then body in a stable orbit around a planet depends upon
the ratio of the escape velocities from them will be: (a) the average radius of the planet
r k (b) the height of the body above the planet
(a) (b)
k r (c) the acceleration due to gravity on surface
(c) kr (d) kr (d) the mass of the orbiting body
47. Two satellites of masses 3M and M orbit the earth in
Motion of a Satellite circular orbits of radii r and 3r respectively. The ratio of
41. The ratio of the escape velocity of an earth satellite to their speeds is
its orbital velocity is very nearly equal to (a) 1:1 (b) 3 :1
(a) 2 (b) 2
(c) 3:1 (d) 9:1
(c) 1/2 (d) 1/ 2
48. The gravitational force between two objects is
42. An earth satellite is kept moving in orbit by the proportional to 1/R (and not as 1/R2) where R is
centripetal force provided by separation between them, then a particle in circular orbit
(a) the burning of fuel in its engine under such a force would have its orbital speed v
(b) the ejection of hot gases from its exhaust proportional to
(c) the gravitational attraction of the sun 1 0
(d) the gravitational attraction of the earth (a) (b) R
R2
43. An instrument package is released from an orbiting
1
earth satellite by simply detaching it from the outer wall (c) R1 (d)
of the satellite. The package will R
(a) go away from the earth and get lost in outer space 49. Two satellites of the same mass are orbiting round the
(b) fall to the surface of the earth earth at heights of R and 4R above the earth’s surface:
(c) continue moving along with the satellite in the same R being the radius of the earth. Their kinetic energies
orbit and with the same speed are in the ratio of
(d) fall through a certain distance and then move in an (a) 4:1 (b) 3:2
orbit around the earth. (c) 4:3 (d) 5:2
@cbseinfinite
GRAVITATION 249
50. An artificial satellite moving in a circular orbit around (a) t2 > t1 (b) t1 = 4t2
the earth has a total (kinetic + potential) energy E0. Its (c) t1 = 2t2 (d) t1 = t2
potential energy is
57. The radius vector, drawn from the sun to a planet,
(a) – E0 (b) 1.5 E0
sweeps out equal areas in equal times. This is the
(c) 2 E0 (d) E0 statement of:
51. An object weights W newton on earth. It is suspended
(a) Newton’s third law (b) Kepler’s third law
from the lower end of a spring balance whose upper end
is fixed to the ceiling of a space capsule in a stable orbit (c) Kepler’s second law (d) Kepler’s first law
around the earth. The reading of the spring balance will 58. The orbital angular momentum of a satellite revolving
be at a distance r form the center is L. If the distance is
(a) W (b) less than W increased to 16r, then the new angular momentum will
(c) more than W (d) zero be
52. A seconds pendulum is mounted in a rocket. Its period (a) 16 L (b) 64 L
of oscillation decreases when the rocket L
(a) comes down with uniform acceleration (c) (d) 4L
4
(b) moves round the earth in a geostationary orbit
59. A satellite is orbiting the earth in a circular orbit of
(c) moves up with a uniform velocity radius r. Its period of revolution varies as
(d) moves up with uniform acceleration
(a) r (b) r
53. The distance of a geostationary satellite from the centre
3/ 2
of earth (radius R = 6400 km) is nearest to: (c) r (d) r2
(a) 18 R (b) 10 R 60. A satellite of mass m is in a stable circular orbit around
(c) 7 R (d) 5 R the earth at an altitude of about 100 kilometres. If M is
54. A geostationary satellite orbits around the earth in a the mass of the earth, R is its radius and g the
circular orbit of radius 36000 km. Then, the time period acceleration due to gravity, the time period T of the
of satellite orbiting a few hundred kilometres above the revolution of the satellite is given by
earth’s surface (Rearth = 6400 km) will approximately be
R g
1 (a) T = 2π (b) T = 2π
(a) h (b) 1 h g R
2
(c) 2 h (d) 4 h MR mR
(c) T = 2π (d) T = 2π
55. A ball is dropped from a satellite revolving around the mg Mg
earth at a height of 120 km. The ball will:
61. A satellite is launched into a circular orbit of radius R
(a) continue to move with same speed along a straight
around the earth. A second satellite is launched into an
line tangentially to the satellite at that time
orbit of radius 1.01 R. The period of the second satellite
(b) continue to move with the same speed along the
is longer than that of the first by approximately
original orbit of satellite
(a) 0.5% (b) 1.0%
(c) fall doom to earth gradually
(d) go far away in space (c) 1.5% (d) 3.0%
62. If the distance between the earth and the sun were half
Kepler's Laws of Planetary Motion its present value, the number of days in a year would
56. The figure shows elliptical orbit of a planet m about the have been
sun S. The shared area SCD is twice the shaded area (a) 64.5 (b) 129
SAB. If t1 is the time for the planet to move from C to (c) 182.5 (d) 730
D and t2 is the time to move from A to B, then 63. Two satellites A and B of masses m1 and m2
(m1 = 2m2) are moving in circular orbits of radii r1 and
r2 (r1 = 4r2), respectively, around the earth. If their
periods are TA and TB, then the ratio TA/TB is
(a) 4 (b) 16
(c) 2 (d) 8
@cbseinfinite
GRAVITATION 250
64. A geostationary satellite is orbiting the earth at a height 68. A satellite orbiting the circular orbit of radius R
of 6 R above the surface of the earth; R being the radius completes one revolution in 3 h. If orbital radius of
of the earth. What will be the time period of another geostationary satellite is 36000 km, the orbital radius R
satellite at a height 2.5 R from the surface of the earth? of satellite is:
(a) 6 2 hours (b) 6 2.5 hours (a) 6000 km (b) 9000 km
(c) 12000 km (d) 15000 km
(c) 6 3 hours (d) 12 hours
69. Assertion: The comet does not obey Kepler’s law of
65. Two satellites A and B are orbiting around the earth in
planetary motion.
circular orbits of the same radius. The mass of A is 16
times that of B. The ratio of the period of revolution of Reason: The comet does not have elliptical orbit.
B to that of A is (a) If both assertion and reason are correct and reason is
(a) 1:16 (b) 1:4 the correct explanation of assertion.
(c) 1:2 (d) 1:1 (b) If both assertion and reason are reason are true but
reason is not the correct explanation of assertion.
66. A planet revolves around the sun in an elliptical orbit.
The linear speed of the planet will be maximum at (c) If assertion is true but reason is false.
(d) if both assertion and reason are false
70. Assertion: The square of the period of revolution of a
planet is proportional to the cube of its distance from
the sun. [Assuming circular orbit]
Reason: Sun’s gravitation field is inversely
proportional to the square of its distance from the
planet:
(a) D (b) B (a) If both assertion and reason are correct and reason is
(c) A (d) C the correct explanation of assertion.
67. Suppose the gravitational force varies inversely as the (b) If both assertion and reason are reason are true but
nth power of the distance. The time period of a planet reason is not the correct explanation of assertion.
in circular orbit of radius R around the sun will be (c) If assertion is true but reason is false.
proportional to: (d) if both assertion and reason are false
( n −1) ( n +1)
2 2
(a) R (b) R
(c) R n −1 (d) R n +1
@cbseinfinite
GRAVITATION 251

1. A satellite is revolving in a circular orbit at a height ‘h’ 4. The variation of acceleration due to gravity g with
from the earth’s surface (radius of earth R; h << R). distance d from centre of the earth is best represented
The minimum increase in its orbital velocity required, by (R = Earth’s radius): (2017)
so that the satellite could escape from the earth’s (a)
gravitational field, is close to: (Neglect the effect of
atmosphere.) (2016)
(a) gR (b) gR / 2
(c) gR ( 2 −1 ) (d) 2gR
2. Figure shows elliptical path abcd of a planet around the (b)

1
sun S such that the area of triangle csa is th of the
4
area of the ellipse. (See figure) With db as the major
axis, and ca as the minor axis. If t1 is the time taken
for planet to go over path abc and t 2 for path taken
over cda then: (2016) (c)
(d)
(a) t1 = t 2 (b) t1 = 2t 2
(c) t1 = 3t 2 (d) t1 = 4t 2
3. An astronaut of mass m is working on a satellite
orbiting, the earth at a distance h from the earth’s
surface. The radius of the earth is R, while its mass is
5. If the Earth has no rotational motion, the weight of a
M. The gravitational pull FG on the astronaut is:
person on the equator is W. Determine the angular
(2016) speed with which the earth would have to rotate about
(a) Zero since astronaut feels weightless 3
its axis so that the person at the equator will weigh
4
GMm
(b) 0 < FG < W. Radius of the Earth is 6400 km and g = 10 m/s2.
R2
(2017)
GMm GMm
(c) < FG <
( R + h)
2
R2 (a) 1.12 × 10−3 rad/s (b) 0.835 × 10−3 rad/s
(c) 0.625 × 10−3 rad/s (d) 0.281× 10−3 rad/s
GMm
(d) FG =
( R + h)
2
@cbseinfinite
GRAVITATION 252
6. The mass density of a spherical body is given by 8. Take the mean distance of the moon and the sun from
k the earth to be 0.4 × 106 km and 150 × 106 km
ρ (r)
= for r ≤ R and ρ (r)= 0 for r > R, where r is
r respectively. Their masses are 8 × 1022 kg and
the distance from the centre. The correct graph that
2 × 1030 kg respectively. The radius of the earth is 6400
describes qualitatively the acceleration, a, of a test
particle as a function of r is: (2017) km. Let ∆F1 be the difference in the forces exerted by
(a) the moon at the nearest and farthest points on the earth
and ∆F2 be the difference in the force exerted by the
sun at the nearest and farthest points on the earth. Then,
∆F1
the number closest is: (2018)
∆F2
(a) 2 (b) 10−2

(b) (c) 0.6 (d) 6
9. Suppose that the angular velocity of rotation of earth
is increased. Then, as a consequence:
(2018)
(a) Weight of the object, everywhere on the earth, will
increase.
(c) (b) Weight of the object, everywhere on the earth, will

decrease
(c) There will be no change in weight anywhere on the
earth.
(d) Except at poles, weight of the object on the earth
will decrease.
10. The relative uncertainty in the period of a satellite
(d) orbiting around the earth is 10−2 . If the relative
uncertainty in the radius of the orbit is negligible, the
relative uncertainty in the mass of the earth is:
(2018)
(a) 10−2 (b) 2 × 10−2
(c) 3 × 10−2 (d) 6 × 10−2
7. A body of mass m is moving in a circular orbit of 11. The energy required to take a satellite to a height 'h'
radius R abut a planet of mass M. At some instant, it = 6.4 × 103 km ) is
above Earth surface (radius of Earth
splits into two equal masses. The first mass moves in a E1 and kinetic energy required for the satellite to be
R in a circular orbit at this height is E2 . The value of h
circular orbit of radius , and the other mass, in a
2
for which E1 and E2 are equal, is: (2019)
3R
circular orbit of radius . The difference between
2 (a) 1.6 × 103 km (b) 3.2 × 103 km
the final and initial total energies is:
(c) 6.4 × 103 km (d) 28 × 104 km
(2018)
GMm GMm
(a) − (b) +
2R 6R
GMm GMm
(c) (d) −
2R 6R
@cbseinfinite
GRAVITATION 253
12. Two stars of masses 3 × 1031 kg each, and at distance 16. A test particle is moving in circular orbit in the
gravitational field produced by a mass density
2 × 1011 m rotate in a plane about their common centre K
of mass O. A meteorite passes through O moving ρ ( r ) = 2 . Identify the correct relation between the
r
perpendicular to the star’s rotation plane. ln order to radius R of the particle’s orbit and its period T:
escape from the gravitational field of this double star, (2019)
the minimum speed that meteorite should have at O is: T T 2
(a) is a constant (b) 3 is a constant
(Take Gravitational constant R R
G 6.67 × 10−11 Nm 2 Kg −2 )
= (2019) T
(c) 2 is a constant (d) TR is a constant
R
(a) 2.4 × 104 m / s (b) 1.4 × 105 m / s 17. A spaceship orbits around a planet at a height of 20 km
from its surface. Assuming that only gravitational field
(c) 3.8 × 104 m / s (d) 2.8 × 105 m / s
of the planet acts on the spaceship, what will be the
13. Two satellites, A and B, have masses m and 2m number of complete revolutions made by the spaceship
respectively. A is in a circular orbit of radius R and B in 24 hours around the planet?
is in a circular orbit of radius 2R around the earth. [Given: Mass of planet = 8 × 1022 kg, Radius of planet
K
The ratio of their kinetic energies, A is G 6.67 × 10−11 Nm 2 / kg 2 . Note that the
= 2 × 106 m ,=
KB
engine of the spaceship is off. (2019)
(2019) (a) 9 (b) 17
1 (c) 13 (d) 11
(a) (b) 1
2 18. The ratio of the weights of a body on the Earth's surface
to that on the surface of a planet is 9:4. The mass of the
1
(c) 2 (d) 1
2 planet is th of that of the Earth. If 'R' is the radius of
9
14. A rocket has to be launched from earth in such a way the Earth, what is the radius of the planet? (Take the
that it never returns. If E is the minimum energy planets to have the same mass density). (2019)
delivered by the rocket launcher, what should be the
R R
minimum energy that the launcher should have if the (a) (b)
3 4
same rocket is to be launched from the surface of the
moon? Assume that the density of the earth and the R R
(c) (d)
moon are equal and that the earth's volume is 64 times 9 2
the volume of the moon. (2019) 19. A satellite is moving with a constant speed v in circular
orbit around the earth. An object of mass ‘m’ is ejected
E E from the satellite such that it just escapes from the
(a) (b)
64 32 gravitational pull of the earth. At the time of ejection,
E E the kinetic energy of the object is (2019)
(c) (d)
4 16 (a) 2mv 2 (b) mv 2
15. A solid sphere of mass 'M' and radius ‘a’ is surrounded 1 2 3
(c) mv (d) m v 2
by a uniform concentric spherical shell of thickness 2a 2 2
and mass 2M. The gravitational field at distance '3a' 20. A satellite is revolving in a circular orbit at a height h
from the centre will be: (2019) from the earth surface, such that h < < R where R is the
2GM GM radius of the earth. Assuming that the effect of earth’s
(a) (b) atmosphere can be neglected the minimum increase in
9a 2 9a 2
the speed required so that the satellite could escape
GM 2GM from the gravitational field of earth is: (2019)
(c) (d)
3a 2 3a 2
(a) 2gR (b) gR
(c)
gR
2
(d) gR ( )
2 −1
@cbseinfinite
GRAVITATION 254
21. A straight rod of length L extends from x = a to 25. A satellite of mass m is launched vertically upward
x= L + a . The gravitational force it exerts on point with an initial speed u from the surface of the earth.
mass ‘m’ at x = 0, If the mass per unit length of the rod After it reaches height R (R = radius of earth), it ejects
is A + Bx 2 , is given by (2019) a rocket of mass m/10 so that subsequently the satellite
moves in a circular orbit. The kinetic energy of the
  1 1 
(a) Gm  A  −  − BL  rocket is (G = gravitational constant; M is the mass of
 a+L a  earth) (2020)
 1 1   m 2GM 
2
(b) Gm  A  −  − BL   119 GM 
+ (a) 5m u 2 − (b) u − 
  a a L    200 R  20  3R 
  1 1 
(c) Gm  A  −  + BL  3m  5GM 
2
m  2 113 GM 
  a + L a   (c) u +  (d) u +
8  6R  20  200 R 
 1 1  
(d) Gm  A  −  + BL  26. A box weighs 196 N on a spring balance at the North
 a a+L 
Pole. Its weight recorded on the same balance, if it is
22. A satellite of mass ‘m’ is in a circular orbit of radius R shifted to the equator its weight is close to (Take
about the centre of the earth.
g = 10ms −2 at the North Pole and radius of the Earth
A meteorite of the same mass, falling towards the earth
= 6400 km) (2020)
collides with the satellite completely inelastically. The
speeds of the satellite and the meteorite are the same, (a) 194.32 N (b) 194.66 N
just before the collision. The subsequent motion of the (c) 195.32 N (d) 195.66 N
combined body will be: (2019) 27. =
Consider two solid spheres of radii R1 1=
m, R2 2m
(a) such that it escapes and masses M 1 & M 2 , respectively. The gravitational
(b) in a elliptical orbit
field due to two spheres 1 and 2 are shown. The value
(c) in the same circular orbit of radius R M
(d) in a circular orbit of a different radius of 1 is
M2
23. Four identical particles of mass M are located at the
corners of a square of side ' a '. What should be their
speeds if each of them revolves under the influence of
other's gravitational fields in a circular orbit
circumscribing the square? (2019)
(2020)
1 1
(a) (b)
GM GM 6 3
(a) 1.35 (b) 1.16
a a 1 2
(c) (d)
GM GM 2 3
(c) 1.21 (d) 1.41
a a 28. Planets A has a mass M and radius R. Planet B has half
24. The value of acceleration due to gravity at Earth's the mass and half the radius of planet A. If the escape
surface is 9.8 ms-2. The altitude above its surface at velocities from the planets A and B are v A and v B
which the acceleration due to gravity decreases to vA n
4.9 ms–2, is close to (Radius of earth = 6.4 × 106 m) respectively, then = , the value of n is:
vB 4
(2020)
(2020)
(a) 2.6 × 10 m
6
(b) 6.4 × 10 m
6
(a) 3 (b) 2
(c) 9.0 × 106 m (d) 1.6 × 106 m
(c) 4 (d) 5
@cbseinfinite
GRAVITATION 255
k 34. The value of the acceleration due to gravity is g1 at a

29. The mass density of a spherical galaxy varies as
r R
over a large distance ‘r’ from its centre. In that region, height h = (R = radius of the earth) from the surface
2
a small star is in a circular orbit of radius R. Then the of the earth. It is again equal to g1 at a depth d below
period of revolution, T depends on R as: (2020)
d
(a) T 2 ∝ R (b) T 2 ∝ R 3 the surface of the earth. The ratio   equals:
R
1 (2020)
(c) T 2 ∝ (d) T ∝ R
R3 1 1
(a) (b)
30. The height ‘h’ at which the weight of a body will be 2 3
the same as that at the same depth ‘h’ from the surface 5 7
(c) (d)
of the earth is (Radius of the earth is R and effect of the 9 9
rotation of the earth is neglected): (2020) 35. The acceleration due to gravity on the earth’s surface
3R − R 5 at the poles is g and angular velocity of the earth about
(a) (b) R−R the axis passing through the pole is ω . An object is
2 2
weighed at the equator and at a height h above the poles
5R − R R by using a spring balance. If the weights are found to
(c) (d)
2 2 be same, then h is: (h < < R, where R is the radius of
31. A satellite is moving in a low nearly circular orbit the earth) (2020)
around the earth. Its radius is roughly equal to that of R 2ω 2 R 2ω 2
the earth’s radius Re. By firing rockets attached to it, (a) (b)
g 8g
its speed is instantaneously increased in the direction
R 2ω 2 R 2ω 2
3 (c) (d)
of its motion so that it become times larger. Due 4g 2g
2
to this the farthest distance from the centre of the earth, 36. A satellite is in an elliptical orbit around a planet P. It
that the satellite reaches is R. Value of R is (2020) is observed that the velocity of the satellite when it is
farthest from the planet is 6 times less than that when
(a) 2 Re (b) 3Re
it is closest to the planet. The ratio of distances between
(c) 4 Re (d) 2.5 Re the satellite and the planet at closest and farthest points
is: (2020)
32. The mass density of a planet of radius R varies with the
(a) 1:2 (b) 1:3
 r2 
distance r from its centre as ρ=(r ) ρ0 1 − 2  . Then (c) 1:6 (d) 3:4
 R  37. An asteroid is moving directly towards the centre of
the gravitational field is maximum at: (2020) the earth. When at a distance of 10 R (R is the radius
1 3 of the earth) from the earth’s centre, it has a speed of
(a) r = R (b) r = R 12 km/s Neglecting the effect of earth’s atmosphere,
3 4
what will be the speed of the asteroid when it hits the
5 surface of the earth (escape velocity from the earth is
(c) r = R (d) r = R
9 11.2 km /s)? Give your answer to the nearest integer in
km/s (2020)
33. A body is moving in a low circular orbit about a planet
of mass M and radius R. The radius of the orbit can be 38. Four identical particles of equal masses 1 kg made to
taken to be R itself. Then the ratio of the speed of this move along the circumference of a circle of radius 1 m
body in the orbit to the escape velocity from the planet under the action of their own mutual gravitational
is: (2020) attraction. The speed of each particle will be (2021)
(a) 2 (b) 2 (a)

G
2
(
2 2 −1 ) (b) (
G 1+ 2 2 )
1
(c) 1 (d)
(1 + 2 2 ) G
( )
2 G
(c) (d) 1+ 2 2
2 2
@cbseinfinite
GRAVITATION 256
39. Two stars of masses m and 2m at a distance d rotate 43. Two satellites A and B of masses 200 kg and 400 kg
about their common centre of mass in free space. The are revolving round the earth at height of 600 km and
period of revolution is (2021) 1600 km respectively. If TA and TB are the time periods
3Gm d3 of A and B respectively then the value of TB − TA :
(a) 2π (b) 2π
d3 3Gm
1 d3 1 3Gm
(c) (d)
2π 3Gm 2π d3
40. A body weighs 49 N on a spring balance at the north
pole. What will be its weight recorded on the same
weighing machine, if it is shifted to the equator?
GM [Given: radius of earth = 6400 km, mass of earth
[use=g = 9.8ms −2 and radius of earth,
R2 = 6 × 1024 kg ] (2021)
R = 6400 km.] (2021)
(a) 4.24 × 10 s 3
(b) 4.24 × 10 s 2
(a) 49.17 N (b) 48.83 N

(c) 49 N (d) 49.83 N (c) 1.33 × 103 s (d) 3.33 × 102 s
41. Given below are two statements: one is labelled as 44. Assume that a tunnel is dug along a chord of the earth,
Assertion A and the other is labelled as Reason R. at a perpendicular distance (R/2) from the earth's
Assertion (A): The escape velocities of planet A and centre, where 'R' is the radius of the Earth. The wall of
B are same. But A and B are of unequal mass. the tunnel is frictionless. If a particle is released in this
tunnel, it will execute a simple harmonic motion with
Reason (R): The product of their mass and radius must
a time period: (2021)
be same. M 1 R1 = M 2 R2
1 g R
In the light of the above statements, choose the most (a) (b) 2π
2π R g
appropriate answer from the options given below:
(2021) 2π R g
(c) (d)
(a) A is not correct but R is correct g 2π R
(b) A is correct but R is not correct 45. A particle is moving with uniform speed along the
(c) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct circumference of a circle of radius R under the action
explanation of A of a central fictitious force F which is inversely
(d) Both A and R are correct but R is NOT the correct proportional to R 3 . Its time period of revolution will
be given by: (2021)
explanation of A
4
42. A solid sphere of radius R gravitationally attracts a (a) T ∝ R 3 (b) T ∝ R 2
particle placed at 3R from its centre with a force F1. 5 3
R (c) T ∝ R 2 (d) T ∝ R 2

Now a spherical cavity of radius   is made in the
2 46. A planet revolving in elliptical orbit has:
sphere (as shown in figure) and the force becomes F2. (A) a constant velocity of revolution.
The value of F1 : F2 is: (2021) (B) has the least velocity when it is nearest to the sun.
(C) its areal velocity is directly proportional to its
velocity.
(D) areal velocity is inversely proportional to its
velocity.
(E) to follow a trajectory such that the areal velocity is
constant.
Choose the correct answer from the options given
below: (2021)
(a) 50:41 (b) 36:25
(a) A only (b) C only
(c) 25:36 (d) 41:50 (c) E only (d) D only
@cbseinfinite
GRAVITATION 257
47. Find the gravitational force of attraction between the 51. If the angular velocity of earth’s spin is increased such
ring and sphere as shown in the diagram, where the that the bodies at the equator start floating, the duration
plane of the ring is perpendicular to the line joining of the day would be approximately:
the centres. If 8R is the distance between the [Take g = 10 ms–2, the radius of earth,
centres of a ring (of mass 'm') and a sphere (mass 'M') R = 6400 × 103 m, Take π = 3.14 ] (2021)
where both have equal radius 'R'. (2021)
(a) does not change (b) 1200 minutes
(c) 84 minutes (d) 60 minutes
52. The initial velocity vi required to project a body
vertically upward from the surface of the earth to reach
a height of 10 R, where R is the radius of the earth, may
be described in terms of escape velocity ve such that
x
=
vi × ve . The value of x will be________[ where,
y
8 GmM 1GMm x
(a) . (b) .
2 is in smallest form]. (2021)
27 R 2 3 8 R y
2 2 GMm 8 GmM 53. In the reported figure of earth, the value of acceleration
(c) . 2 (d) .
3 R 9 R due to gravity is same at point A and C but it is smaller
48. The maximum and minimum distances of a comet than that of its value at point B (surface of the earth).
from the Sun are 1.6 × 1012 m and 8.0 × 1010 m The value of OA: AB will be x : y. The value of x is:
[where x:y is in smallest form]
respectively. If the speed of the comet at the nearest
point is 6 × 104 ms −1 , the speed at the farthest point is
(2021)
(a) 6.0 × 103 m / s (b) 3.0 × 103 m / s
(c) 4.5 × 103 m / s (d) 1.5 × 103 m / s
49. A geostationary satellite is orbiting around an arbitrary
planet 'P' at a height of 11 R above the surface of 'P', R
being the radius of 'P'. The time period of another
satellite in hours at a height of 2 R from the surface of (2021)
'P' is_________. 'P' has the time period of 24 hours. 54. If one wants to remove all the mass of the earth to
(2021) infinity in order to break it up completely. The amount
6 x GM 2
(a) 6 2 (b) of energy that needs to be supplied will be
2 5 R
where x is ____ (Round off to the Nearest Integer)
(c) 3 (d) 5
(M is the mass of earth; R is the radius of earth; G is
50. The time period of a satellite in a circular orbit of
the gravitational constant) (2021)
radius R is T. The period of another satellite in a
circular orbit of radius 9R is: (2021) 55. The radius in kilometres to which the present radius of
earth (R = 6400 km) to be compressed, so that the
(a) 3 T (b) 9 T
escape velocity is increased by 10 times is________.
(c) 27 T (d) 12 T
(2021)
@cbseinfinite
GRAVITATION 258

Objective Questions I [Only one correct option] 8. Four identical point masses each equal to m are placed
at the corners of a square of side a. The force on a point
1. The gravitational force between two objects does not mass m’ placed at the point of intersection of the two
depend on diagonals is:
(a) Sum of the masses 4Gmm’ 2Gmm’
(a) (b)
(b) Product of the masses a2 a2
(c) Gravitational constant Gmm’
(c) (d) zero
(d) Distance between the masses a2
2. The mass of the moon is about 1.2% of the mass of the 9. Two planets have the same average density, but their
earth. Compared to the gravitational force the earth radii are R1 and R2. If acceleration due to gravity at
exerts on the moon, the gravitational force the moon surface on these planets are g1 and g2 respectively,
exerts on earth then
(a) is the same (b) is smaller g1 R1 g1 R2
(a) = (b) =
(c) is greater (d) varies with its phase g 2 R2 g 2 R1
3. Three identical point masses, each of mass 1 kg lie in
g1 R12 g1 R13
the x-y plane at points (0, 0), (0, 0.2m) and (0.2m, 0). (c) = (d) =
The net gravitational force on the mass at the origin is g 2 R22 g 2 R23
( )
(a) 1.67 × 10−9 iˆ + ˆj N ( )
(b) 3.34 × 10−10 iˆ + ˆj N
10. An iron ball and a wooden ball of the same radius are
released from a height ‘h’ in vacuum. The time taken
(c) 1.67 × 10−9 ( iˆ − ˆj ) N (d) 3.34 × 10−10 ( iˆ − ˆj ) N by both of them to reach the ground is
(a) Unequal (b) Exactly equal
4. Four particles of masses m, 2m, 3m and 4m are kept (c) Roughly equal (d) Zero
in sequence at the corners of a square of side a. The 11. The correct answer to above question is based on
magnitude of gravitational force acting on a particle (a) Acceleration due to gravity in vacuum is same
of mass m placed at the centre of the square will be irrespective of size and mass of the body
24m 2 G 6m 2 G (b) Acceleration due to gravity in vacuum depends on
(a) (b)
a2 a2 the mass of the body
(c) There is no acceleration due to gravity in vacuum
4 2Gm 2
(c) (d) zero (d) In vacuum there is resistance offered to the motion
a2
of the body and this resistance depends on the mass of
5. If the distance between two masses is doubled, the the body
gravitational attraction between them 12. A body weighs 700 gm wt on the surface of the earth.
(a) is doubled How much will it weigh on the surface of a planet
(b) becomes four times 1
whose mass and radius is th and half of the earth
(c) is reduced to half 7
(d) is reduced to a quarter respectively.
6. The gravitational force between two stones of mass (a) 200 gm wt (b) 400 gm wt
1 kg each separated by a distance of 1 metre in vacuum (c) 50 gm wt (d) 300 gm wt
is 13. Assume that the acceleration due to gravity on the
(a) zero (b) 6.675 × 10-5 newton surface of the moon is 0.2 times the acceleration due
(c) 6.675 × 10-11 newton (d) 6.675 × 10-8 newton to gravity on the surface of the earth. If Re is the
maximum range of a projectile on the earth's surface,
7. The distance of the centres of moon and earth is D.
what is the maximum range on the surface of the moon
The mass of earth is 81 times the mass of the moon.
for the same velocity of projection
At what distance from the centre of the earth, the
gravitational force will be zero (a) 0.2 Re (b) 2 Re
(a) D/2 (b) 2D/3 (c) 0.5 Re (d) 5 Re
(c) 4D/3 (d) 9D/10
@cbseinfinite
GRAVITATION 259
14. The escape velocity for a body projected vertically 20. At what height above the earth’s surface does the
upwards from the surface of the earth is 11.2 km s-1. If acceleration due to gravity fall to 1% of its value at the
the body is projected in a direction making an angle earth’s surface?
45° with the vertical, the escape velocity will be: (a) 9 R (b) 10 R
11.2 (c) 99 R (d) 100 R
(a) km s −1 (b) 11.2 × 2 km s −1 21. At what height above the earth’s surface is the
2
acceleration due to gravity 1% less than its value at the
(c) 11.2 × 2 km s-1 (d) 11.2 km s-1 surface? [R = 6400 km]
15. A spring balance is graduated on sea level. If a body (a) 16 km (b) 32 km
is weighed with this balance at consecutively
(c) 64 km (d) 32 2 km
increasing heights from earth’s surface, the weight
indicated by the balance 22. At what depth below the surface of the earth
acceleration due to gravity will be half its value at
(a) Will go on increasing continuously
1600 km above the surface of the earth?
(b) Will go on decreasing continuously
(a) 4.3 × 106 m (b) 2.4 × 106 m
(c) Will remain same
(c) 3.2 × 106 m (d) 1.6 × 106 m
(d) Will first increase and then decrease
23. The rotation of the earth about its axis speeds up such
16. An object weights 72 N on earth’s surface. Its weight that a man on the equator becomes weightless. In such
at a height of R/2 from earth is a situation, what would be the duration of one day?
(a) 32 N (b) 56 N 1
(a) 2π R / g (b) R/g
(c) 72 N (d) Zero 2π
17. The depth d at which the value of acceleration due to 1
(c) 2π Rg (d) Rg
gravity becomes
1
times the value at the surface, is 2π
n 24. There are two bodies of same material of masses 103
[R = radius of the earth] kg and 105 kg separated by a distance of 1 km. At what
R  n −1  distance from the smaller body, the intensity of
(a) (b) R   gravitational field will be zero
n  n 
(a) 1/9 km (b) 1/10 km
R  n  (c) 1/11 km (d) 10/11 km
(c) (d) R  
n2  n +1 25. In some region, the gravitational field is zero. The
18. At what distance from the centre of the earth, the value gravitational potential in this region
of acceleration due to gravity g will be half that on the (a) Must be variable (b) Must be constant
surface (R = radius of earth) (c) Cannot be zero (d) Must be zero
(a) 2R (b) R 26. Two concentric shells of mass M1 and M2 are having
(c) 1.414 R (d) 0.5 R radii r1 and r2. Which of the following is the correct
expression for the gravitational field (I) on a mass m?
19. Suppose a vertical tunnel is dug along the diameter of
earth assumed to be a sphere of uniform mass having
density ρ . If a body of mass m is thrown in this
tunnel, its acceleration at a distance y from the centre
is given by
G ( M1 + M 2 )
=(a) I for r < r1
r2
G ( M1 + M 2 )
=(b) I for r < r2
r2
4π M2
(a) G ρ ym (b)
3
π Gρ y =
(c) I G for r1 < r < r2
3 4 r2
GM 1
4 4 =
(d) I for r1 < r < r2
(c) πρ y (d) π Gρ y r2
3 3
@cbseinfinite
GRAVITATION 260
27. A spherical shell is cut into two pieces along a chord 31. A solid sphere of uniform density and radius R applies
as shown in the figure. P is a point on the plane of the a gravitational force of attraction equal to F1 on a
chord. The gravitational field at P due to the upper part particle placed at a distance 2R from the centre of the
is I1 and that due to the lower part is I2. What is the sphere. A spherical cavity of radius R/2 is now made
relation between them? in the sphere as shown in the figure. The sphere with
the cavity now applies a gravitational force F2 on the
same particle. The ratio F1/F2 is
(a) I1 > I2 (b) I1 < I2 1 3

(c) I1 = I2 (d) No definite relation (a) (b)
2 4
28. A particle of mass m is placed inside a spherical shell,
away from its centre. The mass of the shell is M. 7 9
(c) (d)
(a) The particle will move towards the centre. 8 7
(b) The particle will move away from the centre, 32. The following figure shows two shells of masses m1
towards the nearest wall. and m2. The shells are concentric. At which point, a
(c) The particle will move towards the centre if particle of mass m shall experience zero force?
m < M, and away from the centre if m > M.
(d) The particle will remain stationary.
29. A uniform ring of mass m and radius r is placed
directly above a uniform sphere of mass M and of
equal radius. The centre of the ring is at a distance
3r from the centre of the sphere. The gravitational
force exerted by the sphere on the ring will be
GMm GMm
(a) (b) (a) A (b) B
8r 2
4r 2
(c) C (d) D
3 GMm GMm
(c) 2
(d) 33. A solid sphere of uniform density and mass M has
8r 16r 2 radius 4 m. Its centre is at the origin of the coordinate
30. A solid sphere of radius R/2 is cut out of a solid sphere system. Two spheres of radii 1 m are taken out so, that
of radius R such that the spherical cavity so formed their centres are at P (0, –2, 0) and Q (0, 2, 0),
touches the surface on one side and the centre of the respectively. This leaves two spherical cavities. What
sphere on the other side, as shown. The initial mass of is the gravitational field at the origin of the coordinate
the solid sphere was M. If a particle of mass m is axes?
placed at a distance 2.5 R from the centre of the cavity,
then what is the gravitational attraction on the mass
m?
31GM Gm
(a) (b)
1024 1024
GMm GMm (c) 31 GM (d) zero
(a) (b)
R2 2R2
GMm 23 GMm
(c) (d)
8R 2 100 R 2
@cbseinfinite
GRAVITATION 261
34. Gravitational field at the centre of a semicircle formed 38. Three particles each of mass 100 gm are brought from
by a thin wire AB of mass m and length l is: a very large distance to the vertices of an equilateral
triangle whose side is 20 cm in length. The work done
will be
(a) 0.33 × 10-11 Joule (b) – 0.33 × 10-11 Joule
-11
(c) 1.00 × 10 Joule (d) –1.00 × 10-11 Joule
39. The change in potential energy, when a body of mass
Gm Gm m is raised to a height nR from the earth’s surface is
(a) 2 along + x axis (b) along +y axis
 π 2 (R = Radius of earth)
2π Gm 2π Gm n
(c) along + x axis (d) along + y axis (a) mgR (b) nmgR
 2
2 n −1
35. Two identical thin uniform rods of mass m and length n2 n
L are placed as shown in figure. The gravitational (c) mgR (d) mgR
n2 + 1 n +1
interaction force between the two rods is
40. What impulse need to be given to a body of mass m,
released from the surface of earth along a straight
tunnel passing through centre of earth, at the centre of
Gm 2 Gm 2 the earth, to bring it to rest. (Mass of earth M, radius
(a) (b) or earth R)
4 L2 2 L2
Gm 2 Gm 2  4  GM GMm
(c) (d) n   (a) m (b)
R R
9 L2 L2 3
36. Two rings having masses M and 2M, respectively, GM
(c) m (d) zero
having same radius are placed coaxially as shown in 2R
figure. 41. Two bodies of masses m and M are placed a distance
d apart. The gravitational potential at the position
where the gravitational field due to them is zero is V,
then
G Gm
− (m + M )
(a) V = (b) V = −
d d
− ( m+ M)
GM G 2
(c) V = − (d) V =
d d
If the mass distribution on both the rings is non- 42. P is a point at a distance r from the centre of a spherical
uniform, the gravitational potential at point P is shell of mass M and radius a, where r < a. The
gravitational potential at P is
GM  1 2 
(a) −  +  GM GM
R  2 5 (a) − (b) −
r a
GM  2
(b) − 1 + 2  r a−r 
R   (c) −GM (d) −GM  2 
a2  a 
(c) zero
(d) cannot be determined from given information
37. The magnitude of gravitational potential energy of a
body at a distance r from the centre of earth is u. Its
weight at a distance 2r from the centre of earth is
u u
(a) (b)
r 4r
u 4r
(c) (d)
2r u
@cbseinfinite
GRAVITATION 262
43. P is a point at a distance r from the centre of a solid 46. The escape velocity for the earth is 11.2 km/sec. The
sphere of radius a. The gravitational potential at P is mass of another planet is 100 times that of the earth
V. If V is plotted as a function of r, which is the correct and its radius is 4 times that of the earth. The escape
curves? velocity for this planet will be
(a) (a) 112.0 km/s (b) 5.6 km/s
(c) 280.0 km/s (d) 56.0 km/s
47. The ratio of the radii of planets A and B is k1 and ratio
of acceleration due to gravity on them is k2. The ratio
of escape velocities from them will be
(a) k1k2 (b) k1k2
(b) k1 k2
(c) (d)
k2 k1
48. For a satellite escape velocity is 11 km/s. If the satellite
is launched at an angle of 60° with the vertical, then
escape velocity will be
(a) 11 km/s (b) 11 3 km/s
11
(c) km/s (d) 33 km/s
(c) 3
49. A person sitting in a chair in a satellite feels weightless
because
(a) The earth does not attract the objects in a satellite
(b) The normal force by the chair on the person
balances the earth’s attraction
(c) The normal force is zero
(d) (d) The person in satellite is not accelerated
50. Planetary system in the solar system describes
(a) Conservation of energy
(b) Conservation of linear momentum
(c) Conservation of angular momentum
(d) None of these
51. A satellite S is moving in an elliptical orbit around the
44. The gravitational potential due to the earth at infinite earth. The mass of the satellite is very small compared
distance from it is zero. Let the gravitational potential to the mass of earth
at a point P be –5 J/kg. Suppose we arbitrarily assume
(a) The acceleration of S is always directed towards
that the gravitational potential at infinity to be + 10
the centre of the earth
J/kg, then the gravitational potential at P will be
(b) The angular momentum of S about the centre of
(a) –5 J/kg (b) +5 J/kg
the earth changes in direction but its magnitude
(c) –15 J/kg (d) +15 J/kg remains constant
45. A person brings a mass of 1 kg from infinity to a point (c) The total mechanical energy of S varies
A. Initially the mass was at rest but it moves with a periodically with time
speed of 2 m/s as it reaches A. The work done by the
(d) The linear momentum of S remains constant in
person on the mass is – 3 J. The potential of A is
magnitude
(a) – 3 J/kg (b) – 2 J/kg
(c) – 5 J/kg (d) – 7 J/kg
@cbseinfinite
GRAVITATION 263
52. Inside a satellite orbiting very close to the earth’s 58. If orbital velocity of planet is given by v = Ga Mb Rc,
surface, water does not fall out of a glass when it is then
inverted. Which of the following is the best
1 1 1
explanation for this? (a) a = ,b= ,c= −
3 3 3
(a) The earth does not exert any force on the water.
(b) The earth’s force of attraction on the water is 1 1 1
(b) a = ,b= ,c= −
exactly balanced by the force created by the 2 2 2
satellite’s motion.
1 1 1
(c) The water and the glass have the same (c) a = ,b=
− ,c=
acceleration, equal to g, towards the centre of the 2 2 2
earth, and hence there is no relative motion 1 1 1
between them (d) a = ,b=
− ,c=
−
2 2 2
(d) The gravitation attraction between the glass and
the water balances the earth’s attraction on the 59. Two satellites of same mass are launched in the same
water. orbit of radius r around the earth so as to rotate
opposite to each other. If they collide inelastically and
53. If a small part separates from an orbiting satellite, the
stick together as wreckage, the total energy of the
part will
system just after collision is
(a) fall to the earth directly
2GMm GMm
(b) move in a spiral and reach the earth after few (a) − (b) −
rotations r r
(c) continue to move in the same orbit as the satellite GMm
(c) (d) zero
(d) move farther away from the earth gradually 2r
54. If ve and v0 represent the escape velocity and orbital 60. Energy required in moving a body of mass m from a
velocity, respectively, of a satellite corresponding to a distance 2R to 3R from centre of earth of mass M is
circular orbit of radius R, then
GMm GMm
(a) ve = v0 (a) (b)
12 R 2 3R 2
(b) 2vo = ve
GMm GMm
(c) (d)
(c) ve = v0 / 2 8R 6R
(d) ve and v0 are not related 61. A satellite whose mass is m, is revolving in circular
55. Two satellites of masses m1 and m2 (m1 > m2) are orbit of radius r around the earth. Time of revolution
revolving round the earth in circular orbits of radius r1 of satellite is [mass of earth is M]
and r2(r1 > r2) respectively. Which of the following
statements is true regarding their speeds v1 and v2? r5 r3
(a) T ∝ (b) T ∝
(a) v1 = v2 (b) v1 < v2 GM GM
v1 v2 r3
(c) v1 > v2 (d) = (c) T ∝
r
(d) T ∝
r1 r2 GM 2 / 3 GM 1 / 4
56. A satellite is moving around the earth with speed v in
62. The distances of two satellites from the surface of the
a circular orbit of radius r. If the orbit radius is
earth are R and 7R. Their time periods of rotation are
decreased by 1%, its speed will
in the ratio:
(a) Increase by 1% (b) Increase by 0.5%
(a) 1 : 7 (b) 1 : 8
(c) Decrease by 1% (d) Decrease by 0.5%
57. Two satellite A and B go round a planet P in circular (c) 1 : 49 (d) 1 : 73/2
orbits having radii 4R and R respectively. If the speed
of the satellite A is 3v, the speed of the satellite B will
be
(a) 12 v (b) 6 v
4 3
(c) v (d) v
3 2
@cbseinfinite
GRAVITATION 264
63. The figure shows the motion of a planet around the 67. Which of the following statements is/are true about
sun in an elliptical orbit with sun at the focus. The the gravitational constant G?
shaded areas A and B are also shown in the figure (a) G is a dimensionless number.
which can be assumed to be equal. If t1 and t2
(b) The value of G is the same anywhere in the
represent the time for the planet to move from a to b universe.
and d to c respectively, then
(c) G has the same value in all systems of units.
b
a (d) The value of G does not depend on the nature of
A
the medium between the two bodies.
S
68. The value of the acceleration due to gravity g on earth
B depends upon
d c
(a) the mass of the earth
(a) t1 < t2 (b) t1 > t2 (b) the average radius of the earth
(c) t1 = t2 (d) t1 ≠ t2 (c) the average density of the earth
64. The earth E moves in an elliptical orbit with the sun S (d) none of the above quantities
at one of the foci as shown in figure. Its speed of 69. Choose the correct statement (s) from the following
motion will be maximum at the point (a) The gravitational forces between two particles are
C an action and reaction pair.
E
(b) Gravitation constant (G) is scalar but acceleration
A B
S
due to gravity (g) is a vector.
(c) The values of G and g are to be determined
D
experimentally.
(a) C (b) A (d) G and g are constant everywhere.
(c) B (d) D 70. Choose the correct statement (s) from the following
65. Four particles, each of mass M move along a circle of (a) The magnitude of the gravitational force between
radius R under the action of their mutual gravitational two bodies of mass 1 kg each and separated by a
attraction. The speed of each particle is distance of 1 m is 9.8 N.
GM GM (b) Higher the value of the escape velocity for a planet,
(a) (b) 2 2
R R the higher is the abundance of lighter gases in its
atmosphere.
 2 2 +1
(c)
GM
R
(
2 2 +1 ) (d)
GM
R
  (c) The gravitational force of attraction between two
 4  bodies of ordinary mass is not noticeable because
the value of the gravitation constant is extremely
small.
Objective Questions II (d) Force of friction arises due to gravitational
attraction.
71. Choose the wrong statement (s) from the following
66. The magnitudes of the gravitational field at distance r1
(a) It is possible to shield a body from the gravitational
and r2 from the centre of a uniform sphere of radius R
field of another body by using a thick shielding
and mass M are F1 and F2 respectively. Then
material between them.
F1 r1
(a) = if r1 < R and r2 < R (b) The escape velocity of a body is independent of the
F2 r2 mass of the body and the angle of projection.
F1 r22 (c) The acceleration due to gravity increases due to the
(b) = if r1 > R and r2 > R rotation of the earth.
F2 r12
(d) The gravitational force exerted by the earth on a
F r body is greater than that exerted by the body on the
(c) 1 =1 if r1 > R and r2 > R
F2 r2 earth.
F1 r12
(d) = if r1 < R and r2 < R
F2 r22
@cbseinfinite
GRAVITATION 265
72. A comet is revolving around the sun in a highly 78. Let V and E denote the gravitational potential and
elliptical orbit. Which of the following will remain gravitational field at a point. It is possible to have
constant throughout its orbit? =
(a) V 0=
and E 0 =
(b) V 0 and E ≠ 0
(a) Kinetic energy
(c) V ≠ 0 and E =
0 (d) V ≠ 0 and E ≠ 0
(b) Potential energy
79. An orbiting satellite will escape if
(c) Total energy
(a) its speed is increased by 41%
(d) Angular momentum
73. The weight of an object will be (b) its speed in the orbit is made (1.5) times of its
(a) zero at the centre of the earth initial value
(b) one-fourth of its value at sea level at a height equal (c) its KE is doubled
to the radius of the earth above its surface. (d) it stops moving in the orbit
(c) same in all satellites 80. An astronaut, inside an earth satellite, experiences
(d) same at all points on the surface of the earth weightlessness because
74. For two satellites at distance R and 7R above the (a) no external force is acting on him
earth’s surface, the ratio of their (b) he is falling freely
(a) total energies is 4 and potential and kinetic (c) no reaction is exerted by floor of the satellite
energies is 2 (d) he is far away from earth’s surface
(b) potential energies is 4 81. If the radius of the earth suddenly decreases to 80% of
(c) kinetic energies is 4 its present value, the mass of the earth remaining the
same, the value of the acceleration due to gravity will
(d) total energies is 4
(a) remain unchanged
75. A satellite is orbiting the earth in a circular orbit of
radius r. Its 9.8
(b) become ms −2
(a) kinetic energy varies as 1/r 0.64
(c) increase by 36%
(b) angular momentum varies as 1/ r
(d) increase by about 56%
(c) linear momentum varies as 1/ r 82. Which of the following are correct?
3/2 (a) Escape velocity tells us how fast an object needs to
(d) frequency of revolution varies as 1/r
76. An object is taken from a point P to another point Q in go to escape the planet’s gravity.
a gravitational field (b) The time period of a geostationary satellite is 24 h.
(a) Assuming the earth to be spherical, if both P and (c) If a satellite revolves close to the earth’s surface,
Q lie on earth’s surface the work done is zero then velocity of the satellite is gR
(b) If P is on earth’s surface and Q above it, the work (d) When a satellite is revolving around the earth in a
done is minimum when it is taken along the fixed orbit, its linear momentum changes
straight-line PQ continuously.
(c) The work done depends only on the position of P Numerical Value Type Questions
and Q and is independent of the path along which
the particle is taken 83. A sky lab of mass 4 × 103 kg is first launched from the
surface of earth in a circular orbit of radius 2R and
(d) There is no net work done if the object is taken
then it is shifted from this circular orbit to another
from P to Q and then brought back to P, along any circular orbit of radius 3R. Calculate the minimum
path
energy (in 108 J) required to shift the lab from first
77. Consider a planet moving in an elliptical orbit around orbit to the second orbit. R = 6450 km, g = 10 m/s2
the sun. The work done on the planet by the 84. Distance between the centres of two stars is 10 a. The
gravitational force of the sun masses of these stars are M and 16M and their radii a
(a) is zero in any small part of the orbit. and 2a respectively. A body of mass m is fired straight
(b) is zero in some parts of the orbit. from the surface of the larger star towards the smaller
(c) is zero in complete revolution star. What should be its minimum initial speed (in
km/s) to reach the surface of the smaller star?
(d) is zero in no part of the motion
(M = 6 × 1022 kg, a = 2000 km, G= 6 × 10−11 )
@cbseinfinite
GRAVITATION 266
85. A man can jump vertically to a height of 1.5 m on the 92. Assertion: The time period of revolution of a satellite
earth. Calculate the radius of a planet of the same close to surface of earth is smaller than that revolving
mean density as that of the earth from whose away from surface of earth.
gravitational field he could escape by jumping. Radius Reason: The square of time period of revolution of a
19.22 satellite is directly proportional to cube of its orbital
of earth is × 106 m .
3 radius.
86. Three particles of mass m each are placed at the three (a) A (b) B
corners of an equilateral triangle of side a. Find the (c) C (d) D
work (in 10−10 J) which should be done on this system 93. Assertion: Generally, the path of a projectile from the
to increase the sides of the triangle to 2a. earth is parabolic but it is elliptical for projectiles
20 going to a very large height.
=
(m = 5 kg, a = 10 cm, G × 10−11 )
3 Reason: The path of a projectile is independent of the
gravitational force of earth.
87. Earth is a sphere of uniform mass density. How much
would a body weigh (in N) half-way down the centre (a) A (b) B
of earth if it weighed 100 N on the surface? (c) C (d) D
88. An infinite collection of equal masses of 2 kg are kept 94. Assertion: We cannot move even a finger without
on a horizontal line (x–axis) at positions x = 1, 2, 4, 8, disturbing all the stars.
...... Find the magnitude of gravitational potential at x Reason: Everybody in this universe attracts every
= 0 (in SI units). other body with a force which is inversely
89. Two satellites of mass ratio 1 : 2 are revolving around proportional to the square of distance between them.
the earth in circular orbits such that the distance of the (a) A (b) B
second satellite is four times as compared to the
(c) C (d) D
distance of the first satellite. Find the ratio of their
centripetal force. 95. Statement - 1: Escape velocity is independent of the
angle of projection.
Assertion & Reason
Statement - 2: Escape velocity from the surface of
earth is proportional to R where R is radius of earth.
from the codes (A), (B), (C) and (D) defined as follows.
(A) If both Assertion and reason are true and reason (a) A (b) B
is the correct explanation of the assertion. (c) C (d) D
(B) If both assertion and reason are true but reason 96. Statement - 1: Gravitational potential is zero inside a
is not the correct explanation of the assertion. shell.
(C) If assertion is true but reason is false. Statement - 2: Gravitational potential is equal to the
(D) If assertion is false but reason is true. work done in bringing a unit mass from infinity to a
point inside gravitational field.
90. Assertion: If earth suddenly stops rotating about its (a) A (b) B
axis, then the value of acceleration due to gravity will
become same at all the places. (c) C (d) D
Reason: The value of acceleration due to gravity is 97. Statement-1: A spherically symmetric shell produces
independent of rotation of earth. no gravitational field anywhere.
(a) A (b) B Statement-2: The field due to various mass elements
cancels out, everywhere inside the shell.
(c) C (d) D
(a) A (b) B
91. Assertion: Orbital velocity of a satellite is greater
than its escape velocity. (c) C (d) D
Reason: Orbit of a satellite is within the gravitational 98. Statement-1: Rate of change of weight near the
field of earth whereas escaping is beyond the earth’s surface with height h is proportional to h 0 .
gravitational field of earth. Statement-2: Since gravitational potential is given by
(a) A (b) B GM
V= −
(c) C (d) D r
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
@cbseinfinite
GRAVITATION 267
99. Statement - 1: Two particles are to be projected from 102. Four identical satellites are orbiting in four elliptical
the surface of earth so that particles just leave the orbits having same semi-major axis but different
gravitational field of earth. One particle is projected eccentricities. In Column–I some quantities associated
vertically upward and another is at an angle of 45° with four orbits are given and in Column–II the words
with vertical. Speed given to both particles is same. which can give the information about physical
Statement - 2: Escape speed does not depend upon quantities mentioned in Column–I. Match the entries
angle of projection. of Column–I with the entries of Column–II.
4
(a) A (b) B 3
(c) C (d) D
100. Statement - 1: For a satellite revolving very near to 1 E 2
earth’s surface the time period of revolution is given r1 r2
by 1 hour 24 min.
Statement - 2: The period of revolution of a satellite r1 r2
depends only upon its height above the earth’s surface.
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D Column–I Column–II
(A) Total energy of (P) Same
all four orbits
Match the Following
(B) Speed of satellite (Q) Different
in all four orbits
Column-II. Only one of these four options corresponds (C) Velocity of (R) Constant
to a correct matching. satellite in all
four orbits
to the correct matching. (D) Angular (S) Varying
momentum of
101. For a planet orbiting about sun in elliptical orbit, some satellites about
incomplete statements regarding physical quantities centre of earth in
are given in Column–I, which can be completed by all four orbits
using entries of Column–II. Match the entries of
Column–I with the entries of Column–II. 103. Considering earth to be a homogeneous sphere but
keeping in mind its spin, match the following:
(A) Maximum PE of (P) is at perihelion. Column–I Column–II
sun planet (A) Acceleration due (P) May change from
system to gravity point to point.
(B) Maximum speed (Q) is at aphelion (B) Orbital angular (Q) Does not depend
of planet momentum of on direction of
(C) Minimum PE of (R) is independent of the earth as seen projection
sun planet mass of planet from a distant
system star
(D) Minimum kinetic (S) is dependent on (C) Escape velocity (R) Remains
energy of planet semi-major axis from the earth constant
of orbit. (D) Gravitational (S) Depend on
potential due to direction of
earth at a projection
particular point
@cbseinfinite
GRAVITATION 268
Paragraph Type Questions Using the following Passage, solve Q. 107 to Q.113
Using the following Passage, solve Q. 104 to Q. 106 Passage
Passage The satellites when launched from earth are not given
the orbital velocity initially, in practice, a multi-stage
In the graph shown, the PE of earth-satellite system is shown
rocket propeller carries the spacecraft up to its orbit
by solid line as a function of distance r (the separation
and during each stage rocket has been fired to increase
between earth's centre and satellite). The total energy of two
the velocity to acquire the desired velocity for a
objects which may or may not be bounded to earth are shown
particular orbit. The last stage of the rocket brings the
in figure by dotted lines.
satellite in circular/elliptical (desired) orbit.
Consider a satellite of mass 150 kg in low circular
orbit, in this orbit, we can't neglect the effect of air
drag. This air drag opposes the motion of satellite and
hence total mechanical energy of earth-satellite
system decreases means total energy becomes more
negative and hence orbital radius decreases which
causes the increase in KE. When the satellite comes in
enough low orbit, the excessive thermal energy
104. Mark the correct statement(s) generation due to air friction may cause the satellite to
(a) The object having total energy E1 is bounded one. burn up.
107. What is the reason that during launching of satellite,
(b) The object having total energy E2 is bounded one.
while crossing the atmosphere it doesn't get burnt, but
(c) Both the objects are bounded. while falling down towards earth or if orbiting in
lower orbit, it gets burnt up?
(d) Both the objects are unbounded.
(a) While going up air friction force doesn't come into
105. If object having total energy E1 is having same PE existence
curve as shown in figure, then
(b) While going up satellite is with launching vehicle
(a) r0 is the maximum distance of object from earth's whose speed is controllable
centre (c) While going up space-craft is protecting the
(b) this object and earth system is bounded one satellite from air friction by itself getting burned
(d) None of these
(c) the KE of the object is zero when r = r0
108. What would be the motion of satellite if air drag has
(d) all the above to be considered?
106. If both the object have same PE curve as shown in (a) Moves with uniform speed in the launching orbit
figure, then (b) Orbital radius decreases continuously as a result
(a) for object having total energy E2 all values of r are moves with non-uniform velocity in elliptical orbit
possible (c) Orbital radius decreases continuously and hence
collapses with earth after some time in random
(b) for object having total energy E2 values of r < r0
manner and there is equal chance of burning up the
are only possible
satellite due to air friction also
(c) for object having total energy E1 all values of r are (d) Moves with non-uniform speed in the launching
possible orbit
(d) none of these 109. It has been mentioned in passage that as r decreases,
E decreases but K increases. The increase in K is
[E = Total mechanical energy, r = Orbital radius,
K = Kinetic energy] is
(a) due to increase in gravitational PE
(b) due to decrease in gravitational PE
(c) due to work done by air friction force
(d) both (b) and (c)
@cbseinfinite
GRAVITATION 269
110. If due to air drag, the orbital radius of earth decreases Using the following Passage, solve Q. 114 to Q.115
from R to R – ∆R , ∆R << R, then the expression for
Passage
increase in orbital velocity Dv is
The minimum and maximum distances of a satellite
∆R GM ∆R GM from the centre of the earth are 2R and 4R,
(a) (b) −
2 R3 2 R3 respectively, where R is the radius of earth and M is
the mass of the earth.
GM GM
(c) ∆R (d) −∆R 114. The minimum and maximum speeds
R3 R3
111. For information given in above question, the change GM 2GM GM 3GM
(a) , (b) ,
in KE, ∆K is 9R R 5R 2R
GMm GMm GM 2GM GM 5GM

(a) − × ∆R (b) × ∆R (c) , (d) ,
R2 R2 6R 3R 3R 2R
GMm GMm 115. Radius of curvature at the point of minimum distance
(c) ∆R (d) − × ∆R
2R2 2R2 is
112. For information given in question no.110, the change 8R 5R
(a) (b)
in PE, ∆U is 3 3
GMm GMm 4R 7R
(a) − ∆R (b) ∆R (c) (d)
R2 R2 3 3
GMm GMm
(c) ∆R (d) − ∆R
2R2 2R2
113. For information given in question no. 110, the work
done by air friction force W, is
GMm GMm
(a) − ∆R (b) ∆R
R2 R2
GMm GMm
(c) ∆R (d) − ∆R
2R2 2R2
where M is the mass of earth and m is mass of satellite.
@cbseinfinite
GRAVITATION 270

Objective Questions I [Only one correct option] 5. A spherically symmetric gravitational system of
 ρ for r ≤ R
1. A satellite S is moving in an elliptical orbit around particles has a mass density ρ =  0 where
the earth. The mass of the satellite is very small 0 for r > R
compared to the mass of the earth (1998) ρ0 is a constant. A test mass can undergo circular
(a) the acceleration of S is always directed towards motion under the influence of the gravitational field
the centre of the earth. of particles. Its speed v as a function of distance r
(b) the angular momentum of S about the centre of from the centre of the system is represented by
the earth changes in direction, but its magnitude (2008)
remains constant (a)
(c) the total mechanical energy of S varies
periodically with time.
(d) the linear momentum of S remains constant in
magnitude.
2. A simple pendulum has a time period T1 on the
earth’s surface and T2 when taken to a height R
above the earth’s surface, where R is the radius of the
(b)
T
earth. The value of 2 is: (2001)
T1
(a) 1 (b) 2
(c) 4 (d) 2
3. A geostationary satellite orbits around the earth in a
circular orbit of radius 36,000 km. Then, the time
period of a spy satellite orbiting a few hundred km
above the earth's surface ( Re = 6400 km ) will (c)
approximately be (2002)
1
(a) h (b) 1 h
2
(c) 2 h (d) 4 h
4. A double star system consists of two stars A and B
which have time periods TA and TB . Radius
RA and RB and mass M A and M B . Choose the (d)
correct option. (2006)
(a) If TA > TB then RA > RB
(b) If TA > TB then M A > M B
2 3
T   R 
(c)  A  =  A 
 TB   RB 
(d) TA = TB
@cbseinfinite
GRAVITATION 271
6. A satellite is moving with a constant speed v in a Objective Questions II

circular orbit about the earth. An object of mass m is
[One or more than one correct option)
ejected from the satellite such that it just escapes from
the gravitational pull of the earth. At the time of its 9. Two bodies, each of mass M, are kept fixed with a
ejection, the kinetic energy of the object is: separation 2L. A particle of mass m is projected from
(2011) the mid-point of the line joining their centres,
perpendicular to the line. The gravitational constant is
1 2 G. The correct statement(s) is (are):
(a) mv (b) mv 2
2 (2013)
3 2 (a) The minimum initial velocity of the mass m to
(c) mv (d) 2mv 2
2 escape the gravitational field of the two bodies is
1 GM
7. =
A planet of radius R × (radius of Earth) has the 4
10 L
same mass density as Earth. Scientists dig a well of (b) The minimum initial velocity of the mass m to
R escape the gravitational field of the two bodies is
depth on it and lower a wire of the same length
5 GM
−3 −1
2
and of linear mass density 10 kgm into it. If the L
wire is not touching anywhere, the force applied at (c) The minimum initial velocity of the mass m to
the top of the wire by a person holding it in place is escape the gravitational field of the two bodies is
(take the radius of Earth = 6 × 106 m and the 2GM
acceleration due to gravity on Earth is 10 ms–2) L
(d) The energy of the mass m remains constant.
(2014)
(a) 96 N (b) 108 N
(c) 120 N (d) 150 N Numerical Value Type Questions
8. Consider a spherical gaseous cloud of mass density ρ R
10. There is a crater of depth on the surface of the
(r) in a free space where r is the radial distance from 100
its centre. The gaseous cloud is made of particles of moon (radius R). A projectile is fired vertically
equal mass m moving in circular orbits about their upward from the crater with a velocity, which is equal
common centre with the same kinetic energy K. The to the escape velocity v from the surface of the moon.
force acting on the particles is their mutual Find the maximum height attained by the projectile.
gravitational force. If ρ(r) is constant in time. The
Quote your answer in multiple of R (2003)
ρ (r )
particle number density n( r ) = is: 11. Gravitational acceleration on the surface of a planet is
m 6
(G = universal gravitational constant) g , where g is the gravitational acceleration on
11
(2019) the surface of the earth. The average mass density of
K K 2
(a) (b) the planet is times that of the earth. If the escape
6π r 2 m 2 G π r 2 m2G 3
speed on the surface of the earth is taken to be
3K K
(c) (d) 11 kms −1 , the escape speed on the surface of the
π r 2 m2G 2π r 2 m 2 G
planet in kms −1 will be (2010)
@cbseinfinite
GRAVITATION 272
12. A large spherical mass M is fixed at one position and

Assertion & Reason
two identical point masses m are kept on a line
passing through the Centre of M (see figure). The For the following questions choose the correct answer
point masses are connected by rigid massless rod of from the codes (A), (B), (C) and (D) defined as follows.
length l and this assembly is free to move along the
line connecting them. All three masses interact only (A) If Statement–I is true, Statement–II is true;
through their mutual gravitational interaction. When Statement–II is the correct explanation for
the point mass nearer to M is at a distance r = 3l Statement–I.
from M, the tension in the rod is zero for (B) If Statement–I is true, Statement–II is true;
 M 
m = k  . The value of k is Statement–II is not a correct explanation for
 288  Statement–I.
(2015) (C) If Statement–I is true; Statement–II is false.
(D) If Statement–I is false; Statement–II is true.
15. Statement–I: An astronaut in an orbiting space
station above the earth experiences weightlessness.
13. A bullet is fired vertically upwards with velocity v
Statement–II: An object moving around the earth
from the surface of a spherical planet. When it
under the influence of earth's gravitational force is in
reaches its maximum height, its acceleration due to
a state of 'free-fall'. (2008)
1
the planet’s gravity is th of its value of the surface (a) A (b) B
4
of the planet. If the escape velocity from the planet is (c) C (d) D
vesc = v N , then the value of N is (ignore energy
loss due to atmosphere) (2015)
14. The distance between two stars of
masses 3M S and 6 M S is 9 R. Here R is the mean
distance between the centers of the Earth and the Sun,
and M s is the mass of the Sun. The two stars orbit
around their common center of mass in circular orbits
with period nT, where T is the period of Earth's
revolution around the Sun.
The value of n is______.
(2021)
@cbseinfinite
GRAVITATION 273
GRAVITATION
@cbseinfinite
ANSWER KEY 274
Answer Key
CHAPTER -5 WORK, ENERGY AND POWER

1. (b) 2. (c) 3. (a) 4. (d) 1. (b) 2. (a) 3. (d) 4. (c)

5. (a) 6. (a) 7. (c) 8. (d) 5. (a) 6. (b) 7. (a) 8. (d)
9. (b) 10. (b) 11. (b) 12. (d) 9. (d) 10. (d) 11. (b) 12. (d)
13. (b) 14. (c) 15. (c) 16. (d) 13. (d) 14. (d) 15. (d) 16. (a)
17. (b) 18. (d) 19. (c) 20. (c) 17. (a) 18. (b) 19. (b) 20. (a)
21. (b) 22. (c) 23. (c) 24. (c) 21. (3.00) 22. (18.00) 23. (5.00) 24. (1.00)
25. (c) 26. (b) 27. (c) 28. (a) 25. (2.00) 26. (10.00) 27. (6.00) 28. (c)
29. (b) 30.(b) 31. (b) 32. (b) 29. (b) 30.(d)
33. (a) 34.(a) 35.(b) 36. (c)
37. (d) 38.(b) 39.(d) 40. (a)
41. (b) 42.(b) 43.(b) 44. (b)
45. (a) 46.(a) 47.(a) 48. (b)
49. (a) 50.(a) 51. (c) 52. (d)
53. (b) 54.(c) 55.(b) 56. (b)
57. (c) 58.(b) 59.(b) 60. (b)
61. (d) 62.(a) 63.(a) 64. (b)
65. (b) 66.(a) 67. (c) 68. (c)
69. (b) 70.(a) 71. (b) 72. (c)
73. (a) 74.(c) 75. (b) 76. (c)
77. (a) 78.(d) 79. (a) 80. (b)
@cbseinfinite
ANSWER KEY 275
CHAPTER -5 WORK, ENERGY AND POWER

1. (a) 2. (c) 3. (b) 4. (a) 1. (d) 2. (b) 3. (b) 4. (a)

5. (d) 6. (c) 7. (a) 8. (c) 5. (c) 6. (a) 7. (b) 8. (c)
9. (b) 10. (b) 11. (b) 12. (d) 9. (a,d) 10. (a,b,d) 11. (a,d) 12. (7)
13. (b) 14. (d) 15. (c) 16. (b) 13. (8) 14. (5) 15. (5) 16. (5)
17. (b) 18. (d) 19. (b) 20. (c) 17. (c)
21. (c) 22. (a) 23. (c) 24. (c) 18. [A  P, Q, R, T; B  Q, S; C  P, Q, R, S; D  P, R, T]
25. (a) 26. (b) 27. (c) 28. (b) 19. (b) 20. (a)
29. (b) 30.(b) 31. (b) 32. (c)
33. (d) 34.(a) 35.(a) 36. (a)
37. (a) 38.(b) 39.(b) 40. (b)
41. (b) 42.(a) 43.(c) 44. (d)
45. (a) 46.(c) 47.(a) 48. (c)
49. (c) 50.(a) 51. (a) 52. (d)
53. (c) 54.(d) 55.(a) 56. (d)
57. (c) 58.(d) 59.(a,b,c,d) 60. (a,b)
61. (b,c,d) 62.(a,b) 63.(a,b,c) 64. (b,c)
65. (a,c) 66.(3) 67. (0) 68. (3)
69. (1.2) 70. (a) 71. (a) 72. (a)
73. (a) 74.(c) 75. (d) 76. (d)
77. (a) 78. ( a  s, b  p, c  r, d  p )
79. (a) 80.(b)
@cbseinfinite
ANSWER KEY 276
Answer Key
CHAPTER -6 CIRCULAR MOTION

1. (d) 2. (b) 3. (c) 4. (a) 1. (a) 2. (b) 3. (d) 4. (a)

5. (c) 6. (d) 7. (b) 8. (a) 5. (d) 6. (d) 7. (d) 8. (0.2)
9. (c) 10. (c) 11. (c) 12. (c) 9. (b) 10. (25)
13. (b) 14. (c) 15. (a) 16. (b)
17. (d) 18. (c) 19. (c) 20. (8)
21. (20) 22. (b) 23. (d) 24. (c)
25. (c) 26. (c) 27. (c) 28. (a)
29. (c) 30. (c) 31. (a) 32. (a)
33. (b) 34. (b) 35. (d) 36. (c)
37. (b) 38. (c) 39. (b) 40. (c)
41. (b) 42. (c) 43. (a) 44. (b)
45. (a) 46. (b) 47. (b) 48. (b)
49. (b) 50. (b) 51. (a) 52. (b)
53. (a) 54. (5) 55. (2) 56. (2.5)
57. (b) 58. (b) 59. (d) 60. (b)
61. (c) 62. (c) 63. (c) 64. (b)
65. (a) 66. (d) 67. (a) 68. (b)
69. (c) 70. (c) 71. (c) 72. (c)
73. (c) 74. (c) 75. (a) 76. (a)
77. (d) 78. (b) 79. (b) 80. (d)
@cbseinfinite
ANSWER KEY 277
CHAPTER -6 CIRCULAR MOTION

1. (b) 2. (d) 3. (d) 4. (a) 1. (d) 2. (a) 3. (a) 4. (d)

5. (b) 6. (d) 7. (b) 8. (c) 5. (d)
9. (c) 10. (b) 11. (c) 12. (d)
13. (b) 14. (b) 15. (b) 16. (a)
17. (d) 18. (b) 19. (d) 20. (d)
21. (a) 22. (d) 23. (b) 24. (a)
25. (c) 26. (c) 27. (a) 28. (d)
29. (b) 30. (c) 31. (c) 32. (c)
33. (a) 34. (c) 35. (b) 36. (b)
37. (a) 38. (b) 39. (d) 40. (a)
41. (c) 42. (d) 43. (a) 44. (b)
45. (a) 46. (d) 47. (c) 48. (c)
49. (a), (b), (d) 50. (a), (b), (c), (d)
51. (a), (b), (c) 52. (b), (d)
53. (b) (c) 54. (a), (b), (c)
55. (b), (d) 56. (5)
57. 10 58. (90)
59. 0.2 60. 40
@cbseinfinite
ANSWER KEY 278
Answer Key
CHAPTER -7 CENTRE OF MASS, MOMENTUM AND COLLISION

1. (a) 2. (b) 3. (d) 4. (a) 1. (c) 2. (c) 3. (d) 4. (a)

5. (a) 6. (d) 7. (d) 8. (b) 5. (d) 6. (b) 7. (d) 8. (d)
9. (d) 10. (a) 11. (d) 12. (d) 9. (d) 10. (d) 11. (4) 12. (10)
13. (b) 14. (11/12) 15. (2.4) 16. (c) 13. (1) 14. (23) 15. (10) 16. (150)
17. (d) 18. (b) 19. (b) 20. (c) 17. (51) 18. (120) 19. (3.00) 20. (c)
21. (b) 22. (c) 23. (a) 24. (a) 21. (b) 22. (c) 23. (a) 24. (a)
25. (6) 26. (0) 27. (10) 28. (d) 25. (a) 26. (b) 27. (a) 28. (a)
29. (d) 30. (c) 31. (b) 32. (d) 29. (a) 30. (a) 31. (a) 32. (d)
33. (a) 34. (c) 35. (a) 36. (a) 33. (b) 34. (a) 35. (d) 36. (b)
37. (d) 38. (c) 39. (c) 40. (d) 37. (a) 38. (a) 39. (1.00) 40. (1.00)
41. (30.00) 42. (4.00) 43. (20.00) 44. (b)
41. (d) 42. (c) 43. (d) 44. (b)
45. (b) 46. (c) 47. (c) 48. (d)
45. (c) 46. (a) 47. (c) 48. (a)
49. (a) 50. (a)
49. (c) 50. (c) 51. (c) 52. (5)
53. (1) 54. (d) 55. (d) 56. (a)
57. (b) 58. (b) 59. (a) 60. (b)
61. (a) 62. (b) 63. (c) 64. (a)
65. (b) 66. (a) 67. (c) 68. (d)
69. (b) 70. (b) 71. (c) 72. (a)
73. (d) 74. (20) 75. (1) 76. (4.37)
77. (90) 78. (9) 79. (6) 80. (120)
@cbseinfinite
ANSWER KEY 279
CHAPTER -7 CENTRE OF MASS, MOMENTUM AND COLLISION

1. (b) 2. (a) 3. (c) 4. (a) 1. (c) 2. t0 = 12 second, 15.75 m/s 3. (c)

5. (d) 6. (d) 7. (b) 8. (c)
V2
9. (c) 10. (d) 11. (d) 12. (c) 4. mv2 sin tiˆ  m  v2 cos t  v1  ˆj where  
13. (c) 14. (a) 15. (c) 16. (c) R
17. (d) 18. (d) 19. (d) 20. (a) 5. (10) 6. (a,d) 7. (a) 8. (b)
21. (d) 22. (d) 23. (a) 24. (c) 9. (b) 10. (c) 11. (c) 12. (a)
25. (c) 26. (a) 27. (b) 28. (b) 13. (a) 14. (a,c) 15. (a) 16. (d)
29. (c) 30. (a) 31. (b) 32. (d) 17. (d) 18. (a) 19. (2.09) 20. (a)
33. (AQ; BP; CR,S; DS)
34. (a  q, r; b  p, s; c  r; d  p)
35. (a  p, s; b  r, s; c  r; d  p, q, r)
36. (d) 37. (c) 38. (b) 39. (b)
40. (a) 41. (c) 42. (d) 43. (b)
44. (d) 45. (c) 46. (c) 47. (d)
48. (c) 49. (c) 50. (a) 51. (b)
52. (d) 53. (b) 54. (b) 55. (a)
56. (c) 57. (b) 58. (c) 59. (d)
60. (b) 61. (c) 62. (c) 63. (a)
64. (b) 65. (c) 66. (b) 67. (c)
68. (A  P,R; B  R; C  S; D  Q)
69. (a) 70. (d) 71. (c) 72. (a,c)
73. (a,d) 74. (b,c) 75. (b,c) 76. (c,d)
77. (a,d) 78. (b,c) 79. (a,d) 80. (b,d)
81. (a,c,d) 82. (3) 84. (5) 85. (1)
@cbseinfinite
ANSWER KEY 280
Answer Key
CHAPTER -8 ROTATIONAL MOTION

1. (a) 2. (d) 3. (d) 4. (a) 1. (a) 2. (a) 3. (a) 4. (b)

5. (c) 6. (d) 7. (c) 8. (a) 5. (b) 6. (b) 7. (d) 8. (c)
9. (b) 10. (b) 11. (d) 12. (b) 9. (c) 10. (c) 11. (d) 12. (b)
13. (b) 14. (d) 15. (b) 16. (b) 13. (c) 14. (a) 15. (b) 16. (a)
17. (a) 18. (c) 19. (d) 20. (d) 17. (a) 18. (b) 19. (a) 20. (b)
21. (c) 22. (b) 23. (b) 24. (c) 21. (b) 22. (d) 23. (c) 24. (a)
25. (a) 26. (c) 27. (c) 28. (a) 25. (d) 26. (b) 27. (b) 28. (c)
29. (c) 30.(b) 31. (d) 32. (c) 29. (b) 30.(d) 31. (b) 32. (d)
33. (b) 34.(c) 35.(d) 36. (a) 33. (d) 34.(d) 35.(a) 36. (d)
37. (a) 38.(b) 39.(a) 40. (c) 37. (b) 38.(b) 39.(a) 40. (b)
41. (d) 42.(a) 43.(a) 44. (c) 41. (b) 42.(d) 43.(c) 44. (a)
45. (c) 46.(a) 47.(b) 48. (b) 45. (b) 46.(a) 47.(a) 48. (a)
49. (b) 50.(c) 51. (d) 52. (d) 49. (a) 50.(a) 51. (d) 52. (c)
53. (d) 54.(b) 55.(c) 56. (c) 53. (d) 54.(b) 55.(d) 56. (b)
57. (a) 58.(b) 59.(c) 60. (a) 57. (b) 58.(c) 59.(a) 60. (c)
61. (b) 62.(b) 63.(c) 64. (a) 61. (50) 62.(15) 63.(9) 64. (25)
65. (d) 66.(b) 67. (c) 68. (c) 65. (11) 66.(20) 67. (d) 68. (d)
69. (c) 70.(b) 71. (b) 72. (a) 69. (b) 70.(c) 71. (d) 72. (c)
73. (a) 74.(a) 75. (b) 73. (a) 74.(d) 75. (c) 76. (b)
77. (a) 78.(c) 79. (8) 80. (20)
81. (82) 82.(3.00) 83.(20) 84. (728)
85. (4)
@cbseinfinite
ANSWER KEY 281
EXERCISE - 3:
ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTION
DIRECTION TO USE -
1. (b) 2. (d) 3. (a) 4. (d) 127.(c) 128.(a) 129.(c) 130.(d)

5. (d) 6. (b) 7. (a) 8. (a) 131.(d) 132.(d) 133.(b) 134.(b)
9. (a) 10. (d) 11. (d) 12. (a) 135.(b) 136.(b)
13. (a) 14. (d) 15. (d) 16. (a) 137. (A  Q; B  P; C  R; D  P, Q, S)
17. (b) 18. (c) 19. (d) 20. (a)
21. (c) 22. (c) 23. (c) 24. (a) 138. (A  Q); (B  S);(C  R);(D  P)
25. (c) 26. (c) 27. (a) 28. (b) 139. ( A  P,Q ,R ); (B  P,Q ,R); (C  P,Q ); (D  P,Q ,R)
29. (a) 30.(d) 31. (d) 32. (b)
140.(c) 141.(a) 142.(d) 143.(c)
33. (c) 34.(c) 35.(d) 36. (c) 144.(c) 145.(a) 146.(d) 147.(c)
37. (b) 38.(d) 39.(a) 40. (a) 148.(b) 149.(c) 150.(b)
41. (c) 42.(d) 43.(c) 44. (a)
45. (c) 46.(b) 47.(a) 48. (c)
49. (b) 50.(a) 51. (b) 52. (b)
53. (c) 54.(a) 55.(a) 56. (c)
57. (c) 58.(a) 59.(b) 60. (d)
61. (a) 62.(c) 63.(b) 64. (b)
65. (b) 66.(d) 67. (d) 68. (b)
69. (b) 70. (d) 71. (a) 72. (b)
73. (b) 74.(b) 75. (a) 76. (b)
77. (d) 78. (b) 79. (a) 80. (c)
81. (c) 82. (c) 83.(d) 84. (a)
85. (d) 86.(a) 87. (a) 88. (d)
89. (c) 90.(b) 91. (b) 92. (c)
93. (b) 94.(a) 95.(d) 96. (c)
97. (b) 98.(d) 99.(a)
100.(a,b,c) 101.(b,c) 102.(a,b,c,d) 103. (a,c,d)
104.(a,b,c) 105.(a,b,d) 106.(b,c,d) 107. (a,d)
108.(a,c,d) 109.(a,b) 110.(c,d) 111. (b,d)
112. (a,b,c,d) 113.(b,c,d) 114.(a,b,d)
115.(a,b,c) 116.(333) 117.(1000) 118.(333)
119.(3) 120.(2) 121.(4) 122.(20)
123.(9) 124.(364) 125. (2) 126. (0)
@cbseinfinite
ANSWER KEY 282
EXERCISE - 4:
PREVIOUS YEARS JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS
DIRECTION TO USE -
1. (b) 2. (c) 3. (d) 4. (b)

5. (c) 6. (a) 7. (a) 8. (a)
9. (b) 10. (d) 11. (b) 12. (a)
13. (d) 14. (b) 15. (d) 16. (d)
17. (d) 18. (a) 19. (b) 20. (c,d)
21. (a,b,d) 22. (b,c) 23. (b,d)
24. (a,b,d) 25. (a,c) 26. (b,c,d)
27. (a,c,d) 28. (b,d) 29. (a,b,c)
30. (a,b,d) 31. (9) 32. (4)
33. (8) 34.(4) 35.(2)
36. (6) 37.(7) 38.(0.75)
39. (49) 40.(0.18) 41.(0.16)
42. (d) 43.(c) 44.(a)
45. (b) 46.(d) 47.(d)
48. (c) 49.(d) 50.(c)
@cbseinfinite
ANSWER KEY 283
Answer Key
CHAPTER -9 GRAVITATION

1. (b) 2. (d) 3. (c) 4. (a) 1. (c) 2. (c) 3. (d) 4. (d)

5. (b) 6. (d) 7. (c) 8. (a) 5. (c) 6. (a) 7. (d) 8. (a)
9. (b) 10. (c) 11. (a) 12. (d) 9. (d) 10. (b) 11. (b) 12. (d)
13. (b) 14. (d) 15. (d) 16. (a) 13. (b) 14. (d) 15. (c) 16. (a)
17. (d) 18. (c) 19. (d) 20. (a) 17. (d) 18. (d) 19. (b) 20. (d)
21. (c) 22. (c) 23. (c) 24. (a) 21. (d) 22. (b) 23. (b) 24. (a)
25. (b) 26. (d) 27. (a) 28. (d) 25. (a) 26. (c) 27. (a) 28. (c)
29. (a) 30.(d) 31. (b) 32. (a) 29. (a) 30.(c) 31. (b) 32. (d)
33. (c) 34.(b) 35.(a) 36. (a) 33. (d) 34.(c) 35.(d) 36. (c)
37. (a) 38.(b) 39.(b) 40. (d) 37. (16) 38.(c) 39.(b) 40. (b)
41. (a) 42.(d) 43.(c) 44. (c) 41. (b) 42.(a) 43.(c) 44. (b)
45. (a) 46.(d) 47.(b) 48. (b) 45. (b) 46.(c) 47.(a) 48. (b)
49. (d) 50.(c) 51. (d) 52. (d) 49. (c) 50.(c) 51. (c) 52. (10)
53. (c) 54.(c) 55.(b) 56. (c) 53. (4) 54.(3) 55.(64)
57. (c) 58.(d) 59.(c) 60. (a)
61. (c) 62.(b) 63.(d) 64. (a)
65. (d) 66.(c) 67. (b) 68. (b)
69. (a) 70.(b)
@cbseinfinite
ANSWER KEY 284
EXERCISE - 3:
ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTION
DIRECTION TO USE -
1. (a) 2. (a) 3. (a) 4. (c) 104.(c) 105.(d) 106.(a) 107. (b)

5. (d) 6. (c) 7. (d) 8. (d) 108.(c) 109.(b) 110.(a) 111. (c)
9. (a) 10. (b) 11. (a) 12. (b) 112. (a) 113.(d) 114.(c) 115. (a)
13. (d) 14. (d) 15. (b) 16. (a)
17. (b) 18. (d) 19. (d) 20. (a)
21. (b) 22. (a) 23. (a) 24. (c)
25. (b) 26. (d) 27. (c) 28. (d)
29. (c) 30.(d) 31. (d) 32. (d)
33. (d) 34.(d) 35.(d) 36. (a)
37. (b) 38.(d) 39.(d) 40. (a)
41. (d) 42.(b) 43.(c) 44. (b)
45. (c) 46.(d) 47.(b) 48. (a)
49. (c) 50.(c) 51. (a) 52. (c)
53. (c) 54.(b) 55.(b) 56. (b)
57. (b) 58.(b) 59.(a) 60. (d)
61. (b) 62.(b) 63.(c) 64. (b)
65. (d) 66.(a,b) 67. (b,d)
68. (a,b,c) 69.(a,b,c) 70. (b,c)
71. (a,c,d) 72. (c,d) 73. (a,b)
74. (b,c,d) 75. (a,c,d) 76. (a,c,d)
77. (b,c) 78. (a,c,d) 79. (a,c)
80. (b,c) 81. (b,d) 82. (a,b,c,d)
83. (215) 84.(4.5) 85.(3.1 × 103 m)
86. (250) 87. (50) 88.(4)
89. (8) 90.(c) 91. (d) 92. (a)
93. (c) 94.(a) 95.(a) 96. (d)
97. (d) 98.(b) 99.(a) 100. (a)
101.  A  Q,S; B  P,R,S; C  P, S; D  Q,S 
102.(A–P, R; B – Q, S; C – Q, S; D – P, R)
103.  A  P,Q; B  R; C  P,S; D  R 
@cbseinfinite
ANSWER KEY 285
EXERCISE - 4:
DIRECTION TO USE -
1. (a) 2. (d) 3. (c) 4. (d)

5. (c) 6. (b) 7. (b) 8. (d)
9. (b, d) 10. (99.5R) 11. (3) 12. (7)
13. (2) 14. (9) 15. (a)
@cbseinfinite
MASTER INDEX .
VOLUME 1:
VOLUME 2:
Circular Motion
Rotational Motion
Gravitation
VOLUME 3:
Fluid Mechanics
Waves
VOLUME 4:
Thermal Physics
@cbseinfinite
65 Million+
Monthly
Youtube Views

Users Live Learning
25 43
Parents
Happy
Trust
Students
Vedantu
MILLION+ MILLION+
@cbseinfinite
JEE Advanced 2021

Ankit Shrey

JEE Main 2021
903 students in
Top 10,000
78 869
68 444
Sharma
AIR 158 AIR 179
NEET (UG) 2021
AIR 23
Pavit
Score 710 AIR 92

Anirudh
Online Crash Course
Score 705
Shivank
Online Crash Course
AIR 143 Score 700

1172 NEET
Qualifiers
Annmary
Santhosh
98.4% 98.4% 98.0% 99.8% 98.4% 99.8% 99.6% 99.4%
ICSE Class 10
99.4% 97.4% 97.2% 97.2% 97.2% 99.4% 99.2% 99.2%
@cbseinfinite
CBSE INFINITE

@cbseinfinite
Regular tests &

assignments
VEDANTU
VIP
Parent-teacher
meetings

Our Students
5.2X
HIGHER
Our Students
Our Students
3.8X
6.6X
HIGHER
All India HIGHER

All India All India
37.28% 37.28% 8.25%

9.84% 9.84% 1.25%
CBSE 10 CBSE 12 JEE

SCAN CODE
to know more
about VIP
@cbseinfinite
@cbseinfinite
Published by
www.vedantu.com
Printed by
@cbseinfinite
How to use your
Tatva Practice Book
1
electron.
Electrostatics
Exercise - 2:
2
Solve all types of
0.2g is:
(c) 100s (d) 200s
Answer Key
3
For extra exam
@cbseinfinite
Founder’s Message
Dear Student,
level questions.

Anand Prakash
@cbseinfinite
Credits
Physics Team
Anmol Gupta Md Fazlur Rehman

Nitesh Kumar Santhosh Mani Vishwanath G
Sarib Mohammad
Shetty.
@cbseinfinite
6
TABLE OF CONTENTS
MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF SOLIDS
Theory ................................................................................................................................................ 08
Solved examples ............................................................................................................................... 18
Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 193
FLUID MECHANICS
Theory ................................................................................................................................................ 37
Solved examples ............................................................................................................................... 51
Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 195
@cbseinfinite
7
SIMPLE HARMONIC MOTION
Theory ................................................................................................................................................ 93
Solved examples ............................................................................................................................... 101
Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 198
WAVES
Theory ................................................................................................................................................ 140
Solved examples ............................................................................................................................... 160
Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 200
@cbseinfinite
MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF SOLIDS 8
SCAN CODE
ELASTICITY
@cbseinfinite
Chapter 10
1. ELASTIC BEHAVIOUR OF SOLIDS 1.2 Important Points on Elastic Behaviour of Solids

1.1 Introduction
 An elastic body is one that regains its original shape
 What happens to a rubber band when you stretch it
and size when deforming forces are removed
and let go?
 A plastic body is one that succumbs to deforming forces
 It deforms but regains its original form when you stop
applying a force. (however small) and cannot return to its original shape
and size
 But say, you take an aluminium rod and try to bend it
using your arm strength. You somehow do manage to  Elasticity is the property of a body to regain its original
bend it a little and then stop applying force. Does the shape and size when deforming forces are removed. It
rod regain its original shape? Of course not. exhibits an opposition to change.
1.3 Rigid body
A body whose size and shape cannot be changed however
large the applied force may be known as a rigid body.
1.4 Deforming Force and Restoring Force
 Deforming force is the external force applied to a body

which tends to change the size or shape of the body.
 Under the action of deforming force, a body opposes
any change in its shape and size due to the net effect of
internal (molecular) forces. The resulting force which
opposes the deformation is known as restoring force.
Fig. 10.1
 This difference in the behaviour of the material is based 2. STRESS AND STRAIN
on their elastic and plastic nature.
2.1 Stress
 Looking at the elasticity in the atomic level, solids are
Stress is defined as deforming force per unit area within
made of atoms (or molecules). They are surrounded by
materials that arise from externally applied forces, uneven
other such atoms which are held in a state of equilibrium heating, or permanent deformation and that permits an
by interatomic forces. accurate description and prediction of elastic, plastic, and
 When an external force is applied these particles are fluid behaviour.
displaced, resulting in the deformation of the solid. Stress is given by the following formula:
 When the application of the deforming force is stopped,
interatomic forces drive the atoms to regain their state F

of equilibrium. A
where,  is the stess applied, F is the deforming force
 The concept of elasticity is an idealization as no material
applied and A is the area of cross section of the force
is perfectly elastic. For example, if you use a hair tie to
applied.
groom yourself, you may have noticed that its size tends
to deform after prolonged use. After a point, it may The unit of stress is N/m2
snap as well. This is because the hair tie eventually
loses its elastic nature.
SCAN CODE
ELASTICITY
@cbseinfinite
2.2 Types of Stress 2.4 Types of Strain

Tensile Stress Strain experienced by a body can be of two types depending
on stress application as follows:
 Tensile stress is the force applied per unit area,
increasing the length of body (or area). Tensile Strain
 Objects under tensile stress become thinner and longer.  Tensile strain is the change in length (or area) of a
body due to the application of tensile stress.
Compressive Stress
Compressive Strain
 Compressive stress is the force applied per unit area,
which decreases the length (or area) of a body.  Compressive Strain is the change in length (or area)
of a body due to the application of compressive
 The object under compressive stress becomes thicker strain.
and shorter.
Shear Strain or Tangential Strain
Shear Stress or Tangential Stress
 Tangential strain is Ratio of relative displacement to
 Shear stress, often denoted by T, is the component its original distance in short the applied force
of stress coplanar with a material cross section. It tangentially is itself the tangential stress and the
arises from the shear force, the component of force effect seen is the tangential strain.
vector parallel to the material cross section.
2.5 Hooke’s Law
2.3 Strain
 Strain is the amount of deformation experienced by the If the deforming forces are within a limit (known as elastic
body in the direction of force applied, divided by the limit), the stress created in the body is proportional to the
initial dimensions of the body. resulting strain.
 The following equation gives the relation for i.e. stress  strain.
deformation in terms of the length of a solid:
l stress
 The ratio is known as Modulus of Elasticity.
L strain
where,  is the strain due to stress applied, l is the
change in length and L is the original length of the  According to various types of stresses, we have
material. corresponding modulii of elasticity.
 The strain is a dimensionless quantity as it just defines  Unit of modulus of elasticity is same as the unit of
the relative change in shape. stress
3. MODULI OF ELASTICITY
3.1 Stress, Strain and Various Elastic Moduli
Type of stress Stress Strain Elastic Name of State of

modulus modulus Mater
FL
Longitudinal (Tensile or compressive) Two equal and opposite Elongation or Y Young’s Solid
AL
forces perpendicular to compression modulus
opposite faces (L/L)
= F/A)
SCAN CODE
ELASTICITY
@cbseinfinite
Type of stress Stress Strain Elastic Name of State of

modulus modulus Mater
x FL
Shearing Two equal and opposite tan   G Shear modulus Solid
L A.x
forces parallel to
opposite surfaces
( = F/A)
 PV
Hydraulic/volume Forces perpendicular Volume change B Bulk modulus Solid, liquid
V
everywhere to the (V/V) and gas
surface, force per unit
area (pressure) same
everywhere.
3.2 Poisson’s Ratio

4. ELASTIC POTENTIAL ENERGY
When a rod or bar is subjected to a longitudinal stress,
then not only its length changes but its transverse
When an elastic body is deformed, work is done by the
dimensions also change and thus giving rise to transverse
applied force. This work is stored as elastic potential energy
or lateral strain in additional to longitudinal strain.
and is released when the body returns back to its original
shape or size.
We know elastic energy stored per unit volume
Fig. 10.2 1
= (stress) (strain)
2
b
Transverse or lateral strain is
b
1 2
= (modulus of elasticity) (strain)
The ratio of transverse to longitudinal strain is termed as 2
Poisson’s ratio, .
 stress 
2
b / b 1
 =
 /  2 modulus of elasticity
transverse strain
Since,    In case of a longitudinal stress (compressive or tensile)
longitudinal strain
Negative sign is introduced to make  a positive quantity.
Energy stored 1  Δ 
2
Since, an increase in length always results in a decrease in = Y 
transverse dimensions and vice-versa. volume 2   
Note:
1 YA 1
.  Δ  = F Δ
2
(1)  has no units, as its a ratio of similar quantities Total energy =
2  2
(2) 0    0.5
SCAN CODE
ELASTICITY
@cbseinfinite
5. STRESS-STRAIN GRAPH (d) If the stress is increased further,
If by gradually increasing the load on a vertically suspended  A very small increase in stress produces a very large
metal wire, a graph is plotted between stress (or load) and increase in strain (region AB).
longitudinal strain (or elongation) we get the curve as shown
 After reaching point B, the strain increases even if the
in figure. From this curve it is clear that :
wire is unloaded and ruptures at C.
 In the region BC the wire literally flows. The maximum

stress corresponding to B after which the wire begins to
flow and breaks is called breaking or tensile strength.
 The region EABC represents the plastic behaviour of

the material of wire.
 Stress-strain curve for different materials.

Elastic Hysteresis :
The strain persists even when the stress is removed. This
lagging behind of strain is called elastic hysteresis. This
Fig. 10.3 is the reason why the values of strain for same stress are
(a) When the strain is small (< 2%) (i.e., in region OP) different while increasing the load and while decreasing the
load.
 Stress is proportional to strain.
 Hooke’s law is obeyed.
 The point P is called limit of proportionality.
 Slope of line OP gives the Young’s modulus of the
material of the wire. Y = tan .
Note:
Elastic limit. The maximum value of the stress within
which the body regains its original shape and size.
Fig. 10.4
(b) If the strain is increased a little bit (i.e., in the region PE)
Brittle material
 The stress is not proportional to strain.
The plastic region between E and C is small for brittle material
 The wire still regains its original length after the removal
and it will break soon after the elastic limit is crossed.
of stretching force.
 Point E is known as elastic limit or yield–point.
 The region OPE represents the elastic behaviour of the
material of wire.
 Yield point is the stress beyond which the material
becomes plastic.
(c) If the wire is stretched beyond the elastic limit E (i.e.,
between EA)
 The strain increases much more rapidly
 If the stretching force is removed the wire does not come
back to its natural length. Some permanent increase in length
takes place.
Fig. 10.5
SCAN CODE
ELASTICITY
@cbseinfinite
Ductile material Aim

The material of the wire have a good plastic range and such To determine Young’s modulus of elasticity of the material
materials can be easily changed into different shapes and of a given wire.
can be drawn into thin wires. Materials Required
 Searle’s apparatus
 Two long steel wires of same length and diameter
 A metre scale
 A screw gauge
 Eight 0.5 kg slotted weights
 1 kg hanger
Theory
The normal stress for a wire with length L and radius r is
loaded with weight Mg where  is the increase in length,
then normal stress is given as:
Mg
Normal Stess =
Fig. 10.6 r 2
Elastomers
1
Stress strain curve is not a straight line within the elastic Longitudinal Strain =
L
limit for elastomers and strain produced is much larger than
Hence, Young’s Modulus =
the stress applied. Such materials have no plastic range and
the breaking point lies very close to elastic limit. eg. rubber.
Mg
Normal Stress MgL
Y  r  Y  2
2
Longitudinal Strain  r 
L
Y can be calculated as the values of L and r are known and

l is found by known Mg value.
Fig. 10.7
6. MISCELLANEOUS CASE IN ELASTICITY

6.1 Determination of Young’s modulus by Searle’s
method
Searle’s apparatus is used for the measurement of Young’s
modulus. It consists of two equal length wires that are
attached to a rigid support. To understand how Searle’s
apparatus is used to determine Young’s modulus of
elasticity of the material of a given wire, read the below
experiment.
Fig. 10.8
SCAN CODE
ELASTICITY
@cbseinfinite
6.2 Rods as springs and their combination 6.3 Stress developed due to rotation of objects
Analogy of Rod as a spring
stress
Y
strain
AY
or F  

Fig. 10.12
Consider a small element of length dx at a distance x from
the axis of rotation
m
Mass of the element, dm  dx  dx
L
Fig. 10.9
m
AY where  
= constant, depends on type of material and geometry L

The centripetal force acting on the element is
of rod. F  k
AY T dx 2 2
where k  dl    L – x 2  dx [Using (i)]

= equivalent spring constant. YA 2YA 
So the total elongation of the whole rod is
1 2
l  L – x 2  dx
0 2YA  2
L
2  2 x3  1 2 L3 1 m2 L2
  L x –   
2YA  3  0 3 YA 3 YA
6.4 Stress in accelerated linear objects
Under the action of the external force, the rod acceleration
with a = F/m. The magnitude of stress decreases as one
Fig. 10.10 moves away from the point of application of the force.
for the system of rods shown in figure (a), the replaced
Therefore, the strain also decreases as one moves towards
spring system is shown in figure (b) two spring in series.
the free end.
Figure (c) represents equivalent spring system. Figure (d)
d determine the total elongation of the rod, let us consider
represents another combination of rods and their replaced
a small element of length dx at a distance x fro the free end
spring system.
of the rod. The magnitude of force at this section is
F  Fx L . Therefore, the stress at this section is
F F x
  
A A L
and elongation d produced in this differential element is
F
Fig. 10.11 d  xdx
YAL
SCAN CODE
ELASTICITY
@cbseinfinite
Thus, total elongation is  A spring will be better one, if a large restoring force is
set up in it on being deformed, which in turn depends
l
F l F  x2  upon the elasticity of the material of the spring. Since
YAL 0
 xdx    the Young’s modulus of elasticity of steel is more than
YAL  2  0
that of copper, hence steel is preferred in making the
springs.
1 Fl
or  
2 YA  A bridge during its use undergoes alternating stresses
and strains for a large number of times each day,
7. INTERESTING POINTS TO KNOW depending upon the movement of vehicles on it. When
a bridge is used for long time, it loses its elastic strength.
 Consider two rods of rubber and steel each of length l Therefore, the amount of strain in the bridge for a given
and area of cross section a. Let Yr, Ys be the Young’s stress will become large and ultimately, the bridge may
modulus of elasticity of rubber and steel respectively. collapse. That is why the bridges are declared unsafe
When a stretching force F is applied on each rod, let lr, after long use.
ls be the extension in the rubber rod and steel rod
respectivley; where lr > ls  The work done in stretching the wire is stored in it in the
form of the elastic potential energy.
F F 
Then, Yr  and Ys 
a  r a  s
Ys  r
 Y   > 1 i.e. Ys > Yr
r s
Therefore steel is more elastic the rubber.
SCAN CODE
ELASTICITY
@cbseinfinite
SUMMARY
1. ELASTIC BEHAVIOUR OF SOLIDS 3. MODULI OF ELASTICITY

The concept of elasticity is an idealization as no material is Young’s Modulus
perfectly elastic. For example, if you use a hair tie to groom FL
yourself, you may have noticed that its size tends to deform Y
AL
after prolonged use. After a point, it may snap as well. This Shear Modulus
is because the hair tie eventually loses its elastic nature.
FL
G
A.x
2. STRESS AND STRAIN Bulk Modulus
 PV
Stress B
V
Stress is defined as deforming force per unit area within
materials that arise from externally applied forces, uneven Poisson’s Ratio
heating, or permanent deformation and that permits an When a rod or bar is subjected to a longitudinal stress,
accurate description and prediction of elastic, plastic, and then not only its length changes but its transverse
fluid behaviour.
dimensions also change and thus giving rise to transverse
Stress is given by the following formula: or lateral strain in additional to longitudinal strain.
F

A
where,  is the stess applied, F is the deforming force
applied and A is the area of cross section of the force
applied.
Strain b
Transverse or lateral strain is
Strain is the amount of deformation experienced by the body b
in the direction of force applied, divided by the initial The ratio of transverse to longitudinal strain is termed as
dimensions of the body.
Poisson’s ratio, .
The following equation gives the relation for deformation
b / b
in terms of the length of a solid: 
l  / 

L transverse strain
where,  is the strain due to stress applied, l is the change Since, 
longitrdinal strain
in length and L is the original length of the material.
Hooke’s Law
4. ELASTIC POTENTIAL ENERGY
If the deforming forces are within a limit (known as elastic
limit), the stress created in the body is proportional to the When an elastic body is deformed, work is done by the
resulting strain. applied force. This work is stored as elastic potential energy
i.e. stress  strain. and is released when the body returns back to its original
shape or size.
stress
The ratio is known as Modulus of Elasticity. We know elastic energy stored per unit volume
strain
According to various types of stresses, we have 1

= (stress) (strain)
corresponding modulii of elasticity. 2
Unit of modulus of elasticity is same as the unit of stress
SCAN CODE
ELASTICITY
@cbseinfinite
1 2 6. MISCELLANEOUS CASE IN ELASTICITY

= (modulus of elasticity) (strain)
2
 Determination of Young’s modulus by Searle’s method
 stress 
2
1
=  Rods as springs and their combination
2 modulus of elasticity
 Stress developed due to rotation of objects
In case of a longitudinal stress (compressive or tensile)  Stress in accelerated linear objects
Energy stored 1  Δ 
2
= Y 
volume 2   
5. STRESS-STRAIN GRAPH
If by gradually increasing the load on a vertically suspended
metal wire, a graph is plotted between stress (or load) and
longitudinal strain (or elongation) we get the curve as shown
in figure. From this curve it is clear that :
SCAN CODE
ELASTICITY
@cbseinfinite
SOLVED EXAMPLES
A metallic wire is stretched by suspending weight to it. If Four identical cylindrical columns of steel support a big
 is the longitudinal strain and Y is its Young’s modulus structure of mass 50,000 kg. The inner and outer radii of
of elasticity, show that the elastic potential energy per each column are 30 cm and 40 cm respectively. Assume
2
unit volume is given by Y  /2. the load distribution to be uniform, calculate the
compressional strain of each column. The Young’s
Sol. Stress = Young’s modulus × strain = Y ×  11
modulus of steel is 2.0 × 10 Pa.
Elastic potential energy per unit volume is
Sol. Here, M = 50,000 kg; r1 = 0.30 m and r2 = 0.40 m;
1 11
u = × stress × strain Y = 2.0 × 10 Pa.
2
Area of cross section of each column;
1 1
 
2
= × Y  ×  = Y . A   r22  r12    0.4    0.3    0.07 m 2
2 2
2 2  
Example - 2 Whole weight of the structure = Mg = 50000 × 9.8 N
A structural steel rod has a radius of 10 mm and a length of This weight is equally shared by four columns,
1m. A 100 kN force stretches it along its length. Calculate
(a) the stress (b) elongation, and (c) percentage strain on 50000  9.8
 Compressional force on one column, F  N
the rod. Given that the Young’s modulus of elasticity of 4
2
the structural steel is 2.0  10 Nm .
11
F/A
–3 –2
Now, Y  compressional strain
Sol. Here; r = 10 mm = 10 × 10 m = 10 m; l = 1 m;
3 5
F = 100 kN = 100 × 10 N = 10 N; F 50000  9.8 / 4
11
Y = 2.0 × 10 N/m
2  Compressional strain = AY     0.07   2.0  1011
–7
= 2.785 × 10
F F 10 5
(a) Stress =  
A r  
2 2
 22 / 7   10 2 Example - 4
Find the greatest length of copper wire, that can hang
8 –2 7 2
= 3.18 × 10 Nm without breaking. Breaking stress = 7.2 × 10 N/m . Density
2
(b) The elongation, of copper 7.2 g/cc. g = 10 m/s .
7 2
Sol. Given, breaking stress, S = 7.2 × 10 N/m ; Density of wire, 
 
F / A 

 3.18 10  1
8
3
= 7.2 g/cc = 7.2 × 10 kg/m .
3
Y 2  1011 Let l be the greatest length of wire that can hang without
–3
= 1.59 × 10 m = 1.59 mm breaking and a be the area of cross section of the wire.
Weight of wire = (a l)  g.
 1.59  10 3
The strain =   1.59  10 3
 1 Breaking stress, S=
weight of wire a g
=
area of cross section a
(c) Percentage strain in rod
–3
= 1.59 × 10 × 100 S 7.2 107
or     1000 m
= 0.159%  0.16%  g 7.2  103  10
@cbseinfinite
Example - 5
Also, l1 + l2, = 0.70 mm ...(i)
Two wires A and B of length l, radius r and length 2l,
radius 2r having same Young’s modulus Y are hung with a Since both the wires have same tension and same area of
weight mg, as shown in figure. What is the net elongation cross section, hence have the same tensile stress S.
in the two wires ? Thus, S = Y × longitudinal strain
F  1  2
 a  Y1    Y2  
1 2
1 1 Y2 2.2 2.0  1011

or      2.5
 2  2 Y1 1.1 1.1 1011
or l1 = 2.5 l2.
From (i) 2.5 l2 + l2 = 0.70
orl2 = 0.2 mm
–4
 l1 = 0.5 mm = 5 × 10 m
 1 
Thus, F  aY1  r12 Y1 1
1 1
22 5 104
 
2
Sol. Here, the pulling force F (= mg) is same on both the wires.   1.5 103 1.1 1011 
Let l1, l2 be the elongations in the two wires. 7 2.2
2 2
= 1.77 × 10  1.8 × 10 N.
F F
As, Y  2 or  
 r  Y  r2 Example - 7
3
Find the change in volume which 1m of water will undergo
mg
For wire A, 1  when taken from the surface, to the bottom of sea 1 km
Y  r2 deep. Given the elasticity of water is 20,000 atmosphere. 1
5 –2
atmosphere = 1.013 × 10 N m .
mg  2   mg
Fow wire B,  2   3 3 3 6 –2
Y   2r  2 Y  r2 Sol. Here, V = 1 m ; p = h  g = 10 × 10 × 9.8 = 9.8 × 10 Nm
2
4 5 –2 9
B = 20,000 atm. = 2 × 10 × 1.013 × 10 × N m = 2.026 × 10
mg 1 mg Nm
–2
Total elongation = 1   2  

Y  r2 2 Y  r2
As, B 
pV
or V 
pV

9.8 106  1  
3 mg V B 2.026  109
 .
2 Y  r2 –3 3
= 4.83 × 10 m
A copper wire of length 2.2 m and a steel wire of length A solid ball 3cm in diameter is submerged in a lake to a
1.6 m, both of diameter 3.0 mm are connected end to end. 3 –2
depth, where the pressure is 10 kg f m . Find the change
When stretched by a load, the net elongation is found to in volume of the ball, if bulk modulus of the material of the
be 0.70 mm. Obtain the load applied. Young’s modulus of 7 2
ball is 10 dyne/cm .
11 –2
copper is 1.1 × 10 N m and Young’s modulus of steel is
11 –2 –2 –2
2.0 × 10 Nm . Sol. Here, 2 r = 3 cm = 3 × 10 m or r = (3/2) × 10 m
3 2 3 2 7 2 6 2
–3 p = 10 kg f/m = 10 × 9.8 N/m , B = 10 dyne/cm = 10 N/m
Sol. For copper wire, l1 = 2.2 m; r1 = 1.5 mm = 1.5 × 10 m;
3
Y1 = 1.1 × 10 Nm
11 –2 4 3 4 22  3 
Volume of the ball, V   r     10 2  m 3
–3 3 3 7 2 
For steel wire, l2 = 1.6 m; r2 = 1.5 mm = 1.5 × 10 m,
11 2
Y2 = 2.0 × 10 N/m .
@cbseinfinite
Example - 11
pV
Now, B  Two parallel and opposite forces, each 500kgf are applied
V
tangentially to the upper and lower faces of a cubical metal
4 22  3 
3
block 25cm on a side. Find the angle of shear and the
   102   103  9.8
Vp 3 7  2  displacement of the upper surface relative to the lower
or V   6
10
surface. The shear modulus of the metal is 8 × 10 Nm ;
–2
B 10 –2
–6 3 3 g = 10ms .
= 0.1386 × 10 m = 0.1386 cm
Example - 9 Sol. Here F = 500 kgf = 500 × 10N; L = 25 × 10 m;
–2
The average depth of Indian ocean is about 3000m. –2 2

a = (25 × 10 ) = 6.25 × 10 m ;
–2 2
Calculate the fractional compression, V/V, of water at the 10 –2

G = 8 × 10 Nm
bottom of the ocean, given that the bulk modulus of water
9 –2
is 2.2 × 10 Nm . Take g = 10 ms .
–2
Angle of shear or shear strain,
9 2
Sol. Here, h = 3000 m; B = 2.2 × 10 N/m , F 500  10
  –6
= 10 rad
3
p = h  g = 3000 × 10 × 10 = 3 × 10 N m
7 –3 aG 
6.25  102  8 1010   
V p 3 107 L –2 –6
 Compessional strain,    1.36 102 . Now,   or L = L = (25 × 10 ) × 10 rad
V B 2.2  109 L
–8
Example - 10 = 25 × 10 rad.
Example - 12
A square lead slab of side 50cm and thickness 10.0cm is
subjected to a shearing force (on its narrow face) of When load on the wire is increased slowly from 2kg to
4
magnitude 9.0 × 10 N. The lower edge is riveted to the 4kg, the elongation increases from 0.5mm to 0.9mm. If
2
floor as shown in figure. How much is the upper edge g = 10 m/s , find the work done during the extention of the
9
displaced, if the shear modulus of lead is 5.6 × 10 Pa ? wire.
Sol. Here, F1 = 2kgf = 2 × 10N; F2 = 4kgf = 4 × 10N

–3 –3
l1 = 0.5mm = 0.5 × 10 m; l2 = 0.9mm = 0.9 × 10 m
1 1
Work done, W  F2   2  F1  1
2 2
1
Sol. Here, L = 50cm = 50 × 10 m;
–2  –3 –3
[4 × 10 × 0.9 × 10 –2 × 10 × 0.5 × 10 ]
2
9 4
G = 5.6 × 10 Pa, F = 9.0 × 10 N. –3
= 13 × 10 J.
Area of the face on which force is applied, Example - 13
2 2 2
a = 50 × 10 = 500 cm = 0.05 m . A 45kg boy whose leg bones are 5cm in area and 50 cm
long falls through a height of 2m without breaking his leg
If L is the displacement of the upper edge of the slab due 8 –2
bones. If the bones can stand a stress of 0.9 × 10 Nm ,
to tangential force F applied, then
calculate the Young’s modulus for the material of the bone.
–2
Use, g = 10ms .
F/a FL 9  104  50  10 2
G or L  
L / L Ga 5.6  109  0.05 Sol. Here, m = 45kg; h = 2m; L = 0.50m; A = 5 × 10 m
–4 2
–14 Loss in gravitational energy = gain in elastic energy in both

= 1.6 × 10 m
leg bones.
@cbseinfinite
1  Example - 15
So, mgh  2    stress  strain  volume 
2  How does young’s modulus change with the rise of
–4 –4 3 temperarure ?
Here, volume = AL = 5 × 10 × 0.50 = 2.5 × 10 m
F/A 1
Sol. As Y  Y 
1 4   /  
 45 × 10 × 2 = 2 ×   0.9 10  strain  2.5  10 
8
2  So, as temperature increase, length also increase Hence,

Young’s modulus decreases with the rise in temperature.
45  10  2
or strain =  0.04
0.9  2.5  10  4 Example - 16
Distinguish between elasticity and plasticity of materials.
stress 0.9  108
 Y 
strain 0.04 Sol.
= 2.25 × 10 N m
9 –2 Elasticity Plasticity
1. It is the property of the 1. It is the property of the
Example - 14
body due to which the body due to which it
A wire of radius r stretched without tension along a straight
line is tightly fixed at A and B. Figure. What is the tension body regains its original does not regain to its
in the wire when it is pulled in the shape ACB ? Assume configuration (length, original configuration;
Young’s modulus of material of the wire to by Y.
volume or shape) when when the deforming
the deforming forces are force is removed from
removed. it.
2. The bodies, which has 2. The body, which has
this property, are called this property is called
Sol. Let 2 l be the original length of wire AB, i.e., L = 2l. When
wire is pulled into shape ACB, the increase in length, elastic bodies, e.g., Iron, plastic body, e.g., clay
L = (AC + CB) – AB = 2 (l + d ) – 2l.
2 2 1/2
copper, gold etc. etc.
 
1/ 2
L 2   d  2
2 2
Longitudinal strain   Example - 17

L 2 –5 2
A steel wire of length 4.7 m and cross-section 3.0 × 10 m
2l[(1  d 2 / l 2 )1 / 2  1] stretches by the same amount as a copper wire of length
= –5 2
3.5 m and cross-section 4.0 × 10 m under a given load.
2l
What is the ratio of the Young’s modulus of steel to that
 1 d2  d2 of copper ?
 1   1  2
 2   2
2
–5 2
Sol. Given steel : LS = 4.7 m, AS = 3.0 × 10 m , LC = 3.5 m,
–5 2
A = 4.0 × 10 m
tension F
Longitudinal stress   2 Applied force F and extension L are same for both wires.
area r
Young’s modulus of steel,
longitudinal stress FLS F  4.7
 Young’s Modulus, Y  YS  
longitudinalstrain AS L 3.0  105  L
Young’s modulus for copper

F / r 2
 2
d / 2 2 FL C F  3.5
YC  
2 2 2 A C L 4.0  10 5  L
 Tension in the wire, F = Y × r × d /2l .
@cbseinfinite
Hence, Example - 20
YS F  4.7 4 105  L What is the density of ocean water at a depth, where the
  = 1.79
5
YC 3.0  10  L F  3.5 pressure is 80.0 atm, given that its density at the surface is
3 –3 –11
1.03 × 10 kg m ? Compressibility of water = 45.8 × 10
Example - 18 –1 5
Pa . Given, 1 atm = 1.013 × 10 Pa.
9 –2
The breaking stress for a metal is 7.8 × 10 Nm . Calculate –11 –1
the maximum length of the wire made of this metal which Sol. Given, compressibility of water = 1/K = 45.8 × 10 Pa ,
13 5
may be suspended without breaking. The density of the p = 80.0 atm = 80.0 × 1.0 × 10 Pa, density of water at the
3 –3
3 –3
metal = 7.8 × 10 kg m . Take g = 10 ms .
–2 surface,  = 1.03 × 10 kg m .
Suppose that a volume V of the ocean water is taken to a
9 –2
Sol. Given Breaking stress = 7.8 × 10 N m , L = ?, depth where the pressure is 80.0 atm. Let V be the decrease
3 –3
in volume.
 = 7.8 × 10 kgm .
When the wire is suspended vertically, it tends to break pV
Then K 
under its own weight. Let its length be L and cross-sectional V
area be A.
pV –11
Weight of wire = mg = volume × density × g = ALg or V   80  1.013  105  V × 45.8 × 10
K
weight ALg
Stress =   Lg = 0.0037 V
area A
If V’ is volume of the water, when taken to the depth, then
For the wire not to break, this must be equal to the breaking
stress, therefore, we have V’ = V – V = V – 0.0037 V
= 0.9963 V
9
Lg  7.8  10 9
or L  7.8  10  105 m Let ’ be the density of water at the depth, where the pressure
7.8  10  10
3
is 80.0 atm. Since the mass of water remains same, therefore,
Example - 19 we have
A rigid bar of mass 15 kg is supported symmetrically, by V’ ’ = V
three wires each 2.0 m long. Those at each end are of or 0.9963 V × ’ = V × 1.03 × 10
3
copper and the middle one is of iron. Determine the ratios 3 –3

or ’ = 1.034 × 10 kg m
of their diameters if each is to have the same tension.
Sol. Given M = 15 kg, L = 2.0 m each.
Let T be the tension in each wire. As the bar is supported
symmetrically by the three wires, the increases in length L
of each wire should be same.
The expression for Young’s modulus is
FL TL
Y 
A L A L
Now, for all wires, L, L, and T is same, therefore, we have
1 D 2 1
A or 
Y 4 Y
Hence,
D Cu YFe 1.9  1011

   1.3
D Fe YCu 1.1 1011
@cbseinfinite

Elastic behaviour of Solids & Stress and Strain 8. A wire of cross section A is stretched horizontally between
1. The force constant of a wire does not depend on two clamps located 2 metres apart. A weight W kg is
(a) Nature of the material (b) Radius of the wire Suspended from the mid-point of the wire. If the mid-point
sags vertically through a distance x < 1 the strain produced
(c) Length of the wire (d) none of these
is:
2. The ratio of radii of two wires of same material is 2 : 1.
Stretched by same force, then the ratio of stress is 2x 2 x2
(a) (b)
2 2
(a) 2 : 1 (b) 1 : 2
(c) 1 : 4 (d) 4 : 1 x2
(c) (d) None of these
3. The length of a wire is increased by 1 mm on the application 2 2
of a given load. In a wire of the same material, but of length 9. A wire elongates by l mm when a load w is hung from it. If
and radius twice that of the first, on application of the same the wire goes over a pulley and two weights w each are
load, extension is hung at the two ends, the elongation of the wire will be
(a) 0.25 mm (b) 0.5 mm (in mm)
(c) 2 mm (d) 4 mm (a) l (b) 2 l
4. If equal and opposite forces applied to a body tend to (c) zero (d) l/2
elongate it, the stress so produced is called
10. A wire can sustain the weight of 20 kg before breaking. If
(a) Tensile stress (b) Compressive stress the wire is cut into two equal parts, each part can sustain a
(c) Tangential stress (d) Working stress weight of
5. The longitudinal extension of any elastic material is very (a) 10 kg (b) 20 kg
small. In order to have an appreciable change, the material
(c) 40 kg (d) 35 kg
must be in the form of
(a) Long thick wire (b) Short thick wire 11. Two wires of the same material and same mass are stretched
by the same force. Their lengths are in the ratio 2 : 3. Their
(c) Long thin wire (d) Short thin wire
elongations are in the ratio
6. The reason for the change in shape of a regular body is
(a) 3 : 2 (b) 2 : 3
(a) Volume stress (b) Shearing strain
(c) 4 : 9 (d) 9 : 4
(c) Longitudinal strain (d) Metallic strain
12. A rubber ball is taken to a depth of 200 m in a pool. Its
7. One end of a uniform rod of mass m1 and cross-sectional
volume decreases by 0.1%. If the density of the water
area A is hung from a ceiling. The other end of the bar is 3 3 2
is 1 × 10 kg/m and g = 10 m/s , then the volume elasticity
supporting mass m2. The stress at the midpoint is 2
(Bulk modulus) in N/m will be
8 8
(a) 10 (b) 2 × 10
9 9
(c) 10 (d) 2 × 10
–5
13. The compressibility of water is 4 × 10 per unit
atmospheric pressure. The decrease in volume of 100 cubic
centimetre of water under a pressure of 100 atmosphere
will be
–5
(a) 0.4 cc (b) 4 × 10 cc
g m 2  2m1  g m 2  m1  (c) 0.025 cc (d) 0.004 cc
(a) (b)
2A 2A
14. A steel wire of diameter 2 mm has a breaking strength of 4
5
g  m 2  m1  × 10 N. The breaking of similar steel wire of diameter 1
g 2m 2  m1  5
(c) (d) mm will be n × 10 N; where n is
2A 3A
@cbseinfinite
9 –2
15. The breaking stress for a metal is 7.8 × 10 Nm . The 20. Two wires are made of the same material and have the
–3 –1
density of the metal is 7800 kg m . If g = 10 N kg , Find same volume. However, wire 1 has cross-sectional area A
the maximum length of the wire (in km) made of this metal and wire-2 has cross-sectional area 3A. If the length of
which may be suspended without breaking. wire-1 increases by x on applying force 1 N, how much
16. To break a wire of one-meter length, minimum weight of force (in N) is needed to stretch wire 2 by the same amount?
40 kg wt is required. Then the wire of same material of 21. A cylindrical eraser which is attached at the back of a light
double radius and 6 m length will require a breaking weight pencil, of negligible mass is dragged across a paper at a
(in kg-wt) constant velocity to the right by its pencil. The coefficient
of kinetic friction between eraser and paper is 0.6. The
17. Two opposite forces F1  120 N and F2  80 N on an
pencil pushes down with 5N. The height of the eraser is 2
2
elastic plank of modulus of elasticity Y  2  1011 N m 2 cm and its circular area is 4 cm . its top surface is displaced
horizontally 0.6 mm relative to the bottom. If the shear
and length l  1 placed over a smooth horizontal surface.
modulus of the eraser material is x  105 Pa, Find value of
The cross-sectional area of the plank is S  0.5m 2 . The
2x.
change in length of the plank is n  10 –9 m. Find the value
Moduli of Elasticity
of n. 10 2
22. Young’s modulus of brass and steel are 10 × 10 N/m
and
11 2
2 × 10 N/m , respectively. A brass wire and a steel wire
of the same length are extended by 1 mm under the same
force. The radii of the brass and steel wires are RB and RS
respectively. Then
R
(a) RS = 2 RB (b) R S  2B
18. A light rod of length 2m is suspended from the ceiling
R
horizontally by means of two vertical wires of equal (c) RS = 4RB (d) R S  4B
lengths. A weight W is hung from the light rod as shown.
23. Two blocks of masses 1 kg and 2 kg are connected by a
The rod is hung by means of a steel wire of cross-sectional
metal wire going over a smooth pulley as shown. The
area A1  0.1cm 2 and brass wire of cross-sectional area
40
breaking stress of the metal is 3  106 N / m2 . If g = 10 m/
A 2  0.2 cm . To have equal stress in both wires, ratio of
2
2
s , then what should be the minimum radius of the wire
tension T1 T2 =
used if it is not to break?
(a) 0.5 mm (b) 1 mm

19. Two wires are made of the same material and have the (c) 1.5 mm (d) 2 mm
same volume. However, wire 1 has cross-sectional area A 24. Two wires are made of the same material and have the
and wire 2 has cross-sectional area 3A. If the length of same volume. However, wire 1 has cross-sectional area A
wire 1 increases by x on applying force F, the force and wire-2 has cross sectional areal 3A. If the length of
needed to stretch wire 2 by equal amount (or elongation) wire 1 increases by x on aplying force F, how much force
is nF, where n is: is needed to stretch wire 2 by the same amount ?
(a) F (d) 4F
(c) 6F (d) 9F
@cbseinfinite
25. One end of a horizontal thick copper wire of length 2L

 4MLg 
and radius 2R is welded to an end of another horizontal 29. In the determination of Young’s modulus  Y  
 d 2 
thin copper wire of length L and radius R. When the
arrangement is stretched by applying forces at two ends, by using Searle’s method, a wire of length L = 2 m and
diameter d = 0.5 mm is used. For a load M = 2.5 kg, an
the ratio of the elongation in the thin wire to that in the
thick wire is
Quantities d and l are measured using a screw gauge and a
(a) 0.25 (b) 0.50 micrometer, repectively. They have the same pitch of 0.5
(c) 2.00 (d) 4.00 mm. The number of divisions on their circular scale is 100.
6 2
The contributions to the maximum probable error of the Y
26. A cylindrical tree has a breaking stress of 10 N/m . The measurement is
maximum possible height of the tree is 5 m. the density of (a) due to the errors in the measurements of d and l are
2
material of the tree is (take g = 10 m/s ) the same
3 3 4 3
(a) 10 kg/m (b) 10 kg/m (b) due to the error in the measurement of d is twice that
4 3 3 due to the error in the measurement of l.
(c) 2 × 10 kg/m (d) 1 kg/m
(c) due to the error in the measurement of l is twice that
27. You are given three wires A, B and C of the same length due to the error in the measurement of d.
and cross section. They are each stretched by applying the (d) due to the error in the measurement of d is four times
same force to the ends. The wire A is stretched least and that due to the error in the measurement of l.
comes back to its original length when the stretching force So, error in measurment of y is due to errors in t and 
is removed. The wire B is stretched more than A and also 30. A 0.05 m cube has its upper face displaced by 0.2 cm by a
comes back to its original length when the stretching force tangential force of 8 N. Calculate the modulus of rigidity
is removed. The wire C is stretched most and remains 4 –2
(in 10 Nm ) of the material of the cube.
stretched even when stretching force is removed. The 31.
3
A hydraulic press contains 0.25 m (250 L) of oil. Find the
greatest Young’s modulus of elasticity is possessed by the decrease in volume of he oil ( in %) when it is subjected to
material of wire
a pressure increase p  1.6  107 Pa . The bulk modulus
(a) A
of the oil is B  5.0  109 Pa :
(b) B
32. A solid sphere of radius R made of material of bulk
(c) C modulus B is surrounded by a liquid in a cylindrical
container. A massless piston of area A (the area of container
(d) All have the same elasticity
is also A) floats on he surface of the liquid. When a mass
28. The face EFGH of the cube shown in the figure is displaced M is placed on the piston to compress the liquid, find the
5
2 mm parallel to itself when forces of 5 × 10 N each are fractional change in radius of the sphere.
applied on the lower and upper faces. The lower face is
Mg
fixed. The strain produced in the cube is (Given  0.3 )
AB
Elastic Potential Energy
33. If the potential energy of a spring is V on stretching it by 2
cm, then its potential energy when it is stretched by 10
cm will be
(a) V/25 (b) 5V
(c) V/5 (d) 25V
34. Two wires of the same material and length but diameters
in the ratio 1 : 2 are stretched by the same force. The
(a) 2 (b) 0.5 potential energy per unit volume for the two wires when
8
stretched will be in the ratio
(c) 0.05 (d) 1.2 × 10 (a) 16 : 1 (b) 4 : 1
(c) 2 : 1 (d) 1 : 1
@cbseinfinite
35. If S is stress and Y is Young’s modulus of material of a 42. When the thin smooth wire of cross-sectional area A and
wire, the energy stored in the wire per unit volume is Young’s modulus Y, density  and length l is pulled with
S2 2 a 2 l 3 A
(a) 2 S Y
2
(b) an acceleration a the elastic energy stored is .
2Y xY
Find x
2Y S
(c) 2 (d) 2 Y
S
36. A wire fixed at the upper end stretches by length  by

applying a force F. The work done in stretching is : 43. A rubber cord has a cross-sectional area 1 mm2 and total
unstretched length 10.0 cm. It is stretched to 12.0 cm and
F then released to project a missile of mass 5.0 g. Taking
(a) (b) F
2 Young’s modulus Y for rubber as 5.0 × 108 N/m2.
Calculate the velocity (in m/s) of projection.
F
(c) 2F (d) Stress-Strain Graph
2
37. What amount of work is done in increasing the length of a 44. The stress versus strain graphs for wires of two materials
wire through unity? A and B are as shown in the figure. If YA and YB are the
Young’s modulii of the materials, then
YL YL2
(a) 2A (b)
2A
YA YL
(c) 2L (d) A
38. When the load on a wire is slowly increased from 3 to 5

kg wt, the elongation increases from 0.61 to 1.02 mm. The
work done during the extension of wire is
(a) 0.16 J (b) 0.016 J
(c) 1.6 J (d) 16 J (a) YB = 2YA (b) YA = YB
39. Two wires of same diameter of the same material having (c) YB = 3YA (d) YA = 3YB
the length  and 2. If the force F is applied on each, the
ratio of the work done in the two wires will be 45. The strain stress curves of three wires of different materials
(a) 1 : 2 (b) 1 : 4 are shown in the figure. P, Q and R are the elastic limits of
the wires. The figure shows that
(c) 2 : 1 (d) 1 : 1
40. A wire suspended vertically from one of its ends is stretched
by attaching a weight of 200 N to the lower end. The weight
stretches the wire by 1 mm. Then the elastic energy stored
in the wire is :
(a) 0.2 J (b) 10 J
(c) 20 J (d) 0.1 J
41. An iron ball (solid sphere) of radius R is placed in a gas
chamber in which the pressure is maintained at 2P0. The
increase in elastic potential energy stored in the ball is
R 3 P02 x (a) Elasticity of wire P is maximum

y is a proper fraction, find 
, where x  y . (b) Elasticity of wire Q is maximum
y
(c) Elasticity of R is maximum
[P0 is atmospheric pressure;  is bulk modulus of iron]
(d) None of the above is true
@cbseinfinite
46. The figure shows the stress-strain graph of a certain 50. A sphere of radius 0.1 m and mass 8 kg is attached to the
substance. Over which region of the graph is Hooke’s law lower end of a steel wire of length 5m and diameter 10
–3
obeyed m. The wire is suspended from 5.22 m high ceiling of a

room. When the sphere is made to swing as a simple
pendulum, it just grazes the floor at its lowest point. young’s
11 –2
modulus of steel is 2 × 10 Nm . Find the velocity of the
2
sphere at the lowest position in m/s. (Given: g = 10m/s ):
2 2
E 51. A horizontal oriented copper rod of length   m is
3
(a) AB (b) BC rotated about a vertical axis passing through its middle.
(c) CD (d) ED Breaking strength of copper is   2.5  108 Pa and density
47. The stress-strain curves for brass, steel and rubber are of copper p  9  103 Kg m3 . Rotation frequency
shown in the figure. The lines A, B and C are for –1
measured (in sec ) at which the rod ruptures is given by
50 n, where n is equal to:
52. A uniform circular ring of radius R = 2.5 cm and mass 10
gm is made of an elastic material. Symmetrical radially
outward forces are applied on the ring to increase its radius
from R = 2.5 cm to 2.7 cm. young’s modulus of material
N
of the ring is 2  10
11
(a) Rubber, brass and steel respectively and radius of cross section of
m2
(b) Brass, steel and rubber the ring is 1 mm. If all the external forces are removed,
(c) Steel, brass and rubber respectively how long will it take for the ring to come to its original
(d) Steel, rubber and brass radius for the first tune? (in milliseconds)
2
48. Which one of the following is the Young’s modulus (in N/m ) 53. If stress in a stretched wire of a material (whose Young’s
for the wire having the stress-strain curve shown in the Y
figure modulus is Y) is , in order that the speed of
200
longitudinal waves is equal to 10 times the speed of
transverse waves, then find the value of  ?
54. The elastic limit of a steel cable is 3.0 × 108 N/m2 and the
cross-section is 4 cm2. Find the maximum upward
acceleration that can be given to a 900 kg elevator
supported by the cable if the stress is not to exceed on-
11 11 third of the elastic limit. (take g = 9.8 m/s2)
(a) 24 × 10 (b) 8.0 × 10
(c) 10 × 10
11
(d) 2.0 × 10
11 (Answer should be correct up to two decimal places)
Miscellaneous Cases in Elasticity 55. A lift is tied with thick wires and the mass of the lift is
49. The length of a steel cylinder is kept constant by applying 1000 kg. If the maximum acceleration of the lift is 1ms–2
pressure at its two ends. When the temperature of rod is and the maximum stress the wire can bear is 1.4 × 106
increased by 100°C from its initial temperature, the increase Nm–2. If g = 10 ms–2 the minimum diameter of that wire is
in pressure to be applied at its ends is (in meters)?
11 2 –6 5
(Ysteel = 2 × 10 N/m , steel = 11 × 10 /°C, 1 atm = 10 N/
2
m)
7 3
(a) 22 × 10 atm (b) 2.2 × 10 atm
3
(c) zero (d) 4.3 × 10 atm
@cbseinfinite

1. A uniformly tapering conical wire is made from a material 4. A compressive force, F is applied at the two ends of a long
of Young’s modulus Y and has a normal, unextended length thin steel rod. It is heated, simultaneously, such that its
L. The radii, at the upper and lower ends of this conical temperature increases by T . The net change in its length
wire, have values R and 3 R, respectively. The upper end is zero. Let l be the length of the rod, A its area of cross-
of the wire is fixed to a rigid support and a mass M is section, Y its Young’s modulus, and  be its coefficient
suspended from its lower end. The equilibrium extended of linear expansion. Then, F is equal to : (2017)
length, of this wire, would equal (2016)
(a) 2 Y  T (b)  AY  T
 2 Mg   1 Mg 
(a) L 1   (b) L 1   AY
 9 YR 2   3 YR 2  (c) AY  T (d)  T
 1 Mg   2 Mg  5. A solid sphere of radius r made of a soft material of bulk

(c) L 1   (d) L 1   modulus K is surrounded by a liquid in a cylindrical
 9 YR 2   3 YR 2 
container. A massless piston of area a floats on the surface
2. A bottle has an opening of radius a and length b. A cork of of the liquid, covering entire cross section of cylindrical
length b and radius (a + a ) where (a  a) is container. When a mass m is placed on the surface of the
compressed to fit into the opening completely (See figure). piston to compress the liquid, the fractional decrement in
If the bulk modulus of cork is B and frictional coefficient
 dr 
between the bottle and cork is  then the force needed to the radius of the sphere,   is (2018)
push the cork into the bottle is : (2016)  r 
mg mg
(a) (b)
3K a Ka
Ka Ka
(c) mg (d) 3mg
6. As shown in the figure, forces of 105 N each are applied in

opposite directions, on the upper and lower faces of a
cube of sides 10 cm, shifting the upper face parallel to
itself by 0.5 cm. If the side of another cube of the same
material is 20 cm, then under similar conditions as above,
the displacement will be : (2018)
(a) (B b) a (b) (2B b) a
(c) (B b) a (d) (4B b) a

3. A steel rail of length 5m and area of cross section 40 cm2 is (a) 0.25 cm (b) 0.37 cm
prevented from expanding along its length while the (c) 0.75 cm (d) 1.00 cm
temperature rises by 10ºC, If coefficient of linear expansion
7. A load of mass M kg is suspended from a steel wire of
and Young’s modulus of steel are 1.2 × 10–5 K–1 and 2 ×
length 2m and radius 1.0 mm in Searle’s apparatus
1011 Nm–2 respectively, the force developed in the rail is
experiment. The increase in length produced in the wire is
approximately : (2017)
4.0 mm. Now the load is fully immersed in a liquid of relative
(a) 2×107 N density 2. The relative density of the material of load is 8.
(b) 1×105 N The new value of increase in length of the steel wire is
(c) 2×109 N _____. (2019)
(d) 3×10–5 N (a) 3.0 mm (b) 4.0 mm
(c) 5.0 mm (d) Zero
@cbseinfinite
8. A boy’s catapult is made of rubber cord which is 42 cm 13. Two steel wires having same length are suspended from a
long, with 6 mm diameter of cross-section and of negligible ceiling under the same load. If the ratio of their energy
mass. The boy keeps a stone weighing 0.02 kg on it and stored per unit volume is 1: 4, the ratio of their diameters
stretches the cord by 20 cm by applying a constant force. is: (2020)
When released, the stone flies off with a velocity of 20 ms1.
Neglect the change in the area of cross-section of the (a) 2 :1 (b) 1: 2
cord while stretched. The Young’s modulus of rubber is (c) 1 : 2 (d) 2 : 1
closest to: (2019)
14. Given below are two statements: one is labelled as Assertion
(a) 106 N/m–2 (b) 104 N/m–2 A and the other is labelled as Reason R
(c) 108 N/m–2 (d) 103 N/m–2 Assertion (A): When a rod lying freely is heated, no thermal
9. A steel wire having a radius of 2.0 mm, carrying a load of stress is developed in it.
4 kg, is hanging from a ceiling. Given that g = 3.1 ms–2, Reason (R): On heating, the length of the rod increases.
what will be the tensile stress that would be developed in
In the light of the above statements, choose the correct
the wire? (2019)
answer from the option given below: (2021)
(a) 6.2 × 106 Nm–2 (b) 5.2 × 106 Nm–2
(a) A is false but R is true
(c) 3.1 × 106 Nm–2 (d) 4.8 × 106 Nm–2
(b) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation
10. Young’s moduli of two wires A and B are in the ratio 7 : 4. of A
Wire A is 2 m long and has radius R. Wire B is 1.5 m long
(c) A is true but R is false
and has radius 2 mm. If the two wires stretch by the same
length for a given load, then the value of R is close to : (d) Both A and R are true but R is not the correct
explanation of A
(2019)
15. If Y, K and  are the values of Young’s modulus, bulk
(a) 1.5 mm (b) 1.9 mm
modulus and modulus of rigidity of any material
(c) 1.7 mm (d) 1.3 mm respectively. Choose the correct relation for these
11. In an environment, brass and steel wires of length 1 m parameters. (2021)
each with areas of cross section 1mm 2 are used. The wires
9K 9K
are connected in series and one end of the combined wire (a) Y   N / m2 (b) Y   N / m2
3K   2  3K
is connected to a rigid support and other end is subjected
to elongation. The stress required to produce a net
elongation of 0.2 mm is: Y 3YK
(c) K   N / m2 (d)    N / m2
9  3Y 9K  Y
[Given, the Young’s modulus for steel and brass are,
respectively, 120  109 N / m 2 and 60  109 N / m 2 ] 16. The normal density of a material is  and its bulk modulus
of elasticity if K. The magnitude of increase in density of
(2019)
material, when a pressure P is applied uniformly on all sides,
(a) 1.2  106 N / m 2 (b) 4.0  106 N / m2 will be : (2021)
(c) 8 106 N / m2 (d) 0.2 106 N / m2 PK K

(a) (b)
 P
12. The elastic limit of brass is 379 M Pa. What should be the
minimum diameter of a brass rod if it is to support a 400 N
K P
load without exceeding its elastic limit? (c) p (d)
K
(2019)
(a) 1.00 mm (b) 1.15 mm
(c) 0.90 mm (d) 1.36 mm
@cbseinfinite
17. The length of metallic wire is  1 when tension in it is T1 . It 19. A uniform metallic wire is elongated by 0.04 m when
subjected to a linear force F. The elongation, if its length
is  2 when the tension is T2 . The original length of the and diameter is doubled and subjected to the same force
wire will be (Assume that Hooke’s law is valid) (2021) will be ___cm. (2021)
T2 1  T1 2 20. Two separate wires A and B are stretched by 2mm and
1   2
(a) T2  T1 (b) 4mm respectively, when they are subjected to a force of
2
2N. Assume that both the wires are made up of same material
and the radius of wire B is 4 times that of the radius of wire
T11  T2  2 T2 1  T2  2
(c) (d) A. The length of the wires A and B are in the ratio of a:b.
T2  T1 T1  T2
a 1
18. An object is located at 2 km beneath the surface of the can be expressed as where x is ..... (2021)
b x
V
water. If the fractional compression is 1.36%, the ratio
V
of hydraulic stress to the corresponding hydraulic strain
will be _____.
[Given : density of water is 1000kg / m 3 and g  9.8m / s 2

(2021)
(a) 1.96 107 N / m2 (b) 1.44 107 N / m2
(c) 2.26 109 N / m 2 (d) 1.44 109 N / m2
@cbseinfinite

Single Choice Questions 6. A bar of cross section A is subjected to two equal and
1. The length of an elastic string is a meter when the opposite tensile forces as shown. Consider a cross section
longitudinal tension is 4 N and b metre when the tension is BB as shown in figure. The shearing stress at this point is
5 N. The length of the string (in metre) when the
longitudinal tension is 9 N is
(a) a – b (b) 5b – 4a
(c) 2b – a/2 (d) 4a – 3b
5
2. A substance breaks down under a stress of 10 Pa. If the
3 3
density of the wire is 2 × 10 kg/m , find the minimum
length of the wire which will break under its own weight
(g = 10 m/s ).
2 Fcos 2  F
(a) (b) A
A
(a) 10 m (b) 2.5 m
Fsin 2
(c) 4 m (d) 5 m (c) (d) zero
2A
3. A slightly conical wire of length L and end radii r1 and r2
is stretched by two forces F, F applied parallel to length in 7. A uniform rod of length L has a mass per unit length  and
opposite directions and normal to end faces. If Y denotes area of cross section A. The elongation in the rod is  due
the Young’s modulus, then extension produced is to its own weight if it is suspended from the ceiling of a
room. The Young’s modulus of the rod is
FL FL
(a) r 2Y (b) rY 2gL2 gL2
(a) (b)
1 1
A 2A
FL FLY 2gL g 2
(c) r r Y (d) r r (c) (d)
1 2 1 2 A AL
4. One end of uniform wire of length L and of weight W is 8. A small but heavy block of mass 10 kg is attached to a
7 2
attached rigidly to a point in the roof and a weight W1 is wire 0.3m long. Its breaking stress is 4.8 × 10 N/m . The
–6 2
suspended from its lower end. If s is the area of cross area of cross section of the wire is 10 m . The maximum
section of the wire, the stress in the wire at a height (3L/4) angular velocity with which the block can be rotated in
from its lower end is the horizontal circle is
(a) 4 rad/s (b) 8 rad/s
W1  W
(a) s
(b)  W1  4  s (c) 10 rad/s (d) 32 rad/s
9. A 5 kg rod of square cross section 5 cm on a side and 1 m
 3W  long is pulled along a smooth horizontal surface by a force
 W1  4  W1  W applied at one end. The rod has a constant acceleration of
(c) (d) s
s 2
2 m/s . Determine the elongation in the rod. (Young’s
9 2
5. Two bars A and B of circular cross section and same modulus of the material of the rod is 5 × 10 N/m )
volume and made of the same material are subjected to (a) Zero, as for elongation to be there, equal and opposite
tension. If the diameter of A is half that of B and if the force must act on the rod
force applied to both the rod is the same and it is in the (b) Non-zero but can’t be determine from the given
elastic limit, the ratio of extension of A to that of B will be situation
(a) 16 (b) 8 (c) 0.4 m
(d) 16 m
(c) 4 (d) 2
@cbseinfinite
10. A solid sphere of radius R, made up of a material of bulk 14. Choose the correct statements from the following :
modulus K is surrounded by a liquid in a cylindrical (a) Steel is more elastic than rubber.
container. A massless piston of area A floats on the surface
of the liquid. When a mass M is placed on the piston to (b) The stretching of a coil spring is determined by the
compress the liquid, the fractional change in the radius of Young’s modulus of the wire of the spring.
the sphere is (c) The frequency of a tuning fork is determined by the
shear modulus of the material of the fork.
Mg Mg
(a) (b) 3AK
AK (d) When a material is subjected to a tensile (stretching)
stress the restoring forces are caused by interatomic
3Mg Mg attraction.
(c) (d)
AK 2AK
15. A heavy block of mass 150 kg hangs with the help of three
11. A uniform rod of mass m, length L, area of cross-section A vertical wires of equal length and equal cross sectional
is rotated about an axis passing through one of its ends area as shown in the figure.
and perpendicular to its length with constant angular
velocity  in a horizontal plane. If Y is the Young’s modulus
of the material of rod, the increase in its length due to
rotation of rod is
m2 L2 m2 L2
(a) (b)
AY 2AY
m2 L2 2m2 L2
(c) (d)
3AY AY
12. Figure shows the stress-strain graphs for materials A Wire is attached to the mid-point (centre of mass) of block.
and B. Take Y2 = 2Y1. For this arrangement mark out the correct
statment(s).
(a) The wire I and III should have same Young’s modulus.
(b) Tension in I and III would be always equal.
(c) Tension in I and III would be different.
(d) Tension in II is 75 g.
16. A composite rod consists of a steel rod of length 25 cm
and area 2A and a copper rod of length 50 cm and area A.
The composite rod is subjected to an axial load F. If the
Young’s mouduli of steel and copper are in the ratio 2 : 1,
From the graph it follows that
then
(a) material A has a higher Young’s modulus
(a) the extension produced in copper rod will be more
(b) material B is more ductile
(c) material A is more brittle (b) the extension in copper and steel parts will be in the
ratio 1 : 8
(d) material A can withstand a greater stress
13. Two wires A and B have the same cross-section and are (c) the stress applied to copper rod will be more
made of the same material, but the length of wire A is twice (d) no extension will be produced in the steel rod
that of B. Then, for a given load
(a) the extension of A will be twice that of B
(b) the extensions of A and B will be equal
(c) the strain in A will be half that in B
(d) the strains in A and B will be equal
@cbseinfinite
Multiple Choice Questions 21. Assertion : The stress–strain graphs are shown in the figure
17. A metal wire length L, cross section area A, and Young’s for two materials A and B are shown in figure. Young’s
modulus Y is stretched by a variable force F. F is varying modulus of A is greater than that of B.
in such a way that F is always slightly greater than the
elastic forces of resistance in the wire. When the elongation
in the wire is l, up to this instant
YA 2
(a) the work done by F is
2L
YA 2
(b) the work done by F is
L
Reason : The Young’s modulus for small strain is,

YA 2
(c) the elasitc potential energy stored in wire is
2L stress
Y  slope of linear portion, of graph; and slope
(d) no energy is lost during elongation strain
of A is more than that of B.
(a) A (b) B
Numeric Value Type Questions
(c) C (d) D
18. A block of mass m produces an extension of 9 cm in an
elastic spring of length 60 cm when it is hung by it, and
the system is in equilibrium. The spring is cut in two parts Match the Column
of 40 cm and 20 cm lengths. The same block hangs in
22. In the Column I type of stresses or strains are mentioned
equilibrium with the help of these two parts. Find the
and some effect of these stresses within the body are
extension (in cm) in this case.
mentioned in Column II. Match the entries of Column-I
19. Two separate wires A and B are stretched by 2 mm and 4 with the entries of Column-II.
mm respectively, when they are subjected to a force of 2
Column-I Column-II
N. Assume that both the wires are made up of same mate-
rial and the radius of wire B is 4 times that of the radius of (A) Compressive stress (P) Intermolecular
wire A. The length of the wires A and B are in the ratio of separation in
a 1 stresssed state is greater
a : b. Then can be expressed as where x is .......
b x than equilibrium
Assertion & Reason separation.
(A) If both ASSERTION and REASON are true and (B) Tensile stress (Q) Intermolecular
reason is the correct explanation of the assertion. separation in
(B) If both ASSERTION and REASON are true but reason stressed state is less
is not the correct explanation of the assertion. than equilibrium
(C) If ASSERTION is true but REASON is false. separation.
(D) If both ASSERTION and REASON are false. (C) Longitudinal stress (R) Internal developed
(E) If ASSERTION is false but REASON is true. forces are
20. Assertion : Young’s modulus for a perfectly plastic body attractive in nature.
is zero. (D) Lateral strain (S) Internal developed
Reason : For a perfectly plastic body, restoring force is forces are repulsive
zero. in nature
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
@cbseinfinite
Passage 24. Just on crossing the yield region, the material will have
Using the following Passage, Solve Q. 23 to 25 (a) reduced stress
According to Hooke’s law, within the elastic limit stress/ (b) increased stress
strain = constant. This constant depends on the type of (c) breaking stress
strain or the type of force acting. Tensile stress might result
(d) constant stress
in compressional or elongative strain; however, a tangential
stess can only cause a shearing strain. After crossing the stress
elastic limit, the material undergoes elongation and beyond 25. If be x in elastic region and y in the region of yield,
strain
a stage beaks. All modulus of elastically are basically
then
constants for the materials under stress.
(a) x = y (b) x > y
23. Two wires of same material have length and radius (  , r)
(c) x < y (d) x = 2y
 r
and  2,  . The ratio of their Young’s modulus is
 2
(a) 1 : 2 (b) 2 : 3
(c) 2 : 1 (d) 1 : 1
@cbseinfinite

(a) P has more tensile strength than Q
 4MLg 
1. In the determination of Young’s modulus  Y  
 d 2  (b) P is more ductile than Q
by using Searle’s method, a wire of length L = 2 m and (c) P is more brittle than Q
diameter d = 0.5 mm is used. For a load M = 2.5 kg, an (d) The Young’s modulus of P is more than that of Q.
Quantities d and l are measured using a screw gauge and a 4. A block of weight 100 N is suspended by copper and steel
micrometer, respectively. They have the same pitch of 0.5 wires of same cross sectional area 0.5 cm2 and, length3
mm. The number of divisions on their circular scale is 100. m and 1 m, respectively. Their other ends are fixed on a
The contributions to the maximum probable error of the Y ceiling as shown in figure. The angles subtended by
measurement is (2012) copper and steel wires with ceiling are 30° and 60°,
(a) due to the errors in the measurements of d and l are respectively. If elongation in copper wire is (  c ) and
the same
 c
(b) due to the error in the measurement of d is twice that elongation in steel wire is (s) , then the ratio  is
due to the error in the measurement of l. s
___ . (Young’s modulus for copper and steel are 1 × 1011

(c) due to the error in the measurement of l is twice that
N/m2 and 2 × 1011 N/m2, respectively)
due to the error in the measurement of d.
(2019)
(d) due to the error in the measurement of d is four times
that due to the error in the measurement of l.
2. One end of a horizontal thick copper wire of length 2L and
radius 2R is welded to an end of another horizontal thin
copper wire of length L and radius R. When the arrangement
is stretched by applying forces at two ends, the ratio of the
elongation in the thin wire to that in the thick wire is
(2013)
dP
(a) 0.25 (b) 0.50 5. A cubical solid aluminium (bulk modulus =  V = 70
dV
(c) 2.00 (d) 4.00
GPa) block has an edge length of 1 m on the surface of the
3. In plotting stress versus strain curves for two materials P earth. It is kept on the floor of a 5 km deep ocean. Taking
and Q, a student by mistake puts strain on the y-axis and the average density of water and the acceleration due to
stress on the x-axis as shown in the figure. Then the
gravity to be 103 kg m 3 and 10 ms 2 , respectively, the
correct statement(s) is (are). (2015)
change in the edge length of the block in mm is _____.
(2020)
@cbseinfinite

@cbseinfinite
FLUID MECHANICS 37
FLUID MECHANICS
SCAN CODE
FLUID MECHANICS
@cbseinfinite
FLUID Chapter 11
MECHANICS 38
FLUID MECHANICS
1. INTRODUCTION TO FLUIDS
1.1 Introduction to Fluids and Fluid Pressure
 Pressure P at any point is defined as the normal force
per unit area.
dF
P
dA Fig. 11.2
 Pressure at two points which are at a depth separation
of h when fluid is at rest or moving with constant velocity
Fig. 11.1 is related by the expression
 The SI unit of pressure is the Pascal and
2
1 Pascal = 1 N/m
NOTE:
Fluid force acts perpendicular to any surface in the fluid,
no matter how that surface is oriented. Hence pressure,
has no intrinsic direction of its own, it is a scalar.
1.2 Relative Density or Specific Gravity

Fig. 11.3
 Relative density, or specific gravity, is the ratio of the
P2 – P1 = gh, where  is the density of liquid.
density (mass of a unit volume) of a substance to the
density of a given reference material. 2.2 Types of Pressure
 lf the relative density is exactly 1 then the densities are Atmospheric Pressure
equal: that is, equal volumes of the two substances
 It is the pressure exerted by the before earth earth’s
have the same mass. atmosphere. Normal atmospheric pressure at sea level is
5
1 atmosphere (atm) that is equal to 1.013 × 10 Pa.
substance
RD 
reference Gauge Pressure
 Gauge pressure is the difference between absolute
RD = relative density
pressure and atmospheric pressure.
substance = density of substance being measured
 If the gauge pressure is above the atmospheric pressure,
reference = density of the reference it’s positive.
 If the gauge pressure is below the atmospheric pressure,

it’s negative. Since gauge pressure readings include
2. HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE
atmospheric pressure, gauge pressure can differ
2.1 Variation of Pressure
depending on weather and sea level.
 Pressure at two points in a horizontal plane or at same
level when the fluid is at rest or moving with constant  If you’re measuring pressure in an environment that
velocity is same. won’t be heavily affected by the atmosphere, you can
measure in pounds per square inch gauge .
SCAN CODE
FLUID MECHANICS
@cbseinfinite
FLUID MECHANICS 39
Absolute Pressure 2.4 Hydrostatic paradox

Absolute pressure is gauge pressure plus atmospheric  Hydrostatic Paradox
pressure. An absolute pressure reading of zero can only be “Hydrostatic Paradox states that, the pressure at a
achieved in a perfect vacuum and only naturally occurs in certain horizontal level in the fluid is proportional to the
outer space. vertical distance to the surface of the fluid.”
 Hydrostatic Paradox is mathematically expressed as:
Ph
 Example
Three-vessel X, ‘Y, Z of different shape, containing a
different volume of liquid, but all exert the same
pressure(P) at all points at the same horizontal level.
3. FORCE EXERTED BY FLUIDS ON

THE WALLS OF THE CONTAINER
Fig. 11.4 3.1 Horizontal Force Exerted on the Walls of the Container
Force on Side Wall of a Vesssel
2.3 Manometer
A Manometer is a device to measure pressures. A common Consider a strip of width dx at a depth x from the surface of
simple manometer consists of a U shaped tube of glass the liquid as shown in figure, and on this strip the force due
filled with some liquid. Typically the liquid is mercury to the liquid:
because of its high density.
dF  xg  bdx (perpendicular to the wall) ....(i)
Fig. 11.6
Net force on the wall from eq (i).
h
F   dF   xg bdx
0
gbh 2
F
2
Fig. 11.5
SCAN CODE
FLUID MECHANICS
@cbseinfinite
FLUID MECHANICS 40
Average Pressure on Side Wall According to principle of hydraulics,

The average pressure on the wall can be given as : F1 F2 A
P1  P2    F2  2 F1
A1 A2 A1
F
Paverage 
bh
5. BUOYANCY
 Buoyancy is the tendency of an object to float in a
1 gbh 2 1 fluid.
   gh
2 bh 2
 All liquids and gases in the presence of gravity exert an
Above equation shows that the average pressure on side upward force known as the buoyant force on any object
vertical wall is half of the net pressure at the bottom of the immersed in them.
vessel.  Buoyant Force
Torque on the Side Wall due to Fluid Pressure  The buoyant force is the upward force exerted on an
As shown in figure, due to the force dF, the side wall object wholly or partly immersed in a fluid.
experiences a torque about the bottom edge of the side  This upward force is also called Upthrust.
which is given as :  Due to the buoyant force, a body submerged partially
d  dF   h  x  or fully in a fluid appears to lose its weight, ie. appears
to be lighter.
 xgb dx  h  x  Following factors affect buoyant force:
 Density of the fluid
h
Thus net torque is    d   gb  hx  x dx

2
 Volume of the fluid displaced
0
 Local acceleration due to gravity

 h3 h3  5.2 Archimedes Principle
 gb   
2 3 Archimedes’ principle states that:
“The upward buoyant force that is exerted on a body
1 immersed in a fluid, whether partially or fully submerged,
 gbh 3
6 is equal to the weight of the fluid that the body displaces
and acts in the upward direction at the center of mass of
4. PASCAL’S LAW the displaced fluid”.
 A change in the pressure applied to an enclosed fluid is  Archimedes Principle Explanation
transmitted equally to every portion of the fluid in all
direction of to the walls of the containing vessel.
 There are a lot of practical applications of Pascal’s law
e.g Hydraulic lift
Fig. 11.8
If you look at the figure, the weight due to gravity is opposed
by the thrust provided by the fluid. The object inside the
Fig. 11.7 liquid only feels the total force acting on it as the weight.
SCAN CODE
FLUID MECHANICS
@cbseinfinite
FLUID MECHANICS 41
Because the actual gravitational force is decreased by the From Newton’s second law
liquid’s upthrust, the object feels as though its weight is FB – mg = ma0 …(1)
reduced. The apparent weight is thus given by: or B = m (g + a0) …(2)
Equation (1) and (2) are similar to the corresponding
Apparent weight = Weight of object (in the air)
equations for unaccelerated liquid with the only differ-
- Thrust force (buoyancy) ence that g + a takes the role of g.
Archimedes’s principle tells us that the weight loss is equal
to the weight of liquid the object displaces.
6. ACCELERATED FLUIDS
 Archimedes Principle Formula
 Pressure Distribution in an Accelerated Frame
Archimedes law states that the buoyant force on an object
 We’ve seen that when a liquid is filled in a container,
is equal to the weight of the fluid displaced by the object.
generally its free surface remains horizontal as shown
Mathematically written as:
in figure 10.9 as for its equilibrium its free surface must
Fb    g  V be perpendicualr to gravity i.e. horizontal.
Where Fb is the buoyant force,  is the density of the fluid,  Due to same reason we said that pressure at every point
of a liquid layer parallel to its free surface remains
V is the submerged volume, and g is the acceleration due to
constant, Similar situation exist when liquid is in an
gravity.
accelerated frame as shown in figure.
Floatation  Due to acceleration of container, liquid filled in it
When a solid body is dipped into a fluid, the fluid exerts experiences a pseudo force relative to container and
and upward force of buoyancy on the solid. If the force of due to this the free surface of liquid which remains
buoyancy equals the weight of the solid, the solid will remain normal to the gravity now is filled as shown in figure 10.10
in equilibrium. This is called floatation. When the overall and normal to the direction of effective gravity.
density of the solid is smaller than the density of the fluid,
 Thus we can get the inclination angle of free surface of
the solid floats with a part of it in the fluid. The fraction
liquid from horizontal as
dipped is such that the weight of the displaced fluid equals
the weight of the solid. a
  tan 1   ....(i)
Center of Buoyancy g
The center of buoyancy is the point where if you were to
take all of the displaced fluid and hold it by that point it
would remain perfectly balanced, assuming you could hold
a fluid in a fixed shape. This point is also called the center
of mass. The center of buoyancy for an object is the center
of mass for the fluid it displaces.
Buoyant Force in an accelerated Fluid
Fig. 11.9 Fig. 11.10
Suppose a body is dipped inside a liquid of density 
 Now from equilibrium of liquid we can state that
placed in an elevator going up with an acceleration a 0 . Let pressure at every point in a liquid layer parallel to the
us calculate the force of buoyancy FB on this body. As was free Surface
done earlier, let us suppose that we substitute the body  Remains same for example if we find pressure at a point
into the liquid by the same liquid of equal volume. The A in the accelerated containers shown in figure 10.11 is
entire liquid becomes a homogenous mass and hence he given as
substituted liquid is at rest with respect to the rest of the
liquid. Thus, the substituted liquid is also going up with an PA  P0  h a 2  g 2 ...(ii)
acceleration a 0 together with the rest of the liquid.
Where h is the depth of the point A below the free surface
The forces acting on the substituted liquid are of liquid along effective gravity and P0 is the atmospheric
(a) The buoyant force FB and pressure acting on free surface of the liquid.
(b) The weight mg of the substituted liquid.
SCAN CODE
FLUID MECHANICS
@cbseinfinite
FLUID MECHANICS 42
h g 2  a2
l2  h cos ec 
a
From eq. (iii) we have
PA  P0  h g 2  a 2
Here we can see that while evaluating pressure at point A

Fig. 11.11
from vertical direction we haven’t mentioned any thing
about pseudo acceleration as along vertical length l1 due
to pseudo acceleration at every point pressure must be
constant similarly in horizontal direction at every point due
to gravity pressure remains constant.
Using the above concept we can write pressure equations
for a static fluid. These pressure equations are very helpful
in solving numerical examples.
Fig. 11.12
6.2 Fluid in a Rotating Container
 The pressure at point A can also be obtained in an
 When tube is rotated, liquid starts to flow radially
another way as shown in figure 10.12.
outward. Let the shift of liquid mal as shown in
 If l1 and l2 are the vertical and horizontal distances of figure 10.14. Let the cross sectional area of tube be S.
point. Then pressure at point A will be
 Here the pressure difference between point A and B can
PA  P0  l1g  P0  l2 a ....(iii) be given by integrating the pressure difference across
an element of width dx, which is given as
Here l1g is the pressure at A due to the vertical height of
dP  dx  2 x
liquid above A and according to Pascal’s Law pressure at
A is given as Now integrating from A to B, we get
L
PB  PA   H 2 xdx 2 2
PA  P0  l1g ....(iv)
y

2
 L  y2 
here we can write l1 as
h a 2  g2
l1  h s ec  
g
or from equation (iv)
PA  P0  h a 2  g 2
Similarly if we consider the horizontal distance of point A

from free surface of liquid, which is l2 then du e to pseudo
acceleration of container the pressure at point A is given
as
PA  P0  l2 a ....(v)
Here l2 is given as
Fig. 11.13
SCAN CODE
FLUID MECHANICS
@cbseinfinite
FLUID MECHANICS 43
If 2  1 then P2  P1 and the junction of the liquid can

not remain in equilibrium, it will be displaced to the left as-
shown in figure 10.16. The displacement of the junction is
such that the pressure on the two sides at every point must
be same, then only the liquid remains in equilibrium.
In figure 10.16, if x be the displacement of the junction, the

pressure at the bottom from the two sides must be same.
Thus now P1  P2 , here P1 and P2 are given as
P1  P0  l1 g  x2 g
P2  P0   l  x  2 g
Fig. 11.14 On equation P1 and P2 we get the value of x.

Thus pressure at point C can be given as
PC  PB  yg
8. TYPES OF FLUID FLOWS
and at point A, pressure is atmospheric, thus we have
 Steady Flow (Stream Line Flow)
The flow in which the velocity of fluid particles crossing

2 2
PC 
2
 L  y 2   0  yg a particular point is the same at all the times. Thus, each
particle takes the same path as taken by a previous
particle through that point.
7. MISCELLANEOUS CASES IN FLUID STATICS
7.1 U-tube problems
Consider the situation shown in figure 10.15, a U tube,
filled with equal volumes of two different liquids 1 and 2.
In case-1, the pressure at the left of the bottom is
P  P0  l1 g
At the right pressure is
Fig. 11.17
P2  P0  l2 g
 Line of flow
It is the path taken by a particle in flowing liquid. In case of a
steady flow, it is called streamline. Two streamlines can
never intersect. Streamlines do not intersect each other
 Turbulent flow
It is type of fluid flow in which the fluid undergoes
irregular fluctuations, or mixing, in contrast to laminar
flow, in which the fluid moves in smooth paths or layers.
In turbulent flow the speed of the fluid at a point is
continuously undergoing changes in both magnitude
and direction. The flow of wind and rivers is generally
turbulent in this sense, even if the currents are gentle.
The air or water swirls and eddies while its overall bulk
Fig. 11.15 Fig. 11.16 moves along a specific direction.
SCAN CODE
FLUID MECHANICS
@cbseinfinite
FLUID MECHANICS 44
 A1 V1 = A2 V2
 mass flows rate = AV
(where  is the density of the liquid.)
Fig. 11.18  Thus AV = constant, velocity of liquid is smaller in codes

parts and velocity is smaller in larger part of the body.
Reynold’s number
Thrust Force
 The stability of laminar flow is maintained by viscous
forces. It is observed, however that laminar or steady The total normal force exerted by a liquid at rest on a surface
flow is disrupted when the rate of flow is large. Irregular, in contact with it is called fluid thrust. SI unit fluid thrust is
unsteady motion, turbulence, sets in at high flow rates. newton (N) and is a vector quantity.
 Reynolds numbers defined as a dimensionless number
Force by fluid on bent pipe corners
whose value gives one an approximate idea, whether
the flow rate would be turbulent or laminar. Forces on pipe bend due to slug flow
When fluid flows through a pipe bend or elbow, the fluid changes
vD
Re  direction and hence there is a change in momentum. As per
 Newton’s Second Law: ‘’The rate of change of momentum of a
body is equal to the net force acting on the body’’. Slug forces are
where,  = the density of the fluid flowing with a
generated when there is ‘two-phase’ (gaseous and liquid phase)
speed v. fluid flowing through pipes and slugs of liquid that are formed
D = the diameter of the tube. intermittently travel at relatively high velocity.
 = the coefficient of viscosity of the fluid. The liquid slug can cause large reaction forces at changes in
direction such as elbows or tee connections. High slug forces
 It is found that flow is streamline or laminar for Re less
have the potential to cause large pipe deflection or damage to the
than 1000. The flow is turbulent for Re > 2000. The flow supports if they are not designed to withstand them. The slug
becomes unsteady for Re between 1000 and 2000. load lasts until the slug has traversed the elbow and then drops to
near zero. The time duration of the load is calculated as slug
Note:- length divided by the fluid velocity.
For lower density and higher viscosity fluids laminar flow
is more probable.
9. EQUATION OF CONTINUITY
In a time t, the volume of liquid entering the tube of flow in
a steady flow is A1 V1 t. The same volume must flow out as Fig. 11.20
the liquid is incompressible. The volume flowing out in t is Let us assume a horizontal pipe bend turning through and
A2 V2 t. It is a consequence of conservation of mass. angle  as shown in figure below..
The following details apply:
V = Velocity of flow
Q = Flow Rate
 = Fluid Density
A = Cross-section area of pipe ID
 = Change in direction at Bend
Fig. 11.19
SCAN CODE
FLUID MECHANICS
@cbseinfinite
FLUID MECHANICS 45
The forces exerted on the bend by the flowing fluid are Fx  It is a mathematical consequences of low of conservation
and Fy respectively. of energy an fluid dynamics.
Force in X-direction
Net force acting on the bend in x-direction (Fx) = Rate of
change of momentum in x-direction
= Mass Flow × (Final velocity in x-direction – Initial velocity
in x-direction)
= Density (  ) × Flow Rate (Q) × (Vcos  – V) = (  ) × (Q)
(Vcos  – V)
Net force acting on the bend in x-direction
(Fx) =  QV(cos  – 1) ….(1) Fig. 11.21
Force in Y-direction  Bernoulli’s equation is valid only for incompressible
Net force acting on the bend in x-direction (Fy) = Rate of steady flow of a fluid with no viscosity.
change on momentum in y-direction
= Mass Flow × (Final velocity in y-direction – Initial 11. APPLICATION OF FLUID DYNAMICS
velocity in y-direction)
= Density (  ) × Flow rate (Q) × (Vsin  – 0) = (  ) × (Q) 11.1 Velocity of Efflux
× (Vsin  )
Net force acting on the bend in y-direction
(Fy) =  Q(Vsin  ) …..(2)
Resultant Force acting on the Bend
The resultant force acting on the bend
  Fy 
2
 FR    Fx 
2
…(3)
Solving equation (3) gives

The resultant force actin on the bend
 FR   QV 2 1 – cos   …(4)
Substituting Q = A × V
 FR   AV 2 2 1 – cos   …(5) Fig. 11.22
For 90° elbow or bend, cos   0 hence Let us find the velocity with which liquid comes out of a
hole at a depth h below the liquid surface.
Using Bernoulli’s theorem,
 FR   AV 2 2 …(6)
1 2 1 2
PA  vA  gh A  PB  v B  gh B
10. BERNOULLI’S EQUATION 2 2
In a stream line flow of an ideal fluid, the sum of pressure 1 2 1 2

 Patm  v  gh  Patm  v  0
energy per unit volume, potential energy per unit volume 2 A 2
and kinetic energy per unit volume is always constant at all Note:
cross section of the liquid.
PB = Patm, because we have opened the liquid to atmosphere)
ρV 2
P+ρgh+ =Constant 2 2
2  v = vA + 2gh
SCAN CODE
FLUID MECHANICS
@cbseinfinite
FLUID MECHANICS 46
Using equation of continuity 2 2

Q Q
   2 hg (Q = av)
AvA = av 2
a2
2
a1
A: area of cross-section of vessel
a: area of hole 2hg

 Q  a1a 2 2 2
a  a2
1
2 a2 2
 v  v  2gh Here Q is the rate of fluid flow
A2
11.3 Magnus Effect
2gh  Magnus effect is described as a phenomenon that is
 v 2 2
 2gh (if the hole is very small) mainly characterized by a spinning object that is moving
1 a / A
through fluid wherein there is relative motion between
the spinning body and the fluid.
11.2 Venturi Meter
 When the Magnus effect takes place, the path of the
This is an instrument for measuring the rate of flow of fluids.
spinning object is usually deflected in a way that is
completely different from when the object is not
spinning. The deflection that occurs can be described
by the difference in pressure of the fluid that is present
on the opposite sides of the spinning object.
 In simple terms, there is a generation of a sidewise force

on a spinning object. Magnus effect is greatly affected
by the speed of rotation or we can say that it is
dependent on it.
 The Magnus effect is why a football player is able to

bend a football into the goal around a 5-person wall
and the movement of the cricket ball as seen in
conventional swing bowling.
Fig. 11.23
If PA is pressure at A and PB is pressure at B,
PA – PB = hg
[h : difference of heights of liquids of density  in vertical

tubes]
If v1 is velocity at a and v2 is velocity at B
Q = a1v1 = a2v2 [equation of continuity]
2 2
v1 v
Pa    Pa   2 [Bernoulli’s Theorem]
2 2
2 2
2
 v 2  v1 
2
 Pa  PB   hg
 
Fig. 11.24
SCAN CODE
FLUID MECHANICS
@cbseinfinite
FLUID MECHANICS 47
11.4 Aerodynamic lift 12.2 Stoke’s Law

 When a solid moves through a viscous medium, its
Dynamic lift is the force that acts on a body by virtue of its
motion is opposed by a viscous force depending on the
motion through a fluid. It can be defined as:
velocity and shape and size of the body.
Dynamic lift is the force which acts on a body such as an  The viscous drag on a spherical body of radius r, moving
airplane wing hydro fall or spinning Ball by virtue of its with velocity v, in a viscous medium of viscosity  is given
motion through a fluid. by
Fviscous = 6rv
This relation is called Stoke’s law.
12. VISCOSITY
12.3 Terminal Velocity
The property of a fluid by virtue of which it opposes It is maximum constant velocity acquired by the body while
the relative motion between its different layers is known falling freely in a viscous medium.
as viscosity and the force that is into play is called the viscous
2r    s  g
2
force. vr 
9
12.1 Newton’a Law of Viscocity Where r is raduis of body  is density of body,  is density
of liquid and  is coefficient of viscosity.
It defines relationship between the shear strers and rate of
fluid subjected to an externals strers.
where  is a constant depending upon the nature of the
liquid and is called the coefficient of viscosity and velocity
dv
gradient =  dy
–2
S.I. unit of coefficient of viscosity is Pa.s or Nsm .
CGS unit of viscocity is poise. (1 Pa.s = 10 Poise)
 Viscous force is given by :
dv
F  A
dy
Fig. 11.26
12.4 Poiseuille’s Formula
This law states that the flow of liquid depend on variables
such as length of tube (L) radius(r), pressure difference (P)
and coefficient of visocity 
Poiseuille studied the stream-line flow of liquid in capillary
tubes.
Volume of liquid coming out of tube per second in given by
4
 Pr
V
8
Fig. 11.25
SCAN CODE
FLUID MECHANICS
@cbseinfinite
FLUID MECHANICS 48
13. SURFACE TESNSION  The adhesion and cohesion forces, both vary in their
strengths. For example, if cohesion forces between the
13.1 Cohesion and Adhesion water molecules are stronger than that of the adhesion
 As for the definitions, the tendency of two or more forces between them, then the individual molecules will
different molecules to bond with each other is known atiract towards each other thus resulting in settling. In
as Adhesion, whereas the force of attraction between case, the adhesion forces of the water surfaces are
the same molecules is known as Cohesion. stronger than that of the cohesion forces of the water
molecules. then the water tends to disperse.
 The adhesion forces can be one of the results of
electrostatic forces which are exerted on different
substances.
 The cohesive forces are associated with Van der Waals

forces and hydrogen bonding that cause liquids such
as water to withstand the separation.
 When a glass surface is poured with water, both

adhesive and the cohesive forces act on the surface of
the water. A strong adhesive force tends the liquid to
spread over the surface whereas a strong cohesive force
is responsible for the formation of water droplets on
the water surface. Fig. 11.27 Fig. 11.28 Fig. 11.29
DIFFERENCE BETWEENADHESIONAND COHESION
Sr. no. Adhesion Cohesion

1. Adhesion happens between two dissimilar When two similar substances or molecules face the force of
molecules or substances attraction this force is known as cohesion force.
2. Adhesion is generally the force of attraction Cohesion force is rampant among water molecules
present between the water molecules and the
walls of xylem vessels.
3. Capillary action and meniscus (the curved Surface tension meniscus and capilary action are the effects
surface which is formed by any liquid in a of cohesion.
4. Adhesion is caused by electrostatic or Cohesion is caused by hydrogen bonding and Van der Walls forces
mechanical forces that exist among two kinds
of different substances.
5. A strong adhesion force causes the liquid to A strong force of cohesion forms water droplets on any surface
spread all over the surface
13.2 Introduction to surface tension Surface tension is a property of liquid where liquid surface
The surface tension of a liquid is defined as the force per behaves like a stretched membrane which have the tendency
unit length in the plane of the liquid surface at right angles to contract tending to have minimum possible area at the
to either side of an imaginary line drawn on that surface. surface. The property is called surface tension.
2
F Unit of surface tension in MKS system : N/m, J/m
So, S  where S = surface tension of liquid. 2
 CGS system  Dyne/cm, erg/cm
SCAN CODE
FLUID MECHANICS
@cbseinfinite
FLUID MECHANICS 49
13.3 Surface Energy 16. CAPILLARITY

In order to increase the surface area, the work has to be
 A very narrow glass tube with fine bore and open at
done over the surface of the liquid. This work done is stored
both ends is known as capillary tube. When a capillary
in the liquid surface as its potential energy. Hence the surface
tube in dipped in a liquid, then liquid will rise or fall in
energy of a liquid can be defined as the excess potential
the tube, this action is termed as capillarity.
energy per unit area of the liquid surface.
Fig. 11.30
W = SA, where A = increase in surface area.

Note:
(1) Work done in formation of drop of radius
2
r = surface tension × A = 4r S
(2) Work done in formation of soap bubble Fig. 11.31
2
= 2 × surafce tension × A = 8r S
2Scos  2S
h 
r g Rg
14. EXCESS PRESSURE where, S = surface tension,
 Excess pressure in a liquid drop or bubble in a liquid is  = angle of contact,
2S r = radius of capillary tube,
P , S is surface tension
R R = radius of meniscus, and
4S
 Excess pressure in a soap bubble is P =  = density of liquid.
R
(because it has two free surfaces)  Capillary rise in a tube of insufficient length :
If the actual height to which a liquid will rise in a capillary

15. ANGLE OF CONTACT tube is ‘h’ then a capillary tube of length less than ‘h’
can be called a tube of “insufficient length”.
 The angle between the tangent to the liquid surface at
the point of contact and the solid surface inside the In such a case, liquid rises to the top of the capillary
liquid is called the angle of contact. It depends upon tube of length l (l < h) and adjusts the radius of curvature
nature of liqiud and solid in contact. of its meniscus until the excess pressure is equalised by
the pressure of liquid column of length l. (Note liquid
 If the glass plate is immersed in mercury, the surface is does not overflow).
curved and the mercury is depressed below. Angle of
2
contact is obtuse for mercury.   g ... (i)
 If the plate is dipped in water with its side vertical, the r
water is drawn-up along the plane and assumes the If r were the actual radius of curvature,
curved shape as shown. Angle of contact is acute for 2
water.   h g ...(ii)
r
SCAN CODE
FLUID MECHANICS
@cbseinfinite
FLUID MECHANICS 50
Comparing (i) and (ii)
Fig. 10.32
2
 r   hr
g
hr
 r  i.e. radius of curvature r’ can be calculated.

Adhesion > Cohesion Adhesion = Cohesion Adhesion < Cohesion
1. Liquid will wet the solid. 1. Critical. 1. Liquid will not wet the solid.
2. Meniscus is concave. 2. Meniscus is plane. 2. Meniscus is convex.
3. Angle of contact is acute  < 90°). 3. Angle of contact is 90°. 3. Angle of contact is obtuse  > 90°).
4. Pressure below the meniscus is 4. Pressure below the 4. Pressure below the meniscus
lesser than above it by (2T/r), meniscus is same as more then above it by (2T/r),
i.e. P  P0  2T . above it, i.e. P = P0. i.e., P  P0  2T .

r r
5. In capillary there will be rise. 5. No capillarity. 5. In capillary there will be fall
SCAN CODE
FLUID MECHANICS
@cbseinfinite
FLUID MECHANICS 51
SOLVED EXAMPLES
Example - 1
0.84
The two thigh bones (femurs) each of cross-sectional area or h1 = 1.2 h2 = 0.7 h2
2
10 cm support the upper part of a human body of mass
40 kg. Estimate the average pressure sustained by the From (i),
femurs. h2 – 0.7 h2 = 9
2
g = 10 m/s . or
0.3 h2 = 9 or h2 = 30 cm
Sol. Total cross-sectional area,
and h1 = 0.7 × 30 = 21 cm
2 –4 2
A = 2 × 10 cm = 20 × 10 m , F = mg Pressure at the common surface
F = 40 kg wt = 40 × 10 N = 400 N = h22g
3
Average pressure, = 0.30 × (0.84 × 10 ) × 10
= 2520 pa
F 400
P= A
5
= 2 × 10 pa. Example - 4
20 104
Determine height h of oil in the U tube as shown in Fig.
Example - 2 Density of oil = 0.9 g/cc ; Density of liquid is 1.6 g/cc and
What is the pressure on a swimmer 10 m below the surface density of mercury. = 13.6 g/cc.
–2 5
of lake ? g = 10 ms ; atmospheric pressure = 1.01 × 10 Pa.
Sol. Here, h = 10 m,
5
Pa = 1.01 × 10 Pa
 = Density of water =1000 kg m3

5
Total pressure = Pa +  gh = 1.01 × 10 + 1000 × 10 × 10
5
= 2.01 × 10 Pa = 2 atm.
Example - 3 Sol. In equilibrium state, the pressure of liquid at the same level
Two liquids of specific gravity 1.2 and 0.84 are poured into must be equal. Taking pressure at level C in both arms of U
the limbs of a U tube until the difference in levels of their tube, we have
upper surfaces is 9 cm. What will be heights of their Pressure due to h cm of oil + pressure due to (20 – h) cm of
respective surfaces above the common surface in U tube ? mercury
What is the pressure at the common surface ? = pressure of 20 cm of liquid
-2
(g = 10 ms ). i.e., h × 0.9 × g + (20 – h) × 13.6 × g = 20 × 1.6 × g
Sol. Let h1, h2 be the heights of denser and lighter liquids above or 0.9 h + 272 - 13.6 h = 32
the common level. Then or 12.7 h = 240
h2 – h1 = 9.0 cm ...(i) or
At the common surface , h11g = h22g 240
h = 12.7 = 18.9 cm
i.e., h1 × 1.2 × g = h2 × 0.84 × g
@cbseinfinite
FLUID MECHANICS 52
3
Example - 5 (b) Gauge pressure, P = P – Pa = g h = (1.03 × 10 ) × 10 × 1000
5
The vessel shown in Fig. has two sections of area of cross = 103 × 10 Pa.
section A1 and A2. A liquid of density  fills both the (c) The pressure outside the submarine is P = Pa + g h and the
sections, upto a height h in each. Neglect atmospheric pressure inside the submarine is Pa.
pressure. Pressure difference on the window of the submarine = P – Pa
Find (a) the pressure at the base of vessel = g h.
(b) the force exerted by the liquid on the base of the vessel Force on the window = pressure difference × area of window
5 5
(c) the downward force exerted by the walls of the vessel = g h × A = 103 × 10 × (0.04) = 4.12 × 10 N.
at the level B. Example - 7
In a car lift, compressed air exerts a force F1 on a small
piston having a radius of 5.0 cm. This pressure is
transmitted to a second piston of radius 10.0 cm. If the
mass of the car to be lifted is 1350 kg, calculate F1. What is
the pressure necessary to accomplish this task?
–2
(g = 9.8 ms )
5
Sol. Here, F1 = ? ; r1 = m,
100
m = 1350 kg, F2 = 1350 × 9.8 N ;
10
r2 = m
Sol. (a) Pressure at the base of vessel is the pressure due to 100
height of liquid column = h + h = 2. It is given by
F1 F2 a  r2
As,  or F1  a F1   r 2 F2
1 1
P = 2 h g. a1 a 2 2 2
(b) The force exerted by the liquid on the base of the vessel,
r2 (5 / 100) 2
F = P × A2 = 2 h g A2 or F1  r 2 F2  (10 / 100)2  1350  9.8  3307 N
1
2
(c) Since the liquid exerts equal pressure in all directions, so
the force on the wall of vessel at level B in action is equal to F1 F1 3307 5
Pressure, P   = 4.21 × 10 Pa
the downward force exerted by the wall of vessel on the a1 r12 (22 / 7)(5 / 100) 2
liquid at level B
Example - 8
= Pressure × (A2 - A1) = h g × (A2 - A1) –3
A piece of pure gold of density 19.3 g cm is suspected to
Example - 6 be hollow inside. It weighs 38.250 g in air and 33.865 g in
At the depth of 1000 m in an ocean (a) what is the absolute water. Calculate the volume of the hollow portion of the
pressure ? (b) What is the gauge pressure ? (c) Find the gold, if any :
force acting on the window of area 20 cm × 20 cm of a –3
submarine at this depth, the interior of which is maintained Sol. Here, density of pure gold  = 19.3 g cm ;
at sea-level atmospheric pressure. The density of sea water
3 –3 –2 Mass of gold piece, M = 38.250 g
is 1.03 × 10 kg m , g = 10 ms . Atmospheric pressure
5
= 1.01 × 10 Pa.  Volume of the gold piece,
Sol. Here, M 38.25 3 3
5 3 –3 V =   19.3 cm = 1.982 cm
Pa = 1.01 × 10 Pa ; = 1.03 × 10 kg m ;
2
h = 1000 m; A = 0.20 × 0.20 = 0.04 m . mass of gold piece in water, = 33.865 g
(a) Absolute pressure P = Pa + g h Therefore apparent loss in weight of the gold piece in water
5 3 5
= 1.01 × 10 + 1.03 × 10 × 10 × 1000 = 104.01 × 10 Pa. = 38.250 – 33.865 = 4.385 g.
@cbseinfinite
FLUID MECHANICS 53
–3
As, density of water is 1 g cm , therefore, the volume of Example - 11
4.385 3
(a) There is a rectangular frame of wire measuring
displaced water = = 4.385 cm 20 cm × 13 cm. Calculate (i) the side of the square and
1
(ii) radius of the circle, which will have the same perimeter
 Volume of the hollow portion of the gold = 4.385 – 1.982 as the rectangular frame. (b) Show that of the three, the
3
= 2.403 cm circle has the maximum surface area.
Example - 9
Sol. (a) Perimeter of the rectangular frame = (20 + 13)2 = 66 cm
The tension in a string holding a solid block below the
Let l be the side of the square and r be the radius of the
surface of a liquid (of density greater than that of solid) as
square having the same perimeter as that of rectangular
shown in Fig. is T0, when the system is at rest. What will
frame.
be the tension in the string if the system has upward
acceleration a ? (i) For square, the perimeter of square = 4 l = 66 cm
or l = 66/4 = 16.5 cm
(ii) For circle, the perimeter of circle = 2 r = 66
66 66
or r =  = 10.5 cm.
2 2  22 / 7
(b) Area of rectangle = 20 × 13 = 260 sq. cm.

Area of square = 16.5 × 16.5 = 272.25 sq. cm.
22
Area of circle = r 
2 2
Sol. Let V be the volume of block of density . Let be the × (10.5) = 346.5 sq. cm
7
density of liquid. Mass of block, m = V .
Hence, out of the three, circle encloses the maximum area.
Initially for the equilibrium of block, we have
Example - 12
upward thrust = V g = T0 + V g or T0 = V ()g
If excess of pressure inside a soap bubble of radius 1 cm is
When the lift is accelerated upwards, then g  g + a, balanced by that due to column of oil (sp. gravity 0.8) 2 mm
so, T = V ()(g + a) high, find surface tension of soap bubble.
Therefore, T/T0 = [(g + a)/g] or T = T0[(g + a)/g] –2 3 –3
Sol. Here, r = 1 cm = 10 m ; density of oil,  = 0.8 × 10 kg m
–3
Example - 10 ; h = 2 mm = 2 × 10 m
–3
A wire ring of 30.0 mm radius resting flat on the surface of Pressure due to 2 mm column of oil, p = h  g = (2 × 10 )
3
the liquid is raised. The pull required is 3.03 g f more, before (0.8 × 10 ) × 9.8 = 2 × 0.8 × 9.8 Pa
the film breaks than it is after. Calculate the surface tension
4S
of the liquid. In case of a soap bubble, p = r
Sol. Here, r = 30.0 mm = 3 cm ; F = 3.03 g = 3.03 × 980 dyne. Since

pr 2  0.8  9.8 102 –2 –1
the liquid is touching the ring, both inside as well as outside, or S =  = 3.92 × 10 Nm
4 4
therefore, force acting on the ring due to surface tension is
given by Example - 13
F’ = 2 (S × circumference of ring) = 2 (S × 2  r) Find the height to which water will rise in a capillary tube of
–3 –1
1.5 mm diameter. Surface tension of water is 7.4 × 10 Nm .
22
=4Sr=4×S× × 3 dyne –3
7 Sol. Here, h = ? ; r = D/2 = 1.5/2 = 0.75 mm = 0.75 × 10 m ;
–3 –1 3 –3
S = 7.4 × 10 Nm . For water,  = 10 kg m and angle of
22 o
As F’ = F  4 × S × × 3 = 3.03 × 980 contact  = 0
7
2Scos  2  7.4 103  cos 0o
3.03  980  7 Now, h =  = 0.0021m
or S= = 78.76 dyne/cm. rg (0.75 103 ) 103  9.8
4  22  3
@cbseinfinite
FLUID MECHANICS 54
The terminal velocity of a copper ball of radius 2.0 mm Water flows through a horizontal pipe of which the cross-
o –1
falling through a tank of oil at 20 C is 6.5 cm s . Compute the section is not constant. The pressure is 1 cm of mercury
–1
o 3 –3
viscosity of the oil at 20 C. Density of oil is 1.5 × 10 kg m , where the velocity is 0.35ms . Find the pressure (in terms
–1
3
density of copper is 8.9 × 10 kg/m .
3 of mercury column) at a point where the velocity is 0.65ms .
–2 –1 –3
Sol. Here, v = 6.5 × 10 ms ; r = 2.0 × 10 m ; g = 9.8 m/s ,
2 Sol. At one point,
3
P1 = 1 cm of Hg = 0.01 m of Hg = 0.01 × (13.6 × 10 ) × 9.8 Pa ;
3 3
 = 8.9 × 10 kg/m . –1
v1 = 0.35 ms
3 3
 = 1.5 × 10 kg/m –1 3 –3
At another point, P2 = ?, v2 = 0.65 ms and  = 10 kg m .
2r 2 (  ) g 2  (2.0 103 )2  (8.9 1.5) 103  9.8 According to Bernoulli’s theorem
  
9v 9  (6.5 102 )
1 1
P1  v12  P2  v22
–1
= 9.9 × 10 Pa–s. 2 2
Example - 15 1
or P 2 = P1 –  (v 22  v12 )
A rain drop of radius 0.3 mm has a terminal velocity in air 2
–5 –2
1 m/s. The viscosity of air is 18 × 10 dyne cm s. Find the
3 1 3 2 2
viscous force on the rain drops in newton. = 0.01 × 13.6 × 10 × 9.8 – 2 × 10 × [(0.65) – (0.35) ]
–3 –1
Sol. Here, r = 0.3 mm = 0.3 × 10 m ; v = 1 ms 1182.8
 = 18 × 10–5 dyne cm–2 s = 18 × 10–5 Pa-s. = 1182.8 Pa = = 0.00887 m of Hg
9.8  (13.6 103 )
22 Example - 19
Viscous force, F = 6   r v = 6 ×
–6
× (18 × 10 )
7 Find the velocity of efflux of water from an orifice near the
–3 –5
× (0.3 ×10 ) × 1 = 1.018 × 10 N. bottom of a tank in which pressure is 500 gf/sq cm above
atmosphere.
Example - 16
At what speed will the velocity head of stream of water be 500 2 –2
equal to 40 cm ? Sol. Pressure at orifice, P = 500 gf/sq cm = × 9.8 × (100) Nm
1000
–2
= 500 × 98 Nm
v2
Sol. Here, velocity head, = 40 cm Let h be the depth of orifice below the surface.
2g
P 500  98
As, P = h  g,  h =  g  3
–1
 v  2g  40  2  980  40 = 280 cm s =5m
10  9.8
Example - 17
–1
At what speed will the velocity of a stream of water be The velocity of effux, v = 2 gh = 2  9.8  5 = 9.893 ms .
–2
equal to 20 cm of mercury column. Taking g = 10 ms . Example - 20
A bottle full of a liquid is fitted with a tight cork. Explain
Sol. Here, velocity head = 20 cm of Hg = 20 × 13.6 cm of water ; why a slight blow on the cork may be sufficient to break
–2 –2
g = 10 ms = 1000 cm s . the bottle.
v2
As velocity head = Sol. If the blow given to a cork of area of cross-section a exerts
2g a force F on cork, then increase in pressure on liquid is
= F/a. According to Pascal’s law, the increase in pressure at
v2
 20 × 13.6 = one part of liquid is communicated equally at all other parts
2 1000 of liquid. So the increase in force on the area A of the vessel
–1
is F’ = (F/a) A. Since A > > a, so F’ > > F. As a result of which
or v= 20 13.6  2 1000 = 737.56 cm/s = 7.3756 ms the bottle may break.
@cbseinfinite
FLUID MECHANICS 55
Example - 21 of a large iron ship, the weight of water displaced by the

A balloon filled with helium does not rise in air indefinitely ship is higher than the weight of ship, hence the ship floats
but halts after a certain height. (Neglect winds). in water.
Example - 26
Sol. In the beginning the balloon filled with helium rises in air
Does Archimede’s principle hold in a vessel in free fall ?
because weight of the air displaced by balloon is more than
the weight of the balloon and helium gas filled inside balloon. Sol. Archimede’s principle does not hold good in this situation
We know that the density of air and the value of acceleration as the vessel in free fall is in a condition of weightlessness,
due to gravity decreases with height. Due to it, the weight where the buoyant force accounting for Archimede’s
of air decreases at greater height. The balloon halts at such principle does not exist.
a height where the weight of the air displaced just equals to
Example - 27
the weight of helium gas and the balloon.
A block of wood floats in a bucket of water in a lift. Will the
Example - 22
block sink more or less if the lift starts accelerating up ?
The force required by a man to move his limbs immersed in
water is smaller than the force for the same movement in air. Sol. When the lift starts accelerating up, the block of wood will
float at the same level in a bucket of water in a lift. It is so
Sol. The upthurst on the limbs of a man is more when immersed because the equilibrium of floating body is unaffected by
in water than in air. As a result of it, the effective weight of variation is acceleration due to gravity ‘g’. However, thrust
limbs of a man is less in water than in air. Hence the force of liquid and weight of body both depend on g and will
required to move his limbs is less in water than that in air. increase equally.
Ice floats in water with about nine tenths of its volume A shot is obtained by pouring molten lead through narrow
submerged. What is the fractional volume submerged for holes into water from certain height. The falling lead
an ice berg floating on a fresh water lake of a (hypothetical) solidifies and takes the form of small spheres. Explain the
planet whose gravity is ten times that of the earth ? phenomenon.
Sol. The fractional volume of ice submerged in water is Sol. The molten lead comes out of a narrow hole in the form of a
independent of the value of acceleration due to gravity ‘g’. fine stream. When it falls from a height into a vessel
So, it is nine tenths on new planet also. containing cold water, it breaks into spherical drops due to
thrust of water and surface tension. These are cooled on
Example - 24
entering the water and thus solidify into small spheres.
What is the fractional volume of an ice cube in a pail of
Example - 29
water produced in an enclosure which is freely falling
under gravity ? Why does oil spread over the surface of water ?
Sol. For a free fall, the effective value of acceleration due to Sol. Surface tension of oil is less than that of water. When oil is
gravity is zero. Therefore, there will be no weight of ice cube dropped on the surface of water, the force of surface tension
and hence no upward thrust on ice cube. As a result of it, of water being larger than that of oil, stretches the oil drops
the ice cube can float with any value of fractional volume on all sides. Hence, the oil spreads over the surface of water.
submerged. Example - 30
Example - 25 Why the tip of the nib of a pen is split ?
Explain why a small iron needle sinks in water while a
large iron ship floats ? Sol. The tip of the nib of a pen is split in order to provide a
capillary which helps the ink to rise to the end of the nib and
Sol. A body will float in a liquid if the weight of the liquid enables it to write continuously.
displaced by the immersed part of the body in liquid is equal
to weight of body. In case of iron needle, the weight of Example - 31
water displaced by needle is much less than the weight of It is better to wash the clothes in hot soap solution.
needle, hence, the iron needle sinks into the water. In case Why ?
@cbseinfinite
FLUID MECHANICS 56
Sol. The soap solution has less surface tension as compared to Sol. Because in strameline flow all particles maiontain their
ordinary water and its surface tension decreases further on constant speed and the relative separation between them
heating. The hot soap solution can, therefore, spread over Example - 37
large surface area and as such it has more wetting power. It
What happens to the pressure of an ideal liquid when it
is on account of this property that hot soap solution can
passes through a region where its speed increases ?
penetrate and clean the clothes better than the ordinary water.
Example - 32 Sol. The pressure of an ideal liquid decreases when it passes
Why surface tension concept is only held for liquids and through a region where it speed increases, according to
not for gases which are also fluids ? Bernoulli’s theorem.
Example - 38
Sol. We know that the intermolecular distance between the gas
molecules is quite large as compared to that of liquid. Due The shapes of cars and planes are streamlined. Why ?
to it, the forces of cohesion in the gas molecules are very
Sol. When a body moves through a fluid, its motion is opposed
small and these are quite large for liquids. Therefore, the
concept of surface tension is applicable to liquids but not by the force of fluid friction, which increases with the speed
to gases. of the body. When cars and planes, move through air, their
motion is opposed by the air friction, which in turn, depend
Example - 33 upon the shape of the body. It is due to this reason that the
Rain drops falling under gravity do not acquire very high cars or planes are given such shapes (known as stream-
velocity. Why ? lined shapes) so that air friction is minimum. Rather the
movement of air layers on the upper and lower side of
Sol. When a rain drop falls under gravity through a viscous
streamlined shaped body provides a lift which helps in
medium (say air) a viscous drag force acts on it in a direction
increasing the speed of the car.
opposite to that of motion. According to Stoke’s law, this
viscous drag force goes on increasing with the increasing Example - 39
velocity of the drop till a stage comes when the total Why two holes are made to empty an oil tin ?
downward force on the drop is just balanced by the upward
viscous drag force. At this stage, there is no net force to Sol. When oil comes out through a tin with one hole, the pressure
accelerate rain drop. Hence the rain drop starts moving with inside the tin becomes less than the atmospheric pressure.
uniform velocity. This velocity is called ‘terminal velocity’. This stops the oil from flowing out. When two holes are
Example - 34 made in the tin, air keeps on entering the tin through the
A bigger rain drop falls faster than smaller one. Why ? other hole and maintains pressure inside.
Example - 40
Sol. When the rain drops of different sizes fall under gravity,
An air bubble of 1 mm diameter rises in water with terminal
they ultimately move with their terminal velocities due to –3
velocity. If viscosity of water is 1.0 × 10 decapoise and
viscous drag force of air. As terminal velocity of a drop –3
density of air is 1.3 kgm , calculate the terminal velocity of
varies as the square of its radius, therefore a bigger drop
the air bubble.
will have greater terminal velocity and hence fall faster than
a small rain drop.
Sol. Given  = 1.0 × 10 decapoise, density of water  = 10 kg
–3 3
Example - 35 –3 –3
m , diameter of bubble, d = 1 mm = 1 × 10 m
Machine parts are jammed in winter. Why ?
2 r 2 (  )g
Sol. A lubricating oil is generally used between the various parts Using the formula, V =
9 
of a machine to reduce the friction. In winter, since the
temperature is low, the viscosity of oil between the machine
2 (0.5 103 )2 (103  1.3) 9.8
parts increases considerably, resulting in jamming of the We have v 
9 1.0 103
machine parts.
–1
Example - 36 = 0.54 ms .
Two stream lines of fluid can not cut each other. Why ?
@cbseinfinite
FLUID MECHANICS 57
A cylinder of height 20 m is completely filled with water. Why does mercury not wet glass ?
–1
Find the velocity of efflux of water (in ms ) through a
small hole on the side wall of the cylinder near its bottom. Sol. This is because the force of cohesion between mercury
–2
Given g = 10ms . molecules is stronger than the force of adhesion between
the molecules of glass and mercury.
–2
Sol. Given h = 20 m, g = 10ms , Velocity of efflux = ?
Example - 48
Velocity of efflux = 2gh Explain the working of mercury barometer to measure the
atmospheric pressure.
–1
2 10  20 = 20 ms .
Example - 42
How can we suck soft drink through a straw ?
Sol. When we suck the air in the straw, the Pressure inside straw
becomes less than atmospheric preasure. Due to this presure
difference, the soft drink rises up through the straw.
Example - 43
Why does water not flow out of dropper unless the rubber
ball is pressed ?
Sol. The upward air pressure at the tip of the dropper is equal to Sol. (i) The pressure of the atmosphere at any point is equal to
the pressure of the liquid column in it. When we press the the weight of a column per air of unit cross sectional area
rubber ball, the downward pressure increases making the extending from that point to the top of the atmosphere.
liquid flow out.
(ii) A long glass tube closed at one end and filled with mercury
Example - 44 is inverted into a trough of mercury. This device is known
A block of wood is floating in a lake. What is the apparent as mercury barometer.
weight of the floating block ? (iii) The space above the mercury column in the tube contains
only mercury. Vapour whose pressure P is so small that it
Sol. The apparent weight of the block is equal to zero because
may be neglected.
the weight of the block acting vertically downward is
balanced by the buoyant force acting, on the block upward. (iv) The pressure inside the column at point A must be equal to
the pressure at point B which is at the same level.
Example - 45
 Pa = gh
Why is wet ink absorbed by a blotting paper ?
where is the density of mercury and h is height of mercury
Sol. Blotting paper has fine pores which act as capillaries. The column in the tube.
ink rises in these capillarises. Thus, the ink is absorbed by (v) It is found that the mercury column in the barometer has a
the blotting paper. height of about 76 cm at sea level equivalent to one
Example - 46 atmosphere.
Why does water wet glass ? (vi) Hence,
Pa = 0.76 × Density of mercury × g
Sol. This is because the force of adhesion between the 3
molecules of water and the glass is stronger than the force  Pa = 0.76 × 13.6 × 10 × 9.8
5
of cohesion between water molecules.  Pa = 1.013 × 10 pa
@cbseinfinite
FLUID MECHANICS 58
Example - 48 Ans. (d)
If a capillary tube is tilted to 45° and 60° from the vertical Sol. key : considering the fact that density of coin is very high in
then the ratio of length l1? and l2? of liquid columns in it comparison of water and wood.
will be - Density of coin is more so it was applying considerable
force on wood before falling in water.
(a) 1 : 2 (b) 2 :1
But once it'll fall, wood can't apply same force alone so
(c) 1 : 2 (d) 2 : 1 wood will come a little up as result L will decrease.
Ans. (a) when coin falls in water wood goes up so displaced volume
decreases and coin has high density so it's volume is low
The expression for the capillary rise in a tube is given by,
and it doesn't displace liquid that much. As a result H will
also decrease.
2T cos 
H
gr Example - 50
A rod of length 6 m has a mass of 12 kg. If it is hinged at one
where  is the contact angle and not the angle of tilt. end at a distance of 3 m below a water surface,
Thus, for all parameters constant, (i) What weight must be attached to other end of the rod
so that 5 m of the rod is submerged?
at 60° (ii) Find the magnitude and direction of the force exerted
l1=Hcos60° = H/2 by the hinge on the rod. The specific gravity of the
material of the rod is 0.5.
At 45°
Ans. 5.67
H Sol. Let AC be the submerged part of the rod AB hinged at A as
l2=Hcos45°  shown in figure. G is the centre of gravity of the rod and
2
G  is the centre of buoyancy through which force of
Therefore the ratio of the 2 lengths is given by,
buoyancy FB acts vertically upwards.
l1 1

l2 2
Example - 49
A wooden block, with a coin placed on its top, floats in
water as shown in the fig. the distance l and h are shown
there. After some time the coin falls into the water, then
Since the rod is uniform,

5
 12  10 kg
6
(a) l decreases and h increases [Because AB = 6 m and AC = 5 m]
(b) l increases and h decreases The buoyancy force on rod at G  is
(c) Both l and h increases 10

FB   20 kg weight
0.5
(d) Both l and h decreases
@cbseinfinite
FLUID MECHANICS 59
(i) Let x be the weight attached at the end B. Balancing Buoyancy force on rod at the centre of gravity of
torques about a, we get submerged part is
W  AG  x  AB  FB  AG  FB   2l – x  A  dg …(2)
Let N be the upward force on rod by the hinge then for
12  3  x  6  20   5 2  [As
equilibrium of rod we have
AG   5 2 ] N  FB  W
Solving we get x = 2.33 kg
or N  W – FB
(ii) Suppose R be the upward reaction acting on the
hinge, then in equilibrium position, we have 3
or  lAdg –  2l – x  Adg
W + x = FB + R 2
or R – W + x – FB
3 
= 12 + 2.33 –20  Adg  l – 2l  x 
 2 
= –5.67 kg. wt
Negative sign shows that the reaction at the hinge is  l
 Adg  x –  …(3)
acting in the downward direction. The magnitude of the  2
reaction is 5.67 kg. wt.
Now as rod is also in rotational equilibrium, taking net
Example - 51 zero torque about point A, we have.
A thin uniform rod of length 2l and specific gravity 3/4 is 2l – x
hinged at one end to a point height l/2 above the surface of FB  cos  – W  l cos   0 …(4)
2
water, with the other end immersed. Find the inclination of From equation (1), (2) and (4), we have
rod in equilibrium.
2l – x
Ans. 30° FB  cos  – W  l cos   N  2l cos   0  0 …(5)
2
Sol. The situation is shown in figure. From equation (1), (2) and (4), we have
 2l – x 
2
3  l
or Adg – l 2 Adg  2lAdg  x –   0
2 2  2
 l
or  2l – x  – 3l  4l  x –   0
2 2
 2 
or 4l 2  x 2 – 4lx – 3l 2  4lx – 2l 2  0
or x 2 – l 2  0
or x 2  l 2
or x  l
l 2 1
Thus we have sin    or   30
l 2
Let the length of rod outside water is x and its cross sectional
area is A. Here weight of rod is
3
W  2lA  dg …(1)
4
[d = density of water]
@cbseinfinite
FLUID MECHANICS 60

Introduction to Fluids & Hydrostatic Pressure 6.
2
A tube 1 cm in cross section is attached to the top of a
2
1. Pressure at a point inside a liquid does not depend on: vessel 1 cm high and of cross section 100 cm . Water is
(a) the depth of the point below the surface of the liquid poured into the system filling it to a depth of 100 cm above
(b) the nature of the liquid the bottom of the vessel as shown in the figure. Take g
(c) the acceleration due to gravity at that point –2
= 10 ms . Find the correct statement.
(d) the shape of the containing vessel
2. Two stretched membranes of area 2 cm2 and 3 cm2 are placed
in a liquid at the same depth. The ratio of the pressure on
them is:
(a) 1 : 1 (b) 2 : 3
(c) 3 : 2 (d) 22 : 32
3. A dam for water reservoir is built thicker at the bottom
than at the top because:
(a) pressure of water is very large at the bottom due to its
large depth
(b) water is likely to have more density at the bottom due
to its large depth (a) The force exerted by the water against the bottom of
(c) quantity of water at the bottom is large the vessel is 100 N.
(d) none of the above (b) The weigth of water in the system is 1.99 N.
4. In the given figure shown.
(d) Neither (a) nor (b) is correct.
7. A tube of uniform cross-section has two vertical portions
connected with a horizontal thin tube 8 cm long at their
lower ends. Enough water to occupy 22 cm of the tube is
poured into one branch and enough oil of specific gravity
0.8 to occupy 22 cm is poured into the other. Assuming
that interface remains stable find the distance ( in cm) of
(a) p1 > p0 (b) p > p0 the common surface E of the two liquids from point B.
(c) p1 > p2 (d) p = 0
5. A U-tube contains water and oil separated by mercury.
The mercury columns in the two arms are at the same level
with 10 cm of water in one arm and 12.5 cm of oil in the
other, as shown in figure. What is the relative density
of oil ?
Force Exerted by Fluids on the Walls of the Container &

Pascal's Law
8. The height to which a cylindrical vessel be filled with a
homogeneous liquid, to make the average force with which
the liquid presses the side of the vessel equal to the force
exerted by the liquid on the bottom of the vessel, is equal to:
(a) half of the radius of the vessel
(b) radius of the vessel
(a) 0.8 (b) 1.0 (c) one-fourth of the radius of the vessel
(c) 1.25 (d) none of these (d) three-fourths of the radius of the vessel
@cbseinfinite
FLUID MECHANICS 61
9. A uniformly tapering vessel is filled with a liquid of density

F 2F
900 kg/m3. The force that acts on the base of the vessel (a) (b)
A A
due to the liquid is: (g = 10 m/s2)
4F
(c) (d) 0
A
13. A tank 5 m high is half filled with water and then is filled
to the top with oil of denisty 0.85 g/cm3. The pressure at
the bottom of the tank, due to these liquids, is:
(a) 1.85 gf/cm2 (b) 89.25 gf/cm2
(c) 462.5 gf/cm2 (d) 500 gf/cm2
(a) 3.6 N (b) 7.2 N 14. A piston of cross-sectional area 100 cm2 is used in a
(c) 9.0 N (d) 14.4 N hydraulic press to exert a force of 107 dyne on the water.
10. Two vessels A and B of different shapes have the same base The cross-sectional area of the other piston which supports
area and are filled with water upto the same height h (see an object having a mass 2000 kg is:
figure). The force exerted by water on the base is FA for (a) 100 cm2 (b) 109 cm2
vessel A and FB for vessel B. The respective weights of the
(c) 2 × 104 cm2 (d) 2 × 1010 cm2
vessels are WA and WB. Then 2
15. A cylindrical jar of cross-sectional area 0.01 m is filled
with water to a height of 50 cm. It carries a tight-fitting
piston of negligible mass. What is the pressure at the bottom
of the jar when a mass of 1 kg is placed on the piston?
–2
Take g = 10 ms .
5
(a) 10 Pa (b) 6000 Pa
(c) 5000 Pa (d) 1000 Pa
(a) FA > FB ; WA > WB (b) FA = FB ; WA > WB
16. A given shaped glass tube having uniform cross-section is
(c) FA = FB ; WA < WB (d) FA > FB ; WA = WB filled with water and is mounted on a rotatable shaft as
11. A hydraulic lift is used to lift a car of mass 3000 kg. The shown in fig. If the tube is rotated with a constant angular
cross-sectional area of the lift on which the car is supported velocity  then:
–2 2
is 5 × 10 m . What is the pressure on the smaller piston,
if both the pistons are at the same horizontal level ? Take g
–2
= 10 ms .
5 5
(a) 6 × 10 Pa (b) 5 × 10 Pa
5 5
(c) 4 × 10 Pa (d) 3 × 10 Pa
12. Figure shown water filled in a symmetrical container. Four
pistons of equal area A are used at the four openings to
keep the water in equilibrium. Now an additional force F
is applied at each piston. The increase in the pressure at
the centre of the container due to this addition is
(a) water levels in both A and B go up

(b) water level in section A goes up and that in B comes
down
(c) water level in section A comes down and that in B it
goes up
(d) water level remain same in both sections.
@cbseinfinite
FLUID MECHANICS 62
Buoyancy 24. A block of wood is floating in a lake. The apparent weight

of the floating block is
17. When a body is wholly or partially immersed in a liquid it
appears to lose weight. This loss of weight is equal to the (a) equal to its true weight
weight of: (b) less than its true weight
(a) water displaced by the body (c) more than its true weight
(b) liquid displaced by the body (d) equal to zero
(c) equal volume of water
25. A body weights W in air and it loses its weight by 25% in
(d) equal volume of liquid
water. The relative density of the body is
18. Two pieces of metal when immersed in a liquid have equal
(a) 4 (b) 1/4
upthrust on them; then:
(a) both pieces must have equal weights (c) 3/4 (d) 4/3
(b) both pieces must have equal densities 26. A body floats with (1/3) of its volume outside water and
(c) both pieces must have equal volumes immersed (3/4) of its volume outside another liquid. The density of
(d) both are located at the same depth the other liquid is:
19. When a body is weighed in a liquid, the loss in its weight (a) (9/4) g/cc (b) (4/9) g/cc
depends upon: (c) (8/3) g/cc (d) (3/9) g/cc
(a) volume of the body (b) mass of the body 27. A wooden piece floats half submerged in a tub of water. If
(c) shape of the body (d) CG of the body the system is transferred to a lift ascending with
20. An iron ball is weighed in air and then in water by a spring acceleration the wooden piece will:
balance: (a) sink a little more (b) rise a little
(a) its weight in air is more than in water
(c) remain half submerged (d) sink to the bottom
(b) its weight in water is more than in air
28. A body is just floating on the surface of a liquid. The density
(c) its weight is same both in air and water
of the body is same as that of the liquid. The body is slightly
(d) its weight is zero in water
pushed down. What will happen to the body?
21. A body weighs 40 g in air. If its volume is 10 cc, in water
(a) It will come back slowly to its earlier position.
it will weigh:
(a) 30 g (b) It will remain submerged where it is left.
(b) 40 g (c) It will sink.
(c) 50 g (d) It will come out violently.
(d) data are insufficient to calculate 29. A block of metal (density 7 g/cc) of size 5 cm × 5 cm × 5
22. The reading of a spring balance when a block is suspended cm is weighed completely submerged in water. What will
from it in air is 60 N. This reading is changed to 40 N be its apparent weight (density of water = 1 g/cc)?
when the block is submerged in water. The specific gravity (a) (6 × 5 × 5 × 5)g (b) (4 × 4 × 4 × 7)g
of the block must therefore be:
(c) (7 × 5 × 5 × 5)g (d) (4 × 4 × 4 × 6)g
(a) 3 (b) 2
30. A beaker containing water weighs 100 g. It is placed on
(c) 6 (d) 3/2
the pan of a balance and a piece of metal weighing 70 g
23. A vessel with water is placed on a weighing pan and reads
and having a volume of 10 cm3 is placed inside the water
600 g. Now a ball of 40 g and density 0.80 g/cc is sunk
in the beaker. The weight of the beaker and the metal would
into the water with a pin as shown in fig., keeping it sunk.
be:
The weighing pan will show a reading.
(a) 170 g (b) 160 g
(c) 100 g (d) 30 g
31. A boy carries a fish in one hand and a bucket of water in
the other hand; if he places the fish in the bucket, the weight
now carried by him:
(a) is less than before (b) is more than before
(a) 600 g (b) 550 g (c) is the same as before (d) depends upon his speed
(c) 650 g (d) 632 g
@cbseinfinite
FLUID MECHANICS 63
39. A boat carrying a number of large stones is floating in a

9 th water tank. What will happen to the water level if the stones
32. An ice cube floats on water in a beaker with of its
10 are unloaded into the water? The water level
volume submerged under water. What fraction of its (a) remains unchanged
volume will be submerged if the beaker of water is taken
th (b) rises
to the moon where the gravity is 1/6 that on the earth ?
(c) falls
(a) 9/10 (b) 27/50
(c) 2/3 (d) zero (d) rises till half the number of stones are unloaded
then begins to fall
33. When a ship floats on water:
40. A jar is filled with two non-mixing liquids 1 and 2 having
(a) it displaces no water
densities 1 and 2 respectively. A solid ball, made of a
(b) the weight of water displaced is equal to the weight of
material of density 3, is dropped in the jar. It comes to
the ship
equilibrium in the position shown in the fig. Which of the
(c) the weight of water displaced is lesser than the weight
following is true for 1, 2 and 3 ?
of the ship
(d) the weight of water displaced is greater than the weight
of the ship
34. A hydrogen-filled balloon stops rising after it has attained
a certain height in the sky. This happens because
(a) the atmospheric pressure decreases with height and
becomes zero when maximum height is attained
(b) the temperature of the air at maximum height equals that
of the hydrogen in the balloon
(c) viscous effects become negligible
(d) at the highest point, the density of air is such that the
buoyant force on the balloon equals its weight
35. Two solids A and B float in a liquid. It is observed that A
floats with half its volume immersed and B floats with (2/
3) of its volume immersed. Compare the densities of A (a) 3 < 1 < 2 (b) 1 > 3 > 2
and B:
(c) 1 > 2 > 3 (d) 1 < 3 < 2
(a) 4 : 3 (b) 2 : 3
(c) 3 : 4 (d) 1 : 3 41. A metallic sphere floats in an immiscible mixture of water
(w = 103 kg/m3) and a liquid (l = 13.5 × 103 kg/m3) such
36. A raft of wood (density 600 g/m3) of mass 120 kg floats in
water. How much weight can be put on the raft to make it 4 1
that its th portion is in water and th portion is in
just sink? 5 5
(a) 120 kg (b) 200 kg liquid. Density of the metal is:
(c) 40 kg (d) 80 kg (a) 4.5 × 103 kg/m3 (b) 4.0 × 103 kg/m3
37. A boat 3m long and 2 m wide is floating in a lake. When a (c) 3.5 × 103 kg/m3 (d) 1.9 × 103 kg/m3
man climbs over it, it sinks 1 cm further into water. The
42. A vessel contains an immiscible mixture of water and a
mass of the man is:
liquid of density 0.8 gm/cc. A cube of side 10 cm is placed
(a) 60 kg (b) 64 kg in the mixture and it is observed that the water-liquid
(c) 70 kg (d) 72 kg interface is at the middle of cube height. Mass of the cube
38. A man is sitting in a boat which is floating in a pond. If the is:
man drinks some water from the pond, the level of water (a) 420 gm (b) 680 gm
in the pond will: (c) 225 gm (d) 900 gm
(a) rise a little (b) sink a little
(c) remain stationary (d) none of these
@cbseinfinite
FLUID MECHANICS 64
43. A wooden block, with a coin placed on its top, floats in 47. An iceberg is floating partially immersed in sea water. If
water as shown in the figure. The distance h and l are shown the density of sea water is 1.03 g/cc and that of ice is 0.92
there: g/cc, the fraction of the total volume of iceberg above the
level of sea water is:
(a) 8% (b) 11%
(c) 34% (d) 89%
48. A metal ball of density 7800 kg/m3 is suspected to have a
large number of inner cavities. It weighs 9.8 kg when
weighed directly on a balance and 1.5 kg less when
immersed in water. The fraction by volume of the cavities
After sometime, the coin falls into the water. Then: in the metal ball is apporximately:
(a) both l and h increase (a) 20% (b) 30%
(b) both l and h decrease (c) 16% (d) 11%
(c) l decreases and h increases Accelerated Fluids
(d) l increases and h decreases 49. A container containing water has a constant acceleration
44. A piece of ice floats in a vessel with water above which a ‘a’ in the horizontal drection. Free surface of water gets
layer of lighter oil is poured. When the whole of ice melts, sloped with the horizontal at angle:
which one of the following statements will be true? 1  g  1  g 
(a) The level of the interface will remain the same. (a) cos   (b) sin  
a a
(b) The total level of the liquids in the vessel will rise.
1  a  1  a 
(c) The total level of the liquids in the vessel will fall while (c) tan   (d) sin  
g g
the level of interface will go up.
50. The minimum horizontal acceleration of the container so
(d) The level of interface as well as the total level of liquids
that the pressure at the point A of the container becomes
in the vessel will fall.
atmospheric is (the tank is of sufficient height)
45. A cubical block of side 10 cm floats at the interface of an
oil and water. The pressure above that of atmosphere at
the lower face of the block is
3 4
(a) g (b) g
2 3
4 3
(a) 200 N/m2 (b) 680 N/m2 (c) g (d) g
2 4
(c) 400 N/m2 (d) 800 N/m2 51. A sealed tank containing a liquid of density  moves with
46. A sphere of solid material of specific gravity 8 has a horizontal acceleration a as shown in the figure. The
concentric spherical cavity and just sinks in water. Then, difference in pressure between two points A and B will be
the ratio of the radius of the cavity to the outer radius of
the sphere must be
3 3
3 5
(a) (b)
2 2
3
7 2
(c) (d) (a) hg (b) lg
3
2 7
(c) hg – la (d) hg + la
@cbseinfinite
FLUID MECHANICS 65
52. A U-tube of base length ‘l’ filled with same volume of two 56. Bernoulli’s theorem is a consequence of
liquids of densities  and 2 is moving with an acceleration (a) conservation of mass
‘a’ on the horizontal plane. If the height difference between
(b) conservation of energy
the two surfaces (open to atmosphere) becomes zero, then
the height h is given by (c) conservation of linear momentum
(d) conservation of angular momentum
57. The velocity of efflux of a liquid through an orifice in the
bottom of a tank does not depend upon
(a) density of liquid
(b) height of the liquid column above orifice
(c) acceleration due to gravity
(d) None of these
58. A hole is made at the bottom of the tank filled with water
a 3a (density = 1000 kg/m3). If the total pressure at the bottom
(a) 2g  (b) 2g  of the tank is three atmospheres (1 atmosphere = 105 N/
m2), then the velocity of efflux is
a 2a
(c) g  (d) 3g  (a) 400 m / s (b) 200 m / s
Miscellaneous Cases in Fluid Statics & Types of Fluid Flows (c) 600 m / s (d) 500 m / s
& Equation of Continuity & Bernoulli's Equation
53. In the given figure, the velocity v3 will be
59.  
A small hole is made at a height of h '  1 / 2 m from the
bottom of a cylindrical water tank and at a depth of
h  2 m form the upper level of water in the tank. The

distance where the water emerging from the hole strikes
the ground is
(a) 2 m/s (b) 4 m/s

(c) 1 m/s (d) 3 m/s (a) 2 2 m (b) 1 m
54. Water is flowing through two horizontal pipes of different
diameters whcih are connected together. The diameter of
the two pipes are 3 cm and 6 cm respectively. If the speed 60. The level of water in a tank is 5 m high. A hole of area 1
of water in the narrower tube is 4 m/s. Then, the speed of cm2 is made at the bottom of the tank. The rate of leakage
water in the wider tube is : of water from the hole is (g = 10 m/s2)
(a) 10–3 m3/s (b) 10–4 m3/s3
(a) 16 m/s (b) 1 m/s
(c) 10 m /s
3
(d) 10–2 m3/s
(c) 4 m/s (d) 2 m/s
61. A water tank standing on the floor has two small holes
55. A cylinder of height 20 m is completely filled with water. punched in the vertical wall one above the other. The holes
–1
The velocity of efflux of water (in ms ) through a small are 2.4 cm and 7.6 cm above the floor. If the jest of water
hole on the side wall of the cylinder near its bottom, is from the holes hit the floor at the same point, then the
(a) 10 (b) 20 height of water in the tank is:
(c) 25.5 (d) 5 (a) 10 cm (b) 5 cm

(c) 20 cm (d) 48 cm
@cbseinfinite
FLUID MECHANICS 66
62. The pressure of water in a pipe when tap is closed is 5.5 × 67. The ratio of the terminal velocities of two drops of radii R
105 N/m2. When tap gets open, pressure reduces to 5 × 105 and R/2 is
N/m2. The velocity with which water comes out on opening (a) 2 (b) 1
the tap is :
(c) 1/2 (d) 4
(a) 10 m/s (b) 5 m/s
68. Units of coefficient of viscosity are
(c) 20 m/s (d) 15 m/s
(a) Nms–1 (b) Nm2s–1
63. A tank is filled with water up to height H. When a hole is
made at a distance h below the level of water. What will (c) Nm–2s (d) None of these
be horizontal range of water jet ? 69. The terminal velocity v of a small steel ball of radius r
falling under gravity through a column of viscous liquid
(a) 2 h (H  h) (b) 4 h (H  h)
of coeffcient of viscosity  depends on mass of the ball m,
acceleration due to gravity g, coefficient of viscossity 
(c) 4 h (H  h) (d) 2 h (H  h)
and radius r. Which of the following relations is
64. Water is flowing at a speed of 1.5 ms–1 through a horizontal dimensionally correct ?
tube of cross-sectional area 10–2m2 and you are trying to
stop the flow by your palm. Assuming that the water stops mgr
(a) v  (b) v  mgr
immediately after hitting the palm, the minimum force that 
you must exert should be (density of water = 103 kgm–3).
(a) 15 N (b) 22.5 N mg mg
(c) v  (d) v 
(c) 33.7 N (d) 45 N r 
65. A horizontally oriented tube AB of length l = 2.5 m rotates 70. A rain drop of radius r falls in air with a terminal speed vt.
with a constant anglular velocity   5rad s about a What is the terminal speed of a rain drop of radius 2r ?
stationary vertical axis OO’ passing through the end A. (a) vt/2 (b) vt
Initially the tube is filled with an ideal fluid. The end A of (c) 2vt (d) 4vt
the tube is open, the closed end B has a very small of
orifice. Find the velocity of the fluid (in m/s) relative to 71. Eight spherical rain drops of the same mass and radius are
–1
the tube when the liquid column length in tube reduces to falling down with a terminal speed of 6 cm s . If they
h = 1 m. coalesce to form one big drop, what will be its terminal
speed ? Neglect the buoyancy due to air.
–1 –1
(a) 1.5 cms (b) 6 cms
–1 –1
(c) 24 cms (d) 32 cms
72. Two equal drops of water are falling through air with a
steady velocity v. If the drops coalesce, then new velocity
will be :
(a) 2 v (b) 2v
v
(c) 22/3 v (d)
Applications of Fluid Dynamics & Viscosity 2
66. Spherical balls of radius R are falling in a viscous fluid of 73. As the temperature of water increases, its viscosity
viscosity  with a velocity . The retarding viscous force
(a) remains unchanged
acting on the spherical ball is
(a) directly proportional to R but inversely proportional to . (b) decreases
(b) directly proportional to both radius R and velocity . (c) increases

(c) inversely proportional to both radius R and velocity . (d) increases or decreases depending on the external
(d) inversely proportional to R but directly proportional pressure
to velocity .
@cbseinfinite
FLUID MECHANICS 67
74. The rate of flow of liquid in a tube of radius r, length l, 80. Two small drops of mercury each of radius r form a single
whose ends are maintained at a pressure difference p is large drop. The ratio of surface energy before and after
this change is :
Qpr 4
V , where  is coefficient of the viscosity and Q (a) 2 : 22/3 (b) 22/3 : 1

(c) 2 : 1 (d) 1 : 2
is :
81. Which of the following is not the unit of surface tension?
(a) 8 (b) 1/8
(a) Newton/metre (b) Joule/(metre)2
(c) 16 (d) 1/16
(c) kg/(second)2 (d) 3Watt/metre
75. A viscous fluid is flowing through a cylindrical tube. The
82. Surface tension is due to
velocity distribution of the fluid is best represented by the
diagram (a) friction forces between molecules
(b) cohesive forces between molecules
(c) adhesive forces between molecules
(a) (b) (d) gravitational forces
83. The spiders and insects move and run on the surface of
water without sinking, because
(a) elastic membrane is formed on water due to property
(c) (d) None of these of surface tension
(b) spiders and insects are lighter
76. If the terminal speed of a sphere of gold (density (c) spiders and insects swim on water
–3 –1
= 19.5 kgm ) is 0.2 ms in a viscous liquid (density = 1.5 (d) spiders and insects experience upthrust
–3
kgm ), find the terminal speed of a sphere of silver (density 84. Small droplets of liquid are usually more spherical in shape
–3
= 10.5 kg/m ) of the same size in the same liquid. than larger drops of the same liquid because
(a) force of surface tension is equal and opposite to the
–1 –1
(a) 0.4 ms (b) 0.133 ms force of gravity
(c) 0.1 ms
–1
(d) 0.2 ms
–1 (b) force of surface tension predominates the force of
3 gravity
77. The terminal speed of a sphere of god (density 19.5 × 10
–3 3 –3 (c) force of gravity predominates the force of surface
kgm ) in a viscous liquid (density 1.5 × 10 kg m ) is 0.2
–1 tension
ms . What is the terminal speed (in m/s) of a sphere of
3 –3
silver 9density 10.5 × 10 kg m ) of the same size in the (d) force of gravity and force of surface tension act in the
same liquid? same direction and are equal
85. Hair of shaving brush cling together when it is removed
Surface Tension
from water due to
78. The water droplets in free fall are spherical due to (a) force of attraction between hair
(a) gravity (b) surface tension
(b) viscosity (c) viscosity of water
(c) surface tension (d) characteristic property of hair
(d) intermolecular attraction 86. Two water droplets coalesce to form a large drop. In this
process,
79. Tiny insects can float and walk on the surface of water
due to (a) energy is liberated
(a) buoyancy alone (b) energy is absorbed
(c) energy is neither liberated nor absorbed
(b) surface tension alone
(d) a small amount of mass is converted into energy in
(c) both buoyancy and surface tension
accordance with Einstein’s mass-energy equivalence
(d) neither buoyancy nor surface tension 2
relation E = mc .
@cbseinfinite
FLUID MECHANICS 68
6
87. A mercury drop of radius 1 cm is sprayed into 10 drops 95. The excess pressure across a soap bubble of radius r is
of equal size. The energy expended in joule is (surface p = 4/r, where  is the surface tension of soap solution.
–3 –1
tension of mercury is 460 × 10 Nm ) What is the excess pressure across an air bubble of the
(a) 0.057 (b) 5.7 same radius r formed inside a container of soap solution?
–4 –6
(c) 5.7 × 10 (d) 5.7 × 10  2
(a) (b)
88. If work W is done in blowing a bubble of radius R from r r
soap solution, then the work done in blowing a bubble of
radius 2R from the same solution is 4
(c) (d) none of these
(a) W/2 (b) 2W r
96. Two soap bubbles of radii r1 and r2 equal to 4cm and 5cm
1
(c) 4W (d) 2 W are touching each other over a common surface S1S2
3
(shown in figure). Its radius will be :
89. If the surface tension of soap Sol. is , what is the work
done in blowing soap bubble of radius r ?
2 2
(a) r  (b) 2r 
2 2
(c) 4r  (d) 8r 
90. The average mass of rain drops is 3.0×10–5 kg and their
average terminal velocity is 9 m/s. Calculate the energy
transferred by rain to each square metre of the surface at a
place which receives 100 cm of rain in a year. (a) 4 cm (b) 20 cm
(a) 4.05 ×10 J 4
(b) 3.5 ×10 J 5
(c) 5 cm (d) 4.5 cm
(c) 9.0 ×10 J 4
(d) 3.0 ×10 J 5
Angle of Contact
91. The work done to break up a drop of a liquid of radius R 97. If the angle of contact is less than 90°, then pressure just
and surface tension  into eight drops, all of the same size, is inside the surface of a meniscus
2 2
(a) 4R (b) 2R (a) is less than atmospheric pressure
1 1 (b) is greater than atmospheric pressure

2 2
(c) R (d) R (c) is same as the atmospheric pressure
2 4
Excess Pressure (d) none of these
92. If two soap bubbles of different radii are connected by a 98. Water does not wet an oily glass, because
tube (a) cohesive force of oil > adhesive force between oil and
(a) air flows from the bigger bubble to the smaller bubble glass
till the sizes become equal (b) cohesive force of oil > cohesive force of water
(b) air flows from bigger bubble to the smaller bubble till (c) oil repels water
the sizes are interchanged (d) cohesive force of water > adhesive force between water
(c) air flows from the smaller bubble to the bigger and oil molecules
(d) there is no flow of air. 99. A glass plate is partly dipped vertically in the mercury and
93. If two soaps bubbles of equal radii r coalesce, then the angle of contact is measured. If the plate is inclined, then
radius of curvature of interface between two bubble will the angle of contact will
be: (a) increase (b) remain unchanged
(a) r (b) 0 (c) increase or decrease (d) decrease
(c) infinity (d) r/2 100. A liquid wets a solid completely. The meniscus of the liquid
94. The excess pressure due to surface tension in a spherical in a sufficiently long tube is
liquid drop of radius r is directly proportional to (a) flat (b) concave
(a) r (b) r 2 (c) convex (d) cylindrical
(c) r –1
(d) r –2
@cbseinfinite
FLUID MECHANICS 69
101. If a capillary tube is dippped into liquid and the levels of 104. Two capillary tubes of the same length but different radii
the liquid inside and outside are same, then the angle of r1 and r2 are fitted in parallel to the bottom of a vessel. The
contact is : pressure head is p. What should be the radius of a single
(a) 0° (b) 90° tube that can replace the two tubes so that the rate of flow
is same as before ?
(c) 45° (d) 30°
Capillarity r1r1
(a) r1 + r2 (b) r  r
102. When two capillary tubes of different diameters are dipped 1 2
vertically, then rise of the liquid is:
(a) same in both the tubes r1  r2
(b) more in the tube of larger diameter 2
(c) less in the tube of smaller diameter 105. A 20 cm long capillary tube is dipped in water. The water
(d) more in the tube of smaller diameter rises upto 8 cm. If the entire arrangement is put in a freely
falling elevator, the length of water column in the capillary
103. Water rises to a height h in a capillary tube held vertically
tube will be
in a beaker containing water. If the capillary tube is inclined
at an angle 30° with the water surface, the length to which (a) 8 cm (b) 10 cm
water rises in the capillary will be (c) 4 cm (d) 20 cm
(a) h/2 (b) h Ans. (d)
Sol. In a freely falling elevator g = 0
2h
(c) (d) 2h Water will rise to the full length i.e., 20cm of tube.
3
@cbseinfinite
FLUID MECHANICS 70

1. The excess pressure across a soap bubble of radius r is p 5. Water from a pipe is coming at a rate of 100 litres per
= 4/r, where  is the surface tension of soap solution. minute. If the radius of the pipe is 5 cm, the Reynolds
What is the excess pressure across an air bubble of the number for the flow is of the order of: (density of water =
same radius r formed inside a container of soap solution? 1000 kg/m3, coefficient of viscosity of water = 1 mPa s)
(2015) (2019)
(a) 10 3
(b) 104
 2
(a) (b) (c) 10 2
(d) 106
r r
6. If ‘M’ is the mass of water that rises in a capillary tube of
4 radius ‘r’, then mass of water which will rise in a capillary
r tube of radius ‘2r’ is: (2019)
2. Which of the following option correctly describes the
M
variation of the speed v and acceleration ‘a’ of a point (a) M (b)
mass falling vertically in a viscous medium that applies a 2
force F = kv, where ‘k’ is a constant, on the body ? (Graphs (c) 4 M (d) 2 M
are schematic and not drawn to scale) (2016)
4
7. A wooden block floating in a bucket of water has of its
5
volume submerged. When certain amount of an oil is
poured into the bucket, it is found that the block is just
under the oil surface with half of its volume under water
and half in oil. The density of oil relative to that of water
is:
(2019)
(a) 0.5 (b) 0.8
(c) 0.6 (d) 0.7
8. A cubical block of side 0.5 m floats on water with 30% of
its volume under water. What is the maximum weight that
can be put on the block without fully submerging it under
water? (Take, density of water  103 kg / m 3 ]
(2019)
3. Work done in increasing the size of a soap bubble from a
radius of 3 cm to 5 cm is nearly (surface tension of soap (a) 46.3 kg (b) 87.5 kg
Sol.= 0.03 Nm–1) (2017) (c) 65.4 kg (d) 30.1 kg
(a) 0.4πmJ (b) 2πmJ 9. A submarine experiences a pressure of 5.05  106 Pa at
(c) 3.4πmJ (d) 2.0πmJ depth of d1in a sea. When it goes further to a depth of d2it
4. A small soap bubble of radius 4 cm is trapped inside experiences a pressure of 8.08  106 Pa. Then d2 – d1 is
another bubble of radius 6 cm without any contact. Let P2
approximately (density of water  103 kg / m 3 and
be the pressure inside the inner bubble and P0, the pressure
outside the outer bubble. Radius of another bubble with acceleration due to gravity  10 ms 2 ):
pressure difference P2-P0 between its inside and outside
(2019)
would be: (2018)
(a) 300 m (b) 400 m
(a) 12 cm (b) 2.4 cm
(c) 600 m (d) 500 m
(c) 6 cm (d) 4.8 cm
@cbseinfinite
FLUID MECHANICS 71
10. Water from a tap emerges vertically downwards with an 15. A soap bubble, blown by a mechanical pump at the mouth
initial speed of 1.0 ms–1The cross-sectional area of the tap of a tube, increases in volume, with time, at a constant
is 10–4m2. Assume that the pressure is constant throughout rate. The time dependence of pressure inside the bubble
the stream of water and that the flow is streamlined. The is given by : (2019)
cross-sectional area of the stream, 0.15 m below the tap
would be: [Take g = 10ms–2] (a)  t 2 (b)  t –3
(2019) –
1
1
(c)  t 3 (d) 
(a) 2  10 m5 2 (b) 5  10 m5 2 t
(c) 5 104 m2 (d) 1105 m2 16. A cylindrical vessel containing a liquid is rotated about
its axis so that the liquid rises at its sides as shown in the
11. A solid sphere, of radius R acquires a terminal velocity v1 figure. The radius of vessel is 5 cm an and the angular
when falling (due to gravity) through a viscous fluid having
speed of rotation is  rad s1. The difference in the height,
a coefficient of viscosity  . The sphere is recast into 27
identical solid spheres. If each of these spheres acquires h (in cm) of liquid at the centre of vessel and at the side
a terminal velocity, v2, when falling through the same fluid, will be : (2020)
 v1 
the ratio  v  equals: (2019)
 2
1
(a) 9 (b)
27
1
(c) (d) 27
9
12. The top of a water tank is open to air and its water level is
maintained. It is giving out 0.74m3 water per minute through
a circular opening of 2 cm radius in its wall. The depth of
the centre of the opening from the level of water in the
tank is close to: (2019)
(a) 6.0 m (b) 4.8 m
(c) 9.6 m (d) 2.9 m
13. Water flows into a large tank with flat bottom at the rate of
52 22
10–4m3s–1 Water is also leaking out of a hole of area 1 cm2 at (a) (b)
its bottom. If the height of the water in the tank remains 2g 25g
steady, then this height (in cm) is:
252 22
(2019) (c) (d)
2g 5g
14. A long cylindrical vessel is half filled with a liquid. When 17. A capillary tube made of glass of radius 0.15 mm is dipped
the vessel is rotated about its own vertical axis, the liquid vertically in a beaker filled with methylene iodide (surface
rises up near the wall. If the radius of vessel is 5 cm and its tension = 0.05 Nm–1, density = 667 kg m–3) which rises to
rotational speed is 2 rotations per second, then the height h in the tube. It is observed that the two tangents
difference in the heights (in cm) between the centre and drawn from liquid-glass interfaces (from oopposite sides
the sides, in cm, will be (take g = 10 m/s2, pi2 = 10) of the capillary) make an angle of 60º with one another.
(2019) Then h is close to (g = 10 ms–2) (2020)
(a) 2.0 (b) 0.1 (a) 0.172 m (b) 0.049m
(c) 0.4 (d) 1.2 (c) 0.087 m (d) 0.137 m
@cbseinfinite
FLUID MECHANICS 72
18. Pressure inside two soap bubbles are 1.01 and 1.02 23. A fluid is flowing through a horizontal pipe of varying
atmosphere, respectively. The ratio of their volumes is : cross-section, with speed v ms-1 at a point where the
(2020) pressure is P pascal. At another point where pressure is
(a) 4 : 1 (b) 2 : 1 P
Pascal its speed is V ms-1. If the density of the fluid is
2
(c) 0.8 : 1 (d) 8 : 1
kg m-3 and the flow is streamline, then V is equal to :
19. When a long glass capillary tube of radius 0.015 cm is (2020)
dipped in a liquid, the liquid rises to a height of 15 cm
within it. If the contact angle between the liquid and glass P P
is close to 0º, the surface tension of the liquid, in milli (a)  v2 (b)  v2
2 
Newton m–1, is
2P P
[(liquid)  900 kgm3 , g  10 ms2 ] (Give answer in (c)  v2 (d) v
 
closest integer) ……….. (2020)
24. An ideal fluid flows (laminar flow) through a pipe of non-
20. An air bubble of radius 1 cm in water has an upward uniform diameter. The maximum and minimum diameters of
acceleration 9.8 cm s-2. The density of water is 1 gm cm-3 the pipes are 6.4cm and 4.8cm, respectively. The ratio of
and water offers negligible drag force on the bubble. The minimum and maximum velocities of fluid in this pipe is
mass of the bubble is (g = 980 cm/s2).
(2020)
(2020)
3 9
(a) 1.52 gm (b) 4.51 gm (a) (b)
2 16
(c) 3.15 gm (d) 4.15 gm
21. A hollow spherical shell of outer radius R floats just 3 3
(c) (d)
submerged under the water surface. The inner radius of 4 2
the shell is r. If the specific gravity of the shell material is 25. A leak proof cylinder of length 1 m, made of metal which
has very low coefficient of expansion is floating in water
27
w.r.t water, the value of r is : at 0o C such that its height above the water surface is 20
8
cm. When the temperature of water is increases to 4o C,
(2020) the height of the cylinder above the water surface becomes
21 cm. The density of water at T = 4oC relative to the
4 8 density at T=0o C is close to (2020)
(a) R (b) R
9 9 (a) 1.01 (b) 1.03
(c) 1.26 (d) 1.04
1 2
(c) R (d) R 26. Consider a solid sphere of density
3 3
 r2 
22. In an experiment to verify Stokes law, a small spherical   r   0 1   , 0  r  R . The minimum density of a
 R2 
ball of radius r and density  falls under gravity through
a distance h in air before entering a tank of water. If the liquid in which it float is just (2020)
terminal velocity of the ball inside water is same as its
velocity just before entering the water surface, then the 2 2
(a) 0 (b) 0
value of h is proportional to : (ignore viscosity of air) 5 3
(2020) 0 0
(c) (d)
(a) r4 (b) r 5 3
(c) r3 (d) r2
@cbseinfinite
FLUID MECHANICS 73
27. Two liquids of density 1 and  2  2  2 1  are filled up 31. The pressure acting on a submarine is 3×105 Pa at a certain
depth. If the depth is doubled, the percentage increase in
behind a square wall of side 10 as shown in figure. Each
the pressure acting on the submarine would be :
liquid has a height of 5 . The ratio of forces due to these
liquids exerted on the upper part MN to that at the lower (Assume that atmospheric pressure 1105 Pa density of
part NO is (Assume that the liquids are not mixing)
(2020) water is 103 kg m–3, g  10ms 2 ) (2021)
3 200
(a) % (b) %
200 5
200 5
(c) % (d) %
3 200
32. What will be the nature of flow of water from a circular tap,
2 1 when its flow rate increased from 0.18 L/min? The radius of
(a) (b)
3 2 –3
the tap and viscosity of water are 0.5 cm and 10 Pa s.
1 1 respectively. (2021)
(c) (d)
4 3 3
(Density of water : 10 kg/m )
3
28. An ideal liquid (water) flowing through a tube of non-

(a) Remains turbulent flow
uniform cross-sectional area,where area at A and B are
40 cm2 and 20 cm2respectively. If pressure difference (b) Steady flow to unsteady flow
between A and B is 700 N/m2, then volume flow rate is (c) unsteady to steady flow
(density of water = 1000kgm–3) (2020)
(d) Remains steady flow
33. When two soap bubbles of radii a and b (b > a) coalesce,
the radius of curvature of common surface is :
(2021)
(a) 2720 cm3/s (b) 2420 cm3/s
ab ab
(c) 1810 cm /s
3
(d) 3020 cm3/s (a) (b)
ba ab
29. A small spherical droplet of density d is floating exactly
half immersed in a liquid of density  and surface tension
ba ab
T. The radius of droplet is (take note that the surface (c) (d)
ab ab
tension applied an upward force on droplet)
(2020) 34. A hydraulic press can lift 100 kg when a mass ‘m’ is placed
on the smaller piston. It can lift ____ kg when the diameter
2T T of the large piston is increased by 4 times and that of the
(a) r  3    d  g (b) r    d  g smaller piston is decreased by 4 times keeping the same
mass ‘m’ on the smaller piston. (2021)
T 3T
(c) r   g
d  (d) r    g
2 d
35. Consider a water tank as shown in the figure. Its cross-
2
sectional area is 0.4 m . The tank has an opening B near the
2
30. A large number of water drops, each of radius r, combine bottom whose cross-section area is 1 cm . A load of 24 kg
to have a drop of radius R. If the surface tension is T and is applied on the water at the top when the height of the
mechanical equivalent of heat is J, the rise in heat energy water level is 40 cm above the bottom, the velocity of water
per unit volume will be : (2021) 1
coming out the opening B is ms . Find the value of v
2T 2T  1 1  (round off to the nearest integer)
(a) (b)   
rJ J r R [Take value of g to be 10 ms ]
–2
(2021)
3T  1 1 
(c)    (d) none of these
J r R
@cbseinfinite
FLUID MECHANICS 74

Single Choice Questions 4. Two immiscible liquids P and Q of different densities are
1. Two communicating vessels contain mercury. The diameter contained in a wide U-tube as shown in fig. The heights of
of one vessel is four times the diameter of the other. A the two liquids above the horizontal line XX` which cuts
column of water of height h0 = 70 cm is poured into the the boundary between the liquids are H P and H Q
left hand vessel (the narrower one). How much will be respectively. The U-tube is transported to a planet where
mercury level rise in the right hand vessel? (Specific the acceleration of free fall is 2/3 that on the earth, where
density of mercury = 13.6) the liquids do not evaporate and where the heights of liquid
(measured relative to XX`) are hP and hQ respectively.
(a) 0.3 cm (b) 0.7 cm
Which of the given statements is correct?
(c) 0.1 cm (d) 1.0 cm
2. A U-tube is partially filled with water. Oil, which does not
mix with water, is next poured into one side until water
rises by 25 cm on the other side. If the density of oil be
0.8, the oil level will stand higher than the water level by:
(a) 6.25 cm (b) 12.50 cm
(c) 31.25 cm (d) 20 cm
3. The limbs of a glass U-tube are lowered into vessels A and
B, A containing water. Some air is pumped out through (a) The liquid levels are unchanged, i.e.,
the top of the tube C. The liquid in the left hand limb A hP = HP and hQ = HQ
and the right hand limb B rise to heights of 10 cm and 12
(b) Both liquid levels rise up so that hP/HP = hQ/HQ
cm respectively. The density of liquid B is:
(c) Both liquid levels rise up so that h P - h Q
= HP - HQ
(d) The liquid P falls and liquid Q rises such that
hP 2 HP

hQ 3 HQ
2
5. A tank with a square base of area 2.0 m is divided into two
compartments by a vertical partition in the middle. There is
2
a small hinged door of face area 20 cm at the bottom of the
partition. Water is filled in one compartment and an acid of
(a) 0.75 g/cm3 (b) 0.83 g/cm3 relative density 1.5 in the other, both to a height of 4 m. If
–2
g = 10 ms , the force necessary to keep the door closed is
(c) 1.2 g/cm3 (d) 0.25 g/cm3
(a) 10 N (b) 20 N
(c) 40 N (d) 80 N
@cbseinfinite
FLUID MECHANICS 75
6. A ball is made of a material of density  where oil <  < 8. A cubical block of steel of each side equal to  is floating
water with oil and water representing the densities of oil and on mercury in a vessel. The densities of steel and mercury
water, respectively. The oil and water are immiscible. If are s and m. The height of the block above the mercury
the above ball is in equilibrium in mixture of this oil and level is given by
water, which of the following pictures represents its
equilibrium position ?      
(a)  1  s  (b)  1  s 
  m    m 
     
(c)  1  m 
 (d)  1  m 

 s   s 
9. The tension in a string holding a solid block below the

surface of a liquid (where liquid > block) as in shown in the
figure is T when the system is at rest.
Then what will be the tension in the string if the system

has upward acceleration a?
 a  a
(a) T  1   (b) T  1  
 g  g
7. A cube of mass m and density D is suspended form the
point P by a spring of stiffness k. The system is kept inside a  a
a beaker filled with a liquid of density d. The elongation (c) T   1 (d) g T
g 
in the spring, assuming D > d, is
10. A beaker containing water is placed on the platform of a
spring balance. The balance reads 1.5 kg. A stone of mass
3
0.5 kg and density 500 kg/m is immersed in water without
touching the walls of the beaker. What will be the balance
reading now?
(a) 2 kg (b) 2.5 kg
(c) 1 kg (d) 3 kg
11. An ornament weighing 36 g in air weighs only 34 g in
water. Assuming that some copper is mixed with gold to
prepare the ornament, find the amount of copper in it.
Specific gravity of gold is 19.3 and that of copper is 8.9.
(a) 2.2 g (b) 4.4 g
mg  d mg  D 
(a) 1   (b) 1   (c) 1.1 g (d) 3.6 g
k  D k  d
mg  d
(c) 1   (d) none of these
k  D 
@cbseinfinite
FLUID MECHANICS 76
12. A uniform cylinder of length L and mass M having cross- Passage

sectional area A is suspended, with its length vertical from Using the following Passage, solve Q. 18 & 19
a fixed point by a massless spring such that it is half
A rod of length 6 m has a mass 12 kg. It is hinged at one
submerged in a liquid of density  at equilibrium position.
end A at a distance of 3 m below the water surface. The
The extension x0 of the spring when it is in equilibrium is
specific gravity of the material of rod is 0.5.
Mg Mg  LA 
(a) (b) 1  
k k  M 
Mg  LA  Mg  LA 
(c) 1   (d) 1  
k  2M  k  M 
13. A long metal rod of length  and relative density  is held
vertically with its lower end just touching the surface of
water. The speed of the rod when it just sinks in water is
given by 18. What weight must be attached to the other end B so that 5
m of the rod is immersed in water?
(a) 2g (b) 2g
(a) 7 kgf (b) 20kgf
 1  7 7
(c) 2g 1   (d) 2g  2  1 (c) kgf (d) kgf
 2  5 2
14. A large block of ice 5m thick has a vertical hole drilled 19. Find the magnitude and direction of the force exerted by
through it and is floating in the middle of a lake. The the hinge on the rod.
minimum length of the rope required to scoop up bucket
full of water through the hole is
17
(a) kgf in the downward direction
3
(the relative density of ice = 0.9)
(a) 1 m (b) 0.9 m (b) 8 kgf in the downward direction
(c) 0.5 m (d) 0.45 m (c) 4 kgf in the downward direction
15. If a sample of metal weighs 210 g in air, 180 g in water (d) 5 kgf in the downward direction
and 120 g in a liquid: 20. When at rest, a liquid stands at the same level in the tubes
(i) RD of metal is 3 (ii) RD of metal is 7 as shown in the figure. But as indicated, a height difference
(iii) RD of liquid is 3 (iv) RD of liquid is (1/3) h occurs when the system is given an acceleration a towards
the right. Then h is equal to
(a) (i, ii) (b) (i, iii)
(c) (ii, iv) (d) (ii, iii)
–3
16. A vessel contains oil of density 0.8 gcm floating over
–3
mercury of density 13.6 gcm . A homogeneous sphere
floats with half its volume immersed in mercury and the
–3
other half in oil. The density of the sphere in gcm is
(a) 3.3 (b) 6.4
(c) 7.2 (d) 12.8
17. A cubical block of wood of specific gravity 0.5 and a chunk
of concrete of specific gravity 2.5 are fastened together.
The ratio of mass of wood to the mass of concrete which aL gL
(a) 2g (b)
makes the combination to float with its entire volume 2a
submerged in water is:
(a) 1/5 (b) 1/3 gL aL
(c) (d) g
(c) 3/5 (d) 2/5 a
@cbseinfinite
FLUID MECHANICS 77
COMPREHENSION TYPE QUESTIONS 27. Two bodies with volumes V and 2V are equalized on a
Passage balance. The larger body is then immersed in oil of density
d1 = 0.9 g/cm3 while the smaller body is immersed in
Using the following Passage, solve Q. 21 to Q. 26
another liquid when it is found that the equilibrium of the
If the container filled with liquid gets accelerated balance is not disturbed. The density of the second liquid
horizontally or vertically, pressure in liquids gets changed. is then:
In case of horizontally accelerated liquid (ax), the free
(a) 2.4 g/cm3 (b) 1.8 g/cm3
surface has the slope ax/g. In case of vertically accelerated
liquid (ay) for calculation of pressure, effective g is used. (c) 0.45 g/cm3 (d) 2.7 g/cm3
A closed box with horizontal base 6 m by 6m and a height 28. An open glass tube is immersed in mercury in such a way
2m is half filled with liquid. It is given constant horizontal that a length of 8 cm extends above the mercury level.
acceleration g/2 and vertical downward acceleration g/2. The open end of the tube is then closed and sealed and the
21. The angle of the free surface with the horizontal is equal to tube is raised vertically up by additional 46 cm. What will
–1 be length of the air column above mercury in the tube now?
(a) 30 (b) tan (2/3)
–1 (Atmospheric pressure - 76 cm of Hg)
(c) tan (1/3) (d) 45º
(a) 22 cm (b) 38 cm
22. A cylindrical vessel filled with water is released on an
inclined surface of angle  as shown in the figure. The (c) 6 cm (d) 16 cm
friction coefficient of surface with vessel is  (< tan ). 29. There is a circular tube in a vertical plane. Two liquids
Then the constant angle made by the surface of water with which do not mix and of densities d1 and d2 are filled in
the incline will be the tube. Each liquid subtends 90° angle at centre. Radius
joining their interface makes an angle  with vertical.
d1
Ratio d is :
2
–1 –1
(a) tan  (b)  – tan 
–1 –1
(c)  + tan  (d) cot 
23. Length of exposed portion of top of box is equal to -
(a) 2m (b) 3m
(c) 4m (d) 2.5 m
24. Water pressure at the bottom of centre of box is equal to
(atmospheric pressure = 105 N / m 2 , density of water = 1  cos  1  tan 
(a) (b)
3 2
1  cos  1  tan 
1000 kg / m , g  10 m / sec )
(a) 1.1 MPa (b) 0.11 MPa 1  sin  1  sin 
(c) (d)
1  cos  1  sin 
(c) 0.101 MPa (d) 0.011 MPa
25. Maximum value of water pressure in the box is equal to - 30. Two identical cylindrical vessels, each of base area A, have
their bases at the same horizontal level. They contain a
(a) 1.4 MPa (b) 0.14 MPa
liquid of density . In one vessel the height of the liquid is
(c) 0.104 MPa (d) 0.014 MPa
h1 and in the other h2 > h1. When the two vessels are
26. What is the value of vertical acceleration of box for given connected, the work done by gravity in equalizing the levels
horizontal acceleration (g/2), so that no part of bottom of is
box is exposed - 2 2
(a) 2 Ag (h2 – h1) (b) Ag (h2 – h1)
(a) g/2 upward (b) g/2 downward
1 1
Ag  h 2  h1  Ag  h 2  h1 
2 2
(c) g/4 upward (d) not possible (c) (d)
2 4
@cbseinfinite
FLUID MECHANICS 78
31. Two capillary tubes A and B of radii ra and rb and lengths 35. Water stands at level A in the arrangement shown in figure.
a and b respectively are held horizontally. The volume of What will happen if a jet of air is gently blown into the
water flowing per second through tube A is Qa when the horizontal tube in the direction shown in the figure ?
pressure difference across its ends is maintained at P. When
the same pressure difference is maintained across tube B,
the volume of water flowing per second through it is Qb.
The ratio Qa/Qb is
2
b  ra  b  ra 
(a)   (b)  
a  rb  a  rb 
3 4
b  ra  b  ra 
(c)   (d)  
a  rb  a  rb 
32. Two capillary tubes A and B of equal radii ra = rb = r and

equal lengths a = b =  are held horizontally. When the
same pressure difference P is maintained across each tube, (a) Water will rise above A in the capillary
the rate of flow of water in each is Q. If the tubes are
(b) Water will fall below A in the capillary tube
connected in series and the same pressure difference P is
maintained across the combination, the rate of flow through (c) There will be no effect on the level of water in the
the combination will be capillary tube.
(d) Air will emerge from end B in the form of bubbles.
(a) Q/2 (b) Q
36. Tanks A and B open at the top contain two different liquids
(c) 2Q (d) none of these upto certain height in them. A hole is made to the wall of
33. In a test experiment on a model aeroplane in a wind tunnel, each tank at a depth ‘h’ from the surface of the liquid. The
the flow speeds on the lower and upper surfaces of the area of the hole in A is twice that of in B. If the liquid mass
flux through each hole is equal, then the ratio of the
wing are v and 2 v respectively. If the density of air is 
densities of the liquids respectively, is
and the surface area of the wing is A, the dynamic lift on (a) 2/1 (b) 3/2
the wing is given by
(c) 2/3 (d) 1/2
1 1 2 37. In the diagram shown, the difference in the two tubes of
(a) v 2 A (b) v A the manometer is 5 cm, the cross section of the tube at A
2 2
and B is 6 mm2 and 10 mm2 respectively. The rate at which
2
(c) 2 v A (d) 2 v 2 A water flows through the tube is :
(g = 10 ms–2)
34. In a cylindrical water tank there are two small holes Q and
P on the wall at a depth of h1 form upper level of water and
at a height of h2 from the lower end of the tank respectively
as shown in the figure. Water coming out from both the
holes strike the ground at the same point. The ratio of h1
and h2 is
(a) 1 (b) 2
(c) > 1 (d) < 1
(a) 10.0 cc/s (b)8.0 cc/s

(c) 7.5 cc/s (d) 12.5 cc/s
@cbseinfinite
FLUID MECHANICS 79
38. The cylindrical tube of a spray pump has a radius R, one 42. Figure shows two holes in a wide tank containing a liquid
end of which has n fine holes, each of radius r. If the speed column. The water streams coming out of these holes strike
of flow of the liquid in the tube is V, the speed of ejection the ground at the same point. The height of liquid column
of the liquid through the holes is in the tank is
1/ 2
VR VR
(a)   (b)  
nr n r 
3/ 2 2
VR VR
(c)   (d)  
nr  nr 
39. Water from a tap emerges vertically downwards with an
–1
initial speed of 1.0 ms . The cross-sectional area of the (a) 10 cm (b) 8 cm
–4 2
tap is 10 m . Assume that the pressure is constant (c) 9.8 cm (d) 980 cm
throughout the stream of water and that the flow is steady. 43. A siphon tube is used to remove liquid from a container as
The cross-sectional area of the stream 0.15 m below the shown in the figure.
–2
tap is (take g = 10 ms )
–4 2 –5 2
(a) 5.0 × 10 m (b) 1.0 × 10 m
–5 2 –5 2
(c) 5.0 × 10 m (d) 2.0 × 10 m
40. The figure shows a liquid of density  flowing through a
tube with velocity v. The h1 and h2 are the heights of liquid
in the straight and L-shaped tubes, respectively. Choose
the correct statements.
(a) The pressure at the point A is gh1

(b) The pressure at the point B is gh2
(c) The velocity of flow is, v  2gh 2
(d) The velocity of flow is, v  2g  h 2  h1 

41. The velocity of the liquid coming out of a small hole of a
vessel containing two different liquids of densities 2 and
as shown in the figure is
If the tube is initially filled with liquid, then the speed of
the liquid through the siphon is
(a) 2gy (b) 2g  h  y 
(c) 2g  H  h  y  (d) none of the above
44. Water is flowing continuously from a tap having an internal

–3
diameter 8 × 10 m. The velocity as it leaves the tap is
–1
0.4 ms . The water diameter of the water stream at a
–1
distance 2 × 10 m below the tap is close to
–3 –3
(a) 7.5 × 10 m (b) 9.6 × 10 m
–3 –3
(a) 6gh (b) 2 gh (c) 3.6 × 10 m (d) 5.0 × 10 m
(c) 2 2gh (d) gh
@cbseinfinite
FLUID MECHANICS 80
Passage 49. If a number of identical droplets of water, each of radius r,

Using the following Passage, solve Q. 45 to 56 coalesce to form a single drop of radius R, the resulting
2 rise in the temperature of water is given by (here  is the
A cylindrical tank having cross sectional area A = 0.5 m
–3 density of water, s its specific heat and  its surface tension)
is filled with two liquids of density 1 = 900 kg m and
–3
2 = 600 kg m , to a height h = 60 cm each as shown in the  1 1  3  1 1 
2
figure. A small whole having area a = 5 cm is made in (a)    (b)   
s r R s  r R 
right vertical wall at a height y = 20 cm from the bottom. A
horizontal force F is applied on the tank to tank to keep it  1 1  3  1 1 
in static equilibrium. The tank is lying on a horizontal (c)    (d)   
s  r R  s  r R 
surface. Neglect mass of cylindrical tank in comparison to
mass of liquids (take g = 10 ms ).
–2 Multiple Choice Questions
50. The liquid in the capillary tube will rise, if the angle of
contact is
(a) 0° (b) 90°
(c) obtuse (d) acute
51. A capillary tube is immersed vertically in water and the
height of the water column is x. When this arrangement is
taken into a mine of depth d, the height of the water column
is y. If R is the radius of the earth, the ratio x/y is
45. The velocity of efflux is (a) (1 – d/R) (b) (1 + d/R)
–1 –1
(a) 10 ms (b) 20 ms (c) (R – d/R + d) (d) (R + d/R – d)
–1 –1
(c) 4 ms (d) 35 ms 52. The figure shows a container filled with a liquid of density
46. Horizontal force F to keep the cylinder in static . Four points A, B, C and D lie on the vertices of a vertical
equilibrium, if it is placed on a smooth horizontal plane, square. Points A and C lie on a vertical line and points B
is and D lies on a horizontal line. Choose the correct
statement(s) about the pressure at the four points.
(a) 7.2 N (b) 10 N
(c) 15.5 N (d) 20.4 N
47. A tiny sphere of mass m and density x is dropped in a tall jar
of glycerine of density y. When the sphere acquires terminal
velocity, the magnitude of the viscious force acting on it is
(a) mgx/y (b) mgy/x (a) PD = PB (b) PA < PB = PD < PC
(c) mg (1 – y/x) (d) mg (1 + x/y)
PC  PA PC  PA
48. A spherical solid ball of volume V is made of a material of (c) PD  PB  (d) PD  PB 
2 2
density  1 . It is falling through a liquid of density
53. Equal volumes of liquid are poured in the three vessels A,
2. (2 < 1). [Assume that the liquid applies a viscous
B and C (h1 < h2 < h3). All the vessels have same base area.
force on the ball that is proportional to the square of its Select the correct alternatives.
2
speed , ie, Fviscous = –kv (k > 0). The terminal speed
of the ball is
Vg 1   2  Vg 1
(a) (b)
k k
(a) The force on the base will be maximum in vessel A.
Vg 1 Vg (1   2 ) (b) The force on the base will be maximum in vessel C.
(c) (d)
k k
(c) Net force exerted by the liquid in all the three vessels
is equal.
(d) Net force exerted by the liquid in vessel A is maximum.
@cbseinfinite
FLUID MECHANICS 81
54. A spherical pot is more than half filled with water as shown 57. The tank shown in figure has the base area ( × b). It is
in the figure. Choose the correct statement(s) about the filled with a liquid of density  to a height H. Choose the
forces exerted by water on the pot. correct alternative (s).
(a) It is always normal to the surface of pot.

(b) Everywhere it acts in the downward direction. (a) The force at the base of the container is,
(c) The net horizontal force on the pot is zero. F = 1/2gH ( + 2H cot ) b.
(d) The net vertical force on the pot is in the downward
(b) The horizontal component of the force acting on the
direction. 2
inclined wall is Fh = 1/2 gH b
In vertical direction liquid will exert its weight.
(c) The vertical component of the force acting on the
55. The vessel shown in the figure has two sections of areas of
cross section A1 and A2. A liquid of density  fills both the 1 2
inclined wall is Fv  gbH cos ec.
sections, up to a height h in each. Neglect atmospheric 2
pressure.
(d) The vertical component of the force acting on the
1 2
inclined wall is Fv  gbH cot .
2
58. An open vessel containing liquid is moving with constant
acceleration a on a levelled horizontal surface. For this
situation mark out the correct statement(s).
(a) The pressure at the base of the vessel is 2hg.

(b) The force exerted by the liquid on the base of the vessel
is 2hgA2.
(c) The weight of the liquid is < 2hgA2.
(d) The walls of the vessel at the level X exert a downward
force hg(A2–A1) on the liquid.
56. A wall of length  supports water to a height h as shown (a) The maximum pressure is at the leftmost bottom
figure. Choose the correct statement(s). Take  as the corner.
density of water. (b) Along a horizontal line within the liquid as we move
from left to right the pressure decreases.
(c) The pressure at all points on a line making an angle
1  a 
of tan   with horizontal would be same.
g
(d) Along a horizontal line within the liquid as we move
(a) The force exerted by water on the wall per unit length
from left to right, the pressure remains same.
is 1/2 gH 
2
(b) The force exerted by water on the wall is 1/2 gH 

2
(c) The point of application of the resultant force acts

2H/3 below the free surface.
(d) The point of application of the resultant force acts H/3
below the free surface.
@cbseinfinite
FLUID MECHANICS 82
59. A circular cylinder of radius r and height H is filled with 64. The figure shows a siphon tube removing liquid from a
water to a height 2/3 H. It starts rotating about its axis container. Choose the correct statements.
with constantly increasing angular speed. Choose the
correct alternatives.
(a) At all speeds, shape of the free surface is parabolloid. (a) The siphon tube removes liquid only when h1 > 0
(b) The free surface touches first the brim of cylinder and
then the base of the cylinder. (b) The velocity of flow is v  2g  h1  h 2 
(c) The free surface cannot touch the base without spilling
water (c) The pressure at the point B is pB = p0 – gh3
(d) The free surface touches the brim as well as base at (d) The pressure at the point D is p0
the same instant. 65. A tank is filled upto a height h with a liquid and is placed
60. Water flows steadily through a horizontal pipe of a variable on a platform of height h from the ground. To get maximum
cross-section. If the pressure of water is P at a point where range xm a small hole is punched at a distance of y from
the velocity of flow is v, what is the pressure at another
the free surface of the liquid. Then
point where the velocity of flow is 2v;  being the density
of water ?
3 2 3 2
(a) P   v (b) P   v
2 2
2 2
(c) P – 2v (d) P + 2v
61. If the velocity head of a stream of water is equal to 10 cm
then its speed of flow is approximately
(a) 1.0 m/s (b) 1.4 m/s
(c) 140 m/s (d) 10 m/s (a) xm = 2 h (b) xm = 1.5 h
62. A tank is filled to a height H. The range of water coming (c) y = h (d) y = 0.75 h
out of a hole which is a depth H/4 from the surface of 66. A cylindrical vessel is filled with a liquid up to a height H.
water level is A small hole is made in the vessel at a distance y below,
2H 3H the liquid surface as shown in figure. The liquid emerging
(a) (b) from the hole strike the ground at distance x
3 2
3H
(c) 3H (d)
4
63. A cylindrical vessel of 90 cm height is kept filled up to the
brim. It has four holes 1, 2, 3 and 4 which are, respectively,
at height of 20 cm, 30 cm, 40 cm and 50 cm from the
horizontal floor PQ. The water falling at the maximum
horizontal distance from the vessel comes from
(a) x is equal if hole is at depth y or H – y
H
(b) x is maximum for y 
2
(a) hole number 4 (b) hole number 3 (d) Both (c) and (d) are wrong
(c) hole number 2 (d) hole number 1
@cbseinfinite
FLUID MECHANICS 83
Numberic Value Type Questions

67. A tube with both ends open floats vertically in water. Oil ASSERTION & REASON
3
with a density 800 kg/m is poured into the tube. The tube (A) Statement I is true, Statement II is true and Statement II is
is filled with oil upto the top end while in equilibrium. a correct explanation for Statemetn I.
The length of the tube outside the water is 10 cm.
Determine the depth (in cm) upto which the oil will be (B) Statement I is true, Statement II is true and Statement II is
filled in tube. NOT the correct explanation for Statement I.
(C) Statement I is true, Statement II is false.
(D) Statement I is false, Statement II is true.
70. Statement I : Pascal’s law is the working principal of a
hydraulic lift.
Statement II : Pressure is equal to thrust acting per unit
area.
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
71. Statement I : To float, a body must displace liquid whose
weight is greater than the actual weight of the body.
68. A rectangular metal plate has dimensions of 10 cm × 20cm. Statement II : The body will experience no net downward
A thin film of oil separates the plate from a fixed horizontal force, in the case of floating.
surface. The separation between the rectangular plate and
the horizontal surface is 0.2 mm. An ideal string is attached (a) A (b) B
to the plate and passes over an ideal pulley to a mass m. (c) C (d) D
When m = 125 g, the metal plate moves at constant speed
72. Statement I : A block is immersed in a liquid inside a
of 5 cm/s across the horizontal surface. Find the coefficient
–1 2 2 beaker, which is falling freely. Buoyant force acting on
of viscosity of oil in 10 dyne-s/cm . [g = 10 m/s ]
block is zero.
Statement II : In case of freely falling liquid there is no
pressure difference between any two points.
69. What is the excess pressure inside a bubble of soap solution s

(a) A (b) B
of radius 5.00 mm ? Given that the surface tension of soap
–2
solution at the temperature (20°C) is 2.50 × 10 N/m. If an air (c) C (d) D
bubble of the same dimension were formed at a depth of 4.0
cm inside a container containing soap solution (relative
density 1.20), what would be the pressure inside the bubble
–2 5
(in 10 atm) ? (1 atm = 1.01 × 10 Pa)
@cbseinfinite
FLUID MECHANICS 84
73. Statement I : When a body floats such that its parts are Match the Column
immersed into two immiscible liquids then force exerted 75. Match the column I and column II -
by liquid I is of magnitude 1v1g.
Column-I Column-II
Statement II : Total buoyant force = 1v1g + 2v2g.
(A) If the radius of soap bubble A is (P) 16 : 9
fource times that of another soap
bubble B, then the ratio of excess
pressuren (PB/PA) will be
1/3
(B) If two small drops of mercury, each (Q) 2 : 1
of radius R coalesce to form a single
large drop, the ratio of the total surface
energy before and after change will be
(C) The enrgy required to blow a bubble (R) 4 : 1
of radius 4 cm and 3cm in the same
liquid is in the ratio of
(D) Two soap bubbles are blown. In the (S) 1 : 4
(a) A (b) B
first bubble excess pressure in 4 times
(c) C (d) D
that of the second soap bubble. The
74. Statement I : All the raindrops hit the surface of the earth
with the same constant velocity. ratio of radii of first to second soap
Statement II : An object falling through a viscous medium bubble.

eventually attains a terminal velocity.
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
@cbseinfinite
FLUIDS MECHANICS 85

1. A hemispherical portion of radius R is removed from the 3. A uniform solid cylinder of density 0.8 g/cm2 floats in
bottom of a cylinder of radius R. The volume of the equilibrium in a combination of two non-mixing liquids A
remaining cylinder is V and mass M. It is suspended by a and B with its axis vertical. The densities of the liquids A
string in a liquid of density , where it stays vertical. The and B are 0.7 g/cm3 and 1.2 g/cm3 respectively. The height
upper surface of the cylinder is at a depth h below the of liquid A is hA = 1.2 cm. The length of the part of the
liquid surface. The force on the bottom of the cylinder by cylinder immersed in liquid B is hB = 0.8 cm. (2002)
the liquid is (2001)
(a) Find the total force exerted by liquid A on the cylinder.

(a) Mg (b) Mg – Vg
2 2 (b) Find h, the length of the part of the cylinder in air.
(c) Mg + R hg (d) g (V + R h)
2. A wooden block, with a coin placed on its top, floats in (c) The cylinder is depressed in such a way that its top
water as shown in figure. The distance l and h are shown surface is just below the upper surface of liquid A and
there. After sometime the coin falls into the water. Then is then released. Find the acceleration of the cylinder
(2002) immediately after it is released.
4. Statement–I : The stream of water flowing at high speed

from a garden hose pipe tends to spread like a fountain
when held vertically up, but tends to narrow down when
held vertically down. (2003)
Statement–II : In any steady flow of an incompressible

fluid, the volume flow rate of the fluid remains constant.
(a) If Statement I is true. Statement Ii is true; Statement Ii is

the correct explanation for Statement I.
(b) If Statement I is true, Statement Ii is true; Statement Ii is

(a) l decreases and h increases not a correct explanation for Statement I.
(b) l increases and h decreases (c) If Statement I is true; Statement II is false.

(c) Both l and h increase
(d) If Statement I is false; Statement II is true.
(d) Both l and h decrease
@cbseinfinite
FLUIDS MECHANICS 86
5. A container of width 2a is filled with a liquid. A thin wire of 9. Water is filled in a cylindrical container to a height of 3 m.
weight per unit length  is gently placed over the liquid The ratio of the cross-sectional area of the orifice and the
surface in the middle of the surface as shown in the fig. As beaker is 0.1. The square of the speed of the liquid coming
2
a result, the liquid surface is depressed by a distance y (y out from the orifice is (g = 10 m/s ) (2005)
<<a). Determine the surface tension of the liquid.
(2004)
2 2 2 2
(a) 50 m /s (b) 50.5m /s
2 2 2 2
(c) 51m /s (d) 52 m /s
Comprehension Type
Passage - 1
6. Consider a horizontally oriented syringe containing water A wooden cylinder of diameter 4r, height h and density
located at a height of 1.25m above the ground. The diameter /3 is kept on a hole of diameter 2r of a tank, filled with
of the plunger is 8mm and the diameter of the nozzle is liquid of density  as shown in the figure.
2mm. The plunger is pushed with a constant speed of 0.25
m/s. Find the horizontal range of water stream on the
2
ground. (Take g = 10m/s ). (2004)
10. Now level of the liquid starts decreasing slowly. When the
level of liquid is at a height h1 above the cylinder the block
starts moving up. At what value of h1, will the block rise ?
(2006)
(a) 4h/9 (b) 5h/9
5h
7. A small sphere falls from rest in a viscous liquid. Due to (c) (d) Remains same
3
friction, heat is produced. Find the relation between the
rate of production of heat and the radius of the sphere at 11. The block in the above question is maintained at the
terminal velocity. (2004) position by external means and the level of liquid is lowered.
8. A U-shaped tube contains a liquid of density  and it is The height h2 when this external force reduces to zero is
rotated about the line as shown in the figure. Find the (2006)
difference in the levels of liquid column. (2005)
4h 5h
(a) (b)
9 9
2h
(c) remains same (d)
3
@cbseinfinite
FLUIDS MECHANICS 87
12. If height h2 of water level is further decreased, then 15. Two soap bubbles A and B are kept in a closed chamber
–2
(2006) where the air is maintained at pressure 8 Nm . The radii of
bubbles A and B are 2 cm, respectively. Surface tension of
(a) cylinder will not move up and remains at its original –1
the soap-water used tomake bubbles is 0.04 Nm . Find the
position
nB
(b) for h2 = h/3, cylinder again starts moving up ratio n , where nA and nB are the number of moles of air in
A
(c) for h2=h/4, cylinder again starts moving up
bubbles A and B, respectively. [Neglect the effect of
(d) for h2 = h/5, cylinder again starts moving up gravity] (2009)
13. What is the excess pressure inside a bubble of soap Sol. of 16. A cylindrical vessel of height 500 mm has an orifice (small
radius 5.00 mm ? Given that the surface tension of soap Sol. at hole) at its bottom. The orifice is initially closed and water
–2
the temperature (20°C) is 2.50 × 10 N/m. If an air bubble of the is filled in it upto height H.Now the top is completely sealed
same dimension were formed at a depth of 4.0 cm inside a with a cap and the orifice at the bottom is opened. Some
container containing soap Sol. (relative density 1.20), what water comes out from the orifice and the water level in the
–2
would be the pressure inside the bubble (in 10 atm) ? (1 vessel becomes steady with height of water column being
5
atm = 1.01 × 10 Pa) (2007) 200 mm. Find the fall in height (in mm) of water level due to
opening of the orifice.
14. A glass tube of uniform internal radius (r) has a value
5 –2
separating the two identical ends. Initially, the valve is in a [Take atmospheric pressure = 1.0 × 10 Nm , density of
–3 –2
tightly closed position. End 1 has a hemispherical soap water = 1000 kg m and g = 10 ms . Neglect any effect of
bubble of radius r. End 2 has sub-hemispherical soap surface tension.] (2009)
bubble as shown in figure. Passage - 2
Just after opening the valve. (2008) When liquid medicine of density  is to be put in the eye,
it is done with the help of a dropper. As the bulb on the top
of the dropper is pressed, a drop forms at the opening of
the dropper. We wish to estimate the size of the drop.
We first assume that the drop formed at the opening is
spherical because that requires a minimum increase in its
surface energy. To determine the size, we calculate the net
vertical force due to the surface tension T when the radius
of the drop is R. When this force becomes smaller than the
weight of the drop, the drop gets detached from the dropper.
(2010)
(a) air from end 1 flows towards end 2. No change in the
17. If the radius of the opening of the dropper is r, the vertical
volume of the soap bubbles
force due to the surface tension on the drop of radius R
(b) air from end 1 flows towards end 2. Volume of the soap (assuming r << R) is
bubble at end 1 decreases. (a) 2rT (b) 2 RT
(c) no change occurs
2r 2 T 2R 2 T
(d) air from end 2 flows towards end 1. Volume of the soap (c) (d)
R r
bubble at end 1 increases.
–4 3 –3 –2 –1
18. If r = 5 × 10 m,  = 10 kg m , g = 10 ms , T = 0.11 Nm , the
radius of the drop when it detaches from the dropper is
approximately
–3 –3
(a) 1.4 × 10 m (b) 3.3 × 10 m
–3 –3
(c) 2.0 × 10 m (d) 4.1 × 10 m
@cbseinfinite
FLUIDS MECHANICS 88
19. After the drop detaches, its surface energy is Passage - 3

–6 –6
(a) 1.4 × 10 J (b) 2.7 × 10 J A spray gun is shown in the figure where a piston pushes
–6 –9
(c) 5.4 × 10 J (d) 8.1 × 10 J air out of a nozzle. A thin tube of uniform cross section is
20. A glass capillary tube is of the shape of a truncated cone connected to the nozzle. The other end of the tube is in a
with an apex angle  so that its two ends have cross small liquid container. As the piston pushes air through
sections of different radii. When dipped in water vertically, the nozzle, the liquid from the container rises into the nozzle
water rises in it to a height h, where the radius of its crosss and is sprayed out. For the spray gun shown, the radii of
section is b. If the surface tension of water is S, its density the piston and the nozzle are 20 mm and 1 mm respectively.
is , and its contact angle with glass is , the value of h will The upper end of the container is open to the atmosphere.
be (g is the acceleration due to gravity) (2014) (2014)
22. If the piston is pushed at a speed of 5mms–1, the air comes

out of the nozzle with a speed of
(A) 0.1 ms–1 (B) 1 ms–1
2S 2S
(A) cos      (B) cos      (C) 2ms–1 (D) 8 ms–1
b g b g
23. If the density of air is a and that of the liquid l then for a
2S given piston speed the rate (volume per unit time) at which
(C) bg cos    /2 
2S
(D) cos    /2  the liquid is sprayed will be proportional to
bg
21. A person in a lift is holding a water jar, which has a small
a l
hole at the lower end of its side. When the lift is at rest, the (A) (B) a l (C)
l a
water jet coming out of the hole hits the floor of the lift at a
distance d of 1.2 m from the person. In the following, state (D) l
of the lift’s motion is given in List I and the distance where
the water jet hits the floor of the lift is given in List II. 24. A spherical body of radius R consists of a fluid of constant
Match the statements from List I with those in List II and density and is in equilibrium under its own gravity. If P(r)
select the correct answer using the code given below the is the pressure at r(r < P), then the correct option(s) is
lists. (2014) (are). (2015)
List List II
P  r  3R / 4  63
P. Lift is accelerating vertically up. 1. d = 1.2 m
(a) P(r = 0) = 0 (b) P r  2R / 4  80
Q. Lift is accelerating vertically down 2. d > 1.2 m
 
with an acceleration less than the
P  r  3R / 5 16 P  r  R / 2  20
gravitational acceleration.
(c) P r  2R / 5  21 (d) P r  R / 3  27
R. Lift is moving vertically up with 3. d < 1.2 m
   
constant speed
S. Lift is falling freely. 4. No water leaks
out of the jar
(a) P -2, Q-3, R-2, S-4 (b) P-2, Q-3, R-1, S-4
(c) P-1, Q-1, R-1, S-4 (d) P-2, Q-3, R-1, S-1
@cbseinfinite
FLUIDS MECHANICS 89
25. Two spheres P and Q of equal radii have densities  and 28. A cylindrical capillary tube of 0.2 mm radius is made by
, respectively. The spheres are connected by a massless joining two capillaries T1 and T2 of different materials
string and placed in liquids L1 and L2 of densities  &  having water contact angles of 0° and 60° respectively.
and viscosities  and , respectively. They float in The capillary tube is dipped vertically in water in two
equilibrium with the sphere P in L1 and sphere Q in L2 and different configurations, case I and II as shown in figure.
the string being taut (see figure). If sphere P alone in L2 Which of the following option(s) is (are) correct?
 [Surface tension of water = 0.075 N/m , density of water
has terminal velocity VP and Q alone in L1 has terminal
= 1000 kg/m3, take g = 10m/s2] (2019)

velocity VQ , then (2015)
(a) For case I, if the joint is kept at 8 cm above the water

  surface, the height of water column in the tube will
VP  VP 
  1
(a) V   2
(b) V be 7.5 cm. (Neglect the weight of the water in the
Q
2 Q
1
meniscus)
    (b) For case I, capillary joint is 5cm above the water
(c) VP .VQ  0 (d) VP .VQ  0
surface, the height of water column raised in the tube
26. Consider two solid spheres P and Q each of density 8gm will be more than 8.75 cm. (Neglect the weight of the
cm–3 and diameters 1 cm and 0.5cm, respectively. Sphere P water in the meniscus)
is dropped into a liquid of density 0.8gm cm–3 and viscosity (c) The correction in the height of water column raised
 = 3 Poiseuille. Sphere Q is dropped into a liquid of in the tube, due to weight of water contained in the
density 1.6gm cm–3 and viscosity  = 2 Poiseuille. The meniscus, will be different for both cases.
ratio of the terminal velocities of P and Q is
(2016) (d) For case II, the capillary joint is 5 cm above the water
surface, the height of water column raised in the tube
27. A uniform capillary tube of inner radius r is dipped
will be 3.75 cm. (Neglect the weight of the water in
vertically into a beaker filled with water. The water rises to
the meniscus)
a height h in the capillary tube above the water surface in
the beaker. The surface tension of water is  . The angle
of contact between water and the wall of the capillary
tube is . Ignore the mass of water in the meniscus. Which
of the following statements is (are) true? (2018)
(a) For a given material of the capillary tube, h decreases
with increase in r
(b) For a given material of the capillary tube, h is
independent of 
(c) If this experiment is performed in a lift going up with a
constant acceleration, then h decreases
(d) h is proportional to contact angle 
@cbseinfinite
FLUIDS MECHANICS 90
29. A beaker of radius r is filled with water (refractive index 30. A horizontally oriented tube AB of length 1m rotates with
4 a constant angular velocity 10 3 rad/s about a stationary
= ) up to a height H as shown in the figure on the left.
3 vertical axis O1O2 passing through the end A. The tube is
The beaker is kept on a horizontal table rotating with filled with an ideal fluid. The end A is open and end B has
angular speed  . This makes the water surface curved a very small hole. Find the velocity of the fluid (in m/s)
so that the difference in the height of water level at from hole when the length of the liquid column is half the
length of tube.
the center and at the circumference of the beaker is(h
<< H, h << r), as shown in the figure on the right. Take
this surface to be approximately spherical with a radius of
curvature s. Which of the following is/are correct? (g is
the acceleration due to gravity) (2020)
31. A train with cross-sectional area St is moving with speed
 t inside a long tunnel of cross-sectional area
S0 (S0 = 4St ) . Assume that almost all the air (density  )

in front of the train flows back between its sides and the
walls of the tunnel. Also, the air flow with respect to the
train is steady and laminar. Take the ambient pressure and
that inside the train to be p0 .If the pressure in the region
h2 + r2
(a) R = between the sides of the train and the tunnel walls is p,
2h
7
then p 0 - p = Vt2 . The value of N is ________.
3r2 2N
(b) R =
2h (2020)
(c) Apparent depth of the bottom of the beaker is close 32. A hot air balloon is carrying some passengers, and a few
-1
sandbags of mass 1 kg each so that its total mass is 480
3H  2 H  kg. Its effective volume giving the balloon its buoyancy
to 1+ 
2  2g  is V. The balloon is floating at an equilibrium height of
100 m. When N number of sandbags are thrown out, the
(d) Apparent depth of the bottom of the beaker is close to balloon rises to a new equilibrium height close to 150 m
with its volume V remaining unchanged. If the variation
-1
3H  2 H  of the density of air with height h from the ground is
1+ 
4  4g  h
-
(h) = 0 e h0 , where 0 = 1.25 kg m-3 and h 0 = 6000
m, the value of N is _________. (2020)
@cbseinfinite
FLUIDS MECHANICS 91
33. A cylindrical tube, with its base as shown in the figure, is 34. A soft plastic bottle, filled with water of density 1gm/cc,
filled with water. It is moving down with a constant carries an inverted glass test tube with some air (ideal gas)
acceleration a along a fixed inclined plane with angle trapped as shown in figure. The test tube has a mass of
  45 . P1 and P2 are pressures at point 1 and 2, 5gm, and it is made of a thick glass of density 2.5 gm/cc.
Initially the bottle is sealed at atmospheric pressure
respectively, located at the base of the tube. Let
p 0  105 Pa so that the volume of the trapped air
   P1  P2  /  gd  . where  is density of water, d is the
inner diameter of the tube and g is the acceleration due to  0  3.3cc. When the bottle is squeezed from outside at
gravity. Which of the following statement(s) is(are) correct? constant temperature, the pressure inside rises and the
(2021) volume of the trapped air reduces. It is found that the test
tube begins to sink at pressure p0  p without changing
its orientation. At this pressure, the volume of the trapped
air is  0   let   Xcc and p  Y  103 Pa.
(2021)
(a)   0 when a  g / 2
(b)   0 when a  g / 2
The value of X is _______.
2 1
(c)   when   g / 2 35. A soft plastic bottle, filled with water of density 1gm/cc,
2
carries an inverted glass test-tube with some air (ideal gas)
1 trapped as shown in the figure. The test-tube has a mass
(d)   when   g / 2
2 of 5gm, and it is made of a thick glass of density 2.5 gm/cc.
Initially the bottle is sealed at atmospheric pressure so
that the volume of the trapped air is 0  3.3cc. When the
bottle is squeezed from outside at constant temperature,
the pressure inside rises and the volume of the trapped air
reduces. it is found that the test tube begins to sink at
pressure 0  p without changing the orientation. At this
pressure, the volume of the trapped air is 0   let
  Xcc and p  Y 10 Pa .

3
The value of Y is ______. (2021)
@cbseinfinite
FLUIDS MECHANICS 92
FLUIDS MECHANICS

@cbseinfinite
12
@cbseinfinite
SIMPLEChapter
HARMONIC12 MOTION 94
1. INTRODUCTION 3. Frequency
The frequency of a particle executing S.H.M. is
equal to the number of oscillations completed in
(1) A motion which repeats itself over and over again
one second.
after a regular interval of time is called a periodic
ω 1 k
motion. ν
= =
(2) Oscillatory or vibratory motion is kind of motion 2π 2π m
4. Phase
in which a body moves to and fro or back and forth
The phase of particle executing S.H.M. at any
repeatedly about a fixed point in a definite interval instant is its state as regard to its position and
of time. direction of motion at that instant. It is measured as
(3) Simple harmonic motion is a specific type of argument (angle) of sine in the equation of S.H.M.
oscillatory motion, in which Phase = (ωt + φ)
(a) particle moves in one dimension, At t = 0, phase = φ; the constant φ is called initial
(b) particle moves to and fro about a fixed mean phase of the particle or phase constant.
position (where Fnet = 0), 1.2 Important Relations
(c) net force on the particle is always directed 1. Position (For φ = 2nπ )
towards mean position, and
(d) magnitude of net force is always proportional
to the displacement of particle from the mean
position at that instant.
So, Fnet ∝ x ⇒ Fnet =−kx
where, k is known as force constant
⇒ ma = – kx Fig. 12.1
−k
⇒ a= x or a = −ω 2 x If mean position is at origin the position
m (x coordinate) depends on time in general as:
where, ω is known as angular frequency. x (t) = sin (ωt + φ)
d2x • At mean position, x = 0
⇒ = −ω 2 x
dt 2 • At extremes, x = + A, – A
This equation is called as the differential 2. Velocity (For φ = 2nπ )
equation of S.H.M.
The general expression for x(t) satisfying the
above equation is: x (t) = A sin (ωt + φ)
1.1 Some Important terms
1. Amplitude
The amplitude of particle executing S.H.M. is its
maximum displacement on either side from the Fig. 12.2
mean position. • =
At any instant t, v(t ) Aω cos(ωt + φ )
A is the amplitude of the particle in the equation
x(t) = A sin (ωt + φ) • At any position x, v( x) = ±ω A2 − x 2
2. Time Period • Velocity is minimum at extremes because the
Time period of a particle executing S.H.M. is the particles is at rest.
time taken to complete one cycle and is denoted by i.e., v = 0 at extreme position.
T. • Velocity has maximum magnitude at mean
position.
2π m m
Time period= (T) = π
2= as ω vmax = ω A at mean position.
ω k k
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
SIMPLE HARMONIC MOTION 95
3. Acceleration (For φ = 2nπ )
Fig. 12.5
1 2
• U is maximum at extremes, Umax = kA
Fig. 12.3 2
• U is minimum at mean position
• −ω 2 A sin(ωt + φ )
At any instant t, a (t ) =
2.3 Total Energy
• At any position x, a ( x) = −ω 2 x
• Acceleration is always directed towards mean
position.
• The magnitude of acceleration is minimum at
mean position and maximum at extremes.
amin = 0 at mean position.
Fig. 12.6
amax = ω 2 A at extremes.
1 2 1
=
T .E. = kA mA2ω 2
2 2
2. ENERGY IN SHM
NOTE:
2.1 Kinetic Energy Total energy is constant at all instants and at all
positions
1 2
K= mv
2
mω 2 ( A2 − x 2 ) (as =
1
⇒K= v ω A2 − x 2 )
2
1
mω 2 A2 cos 2 (ωt + φ )
2
Fig. 12.7 Energy Position Graph
3. RELATION BETWEEN SIMPLE HARMONIC

MOTION AND UNIFORM CIRCULAR MOTION
Fig. 12.4
• K is maximum at mean position and minimum at
extremes.
1 1 2
•= K max =m ω 2 A2 kA at mean position
2 2
• Kmin = 0 at extremes.
2.2 Potential Energy
Fig. 12.8
If potential energy is taken as zero at mean position, Consider a particle Q, moving on a circle of radius A
then at any position x,
with constant angular ω .
1 2 1
U= ( x) = kx mA2ω 2 sin 2 (ωt + φ ) The projection of Q on a diameter BC is P. It is clear
2 2
from the figure that as Q moves around the circle the
projection P oscillates between B and C.
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
The angle that the radius OQ makes with the x-axis is (c) Find the net force on it and check if it is towards
θ= ωt + φ . Here, φ is the angle made by the radius mean position.
OQ with the x-axis at time t = 0. Further, (d) Try to express net force as a proportional function
OP = OQ cos θ of its displacement ‘x’.
or x A cos (ωt + φ )
= NOTE:
This is standard x-t equation of SHM. If step (c) and step (d) are proved then it is a simple
Hence, P executives SHM. That is harmonic motion.
(e) Find k from expression of net force (F = – kx) and

m
find time period using T = 2π .
k
Fig. 12.9 5. SPRING BLOCK SYSTEM

Fig. (a) Relation between SHM and uniform circular
motion, 8 5.1 Horizontal Spring
(b) Position, Let a block of mass m be placed on a smooth horizontal
(c) Velocity and surface and rigidly connected to spring of force constant
(d) acceleration K whose other end is permanently fixed.
When a particle moves with uniform circular motion, its
projection on a diameter moves with SHM. The velocity
of Q is perpendicular to OQ and has a magnitude of
velocity v′ = ω A .
The component v ' along the x-axis is,
v= −ω A sin (ωt + φ )
−v′ sin θ or v =
Which is also the velocity of P. The acceleration of Q is
centripetal and has a magnitude, a ′ = ω 2 x . Fig. 12.10
The component of a ′ along the x-axis is • Mean position: when spring is at its natural length.
a= −ω 2 A cos (ωt + φ )
− a ′ cos θ or a = m
• Time period: T = 2π
Which again coincides with the acceleration of P. k
NOTE: 5.2 Vertical Spring
v = velocity of SHM of particle (a) If the spring is suspended vertically from a fixed
dx d point and carries the block at its other end as
== A cos (ωt + φ )  = −ω A sin (ωt + φ )
dt dt shown, the block will oscillate along the vertical
a = acceleration of SHM of particle line.
dv
= = −ω 2 A cos (ωt + φ )
dt
4. TIME PERIOD OF S.H.M.
To find whether a motion is S.H.M. or not and to find

its time period, follow these steps: Fig. 12.11
(a) Locate the mean (equilibrium) position mg
• Mean position: spring in elongated by d =
mathematically by balancing all the forces on it. k
(b) Displace the particle by a displacement ‘x’ from the
m
mean position in the probable direction of • Time period: T = 2π
oscillation. k
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
5.3 Combination of Springs Example: A light spring of force constant k is held

(a) Springs in Series between two blocks of masses m and 2m. The two
When two springs of force constant k1 and k2 are blocks and the spring system rests on a smooth
connected in series as shown, they are equivalent to horizontal floor. Now the blocks are moved towards
a single spring of force constant k which is given each other compressing the spring by x and then they
by are suddenly released. Then find the relative velocity
between the blocks when the spring attains its natural
1 1 1
= + length.
k k1 k2
k1k2
k=
k1 + k2
Fig. 12.15
Solution: Potential energy of the spring is being
converted into kinetic energy of system.
1 2
Potential energy of the spring before released = kx
2
K.E. of the system in centre of mass frame
1 2 m × 2m 2m
= µ vrelative =
where µ = is reduced
2 m + 2m 3
mass of the system.
1 2 1
Now, µv = kx 2
2 relative 2
Fig. 12.12 3
2
vrelative = kx 2
(b) Springs in parallel 2m
 3k 
For a parallel combination as shown, the effective vrelative =   x

spring constant is k = k1 + k2  2m 
6. ANGULAR SHM
6.1 Angular Oscillations
Instead of straight-line motion, if a particle or centre of
mass of a body is oscillating on a small arc of circular
path then it is called angular S.H.M.
≡
For angular S.H.M., τ = – kθ
Fig. 12.13
⇒ Iα = −kθ
5.4 Reduced Mass and Problems Involving
I
Reduced Mass ⇒ Time period, T = 2π
k
Definition: When two bodies in relative motion are
acted upon by a central force involving Newton’s law 6.1.1 Simple Pendulum
then the system can be replaced by a single mass 
called the reduced mass which is given as • Time period: T = 2π
g
mm
µ= 1 2 • Time period of a pendulum in a lift:
m1 + m2

T = 2π
g+a
(if acceleration a of the lift is upwards)

T = 2π
Fig. 12.14 g −a
(if acceleration a of the lift is downwards)
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
6.1.2 Physical Pendulum This system is called a torsional pendulum. There is no

I small-angle restriction in this situation as long as the
Time period: T = 2π
mgl elastic limit of the wire is not exceeded. Figure shows
the balance wheel of a watch oscillating as a torsional
pendulum, energized by the mainspring.
7. SUPERPOSITION OF SIMPLE HARMONIC

MOTION
A simple harmonic motion is produced when a force

(called restoring force) proportional to the
displacement acts on a particle. If a particle is acted
upon by two such forces the resultant motion of the
Fig. 12.16 particle is a combination of two simple harmonic
motions.
Where, I is moment of inertia of object about point of
suspension, and l is distance of centre of mass of Suppose the two individual motions are represented
object from point of suspension. by,
6.1.3 Torsional pendulum x1 = A1 sin ωt

And x2 A2 sin (ωt + φ )
=
Both the simple harmonic motions have same angular
frequency ω .
Fig. 12.17 Fig. 12.18

Figure shows a rigid body suspended by a wire attached
The resultant displacement of the particle is given by,
at the top to a fixed support. When the body is twisted
x= x1 + x2
through some small angle θ , the twisted wire exerts on
=A1 sin ωt + A2 sin (ωt + φ )
the body a restoring torque that proportional to the
angular displacement. That is, τ = −κθ = A sin (ωt + α )
Where κ (kappa) is called the torsion constant of the Here, A = A12 + A22 + 2 A1 A2 cos φ
support wire. The value of κ can be obtained by A2 sin φ
applying a known torque to twist the wire through a And tan α =
A1 + A2 cos φ
measurable angle θ . Applying Newton’s second law
Thus, we can see that this is similar to the vector
for rotational motion, we find
addition. The same method of vector addition can be
d 2θ applied to the combination of more than two simple
τ= −κθ = I 2
dt harmonic motions.
dθ
2
κ 8. DAMPED AND FORCED OSCILLATIONS
2
= − θ
dt I
Again, this is the equation of motion for a simple 8.1 Damped Oscillations
κ
harmonic oscillator, with ω = and time period (i) The oscillations of a body whose amplitude goes
I on decreasing with time is defined as damped
oscillations.
I
T = 2π
κ
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
(ii) In these oscillations the amplitude of oscillation

decreases exponentially due to damping forces 9. MISCELLANEOUS EXAMPLES OF SHM
like frictional force, viscous force etc.
9.1 Oscillation of a Cylinder Floating in a Liquid
Let a cylinder of mass m and density d be floating on
the surface of a liquid of density ρ . The total length of
cylinder is L.
Fig. 12.19
(iii) Due to decrease in amplitude the energy of the
oscillator also goes on decreasing exponentially.
8.2 Forced Oscillation
The oscillations in which a body oscillates under the
influence of an external periodic force are known as
forced oscillations. Fig. 12.20
8.3 Resonance Ld
• Mean position: cylinder is immersed upto  = .
When the frequency of external force is equal to the ρ
natural frequency of the oscillator, then this state is Ld 
known as the state of resonance. And this frequency is • =
Time period: π
T 2= 2π .
ρg g
known as resonant frequency.
8.4 Resonance and its Consequences 9.2 Liquid Oscillating in a U-tube
The fact that there is an amplitude peak at driving Consider a liquid column of mass m and density ρ in a
frequencies close to the natural frequency of the U-tube of area of cross section A. Let L = 2H,
system is called resonance. Physics is full of examples
of resonance; building up the oscillations of a child on
a swing by pushing with a frequency equal to the
swing’s natural frequency is one. Inexpensive loud
speakers often have an unwanted boom or buzz when
a musical note happens to coincide with the resonant h
frequency of the speaker cone. Resonance also occurs
in electric circuits; a tuned circuit in a radio or
television receiver responds strongly to waves having
frequencies near its resonant frequency, and this fact is
used to select a particular station and reject the others.
Resonance in mechanical systems can be destructive. Fig. 12.21
A company of soldiers once destroyed a bridge by • Mean position: when height of liquid is same in
marching across it in step; the frequency of their steps both limbs.
was close to the natural vibration frequency of the • Time period:
bridge and the resulting oscillation had large enough
m 2L ⋅ A L
amplitude to tear the bridge apart. = π
T 2= π
2= 2π
2 Aρ g 2 Aρ g 2g
Ever since, marching soldiers have been ordered to
break step before crossing a bridge. Nearly everyone where, L is length of liquid column.
has seen the film of the collapse of the Tacoma
Narrows suspension bridge in 1940.
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
9.3 Body Oscillation in Tunnel Along Any Chord of ky

So the force in the spring F = .
the Earth 2
Now as pulley is massless F = 2T ,
F ky
⇒T = = .
2 4
So the restoring force on the mass m,
1 1
T= ky = k ' y ⇒ k ' = k
4 4
Fig. 12.22 1 k' 1 k fA
• Mean position: At the centre of the chord. ⇒=
fB = =
2π m 2π 4m 2
• Time period:
R
= π
T 2= 84.6 minutes
g
where, R is radius of earth = 6400 Km.
9.4 Pulley Spring Block System
A system is consisting of massless pulley, a spring of
spring constant k and a block of mass m. If the block is
slightly displaced vertically down from its equilibrium
position and released.
Let’s find the frequency of its vertical oscillation in
given cases:
Case (A): Fig. 12.24
As the pulley is fixed and string in inextensible, if mass
Case (C):
m is displaced by y the spring will stretch by y
In this situation if the mass m moved by the pulley will
F = T = ky i.e.,
also move by y and so the spring will stretch by 2 (as
restoring force is linear and so motion of mass m will be
linear simple harmonic with frequency string is inextensible) and so, T=' F= 2ky .
1 k Now as pulley is massless so T = F + T ' = 4ky

fA =
2π m i.e., the restoring force on the mass m
So, T = 4ky = k ' y ⇒ k ' = 4k
1 k' 1 4k
⇒=
fC = = 2 fA
2π m 2π m
Fig. 12.23
Case (B):
Fig. 12.25
The pulley is moveable and string inextensible, so if
mass m moves down a distance y, the pulley will move
 y
down by   .
2
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
Solved Examples
Write the displacement equation representing the A body oscillates with SHM along with X-axis. Its
following conditions obtained in a simple harmonic displacement varies with time according to the
motion. Amplitude = 0.01 m, frequency = 600 Hz, equation:
π  π
initial phase . = x (4.00m) cos  π t + 
6  4
π Calculate at t = 1.00 s:
Sol. Here A = 0.01 m, ν = 600Hz , φ =
6 (a) displacement
(b) velocity
The displacement equation of simple harmonic motion (c) acceleration
is
(d) Also calculate the maximum speed and maximum
= y A sin(ω t =
+ φ ) A sin(2πν t + φ ) acceleration and
(e) phase at t = 2.00 s.
 π
=⇒ y 0.01sin 1200π t +  Sol. By comparing the given equation with the general
 3
equation for SHM along X-axis,
Example - 2 i.e., x = Acos (ωt + φ0), we get
A particle executes SHM of amplitude 25 cm and time A = 4.00m, ω = π rad/s, φ0 = π/4
period 3s. What is the minimum time required for the
(a) Displacement at t = 1.00 s i.e.,
particle to move between two points 12.5 cm on either
x = (4.00 m) cos (π × 1 + π/4) = (4.00) (–cos π/4)
side of the mean position?
Sol. With usual notation, we are given that amplitude = (4.00) (–0.707) = – 2.83 m
A = 25 cm, time period T = 3s (b) Velocity at t = 1.00 s, i.e., v = – ωA sin (ωt + φ0)
Displacement from the mean position, y = 12.5 cm or v = – (π rad/s) (4.00 m) sin [π × 1 + π/4]
If t is the time taken by the particle to move from the
= –(4.00 π) (–sin π/4) m/s
mean position to a point 12.5 cm on any side of the
= (4.00 × 3.14) (0.707) m/s
mean position,
= 8.89 m/s
 2π   2π 
=y A sin = ωt A sin  t  or 12.5 = 25sin  t (c) Acceleration,
 T   3 
a = – ω A cos (ωt + φ0)
2
 2π  1 π  2π  π
or sin  t = = sin or  t =
 3  2 6  3  6 = – π × 4.00 cos (π × 1 + π/4)
2
= – (4.00 π ) (–cos π/4) m/s

2 2
or t = 0.25 s
Obviously, minimum time taken by the particle to 2 2
= 4.00 × (3.14) × 0.707 m/s
move between two points 12.5 cm on either side of the 2
mean position. = 27.9 m/s
= 2t = 2 × 0.25 = 0.5 s. (d) Maximum velocity,
vmax = ωA = π × 4.00 = 12.6 m/s
Maximum acceleration, amax = ω A = π × 4.00
2 2
2
= 39.5 m/s
π
(e) Phase, (ωt + φ0) = (π rad/s) × 2s +
4
π 9π
= 2π + = .
4 4
@cbseinfinite
Example - 4 l
T = 2π … (i)
A block is resting on a piston which is moving g
vertically with a SHM of period 1.0 s. At what When length is increased by 1%, i.e., by 1/100,
amplitude of vibration will the block and the piston
separate? What is the maximum velocity of the piston new length = l + (l/100) = l (1 + 1/100)
at this amplitude? If T’ be its changed time period,
Sol. We are given that T = 1.0 s l (1 + 1 / 100)
Further, the maximum acceleration in SHM, T’ = 2π … (ii)
g
i.e., amax = ω A
2
From eqns. (i) and (ii),
For the block and the piston to separate, 1/2
T'  1   1 
amax ≥ g or ω A ≥ g
2 =1 + =1 + 
T  100   100 
gT 2 T'  1 
or (2π/T) A ≥ g or A ≥
2
= 1 +  [using (1 + x) =1 + nx for x  1 ]
n
or
4π2 T  200 
(9.8 m / s 2 )(1.0s) 2
or A ≥ T'
2
(as 4π = 39.48) or = (1 + 0.005) = 1.005
39.48 T
or A ≥ 0.248 m or T’ = (1.005)T = 1.005 × 2
Thus, the block and the piston separate, when (as for a second pendulum, T = 2s)
A = 0.248 m or T’ = 2.01 s
Clearly, Since the time period has increased, the pendulum will
 2π   2 × 3.14  make lesser number of vibrations per day. In other
vmax = ωA =   A =   (0.248 m) = 1.56 m/s words, it will run slow.
 T   1.0s 
Loss in time in 2 s = 0.01 s
Example - 5 0.01s
Loss in 1 day (i.e., 86400 s) = × 86400 s
A point particle of mass 0.1 kg is executing SHM of 2s
amplitude 0.1 m. When the particle passes through the
–3 = 432 s
mean position, its kinetic energy is 8 × 10 J. Obtain
the equation of motion of this particle if the initial Example - 7
o
phase of oscillations is 45 .
A spring compressed by 10 cm develops a restoring
Sol. Here, m = 0.1 kg, A = 0.1 m, force of 10 N. A body of mass 9 kg is placed on it.
K0 (kinetic energy at mean position) What is the force constant of the spring? What is the
depression in the spring under the weight of the body?
= 8 × 10 J, φ0 = 45 = π/4
–3 o
What is the period of oscillation if the body is
1 1 disturbed from its equilibrium position?
mω A , ⇒ (0.1 kg)ω (0.1 m)
2 2 2 2
Since K0 = [Take g = 10 N/kg]
2 2
= 8 × 10 J
–3 Sol. Here, F = 10 N, y = 10 cm = 0.1 m
or ω = 4 rad/s Force constant, k =
F
=
10 N
= 100 N/m
The equation of motion of a particle executing SHM y 0.1m
is given by Further, when F = weight of the body = 9 kg wt
y = A sin (ωt + φ0) = 90 N,
or y = (0.1) sin [4t + π/4] F 90 N
y= = = 0.9 m
Example - 6 k 100 N / m
If the length of a second pendulum is increased by 1%, m

Time period, T = 2π
how many seconds will it lose in a day? k
Sol. If l be the length of the second pendulum and T be its
time period, then
9  3
= 2π s = 2π   s
100  10 
@cbseinfinite
3π TM 2π l / g M gE 9.8
or T = s = 1.88 s. or= = = = 2.4
5 TE 2π l / g E gM 1.7
Example - 8 Clearly, TM = 2.4 TE = 2.4 × 3.5 = 8.4 s
Write the values of amplitude and angular frequency Example - 11
in the following simple harmonic motion:
x = 0.70 cos (180t + 0.23) A spring balance has a scale that reads from
0 to 50 kg. The length of the scale is 20 cm. A body
where the various quantities are in SI units. suspended from this spring, when displaced and
Sol. Comparing the given simple harmonic motion with released, oscillates with a period of 0.60 s. What is the
the standard SHM equation weight of the body?
x = 0.70 cos (180t + 0.23) Sol. If k is the spring constant of the spring balance,
x = A cos (ωt + φ0), we have A = 0.70 m, ω = 180 rad/s F 50 kg wt 50 × 9.8 N
k= = = = 2450 N/m
Example - 9 l 0.2 m 0.20 m
Two simple harmonic motions are represented by the Let ω be the angular frequency of the spring balance.
equations y1 = 10 sin (3πt + π/4) and 2π 2π
Clearly, ω = = = 10.47 rad/s
T 0.60
y2 = 5 (sin 3πt + 3 cos 3πt)
If m is the mass of the body,
Find the ratio of their amplitudes.
k k 2450
ω = or m = 2 =
2
Sol. We are given that = 22.35 kg
m ω (10.47) 2
y1 = 10 sin (3πt + π/4) … (i)
Weight of the body = mg = 22.35 kg wt
y2 = 5 (sin 3πt + 3 cos 3πt)
= 22.35 × 9.8 N = 219 N
= 10 [(1/2) sin 3πt + ( 3 / 2) cos 3πt] Example - 12
= 10 [cos (π/3) sin 3πt + sin (π/3) cos 3πt] A small trolley of mass 2.0 kg resting on a horizontal
= 10 sin [3πt + (π/3)] … (ii) turntable is connected by a light spring to the centre
From eqns. (i) and (ii), it is clear that the amplitudes of the table. When the turntable is set into rotation at
of both SHM’s are equal i.e., these are in the ration of a speed of 300 rpm, the length of the stretched spring
1 : 1. is 40 cm. If the original length of the spring is 35 cm,
determine the force constant of the spring.
Example - 10
Sol. We are given that
The acceleration due to gravity on the surface of the mass of the trolley, m = 2.0 kg
2
Moon is 1.7 m/s . What is the time-period of a simple Frequency of rotation of the turntable,
pendulum on the Moon if its time period on the Earth
is 3.5 s? 300
ν= = 5rps
(g on Earth = 9.8 m/s )
2 60
Sol. We are given that time period of a simple pendulum Length of the stretched spring,
on Earth, i.e., TE = 3.5 s r = 40 cm = 0.4 m
Acceleration due to gravity on Earth, Original length of the spring,
i.e., gE = 9.8 m/s
2 L = 35 cm = 0.35 m
Acceleration due to gravity on Moon, Extension produced in the spring,
2
l = r – L = 0.05 m
i.e., gM = 1.7 m/s . Tension in the spring = centripetal force,
Let TM be the time period of the simple pendulum on mv 2 2 2
Fc = = 4π v mr
Moon. r
If k is the spring constant of the spring,
l l F = kl
Clearly, TE = 2π and TM = 2π
gE gE F 4π2 v 2 mr
or k = =
l l
@cbseinfinite
4 × 9.8 × (5) 2 × 2 × 0.4 (c) Total energy of the oscillating mass (E)
or k =
0.05 = its potential energy at the extreme position (U0)
4
= 15792 N/m = 1.6 × 10 N/m = 0.24 J
A spring of force constant 1200 N/m is mounted on a In above problem, let us take the position of the mass
horizontal table as shown in Figure. A mass of 3.0 kg, when the spring is unstretched as x = 0, and the
attached to the free end of spring, is pulled sideways direction from left to right is the positive direction of
to a distance of 2.0 cm and released. X-axis. Give x as a function of time t for the oscillating
mass. If at the moment we start the stop watch (t = 0);
the mass is
(a) at the mean position
(b) at the maximum stretched position
Determine: (c) at the maximum compressed position.
(a) the frequency of oscillations, In what way do these different functions for SHM
differ? Frequency? Amplitude? Or Initial phase?
(b) the maximum acceleration of the mass,
Sol. For SHM along x-axis,
(c) the maximum speed of the mass.
x = A cos (ωt +φ0) … (i)
Sol. With usual notations, we are given that
m = 3.0 kg, k = 1200 N/m, A = 2.0 cm = 0.02 m (a) When at t = 0, x = 0,
(a) The frequency of oscillation of the mass m is 0 = A cos (ω × 0 + φ0)
given as or cos φ0 = 0 or φ0 = – π/2
1 k 1 1200
f= = From eqn. (i), x = A cos (ωt – π/2) = A sin ωt
2π m 2 × 3.14 3
or x = 2 sin (20 t)
20 –1 –1
(as A = 2 cm, ω = 2πf = 2 × 3.142 × 3.2 = 20 s )
–1
or f = s = 3.2 s
6.28
(b) The maximum acceleration of the mass, (b) When at t = 0, x = A,
i.e., amax = ω A = (2πf) A = 4π f A A = A cos (ω × 0 + φ0)
2 2 2 2
2 2 2
or amax = [(39.48) (3.2) (0.02)] m/s = 8.1 m/s or cos φ0 = –1 or φ0 = 0
(c) The maximum speed of the mass, i.e.,
From eqn. (i) x = A cos ωt = 2cos (20t)
vmax = ωA = 2πfA
vmax = (2 × 3.14 × 3.2 × 0.02) m/s = 0.4 m/s (c) When at t = 0, x = –A,
–A = A cos (ω × 0 + φ0)
Example - 14
or cos φ0 = – 1 or φ0 = π
In above problem, what is
From eqn. (i), x = A cos (ωt + π)
(a) the speed of the mass when the spring is
compressed by 1.0 cm? = –A cos ωt
(b) potential energy of the mass when it momentarily or x = –2 cos (20 t)
comes to rest? Example - 16
(c) total energy of the oscillating mass?
A particle executing SHM along a straight line has a
Sol. (a) Speed v = ω A 2 − x 2 =π
2 f A2 − x 2 –1
velocity of 4 ms , when at a distance of 3 m from its
–1
mean position and 3 ms , when at a distance of 4 m
= 2 × 3.14 × 3.2 (0.02) 2 − (−0.01) 2
from it. Find the time it takes to travel 2.5 m from the
= 0.35 m/s (as f = 3.2, A = 0.02 m, x = –0.01 m) positive extremity of its oscillation.
–1
(b) PE of the mass when it momentarily comes to rest Sol. Here (case i), v1 = 4 ms ; y1 = 3m;
(at the extreme position), –1
(case ii), v2 = 3 ms ; y2 = 4m.
1 1
mω2 A 2 =m(2πf) A = 2π mf A
2 2 2 2 2
i.e., U0 = We know that v = ω a 2 − y2
2 2
2 2
= 2 × 9.87 × 3 × (3.2) × (0.02) = 0.24 J Case (I) 4 =
ω a 2 − 32 … (i)
@cbseinfinite
2
Case (II) 3 = ω a 2 − 42 … (ii) = –3.754 cm/s
2
Dividing (i) by (ii), we get In fact, the acceleration is 3.754 cm/s and is
directed towards the mean position.
4 ω a −9 16 a 2 − 9
2
= or = Example - 18
3 ω a 2 −16 9 a 2 −16
A particle executes simple harmonic motion with a
2 2 2
or 16 a – 256 = 9 a – 81 or 7 a = 256 – 81 = 175 time period of 16 s. At time t = 2 s, the particle crosses
the mean position while at t = 4 s, its velocity is
2 175 –1
or a = = 25 or a = 25 = 5 4 ms . Find its amplitude of motion.
7
Sol. Here, T = 16 s; At t = 2 s, y = 0 and at t = 4 s;
Substituting it in (i), we get –1
v = 4 ms ; a = ?
4=ω 2 2
ω 25 − 9 = ω × 4
5 −3 = 2π
For simple harmonic motion, y = a sin ωt = a sin t
4 T
or ω =
–1
= 1 rad s When t = 4 s, the time taken by particle to travel from
4
the mean position to a given position = 4 – 2 = 2s. The
When the particle is at a distance 2.5 m from the displacement,
extreme position, then its distance from the mean
 2π  π a
position, y = a sin  × 2  = a sin   = … (i)
x = 5 – 2.5 = 2.5 m  16  4 2
Since, the time is to be noted from the extreme position Velocity, v = ω a 2 − y2

for SHM therefore, we shall use the relation
 2π  a2 π a
x = a cos ωt ∴ 4 =  a 2 − = ×
 16  2 8 2
or 2.5 = 5 cos (1 × t) = 5 cos t or cos t =
2.5 1 π 32 2
= = cos or a = = 14.4 m.
5 2 3 π
π 22 Example - 19
or t = = = 1.048 s.
3 7×3 A particle executes SHM of amplitude a. At what
distance from the mean position is its K.E. equal to its
Example - 17 P.E.?
A particle executes SHM of time period 10 s. The 1 1
mω (a –y ) and P.E. = m ω y
2 2 2 2 2
displacement of particle at any instant is given by the Sol. K.E. =
2 2
relation x = 10 sin ωt (in cm).
1 1
∴ mω (a –y ) = m ω y
2 2 2 2 2
(i) Find the velocity of body 2 s after it passes through As, K.E. = P.E.
the mean position and 2 2
2 2 2 2 2
(ii) The acceleration 2 s after it passes the mean or a – y = y or y = a /2 or y = a/ 2 = 0.71 a
position.
Example - 20
2π 2π
Sol. Here; T = 10 s; ω = = rad/s ; amplitude,
–1
T 10 A mass of 1 kg is executing SHM which is given by,

x = 6.0 cos (100 t + π/4) cm. What is the maximum
r = 10 cm. kinetic energy?
Velocity of the particle at any instant t is given by Sol. Here, m = 1 kg.
v = rω cos ωt The given equation of SHM is x = 6.0 cos (100 t + π/4)
2π  2π  Comparing it with the equation of SHM
(i) When t = 2 s, v = 10 × cos  × 2 
10  10  x = a cos (ωt + φ),
= 2 π cos (0.4π) = 1.942 cm/s. we have, a = 6.0 cm = 6/100 m and ω = 100 rad s
–1
1 2
(ii) Acceleration at any time t is given by maximum kinetic energy = m(vmax)
2
 2π 
2
 2π   6 
2
A = –ω r sin ωt = –   × 10 × sin  × 2 
2
1 1
×100  = 18 J
2
= m(aω) = × 1 × 
 10   10  2 2  100 
@cbseinfinite
Example - 21 Therefore, total restoring force on mass m is

An 8 kg body performs SHM of amplitude 30 cm. The F = F1 + F2 = – kx + (– kx) = – 2kx ...(i)
restoring force is 60 N, when the displacement is Here –ve sign shows that force F is directed towards the
30 cm. Find (a) time period (b) the acceleration, P.E equilibrium position O and F ∝ x. Therefore, if the mass
and K.E., when displacement is 12 cm. m is left free, it will execute linear SHM.
Sol. Here, m = 8 kg; a = 30 cm = 0.30 m; Comparing (i) with the relation, F = – kx, we have
(a) F = 60 N; y = 0.30 m Spring factor, k’ = 2 k
F 60 Here, inertia factor = mass of the block = m
=
–1
F = ky or k = = 200 Nm
y 0.30 inertia factor m
As time period, T = 2π = 2π
spring factor 2k
k 200
As ω = =
–1
= 5 rad/s
m 8 Example - 23
2π 2 × 22 44 For the damped oscillator shown in Figure, the mass
Time period, T == = = 1.256 s
ω 7 × 5 35
–1
m of the block is 200 g, k = 90 Nm and the damping
–1
(b) Here, y = 12 cm = 0.12 m constant b is 40 gs .
Calculate:
∴ Acceleration, a = ω y = (5) × 0.12 = 3.0 ms
2 2 –2
(a) the period of oscillation,

1 2 1 2
P.E. = ky = × (200) × (0.12) = 1.44 J (b) time taken for its amplitude of vibrations to drop
2 2 to half of its initial value and
1 2 2 1 2 2 (c) the time taken for its mechanical energy to drop to
K.E. = k (a – y ) = × 200 × [(0.30) – (0.12) ]
2 2 half its initial value.
= 7.56 J –1
Sol. (a) Here m = 200 g = 0.2 kg, k = 90 Nm
Example - 22 k 90
∴ =
–1 –1
= 450 Nm kg
Two identical springs of spring constant k are attached m 0.2
to a block of mass m and to fixed supports as shown
b2 (0.04) 2
=
2 –2
in Figure. Show that when the mass is displaced from = 0.01 kg s
its equilibrium position on either side, it executes a 4m 4 × (0.2) 2
2
simple harmonic motion. Find the period of

k b2 k b2 k
oscillation. As, >> ,therefore, ω’ = − ≈
m 4m 2 m 4m 2 m
2π m 22 0.2
T= =
2π =
2× ≈ 0.3 s.
ω' k 7 90
(b) If T is the time, when amplitude drops to half
value then amplitude of the damped oscillations at
–bt/2m
time t is a = x0 e
Sol. Let the mass m be displaced by a small distance x to the when t = T, a = x0/2
right as shown in Figure. Due to it, the spring on the left
hand side gets stretched by length x and the spring on x0
∴
–bT/2m
= x0 e
the right hand side gets compressed by length x. The 2
forces acting on the mass due to springs are
bT/2m bT
F1 = – kx towards left hand side or 2 = e or log e 2 =
2m
F2 = – kx towards left hand side
2m 2.3026 × 2m
or T = loge2 = log102
b b
2.3026 × 2 × 0.2 × 0.3010
=
0.04
= 6.93 s.
@cbseinfinite
(c) If T’ is the time, when mechanical energy drops to Example - 25

half its mechanical energy E0, then mechanical
The moment of inertia of the disc used in a torsional
energy E of the damped oscillations at an instant t
is given by pendulum about the suspension wire is 0.2 kg-m 2 . It
–bt/m oscillates with a period of 2s. Another disc is placed
E = E0 e over the first one and the time period of the system
E0 –bT’/m
becomes 2.5s. Find the moment of inertia of the
When t = T’, E = E0/2 then = E0e second disc about the wire.
2
bT’/m
or 2 = e
bT '
or loge2 =
m
m
or T’ = 2.3026 log102 ×
b
0.2
or T’ = 2.3026 × 0.3010 × = 3.46 s.
0.04
Sol. Let the torsional constant of the wire be k.
Example - 24
The moment of inertia of the first disc about the wire
A simple pendulum of length l is suspended from the
is 0.2 kg-m 2 .
ceiling of a cart which is sliding without friction on an
inclined plane of inclination θ . What will be the time Hence, the time period is
period of the pendulum?
I
Sol. Here, point of suspension has an acceleration. 2 s = 2π
K
a = g sin θ (down the plane). Further, g can be
resolved into two components g sin θ (along the 0.2 kg-m 2
= 2π … (i)
plane) and g cos θ (perpendicular to plane). k
When the second disc having moment of inertia I1
about the wire is added, the time period is
0.2 kg-m 2 + I1
2.5s = 2π … (ii)
k
In the frame of cart, 6.25 0.2 kg-m 2 + I1

    From (i) and (ii), =
g eff = g − a = g + ( − g sin θ ) 4 0.2 kg-m 2
 This gives I1 ≈ 0.11kg-m 2
Where a is acceleration of the cart
 
Resultant of g and −a will be g cos θ . Example - 26
g cos θ (perpendicular to plane)
∴ g eff = The friction coefficient between the two blocks shown
in figure is µ and the horizontal plane is smooth.
l l
∴ T 2π = 2π
= (a) If the system is slightly displaced and released,
g eff g cos θ
find the time period.
NOTE: (b) Find the magnitude of the frictional force
between the blocks when the displacement from
l the mean position is x.
If θ =0°, T =2π which is quite obvious. (c) What can be the maximum amplitude if the upper
g
block does not slip relative to the lower block?
@cbseinfinite
Sol. (a) For small amplitude, the two blocks oscillate mg

=2T mg= =
or, 2ky mg or, y
together. The angular frequency is 2k
k mg
ω= The spring is extended by a distance when the
M +m 2k
pulley is in equilibrium.
M +m
And so the time period T = 2π Now suppose, the centre of the pulley goes down
k
further by a distance x. The total increase in the length
(b) The acceleration of the blocks at displacement x of the string plus the spring is 2x . The energy of the
from the mean position is system is
−kx
2
1 2 1 2 1  mg 
−ω 2 x =
a= U= I ω + mv − mgx + k  + 2x 
M +m 2 2 2  2k 
The resultant force on the upper block is, therefore, 1 I  2 m g
2 2
=  2 + mv + + 2kx 2
−mkx 2r  8 k
ma =
M +m
dU
This force is provided by the friction of the lower As the system is conservative, = 0,
dt
block. Hence, the magnitude of the frictional force
mk x  I  dv
is Giving 0 =
 2 + m  v + 4kxv
M +m  r  dt
(c) Maximum force of friction required for simple dv 4kx
Or, = −
dt  I 
harmonic motion of the upper block is
mkA
at  2 + m
M +m r 
the extreme positions. But the maximum frictional 4k
force can only be µ mg . Or, a = −ω 2 x, where ω 2 =
 I 
 2 + m
mkA µ ( M + m) g r 
= µ=
Hence, mg or, A
M +m k Thus, the centre of mass of the pulley executes a
simple harmonic motion with time period
Example - 27
 I 
The pulley shown in figure has a moment of inertia I  2 + m
T = 2π  
about its axis and mass m. Find the time period of r
vertical oscillation of its centre of mass. The spring ( 4k )
has spring constant k and the string does not slip over
the pulley. Example - 28
A smooth inclined plane having angle of inclination
30° with horizontal has a mass 2.5 kg is held by a
spring which is fixed at the upper end as shown in
figure.
Sol. Let us first find the equilibrium position. For

rotational equilibrium of the pulley, the tensions in the
two strings should be equal. Only then the torque on
the pulley will be zero. Let this tension be T. The If the mass is taken 2.5cm up along the surface of the
T inclined plane, the tension in the spring reduces to
extension of the spring will be y = , as the tension
k zero. If the mass is then released, the angular
in the spring will be the same as the tension in the frequency of oscillation in radian per second is?
string. For translational equilibrium of the pulley,
@cbseinfinite
Sol. Tension of spring zero means that the spring is in

unstretched position. So, 2.5 cm is extension of spring
when the mass attach to spring.
From figure, it is clear that the downward acceleration
of spring along inclined plane is
g 10
g =′ g sin 30°= = = 5 m / s2
2 2
At the stretched position the restoring force is
balanced by weight of mass along inclined plane
k × x = mg ' = 2.5 × 5
Where, mass of the body = 2.5 kg
Extension of spring= x= 2.5 cm= 0.025 m and,
k = spring constant
⇒ k × 0.025 = 2.5 × 5
⇒k=
500
k 500
Angular frequency ⇒ ω= =
m 2.5
⇒ω =
14.14 rad / s
@cbseinfinite

Periodic Motion and Oscillatory Motion Simple Harmonic Motion
1. Which of the following equations does not represent a 6. A particle of mass 0.1 kg is executing SHM of
simple harmonic motion? amplitude 0.1 m. When the particle passes through the
–3
(a) y = a sin ω t (b) y = b cos ω t mean position, its K.E. is 8 × 10 J. The equation of
(c) y = a sin ω t + b cos ω t (d) y = a tan ω t motion of the particle, when the initial phase of
o
2. A body is moving in a room with a velocity of 20 m/s oscillation is 45 , is
perpendicular to the two walls separated by 5 m. There  π  π
(a) y 0.1sin  3t +  =
= (b) y 0.1cos  3t + 
is no friction and the collisions with the walls are  4   4
elastic. The motion of the body is  π  π
(a) not periodic =
(c) y 0.1sin  4t +  = (d) y 0.1cos  4t + 
 4  4
(b) periodic but not simple harmonic
7. The displacement of a particle is represented by the
(c) periodic and simple harmonic
π 
(d) periodic with variable time period equation: y = 3 cos  − 2ωt 
3. Assertion: In extreme position of a particle executing 4 
S.H.M., both velocity and acceleration are zero. The motion of the particle is:
Reason: In S.H.M., acceleration always acts towards 2π
(a) simple harmonic with period
mean position. ω
(a) Both Assertion and Reason are true and Reason is π
(b) simple harmonic with period
the correct explanation of Assertion. ω
(b) Both Assertion and Reason are true but Reason is (c) periodic but not simple harmonic
NOT the correct explanation of Assertion. (d) non-periodic
(c) Assertion is true but Reason is false. 8. For the two curves choose the correct option.
(d) Assertion is false but Reason is true.
4. The function sin 2 ωt represents
(a) a periodic but simple harmonic motion with a
period 2π / ω
(b) a periodic but not simple harmonic motion with a
period π / ω
(c) a simple harmonic motion with a period 2π / ω (a) (Amplitude)A > (Amplitude)B
(d) a simple harmonic motion with a period π / ω (b) (Time period)A > (Time period)B
5. Out of the following functions representing motion of (c) Both (a) and (b) are correct
a particle which represents SHM? (d) Both (a) and (b) are incorrect
(1) y = sin ωt – cos ωt (2) y = sin3ωt 9. The relation between acceleration and displacement of
 3π  four particles are given below:
=
(3) y 5cos  − 3ωt  (4) y = 1 + ωt + ω2 t 2
which one of the particles is executing simple
 4 
(a) Only (1) and (2) harmonic motion?
2
(b) Only (1) (a) ax = + 2x (b) ax = + 2x
2
(c) Only (4) does not represent SHM (c) ax = – 2x (d) ax = – 2x
(d) Only (1) and (3) 10. A particle executing SHM has a maximum speed of
2
30 cm/s and a maximum acceleration of 60 cm/s . The
period of oscillation is:
π
(a) π s (b) s
2
π
(c) 2π s (d) s
4
@cbseinfinite
11. For a particle in SHM, if the amplitude of the 17. The time taken by a particle executing S.H.M. of
displacement is a and the amplitude of velocity is v the period T to move from the mean position to half the
amplitude of acceleration is: maximum displacement is
v2 (a) T/2 (b) T/4
(a) va (b) (c) T/8 (d) T/12
a
18. A particle executes simple harmonic motion between
v2 v
(c) (d) x = –A and x = + A. The time taken for it to go from 0
2a a
to A/2 is t1 and to go from A/2 to A is t2. Then
12. What is the ratio of maximum acceleration to the
(a) t1 < t2 (b) t1 > t2
maximum velocity of a simple harmonic oscillator?
(c) t1 = t2 (d) t1 = 2 t2
2
(a) ω (b) 19. Two pendulums of time period 3 s and 8 s respectively
ω
starts oscillating simultaneously from two opposite
1
(c) (d) 2ω extreme positions. After how much time they will be
ω in the same phase?
13. A mass m is performing linear simple harmonic
24 12
motion, then which of the following graph represents (a) s (b) s
5 5
correctly the variation of acceleration a corresponding
to linear velocity v? 24 12
(c) s (d) s
2 2 11 11
v v
20. Two particles are executing simple harmonic motion
of the same amplitude A and frequency ω along the
(a) (b) x–axis. Their mean position is separated by distance
x0 (x0 > A). If the maximum separation between them
a2 a2 is (x0 + A), the phase difference between their motion
v2 v2 is
π π
(a) (b)
3 4
(c) (d) π π
(c) (d)
a
2
a
2 6 2
21. The radius of circle, the period of revolution, initial
14. The displacement of an oscillating particle varies with
position and sense of revolution are indicated in the
time (in seconds) according to the equation
fig.
π  t 1
y = sin  +  , where y is in cm. The maximum
2  2 3
acceleration (in m/s) of the particle is: [take π 2 = 10]
Phasors in SHM
15. The phase difference between x1 = A sin ω t and
x 2 = A cos ω t is:
π π
(a) (b) y – projection of the radius vector of rotating particle
2 4
P is:
π π
(c)
3
(d)
6  πt 
(a) y(t) = 4 sin   , where y in m
16. A particle is performing S.H.M. along X-axis with  2
amplitude 4 cm and time period 1.2 sec. The minimum  3πt 
(b) y(t) = 3 cos   , where y in m
time taken by the particle to move from x = + 2 cm to  2 
x = + 4 cm and back again is given by  πt 
(c) y(t) = 3 cos   , where y in m
(a) 0.6 s (b) 0.4 s  2
(c) 0.3 s (d) 0.2 s (d) y(t) = – 3 cos 2πt, where y in m
@cbseinfinite
22. A particle is executing simple harmonic motion with 28. The force constant of a weightless spring is 16 N/m.
frequency 5. The frequency at which its kinetic energy A body of mass 1.0 kg suspended from it is pulled
changes into potential energy is down through 5 cm from it’s mean position and then
released. The maximum kinetic energy of the system
Energy in Simple Harmonic Motion
(spring + body) will be
23. For a particle executing simple harmonic motion, the –2
(a) 2 × 10 J (b) 4 × 10 J
–2
displacement x is given by x = A sin ωt. Identify the –2

(c) 8 × 10 J (d) 16 × 10 J
–2
graph, which represents the variation of potential 29. The potential energy of a harmonic oscillation of mass
energy (PE) as a function of time t and displacement x 2 kg in its mean position is 5 J. If its total energy is 9 J
and its amplitude is 0.01 m, its time period of
π
oscillation is s , find the value of n
n
Spring Block System
30. A mass of 1 kg attached to the bottom of a spring has
a certain frequency of vibration. The following mass
has to be added to it in order to reduce the frequency
by half.
(a) 1 kg (b) 2 kg
(c) 3 kg (d) 4 kg
(a) I, III (b) II, III 31. The period of oscillation of a mass m suspended from
(c) I, IV (d) II, IV a spring is 2 seconds. If along with it another mass of
24. If a conservative force is acting on a system in SHM. 2 kg is also suspended, the period of oscillation
The total mechanical energy is: increases by one second. The mass m will be
(a) time dependent (a) 2 kg (b) 1 kg
(b) position dependent (c) 1.6 kg (d) 2.6 kg
(c) amplitude dependent 32. In the figure shown below, the block is moved
(d) both (a) and (c) are correct sideways by a distance A. The magnitude of net force
25. The expression for displacement of an object in SHM on the block is:
T
is x = A cos (ωt). The potential energy at t = is (take
2
potential energy at mean position to be zero):
1 1
(a) kA2 (b) kA2
2 8
1 2
(c) kA (d) zero (a) (k1 – k2) A (b) (k2 – k1) A
4
26. A body executes simple harmonic motion. The (c) (k1 + k2) A (d) None of the above
potential energy (PE), the kinetic energy (KE) and total 33. The time period of a spring mass system shown below
energy (TE) are measured as function of displacement is equal to:
x. Which of the following statements is true?
(a) KE is maximum when x = 0
(b) TE is zero when x = 0
(c) KE is maximum when x is maximum
(d) PE is maximum when x = 0
27. The kinetic energy of a particle executing S.H.M. is 2m m
16 J when it is in its mean position. If the amplitude of (a) 2π (b) 2π
k 4k
oscillations is 25 cm and the mass of the particle is
5.12 kg, the time period of its oscillation in seconds is 2π 2 m
(a) π/5 (b) 2 π k
(c) 5 π (d) 20 π
@cbseinfinite
34. There are two springs mass systems as shown in the 38. The displacement of an object attached to a spring and
figures. Resistive forces are absent everywhere. Let the executing simple harmonic motion is given by
time periods of two systems are T1 and T2. The relation x= 2 × 10−2 cos(π t) m. The time at which the
between T1 and T2 is: maximum speed first occurs is:
(a) 0.5 s (b) 0.75 s
(c) 0.125 s (d) 0.25 s
39. A force of 6.4 N stretches a vertical spring by 0.1m.
The mass that must be suspended from the spring so
that it oscillates with a period of (π/4) second is
(a) (π/4) kg (b) 1 kg
T2
(a) T1 = (c) (1/π) kg (d) 10 kg
2
40. If a spring has time period T, and is cut into n equal
T
(b) T2 = 1 parts, then the time period of each part will be
T2
T
(c) T1 = T2 (a) T n (b)
n
(d) Cannot establish the relation between them (c) nT (d) T
35. Two identical springs are connected in series and 41. Two bodies M and N of equal masses are suspended
parallel as shown in the figure. If fs and fp are from two separate massless springs of spring constant
frequencies of series and parallel arrangements, what k1 and k2 respectively. If the two bodies oscillate
f vertically such that their maximum velocities are
is s ?
fp equal, the ratio of the amplitude of M to that of N is
k1 k1
(a) (b)
k2 k2
k2 k2
(c) (d)
k1 k1
42. A block is in SHM on a frictionless surface as shown
in the figure. The position x = 0 shows the unstretched
position of the spring.
(a) 1 : 2 (b) 2 : 1
(c) 1 : 3 (d) 3 : 1
36. A block of mass 1 kg hangs without vibrating at the
end of a spring whose force constant is 200 N/m and
which is attached to the ceiling of an elevator. The
elevator is rising with an upward acceleration of g/3
when the acceleration suddenly ceases. The angular Choose the correct option with reference to the above
frequency of the block after the acceleration ceases is system.
(a) 13 rad/s (b) 14 rad/s (a) +A and –A are maximum displacements where, A
(c) 15 rad/s (d) None of these is amplitude
+A (b) x = 0 indicate the equilibrium position
37. A block is left from x = + A, its speed at x = is:
2 (c) The block executes to and fro motion about the
(ω = 2 rad/s). mean position, when pulled aside and released
(d) All of the above
(a) (3A) m/s (b) ( 3 A) m/ s

(c) (2A) m/s (d) ( 2 A) m/ s
@cbseinfinite
43. If the block is pulled by a distance x and left, the block 47. What is the velocity of the bob of a simple pendulum
will start oscillating. The value of x, so that at a at its mean position, if it is able to rise to vertical height
–2
moment when speed of the block become zero the of 10 cm? (g = 9.8 ms ).
spring become unstretched.
–1 –1
mg 2k (a) 2.2 ms (b) 1.8 ms
(a) (b) (c) 1.4 ms
–1
(d) 0.6 ms
–1
2k mg
48. A man measures time period of a simple pendulum
mg 2mg
(c) (d) inside a stationary lift and find it to be T. If the lift starts
k k
accelerating upwards with an acceleration g/4, then the
44. A coin is placed on a horizontal platform which
time period of pendulum will be
undergoes vertical simple harmonic motion of angular
frequency ω . The amplitude of oscillation is gradually 2T 5T
(a) (b)
increased. The coin will leave contact with the 5 2
platform for the first time 5 2
(c) (d)
(a) at the highest position of the platform 2T 5T
(b) at the mean position of the platform
49. A simple pendulum is oscillating without damping, as
g shown in figure. When the displacement of the bob is
(c) at an amplitude of 2
ω 
less than maximum, its acceleration vector a is
g2 correctly shown in
(d) for an amplitude of
ω2
45. One end of a spring of force constant k is fixed to a
vertical wall and the other to a block of mass m
resting on a smooth horizontal surface. There is (a) (b)
another wall at a distance x 0 from the block. The a
spring is then compressed by 2x 0 and released. The a
π m
time taken to strike the wall is , find the value
n k
of n
(c) (d)
a
a
50. A simple pendulum is suspended from the ceiling of a

lift. When the lift is at rest its time period is T. With
Angular SHM
what acceleration should the lift be accelerated
46. If we do an experiment by swinging a small ball by a upwards in order to reduce its period to T/2? (g is
thread of length 100 cm, what will be the approximate acceleration due to gravity).
time for complete to and fro periodic motion if the (a) 2g (b) 3g
swinging angle is very small? (c) 4g (d) g
(a) 4 s (b) 2 s
(c) 6 s (d) 1 s
@cbseinfinite
51. A hollow sphere is filled with water through the small 56. Which of the following expressions of force,
hole in it. It is then hung by a long thread and made to corresponds to simple harmonic motion along a
oscillate. As the water slowly flow out of the hole at straight line, where x is the displacement and a, b, c are
the bottom, the period of oscillation will: positive constant?
(a) continuously decrease (a) a + bx – cx2 (b) a – bx + cx2
2
(b) continuously increase (c) bx (d) – bx
(c) first decrease then increase 57. A physical pendulum is positioned so that its centre of
(d) first increase then decrease gravity is above the suspension point. When the
52. A simple pendulum has a time period T1 when on the pendulum is released it passes the point of stable
Earth’s surface and T2 when taken to a height 2R above equilibrium with an angular velocity ω. The period of
the Earth’s surface, where R is the radius of the Earth. small oscillations of the pendulum is
T (a) 4π (b) 2π
The value of 1 is: ω ω
T2
(a) 1/9 (b) 1/3 (c) π (d) π
ω 2ω
(c) 3 (d) 9 58. The displacement of a particle varies with time
53. A simple pendulum performs simple harmonic according to the relation: y = asin ωt + bcos ωt.
motion about x = 0 with an amplitude a and time Choose the correct statement.
a (a) The motion is oscillatory but not SHM.
period T. The speed of the pendulum at x = is
2 (b) The motion is SHM with amplitude (a + b).
2 2
πa n (c) The motion is SHM with amplitude (a + b )
, find the value of n
T (d) The motion is SHM with amplitude a 2 + b2
πa 3 πa 59. The displacement equation of a particle is
(a) (b)
2T T x = 3 sin 2 t + 4 cos 2 t
3π2 a πa 3 The amplitude and maximum velocity will be
(c) (d) respectively
T T
(a) 5, 10 (b) 3, 2
Miscellaneous Examples of SHM (c) 3, 4 (d) 4, 2
54. A particle of mass m moving along the x-axis has a Superposition of Simple Harmonic Motion
2
potential energy U(x) = a + bx where a and b are 60. Four simple harmonic motions.
positive constants. It will execute simple harmonic x1 = 8 sin ωt; x2 = 6 sin (ωt + π/2); x3 = 4 sin (ωt + π)
motion with a frequency determined by the value of and x4 = 2 sin (ωt + 3π/2) are superimposed on each
(a) b alone (b) b and a alone
other. The resulting amplitude and its phase difference
(c) b and m alone (d) b, a and m alone
with x1 are respectively
55. A metre stick swinging in vertical plane about a fixed
(b) 4 2 , π/2
–1
horizontal axis passing through its one end undergoes (a) 20, tan (1/2)
small oscillation of frequency f0. If the bottom half of –1
(c) 20, tan (2) (d) 4 2 , π/4
the stick were cut off, then its new frequency of small
61. The displacement equation of a particle is
oscillation would become.
x = 3 sin 2t + 4 cos 2t
The amplitude and maximum velocity will be
respectively
(a) 5, 10 (b) 3, 2
(c) 4, 2 (d) 3, 4
(a) f0 (b) 2 f0 62. Two similar simple harmonic motions are propagating
in x-axis and another one in y-axis. When they collide
(c) 2f0 (d) 2 2 f 0
to superimpose, the resultant wave will be:
(a) elliptical (b) hyperbolic
(c) straight line (d) parabolic
@cbseinfinite
63. The resultant of two rectangular simple harmonic 70. In damped oscillation graph between velocity and
motions of same frequency and unequal amplitudes but position will be:
π
differing in phase by is:
2
(a) Simple harmonic (b) Circular (a) (b)
(c) Elliptical (d) Parabolic

64. Two mutually perpendicular simple harmonic
vibrations have same amplitude, frequency, and phase.
When they superimpose, the resultant form of (c) (d)
vibrations will be:
(a) A circle (b) An ellipse
(c) A straight line (d) A parabola
71. The drag force on the vane is directly proportional to:
65. The composition of two simple harmonic motions of
(a) velocity of vane (b) displacement of vane
equal periods at right angle to each other with a phase
(c) spring constant (d) mass of the block
difference of π results in the displacement of the
72. The expression for the motion of block in damped
particles along:
oscillation can be represented as:
(a) Straight line (b) Circle
d2 x dx dx d2 x
(c) Ellipse (d) Parabola (a) m +b + kx =
0 (b) m + b 2 + kx =
0
dt 2 dt dt dt
Damped and Forced Oscillations d2 x dx d2 x dx
(c) m 2
+b − kx =0 (d) m 2
− b − kx = 0
66. Pendulum after some time becomes slow in motion dt dt dt dt
and finally stops due to: 73. In case of a forced vibration, the resonance wave
(a) air friction (b) earth’s gravity becomes very sharp when the
(c) mass of pendulum (d) none of the above (a) applied periodic force is small
67. In the above question, the net force acting on the (b) quality factor is small
block of mass m is: (c) damping force is small
(a) kx – bv (b) –kx – bv (d) restoring force is small
(c) –kx + bv (d) None of these 74. When a damped harmonic oscillator completes 100
(here, x is the displacement of the block and v is the 1
velocity of the block, k is spring constant and b is oscillations, its amplitude is reduced to of its initial
3
damping constant.) value. What will be its amplitude when it completes
68. A simple pendulum is made of a body which is a 200 oscillations? [A0: initial amplitude]
hollow sphere containing mercury suspended by
1 2
means of a wire. If a little mercury is drained off, the (a) A 0 (b) A 0
5 3
period of pendulum will:
(a) remain unchanged (b) increase 1 1
(c) A0 (d) A 0
(c) decrease (d) become erratic 6 9
69. The graph between velocity and position for a
damped oscillation will be:
(a) Straight line (b) Circle
(c) Ellipse (d) Spiral
@cbseinfinite
75. Match the following columns of damped oscillations

=
expressed by x(t) Ae − bt /2 m cos (ω ' t + φ) , where
Column-I Column-II
(A) b = 0 means 1. Small damping
1
(B) kA 2 e − bt /m equals 2. Amplitude
2
b
(C) If << 1 means 3. No damping
km
4. Total mechanical
energy
Choose the correct option regarding above columns.
Form the codes given below
Codes
A B C
(a) 3 2 1
(b) 1 2 3
(c) 3 4 1
(d) 3 4 2
@cbseinfinite

1. A particle is performing S.H.M. along X-axis with 5. In an experiment to determine the period of a simple
amplitude 4 cm and time period 1.2 sec. The minimum pendulum of length 1 m, it is attached to different
time taken by the particle to move from x = + 2 cm to spherical bobs of radii r1 and r2. The two spherical bobs
x = + 4 cm and back again is given by [2015] have uniform mass distribution. If the relative
(a) 0.6 s (b) 0.4 s difference in the periods, is found to be 5 × 10−4 s , the
(c) 0.3 s (d) 0.2 s difference in radii, r1 − r2 is best given by:
2. A particle performs simple harmonic motion with
amplitude A. Its speed is tripled at the instant when it ( length () >>> ( r1 , r2 ) ) [2017]
2A (a) 1 cm (b) 0.1 cm
is at a distance from equilibrium position. The
3 (c) 0.05 cm (d) 0.01 cm
new amplitude of the motion is: [2016] 6. A sliver atom in a solid oscillates in simple harmonic
(a) 3 A (b) A 3 motion in some direction with a frequency of 1012/sec
7A A What is the force constant of the bonds connecting one
(c) (d) 41 atom with the other? (Molecular weight of silver =108
3 3
and Avogadro number = 6.02× 1023 gm mole-1)
3. A particle is executing, simple harmonic motion with
[2018]
a time period T. At time t = 0, it is at its position of
(a) 2.2 N/m (b) 5.5 N/m
equilibrium. The kinetic energy–time graph of the
(c) 6.4 N/m (d) 7.1 N/m
particle will look like [2017]
7. A pendulum with time period of 1s is losing energy due
to damping. At certain time its energy is 45 J. If after
completing 15 oscillations, its energy has become 15 J,
(a)
its damping constant (in s −1 ) is: [2015]
1 1
(a) (b)
ln 3
2 30
1
(c) 2 (d) ln 3
(b) 15
8. Two particles are performing simple harmonic motion
in a straight line about the same equilibrium point. The
amplitude and time period for both particles are same
and equal to A and T, respectively. At time t = 0 one
(c)
particle has displacement A while the other one has
−A
displacement and they are moving towards each
2
other. If they cross each other at time t, then t is:
(d) [2016]
T 5T
(a) (b)
4. A 1 kg block attached to a spring vibrates with a 6 6
frequency of 1 Hz on a frictionless horizontal table. T T
(c) (d)
Two springs identical to the original spring are 3 4
attached in parallel to an 8 kg block placed on the same 9. In an engine the piston undergoes vertical simple
table. So, the frequency of vibration of the 8 kg block harmonic motion with amplitude 7 cm. A washer rests
is: [2017] on top of the piston and moves with it. The motor speed
1 1 is slowly increased. The frequency of the piston at
(a) Hz (b) Hz
4 2 2 which the washer no longer stays in contact with the
piston, is close to: [2016]
1
(c) Hz (d) 2 Hz (a) 0.1 Hz (b) 1.2 Hz
2
(c) 0.7 Hz (d) 1.9 Hz
@cbseinfinite
10. The ratio of maximum acceleration to maximum 14. A particle executes simple harmonic motion and is
velocity in a simple harmonic motion is 10 s-1. located at x =a, b and c at times t 0 , 2t 0 and 3t 0
At, t = 0 the displacement is 5 m. What is the maximum respectively. The frequency of the oscillation is:
π [2018]
acceleration? The initial phase is . [2017]
4 1  a + c  1  a + c
(a) cos −1   (b) cos −1  
(a) 500 m/s2 (b) 500 2 m/s 2 2π t0  2b  2π t0  2c 
(c) 750 m/s2 (d) 750 2 m/s 2 1  2a + 3c  1  a + 2b 
(c) cos −1   (d) cos −1  
11. A block of mass 0.1 kg is connected to an elastic spring 2π t0  b  2π t0  3c 
of spring constant 640 Nm-1 and oscillates in a 15. A damped harmonic oscillator has a frequency of 5
damping medium of damping constant 10-2 kg s-1, The oscillations per second. The amplitude drops to half its
system dissipates its energy gradually. The time taken value for every 10 oscillations. The time it will take to
for its mechanical energy of vibration to drop to half of 1
drop to of the original amplitude is close to:
its initial value, is closest to: [2017] 1000
(a) 2 s (b) 3.5 s [2019]
(c) 5 s (d) 7 s (a) 50 s (b) 100 s
12. Two simple harmonic motions, as shown below, are at (c) 20 s (d) 10 s
right angles. They are combined to form Lissajous 16. A simple pendulum oscillating in air has period T. The
figures. bob of the pendulum is completely immersed in a non-
x ( t ) A sin ( at + δ )
= 1
viscous liquid. The density of the liquid is th of the
y ( t ) = B sin ( bt )
16
material of the bob. If the bob is inside liquid all the
Identify the correct match below. [2018] time, its period of oscillation in this liquid is: [2019]
Parameters Curve
1 1
(a) A ≠ B, a = b; δ = 0 Parabola (a) 2T (b) 2T
10 14
(b) π Line
=
A B= ;δ
, a b= 1 1
2 (c) 4T (d) 4T
15 14
(c) π Ellipse
A ≠ B, a = b; δ = m
2 17. Two masses m and are connected at the two ends
2
(d) π Circle
=
A B= ;δ
, a 2b= of a massless rigid rod of length l. The rod is suspended
2
by a thin wire of torsional constant k at the centre of
13. An oscillator of mass M is at rest in its equilibrium
mass of the rod-mass system (see figure). Because of
1
= k ( x − X ) . A particle of torsional constant k, the restoring torque is τ = k for
2
position in a potential V
2
angular displacement θ . If the rod is rotated by an
mass m comes from right with speed u and collides
angle θ 0 and released, the tension in it when it passes
completely inelastically with M and sticks to it. This
process repeats every time the oscillator crosses its through its mean position will be: [2019]
equilibrium position. The amplitude of oscillations
after 13 collisions is: (M=10, m=5, u=1, k=1) [2018]
1 1
(a) (b)
3 2
2 3
(c) (d)
3 5
3kθ 02 2kθ 02
(a) (b)
l l
kθ 02 kθ 02
(c) (d)
l 2l
@cbseinfinite
18. A rod of mass ‘M’ and length ‘2L’ is suspended at its 24. This displacement time graph of a particle executing
middle by a wire. It exhibits torsional oscillations; If S.H.M. is given in figure: (sketch is schematic and not
two masses each of ‘m’ are attached at distance ‘L/2’ to scale)
from its centre on both sides, it reduces the oscillation
m
frequency by 20%. The value of is close to: [2019]
M
(a) 0.77 (b) 0.57
(c) 0.37 (d) 0.17
19. A particle is executing simple harmonic motion (SHM) Which of the following statements is/are true for this
of amplitude A, along the x-axis, about x = 0. When its motion?
potential Energy (PE) equals kinetic energy (KE), the 3T
position of the particle will be: [2019] (A) The force is zero at t =
4
A A (B) The acceleration is maximum at t = T
(a) (b)
2 2 2 T
(C) The speed is maximum at t =
A 4
(c) (d) A T
2 (D) The P.E. is equal to K.E. of the oscillation at t =
20. A cylindrical plastic bottle of negligible mass is filled 2
with 310 ml of water and left floating in a pond with [2020]
still water. If pressed downward slightly and released, (a) (B), (C) and (D) (b) (A), (B) and (D)
it starts performing simple harmonic motion at angular (c) (A) and (D) (d) (A), (B) and (C)
frequency ω. If the radius of the bottle is 2.5 cm then 25. A block of mass m attached to a massless spring is
performing oscillatory motion of amplitude ‘A’ on a
ω is close to: (density of water = 103 kgm −3 ) [2019]
frictionless horizontal plane. If half of the mass of the
(a) 3.75 rad s −1 (b) 1.25 rad s −1 block breaks off when it is passing through its
(c) 2.50 rad s −1 (d) 8.00 rad s −1 equilibrium point, the amplitude of oscillation for the
21. A particle undergoing simple harmonic motion has remaining system become fA. The value of f is: [2020]
time dependent displacement given by 1 1
(a) (b)
πt 2 2
x ( t ) = A sin . The ratio of kinetic to potential
90 (c) 1 (d) 2
energy of this particle at t = 210 s will be: [2019] 26. A ring is hung on a nail. It can oscillate, without
1 slipping or sliding (i) in its plane with a time period T1
(a) (b) 1
9 and, (ii) back and forth in a direction perpendicular to
(c) 2 (d) 3 T
22. A simple pendulum of length 1m is oscillating with an its plane, with a period T2. The ratio 1 will be:
T2
angular frequency 10 rad/s. The support of the
[2020]
pendulum starts oscillating up and down with a small
angular frequency of 1 rad/s and an amplitude of 3 2
(a) (b)
10-2 m. The relative change in the angular frequency of 2 3
the pendulum is best given by: [2000] 2 2
-3
(c) (d)
(a) 10 rad/s (b) 1 rad/s 3 3
(c) 10-1 rad/s (d) 10-5 rad/s 27. When a particle of mass m is attached to a vertical
23. A simple harmonic motion is represented by: spring of spring constant k and released, its motion is
described by y ( t ) = y0 sin ωt , where ‘y’ is measured
( )
2
=y 5 sin 3π t + 3 cos 3π t cm . The amplitude and
from the lower end of unstretched spring. Then ω is:
time period of the motion are: [2019] [2020]
2 3 g 1 g
(a) 10 cm, s (b) 10 cm, s (a) (b)
3 2 y0 2 y0
3 2
(c) 5 cm, s (d) 5 cm, s 2g g
2 3 (c) (d)
y0 2 y0
@cbseinfinite
28. In the given figure, a body of mass M is held between 32. The point A moves with a uniform speed along the
two massless springs, on a smooth inclined plane. The circumference of a circle of radius 0.36 m and covers
free ends of the springs are attached to firm supports. 30o in 0.1 s. The perpendicular projection ‘P’ from ‘A’
If each spring has spring constant k, the frequency of on the diameter MN represents the simple harmonic
oscillation of given body is: [2021] motion of ‘P’. The restoration force per unit mass when
P touches M will be: [2021]
1 2k 1 k
(a) (b)
2π M 2π 2M
(a) 0.49 N/kg (b) 50 N/kg
1 2k 1 k (c) 9.87 N/kg (d) 100 N/kg
(c) (d)
2π Mg sin α 2π Mg sin α 33. If two similar springs each of spring constant k1 are
29. If the time period of a two meter long simple pendulum joined in series, the new spring constant and time
is 2s, the acceleration due to gravity at the place where period would be changed by a factor: [2021]
pendulum is executing S.H.M. is: [2021] 1 1
−2 −2 (a) , 2 2 (b) , 2
(a) 9.8ms (b) 16 ms 2 4
(c) π 2 ms −2 (d) 2π 2 ms −2 1
(c) , 2 2
1
(d) , 2
4 2
=
30. Y A sin (ω t + φ0 ) is the time-displacement equation
34. Given below are two statements:
of a SHM. At t = 0 the displacement of the particle is Statement I: A second’s pendulum has a time period
A of 1 second.
Y= and it is moving along negative x-direction.
2 Statement II: It takes precisely one second to move
Then the initial phase angle φ0 will be: [2021] between the two extreme positions.
In the light of the above statements, chose the correct
π 5π
(a) (b) answer from the options given below [2021]
6 6
(a) Statement I is false but Statement II is true
π 2π
(c) (d) (b) Statement I is true but Statement II is false
3 3
(c) Both Statement I and Statement II are true
31. Two identical springs of spring constant ‘2k’ are (d) Both Statement I and Statement Ii are false
attached to a block of mass m and to fixed support (see 35. A particle executes S.H.M., the graph of velocity as a
figure). When the mass is displaced from equilibrium function of displacement is [2021]
position on either side, it executes simple harmonic (a) A circle (b) An ellipse
motion. The time period of oscillations of this system (c) A parabola (d) A helix
is: [2021] 36. Time period of a simple pendulum is T inside a lift
when the lift is stationary. If the lift moves upwards
with an acceleration g/2, the time period of pendulum
will be [2021]
2 3
m m (a) T (b) T
(a) 2π (b) 2π 3 2
2k k
T
m m (c) (d) 3T
(c) π (d) π 3
k 2k
@cbseinfinite
37. Amplitude of a mass-spring system, which is executing 43. Time period of a simple pendulum is T. The time taken
simple harmonic motion decreases with time. 5
to complete oscillations starting from mean
If mass = 500g. Decay constant =20 g/s then how much 8
time is required for the amplitude of the system to drop α
position is T . The value of α is: [2021]
to half of its initial value? (ln 2 = 0.693) [2021] β
(a) 17.32 (b) 34.65 44. Consider two identical springs each of spring constant
(c) 0.034 (d) 15.01 k and negligible mass compared to the mass M as
38. For what value of displacement, the kinetic energy and shown. Figure 1 shows one of them and figure 2 shows
potential energy of a simple harmonic oscillation their series combination. The ratios of time period of
become equal? [2021] T
(a) x = 0 (b) x = ± A oscillation of the two SHM is b = x , where value
Ta
A A
(c) x = ± (d) x = of x is_________. (Round off to the Nearest Integer)
2 2 [2021]
39. A block of mass 1 kg attached to a spring is made to
oscillate with an initial amplitude of 12 cm.
After 2 minutes the amplitude decreases to 6 cm.
Determine the value of the damping constant for this
motion: (take ln 2 = 0.693) [2021]
−2 −1 −2 −1
(a) 0.69 × 10 kg s (b) 3.3 × 10 kg s
(c) 1.16 × 10−2 kg s −1 (d) 5.7 × 10−3 kg s −1
40. Two particles A and B of equal masses are suspended
from two massless springs of spring constants K1 and
45. A particle performs simple harmonic motion with a
K2 respectively. If the maximum velocities during
period of 2 second. The time taken by the particle to
oscillations are equal, the ratio of the amplitude of A
cover a displacement equal to half of its amplitude
and B is: [2021]
1
K K from the mean position is s.
(a) 2 (b) 1 a
K1 K2
The value of ‘a’ to the nearest integer is ………
K1 K2 [2021]
(c) (d)
K2 K1
41. The function of time representing a simple harmonic
π
motion with a period of is: [2021]
ω
(a) sin 3 (ωt )
(b) sin(ωt ) + cos (ωt )
π 
(c) 3 cos  − 2ωt 
4 
(d) cos (ωt ) + cos (2ωt ) + cos (3ωt )
42. A particle executes S.H.M. with amplitude ‘A’ and
time period ‘T’. The displacement of the particle when
xA
its speed is half of maximum speed is . The value
2
of x is: [2021]
@cbseinfinite

Objective Questions I [Only one correct option] 6. The variation of the acceleration a of the particle
executing S.H.M. with displacement x is as shown in
1. A simple harmonic motion is represented by the figure.
x (t) = 10 sin (20 t + 0.5). The amplitude (A) of the a
a
S.H.M. is
(a) A = 30 (b) A = 20
(a) (b)
(c) A = 10 (d) A = 5
2. The vertical motion of a ship at sea is described by the
x x
d2x
equation = − 4 x , where x is the vertical height of a
dt 2 a
the ship (in metre) above its mean position. If it

oscillates up to a height of 1 m from its mean position. (c) x (d) x
(a) its maximum vertical speed will be 1 m/s
(b) its maximum vertical speed will be 2 m/s
(c) its greatest vertical acceleration is 2 m/s2
(d) its greatest vertical acceleration is 1 m/s2 7.What is the maximum acceleration of the particle
3. A body of mass 0.01 kg executes simple harmonic doing the SHM
motion (S.H.M.) about x = 0 under the influence of a π t 
force shown below: The period of the S.H.M. is
= y 2sin  + φ  , where y is in cm.
2 
π π2
(a) cm/s 2 (b) cm/s 2
2 2
π π2
(c) cm/s 2 (d) cm/s 2
4 4
(a) 1.05 s (b) 0.52 s 8. The acceleration a of a particle undergoing SHM is
(c) 0.25 s (d) 0.30 s shown in the figure. Which of the labelled points
4. If a particle under S.H.M. has time period 0.1 sec and corresponds to the particle being at –xmax?
amplitude 2 × 10–3 m. It has maximum velocity
π π
(a) m/s (b) m/s
25 26
π
(c) m/s (d) None of these
30
5. For a particle executing simple harmonic motion,
(a) 4 (b) 3
which of the following statements is not correct
(c) 2 (d) 1
(a) The total energy of the particle always remains the
9. The equation of motion of a particle executing simple
same
(b) The restoring force is always directed towards a harmonic motion is a + 16p 2 x =
0 . In this equation, a
fixed point is the linear acceleration in m/s2 of the particle at a
(c) The restoring force is maximum at the extreme displacement x in metre. The time period in simple
positions harmonic motion is
(d) The acceleration of the particle is maximum at the 1 1
(a) s (b) s
equilibrium position. 4 2
(c) 1 s (d) 2 s
@cbseinfinite
10. The displacement of a particle moving in S.H.M. at any 18. The displacement time equation of a particle executing
instant is given by y = a sin ωt . The acceleration after SHM= is: x A sin ( t + φ ) . At time t = 0 position of the
T A
time t = is (where T is the time period) particle is x = and it is moving along negative x-
4 2
(a) aω (b) −aω direction. Then the angle φ can be:
(c) aω 2 (d) − aω 2 π π
11. The potential energy of a particle executing S.H.M. is (a) (b)
6 3
2.5 J, when its displacement is half of amplitude. The
total energy of the particle is 2π 5π
(c) (d)
(a) 18 J (b) 10 J 3 6
(c) 12 J (d) 2.5 J 19. Two simple harmonic motions are represented by the
12. A particle is vibrating in a simple harmonic motion  π
=
equations y1 0.1sin 100π t +  and
with amplitude 4 cm. At what distance from the  3
equilibrium is its energy half potential and half kinetic? y2 = 0.1cos π t . The phase difference of the velocity of
(a) 2 2 cm (b) 2 cm
particle 1 with respect to the velocity of particle 2 is
(c) 3 cm (d) 1 cm −π π
13. Energy of particle executing SHM depends upon (a) (b)
3 6
(a) amplitude only
−π π
(b) amplitude and frequency (c) (d)
(c) velocity only
6 3
20. If < E > and < U > denote the average kinetic and the
(d) frequency only
average potential energies respectively of mass
14. A particle of mass 0.10 kg executes SHM with an
describing a simple harmonic motion, over one period,
amplitude 0.05 m and frequency 20 Hz. Its energy of
then the correct relation is
oscillation is [given : π 2 = 10]
(a) < E > = < U > (b) < E > = 2 <U >
(a) 2 J (b) 4 J (c) < E > = – 2 <U > (d) < E >= – < U >
(c) 1 J (d) zero 21. The following figure depicts a circular motion. The
15. A particle is executing simple harmonic motion with a radius of the circle, the period of revolution, the initial
period of T seconds and amplitude a metre. The position and the sense of revolution are indicated on
a the figure. The simple harmonic motion of the x–
shortest time it takes to reach a point m from its
2 projection of the radius vector of the rotating particle P
mean position in seconds is can be shown as :
T
(a) T (b)
4
T T
(c) (d)
8 16
16. A particle of mass 0.1 kg is executing SHM of
amplitude 0.1 m. When the particle passes through the
mean position, its KE is 8 × 10-3 J. Find the equation
 2π t π 
of motion of the particle, if the initial phase of (a) x ( t ) a cos 
= + 
oscillation is 45°  4 4
π  πt π 

(a) y 0.1cos  3t +  =
=
 π
(b) y 0.1sin  6t +  (b) x ( t ) a cos  + 
=
 4   4  4 4
 2π t π 
 π  π (c) x ( t ) a sin 
= + 
=(c) y 0.1sin  4t +  = (d) y 0.1cos  4t +   4 4
 4  4
 πt π 
17. A particle of mass 0.1 kg executes SHM under a force (d) x ( t ) a cos  + 
=
F = (–10x) Newton. Speed of particle at mean position  3 2
is 6 m/s. Then amplitude of oscillations is
(a) 0.6 m (b) 0.2 m
(c) 0.4 m (d) 0.1 m
@cbseinfinite
22. A particle moves with simple harmonic motion in a 29. The potential energy of a harmonic oscillator of mass
straight line. In first τs, after starting from rest it travels 2 kg in its mean position is 5J. If its total energy is 9J
a distance a, and in next τ s it travels 2a, in same and its amplitude is 0.01 m, its time period will be
direction, then : π π
(a) s (b) s
(a) time period of oscillations is 8τ 100 50
(b) amplitude of motion is 4a π 
(c) time period of oscillations is 6τ (c)   s (d) none of these
 20 
(d) amplitude of motion is 3a
30. Two particles are executing SHM in a straight line.
23. In SHM for how many times potential energy is equal
Amplitude A and time period T of both the particles
to kinetic energy during one complete period?
are equal. At time t = 0, one particle is at displacement
(a) 1 (b) 2
−A
(c) 4 (d) 8 x1 = +A and the other at x 2 = and they are
24. Velocity at mean position of a particle executing SHM 2
is v. Velocity of the particle at a distance equal to half approaching towards each other. After what time they
of the amplitude will be cross each other?
v v T T
(a) (b) (a) (b)
2 2
3 4
3 3 5T T
(c) v (d) v (c) (d)
2 4 6 6
25. A particle executes linear simple harmonic motion 31. A particle is executing S.H.M. of amplitude 5 cm and
with an amplitude of 2 cm. When the particle is at 1 cm period 6 sec. How long will it take to move from one
from the mean position the magnitude of its velocity is end of its path on one side of mean position to a
equal to that of its acceleration. Then its time period in position 2.5 cm on the same side of the mean position?
seconds is (a) 1.5 sec (b) 1 sec
1 (c) 3 sec (d) 3.5 sec
(a) (b) 2π 3 32. A particle executing harmonic motion is having
2π 3
velocities v1 and v2 at distance x1 and x2 from the
2π 3
(c) (d) equilibrium position. The amplitude of the motion is
3 2π
26. A particle of mass m executes simple harmonic motion v12 x 22 − v 22 x12 v12 x12 − v 22 x 22
(a) (b)
with amplitude a and frequency ν . The average kinetic v12 + v 22 v12 + v 22
energy during its motion from the position of
v12 x 22 - v 22 x12 v12 x 22 + v 22 x12
equilibrium to the ends is (c) (d)
v12 - v 22 v12 + v 22
(a) 2π 2 ma 2ν 2 (b) π 2 ma 2ν 2
1 33. A certain simple harmonic vibrator of mass 0.1 kg has
(c) π 2 ma 2ν 2 (d) 4π 2 ma 2 v 2 a total energy of 10 J. Its displacement from the mean
4
27. The maximum acceleration of a particle in SHM is position is 1cm when it has equal kinetic and potential
made two times keeping the maximum speed to be energies. The amplitude A and frequency f of vibration
constant. It is possible when of the vibrator are
(a) amplitude of oscillation is doubled while frequency 500
=
(a) A =
2 cm, f Hz
remains constant π
(b) amplitude is doubled while frequency is halved
(c) frequency is doubled while amplitude is halved
1000
(d) frequency of oscillation is doubled while amplitude =
(b) A =
2 cm, f Hz
π
remains constant
1 500
πt =
(c) A = cm, f Hz
28. A particle moves according to the law x = a cos . 2 π
2
The distance covered by it in the time interval between 1 1000
=
(d) A = cm, f Hz
t = 0 to t = 3 s is 2 π
(a) 2a (b) 3a
(c) 4a (d) 5a
@cbseinfinite
34. A particle of mass m is executing simple harmonic 41. Two bodies M and N of equal masses are suspended
oscillations about the origin on the x-axis. Its potential from two separate massless springs of force constants
energy is U(x) = k x 3 , where k is a positive constant. k1 and k 2 respectively. If the two bodies oscillate
If the amplitude of oscillation is a, then its time period vertically such that their maximum velocities are
T is equal, the ratio of the amplitude M to that of N is
1 k1 k1
(a) proportional to (b) proportional to a (a) (b)
a k2 k2
(c) proportional to a (d) proportional a 3/ 2 k2 k2
35. The displacement of the particle from its mean position (c) (d)
k1 k1
(in metre) is given by
42. In arrangement given in figure, if the block of mass m
y = 0.2 sin (10πt + 1.5π) cos (10πt + 1.5π). is displaced, the frequency is given by
The motion of the particle is
(a) periodic but not simple harmonic motion
(b) non periodic
(c) simple harmonic motion with period of 0.1 s
(d) simple harmonic motion with period of 0.2 s. 1 k1 – k2 1 k1 + k2
(a) f = (b) f =
36. Maximum velocity in SHM is v m . The average 2π m 2π m
velocity during motion from one extreme point to the
1 m 1 m
other extreme point will be: (c) f = (d) f =
2π k1 + k2 2π k1 – k2
π 2
(a) v m (b) v m
2 π 43. Three masses 700 g, 500 g, and 400 g are suspended at
4 π the end of as spring as shown and are in equilibrium.
(c) v m (d) v m When the 700g mass is removed, the system oscillates
π 4
37. Force constant of a weightless spring is 16 N/m. A with a period of 3 seconds, when the 500 gm mass is
body of mass 1.0 kg suspended from it is pulled down also removed, it will oscillate with a period of
through 5 cm from its mean position and then released.
The maximum kinetic energy of the body will be
(a) 2 × 10–2 J (b) 4 × 10–2 J
(c) 8 × 10–2 J (d) 16 × 10–2 J
38. A particle is attached to a vertical spring and is pulled
down a distance 0.04 m below its equilibrium position
(a) 1 s (b) 2 s
and is released from rest. The initial upward
12
acceleration of the particle is 0.30 m/s2. The period of (c) 3 s (d) s
the oscillation is 5
(a) 4.08 s (b) 1.92 s 44. On a smooth inclined plane, a body of mass M is
(c) 3.90 s (d) 2.29 s attached between two springs. The other ends of the
39. Frequency of a particle executing SHM is 10 Hz. The springs are fixed to firm supports. If each spring has
particle is suspended from a vertical spring. At the force constant k, the period of oscillation of the body
highest point of its oscillation the spring is unstretched. (assuming the springs as massless) is
Maximum speed of the particle is: (g = 10 m/s2)
(a) 2π m / s (b) π m / s
1 1
(c) m/s (d) m/s
π 2π
40. To make the frequency double of an oscillator, we have
to 1/ 2 1/ 2
M   2M 
(a) Double the mass (a) 2π   (b) 2π  
(b) Half the mass K  K 
Mg sin θ
1/ 2
(c) Quadruple the mass  2 Mg 
(c) 2π (d) 2π  
(d) Reduce the mass to one-fourth 2K  K 
@cbseinfinite
45. Four massless springs whose force constants are 2k, 47. A massless rod is pivoted at point O. A string carrying
2k, k and 2 k respectively are attached to a mass M kept a mass m at one end is attached to the point A on the
on a frictionless plane (as shown in figure). If the mass rod. The period of small vertical oscillation of mass m
M is displaced in the horizontal direction, then the around its equilibrium position is:
frequency of the system.
1 k 1 4k a m a m
(a) (b) (a) T = 2π (b) T = π
2π 4M 2π M b k b k
1 k 1 7k b m b m
(c) (d) (c) T = 2π (d) T = π
2π 7M 2π M a k a k
46. m1 and m2 are connected with a light inextensible 48. A block of mass m, attached to a fixed position O on a
string with m1 lying on smooth table and m2 hanging smooth inclined wedge of mass M, oscillates with
amplitude A and angular frequency ω . The wedge is
as shown in figure. m1 is also connected to a light
located on a rough horizontal surface and the wedge
spring which is initially unstretched and the system is doesn’t move. If the angle of the wedge is 60°, then the
released from rest force of friction acting on the wedge is given by
(coefficient of static friction = µ)
(a) system will perform SHM with angular frequency

k ( m1 + m2 )
given by . (a) µ (M + m) g
m1m2 1
(b) mω 2 A sin ωt
(b) system performs SHM with angular frequency 2
k (c) µ ( M + m ) ω 2 A sin ωt
given by .
m1 + m2  3 
(d) µ ( M + m ) g + mω 2 A sin ωt 
(c) tension in string will be 0 when the system is  2 
released. 49. In the figure, the block of mass m, attached to the
mg springs of stiffness k is in contact with the completely
(d) maximum displacement of m1 will be 2 .
k elastic wall, and the compression in the spring is x. The
spring is compressed further by x by displacing the
block towards left and is then released. If the collision
between the block and the wall is completely elastic
then the time period of oscillations of the block will be:
2π m m
(a) (b) 2π
3 k k
π m π m
(c) (d)
3 k 6 k
@cbseinfinite
50. A uniform cylinder of length L and mass M having 53. The friction coefficient between two blocks of masses
cross-sectional area A is suspended with its length 1 kg and 4 kg shown in figure is µ and the horizontal
vertical from a fixed point by a light spring such that it plane surface is smooth. If the system is slight
is half submerged in a liquid of density σ at displaced from the mean position and released, it will
equilibrium position. When the cylinder is given a execute SHM. The maximum amplitude for which the
small downward push and released it starts oscillating upper block does not slip relative to the lower will be
with small amplitudes. If the spring has a force –(k is spring constant)
constant k, then its time period of oscillations will be
M M
(a) T = 2π (b) T = 2π
Aσ g k
M
(c) T = 2π (d) none of these
k + Aσ g
51. One end of a spring of force constant k is fixed to a 5µg µg
(a) (b)
vertical wall and the other to a block of mass m resting k k
on a smooth horizontal surface. There is another wall 3µg 2µg
(c) (d)
at a distance x0 from the black. The spring is then k k
compressed by 2x0 and released. The time taken to 54. A mass M = 5 kg is attached to a spring a shown in the
figure and held in position, so that the spring remains
strike the wall is
unstretched. The spring constant is 200 N/m. The mass
M is, then released and begins to undergo small
M
oscillations. The amplitude of oscillation is
2x0 x0
1 k k
(a) π (b)
6 m m
2π m π k
(c) (d)
3 k 4 m
52. A wooden cube (density of wood d) of side l floats in (a) 0.5 m (b) 0.25 m
a liquid of density ρ with its upper and lower surfaces (c) 0.2 m (d) 0.1 m
horizontal. If the cube is pushed slightly down and 55. A spring has a natural length of 50 cm and a force
released, it performs simple harmonic motion of period constant of 2.0 × 103 Nm–1. A body of mass 10 kg is
T. Then T is equal to suspended from it and the spring is stretched. If the
ρ d body is pulled down to a length of 58 cm and released,
(a) 2π (b) 2π
( d)g
ρ − ρg it executes simple harmonic motion. What is the net
force on the body when it is at its lowermost position
ρ d of its oscillation? (Take g = 10 ms–2)
(c) 2π (d) 2π
dg (ρ − d ) g (a) 20 N (b) 40 N
(c) 60 N (d) 80 N
56. A spring of force constant 200 N/m is mounted as
shown in figure and a mass 2 kg is attached to the free
end. If the system is given an initial displacement of
0.05 m and an initial velocity of 2 m/sec, find the
amplitude of simple harmonic motion.
(a) 0.4 m (b) 0.206 m

(c) 0.3 m (d) 0.5 m
@cbseinfinite
57. The ratio of frequencies of two pendulums are 2:3, then 61. A horizontal rod of mass m and length L is pivoted
their length are in ratio smoothly at one end. The rod’s other end is supported
(a) 2/3 (b) 3/ 2 by a spring of force constant k. The rod is rotated (in
4 vertical plane) by a small angle θ from its horizontal
9
(c) (d) equilibrium position and released. The angular
9 4
frequency of the subsequent simple harmonic motion
58. The period of oscillation of a simple pendulum of
is
length L suspended from the roof of a vehicle which
moves without friction down an inclined plane of
inclination α , is given by
L L
(a) 2π (b) 2π
g cos α g sin α
L L 3k k
(c) 2π (d) 2π (a) (b)
g g tan α m 3m
59. In case of a simple pendulum, time period versus 3k 3 g k
length is depicted by (c) + (d)
m 2L m
62. A uniform rod of length L is suspended from a point P
and is made to undergo small oscillations. Time period
of oscillation is (O is centre of mass):
(a) (b)
(c) (d) 3L L
(a) 2π (b) 2π
g g
7L L
(c) 2π (d) 2π
12 g 12 g
63. A rectangular block of mass m and area of cross-
60. A simple pendulum has time period T = 2s is air. If
section A floats in a liquid of density ρ . If it is given
whole arrangement is placed in non-viscous liquid
1 small vertical displacement from equilibrium, it
whose density is times the density of bob. The time undergoes oscillation with a time period T, then
2
(a) T ∝ m (b) T ∝ ρ
period in the liquid will be:
2 1 1
(a) s (b) 4 s (c) T ∝ (d) T ∝
2 A ρ
(c) 2 2 s (d) 4 2 s 64. A U tube of uniform bore of cross-sectional area A has
been set up vertically with open ends facing up. Now
M gm of a liquid of density d is poured into it. The
column of liquid in this tube will oscillate with a period
T such that
M MA
(a) T = 2π (b) T = 2π
g gd
M M
(c) T = 2π (d) T = 2π
gdA 2 Adg
@cbseinfinite
65. The metallic bob of a simple pendulum has the relative Objective Questions II
density ρ . The time period of this pendulum is T. If [One or more than one correct option]
the metallic bob is immersed in water, then the new 68. A coin is placed on a horizontal platform, which
time period is given by undergoes vertical simple harmonic motion of angular
ρ −1 ρ frequency ω . The amplitude of oscillation is gradually
(a) T (b) T
ρ ρ −1 increased. The coin will leave contact with the
platform for the first time
ρ −1 ρ
(c) T (d) T (a) at the highest position of the platform
ρ ρ −1
(b) at the mean position of the platform
66. One end of a spring of force constant k is fixed to a g
vertical wall and the other to a body of mass m resting (c) for an amplitude of
ω2
on a smooth horizontal surface. There is another wall
at a distance x0 from the body. The spring is then g
(d) for an amplitude of
compressed by 3x0 and released. The time taken to
ω
69. Two masses m1 and m2 are suspended together by a
strike the wall from the instant of release is
–1 light spring of spring constant k as shown in the figure.
(given sin (1/3) = (π/9))
When the system is in equilibrium, the mass m1 is
removed without disturbing the system, as a result of
this removal mass m2 performs simple harmonic
motion. For this situation mark the correct
statement(s).
π m 2π m
(a) (b)
6 k 3 k
π m 11π m
(c) (d)
4 k 18 k
67. A mass m is suspended from a spring of force constant
k and just touches another identical spring fixed to the
floor as shown in the figure. The time period of small
oscillations is
m1 g
(a) the amplitude of oscillation is
k
( m1 + m2 ) g
(b) the amplitude of oscillation is
k
(c) the system oscillates with angular frequency k
m2
m m m (d) the system oscillates with angular frequency

(a) 2π (b) π +π
k k k/2 k
(c) π
m
(d) π
m m ( m1 + m2 )
+π
3k / 2 k 2k 70. A particle is subjected to two simple harmonic motions
along x and y directions according to x = 3 sin 100 πt
and y = 4sin 100 πt
(a) Motion of particle will be on ellipse travelling in
clockwise direction.
(b) Motion of particle will be on a straight line with
slope 4/3.
(c) Motion will be simple harmonic motion with
amplitude 5.
(d) Phase difference between two motions is π/2.
@cbseinfinite
71. A rectangular block of mass m and area of cross 77. The length of second’s pendulum of the earth is 1 .
section A floats on a liquid of density ρ. If it is given a And the length of second’s pendulum on the moon is
small displacement, it oscillates with a period T, then 
 2 . Find the value of 1
(a) T ∝ m (b) T ∝ ρ 2
1 1 78. In a seconds pendulum, mass of the bob is 30 g. If it is

(c) T ∝ (d) T ∝ replaced by 90 g mass then its time period (in sec) will
A r
72. The potential energy of a particle of mass 0.1kg, be
moving along the x-axis, is given by U = 5x(x – 4)J, 79. The motion of a particle is given as
where x is in meter. It can be concluded that =x A sin ωt + B cos ωt . The motion of the particle is
(a) the particle is acted upon by a constant force. simple harmonic with amplitude ( A2 + B 2 ) , find the
n
(b) the speed of the particle is maximum at x = 2 m.

(c) the particle executes SHM. value of n
π 80. The displacement equation of a particle is
(d) the period of oscillation of the particle is s .
5 x = 3 sin 2t + 4 cos 2t
73. The angular frequency of the damped oscillator is
The product of magnitude of amplitude and magnitude
k r2  of maximum velocity will be:
given by,= ω  − 2 
where k is the spring
 m 4m  81. The equation of a SHM is given by
constant, m is the mass of the oscillator and r is the =x 4sin 5π t + 4 cos 5π t , where x is in cm and time t
r2 is in seconds. Find the phase constant (in degrees) of
damping constant. If the ratio is 8%, the change the motion.
mk
in time period compared to the undamped oscillator is 82. A particle undergoing SHM has the equation:
approximately as follows: =x A sin (ω t + φ ) , where x represents the
(a) increases by 8% (b) decreases by 8% displacement of the particle. The kinetic energy
(c) increases by 1% (d) decrease by 1% nπ
74. A body is in simple harmonic motion with time period oscillates with time period find the value of n.
ω
half second (T = 0.5 s) and amplitude one cm
(A = 1 cm). Find the average velocity in the interval in 83. The potential energy of a particle of mass 1 kg in motion
along the x–axis is given by: U = 4 (1 – cos 2x) J
which it moves from equilibrium position to half of its
amplitude. Here x is in metres. The period of small oscillations (in
(a) 6 cm/s (b) 4 cm/s π
sec) is , find the value of n.
(c) 16 cm/s (d) 12 cm/s n
Numerical Value Type Questions Assertion Reason
75. The mass and diameter of a planet are twice those of (A) If both assertion and reason are true and the reason
earth. The period of a second’s pendulum on this planet is the correct explanation of the assertion.
is 2 n . Find the value of n. (B) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is
not the correct explanation of the assertion.
76. A man measures the period of a simple pendulum
inside a stationary lift and finds it to be T sec. If the lift (C) If assertion is true but reason is false.
g (D) If the assertion and reason both are false.
accelerates upwards with an acceleration , then the
4 84. Assertion (A): In extreme position of a particle
2T executing S.H.M., both velocity and acceleration are
period of the pendulum becomes . Find the value
n zero.
of n. Reason (R): In S.H.M., acceleration always acts
towards mean position.
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
@cbseinfinite
85. Assertion (A): Water in a U-tube executes SHM, the 89. A simple harmonic oscillator consists of a block
time period for mercury filled upto the same height in attached to a spring with k = 200 N/m. The block slides
the U-tube bc greater than that in case of water. on a frictionless horizontal surface, with equilibrium
Reason (R): Thc amplitude of an oscillating pendulum point x = 0. A graph of the block’s velocity v as a
goes on increasing. function of time t is shown. Correctly match the
(a) A (b) B required information in Column I with the values given
in Column II (use π = 10):
2
(c) C (d) D
86. Assertion (A): The percentage change in time period
is 1.5%. If the length of simple pendulum increases
by 3%.
Reason (R): Time period is directly proportional to
length of pendulum.
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
87. Assertion (A): All oscillatory motions are necessarily Column-I Column-II
periodic motion, but all periodic motions are not (a) The block’s mass in kg (p) –200
oscillatory. (b) The block’s displacement (q) 0.20
Reason (R): Simple pendulum is an example of at t = 0 in metres
oscillatory motion. (c) The block’s acceleration (r) 4.0
2
(a) A (b) B at t = 0.10s in m/s
(c) C (d) D (d) The block’s maximum (s) –0.20
kinetic energy in joules
Match the Following
Paragraph Type Questions
Using the following passage, solve Q. 90 to 92
Column-II. Only one of these four options corresponds to Passage - 1
a correct matching. For each question, choose the option One end of an ideal spring is fixed to a wall at origin O and
corresponding to the correct matching. the axis of spring is parallel to x-axis. A block of mass m =
88. Two particles ‘A’ and ‘B’ start SHM at t = 0. Their 1kg is attached to free end of the spring and it is performing
positions as function of time are given by SHM. Equation of position of the block in co-ordinate system
XA = A sin ωt shown in figure is x = 10 + 3sin (10t), where t is in second
and x in cm.
XB = A sin (ωt + π/3)
Another block of mass M = 3 kg, moving towards the origin
Column-I Column-II
with velocity 30 cm/s collides with the block performing
(a) Minimum time (p) π SHM at t = 0 and gets stuck to it.
when x is same 3ω
(b) Minimum time (q) π
when velocity is ω
same
(c) Minimum time (r) π 90. Angular frequency of oscillation after collision is
(a) 20 rad/s (b) 5 rad/s
after which 2ω
vA < 0 and vB < 0 (c) 100 rad/s (d) 50 rad/s
91. New amplitude of oscillation is
(d) Minimum time (s) 5π
(a) 3 cm (b) 20 cm
after which 6ω (c) 10 cm (d) 100 cm
xA < 0 and xB < 0
92. New equation for position of the combined body is
(a) (10 + 3 sin 5t) cm (b) (10 – 3 sin 5t) cm
(c) (10 + 3 cos 10 t) cm (d) (10 – 3 cos 10t) cm
@cbseinfinite
Using the following passage, solve Q. 93 to 95 Using the following passage, solve Q. 96 to 100
Passage - 2 Passage - 3
A small block of mass m is fixed at upper end of a massive A 100 g block is connected to a horizontal massless spring of
vertical spring of spring constant k = 4 mg/L and natural force constant 25.6 N/m. As shown in figure (a), the block is
length ‘10L’. The lower end of spring is free and is at a height free to oscillate on a horizontal frictionless surface. The block
is displaced 3 cm from the equilibrium position and, at t = 0,
L from fixed horizontal floor as shown. The spring is initially
it is released from rest at x= 0. It executes simple harmonic
unstressed, and the spring-block system is released from rest motion with the positive x-direction indicated in figure (a).
in the shown position. The position-time(x-t) graph of motion of the block is as
shown in figure (b).
93. At the instant the speed of block is maximum, the

magnitude of force exerted by the spring on the block
is
mg
(a) (b) mg
2
(c) zero (d) None of these
94. As the block is coming down, the maximum speed
96. When the block is at position A on the graph, its
attained by the block is
(a) position and velocity both are negative
(a) gL (b) 3gL
(b) position is positive, and velocity is negative
3 3 (c) position is negative, and velocity is positive
(c) gL (d) gL
2 2 (d) position and velocity both the positive
95. Till the block reaches its lowest position for the first 97. When the block is at position B on the graph, its
time, the time duration for which the spring remains (a) position and velocity are positive
compressed is (b) position is positive, and velocity is negative
(c) position in negative and velocity is positive
L L 1
(a) π + sin −1 (d) position and velocity are negative
2g 4g 3
98. When the block is at position C on the graph, its
π L L 1 (a) velocity is maximum, and acceleration is zero
(b) + sin −1
4 g 4g 3 (b) velocity is minimum, and acceleration is zero
(c) velocity is zero and acceleration is negative
L L 2
(c) π + sin −1 (d) velocity is zero and acceleration is positive
2g 4g 3
99. Position of the block as a function of time can now be
π L L 2 expressed as
(d) + sin −1
2 2g 4g 3  π
=
(a) x 3cos 16t +  cm
 2
 π
=
(b) x 3cos 16t +  cm
 3
 π
=
(c) x 3.5cos 16t +  cm
 6
 π
=
(d) x 3.2 cos 16t +  cm
 4
@cbseinfinite
100. Velocity of the block as a function of time can be

expressed as
 π
(a) v =
−48sin 16t +  cm / s
 2
 π
(b) v =
−48sin 16t +  cm / s
 3
 π
(c) v =
−56sin 16t +  cm / s
 4
 π
(d) v =
−56sin 16t +  cm / s
 6
@cbseinfinite

When a particle of mass m moves on the x–axis in a potential 5. A simple pendulum has time period T1. The point of
of the form V(x) = kx2, it performs simple harmonic motion. suspension is now moved upward according to the
relation y = kt2, (k = 1 m/s2) where y is the vertical
m
The corresponding time period is proportional to , as can displacement. The time period now becomes T2 The
k
T12
be seen easily using dimensional analysis. However, the ratio of is
motion of a particle can be periodic even when its potential T22
energy increases on both sides of x = 0 in a way different from (Take g = 10 m/s2) [2005]
kx2 and its total energy is such that the particle does not 6 5
(a) (b)
escape to infinity. Consider a particle of mass m moving on 5 6
the x–axis. Its potential energy is V(x) = ax4 (a > 0) for |x| 4
near the origin and becomes a constant equal to V0 for |x| > (c) 1 (d)
5
X0 (see figure)
V(x) 6. A mass m is undergoing SHM in the vertical direction
about the mean position y 0 with amplitude A and
angular frequency ω . At a distance y from the mean
V0 position, the mass detaches from the spring. Assume
that the spring contracts and does not obstruct the
x motion of m.
X0
*
1. If the total energy of the particle is E, it will perform Find the distance y . (measured from the mean
periodic motion only if [2004] position) such that the height h attained by the block
(a) E < 0 (b) E > 0 is maximum.
(c) V0 > E > 0 (d) E > V0 (Aω 2 > g ) [2005]
2. For periodic motion of small amplitude, A, the time
period T of this particle is proportional to [2004]
m 1 m
(a) A (b)
α A α
α 1 α
(c) A (d)
m A m
3. The acceleration of this particle for |x| > X0 is [2004]
V
(a) proportional to V0 (b) proportional to 0
mX 0 7. Function x = A sin 2 ωt + B cos 2 ωt + C sin ωt cos ωt
V0 represents SHM: [2006]
(c) proportional to (d) zero
mX 0 (a) For any value of A, B and C (except C = 0)
4. A block P of mass m is placed on a horizontal (b) If A = –B, C = 2 B, amplitude = B 2
frictionless plane. A second block of same mass m is
placed on it and is connected to a spring of spring (c) If A = B; C = 0
constant k, the two blocks are pulled by a distance A. (d) If A = B; C = 2 B, amplitude = |B|
Block Q oscillates without slipping. What is the
maximum value of frictional force between the two
blocks? [2004]
kA
(a) (b) kA
2
(c) µs mg (d) zero
@cbseinfinite
8. Column–I describes some situation in which a small 9. Column-I gives a list of possible set of parameters
object moves. Column–II describes some measured in some experiments. The variations of the
characteristics of these motions. Match the situations parameters in the form of graphs are shown in
in Column–I with the characteristic in Column–II. Column-II. Match the set of parameters given in
[2007] Column-I with the graphs given in Column-II.
Column-I Column-II Indicate your answer by darkening the appropriate
(a) The object moves on the (p) The object bubbles of the 4 × 4 matrix given in the ORS. [2008]
x–axis executes under a is Column-I Column-II
conservative force in performing (a) Potential energy of (p)
such a way that its simple a simple pendulum
“speed” and “position” harmonic (y-axis) as a
=
satisfy v c c −x 2 motion. function of
1 2
displacement
,where c1 and c2 are
(x-axis)
positive constants.
(b) The object moves on the (q) The object (b) Displacement (y- (q)
x–axis in such a way does not axis) as a function
that its velocity and its change its of time (x-axis) for
displacement from the direction a one dimensional
origin satisfy v = –kx, motion at zero or
where k is a positive constant
constant. acceleration when
(c) The object is attached to (r) The kinetic the body is moving
one end of a mass–less energy of along the positive
spring of a given spring the object x-direction.
constant. The other end keeps on (c) Range of a (r)
of the spring is attached decreasing projectile (y-axis)
to the ceiling of an as a function of its
elevator. Initially velocity (x-axis)
everything is at rest. The when projected at a
elevator starts going fixed angle.
upwards with a constant (d) The square of the (s)
acceleration a. The time period (y-axis)
motion of the object is of a simple
observed from the pendulum as a
elevator during the function of its
period it maintains this length (x-axis).
acceleration. 10. The x–t graph of a particle undergoing simple
(d) The object is projected (s) The object harmonic motion is shown below. The acceleration of
from the earth’s surface can change the particle at t = 4/3 s is: [2009]
vertically upwards its direction
GM e only once.
2 , where Me is
Re
the mass of the earth and
Re is the radius of the
earth. Neglect forces
from objects other than 3 2 −π 2
the earth. (a) π cm s −2 (b) cm s −2
32 32
π2 3 2
(c) cm s −2 (d) − π cm s −2
32 32
@cbseinfinite
11. A uniform rod of length l and mass M is pivoted at the 15. A point mass is subjected to two simultaneous
centre. Its two ends are attached to two springs of equal sinusoidal displacements in x–direction,
spring constant k. The springs are fixed to rigid  2π 
x1 (t) = A sin ωt and x2 (t) = A sin  ωt + .
supports as shown in the figure, and rod is free to  3 
oscillate in the horizontal plane. The rod is gently Adding a third sinusoidal displacement
pushed through a small angle θ in one direction and x3(t) = B sin (ωt + φ) brings the mass to a complete
released. The frequency of oscillation is [2009]
rest. The value of B and φ are [2011]
3π 4π
(a) 2 A, (b) A,
4 3
5π π
(c) 3 A, (d) A,
1 2k 1 k 6 3
(a) (b)
2π M 2π M 16. A metal rod of length L and mass m is pivoted at one
1 6k 1 24k end. A thin disk of mass M and radius R (< L) is
(c) (d) attached at its centre of the free end of the rod.
2π M 2π M
12. The mass M shown in the figure oscillates in simple Consider two ways the disc is attached.
harmonic motion with amplitude A. The amplitude of Case A – the disc is not free to rotate about its centre
the point P is [2009] and
Case B – the disc is free to rotate about its centre.
The rod-disc system performs SHM in vertical plane
after being released from the same displaced position.
k1 A k2 A
(a) (b) Which of the following statement(s) is/are true?
k2 k1 [2011]
k1 A k2 A
(c) (d)
k1 + k2 k1 + k2
13. A 0.1 kg mass is suspended from a wire of negligible
mass. The length of the wire is 1 m and its cross-
sectional area is 4.9 × 10−7 m 2 . If the mass is pulled a
little in the vertically downward direction and released,
it performs simple harmonic motion of angular
frequency 140 rad s-1. If the Young’s modulus of the
(a) Restoring torque in case A = Restoring torque in
material of the wire is n×109 Nm-2 the value of n is
case B
[2010]
(b) Restoring torque in case A < Restoring torque in
14. A wooden block performs SHM on a frictionless
case B
surface with frequency f 0 . The block carries a charge
 (c) Angular frequency for case A > Angular frequency
+Q on its surface. If now a uniform electric field E is for case B
switched-on as shown, then the SHM of the block will (d) Angular frequency for case A < Angular frequency
be [2011] for case B
(a) of the same frequency and with shifted mean

position
(b) of the same frequency and with the same mean
position
(c) of changed frequency and with shifted mean
position
(d) of changed frequency and with the same mean
position
@cbseinfinite
17. A particle of mass m is attached to one end of a mass- 19. A block with mass M is connected by a massless spring
less spring of force constant k, lying on a frictionless with stiffness constant k to a rigid wall and moves
horizontal plane. The other end of the spring is fixed. without friction on a horizontal surface. The block
The particle starts moving horizontally from its oscillates with small amplitude A about an equilibrium
equilibrium position at time t = 0 with an initial position x0. Consider two cases: (i) when the block is
velocity u0. When the speed of the particle is 0.5 u0, it at x0; and (ii) when the block is at x = x0 + A. In both
collides elastically with a rigid wall. After this the cases, a particle with mass m (< M) is softly placed
collision [2013] on the block after which they stick to each other.
(a) the speed of the particle when it returns to its Which of the following statement (s) is (are) true about
equilibrium position is u0 the motion after the mass m is placed on the mass M?
(b) the time at which the particle passes through the [2016]
m (a) The amplitude of oscillation in the first case
equilibrium position for the first time is t = π
k M
changes by a factor of , whereas in the
(c) the time at which the maximum compression of the m+M
4π m second case it remains unchanged
spring occurs is t = (b) The final time period of oscillation in both the cases
3 k
is same
(d) the time at which the particle passes through the
(c) The total energy decreases in both the cases
equilibrium position for the second time is
(d) The instantaneous speed at x0 of the combined
5π m
t= masses decreases in both the cases
3 k
20. A block of mass 2M is attached to a massless spring
18. Two independent harmonic oscillators of equal mass with spring-constant k. This block is connected to two
are oscillating about the origin with angular other blocks of masses M and 2M using two massless
frequencies ω1 and ω2 and have total energies E1 and pulleys and strings. The accelerations of the blocks are
E2, respectively, The variation of their momenta p with a1,a2, and a3 as shown in the figure. The system is
a a released from rest with spring in its unstretched state.
positions x are shown in the figures. If = n2 and
b R The maximum extension of the spring is x0. Which of
= n, then the correct equation(s) is (are) [2015] the following option(s) is/are correct? [g is the
acceleration due to gravity. Neglect friction] [2019]
ω2
(a) E1ω1 = E2 ω2 (b) = n2
ω1
E1 E2 x0
(c) ω2 ω1 = n2 (d) = (a) At an extension of of the spring, the magnitude
ω1 ω2 4
of acceleration of the block connected to the spring
3g
is
10
4Mg
(b) x0 =
k
x
(c) When spring achieves an extension of 0 for the
2
first time, the speed of the block connected to the
M
spring is 3 g
5k
(d) a2-a1=a1-a3
@cbseinfinite

@cbseinfinite
13
WAVES
@cbseinfinite
WAVESChapter 13 141
WAVES
1. INTRODUCTION AND CLASSIFICATION OF In stationary waves particles of the medium vibrate

WAVES with different amplitude but energy does not
propagate.
Introduction of waves: When a particle moves through
(iii) Based on direction of propagation: Waves can be
space, it carries KE with itself. Wherever the particle
one, two or three dimensional according to the
goes, the energy goes with it. (One way of transporting
number of dimensions in which they propagate
energy from one place to another place).
energy. Waves moving along strings are one-
There is another way (wave motion) to transport energy
dimensional. Surface waves or ripples on water are
from one part of space to other without any bulk motion
two dimensional, while sound or light waves from a
of material together with it. Sound is transmitted in air in
point source are three dimensional.
this manner.
(iv) Based on the motion of particles of medium:
NOTE:
A wave is a disturbance that propagates in space,
transport energy and momentum from one point to
another without the transport of matter.
Few Examples of waves: The ripples on a pond (water Waves are of two types on the basis of motion of
waves), the sound we hear, visible light, radio and TV particles of the medium.
signals etc.
(i) Longitudinal waves
1.1. Classification of waves
(ii) Transverse waves
In the transverse wave the direction associated with
the disturbance (i.e. motion of particles of the
medium) is at right angle to the direction of
propagation of wave while in the longitudinal wave
the direction of disturbance is along the direction of
(i) Based on medium necessity: A wave may or may propagation.
not require a medium for its propagation. The waves 1.2. Transverse Wave Motion
which do not require medium for their propagation Mechanical transverse waves are produced in such type
are called non-mechanical, e.g. light, heat (infrared), of medium which have shearing property, so they are
radio waves etc. On the other hand the waves which known as shear wave or S-wave
require medium for their propagation are called
mechanical waves. In the propagation of mechanical
waves elasticity and density of the medium play an
important role therefore mechanical waves are also
known as elastic waves.
Example:
Waves in water, sound waves, seismic waves in
earth’s crust. Fig. 13.1
(ii) Based on energy propagation: Waves can be
NOTE:
divided into two parts on the basis of energy
propagation (i) Progressive wave (ii) Stationary Shearing is the property of a body by which it changes
waves. The progressive wave propagates with its shape on application of force.
constant velocity in a medium.
SCAN CODE
WAVES
@cbseinfinite
WAVES 142
⇒ Mechanical transverse waves are generated only in • In solids, mechanical waves (may be sound) can be
solids and surface of liquid. either transverse or longitudinal depending on the
mode of excitation.
Individual particles of the medium execute SHM about
The speed of the two waves in the same solid are
their mean position in direction perpendicular to the
different. (Longitudinal waves travels faster than
direction of propagation of wave.
transverse waves). e.g., if we struck a rod at an angle
A crest is a portion of the medium, which is raised as shown in fig. (A) the waves in the rod will be
temporarily above the normal position of rest of particles transverse while if the rod is struck at the side as
of the medium, when a transverse wave passes. shown in fig. (B) or is rubbed with a cloth the waves
A trough is a portion of the medium, which is depressed in the rod will be longitudinal. In case of vibrating
temporarily below the normal position of rest of particles tuning fork waves in the prongs are transverse while
of the medium, when a transverse wave passes. in the stem are longitudinal.
1.3. Longitudinal Wave Motion
In this type of waves, oscillatory motion of the medium
particles produces regions of compression
(high pressure) and rarefaction (low pressure) which
propagated in space with time (see figure).
Fig. 13.3
Furthermore in case of seismic waves produced by
Earthquakes both S (shear) and P (pressure) waves are
produced simultaneously which travel through the rock
Fig. 13.2
in the crust at different speeds
NOTE:
vs ≅ 5km / s while v p ≅ 9km / s  S-waves are transverse
The regions of high particle density are called
compressions and regions of low particle density are while P − waves are longitudinal.
called rarefactions. Some waves in nature are neither transverse nor
The propagation of sound waves in air is visualized as longitudinal but a combination of the two. These waves
the propagation of pressure or density fluctuations. The are called ‘ripple’ and waves on the surface of a liquid
pressure fluctuations are of the order of 1Pa, whereas are of this type. In these waves particles of the medium
vibrate up and down and back and forth simultaneously
atmospheric pressure is 105 Pa.
describing ellipses in a vertical plane.
1.4. Mechanical Waves in Different Media
• A mechanical wave will be transverse or
longitudinal depending on the nature of medium and
mode of excitation.
• In strings, mechanical waves are always transverse
when string is under a tension. In the bulk of gases
and liquids mechanical waves are always
Fig. 13.4
longitudinal e.g. sound waves in air or water. This is
because fluids cannot sustain shear.
SCAN CODE
WAVES
@cbseinfinite
WAVES 143
1.5. Characteristics of Wave Motion • Wave number ( v ) : it is defined as

• In wave motion, the disturbance travels through the 1 k
v= = = number of waves in unit length of the
medium due to repeated periodic oscillations of the λ 2π
particles of the medium about their mean positions. wave pattern.
• The energy is transferred from one place to another • Particle velocity, wave velocity and particle's
without any actual transfer of the particles of the acceleration: In plane progressive harmonic wave
medium. particles of the medium, usually oscillate simple
• Each particle receives disturbance a little later than harmonically about their mean position. Therefore,
its preceding particle i.e., there is a regular phase all the formulae that we studied in SHM apply to the
difference between one particle and the next. particles here also.
• The velocity with which a wave travels is different For example, maximum particle velocity is ± Aω at
from the velocity of the particles with which they mean position and it is zero at extreme positions.
vibrate about their mean positions. Similarly maximum particle acceleration is ±ω 2 A at
• The wave velocity remains constant in a given extreme positions and zero at mean position.
medium while the particle velocity changes However the wave velocity is different from the
continuously during its vibration about the mean particle velocity. This depends on certain
position. It is maximum at mean position and zero at characteristics of the medium. Unlike the particle
extreme position. velocity which oscillates simple harmonically
• For the propagation of a mechanical wave, the (between + Aω and − Aω ) the wave velocity is
medium must possess the properties of inertia, constant for given characteristics of the medium.
elasticity and minimum friction among its particles.
• ( )
Particle velocity v p and acceleration a p in a ( )
2. EQUATION OF PLANE PROGRESSIVE WAVE sinusoidal wave: The acceleration of the particle is
2.1. Important terms connected with wave motion the second partial derivative of y ( x, t ) with respect
• Wavelength ( λ ) [length of one wave]: Distance to t,

∂ 2 y ( x, t )
travelled by the wave during the time interval in ∴ ap = 2 −ω 2 A sin (ωt − kx ) =
= −ω 2 y ( x, t )
which any one particle of the medium completes one ∂t
cycle about its mean position. We may also define i.e., the acceleration of the particle equals −ω 2 times
wavelength as the distance between any two nearest its displacement, which is the same result we
particles of the medium, vibrating in the same phase. obtained for SHM. Thus, aP = −ω 2 (displacement)
• Frequency (n): Number of cycles (number of
2.2. Equation of a Plane Progressive Wave
complete wavelengths) completed by a particle in
unit time. • Particle velocity in wave motion: The individual
• Time period (T): Time taken by wave to travel a particles which make up the medium do not travel
distance equal to one wavelength. through the medium with the waves. They simply
• Amplitude (A): Maximum displacement of oscillate about their equilibrium positions. The
vibrating particle from its equilibrium position. instantaneous velocity of an oscillating particle of
• Angular frequency (ω ) : It is defined as the medium, through which a wave is travelling, is
known as "particle velocity".
2π
ω
= = 2π n
T
• Phase: Phase is a quantity which contains all
information related to any vibrating particle in a
wave. For equation
=y A sin (ωt − kx ) ; (ωt − =
kx ) phase.
• Angular wave number or propagation constant
2π
(k): It is defined as k = Fig. 13.5
λ
SCAN CODE
WAVES
@cbseinfinite
WAVES 144
• Wave velocity: The velocity with which the

3. TRANSVERSE WAVES ON A STRING
disturbance, or planes of equal (wave front), travel
through the medium is called wave velocity. A transverse wave is a moving wave whose oscillations
• Relation between particle velocity and wave are perpendicular to the direction of the wave. A simple
=
velocity: Wave equation: y A sin (ωt − kx ) , demonstration of the wave can be created on a horizontal
∂y length of the string by securing one end of the string and
Particle velocity v P = = Aω cos ( ωt − kx ) . moving the other end up and down. Light is another
∂t
example of a transverse wave, where the oscillations are
Wave velocity
electric and magnetic fields that are at right angles to the
λ ω ω ∂y
=
v= λ
= = , = −Ak cos (ω t − kx ) ideal light rays that describe the direction of propagation.
T 2π k ∂x
Transverse waves commonly occur in elastic solids,
1 ∂y ∂y 1 ∂y
=
− ⇒ =
− oscillations, in this case, are the displacement of solid
v ∂t ∂t v ∂t particles from their relaxed position, in the direction
Particle velocity at a given position and time is perpendicular to the propagation of the wave. Since these
equal to negative of the product of wave velocity displacements correspond to local shear deformation of
with slope of the wave at that point at that instant. the material, the transverse waves of this form are known
as a shear wave. In seismology, shear waves are also
2.3. Differential equation of Harmonic Progressive
known as secondary waves or S-waves. For example: -
Waves The ripples on the surface of the water, Electromagnetic
∂2 y waves, Ocean waves, etc.
= − Aω 2 sin (ωt − kx )
∂t 2 The speed of a wave on a string is given by
∂2 y
⇒ 2 = − Ak 2 sin (ωt − kx ) v=
T
∂x µ
∂2 y 1 ∂2 y
⇒ 2 = where T is tension in the string (in Newtons) and µ is
∂x v 2 ∂t 2
2.4. Relation Between phase Difference and Path mass per unit length of the string (kg/m).
Difference It should be noted that v is speed of the wave w.r.t. the
medium (string).
In case the tension is not uniform in the string or string
has nonuniform linear mass density then v is speed at a
given point and T and µ are corresponding values at
that point.
Fig. 13.6
Phase 0 π π 3π 2π 5π 3π
Difference 2 2 2
( ∆φ )
Fig. 13.7
Path 0 λ λ 3λ λ 5λ 3λ The velocity of a wave is calculated by dividing the
Difference 4 2 4 4 2
( ∆λ ) distance traveled by the time it took to travel that
distance. For waves, this is calculated by dividing the
Time 0 T T 3T T 5T 3T
λ
Difference 4 2 4 4 2 wavelength by the period as follows: v =
( ∆t ) T
We can take the inverse proportionality to period and
∆φ ∆λ ∆t  λ 
⇒ = = ⇒ Path difference =   phase
frequency and apply it to this situation as follows:
2π λ T  2π 
λ 1
difference v= ⇒v= λ ⇒v= λf
T T
SCAN CODE
WAVES
@cbseinfinite
WAVES 145
4. ENERGY TRANSFER IN A STRING WAVE 5. LONGITUDINAL WAVES
4.1. Rate of Energy, Power and Intensity of wave 5.1. Longitudinal waves and Equation of
t Longitudinal waves
• Energy Transferred = ∫ Pav dt Longitudinal waves are the waves where the
0
displacement of the medium is in the same direction as
Energy transferred in one time period = PavT the direction of the travel of the wave.
This is also equal to the energy stored in one The distance between the centres of two consecutive
wavelength. regions of compression or the rarefaction is defined by
• When a travelling wave is established on a string, wavelength λ . When the compression and rarefaction
energy is transmitted along the direction of regions of two waves coincide with each other, it is
propagation of the wave, in form of potential energy known as constructive interference and if the regions of
and kinetic energy compression and rarefaction do not coincide, it is known
Average Power ( P ) = 2π 2 f 2 A2 µ v as destructive interference.
Where, µ is linear mass density
• Intensity: Energy transferred per second per unit
cross sectional area is called intensity of the wave.
Power P 1
I= = ⇒ I = ρω 2 A2 v
Cross sectional area s 2
This is average intensity of the wave. Fig. 13.8
Energy density: Energy per unit volume of the wave A compression in a longitudinal wave is a region where
the particles are the closest together while rarefaction in
Pdt I
= = a longitudinal wave is a region where the paricle are
svdt v
spread out.
4.2. Relation Between Amplitude and Intensity of
5.2. Sound as a Pressure wave
wave
We can describe sound waves either in terms of excess
For light waves, the energy of the light wave is
pressure or in terms of the longitudinal
proportional to the intensity.
displacement suffered by the particles of the medium
E ∝ I , where E is the energy of the wave and I is the w.r.t. mean position.
intensity. =s s0 sin ω ( t − x / v ) represents a sound wave where,
E ∝ ( Amplitude ) ... (1)
2
s = displacement of medium particle from its mean
Also, the intensity of a wave is power transferred per unit position at x,
area. = s s0 sin (ωt − kx ) ..... ( 3.1)
We know that power is energy expended per unit time. When sound is not propagating particles are at mean
Therefore, position 1 and 2
E
I= , where A is the area of the wave and t is the time.
At
Therefore, we can say that.
I ∝ E ... ( 2 )
From expression (1) and (2) we can say that.
I ∝ ( Amplitude ) or
2
Fig. 13.9
Amplitude ∝ Intensity
When particles are displaced from mean position.
SCAN CODE
WAVES
@cbseinfinite
WAVES 146
Where Y = Young’s modulus of elasticity and

ρ = density.
Velocity of sound waves in a fluid medium (liquid or
gas) is given by
B
v= ... ( 2 )
Fig. 13.10 ρ
Change in volume = ∆V = ( ∆x + ∆s ) A − ∆xA = ∆sA Where ρ = density of the medium and B = Bulk
modulus of the medium given by,
∆V ∆sA ∆s
= = dP
V ∆xA ∆x B = −V ... ( 3)
dV
B∆V
∆P =− Newton’s formula: Newton assumed propagation of
V sound through a gaseous medium to be an isothermal
B∆s process.
∆P =− PV = constant
∆x
dP − P
Bds ⇒ =
dp = − dV V
dx
and hence B = P using equation (3) and thus he obtained
dp =− B ( − ks0 ) cos (ωt − kx ) for velocity of sound in a gas,
=dp Bks0 cos (ωt − kx ) =v

P
=
RT
where M = molar mass
ρ M
=dp ( dp )max ocs (ωt − kx ) The density of air at 0° at pressure 76 cm of Hg column
 π is ρ = 1.293kg / m3 . This temperature and pressure is
=p p0 sin  ωt − kx +  ..... ( 3.2 )
 2 called standard temperature and pressure at STP. Speed
Where = = variation in pressure at position x and
p dp of sound in air is 280m/s. This value is some what less
than measured speed of sound in air 332m/s ten Laplace
= =
p0 Bks maximum pressure variation
0 suggested the correction.
Equation 3.2 represents that same sound wave where, P Laplace’s Correction: Later Lapalce established that
is excess pressure at position x, over and above the propagation of sound in a gas is not an isothermal but an
average atmospheric pressure and pressure amplitude adiabatic process and hence PV γ = constant
p0 is given by P0 = Bks0 ..... ( 3.3) dP P
⇒ −γ
=
(B = Bulk modulus of the medium, K = angular wave dV V
number) dP
Where, B =
−V γ P and hence speed of sound is a
=
Note from equation (3.1) and (3.2) that the displacement dV
of a medium particle and excess pressure at any position gas,
π γP γ RT
are out of phase by . Hence a displacement maxima =v = ... ( 4 )
2 ρ M
corresponds to a pressure minima and vice-versa. Factors affecting speed of sound in atmosphere.
5.3. Speed of Sound and Laplace’s Correction (a) Effect of temperature: As temperature (T)
increases velocity (v) increases.
Velocity of sound waves in a linear solid medium is
given by v∝ T
For small change in temperature above room
Y
v= ... (1) temperature v increases linearly by 0.6m/s for every
ρ 1°C rise in temperature.
SCAN CODE
WAVES
@cbseinfinite
WAVES 147
γR p0ω s0 A B
=v × T 1/ 2 = =⇒v
M 2 ρ
∆v 1 ∆T B = ρ v 2 ⇒ p0 = Bks0 = ρ v 2 ks0
=
v 2 T
1  p0  p02 A pAvω 2 s02
1 v  =
Paverage ω p0 A  = 2 
=
=
∆v   ∆T 2  ρ v k  2ρ v 2
2T 
Maximum power
∆=
v ( 0.6 ) ∆T p02 A
= P= = ( pA) v v 2p= pAω 2 s02
ρv
max ,max
(b) Effect of pressure: The speed of sound in a gas is
γP γ RT ρ Avω 2 s02
=
given by v =
ρ M Total energy transfer = Pav × t= ×t
2
(c) Effect of humidity: With increase in humidity
Average intensity = Average power / Area the average
density decreases. This is because the molar mass of
intensity at position x is given by
water vapour is less than the molar mass of air.
So at constant temperature, if P changes then ρ also 1 ω 2 s02 B P02 v
=
<I> = .... (1)
changes in such a way that P / ρ remains constant. 2 v 2B
Hence pressure does not have any effect on velocity Substituting B = ρ v 2 , intensity can also be expressed as
of sound as long as temperature is constant.
P02
I= ρv ..... ( 2 )
6. SOUND INTENSITY AND LOUDNESS 2
NOTE:
Intensity of Sound Waves: Like any other progressive
wave, sound waves also carry energy from one point of 1 1
If the source is a point source then I ∝ and s0 ∝
space to the other. This energy can be used to do work, r2 r
for example, forcing the eardrums to vibrate or in the a
=
and s sin (ωt − kr + θ )
extreme case of a sonic boom created by a supersonic jet, r
can even cause glass panes of windows to crack. The 1
amount of energy carried per unit time by a wave is If a sound source is a line source then l ∝ and
r
called its power and power per unit area held
1 a
perpendicular to the direction of energy flow is called s0 ∝ =
and s sin (ωt − kr + θ )
r r
intensity. For a sound wave travelling along positive x-
axis described by the equation. Loudness: Audible intensity range for humans:
=s s0 sin (ωt − kx + φ ) The ability of human to perceive intensity at different
frequency is different. The perception of intensity is
=P p0 cos (ωt − kx + φ ) maximum at 1000 Hz and perception of intensity
decreases as the frequency decreases or increases from
δs
= ω s0 cos (ωt − kx + φ ) 1000Hz.
δt
For a 1000Hz tone, the smallest sound intensity that a
δs human ear can detect is 10−12 watt. / m 2 . On the other
Instantaneous power =
P F=
.v pA
δt
hand, continuous exposure to intensities above 1W / m 2
=P p0 cos (ωt − kx + φ ) Aω s0 cos (ωt − kx + φ ) can result in permanent hearing loss.
Paverage =
<P> The overall perception of intensity of sound to human ear
is called loudness.
= p0 Aω s0 < cos 2 (ωt − kx + φ ) > Human ear do not perceives loudness on a linear intensity
scale rather it perceives loudness on organismic intensity
scale.
SCAN CODE
WAVES
@cbseinfinite
WAVES 148
For example: If intensity is increased 10 times human The transmitted wave is never inverted, but propagation
ear does not perceive 10 times increase in loudness. constant k is changed.
It roughly perceived that loudness is doubled where
intensity increased by 10 times. Hence it is prudent to
define a logarithmic scale for intensity.
Decibel Scale: The logarithmic scale which is used for
comparing two sound intensity is called decibel scale.
The intensity level β described in terms of decibels is
 I 
defined as β = 10 log   ( dB )
 I0 
Here I 0 is the threshold intensity of hearing for human
ear
i.e I = 10−12 watt / m 2 .
In terms of decibel threshold of human hearing is 1dB
Fig. 13.11
Note that intensity level β is a dimensionless quantity Amplitude of reflected and transmitted waves:
and is not same as intensity expressed in W / m 2 . v1 and v2 are speeds of the incident wave and reflected
wave in mediums respectively then
7. SUPERPOSITION OF WAVES
v −v 2v2
Ar = 2 1 Ai , At = . Ai
7.1. Superposition of Waves v1 + v2 v1 + v2
Two or more waves can traverse the same medium Ar is positive if v2 > v1 , i.e., wave is reflected from a
without affecting the motion of one another. If several rarer medium.
waves propagate in a medium simultaneously, then the Reflection of Sound Waves: Reflection of sound waves
resultant displacement of any particle of the medium at from a rigid boundary (e.g. closed end of an organ pipe)
any is instant is equal to the vector sum of the is analogous to reflection of a string wave from rigid
displacement produced by individual by wave. The boundary; reflection accompanied by an inversion i.e. an
phenomenon of intermixing of two or more waves to abrupt phase change of π . This is consistent with the
requirement of displacement amplitude to remain zero at
produce a new wave is called Superposition of waves.
the rigid end, since a medium particle at the rigid end can
Therefore, according to superposition principle. not vibrate. As the excess pressure and displacement
The resultant displacement of a particle at any point of corresponding to the same sound wave vary by π / 2 in
the medium, at any instant of time is the vector sum of term of phase, a displacement minimum at the rigid end
the displacement caused to the particle by the individual will be a point of pressure maxima. This implies that the
waves. reflected pressure wave from the rigid boundary will
   have same phase
If y1 , y2 , y3 ..... are the displacement of particle at a as the incident wave, i.e., a compression pulse is reflected
particular time due to individual waves, then the resultant as a compression pulse and a rarefaction pulse is
    reflected as a rarefaction pulse.
displacement is given by y = y1 + y2 + y3 + ....
On the other hand, reflection of sound wave from a low
Principle of superposition holds for all types of waves, pressure region (like open end of an organ pipe) is
i.e., mechanical as well as electromagnetic waves. But analogous to reflection of string wave from a free end.
This point corresponds to a displacement maxima, so that
this principle is not applicable to the waves of very large
the incident & reflected displacement wave at this point
amplitude. must be in phase. This would imply that this point would
7.2. Reflection of Waves be a minima for pressure wave (i.e. pressure at this point
remains at its average value), and hence the reflected
Reflection of String Waves: A travelling wave, at a
rigid or denser boundary, is reflected with a phase pressure wave would be out of phase by π with respect
reversal but the reflection at an open boundary (rarer to the incident wave. i.e. a compression pulse is reflected
medium) takes place without any phase change. as a rarefaction pulse and vice-versa.
SCAN CODE
WAVES
@cbseinfinite
WAVES 149
7.3. Interference of Waves ⇒ p p0 sin (ωt − kx + θ )

=
Interference of String Waves: Suppose two identical
sources send sinusoidal waves of same angular Where, p0 = pm2 1 + pm2 2 + 2 pm1 pm 2 cos φ ,
frequency ω in positive x-direction. Also, the wave
velocity and hence, the wave number k is same for the φ = k ( x1 − x2 ) + (θ 2 − θ1 ) ... (1)
two waves. One source may be situated at different
points. The two waves arriving at a point then differ in (i) For constructive interference
phase. Let the amplitudes of the two waves be A1 and A2 φ = 2nπ ⇒ p0 = pm1 + pm 2
and the two waves differ in phase by an angle φ . Their
(ii) For destructive interference
equations may be written as
= y1 A1 sin ( kx − ωt ) φ = ( 2n + 1) π ⇒ p0 = pm1 − pm 2
=
And y2 A2 sin ( kx − ωt + φ )
2π
According to the principle of superposition, the resultant φ
If φ is only due to path difference, then = ∆x, and
λ
wave is represented by
condition for constructive interference:
y = y1 + y2 = A1 sin ( kx − ωt ) + A2 sin ( kx − ωt + φ )
∆x = nλ , n = 0, ±1, ±2
=
We get y A sin ( kx − ωt + α )
Condition for destructive interference:
Where, A = A12 + A22 + 2 A1 A2 cos φ (A is amplitude of
λ
the resultant wave) ∆x = ( 2n + 1) , n = 0, ±1, ±2
A2 sin φ 2
Also, tan α = ( α is phase difference of the
A1 + A2 cos φ From equation (1)
resultant wave with the first wave)
Constructive and Destructive interference P02 = Pm21 + Pm22 + 2 Pm1 + Pm 2 cos φ
Constructive Interference: Since intensity, I ∝ (Pressure amplitude)2,
= A1 + A2
When resultant amplitude A is maximum A We have, for resultant intensity,
When cos φ =
+1 or φ =
2nπ I = I1 + I 2 + 2 I1 I 2 cos φ ..... ( 2 )
Where n is an integer. I= I= I0
1 2
Destructive Interference:
φ
When resultant amplitude A is minimum I 2 I 0 (1 + cos φ ) ⇒=
= I 4 I 0 cos 2 ...... ( 3)
2
Or =
A A1 − A2
Hence in this case,
When cos φ = ( 2n + 1) π
−1 or φ = For constructive interference: φ = 0, 2π , 4π and
When n is an integer. I max = 4 I 0

Interference of Sound Waves: And for destructive interference: φ = π ,3π .... and
If p1 pm1 sin (ωt − kx1 + θ1 )
= I min = 0
=
and p2 pm 2 sin (ωt − kx2 + θ 2 ) Coherence: Two sources are said to be coherent if the
phase difference between them does not change with
time. In this case their resultant intensity at any point in
space remains constant with time.
Two independent sources of sound are generally
incoherent in nature, i.e. phase difference between them
changes with time and hence the resultant intensity due
to them at any point in space changes with time.
Fig. 13.12
Resultant excess pressure at point O is
=
p p1 + p2
SCAN CODE
WAVES
@cbseinfinite
WAVES 150
8. STANDING WAVES Furthermore, nodes and antinodes are alternate

λ
Suppose two sine waves of equal amplitude and with spacing   .
4
frequency propagate on a long string in opposite
directions. The equations of the two waves are given by 5. The nodes divide the medium into segments (or
loops). All the particles in a segment vibrate in same
=y1 A sin (ωt − kx ) and=
y2 A sin (ωt + kx + φ )
phase, but in opposite phase with the particles in the
These waves interfere to produce what we call standing adjacent segment. Twice in one period all the
waves. To understand these waves, let us discuss the
particles pass through their mean position
special case when φ = 0 .
simultaneously with maximum velocity ( Asω ) , the
The resultant displacements of the particles of the string
direction of motion being reversed after each half
are given by the principle of superposition as
cycle.
y= y1 + y2
= A sin (ωt − kx ) + sin (ωt +=

kx )  2 A sin ωt cos kx
or y = ( 2 A cos kx ) sin ωt.
This is the required result and from this it is clear that:

1. As the equation satisfies the wave equation,
∂2 y 1 ∂2 y
=
∂x v 2 ∂t 2
2
it represents a wave. However, as it is not of the form

f ( ax ± bt ) , the wave is not travelling and so is
called standing or stationary wave.
2. The amplitude of the wave
As = 2 A cos kx Fig. 13.13
6. Standing waves can be transverse or longitudinal,
Is not constant but varies periodically with position
e.g., in strings (under tension) if reflected wave
(and not with time as om beats).
exists, the waves are transverse-stationary, while in
3. The points for which amplitude is minimum are organ pipes waves are longitudinal-stationary.
called nodes and for these 7. As in stationary waves nodes are permanently at rest,
π 3π 5π so no energy can be transmitted across them, i.e.,
=
cos kx 0,=
i.e., kx , ,
2 2 2 energy of one region (segment) is confined in that
region. However, this energy oscillates between
λ 3λ 5λ  2π 
=i.e., x =, , ,.......  as k elastic potential energy and kinetic energy of the
4 4 4  λ  particles of the medium. When all the particles are
i.e., in a stationary wave, nodes are equally spaced. at their extreme positions KE is minimum while
4. The points for which amplitude is maximum are elastic PE is maximum (as shown in figure A), and
called antinodes and for these, when all the particles simultaneously) pass through
their mean position KE will be maximum while
cos kx = 0, π , 2π ,3π ,....
±1, i.e., kx = elastic PE minimum (Figure B). The total energy
λ 2λ 3λ  2π  confined in a segment (elastic PE + KE), always
=i.e., x 0,= , , ,......  as k
2 2 2  λ  remains the same.
i.e., like nodes, antinodes are also equally spaced
λ
with spacing   and Amax = ±2 A
2
SCAN CODE
WAVES
@cbseinfinite
WAVES 151
 φ
or  kx + = nπ , = n 0,1, 2,... ( 4 )
 2
Note that a pressure node in a standing wave would
correspond to a displacement antinode, and a pressure
anti-node would correspond to a displacement node.
(when we label equation (1) as SHM, what we mean is
that excess pressure at any point varies simple-
harmonically. If the sound waves were represented in
terms of displacement waves, then the equation of
standing wave corresponding to (1) would be
 φ  φ
= s s0′ cos  ωt +  =
where s0′ 2 s0 sin  kx + 
 2  2
Fig. 13.14 This can be easily observed to be an equation of SHM. It
Longitudinal Standing Waves: Two longitudinal represents the medium particles moving simple
waves of same frequency and amplitude travelling in
opposite directions interfere to produce harmonically about their mean position at x.
a standing wave. Vibration Of Air Columns: Standing waves can be set
up in air-columns trapped inside cylindrical tubes if
If the two interfering waves are given by
frequency of the tuning fork sounding the air column
=p1 p0 sin (ωt − kx ) matches one of the natural frequency of air columns. In
such a case the sound of the tuning fork becomes
=
And p2 p0 sin (ωt + kx + φ ) markedly louder, and we say there is resonance between
the tuning fork and air-column. To determine the natural
Then the equation, of the resultant standing wave would frequency of the air-column, notice that there is a
be given by displacement node (pressure antinode) at each closed end
of the tube as air molecules there are not free to move,
 φ  φ
p = p1 + p2 = 2 p0 cos  kx +  sin  ωt +  and a displacement antinode (pressure-node) at each
 2  2 open end of the air-column.
In reality antinodes do not occurs exactly at the open end
 φ
⇒ p p0 sin  ωt +  ... (1)
= but a little distance outside. However if diameter
 2
of tube is small compared to its length, this end
The equation of SHM in which the amplitude p0 correction can be neglected
depends on position as Closed organ pipe: (in the diagram, Ap = pressure
 φ antinode, As = displacement antinode, N p = pressure
= p0′ 2 p0 cos  kx +  ... ( 2 )
 2
node, N s = displacement node).
Points where pressure remains permanently at its average
value; i.e. pressure amplitude is zero is called a pressure
node, and the condition for a pressure node would be
given by
p0′ = 0
 φ
i.e., cos  kx +  =
0
 2
φ π
i.e., kx + = 2nπ ± , n= 0,1, 2... ( 3)
2 2
Similarly points where pressure amplitude is maximum
is called a pressure antinode and condition for a pressure Fig. 13.15
antinode would be given by
p0′ = ±2 p0
 φ
i.e., cos  kx +  =
±1
 2
SCAN CODE
WAVES
@cbseinfinite
WAVES 152
Fundamental mode: The smallest frequency (largest Fundamental mode: The smallest frequency (largest
wavelength) that satisfies the boundary condition for wavelength) that satisfies the boundary condition for
resonance (i.e. displacement node at left end and resonance (i.e. displacement antinodes at both ends) is,
antinode at right end is λ0 = 4l , , where l = length of λ0 = 2l
closed pipe the corresponding frequency.
v v Corresponding frequency, is called the fundamental
v= = is called the fundamental frequency ... (1) frequency
λ 4L
0
v
v0 = ... ( 3)
2l
Fig. 13.16
First Overtone: Here there is one node and one antinode
apart from the nodes and antinodes at the ends. Fig. 13.18
4l λ0 1st Overtone: Here there is one displacement antinode
λ=
1 =
3 3 between the two antinodes at the ends.
And corresponding frequency, 2l λ
λ1 = ⇒ λ1 = 0 and corresponding frequency
v 2 2
v= = 3v0
λ1
1
v
v= = 2v0
λ1
1
This frequency is 3 times the fundamental frequency and
hence is called the 3rd harmonic. This frequency is 2 times the fundamental frequency and
nth overtone: In general, the nth overtone will have n is called the 2nd harmonic.
nodes and n antinodes between the two ends.
The corresponding wavelength is nth overtone: The nth overtone has n displacement
4l λ0 antinodes between the two antinode at the ends.
λn =
= and = nn ( 2n + 1) v0 ... ( 2 )
2n + 1 2n + 1 2l λ0
λn
= = and v= ( n + 1) v0 ... ( 4 )
n +1 n +1 n
This corresponds to the ( 2n + 1) harmonic. Clearly only

th
This correspond to ( n + 1) harmonic: clearly both even

th
odd harmonics are allowed in a closed pipe.

and odd harmonics are allowed in an open pipe.
9.2 Open organ pipe : End correction: As mentioned earlier the displacement
antinode at an open end of an organ pipe lies slightly
outside the open end. The distance of the antinode from
the open end is called end correction and its value is
given by e = 0.6r
Fig. 13.19
Fig. 13.17
SCAN CODE
WAVES
@cbseinfinite
WAVES 153
where r = radius of the organ pipe. with end correction, (c) Law of Mass: The fundamental frequency of a
the fundamental frequency of a closed pipe ( f c ) and an string is inversely proportional to the square root of
open organ pipe ( f0 ) will be given by the linear mass density, i.e., mass per unit length,
provided the length and the tension remain the same.
v v
fc = and f 0 = ... ( 5 )
4 ( l + 0.6r ) 2 ( l + 1.2r )
1
v∝ if L and F are constants.
µ
9. EXPERIMENTAL STUDY OF STANDING 9.2. Resonance Tube
WAVES Figure shows schematically the diagram of a simple
apparatus used in laboratories to measure the speed of
9.1. Sonometer sound in air. Along cylindrical glass tube (say about 1 in)
• If a vibrating Tuning fork is pressed against a is fixed on a vertical wooden frame. It is also called a
sonometer wire then forced vibrations are produced resonance tube. A rubber tube connects the lower end of
in table of hollow box & these vibrations are this glass tube to a vessel which can slide vertically on
transferred to air column filled in hollow box the same wooden frame. A meter scale is fitted parallel
which results into increase in vibration amplitude to and close to the glass tube.
of sound & intensity of sound increases. Air filled
hollow box is called sound box.
• During contact with table some energy is
transferred to table so TF cannot do vibrations for
longer duration
• At resonance maximum energy is transferred to
table so TF can do vibrations not for longer
duration.
• At resonance maximum energy is transferred from
TF to vibrating wire and sound intensity is Fig 13.20
maximum. The vessel contains water which also goes in the
Laws of Transverse Vibrations of a String: resonance tube through the rubber tube. The level of
Sonometer water in the resonance tube is same as that in the vessel.
The fundamental frequency of vibration of a string fixed Thus, by sliding the vessel up and down, one can change
at both ends is given by equation. From this equation, one the water level in the resonance tube.
can immediately write the following statements known A tuning fork (frequency 256 Hz if the tube is 1 in long)
as "Laws of transverse vibrations of a string". is vibrated by hitting it on a rubber pad and is held near
(a) Law of Length: The fundamental frequency of the open end of the tube in such a way that the prongs
vibration of a string (fixed at both ends) is inversely vibrate parallel to the length of the tube. Longitudinal
proportional to the length of the string provided its waves are then sent in the tube.
tension and its mass per unit length remain the same. The water level in the tube is initially kept high. The
tuning fork is vibrated and kept dose to the open end, and
1
v∝ If F and µ are constants. the loudness of sound coming from the tube is estimated.
L
The vessel is brought down a little to decrease the water
(b) Law of Tension: The fundamental frequency of a level in the resonance tube. The tuning fork is again
string is proportional to the square root of its tension vibrated, kept close to the open end and the loudness of
provided its length and the mass per unit length the sound coming from the tube is estimated. The process
remain the same. is repeated until the water level corresponding to the
v ∝ F if L and µ are constants. maximum loudness is located. Fine adjustments of water
level are made to locate accurately the level
corresponding to the maximum loudness.
SCAN CODE
WAVES
@cbseinfinite
WAVES 154
The length of the air column is read on the scale attached.

10. BEATS
In this case, the air column vibrates in resonance with the
tuning fork. The minimum length of the air column for When two sound waves of same amplitude and different
which the resonance takes place corresponds to the frequency superimpose, then intensity at any point in
fundamental mode of vibration. A pressure antinode is space varies periodically with time. This effect is called
formed at the water surface (which is the closed end of beats.
the air column) and a pressure node is formed near the If the equation of the two interfering sound waves
open end. In fact, the node is formed slightly above the emitted by s1 and s2 at point O are,
open end (end correction) because of the air-pressure
=p1 p0 sin ( 2π f1t − k1 x1 + θ1 )
from outside. Thus, for the first resonance the length l1
of the air column in the resonance tube is given by =p2 p0 sin ( 2π f 2 t − k2 x2 + θ 2 )
λ
l1 + e = ,... ( i ) φ1 and −k2 x2 + θ 2 =
Let −k1 x1 + θ1 = φ2
4
By principle of superposition
Where d is the end correction.
 φ +φ   φ1 − φ2 
= 2 p0 sin  π ( f1 + f 2 ) t + 1 2  cos  π ( f1 − f 2 ) t + 2 
 2   
Fig. 13.22
i.e., the resultant sound at point O has frequency
Fig 13.21
 f1 + f 2 
The length of the air column is increase to a little less  2  while pressure amplitude p0′ ( t ) varies with
 
than three times of l. The water level is adjusted so that
 φ −φ 
the loudness of the sound coming from the tube becomes p0′ ( t ) 2 p0 cos π ( f1 − f 2 ) t + 1 2 
time as=
maximum again. The length of the air column is noted  2 
on the scale. In this second resonance the air column Hence pressure amplitude at point O varies with time
vibrates in the first overtone. There is one node and one
 f − f2 
antinode in between the ends of the column. The length with a frequency of  1 
 2 
l2 of the column is given by
Hence sound intensity will vary with a frequency f1 − f 2
3λ ( fB )
l2 + e = ... ( ii ) This frequency is called beat frequency and the
4 time interval between two successive intensity maxima
By (i) and (ii), (or minima) is called beat time period (TB )
λ
( l2 − l1 ) =, or=
λ 2 ( l2 − l1 ) . f B= f1 − f 2
2
1
TB = ... (1)
f1 − f 2
SCAN CODE
WAVES
@cbseinfinite
WAVES 155
Suppose the source S and observer O are separated by

Important Points: distance v. Where v is the velocity of sound. Let n be the
(i) The frequency f1 − f 2 should be less than 16Hz , frequency of sound emitted by the source. Then n waves
for it to be audible. will be emitted by the source in one second. These n
(ii) Beat phenomenon can be used for determining an waves will be accommodated in distance v.
unknown frequency by sounding it together with a
total distance v
source of known frequency. So, wavelength λ =
=
(iii) If the arm of a tuning fork is waxed or loaded, then total number of waves n
its frequency decreases. (1) Source moving towards stationary observer:
(iv) If arm of tuning fork is filed, then its frequency Let the source start moving towards the observer
increases.
with velocity vs , after one second, the n waves will
11. DOPPLER’S EFFECT be crowded in distance ( v − vs ) . Now the observer
The apparent change in frequency or pitch due to shall feel that he is listening to sound of wave length
relative motion of source and observer along the line of λ and frequency n′
sight is called Doppler Effect. While deriving these
expressions, we make the following assumptions:
(i) The velocity of the source, the observer and the
medium are along the line joining the positions of
the source and the observer.
(ii) The velocity of the source and the observer is less
than velocity of sound. Fig. 13.24
Now apparent wavelength
Doppler effect takes place both in sound and light. In
total distance v − vs
sound it depends on whether the source or observer = or λ′ =
both are in motion while in light it depends on whether total number of waves n
the distance between source and observer is increasing And changed frequency,
or decreasing. v v  v 
n=′ = = n 
Notations: λ ′  v − vs   v − vs 
 n 
n → Actual frequency  
So, as the source of sound approaches the observer
n′ → observed frequency (apparent frequency)
the apparent frequency n′ becomes greater than be
λ → actual wavelength true frequency n,
λ ′ → observed (apparent) wavelength (2) When source move away from stationary observer:
For this situation n waves will be crowded in
v → velocity of sound distance v + vs .
vs → velocity of source
vo → velocity of observer
vw → wind velocity
Case I:
Fig. 13.25
Source in motion, observer at rest, medium at rest:
v + vs
So, apparent wavelength λ ′ =
n
And apparent frequency
v v  v 
n=′ = = n 
λ′  v + vs   v + vs 
 n 
 
Fig. 13.23 So, n′ becomes less thatn n.
SCAN CODE
WAVES
@cbseinfinite
WAVES 156
Case II: Apparent frequency ( n′ ) = Actual waves (n) −

Observer in motion, source at rest, medium at rest: reduction in number of waves ( ∆n )
Let the source (S) and observer (O) are in rest at their
v v v − vo  v − vo   v
respective places. Then n waves given by source ‘S’ n′ = − o = = n  λ = 
would be crossing observer ‘ O’ in one second and fill λ λ λ  v   n
the space OA ( = v ) (so n′ < n )
Case III:
Effect of motion of medium: General formula for a
 v ± v0 
Doppler effect= n=′ n   ... ( i )
 v  vs 
Fig. 13.26 If medium (air) is also moving with vm velocity in
1. Observer move towards stationary source: direction of source and observer. Then velocity of sound
relative to observer will be v ± vm (-ve sign, if vm is
opposite to sound velocity). So,
 v ± vm ± vo 
n′ = n  
 v ± vm  vs 
Fig. 13.27 [on replacing v by v ± vm is equal (i)]
When observer ‘O’ moves towards ‘S’ with velocity NOTE:
vo , it will cover v0 distance in one second. So, the When both ‘S’ and ‘O’ are in rest (i.e. v= v= 0 ) then
s o
observer has received not only the n waves occupying there is no effect on frequency due to motion of air.
OA but also received additional number of ∆n waves
occupying the distance OO ′ ( = vo ) . Case I:
If medium moves in a direction opposite to the direction
So, total waves received by observer in one second
 v − vm ± vo 
i.e., apparent frequency ( n′ ) = Actual waves (n) + of propagation of sound, then n′ =  n
 v − vm ± vs 
Additional waves ( ∆n )
Case II:
v v v + vo  v + vo   v Source in motion towards the observer. Both medium
n′ = + o = =n    λ = n 
λ λ (v / n)  v    and observer are at rest.
(so, n′ > n )  v 
n′ =   n; clearly n′ > n
2. Observer move away from stationary source:-  v − vs 
For this situation n waves will be crowded in distance So, when a source of sound approaches a stationary
v − vo . observer, the apparent frequency is more than the actual
frequency.
Case III:
Source in motion away from the observer. Both medium
and observer are at rest.
Fig. 13.28  v 
n′ =   n; clearly n′ < n
When observer move away from source with v0  v + vs 
velocity then he will get ∆n waves less than real So, when a source of sound moves away from a
number of waves. So, total number of waves received stationary observer, the apparent frequency is less than
by observer i.e., actual frequency.
SCAN CODE
WAVES
@cbseinfinite
WAVES 157
Case IV:
Observer in motion towards the source. Both medium
and source are at rest.
 v + vo 
 v 
So, when observer is in motion towards the source, the
apparent frequency is more than the actual frequency.
Case V:
Observer in motion away from the source. Both medium
and source are at rest.
 v − v0 
n′ =   n; clearly n′ < n
 v 
So, when observer is in motion away from the source, the
apparent frequency is less than the actual frequency.
Case VI:
Both source and observer are moving away from each
other. Medium at rest.
 v − v0 
 v + vs 
SCAN CODE
WAVES
@cbseinfinite
WAVES 158
SUMMARY
1. A wave is a disturbance that propagates in space, ∂2 y

− Aω 2 sin (ωt − kx )
=
transport energy and momentum from one point to ∂t 2
another without the transport of matter.
∂2 y
2. Mechanical transverse waves are produced in such ⇒ − Ak 2 sin (ωt − kx )
=
∂x 2
type of medium which have shearing property, so they
∂2 y 1 ∂y
are known as shear wave or S-wave ⇒ 2 =
∂x V 2 ∂t
3. A crest is a portion of the medium, which is raised
temporarily above the normal position of rest of 12. Wave velocity: The velocity with which the
particles of the medium, when a transverse wave disturbance, or planes of equal (wave front), travel
passes. through the medium is called wave (or phase) velocity
4. A trough is a portion of the medium, which is 13. Transverse wave: A transverse wave is a moving
depressed temporarily below the normal position of wave whose oscillations are perpendicular to the
rest of particles of the medium, when a transverse direction of the wave
wave passes. • The speed of a wave on a string is given by
T
5. Longitudinal Wave Motion: Longitudinal wave v=
µ
have oscillatory motion of the medium particles
where T is tension in the string (in Newtons) and
produces regions of compression (high pressure) and
µ is mass per unit length of the string (kg/m).
rarefaction (low pressure) which propagated in space
with time (see figure). 14. When a travelling wave s established on a string,
6. The regions of high particle density are called energy is transmitted along the direction of
compressions and regions of low particle density are propagation of the wave, in form of potential energy
called rarefactions. and kinetic energy
15. Intensity of Sound Waves: The amount of energy
7. Wavelength (λ ) [length of one wave]: Distance carried per unit time by a wave is called its power and
travelled by the wave during the time interval in which power per unit area held perpendicular to the direction
any one particle of the medium completes one cycle of energy flow is called intensity.
about its mean position. We may also define 16. Loudness: Audible intensity range for humans:
wavelength as the distance between any two nearest The ability of human to perceive intensity at different
particle of the medium, vibrating in the same phase frequency is different. The perception of intensity is
9. Phase: Phase is a quantity which contains all maximum at 1000 Hz and perception of intensity
information related to any vibrating particle in a wave. decreases as the frequency decreases or increases from
For equation= y A sin (ωt − kx ) ; (ωt − =
kx ) phase. 1000 Hz.
17. Decibel Scale: The logarithmic scale which is used
10. Wave number ( v ) : it is defined as for comparing two sound intensity is called decibel
scale. The intensity level β described in terms of
1 k
v= = = number of waves in unit length of the
λ 2π  I 
decibels is defined as β = 10 log   ( dB )
wave pattern.  I0 
11. Differential equation of Harmonic Progressive 18. Superposition of Waves: The phenomenon of
Waves: intermixing of two or more waves to produce a new
wave is called Superposition of waves. Therefore,
Differential equation of Harmonic Progressive Waves
according to superposition principle.
is given by:
SCAN CODE
WAVES
@cbseinfinite
WAVES 159
19. The resultant displacement of a particle at any point 22. Beats: When two sound waves of same amplitude and
of the medium, at any instant of time is the vector different frequency superimpose, then intensity at any
sum of the displacement caused to the particle by the point in space varies periodically with time. This effect
is called beats.
individual waves.
• The frequency f1 − f 2 should be less than
20. Coherence: Two sources are said to be coherent if the 16 Hz , for it to be audible.
phase difference between them does not change with • Beat phenomenon can be used for determining an
time. In this case their resultant intensity at any point unknown frequency by sounding it together with
in space remains constant with time. Two independent a source of known frequency.
sources of sound are generally incoherent in nature, 23. Doppler’s Effect: The apparent change in
i.e. phase difference between them changes with time
frequency or pitch due to relative motion of source
and hence the resultant intensity due to them at any
point in space changes with time. and observer along the line of sight is called
Doppler Effect.
21. Standing Wave: Standing waves can be transverse
or longitudinal, e.g., in strings (under tension) if 24. Assumptions:
reflected wave exists, the waves are transverse- (i) The velocity of the source, the observer and the
stationary, while in organ pipes waves are medium are along the line joining the positions
longitudinal-stationary. of the source and the observer.
(ii) The velocity of the source and the observer is
less than velocity of sound.
@cbseinfinite
SCAN CODE
WAVES 160
Solved Examples
Example - 1 (a) The reflected sound is travelling in air.

An observer standing at the seacoast observes 54 Therefore if λa is the wavelength of the reflected
waves reaching the coast per minute. If the wavelength
of the wave is 10 m, find the speed. What types of v a 340 m / s
wave, λ a = =
–4
= 3.4 × 10 m
waves did he observe? Explain f 106 s −1
Sol. Since 54 waves reach the coast in 1 min (i.e., 60 s),
(b) Further, the transmitted wave is travelling through
54 water and as such wavelength of the transmitted
Frequency of the waves, i.e., f = = 0.9 Hz
60 v 1486 m / s
wave, i.e., λ w = w =
–3
= 1.49 × 10 m
As λ = 10 m, speed of the waves f 106 s −1
2
v = fλ = (0.9 × 10) m/s = 9 m/s
The waves are transverse. Strictly speaking, these Example - 4
waves are ripples, which are neither entirely transverse A travelling harmonic wave on a string is described by
nor longitudinal. This is due to the reason that the y = 7.5 sin (0.0050 x + 12t + π/4)
water particles while moving up and down, also move (a) What are the displacement and velocity of
back and forth horizontally. Thus, water waves are oscillation of a point at x = 1 cm and t = 1 s? Is
wrongly classified as transverse waves. this speed equal to the speed of wave propagation?
Example - 2 (b) Locate the points of the string which have the
same transverse displacements and velocity as the
How far does the sound travel in air when a tuning fork x = 1 cm point at t = 2 s, 5 s, 11 s.
of frequency 560 Hz makes 30 vibrations? Given Sol. We are given that
speed of sound in air = 336 m/s.
y = 7.5 sin (0.0050 x + 12t + π/4)...(i)
Sol. Here, speed of sound in air, (a) At x = 1 cm and t = 1 s, displacement,
v = 336 m/s y = 7.5 sin (0.0050 × 1 + 12 × 1 + π/4)
Frequency of the tuning fork, f = 560 Hz or y = 7.5 sin (12.7904 rad)
Time taken to complete 30 vibrations, 180° 

30 3 or y = 7.5 sin 12.7904 × 
i.e., t = =  π 
560 56 = 7.5 sin 732.83°
Distance travelled by sound, y = 7.5 sin (720° + 12.83°)
 3  = 7.5 sin 12.83°
s = vt = (336 m/s)  s  = 18 m
 56  or y = (7.5 × 0.2215) cm = 1.666 cm
Speed of oscillation at a point,
Example - 3
dy
A bat emits ultrasonic sound of frequency 1000 kHz vp =
dt
in air. If this sound meets a water surface, what is the
or v p = 7.5 × 12 × cos (0.0050 x + 12t + π/4)
wavelength of:
(a) the reflected sound (b) the transmitted sound? = 90 cos (0.0050 x + 12t + π/4)
Speed of sound in air = 340 m/s and in water When x = 1 cm and t = 1 s,
= 1486 m/s. v p = (90 cos 12.83°) cm/s
Sol. We are given that frequency of the ultrasonic sound, = (90 × 0.9751) cm/s = 87.75 cm/s
6
f = 1000 kHz = 10 Hz The general equation of the travelling harmonic
speed of sound in air, va = 340 m/s wave (travelling towards left) is
speed of sound in water, y = A sin [ωt + kx + φ0]...(ii)
vw = 1486 m/s Comparing eqns. (i) and (ii), we get
A = 7.5 cm, ω = 12 rad/s
k = 0.0050 rad/cm
Speed of wave propagation,
@cbseinfinite
WAVES 161
ω 12 rad / s (a) When the string is vibrating in its fundamental

v= = = 2400 cm/s = – 24 m/s
k 0.0050 rad / cm mode,
(Negative sign has been taken as the wave travels L = λ/2
towards left) or λ = 2L = (2 × 0.875) m = 1.75 m
We thus find that vp (particle speed) is not equal If v is the speed of transverse wave on the string,
v = fλ = (45 × 1.75) m/s = 79 m/s
to v (wave-speed).
(b) If T is the tension in the string,
2π 2π 2π
(b) As k = ,=
λ = = 12.6 m T
λ k 0.0050 v= or T = v µ
2
All points located at distances, x = nλ (where

µ
2 –2
n = + 1, +2, + 3, ...) from the point x = 1 cm have or T = (79) (4 × 10 ) = 248 N
the same displacement and velocity.
Example - 7
Example - 5
One end of a long string of linear mass density
–3
A uniform rope of length 12 m and mass 6 kg hangs = 8.0 × 10 kg/m is connected to an electrically driven
vertically from a rigid support. A block of mass 2 kg tuning fork of frequency 256 Hz. The other end passes
is attached to the free end of the rope. A transverse over a pulley and is tied to a pan containing a mass of
pulse of wavelength 0.06 m is produced at the lower 90 kg. The pulley end absorbs all the incoming energy
end of the rope. What is the wavelength of the rope so that reflected waves at this end have negligible
when it reaches the top of the rope? amplitude. At t = 0, the left end (fork end) of the string
Sol. Tension at the lower end, T1 = 2 kg wt x = 0 has zero transverse displacement (y = 0) and is
Tension at the top end, moving along positive y-direction. The amplitude of
T2 = 2 kg wt + 6 kg wt = 8 kg wt the wave is 5.0 cm. Write down the transverse
displacement y as a function of x and t that describes
Speed of the wave at the lower end,
this wave on the string.
v1 = T1 / µ Sol. We are given that,
Speed of the wave at the top end, tension in the string, T = (90 × 9.8) N = 882 N
v2 = T2 / µ mass per unit length of the string,
µ = 8.0 × 10 kg/m
–3
v1 T1 2 1
Thus, = = = amplitude of the wave, A = 5.0 cm = 0.05 m
v2 T2 8 2 Since the wave propagation along the string is a
or v2 = 2v1 or fλ2 = 2 (fλ1) or λ2 = 2λ1 transverse travelling wave, the velocity of the wave is
given by
(as frequency remains the same)
As λ1 = 0.06 m, v=
T
=
882 N 2
= 3.32 × 10 m/s
λ2 = 2 (0.06 m) = 0.12 m µ 8 ×10−3 kg / m
Now, ω = 2πf = (2 × 3.14 × 256) rad/s
Example - 6 3
= 1.61 × 10 rad/s
A wire stretched between two rigid supports vibrates ω ω 1.61×103 rad / s
As v = , k= = = 4.84 rad/m
in its fundamental mode with a frequency of 45 Hz. k v 3.32 ×102 m / s
–2
The mass of the wire is 3.5 × 10 kg and its linear As the wave travels towards the positive direction of
–2
density is 4 × 10 kg/m. What is: X-axis, the equation of the wave is:
(a) speed of a transverse wave on the string and y = A sin (ωt – kx)
(b) the tension in the string? where x, y and A are in metres.
Sol. We are given that 3
Thus, y = 0.05 sin (1.61 × 10 t – 4.84 x)
Frequency of the fundamental mode, f = 45 Hz
Linear density of the wire, µ = 4 × 10 kg/m
–2
–2
Mass of the wire, M = 3.5 × 10 kg
Clearly, length of the wire,
–2 –2
L = M/µ = (3.5 × 10 kg)/ (4 × 10 kg/m) = 0.875 m
@cbseinfinite
WAVES 162
A uniform rope of mass 0.1 kg and length 2.45 m For aluminium, the bulk modulus of elasticity is
10 2 3 3
hangs from a ceiling. 7.5 × 10 N/m and density is 2.70 × 10 kg/m .
(a) Find the speed of transverse wave in the rope at a Deduce the speed of longitudinal waves in aluminium.
point 0.5 m distant from the lower end. Sol. We are given that
(b) Calculate the time taken by a transverse wave to B = 7.5 × 10 N/m , ρ = 2.7 × 10 kg/m
10 2 3 3
travel a full length of the rope.

B 7.5 ×1010 N/m 2
Sol. (a) If L is the length of the rope and m is its mass, Thus,=
v =
ρ 2.70 ×103 kg/m3
then mass per unit length of the rope, i.e.,
3
m = 5.3 × 10 m/s.
µ=
L Example - 11
Tension at a point distant y from the lower end,
The prongs of a tuning fork A, originally in unison
i.e.,
with tuning fork B are filed. Now the tuning forks on
T = weight of the rope of length y = µyg
being sounded together produce 2 beats/s. What is
If v is the speed of the transverse wave set up in
frequency of A after filing, if frequency of B is
the rope,
250 Hz?
µyg
=
v T=
/µ = yg Sol. On filing, the frequency of tuning fork A increases.
µ The new frequency of A after filing
When y = 0.5 m, = (250 + 2) Hz = 252 Hz
v = (0.5 m)(9.8 m / s 2 ) = 2.2 m/s Example - 12
dy dy dy A sitar wire and a tabla when sounded together give
(b) As v = therefore = yg or dt =
dt dt gy four beats/s. What do we conclude from this? As the
Integrating both sides within proper limits, we get tabla membrane is tightened, the beat rate may
t decrease or increase. Explain.
1 L dy 1 L
=∫ dt = ∫ ∫y
−1/2
dy Sol. Let f1 and f2 be the frequencies of the sitar wire and the
0 g 0 y g 0
tabla membrane respectively. Since in this case 4
L
1  y1/2  beats/s are heard,
or t =  
g  (1 / 2)  0 f1 = f2 + 4
On tightening the tabla membrane, its frequency
2 L
= [ L − 0] =
2 increases. Now there are two possibilities:
g g
(i) If f1 < f2, the number of beats increases on tightening
2.45 m the membrane.
As L = 2.45 m, t = 2
9.8 m / s 2 (ii) If f1 > f2, the number of beats decreases on tightening
 1 the membrane.
or t =  2  s = 1 s
 4 Example - 13
A tuning fork of unknown frequency gives 4 beats per
Example - 9
second with another fork of frequency 310Hz. It gives
Calculate the speed of sound in a liquid of density the same number of beats/s when loaded with wax.
3 9 2
8000 kg/m and bulk modulus 2 × 10 N/m . Find the unknown frequency.
Here, ρ = 8000 kg/m and B = 2 × 10 N/m
3 9 2
Sol. Sol. Let us name the tuning fork of unknown frequency as
A and the tuning fork of known frequency i.e., 310 Hz
B 2 ×10 N / m
9 2
Thus,=
v = as B. When A and B are sounded together, 4 beats are
ρ 8000 kg / m3 heard per second.
= 500 m/s Thus, frequency of A, i.e., f is either (310 + 4) Hz
= 314 Hz
or f = (310 – 4) Hz = 306 Hz
@cbseinfinite
WAVES 163
In case, the frequency of A is 306 Hz, on loading it The wave velocity (magnitude) of either wave, i.e.,
with wax, its frequency decreases and may become ω 78.5s −1
v= = = 50 cm/s
305 Hz, 304 Hz, 303 Hz etc. In that case, the number k 1.57 cm −1
of beats given by it per second when sounded with B
(b) For a node, y = 0, i.e., cos kx = 0
will be (310 – 305) = 5, (310 – 304) = 6, (310 – 303)
or kx = (for the smallest positive value of x)
= 7 etc. i.e., the number of beats/s is more than 4. Thus,
π / 2 3.14 / 2
f = 306 Hz is not possible. If f = 314 Hz, on loading A or x== = 1cm
k 1.57 cm −1
with wax, its frequency may decrease to 306 Hz and
then it will give (310 – 306) = 4 beats per sec with B. (c) For an antinode, |cos kx| = 1
Thus, the unknown frequency is 314 Hz. or kx = π (for the smallest positive value of x)
π
Example - 14 or x = = 2 cm
k
Calculate the speed of sound in a gas in which two (d) The amplitude of vibration of the particle at x is
wavelengths 204 cm and 208 cm produce 20 beats in given by |A cos kx|.
6 second. For the given point (x = 2.33 cm),
Sol. Here, wavelength of one wave, λ1 = 204 cm amplitude = A cos kx
Wavelength of the second wave λ2 = 208 cm
–1
= (1.0 mm) cos [(1.57 cm ) (2.33 cm)]
Let speed of sound in the gas = v cm/s = (1.00 mm) cos (3.658 rad) = 0.875 mm
Frequency of one wave = f1 [cos (3.658 rad) = cos (3.658 × 57°)
Frequency of second wave = f2 = cos 209° = cos (180° + 29°)
= – cos 29° = –0.875
Number of beats produced per second,
= 0.875 mm
20
fb =
6 Example - 16
As f1 – f2 = fb, A 3.6 g string of a sonometer is 64 cm long. What
v v 20  v v  should be the tension in the string in order that it may
− =  as=
f1 and=
f2  vibrate in 2 segments with a frequency of 256 Hz?
204 208 6  λ1 λ2 
Sol. Here, l = 64 cm = 0.64 m,
v (208 − 204) 20 µ = 3.6 × 10 kg/64 × 10 m = 5.6 × 10 kg/m,
–3 –2 –3
or =
204 × 208 6 f1 = 256 Hz
 20   204 × 208  Since the string vibrates in 2 segments,
or v =     cm/s
 6  4  f1 = 2f
= 35360 cm/s = 353.6 m/s 1 T
or 256 = 2 ×
Example - 15 2 µ
Two travelling waves of equal amplitudes and equal 1 T

or 256 =
frequencies move in opposite directions along a string. 0.64 (5.6 ×10−3 )
They interfere to produce a standing wave having the 2 –3
or T = (256 × 0.64) (5.6 × 10 ) N = 150 N
equation
y = A cos kx sin ωt Example - 17
where A = 1.0 mm, k = 1.57 cm and ω = 78.5 s
–1 –1
A wire of length 1.5 m is stretched by a force of 44 N.
Find: The diameter of the wire is 2 mm and its density is
(a) the velocity of the component waves 3
1.4 g/cm . Calculate the frequency of the fundamental
(b) the node closest to the origin (in the region x > 0) note emitted by it.
and Sol. With usual notation, we are given that
(c) the antinode closest to the origin (x > 0) and (d) the L = 1.5 m, T = 44 N
amplitude of the particle at x = 2.33 cm. D = 2 mm = 2 × 10 m
–3
Sol. (a) The standing wave is formed by the superposition of

ρ = 1.4 g/cm = 1400 kg/m
3 3
the waves y1 = (A/2) sin (ωt – kx) and

y2 = (A/2) sin (ωt + kx) as y = y1 + y2
@cbseinfinite
WAVES 164
1 T 200 T
We know that f = or =2 1
LD πρ 300 T2
1 44 (as f1 = 200 Hz, f2 = 300 Hz and L2 = 2L1 or L2/L1 = 2)
= Hz
1.5(2 ×10 ) (22 / 7) ×1400
−3
2 T1 4 T T
=
or 2= or 4 1 or 2 = 9
100 3 T2 9 T2 T1
= Hz = 33.3 Hz.
3 Thus, the new tension is 9 times the original tension.
When the wire of a sonometer is 73 cm long, it is in A wire of length 108 cm produces a fundamental note
resonance with a tuning fork. On shortening the wire of frequency 256 Hz, when stretched by a weight of
by 0.5 cm, it makes 3 beats with the same fork. 1 kg. By how much its length should be increased so
Calculate the frequency of the tuning fork. that its pitch is raised by a major tone, if it is now
Sol. We are given that stretched by a weight of 4 kg?
L (original length of the wire) = 73 cm Sol. Case I. Frequency of the fundamental note, f = 256 Hz
L’ (shortened length of the wire) = (73 – 0.5) cm Length of the wire, L = 108 cm
= 72.5 cm Stretching force, T = 1 kg f
Let f be the frequency of the tuning fork. Case II. Frequency of the major tone emitted
This also is the frequency of the wire when its length 9 9
i.e., f’ = f =   256 Hz = 288 Hz
is L as it is then in resonance with the tuning fork. Let 8 8
f’ be the frequency of the wire when its length is L’. Stretching force, T = 4 kg f
Since it then produces 3 beats/s with the tuning fork, f’ Let the length be increased by x.
=f+3 Increased length of the wire, i.e.,
(On shortening the length, the frequency of the wire L’ = L + x = (108 + x) cm
increases)
1 T
According to the law of length, As f = ,
2L µ
vf = f’L’
or f × 73 = (f + 3) (72.5) = 72.5 f + 217.5 1 1kg f
For Case I, 256 =
or 73 f – 72.5 f = 217.5 or 0.5 f = 217.5 2 ×108 µ
f = 435 Hz and for Case II,
Example - 19 1 4 kg f
288 =
A string vibrates with a frequency 200 Hz. Its length 2 × (108 + x) µ
is doubled and its tension is altered until it begins to Dividing, we get
vibrate with frequency 300 Hz. What is the ratio of the 256 108 + x
new tension to the original tension? =
288 108 × 4
Sol. Let f1 and f2 be the frequencies in the two cases and L1,
8 108 + x 108 + x
L2 and T1, T2 be respectively the corresponding lengths =
or = or 972 + 9x = 1728
9 108 × 2 216
of the string and tensions under which it is vibrating.
756
1 T1 or 9x = 1728 – 972 = 756 cm or x = = 84 cm
f1 = , 9
2L1 µ
Thus, the length should be increased by 84 cm.
1 T2
f2 = Example - 21
2L 2 µ `
A pipe of length 2L open at both ends has the same
(For the same string, µ in both the cases remains same)
frequency as another pipe of length L closed at one
f1 L 2 T1
Thus, = end. Prove this. Also state if the sounds will be
f 2 L1 T2 identical for the two pipes.
Sol. Fundamental frequency of open pipe of length 2L,
@cbseinfinite
WAVES 165
v v Let Young’s modulus of the material of the rod = Y

i.e., f = = … (i)
2 × 2L 4L As v = Y/ρ ,
Fundamental frequency of a closed pipe of length L, Y= v × ρ2
v
i.e., f’ = … (ii) 3 2 3 3
= (3.6 × 10 m/s) (8.3 × 10 kg/m ) = 1.1 × 10 N/m .
11 2
4L
From eqns. (i) and (ii), f = f’ Example - 24
The sound (i.e., its quality) which depends upon the
A steel rod 100 cm long is clamped at its middle. The
number of harmonics and their relative intensities will
fundamental frequency of longitudinal vibrations of
not be the same in the two cases. In case of an open
organ pipe, all the harmonics are present whereas in the rod is given to be 2.53 kHz. What is the speed of
the case of a closed organ pipe only odd harmonics are sound in steel?
Sol. Here, length of the steel rod, L = 100 cm = 1 m
present.
fundamental frequency of the longitudinal vibrations,
Example - 22 3
f = 2.53 kHz = 2.53 × 10 Hz
Find the ratio of length of a closed pipe to that of the If λ is the wavelength of the wave generated,
open pipe in order that the second overtone of the λ/2 = L or λ = 2L = 2m
former is in unison with fourth overtone of the latter. Therefore, speed of sound in steel rod, i.e.,
v = fλ = (2.53 × 10 ) (2 m)
3
Sol. Let f and f’ be the fundamental frequencies of the open
3
and the closed pipes respectively of lengths L and L’. = 5.06 × 10 m = 5.06 km/s
v v Alternate solution: For a rod vibrating longitudinally,
Clearly, f = and f’ = ...(i)
2L 4L ' fundamental frequency,
where v is the speed of sound. v
f=
Second overtone of the closed pipe = 5f’ 2L
3 –1
Fourth overtone of the open pipe = 5f or v = 2fL = 2 (2.53 × 10 s ) (1 m)
Since the two notes are to be in unison, 3
or v = 5.06 × 10 m/s = 5.06 km/s
5f’ = 5f or f’ = f
Thus, from eqns. (i) and (ii), Example - 25
v v Two tuning forks with natural frequencies of 340 Hz
=
4L ' 2L each move relative to a stationary observer. One fork
L' 2 1 moves away from the observer while the other moves
or 4L’ = 2L or = = or L’ : L :: 1 : 2 towards him at the same speed. The observer hears
L 4 2
beats of frequency 3 Hz. Find the speed of the tuning
Example - 23 fork. Speed of sound in air = 340 m/s.
3
A brass rod (density 8.3 g/cm ), 3 m long is clamped Sol. Let vs be the speed of source and v be that of the
at the centre, It is excited to give longitudinal sound waves. Let f be the frequency of the tuning fork.
vibrations and the frequency of the fundamental note If f’ is its apparent frequency when it moves towards
is 600 Hz. Calculate the velocity of sound in the rod the stationary observer,
−1
and its Young’s modulus.  v  1  v 
Sol. Here, density of the brass rod, f’ =  =
f f= 1 − s  f
 (v − v S 
) (1 − v S
/ v)  v
ρ = 8.3 g/cm = 8.3 × 10 kg/m
3 3 3
vs
Length of the rod, L = 3 m Applying binomial theorem (as  1 ), we get
Frequency of the note produced, f = 600 Hz v
Let the wavelength of vibration in the rod = λ  v 
f’ = 1 + s  f ...(i)
As the rod is clamped at its centre, the centre is a node  v
and free ends are antinodes. If f’’ is the apparent frequency of the tuning fork when
Thus, λ = 2 L = 6m it moves away from the stationary source,
If speed of sound in brass is v, then −1
 v  1  v 
v = fλ f’’ =  =
f f= 1 + s  f
3
or v = (600 Hz) (6 m) = 3.6 × 10 m/s  v + vs  (1 + vS / v)  v
@cbseinfinite
WAVES 166
vs
Applying binomial theorem (since  1 ), we get
v Example - 27
 v  What is the speed of the observer for whom a note is
f’’= 1 − s  f ...(ii)
 v 10 per cent lower than the emitted frequency?
From eqns. (i) and (ii), Sol. As the apparent frequency (f’) is less than emitted
 v   v  2vs f frequency (f), the observer must move away from the
f’ – f’’ = 1 + s f − 1 − s f = v source.
 v   v 
If v is the speed of sound and v o that of the observer,
(f ' − f '')f 3 × 340 m / s
=
or vs = = 1.5 m/s v − vo
2f 2 × 340 then f’ = f
v
(as f’ – f’’ = 3, v = 340 m/s and f = 340 Hz)
As the apparent frequency is 10% lower than the
Example - 26 emitted frequency,
Consider a source moving towards an observer at the 10 90
f’ = f – f= f = 0.9 f
speed of vs = 0.95v . Deduce the observed frequency 100 100
if the original is 500 Hz. (Think what would happen if  v − vo   v − vo 
or 0.9 f =   f or 0.9 =  
vs > v . Jet planes moving faster than sound are now  v   v 
so common). Here, v is the speed of sound. or 0.9v =
v − v o or v o =
v − 0.9v =
0.1v
Sol. We are given that v = 500 Hz, vs = 0.95v . Thus, speed of the observer is (1/10)th of the speed of
Since the observer is at rest and the source is moving sound.
towards the observer, the apparent frequency,
 v   v  500
f’ =  f =  500 =
 v − vs   v − 0.95 v  0.05
or f’ = 10,000 Hz
If vs > v , ( v − vs ) is negative and as such f’ is
negative which has no meaning. Thus, Doppler
formula is applicable so long as the velocity of the
source does not exceed the velocity of the wave. In
case of jet planes which move with speed greater than
the sound, a shock wave is formed whose wavefront is
a cone with the plane at its apex. The semi-vertical
v
angle of the cone is sin −1
vs
@cbseinfinite

7. A sinusoidal travelling wave is described by
Introduction and Classification of Waves
y (x, t) = a sin (kx – ωt + φ), where y(x, t) is the
1. The minimum distance between the two points having displacement as a function of position x and time t.
the same phase is: With reference to the above equation, match the items
(a) wavelength of the wave (b) amplitude of the wave in Column-I with terms in Column-II and choose the
(c) wave number (d) frequency of the wave correct option from the codes given below.
2. The distance travelled by the wave pattern in the time Column-I Column-I
required for one full oscillation by any constituent of (A) a denotes 1. Angular frequency of the
the medium is equal to: wave
(a) wavelength of the wave (B) ω denotes 2. Angular wave number
(b) amplitude of the wave (C) k denotes 3. Amplitude of the wave
(c) wave number of the wave (D) φ denotes 4. Initial phase angle at
(d) both (a) and (b) x = 0, t = 0
3. The path difference between the two waves Codes
 2π x  A B C D
= y1 a1 sin  ωt −
λ 
and
 (a) 3 2 4 1
 2π x  (b) 3 2 1 4
y2 a2 cos  ωt −
= + φ  is
 λ  (c) 3 1 2 4
(d) 4 1 2 3
λ λ  π
(a) φ (b) φ +    t x 1 
2π 2π  2 8. =
A wave equation is given by y 4sin π  − +  
  5 9 6 
2π  π 2π
(c) φ −  (d) (φ ) where, x is in cm and t is in seconds. The wavelength
λ  2 λ
of the wave is:
4. Which of the following waves have the maximum
(a) 18 cm (b) 9 cm
wavelength?
(c) 36 cm (d) 6 cm
(a) Infrared rays (b) UV-rays
9. The equation of progressive wave is
(c) Radio waves (d) X-rays
 t x 
5. Which of the following are not the transverse wave? = y 0.2sin 2π  −  , where x and y are in
(a) sound waves in the air (b) visible light waves  0.01 0.3 
(c) X-rays (d) γ - rays metres and t is in seconds. The velocity of
propagation of the wave is:
–1 –1
Equation of a Plane Progressive Wave (a) 30 ms (b) 40 ms
–1 –1
6. The equation which represents a sinusoidal (harmonic) (c) 300 ms (d) 400 ms
wave travelling along the positive direction of the 10. The equation of a wave travelling on a string is
X-axis is: π x
= y 4sin  8t −  if x and y are in centimetres, then
(a) y (x, t) = a sin (kx – ωt + φ) 2 8
(b) y (x, t) = a sin (kx + ωt + φ) velocity of wave is
(c) y (x, t) = a sin (kx + ωt) (a) 64 cm/sec in –ve x-direction
(d) y (x, t) = a sin (ωt + kx) (b) 32 cm/sec in –ve x-direction
(c) 32 cm/sec in +ve x-direction
(d) 64 cm/sec in +ve x-direction
@cbseinfinite
11.
A transverse wave is described by the equation 17. A stationary boat is rocked by waves whose crests are
 x 100 m apart velocity is 25 m/s. The boat bounces up
= y y0 sin 2π  ft − 
 λ  once in every:
The maximum particle velocity is equal to four times (a) 2500 s (b) 75 s
the wave velocity if (c) 4 s (d) 0.25 s
π y0 π y0 18. A transverse wave passes through a string with the
(a) λ = (b) λ =
4 2 equation
(c) λ = π y0 (d) λ = 2π y0 y = 10 sin π (0.02 x - 2.00t)
12. A progressive wave is given by where x is in meter and t in second. The maximum
 t x  velocity of the particle in wave motion is:
= y 3sin 2π  − 
 0.04 0.01  (a)100 m/s (b) 63 m/s
Where x, y are in cm and t in s. The frequency of wave (c)120 m/s (d) 161 m/s
and maximum acceleration will be Energy Transfer in a String Waves &
3 2 3 2
(a) 100 Hz, 4.7 × 10 cm/s (b) 50 Hz, 7.5 × 10 cm/s Longitudinal Waves
4 2 4 2
(c) 25 Hz, 4.7 × 10 cm/s (d) 25 Hz, 7.5 × 10 cm/s
19. Energy is not carried by which of the following
13. Which of the following is not true for the progressive
wave?
 t x 
= wave y 4sin 2π  −  (a) Progressive (b) Electromagnetic
 0.02 100  (c) Transverse (d) Stationary
Where x and y are in cm and t in seconds. 20. A sings with a frequency n and B sings with a
(a) The amplitude is 4 cm 1
(b) The wavelength is 100 cm frequency that of A. If the energy remains the same
8
(c) The frequency is 50 Hz
and the amplitude of A is a then amplitude of B is:
(d) The velocity of propagation is 50 cm/s
(a) 16 a (b) 8 a
Transverse Waves on a String (c) 2 a (d) a
21. When a longitudinal wave propagates through a
14. A string of 5.5 m length has a mass 0.035 kg. If the
medium, the particles of the medium execute simple
tension in the string is 77 N, then the speed of wave on
harmonic oscillations about their mean positions.
the string is:
These oscillations of a particle are characterized by an
(a) 77 m/s (b) 102 m/s
invariant
(c) 110 m/s (d) 164 m/s
(a) Kinetic energy
15. A long string having mass density as 0.01 kg/m is
(b) Potential energy
subjected to a tension of 64 N. The speed of the
(c) Sum of kinetic energy and potential energy
transverse wave on the string is:
(d) Difference between kinetic energy and potential
(a) 100 m/s (b) 120 m/s
energy
(c) 80 m/s (d) 90 m/s
22. When sound propagates through air, the region of high
16. Wave pulse on a string shown in figure is moving to
density of air molecules is called:
the right without changing shape. Consider two
(a) compression (b) rarefaction
particles at positions x1 = 1.5 m and x2 = 2.5 m. Their
(c) denser (d) none of the above
transverse velocities at the moment shown in figure are
23. The speed of a longitudinal wave in air is given by:
along directions
ρ B
(a) v = (b) v =
B ρ
ρ (∆V / V )
(c) v = (d) both (a) and (c)
−∆p
24. The relation for Bulk modulus of a medium is given by
(a) positive y-axis and positive y-axis respectively ∆p ∆V
(a) B = − (b) B = −
(b) negative y-axis and positive y-axis respectively ∆V / V ∆p / p
(c) positive y-axis and negative y-axis respectively
∆p ∆p
(d) negative y-axis and negative y-axis respectively (c) B = (d) B = −
∆V / V V / ∆V
@cbseinfinite
25. Distance between successive compression and 33. A wave frequency 100 Hz is sent along a string
rarefactions is 1 m and velocity of sound is 360 m/s. towards a fixed end. When this wave travels back,
Then the frequency (in Hz) of the sound is after reflection, a node is formed at a distance of
10 cm from the fixed end of the string. The speeds of
Sound Intensity and Loudness
incident (and reflected) waves are:
26. An increase in intensity level of 1 dB implies an (a) 48 m/s (b) 20 m/s
increase in Intensity of (given antilog10 0.1 = 1.2589)
(c) 10 m/s (d) 15 m/s
(a) 1 % (b) 3.01 %
34. When two sound waves with a phased difference of
(c) 26 % (d) 0.1 %
π / 2 , and each having amplitude A and frequency ω ,
27. If separation between screen and source is increased
are superimposed on each other, then the maximum
by 2% what would be the effect on the intensity amplitude and frequency of resultant wave is
(a) Increases by 4% (b) Increases by 2% A ω A
(a) : (b) :ω
(c) Decreases by 2% (d) Decreases by 4% 2 2 2
28. The intensity level of two sounds are 100 dB and ω
50 dB. What is the ratio of their intensities? (c) 2 A : (d) 2A :ω
1 3
2
(a) 10 (b) 10 35. The superposition takes place between two waves of
5 10
(c) 10 (d) 10 frequency f and amplitude a. The total intensity is
29. A source of sound emits 200 π W power which is directly proportional to
uniformly distributed over a sphere of radius 10 m. (a) a (b) 2a
What is the loudness of sound on the surface of the (c) 2a 2 (d) 4a 2
sphere?
36. If two waves of same frequency and same amplitude
(a) 70 dB (b) 74 dB
respectively on superimposition produced a resultant
(c) 80 dB (d) 117 dB
disturbance of the same amplitude, find the phase
30. The loudness and pitch of a sound note depends on difference (in degrees) between the waves:
(a) intensity and frequency
Standing Waves
(b) frequency and number of harmonics
37. A standing wave consisting of 3 nodes and 2 antinodes
(c) intensity and velocity
is formed between the two atoms having a distance of
(d) frequency and velocity 1.21 Å between them. The wavelength of the standing
31. The power of a sound from the speaker of a radio is wave is:
20 mW. By tuning the knob of the volume control, the (a) 1.21 Å (b) 2.42 Å
power of the sound is increased to 400mW. The power (c) 6.05 Å (d) 3.63 Å
increase in decibels as compared to the original power 38. A string is stretched between fixed points separated by
is 75.0 cm. It is observed to have resonant frequencies of
420 Hz and 315 Hz. There are no other resonant
(a)13 dB (b) 10 dB
frequencies between these two. Then the lowest
(c) 20 dB (d) 800 dB resonance frequency for this string is
Superposition of Waves (a) 1.05 Hz (b) 1050 Hz
(c) 10.5 Hz (d) 105 Hz
32. A pulse of a wave train travels along a stretched string
and reaches the fixed end of the string. It will be 39. The fundamental frequency of a closed organ pipe of
reflected back with length 20 cm is equal to the second overtone of an
organ pipe open at both the ends. The length of organ
(a) a phase change of 180° with velocity reversed
pipe open at both the ends is:
(b) the same phase as the incident pulse with no
(a) 100 cm (b) 120 cm
reversal of velocity
(c) 140 cm (d) 80 cm
(c) a phase change of 180° with no reversal of
velocity
(d) the same phase as the incident pulse but with
velocity reversed
@cbseinfinite
40. Standing waves are produced in 10 m long stretched 45. Column-I has figures showing different modes of
string. If the string vibrates in 5 segments and wave oscillation of the system (a string tied at both the ends)
velocity is 20 m/s, then its frequency will be: and Column-II has name of the corresponding modes.
(a) 5 Hz (b) 2 Hz Match the items in Column I with terms in Column II
and choose the correct option from the codes given
(c) 10 Hz (d) 2 Hz
–4
below.
41. A stretched string of length 1m and mass 5 × 10 kg, Column-I Column-II
fixed at both ends, is under a tension of 20 N. If it is A. 1. Fundamental
plucked at points situated at 25 cm from one end, it mode
would vibrate with a frequency:
(a) 400 Hz (b) 200 Hz B. 2. Second
(c) 100 Hz (d) 256 Hz harmonic
42. A standing wave is formed on a string fixed at both the
ends. The individual waves i.e., incident wave and C. 3. Sixth
reflected wave are y= 1
(x, t) a sin(kx − ω t) y1 and harmonic
y=
2
(x, t) a sin(kx − ω t) , respectively. The two waves D. 4. Fifth
have same wavelength ‘ λ ’. harmonic
The position of nodes is given as
Codes
nλ
(a) x = ; n = 0, 1, 2, 3, ... A B C D
2 (a) 4 2 3 1
(2n + 1)λ (b) 4 3 1 2
(b) x = ; n = 0, 1, 2, 3, ...
2 (c) 3 2 1 4
(c) x = nλ; n = 0, 1, 2, 3, ... (d) 2 3 1 4
(d) x = (2n + 1) λ; n = 0, 1, 2, 3, ... 46. An open organ pipe of length l vibrates in its
43. A standing wave is formed on a string fixed at both the fundamental mode. The pressure variation is
ends. The individual waves i.e., incident wave and maximum:
(x, t) a sin(kx − ω t) and (a) at the two ends
y=
2
(x, t) a sin(kx + ω t) , respectively. The two waves (b) at the distance l/2 inside the ends
have same wavelength ‘ λ ’. (c) at the distance l/4 inside the ends
The position of anti-nodes is given by the equation,
(d) at the distance l/8 inside the ends
 1λ
(a) =
x  n +  ; n = 0, 1, 2, 3, ... 47. A pipe closed at one end produces a fundamental note
 2 2 of 412 Hz. It is cut into two equal lengths, the
nλ fundamental notes produced by the two pieces are
(b) x = ; n = 0, 1, 2, 3, ...
2 (a) 206 Hz, 412 Hz (b) 206 Hz, 824 Hz
(2n + 1)λ (c) 412 Hz, 824 Hz (d) 824 Hz, 1648 Hz
(c) x = ; n = 0, 1, 2, 3, ... 48. An open pipe is suddenly closed at one end with the
2
(d) x = (2n + 1)λ; n = 0, 1, 2, 3, ... result that the frequency of third harmonic of the closed
44. A standing wave is formed on a string fixed at both the pipe is found to be higher by 100 Hz than fundamental
ends. The individual waves i.e., incident wave and frequency of the open pipe. The fundamental
frequency of the open pipe is
(x, t) a sin(kx − ω t) and
(a) 200 Hz (b) 300 Hz
y=
2
(x, t) a sin(kx + ω t) , respectively. The two waves (c) 240 Hz (d) 480 Hz
have same wavelength ‘ λ ’.
The distance between any two consecutive anti-nodes
is
λ
(a) λ (b)
2
3λ
(c) (d) 2λ
2
@cbseinfinite
49. An open pipe is in resonance in 2nd harmonic with 56. A uniform wire of length L, diameter D and density S
frequency f1. Now one end of the tube is closed and is stretched under a tension T. The correct relation
frequency is increased to f2 such that the resonance between its fundamental frequency f, the length L and
again occurs in nth harmonic. Choose the correct the diameter D is:
option. 1 1
3 5 (a) f ∝ (b) f ∝
(a) n = 3, f2 = f1 (b) n = 3, f2 = f1 LD L D
4 4
1 1
5
(c) n = 5, f2 = f1
3
(d) n = 5, f2 = f1 (c) f ∝ 2
(d) f ∝
4 4 D LD 2
50. If the length of a closed organ pipe is 1 m and velocity 57. A wire under tension vibrates with a fundamental
of sound is 330 m/s, then the frequency of 1st overtone frequency of 600 Hz. If the length of the wire is
is: doubled, the radius is halved and the wire is made to
(a) 4 (330/4) Hz (b) 3 (330/4) Hz vibrate under one-ninth the tension. Then, the
(c) 2 (330/4) Hz (d) none of these fundamental frequency will become:
51. An open organ pipe of length l vibrates in its (a) 400 Hz (b) 600 Hz
fundamental mode. The displacement variation is (c) 300 Hz (d) 200 Hz
maximum: 58. Three sound waves of equal amplitudes have
(a) at the two ends frequencies (f – 1), f, (f + 1). They superpose to give
(b) at the distance l/2 inside the ends beats. The number of beats produced per second will
(c) at the distance l/4 inside the ends be
(d) at the distance l/8 inside the ends (a) 4 (b) 3
52. A pipe closed at one end and open at the other end (c) 2 (d) 1
resonates with sound waves of frequencies 135 Hz and 59. Two sound waves with wavelength 5.0 m and 5.5 m
also 165 Hz but not with any wave of frequency respectively, each propagate in a gas with velocity
intermediate between these two. The frequency of the 330 m/s. Number of beats per second produced is:
fundamental note is: (a) 6 (b) 12
(a) 30 Hz (b) 15 Hz (c) 0 (d) 1
(c) 60 Hz (d) 7.5 Hz 60. A tuning fork vibrating with a sonometer having 20 cm
wire produces 5 beats/s. The beat frequency does not
53. If we study the vibration of a pipe open at both ends,
change if the length of the wire is changed to 21 cm.
then, which of the following statement is NOT true?
The frequency of the tuning fork must be:
(a) Open end will be anti-node.
(a) 200 Hz (b) 210 Hz
(b) Odd harmonics of the fundamental frequency will
(c) 205 Hz (d) 215 Hz
be generated.
61. A source of frequency f gives 5 beats/s when sounded
(c) All harmonics of the fundamental frequency will be
with a frequency 200 Hz. The second harmonic of
generated.
source gives 10 beats/s when sounded with a source of
(d) Pressure change will be maximum at both ends.
frequency 420 Hz. The value of f is:
54. A pipe closed at one end and open at the other end
(a) 200 Hz (b) 210 Hz
resonates with sound waves of frequency 135 Hz and
(c) 205 Hz (d) 195 Hz
also 165 Hz but not with any wave of frequency
62. When temperature increase, the frequency of a tuning
intermediate between these two. Then find the
fork
frequency (in Hz) of the first overtone:
(a) increases
Experimental Study of Standing Waves & Beats (b) decreases
55. A cylindrical tube, open at both ends, has a (c) remains same
fundamental frequency, f, in air. The tube is dipped (d) increases of decreases depending on the material
vertically in water so that half of it is in water. The
fundamental frequency of the air-column is now
f
(a) f (b)
2
3f
(c) (d) 2f
4
@cbseinfinite
63. Two wires are fixed on a sonometer. Their tensions are 70. A police car with a siren of frequency 8 kHz is moving
in the ratio 8 : 1, their lengths are in the ratio 36 : 35, with uniform velocity of 36 km/h towards a tall
the diameters are in the ratio 4 :1 and densities are in building which reflects the sound waves. The speed of
the ratio 1 : 2. If the note of the higher pitch has a sound in air is 320 m/s. The frequency of the siren
–1
frequency 360 s , the frequency of beats ( in Hz) heard by the car driver is:
produced is (a) 8.50 kHz (b) 8.25 kHz
(c) 7.75 kHz (d) 7.50 kHz
Doppler's Effect of Sound
71. A whistle producing sound waves of frequencies
64. A vehicle with a horn of frequency n is moving with a 9500 Hz and above is approaching a stationary person
velocity of 30 m/s in a direction perpendicular to the with speed v m/s. The velocity of sound in air is 300
straight line joining the observer and the vehicle. The m/s. If the person can hear frequencies up to a
observer perceives the sound to have a frequency maximum of 10,000 Hz, the maximum value of v up
(n + n1). If velocity of sound in air is 300 m/s, n1 would to which he can hear the whistle is:
be (a) 15 / 2 m/s (b) 15 m/s
(a) n1 = 10 n (b) n1 = 0
(c) 30 m/s (d) 15 2 m/s
(c) n1 = 0.1 n (d) n1 = – 0.1 n
72. A source of sound is travelling towards a stationary
65. Two sources A and B are sounding notes of frequency
observer. The frequency of sound heard by the
680 Hz. A listener moves from A to B with a constant
observer is three times the original frequency. The
velocity u. If speed of sound is 340 ms-1, what should
velocity of sound is v m/s. The speed if source will be
be the value of u so that he hears 10 beats/s?
(a) 2.0 ms-1 (b) 3.0 ms-1 2
(a) v (b) v
(c) 2.5 ms -1
(d) 3.5 ms-1 3
66. When a source is going away from a stationary 3
(c) v (d) 3v
observer with a velocity equal to velocity of sound in 2
air, then the frequency heard by the observer will be 73. A train is moving with a constant speed along a
(a) same (b) double circular track. The engine of the train emits a sound of
(c) half (d) one third frequency f. The frequency heard by the guard at rear
67. A car sounding its horn at 480 Hz moves towards a end of the train is
high wall at a speed of 20 ms-1, the frequency of the (a) less than f
reflected sound heard by the man sitting in the car will (b) equal to f
be nearest to; (speed of sound 330 m/s) (c) is greater than f
(a) 480 Hz (b) 510 Hz (d) may be greater than, less or equal to f depending
(c) 540 Hz (d) 570 Hz on the factors like speed of train, length of train
68. A siren placed at a railway platform is emitting sound and radius of circular track
of frequency 5 k Hz. A passenger sitting in a moving 74. A train approaches a stationary observer, the velocity
train A records a frequency of 5.5 k Hz, while the train 1
approaches the siren. During his return journey in a of train being of the velocity of sound. A sharp
20
different train B, he records a frequency of 6.0 k Hz,
blast is blown with the whistle of the engine at equal
while approaching the same siren. The ratio of the
intervals of a second. The interval between the
velocity of train B to that of train A is successive blasts as heard by the observer is:
(a) 242/252 (b) 2
1 1
(c) 5/6 (d) 11/6 (a) s (b) min
20 20
69. A car is moving towards a high cliff. The driver sounds
a horn of frequency f. The reflected sound heard by the 19 19
(c) s (d) min
driver has a frequency 2 f. If v be the velocity of sound, 20 20
then the velocity of the car, in the same velocity units 75. Two trains, each moving with a velocity of 30 m/s,
would be cross each other. One of the trains gives a whistle
(a) v/4 (b) v/2 whose frequency is 600 Hz. If the speed of sound is
330 m/s, then the apparent frequency (in Hz) for
(c) v/ 2 (d) v/3
passengers sitting in the other train before crossing
would be:
@cbseinfinite
WAVES 173

1. A train is moving on a straight track with speed 5. Two engines pass each other moving in opposite
20 ms-1. It is blowing its whistle at the frequency of directions with uniform speed of 30 m/s. One of them
1000 Hz. The percentage change in the frequency is blowing a whistle of frequency 540 Hz. Calculate
heard by a person standing near the track as the train the frequency heard by driver of second engine before
passes him is (speed of sound = 320 ms-1) close to: they pass each other. Speed of sound is 330 m/sec:
[2015] [2016]
(a) 18% (b) 24% (a) 450 Hz (b) 540 Hz
(c) 6% (d) 12% (c) 648 Hz (d) 270 Hz
2. A source of sound emits sound waves at frequency f0. 6. A toy-car, blowing its horn, is moving with a steady
It is moving towards an observer with fixed speed speed of 5 m/s, away from a wall. An observer, towards
vs ( vs < v , where v is the speed of sound in air). If the whom the toy car is moving, is able to hear 5 beats per
observer were to move towards the source with speed second. If the velocity of sound in air is 340 m/s, the
v 0 , one of the following two graphs (A and B) will frequency of the horn of the toy car is close to: [2016]
(a) 680 Hz (b) 510 Hz
give the correct variation of the frequency f heard by
(c) 340 Hz (d) 170 Hz
the observer as v 0 is changed.
7. Two wires W1 and W2 have the same radius r and
respective densities r1 and r2 such that r2 = 4 r1. They
are joined together at the point O, as shown in the
figure. The combination is used as a sonometer wire
and kept under tension T. The point O is midway
between the two bridges. When a stationary wave is set
The variation of f with v0 is given correctly by: [2015] up in the composite wire, the joint is found to be a
node. The ratio of the number of antinodes formed in
f0
(a) graph A with slope = W1 to W2 is: [2017]
( v + vs )
f0
(b) graph B with slope =
( vs )
v −
f0
(c) graph A with slope = (a) 1:1 (b) 1:2
( v − vs ) (c) 1:3 (d) 4:1
f0 8. A standing wave is formed by the superposition of two
(d) graph B with slope =
( v + vs ) waves travelling in opposite directions. The transverse
3. A uniform string of length 20 m is suspended from a displacement is given by
rigid support. A short-wave pulse is introduced at its  5π 
y ( x, t ) = 0.5 sin  x  cos (200π t ).
lowest end. It starts moving up the string. The time  4 
taken to reach the support is: (take g = 10 ms-2) What is the speed of the travelling wave moving in the
[2016] positive x direction?
(a) 2s (b) 2 2 s (x and t are in meter and second, respectively.) [2017]
(a) 160 m/s (b) 90 m/s
(c) 2 s (d) 2π 2 s
(c) 180 m/s (d) 120 m/s
4. A pipe open at both ends has a fundamental frequency
9. 5 beats/ second are heard when a tuning fork is
f in air. The pipe is dipped vertically in water so that
sounded with a sonometer wire under tension, when
half of it is in water. The fundamental frequency of the
the length of the sonometer wire is either 0.95 m or
air column is now: [2016]
1 m. The frequency of the fork will be: [2018]
3f (a) 195 Hz (b) 150 Hz
(a) (b) 2f
4 (c) 300 Hz (d) 251 Hz
f
(c) f (d)
2
@cbseinfinite
WAVES 174
10. Two sitar strings, A and B, playing the note ‘Dha’ are 16. The correct figure that shows, schematically, the wave
slightly out of tune and produce beats of frequency pattern produced by superposition of two waves of
5 Hz. The tension of the string B is slightly increased frequencies 9 Hz and 11 Hz is: [2019]
and the beat frequency is found to decrease by 3 Hz. If (a)
the frequency of A is 425 Hz, the original frequency of
B is: [2018]
(a) 430 Hz (b) 420 Hz
(c) 428 Hz (d) 422 Hz
11. The end correction of a resonance column is 1 cm. If
the shortest length resonating with the tuning fork is (b)
10 cm, the next resonating length should be: [2018]
(a) 28 cm (b) 32 cm
(c) 36 cm (d) 40 cm
12. The P = 0.01 sin [1000t – 3x] Nm-2 pressure wave,
corresponds to the sound produced by a vibrating blade
on a day when atmospheric temperature is 0°C. On (c)
some other day when temperature is T, the speed of
sound produced by the same blade and at the same
frequency is found to be 336 ms-1. Approximate value
of T is: [2019]
(a) 4°C (b) 11°C
(c) 12°C (d) 15°C (d)
13. Two cars A and B are moving away from each other in
opposite directions. Both the cars are moving with a
speed of 20 ms −1 with respect to the ground. If an
observer in car A detects a frequency 2000 Hz of the
sound coming from car B, what is the natural 17. A source of sound S is moving with a velocity of
frequency of the sound source in car B? 50 m/s towards a stationary observer. The observer
(Speed of sound in air = 340 ms −1 ) [2019] measures the frequency of the source as 1000 Hz. What
(a) 2250 Hz (b) 2060 Hz will be the apparent frequency of the source when it is
(c) 2300 Hz (d) 2150 Hz moving away from the observer after crossing him?
14. A string 2.0 m long and fixed at its ends is driven by a (Take velocity of sound in air 350 m/s) [2019]
240 Hz vibrator. The string vibrates in its third (a) 750 Hz (b) 857 Hz
harmonic mode. The speed of the wave and its (c) 1143 Hz (d) 807 Hz
fundamental frequency is: [2019] 18. A progressive wave travelling along the positive
(a) 180 m / s,80 Hz (b) 320 m / s,80 Hz x-direction is represented by
y ( x=
, t ) A sin ( kx − ωt + φ ) . Its snapshot at t = 0 is
(c) 320 m / s,120 Hz (d) 180 m / s,120 Hz
15. A stationary source emits sound waves of frequency given in the figure.
500 Hz. Two observers moving along a line passing
through the source detect sound to be of frequencies
480 Hz and 530 Hz. Their respective speeds are,
1
in ms- , (Given speed of sound = 300 m/s) [2019]
(a) 12, 16 (b) 12, 18

(c) 16, 14 (d) 8, 18
For this wave, the initial phase φ is [2019]
π
(a) − (b) π
2
π
(c) 0 (d)
2
@cbseinfinite
WAVES 175
19. A submarine (A) travelling at 18 km/hr is being chased 26. A travelling harmonic wave is represented by the
along the line of its velocity by another submarine (B) equation, where x and y are in meters and t is in
travelling at 27 km/hr. B sends a sonar signal of seconds. Which of the following is a correct statement
500 Hz to detect A and receives a reflected sound of about the wave? [2019]
frequency ν . The value of ν (in Hz) is close to: (a) The wave is propagating along the negative X-axis
(Speed of sound in water = 1500 ms-1). Write the with speed 25 ms-1.
nearest integer as the answer. [2019] (b) The wave is propagating along the positive X-axis
20. A tuning fork of frequency 480Hz is used in an with speed 100 ms-1.
experiment for measuring speed of sound (v) in air by (c) The wave is propagating along the positive X-axis
resonance tube method. Resonance is observed to with speed 25 ms-1.
occur at two successive lengths of the air column, (d) The wave is propagating along the negative X-axis
l1 = 30 cm and l2 = 70 cm. then, v is equal to: [2019] with speed 100 ms-1.
(a) 332 ms-1 (b) 384 ms-1 27. A musician using an open flute of length 50 cm
(c) 338 ms -1
(d) 379 ms-1 produces second harmonic sound waves. A person runs
21. A small speaker delivers 2 W of audio output. At what towards the musician from another end of the hall at a
distance from the speaker will one detect 120 dB speed of 10 km/h. If the wave speed is 330 m/s, the
intensity sound? [Given reference intensity of sound as frequency heard by the running person shall be close
10-12 W/m2] [2019] to: [2019]
(a) 40 cm (b) 20 cm (a) 666 Hz (b) 753 Hz
(c) 10 cm (d) 30 cm (c) 500 Hz (d) 333 Hz
22. A heavy ball of mass M is suspended from the ceiling 28. Two identical strings X and Z made of same material
of a car by a light string of mass m (m << M). When have tension Tx and Ty in them. If their fundamental
the car is at rest, the speed of transverse waves in the frequencies are 450 Hz and 300 Hz, respectively, then
string is 60 ms-1. When the car has acceleration a, the the ratio Tx/Tz is: [2020]
wave-speed increases to 60.5 ms-1. The value of a, in
(a) 2.25 (b) 1.25
terms of gravitational acceleration g, is closest to:
(c) 0.44 (d) 1.5
[2019]
29. A wire of density 9 × 10 kg cm-3 is stretched between
-3
g g two clamps 1 m apart. The resulting strain in the wire
(a) (b)
30 5 is 4.9 × 10-4. The lowest frequency of the transverse
g g vibrations in the wire is (Young’s modulus of wire
(c) (d)
10 20 Y = 9 × 1010 Nm-2), (to the nearest integer),……….
23. A closed organ pipe has a fundamental frequency of [2020]
1.5 kHz. The number of overtones that can be distinctly 30. A uniform thin rope of length 12 m and mass 6 kg
heard by a person with this organ pipe will be: hangs vertically from a rigid support and a block of
(Assume that the highest frequency a person can hear mass 2 kg is attached to its free end. A transverse short-
is 20,000 Hz) [2019] wave train of wavelength 6 cm is produced at the lower
(a) 6 (b) 4 end of the rope. What is the wavelength of the wave
(c) 7 (d) 5 train (in cm) when it reaches the top of the rope?
24. A string of length 1 m and mass 5 g is fixed at both [2020]
ends. The tension in the string is 8.0 N. The string is (a) 12 (b) 3
set into vibration using an external vibrator of (c) 9 (d) 6
frequency 100 Hz. The separation (in cm) between 31. For a transverse wave travelling along a straight line,
successive nodes on the string is: [2019] the distance between two peaks (crests) is 5m, while
25. Equation of travelling wave on a stretched string of the distance between one crest and one trough is 1.5m.
linear density 5 g/m is y = 0.03 sin (450 t – 9x) where The possible wavelengths (in m) of the waves are:
distance and time are measured in SI units. The tension [2020]
in the string (in N) is: [2019] (a) 1, 3, 5,…. (b) 1,2,3,…
1 1 1 1 1 1
(c) , , ,... (d) , , ,...
2 4 6 1 3 5
@cbseinfinite
WAVES 176
32. The driver of a bus approaching a big wall notices that 37. A stationary observer receives sound from two
the frequency of his bus’s horn changes from 420 Hz
to 490 Hz when he hears it after it gets reflected from identical tuning forks, one of which approaches and the
the wall. Find the speed of the bus if speed of the sound other one receded with the same speed (much less than
is 330 ms-1. [2020] the speed of sound). The observer hears 2 beats/sec.
(a) 81 kmh-1 (b) 91 kmh-1 The oscillation frequency of each tuning fork is
(c) 71 kmh-1 (d) 61 kmh-1
33. Assume that the displacement (s) of air is proportional vo = 1400 Hz and the velocity of sound in air is 350
to the pressure difference ( ∆p ) created by a sound m/s. The speed of each tuning fork is close to [2020]
wave. Displacement(s) further depends on the speed of 1
(a) m/s (b) 1 m/s
sound (n), density of air (r) and the frequency (f). If 4
∆p  10 Pa, v  300 m / s, ρ  1 kg/m3 and f =1000 Hz, 1 1
(c) m/s (d) m/s
then s will be of the order of (take the multiplicative 2 8
constant to be 1) [2020] 38. A one meter long (both ends open) organ pipe is kept
(a) 1 mm (b) 10 mm in a gas that has double the density of air at STP.
1 3 Assuming the speed of sound in air at STP is 300 m/s,
(c) mm (d) mm
10 100 the frequency difference between the fundamental and
34. In a resonance tube experiment when the tube is filled second harmonic of this pipe is ……… Hz. [2020]
with water up to a height of 17.0 cm from bottom, it 39. A transverse wave travels on a taut steel wire with a
resonates with a given tuning fork. When the water velocity of V when tension in it is 2.06 × 104. When the
V
level is raised the next resonance with the same tuning tension is changed to T, the velocity changed to .
fork occurs at a height of 24.5 cm. If the velocity of 2
sound in air is 330 m/s, the tuning fork frequency is: The value of T is close to [2020]
[2020] (a) 30.5 × 104 N (b) 2.50 × 104 N
(a) 2200 Hz (b) 550 Hz (c) 10.2 × 102 N (d) 5.15 × 103 N
(c) 3300 Hz (d) 1100 Hz 40. Three harmonic waves of same frequency (v) and
35. A driver in a car, approaching a vertical wall notice that
π π
the frequency of his car horn, has changed from intensity (I0) having initial phase angles 0, , − rad
4 4
440 Hz to 480 Hz, when it gets reflected from the wall.
respectively.
If the speed of sound in air is 345 m/s, then the speed
When they are superimposed, the resultant intensity is
of the car is: [2020]
close to [2020]
(a) 24 km/hr (b) 36 km/hr
(a) 5.8 I0 (b) I0
(c) 54 km/hr (d) 18 km/hr
(c) 3 I0 (d) 0.2 I0
36. An object of mass m is suspended at the end of a
41. For a transverse wave travelling along a straight line,
massless wire of length L and area of cross-section A.
the distance between two peaks (crests) is 5m, while
Young modulus of the material of the wire is Y. If the
the distance between one crest and one trough is 1.5m.
mass is pulled down slightly its frequency of
The possible wavelengths (in m) of the waves are:
oscillation along the vertical direction is: [2020]
[2020]
1 YA 1 mL
(a) f = (b) f = (a) 1, 3, 5,…. (b) 1,2,3,…
2π mL 2π YA 1 1 1 1 1 1
(c) , , ,... (d) , , ,...
1 YL 1 mA 2 4 6 1 3 5
(c) f = (d) f =
2π mA 2π YL 42. Which of the following equations represents a
travelling wave? [2021]
(a) y A sin (15 x − 2t )
= (b) y Ae − x ( vt + θ )
=
2
(c) y Ae x cos (ωt − θ )

= (d) y = A sin x cos ωt
@cbseinfinite
WAVES 177
43. A student is performing the experiment of resonance 47. A signal of 0.1 kW is transmitted in a cable. The
column. The diameter of the column tube is 6 cm. The attenuation of cable is –5 dB per km and cable length
frequency of the tuning fork is 504 Hz. Speed of the is 20 km. The power received at receiver is 10–x W.
sound at the given temperature is 336 m/s. The zero of The value of x is ………
the meter scale coincides with the top end of the P 
resonance column tube. The reading of the water level [Gain in dB = 10log10  0  ] [2021]
 Pi 
in the column when the first resonance occurs is:
[2021] 48. The percentage increase in the speed of transverse
(a) 18.4 cm (b) 13 cm waves produced in a stretched string if the tension is
(c) 14.8 cm (d) 16.6 cm increased by 4%. Will be ……… %. [2021]
44. A tuning fork A of unknown frequency produces 49. The mass per unit length of a uniform wire is
5 beats/s with a fork of known frequency 340 Hz. 0.135 g/cm. A transverse wave of the form
When fork A is filed, the beat frequency decreases to y = –0.21 sin (x + 30t) is produced in it, where x is in
2 beats/s. What is the frequency of fork A? [2021] meter and t is in second. Then, the expected value of
(a) 338 Hz (b) 335 Hz tension in the wire is x × 10–2 N. N. Value of x is
(c) 345 Hz (d) 342 Hz ………
45. A sound wave of frequency 245 Hz travels with the (Round-off to the nearest integer) [2021]
speed of 300m / s along the positive x – axis. Each
50. A closed organ pipe of length L and an open organ pipe
point of the wave moves to and fro through a total
contain gases of densities ρ1 and ρ2 respectively. The
distance of 6 cm. What will be the mathematical
compressibility of gases is equal in both the pipes.
expression of this travelling wave? [2021]
Both the pipes are vibrating in their first overtone with
Y ( x, t ) 0.03 sin 5.1x − ( 0.2 × 103 ) t 
(a) = same frequency. The length of the open pipe is
( )
Y ( x, t ) 0.06 sin 5.1x − 1.5 × 103 t 
(b)= x ρ
L 1 where x is ……… (Round off to the Nearest
3 ρ2
(c)=Y ( x, t ) 0.06 sin 0.8 x − ( 0.5 × 10 ) t 
3
Integer) [2021]
Y ( x, t ) 0.03 sin 5.1x − (1.5 × 10 ) t 
(d) = 3
46. Two cars are approaching each other at an equal speed

of 7.2 km/hr. When they see each other, both blow horn
having frequency of 676 Hz. The beat frequency heard
by each driver will be ……… Hz. [Velocity of sound
in air is 340 m/s.] [2021]
@cbseinfinite
WAVES 178

Objective Questions I [Only one correct option] 6. Transverse waves are produced in a long string by
attaching its free end to a vibrating tuning fork. Figure
1. The amplitude of a wave disturbance propagating
below shows the shape of a part of string. Which pairs
1
along positive x-axis is given by y = at t = 0 and of points are in phase?
1+ x2
1
y= at t = 2 s where x and y are in metres.
1 + ( x −1) 2
The shape of the wave disturbance does not change
with time. The velocity of the wave is
(a) 0.5 m/s (b) 1 m/s
(a) A and D (b) B and E
(c) 2 m/s (d) 4 m/s
(c) C and F (d) A and G
2. The distance between two consecutive crests in a wave
7. When a wave travels in a medium, the particle
train produced in string is 5 cm. If two complete waves
displacements are given by
pass through any point per second, the velocity of the
y (x, t) = 0.03 sin π (2t – 0.01 x) where y and x are in
wave is
(a) 10 cm/s (b) 2.5 cm/s meters and t in seconds.
(c) 5 cm/s (d) 15 cm/s The wave length of the wave is
3. A equation of plane progressive wave (a) 10 m (b) 20 m
(c) 100 m (d) 200 m
y = A sin ( ωt + kx). Its wrong statement is
8. Transverse wave of amplitude 10 cm is generated at
2π one end (x = 0) of a long string by a tuning fork of
(a) is wavelength
k frequency 500 Hz. At a certain instant of time, the
ω displacement of a particle A at x = 100 cm is - 5 cm
(b) is velocity of wave
k and of particle B at x = 200 cm is + 5 cm. What is the
ω wave length of the wave?
(c) is frequency of wave
2π (a) 2 m (b) 3 m
k (c) 4 m (d) 5 m
(d) is maximum velocity of particle 9. A source of sound vibrates according to the equation
πω
4.
An equation of plane progressive wave y = 0.05 cos π t. It sends out waves of velocity 1.5 m/s.
a 2π  x  The wave length of the waves is
=y sin  t −  . If maximum velocity of particle (a) 1.5 m (b) 3.0 m
π 3  b
(c) 4.5 m (d) 6.0 m
and velocity of wave are equal.
10. A progressive wave in a medium is represented by the
a
Now will be  5 
b equation y 0.1sin 10 π t − π x  where y and x are
=
 11 
2 3 in cm and t in seconds. The maximum speed of a
(a) (b)
3 2 particle of the medium due to the wave is
1 (a) 1 cm s
–1
(b) 10 cm s
–1
2 (c) π cms (d) 10 π cms
–1 –1
5. A transverse wave is represented by the equation

5  x
2π 11. The equation of wave=
y sin  t −  where
= y y0 sin (vt − x) for what value of λ , the 2  2
λ
displacement is in cm and time in sec. The phase angle
maximum particle velocity is equal to two times the
between two particles at distance 12 cm is
wave velocity? o
(a) 6 (b) 6 radian
π y0
(a) λ = (b) λ = πy0 (c) 3
o
(d) 3 radian
2
2π y0
(c) λ = 2 πy0 (d) λ =
2
@cbseinfinite
WAVES 179
12. The particle displacement in a travelling harmonic 20. Two periodic waves of amplitudes a and b pass through
wave is given by a region at the same time and in the same direction. If
y (x, t) = 2.0 cos2(10t – 0.008x + 0.35) where x and y a > b, the difference in the maximum and minimum
are in centimetres and t is in seconds. What is the phase possible amplitudes is:
difference between oscillatory motion at two points (a) a + b (b) a – b
separated by a distance of 4 m? (c) 2 a (d) 2 b
(a) 0.2 π (b) 6.4 π 21. The extension in a string, obeying Hooke’s law, is x.
(c) 0.6 π (d) 0.8 π The speed of the wave in the stretched string is v. If the
13. Transverse waves of the same frequency are generated extension in the string is increased to 1.5 x, the speed
in two steel wires A and B. The diameter of A is twice of the wave in the string will be
that of B and the tension in A is half that in B. The ratio (a) 1.22 v (b) 0.61 v
of the velocities of waves in A and B is (c) 1.50 v (d) 0.75 v
22. A uniform rope of mass 0.1 kg and length 2.45 m hangs
(a) 1 : 2 (b) 1 : 2
from a ceiling. The time taken by a transverse wave to
(c) 1 : 2 2 (d) 3 : 2 2 2
travel the full length of the rope is (g = 9.8 m/s )
14. The velocity of sound in air is 332 m/s. If the air (a) 1 s (b) 2 s
consists of nitrogen and oxygen in the ratio 4 : 1, the (c) 3 s (d) 4 s
velocity of sound in oxygen is 23.
–8 –2
A sound has an intensity of 2 × 10 Wm . Its intensity
(a) 372 m/s (b) 278 m/s level in decibels is: (log10 2 = 0.3)
(c) 418 m/s (d) 315 m/s
(a) 23 (b) 4.3
15. The speed of sound in oxygen ( O2 ) at a certain
(c) 43 (d) none of these
temperature is 460 ms −1 . The speed of sound in helium 24. Two waves represented by the following equations are
(He) at the same temperature will be (assume both travelling in the same medium
gases to be ideal) y1 = 5 sin 2π (75t – 0.25 x),
–1 –1
(a) 330 ms (b) 460 ms y2 = 10 sin 2π (150 t – 0.50 x)
–1 –1
(c) 500 ms (d) 1420 ms I1
16. The speed of sound in a gas is v and the root mean The intensity ratio of the two waves is:
I2
square speed of gas molecules is vrms. If the ratio of the
(a) 1 : 2 (b) 1 : 4
specific heats of the gas γ = 1.5, then the ratio of speed (c) 1 : 8 (d) 1 : 16
of sound to vrms is 25. The intensity level of a sound wave is 4dB. If the
(a) 1 : 2 (b) 1 : 2 intensity of the wave is doubled, then the intensity
level of the sound, as expressed in dB, would be:
(c) 1: 3 (d) 1 : 3 (a) 8 (b) 16
17. Under the same conditions of pressure and (c) 7 (d) 14
temperature, the velocity of sound in oxygen and 26. Two sound waves of the same frequency have
hydrogen gases are v0 and vH then: respective amplitudes of 3 units and 1 unit and are
(a) vH = 2v0 (b) vH = 4v0 travelling in opposite directions in the same straight
(c) v0 = 4vH (d) vH = v0 line. At a particular place in that line, the resultant
18. If the temperature of the gaseous medium drops by 1%, wave will vary in loudness. The ratio of maximum
the velocity of sound in that medium: loudness to minimum loudness is:
(a) increase by 5% (b) remains unchanged (a) 9/1 (b) 6/1
(c) decreases by 0.5% (d) decreases by 2% (c) 9/2 (d) 2/1
19. The velocity of sound through a diatomic gaseous 27. A sound absorber attenuates the sound level by 20 dB.
medium of molecular weight M at 0°C: The intensity decreases by a factor of
(a) 100 (b) 1000
R 3R
(a) (b) (c) 10000 (d) 10
M M
382 R 273 R
(c) (d)
M M
@cbseinfinite
WAVES 180
2
28. Two sounds waves have intensities 100W/m and 33. A string fixed at both ends is vibrating in the lowest
2
400W/m respectively. The later sound is mode of vibration for which a point at quarter of its
(a) 6 decibel louder than the other length from one end is a point of maximum
(b) 4 decibel louder than the other displacement. The frequency of vibration in this mode
(c) 0.6 decibel louder than the other is 100 Hz. What will be the frequency emitted when it
(d) data is not sufficient vibrates in the next mode such that this point is again a
29. The power of a sound from the speaker of a radio is point of maximum displacement?
20 mW. By turning the knob of the volume control, the (a) 400 Hz (b) 200 Hz
power of the sound is increased to 400 mW. The power (c) 600 Hz (d) 300 Hz
increase in decibels as compared to the original power 34. A string is stretched between fixed points separated by
is 75 cm. It is observed to have resonant frequencies of
(a) 13.0 dB (b) 10 dB 420 Hz and 315 Hz. There are no other resonant
(c) 20 dB (d) 8000 dB frequencies between these two. Then, the lowest
30. A wave is incident on fixed target as resonant frequency for this string is
 x (a) 10.5 Hz (b) 105 Hz
= y 5sin 2π  t −  , the equation of reflected wave (c) 1.05 Hz (d) 1050 Hz
 2
35. Two stretched strings of same material are vibrating
through rigid target
under the same tension in fundamental mode. The ratio
 x  x
(a) y = –5 sin 2π  t +  (b) y = +5 sin 2π  t +  of their frequencies is 1 : 2 and ratio of the length of
 2  2 the vibrating segments is 1 : 4. Then the ratio of the
 x  x radii of the strings is :
(c) y = +5 sin 2π  t −  (d) y = –5 sin 2π  t − 
 2   2 (a) 2 : 1 (b) 4 : 1
31. Two loudspeakers A and B, 1.0 m apart, produce sound (c) 3 : 2 (d) 8 : 1
waves of the same wavelength and in the same phase. 36. A string of length 1 m has the mass per unit length
–1
A sensitive sound detector, moving along PQ, parallel 0.1 g cm . What would be the fundamental frequency
to line AB, 2.4 m away, detects maximum sound at P of vibrating of this string under tension of 400 N?
(on the perpendicular bisector of AB) and another (a) 400 Hz (b) 100 Hz
maximum sound when it first reaches Q directly (c) 50 Hz (d) 200 Hz
opposite to B, as shown in Figure. What is the 37. Four wires of identical length, diameters and of the
wavelength of sound emitted by the speakers? same material are stretched on a sonometer wire. If the
ratio of their tensions is 1 : 4 : 9 : 16, then the ratio of
their fundamental frequencies are :
(a) 16 : 9 : 4 : 1 (b) 4 : 3 : 2 : 1
(c) 1 : 4 : 2 : 16 (d) 1 : 2 : 3 : 4
38. The fundamental frequency of sonometer wire is
600 Hz when length of wire is short by 25%. Now
st
(a) 0.1 m (b) 0.2 m frequency of 1 overtone will be
(c) 0.3 m (d) 0.4 m (a) 800 Hz (b) 1200 Hz
32. Two waves are passing through a region in the same (c) 1600 Hz (d) 2000 Hz
direction at the same time. If the equation of these 39. The length of sonometer wire is 1.8 m. What is
waves are: wavelength of wave when number of nodes are 10
2π (a) 20 cm (b) 36 cm
=y1 a sin ( vt − x ) (c) 40 cm (d) 72 cm
λ
40. The total length of a sonometer wire between fixed
2π
=y2 b sin ( vt − x ) + x0  ends is 110 cm. Two bridges are placed to divide the
λ  length of wire in ratio 6 : 3 : 2. The tension in the wire
λ
then the amplitude of the resultant wave for x0 = , is 400 N and the mass per unit length is 0.01 kg/m.
2 What is the minimum common frequency with which
is: three parts can vibrate?
(a) | a – b | (b) (a + b)
(a) 1100 Hz (b) 100 Hz
(c) zero (d) a 2 + b2 (c) 166 Hz (d) 1000 Hz
@cbseinfinite
WAVES 181
41. Figure shows a stationary wave between two fixed 49. A pipe of length 20 cm is open at both ends. Which
point P and Q. Which point(s) of 1,2 and 3 are in phase harmonic mode of the pipe is resonantly excited by a
–1
with the point X? 1700 Hz source? The speed of sound = 340 ms .
(a) First harmonic (b) Second harmonic
(c) Third harmonic (d) Fourth harmonic
(a) 1, 2 and 3 (b) 1 and 2 only 50. A knife–edge divides a sonometer wire into two parts.
(c) 2 and 3 only (d) 3 only The fundamental frequencies of the two parts are f1 and
42. Particle displacements (in cm) in a standing wave are
f2. The fundamental frequency of the sonometer wire
given by y (x, t) = 2 sin (0.1 π x) cos (100 π t).
when the knife–edge is removed will be
The distance between a node and the next anti–node is
1
(a) 2.5 cm (b) 5.0 cm (a) f1 + f2 (b) ( f1 + f 2 )
2
(c) 7.5 cm (d) 10.0 cm
43. Two parts of a sonometer wire, divided by a movable f f
(c) f1 f 2 (d) 1 2
knife–edge, differ in length by 1 cm and produce 1 beat f1 + f 2
per second when sounded together. If the total length 51. A tube closed at one end containing air, produces,
of the wire is 100 cm, the frequencies of the two parts when excited, the fundamental note of frequency
of the wire are 512 Hz. If the tube is open at both ends, the
(a) 51 Hz, 50 Hz (b) 50.5 Hz, 49.5 Hz fundamental frequency that can be excited is (in Hz)
(c) 49 Hz, 48 Hz (d) 49.5 Hz, 48.5 Hz (a) 1024 (b) 512
44. An organ pipe closed at one end is excited to support (c) 256 (d) 128
the third overtone. It is found that air in the pipe has 52. An organ pipe P1, closed at one end vibrating in its first
(a) 3 nodes and 3 antinodes harmonic and another pipe P2, open at both ends
(b) 3 nodes and 4 antinodes vibrating in its third harmonic, are in resonance with a
(c) 4 nodes and 3 antinodes given tuning fork. The ratio of the lengths of P1 and P2
(d) 4 nodes and 4 antinodes
is
45. Two organ pipes A and B are closed and open
8 1
respectively. Third overtone of each are unison. The (a) (b)
ratio of their length is 3 6
(a) 8/7 (b) 7/8 1 1
(c) (d)
(c) 7/4 (d) 4/7 2 3
46. The fundamental frequency of open organ pipe is f 53. Two closed pipes produce 10 beats/s when emitting
when it filled with one–fourth length with water now their fundamental nodes. If their length are in ratio of
frequency will be 25 : 26. Then their fundamental frequency in Hz, are :
f (a) 270, 280 (b) 260, 270
(a) f (b)
3 (c) 260, 250 (d) 260, 280
2f 4f 54. When two tuning forks A and B are sounded together,
(c) (d) x beats/sec are heard. Frequency of A is n. Now, when
3 3
one prong of fork B is loaded with a little wax, the
47. Two organ pipes, each closed at one end, give 5 beats
number of beats decreases. The frequency of fork B is:
per second when emitting their fundamental notes. If
(a) n + x (b) n – x
their lengths are in the ratio of 50:51, their fundamental
(c) n + 2x (d) n – 2x
frequencies (in Hz) are
55. A tuning fork of frequency 100 when sound together
(a) 250, 255 (b) 255, 260
with another tuning fork of unknown frequency
(c) 260, 265 (d) 265, 270
produces 2 beats/s. On loading the tuning fork whose
48. Standing waves are produced by the superposition of
frequency is not known and sounded together with the
two waves y1 = 0.05 sin (3t – 2x) and
same tuning fork produces one beat, then the frequency
y2 = 0.05 sin (3t + 2x) where x and y are expressed in of the unknown tuning fork is:
metres and t is in seconds. What is the amplitude of a (a) 102 (b) 98
0
particle at x = 0.5 m. Given cos (57.3 ) = 0.54 (c) 99 (d) 101
(a) 2.7 cm (b) 5.4 cm
(c) 8.1 cm (d) 10.8 cm
@cbseinfinite
WAVES 182
56. An organ pipe, open from both ends produces 5 beats/s 62. A motorcycle starts from rest and accelerates along a
2
when vibrated with a source of frequency 200 Hz in its straight line at 2.2 m/s . At the starting point of the
fundamental mode. The second harmonic of the same motorcycle, there is a stationary electric siren. How far
pipe produces 10 beats/s with a source of frequency has the motorcycle gone when the driver hears the
420 Hz. The fundamental frequency of pipe is: frequency of the siren at 90% of its value when the
(a) 195 Hz (b) 205 Hz motorcycle was at rest?
(c) 190 Hz (d) 210 Hz (Speed of sound in air = 330 ms-1)
57. A metal wire of diameter 1 mm is held on two knife (a) 123.75 m (b) 247.5 m
edges separated by a distance of 50 cm. The tension in (c) 495 m (d) 990 m
the wire is 100 N. The wire vibrating with its 63. A whistle emitting a sound of frequency 440 Hz is tied
fundamental frequency and a vibrating tuning fork to a string of 1.5 m length and rotated with an angular
together produce 5 beats per second. The tension in the velocity of 20 rad/s in the horizontal plane. Then the
wire is then reduced to 81 N. When the two are excited, range of frequencies heard by an observer stationed at
beats are heard at the same rate. What is the frequency a large distance from the whistle will be (Speed of
of the fork? sound v = 330 m/s)
(a) 90 Hz (b) 95 Hz (a) 400.0 Hz to 484.0 Hz (b) 403.3 Hz to 480.0 Hz
(c) 100 Hz (d) 105 Hz (c) 400.0 Hz to 480.0 Hz (d) 403.3 Hz to 484.0 Hz
58. A closed organ pipe and an open organ pipe of same 64. A car sounding its horn at 480 Hz moves towards a
length produce 2 beats when they are set into vibrations high wall at a speed of 20 m/s. If the speed of sound is
simultaneously in their fundamental mode. The length –1
340 m/s , the frequency of the reflected sound heard
of open organ pipe is now halved and of closed organ by the man sitting in the car will be nearest to
pipe is doubled. The number of beats produced will be: (a) 480 Hz (b) 510 Hz
(a) 8 (b) 7 (c) 540 Hz (d) 570 Hz
(c) 4 (d) 2
59. A train standing at a certain distance from a railway Objective Questions II
platform is blowing a whistle of frequency 500 Hz. If [One or more than one correct option]
the speed of sound is 340 ms-1, the frequency and 65. A bat flying above a lake emits ultrasonic sound of
wavelength of the sound of the whistle heard by a man 100 kHz. When this wave falls on the water surface, it
running towards the engine with a speed of 10 ms-1 is partly reflected and partly transmitted. The speed of
respectively are –1
sound in air is 340 ms and in water 1450m/s, Then:
(a) 500 Hz, 0.7 m (b) 500 Hz, 0.68 m (a) wavelength of sound in air is 6.8 mm
(c) 486 Hz, 0.7 m (d) 515 Hz, 0.68 m (b) wavelength of sound in air is 3.4 mm
60. In the above question a wind starts blowing in the (c) wavelength of sound in water is 14.5 mm
direction from the engine to the platform with a speed (d) wavelength of sound in water is 1.45 mm
of 10 ms-1. The frequency and wavelength of the sound π
of the whistle heard by a man standing at the platform 66. When two sound waves with a phase difference of,
2
will be
and each having amplitude A and frequency ω, are
(a) 500 Hz, 0.68 m (b) 500 Hz, 0.7m
superimposed on each other, Then:
(c) 486 Hz, 0.7 m (d) 515 Hz, 0.68 m
A
61. A train blowing its whistle moves with a constant (a) the maximum amplitude is
velocity u away from the observer on the ground. The 2
ratio of the actual frequency of the whistle to that (b) frequency of resultant wave is ω
measured by the observer is found to be 1.2. If the train (c) the maximum amplitude is 2A
is at rest and the observer moves away from it at the
ω
same velocity, the ratio would be given by (d) frequency of resultant wave is
(a) 0.51 (b) 1.25 2
(c) 1.52 (d) 2.05
@cbseinfinite
WAVES 183
67. The length of a sonometer wire AB is 110 cm. Where 72. A wave moves at a constant speed along a stretched
should the two bridges be placed from A, to divide the string. Mark the incorrect statement out of the
wire in 3 segments whose fundamental frequencies are following:
in the ratio of 1 : 2 : 3? (a) Particle speed is constant and equal to the wave
(a) 30 cm (b) 60 cm speed.
(c) 90 cm (d) 80 cm (b) Particle speed is independent of amplitude of the
68. A tuning fork of frequency 340 Hz is sounded above a periodic motion of the source.
cylindrical tube 1 m high. Water is slowly poured into (c) Particle speed is independent of frequency of
–1
the tube. If the speed of sound is 340 ms , at what periodic motion of the source.
levels of water in the tube will the sound of the fork be (d) Particle speed is dependent on tension and linear
appreciably intensified? mass density the string.
(a) 25 cm (b) 75cm 73. An observer A is moving directly towards a stationary
(c) 20cm (d) 100cm sound source while another observer B is moving away
69. Two whistles A and B have frequencies 660 Hz and from the source with the same velocity. Which of the
590 Hz respectively. An observer is standing in the following statements are correct?
middle of line joining the two sources. Source B and (a) Average of frequencies recorded by A and B is
observer are moving towards right with velocity 30 m/s equal to natural frequency of the source.
and A is standing to the left side. If the velocity of (b) Wavelength of wave received by A is less than that
sound in air is 300 m/s. Then: of waves received by B.
(a) beat frequency is 6Hz (c) Wavelength of waves received by two observers
(b) beat frequency is 4Hz will be same.
(c) apparent wavelength for B is 0.45 (d) Both the observers will observe the wave travelling
(d) apparent wavelength for B is 45m with same speed.
70. A wave equation which gives the displacement along
Y-direction is given by
=y 10−4 [sin (60t + 20 x)] 74. A string has a mass 10 g and a length L = 3 m. Its two
ends are tied to two walls at a distance D = 2 m apart.
where x and y are in metres and t is time in seconds.
Two blocks of mass M = 2 kg each are suspended from
This represents a wave
the string as shown in figure. In what time in
(a) travelling with a velocity of 30 m/s in the negative
milliseconds will a wave pulse sent from a point A,
x-direction
reach point B?
(b) of wavelength π metres
3g
(c) of frequency 30/π Hertz (given: = 3)
–4
(d) of amplitude 10 m travelling along the negative x- 2 2
D
direction.
71. For a transverse wave on a string, the string L/4 L/4
displacement is described by L/2
y = (x, t) = f(x – at) A B
where f represents a function and a is a negative
constant. Then which of the following is/are correct
statement(s)? M M
(a) Shape of the string at time t = 0 is given by f(x)
(b) The shape of wave form does not change as it
moves along the string
(c) Wave form moves in +ve x-direction
(d) The speed of waveform is a
@cbseinfinite
WAVES 184
75. Two narrow cylindrical pipes A and B have the same 83. A tuning fork of frequency 480 Hz produces 10 beat/s,
length. Pipe A is open at both ends and is filled with a when sounded with a vibrating sonometer string. What
monoatomic gas of molar mass MA. Pipe B is open at must be frequency (in Hz) of the string, if a slight
one end and closed at the other end, and is filled with increase in tension produces more beats per sec, then
a diatomic gas of molar mass MB. Both gases are at the before?
same temperature. If the frequency of the second
harmonic of the fundamental mode in pipe A is equal Assertion & Reason
to the frequency of the third harmonic of the
(A) If both Assertion and Reason are true and reason
MA is the correct explanation of the assertion.
fundamental mode in pipe B, if the value of is
MB (B) If both Assertion and Reason are true but reason
100n is not the correct explanation of the assertion.
, find the value of n. (C) If Assertion is true but Reason is false.
63 (D) If both Assertion and Reason are false.
76. A “pop” gun consists of a tube 25 cm long closed at
one end by a cork and at the other end by a tightly fitted 84. Assertion: Both transverse and longitudinal
mechanical waves can propagate in solids but only
piston. The piston is pushed slowly in. When the
longitudinal mechanical waves can propagate in gases.
pressure rises to one and half times the atmospheric Reason: Gases cannot withstand a shearing stress;
pressure, the cork is violently blown out. Calculate the hence they have only bulk modulus. Choose the correct
frequency of the “pop” caused by its ejection. statement from the following.
(v = 340 m/s) (a) A (b) B
77. A weight is attached to the free end of a sonometer (c) C (d) D
wire. It gives resonance at a length 40 cm when it is in 85. Assertion: Compression and rarefaction involve
resonance with a tuning fork of frequency 512 Hz. The changes in density and pressure.
weight is then immersed wholly in water, the resonant Reason: When particles are compressed, density of
length is reduced to 30 cm. The relative density in medium increases and when they are rarefied, density
16 of medium decreases.
which weight suspended is , find the value of n
n (a) A (b) B
78. Two tuning forks A and B produce 10 beats per second (c) C (d) D
when sounded together. On slightly loading fork A 86. Assertion: The phase difference between two medium
with a little wax, it was observed that 15 beats are particles having a path difference λ is 2 π .
heard per second. If the frequency of fork B is 480 Hz, Reason: The phase difference is directly proportional
what is the frequency (in Hz) of fork A before it was to path difference of a particle.
loaded? (a) A (b) B
79. Nine tuning forks are arranged in order of increasing (c) C (d) D
frequency. Each tuning fork produces 4 beats per 87. Assertion: Sound would travel faster on a hot summer
day than on a cold winter day.
second when sounded with either of its neighbours. If
Reason: Velocity of sound is directly proportional to
the frequency of the 9th tuning fork is twice that of the the square of its absolute temperature.
first, what is the frequency (in Hz) of the first tuning (a) A (b) B
fork? (c) C (d) D
80. A tuning fork produces 4 beats per second when 88. Assertion: Where two vibrating tuning forks having
sounded with a sonometer of vibrating length 48 cm. It frequencies 256 Hz and 512 Hz are held near each
produces 4 beats per second also when the vibrating other, beats cannot be heard.
length is 50 cm. What is the frequency (in Hz) of the Reason: The principle of superposition is valid only if
tuning fork? the frequencies of the oscillators are nearly equal.
81. λ1 = 100 cm, λ2 = 99 cm and velocity of sound (a) A (b) B
= 396 m/s. The number of beats (in Hz) is: (c) C (d) D
82. Following two wave trains are approaching each
other:
y1 = a sin 2000 πt
y2 = a sin 2008 πt
The number of beats (in Hz) heard per second is:
@cbseinfinite
WAVES 185
Match the Following 94. What is the velocity of this particle at this instant?
(a) 10 2 π cm / s (b) 40 2 π cm /s
Column-II. Only one of these four options corresponds to (c) 30 2 π cm / s (d) 20 2 π cm / s
a correct matching. For each question, choose the option
corresponding to the correct matching. Use the following passage, solve Q. 95 to Q. 97
89. Match the column Passage – 2
Column–I Column–II A train approaching a hill at a speed of 40 km/hr sounds a
(a) Wave in solids (p) Transverse only whistle of frequency 580 Hz when it is at a distance of 1 km
(b) Electromagnetic (q) Can be transverse from the hill. A wind with a speed of 40 km/hr is blowing in
waves or longitudinal the direction of motion of train.
(c) Longitudinal (r) Require a medium Velocity of sound = 1200 km/hr.
waves to propagate 95. Find the frequency of the whistle as heard by an
(d) Pressure waves (s) Elastic parameters observer on the hill
dependent (a) 599.33 Hz (b) 590.33 Hz
90. Match the column: (c) 582.30 Hz (d) 370.22 Hz
For the travelling wave 96. What is the distance from the hill at which the echo
y = 0.02 sin 2π (10t – 5x), (all in SI units) from the hill is heard by the driver?
Column–I Column–II 15 20
(a) Speed of wave (p) 10 (a) km (b) km
16 31
(b) Frequency of (q) 0.4 π
17 29
wave (c) km (d) km
(c) Wavelength of (r) 2 18 30
wave 97. What is the frequency heard by the driver?
(a) 620 Hz (b) 630 Hz
(d) Maximum particle (s) 0.2
(c) 650 Hz (d) 640 Hz
speed
Use the following passage, solve Q. 98 to Q. 100
Paragraph Type Questions Passage – 3
Use the following passage, solve Q. 91 to Q. 94 RADAR is the acronym of radio detection and ranging.
Passage – 1
A radar detects an enemy aircraft by the use of radio-waves
A long string having a cross-sectional area 0.80 mm2 and which are received after reflection. In analogy with plane
density 12.5 g/cm3 is subjected to a tension of 64 N along the mirror reflection, one can take the reflected wave to be
x-axis. One end (at x = 0) of this string is attached to a vibrator coming from a virtual source. If the reflector is moving with
moving in transverse direction at a frequency of 20 Hz. a speed u, the speed of source relative the receiver can be 2u.
At, t = 0, the source is at a maximum displacement y = 1.0cm. Even when this kind of motion exist with the source and to
91. Find the speed of the wave travelling on the string. the receiver, Doppler’s effect can be applied. According to
(a) 20 m/s (b) 10 m/s Doppler’s effect as a source and an observer are approaching
(c) 80 m/s (d) 40 m/s each other, the apparent frequency f’, of a signal of frequency
92. Write the equation for the wave. f is,
(a) y = (1.0 cm) cos [(40 πs ) t – {(π/2m ) x}]
–1 –1
 v + v0 
(b) y = (1.0 cm) cos [(40 πs ) t + {(π/2m ) x}]
–1 –1 f '= f  
 v − vs 
(c) y = (1.0 cm) cos [(40 πs ) t – {(π/4m ) x}]
–1 –1
Using the elaborated idea solve the following questions:
(d) y = (1.0 cm) cos [(40 πs )t + {(π/4m )x}]
–1 –1
98. If an aircraft is approaching a given radar with a speed
93. What is the displacement of the particle of the string at u, the apparent frequency of f, received by the radar
x = 50 cm at time t = 0.05 s? will be [v – velocity of electromagnetic wave]
(a)
1
cm (b) 2cm  v   v 
(a) f   (b) f  
2  v −u   v −u 
3 2  v   v 
(c) cm (d) cm (c) f   (d) f  
2 3 v+u   v − 2u 
@cbseinfinite
WAVES 186
99. The apparent decrease in frequency, if the air-craft

moves away is
2u u
(a) f (b) f
v v
u 2uf
(c) f (d)
2v v + 2u
100. In a detective system, the apparent frequency found
with the source moving with a speed u = 0.8v is f1 and
the source being at rest and the RADAR moving with
u = 0.9v is f2, then
(a) f1 = f2 (b) f1 > f2
8
(c) f1 < f2 (d) f 2 = f1
9
@cbseinfinite
WAVES 187

1. A sonometer wire resonates with a given tuning fork 5. A closed organ pipe of length L and an open organ pipe
forming standing waves with five antinodes between contain gases of densities ρ1 and ρ2 respectively. The
the two bridges when a mass of 9 kg is suspended from compressibility of gases are equal in both the pipes.
the wire. When this mass is replaced by mass M. The Both the pipes are vibrating in their first overtone with
wire resonates with the same tuning fork forming three same frequency. The length of the open organ pipe is
antinodes for the same positions of the bridges. The [2004]
value of M is: [2002] L 4L
(a) 25 kg (b) 5 kg (a) (b)
3 3
(c) 12.5 kg (d) 1/25 kg
2. In the experiment for the determination of the speed of 4 L ρ1 4 L ρ2
(c) (d)
sound in air using the resonance column method, the 3 ρ2 3 ρ1
length of the air column that resonates in the 6. An open pipe is in resonance in 2nd harmonic with
fundamental mode, with a tuning fork is 0.1 m. When frequency f1. Now one end of the tube is closed and
this length is changed to 0.35 m, the same tuning fork frequency is increased to f2 such that the resonance
resonates with the first overtone. Calculate the end
again occurs in nth harmonic. Choose the correct
correction. [2003]
option. [2005]
(a) 0.012 m (b) 0.025 m
3 5
(c) 0.05 m (d) 0.024 m =
(a) n 3,= f2 f1 =
(b) n 3,= f2 f1
3. A police car moving at 22 m/s chases a motorcyclist. 4 4
The police man sounds his horn at 176 Hz, while both 5 3
=
(c) n 5,= f2 f1 =
(d) n 5,= f2 f1
of them move towards a stationary siren of frequency 4 4
165 Hz. Calculate the speed of the motorcycle. If it is 7. A tuning fork of 512 Hz is used to produce resonance
given that the motorcyclist does not observe any beats in a resonance tube experiment. The level of water at
(speed of sound = 330 m/s) [2004] first resonance is 30.7 cm and at second resonance is
63.2 cm. The error in calculating velocity of sound is:
[2005]
(a) 204.1 cm/s (b) 110 cm/s
(c) 58 cm/s (d) 280 cm/s
8. A massless rod BD is suspended by two identical
massless strings AB and CD of equal lengths. A block
(a) 33 m/s (b) 22 m/s of mass m is suspended from point P such that BP is
(c) zero (d) 11 m/s equal to x. If the fundamental frequency of the left wire
4. A source of sound of frequency 600 Hz is placed inside is twice the fundamental frequency of right wire, then
water. The speed of sound in water is 1500 m/s and in the value of x is: [2006]
air it is 300 m/s. The frequency of sound recorded by
an observer who is standing in air is [2004]
(a) 200 Hz (b) 3000 Hz
(c) 120 Hz (d) 600 Hz
(a) l/5 (b) l/4

(c) 4l/5 (d) 3l/4
@cbseinfinite
WAVES 188
Paragraph Type Questions 13. The distribution of the sound intensity of the whistle as
Use the following passage, solve Q. 9 to Q. 11 observed by the passengers in train A is best
Passage - 1 represented by [2007]
Two plane harmonic sound waves are expressed by the (a)
equations.
y1 (x, t) = A cos (0.5 πx – 100 πt)
y2 (x, t) = A cos (0.46 πx – 92 πt)
(All parameters are in MKS)
9. How many times does an observer hear maximum
intensity in one second? [2006]
(a) 4 (b) 10 f1 f2 Frequency
(c) 6 (d) 8 (b)
10. What is the speed of the sound? [2006]
(a) 200 m/s (b) 180 m/s
(c) 192 m/s (d) 96 m/s
11. At x = 0 how many times the amplitude of y1 + y2 is
zero in one second? [2006]
(a) 192 (b) 48 f1 f2 Frequency
(c) 100 (d) 96
(c)
Paragraph Type Questions
Passage - 2
Two trains A and B are moving with speeds 20 m/s and
30 m/s respectively in the same direction on the same straight
track, with B ahead of A. The engines are at the front ends.
f1 f2 Frequency
The engine of train A blows a long whistle.
(d)
f1 f2 Frequency
f1 f2 Frequency
Assume that the sound of the whistle is composed of
components varying in frequency from f1 = 800 Hz to 14. The spread of frequency as observed by the passengers
f2 = 1120 Hz, as shown in the figure. The spread in the in train B is [2007]
(a) 310 Hz (b) 330 Hz
frequency (highest frequency–lowest frequency) is thus
(c) 350 Hz (d) 290 Hz
320 Hz. The speed of sound in air is 340 m/s.
12. The speed of sound of the whistle is [2007]
(a) 340 m/s for passengers in A and 310 m/s for
passengers in B
(b) 360 m/s for passengers in A and 310 m/s for
passengers in B
(c) 310 m/s for passengers in A and 360 m/s for
passengers in B
(d) 340 m/s for passengers in both the trains
@cbseinfinite
WAVES 189
15. A transverse sinusoidal wave moves along a string in 18. A 20 cm long string, having a mass of 1.0 g, is fixed at
the positive x–direction at a speed of 10 cm/s. The both the ends. The tension in the string is 0.5 N. The
wavelength of the wave is 0.5 m and its amplitude is string is set into vibration using an external vibrator of
10 cm. At a particular time t, the snap-shot of the wave frequency 100 Hz. Find the separation (in cm) between
is shown in figure. The velocity of point P when its the successive nodes on the string. [2009]
displacement is 5 cm is: [2008] 19. A stationary source is emitting sound at a fixed
frequency f0, which is reflected by two cars
approaching the source. The difference between the
frequencies of sound reflected from the cars is 1.2% of
f0. What is the difference in the speeds of the cars (in
km per hour) to the nearest integer? The cars are
moving at constant speeds much smaller than the speed
–1
of sound which is 330 ms . [2009]
3π ˆ 3π ˆ 20. When two progressive waves y1 = 4 sin (2x – 6t) and
(a) jm/ s (b) − jm/ s
50 50  π
y2 = 3 sin  2 x − 6t −  are superimposed, the
3π ˆ 3π ˆ  2
(c) i m/s (d) − i m/s
50 50 amplitude of the resultant wave is [2010]
16. A vibrating string of certain length l under a tension T 21. A hollow pipe of length 0.8 m is closed at one end. At
resonates with a mode corresponding to the first its open end a 0.5 m long uniform string is vibrating in
overtone (third harmonic) of an air column of length its second harmonic and it resonates with the
75 cm inside a tube closed at one end. The string also fundamental frequency of the pipe. If the tension in the
–1
generates 4 beats/s when excited along with a tuning wire is 50 N and the speed of sound is 320 ms , the
fork of frequency n. Now when the tension of the string mass of the string is: [2010]
is slightly increased the number of beats reduces to (a) 5 g (b) 10 g
2 per second. Assuming the velocity of sound in air to (c) 20 g (d) 40
be 340 m/s, the frequency n of the tuning fork in Hz is: 22. A police car with a siren of frequency 8 kHz is moving
[2008] with uniform velocity 36 km/h towards a tall building
(a) 344 (b) 336 which reflects the sound waves. The speed of sound in
(c) 117.3 (d) 109.3 air is 320 m/s. The frequency of the siren heard by the
17. A student performed the experiment to measure the car driver is [2011]
speed of sound in air using resonance air-column (a) 8.50 kHz (b) 8.25 kHz
method. Two resonances in the air-column were (c) 7.75 kHz (d) 7.50 kHz
obtained by lowering the water level. The resonance
with the shorter air-column is the first resonance and
that with the longer air column is the second resonance.
Then, [2009]
(e) the intensity of the sound heard at the first
resonance was more than that at the second
resonance
(f) the prongs of the tuning fork were kept in a
horizontal plane above the resonance tube
(g) the amplitude of vibration of the ends of the prongs
is typically around 1 cm
(h) the length of the air–column at the first resonance
was somewhat shorter than l/4th of the wavelength
of the sound in air
@cbseinfinite
WAVES 190
23. Column-I show four systems, each of the same length 26. A student is performing an experiment using a
L, for producing standing waves. The lowest possible resonance column and a tuning fork of frequency
natural frequency of a system is called its fundamental 244 s-1. He is told that the air in the tube has been
frequency, whose wavelength is denoted as λf Match replaced by another gas (assume that the column
each system with statements given in Column-II remains filled with the gas). If the minimum height at
describing the nature and wavelength of the standing which resonance occurs is (0.350 ± 0.005) m, the gas
waves. [2011] in the tube is
Column-I Column-II (Useful information: 167 RT = 640 J 1/ 2 mole −1/ 2 ;
(A) Pipe closed at one end (p) Longitudinal 140 RT = 590 J 1/ 2 mole −1/ 2 . The molar masses M in
waves grams are given in the options. Take the values of
10
O L for each gas as given there.) [2014]
M
(B) Pipe open at both ends (q) Transverse
10 7
waves (a) Neon (M = 20, = )
20 10
10 3
O L (b) Nitrogen (M = 28, = )
(C) Stretched wire (r) λf = L 28 5
clamped at both ends 10 9
(c) Oxygen (M = 32, = )
32 16
O L 10 17
(d) Argon (M = 36, = )
(D) Stretched wire (s) λf = 2L 36 32
clamped at both ends 27. One end of a taut string of length 3m along the x axis
and at mid-point is fixed at x = 0. The speed of the waves in the string
is 100 ms-1. The other end of the string is vibrating in
the y direction so that stationary waves are set up in the
O L
string. The possible waveform (s) of these stationary
L/2
waves is (are) [2014]
(t) λf = 4L
πx 50π t
24. A student is performing the experiment of resonance (a) y (t) = A sin cos
6 3
column. The diameter of the column tube is 4 cm. The
πx 100π t
frequency of the tuning fork is 512 Hz. The air (b) y (t) = A sin cos
temperature is 38°C in which the speed of sound is 3 3
336 m/s. The zero of the meter scale coincides with the 5π x 250π t
(c) y (t) = A sin cos
top end of the resonance column tube. When the first 6 3
resonance occurs, the reading of the water level in the 5π x
(d) y (t) = A sin cos 250π t
column is [2012] 2
(a) 14.0 cm (b) 15.2 cm 28. A container of fixed volume has a mixture of one mole
(c) 16.4 cm (d) 17.6 cm of hydrogen and one mole of helium in equilibrium at
25. A person blows into open-end of a long pipe. As a temperature T. Assuming the gases are ideal, the
result, a high-pressure pulse of air travels down the correct statement (s) is (are) [2015]
pipe. When this pulse reaches the other end of the pipe, (a) The average energy per mole of the gas mixture is
[2012] 2RT
(a) a high-pressure pulse starts travelling up the pipe, (b) The ratio of speed of sound in the gas mixture to
if the other end of the pipe is open. that in helium gas is 6 / 5
(b) a low-pressure pulse starts travelling up the pipe, if (c) The ratio of the rms speed of helium atoms to that
the other end of the pipe is open 1
(c) a low-pressure pulse starts travelling up the pipe, if of hydrogen molecules is
2
the other end of the pipe is closed (d) The ratio of the rms speed of helium atoms to that
(d) a high-pressure pulse starts travelling up the pipe, 1
if the other end of the pipe is closed. of hydrogen molecules is
2
@cbseinfinite
WAVES 191
29. Four harmonic waves of equal frequencies and equal 32. A train S1, moving with a uniform velocity of 108
π 2π km/h, approaches another train S2 standing on a
intensities I0 have phases angles 0, and π .
3 3 platform. An observer O moves with a uniform
When they are superposed, the intensity of the velocity of 36 km/h towards S2, as shown in figure.
resulting wave is nI0 .The value of n is. [2015] Both the trains are blowing whistles of same frequency
120 Hz. When O is 600 m away from S2 and distance
30. Two loudspeakers M and N are located 20 m apart and
between S1 and S2 is 800 m, the number of beats heard
emit sound at frequencies 118 Hz and 121 Hz,
by O is ……… (Speed of the sound = 330) [2019]
respectively. A car is initially at a point P, 1800 m
away from the midpoint Q of the line MN and moves
towards Q constantly at 60 km/hr along the
perpendicular bisector of MN. It crosses Q and
eventually reaches a point R, 1800 m away from Q. Let
v(t) represent the beat frequency measured by a person
sitting in the car at time t. Let fP, fQ and fR be the beat
frequencies measured at locations P, Q and R,
respectively. The speed of sound in air is 330 ms-1.
33. A musical instrument is made using four different
Which of the following statement(s) is(are) true
metal strings 1, 2, 3 and 4 with mass per unit length
regarding the sound heard by the person? [2016]
µ , 2 µ ,3µ and 4 µ respectively. The instrument is
(a) The plot below represents schematically the
variation of beat frequency with time played by vibrating the strings by varying the free
length in between the range L0 and 2L0. It is found that
in string 1( µ ) at free length L0 and tension T0 the
fundamental mode frequency is f0. [2019]
List-I List-II
(I) String-1 ( µ ) (P) 1
(b) The plot below represents schematically the (II) String-2 (2 µ ) (Q) 1
variation of beat frequency with time 2
(III) String-3 (2 µ ) (R) 1
2
(IV) String-4 (4 µ ) (S) 1
3
(T) 3
16
(c) The rate of change in beat frequency is maximum (U) 1
when the car passes through Q
16
(d) fP + fR = 2 fQ
31. Two men are walking along a horizontal straight line The length of the strings 1, 2, 3 and 4 are kept fixed at
in the same direction. The man in front walks at a speed 3L 5 L 7L
L0, 0 , 0 and 0 , respectively. Strings 1, 2, 3 and
1.0 ms-1 and the man behind walks at a speed 2.0 ms-1. 2 4 4
A third man is standing at a height 12 m above the 4 are vibrated at their 1st, 3rd, 5th and 14th harmonics,
same horizontal line such that all three men are in a respectively such that all the strings have same
vertical plane. The two walking men are blowing frequency. The correct match for the tension in the four
identical whistles which emit a sound of frequency strings in the units of T0 will be:
1430 Hz. The speed of sound in air is 330 ms-1. At the (a) I → P, II → R, III → T, IV → U
instant, when the moving men are 10 m apart, the (b) I → P, II → Q, III → R, IV → T
stationary man is equidistant from them. The
(c) I → P, II → Q, III → T, IV → U
frequency of beats in Hz, heard by the stationary man
at this instant, is ……… [2018] (d) I → T, II → Q, III → R, IV → U
@cbseinfinite
WAVES 192
34. A stationary tuning fork is in resonance with an air 35. A source, approaching with speed u towards the open
column in a pipe. If the tuning fork is moved with a end of a stationary pipe of length L, is emitting a sound
speed of 2 ms-1 in front of the open end of the pipe and of frequency f s . The farther end of the pipe is closed.
parallel to it, the length of the pipe should be changed The speed of sound in air is v and f 0 is the fundamental
for the resonance to occur with the moving tuning fork.
frequency of the pipe. For which of the following
If the speed of sound in air is 320 ms-1, the smallest
combination(s) of u and f s will the sound reaching the
value of the percentage change required in the length
of the pipe is ………… [2020] pipe lead to a resonance? [2021]
(a) u=0.8 v and f s = f 0
(b) u=0.8 v and f s = 2 f 0
(c) u=0.8 v and f s = 0.5 f 0
(d) u=0.5 v and f s = 1.5 f 0
WAVES
@cbseinfinite
ANSWER KEY 193
Answer Key
CHAPTER -10 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF SOLIDS
BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

1. (d) 2. (c) 3. (b) 4. (a) 1. (b) 2. (d) 3. (b) 4. (c)

5. (c) 6. (b) 7. (c) 8. (c) 5. (a) 6. (a) 7. (a) 8. (a)
9. (a) 10. (b) 11. (c) 12. (d) 9. (c) 10. (c) 11. (c) 12. (b)
13. (a) 14. (1.00) 15. (100.00) 13. (a) 14. (d) 15. (c) 16. (d)
16. (160.00) 17. (1.00) 18. (0.50) 17. (a) 18. (d) 19. (2.00)
19. (9.00) 20. (9.00) 21. (5.00) 22. (b) 20. (32.00)
23. (b) 24. (d) 25. (c) 26. (c)
27. (a) 28. (c) 29. (a) 30. (8.00)
31. (0.32) 32. (0.10) 33. (d) 34. (a)
35. (b) 36. (d) 37. (c) 38. (b)
39. (a) 40. (d) 41. (5.00) 42. (6.00)
43. (20.00) 44. (d) 45. (c) 46. (d)
47. (c) 48. (d) 49. (b) 50. (8.76)
51. (5.00) 52. (1.25) 53. (2)
54. (34.64)55. (0.10)
@cbseinfinite
ANSWER KEY 194
CHAPTER -10 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF SOLIDS

ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTION ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTION

1. (b) 2. (d) 3. (c) 4. (c) 1. (a) 2. (c) 3. (a,b) 4. (2.00)
5. (a) 6. (c) 7. (b) 8. (a) 5. (2.4)
9. (c) 10. (b) 11. (c) 12. (a,d)

13. (a, d) 14. (a,d) 15. (a,b,d) 16. (a,b,c)
17. (a,c,d) 18. 2 19. 32.00 20. (a)
21. (a)
22. (A  Q,S);(B  P, R);(C  P, Q, R,S);(D  P, Q, R,S)
23. (d) 24. (a,c) 25. (b)
@cbseinfinite
ANSWER KEY 195
Answer Key
CHAPTER -11 FLUID MECHANICS
EXERCISE - 1 :
BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
DIRECTION TO USE -
1. (d) 2. (a) 3. (a) 4. (a) 81. (d) 82. (b) 83. (a) 84. (b)
5. (a) 6. (c) 7. (6.00) 8. (b) 85. (b) 86. (a) 87. (a) 88. (c)
89. (d) 90. (a) 91. (a) 92. (c)
9. (b) 10. (b) 11. (a) 12. (a)
93. (c) 94. (c) 95. (b) 96. (b)
13. (c) 14. (c) 15. (b) 16. (a)
97. (a) 98. (d) 99. (b) 100. (b)
17. (b) 18. (c) 19. (a) 20. (a)
101. (b) 102. (d) 103. (d) 104. (d)
21. (a) 22. (a) 23. (c) 24. (d)
25. (a) 26. (c) 27. (c) 28. (c) 105. (d)
29. (a) 30. (a) 31. (c) 32. (a)

33. (b) 34. (d) 35. (c) 36. (d)
37. (a) 38. (c) 39. (c) 40. (d)
41. (c) 42. (d) 43. (b) 44. (c)
45. (d) 46. (c) 47. (b) 48. (c)
49. (c) 50. (b) 51. (d) 52. (b)
53. (c) 54. (b) 55. (b) 56. (b)
57. (d) 58. (a) 59. (c) 60. (a)
61. (a) 62. (a) 63. (a) 64. (b)
65. (10.00) 66. (b) 67. (d) 68. (c)
69. (c) 70. (d) 71. (c) 72. (c)
73. (b) 74. (b) 75. (c) 76. (c)
77. (0.10) 78. (c) 79. (c) 80. (a)
@cbseinfinite
ANSWER KEY 196
ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTION ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTION

1. (a) 2. (b) 3. (b) 4. (a)

1. (b) 2. (d) 3. (a) 4. (b)
5. (c) 6. (b) 7. (a) 8. (b)
5. (b) 6. (d) 7. (c) 8. (b)
9. (b) 10. (b) 11. (a) 12. (c)
9. (a) 10. (b) 11. (a) 12. (b)
13. (c) 14. (c) 15. (d) 16. (c)
13. (5.00) 14. (a) 15. (c) 16. (c)
17. (c) 18. (b) 19. (a) 20. (d)
17. (c) 18. (d) 19. (101.00) 20. (d)
21. (d) 22. (a) 23. (c) 24. (b)
21. (b) 22. (a) 23. (b) 24. (b)
25. (b) 26. (a) 27. (b) 28. (d)
25. (a) 26. (a) 27. (c) 28. (a)
29. (b) 30. (d) 31. (d) 32. (a)
29. (d) 30. (c) 31. (c) 32. (b)
33. (b) 34. (a) 35. (a) 36. (d)
33. (a) 34. (25600.00) 35. (3.00)
37. (c) 38. (d) 39. (c) 40. (d)
41. (b) 42. (a) 43. (b) 44. (c)
45. (c) 46. (a) 47. (c) 48. (a)
49. (b) 50. (a,d) 51. (a) 52. (a,b,d)
53. (b,c) 54. (a,c,d) 55. (a,b,c,d) 56. (b,c)
57. (b,d) 58. (a,b,c) 59. (a,b,c) 60. (a)
61. (b) 62. (b) 63. (a,b) 64. (b,d)
65. (a,c) 66. (c) 67. (50) 68. (25)
69. (100.4) 70. (b) 71. (c) 72. (a)
73. (d) 74. (d)
75. (AR); (B  Q);(C  P);(D  S)
@cbseinfinite
ANSWER KEY 197

EXERCISE - 4:
DIRECTION TO USE -
1. (d) 2. (d)
3. ((a) zero (b) 0.25 cm (c) g/6)
 dR 5 
4. (a) 5. (ga/2y) 6. (2m) 7.  r 
 dt 
  2 L2 
8.  H   9. (a) 10. (c)
 2g 
5
11. (a) 12. (a) 13. (1.01 × 10 Pa)
14. (b) 15. (6.00) 16. (6.00) 17. (c)
18. (a) 19. (b) 20. (d) 21. (c)
22. (c) 23. (a) 24. (b,c) 25. (a,d)
26. (3.00) 27. (a,c) 28. (a),(c),(d) 29. (a,d)
30. (15.00) 31. (9.00) 32. (004.00) 33. (a, c)
34. (0.30) 35. (10.00)
@cbseinfinite
ANSWER KEY 198
Answer Key
CHAPTER - 12 SIMPLE HARMONIC MOTION

1. (d) 2. (b) 3. (d) 4. (d) 1. (b) 2. (c) 3. (a) 4. (c)

5. (d) 6. (c) 7. (b) 8. (d) 5. (b) 6. (d) 7. (d) 8. (a)
9. (d) 10. (a) 11. (b) 12. (a) 9. (d) 10. (b) 11. (d) 12. (c)
13. (d) 14. (0.625) 15. (a) 16. (b) 13. (a) 14. (a) 15. (c) 16. (c)
17. (d) 18. (a) 19. (b) 20. (a) 17. (c) 18. (c) 19. (c) 20. (d)
21. (c) 22. (10) 23. (b) 24. (c) 21. (d) 22. (a) 23. (a) 24. (d)
25. (a) 26. (a) 27. (a) 28. (a) 25. (a) 26. (c) 27. (d) 28. (a)
29. (100) 30.(c) 31. (c) 32. (c) 29. (d) 30.(b) 31. (c) 32. (c)
33. (c) 34.(c) 35.(a) 36. (b) 33. (d) 34.(a) 35.(b) 36. (a)
37. (b) 38.(a) 39.(b) 40. (b) 37. (b) 38.(c) 39.(c) 40. (d)
41. (d) 42.(d) 43.(d) 44. (c) 41. (c) 42.(3.00) 43.(7.00) 44. (2.00)
45. (1.5) 46.(b) 47.(c) 48. (a) 45. (6.00)
49. (c) 50.(b) 51. (d) 52. (b)
53. (d) 54.(c) 55.(b) 56. (d)
57. (a) 58.(d) 59.(a) 60. (d)
61. (a) 62.(c) 63.(c) 64. (c)
65. (a) 66.(a) 67. (b) 68. (b)
69. (d) 70.(c) 71. (a) 72. (a)
73. (c) 74.(d) 75. (c)
@cbseinfinite
ANSWER KEY 199
CHAPTER - 12 SIMPLE HARMONIC MOTION

1. (c) 2. (b) 3. (d) 4. (a) 1. (c) 2. (b) 3. (d) 4. (a)

5. (d) 6. (c) 7. (b) 8. (d) 5. (a) 6. (0) 7. (b,d)
9. (b) 10. (d) 11. (b) 12. (a) 8. (a–p; b–q, r; c–p; d–q, s)
13. (b) 14. (a) 15. (c) 16. (c) 9. (a–p or p, s; b–q, s or q, r, s; c–s; d–q)
17. (a) 18. (d) 19. (c) 20. (a) 10. (d) 11. (c) 12. (d)
21. (a) 22. (c) 23. (c) 24. (c) 13. (4.00) 14. (a) 15. (b) 16. (a,d)
25. (c) 26. (c) 27. (c) 28. (b) 17. (a,d) 18. (b,d) 19. (a,b,d) 20. (d)
29. (a) 30.(d) 31. (b) 32. (c)
33. (a) 34.(a) 35.(c) 36. (b)
37. (a) 38.(d) 39.(d) 40. (d)
41. (d) 42.(b) 43.(b) 44. (a)
45. (b) 46.(b) 47.(a) 48. (b)
49. (a) 50.(c) 51. (c) 52. (b)
53. (a) 54.(a) 55.(c) 56. (b)
57. (d) 58.(a) 59.(d) 60. (c)
61. (a) 62.(c) 63.(d) 64. (d)
65. (d) 66.(d) 67. (d) 68. (a,c)
69. (a,c) 70. (b,c) 71. (a,b,d)
72. (b,c,d) 73. (c) 74.(d) 75. (2.00)
76. (5.00) 77. (6.00) 78. (2.00) 79. (0.5)
80. (50) 81. (45) 82. (1.00) 83. (2)
84. (d) 85.(d) 86.(c) 87. (b)
88. (a-p; b-s; c-r; d-q) 89.(a-q; b-s; c-p; d-r)
90. (b) 91. (a) 92. (b) 93. (b)
94. (c) 95.(b) 96.(b) 97. (c)
98. (c) 99.(c) 100.(d)
@cbseinfinite
ANSWER KEY 200
Answer Key
CHAPTER - 13 WAVES

1. (a) 2. (a) 3. (b) 4. (c) 1. (d) 2. (c) 3. (b) 4. (c)

5. (a) 6. (a) 7. (c) 8. (a) 5. (c) 6. (d) 7. (b) 8. (a)
9. (a) 10. (d) 11. (b) 12. (d) 9. (a) 10. (b) 11. (b) 12. (a)
13. (d) 14. (c) 15. (c) 16. (b) 13. (a) 14. (b) 15. (b) 16. (c)
17. (c) 18. (b) 19. (d) 20. (b) 17. (a) 18. (b) 19. (502) 20. (b)
21. (c) 22. (a) 23. (b) 24. (a) 21. (a) 22. (b) 23. (a) 24. (20)
25. (180) 26. (c) 27. (d) 28. (c) 25. (12.50) 26. (a) 27. (a) 28. (a)
29. (d) 30.(a) 31. (a) 32. (a) 29. (35) 30.(a) 31. (d) 32. (b)
33. (b) 34.(d) 35.(d) 36. (120) 33. (d) 34.(a) 35.(c) 36. (a)
37. (a) 38.(d) 39.(b) 40. (a) 37. (a) 38.(106.05) 39.(d) 40. (a)
41. (b) 42.(a) 43.(a) 44. (b) 41. (d) 42.(a) 43.(c) 44. (b)
45. (b) 46.(b) 47.(d) 48. (a) 45. (d) 46.(8.00) 47.(8.00) 48. (2.00)
49. (c) 50.(b) 51. (a) 52. (b) 49. (1215) 50.(4.00)
53. (d) 54.(45) 55.(a) 56. (a)
57. (d) 58.(c) 59.(a) 60. (c)
61. (c) 62.(b) 63.(10) 64. (b)
65. (c) 66.(c) 67. (c) 68. (b)
69. (d) 70.(a) 71. (b) 72. (a)
73. (b) 74.(c) 75. (720)
@cbseinfinite
ANSWER KEY 201
CHAPTER - 13 WAVES

1. (a) 2. (a) 3. (d) 4. (b) 1. (a) 2. (b) 3. (b) 4. (d)

5. (b) 6. (d) 7. (d) 8. (a) 5. (c) 6. (c) 7. (d) 8. (a)
9. (b) 10. (c) 11. (b) 12. (b) 9. (a) 10. (a) 11. (c) 12. (b)
13. (c) 14. (d) 15. (d) 16. (b) 13. (a) 14. (a) 15. (b) 16. (a)
17. (d) 18. (c) 19. (c) 20. (d) 17. (a,d) 18. (5.00) 19. (7.00) 20. (5.00)
21. (a) 22. (a) 23. (c) 24. (b) 21. (b) 22. (a)
25. (c) 26. (d) 27. (a) 28. (a) 23. (A – p, t; B – p, s; C – q, s; D – q, r)
29. (a) 30.(a) 31. (b) 32. (a) 24. (b) 25. (b,d) 26. (d)
33. (d) 34.(b) 35.(d) 36. (b) 27. (a,c,d) 28. (a,b,d) 29. (3.00)
37. (d) 38.(c) 39.(c) 40. (d) 30. (a,b,c) 31. (5.00) 32. (8.13)
41. (d) 42.(b) 43.(b) 44. (d) 33. (c) 34.(0.62 to 0.63)
45. (b) 46.(d) 47.(a) 48. (b) 35. (a,d)
49. (b) 50.(d) 51. (a) 52. (b)
53. (c) 54.(a) 55.(a) 56. (b)
57. (b) 58.(b) 59.(d) 60. (b)
61. (b) 62.(b) 63.(d) 64. (c)
65. (b,c) 66.(b,c) 67. (b,c) 68. (a,b)
69. (b,c) 70. (c,d) 71. (a,b,d)
72. (a,b,c,d) 73. (a,c) 74. (50)
75. (4.00) 76. (510) 77. (7.00) 78. (470)
79. (32) 80.(196) 81. (4.00) 82. (4.00)
83. (490) 84.(a) 85.(a) 86. (b)
87. (c) 88.(c)
89. (a-q; b - p; c - r, s; d - r)
90. (a - r; b - p; c - s; d - q)
91. (c) 92. (a) 93.(a) 94. (d)
95. (a) 96.(d) 97. (a) 98. (d)
99. (a) 100.(c)
@cbseinfinite
MASTER INDEX .
VOLUME 1:
VOLUME 2:
Circular Motion
Rotational Motion
Gravitation
VOLUME 3:
Fluid Mechanics
Waves
VOLUME 4:
Thermal Physics
@cbseinfinite
65 Million+
Monthly
Youtube Views

Users Live Learning
25 43
Parents
Happy
Trust
Students
Vedantu
MILLION+ MILLION+
@cbseinfinite
JEE Advanced 2021

Ankit Shrey

JEE Main 2021
903 students in
Top 10,000
78 869
68 444
Sharma
AIR 158 AIR 179
NEET (UG) 2021
AIR 23
Pavit
Score 710 AIR 92

Anirudh
Online Crash Course
Score 705
Shivank
Online Crash Course
AIR 143 Score 700

1172 NEET
Qualifiers
Annmary
Santhosh
98.4% 98.4% 98.0% 99.8% 98.4% 99.8% 99.6% 99.4%
ICSE Class 10
99.4% 97.4% 97.2% 97.2% 97.2% 99.4% 99.2% 99.2%
@cbseinfinite
CBSE INFINITE

@cbseinfinite
Regular tests &

assignments
VEDANTU
VIP
Parent-teacher
meetings

Our Students
5.2X
HIGHER
Our Students
Our Students
3.8X
6.6X
HIGHER
All India HIGHER

All India All India
37.28% 37.28% 8.25%

9.84% 9.84% 1.25%
CBSE 10 CBSE 12 JEE

SCAN CODE
to know more
about VIP
@cbseinfinite
@cbseinfinite
Published by
www.vedantu.com
Printed by
@cbseinfinite
How to use your
Tatva Practice Book
1
electron.
Electrostatics
Exercise - 2:
2
Solve all types of
0.2g is:
(c) 100s (d) 200s
Answer Key
3
For extra exam
@cbseinfinite
Founder’s Message
Dear Student,
level questions.

Anand Prakash
@cbseinfinite
Credits
Physics Team
Anmol Gupta Md Fazlur Rehman

Nitesh Kumar Santhosh Mani Vishwanath G
Sarib Mohammad
Shetty.
@cbseinfinite
6
TABLE OF CONTENTS
THERMAL PHYSICS
Theory ................................................................................................................................................ 08
Solved examples ............................................................................................................................... 25
Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 107
@cbseinfinite
7
KINETIC THEORY OF GASES & THERMODYNAMICS
Theory ................................................................................................................................................ 53
Solved examples ............................................................................................................................... 71
Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 109
@cbseinfinite
THERMAL PHYSICS 8
THERMAL PHYSICS
SCAN CODE
THERMAL PHYSICS
@cbseinfinite
Chapter 14
THERMAL PHYSICS 9
THERMAL PHYSICS
1. TEMPERATURE AND HEAT The zeroth law of thermodynamics states that if two
thermodynamic systems are each in thermal equilibrium with
1.1 Introduction to Temperature and Heat a third one, then they are in thermal equilibrium with each
Temperature : Temperature is a relative measure of hotness other.
or coldness of a body.
There are also various ways to state the zeroth law of
SI Unit : Kelvin (K) thermodynamics. However, in simple terms, it can be said,
Commonly Used Unit : °C or °F 'System that are in thermal equilibrium exist at the same
Conversion : t(k) = t°C + 273.15 temperature'.
Heat : Heat is a form of energy flow (i) between two bodies Zeroth law of thermodynamics takes into account that
or (ii) between a body and its surroundings by virtue of temperature is something worth measuring because it predicts
temperature difference between them. whether the heat will transfer between objects or not. This is
SI Unit : Joule (J) true regardless of how the objects interact. Even if two objects
are not in physical contact, heat still can flow between them,
Commonly Used Unit : Calorie (Cal)
by means of radiation mod of heat transfer. Whereas, zeroth
Conversion : 1cal = 4.186 J law of thermodynamics states that, if system are in thermal
Note: equilibrium, no heat flow will takes place
Heat always flows from a higher temperature system to a Thermal Equilibrium
lower temperature system. Temperature is a property that distinguishes thermodynamics
1.2 Zeroth law of thermodynamics from other sciences. This property can distinguish between
Zeroth law of thermodynamics is one of the four laws of hot and cold. When two or more bodies at different
thermodynamics. The credit for formulating the law goes to temperatures are brought into contact then after some time
Ralph H. Fowler. Interestingly, the zeroth law of they attain a common temperature and they are said to exist
thermodynamics was actually developed much later than the in thermal equilibrium.
original three laws. However, there was some confusion Systems are said to be in thermal equilibrium if there is no
regarding the nomenclature, whether it should be named the heat transfer, even if they are in a position to transfer heat,
fourth law of some other name. The complication arose based on other factors. For example, if we put food in the
because the new law gave a much clearer definition of the refrigerator overnight then that food is in thermal equilibrium
temperature and basically replaced what the other three laws with the air of that refrigerator. Heat no longer flows from
had to state. Fowler finally came up with the name to end this food to the air or from the air to the food, this state is known
conflict. as thermal equilibrium.
The zeroth law of Thermodynamics frames an idea of 1.3 Temperature Scales
temperature as an indicator of thermal equilibrium.
Measurement of Temperature
When a body 'A' is in thermal equilibrium with another body
Principle : Observation of Thermometric property with the
'b', and also separately in thermal equilibrium with a body 'C',
change in temperature and comparing it with certain reference
then body 'B' and 'C' will also be in thermal equilibrium with
situations.
each other. This statement defines the zeroth law of
thermodynamics. The law is based on temperature  Reference situation is generally ice point or steam point.
measurement.
Celcius and Fahrenheit Temperature Scales
In Celsius Scale In Fahrenheit Scale
Ice point  0°C Ice point  32°F

Steam point  100°C Steam point  212°F
Fig. 14.1
SCAN CODE
THERMAL PHYSICS
@cbseinfinite
THERMAL PHYSICS 10
It implies that 100 division in celcius scales is equivalent to

180 scale divisions in fahrenheit scale. Thermometers
Instrument used to measure temperature of any system is called
t f  32 t
Hence  c as thermometer.
180 100
Examples : Liquid in Glass thermometer, Platinum Resistance
Thermometer, Constant Volume Gas Thermometers.
Liquid in Glass thermometer and Platinum Resistance
thermometer give uniform readings for ice point & steam point
but go non uniform for different liquids and different materials.
 Constant volume gas thermometer gives same readings
irrespective of which gas. It is based on the fact that at low
pressures and constant volume, P × T for a gas is constant.
Pressure
Gas A
Gas B
–273.15°C 0°C Temperature

(°C)
Fig. 14.2 Fig. 14.4
Absolute Temperature Scale  All gases converge to absolute zero at zero pressure.
It is kelvin scale
Ice point  273.15 K 2. THERMAL EXPANSION
Steam point  373.15 K
Most substances expand when they are heated. Thermal
Comparing it with the celcius scale, number of scale division expansion is a consequence of the change in average
in both the scales is same. separation between the constituent atoms of an object. Atoms
of an object can be imagined to be connected to one another
t c  0C t k  273.15
 by stiff springs as shown in Fig. At ordinary temperatures,
100 100 the atoms in a solid oscillate about their equilibrium positions
–11
 Kelvin scale is called as absolute scale, because it is with an amplitude of approximately 10 m. The average
– 10
practically impossible to go beyond 0 K into the negative spacing between the atoms is about 10 m. As the
side. temperature of solid increases, the atoms oscillate with greater
amplitudes, as a result the average separation between them
Steam
Point
373.15 K 100°C 212.0°F increases, consequently the object expands.
Ice
273.15 K 0°C 32°F
Point
Absolute
0K –273.15°C –459.67°F
zero
Kelvin Scale Celcius Scale Fahrenheit Scale
1K 1°C 1.8°F Fig. 14.5
Comparison of Temperature Scales

More precisely, thermal expansion arises from the
asymmetrical nature of the potential energy curve.
Fig. 14.3
SCAN CODE
THERMAL PHYSICS
@cbseinfinite
THERMAL PHYSICS 11
At the atomic level, thermal expansion may be understood by as shown in figure, the average position of an atom will not
considering how the potential energy of the atoms varies be at the minimum point.
with distance. The equilibrium position of an atom will be at When the temperature is raised the amplitude of the vibrations
the minimum of the potential energy well if the well is increases and the average position is located at a greater
symmetric. At a given temperature, each atom vibrates about interatomic separation. This increased separation is manifested
its equilibrium position and its average position remains at as expansion of the material.
the minimum point. If the shape of the well is not symmetrical,
2.1 Linear, Areal and Volumetric Expansion
x
 KT constant (K)
x
Linear Expansion Coefficient of Linear expansion (a) :
L
L  a T Increase in length per unit length per
L
degree rise in temp.
Area Expension Coefficient of Area Expansion (b) :
A
 b T
A Increase in area per unit area per degree
rise in temp.
Volume Expansion Coefficient of volume expansion (g) :
V
 g T
V Increase in volume per unit volume per
degree rise in temp.
V
Units of a,b,g = /°C or /K

 In general with change in volume the density will also change.
 a for metals generally higher than a for non-metals
 gis nearly constant at high temperatures but at low temp it depends on temp.
Fig. 14.6
Coefficient of volume expansion of Cu as a function of temperature.
SCAN CODE
THERMAL PHYSICS
@cbseinfinite
THERMAL PHYSICS 12
For ideal gases g is inversely proportional to temperature at From the figure it is observed that,
constant pressure CB = CA+AB
nRT Real expansion = Apparent expansion + expansion of the
V
P container
V T So, Vr = Va + Vc
 
V T Unlike solids, liquids have no fixed length or surface area but
1 always take up the shape of the containing vessel. When a
 g liquid is heated in a container, heat flows through the container
T
to the liquid; which means that the container expands first,
2.2 Relation between Real Expansion and Apparent
Expansion due to which the level of the liquid falls. When the liquid gets
heated, it expands more, beyond its unique level. We cannot
If the liquid is heated directly without using any container
monitor the intermediate state. We can only observe the initial
then the expansion that you observe is termed as a real
and final levels. This observed expansion of the liquid is
expansion of the liquid. The expansion of the liquid apparently
known as the apparent expansion of the liquid.
observed without considering the expansion of the container
is called the apparent expansion of the liquid. If we consider The real expansion of liquid = Apparent expansion of liquid
the expansion of the container also and measure the total + Volume expansion of the container.
expansion in the volume of the liquid, then the expansion is Therefore, in the case of liquids, we are concerned only with
termed as the absolute expansion of the liquid. volume changes when they are heated. The real (or absolute)
Explanation: A glass bulb with a long graduated stem is filled expansivity of a liquid is the fraction of its volume by which
with liquid up to the mark A. Now keeping an eye on the it expands per kelvin rise in temperature.
liquid column the bulb is heated and it is observed that the 2.3 Anomalous Expansion of Water
upper level of the liquid comes down from position A to
As an exception, water contracts on heating from 0°C to 4°C
position B. After that, it moves up from the graduated line B
and hence its density increases from 0°C to 4°C. Thus is called
crossing the mark A and reaches to mark C.
as anamolous expansion
The reason is that when the heat is applied the volume of the
1 gm/cc
bulb increases at first. Due to this cause liquid comes down
Density
to B from A. Later on as soon as the liquid gets heated its
volume starts to increase and reaches from B to C. It happens
so as the expansion of liquid is more than the expansion of
solid.
Apparently it appears to us that the liquid was at mark A and
4°C 4°C
finally reaches to mark C. Therefore, CA is the apparent (a) (b)
expansion. CB is the real expansion and AB indicates the Fig. 14.8 Fig. 14.9
expansion of the container.
Note:
 In general
3
g  3a  b
2
Proof : Imagine a cube of length, l that expands equally in
all directions, when its temperature increases by small T;
We have
l = alT
Also
3 3 3 2 2 2 3
V = (l l) – l = l + 3l l + 3ll + l – l
2
= 3l l ...(1)
Fig. 14.7
SCAN CODE
THERMAL PHYSICS
@cbseinfinite
THERMAL PHYSICS 13
2 3
In Equation (1) we ignore 3ll & l as l is very small as
compared to l.
So
3V V
V  l = 3VaT [Using  l2 ] ...(2)
l l
V
 3aT
 V
Fig. 14.11
 g = 3a
For example, when the temperatures of a brass rod and a steel
Similarly we can prove for area expansion coefficient
rod of equal length are raised by the same amount from some
 In case, thermal expansion is prevented inside the rod common initial value, the brass rod expands more than the
by fixing its ends rigidly, then the rod acquires a compressive steel rod because brass has a greater average coefficient of
strain due to external fones at the ends corresponding stress expansion than steel. Such type of bimetallic strip is found in
set up in the rod is called thermal stress. practical devices such as thermostats to break or make
we know electrical contact.
V
 aT  compressive strain
V
YL
Also     Thermal stress
L
T  YaT
Where Y = young madulus of elasticity ...(3)
 Practical applications in railway tracks, metal tyres of
cart wheels, bridges and so many other applications.
Fig. 14.12
 If a solid object has a hole in it, what happens to the size
of the hole, when the temperature of the object increases. Variation of Density with Temperature
A common misconception is that if the object expands, ariation of density with temperature
the hole will shrink because material expands into the Most substances expand when they are heated, i.e. volume of
hole. But the truth is that if the object expands, the hole a given mass of a substance increases on heating, so the density
will expand too, because every linear dimension of an
object changes in the same way when the temperature  1
should decrease as  as    . Let us see how the density
changes.  V
 varies with increase in temperature.
m

V
1
or  (for a given mass)
V
Fig. 14.10  V V V 1
    
2.4 Applications of Thermal Expansion p V  V  t V  gT 1  gT
Expansion of a Bimetallic Strip
Each substance has its own characteristic average coefficient 
  
of expansion. 1  gT
SCAN CODE
THERMAL PHYSICS
@cbseinfinite
THERMAL PHYSICS 14
This expression can also be written as Weight of the solid = Upthrust on solid from liquid
   1  gT   VS g  Vi l g ...(1)

–1
Here, S  density of solid

If g very small. 1  gT 
–1
 1 – gT
l  density of liquid
    1 – gT 
Vi  immersed volume of solid and
Effect of temperature on apparent weight when immersed
in a liquid V  Total volume of solid
When a solid body is complete immersed a liquid its apparent From Eqn. (1)
weight gets decreased due to an upthrust acting on it by the
Vi S
liquid. The apparent weight is given by  f ...(2)
V l
Wapp = W – F
where, f = immersed fraction of solid.
Here, F = upthrust =  VS L g
With increase in temperature S and l both will decrease.
Where, VS = volume of solid and L  density of liquid
Therefore, this fraction may increase, decrease or remain
Now, as the temperature is increased VS increases while L constant. At some higher temperature,
decreases. So, F may increase or decrease (or may remain S
constant also) depending upon the condiction that which factor f  ...(3)
l
dominates on the other. We can write.
From Eqs. (2) and (3), we have
F  VS L
f   S  l 
F VS L  VS  VS   1     
or      f  S  l 
F VS L VS  1  g L
T 
 V  g V T  1   1 
 S S S     1  g l  
 VS   1  g L T   1  g S
 
 1  g S T 
or F  F   f   1  g l  
 
 1  g L T  or f  1  gS  
Now, if g S  g L , F  F
Now, if g l  g S , f   f or immersed fraction will increase.
or   Wapp and vice-versa.
Waoo
If g l  g S , f   f or immersed fraction will remain unchanged
and if g S  g L , F  F
or   Wapp
Wapp and if, g l  g S , then f   f or immersed fraction will
decrease.
Effect of Temperature on Immersed Fraction of a Solid
Effect of temperature on the time period of a pendulum
in Floating condition
The time period of a simple pendulum is given by
When a solid, whose density is less than the density of liquid
is floating in it, then l
T  2
g
or T l
As the temperature is increased, length of the pendulum and
hence, time period gets increased or a pendulum clock
becomes slow and it loses the time.
Fig. 14.13
SCAN CODE
THERMAL PHYSICS
@cbseinfinite
THERMAL PHYSICS 15
T l l  l F  YAaT
 
T l l Expansion of Liquids
Here, we l = l a in place of l aT so as to avoid the For heating a liquid it has to be ut in some container. When
confusion with change in time period. Thus, the liquid is heated, the container will also expand. We define
coefficient of apparent expansion of a liquid as the apparent
T l  l a increase in volume per unit origional volume per °C rise in
 1  a 
12

T l temperature. It is represented by g a . Thus,
 1  g r  coefficient of volume expansion of liquid

or T   T 1  a  (if a  1 )
 2  and g g  coefficient of volume expansion of the container
1
or T  T  – T  Ta
2
3. CALORIMETRY
Time lost in time t (by a pendulum clock whose actual time
period is T and the changed time period at some higher When two systems at different temperatures are connected
temperature is T  ) is together then heat flows from higher temperature to lower
temperature till the time their temperatures do not become
 T  same.
t   t
 T  Principle of calorimetry states that, neglecting heat loss to
 At some higher temperature a scale will expand and scale surroundings, heat lost by a body at higher temperature is
reading will be lesser than true value. equal heat gained by a body at lower temperature.
However, at lower temperature scale reading will be more heat gained = heat lost
or true value will be less. Whenever heat is given to any body, either its temperature
 When a rod whose ends are rigidly fixed such as to prevent changes or its state changes.
from expansion or contraction undergoes a change in 3.1 Change in Temperature
temperature, thermal stresses are developed in the rod.
This is because, if the temperature is increased, the rod When the temp changes on heating,
has a tendency to expand with since it is fixed at two Then
ends it is not allowed to expand. So, the rod exerts a force
Heat supplied  change in temp (T)
on supports to expand.
 amount of substance (m/n)
 nature of substance (s/C)
 H = msT
m = Mass of body
s = specific heat capacity per kg
T = Change in temp
Fig. 14.14 or H = nCT
n = Number of moles
l
Thermal strain   aT C = Specific/Molar heat Capacity per mole
l
T = Change in temp
So thermal stress   g  (thermal strain) YaT Specific Heat Capacity : Amount of heat required to raise
the temperature of unit mass of the substance through one
or force on supports F = A (stress) YAaT degree.
Here, Y = Young’s modulus of elasticity of the rod.
SCAN CODE
THERMAL PHYSICS
@cbseinfinite
THERMAL PHYSICS 16
Units  In case any material is not at its B.P or M.P, then on heating
the temperature will change till the time a particular state
SI  J/KgK SH O L  = 1 cal/g°C
2
change temperature reaches.
Common  cal/g°C SH O ice  = 0.5 cal/g°C For Example : If water is initially at –50°C at 1 Atm pressure
2
in its solid state.

Molar Heat Capacity : Amount of heat required to raise the
On heating.
temperature of unit mole of the substance through one degree
Step - 1 : Temp changes to 0°C first
Units
Step - 2 : Ice melts to H2O(l) keeping the temp constant
SI  J/mol K
Step - 3 : Temp. increase to 100°C
Common  Cal/g°C
Step - 4 : H2O(l) boils to steam keeping the temp constant
Heat Capacity : Amount of heat required to raise the
temperature of a system through one degree Step - 5 : Further temp increases
 H = ST
where S = Heat Capacity
Units
SI  J/K
Common  Cal/°C
 For H2O specific heat capacity does change but fairly very
less.
 Materials with higher specific heat capacity require a lot
of heat for same one degree rise in temperature Fig. 14.15
3.2 Change in State  The slope is inversely proportional to heat capacity.
 Length of horizontal line depends upon mL for the process.
When the phase changes on heating
Then 3.3 Pressure dependence on melting point and boiling
point
Heat supplied  amount of substance which changes the state (m)
  nature of substance (L)  For some substance melting point decreases with increase
in pressure and for other melting point increases
 H = mL
 Melting poing increases with increase in temperature. We
Where L = Latent Heat of substance
can observe the above results through phaser diagrams.
Latent Heat : Amount of heat required per mass to change
the state of any substance. P P
B B
(atm) (atm)
Units
C C
Liq Liq
SI  J/Kg Solid
Solid
Common  Cal/g
O Vapour O Vapour
 The change in state always occurs at a constant
A A
temperature. T(°C) T(°C)
For H2O For CO2
For example
Solid  Liq Lf Fig. 14.16 Fig. 14.17

Line AO  Sublimation curve
Liq  Gas Lv
Line OB  Fusion curve
Lf = Latent Heat of fusion Line OC  Vapourization curve
Lv = Latent heat of vaporization Point O  Triple Point
SCAN CODE
THERMAL PHYSICS
@cbseinfinite
THERMAL PHYSICS 17
Point C  Critical temperature

Triple Point : The combination pressure and temperature at
which all three states of matter (i.e. solids, liquids gases co-
exist.
For H2O it is at 273.16 K and 0.006 Atm.
Critical Point : The combination of pressure & temp beyond
which a vapour cannot be liquified is called as critical point.
Corresponding temperature, pressure are called as critical
temperature & critical pressure.
From the phasor diagram, we can see that melting point
decreases with increases in pressure for H2O.
Based on this is the concept of regelation.
Regelation : The phenomena of refreezing of water melted
below the normal melting point due to increase in pressure.
 It is due to this pressure effect on boiling point that cooking
is tough on mountains and easier in pressure cooker.
3.4 Mechanical equivalent of heat
In the history of science, the mechanical equivalent of heat
states that motion and heat are mutually interchangeable and
that in every case, a given amount of work would generate
the same amount of heat, provided the work done is totally
converted to heat energy. Fig. 14.18
Note:
HEAT TRANSFER
Water equivalent of a container
Normally, a liquid is heated in a container. So, some heat is
wasted in heating the container also. Suppose water
equivalent of a container is 10 g, then it implies that heat 1. HEAT TRANSFER
required to increase the temperature of this container is equal
to heat required to increase the temperature of 10 g of water. 1.1 Introduction to heat transfer
3.5 Calorimeter Heat transfer is the process of the movemnet of energy dut to
Calorimeter, device for measuring the heat developed during a temperature difference. The calculations we are interested
a mechanical, electrical, or chemical reaction, and for in include determining the final temperatures of materials and
calculating the heat capacity of materials. how long it takes for these materials to reach these
A calorimeter consists of an insulated container, water, a temperatures.
thermometer, a stirring rod, and an object that will either
1.2 Modes of Heat Transfer
absorb or emit heat. To do a Calorimetry experiment, an object
with a certain mass and temperature is placed in the water There are three modes of heat transfer.
and the change in the temperature measured .
 Conduction
A calorimeter is a device that is in use for measuring the
warmth of chemical reactions or physical changes also as heat  Convection
capacity. The most common types of calorimeters are
 Radiation
differential scanning calorimeters, titration calorimeters,
isothermal micro calorimeters, and accelerated rate
calorimeters.
SCAN CODE
THERMAL PHYSICS
@cbseinfinite
THERMAL PHYSICS 18
2. CONDUCTION AND CONVECTION 2.2 Electrical Analogue of Thermal Conduction

Thermal Resistance (R)
2.1 Conduction
Thermal conduction is the process in which thermal energy is dQ T T

We know dt  H  l KA  R
transferred from the hotter part of a body to the colder one or
from hot body to a cold body in contact with it without any Here, T  temperature difference (TD) and
transference of material particles.
l
TC > T D R  thermal resistance of the rod.
TC TD KA
L
Consider a section ab of a rod as shown in figure. Suppose
A
Q1 heat enters into the section at ‘a’ and Q2 leaves at ‘b’, then
Direction of
heat flow Q2 < Q1. Part of the energy Q1 – Q2 is utilized in raising the
temperature of section ab and the remaining is lost to
Fig. 14.19 atmosphere through ab. If heat is continuously supplied fro
At steady state, the left end of the rod, a stage comes when temperature of
the section becomes constant. In that case Q1 = Q2 if rod is
The rate of heat energy flowing through the rod becomes insulated from the surroundings (or loss through ab is zero).
constant. This is called the steady state condition. Thus, is steady state
temperature of different section of the rod becomes constant
T  TD 
This is rate Q  KA
C
...(i) (but not same). Hence, in the figure:
L
for uniform cross-section rods

where Q = Rate of heat energy flow (J/s or W)
2
A = Area of cross-section (m )
TC,TD = Temperature of hot end and cold end respectively
(°C or K)
L = Length of the rod (m)
K = coefficient of thermal conductivity
Coefficient of Thermal Conductivity :
It is defined as amount of heat conducted during steady state
in unit time through unit area of any cross-section of the Fig. 14.20
substance under unit temperature gradient, the heat flow being T1 = constant, T2 = constant etc. and T1 > T2 > T 3 > T4
normal to the area.
Now, a natural question arises, why the temperature of
Units whole rod not becomes equal when heat is being
SI  J/msK or W/mK. continuously supplied? The answer is: there must be a
 Larger the thermal conductivity, the greater will be rate of temperature difference in the rod for the heat flow, same as
heat energy flow for a given temperature difference. we require a potential difference across a resistance for the
current flow through it.
 Kmetals > Knon metals
In steady state, the temperature varies linearly with
 Thermal conductivity of insulators is very low. Therefore,
distance along the rod if it is insulated.
air does not let the heat energy to be conducted very easily.
SCAN CODE
THERMAL PHYSICS
@cbseinfinite
THERMAL PHYSICS 19
2.3 Series and Parallel Combination of Rods

Series Combination:
We can compute the effective coefficient of heat conductivity
when different materials are linked with varying coefficients
of thermal conductivity. When the rods are linked in series,
the flow rate through both sections is the same. However,
because the different connections get varying amounts of heat
energy, the temperature differential between them will be
varied.
The total of the temperature differences between the junctions
Fig. 14.21 equals the temperature difference between the first and last
ends. When two materials are linked in series and their
 Comparing equation number (iii), i.e. heat current physical dimensions are the same.
dQ T  I 
H   where R   2K1 K 2
dt R  KA  KS 
K1  K 2
with the equation, of current flow through a resistance,
dQ V  I  Parallel Combination:
I   where R  
dt R  A  When two materials are linked in a parallel configuration,
We find the following similarities in heat flow through a the entire available heat energy per second is divided between
rod and current flow through a resistance. them. In any case, the temperature will be the same at the
end. When the rods are linked in parallel, the effect on thermal
S.No. Heat flow Current flow
resistance is identical to the effect on electric resistance.
through a through a
conducting rod resistance We may construct a simple equation for the influence on
1. Conducting rod Electrical coefficient of heat conductivity when two distinct rods have
resistance the same length and cross-section area, as shown below.
2. Heat flows Charge flows
3. TD is required PD is required K1  K 2
4. Heat current Electric current Kp 
2
dQ dQ
H  rate of I  rate of Note:
dt dt
heat flow charge flow Low thermal conductivity materials transmit heat at a slower
5. T TD V PD pace than high thermal conductivity materials. Metals, for
H  I 
R R R R example, have a high thermal conductivity and are extremely
6. l l effective at transferring heat, whereas insulating materials
R R
KA A like Styrofoam are the polar opposite. High thermal
7. K=Thermal   electrical conductivity materials are commonly utilised in heat sink
conductivity conductivity applications, while low thermal conductivity materials are
used as thermal insulation. Thermal resistance is the
counterpart of thermal conductity.
From the above table it is evident that flow of heat through
rods in series and parallel is analogous to the flow of current 2.4 Growth of Ice in Lakes
through resistance in series and parallel. This analogy is of Warm water generally gets more dense as it gets colder, and
great importance in solving complicated problems of heat therefore sinks. This fact may lead you to believe that ice
conduction. should form on the bottom of a lake first. But a funny thing
happens to water as it gets even colder. Colder than 4° Celsius
(39° Fahrenheit), water begins expanding and becomes less
SCAN CODE
THERMAL PHYSICS
@cbseinfinite
THERMAL PHYSICS 20
dense as it gets colder. As a result, close to freezing, colder George D. Ashton states, "As a lake cools from above 4° C,
water floats to the top and the warmer water sinks to the the surface water loses heat, becomes more dense and sinks.
bottom. The density of water as a function of temperature This process continues until all the water in the lake is at 4°
can be seen in the plot on the right. Eventually, the coldest C, when the density of water is at its maximum. With further
water, which has floated to the top of the lake in wintry cooling (and without mechanical mixing) a stable, lighter layer
conditions, freezes to form a layer of ice. Right when the of water forms at the surface. As this layer cools to its freezing
water freezes to ice, the ice becomes significantly less dense point, ice begins to form on the surface of the lake."
than the water and continues to float on the lake's surface.
In deep lakes, water pressure may also play a role. The
gravitational weight of all the water higher up in the lake
presses down on the water deep in the lake. The pressure
allows the water near the bottom of the lake to get cold without
expanding and rising. Because of the pressure, the water at
the bottom of deep lakes can become cold without freezing
to ice.
2.5 Convection
The process in which heat is transferred from one point to
another by the actual movement of the heated material particles
from a place at higher temperature to another place of lower
temperature is called as thermal convection.
 If the medium is forced to move with the help of a fan or
a pump, it is called as forced convection.
Fig. 14.22 If the material moves because of the differences in density
of the medium, the process is called natural or free
Ice is less dense than water because of the way it forms a
convection.
hexagonal crystalline structure. Each water molecule consists
of two hydrogen atoms bonded to the bottom of an oxygen  Examples of forced convection
atom. When ice forms, the hydrogen atoms of one water Circulatory system, cooling system of an automobile heat
molecule form weak hydrogen bonds with the top of the connector
oxygen atoms of two other water molecules.
 Examples of natural convection
Lining up the water molecules in this pattern takes up more
space than having them jumbled randomly together (as is the Trade winds, Sea Breeze/Land Breeze, Monsoons,
case in liquid water). And because the same mass of molecules Burning of Tea.
takes up more space when frozen, ice is less dense than liquid
water. For this same reason, water below 4° Celsius becomes
increasingly less dense as it gets colder. Close to freezing 3. RADIATION
temperatures, the molecules in the liquid water begin to line
up into the space-filling hexagonal structure. It is a process of transmission of heat in which heat travels
directly from one place to another without the agency of any
intervening medium.
 This radiation of heat energy occurs in the form of EM
waves.
 These radiators are emitted by virtue of its temperature,
like the radiation by a red hot iron or light from a filament
lamp.
 Every body radiates energy as well as absorbs energy from
surroundings.
Fig. 14.23
SCAN CODE
THERMAL PHYSICS
@cbseinfinite
THERMAL PHYSICS 21
 The proportion of energy absorbed depends upon the colour 3.2 Ideal Black Body
of the body.
A body that absorbs all the radiation incident upon it and has
3.1 Basic Fundamental Terms in Radiation an emissivity equal to 1 is called a perfectly black body. A
black body is also an ideal radiator. It implies that if a black
Radiant Energy
body and an identical another body are kept at the same
All bodies radiate energy in the form of electromagnetic waves temperature, then the black body will radiate maximum power
by virtue of their temperature. This energy is called the radiant 4
as is obvious from equation P = eA also. Because
energy. e = 1 for a perfectly black body while for any other body
Absorptive Power ‘a’ e <1.
“It is defined as the ratio of the radiant energy absorbed by it Materials like black velvet or lamp black come close to being
in a given time to the total radiant energy incident on it in the ideal black bodiies, but the best practical realization of an
same interval of time.” ideal black body is a small hole leading into a cavity, as this
absorbs 98% of the radiation incident on them.
energy absorbed
a
energy incident
As a perfectly black body absorbs all radiations incident on
it, the absorptive power of a perfectly black body is maximum
and unity.
Spectral Absorptive Power ‘ a λ ’

The absorptive power ‘a’ refers to radiations of all wavelengths
(or the total energy) while the spectral absorptive power is
the ratio of radiant energy absorbed by a surface to the radiant
energy incident on it for a particular wavelength  . It may
have different values for different wavelengths for a given
surface. Let us take an example, suppose a = 0.6, a  = 0.4
Fig. 14.24
for1000 Å and a  = 0.7 for 2000 Å for a given surface. Then,
3.3 Kirchoff's law of Thermal Radiation
it means that this surface will absorb only 60% of the total
radiant energy incident on it. Similarly, it absorbs 40% of the Kirchhoff’s law
energy incident on it corresponding to1000 Åand 70% ‘’According to this law the ratio of emissive power to
absorptive power is same for all surfaces at the same
corresponding to 2000 Å.The spectral absorptive power a  is
temperature.’’
related to absorptive power a through the relation

a   a  d
0
Emissive Power ‘e’

(Do not confuse it with the emissivity e which is different
from it, although both have the same symbol e).
“For a given surface it is defined as the radiant energy emitted Fig. 14.25
per second per unit area of the surface.”
e1 e 2  e 
It has the units of W/m
2
Hence   
2 4
a1 a 2  a  perfactly black body
or J/s–m . For a black body e T =  .
But a  black body
1
Spectral Emissive Power ‘ e λ ’
and e E  say 
“It is emissive power for a particular wavelength  .” Thus, black body
e

d   e  d Then,    constant  E
0  a for any surface
SCAN CODE
THERMAL PHYSICS
@cbseinfinite
THERMAL PHYSICS 22
Similarly, for a particular wavelength , 3.5 Newtons Law of Cooling

Newton’s Law of cooling states that, the rate of loss of heat
 e 
   E  dQ
 a  for any body of the body is directly proportional to the difference of
dt
Here, E = emissive power of black body at temperature T
temp between body and surrounding.
 T 4
From the above expression, we can see that dQ
Now  k  T2  T1 
e  a  dt
...(4)
3.4 Stefan's Law
The amount of radiation emitted per second per unit area by where k is a positive constant depending upon area and nature
a black body is directly proportional to the fourth power of of the surface of the body. Suppose a body of mass m, specific
its absolute temperature. heat capacity s is at temperature T2 & T1 be the temp of
Amount of radiation emitted E  T4 surroundings, if dT the fall of temperature in time dt.
where T = temperature of ideal black body (in K) Amount of heat lost is
E =  T4 dQ = msdT
This law is true for only ideal black body
 Rate of loss of heat is given by
SI Unit : E = watt/m2
 = Stefen's constant = 5.67 × 10–8 watt /m2 K4 dQ dT
 ms
Dimensions of  : M1 L0 T–3 –4 dt dt
Total radiation energy emitted out by surface of area A in ...(5)
time t : From Equation 4 and 5
Ideal black body QIBB =  A T 4 t and for any other body QGB dT
= erA T 4 t  ms  k  T2  T1 
dt
Rate of emission of radiation
When Temperature of surrounding T0 (Let T0 < T) dT k
  dt   Kdt
Rate of emission of radiation from ideal black body surface T2  T1 ms
E1 =  T4
k
Rate of emission of radiation from surrounding where K 
ms
E2 = T04
Net rate of loss of radiation from ideal black body surface is On integrating
E = E1 – E2 = T4–  T04 =  ( T4 – T04 ) log (T2 – T1) = –Kt + C
Net loss of radiation energy from entire surface area in time t –Kt C
or T2 = T1 + C1e where C1 = e ...(6)
is QIBB = A ( T4 – T04 ) t
For any other body QGB = er A ( T4 – T04 ) t equation (6) enables you to calculate the time of cooling of a
If in time dt the net heat energy loss for ideal black body is body through a particular range of temperature.
dQ and because of this its temperature falls by d
dQ
Rate of loss of heat RH = = σ A(T 4 – T04 )
dt
It is also equal to emitted power or radiation emitted per
second
Rate of fall in temperature (Rate of cooling)
dθ σA 4  dQ dθ 
 dt = m s J dt 
4
RF = dt = ms J (T – T0 )
 
Fig. 14.26
SCAN CODE
THERMAL PHYSICS
@cbseinfinite
THERMAL PHYSICS 23
3.6 Wein's Displacement Law
At ordinary temperatures (below about 600°C) the thermal

radiation emitted by a body is not visible, most of it is
concentrated in wavelengths much longer than those of visible
light.
Fig. 14.27
 For small temp diff, the rate of cooling, due to conduction,
convection & radiation combined is proportional to
difference in temperature.
 Approximation : If a body cools from Ta to Tb in t times
in medium where surrounding temp is T0, then
Ta  Tb  T  Tb 
 K a  T0 
t  2 
 Newton’s Law of cooling can be verified experimentally.

Fig. 14.29
Figure shows how the energy of a black body radiation varies
T2 T1 with temperature and wavelength. As the temperature of the
black body increases, two distinct behaviors are observed.
The first effect is that the peak of the distribution shifts to
loge (T 2-T1)
shorter wavelengths. This shift is found to obey the following

relationship called Wien’s displacement law.
C
mT  b
V
Here, b is a constant called Wien’s constant. The value of this
t constant for perfectly black body in SI unit is 2.898×10–3 m-
(a) (b) K. Thus,
1
m 
Fig. 14.28 T
Set Up : A double walled vessel (v) containng water in Here,  m is the wavelength corresponding to the
between two walls.
maximum spectral emissive power e . The second effect
A copper calorimeter (C) containing hot water placed inside is that the total amount of energy the black body emits per
the double walled vessel. Two thermometers through the lids
unit area per unit time   T  increases with fourth
4
are used to note the temperature T2 of H2O in calorimeter and
T1 of water in between the double walls respectively. power of absolute temperature T. This is also known as the
emissive power. We know
Experiment : The temperature of hot water in the calorimeter

after equal intervals of time is measured. e   e d  Area under e –  graph  T 4
0
Result : A graph is plotted between log (T2 – T1) and time (t).
A 2   2  A1  16A1
2
or Area  T 4 
The nature of the graph is observed to be a straight line as it
should be from Newton’s law of cooling.
SCAN CODE
THERMAL PHYSICS
@cbseinfinite
THERMAL PHYSICS 24
Thus, if the temperature of the black body is made two

fold,  m remains half while the area becomes 16 times.
3.7 Solar Constant
Solar constant, the total radiation energy received from the
Sun per unit of time per unit of area on a theoretical surface
perpendicular to the Sun’s rays and at Earth’s mean distance
from the Sun. It is most accurately measured from satellites
where atmospheric effects are absent.
Fig. 14.30
Fig. 14.31
SCAN CODE
THERMAL PHYSICS
@cbseinfinite
THERMAL PHYSICS 25
SOLVED EXAMPLES
Example - 1 (d) The atmosphere serves purpose of a blanket over the
Burns from steam are usually more serious than those earth and it does not allow earth’s heat to be radiated
during night.
from boiling water. Why ?
(e) This is due to the fact that steam contains more heat in
Sol. For water, the latent heat of fusion and vaporisation are, the form of latent heat (540 calories/ gram) than water.
Lf = 3.33 × 105 J kg–1 and LV = 22.6 × 105 J respectively. It
means 3.33 × 105 J of heat are needed to melt 1 kg of ice at Example - 3
0°C and 22.6 × 105 J of heat are needed to convert 1 kg of Two slabs of thickness l1 and l2 and conductivities K1
water to steam at 100°C. So, steam at 100°C carries 540 cal/gm and K2 are in the thermal constant with each other as
more heat than water at 100°C. This is why burns from steam shown in the figure alongside. The temperature of their
are usually more serious than those from boiling water. outer surfaces are T 1 and T 2 respectively (T 1 > T 2).
Example - 2 Determine the temperature at their interface and the rate
of heat transfer through the slabs in the steady state
Explain why :
condition. Also find the equivalent conductivity of the
(a) a body with large reflectivity is a poor emitter.
system.
(b) a brass tumbler feels colder than a wooden tray in
l1 l2
winter.
(c) On optical pyrometry (for measuring high
temperatures) caliberated for an ideal black body
radiation, gives too low a value for the temperature
of a red hot iron piece in the open, but gives a correct
value for the temperature when the same piece is in
the furnace.
Sol. If T be the temperature at the interface, then the rate at
(d) the earth without its atmosphere would be which heat is transferred through slab ‘2’ is given by :
inhospitably cold.
d1 K1 A  T1  T 
(e) a heating system based on circulation of steam are  ...(i)
more efficient in warming a building than those based dt l1
on circulation of hot water.
d 2 K 2 A  T  T2 
and  ...(ii)
Sol. (a) The body with large reflectivity would be poor absorber dt l2
of radiations. Poor absorbers are poor radiators of In steady state,
radiation. Hence, body with large reflectivity is a poor
emitter. K1 A  T1  T  K 2 A  T  T2 

(b) Brass is a good conductor of heat. When we touch l1 l2
brass tumbler with our fingers, our body heat is quickly
K1T1l2  K 2 l1T2
conducted to the brass tumbler and hence temperature  T ...(iii)
K1l2  K 2 l1
of the finger tips is reduced. Thus, the brass-tumbler
feels colder. Putting the value of (iii) in equations (i) or (ii), we get
On the other hand, wood is a bad conductor, hence d A  T1  T2 
our body heat is not conducted to the wooden tray.  [ l1 = l2]
dt  l1 l 
(c) The temperature of red hot iron in the oven is given by   2 
 K1 K 2 
E 1 =  T 4. When iron is taken out in the open
temperature (T 0), its radiation energy is given by,
ES =  (T4 – T04). Thus, the pyrometer measures low
l +l2  2K 1 K 2
 K  K K
or K 1
values for the red hot iron in the open.  l1 l  1 2

  2 
 K1 K 2 
@cbseinfinite
THERMAL PHYSICS 26
Two rods A and B are of equal length. Each ends at A blacksmith fixes iron ring on the rim of the wooden
temperatures T1 and T2. What is the condition that will wheel of a bullock cart. The diameter of the rim and the
ensure equal rates of flow of heat through the rods A and iron ring are 5.243 m and 5.231 m respectively at 27°C. To
B? what temperature should be ring be heated so as to fit the
rim of the wheel ?
Sol. Suppose that the two rods 1 and 2 have same temperature
difference T1 – T2 across their ends and the length of each Sol. Given, T1 = 27°C, L T = 5.231 m
1
rod is ‘d’.
L T = 5.243 m
2
For their same rate of heat condition, we have
So, L T = L T [1 + 1 (T2 – T1)]
K1 A1  T1  T2  K 2 A 2  T1  T2 
2 1
=  5.243 = 5.231 [1 + 1.20 × 10–5 °C–1 (T2– 27°C)]

d d
or T2 = 218°C.
 K1A1 = K2A2
Example - 7
A1 K 2 Two ideal gas thermometers A and B use oxygen and
 A 2 = K1 hydrogen respectively. The following observations are
made :
i.e., for the same rate of heat conduction, the area of cross-
Temperature Pressure Pressure
section of the two rods should be inversely proportional
thermometer A thermometer B
to their coefficients of thermal conductivity.
Triple point 1.250 × 105 Pa 0.200 × 105 Pa
Example - 5
of water
The difference between length of a certain brass rod and Normal melting 1.797 × 105 Pa 0.287 × 105 Pa
that of a steel rod is claimed to be constant at all point of sulphur
temperatures. Is this possible ?
(a) What is the absolute temperature of normal melting
Sol. Yes, it is possible. Let 1, and 2 be the coefficients of point of sulphur as read by the thermometer A and B ?
linear expansion and l1 and l2 be the lengths of brass and (b) What do you think is the reason for the slightly
steel rods respectively. Suppose that the temperature of different answers from A and B? (Thermometers are
the rod is increased by T. Then, change in length of brass not faulty). What further procedure is needed in the
rod, experiment to reduce the discrepancy between the
l1 = l1 1 T two readings ?
and change in the length of the steel rod,
Sol. (a) For thermometer A,
l2 = l2 2 T.
ptr = 1.250 × 105 Pa
If the difference between the lengths of the two rods is to
Ttr = 273.16 K
remain same, then
p = 1.797 × 105 Pa
or l1 = l2
and T=?
or l1 1 T = l2 2 T.
p tr p T
l1  Now, using   T  p tr
 2 Ttr T p tr
or l2 1
Thus, the lengths of the two rods should be in the inverse 1.797  105  273.16
=
ratio of their coefficients of linear expansion. 1.250  105
= 392.69 K
@cbseinfinite
THERMAL PHYSICS 27
Example - 9
For the thermometer B,
A brass boiler has a base area of 0.15 m2 and thickness 1.0 cm.
p tr = 0.200 × 105 Pa, Ttr = 273.16 K
It boils water at the rate of 6.0 kg/min when placed on a
P = 0.287 × 105 Pa, T = ? gas stove. Estimate the temperature of the part of the
flame in contact with the boiler. Thermal conductivity of
Ttr 0.287  105 brass = 109 Js–1 m–1 °C–1. (Heat of vaporization of water
Ttr = p.   273.16
p tr 0.200  105 = 2256 × 103 J kg–1)
= 391.98 K Sol. Here, base area A = 0.15 m2
(b) The discrepancy between the two readings is due to Thickness, x = 1 cm = 1 × 10–2 m
the fact that the gases are not perfectly ideal gases. To K = 109 Js–1 m–1 °C–1
reduce the discrepancy, the readings should be taken L = 2256 × 103 J kg–1
at low pressures so that the gases could show perfect T = (T – 100)
behaviour. Here, T = temperature of the part of the flame in contact
with boiler.
Example - 8 Rate of boiling of water = 6 kg min–1. Rate at which heat is
being supplied to water is :
What is the temperature of the steel-copper junction in
the steady state of the system. Length of the steel rod  mL 6  2256  103
 
= 15.0 cm; length of the copper rod = 10.0 cm, temperature t t 60
of the furnace = 300°C, temperature of the other end
= 2.2556 × 105 Js–1
= 0°C. The area of cross-section of the steel rod is twice
that of the copper rod. [Theorem conductivity of steel   L 
Also, = KA  
= 50.2 Js –1 m–1 K–1; and of copper = 385 Js–1 m–1 K–1] t  x 
Steel
109  0.15   T  100 
=
Furnace Ice 1 102
(300°) 0°C
= 1635 (T – 100)
Insulating
Copper
material 
Equating the above two values of
t
Sol. Heat loss is reduced by placing insulating material around
the rods. In the steady state, the rate of heat flowing across 1635 (T – 100) = 2.256 × 105
a cross-section of the rod is the same at every point along
2.256  105
the length of the combined steel-copper rod. Let T be the  T – 100 =  138
1635
temperature of the steel-copper junction in the steady state.
 T = 138 + 100 = 238°C
K1 A1  300  T  K2 A2 T  0
Then, 
L1 L2
Example - 10
Where 1 and 2 refer to the steel and copper rods A clock which keeps correct time at 25°C has a pendulum
respectively. For A1 = 2A2, L1 = 15 cm, made of brass. How many seconds will it gain per day
L2 = 10 cm, when the temperature falls to the freezing point?
K1 = 50.2, K2 = 385, we have (brass = 18.7 × 10–6/°C)
Sol. Let l0 be the length of the pendulum at 0°C and l at 25°C

50.2  2  300  T  385T
 and let T0 and T be the corresponding time periods.
15 10
Solving it, we get, T = 44.4°C T l l 1  t 
Thus, T =  0  1  t
0 l0 l0
@cbseinfinite
THERMAL PHYSICS 28
= 1  18.7  106  25 80  T   65  T 

or
0
 0
 65  T   55  T 
0 0
= 1  467.5  106 
1/ 2
or (80 – T0) (55 – T0) = (65 – T0)2

1 or 4400 – 55T0 – 80T0 + T02 = 4225 – 130T0 + T02
=  1 (467.5 × 10–6) = 1.00023375
2 or 5T0 = 175 or T0 = 35°C
But as the pendulum keeps correct time at 25°C, T = 1s and Example - 12
so at this temperature the pendulum makes (24 × 60 × 60 =
A ‘thermocol’ ice box is a cheap and efficient material for
86400) complete oscillations.
storing small quantities of cooked food in summer in
1 particular. A cubical ice box of side 30cm has a thickness
At 0°C, the time period is given by T0  s of 5.0 cm. If 4.0 kg of ice are put in the box, estimate the
1.00023375
amount of ice remaining after 6 h. The outside temperature
Number of oscillations made per day
is 45°C, and coefficient of thermal conductivity = 0.01 J/s
86400s mC°. Heat of fusion of water = 335 J/kg.

1/1.00023375  s Sol. We are given that
Number of seconds gained by the clock each of side of cubical box, L = 30 cm = 0.3 m
= 86420.2 s – 86400 s = 20.2 s thickness of each side, x = 5 cm = 0.05 cm
Example - 11 temperature difference between the outside and the inside
of the box,
A body takes 5 minutes to cool from 80°C to 65°C and 10
minutes to cool to 55°C. Find the temperature of the T1 – T2 = 45 – 0 = 45°C
surroundings. time for which heat flow is considered
Sol. In the first case, T1 = 80°C, T2 = 65°C, t = 5 min t = 6 h = (6 × 60 × 60)s = 21600 s
Let T0 be the temperature of the surroundings thermal conductivity of thermocole, k = 0.01 J/s mC°
heat of fusion of water, L = 335 J/g
T  T 
From ln
1
 Kt, we get
0
surface area of the box
T  T 
2 0
= 6 (0.30 m × 0.30 m) = 0.54 m2
If m is the mass of ice that melts in 6 h,
80  T0 
ln 65  T  5K ...(i)
 0
Q = mL ...(i)
In the second case, kA  T1  T2  t

Also, Q  ...(ii)
x
T1 = 65°C, T2 = 55°C, t = 10 min – 5 min = 5 min
From equations (i) and (ii), we get
 T1  T0 
From ln T  T  Kt, we get kA  T1  T2  t
 2 0 mL 
x
 65  T0  kA  T1  T2  t
ln 55  T  5K ...(ii) or m
 0
Lx
From equation (i) and (ii), 0.01 J / smC   0.54 m 2   45 C   21600s 

or m
 335 J / g   0.05m 
 80  T 
0  65  T  0
ln = ln
 65  T 
0  55  T  0
= 313 g = 0.313 kg
Mass of ice left after 6 h = 4 kg – 0.313 kg
= 3.687 kg = 3.7 kg
@cbseinfinite
THERMAL PHYSICS 29
Example - 13 Ans. (c)

4 4
From what height must a block of ice be dropped in order E 2 eA 2 T24  A 2   T2  2  800 
Sol.       
that it may melt completely. It is assumed that the whole E1 eA1T1  A1   T1 
4
1  400 
of energy is retained by ice. E2 = 32 E1
(Latent heat of ice = 3.33 × 10 J/kg)5
= 4800 W
Sol. Let mass of ice block = m (kg) E = 4.8 KW
Height through which it is dropped = h (m) Example - 16
PE of the block, W = mgh (J) The area of a hole of heat furnace is 10–4 m2. It radiates
Since it is assumed that whole of this energy is retained by l.58 × 105 cal of heat per hour. If the emissivity of the furnace
ice and is converted into heat Q, is 0.80, then its temperature is :
Q = mgh (J) ...(i) (a) 1500 K (b) 2000 K

(c) 2500 K (d) 3000 K
If this heat is to melt the ice, then
Ans. (c)
Q = (m kg) × (3.33 × 105 J/kg) = 3.33 × 105 m(J) ...(ii)
Sol. E  eAT 4
From equation (i) and (ii),
mgh = 3.33 × 105 m 1.58 105  4.2
 0.8  5.67  108  104  T 4
60  60
3.33  105
or h=
9.8
or h = 3.4 × 104 m T = 2524  2500 K
If the total surface area of human body is 1.2 m2 and the
The temperature of body is increased from 27°C to 127°C.
temperature is 30°C, then the net rate of radiation from the
The radiation emitted by it increases by a factor of :
body if surrounding temperature is 20°C would be [Take
(a) 256/81 (b) 15/9
emissivity of human body = 1]
(c) 4/5 (d) 12/27
(a) 574 W (b) 72 W
Ans. (a)
(c) 800 W (d) 60 W
Sol. E  eAT 4
Ans. (b)
E  eA  T 4  Ts4 
4
E 2  T2  Sol.
 
E1  T1 
E  1  5.67  108  1.2   3034  2934 
4
E 2  400 
  E = 72 W
E1  300 
Example - 18
256 A solid sphere cools at the rate of 2.8°C/min, when its
E2  E1
81 temperature is 127°C. The rate at which another solid sphere
of same material of twice the radius will lose its temperature
Example - 15
at 327°C is given by [Take the surrounding temperature at
A sphere has a surface area of 1.0 m2 and a temperature of 27°C]
400 K and the power radiated from it is 150 W. Assuming
(a) 6.8 °C/min (b) 5.6 °C/min
the sphere is a black body radiator, the power in kilowatt
radiated when the area expands to 2.0m2 and the temperature (c) 9.72 °C/min (d) 8.4 °C/min
changes to 800 K is : Ans. (c)
(a) 6.2 (b) 9.6
(c) 4.8 (d) 16
@cbseinfinite
THERMAL PHYSICS 30
Sol. Heat lost per second = msdT
4 3 
Heat lost by first sphere   r   s  2.8 ...(i)
3 
From Stefan’s law, heat lost  A  T  Ts  ...(ii)

4 4
From equation (i) and (ii)
4 3 
 r   s  2.8   4r  400    300  
2 4 4
3 
2.8
rs    400    300   ...(iii)
4 4
3  
For second phase
2 dT
   600    300   ...(iv)
4 4
rs
3 dt  
Divided equation (iv) by equation (iii)
 600    300 
4 4
dT 2
   9.72 C/ min
dt 2.8  400 4   300 4
@cbseinfinite
THERMAL PHYSICS 31

Heat, Temperature and Calorimetry 6. The radius of a ring is R and its coefficient of linear expansion
Temperature and Heat is . If the temperature of ring increases by , then its
1. At absolute zero circumference will increase by :
(a) all substances exist in solid form (a)  R (b) 2 R
(b) molecular motion ceases  

(c)  R (d)  R
(c) water freezes 2 4
(d) None of the above 7. A steel wire of cross–sectional area 0.5 mm2 is held between
2. At critical temperature, the surface tension of a liquid is : two fixed supports. If the wire is just taut at 20°C, determine
(a) zero the tension when the temperature falls to 0°C. Coefficient
of linear expansion of steel is 1.2 × 10–5/°C and its Young’s
(b) infinity
modulus is 2.0 × 1011 N/m2.
(c) the same as that at any other temperature
(a) 24 N (b) 36 N
(d) cannot be determined
(c) 12 N (d) 6 N
3. The graph between two temperature scales A and B is
shown in figure. 8. A solid ball of metal has a spherical cavity inside it. If the
ball is heated the volume of cavity will :
(a) increase (b) decrease
(c) remain unchanged (d) data insufficient
Thermal Expansion
9. An iron ball of mass 0.2 kg is heated to 10°C and put into a
block of ice at 0°C. 2.5 g of ice melts. If the latent heat of
fusion of ice is 80 cal/g, then the specific heat of iron in
cal/g°C is :
(a) 1 (b) 0.1
(c) 0.8 (d) 0.08
Between upper fixed point and lower fixed point, there are
150 equal divisions on scale A and 100 on scale B. The 10. Equal masses of three liquids A, B and C have temperatures
relationship for conversion between the two scales is given 10°C, 25°C and 40°C respectively. If A and B are mixed,
by : the mixture has a temperature of 15°C. If B and C are mixed,
the mixture has a temperature of 30°C. If A and C are mixed,
t A  180 t B t A  30 t the mixture will have a temperature of:
(a)  (b)  B
100 150 150 100 (a) 16°C (b) 20°C
(c) 25°C (d) 29°C
t B  180 t A t B  40 t A
(c)  (d)  11. The temperatures of equal masses of three different liquids
150 100 100 180
A, B and C are 12°C, 19°C and 28°C respectively. The
4. The reading of Centigrade thermometer coincides with that
temperature when A and B are mixed is 16°C, and when B
of Fahrenheit thermometer in a liquid. The temperature of
and C are mixed, it is 23°C. What will be the temperature
the liquid is :
when A and C are mixed ?
(a) –40°C (b) 0°C
(a) 15.6 °C (b) 23.2 °C
(c) 100°C (d) 300°C
(c) 20.3 °C (d) 25.8 °C
5. Which of the following parameters does not characterize
the thermodynamic state of matter? 12. 50 g of ice at 0°C is mixed with 50 g of water at 60°C, final
(a) temperature (b) pressure temperature of mixture will be :
(c) work (d) volume (a) 0°C (b) 40°C

(c) 10°C (d) 15°C
@cbseinfinite
THERMAL PHYSICS 32
13. Two metal rods A and B are having their initial length in 19. Steel wire of length L at 40°C is suspended from the ceiling
the ratio 2 : 3 and the co-efficients of linear expansion in and then a mass m is hung from its free end. The wire is
the ratio 3 : 4. When they are heated through the same cooled down from 40°C to 30°C to regain its original length
temperature difference, the ratio of their linear expansion L. The coefficient of linear thermal expansion of steel is
is 10–5/°C. Young’s modulus of steel is 1011N/m2 and radius
(a) 3 : 4 (b) 1 : 2 of the wire is 1 mm. Assume that length (L) >> diameter
9d) of the wire. Then the value of ‘m’ (in kg to nearest,
(c) 2 : 3 (d) 4 : 3
integer).
14. A bi-metallic strip is made of two strips A and B having
co-efficients of linear expansion A and B. If A <B, 20. Two rods of different materials having coefficients of
then on heating the strip will thermal expansion 1 ,  2 and Young’s moduli Y1, Y2
(a) bend with A on outer side respectively are fixed separately between two rigid walls.
(b) bend with B on outer side The rods are heated such that they undergo the same
increase in temperature. There is no bending of the rods.
(c) not bend at all
If 1 :  2 = 2 : 3; then thermal stress developed in both
(d) None of these
15. Two rods of different materials having coefficients of Y1
rods would be equal, if Y is
thermal expansion 1 and 2 and Young’s moduli Y1 and 2
Y2 respectively are fixed between two rigid massive walls.

The rods are heated such that these undergo the same 21. As a result temperature rise of 32°C, a bar with a crack at
increase in temperature. There is no bending of the rods. its center buckles upwards. If the fixed distance L0 is 4 m,
If 1 : 2 = 2 : 3, the thermal stresses developed in the two and the coefficient of linear expansion of bar is 25 × 10–6
rods are equal, provided Y1 : Y2 is °C–1. Find the rise x (in cm, to the nearest integer) of the
center.
(a) 2 : 3 (b) 1 : 1
(c) 3 : 2 (d) 4 : 9
16. Which of the following qualities are best suited for a
cooking utensil
(a) high specific heat and low thermal conductivity
(b) high specific heat and high thermal conductivity
(c) low specific heat and low thermal conductivity
(d) low specific heat and high thermal conductivity
17. What should be the lengths of steel and copper rods at
0°C so that the length of the steel rod is 5 cm longer than
the copper rod at any temperature? 22. Two vessels connected at the bottom by a thin pipe with a
 (Steel) = 1.1 × 10–5 °C–1 and sliding plug contain liquid at 20°C and 80°C respectively.
The coefficient of cubic expansion of liquid is 10–3 K–1.
 (Copper) = 1.7 × 10–5 °C–1
(a) 14.17 cm, 9.17 cm (b) 9.17 cm, 14.17 cm  h 20 
The ratio of heights columns in the vessel  h  is nearest
(c) 28.34 cm, 18.34 cm (d) 14.17 cm, 18.34 cm  80 
18. The radius of a metal sphere at room temperature T is R, to which integer?

and the coefficient of linear expansion of the metal is . 23. The area of cross - section of a railway track is 0.01 m2.
The sphere is heated a little by a temperature T so that its The temperature variation is 10°C. Coefficient of linear
new temperature is (T + T). The increase in the volume expansion of material of track is 10–5/°C. The energy stored
of the sphere is approximately : per meter in the track is _____ J/m.
(a) 2R T (b) R2 T (Young’s modulus of material of track is 1011 Nm–2)
(c) 4R T/3
3
(d) 4R T
3
@cbseinfinite
THERMAL PHYSICS 33
Calorimetry 31. Three copper blocks of masses M 1, M 2 and M 3 kg,

24. Relation between molar and principal specific heat of gases respectively are brought into thermal contact till they reach
(a) Cp = Mcp (b) Cp = M + cp equilibrium. Before contact, they were at temperatures T1,
T2, T3 (T1 > T2 > T3). Assuming there is no heat loss to the
(c) cp = MCp (d) Cp = M – cp
surroundings, the equilibrium temperature T is :
25. Liquids at temperature 60°C and 20°C, respectively, have
mass ratio 3 : 4 and their specific heats in the ratio 4 : 5. If (s is specific heat of copper)
the two liquid mixed, the resultant temperature
T1  T2  T3
(a) 70°C (b) 0°C (a) T 
3
(c) 35°C (d) 40°C
26. Heat given to a body which raises its temperature by 1°C M1T1  M 2 T2  M 3 T3
is (b) T 
M1  M 2  M 3
(a) water equivalent (b) thermal capacity
(c) specific heat (d) temperature gradient M1T1  M 2 T2  M 3 T3
(c) T 
27. If m is the mass,  is temp. and ‘s’ is specific heat, then 3  M1  M 2  M 3 
thermal capacity K is given by
(a) K = ms  (b) K = m  M1T1s  M 2 T2 s  M 3 T3s
(d) T 
ms M1  M 2  M 3
(c) K  (d) K = ms

32. In two experiments with a continuous flow - calorimeter
28. Dimensions of latent heat are to determine the specific heat capacity of a liquid, an input
(a) [M1 L2 T–2] (b) [M0 L2 T–2] power of 16 W produced a rise of 10 K in the liquid.
(c) [M L T ]
1 1 –1
(d) [M1 L 1 T–2] When the power was doubled, the same temperature rise
was achieved by making the rate of flow of liquid three
29. Equal masses of two liquids A and B contained in vessels
times faster. Find the power lost (in W) to the surroundings
of negligible heat capacity are supplied heat at the same
in each case, assuming that heat lost to surroundings
rate. The (temperature vs time) graphs for the two liquids
depends on temp of liquid and atmospheric temp. only.
are shown in figure. If S represents specific heat and L
represents latent heat of liquid, then 33. A copper ball of mass 100 gm is at a temperature T. It is
dropped in a copper calorimeter of mass 100 gm filled
with 170 gm of water at room temperature. Subsequently,
the temperature of the system is found to be 75° C. (given
room temperature = 30°C, specific heat of copper = 0.1
cal/gm°C. Temperature T (in °C) is:
34. Two liquids A and B are at 32° C and 24°C respectively.
When mixed in equal masses the temperature of the mixture
 SA 
if found to be 28°C. The ratio of specific heats  S  is
 B
(a) SA > SB ; LA < LB (b) SA > SB ; LA > LB
(c) SA < SB ; LA < LB (d) SA < SB ; LA > LB
cal
30. If mass-energy equivalence is taken into account, when water 35. A 50 gm lead bullet (specific heat 0.020 gC ) is initially
is cooled to form ice, the mass of water should
at 30°. It is fired vertically upwards with a speed of 84 m/
(a) increase
s. On returning to the starting level, it strikes a slab of ice
(b) remain unchanged
kept at 0°C. (A × 100) mg of ice is melted due to this. Find
(c) decrease the value of ‘A’.
(d) first increase then decrease
(Take:- Lice = 80 cal/gm and 1 cal = 4.2 J)
@cbseinfinite
THERMAL PHYSICS 34
36. A liquid at 30°C is poured very slowly into an open 43. Two metal rods A and B of equal lengths and equal cross
Calorimeter that is at temperature of 110°C. The boiling sectional areas are joined end-to-end. The co-efficients of
temperature of the liquid is 80°C. It is found that the first thermal conductivity of A and B are in the ratio 2 : 3. When
5 gm of the liquid completely evaporated. After pouring the free end of A is maintained at 100°C and the free end
another 80 gm of the liquid the equilibrium temperature is of B is maintained at 0°C, the temperature of the junction
found to be 50 °C. The ratio of the Latent heat of the liquid is
to its specific heat will be ____ °C. (Neglect the heat (a) 30°C (b) 40°C
exchange with surrounding)
(c) 50°C (d) 60°C
37. How much heat is required to convert 8.0 g of ice at –
44. In steady state
15°C to steam at 100°C? (Given, Cice = 0.53 cal/g–°C, Lf
= 80 cal/g and Lv = 539 cal/g, and cwater = 1 cal/g–°C) (a) temperature does not change with time
Give the answer in kcal correct to one decimal place. (b) all parts of the body are at same temperature
38. The temperature of equal masses of three different liquids (c) there is no flow of heat
A, B and C are 12°C, 19°C and 28°C respectively. the (d) all of the above
temperature when A and B are mixed is 16° C and when B 45. Two metallic plates of equal thicknesses and thermal
and C are mixed it is 23°C. What should be the temperature conductivities K1 and K2 are put together face to face and
when A and C are mixed (in °C, correct to two decimal a common plate is constructed, figure. The equivalent
places)? thermal conductivity will be:
39. An ice cube of mass 0.1 kg at 0°C is placed in an isolated
k1 k2
container which is at 227°C. The specific heat s of the
container varies with temperature T according to the l l
empirical relation s = A + BT, where A = 100 cal/kg-K and
K1 K 2 2K1 K 2
B = 2 × 10–2 cal/kg-K2. If the final temperature of the (a) K  K (b) K  K
container is 27°C, determine the mass of the container (in 1 2 1 2
kg, correct to one decimal place). (Latent heat of fusion

K  K 22 
2 3/ 2
for water = 8 × 104 cal/kg, specific heat of water = 103 cal/ K1  K 2 1

(c) (d)
kg-K). 2 2K1 K 2
40. m grams of steam at 100°C is mixed with 200g of ice at its 46. Two metallic plates of equal lengths and thermal
melting point in a thermally insulated container. If it conductivities k1 and k2 are put together such that their
produces liquid water at 40°C [heat of vaporization of ends coincide. If their cross-sectional areas are the same,
water is 540 cal/g and heat of fusion of ice is 80 cal/g], the then the equivalent thermal conductivity of the combination
value of m (in grams) is _______. will be :
41. 1 kg ice at –10°C is mixed with 0.2 kg of steam at 200°C.
If final temperature (°C) of mixture at equilibrium is A k1
A k2
 255 
Teq    , then fill the value of x.
 x 
k1 k 2 2k1k 2
Latent heat of fusion of ice = 80 cal/gram, latent heat of (a) k  k (b) k  k
1 2 1 2
vaporization of water = 540 cal/gram, specific heat of water
= 1 cal/gm K
k1  k 2
specific heat capacity of ice  specific heat of steam = (c) (d) k1 k 2
2
0.5 cal/gram-K.
47. The ends of a copper rod of length 1m and area of cross
Heat Transfer 2
section 1 cm are maintained at 0°C and 100°C. At the
Heat Transfer, Conduction and Convection centre, power is supplied at a constant rate of 25 J/s. The
42. Dimension of co-efficient of thermal conductivity are temperature gradient on higher temperature side of the rod
(a) [L0M1T–3K–1] (b) [L1M1T–3K–1] in steady state (in °C/m) will be
(c) [L1M1T–3K] (d) [L1M–1T–2K–1] (K = 400 J/m-K-s)
@cbseinfinite
THERMAL PHYSICS 35
48. Three rods made of same material and having same cross 51. The temperature of the two outer surface (end surfaces
- section have been joind as shown in the figure. Each rod shown) of a composite slab, consisting of two materials
is of same length. The left end is kept at 0°C and both the having coefficients of thermal conductivity K and 2K,
right ends are kept at 90°C. The temperature of the junction thickness ‘x’ and ‘4x’ are T2 and T1(T2 > T1). The rate of
of the three rods (in degree Celsius) will be heat transfer through the slab in steady state is
 A  T2 – T1  K  1
  , where ‘f’ is equal to
 x f
(all quantities measured in S.I unit)
49. Two rectangular blocks, having identical dimensions, can

be arranged either in configuration I or in configuration II
as shown in the figure. One of the blocks has thermal
conductivity K and other 2K. The temperature difference 52. Two conducting cylinders of equal length but different radii
between the ends along the x-axis is the same in both the are connected in series between two heat baths kept at
configurations. It takes 9 s to transport certain amount of temperature T1 = 300 K and T2 = 100 K, as shown in the
heat from the hot end in the configuration I. The time (in figure. The radius of the bigger cylinder twice that of the
seconds) to transport the same amount of heat in the smaller one and the thermal conductivities of the materials
configuration II is: of the smaller and the larger cylinders are K1 and K2
respectively. If the temperature at the junction of the two
cylinders in the steady state is 200 K, then K1/K2 =
_______.
50. Figure shows a metal rod of uniform cross section area A,

with variable thermal conductivity given by
  
k  x   k 0 sec  x  . If the end A is maintained at
 6L 
temperature T0 , the rod carries a thermal current I0 (from
Radiation
I0 L 
B to A) in steady state and k AT  3 ; find the 53. A sphere, a cube and a thin circular plate, all of same
0 1 material and same mass, are initially heated to same high
temperature of the end B of the rod. Let’s say this temperature. Choose the correct statement.
temperature is kT0, find integer value k. (a) The plate will cool fastest and cube the slowest.
(b) The sphere will cool fastest and cube the slowest.
(c) The plate will cool fastest and sphere the slowest.
(d) The cube will cool fastest and plate the slowest.
54. Velocity of heat radiation v as related to the velocity of
light c is
(a) v > c (b) v = c
(c) v < c (d) no definite relation
@cbseinfinite
THERMAL PHYSICS 36
55. Heat is transferred most rapidly by the process of 59. A body cools from 50°C to 46°C in 5 minutes and to 40°C
(a) Conduction (b) Convection in the next 10 minutes. The surrounding temperature is :
(c) Radiation (d) Combustion (a) 30°C (b) 28°C
56. Two circular discs A and B with equal radii are blackened. (c) 36°C (d) 32°C
They are heated to same temperature and then cooled under
60. Newton’s law of cooling is used in laboratory for
identical conditions. What inference do you draw from
determining:
their cooling curves as shown in figure?
(a) Specific heat of gases (b) Specific heat of liquids
B (c) Latent heat of gases (d) Latent heat of liquids
61. If the rate of change of temperature is 0.2°C/ min and
R A excess temperature of a body over surrounding is 20°C,
the constant of proportionality is
(a) 0.1 (b) 0.01
( – 0) (c) 1 (d) 0.001
(a) A and B have same specific heats 62. Newton’s law of cooling is applicable for
(b) specific heat of A is less (a) Any excess of temperature over the surrounding
(c) specific heat of B is less (b) Small excess of temperature over the surrounding
(d) nothing can be said (c) Large excess of temperature over the surrounding
57. The temperature of coffee in a cup with time is most likely (d) Very large excess of temperature over the surrounding
given by the curve in figure.
63. Newton’s law of cooling leads us to the following
expression,
Temperature
Temperature
(a) ( – 0) = Kt + C (b) log ( – 0) = Kt + C

(c) log  = Kt + C (d)  = K0 + C
(a) (b)
64. Two spheres of the same material have radii 1 m and 4 m
Time Time and temperatures 4000 K and 2000 K respectively. The
ratio of the energy radiated per second by the first sphere
to that by the second is
Temperature
Temperature
(a) 1 : 1 (b) 16 : 1
(c) (d) (c) 4 : 1 (d) 1 : 9
65. Which of the following is more close to a black body ?
Time Time
(b) Black board paint (b) Green leaves
58. A block of steel heated to 100°C is left in a room to cool.
Which of the curves shown in the figure represents the (c) Black holes (d) Red roses
decrease of temperature with time? 66. Infrared radiations are detected by
(a) spectrometer (b) pyrometer
D
C (c) nanometer (d) photometer
Temperature
B
A
Time
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
@cbseinfinite
THERMAL PHYSICS 37
67. A liquid in a beaker has temperature (t) at time t and 0 is 71. A piece of metal is heated to temperature  and then
temperature of surroundings, then according to Newton’s allowed to cool in a room which is at temperature 0. The
law of cooling, the correct graph between loge ( – 0) and graph between the temperature T of the metal and time t
will be closed to :
t is :
T
T
(a) (b)
O t O t
T T
(c) (d)
O t O t
72. If the temperature of the sun were to increase from T to 2T

and its radius from R to 2R, then the ratio of the radiant
energy received on earth to what it was previously, will be
(a) 4 (b) 16
(c) 32 (d) 64
73. In the figure, the distribution of energy density of the
radiation emitted by a black body at a given temperature
is shown. The possible temperature of the black body is
68. The maximum wavelength of radiations emitted at 900 K 3
n × 10 K. Write n as the nearest integer.
is 4 m. What will be the maximum wavelength of –3
(Take:- b = 2.898 × 10 mK)
radiations emitted at 1200K:
(a) 3 m (b) 0.3 m
(c) l m (d) none of these
69. A bucket full of hot water is kept in a room and it cools
from 75°C to 70°C in T1 minutes, from 70°C to 65°C in T2
minutes and from 65°C to 60°C in T3 minutes then
(a) T1 = T2 = T3 (b) T1 < T2 > T3
(c) T1 > T2 > T3 (d) T1 < T2 < T3
70. Assuming the sun to be a spherical body of radius R at a
temperature of T K, evaluate the total radiant power,
incident on earth, at a distance r from the sun, where r0 is
radius of earth 74. Two starts (say S1 and S2) emit their maximum intensity
–6 –7
radiations at wavelengths 10 m and 0.4 × 10 m
4r02 R 2 T 4 r02 R 2 T 4
(a) (b)  T2 
r2 r2 respectively. The ratio of their surface temperature  T 
 1
r02 R 2 T 4 R 2 T 4 is
(c) (d)
4r 2 r2
@cbseinfinite
THERMAL PHYSICS 38
75. A body cools in 7 minutes from 60°C. What will be its 78. A glass of boiling water at 100°C cools down to 90°C in
temperature (in °C) after the next 7 minutes? The 10 minutes when placed in surrounding temperature of
temperature of surroundings in 10°C. 30°C. It will cool down to 80°C in an additional time
76. A solid cube of side a, density d and specific heat ‘s’ is at nx – n  x –1
t  10
temperature 400 K. It is placed in an ambient temperature n  x  1 – nx minutes. Assume Newton’s law of
of 200 K.
–3 3 3 cooling to hold. Find x
Take: a = 0.9 m, d = 4.8 ×10 kg/m , s = 2.0 × 10 J/kg K.
79. A body cools in 7 minutes from 60°C to 40°C. What will
Stefan’s constant   6  10 –8 W K 4 m 2 . Consider the be its temperature in °C after next 7 minutes? The tem-
cube to be a black body. If the time for the temperature of perature of surrounding is 10°C.
the cube to drop by 5 K is 1000x second, find x in nearest 80. The emissive power of a black body at T = 300 K is 460
integer. W/m2. Consider a body B of area A = 100 cm2 , coefficient
77. Two planets X and Y revolving around the sun is circular of reflectivity r = 0.3 and coefficient of transmission t =
orbits, have temperature of their surfaces as T1 and T2. If 0.5. Its temperature is 300 K. Then the power radiated by
their distance from the sun are in the ratio of 1 : 4, then B is ____ W.
find T1 : T2. Assume the planets to be in the steady state,
and the sun and the planets to be black-bodies. Neglect
the energy exchange between the two planets.
@cbseinfinite
THERMAL PHYSICS 39

Heat, Temperature and Calorimetry 4. A bimetallic strip consists of metals A and B. It is mounted
1. Consider a spherical shell of radius R at temperature T. rigidly as shown. The metal A has higher coefficient of
The black body radiation inside it can be considered as an expansion compared to that of metal B. When the bimetallic
ideal gas of photons with internal energy per unit volume strip is placed in a cold bath, it will : (2021)
U 1U
u  T 4 and pressure P =   . If the shell now
V 3 V
undergoes an adiabatic expansion the relation between T
and R is : (2015)
1 1 (a) Not bend but shrink

(a) T  (b) T 
R R3 (b) Bend towards the left
(c) Bend towards the right
(c) T  eR (d) T  e3R
(d) Neither bend nor shrink
2. A container with 1 kg of water in it is kept in sunlight, which Heat transfer
causes the water to get warmer than the surroundings. The
5. An experiment take 10 minutes to raise the temperature of
average energy per unit time per unit area received due to
water in a container from 0°C to 100°C and another 55
the sunlight is 700Wm–2 and it is absorbed by the water
minutes to convert it totally into steam by a heater
over an effective area of 0.05m2. Assuming that the heat supplying heat at a uniform rate. Neglecting the specific
loss from the water to the surroundings is governed by heat of the container and taking specific heat of water to
Newton’s law of cooling, the difference (in ºC) in the be 1cal/ g° C, the heat of vapourization according to this
temperature of water and the surroundings after a long time experiment will come out to be : (2015)
will be _____________. (Ignore effect of the container, (a) 560 cal/g (b) 550 cal/g
and take constant for Newton’s law of cooling=0.001s–1,
(c) 540 cal/g (d) 530 cal/g
Heat capacity of water = 4200 J kg –1 K –1
6. A pendulum clock loses 12 s a day if the temperature is
40°C and gains 4 s a day if the temperature is 20°C. The
(2020)
temperature at which the clock will show correct time, and
3. Each slide of a box made of metal sheet in cubic shape is ‘a’ the co-efficient of linear expansion () of the metal of the
at room temperature 'T’, the coefficient of linear expansion pendulum shaft are respectively : (2016)
of the metal sheet is '  ' . The metal sheet is heated uniformly,, (a) 60°C;  = 1.85 × 10–4/°C
by a small temperature T , so that its new temperature is
(b) 30°C;  = 1.85 × 10–3/°C
T  T . Calculate the increase in the volume of the metal
box. (2021) (c) 55°C;  = 1.85 × 10–2/°C
(d) 25°C;  = 1.85 × 10–5/°C
(a) 3a 3 T (b) 4a 3 T
7. 200 g water is heated from 40°C to 60°C. Ignoring the slight
expansion of water, the change in its internal energy is
4 3 close to (Given specific heat of Water = 4184 J/kg/K) :
(c) a T (d) 4a 3T
3
(2016)
(a) 8.4 kJ (b) 4.2 kJ
(c) 16.7 kJ (d) 167.4 kJ
@cbseinfinite
THERMAL PHYSICS 40
8. A simple pendulum made of a bob of mass m and a metallic 12. A body takes 10 minutes to cool from 600 C to 500 C. The
wire of negligible mass has time period 2 s at T = 0°C. If temperature of surroundings is constant at 250 C. Then,
the temperature of the wire is increased and the the temperature of the body after next 10 minutes will be
corresponding change in its time period is plotted against approximately : (2018)
its temperature, the resulting graph is a line of slope S. If
(a) 470 C (b) 410 C
the coefficient of linear expansion of metal is α then the
value of S is (2016) (c) 450 C (d) 430 C
13. When the temperature of a metal wire is increased from 0ºC
 to 10ºC, its length increases by 0.02%. The percentage
(a)  (b)
2 change in its mass density will be closest to :
(2020)
1
(c) 2 (d) (a) 0.06 (b) 0.008

(c) 2.3 (d) 0.8
9. The temperature of an open room of volume 30 m 3
14. The temperature  at the junction of two insulating sheets,
increases from 17°C to 27°C due to the sunshine. The having thermal resistances R1 and R 2 as well as top and
atmospheric pressure in the room remains 1× 10 Pa. If ni
5
bottom temperatures 1 and 2 (as shown in figure) is given
and nf are the number of molecules in the room before and by: (2021)
after heating, then nf – ni will be : (2017)
(a) –2.5 × 1025 (b) – 1.61 × 1023
(c) 1.38 × 1023 (d) 2.5 × 1025

10. A copper ball of mass 100 gm is at a temperature T. It is
dropped in a copper calorimeter of mass 100 gm, filled
with 170 gm of water at room temperature. Subsequently,
the temperature of the system is found to be 75°C. T is
given by : (Given : room temperature = 30°C, specific heat 2 R 2  1 R1 1R 2  2 R1
of copper = 0.1 cal/gm°C) (2017) (a) R 2  R1 (b) R 2  R1
(a) 825°C (b) 800°C
1R1  2 R 2 1R 2   2 R 1
(c) 885°C (d) 1250°C (c) (d)
R1  R 2 R 2  R1
11. In an experiment a sphere of aluminium of mass 0.20 kg is
heated upto 150° C. Immediately, it is put into water of 15. Two identical metal wires of thermal conductivities K1 and
volume 150 cc at 27°C kept in a calorimeter of water
K 2 respectively are connected in series. The effective
equivalent to 0.025 kg. Final temperature of the system is
40°C. The specific heat of aluminium is : thermal conductivity of the combination is: (2021)
(take 4.2 Joule = 1 calorie) (2017) 2K1K 2 K1  K 2

(a) K  K (b) 2K K
(a) 378 J/kg–°C (b) 315 J/kg–°C 1 2 1 2
(c) 476 J/kg–°C (d) 434 J/kg–°C

K1  K 2 K1 K 2
(c) K K (d) K  K
1 2 1 2
@cbseinfinite
THERMAL PHYSICS 41

Heat, temperature and calorimetry 5. If two rods of length L and 2L, having coefficient of linear
expansion  and 2 respectively are connected end–on–
Single Choice Questions
end, the average coefficient of linear expansion of the
1. Find the ratio of the lengths of an iron rod and an aluminium composite rod, equals :
rod for which the difference in the lengths is independent
of temperature. Coefficients of linear expansion of iron and 3 5
aluminium are 12 × 10–6/°C and 23 × 10–6/°C respectively. (a)  (b) 
2 2
(a) 23 : 12 (b) 12 : 23
5
(c) data insufficient (d) Not possible (c)  (d) none of these
3
2. Two rods of different materials having coefficients of thermal
expansion 1, 2 and Young’s modulli Y1, Y2 respectively 6. The coefficient of volume expansion of glycerin is
are fixed between two rigid massive walls. The rods are 49 × 10–5 K–1. What is the fractional change in its density
heated such that they undergo the same increase in for a 30°C rise in temperature ?
temperature. There is no bending of the rods. If1 : 2 = 2 (a) increases by 0.015 (b) increases by 0.005
: 3, the thermal stresses developed in the two rods are equal
(c) decreases by 0.015 (d) decreases by 0.005
provided Y1 : Y2 is equal to :
7. A steel rod is clamped at its two ends and rests on a fixed
horizontal base. The rod is unstrained at 20°C. Find the
longitudinal strain developed in the rod if the temperature
rises to 50°C. Coefficient of linear expansion of steel = 1.2
× 10–5/°C.
(a) 6 × 10–4 (b) 3.6 × 10–5
(c) 2.4 × 10–4 (d) 3.6 × 10–4
(a) 2 : 3 (b) 1 : 1 8. A wooden wheel of radius R is made of two semicircular

parts (see figure). The two parts are held together by a ring
(c) 3 : 2 (d) 4 : 9 made of a metal strip of cross-sectional area S and length L.
3. A blacksmith fixes iron ring on the rim of the wooden wheel L is slightly less than 2R. To fit the ring on the wheel, it is
of a bullock cart. The diameter of the rim and the iron ring heated so that its temperature rises by T and it just steps
are 5.243 m and 5.231 m respectively at 27°C. To what over the wheel. As it cools down to surrounding temperature,
temperature should the ring be heated so as to fit the rim of it presses the semicircular parts together. If the coefficient
the wheel ? ( for iron = 1.2 × 10–5/°C) of linear expansion of the metal is  and its Young’s modulus
is Y, the force that one part of the wheel applies on the other
(a) 191 °C (b) 254 °C
part is
(c) 218 °C (d) 164 °C
4. A hole is drilled in a copper sheet. The diameter of the hole
is 4.24 cm at 27.0°C. What is the change in the diameter of
the hole when the sheet is heated to 227°C ? Coefficient of
linear expansion of copper = 1.70 × 10–5 K–1.
(a) Diameter decreases by 7.2 × 10–3 cm
(b) Diameter increases by 7.2 × 10–3 cm
(c) Diameter decreases by 1.44 × 10–2 cm
(a) 2SYT (b) SYT
(d) Diameter increases by 1.44 × 10–2 cm
(c) SYT (d) 2SYT
@cbseinfinite
THERMAL PHYSICS 42
9. A sphere of aluminium of 0.06 kg placed for sufficient time 14. A copper block of mass 2.5 kg is heated in a furnace to a
in a vessel containing boiling water, so that the sphere is at temperature of 500 °C and then placed on a large ice block.
100°C. It is then immediately transfered a vessel containing What is the maximum amount of ice that can melt ? (Specific
0.25 kg of water at 20°C. The temperature of water rises and heat of copper = 0.39 J g–1 K–1; heat of fusion of water = 335 J
attains a steady state at 24°C. Calculate the specific heat g–1).
capacity of aluminium. (neglect heat loss to vessel and (a) 2.6 kg (b) 10 kg
surroundings)
(c) 3.8 kg (d) 1.5 kg
(a) 870 J kg–1 k–1 (b) 1024 J kg–1 k–1
15. A block of ice of mass M = 10 kg is moved back and forth
(c) 921 J kg–1 k–1 (d) 708 J kg–1 k–1 over the flat horizontal surface of a large block of ice. Both
10. A metal block is made from a mixture of 2.4 kg of aluminium blocks are at 0°C and the force that produces the back–and
1.6 kg of brass and 0.8 kg of copper. The amount of heat –forth motion acts only horizontally. The coefficient of
required to raise the temperature of this block from 20°C to friction between the two surfaces is 0.060. If m = 15.2 g of
80°C is (specific heats of aluminium, brass and copper are water is produced, the total distance travelled by the upper
0.216,0.0917 and 0.0931 cal/kg°C respectively): block relative to the lower is : (Lice = 3.34 × 105 J/kg)
(a) 96.2 cal (b) 44.4 cal (a) 432 m (b) 863 m
(c) 86.2 cal (d) 62.8 cal (c) 368 m (d) 216 m
11. Suppose the specific heat capacity of a substance is varying Multiple Choice Questions
with temperature according to, s = A + BT2 where A and B 16. Two identical beakers are filled with water to the same level
are positive constants and T is temperature in °C. If at 4°C. If one say A is heated while the other B is cooled,
temperature of m kg of this substance has to raise from T°C then:
to 2T°C, then the amount of energy supplied to the substance
is (a) water level in A will rise
(b) water level in B will rise
 7BT 3   5BT 3  (c) water level in A will fall
(a) m  AT  J (b) m  AT  J
 3   3 
(d) water level in B will fall
(c) m [AT + 2BT3] J (b) None of these 17. An aluminium sphere of 20 cm diameter is heated from 0°C
12. A mass of a material exists in its solid form at its melting to 100°C. Its volume changes by (given that coefficient of
temperature 10°C. The following processes then occur to linear expansion for aluminium Al = 23 × 10–6/°C)
the material. (a) 28.9 cc (b) 2.89 cc
Process I : An amount of thermal energy Q is added to the (c) 9.28 cc (d) 49.8 cc
material and 3/4 of the material melts.
Assertion & Reason
Process II : An identical additional amount of thermal energy
Q is added to the material and the material is now a liquid at (A) Statement–I is True, Statement–II is True; Statement–II is a
50°C. correct explanation for Statement–I.
What is the ratio of the latent heat of fusion to the specific (B) Statement–I is True, Statement–II is True; Statement–2 is
heat of the liquid for this material ? NOT a correct explanation for Statement–I.
(a) 80°C (b) 60°C (C) Statement–I is True, Statement–II is False.
(c) 40°C (d) None of these (D) Statement–I is False, Statement–II is True.
13. When 0.15 kg of ice of 0°C mixed with 0.30 kg of water at 18. Statement -1 : A drop of cool water accidentally falls on an
50°C in a container, the resulting temperature is 6.7°C. incandescent lamp which is continuously glowing from long
Calculate the heat of fusion of ice. time, then the bulb breaks.
(swater = 4186 J kg–1 K–1) Statement -2 : As temperature of an object decreases then

it tries to contract and thermal contraction occurs.
(a) 3.34 × 105 J kg–1 k–1 (b) 3.63 × 105 J kg–1 k–1
(a) A (b) B
(c) 3.34 × 106 J kg–1 k–1 (d) 4.19 × 105 J kg–1 k–1
(c) C (d) D
@cbseinfinite
THERMAL PHYSICS 43
19. Statement - 1 : The expanded length l of a rod of original 23. A wall has two layers A and B, each made of different
length l0 is not correctly given by (assuming  to be constant material. Both the layers have the same thickness. The
with T) l = l0 (1 + T), thermal conductivity for A is twice that of B and, under steady
if T is large. condition, the temperature difference across the wall is 36°C.
Statement - 2: It is given by l = l0 eT, which cannot be The temperature difference across the layer A is:
treated as being approximately equal to l = l0 (1 + T) for (a) 6°C (b) 12°C
large values of T.
(c) 24°C (d) 18°C
(a) A (b) B
24. Three rods of same dimensions have thermal conductivities
(c) C (d) D
3k, 2k and k. They are arranged as shown, with their ends at
20. Statement - 1 : The coefficient of volume expansion has 100°C, 50°C and 0°C. The temperature of their junction is :
dimension K–1.
Statement - 2 : The coefficient of volume expansion is
defined as the change in volume per unit volume per unit
change in temperature.
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
Heat transfer
Assertion & Reason
(A) Statement–I is True, Statement–II is True; Statement–II is a 200
(a) 75°C (b) C
correct explanation for Statement–I. 3
(B) Statement–I is True, Statement–II is True; Statement–2 is
NOT a correct explanation for Statement–I. 100
(c) 40°C (d) C
3
(C) Statement–I is True, Statement–II is False.
(D) Statement–I is False, Statement–II is True. 25. Equal temperature differences exist between the ends of two
metallic rods 1 and 2 of equal lengths. Their thermal
21. Statement - 1 : In natural convection, the fluid motion is
conductivities are Kl and K2 and area of cross-section are
caused by density difference produced by temperature
Al and A2, respectively. The condition of equal rates of heat
gradient.
transfer is :
Statement - 2 : In forced convection, the fluid is forced to
flow along the solid surface by means of fans or pumps. (a) K1A2 =K2A1 (b) K1A1 = K2A2
(a) A (b) B (b) K1A12 = K2A22 (d) K12A2 = K22A1
(c) C (d) D 26. Two rods of copper and brass (KC > KB ) of same length
22. One end of a thermally insulated rod is kept at a temperature and area of cross-section are joined as shown. End A is kept
T1 and the other at T2. The rod is composed of two sections at 100°C and end B at 0°C. The temperature at the junction:
of lengths l1 and l2 and thermal conductivities K1 and K2
respectively. The temperature at the interface of the two A Copper Brass B
sections is
(a) will be more than 50°C
l1 l2
T1 T2 (b) will be less than 50°C
(c) will be 50°C
(d) may be more or less than 50°C depending upon the size
of rods
K1 K2
(a) (K2l2T1 + K1l1T2)/(K1l1 + K2l2)
(b) (K2l1T1 + K1l2T2)/(K2l1 + K1l2)
(c) (K1l2T1 + K2l1T2)/(K1l2 + K2l1)
(d) (K1l1T1 + K2l2T2)/(K1l1 + K2l2)
@cbseinfinite
THERMAL PHYSICS 44
27. A long metallic bar is carrying heat from one of its ends to 30. The length of the two rods made up of the same metal and
the other end under steady–state. The variation of having the same area of cross-section are 0.6 m 0.8 m and
temperature  along the length x of the bar from its hot end respectively. The temperature between the ends of first rod
is best described by which of the following figure ? (2009) is 90°C and 60°C and that for the other rod is 150°C and
110°C. For which rod the rate of conduction will be greater
(a) first (b) second
(c) same for both (d) none of these
31. A ring consisting of two parts ADB and ACB of same
conductivity K carries an amount of heat H. The ADB part
is now replaced with another metal keeping the temperatures
T1 and T2 constant. The heat carried increases to 2 H. What
should be the conductivity of the new ADB part ? Given
ACB
 3:
ADB
28. The temperature of the two outer surface of a composite

slab, consisting of two materials having coefficients of
thermal conductivity K and 2K thickness x and 4x,
respectively are T2 and T1 (T2 > T1). The rate of heat transfer
 A  T2  T1  K 
through the slab, in a steady state is  x
 f, with
 
f equals to
x 4x
7
(a) K (b) 2 K
3
T2 K 2K T1
5
(c) K (d) 3 K
2
32. Water is being boiled in a flat bottomed kettle placed on a

(a) 1 (b) 1/2
stove. The area of the bottom is 300 cm2 and the thickness
(c) 2/3 (d) 1/3
is 2 mm. If the amount of steam produced is 1g min–1, then
29. Two identical square rods of metal are welded end to end as the difference of the temperature between the inner and the
shown in figure (i), 20 cal of heat flows through it in 4 min. outer surface of the bottom is : (thermal conductivity of the
If the rods are welded as shown in figure (ii), the same material of the kettle = 0.5 cal–cm–1 °C–1 S–1 and latent
amount of heat will flow through the rods in : heat of the steam is equal to 540 cal g–1)
(a) 12°C (b) 1.2°C
(c) 0.2°C (d) 0.012°C
(a) 1 min (b) 2 min

(c) 4 min (d) 16 min
@cbseinfinite
THERMAL PHYSICS 45
Use the following passage, solve Q. 33 to Q. 36 36. A cylindrical rod of length 50 cm and cross–sectional area 1
PASSAGE –1 cm2 is fitted between a large ice chamber at 0°C and an
evacuated chamber maintained at 27°C as shown in figure.
The rate of flow of heat depends on the nature of material,
Only small portions of the rod are inside the chambers and
cross-sectional area and temperature gradient. If a material
the rest is thermally insulated from the surrounding. The
of conductivity k has set up a temperature gradient in x
cross–section going into the evacuated chamber is blackened
direction, then rate of heat flow at cross-section having area
so that it completely absorbs any radiations falling on it.
dQ dT The temperature of the blackened end is 17°C when steady
A is kA
dt dx state is reached. Stefan constant  = 6 × 10–8 W/m2–K4. Find
the thermal conductivity of the material of the rod.
Between any two points of conductor, if temperature difference
is T and rate of heat flow is H, then the resistance or
17°C
T
opposition offered by the material to flow is defined as = .
H 0°C 27°C
Now consider two very thin concentric metallic shells A and 37. A hot body, obeying Newton’s law of cooling is cooling
B of radii R1 and R2 (R2 > R1) and temperature T1 and T2 down from its peak value 800C to an ambient temperature
(T1 > T2) respectively. The hollow space between them is of 300C. It takes 5 minutes in cooling down from 800C to
filled with sand of thermal conductivity k. 400C. How much time will it take to cool down from 620C
33. Thermal resistance offered by the sand is to 320C? (Given ln 2 = 0.693, ln 5 = 1.609)
(a) 3.75 minutes (b) 8.6 minutes
1  1 1  1  1 1 
(a)    (b) 4k  R  R  (c) 6.5 minutes (d) 9.6 minutes
2k  R1 R 2   1 2 
38. If wavelength of maximum intensity of radiation emitted
by sun and moon are 0.5 × 10–6 m and 10–4 m respectively
 1 1   1 1  the ratio of their temperature is :
(c) 4k    (d) 2k   
 R1 R 2   R1 R 2  (a) 2000 (b) 1000
34. The rate of heat flow through the sand is (c) 100 (d) 200
39. In the figure, the distribution of energy density of the
R1R 2 R1R 2
(a) 4k  T1  T2  (b) 2k  T1  T2  radiation emitted by a black body at a given temperature is
R1  R 2 R1  R 2 shown. The possible temperature of the black body is :
 T1  T2   1 1   T1  T2   1 1 
(c)    (d)   
4k  R1 R2  2k R
 1 R 2 
35. The temperature T of a point at distance r from the centre in

steady state condition where R1 < r < R2 is
 R 2  r  R1  
(a)  T1  T2   r R  R 
  2 1 
 R  r  R1  
(b) T1   T1  T2   2
 r  R  R  
 2 1  (a) 1500 K (b) 2000 K
(c) 2500 K (d) 3000 K
 R 1  r  R1   40. If a black body radiates 10 cal/s at 227°C, it will radiate at
(c)  T1  T2   r R  R 
  2 1 
727°C :
(a) 10 cal/s (b) 80 cal/s
 R r  R2   (c) 160 cal/s (d) none of these
(d) T1   T1  T2   1
 r  R  R  
 2 1 
@cbseinfinite
THERMAL PHYSICS 46
41. A body cools from 50°C to 40°C in 5 min. The surrounding

d
temperature is 20°C. In what further time (in min) will it 45. In Newton’s law of cooling,  k    0  , the constant
dt
cool to 30°C?
‘k’ is proportional to :
15 (a) A, surface area of the body
(a) 5 (b)
2 (b) S, specific heat of the body
25 (c) 1/m, m being mass of the body

(c) (d) 10
3 (d) e, emmisivity of the body
42. If a body cools down from 80°C to 60°C in 10 min when the
temperature of the surrounding is 30°C. Then, the Assertion & Reason
temperature of the body after next 10 min will be : (A) Statement–I is True, Statement–II is True; Statement–II is a
(a) 50°C (b) 48°C correct explanation for Statement–I.
(c) 30°C (d) none of these (B) Statement–I is True, Statement–II is True; Statement–2 is
NOT a correct explanation for Statement–I.
43. A liquid cools from 50°C to 45°C in 5 min and from 45°Cto
41.5°C in the next 5 min. The temperature of the surrounding (C) Statement–I is True, Statement–II is False.
is : (D) Statement–I is False, Statement–II is True.
(a) 27°C (b) 40.3°C 46. Statement - 1 : Two stars S1 and S2 radiate maximum energy
(c) 23.3°C (d) 33.3°C at 360 nm and 480 nm, respectively. Ratio of their absolute
temperature is 4 : 3.
Statement - 2 : According to Wien’s law T = b (constant).
Multiple Choice Questions
(a) A (b) B
44. Two identical objects A and B are at temperatures TA and
TB respectively. Both objects are placed in a room with (c) C (d) D
perfectly absorbing walls maintained at a temperature 47. A black body radiates power P and maximum energy is
T (TA > T > TB). The objects A and B attain the temperature radiated by it around a wavelength 0 . The temperature of
T eventually. Select the correct statements from the following the black body is now changed such that it radiates maximum
(a) A only emits radiations, while B only absorbs it until 3 0
energy around the wavelength . The power radiated by
both attain the temperature T. 4
(b) A loses more heat by radiation than it absorbs, while B it now is :
absorbs more radiation than it emits, until they attain the
256 27
temperature T (a) P (b) P
81 64
(c) Both A and B only absorb radiation, but do not emit it, until
they attain the temperature T. 64 81
(c) P (d) P
(d) Each object continues to emit and absorb radiation even 27 256
after attaining the temperature T. 48. The maximum energy in thermal radiations from a blackbody
occurs at wavelength 4000 Å. The effective temperature of
the source is :
(a) 7000 K (b) 80000 K
(c) 104 K (d) 106 K
@cbseinfinite
THERMAL PHYSICS 47
Match the Column 50. A black coloured solid sphere of radius R and mass M is
49. A ball has surface temperature T initially at time t = 0, that inside a cavity with vacuum inside. The walls of the cavity
is less than surrounding constant temperature T0. On the are maintained at temperature T0. The initial temperature
vertical axis of the graph shown has either thermal energy of the sphere is 3T0. If the specific heat of the material of
radiated/absorbed per unit time or total energy radiated/ the sphere varies as T3 per unit mass with the temperature
absorbed till time t by the ball. Correctly match the curves T of the sphere, where  is a constant, then the time taken
marked in the graph : for the sphere to cool down to temperature 2T0 will be ( is
Stefan Boltzmann constant)
M 3 M  16 
(a) 2
n   (b) n  
2
4R   2  16R   3 
M 3 M  16 
(c) n  
2 (d) 2
n  
16R   2  4R   3 
Column I Column II
(A) Thermal energy emitted (p) 1

per unit time
(B) Thermal energy absorbed (q) 2
per unit time
(C) Total energy emitted till time t (r) 3
(D) Total energy absorbed till time t (s) 4
@cbseinfinite
THERMAL PHYSICS 48

Heat, Temperature and Calorimetry 5. A current carrying wire heats a metal rod. The wire provides
1. A cubical block of co-efficient of linear expansion s , is a constant power (P) to the rod. The metal rod is enclosed
in an insulated container. It is observed that the temperature
submerged partially inside a liquid of co-efficient of volume
(T) in the metal rod changes with time (t)
expansion   . On increasing the temperature of the system
as T(t)  T0 (1   t1/4 ) where  is a constant with
T , the height of the cube inside the liquid remains
appropriate dimension while T0 is a constant with dimension
unchanged. Find the relation between s , and l . of temperature.The heat capacity of metal is :
(2004) (2019)
2. A piece of ice (heat capacity = 2100 J kg–1 °C–1 and latent
heat = 3.36 × 105 J kg–1) of mass m gram is at –5°C at 4P(T(t) - T0 )4 4P(T(t) - T0 )3
atmospheric pressure. It is given 420 J of heat so that the ice (a) (b)
β 4 T05 β 4 T04
starts melting. Finally when the ice–water mixture is in
equilibrium, it is found that 1 g of ice has melted. Assuming
there is no other heat exchange in the process, the value of 4P(T(t) - T0 ) 4P(T(t) - T0 )2
m is (2010) (c) 4 (d)
β T02 β 4 T03
3. Steel wire of length L at 40°C is suspended from the ceiling
and then a mass m is hung from its free end. The wire is 6. Two identical beakers A and B contain equal volumes of
cooled down from 40°C to 30°C to regain its original length two different liquids at 60°C each and left to cool down.
L. The coefficient of linear thermal expansion of the steel Liquid in A has density of 8 × 102 kg/m3 and specific heat of
is 10–5/ºC, Young’s modulus of steel is 1011N/m2 and radius 2000 Jkg–1K–1 while liquid in B has density of 103 kg m–3 and
of the wire is 1 mm. Assume that L>> diameter of the wire. specific heat of 4000 Jkg–1K–1. Which of the following best
Then the value of m in kg is nearly. (2011) describes their temperature versus time graph
4. The figure below shows the variation of specific heat schematically? (assume the emissivity of both the beakers
capacity(C) of a solid as a function of temperature (T). The to be the same) (2019)
temperature is increased continuously from 0 to 500 K at a
constant rate. Ignoring any volume change, the following
statement(s) is (are) correct to reasonable approximation.
(2013)
100 200 300 400 500

T(K)
(a) the rate at which heat is absorbed in the range 0–100
K varies linearly with temperature T
(b) heat absorbed in increasing the temperature from
0–100 K is less than the heat required for increasing
the temperature from 400–500 K
(c) there is no change in the rate of heat absorbtion in the
range 400–500 K
(d) the rate of heat absorption increases in the range 200–
300 K
@cbseinfinite
THERMAL PHYSICS 49
7. A liquid at 30° C is poured very slowly into a open 11. An ideal black-body at room temperature is thrown into a
Calorimeter that is at temperature of 110°C. The boiling furnace. It is observed that (2002)
temperature of the liquid is 80°C. It is found that the first 5
(a) initially it is the darkest body and at later times the
gm of the liquid completely evaporates. After pouring brightest
another 80 gm of the liquid the equilibrium temperature is
found to be 50°C. The ratio of the Latent heat of the liquid (b) it is the darkest body at all times
to its specific heat will be _____ ºC. (Neglect the heat (c) it cannot be distinguished at all times
exchange with surrounding]
(d) initially it is the darkest body and at later times it cannot
(2019) be distinguished.
8. When the temperature of a metal wire is increased from 0ºC
12. The graph, shown in the adjacent diagram, represents the
to 10ºC, its length increases by 0.02%. The percentage
variation of temperature (T) of two bodies, x and y having
change in its mass density will be closest to :
same surface area, with time (t) due to the emission of
(2020) radiation. Find the correct relation between the emissivity
(a) 0.06 (b) 0.008 and absorptivity powers of the two bodies (2003)
(c) 2.3 (d) 0.8
Heat Transfer
9. The plots of intensity versus wavelength for three black
bodies at temperatures T1, T2 and T3 respectively are as
shown. Their temperature are such that (2000)
(a) Ex > Ey and ax < ay (b) Ex < Ey and ax > ay

(c) Ex > Ey and ax > ay (d) Ex < Ey and ax < ay
13. Two identical rods are connected between two conatiners.
One of them is at 100°C containing water and another is at
0°C containing ice. If rods are connected in parallel then the
rate of melting of ice is ql g/s. If they are connected in series
q2
then the rate is q2. The ratio q is (2004)
1
(a) 2 (b) 4
(a) T1 > T2 > T3 (b) T1> T3 > T2
(C) T2 > T3 > T1 (d) T3 > T2 > T1 1 1
(c) (d)
10. When a block of iron floats in mercury at 0ºC, fraction k1 of 2 4
its volume is submerged, while at the temperature 60ºC, a 14. Three discs, A, B and C having radii 2 m, 4 m and 6 m
fraction k2 is seen to be submerged. If the coefficient of respectively are coated with carbon black on their outer
volume expansion of iron is Fe and that of mercury is Hg, surfaces. The wavelengths corresponding to maximum
then the ratio k1/k2 can be expressed as (2001) intensity are 300 nm, 400 nm and 500 nm, respectively. The
power radiated by them are QA, QB and QC respectively
1  60  Fe 1  60  Fe (2004)
(a) (b)
1  60  Hg 1  60  Hg
(a) QA is maximum (b) QB is maximum
1  60  Fe 1  60  Hg (c) QC is maximum (d) QA = QB = QC

(c) (d)
1  60  Hg 1  60  Fe
@cbseinfinite
THERMAL PHYSICS 50
15. Variation of radiant energy emitted by sun, filament of 20. A metal rod AB of length 10x has its one end A in ice at 0°C
tungsten lamp and welding arc as a function of its and the other end B in water at 100°C. If a point P on the rod
wavelength is shown in figure. (2005) is maintained at 400°C, then it is found that equal amounts
of water and ice evaporate and melt per unit time. The latent
heat of evaporation of water is 540 calg–1 and latent heat of
melting of ice is 80 calg–1. If the point P is at a diatance of x
from the ice end A, find the value of . (Neglect any heat
loss to the surrounding). (2009)
21. Two spherical bodies A (radius 6 cm) and B (radius 18 cm)
are at temperatures T1 and T2, respectively. The maximum
intensity in the emission spectrum of A is at 500 nm and in
that of B is at 1500 nm. Considering them to be black bodies,
what will be the ratio of the rate of total energy radiated by
Which of the following option is the correct match?
A to that of B ? (2010)
(a) Sun-T3, tungsten filament-T1, welding arc-T2
22. A composite block is made of slabs A, B, C, D and E of
(b) Sun-T2, tungsten filament-T2, welding arc-T3 different thermal conductivities (given in terms of a
(c) Sun-T3, tungsten filament-T2, welding arc-T1 constant K) and sizes (given in terms of length L) as shown
(d) Sun-T1, tungsten filament-T2, welding arc-T3 in the figure. All slabs are of same width. Heat Q flows
16. In which of the following processes, convection does not only from left to right through the blocks. Then in steady
take place primarily? (2005) state (2011)
(a) sea and land breeze
(b) boiling of water
(c) heating air around a furnace
(d) warming of glass of bulb due to filament.
17. A spherical body of area A and emissivity e = 0.6 is kept
inside a perfectly black body. Energy radiated per second
by the body at temperature T is (2005)
(a) 0.4  AT T 4 (b) 0.8  ATT 4
(c) 0.6  AT T4 T4
(d) l.0  AT
18. Water of volume 2 litre in a container is heated with a coil of
1 kW at 27°C. The lid of the container is open and energy (a) heat flown through A and E slabs are same
dissipates at rate of 160 J/s. In how much time temperature
(b) heat flown through slab E is maximum
wil rise from 27°C to 77°C.
[Given specific heat of water is 4.2 kJ/kg] (2005) (c) temperature difference across slab E is smallest
(a) 7 min (b) 6 min 2 s (d) heat flown through C = heat flow through B + heat
(c) 8 min 20s (d) 14 min flown through D.
19. Initially a black body at absolute temperature T is kept inside 23. Three very large plates of same area are kept parallel and
a closed chamber at absolute temperature T0. Now the close to each other. They are considered as ideal black
chamber is slightly opened to allow sun rays to enter. It is surfaces and have very high thermal conductivity. The first
observed that temperatures T and T0 remains constant. and third plates are maintained at temperatures 2T and 3T
Which of the following statements is/are true? (2006) respectively. The temperature of the middle (i.e., second)
(a) The rate of emission of energy from the black body plate under steady state condition is : (2012)
remains the same
1 1
(b) The rate of emission of energy from the black body  65  4  97  4
increases (a)   T (b)   T
 2   4 
(c) The rate of absorption of energy by the black body
increases. 1
(d) The energy radiated by the black body equals the energy  97  4 1
(c)   T (d)  97  4 T
absorbed by it.  2 
@cbseinfinite
THERMAL PHYSICS 51
24. Two rectangular blocks, having indentical dimensions, can 28. A water cooler of storage capacity 120 litres can cool water
be arranged either in configuration I or in configuration II at a constant rate of P watts. In a closed circulation system
as shown in the figure. One of the blocks has thermal (as shown schematically in the figure), the water from the
conductivity K and the other 2K. The temperature difference cooler is used to cool an external device that generates
between the ends along the x-axis is the same in both the constantly 3 kW of heat (thermal load). The temperature of
configurations. It takes 9s to transport a certain amount of water fed into the device cannot exceed 30°C and the entire
heat from the hot end to the cold end in the configuration I. stored 120 litres of water is initially cooled to 10°C. The
The time to transport the same amount of heat in the entire system is thermally insulated. The minimum value of
configuration II is : (2013) P (in watts) for which the device can be operated for 3
Configuration II hours is (2016)
Configuration I
2K
K 2K K
X
(a) 2.0 s (b) 3.0 s
(c) 4.5 s (d) 6.0 s
25. Heater of an electric kettle is made of a wire of length L and (Specific heat of water is 4.2 kJ kg–1 K–1 and the density of
diameter d. It takes 4 minutes to raise the temperature of 0.5 water is 1000 kg m–3)
kg water by 40 K. This heater is replaced by a new heater
(a) 1600 (b) 2067
having two wires of the same material, each of length L and
diameter 2d. The way these wires are connected is given in (c) 2533 (d) 3933
the options. How much time in minutes will it take to raise 29. A metal is heated in a furnace where a sensor is kept above
the temperature of the same amount of water by 40 K? the metal surface to read the power radiated (P) by the
(2014) metal. The sensor has a scale that displays log2 (P/P0), where
P0 is a constant. When the metal surface is at a temperature
(a) 4 if wires are in parallel (b) 2 if wires are in series
of 487°C, the sensor shows a value 1. Assume that the
(c) 1 if wires are in series (d) 0.5 if wires are in parallel emissivity of the metallic surface remains constant. What
26. Two spherical stars A and B emit black body radiation. The is the value displayed by the sensor when the temperature
radius of A is 400 times that of B and A emits 104 times the of the metal surface is raised to 2767°C?
(2016)
 A 
30. Two conducting cylinders of equal length but different radii
power emitted from B. The ratio   of their
 B  are connected in series between two heat baths kept at
temperatures T1 = 300 K and T2 = 100 K, as shown in the
wavelengths A and B at which the peaks occur in their figure. The radius of the bigger cylinder is twice that of the
respective radiation curves is (2015) smaller one and the thermal conductivities of the materials
27. The ends Q and R of two thin wires, PQ and RS, are soldered of the smaller and the larger cylinders are K1 and K2
(joined) together. Initially each of the wires has a length of respectively. If the temperature at the junction of the two
1 m at 10°C. Now the end P is maintained at 10°C, while the cylinders is the steady state is 200 K, then K 1 /K 2
end S is heated and maintained at 400°C. The system is = _________.
thermally insulated form its surroundings. If the thermal (2018)
conductivity of wire PQ is twice that of the wire RS and the
coefficient of linear thermal expansion of PQ is 1.2 × 10–5 K–
1
, the change in length of the wire PQ is
(2016)
(a) 0.70 mm (b) 0.90 mm
(c) 1.56 mm (d) 2.34 mm
@cbseinfinite
THERMAL PHYSICS 52
THERMAL PHYSICS

@cbseinfinite
KINETIC THEORY OF GASES AND THERMODYNAMICS 53
15
KINETIC THEORY OF GASES &
THERMODYNAMICS
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
Chapter
KINETIC THEORY15
OF GASES & THERMODYNAMICS 54
1. INTRODUCTION TO KINETIC THEORY OF GASES 1.2 Pressure Calculation

Pressure of an Ideal Gas and Its Expression:
In this topic, we discuss the behaviour of gases and how Pressure exerted by the gas is due to continuous
are the various state variable like P, V, T, moles, U etc bombardment of gas molecules against the walls of the
are interrelated with each other? container.
Expression:
1.1 Postulates of Kinetic Theory of Gases
Consider a gas enclosed in a cube of side l. Take the axes
• A gas consists of a very large number of molecules
to be parallel to the sides of the cube, as shown in figure.
(of the order of Avogadro’s number, 1023), which are
perfect elastic spheres. For a given gas they are (
A molecule with velocity v x , v y , v z ) hits the planar
identical in all respects, but for different gases, they wall parallel to yz-plane of area A (= l2). Since the
are different. collision is elastic, the molecule rebounds with the same
• The molecules of a gas are in a state of incessant velocity; its y and z components of velocity do not
random motion. They move in all directions with change in the collision but the x-component reverses
different speeds., (of the order of 500 m/s) and obey sign. That is, the velocity after collision is
Newton’s laws of motion.
( −v x , v y , v z ) . The change in momentum of the
• The size of the gas molecules is very small as
compared to the distance between them. If typical molecule is: −mv x − ( mv x ) =
−2mv x . By the principle
size of molecule is 2Å, average distance between the of conservation of momentum, the magnitude of
molecules is 320Å. Hence volume occupied by the momentum imparted to the wall in the collision = 2mvx.
molecules is negligible in comparison to the volume
of the gas.
• The molecules do not exert any force of attraction or
repulsion on each other, except during collision.
• The collisions of the molecules with themselves and
with the walls of the vessel are perfectly elastic. As
such, that momentum and the kinetic energy of the
molecules are conserved during collisions, though
their individual velocities change.
• There is no concentration of the molecules at any Fig 15.1
point inside the container i.e. molecular density is
uniform throughout the gas. To calculate the force (and pressure) on the wall, we need
• A molecule moves along a straight line between two to calculate momentum imparted to the wall per unit
successive collisions and the average straight time, if it is within the distance v x ∆t from the wall, that
distance covered between two successive collisions is, all molecules within the volume. Av x ∆t only can hit
is called the mean free path of the molecules.
1
• The collisions are almost instantaneous, i.e., the time the wall in time ∆T is A v x ∆t n, where n is the
2
of collision of two molecules is negligible as
number of molecules per unit volume. The total
compared to time interval between two successive
momentum transferred to the wall by these molecules in
collisions.
time ∆t is: Q ( 2mv x )  nAv x ∆t  . The force on the
1
=
2 
wall is the rate of momentum transfer Q/∆t and pressure
is force per unit area:
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
Q 1.3 Ideal Gas Laws

=P = nmv 2x
( A ∆t ) • Ideal Gas
That gas which strictly obeys the gas laws, (such as
Actually, all molecules in a gas do not have the same
Boyle’s Law, Charle's law, Gay Lussac’s Law etc.)
velocity; there is a distribution in velocities. The above
equation therefore, stands for pressure due to the group Characteristics
of molecules with speed vx in the x-direction and n stands 1. The size of the molecule of an ideal gas is zero.
for the number density of that group of molecules. The 2. There is no force of attraction or repulsion amongst
total pressure is obtained by summing over the
the molecules of an ideal gas.
contribution due to all groups:
2 • Real Gas
P = nmv x All gases are referred to as real Gases. All real gases
2 show nearly the ideal gas behavior at low pressures
where v x is the average of v 2x . Now the gas is isotropic, and temperatures high enough, where they cannot be
i.e. there is no preferred direction of velocity of the liquified.
molecules in the vessel. Therefore by symmetry, Gay Lussac’s Law:
2 2 2 2 
v=
x v=
y vz We know that PV = NK
3
( )
2  1  2 2 2  1  2 
=
vx   vx + vy + =
vz  v where K is the average kinetic energy of translation per
3 3 
gas molecule. At constant temperature. K is constant
2 and for a given mass of the gas. N is constant.
where v is the speed and v denotes the mean of the
squared speed. Thus Thus, PV = constant for given mass of gas at constant
temperature, which is also called Boyle’s Law.
1 2
P =   nmv Charle’s Law:
3
2 
2 1 M 1 2 We know that PV = NK
1 3
P= mnv = = ρv
3 3V 3
For a given mass of gas, N is constant.
M = Total mass of gas molecules  3 
=
Since K k B T, K ∝ T and as such PV ∝ T.
V = Total volume of gas molecules 2
Relation Between Pressure and KE of Gas Molecules If P is constant, V ∝ T, which is the Charles’ Law.
Constant Volume Law:
1 2
From equation P= ρv
3 2 
We know that PV = NK
3
2 1 
⇒ P =  Mv −2  For a given mass of gas, N is constant. Since
3V  2 
 3 
=K k B T, K ∝ T
2 K.E 2
⇒P=
3 V Thus, PV ∝ T
2 If V is constant, P ∝ T, which the constant volume law.
⇒ P =E
3
Avogadro’s Law:
Pressure exerted by an ideal gas is numerically equal to Consider two gases 1 and 2. We can write
two third of mean kinetic energy
2  2 
=P1V1 = N1 K1 , P2 V2 N2 K 2
3 3
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
KINETIC THEORY OF GASES & THERMODYNAMICS 56
If their pressures, volumes and temperatures are the Real Gas Law
same, then By explicitly including the effects of molecular size and
 
=P1 P=2 , V1 V=
2 , K1 K2. intermolecular forces, the Dutch physicist Johannes van
der Waals modified the ideal gas law to explain the
Clearly, N1 = N2 Thus: behavior of real gases. The Vander Waal real gas
Equal volumes of all ideal gases existing under the same equation is given below.
conditions of temperature and pressure contain equal Real gas law equation,
number of molecules which is Avogadro’s Law or
 n 2a 
 ( V − nb ) =
hypothesis. +
 P nRT
This law is named after the Italian physicist and chemist,  V2 
Amedeo Avogadro (1776 – 1856). Where a and b represent the empirical constant which is
PV unique for each gas.
Aliter:= =
As PV Nk B T, N
k BT n2
represents the concentration of gas.
If P, V and T are constants, N is also constant. V2
1.4 Ideal Gas Equation P represents pressure
 3 R represents a universal gas constant and T is the

2 
As PV = NK and K = k B T temperature.
3 2
Difference Between Ideal and Real Gases
2 3 
PV = N  k B T  or PV = Nk B T The table below shows the properties and the behaviour
3 2 
of ideal and real gases.
which is the ideal gas equation
Ideal Gas Real Gas
1.5 Real Gas Equation and Related Concepts No definite volume Definite volume
Real Gas Definition: A real gas is defined as a gas that Elastic collision of Non-elastic collisions
at all standard pressure and temperature conditions does particles between particles
not obey gas laws. It deviates from its ideal behavior as
No intermolecular Intermolecular attraction
the gas becomes huge and voluminous. True gases have
attraction force force
velocity, mass, and volume. They liquefy when cooled to
their boiling point. The space filled by gas is not small Does not really exist in the It really exists in the
when compared to the total volume of gas. environment and is a environment
hypothetical gas
Ideal and Real Gas Equation An ideal gas is defined as a
gas that obeys gas laws at all pressure and temperature High pressure The pressure is less when
conditions. Ideal gases have velocity as well as mass. compared to ideal gas
They have no volume. The volume taken up by the gas is Independent Interacts with others
small as compared to the overall volume of the gas. It
Obeys PV = NRT Obeys
does not condense, and triple-point does not exist.
 n 2a 
The ideal gas law is the equation of the state of a  P + 2  ( V − nb ) =
nRT
hypothetical ideal gas, also called the general gas  V 
equation. Under many conditions, it is a reasonable
approximation of the behavior of several gases, but it has
many limitations. In 1834, Benoit Paul Emile Clapeyron
first described it as a variation of the empirical law of
Boyle, the law of Charles, the law of Avogadro, and the
law of Gay-Lussac. In an empirical form, the ideal gas
law is also written:
PV = nRT
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
2. SPEEDS OF GAS MOLECULES Vrms =

3RT
M
Maxwell’s speed Distribution Law, average, RMS and Where M = Molecular Mass of Gas
most Probable Speeds.  1
N∫
Similarly, Vav= V= VdN v
Molecule Nature of Matter: Same as Atomic Theory
given by Dalton, according to him, atoms are the smallest 8RT
=
constituents of elements. All atoms of one element are πM
identical, but atoms of different element are different. dN v
But VMP is velocity at which =0
In solids: Atoms are tightly packed, interatomic spacing dv
about 1A°. Interatomic force of attraction are strong.
3RT
In liquids: Atoms are not as rigidly fixed as in solids. ⇒ VMP =
M
Interatomic spacing is about the same 2Å. Interatomic
Physically VMP is velocity possessed by Maximum
force a attraction are relative weaker.
number of molecules.
In Gases: Atoms are very free. Inter atomic spacing is
NOTE:
about tens of Angstroms. Interatomic forces are much
weaker in gases than both in solids and liquids. Vrms > Vav > VMP
In this chapter, we mainly focus on gases

2.1 Maxwell’s Law of Distribution of Molecular 3. ENERGY OF GAS MOLECULES
Velocities
Assumptions of Maxwell Distribution 3.1 Degrees of Freedom
• Molecules of all velocities between 0 to ∞ are The number of degrees of freedom of a dynamical
present. system is defined as the total number of co-ordinates or
• Velocity of one molecule, continuously changes, independent quantities required to describe completely
though fraction of molecules in one range of the position and configuration of the system.
velocities is constant. Example:
Result • A particle moving in straight line, say along X-axis
3/ 2 mv 2
 M  − need only x coordinate to define itself. It has only
N v = 4πN  
2
Ve 2k B T
one degree of freedom.
 2πk B T 
• A particle in a plane, needs 2 co-ordinates, hence
dN v
where N v = has 2 degrees of freedom.
dV In general if
where dNv = Total number of molecules with speeds A = number of particles in the system
between V and V + dV R = number of independent relations among the
N = Total number of molecules. particles
N = Number of degrees of freedom of the system
N = 3A – R
Monoatomic Gases
The molecules of a monoatomic gas (like neon, argon,
helium etc) consists only of one atom.
∴A=1
R=0
Fig 15.2 ∴N=3
Based on this we define three types of speed for Here 3 degrees of freedom are for translational motion
molecules of gas
( )
 2 1/ 2  1 
1/ 2
=
Vrms =  N ∫ V dNv 
2
V
 
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
Diatomic Gases Polyatomic Gas

A=2 A polyatomic gas has 3 translational, 3 rotational degrees
Assuming the distance between the two molecules is of freedom. Apart from them if there V vibrational
fixed then R = 1 modes then there will be additional 2V vibrational
⇒ N = 3× 2 −1 = 5 degrees of freedom.
Here 5 degrees of freedom implies combination of ∴ Total degree of freedom
3 translational energies and 2 rotational energies. n = 3 + 3 + 2V = 6 + 2V
3.2 Internal Energy and Kinetic Energy
Internal Energy: As studied in thermodynamics, Internal
Energy of any substance is the combination of Potential
Energies and Kinetic Energies of all molecules inside a
given gas.
• In real gas
Internal Energy = P.E of molecules + K.E of
Molecules
• In real gas: Internal Energy = K.E of Molecules
Here PE of molecules is zero as assumed in Kinetic
theory postulates; There is no interaction between
the molecules hence its interactional energy is zero.
Average KE per Molecule of the Gas:
1 M 2
We know, P = v
3V
1 2
⇒ PV = Mv
3
1 2
Fig 15.3
If vibrational motion is also considered then [only at very Hence, nRT = Mv
3
high temperatures]
1 2
N=7 ⇒ nRT = Nmv
where 3 for translational 3
2 for rotational n 3RT 1  2
⇒ = mv
2 for vibrational N 2 2
Triatomic Gas Also N = nN A
3 R 1 2 3
Fig 15.4 ⇒ T= ( K.E )avg
mv ⇒ K B T =
2 NA 2 2
Linear
Average KE of translation per molecule of the gas
A=3
R=2 3
K BT
⇒N=3×3–2=7 2
Non-Linear Kinetic Interpretation of Temperature
From above equations, we can easily see that KE of one
molecule is only dependent upon its temperature.
⇒ KE of molecule will cease if, the temperature of the
gas molecules become absolute zero.
∴ Absolute zero of a temperature may be defined as that
temperature at which the root mean square velocity of the
Fig 15.5
gas molecule reduces to zero.
A=3
All the Ideal gas laws can be derived from Kinetic
R=3⇒N=3×3–3=6 Theory of gases.
• Here again vibrational energy is ignored.
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
3.3 Law of Equipartition of Energy ∆Q  ∆U

=
CV =  [⸪ W = 0 for constant V]
Statement: According to this law, for any dynamical ∆T  V ∆T
system in thermal equilibrium, the total energy is 3R
⇒ Cv =
distributed equally amongst all the degrees of freedom, 2
and the energy associated with each molecule per degree Cp 5
5R
1 ∴ Cp = and =
γ = .
of freedom is k B T, where kB is Boltzman constant and 2 Cv 3
2
Diatomic Gases
T is temperature of the system.
When no vibration
k T
Application: U = f B where f = Total degrees of Degree of freedom = 5
2
5
freedom. This law is very helpful in determining the total Average energy for one mole = RT
2
internal energy of any system be it monatomic, diatomic
∆U 5
or any polyatomic. Once the internal energy is know we ∴ Cv = = R
can very easily predict Cv and Cp for such systems. ∆T 2
Remark: In case vibrational motion is also there in any 7R
Cp =
system, say for diatomic molecule, then there should be 2
energy due to vibrational as well given by Cp 7
2
=
γ =
1  dy  1 2 Cv 5
=Ev m   + ky
2  dt  2 When vibration is present.
dy ky 2 There is only one mode of vibration between 2
where = vibrational velocity and = Energy molecules.
dt 2
∴ Degree of freedom = 7
due to configuration.
7
According to Law of Equipartition ∴ U =RT
1 2
Energy per degree of freedom = k B T 7 9
2 ⇒ Cv = R and Cp = R
1 1 2 2
⇒ Total energy = k B T + k B T = k B T 9
2 2 and γ =
is energy for complete one vibrational mode 7
Polyatomic Gases
3.4 Specific Heat of Gases
Degree of freedom
Specific Heat Capacity: = 3 for translational
As we know the law of equipartition, we can predict the + 3 for rotational
heat capacity of various gases. + 2V for vibrational
= 6 + 2V
Monoatomic Gas
If v = Number of vibrational modes
Degree of freedom = 3. RT
∴ U = ( 6 + 2V ) K
∴ Average Energy of a molecule at temperature T 2
1  ⇒ C v =( 3 + V ) R
⇒E=
3  k BT 
2  C=
p (4 + V) R
Energy for one mole ⇒ E × N A 4+V
and γ =
3+ V
3
⇒ U =( k B N A ) T
2 Specific Heat Capacity of Water
3 Water is treated like solid.

⇒ U =RT
2 Water has three atoms, 2 of hydrogen and one of oxygen
In thermodynamics, we studied ∴ Total degree of freedom for every atom
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
=3×2=6 3.5 Mean Free Path

∴ Total degree of freedom for every molecule of water The path traversed by a molecule between two
= 3 × 6 = 18 successive collisions with other molecule is called the
mean free path
 1  
18 × R∆T  Total distance travelled by a molecule
∆Q ∆U  2  l=
∴ C= = = No. of collisions it makes with other molecules
∆T ∆T ∆T
Expression:
C = 9R
Mean Free Path
Specific Heat Capacity of Solids
• In solids, there is very less difference between heat
capacity at constant pressure and at that constant
volume. Therefore we do not differentiate between
Cp and Cv for solids.
∆Q ∆U
∴ C= =
∆T ∆T
{As solids hardly expand or expansion is negligible}
Now in solid the atoms are arranged in an array Fig 15.7
structure and they are not free to move
Suppose the molecules of a gas are spheres of diameter
independently like in gases. 
Therefore the atoms do not possess any translational d. Focus on a single molecule with the average speed V.
or rotational degree of freedom. It will suffer collision with any molecule that comes
On the other hand, the molecules do possess within a distance d between the centres. In time ∆t, it

vibrational motion along 3 mutually perpendicular sweeps a volume πd 2 V ∆t wherein any other molecule
directions.
will collide with it (as shown in figure). If n is the number
Hence for 1 mole of a solid, there are NA number of
of molecules per unit volume, the molecule suffers
atoms. The energy associated with every molecule 
nπd 2 V ∆t collisions in time ∆t. thus the rate of
 1  
= 3 2 × k BT  =3K B T
 2  collisions is nπd 2 V or the time between two successive
∴ U = 3 RT for one mole 1
collisions is on the average. τ =  2
∴ C=
∆Q ∆U
= = 3R ( nπ V d )
∆T ∆T
• The above equation is called as Dulong and Petit’s The average distance between two successive collisions,
Law. called the mean free path l, is:
• At low temperatures the vibrational mode may not  1
=l V= τ
be that active hence, heat capacity is low at low ( nπd 2 )
temperatures for solids.
In this derivation, we imagined the other molecules to be
at rest. But actually all molecules are moving and the
collision rate is determined by the average relative

velocity of the molecules. Thus we need to replace V by

2V in equation. A more exact treatment.
 1
=
Fig 15.6
( 2nπd 2 )
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
Result Equation of State: The equation which connects the

 1
pressure (P), the volume (V) and absolute temperature
=
( )
(T) of a gas is called the equation of state.
2nπd 2
PV = constant (Boyle’s law)
for N molecules PV = NKBT V
= cons tan t (Charle’s law)
T
N P
⇒n= = ⇒ PV = nRT
V K BT
Thermodynamic Process: A thermodynamic process is
 K BT
= said to take place when some changes occur in the state
2πd 2 P of a thermodynamic system, i.e., the thermodynamic
parameters of the system change with time. Types of
NOTE: these thermodynamic process are Isothermal, Adiabatic,
Mean free path depends inversely on the number density Isobaric and Isochoric.
and size of the molecule. Quasi Static Process: A thermodynamic process which
is infinitely slow is called as quasi-static process.
4. INTRODUCTION TO THERMODYNAMICS • In quasi static process, system undergoes change so
slowly, that at every instant, system is in
It is the study of interrelations between heat and other equilibrium, both thermal and mechanical, with the
forms of energy surroundings.
Thermodynamic System: A collection of large number • Quasi-static process is an idealised process. We
of molecules of matter (solid, liquid or gas) which are so generally assume all the processes to be quasistatic
arranged that these possess certain values of pressure, unless stated.
volume and temperature forms a thermodynamic system. Indicator or P-V, Diagram: A graph between pressure
• The parameters pressure, volume, temperature, and
internal energy etc which determine the state or volume of a gas under thermodynamic operation is called
condition of system are called thermodynamic state P-V. diagram.
variables.
• In thermodynamics we deal with the thermodynamic
systems as a whole and study the interaction of heat
and energy during the change of one thermodynamic
state to another.
Thermal Equilibrium
The term ‘equilibrium’ in thermodynamics implies the Fig 15.8
state when all the macroscopic variables characterising a → Isobaric
the system (P, V, T, mass etc) do not change with time. b → Isothermal
• Two systems when in contact with each other come c → Adiabatic
to thermal equilibrium when their temperatures d → Isochoric
become same. Area under P – V diagram gives us work done by a gas.
• Based on this is zeroth law of thermodynamics. 4.2 Heat, Work Done and Internal Energy of Gas
According to zeroth law, when the thermodynamic
systems A and B are separately in thermal Internal Energy is the energy possessed by any system
equilibrium with a third thermodynamic system C, due to its molecular K.E. and molecular P.E. Here K.E
then the systems A and B are in thermal equilibrium and PE are with respect to centre of mass frame. This
with each other also. internal energy depends entirely on state and hence it is
a state variable. For a real gases internal energy is only
4.1 Basic Terms of Thermodynamics by virtue of its molecular motion.
State Variables: P, V, T, no. of moles and internal nfRT
U= for ideal gases where
energy They can be extensive or intestive. 2
n = number of moles
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
f = Degree of freedom 5.1 Relation of Heat and Internal Energy

R = Universal Gas Constant Let ∆Q = Heat supplied to the system by the
T = Temperature in Kelvin surroundings
Internal Energy can be change either by giving heat
energy or by performing some work. ∆W = Work done by the system on the surroundings
Heat Energy is the energy transformed to or from the ∆U = Change in internal energy of the system.
system because of the difference in temperatures by First law of thermodynamics states that energy can
conduction, convection or radiation. neither be created nor be destroyed. It can be only
The energy that is transferred from one system to another transformed from one form to another.
by force moving its point of application in its own
direction is called work. Mathematically: ∆Q = ∆U + ∆W
Sign Conventions:
• When heat is supplied to the system, then ∆Q is
positive and when heat is withdrawn from the
system, ∆Q is negative.
• When a gas expands, work done by the gas is
positive and when a gas contracts then work is
negative.
• ∆U is positive, when temperature rises and ∆U is
Fig 15.9
negative, when temperature falls. Remember here
Work done by the system = ∫ F dx we always take work done by the system.
= ∫ Ps Adx 5.2 Mayer’s Formula
= ∫ Ps dV  dQ 
CP =  
Where Ps is the Pressure of system on the piston. This  dT  P
work done by system is positive if the system expands Or, dQ = C P dT
and it is negative if the system contracts.
From equation
• Work and Heat are path functions whereas internal
= CP dT
dQ = dU + PdV
energy is a state function.
Again, from equation (2) substituting
• Heat and work are two different terms through they
might look same. dU = CV dT
C=
P dT CV dT + PdV... ( 4 )
5. FIRST LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS For one mole of gas ( µ =1) , from ideal gas equation,
The first law of thermodynamics is a thermodynamics- PV = RdT
adapted version of the law of conservation of energy. In PdV = RdT
principle, the conservation law asserts that an isolated From equations
system's total energy remains constant; energy can be ( CP − CV ) dT =
RdT
transferred from one form to another, but it cannot be
Or, CP − C V =
R
created or destroyed.
Where C P is the Specific heat at constant pressure and
The first law states that the change in internal energy of
the system ( ∆U system) is equal to the difference CV is the specific heat at constant volume.
between the heat provided to the system (Q) and the work
(W) done by the system on its surroundings in a closed
system (i.e., there is no transfer of matter into or out of
the system).
∆U system =
Q−W
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
6. CYCLIC AND NON-CYCLIC PROCESSES Ti = Tf

⇒ Ui =
Uf
6.1 Introduction to Cyclic and Non-Cyclic Processes Or, ∆U net =
0
Cyclic Process: A cyclic process is one in which the If there are three process in a cyclic abc, then
system returns to its initial stage after undergoing a series ∆U ab + ∆U bc + ∆U ca = 0
of changes. From first law of thermodynamics,
Indicator Diagram Q= W + ∆U,if ∆U net= 0, then
Q net = Wnet
Or, Qab + Q bc + Qca = Wab + Wbc + Wca
Further, Wnet = area under P-V diagram. For example,
Wnet = + area of triangle ‘abc’ in the shown diagram.
Cycle is clockwise. So, work done will be positive.
6.3 Reversible and Irreversible Processes
Fig 15.10 Reversible Process: A reversible process is the process

∆U = 0 where it never occurs; on the contrary the irreversible
W = Area enclosed by the loop. process is the one which can be said to be the natural
Q = W as per First Law of thermodynamics process and cannot be reversed.
Here W is positive if the cycle is clockwise and it is Thermodynamics is the example of the reversible
negative if the cyclic is anti clockwise. process. Here the system and the surroundings return to
Non-Cyclic Process: In Non-cyclic process the series of the same stage at the end of the process.
changes involved do not return the system back to its NOTE:
initial state. A Reversible process takes two processes into account
i.e., change in internal energy for cyclic process is zero while in the first process participants convert into
and also ∆U ∝ ∆T ⇒ ∆T =0 another form, tin the case of this second process the
i.e., temperature of system remains constant. i.e, heat reverse reaction takes space where the resultants get back
supplied is equal to the work done by the system. to the initial state.
6.2 Work done and Heat exchange in Cyclic Types of reversible processes: There are two types of
Processes
reversible processes. The internally reversible process
In cyclic process, initial and final points are same. and the external reversible process. Internal reversible
process involves no irreversibility within the system
boundaries. This states that the system undergoes the
stage of equilibrium but when it returns it again passes
through the same stage.
• In the externally reversible process there are no
irreversibility’s
Irreversible Process: an irreversible process is a
naturally occurring phenomenon, which does not go back
to its original state.
Factors behind Irreversibility of process:
An irreversible process can be said to be the
thermodynamics process that departs equilibrium. When
Fig 15.11
we talk in terms of pressure, we can say that it occurs
Therefore, ( pi Vi , Ti ) = ( p f , Vf , Tf )
when the pressure of the system changes and the volume
Internal energy is a state function which only depends on does not have time to reach equilibrium.
temperature (in case of an ideal gas).
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
The system and the surrounding does not come back to P 

the original state even after the completion of the process Therefore, W = nRT ln  1 
 P2 
in the spontaneous process.
Hence, The Reversible Nature of a Process is Dependent First Law of Thermodynamics
on Multiple Factors Such as non-elasticity, friction, Q =∆U + W
viscosity, electrical resistance etc.
V2
⇒Q=
nRT ln
7. THERMODYNAMIC PROCESSES V1
NOTE:
7.1 Isothermal Process
All the heat supplied is used entirely to do work against
Description: A thermodynamic process in which external surroundings. If heat is supplied then the gas
temperature remains constant expands and if heat is withdrawn then the gas contracts.
Condition: The walls of the container must be perfectly
conducting to allow free exchange of heat between gas Practical Examples:
and its surroundings. Melting of ice at 0°C
The process of compression or expansion should be slow
Boiling of water at 100°C
so as to provide time for exchange of heat.
7.2 Adiabatic Process
These both conditions are perfectly ideal.
Description: When there is no heat exchange with
Equation of State: T = Constant or PV = Constant
surroundings.
Indicator Diagram: Conditions: The walls of the container must be perfectly
non-conducting in order to prevent any exchange of heat
between the gas and its surroundings.
The process of compression or expansion should be
rapid, and so, there is no time for the exchange of heat.
These conditions are again ideal condition and are hard
to obtain
Equation of State:
Fig 15.12 PV γ = constant
dP or TV γ −1 = constant
Slope of P – V curve is at any point. γ
dV
or PT 1−γ = constant
PV = nRT Indicator Diagram
⇒ ( dP ) V + P ( dV ) =
0
dP P
⇒ =
−
dV V
∆U = 0 (Temperature remains constant)
v2
W= ∫ Pg dV
v2
Fig 15.13
dP
v2
nRT Slope of adiabatic curve =
= ∫v V dV [Using PV = nRT] dV
2
PV γ = const
V2
= nRT ln ⇒ PγV γ −1 ( dv ) + ( dP ) Vγ =0
V1
Since P1V1 = P2 V2 dP −γP

⇒ =
dV V
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
As shown in graph adiabatic curve is steeper than

isothermal curve.
nfRdT nR ( T2 − T1 ) P2 V2 − P1V1
=
∆U = =
2 γ −1 γ −1
Work Done by Gas: If a gas adiabatically expands from Fig 15.14
V1 to V2
v2
nfR∆T
W= ∫ P ( dv )
v
∆U =
2
2
Work
v2
dV W = 0 as gas does not expands
= cons tan t ∫ γ First Law of thermodynamics
v2 V
Q =∆U + W
 PV γ = constant  nfR∆T
  ⇒Q=
⇒ P = constant  2
 Vγ 
NOTE:
V2
V  −γ+1
constant  1 1  Since we have studied earlier, that when heat is supplied
= constant
= ×   γ−1 − γ−1  to any process. Its temperature increases according to
 1 − γ  V1 1 − γ  2
V V1 
relation.
Also we know
P= γ
P= γ = nC∆T
Q
1V1 2 V2 constant
Q
1  P2 V2γ P1V1γ 
⇒C= .... (1)
⇒ − n∆T
 
1 − γ  V2γ −1 V1γ −1  Now this C depends upon external conditions for gases.
∆Q 
P2 V2 − P1V1 nR ( T1 − T2 ) Here it is referred as ( 2)
=W = n∆T  v
γ −1 γ −1
i.e. Molar heat capacity at constant volume Comparing
First Law of Thermodynamics equation 1 and 2
Q =∆U + W fR
We get C v = ... ( 3)
Substituting the values 2
We get Q = 0 7.4 Isobaric Process
NOTE: Description: When pressure remains constant

If gas expands adiabatically then its temperature Condition: When in one container, the piston is free to
decreases and vice versa. move and is not connected by any agent.
Equation of State: P = constant
Practical Example V
• Propagation of sound waves in the form of = cons tan t
T
compression and rarefaction. Indicator Diagram:
• Sudden bursting of a cycle tube.
7.3 Isochoric Process
Description: Volume remains constant
Condition: A gas being heated or cooled inside a rigid
container. Fig 15.15
P nfR∆T
Equation of State: V = constant or = constant ∆U = same as always
T 2
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
W= ∫ PdV= P∆V (as pressure is constant) 7.5 Melting Process

=PV2 − PV1 =nR∆T In any case first law is always applicable
First Law of Thermodynamics Q = mLf as learned earlier.
Q =∆U + W W=0
nfR∆T (In the change of state from solid to liquid we ignore any
⇒= Q + nR∆T
2 expansion or contraction as it is very small)
 fR 
⇒Q = n  + R  ∆T ... ( 4 ) According to first law of thermodynamics
 2  ∆U = Q − W
Similar to Cv, we can define molar heat capacity at ∆U =mLf
constant pressure
Q  NOTE:
⇒ Cp =  ... ( 5 )
n∆T  p The heat given during melting is used in increasing the
internal energy of any substance
From equation 4 and 5
fR
+ R ... ( 6 )
7.6 Boiling Process
We get C=
p
2
Here, Q = mL v
From equation 3 and 6
fR W P [ V2 − V1 ]
=
Replacing by Cv we get
2 (Pressure is constant during boiling and it is equal to
V=
p Cv + R atmosphere pressure)
⇒ ∆U= Q − W
which is also called Mayer’s Relation.
Similar to molar specific heat at constant pressure and ∆U= mL v − P ( V2 − V1 )
molar specific heat at constant volume, we can define 7.7 Polytropic Process
molar specific heat for any process. A polytropic process is a thermodynamic process that
For example: obeys the relation:
Cadiabatic = 0 PV n = C
Cisothermal = ∞ Where P is the pressure, V is volume, n is the polytropic
Basically gas does not possess a unique specific heat. index, and C is a constant. The polytropic process
Mainly we have Cp and C v . equation can describe multiple expansion and
compression processes which include heat transfer.
• Specific Heat at Constant Volume: It is defined as Particular Cases:
the amount of heat required to raise the temperature Some specific values of n correspond to particular cases:
of 1g of a gas through 1°C, when its volume is kept n = 0 for an isobaric process,
constant. It is denoted as CV. n = +∞ for an isochoric process
• Specific Heat at Constant Pressure: It is defined In addition, when the ideal gas law applies:
as the amount of heat required to raise the n = 1 for an isothermal process,
temperature of 1g of a gas through 1°C keeping its n = γ for an isentropic process.
pressure constant. It is denoted as Cp.
Where γ is the ratio of the heat capacity at constant
NOTE: pressure ( CP ) to heat capacity at constant volume ( C v )
c P , c v means Molar heat Capacity and CP , C V means 7.8 Free-Expansion
specific heat capacity A process in which gas is allowed to expand in vacuum
=CV Mc = V and C P Mc P where M stands for molar and this happens so quickly that no heat leaves or enters
mass of any sample. the system this type of process is also known as adiabatic
R process and because this happens so fast the gas does not
cp − c v =
M cross the system boundaries, hence no work is done by
the system or on the system, then the expansion is called
the free expansion.
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
We can for the equate free expansion into 8.1 Thermal Efficiency
U f − U i =Q − W Thermal Efficiency of a heat engine is defined of the
Now, as know heat is exchange and no work is done ratio of net work done per cycle by the engine to the total
Q = 0 and W = 0 i.e., U f = U i
amount of heat absorbed per cycle by the working
substance from the source.
Further, as we see there is no change in the internal
W
energy, Hence, the temperature remains constant. It is denoted by η = ... (1)
Q1
7.9 Limitation of First Law of Thermodynamics Using equation 1 and 2 we get
• Q
The first law does not indicate the direction in which η = 1− 2 ... ( 2 )
the change can occur. Q1
• The first law gives no idea about the extent of Ideally engines should have efficiency = 1
change.
NOTE:
• The first law of thermodynamics gives no
The mechanism of conversion of heat into work vanes
information about the source of heat. i.e. whether it
for different heat engines.
is a hot or a cold body.
The system heated by an external furnace, as in a steam
8. HEAT ENGINE engine. Such engines are called as external combustion
engine.
The system in which heat is produced by burning the fuel
It is a device that converts heat energy into mechanical
inside the main body of the engine is called as Internal
energy.
Combustion Engine.
Key Elements:
• A source of heat at higher temperature 9. CARNOT CYCLE
• A working substance
Sadi Carnot devised on ideal cycle of operation for a heat
• A sink of heat at lower temperature.
engine called as Carnot cycle.
Working:
• The working substance goes through a cycle Engine used for realising this ideal cycle is called as
consisting of several processes. Carnot heat engine.
• In some processes it absorbs a total amount of heat The essential parts of an Ideal heat engine are shown in
Q1 from the source at temperature T1. figure.
• In some processes it rejects a total amount of heat Q2

to the sink at some lower temperature T2.
• The work done by the system in a cycle is transferred
to the environment via some arrangement.
Schematic Diagram
Fig 15.17
• Source of heat: The source is maintained at a fixed
higher temperature T1, from which the working
substance draws heat. The source is supposed to
Fig 15.16 possess infinite thermal capacity and as such any
amount of heat can be drawn from it without
First Law of Thermodynamics changing its temperature.
⸪ Energy is always conserved • Sink of heat: The sink is maintained at a fixed lower
⇒ Q1 = W + Q 2 temperature T2, to which any amount of heat can be
rejected by the working substance.
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
It has also infinite thermal capacity and as such its • Adiabatic Expansion: The cylinder is now
temperature remains constant at T2, even when any removed from source and is placed on the perfectly
amount of heat is rejected to it. insulating pad. The gas is allowed to expand further
• Working substance: A perfect gas acts as the from B (P2, V2) to C (P3, V3). Since the gas is
working substance. It is contained in a cylinder with thermally insulated from all sides, therefore the
non-conducting sides but having a perfectly R (T − T )
conducting-base. This cylinder is fitted with processes is adiabatic q 2 = 0 ∆U 2 = 2 1
γ −1
perfectly non-conducting and frictionless piston.
R ( T1 − T2 )
• Apart from these essential parts, there is a perfectly =W2 = Area BCNMB
insulating stand or pad on which the cylinder can γ −1
be placed. It would isolate the working substance • Isothermal Compression: The cylinder is now
completely from the surroundings. Hence, the gas removed from the insulating pad and is placed on the
can undergo adiabatic changes. sink at a temperature T2. The piston is moved slowly
The Carnot cycle consists of the following four so that the gas is compressed until is pressure is P4
stages: and volume is V4.
• Isothermal expansion ∆U 3 = 0
• Adiabatic expansion V
W3 =
−RT2 ln 4 =
−Area CDLNC
• Isothermal compression V3
• Adiabatic compression
V4
The cycle is carried out with the help of the Carnot q 3 = −RT2 ln
V3
engine as detailed below:
q3 = Heat absorbed in this process
W3 = Work done by gas
• Adiabatic Compression: The cylinder is again
placed on the insulating pad, such that the process
remains adiabatic. Here the gas is further
compressed to its initial P1 and V1.
R (T − T )
∆U 4 = 1 2
γ −1
−R ( T1 − T2 )
Fig 15.18 W4 = = −area DAKLD
γ −1
Consider one gram mole of an ideal gas enclosed in the
cylinder. Let V1, P1, T1 be the initial volume, pressure q4 = 0
and temperature of the gas. The initial state of the gas is W4 = work done by the gas
represented by the point A on P−V. diagram, We shall 9.1 Analysis of Carnot Cycle
assume that all the four processes are quasi-static and
dissipative, the two conditions for their reversibility. Total work done by the engine per cycle.
Steps = W1 + W2 + W3 + W4
• Isothermal Expansion: The cylinder is placed on = W1 + W3
the source and gas is allowed to expand by slow V2 V
outward motion of piston. Since base is perfectly =W RT1 ln − RT2 ln 4
V1 V3
conducting therefore the process is isothermal.
Now Q1 = Total heat absorbed = q1
∆U1 = V
0 = RT1 ln 2
V1
V2
= =
q1 W1 RT1 ln = Area ABMKA Q2 = Total heat released = −q3
V1
[q3 = Heat absorbed and not heat released]
q1 → Heat absorbed by gas
V
W1 → Work done by gas = RT2 ln 3
V4
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
We can see that for heat engine Step - 3: Let engine I absorb Q1 heat from the source
W= Q1 − Q 2 deliver work W1 and release the balance Q1 − W1 to the
= Area under ABCDA sink in one cycle.
9.2 Efficiency of Carnot Engine
W Q
η= = 1− 2
Q1 Q1
Now steps 2 is adiabatic and step 4 is also adiabatic
⇒ T1V2γ −1 =
T2 V3γ −1
and T1V1γ −1 = T2 V4γ −1 Fig 15.19
Step - 4: Arrange R, such that it returns same heat Q, to
V2 V3
⇒ = ... ( 21) the source, taking Q2 from the sink and requiring work
V1 V4 W = Q1 – Q2 to be done on it.
From equation 19, 20 and 21 we get Step - 5: Suppose ηR < ηI (i.e.) If R were to act as an
Q1 T1
= engine it would give less work output than that of I (i.e.)
Q 2 T2 W < W1 for a given Q1 and Q1 – W > Q1 – W1
T Step - 6: In totality, the I-R system extracts heat (Q1 −
∴ n Carnot =
1− 2
T1 W) − (Q1 − W1) = W1 − W and delivers same amount of
work in one cycle, without any change in source or
• ηCarnot engine − depends only upon source
anywhere else. This is against second Law of
temperature and sink temperature. Thermodynamics. (Kelvin - Planck statement of second
• ηCarnot engine =
1 only when T2 = 0 K or T1 = ∞ which law of thermodynamics)
is impossible to attain. Hence the assertion η1 > ηR is wrong.
• If T2= T1 ⇒ η= 0 ⇒ Heat cannot be converted to Similar argument can be put up for the second statement
mechanical energy unless there is some difference of Carnot theorem, (i.e) Carnot efficiency is independent
between the temperature of source and sink. of working substance.
∴ We use ideal gas for calculating but the relation.
9.3 Carnot Theorem
Q1 T1
= will always hold true for any working
Statement: Carnot theorem states that all reversible Q 2 T2
engines working between same two temperatures have
substance used in a Carnot engine.
same efficiency irrespective of the nature of working
substance. The source and the sink works between the 9.4 Second Law of Thermodynamics
same temperature. The second law of thermodynamics states that the heat
• Working between two given temperatures, T1 of hot energy cannot transfer from a body at a lower
reservoir (the source) and T2 of cold reservoir (the temperature to a body at a higher temperature without the
sink), no engine can have efficiency more than that addition of energy.
of the Carnot engine. There are number of ways in which this law can be
• The efficiency of the Carnot engine is independent stated. Though all the statements are the same in their
of the nature of the working substance. contents, the following two are significant.
Engine used for realizing this ideal cycle is called as Kelvin Planck Statement: No process is possible whose
Carnot heat engine. sole result is the absorption of heat from a reservoir and
Proof: the complete conversion of the heat into work.
Step - 1: Imagine a reversible engine R and an Clausius Statement: No process is possible whose sole
irreversible engine-I working between the same source result is the transfer of heat from a colder object to a
(hot reservoir T1) and sink (cold reservoir T2). hotter object.
Step - 2: Couple two engines such that I acts like heat Significance: 100% efficiency in heat engines or infinite
engine and R acts like refrigerator. CoP in refrigerators is not possible.
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
10. REFRIGERATION 10.1 Coefficient of Performance

Coefficient of Performance of refrigerator (β) is defined
A refrigerator or heat pump is a device used for cooling
as the ratio of quantity of heat removed per cycle from
things.
contents of the refrigerator (Q2) to the energy spent per
Key Elements:
cycle (W) to remove this heat.
• A cold reservoir at temperature T2.
Q
• A working substance. β= 2 ... ( 2 )
W
• A hot reservoir at temperature T1.
Using equation 1 and 2 we get
Working
Q2
• The working substance goes through a cycle β=
consisting of several process. Q1 − Q 2
• A sudden expansion of the gas from high to low Ideally heat pumps should have β = ∞
pressure which cools it and converts it into a
vapour-liquid mixture.
• Absorption by the cold fluid of heat from the region
to be cooled, converting it into vapour.
• Heating up of the vapour due to external work done
on the working substance.
• Release of heat by the vapour to the surroundings
bringing it to the initial state and completing the
cycle.
Schematic Diagram.
Fig 15.20
First Law of Thermodynamics

Q2 + W =
Q1 ... (1)
SCAN CODE
@cbseinfinite
Solved Examples
pV
Example - 1 Sol. (a) The dotted plot shows that is a constant
T
Estimate the fraction of molecular volume to the actual quantity = (µR).
volume occupied by oxygen gas at STP. Take the
diameter of an oxygen molecule to be 3 Å. This signifies the ideal gas behaviour.
Sol. At S.T.P., actual volume occupied by 1 mole of (b) Here T1 > T2

oxygen is: (c) At the point where the curve meets the y-axis,
V = 22400 ml pV
= 22400 cm3 we have = µR, where µ is the number of moles
T
Also, molecular volume, of oxygen gas.
4
V=′ πR 3 N Here, Mass of oxygen,
3
=
where R
D 3 o
= A m 1.00 × 10−3 kg
=
2 2
3 Also, molecules mass,
=× 10−8 =
1.5 × 10−8 cm
2
M= 32 × 10−3 kg
=
and N 6.023 × 10 23
Hence, V ′ = × 3.143 × (1.5 × 10−8 ) × 6.023 × 1023

4 3 m 1.00 × 10−3 1
No. of moles, µ
= = =
3 M 32 × 10−3 32
= 8.52 cm3 pV 1
=µR = × 8.31 =0.26 J k −1
Hence, fraction of molecular volume to actual volume T 32
is
V′ 8.52
= = = 3.8 × 10−4 ≈ 4 × 10−4.
V 22400 pV
(d) Since the value of depends upon the number
Example - 2 T
Figure shows plot of pV/T versus p for 1.00 × 10−3 kg pV

of moles, we will not get the same value for
of oxygen gas at two different temperatures. T
in case of hydrogen. To obtain the same value of
 1  pV
µ  i.e.,  and hence , we must have
 32  T
Mass of hydrogen
=
Molecular mass of hydrogen
1
(a) What does the dotted plot signify? =
(b) Which is true: T1 > T2 or T1 < T2? 32
(c) What is the value of pV/T where the curves meet Hence, mass of hydrogen
on the y-axis.
(d) If we obtained similar plots for 1.00 × 10−3 kg of =
1
× molecular mass
hydrogen, would we get the same value of pV/T 32
at the point where the curves meet on the y-axis? 1
If not, what mass of hydrogen yields the same = × 2 × 10−3 kg
32
value of pV/T (for low pressure high temperature
region of the plot)? (Molecular mass of = 6.25 × 10−5 kg
H2 = 2.02u, of O2 = 32.0 u, R = 8.31 J mol−1 K−1).
@cbseinfinite
An oxygen cylinder of volume 30 litres has an initial An air bubble of volume 1.0 cm3 rises from the
gauge pressure of 15atm and a temperature of 27°C. bottom of a lake 40 m deep at temperature of 12°C.
After some oxygen is withdrawn from the cylinder, To what volume does it grow when it reaches the
the gauge pressure drops to 11atm and its temperature surface, which is at a temperature of 35°C?
drops to 17°C. Estimate the mass of oxygen taken out Sol. Volume of the bubble inside,
of the cylinder.
V1 = 1 cm3 = 1× 10−6 m3
(R = 8.31 J mol−1 K−1, molecular mass of O2 = 32u).
Sol. Under the initial conditions, Pressure on the bubble = Pressure of water +
atmospheric pressure,
V = 30 litre = 30 × 10−3m3
P = 15 atm = 15 × 1.01 × 105 Pa =ρgh + 1.01× 105
T = 27°C = 273 + 27 = 300 K = 1000 × 9.8 × 40 + 1.01× 105 = 4.93 × 105 Pa
Also, R = 8.31 J mol−1 K−1 and molar mass, Temperature,
M = 32 × 10−3 kg. T1 = 12°C = 273 + 12 = 285 K
Using the relation,
Also, pressure outside the lake
pV = nRT
p 2 1.01× 105 Nm −2
=
pV
⇒n= Temperature,
RT
T = 35°C = 35 + 273 = 308 K
15 × 1.01× 105 × 30 × 10−3
= 18.23
8.31× 300 Volume, V2 = ?
m p1V1 p 2 V2 p1V1 T1
Now, n = Now, = or =
V2 ×
M T1 T2 T1 p 2
⇒ m = nM = 18.23 × 32 × 10−3 kg 4.93 × 105 × 1× 10−6 × 308

= = 5.3 × 10−6 m3 .
285 × 1.01× 105
or m = 0.58 kg
Example - 5
Under the final condition:
Estimate the average thermal energy of a helium atom
V=′ 30 litre= 30 × 10−3 m3
at (i) room temperature (27°C), (ii) the temperature
P' =11atm =11× 1.01× 105 Pa on the surface of the Sun (6000 K), (iii) the
temperature of 10 million kelvin (the typical core
T ′ = 17°C = 17 + 273 = 290 K temperature in the case of a star).
P 'V ′ Sol. The average thermal energy of an atom is
We have, n ' =
RT ′ 3
−3
E= k BT
11× 1.01× 10 30 × 10
5
2
= 13.83
8.31× 290 k B 1.38 × 10−23 J K −1 is the Boltzmann’s
where =
m′ = n 'M const.
−3
= 13.83 × 32 × 10 kg= 0.44 kg (i). At room temperature,
T = 27°C = 27 + 273 = 300 K
Mass of the oxygen taken out of the cylinder
3
=m − m′ =0.58 − 0.44 =0.14 kg E = × 1.38 × 10−23 × 300 =6.21× 10−23 J
2
(ii). At the temperature on the surface of the sun,
i.e. T = 6000 K
@cbseinfinite
3 1 1
E = × 1.38 × 10−23 × 6000 =
1.24 × 10−19 J = =
2πnd 2 2πn ( 2r )
2
2
(iii). At
1
T = 10 million Kelvin =
( )
2
= 10 × 106 K. 1.414 × 3.14 × 5.06 × 1025 × 2 × 1× 10−10
3 = 1.1× 10−7 m
E = × 1.38 × 10−23 × 10 × 106
2
3RT
= 2.1× 10−16 J. Also, v rms =
M
Example - 6
3 × 8.31× 290
Estimate the mean free path and collision frequency of = = 5.08 × 102 ms −1
28 × 10−3
a nitrogen molecule in a cylinder containing nitrogen
Collision frequency,
at 2.0 atm and temperature 17°C. Take the radius of a
nitrogen molecule to be roughly 1.0 Å. Compare the v rms 5.08 × 102
= =
collision time with the time the molecule moves freely λ 1.1× 10−7
between two successive collisions (Molecular mass of Time between successive collisions
N2 = 28.0 u).
1 1
= = = 1.97 × 10−10 s
Sol. Here, p = 2 atm v rms 5.08 × 109
=
2 × 1.013 × 105 Pa Also, the collision time
d 2r
= 2.023 × 105 Pa = =
v rms v rms
T= 17°C
2 × 1× 10−10
= = 3.94 × 10−29 s.
=17 + 273 =290 K 5.08 × 109
o Example - 7
Radius, R = 10 A = 1× 10−10 m
Consider in ideal gas with following distribution of
Molecular, mass (m) speeds
=28u =28 × 1.66 × 10−27 RMS Speed (m/s) % of molecules
200 10
= 4.65 × 10−26 kg
400 20
−1 −1
Also, R = 8.31 J mole K
600 40
k B 1.38 × 10−23 J K −1
= 800 20
Now, for one mole of a gas, 1000 10
pV = RT (i) Calculate Vrms and hence T
(m = 3 × 0 × 10−26 kg)
RT (ii) If all the molecules with speed 1000 m/s escape
or V =
p from the system, calculate new Vrms and hence
T.
8.31× 290
= Sol. (i) By definition,
2.026 × 105
=
or V 1.189 × 10−2 m3 ∑n V i i
2
V 2
= i
∑n
rms
Number of molecules per unit volume, i
N
n= 10 ( 200 ) + 20 ( 400 ) + 40 ( 600 ) + 20 ( 800 ) + 10 (1000 )
2 2 2 2 2
V =
10 + 20 + 40 + 20 + 10
6.023 × 1023
⇒ n= = 5.06 × 1025 m −3 105 [ 4 + 32 + 144 + 128 + 100]
1.189 × 10−2 V=2
rms = 408 × 103
100
Now, mean free path, λ
@cbseinfinite
Vrms = 408 × 103 = 6.39 × 102 m / s

Example - 10
1 3
As mv 2rms = kT
2 2 Two different adiabatic parts for the same gas
intersect two isothermals at T1 and T2 as shown in P-
V diagram. How does the ratio (Va/Vd) compare with
mv 2rms 3 × 10−26 × 4.08 × 105 the ratio (Vb/Vc)?
∴ T= = −23
= 2.96 × 102 K.
3k 3 × 1.38 × 10
(ii) When all the molecules with speed 1000 m/s

escape from the system.
10 ( 200 ) + 20 ( 400 ) + 40 ( 600 ) + 20 ( 800 )
2 2 2 2
2
Vrms =
10 + 20 + 40 + 20
105 ( 4 + 32 + 144 + 128 ) 308

= = × 104
90 9
308
Vrms = × 102 m / s =
5.85 × 102 m / s
For adiabatic curve BC : T1Vb( ) = T2 Vc( )
γ−1 γ−1
9 Sol.
2
mVrms 3 × 10−26 × 308 × 104 For adiabatic curve AD : T1Va( ) = T2 Vd( )
γ −1 γ −1
=
As above, T =
3k 3 × 1.38 × 10−23 Dividing, we get
T = 248 K. ( γ −1) ( γ −1)
 Va  V 
  = d 
 Vb   Vc 
Example - 8 Va Vb
or =
The temperature of the surface of sun is about 6000 Vd Vc
K. Can we produce a temperature of 7000 K by Va Vd
converging sun’s rays using a large convex lens? ∴ =
Vb Vc
Sol. No, as according to the second law of
thermodynamics, heat cannot be transferred on its i.e., the ratio remains the same.
own, from a body at lower temperature to another at
higher temperature. Theoretically, the maximum
temperature we can produce by this method is 6000 Example - 11
K. A quantity of air at normal temperature is compressed
(a) slowly (b) suddenly to one third of its volume.
Example - 9 Find the rise in temperature, if any, in each case,
γ = 1.4
A refrigerator is to maintain eatables kept inside at
1
9°C. If room temperature is 36°C, calculate the Sol. Here,=
V2 V1 ; ( T2 −=
T1 ) ?
coefficient of performance. 3
γ = 1.4, T1 = 0°C = 273 K
Sol. Given: T1 = 36°C = ( 36 + 273) = 309 K (a). When the gas is compressed slowly, the change
is isothermal, i.e., temperature remains constant.
T2 = 10°C = (10 + 273) = 283 K (b). When the compression is sudden, the change is
adiabatic,
T 283 283
T2 V2(
γ −1)
= T1V1(
γ −1)
⇒ COP = 2 = = =10.9
T1 − T2 309 − 283 26
( γ −1)
V 
T2 = T1  1 
 V2 
(1.4 −1)
= ( 3)
T2 273= = ( 3) 423.6 K
0.4
273
T2 − T=
1 426.6 − 273
= 150.6 K
= 150.6°C
@cbseinfinite
Water of one kg mass at 373 K is converted into From what height must a block of ice be dropped in
steam at the same temperature and at atmospheric order that it may melt completely. It is assumed that
pressure. On boiling, 1 Litre. of water takes a volume the whole of energy is retained by ice.
of 1671 Litre. Calculate the change in internal energy (Latent heat of ice = 3.33 × 105 J/kg)
of the system, taking the heat of vaporisation to be
540 cal g −1 540. Sol. Let mass of ice block = m (kg)
Sol. Here, m = 1 kg = 103 g Height through which it is dropped = h (m)
Initial volume, V1 = 10 ml
3
PE of the block, W = mgh (J)
Final volume, =
V2 1671× 103 ml Since it is assumed that whole of this energy is
retained by ice and is converted into heat Q,
P = 1 atmosphere
Q = mgh ( J ) ... ( i )
= 1.013 × 106 dyne / cm 2
From first law of thermodynamics If this heat is to melt the ice, then
dU =dQ − dW =mL − P ( V2 − V1 ) J Q= ( mkg ) × ( 3.33 ×105 J / kg )
1.013 × 106 × 103 (1671 − 1)
=103 × 540 − = 3.33 × 105 m ( J ) ... ( ii )
4.2 × 107
dU = 540 × 103 − 40.16 × 103 From equation (i) and (ii),
= 499.84 × 103 cal. = 3.33 × 105 m

mgh
= 499.84 Kcal.
3.33 × 105
Example - 13 or h = or =
h 3.4 × 104 m
9.8
A heat engine operates between a cold reservoir at
temp. T2 = 300 K and a hot reservoir at temp. T1. It
takes 200 J of heat from hot reservoir and delivers Example - 15
120 J of heat to cold reservoir in a cycle. What could Is it possible to heat a room by means of a
be the minimum temperature of hot reservoir?
refrigerator? If so, is this method the most
Sol. Work done by the engine in one cycle advantageous from energetic point of view?
W = Q1 − Q 2 = 200 − 120 = 80 J
Sol. Yes, a refrigerator can remove heat from the outside
W 80 air and reject it into the room. If P is the power
=
η = = 0.40
Q1 200 consumed by the refrigerator and Q is the heat
removed from the outside air in a unit time, the heat
According to Carnot theorem, no engine can have
rejected into the room per second = P + Q.
efficiency greater than that of Carnot engine.
 T  300
∴ 0.40 ≤ 1 − 2  =1 −
 T1  T1
300
or ≤ 1 − 0.40 =0.60
T1
300
∴ T1 ≥ =
500 K
0.6
Hence, minimum temperature of hot reservoir is
T1 = 500 K
@cbseinfinite

Introduction to Kinetic Theory of Gases 7. One mole of an ideal gas at an initial temperature of T
kelvin does 6 R joule of work adiabatically. If the ratio
1. Cooking gas containers are kept in a lorry moving with
of specific heats of this gas at constant pressure and at
uniform speed. The temperature of the gas molecules
inside will 5
constant volume is , the final temperature of the gas
(a) increase 3
(b) decrease will be
(c) remain same (a) (T + 4) K (b) (T – 4) K
(d) decrease for some, while increase for others (c) (T + 2.4) K (d) (T – 2.4) K
2. If the pressure of the gas is doubled at constant volume Speeds of Gas Molecules
and mass, the frequency of collision of the molecules
with the walls of a container will 8. The density of a gas is 6 × 10–2 kg/m3 and the RMS
(a) Not change (b) Increase four times velocity of the gas molecules is 500 m/s. The pressure
exerted by the gas on the walls of the vessel is
(c) Be doubled (d) Increase by 2 times
(a) 5 × 103 N/m2 (b) 0.83 × 10–4 N/m2
3. If pressure and temperature of an ideal gas are doubled
(c) 1.2 × 10–4 N/m2 (d) 30 N/m2
and volume is halved, the number of molecules of the
9. The mean free path of a gas molecule at 27°C is 2 cm.
gas
If the rms velocity of the gas at that temperature is
(a) become half (b) become 4 times
10 m/s, what is the time interval between two
(c) become two times (d) remain constant
successive collisions?
4. Real gases obey gas laws more closely at
1 1
(a) High pressure and low temperature (a) s (b) s
(b) Low pressure and high temperature 5 500
(c) High pressure and high temperature 1 1
(c) s (d) s
(d) Low pressure and low temperature 50 250
5. By what percentage should the pressure of a given 10. Mean free path (λ) is
mass of a gas be increased so as to decrease its volume (a) inversely proportional to the diameter of molecule
by 10 % at a constant temperature? (b) inversely proportional to the square of diameter of
(a) 8.1 % (b) 10.1 % molecule
(c) 9.1 % (d) 11.1 % (c) inversely proportional to the number of molecules
6. A cylinder containing an ideal gas is in vertical per unit volume
position and has a piston of mass M that is able to move (d) both b and c
up or down without friction, as shown in figure. If the 11. Four molecules of speed 2 km/s, 3 km/s, 4 km/s and
temperature is increased. 5 km/s. The RMS speed of these molecules in km/s is
(P and V are the initial pressure and volume of the gas 54
respectively) (a) (b) 3.5
4
54
(c) (d) 3 3
2
(a) both P and V of the gas will change

(b) only P will increase according to Charles law
(c) V will change but not P
(d) P will change but not V
@cbseinfinite
12. A cubic vessel (with faces horizontal + vertical) 16. 1 mole of an ideal gas is contained in a cubical vessel,
contains an ideal gas at NTP. The vessel is being ABCDEFGH at 300 K, figure.
carried by a rocket which is moving at a speed of B C
500 m/s in vertical direction. The pressure of the gas
inside the vessel as observed by us on the ground: A D
(a) remains the same because 500 m/s is very much
smaller than vrms of the gas F G
(b) remains the same because motion of the vessel as a E
whole does not affect the relative motion of the gas H
molecules and the walls One face (EFGH) of the vessel is made up of a material
which totally absorbs any gas molecule incident on it.
+ ( 500 )
2 2
vrms
(c) will increase by a factor equal to 2
, At any given time:
vrms (a) the pressure on EFGH would be zero
where vrms was the original root mean square (b) the pressure on all the faces will be equal
velocity of the gas (c) the pressure on EFGH would be double the pressure
(d) will be different on the top wall and bottom wall of on ABCD
the vessel (d) the pressure on EFGH would be half that on ABCD
17. If C p and Cv denote the specific heats of nitrogen per
Energy of gas molecules
unit mass at constant pressure and constant volume
13. The increase in internal energy of a gas per unit mass
respectively, then
per unit rise in temperature is equal to ( Cv and C p are
R
specific heat capacities at constant volume and (a) CP – CV = 28 R (b) CP – CV =
28
pressure respectively)
R
(a) Cp (b) Cp + Cv (c) CP – CV = (d) CP – CV = R
14
(c) Cp – Cv (d) Cv
18. Two monoatomic gases are at absolute temperature
14. Which of the following statements is correct for any 300K and 350K respectively. The ratio of average
thermodynamic system? kinetic energies of their molecules is
(a) The internal energy changes in all processes
3.5 3
(b) Internal energy and entropy are state functions (a) (b)
3 3.5
(c) The change in entropy can never be zero
(d) The work done in an adiabatic process is always (c) 6 : 7 (d) 36 : 49
zero 19. A sample of oxygen and a sample of hydrogen have
15. A system goes from A to B via two process I and II as the same mass, volume and pressure. The ratio of their
absolute temperature is
shown in figure. If ∆U1 and ∆U 2 are the changes in
(a) 1/4 (b) 1/16
internal energies in the processes I and II respectively, (c) 4 (d) 16
then
(a) ∆U 2 > ∆U1

(b) ∆U 2 < ∆U1
(c) ∆U1 =
∆U 2
(d) relation between ∆U1 and ∆U 2 cannot be
determined
@cbseinfinite
20. In the diagrams (i) to (iv) of variation of volume with 23. An air sample consists of 78% N2 and 22% oxygen.
changing pressure is shown. A gas is taken along the The values of Cv for N2 and O2 is 0.2 kcal/kg/K and
path ABCD. The change in internal energy of the gas 0.15 kcal/kg/K. Heat required to raise the temperature
will be of 1 kg of air through 1°C is
(a) 0.350 cal (b) 0.189 cal
(c) 0.350 kcal (d) 0.189 kcal
24. A thermally insulated vessel contains an ideal gas of
molecular mass M and ratio of specific heats γ . It is
moving with speed v and it is suddenly brought to rest
Assuming no heat is lost to the surroundings, its
temperature increases by
(γ − 1) γ Mv 2
(a) Mv 2 K (b) K
2γ R 2R
(γ − 1) (γ − 1)
(c) Mv 2 K (d) Mv 2 K
2R 2 ( γ + 1) R
25. The difference between two principal specific heats of
nitrogen is 300 J/kg.K and ratio of the two specific
heats is 1.4. Value of Cp (in J/kg.K ) is:
(a) Positive in all cases (i) to (iv) Introduction to Thermodynamics
(b) Positive in cases (i), (ii) and (iii) but zero in (iv) 26. The internal energy of an ideal gas depends on:
case (a) Pressure (b) Volume
(c) Negative in cases (i), (ii) and (iii) but zero in (iv) (c) Temperature (d) Size of the molecule
case 27. Which one of the following is not a thermodynamic
(d) Zero in all four cases co-ordinate?
21. Consider a process shown in the figure. During this (a) V (b) R
process the work done by the system (c) T (d) P
28. Which one of the following gases possesses the
largest internal energy
(a) 2moles of helium occupying 1m3 at 300 K
(b) 56kg of nitrogen at 107 Nm −2 and 300 K
(c) 8 grams of oxygen at 8atm and 300 K
(d) 6 × 1026 molecules of argon occupying 40 m3 at
(a) Continuously increases 900 K
(b) Continuously decreases 29. If the gases have initial temperature 300K and they are
(c) First increases, then decreases mixed in an adiabatic container having the same
(d) First decreases, then increases volume as the previous containers. Now the
22. Three perfect gases at absolute temperature T1, T2 and temperature of the mixture is T and pressure is P. Then
T3 are mixed. The masses of molecules are m1, m2 and
m3 and the number of molecules are n1, n2 and n3
respectively.
Assuming no loss of energy, the final temperature of
the mixture is (a) P > PA , T > 300 K (b) P > PB , T =
300 K
n1T1 + n2T2 + n3T3 nT +n T +n T
1 1
2
2 2
2
3 3
2
(c) P < PA , T =
300 K (d) P > PA , T < 300 K
(a) (b)
n1 + n2 + n3 n1T1 + n2T2 + n3T3
n12T12 + n22T22 + n32T32 (T1 + T2 + T3 )
(c) (d)
n1T1 + n2T2 + n3T3 3
@cbseinfinite
30. The molar heat capacity in a process of a diatomic gas 34. A and B are two adiabatic curves for two different
Q gases. Then A and B correspond to
if it does a work of when a heat of Q is supplied to
4
it is
2 5
(a) R (b) R
5 2
10 6
(c) R (d) R
3 7
First Law of Thermodynamics
31. A gas is compressed at a constant pressure of 50 N/m2
(a) Ar and He respectively (b) He and H2 respectively
from a volume of 10 m3 to a volume of 4 m3. Energy of
(c) O2 and H2 respectively (d) H2 and He respectively
100 J is then added to the gas by heating. Its internal
energy is: 35. In a given process for an ideal gas,
(a) increased by 400 J (b) increased by 200 J dW = 0 and dQ < 0. Then for the gas,
(c) increased by 100 J (d) decreased by 200 J (a) temperature will decrease
32. The slopes of the isothermal and adiabatic curves are (b) volume will increase
related as: (c) pressure will remain constant
(a) isothermal curve slope = adiabatic curve slope (d) temperature will increase
(b) isothermal curve slope = γ × adiabatic curve slope 36. Starting with the same initial conditions, an ideal gas
expands from volume V1 to V2 in three different ways.
(c) adiabatic curve slope = γ × isothermal curve slope
(d) adiabatic curve slope = (1/2) × isothermal curve The work done by the gas is W1 if process is
slope isothermal, W2 if isobaric and W3 if adiabatic. Then,
33. Consider P-V diagram for an ideal gas shown in figure (a) W2 > W1 > W3 (b) W2 > W3 > W1
P
(c) W1 > W2 > W3 (d) W1 = W2 = W3
1 37. At 27°C, a gas is compressed suddenly such that its
constant
P= pressure becomes (1/8)th of its original pressure. Final
V
temperature will be (γ = 5/3):
2
(a) 420 K (b) 300 K
V (c) –142°C (d) 327°C
Out of the following diagrams, which represents the T- 38. In an adiabatic change, the pressure P and temperature
P diagram?
T T of a diatomic gas are related by the relation P ∝ TC,
T
2
where c is equal to:
2 (a) 5/3 (b) 2/5
(i) (ii) (c) 3/5 (d) 7/2
1 1 39. The P-V diagram shows seven curved paths (connected
P P by vertical paths) that can be followed by a gas. Which
T T two of them should be parts of a closed cycle if the net
work done by the gas is to be at its maximum value
2 1 1 2
P a
(iii) (iv)
b
c
P P d
(a) (iv) (b) (ii) e
(c) (iii) (d) (i) f
g
V
(a) ac (b) cg
(c) af (d) cd
@cbseinfinite
40. Consider two containers A and B containing identical 45. In the cyclic process shown in the figure, the work
gases at the same pressure, volume, and temperature. done by the gas in one cycle is
The gas in container A is compressed to half of its
original volume isothermally while the gas in container
B is compressed to half of its original value
adiabatically. The ratio of final pressure of gas in B to
that of gas in A is:
γ −1
1
(a) 2γ–1 (b)  
2
γ −1 2
 1   1 
(c)   (d)  
1− γ   γ −1  (a) 28PV (b) 14PV
1 1 1 1
41. In the following indicator diagram, the net amount of
(c) 18PV
1 1 (d) 9PV
1 1
work done by the gas will be
46. Heat energy absorbed by a system in going through a
P
cyclic process shown in figure is
1 2
V
(a) Positive (b) Negative
(c) Zero (d) Infinity
42. One mole of an ideal gas requires 207 J heat to raise
(a) 107 π J (b) 104 π J
the temperature by 10K, when heated at constant
pressure. If the same gas is heated at constant volume (c) 102 π J (d) 10−3 π J
to raise the temperature by 10K, then heat required (in 47. In a cyclic process, work done by the system is
joules) is (R = 8.3 J/mol.K) (a) zero
Cyclic and Non-cyclic Processes (b) Equal to heat given to the system
(c) More than the heat given to system
43. An ideal gas undergoes cyclic process ABCDA as
(d) Independent of heat given to the system
shown in given P-V diagram
48. In a cyclic process, the internal energy of the gas
P
(a) Increases (b) Decreases
D C
2P0 (c) Remains constant (d) Becomes zero
49. A thermodynamic system is taken through the cycle
P0 B
A PQRSP process. The net work done (in joules) on the
V system is
V0 3V0
The amount of work done by the gas is:
(a) 6P0V0 (b) –2P0V0
(c) +2P0V0 (d) +4P0V0
44. Work done by the gas in the process shown in figure is
(a) positive (b) negative

(c) zero (d) cannot say
@cbseinfinite
Thermodynamic Processes Heat Engine

50. A given system undergoes a change in which work 55. An ideal heat engine working between temperature T1
done by the system equals the decrease in its internal and T2 has an efficiency h, the new efficiency if both
energy. The system must have undergone
the source and sink temperature are doubled, will be
(a) isothermal change (b) adiabatic change
η
(c) isobaric change (d) isochoric change (a) (b) η
51. The temperature of a hypothetical gas increases to 2
2 times when compressed adiabatically to half the (c) 2η (d) 3η
volume. Its equation can be written as 56. The thermal efficiency of a hat engine for which the
(a) PV 3/ 2 = constant (b) PV 5/ 2 = constant work output is 2500 J/cycle and the heat input is
(c) PV 7/3 = constant (d) PV 4/3 = constant 10000 J/cycle, is
52. Two samples A and B of same gas have equal volumes (a) 75% (b) 40%
and pressures. The gas in sample A is expanded
isothermally to double its volume and the gas in (c) 25% (d) 0.25%
sample B is expanded to double its volume 57. An ideal gas heat engine operates in the Carnot cycle
adiabatically. If work done by the gas is same in two between 227°C and 127°C . It absorbs 6 × 104 cal of
processes, then value of γ for the gas is best given by heat at higher temperature. Amount of heat converted
(a) 1 − 2−γ =( γ − 1) ln 2 into work, is
(a) 1.2 × 104 cal (b) 2.4 × 104 cal
(γ 1) ln 2
(b) 1 − 2−(γ −1) =−
(c) 6.0 × 104 cal (d) 4.8 × 104 cal
(c) 1 − 2 − ( γ −1)
=2 ( γ − 1) ln 2
(d) None of these ABCD as shown in figure. Heat rejected by the gas
53. Two samples A and B of a gas initially at the same during the cycle is:
pressure and temperature are compressed from volume
V
V to (A isothermally and B adiabatically). The
2
final pressure of A is
(a) Greater than the final pressure of B
(b) Equal to the final pressure of B
(c) Less than the final pressure of B (a) PV (b) 2 PV
(d) Twice the final pressure of B 1
(c) 4 PV (d) PV
54. An ideal gas undergoes four different processes from 2
the same initial state, as shown in figure. Four 59. The temperature-entropy diagram of a reversible
processes are adiabatic, isothermal, isobaric and engine cycle is given in the figure. Its efficiency is
isochoric. Out of 1, 2, 3 and 4 which one is adiabatic?
P
4
3
2
1
1 2
(a) (b)
3 3
1 1
(c) (d)
2 4
@cbseinfinite
60. The shown P-V diagram represents the Carnot Cycle

thermodynamics cycle of an engine, operating with an 66. Even Carnot engine cannot give 100% efficiency
ideal monoatomic gas. The amount of heat, extracted because we cannot
from the source in a single cycle is:
(a) prevent radiation
(b) find ideal sources
(c) reach absolute zero temperature
(d) eliminate friction
67. Which statement is incorrect?
(a) all reversible cycles have same efficiency
(b) reversible cycle has more efficiency than the
irreversible one
(c) Carnot cycle is a reversible one
(d) Carnot cycle has the maximum efficiency in all
cycles
1
68. A Carnot engine, having an efficiency of η = as
 13  10
(a) PV
0 0 (b)   PV 0 0
2 heat engine, is used as a refrigerator. If the work done
on the system is 10 J, the amount of energy absorbed
 11 
(c)   PV 0 0 (d) 4PV
0 0
from the reservoir at lower temperature is
2 (a) 100 J (b) 99 J
61. A reversible engine converts one-sixth of the heat (c) 90 J (d) 1 J
input into work. When the temperature of the sink is 69. A Carnot engine takes 3 × 106 cal of heat from a
reduced by 62°C , the efficiency of the engine is reservoir at 627°C, and gives it to a sink at 27°C. The
doubled. The temperatures of the source and sink are work done by the engine is
(a) 80°C ,37°C (b) 95°C , 28°C (a) 4.2 × 106 J (b) 8.4 × l06 J
(c) 90°C ,37°C (d) 99°C ,37°C 6
(c) 16.8 × l0 J (d) zero
62. A heat engine operates between a cold reservoir at 70. Two Carnot engines A and B are operated in
temperature T2 = 300 K and a hot reservoir at succession. The first one, A receives heat form a
temperature T1 . It takes 200 J of heat from hot reservoir source at T = 800 K and rejects to sink at T2 . The
and delivers 120 J of heat to cold reservoir in a cycle. second engine B receives heat rejected by the first
What could be the minimum temperature of hot engine and rejects to another sink at T3 = 300 K . If the
reservoir?
work outputs of two engines are equal, then the value
(a) 200K (b) 300K
of T2 is
(c) 400K (d) 500K
(a) 100 K (b) 300 K
63. An ideal heat engine exhausting heat at 77°C is to
(c) 550 K (d) 700 K
have a 30% efficiency. It must take heat at
Refrigeration
(a) 127°C (b) 227°C
71. A refrigerator is to maintain eatables kept inside at
(c) 327°C (d) 673°C
9°C . If room temperature is 36°C , calculate the
64. A reversible heat engine coverts one-fourth of the heat coefficient of performance.
input into work. When the temperature of the sink is
(a) 10.9 (b) 20.9
reduced by 52K, its efficiency is doubled.
(c) 30.9 (d) 40.9
The temperature in Kelvin of the source will be ………
72. The coefficient of performance of a Carnot refrigerator
65. For an ideal heat engine, the temperature of the source
working between 30°C and 0°C is
is 127°C . In order to have 60% efficiency the
temperature of the sink should be ……… kelvin (a) 10 (b) 1
(Round off to the Nearest Integer). (c) 9 (d) 0
73. A refrigerator is to maintain eatables kept inside at
9°C , calculate the coefficient of performance?
(a) 10.44 (b) 11.44
(c) 12.44 (d) 13.44
@cbseinfinite
74. The coefficient of performance for a refrigerator 78. The freezer in a refrigerator is located at the top section
should be: so that
(a) Greater than 1 (b) smaller than 1 (a) The entire chamber of the refrigerator is cooled
(c) Equal to 1 (d) None of these quickly due to convection
(b) The motor is not heated
75. A refrigerator is
(c) The heat gained from the environment is high
(a) Heat engine
(d) The heat gained from the environment is low
(b) An electric motor
79. The inside and outside temperature of a refrigerator are
(c) Heat engine working in backward direction
273 K and 303 K respectively. Assuming that
(d) Air cooler refrigerator cycle is reversible, for every joule of work
76. An ideal refrigerator has a freezer at a temperature of done the heat delivered to the surrounding will be
−13°C. The coefficient of performance of the engine (a) 10 J (b) 20 J
is 5. The temperature of the air (to which heat is (c) 30 J (d) 50 J
rejected) will be:
80. A refrigerator works between 4°C and 30°C . It is
(a) 325°C (b) 325K required to remove 600 cal of heat every second in
(c) 39°C (d) 320°C order to keep the temperature of the refrigerated space
77. The coefficient of performance of a Carnot refrigerator constant. The power required is (take, 1 cal = 4.2J)
working between 30°C and 0°C is (a) 23.65W (b) 236.5W
(a) 10 (b) 1 (c) 2365W (d) 2.365W
(c) 9 (d) 0
@cbseinfinite

1. ‘n’ moles of an ideal gas undergo a process A → B as 5. Which of the following shows the correct relationship
shown in the figure. The maximum temperature of the between the pressure ‘P’ and density r of an ideal gas
gas during the process will be: [2016] at constant temperature? [2016]
3 P0V0 9 P0V0
(a) (b)
2nR 2nR
9 P0V0 9 P0V0
(c) (d)
nR 4nR
2. An ideal gas undergoes a quasi-static, reversible 6. C p and Cv are specific heats at constant pressure and
process in which its molar heat capacity C remains constant volume respectively. It is observed that
constant. If during this process the relation of pressure C p − Cv =a for hydrogen gas, C p − Cv = b for
P and volume V is given by PVn = constant, then n is
nitrogen gas. The correct relation between a and b is:
given by (Here C p and CV are molar specific heat at
[2017]
constant pressure and constant volume, respectively): 1
[2016] (a) a = b (b) a = b
14
C − CP C −C (c) a = 14 b (d) a = 28 b
(a) n = (b) n = P
C − CV C − CV 7. N moles of a diatomic gas in a cylinder are at a
C − CV C temperature T. Heat is supplied to the cylinder such
(c) n = (d) n = P
C − CP CV that the temperature remains constant but n moles of
the diatomic gas get converted into monoatomic gas.
3. The ratio of work done by an ideal monoatomic gas to
What is the change in the total kinetic energy of the
the heat supplied to it in an isobaric process is:
gas? [2017]
[2016]
1
3 2 (a) nRT (b) 0
(a) (b) 2
5 5
3 5
3 2 (c) nRT (d) nRT
(c) (d) 2 2
2 5
8. An engine operates by taking n moles of an ideal gas
4. A Carnot freezer takes heat from water at 0ºC inside it
through the cycle ABCDA shown in figure. The
and rejects it to the room at a temperature of 27ºC. The
thermal efficiency of the engine is:
latent heat of ice is 336 × 103J kg-1. If 5 kg of water at
(Take Cv =1.5 R, where R is gas constant) [2017]
0ºC is converted into ice at 0ºC by the freezer, then the
energy consumed by the freezer is close to: [2016]
5 6
(a) 1.67 × 10 J (b) 1.68 × 10 J
(c) 1.51 × 105J (d) 1.71 × 107J
(a) 0.24 (b) 0.15

(c) 0.32 (d) 0.08
@cbseinfinite
9. An ideal gas has molecules with 5 degrees of freedom. 13. Two Carnot engines A and B are operated in series.
The ratio of specific heats at constant pressure (Cp) and Engine A receives heat from a reservoir at 600 K and
at constant volume (Cv) is: [2017] rejects heat to a reservoir at temperature T. Engine B
7 receives heat rejected by engine A and in turn rejects it
(a) 6 (b)
2 to a reservoir at 100 K. If the efficiencies of the two
5 7 engines A and B are represented by η A and η B
(c) (d)
2 5 ηB
respectively, then what is the value of ? [2018]
10. For the P-V diagram given for an ideal gas, out of the ηA
following which one correctly represents the T-P
diagram? [2017]
12 7
(a) (b)
7 12
12 5
(c) (d)
5 12
14. The value closest to the thermal velocity of a Helium
atom at room temperature (300K) in ms-1 is:
[kB = 1.4 × 10-23 J/K; mHe = 7 ×10-27 kg] [2016]
(a) 1.3 × 10 4
(b) 1.3 × 10 3
(c) 1.3 × 105 (d) 1.3 × 102

15. One mole of an ideal monoatomic gas is taken along
the path ABCA as shown in the PV diagram. The
maximum temperature attained by the gas along the
path BC is given by: [2018]
11. A Carnot’s engine works as a refrigerator between

250 K and 300 K. It receives 500 cal heat from the 25 PV 25 PV
0 0 0 0
reservoir at the lower temperature. The amount of (a) (b)
16 R 8 R
work done in each cycle to operate the refrigerator is:
[2018] 25 PV
0 0 5 PV
0 0
(c) (d)
(a) 420 J (b) 772 J 4 R 8 R
(c) 2100 J (d) 2520 J 16. Two moles of helium are mixed with n moles of
12. One mole of an ideal monoatomic gas is compressed C 3
hydrogen. If P = for the mixture, then the value of
isothermally in a rigid vessel to double its pressure at CV 2
room temperature, 27oC. The work done on the gas will n is: [2018]
be: [2018] (a) 1 (b) 3
(a) 300 R (b) 300 R ln 6 3
(c) 300 R ln 2 (d) 300 R ln 7 (c) 2 (d)
2
@cbseinfinite
17. Following figure shows two processes A and B for a 21. A thermally isolated cylindrical closed vessel of height
gas. If ∆QA and ∆QB are the amounts of heat absorbed 8 m is kept vertically. It is divided into two equal parts
by a diathermic (perfect thermal conductor)
by the system in two cases, ∆U A and ∆U B are changes
frictionless partition of mass 8.3 kg. Thus, the partition
in internal energies, respectively, then: [2019] is held initially at a distance of 4 m from the top, as
shown in the schematic figure below. Each of the two
parts of the vessel contains 0.1 mole of an ideal gas at
temperature 300 K. The partition is now released and
moves without any gas leaking from one part of the
vessel to the other. When equilibrium is reached, the
distance of the partition from the top (in m) will be
(a) ∆Q A < ∆Q B , ∆U A < ∆U B _______ (take the acceleration due to gravity
(b) ∆Q A > ∆Q B , ∆U A > ∆U B =10 ms-2 and the universal gas constant). [2020]
(c) ∆Q A > ∆Q B , ∆U A = ∆U B
(d) ∆Q A =
∆Q B , ∆U A =
∆U B
18. Under an adiabatic process, the volume of an ideal gas
gets doubled. Consequently, the mean collision time
between the gas molecules changes from τ 1 to τ 2 .
Cp τ2
If = γ for this gas, then a good estimate for is 22. A spherical bubble inside water has radius R. Take the
CV τ1
pressure inside the bubble and the water pressure to be
given by [2020] P0. The bubble now gets compressed radially in an
γ +1
1 1 2 adiabatic manner so that its radius becomes (R – a). For
(a) (b)  
2 2 a << R the magnitude of the work done in the process
γ is given by (4π p0 Ra 2 ) X , where X is a constant and.
1
(c)   (d) 2
2 γ = Cp / Cv = 41/ 30 . The value of X is [2020]
19. A gas mixture consists of 3 moles of oxygen and 23. If one mole of the polyatomic gas is having two
5 moles of argon at temperature T. Assuming the gases vibrational modes and β is the ratio of molar specific
to be ideal and the oxygen bond to be rigid, the total
 C 
internal energy (in units of RT) of the mixture is: heats for polyatomic gas  β = p  , then the value of
[2020]  Cv 
(a) 11 (b) 13 β is: [2021]

(c) 15 (d) 20 (a) 1.02 (b) 1.20
20. Consider one mole of helium gas enclosed in a (c) 1.25 (d) 1.35
container at initial pressure P1 and V1. It expands 24. On the basis of kinetic theory of gases, the gas exerts
isothermally to volume 4V1. After this, the gas expands pressure because its molecules: [2021]
adiabatically and its volume becomes 32V1. The work (a) continuously lose their energy till it reaches wall
done by the gas during isothermal and adiabatic (b) are attracted by the walls of container
expansion processes are Wiso and Wadia, respectively. (c) continuously stick to the walls of container
W (d) suffer change in momentum when impinge on the
If the ration iso = f ln 2, then f is ……… [2020]
Wadia walls of container
@cbseinfinite
25. Given below are two statements: 31. The root mean square speed of molecules of a given
Statement I: In a diatomic molecule, the rotational mass of a gas at 27° C and 1 atmosphere pressure is
energy at a given temperature obeys Maxwell's 200 ms-1. The root mean square speed of molecules of
distribution. the gas at 127° C and 2 atmosphere pressure is
Statement II: In a diatomic molecule, the rotational x
energy at a given temperature equals the translational ms-1. The value of x will be [2021]
3
kinetic energy for each molecule.
32. A monatomic gas of mass 4.0 u is kept in an insulated
In the light of the above statements, choose the correct
container. Container is moving with velocity 30 m/s. If
answer from the options given below: [2021]
container is suddenly stopped then change in
(a) Both Statement I and Statement II are true.
x
(b) Statement I is false but Statement II is true. temperature of the gas (R= gas constant) is .
3R
(c) Both Statement I and Statement II are false.
(d) Statement I is true but Statement II is false. Value of x is ……… [2021]
26. The internal energy (U), pressure (P) and volume (V) 33. Match List-I with List-II
of an ideal gas are related as U = 3PV + 4. The gas is List-I List-II
[2021] A Isothermal (i) Pressure constant
(a) Diatomic only B Isochoric (ii) Temperature constant
(b) Polyatomic only C Adiabatic (iii) Volume constant
(c) Either monoatomic or diatomic D Isobaric (iv) Heat content is constant
(d) Monoatomic only Choose the correct answer from the options given
27. Calculate the value of mean free path (λ) for oxygen below [2021]
molecules at temperature 27°C and pressure 1.01 × 105 (a) A – (iii), B – (ii), C – (i), D – (iv)
Pa. Assume the molecular diameter 0.3 nm and the gas (b) A – (ii), B – (iv), C – (iii), D – (i)
is ideal. (k = 1.38 × 10-23 JK-1) [2021] (c) A – (i), B – (iii), C – (ii), D – (iv)
(a) 86 nm (b) 102 nm (d) A – (ii), B – (iii), C – (iv), D – (i)
(c) 32 nm (d) 58 nm 34. n moles of a perfect gas undergoes a cyclic process
28. A polyatomic ideal gas has 24 vibrational modes. What ABCA (see figure) consisting of the following
is the value of γ ? [2021] processes.
(a) 1.03 (b) 1.30 A → B: Isothermal expansion at temperature T so that
(c) 1.37 (d) 10.3 the volume is doubled from V1 to V2 = 2V1 and
pressure changes from P1 to P2.
29. Two ideal polyatomic gases at temperatures T1 and T2
B → C: Isobaric compression at pressure P2 to initial
are mixed so that there is no loss of energy. If F1 and volume V1.
F2 , m1 and m2 , n1 and n2 be the degrees of freedom, C → A: Isochoric change leading to change of pressure
masses, number of molecules of the first and second from P2 to P1.
gas respectively, the temperature of mixture of these Total work done in the complete cycle ABCA is:
two gases is: [2021] [2021]
nT +n T n FT + n F T
(a) 1 1 2 2 (b) 1 1 1 2 2 2
n1 + n2 n1 F1 + n2 F2
n1 F1T1 + n2 F2T2 n1 F1T1 + n2 F2T2
(c) (d)
F1 + F2 n1 + n2
30. What will be the average value of energy along one
degree of freedom for an ideal gas in thermal
equilibrium at a temperature T? ( k B is Boltzmann
 1
constant) [2021] (a) 0 (b) nRT  ln 2 − 
2  2
(a) k BT (b) k BT
3  1
(c) nRT ln 2 (d) nRT  ln 2 + 
1 3  2
(c) k BT (d) k BT
2 2
@cbseinfinite
35. If one mole of an ideal gas at (P1, V1) is allowed to 39. A Carnot’s engine working between 400 K and 800 K
expand reversibly and isothermally (A to B) its has a work output of 1200 J per cycle. The amount of
pressure is reduced to one-half of the original pressure heat energy supplied to the engine from the source in
(see figure). This is followed by a constant volume each cycle is: [2021]
cooling till its pressure is reduced to one-fourth of the (a) 3200 J (b) 1800 J
initial value (B → C). Then it is restored to Initial state (c) 1600 J (d) 2400 J
by a reversible adiabatic compression (C to A). The net 40. Which one is the correct option for the two different
work done by the gas is equal to [2021] thermodynamic processes? [2021]
 1  RT
(a) RT  ln 2 −  (b) −
 2 ( γ − 1)  2 ( γ − 1)
(c) RT ln 2 (d) 0
7 5 (a) (c) and (a) (b) (c) and (d)
36. =
A diatomic gas, having CP = R and CV R, is
2 2 (c) (a) only (d) (b) and (c)
heated at constant pressure. The ratio dU : dQ : dW : 41. The P-V diagram of a diatomic ideal gas system going
[2021] under cyclic process is shown in figure. The work done
(a) 5 : 7 : 2 (b) 3 : 5 : 2 during an adiabatic process CD is (use γ = 1.4) :
(c) 5 : 7 : 3 (d) 3 : 7 : 2 [2021]
37. Thermodynamic process is shown below on a P-V
diagram for one mole of an ideal gas. If V2 = 2V1 then
T
the ratio of temperature 2 is: [2021]
T1
(a) – 400 J (b) 400 J

1 (c) 200 J (d) – 500 J
(a) (b) 2
2 42. Consider a sample of oxygen behaving like an ideal
1 gas. At 300 K, the ratio of root mean square (rms)
(c) (d) 2
2 velocity to the average velocity of gas molecule would
38. The volume V of an enclosure contains a mixture of be:
three gases, 16 g of oxygen, 28 g of nitrogen and 44 g (Molecular weight of oxygen is
of carbon dioxide at absolute temperature T. consider 32 g/mol; R = 8.3 J K-1 mol-1) [2021]
R as universal gas constant. The pressure of the
3 3π
mixture of gases is: [2021] (a) (b)
8 8
88RT 5 RT
(a) (b) 8 8π
V 2 V (c) (d)
3 3
3RT 4RT
(c) (d)
V V
@cbseinfinite
43. For an adiabatic expansion of an ideal gas, the 47. A container is divided into two chambers by a
fractional change in its pressure is equal to (where γ partition. The volume of first chamber is 4.5 litre and
is the ratio of specific heats): [2021] second chamber is 5.5 litre. The first chamber contain
1 dV V 3.0 moles of gas at pressure 2.0 atm and second
(a) − (b) − γ chamber contain 4.0 moles of gas at pressure 3.0 atm.
γ V dV
After the partition is removed and the mixture attains
dV dV
(c) − γ (d) equilibrium, then, the common equilibrium pressure
V V existing in the mixture is x × 10−1 arm.
44. An ideal gas in a cylinder is separated by a piston in Value of x is ……… [2021]
such a way that the entropy of one part is S1 and that 48. The volume V of a given mass of monoatomic gas
of the other part is S2. Given that S1 > S2. If the piston changes with temperature T according to the relation
is removed then the total entropy of the system will be: 2
[2021] V = KT 3 . The work done when temperature changes

(a) S1 + S 2 (b) S1 − S 2 by 90 K will be xR. The value of x is: (Assume one
mole of gas only)
S1
(c) S1 × S 2 (d) [R = universal gas constant] [2021]
S2
Q
45. In a certain thermodynamical process, the pressure of 49. 1 mole of rigid diatomic gas performs a work of
5
a gas depends on its volume as kV3. The work done
when heat Q is supplied to it. The molar heat capacity
when the temperature changes from 100°C to 300°C
will be ……… nR, where n denotes number of moles xR
of the gas during this transformation is . The value
of a gas. [2021] 8
46. A reversible heat engine converts one-fourth of the of x is:
heat input into work. When the temperature of the sink [R = universal gas constant] [2021]
is reduced by 52 K, its efficiency is doubled. The 50. For an ideal heat engine, the temperature of the source
temperature in Kelvin of the source will be ……… is 127°C. In order to have 60% efficiency the
[2021] temperature of the sink should be ……… °C. (Round
off to the Nearest Integer) [2021]
@cbseinfinite

Objective Questions I [Only one correct option] 7. A gas molecule of mass M at the surface of the Earth
has kinetic energy equivalent to 0°C. If it were to go
1. Which one of the following gases possesses the largest up straight without colliding with any other molecules,
internal energy how high it would rise? Assume that the height
(a) 2 moles of helium occupying 1 m3 at 300 K
attained is much less than radius of the earth. (kB is
(b) 56 kg of nitrogen at 107 Nm-2 and 300 K
Boltzmann constant)
(c) 8 grams of oxygen at 8 atm and 300 K
273k B 546 k B
(d) 6 × 1026 molecules of argon occupying 40 m3 at (a) (b)
2 Mg 3Mg
900 K
819 k B
2. What will be the temperature when the rms velocity is (c) 0 (d)
2 Mg
double of that at 300 K:
8. A gaseous mixture consists of 16 g of helium and 16 g
(a) 300 K (b) 600 K
of oxygen, The ratio CP/CV of the mixture is
(c) 900 K (d) 1200 K
3. If Maxwell distribution is valid and VP denotes the (a) 1.4 (b) 1.54
(c) 1.59 (d) 1.62
most probable speed, V the average speed and Vrms the 
root–mean–square speed, then: 9. Let v, v rms and vP respectively denote the mean speed,
(a) V < VP < Vrms (b) V < Vrms < VP root mean square speed and most probable speed of the
(c) VP < V < Vrms (d) VP < Vrms < V molecules in an ideal monoatomic gas at absolute
temperature T. The mass of the molecule is m. Then
4. The root–mean–square (rms) speed of oxygen
(a) no molecule can have a speed greater than
molecules (O2) at a certain absolute temperature is V.
( 2vrms )
If the temperature is doubled and the oxygen gas
dissociates into atomic oxygen, the rms speed would vp
(b) no molecule can have a speed less than
be: ( 2)
(a) V (b) 2V (c) v < v p < vrms
(c) 2V (d) 2 2V (d) the average kinetic energy of the molecules is
5. The temperature at which the root mean square speed 3
4
( mv 2p )
of a gas will be half its value at 0°C is (assume the
pressure remains constant): 10. The temperature-entropy diagram of a reversible
(a) – 86.4°C (b) – 204.75°C engine cycle is given in the figure. Its efficiency is
T
(c) – 104.75°C (d) – 68.25°C
6. Tyre of a bicycle has volume 2 × 10-3 m3. Initially the
tube is filled to 75% of its volume by air at atmospheric 2T0
pressure of p0 = 105 N/m2. When a rider rides the
bicycle the area of contact of tyre with road is T0
A = 24 × 10-4 m2. The mass of rider with bicycle is
120 kg. The number of strokes which delivers,
S
V = 500 cm3 volume of air in each stroke required to S0 2S0
inflate the tyres is [Take g = 10 m/s2]
(a) 1/3 (b) 2/3
(a) 10 (b) 11
(c) 1/2 (d) 1/4
(c) 20 (d) 21
11. When an ideal diatomic gas is heated at constant
pressure, the fraction of the heat energy supplied which
increases the internal energy of the gas, is
2 3
(a) (b)
5 5
3 5
(c) (d)
7 7
@cbseinfinite
12. A monoatomic ideal gas, initially at temperature T1, is 17. The temperature of a hypothetical gas increases to 2
enclosed in a cylinder fitted with a frictionless piston. times when compressed adiabatically to half the
The gas is allowed to expand adiabatically to a volume. Its equation can be written as
temperature. T2 by releasing the piston suddenly. If L1 (a) PV3/2 = constant (b) PV5/2 = constant
and L2 are the lengths of the gas column before and 7/3
(c) PV = constant (d) PV4/3 = constant
after expansion respectively, then T1/T2 is given by 18. When an ideal gas (γ = 5/3) is heated under constant
2/3
L  L pressure, then what percentage of given heat energy
(a)  1  (b) 1
 L2  L2 will be utilised in doing external work
2/3
(a) 40 % (b) 30 %
L L  (c) 60 % (d) 20 %
(c) 2 (d)  2 
L1  L1  19. The shown P–V diagram represents the
13. A mono atomic gas is supplied the heat Q very slowly thermodynamic cycle of an engine, operating with an
keeping the pressure constant. The work done by the ideal monoatomic gas. The amount of heat, extracted
gas will be from the source in a single cycle is:
2 3
(a) Q (b) Q
3 5
2 1
(c) Q (d) Q
5 5
14. An ideal gas expands isothermally from a volume V1
to V2 and then compressed to original volume V1
adiabatically. Initial pressure is P1 and final pressure is
P3. The total work done is W. Then
(a) P3 > P1, W > 0 (b) P3 < P1, W < 0  13 
(a) P0V0 (b)   PV 0 0
(c) P3 > P1, W < 0 (d) P3 = P1, W = 0 2
15. A cylindrical tube of uniform cross-sectional area A is
 11 
fitted with two air tight frictionless pistons. The pistons (c)   PV 0 0 (d) 4P0V0
2
are connected to each other by a metallic wire. Initially
the pressure of the gas is P0 and temperature is T0, 20. Two samples A and B of a gas initially at the same
pressure and temperature are compressed from volume
atmospheric pressure is also P0. Now the temperature
V to V/2 (A isothermally and adiabatically). The final
of the gas is increased to 2T0, the tension in the wire pressure of A is
will be (a) Greater than the final pressure of B
(b) Equal to the final pressure of B
Wire (c) Less than the final pressure of B
(d) Twice the final pressure of B
(a) 2 P0A (b) P0A PQRSP process. The net work done by the system is
P0 A
(c) (d) 4 P0A
2
16. The molar heat capacity in a process of a diatomic gas
Q
if it does a work of when a heat of Q is supplied to
4
it is
2 5
(a) R (b) R
5 2
(a) 20 J (b) – 20 J
10 6 (c) 400 J (d) – 374 J
(c) R (d) R
3 7
@cbseinfinite
22. Two rigid boxes containing different ideal gases are 25. An ideal gas is taken through the cycle A → B → C →
placed on a table. Box A contains one mole of nitrogen A, as shown in the figure. If the net heat supplied to the
at temperature T0, while Box B contains one mole of gas in the cycle is 5 J, the work done by the gas in the
helium at temperature (7/3) T0. The boxes are then put process C → A is
into thermal contact with each other and heat flows
between them until the gases reach a common final
temperature. (Ignore the heat capacity of boxes). Then,
the final temperature of the gases, Tf, in terms of T0 is
5 3
(a) T f = T0 (b) T f = T0
2 7
7 3 (a) – 5 J (b) – 10 J
(c) T f = T0 (d) T f = T0
3 2 (c) – 15 J (d) – 20 J
23. An ideal gas of mass m in a state A goes to another state 26. In the cyclic process shown in the figure, the work
B via three different processes as shown in figure. If done by the gas in one cycle is
Q1, Q2 and Q3 denote the heat absorbed by the gas
along the three paths, then
P A
3
2
1
B
V (a) 28 P1V1 (b) 14 P1V
(a) Q1 < Q2 < Q3 (b) Q1 < Q2 = Q3 (c) 18 P1V (d) 9 P1V1
(c) Q1 = Q2 > Q3 (d) Q1 > Q2 > Q3 27. Heat energy absorbed by a system in going through a
cyclic process shown in figure is
24. A thermodynamic process is shown in the figure. The
pressures and volumes corresponding to some points
in the figure are:
PA = 3 × 104 Pa, PB = 8 × 104 Pa
and VA = 2 × 10–3m3, VD = 5 × 10–3 m3
In process AB, 600 J of heat is added to the system and
in process BC, 200 J of heat is added to the system.
The change in internal energy of the system in process (a) 107 π J (b) 104 π J
AC would be (c) 102 π J (d) 10-3 π J
(a) 560 J (b) 800 J

(c) 600 J (d) 640 J
@cbseinfinite
28. One mole of diatomic ideal gas undergoes a cyclic 32. Two Carnot engines A and B are operated in
process ABC as shown in figure. The process BC is succession. The first one, A receives heat from a source
adiabatic. The temperatures at A, B and C are 400 K, at T = 800 K and rejects to sink at T2. The second
800 K and 600 K respectively. Choose the correct engine B receives heat rejected by the first engine and
statement: rejects to another sink at T3 = 300 K. If the work
outputs of two engines are equal, then the value of T2
is
(a) 100 K (b) 300 K
(c) 550 K (d) 700 K
33. A reversible engine converts one-sixth of the heat input
into work. When the temperature of the sink is reduced
by 62°C, the efficiency of the engine is doubled. The
(a) The change in internal energy in the process CA is temperatures of the source and sink are
700 R. (a) 80°C, 37°C (b) 95°C, 28°C
(b) The changes in internal energy in the process AB is (c) 90°C, 37°C (d) 99°C, 37°C
–350 R. 34. An ideal monoatomic gas is confined in a cylinder by
(c) The change in internal energy in the process BC is a spring-loaded piston of cross section 8.0 × 10–3m2.
–500 R. Initially the gas is at 300 K and occupies a volume of
(d) The change in internal energy in whole cyclic 2.4× 10–3 m3 and the spring is in its relaxed state as
process is 250 R. shown in figure. The gas is heated by a small heater
29. A thermodynamic system undergoes cyclic process until the piston moves out slowly by 0.1 m. The force
ABCDA as shown in figure. The work done by the constant of the spring is 8000 N/m and the atmospheric
system is pressure is 1.0 × 105 N/m2. The cylinder and the piston
P
C B are thermally insulated. The piston and the spring are
3P0
massless and there is no friction between the piston and
2P0 O the cylinder. The final temperature of the gas will be:
(Neglect the heat loss through the lead wires of the
P0 heater. The heat capacity of the heater coil is also
A D
negligible)
V
V0 2V0
(a) P0V0 (b) 2P0V0

PV
(c) 0 0 (d) Zero
2
30. Two samples A and B of same gas have equal volumes (a) 500 K (b) 300 K
and pressures. The gas in sample A is expanded (c) 800 K (d) 1000 K
isothermally to double its volume and the gas in sample 35. When a system is taken from state i to state f along the
path iaf, it is found that Q = 50 cal and W = 20 cal.
B is expanded to double its volume adiabatically. If
Along the path ibf, Q = 36 cal. W along the path ibf is
work done by the gas is same in two processes, then
value of γ for the gas is best given by
(a) 1 – 2–γ = (γ – 1) ln 2
(b) 1 – 2–(γ – 1) = (γ – 1) ln 2
(c) 1 – 2–(γ – 1) = 2 (γ – 1) ln 2
(d) None of these
31. If CV for an ideal gas is given by CV = 3 + 2T, where
T is the absolute temperature of gas, then the equation (a) 14 cal (b) 6 cal
of adiabatic process for this gas is (c) 16 cal (d) 66 cal
(a) VT2 = constant (b) VT2e2T = constant
3 –2T
(c) VT e = constant (d) VT3e2T = constant
@cbseinfinite
36. A Carnot engine absorbs 1000 J of heat energy from a 42. Four curves A, B, C and D are drawn in the adjoining
reservoir at 127oC and rejects 600 J of heat energy figure for a given amount of gas. The curves which
during each cycle. The efficiency of engine and represent adiabatic and isothermal changes are
temperature of sink will be:
(a) 50% and – 20oC (b) 40% and – 33oC
o
(c) 70% and – 10 C (d) 20% and – 43oC
37. Equal masses of three liquids A, B and C have
temperatures 10°C, 25°C and 40°C respectively. If A
and B are mixed, the mixture has a temperature of
15°C. If B and C are mixed, the mixture has a (a) C and D respectively (b) D and C respectively
temperature of 30°C. If A and C are mixed, the mixture (c) A and B respectively (d) B and A respectively
will have a temperature of:
(a) 16°C (b) 20°C
(c) 25°C (d) 29°C
38. The temperatures of equal masses of three different 43. During an experiment, an ideal gas is found to obey a
liquids A, B and C are 12°C, 19°C and 28°C P2
condition = constant [ ρ = density of the gas]. The
respectively. The temperature when A and B are ρ
mixed is 16°C, and when B and C are mixed, it is gas is initially at temperature T, pressure P and density
23°C. What will be the temperature when A and C are ρ . The gas expands such that density changes to ρ /2
mixed ?
(a) 15.6 °C (b) 23.2 °C (a) The pressure of the gas changes to 2P
(c) 20.3 °C (d) 25.8 °C (b) The temperature of the gas changes to 2T
39. An ideal gas at 27°C is compressed adiabatically to (c) The graph of the above process on the P-T diagram
8 is parabola
of its original volume. The rise in temperature is
27 (d) The graph of the above process on the P-T diagram
 5 is hyperbola
γ = 
 3 44. Pick the correct statement (s)
(a) 475° C (b) 402° C (a) The rms translational speed for all ideal-gas
(c) 275° C (d) 375° C molecules at the same temperature is not the same
40. A mass of diatomic gas (γ = 1.4) at a pressure of but it depends on the mass
2 atmospheres is compressed adiabatically so that its (b) Each particle in gas has average translational
temperature rises from 27°C to 927°C. The pressure of 1 2 3
the gas in the final state is: kinetic energy and the equation mvrms = kT
2 2
(a) 256 atm (b) 8 atm establishes the relationship between the average
(c) 28 atm (d) 68.7 atm translational kinetic energy per particle and
41. In the following P-V diagram two adiabatics cut two temperature of an ideal gas. It can be concluded that
isothermals at temperatures T1 and T2 (fig.). The value single particle has a temperature.
V (c) Temperature of an ideal gas is doubled from 100°C
of a will be
Vd to 200°C. The average kinetic energy of each
particle is also doubled.
(d) It is possible for both the pressure and volume of a
monoatomic ideal gas to change simultaneously
without causing the internal energy of the gas to
change.
Vb Vc
(a) (b)
Vc Vb
Vd
(c) V (d) VbVc
a
@cbseinfinite
45. For the P–V diagram shown, for path 1 → 2 → 3, 100 48. A monoatomic ideal gas having an initial volume of
J of heat is given to the system and 40 J of work is done 0.1 m3 and a pressure of 106 N/m2 absorbs 6 × 104 J of
by the system. For path 1 → 4 → 3, the work done by heat. For this situation mark out the correct
system is 10 J. Then statement(s).
(a) The change in internal energy if process is isobaric
is 3.6 × 104 J.
(b) The change in internal energy if process is isobaric
is 6 × 104 J.
(c) The change in internal energy if process is isochoric
is 6 × 104 J.
(d) The change in internal energy if process is
(a) U3 – U1 = 60 J isothermal is 6 × 104 J.
49. In the figure shown, a horizontal cylindrical tube
(b) For 3 → 1 the heat is rejected and equal to 85 J
connected to the vertical wall of a chamber of volume
(c) For 1 → 4 the work done by system is 10 J
V, contains V0 volume of air at atmospheric pressure
(d) For 1 → 4 the heat given to system is 20 J
46. In a certain process, final volume of the gas is equal to P0 and temperature T0 by means of a movable piston
its initial volume. Then for this process A and a valve B. In the beginning valve is closed and
(a) work done by the gas may be equal to zero the chamber is evacuated. The valve gets opened and
(b) work done by the gas is zero air starts leaking into the chamber very slowly. The
(c) change in internal energy of the gas may be equal volume V >> V0 . Take the molar heat capacity of air at
to zero
(d) ratio of final to initial pressure is equal to ratio of 5
constant volume equals R, where R is universal gas
final to initial temperature 2
constant. When air occupies the total volume of the
47. 1 mole of an ideal monoatomic gas is confined in a
chamber, (All walls and piston are made up of
cylinder fitted with a piston as shown in the figure.
insulating material):
Take mass of the piston as 0.5 kg, spring constant,
k = 100 N/m, atmospheric pressure p0 = 105 N/m2, and
the cross–section area of piston, A = 50 cm2. If energy
of 50 J has been supplied to the system, then piston
moves up by 5 cm [Take g = 10 m/s2]. Initially the
spring is in its natural position. Mark out the correct
statement(s).
(a) Its internal energy is 7PV

0 0
(b) Its temperature is 1.4T0

1.4PV0 0
(c) Its pressure is
V
(d) None
(a) Increase in internal energy of the system is 24.625J.

(b) Initial pressure of the gas is 1.01 × 105 N/m2.
(c) For the change described, the temperature of the
gas increases by 2 K.
(d) For the change described, the temperature of the
gas decreases by 2 K.
@cbseinfinite
50. A monoatomic gas undergoes a cyclic process as 55. Determine efficiency of Carnot cycle if in adiabatic
shown in the figure. The ideal gas follows the equation expansion volume 3 times of initial value and (Given;
T = bV2 for the process B → C. During the cycle; the 1
ratio of maximum to minimum pressure is 2 and heat
= γ 1.5,= 0.58 )
3
supplied to the gas in B → C is QB → C = 120 J.
56. For a refrigerator, heat absorbed from source is 800 J
Assuming usual meanings for the symbols, pick
and heat supplied to sink is 600 J then find coefficient
correct option(s)
of performance is:
57. A Carnot engine works between 27ºC and 127ºC. Heat
supplied by the source is 500 J. Then heat ejected (in
joules) to the sink is:
58. In an isobaric process, the work done by a di-atomic
gas is 10J, the heat given (in joules) to the gas will be:
59. A sample of 0.1 g of water at 1000C and normal
pressure (1.0 × 105 Nm -2 ) requires 54 cal of heat
TA
(a) PA = PC (b) =2 energy to convert to steam at 1000C. If the volume of
TB the steam produced is 168 cc, the change in internal
TC energy (in joules) of the sample, is: (Given; 1cal = 4.2
(c) =2 (d) QC → A → B = –130J
TB joules)
51. The internal energy U of an ideal gas depends on 60. One mole of diatomic ideal gas undergoes a cyclic
pressure P and Volume V of the gas according to process ABC as shown in figure. The process BC is
equation U = 3PV, which of the following conclusion adiabatic. The temperatures at A, B and C are 400 K,
can you make regarding the gas? 800K and 600 K respectively. The magnitude of
(a) The gas is not a monatomic gas change in internal energy in the process BC is nR
(b) The gas can be a diatomic gas joules Where R is gas constant. Find the value of n.
(c) The gas can be a triatomic gas
(d) Molar specific heat of the gas in an isobaric
process is 4R
52. Two cylinders A and B fitted with pistons contain
equal amounts of an ideal diatomic gas at 300 K. The
piston of A is free to move, while that of B held fixed.
The same amount of heat is given to the gas in each Assertion & Reason
cylinder. Determine the greatest integral value of the For the following question choose the correct answer
ratio of change in temperature of B to the change in from the codes (A), (B), (C) and (D) defined as follows.
temperature of A. (A) Statement-I is true, Statement-II is also true;
53. On mole of an ideal monoatomic gas is taken through Statement-II is a correct explanation of Statement- I.
(B) Statement-I is true, Statement-II is also true;
a thermodynamic process shown in the p–V diagram.
Statement-II is not a correct explanation of
The heat supplied to the system in this process is Statement-I.
k × (π + 10) p0V0 . Determine the value of k. (C) Statement-I is true, Statement-II is false.
(D) Statement-I is false, Statement-II is true.
61. Statement-1: The internal energy of a given sample of
an ideal gas depends only its temperature according to
kinetic theory of gases.
Statement-2: The ideal gas molecules do not exert
inter-molecular forces.
54. If sink and source temperature of a refrigerator are 7ºC (a) A (b) B
and 847ºC respectively. Then efficiency of the (c) C (d) D
refrigerator is:
@cbseinfinite
62. Statement-1: Internal energy change is zero if the Match the Columns
temperature is constant, irrespective of the process 68.Match the quantities given in column-I with column-II
being cyclic or non-cyclic.
Statement-2: dU = n CvdT for all process and is Column-I Column-II
(A) Adiabatic bulk modulus (p) – P/V
independent of path.
(B) Slope of P-V graph in (q) 2/(γ–1)
(a) A (b) B
isothermal process
(c) C (d) D
(C) Degree of freedom (r) γP
63. Statement-1: A quasi-static process is so called
because it is a sudden and large change of the system. (D) The ratio of molar heat (s) γ
Statement-2: An adiabatic process is not quasi-static capacity at constant γ −1
because it is a sudden and large change of the system. pressure to universal gas
(a) A (b) B constant R
(c) C (d) D 69. Thermodynamic processes are indicated in the
following diagram.
64. Statement-1: When an ideal gas is taken from a given
thermodynamics state A to another given
thermodynamic state B by any polytropic process, the
change in the internal energy of the system will be the
same in all processes.
Statement-2: Internal energy of the gas depends only
upon its absolute temperature.
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D Match the following:
65. Statement-1: Work done by a gas in isothermal Column-I Column -II
expansion is more than the work done by the gas in the
P Process I a. Adiabatic
same expansion adiabatically.
Statement-2: Temperature remains constant in Q Process II b. Isobaric
isothermal expansion but not in adiabatic expansion. R. Process III c. Isochoric
(a) A (b) B S. Process IV d. Isothermal
(c) C (d) D 70. One mole of a monatomic ideal gas is taken along two
66. Statement-1: In an isothermal process whole of the cyclic processes E → F → G → E and E → F →
heat energy supplied to the body is converted into H → E as shown in the P–V diagram. The process
internal energy. involved are purely isochoric, isobaric, isothermal or
Statement-2: According to the first law of adiabatic
thermodynamics ∆Q = ∆U + P∆V
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
67. Statement-1: In an adiabatic process, change in
internal energy of a gas is equal to work done on or by
the gas in the process.
Statement-2: Temperature of gas remains constant in Match the paths in List I with the magnitudes of the
a adiabatic process. work done in List II and select the correct answer using
the codes given below the lists.
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D List I List II
P. G → E 1. 160 PV
0 0 ln 2
Q. G → H 2. 36PV
0 0
R. F → H 3. 24PV
0 0
S. F → G 4. 31PV
0 0
@cbseinfinite
Paragraph Type Questions 72. Identify the gas filled in the container A and B
Use the following passage, solve Q. 71 to Q. 75 (a) N2, Ne (b) He, H2

Passage
(c) O2, Ar (d) Ar, O2
Two closed identical conducting containers are found in the
73. Total number of molecules in 'A' (Here NA = Avogadro
laboratory of an old scientist. For the verification of the gas
number)
some experiments are performed on the two boxes and the
results are noted. 125
(a) N (b) 3.125 NA
64 A
125
(c) N (d) 31.25 NA
28 A
74. The initial internal energy of the gas in container 'A', if
the containers were at room temperature 300 K
initially
Experiment 1: When the two containers are weighed
WA = 225 g, WB = 160 g and mass of evacuated container (a) 1406.25 cal (b) 1000 cal
WC=100 g. (c) 2812.5 cal (d) none of these
Experiment 2: When the two containers are given same 75. If the gases have initial temperature 300 K and they are
amount of heat same temperature rise is recorded. The mixed in an adiabatic container having the same
pressure change found are ∆PA = 2.5 atm, ∆PB = 1.5 atm volume as the previous containers. Now the
temperature of the mixture is T and pressure is P. Then
Required data for unknown gas:
Mono (molar mass) (a) P > PA, T > 300K (b) P > PB, T = 300K
He Ne Ar Kr Xe Rd (c) P < PA, T = 300K (d) P > PA, T < 300K
4g 20 g 40 g 84 g 131 g 222 g
Dia (molar mass)
H2 F2 N2 O2 Cl2
2g 19 g 28 g 32 g 71 g
71. Identify the type of gas filled in container A and B
respectively
(a) Mono, mono (b) Dia, dia
(c) Mono, dia (d) Dia, mono
@cbseinfinite

1. Two gases, Argon (atomic radius 0.07 nm, atomic 4. The PT diagram for an ideal gas is shown in the figure,
weight 40) and Xenon (atomic radius 0.1 nm, atomic where AC is an adiabatic process. Find the
weight 140) have the same number density and are at corresponding PV diagram. (2003)
the same temperature. The ratio of their respective
mean free time is closest to (2001)
(a) 4.67 (b) 2.04
(c) 1.83 (d) 3.67
2. P-V plots for two gases during adiabatic processes are
shown in the figure. Plots 1 and 2 should correspond
respectively to (2001)
(a) (b)
(a) He and O2 (b) O2 and He

5. If liquefied oxygen at 1 atmospheric pressure is heated
(c) He and Ar (d) O2 and N2
from 50 K to 300 K by supplying heat at constant rate,
3. An ideal gas is taken through the cycle the graph of temperature vs time will be (2004)
A → B → C → A, as shown in the figure, if the net
heat supplied to the gas in the cycle is 5 J, the work
done by the gas in the process C → A is (2002)
(a) (b)
(c) (d)
(a) - 5 J (b) - 10 J
(c) - 15 J (d) - 20 J 6. An ideal gas expands isothermally from a volume V1
to V2 and then compressed to original volume V1
adiabatically. Initial pressure is P1 and final pressure is
P3. The total work done is W. Then (2004)
(a) P3 > P1, W > 0 (b) P3 < P1, W < 0
(c) P3 > P1, W < 0 (d) P3 = P1, W = 0
@cbseinfinite
7. Statement-1: The total translational kinetic energy of 10. The buoyancy force acting on the gas bubble is
all the molecules of a given mass of an ideal gas is 1.5 (Assume R is the universal gas constant) (2008)
times the product of its pressure and its volume.
( p0 + ρ gH ) 2/5
Statement-2: The molecules of a gas collide with each (a) ρ nRg T0
( p0 + ρ gy ) 2/5
other and the velocities of the molecules change due to
the collision. (2007) ρ nRgT0
(b)
(a) Statements-1 and 2 are true and statement-2 is a ( p0 + ρ gH ) [ p0 + ρ  g ( H − y )]3/5
2/5
correct explanation for statement-1.

( p0 + ρ  gH )3/5
(b) Statements-1 and 2 are true and statement-2 is not (c) ρ  nRgT0
a correct explanation for statement-1. ( p0 + ρ  gy )8/5
(c) Statement-1 is true, statement-2 is false. ρ nRgT0
(d) Statement-1 is false, statement-2 is true. (d)
( p0 + ρ gH )3/5 [ p0 + ρ g ( H − y )]2/5
11. CV and CP denote the molar specific heat capacities of
 5
A small spherical monoatomic ideal gas bubble  γ =  is a gas at constant volume and constant pressure,
 3
respectively.
trapped inside a liquid of density ρl (see figure). Assume that Then, (2009)
the bubble does not exchange any heat with the liquid. The (a) CP – CV is larger for a diatomic ideal gas than for a
bubble contains n moles of gas. The temperature of the gas monoatomic ideal gas
when the bubble is at the bottom is T0, the height of the liquid (b) CP + CV is larger for a diatomic ideal gas than for a
is H and the atmospheric pressure is p0. (Neglect surface monoatomic ideal gas
tension) C
(c) P is larger for a diatomic ideal gas than for a
CV
monoatomic ideal gas
(d) CP - CV is larger for a diatomic ideal gas than for a
monoatomic ideal gas
12. The figure shows the p–V plot an ideal gas taken
8. As the bubble moves upwards, besides the buoyancy through a cycle ABCDA. The part ABC is a semi–
force the following forces are acting on it (2008) circle and CDA is half of an ellipse. Then, (2009)
(a) Only the force of gravity
(b) The force due to gravity and the force due to the
pressure of the liquid.
(c) The force due to gravity, the force due to the
pressure of the liquid and the force due to viscosity
of the liquid
(d) The force due to gravity and the force due to
viscosity of the liquid
9. When the gas bubble is at a height y from the bottom,
its temperature is (2008) (a) The process during the path A → B is isothermal
2/5 (b) heat flows out of the gas during the path
 p0 + ρ gH 
(a) T0   B→C→D
 p + ρ gy
 0   (c) work done during the path A → B → C is zero
2/5
 p0 + ρ g ( H − y )  (d) positive work is done by the gas in the cycle
(b) T0  
 p0 + ρ gH
ABCDA
 
3/5
 p0 + ρ gH 
(c) T0  
 p + ρ gy
 0  
3/5
 p0 + ρ g ( H − y ) 
(d) T0  
 p0 + ρ gH
 
@cbseinfinite
13. One mole of an ideal gas in initial state A undergoes a 19. One mole of a monatomic ideal gas is taken along two
cyclic process ABCA, as shown in the figure. Its cyclic processes E → F → G → E and E → F → H →
pressure at A is p0. E as shown in the p–V diagram.
Choose the correct option(s) from the following The process involved are purely isochoric, isobaric,
(2010) isothermal or adiabatic.
(a) Internal energies at A and B are the same

(b) Work done by the gas in process AB is p0V0 ln 4
Match the paths in List I with the magnitudes of the
(c) Pressure at C is p0/4
work done in List II and select the correct answer using
(d) Temperature at C is T0/4 the codes given below the lists. (2013)
14. A diatomic ideal gas is compressed adiabatically to List-I List-II
P. G → E 1. 160 p0V0 ln 2
1
of its initial volume. If the initial temperature of Q. G → H 2 36 p0V0
32
R. F → H 3 24 p0V0
the gas is Ti (in kelvin) and the final temperature is aTi,
S. F → G 4 31 p0V0
the value of a is (2010)
Codes
15. A real gas behaves like an ideal gas if its (2010) P Q R S
(a) pressure and temperature are both high (a) 4 3 2 1
(b) pressure and temperature are both low (b) 4 3 1 2
(c) pressure is high and temperature is low (c) 3 1 2 4
(d) pressure is low and temperature is high (d) 1 3 2 4
16. 5.6 L of helium gas at STP is adiabatically compressed
to 0.7 L. Taking the initial temperature to be T1, the
work done in the process is (2011)
9 3
(a) RT1 (b) RT1
8 2
15 9
(c) RT1 (d) RT1
8 2
17. A mixture of 2 moles of helium gas (atomic mass = 4
amu) and 1 mole of argon gas (atomic mass = 40 amu)
is kept at 300 K in a container. The ratio of the rms
 v ( helium ) 
speeds  rms
 v ( argon ) 
is (2012)
 rms 
(a) 0.32 (b) 0.45
(c) 2.24 (d) 3.16
18. Two non-reactive monoatomic ideal gases have their
atomic masses in the ratio 2 : 3. The ratio of their
partial pressures, when enclosed in a vessel kept at a
constant temperature, is 4 : 3. The ratio of their
densities is : (2013)
(a) 1 : 4 (b) 1 : 2
(c) 6 : 9 (d) 8 : 9
@cbseinfinite
Use the following passage, solve Q. 20 to Q. 21 23. An ideal monoatomic gas is confined in a horizontal
cylinder by a spring loaded piston (as shown in the
In the figure a container is shown to have a movable (without
figure). Initially the gas is at temperature T1, pressure
friction) piston on top. The container and the piston are all
P1 and volume V1 and the spring is in its relaxed state.
made of perfectly insulating material allowing no heat
The gas is then heated very slowly to temperature T2,
transfer between outside and inside the container. The
pressure P2 and volume V2. During this process the
container is divided into two compartments by a rigid
piston moves out by a distance x. Ignoring the friction
partition made of a thermally conducting material that allows
between the piston and the cylinder, the correct
slow transfer of heat. The lower compartment of the container
statement(s) is (are) (2015)
is filled with 2 moles of an ideal monoatomic gas at 700 K
and the upper compartment is filled with 2 moles of an ideal
diatomic gas at 400 K. The heat capacities per mole of an ideal
3 5
monoatomic gas are CV = R , CP = R , and those for an
2 2
5 7 (a) If V2 = 2V1 and T2 = 3T1, then the energy stored in
ideal diatomic gas are CV = R , CP = R .
2 2 1
the spring is P1V1
4
(b) If V2 = 2V1 and T2 = 3T1, then the energy in internal
energy is 3P1V1
(c) If V2 = 3V1 and T2 = 4T1, then the work done by the
7
gas is P1V1
3
20. Consider the partition to be rigidly fixed so that it does
(d) If V2 = 3V1 and T2 = 4T1, then the heat supplied to
not move. When equilibrium is achieved, the final
temperature of the gases will be (2014) 17
the gas is P1V1
(a) 550 K (b) 525 K 6
(c) 513 K (d) 490 K 24. Heat given to process is positive, match the following
21. Now consider the partition to be free to move without option of column I with the corresponding option of
friction so that the pressure of gases in both column II. (2015)
compartments is the same. Then total work done by the
gases till the time they achieve equilibrium will be
(2014)
(a) 250 R (b) 200 R
(c) 100 R (d) –100 R
22. A thermodynamic system is taken from an initial state
i with internal energy Ui=100 J to the final state f along
two different paths iaf and ibf, as schematically shown
in the figure. The work done by the system along the
paths af, ib and bf are Waf =200 J, Wib=50J and Column-I Column-II
Wbf=100 J respectively. The heat supplied to the (a) JK (p) ∆ W > 0
system along the path iaf, ib and bf are Qiaf, Qib and Qbf (b) KL (q) ∆ Q < 0
respectively. If the internal energy of the system in the (c) LM (r) ∆W<0
state b is Ub=200 J and Qiaf= 500 J, the ratio Qbf/Qib is (d) MJ (s) ∆Q>0
(2014)
@cbseinfinite
25. Column-I contains a list of processes involving 26. One mole of a monatomic ideal gas is taken through a
expansion of an ideal gas. Match this with Column-II cycle ABCDA as shown in the p–V diagram.
describing the thermodynamic charge during this Column- II gives the characteristics involved in the
process. Indicate your answer by darkening the cycle. Match them with each of the processes given in
appropriate bubbles of the 4 × 4 matrix given in the Column-I. (2015)
ORS. (2015)
Column-I Column-II
(a) An insulated container (p) The
two chambers separated temperature
by a valve. Chamber I of the gas
contains an ideal gas and decreases
the Chamber II has
Column-I Column-II
vacuum. The valve is
(a) Process A → B (p) Internal energy decreases
opened.
(b) Process B → C (q) Internal energy increases
(c) Process C → D (r) Heat is lost
(d) Process D → A (s) Heat is gained
(b) An ideal monoatomic gas (q) The (t) Work is done on the gas
expands to twice its temperature 27. A gas is enclosed in a cylinder with a movable
original gas increases or of the gas frictionless piston. Its initial thermodynamic state at
volume such that its increases pressure Pi = 105 Pa and volume Vi = 10-3 m3 changes
pressure remains to a final state at Pf = (1/32) × 105 Pa and Vf = 8 × 10-3
1 m3 in an adiabatic quasi-static process, such that P3V5
constants. p ∝ ,
V2 = constant. Consider another thermodynamic process
where V is the volume of that brings the system from the same initial state to the
the gas same final state in two steps: an isobaric expansion at
(c) An ideal monoatomic gas (r) The gas Pi followed by an isochoric (isovolumetric) process at
expands to twice its loses heat volume Vf. The amount of heat supplied to the system
original volume such that in the two-step process is approximately (2016)
1 (a) 112 J (b) 294 J
its pressure p ∝ , (c) 588 J (d) 813 J
V 4/3
28. One mole of a monatomic ideal gas undergoes an
where V is its volume.
adiabatic expansion in which its volume becomes eight
(d) An ideal monoatomic gas (s) The gas
times its initial value. If the initial temperature of the
expands such that its gains heat
gas is 100 K and the universal gas constant R = 8.0 J
pressure p and volume V
mol-1 K-1, the decrease in its internal energy, in Joule,
follows the behaviour
is (2018)
shown in the graph.
@cbseinfinite
29. One mole of a monatomic ideal gas goes through a 31. In a thermodynamic process on an ideal monoatomic
thermodynamic cycle, as shown in the volume versus gas, the infinitesimal heat absorbed by the gas is given
temperature (V-T) diagram. The correct statement(s) by TdX, where T is temperature of the system and dX
is/are: [R is the gas constant] (2019) is the infinitesimal change in a thermodynamic
quantity X of the system. For a mole of monatomic
3 T  V 
=
ideal gas X Rn   + Rn   . Here, R is gas
2  TA   VA 
constant, V is volume of gas. TA and VA are constants.
The List-I below gives some quantities involved in a
process and List-II gives some possible values of these
quantities. (2019)
List-I List-II
(I) Work done by the system (P) 1
RT0 n2
in process 1 → 2 → 3 3
(a) Work done in thisthermodynamic cycle (II) Change in internal (Q) 1
1 energy in process RT
(1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 1) is | W |= RT0 3
2 1→ 2→ 3
(b) The ratio of heat transfer during possesses (III) Heat absorbed by the (R) RT0
Q 5 system in process
1 → 2 and 2 → 3 is 1→ 2 = 1→ 2→ 3
Q2→3 3
(IV) Heat absorbed by the (S) 4
(c) The above thermodynamic cycle exhibits only RT0
isochoric and adiabatic processes. system in process 1 → 2 3
(d) The ratio of heat transfer during processes (T) 1
RT0 ( 3| n 2 )
Q 1 3
1 → 2 and 3 → 4 is 1→ 2 =
Q3→ 4 2 (U) 5
RT0
30. A mixture of ideal gas containing 5 moles of 6
monatomic gas and 1 mole of rigid diatomic gas is If the procession one mole of monatomic ideal gas is
initially at pressure P0, volume V0 and temperature T0. as shown in the TV-diagram with P0V0 = RT0, the
If the gas mixture is adiabatically compressed to a correct match is,
volume V0/4, then the correct statement(s)/are,
(Given 21.2 = 2.3;23.2 = 9.2; R is gas constant) (2019)
(a) The final pressure of the gas mixture after

compression is in between 9P0 and 10P0.
(b) The average kinetic energy of the gas mixture after
compression is in between 18RT0 and 19RT0
(c) Adiabatic constant of the gas mixture is 1.6
(d) The work |W| done during the process is 13RT0
(a) I → P, II → R, III → T, IV → S
(b) I → P, II → T, III → Q, IV → T
(c) I → S, II → T, III → Q, IV → U
(d) I → P, II → R, III → T, IV → P
@cbseinfinite
32. Consider a gas of triatomic molecules. The molecules 35. A thermally insulating cylinder has a thermally
are assumed to be triangular and made of massless insulating and friction less movable partition in the
rigid rods whose vertices are occupied by atoms. The middle, as shown in the figure below. On each side of
internal energy of a mole of the gas at temperature T the partition, there is one mole of an ideal gas, with
is: (2020) specific heat at constant volume, CV = 2 R. Here, R is
the gas constant. Initially, each side has a volume V0
and temperature T0 . The left side has an electric
heater, which is turned on at very low power to
3 transfer heat Q to the gas on the left side. As a result,
(a) RT (b) 3 RT the partition moves slowly towards the right reducing
2
5 9 the right-side volume to V0 / 2. Consequently, the gas
(c) RT (d) RT
2 2 temperatures on the left and the right sides become TL
33. An ideal gas undergoes a four-step cycle as shown in
and TR , respectively. Ignore the changes in the
the P − V diagram below. During this cycle, heat is
absorbed by the gas in (2021) temperatures of the cylinder, heater and the partition.
(2021)
(a) steps 1 and 2 (b) steps 1 and 3 Q

(c) steps 1 and 4 (d) steps 2 and 4 The value of is
RT0
34. A thermally insulating cylinder has a thermally
insulating and frictionless movable partition in the (a) 4(2 2 + 1) (b) 4(2 2 − 1)
middle, as shown in the figure below. On each side of (c) (5 2 + 1) (d) (5 2 − 1)
the partition, there is one mole of an ideal gas, with
specific heat at constant volume, CV = 2 R. Here, R is
the gas constant. Initially, each side has a volume V0
and temperature T0 . The left side has an electric heater,
which is turned on at very low power to transfer heat
Q to the gas on the left side. As a result, the partition
moves slowly towards the right reducing the right-side
volume to V0 / 2. Consequently, the gas temperatures
on the left and the right sides become TL and TR ,
respectively. Ignore the changes in the temperatures of
the cylinder, heater and the partition. (2021)
TR
The value of is
T0
(a) 2 (b) 3
(c) 2 (d) 3
@cbseinfinite
KINETIC THEORY OF GASES &

THERMODYNAMICS
@cbseinfinite
ANSWER KEY 107
Answer Key
CHAPTER -14 THERMAL PHYSCIS
EXERCISE - 1 : EXERCISE - 2:
BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTION
DIRECTION TO USE -
DIRECTION TO USE -
1. (b) 2. (a) 3. (b) 4. (a) 1. (a) 2. (8.33) 3. (a) 4. (b)

5. (b) 6. (d) 7. (c) 8. (a)
5. (c) 6. (b) 7. (a) 8. (a)
9. (b) 10. (a) 11. (c) 12. (a) 9. (a) 10. (c) 11. (d) 12. (d)
13. (b) 14. (b) 15. (c) 16. (d) 13. (a) 14. (b) 15. (a)
17. (a) 18. (d) 19. (3.00) 20. (1.50)
21. (8.00) 22. (1.00) 23. 5.00 24. (a)
25. (c) 26. (b) 27. (d) 28. (b)
29. (d) 30. (c) 31. (b) 32. (8.00)
33. (885.00) 34. (1.00) 35. (9.00)
36. (270.00) 37. (5.8)
38. (20.26) 39. (0.5) 40. (40.00) 41. (6.00)
42. (b) 43. (b) 44. (a) 45. (b)
46. (c) 47. (212.50) 48. (60.00) 49. (2.00)
50. (2.00) 51. (3.00) 52. (4.00) 53. (c)
54. (b) 55. (c) 56. (c) 57. (c)
58. (a) 59. (b) 60. (b) 61. (b)
62. (b) 63. (b) 64. (a) 65. (c)
66. (b) 67. (d) 68. (a) 69. (d)
70. (b) 71. (c) 72. (d) 73. (2.00)
74. (25.00) 75. (28.00) 76. (5.00) 77. (2.00)
78. (6.00) 79. (28.00) 80. (0.92)
@cbseinfinite
ANSWER KEY 108
CHAPTER -14 THERMAL PHYSCIS

1. (a) 2. (c) 3. (c) 4. (d) 1. (    2 s ) 2. (8.00) 3. (3.00)

5. (c) 6. (c) 7. (d) 8. (d)
4. (b, c, d) 5. (b) 6. (b) 7. (270.00)
9. (c) 10. (b) 11. (a) 12. (a)
8. (a) 9. (b) 10. (a) 11. (a)
13. (a) 14. (d) 15. (b) 16. (a, b) 12. (c) 13. (d) 14. (b) 15. (a)
17. (a) 18. (a) 19. (a) 20. (a) 16. (d) 17. (c) 18. (c) 19. (a, d)
21. (b) 22. (c) 23. (b) 24. (b) 20. (9.00) 21. (9.00) 22. (a, c, d) 23. (c)
25. (b) 26. (a) 27. (b) 28. (d) 24. (a) 25. (b, d) 26. (2) 27. (a)
29. (a) 30. (c) 31. (a) 32. (d) 28. (b) 29. (9) 30. (4.00)
33. (b) 34. (a) 35. (b) 36. (2.00)
37. (b) 38. (d) 39. (b) 40. (c)
41. (c) 42. (b) 43. (d) 44. (b, d)
45. (a, d) 46. (a) 47. (a) 48. (a)
49. (A - p; B - q; C - s; D - r) 50. (b)
@cbseinfinite
ANSWER KEY 109
Answer Key
CHAPTER - 15 KINETIC THEORY OF GASES & THERMODYNAMICS

1. (c) 2. (d) 3. (a) 4. (b) 1. (d) 2. (a) 3. (d) 4. (a)

5. (d) 6. (c) 7. (b) 8. (a) 5. (d) 6. (c) 7. (a) 8. (b)
9. (b) 10. (d) 11. (c) 12. (b) 9. (d) 10. (c) 11. (a) 12. (c)
13. (d) 14. (b) 15. (c) 16. (d) 13. (a) 14. (b) 15. (b) 16. (c)
17. (b) 18. (c) 19. (d) 20. (d) 17. (c) 18. (c) 19. (c)
21. (a) 22. (a) 23. (d) 24. (c) 20. (1.77 to 1.78) 21. (6.00) 22. (2.05)
25. (1050) 26. (c) 27. (b) 28. (b) 23. (b) 24.(d) 25. (d) 26. (b)
29. (b) 30.(c) 31. (a) 32. (c) 27. (b) 28. (a) 29. (b) 30. (c)
33. (c) 34.(d) 35.(a) 36. (a) 31. (400) 32. (3600) 33.(d) 34.(b)
37. (c) 38.(d) 39.(c) 40. (a) 35. (a) 36.(a) 37. (b) 38.(b)
41. (b) 42.(124) 43.(b) 44. (b) 39. (d) 40.(b) 41. (d) 42.(b)
45. (d) 46.(c) 47.(b) 48. (c) 43.(c) 44.(a) 45.(50.00) 46.(208)
49. (20.00) 50.(b) 51. (a) 52. (b) 47.(26.00) 48.(60.00) 49.(25.00)
53. (c) 54.(2.00) 55.(b) 56. (c) 50.(-113.00)
57. (a) 58.(b) 59.(a) 60. (b)
61. (d) 62.(d) 63.(b) 64. (208)
65. (160) 66.(c) 67. (a) 68. (c)
69. (b) 70.(c) 71. (a) 72. (c)
73. (a) 74.(a) 75. (c) 76. (c)
77. (c) 78.(a) 79. (a) 80. (b)
@cbseinfinite
ANSWER KEY 110
CHAPTER - 15 KINETIC THEORY OF GASES & THERMODYNAMICS

1. (b) 2. (d) 3. (c) 4. (c) 1. (b) 2. (b) 3. (a) 4. (d)

5. (b) 6. (d) 7. (d) 8. (d) 5. (c) 6. (c) 7. (b) 8. (d)
9. (d) 10. (a) 11. (d) 12. (d) 9. (b) 10. (b) 11. (b,d) 12. (b,d)
13. (c) 14. (c) 15. (b) 16. (c) 13. (a,b) 14. (4.00) 15. (d) 16. (a)
17. (a) 18. (a) 19. (b) 20. (c) 17. (d) 18. (d) 19. (a) 20. (d)
21. (b) 22. (d) 23. (a) 24. (a) 21. (d) 22. (2.00) 23. (a,b,c)
25. (a) 26. (d) 27. (c) 28. (c) 24. (a – q; b – p,q; c – s; d – q,r)
29. (d) 30.(b) 31. (d) 32. (c) 25. (a – q; b – p, r; c – p, s; d – q, s)
33. (d) 34.(c) 35.(b) 36. (b) 26. (a – p,r,t; b – p,r; c – q, s; d – r,t)
37. (a) 38.(c) 39.(d) 40. (a) 27. (c) 28. (900) 29. (a,b)
41. (a) 42.(c) 43.(b,d) 44. (a,d) 30. (a,c,d) 31. (d) 32. (b)
45. (a,b,c) 46.(a,c,d) 47.(a,b,c) 48. (a,c) 33. (c) 34.(a) 35.(b)
49. (b,c) 50.(a,b,d) 51. (a,c,d) 52. (1.00)
53. (1.00) 54.(0.75) 55.(0.42) 56. (3.00)
57. (375) 58.(35.00) 59.(210) 60. (500)
61. (a) 62.(a) 63.(d) 64. (a)
65. (a) 66.(d) 67. (c)
68. (A - r; B - p; C - q; D- s)
69. ( P  c, Q  a, R  d, S  b )
70. ( P  4; Q  3; R  2; S  1 )
71. (c) 72. (d) 73. (b) 74. (c)
75. (b)
@cbseinfinite
MASTER INDEX .
VOLUME 1:
VOLUME 2:
Circular Motion
Rotational Motion
Gravitation
VOLUME 3:
Fluid Mechanics
Waves
VOLUME 4:
Thermal Physics
@cbseinfinite
65 Million+
Monthly
Youtube Views

Users Live Learning
25 43
Parents
Happy
Trust
Students
Vedantu
MILLION+ MILLION+
@cbseinfinite
JEE Advanced 2021

Ankit Shrey

JEE Main 2021
903 students in
Top 10,000
78 869
68 444
Sharma
AIR 158 AIR 179
NEET (UG) 2021
AIR 23
Pavit
Score 710 AIR 92

Anirudh
Online Crash Course
Score 705
Shivank
Online Crash Course
AIR 143 Score 700

1172 NEET
Qualifiers
Annmary
Santhosh
98.4% 98.4% 98.0% 99.8% 98.4% 99.8% 99.6% 99.4%
ICSE Class 10
99.4% 97.4% 97.2% 97.2% 97.2% 99.4% 99.2% 99.2%
@cbseinfinite

Class 11 Physics TB

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Class 11 Physics TB

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Class 11 Physics TB

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CBSE INFINITE

NO fear when we are Here

This PDF is downloaded from Click here

Join Our Telegram Channel Click here

Regular tests &

Our Extraordinary Results 2021

All India HIGHER

37.28% 37.28% 8.25%

CBSE 10 CBSE 12 JEE

We strongly believe in you and your capabilities. So believe in yourself

Typesetting Team Graphic Designers

UNITS & MEASUREMENTS AND BASIC MATHEMATICS

Solved examples ............................................................................................................................... 36

Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions............................................................................................ 43

Exercise - 2 : Previous Year JEE MAIN Questions ........................................................................... 50

Exercise - 3 : Advanced Objective Questions .................................................................................. 55

Exercise - 4 : Previous Year JEE Advanced Questions ..................................................................... 58

Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 183

MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE

Solved examples ............................................................................................................................... 72

Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions............................................................................................ 75

Exercise - 2 : Previous Year JEE MAIN Questions ........................................................................... 83

Exercise - 3 : Advanced Objective Questions .................................................................................. 88

Exercise - 4 : Previous Year JEE Advanced Questions ..................................................................... 97

Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 185

MOTION IN A PLANE AND RELATIVE MOTION

Theory ................................................................................................................................................ 100

Solved examples ............................................................................................................................... 108

Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions............................................................................................ 111

Exercise - 2 : Previous Year JEE MAIN Questions ........................................................................... 117

Exercise - 3 : Advanced Objective Questions .................................................................................. 121

Exercise - 4 : Previous Year JEE Advanced Questions ..................................................................... 130

Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 187

LAWS OF MOTION AND FRICTION

Theory ................................................................................................................................................ 133

Solved examples ............................................................................................................................... 144

Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions............................................................................................ 151

Exercise - 2 : Previous Year JEE MAIN Questions ........................................................................... 160

Exercise - 3 : Advanced Objective Questions .................................................................................. 165

Exercise - 4 : Previous Year JEE Advanced Questions ..................................................................... 179

Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 189

UNITS & MEASUREMENTS

1. PHYSICAL QUANTITY For Example:

Any quantity which can be measured is called a

Fig. 1.1 1.4 Derived Physical Quantities

1.3 Derived Physical Quantities

1.6 Standard Units

1.7 Expressing Measurement of physical quantity

1.10 The SI System of Units

1.11 Fundamental Units: 1.14 Solid Angle

Quantity Name of Symbol

Amount of Substance [mol]

1.13 Plane Angle Luminous Intensity [Cd]

1.16 Writing Dimensions of Physical Quantities

Dimensional analysis is a tool to find or check

NOTE: ● In the case of physical quantities which are

2.3 Deducing Relation among the Physical 3. SIGNIFICANT FIGURES

1 1 3.1 Rules for Determining Significant Figures

Example: Last significant digit is 3 < 5

0.423 meter = 4.23×10−1 meter Example: